Mechanical APDL Structural Analysis Guide

Mechanical APDL Structural Analysis Guide
Table of Contents
1. Overview of Structural Analyses
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
Types of Structural Analysis

Elements Used in Structural Analyses
Material Model Interface
Damping
Solution Methods
2. Structural Static Analysis

2.1. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses
2.2. Performing a Static Analysis
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
2.2.3.
2.2.4.
2.2.5.
2.2.6.
Build the Model

Set Solution Controls
Set Additional Solution Options
Apply the Loads
Solve the Analysis
Review the Results
2.3. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

2.3.1. Problem Description
2.3.2. Problem Specifications
2.3.3. Problem Sketch
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
2.5. Where to Find Other Examples
3. Modal Analysis
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
Uses for Modal Analysis

Understanding the Modal Analysis Process
Building the Model for a Modal Analysis
Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.4.6.
3.4.7.
3.4.8.
Enter the Solution Processor

Define Analysis Type and Options
Define Master Degrees of Freedom
Apply Loads
Specify Load Step Options
Solve
Participation Factor Table Output
Exit the Solution Processor
3.5. Reviewing the Results

3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.
3.5.7.
3.5.8.
3.5.9.
Points to Remember
Reviewing Results Data
Option: Listing All Frequencies
Option: Display Deformed Shape
Option: List Master Degree of Freedom
Option: Line Element Results
Option: Contour Displays
Option: Tabular Listings
Other Capabilities
3.6. Applying Prestress Effects in a Modal Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_StrTOC.html[28/04/2013 02:19:20 p.m.]
3.6.1. Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis

3.6.2. Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution
3.7. Modal Analysis Examples
3.7.1.
3.7.2.
3.7.3.
3.7.4.
3.7.5.
An Example Modal Analysis (GUI Method)

An Example Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
Brake Squeal (Prestressed Modal) Analysis
Reuse of Jobname.MODE in QR Damp Eigensolver
Where to Find Other Modal Analysis Examples
3.8. Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods

3.8.1.
3.8.2.
3.8.3.
3.8.4.
3.8.5.
3.8.6.
3.8.7.
Block Lanczos Method

PCG Lanczos Method
Supernode (SNODE) Method
Reduced (Householder) Method
Unsymmetric Method
Damped Method
QR Damped Method
3.9. Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis

3.9.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction
3.10. Using the Residual-Vector Method to Improve Accuracy
3.10.1. Understanding the Residual Vector Method
3.10.2. Using the Residual Vector Method
3.11. Reusing Eigenmodes
3.11.1. Spectrum Analysis (ANTYPE, SPECTRUM)
3.11.2. Modal Transient Analysis/Harmonic Analysis
3.11.3. QR Damp Complex Modes Extraction
3.12. Applying Multiple Loads for use in Mode-Superposition Harmonic and Transient Analysis
3.12.1. Understanding the Multiple Loads Method
3.12.2. Using the Multiple Loads Method
3.13. Reusing Extracted Eigenmodes in LANB, LANPCG and SNODE method
3.13.1. Understanding the Reuse Eigenmodes
3.13.2. Reusing the Existing Eigenmodes
3.14. Enforced Motion Method for Mode-Superposition Transient and Harmonic Analyses
3.14.1. Understanding the Enforced Motion Method
3.14.2. Using the Enforced Motion Method
3.14.3. Sample Input for Enforced Motion Mode-Superposition Analysis
4. Harmonic Response Analysis
4.1. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis
4.2. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis
4.3. Three Solution Methods
4.3.1. The Full Method
4.3.2. The Reduced Method
4.3.3. The Mode-Superposition Method
4.3.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods

4.4. Performing a Harmonic Response Analysis
4.4.1.
4.4.2.
4.4.3.
4.4.4.
Full Harmonic Response Analysis

Build the Model
Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
Review the Results
4.5. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)

4.5.3. Problem Diagram
4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
4.8. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis
4.8.1.
4.8.2.
4.8.3.
4.8.4.
4.8.5.
Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution

Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)
Review the Results of the Expanded Solution
Sample Input
4.9. Mode-Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

4.9.1.
4.9.2.
4.9.3.
4.9.4.
4.9.5.
Obtain the Modal Solution

Obtain the Mode-Superposition Harmonic Solution
Expand the Mode-Superposition Solution
Sample Input
4.10. Additional Harmonic Response Analysis Details

4.10.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis
5. Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.1. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.2.1. Full Method
5.2.2. Mode-Superposition Method
5.2.3. Reduced Method
5.3. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.3.1. Build the Model
5.3.2. Establish Initial Conditions
5.3.3. Set Solution Controls
5.3.4. Apply the Loads
5.3.5. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
5.3.6. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step
5.3.7. Save a Backup Copy of the Database
5.3.8. Start the Transient Solution
5.3.9. Exit the Solution Processor
5.3.10. Review the Results
5.3.11. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.4. Performing a Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.4.1.
5.4.2.
5.4.3.
5.4.4.
5.4.5.
5.4.6.
Build the Model

Obtain the Mode-Superposition Transient Solution
Expand the Mode-Superposition Solution
Review the Results
Sample Input for a Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.5. Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

5.5.1.
5.5.2.
5.5.3.
5.5.4.
Obtain the Reduced Solution

Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)
5.6. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

5.6.1.
5.6.2.
5.6.3.
5.6.4.
Problem Description
Problem Specifications
Problem Sketch
Solve the Next Load Step
5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

5.8. Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.8.1. Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.8.2. Prestressed Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.8.3. Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.9. Transient Dynamic Analysis Options
5.9.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step
5.9.2. Automatic Time Stepping
6. Spectrum Analysis
6.1. Understanding Spectrum Analysis
6.1.1.
6.1.2.
6.1.3.
6.1.4.
Response Spectrum
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
Power Spectral Density
Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses
6.2. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis Process

6.2.1.
6.2.2.
6.2.3.
6.2.4.
6.2.5.
6.2.6.
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Build the Model

Obtain the Spectrum Solution
Expand the Modes
Combine the Modes
Review the Results
6.3. Example Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

6.3.1.
6.3.2.
6.3.3.
6.3.4.
Problem Description
Problem Sketch
Procedure
6.4. Example Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

6.6. Performing a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis

6.6.1.
6.6.2.
6.6.3.
6.6.4.
Obtain the PSD Solution

Combine the Modes
Review the Results
Sample Input
6.7. Performing a DDAM Spectrum Analysis

6.8. Performing a Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis
6.8.1. Step 4: Obtain the Spectrum Solution
6.8.2. Step 5: Combine the Modes
6.8.3. Step 6: Review the Results
6.9. Example Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
6.9.1.
6.9.2.
6.9.3.
6.9.4.
Problem Description
Problem Sketch
Command Listing
7. Buckling Analysis
7.1. Types of Buckling Analyses
7.1.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
7.1.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
7.2. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis
7.3. Performing a Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
7.3.1.
7.3.2.
7.3.3.
7.3.4.
Applying Load Increments

Automatic Time Stepping
Unconverged Solution
Hints and Tips for Performing a Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
7.4. Performing a Post-Buckling Analysis

7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
7.5.1.
7.5.2.
7.5.3.
7.5.4.
Build the Model

Obtain the Static Solution
Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution
Review the Results
7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
8. Nonlinear Structural Analysis
8.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior
8.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact)
8.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities
8.1.3. Material Nonlinearities
8.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses
8.2.1.
8.2.2.
8.2.3.
8.2.4.
8.2.5.
Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency

Substeps
Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis
Rotations in a Large-Deflection Analysis
Nonlinear Transient Analyses
8.3. Using Geometric Nonlinearities

8.3.1. Stress-Strain
8.3.2. Stress Stiffening
8.4. Modeling Material Nonlinearities
8.4.1. Nonlinear Materials
8.4.2. Material Model Combination Examples
8.5. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS
8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis
8.6.1.
8.6.2.
8.6.3.
8.6.4.
8.6.5.
8.6.6.
8.6.7.
Build the Model

Apply the Loads
Solve the Analysis
Review the Results
Terminating a Running Job; Restarting
8.7. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

8.7.1. Build the Model
8.7.2. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
8.7.3. Review the Results
8.8. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
8.9. Restarts
8.10. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements
8.10.1. Element Birth and Death
8.11. Unstable Structures
8.11.1. Understanding Nonlinear Stabilization
8.11.2. Using the Arc-Length Method
8.11.3. Nonlinear Stabilization vs. the Arc-Length Method
8.12. Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis
8.12.1. Setting Up a Nonlinear Analysis
8.12.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems
8.13. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)
8.14. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
9. Linear Perturbation Analysis
9.1. Understanding Linear Perturbation

9.2. General Procedure for Linear Perturbation Analysis
9.2.1.
9.2.2.
9.2.3.
9.2.4.
9.2.5.
9.2.6.
The Base (Prior) Analysis

First Phase of the Linear Perturbation Analysis
Second Phase of the Linear Perturbation Analysis
Stress Expansion from Modal Linear Perturbation Analysis
Reviewing Results of a Linear Perturbation Analysis
Downstream Analysis Following the Linear Perturbation Analysis
9.3. Considerations for Load Generation and Controls

9.3.1. Generation and Control of Mechanical Loads
9.3.2. Generation and Control of Non-mechanical Loads
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
Considerations for Perturbed Stiffness Matrix Generation

Considerations for Rotating Machinery
Sample Inputs for Linear Perturbation Analysis
Comparison of Linear Perturbation and Prestressed Modal Procedures
Where to Find Other Examples
10. Material Curve Fitting

10.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types
10.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
10.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material Behavior
10.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting
10.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior
10.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models
10.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
10.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
11. Gasket Joints Simulation
11.1. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis
11.2. Finite Element Formulation
11.2.1. Element Topologies
11.2.2. Thickness Direction
11.3. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
11.3.1. Element Selection
11.3.2. Applications
11.4. Material Definition
11.4.1.
11.4.2.
11.4.3.
11.4.4.
Material Characteristics
Input Format
Temperature Dependencies
Plotting Gasket Data
11.5. Meshing Interface Elements

11.6. Solution Procedure and Result Output
11.6.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing

11.7.1. Points to Remember
11.7.2. Reviewing Results in POST1
11.8. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
12. Interface Delamination and Failure Simulation
12.1. Modeling Interface Delamination with Interface Elements
12.1.1.
12.1.2.
12.1.3.
12.1.4.
12.1.5.
12.1.6.
Analyzing Interface Delamination

ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
Material Definition
Meshing and Boundary Conditions
Solution Procedure and Result Output
Reviewing the Results
12.2. Modeling Interface Delamination with Contact Elements

12.2.1.
12.2.2.
12.2.3.
12.2.4.
Analyzing Debonding
Contact Elements
Material Definition
Result Output
13. Fracture Mechanics

13.1. Introduction to Fracture
13.1.1. Fracture Modes
13.1.2. Fracture Mechanics Parameters
13.1.3. Crack Growth Simulation
13.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
13.2.1. Modeling the Crack-Tip Region
13.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters
13.3. Numerical Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters
13.3.1. J-Integral Calculation
13.3.2. VCCT Energy-Release Rate Calculation
13.3.3. Stress-Intensity Factors Calculation
13.4. Learning More About Fracture Mechanics
14. Composites
14.1. Modeling Composites
14.1.1.
14.1.2.
14.1.3.
14.1.4.
Selecting the Proper Element Type

Defining the Layered Configuration
Specifying Failure Criteria
Composite Modeling and Postprocessing Tips
14.2. The FiberSIM-ANSYS Interface

14.2.1. Understanding the FiberSIM XML File
14.2.2. Using FiberSIM Data in ANSYS
14.2.3. FiberSIM-to-ANSYS Translation Details
15. Fatigue
15.1. How ANSYS Calculates Fatigue
15.2. Fatigue Terminology
15.3. Evaluating Fatigue
15.3.1.
15.3.2.
15.3.3.
15.3.4.
15.3.5.
15.3.6.
15.3.7.
Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database

Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations
Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
Activate the Fatigue Calculations
Review the Results
Other Approaches to Range Counting
Sample Input
16. Beam Analysis and Cross Sections

16.1. Overview of Cross Sections
16.2. How to Create Cross Sections
16.2.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number
16.2.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
16.2.3. Meshing a Line Model with BEAM188 or BEAM189 Elements
16.3. Creating Cross Sections
16.3.1.
16.3.2.
16.3.3.
16.3.4.
16.3.5.
Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections

Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh
Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials
Defining Composite Cross Sections
Defining a Tapered Beam
16.4. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

16.4.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section
16.4.2. Considerations for Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections
16.5. Using Preintegrated Composite Beam Sections
16.5.1. Defining a Composite Beam Section
16.5.2. Considerations for Using Composite Beam Sections
16.5.3. Example: Composite Beam Section Input
16.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries
16.7. Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
16.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse
16.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry
16.7.6. Define Element Type and Cross Section Information
16.7.7. Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node
16.7.8. Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation
16.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions
16.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
16.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
16.7.12. Plot and Review the Results
16.7.13. Plot and Review the Section Results
16.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method
17. Shell Analysis and Cross Sections

17.1. Understanding Cross Sections
17.2.1.
17.2.2.
17.2.3.
17.2.4.
17.2.5.
17.2.6.
17.2.7.
17.2.8.
Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Defining Layer Data
Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties
Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells)
Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
Associating an Area with a Section
Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections
Managing Cross-Section Libraries
17.3. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections

17.3.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section
17.3.2. Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections
18. Reinforcing
18.1. Assumptions About Reinforcing
18.2. Modeling Options for Reinforcing
18.3. Defining Reinforcing Sections and Elements
18.3.1. Example: Discrete Reinforcing
18.3.2. Example: Smeared Reinforcing
18.4. Reinforcing Simulation and Postprocessing
19. Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids
19.1. Hydrostatic Fluid Element Features
19.2. Defining Hydrostatic Fluid Elements
19.3. Material Definitions and Loading
19.3.1. Fluid Materials
19.3.2. Loads and Boundary Conditions
19.4. Example Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid Elements
19.5. Results Output
A. Example Analyses with Multiple Imposed Rotations
A.1. Problem Description
A.2. Sample Inputs for Imposed Rotations
A.2.1. Sequentially Applied Rotations
A.2.2. Simultaneously Applied Rotations
Release 13.0 - 2010 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses
Chapter1:Overview of Structural Analyses

Structural analysis is probably the most common application of the finite element method. The term
structural (or structure ) implies not only civil engineering structures such as bridges and buildings, but
also naval, aeronautical, and mechanical structures such as ship hulls, aircraft bodies, and machine
housings, as well as mechanical components such as pistons, machine parts, and tools.
The following structural analysis topics are available:
Types of Structural Analysis
Elements Used in Structural Analyses
Material Model Interface
Damping
Solution Methods
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR1.html[28/04/2013 02:20:27 p.m.]
1.1. Types of Structural Analysis
1.1.Types of Structural Analysis

The seven types of structural analyses available in the ANSYS family of products are explained below.
The primary unknowns (nodal degrees of freedom) calculated in a structural analysis are displacements.
Other quantities, such as strains, stresses, and reaction forces, are then derived from the nodal
displacements.
Structural analyses are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and
ANSYS Professional programs only.
You can perform the following types of structural analyses. Each of these analysis types are discussed in
detail in this manual.
Static Analysis --Used to determine displacements, stresses, etc. under static loading conditions. Both
linear and nonlinear static analyses. Nonlinearities can include plasticity, stress stiffening, large
deflection, large strain, hyperelasticity, contact surfaces, and creep.
Modal Analysis --Used to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure. Different
mode-extraction methods are available.
Harmonic Analysis --Used to determine the response of a structure to harmonically time-varying loads.
Transient Dynamic Analysis --Used to determine the response of a structure to arbitrarily time-varying
loads. All nonlinearities mentioned under Static Analysis above are allowed.
Spectrum Analysis --An extension of the modal analysis, used to calculate stresses and strains due to a
response spectrum or a PSD input (random vibrations).
Buckling Analysis --Used to calculate the buckling loads and determine the buckling mode shape. Both
linear (eigenvalue) buckling and nonlinear buckling analyses are possible.
Explicit Dynamic Analysis --This type of structural analysis is only available in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
program. ANSYS LS-DYNA provides an interface to the LS-DYNA explicit finite element program. Explicit
dynamic analysis is used to calculate fast solutions for large deformation dynamics and complex contact
problems. Explicit dynamic analysis is described in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
In addition to the above analysis types, several special-purpose features are available:
Fracture mechanics
Composites
Fatigue
p-Method
Beam Analyses
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR1_2.html[28/04/2013 02:21:31 p.m.]
1.2. Elements Used in Structural Analyses
1.2.Elements Used in Structural Analyses

Most ANSYS element types are structural elements, ranging from simple spars and beams to more
complex layered shells and large strain solids. Most types of structural analyses can use any of these
elements.
Note: Explicit dynamics analysis can use only the explicit dynamic elements (LINK160,
BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167, and
SOLID168).
Table1.1Structural Element Types
Category
Spars
Beams
Pipes
2-D Solids
3-D Solids
Shells
Solid-Shell
Interface
Contact
Coupled-Field
Specialty
Explicit Dynamics
Element Name(s)
LINK180
BEAM188, BEAM189
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290
PLANE25, PLANE83, PLANE182, PLANE183
SOLID65, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273,
SOLID285
SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL61, SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL281
SOLSH190
INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174,
CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, CONTA178
SOLID5, PLANE13, FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID38, SOLID62, FLUID79,
FLUID80, FLUID81, SOLID98, FLUID129, INFIN110, INFIN111, FLUID116,
FLUID130
LINK11, COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, COMBIN39,
COMBIN40, MATRIX50, SURF153, SURF154, SURF156, SURF159,
REINF264, REINF265,
LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165,
MASS166, LINK167, SOLID168
1.3. Material Model Interface
1.3.Material Model Interface

For analyses described in this guide, if you are using the GUI, you must specify the material you will be
simulating using an intuitive material model interface. This interface uses a hierarchical tree structure of
material categories, which is intended to assist you in choosing the appropriate model for your analysis.
See Material Model Interface in the Basic Analysis Guide for details on the material model interface.
1.4. Damping
1.4.Damping
Damping is present in most systems and should be specified in a dynamic analysis. The following forms
of damping are available in the ANSYS program:
Alpha and Beta Damping (Rayleigh Damping)
Material-Dependent Damping
Constant Material Damping Coefficient
Constant Damping Ratio
Modal Damping
Element Damping
Material Structural Damping Coefficient
Only the constant damping ratio and modal damping are available in the ANSYS Professional program.
You can specify more than one form of damping in a model. The program will formulate the damping
matrix [C] as the sum of all the specified forms of damping. The constant material damping coefficient is
only applicable in full and modal harmonic analyses.
Table1.2:Damping for Different Analysis Types shows the types of damping available for different
structural analyses.
Table1.2Damping for Different Analysis Types
Analysis
Type
Static
Modal
Undamped
Damped
Harmonic
Full
Reduced
Mode Sup
QR DAMP
Mode Sup
Transient
Full
Reduced
Mode Sup
QR DAMP
Mode Sup
Spectrum
SPRS, MPRS
Alpha,
Beta
Damping
ALPHAD,
BETAD
N/A
Constant Material
Material Structural
Material- Constant
Element
Dependent Damping Modal Damping(2) Damping Damping
Ratio Damping COMBIN14, Coefficient Coefficient
Damping
MP,DAMP DMPRAT MDAMP and so on MP,DMPR TB,SDAMP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
Yes
No(3)
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(4)
Yes
Yes
Yes(3)
Yes(4)
Yes(5)
Yes(5)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(3,)
Yes(4)
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes(5)
No
No
Yes(5)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes(3,)
Yes
Yes
No
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/a6iQxq21mcm.html[28/04/2013 02:21:57 p.m.]
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
No
No
No
Yes(1)
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
1.4. Damping
DDAM
PSD
Buckling
Substructure
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes(3)
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
No
N/A
Yes
N/A
No
N/A
No
N/A
Yes
N/A
No
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note: When specifying frequency dependent damping using TB,SDAMP, you must specify
the material property using TB,ELAS.
N/A - Not applicable
1. damping only, no damping
2. Includes superelement damping matrix
3. MP,DAMP specifies an effective material damping ratio. Specify it in the modal analysis (and
expand the modes, MXPAND,,,,YES) for use in subsequent spectrum and mode-superposition
analyses.
4. ALPHAD, BETAD, and MP,DAMP damping must be applied in the QR Damped modal analysis
portion of the mode-superposition analysis.
5. In harmonic analyses where indicated, DMPRAT and MP,DMPR are structural damping ratios and
not modal damping ratios.
Alpha damping and Beta damping are used to define Rayleigh damping constants and . The damping
matrix [C] is calculated by using these constants to multiply the mass matrix [M] and stiffness matrix
[K]:
[C] = [M] + [K]
The ALPHAD and BETAD commands are used to specify and , respectively, as decimal numbers.
The values of and are not generally known directly, but are calculated from modal damping ratios,
i. i is the ratio of actual damping to critical damping for a particular mode of vibration, i. If i is the
natural circular frequency of mode i, and satisfy the relation
i = /2 i + i/2
In many practical structural problems, alpha damping (or mass damping) may be ignored ( = 0). In
such cases, you can evaluate from known values of i andi, as
= 2i/ i
Only one value of can be input in a load step, so choose the most dominant frequency active in that
load step to calculate .
To specify both and for a given damping ratio , it is commonly assumed that the sum of the and
terms is nearly constant over a range of frequencies (see Figure 1.1). Therefore, given and a
frequency range 1 to 2 , two simultaneous equations can be solved for and :
Figure1.1Rayleigh Damping
1.4. Damping
Alpha damping can lead to undesirable results if an artificially large mass has been introduced into the
model. One common example is when an artificially large mass is added to the base of a structure to
facilitate acceleration spectrum input. (You can use the large mass to convert an acceleration spectrum
to a force spectrum.) The alpha damping coefficient, which is multiplied by the mass matrix, will produce
artificially large damping forces in such a system, leading to inaccuracies in the spectrum input, as well
as in the system response.
Beta damping and material damping can lead to undesirable results in a nonlinear analysis. These
damping coefficients are multiplied by the stiffness matrix, which is constantly changing in a nonlinear
analysis. Beta damping is not applied to the stiffness matrices generated by contact elements. The
resulting change in damping can sometimes be opposite to the actual change in damping that can occur
in physical structures. For example, whereas physical systems that experience softening due to plastic
response will usually experience a corresponding increase in damping, an ANSYS model that has beta
damping will experience a decrease in damping as plastic softening response develops.
Material-dependent damping allows you to specify beta damping () as a material property (MP,DAMP).
However, MP,DAMP in an undamped modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) specifies a material-dependent
damping ratio (not ), and for multi-material elements such as SOLID65, can only be specified for
the element as a whole, not for each material in the element. In these cases, is determined from the
material pointer for the element (set with the MAT command), rather than the material pointed to by
any real constant MAT for the element. MP,DAMP is not assumed to be temperature-dependent, and is
always evaluated at T = 0.0.
The constant damping ratio is the simplest way of specifying damping in the structure. It represents the
ratio of actual damping to critical damping, and is specified as a decimal number with the DMPRAT
command. DMPRAT is available only for spectrum, harmonic response, and mode-superposition
transient dynamic analyses.
Modal damping gives you the ability to specify different damping ratios for different modes of vibration.
It is specified with the MDAMP command and is available only for the spectrum and modesuperposition method of solution (transient dynamic and harmonic response analyses).
The constant material damping coefficient MP,DMPR is available only for full, VT, and modesuperposition harmonic analyses.
Element damping involves using element types having viscous damping characteristics, such as
COMBIN14, COMBIN37, COMBIN40, and so on.
If you are running a mode-superposition analysis and used the QR damped solution method for the
modal solution, alpha (ALPHAD), beta (BETAD), material-dependent (MP,DAMP), and element
damping must be defined in the QR damped modal solution for the damping to be available in a
subsequent mode-superposition analysis.
For more information about damping, see the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications .
Damping ratios may be retrieved using *GET,,MODE,,DAMP. They are calculated for the following
analyses:
spectrum analysis
1.4. Damping
damped modal analysis

mode-superposition transient and harmonic analysis
After a modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) using unsymmetric (MODOPT,UNSYM), damped (MODOPT,
DAMP) or QRDAMP methods (MODOPT, QRDAMP), the modal damping ratios are deduced from the
complex eigenvalues using Equation15218 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications . These frequencies appear in the last column of the complex frequencies
printout.
1.5. Solution Methods
1.5.Solution Methods
Two solution methods are available for solving structural problems in the ANSYS family of products: the
h-method and the p-method. The h-method can be used for any type of analysis, but the p-method can
be used only for linear structural static analyses. Depending on the problem to be solved, the h-method
usually requires a finer mesh than the p-method. The p-method provides an excellent way to solve a
problem to a desired level of accuracy while using a coarse mesh. In general, the discussions in this
manual focus on the procedures required for the h-method of solution.
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis
Chapter2:Structural Static Analysis

A static analysis calculates the effects of steady loading conditions on a structure, while ignoring inertia
and damping effects, such as those caused by time-varying loads. A static analysis can, however, include
steady inertia loads (such as gravity and rotational velocity), and time-varying loads that can be
approximated as static equivalent loads (such as the static equivalent wind and seismic loads commonly
defined in many building codes).
Static analysis determines the displacements, stresses, strains, and forces in structures or components
caused by loads that do not induce significant inertia and damping effects. Steady loading and response
conditions are assumed; that is, the loads and the structure's response are assumed to vary slowly with
respect to time. The types of loading that can be applied in a static analysis include:
Externally applied forces and pressures
Steady-state inertial forces (such as gravity or rotational velocity)
Imposed (nonzero) displacements
Temperatures (for thermal strain)
Fluences (for nuclear swelling)
More information about the loads that you can apply in a static analysis appears in Apply the Loads.
The following topics are available for structural static analysis:
Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses
Performing a Static Analysis
A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)
A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
2.2.Performing a Static Analysis

The procedure for a static analysis consists of these tasks:
1. Build the Model
2. Set Solution Controls
3. Set Additional Solution Options
4. Apply the Loads
5. Solve the Analysis
6. Review the Results
2.2.1.Build the Model

See Building the Model in the Basic Analysis Guide . For further details, see the Modeling and Meshing
Guide.
2.2.1.1.Points to Remember
Keep the following points in mind when doing a static analysis:
You can use both linear and nonlinear structural elements.
Material properties can be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or
temperature-dependent.
You must define stiffness in some form (for example, Young's modulus (EX), hyperelastic
coefficients, and so on).
For inertia loads (such as gravity), you must define the data required for mass calculations,
such as density (DENS).
For thermal loads (temperatures), you must define the coefficient of thermal expansion
(ALPX).
Note the following information about mesh density:
Regions where stresses or strains vary rapidly (usually areas of interest) require a relatively finer
mesh than regions where stresses or strains are nearly constant (within an element).
While considering the influence of nonlinearities, remember that the mesh should be able to
capture the effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration
point density (and therefore a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
2.2.2.Set Solution Controls

Setting solution controls involves defining the analysis type and common analysis options for an
analysis, as well as specifying load step options for it. When you are doing a structural static analysis,
you can take advantage of a streamlined solution interface (called the Solution Controls dialog box) for
setting these options. The Solution Controls dialog box provides default settings that will work well for
many structural static analyses, which means that you may need to set only a few, if any, of the
options. Because the streamlined solution interface is the recommended tool for setting solution controls
in a structural static analysis, it is the method that is presented in this chapter.
If you prefer not to use the Solution Controls dialog box (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Sol'n Controls), you can set solution controls for your analysis using the standard set of ANSYS
solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths (Main Menu> Solution>
Unabridged Menu> option). For a general overview of the Solution Controls dialog box, see Using
Special Solution Controls for Certain Types of Structural Analyses in the Basic Analysis Guide .
2.2.2.1.Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Sol'n Controls. The following sections provide brief descriptions of the options that appear on
each tab of the dialog box. For details about how to set these options, select the tab that you are
interested in (from within the ANSYS program), and then click the Help button. Nonlinear Structural
Analysis also contains details about the nonlinear options introduced in this chapter.
2.2.2.2.Using the Basic Tab

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box.
The controls that appear on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data that ANSYS needs for
the analysis. Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not need to progress
through the remaining tabs unless you want to adjust the default settings for the more advanced
controls. As soon as you click OK on any tab of the dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS
database and the dialog box closes.
You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table2.1:Basic Tab Options. For specific
information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box,
select the Basic tab, and click the Help button.
Table2.1Basic Tab Options
Option
Specify analysis type [ANTYPE,
NLGEOM]
For more information on this option, see:

Defining the Analysis Type and Analysis Options in the
Basic Analysis Guide
Nonlinear Structural Analysis in the Structural Analysis

Guide
Restarting an Analysis in the Basic Analysis Guide
Control time settings, including: time
at end of load step [TIME],
automatic time stepping [AUTOTS],
and number of substeps to be taken
in a load step [NSUBST or
DELTIM]
Specify solution data to write to
database [OUTRES]
The Role of Time in Tracking in the Basic Analysis

Guide
Setting General Options in the Basic Analysis Guide
Setting Output Controls in the Basic Analysis Guide
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include:

When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Static if you are performing
a new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large
rotation, and large strain. Choose Large Displacement Static if you expect large deflections (as
in the case of a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem).
Choose Restart Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, if you have
previously completed a static analysis and you want to specify additional loads, or if you wish to
use the Jobname.RSX information from a previous VT Accelerator run. Note that in a VT Accelerator
run, you cannot restart a job in the middle; you can only rerun the job from the beginning with
changes in the input parameters.
When setting TIME, remember that this load step option specifies time at the end of the load
step. The default value is 1.0 for the first load step. For subsequent load steps, the default is 1.0
plus the time specified for the previous load step. Although time has no physical meaning in a
static analysis (except in the case of creep, viscoplasticity, or other rate-dependent material
behavior), it is used as a convenient way of referring to load steps and substeps (see "Loading" in
the Basic Analysis Guide ).
When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind:
Caution: By default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file
( Jobname.RST). If this number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES
specification), the program will terminate with an error. Use the command
/CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see "Memory Management and
Configuration" in the Basic Analysis Guide ).
2.2.2.3.The Transient Tab

The Transient tab contains transient analysis controls; it is available only if you choose a transient
analysis and remains grayed out when you choose a static analysis. For these reasons, it is not
described here.
2.2.2.4.Using the Sol'n Options Tab

You can use the Sol'n Options tab to set the options listed in Table2.2:Sol'n Options Tab Options. For
specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog
box, select the Sol'n Options tab, and click the Help button.
Table2.2Sol'n Options Tab Options
Option
For more information about this option, see the

following section(s) in the Basic Analysis Guide :
Specify equation solver [EQSLV]
Selecting a Solver through The Automatic Iterative

(Fast) Solver Option
Specify parameters for multiframe

restart [RESCONTROL]
Multiframe Restart
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include:

When setting EQSLV, specify one of these solvers:
Program chosen solver (ANSYS selects a solver for you, based on the physics of the problem)
Sparse direct solver (default for linear and nonlinear, static and full transient analyses)
Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) solver (recommended for large size models, bulky
structures)
Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) solver (applicable in the same situations as the PCG solver, but
provides parallel processing; for faster turnaround times when used in a multiprocessor
environment)
Iterative solver (auto-select; for linear static/full transient structural or steady-state thermal
analyses only; recommended)
Note: The AMG solver is part of ANSYS Mechanical HPC, which is a separately-licensed
product. See "Using Shared-Memory ANSYS" in the Advanced Analysis Techniques
Guide for more information about using the AMG solver.
2.2.2.5.Using the Nonlinear Tab

You can use the Nonlinear tab to set the options listed in Table2.3:Nonlinear Tab Options. For specific
select the Nonlinear tab, and click the Help button.
Table2.3Nonlinear Tab Options
Option

following section(s) in the Structural Analysis Guide :
Activate line search [LNSRCH]
Line Search Option

Line Search
Activate a predictor on the DOF

solution [PRED]
Activate an advanced predictor
(STAOPT)
Specify the maximum number of
iterations allowed per substep
[NEQIT]
Specify whether you want to
include creep calculation [RATE]
Predictor-Corrector Option
Set convergence criteria

[CNVTOL]
Control bisections
[CUTCONTROL]
Convergence Criteria
VT Accelerator
Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
Creep Material Model
Creep Criteria
Cutback Criteria
2.2.2.6.Using the Advanced NL Tab

You can use the Advanced NL tab to set the options listed in Table2.4:Advanced NL Tab Options. For
specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog
box, select the Advanced NL tab, and click the Help button.
Table2.4Advanced NL Tab Options
Option
Specify analysis termination criteria
[NCNV]
Control activation and termination

following section(s) in the Structural Analysis Guide :
Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
Using the Arc-Length Method
of the arc-length method

[ARCLEN, ARCTRM]
"Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide
2.2.3.Set Additional Solution Options

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These options do not appear
on the Solution Controls dialog box because they are used very infrequently, and their default settings
rarely need to be changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these
options for those cases in which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
Many of the options that appear in this section are nonlinear options, and are described further in
Nonlinear Structural Analysis .
2.2.3.1.Stress Stiffening Effects

Some elements include stress stiffening effects regardless of the SSTIF command setting. To determine
whether an element includes stress stiffening, refer to the appropriate element description in the
Element Reference.
By default, stress stiffening effects are ON when NLGEOM is ON. Specific situations in which you can
turn OFF stress stiffening effects include:
Stress stiffening is relevant only in nonlinear analyses. If you are performing a linear analysis
[NLGEOM,OFF], you can turn stress stiffening OFF.
Prior to the analysis, you know that the structure is not likely to fail because of buckling
(bifurcation, snap through).
Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence characteristics. Keeping in
mind the points listed above, you may choose to turn stress stiffening OFF for specific problems in which
convergence difficulties are seen; for example, local failures.
Command(s):
GUI:
SSTIF
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
2.2.3.2.Newton-Raphson Option
Use this analysis option only in a nonlinear analysis. This option specifies how often the tangent matrix
is updated during solution. You can specify one of these values:
Program-chosen (default)
Full
Modified
Initial stiffness
Full with unsymmetric matrix
Command(s):
GUI:
NROPT
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
2.2.3.3.Prestress Effects Calculation

Use this analysis option to perform a prestressed analysis on the same model, such as a prestressed
modal analysis. The default is OFF.
Note: The stress stiffening effects and the prestress effect calculation both control the
generation of the stress stiffness matrix, and therefore should not be used together
in an analysis. If both are specified, the last option specified will override the
previous setting.
Command(s):
GUI:
PSTRES
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis
Options
2.2.3.4.Mass Matrix Formulation

Use this analysis option if you plan to apply inertial loads on the structure (such as gravity and spinning
loads). You can specify one of these values:
Default (depends on element type)
Lumped mass approximation
Note: For a static analysis, the mass matrix formulation you use does not significantly
affect the solution accuracy (assuming that the mesh is fine enough). However, if
you want to do a prestressed dynamic analysis on the same model, the choice of
mass matrix formulation may be important; see the appropriate dynamic analysis
section for recommendations.
Command(s):
GUI:
LUMPM
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis
Options
2.2.3.5.Reference Temperature
This load step option is used for thermal strain calculations. Reference temperature can be made
material-dependent with the MP,REFT command.
Command(s):
GUI:
TREF
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Reference Temp
2.2.3.6.Mode Number
This load step option is used for axisymmetric harmonic elements.
Command(s):
MODE
GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> For Harmonic Ele
2.2.3.7.Creep Criteria
This nonlinear load step option specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.
Command(s):
GUI:
CRPLIM
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear>
Creep Criterion
2.2.3.8.Printed Output
Use this load step option to include any results data on the output file ( Jobname.OUT).
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTPR
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls>
Solu Printout
Caution: Proper use of multiple OUTPR commands can sometimes be a little tricky. See
Setting Output Controls in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on how
to use this command.
2.2.3.9.Extrapolation of Results
Use this load step option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes
instead of extrapolating them (default when no material nonlinearities are present).
Command(s):
GUI:
ERESX
Integration Pt
2.2.4.Apply the Loads

After you set the desired solution options, you are ready to apply loads to the model.
2.2.4.1.Load Types
All of the following load types are applicable in a static analysis.
2.2.4.1.1.Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)

These are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries to define rigid support points. They can
also indicate symmetry boundary conditions and points of known motion. The directions implied by the
labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
2.2.4.1.2.Velocities (VELX, VELY, VELZ, OMGX, OMGY, OMGZ)
The displacement constraints can be replaced by the equivalent differentiation forms, which are the
corresponding velocity loads. If a velocity load is present, the displacement constraint at the current time
step is calculated as the displacement constraint at the previous time step plus the input velocity value
times the time step. For example, if VELX is input the ux constraint is: ux(t+dt) = ux(t) + v(t)*dt.
The directions implied by the velocity load labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
2.2.4.1.3.Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)

These are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied by the
labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
2.2.4.1.4.Pressures (PRES)
These are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive values of pressure act
towards the element face (resulting in a compressive effect).
2.2.4.1.5.Temperatures (TEMP)
These are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal stresses).
The coefficient of thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated. You can
read in temperatures from a thermal analysis [LDREAD], or you can specify temperatures directly, using
the BF family of commands.
2.2.4.1.6.Fluences (FLUE)
These are applied to study the effects of swelling (material enlargement due to neutron bombardment
or other causes) or creep. They are used only if you input a swelling or creep equation.
2.2.4.1.7.Gravity, Spinning, Etc.

These are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density (or mass in some form) must be defined
if inertia effects are to be included.
2.2.4.2.Apply Loads to the Model

Except for inertia loads (which are independent of the model) and velocity loads, you can define loads
either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and
elements). You can also apply boundary conditions via TABLE type array parameters (see Applying
Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters) or as function boundary conditions (see "Using the Function
Tool").
Table2.5:Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a static analysis. In
an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
Table2.5Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis
Load Type
Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
ROTY, ROTZ)
Velocities (VELX, VELY, VELZ,
Category
For details on commands and menu

paths for defining these loads, see...
Constraints DOF Constraints in the Basic Analysis Guide

Constraints DOF Constraints in the Basic Analysis Guide
OMGX, OMGY, OMGZ)

Force, Moment (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, Forces
MZ)
Pressure (PRES)
Surface
Loads
Temperature (TEMP), Fluence
Body Loads
(FLUE)
Gravity, Spinning, and so on
Inertia
Loads
Forces (Concentrated Loads) in the Basic

Analysis Guide
Surface Loads in the Basic Analysis Guide
Applying Body Loads in the Basic Analysis
Guide
Applying Inertia Loads in the Basic Analysis
Guide
2.2.4.2.1.Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters

You can also apply loads using TABLE type array parameters. For details on using tabular boundary
conditions, see Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in the Basic Analysis Guide .
In a structural analysis, valid primary variables are TIME, TEMP, and location (X, Y, Z).
When defining the table, TIME must be in ascending order in the table index (as in any table array).
You can define a table array parameter via command or interactively. For more information on defining
table array parameters, see the ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide .
2.2.4.3.Calculating Inertia Relief

You can use a static analysis to perform inertia relief calculations, which calculate the accelerations that
will counterbalance the applied loads. You can think of inertia relief as an equivalent free-body analysis.
Your model should meet the following requirements:
The model should not contain axisymmetric or generalized plane strain elements, or nonlinearities.
Models with a mixture of 2-D and 3-D element types are not recommended.
Data required for mass calculations (such as density) must be specified.
Specify only the minimum number of displacement constraints - those required to prevent rigidbody motion. Three constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) are necessary for 2-D
models and six (or fewer) are necessary for 3-D models. Additional constraints, such as those
required to impose symmetry conditions, are permitted, but check for zero reaction forces at all
the constraints to make sure that the model is not overconstrained for inertia relief.
The loads for which inertia relief calculations are desired should be applied.
Issue the IRLF command before the SOLVE command as part of the inertia load commands.
Command(s):
GUI:
IRLF,1
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Inertia Relief
Inertia Relief for Substructures

For substructures, inertia relief calculations (MATRIX50) use the equations described in Inertia Relief in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications . ANSYS obtains the mass
matrix of a substructure via matrix reduction to condense it to the master nodes (MASTER). The inertia
relief calculations in a substructure are therefore consistent with the reduced mass contribution at the
master nodes.
The IRLF command has no effect in the generation pass of a substructure. If you intend to perform
inertia relief calculations on a substructure, do not apply DOF constraints (D) on the substructure during
its generation pass; instead, apply them during the use pass. (Otherwise, the substructure reduction
logic condenses out the mass associated with the constrained DOFs in the generation pass, and the
inertia relief calculations in the use pass of the substructure reflect the condensed mass distribution.)
The choice of master nodes during the generation pass will have a critical effect on how well the mass is
represented in the condensed substructure mass matrix. When you choose the Master Degrees of
Freedom nodes to represent a 'bounding box' of the model, the substructures inertia relief calculations
should closely represent that of the model. To verify your Master dof selections, check the reaction
forces (PRRSOL in /POST1) to ensure they are close to zero.
In the expansion pass, precalculation of masses for summary printout (IRLF,-1) occurs only on
elements that are part of the substructure.
2.2.4.3.1.Inertia Relief Output

Use the IRLIST command to print the output from inertia relief calculations. This output consists of the
translational and rotational accelerations required to balance the applied loads and can be used by other
programs to perform kinematics studies. The summary listing of mass and moments of inertia (produced
during solution) is accurate, not approximate. The reaction forces at the constraints will be zero because
the calculated inertia forces balance the applied forces.
Inertia relief output is stored in the database rather than in the results file ( Jobname.RST). When you
issue IRLIST, ANSYS pulls the information from the database, which contains the inertia relief output
from the most recent solution [SOLVE or PSOLVE].
Command(s):
GUI:
IRLIST
No GUI equivalent.
2.2.4.3.2.Partial Inertia Relief Calculations

You can also do a partial inertia relief calculation. Use the partial solution method [PSOLVE], as shown
in the command input below:
/PREP7
...
...
MP,DENS,...
...
...
FINISH
/SOLU
D,...
F,...
SF,...
OUTPR,ALL,ALL
IRLF,1
PSOLVE,ELFORM
PSOLVE,ELPREP
IRLIST
FINISH
! Generate model, define density
! Specify only minimum no. of constraints

! Other loads
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activates printout of all items

Can also be set to -1 for precise mass and
load summary only, no inertia relief
Calculates element matrices
Modifies element matrices and calculates
inertia relief terms
Lists the mass summary and total load summary tables
See the Command Reference for discussions of the OUTPR, IRLF, IRLIST, and PSOLVE commands.
2.2.4.3.3.Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations
If you need to do inertia relief calculations frequently, you can write a macro containing the above
commands. Macros are described in the ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide .
2.2.5.Solve the Analysis

You are now ready to solve the analysis.
1. Save a backup copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by
reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
Utility Menu> File> Save as
2. Start solution calculations.

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3. If you want the analysis to include additional loading conditions (that is, multiple load steps), you
will need to repeat the process of applying loads, specifying load step options, saving, and solving
for each load step. (Other methods for handling multiple load steps are described in "Loading" in
the Basic Analysis Guide .)
4. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Close the Solution menu.
2.2.6.Review the Results

Results from a static analysis are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of the
following data:
Primary data:
Nodal displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)
Derived data:
Nodal and element stresses
Nodal and element strains
Element forces
Nodal reaction forces
and so on
2.2.6.1.Postprocessors
You can review these results using POST1, the general postprocessor, and POST26, the time-history
processor.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific substeps (time-points). Some
typical POST1 operations are explained below.
POST26 is used in nonlinear static analyses to track specific result items over the applied load
history. See Nonlinear Structural Analysis for the use of POST26 in a nonlinear static analysis. For a
complete description of all postprocessing functions, see "An Overview of Postprocessing" in the
Basic Analysis Guide .
To review results in POST1 or POST26, the database must contain the same model for which the
solution was calculated.
The results file ( Jobname.RST) must be available.
2.2.6.3.Reviewing Results Data

1. Read in the database from the database file.
Command(s):
GUI:
RESUME
Utility Menu> File> Resume from
2. Read in the desired set of results. Identify the data set by load step and substep numbers or by
time. (If you specify a time value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program will
perform linear interpolation on all the data to calculate the results at that time.)
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Load Step
3. Perform the necessary POST1 operations. Typical static analysis POST1 operations are explained
below.
2.2.6.4.Typical Postprocessing Operations

Use the PLDISP command to display a deformed shape (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot
Results> Deformed Shape). The KUND field on PLDISP gives you the option of overlaying the
undeformed shape on the display.
Option: List Reaction Forces and Moments

The PRRSOL command lists reaction forces and moments at the constrained nodes (Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu).
To display reaction forces, issue /PBC,RFOR,,1 and then request a node or element display [NPLOT or
EPLOT]. (Use RMOM instead of RFOR for reaction moments.)
Option: List Nodal Forces and Moments

Use the PRESOL,F (or M) command to list nodal forces and moments (Main Menu> General
Postproc> List Results> Element Solution).
You can list the sum of all nodal forces and moments for a selected set of nodes. Select a set of nodes
and use this feature to find out the total force acting on those nodes:
Command(s):
GUI:
FSUM
Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Total Force Sum
You can also check the total force and total moment at each selected node. For a body in equilibrium,
the total load is zero at all nodes except where an applied load or reaction load exists:
Command(s):
GUI:
NFORCE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Sum @ Each Node
The FORCE command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) dictates which
component of the forces is being reviewed:
Total (default)
Static component
Damping component
Inertia component
For a body in equilibrium, the total load (using all FORCE components) is zero at all nodes except where
an applied load or reaction load exists.
Option: Line Element Results

For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use ETABLE to gain access to derived data
(stresses, strains, and so on) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table).
Results data are identified by a combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on
the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic
Analysis Guide for details.
Option: Error Estimation

For linear static analyses using solid or shell elements, use the PRERR command to list the estimated
solution error due to mesh discretization (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Percent
Error). This command calculates and lists the percent error in structural energy norm (SEPC), which
represents the error relative to a particular mesh discretization.
Option: Structural Energy Error Estimation

Use PLESOL,SERR to contour the element-by-element structural energy error (SERR) (Main Menu>
General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu). Regions of high SERR on the
contour display are good candidates for mesh refinement. (You can activate automatic mesh refinement
by means of the ADAPT command - see the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.) See
Estimating Solution Error in the Basic Analysis Guide for more details about error estimation.

Use PLNSOL and PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains
(EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot
Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on
the display.
Use PLETAB and PLLS to contour element table data and line element data (Main Menu> General
Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table and Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot
Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res).
Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the
PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where
elements of different materials, different shell thicknesses, or other
discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
"Selecting and Components" in the Basic Analysis Guide ) to select elements of
the same material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL.
Alternatively, use PowerGraphics with the AVRES command (Main Menu>
General Postproc> Options for Outp) to not average results across
different materials and/or different shell thicknesses.
Option: Vector Displays

Use PLVECT to view vector displays (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector
Plot> Predefined) and PRVECT to view vector listings (Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> Vector Data).
Vector displays (not to be confused with vector mode ) are an effective way of viewing vector quantities,
such as displacement (DISP), rotation (ROT), and principal stresses (S1, S2, S3).

Use these commands to produce tabular listings:
(nodal results),
Command(s): PRNSOL
PRESOL (element-by-element results)
PRRSOL (reaction data), and so on
GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them (Main Menu> General
Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes or Sort Elems).
Other Postprocessing Capabilities

Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on are available in POST1. See "An Overview of Postprocessing" in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
2.1. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses
2.1.Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses

A static analysis can be either linear or nonlinear. All types of nonlinearities are allowed - large
deformations, plasticity, creep, stress stiffening, contact (gap) elements, hyperelastic elements, and so
on. This chapter focuses on linear static analyses, with brief references to nonlinearities. Details of how
to handle nonlinearities are described in Nonlinear Structural Analysis .
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis
Chapter8:Nonlinear Structural Analysis

Structural nonlinearities occur on a routine basis. For example, whenever you staple two pieces of paper
together, the metal staples are permanently bent into a different shape, as shown in Figure 8.1 (a). If
you heavily load a wooden shelf, it will sag more and more as time passes, as shown in Figure (b). As
weight is added to a car or truck, the contact surfaces between its pneumatic tires and the underlying
pavement change in response to the added load, as shown in Figure (c). If you were to plot the loaddeflection curve for each example, you would discover that they exhibit the fundamental characteristic of
nonlinear structural behavior: a changing structural stiffness.
Figure8.1Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural Behavior
The following nonlinear structural analysis topics are available:

Causes of Nonlinear Behavior
Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses
Using Geometric Nonlinearities
Modeling Material Nonlinearities
Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS
Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis
Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
Restarts
Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements
Unstable Structures
Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis
Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)
Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
2.3.A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a static analysis of an Allen wrench.
2.3.1.Problem Description
An Allen wrench (10 mm across the flats) is torqued by means of a 100 N force at its end. Later, a 20 N
downward force is applied at the same end, at the same time retaining the original 100 N torquing force.
The objective is to determine the stress intensity in the wrench under these two loading conditions.
2.3.2.Problem Specifications
The following dimensions are used for this problem:
Width across flats = 10 mm
Configuration = hexagonal
Length of shank = 7.5 cm
Length of handle = 20 cm
Bend radius = 1 cm
Modulus of elasticity = 2.07 x 10 11 Pa
Applied torquing force = 100 N
Applied downward force = 20 N
2.3.3.Problem Sketch
Figure2.1Diagram of Allen Wrench
2.3.3.1.Set the Analysis Title

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title.
2. Type the text "Static Analysis of an Allen Wrench" and click on OK.
2.3.3.2.Set the System of Units

1. Click once in the Input Window to make it active for text entry.
2. Type the command /UNITS,SI and press ENTER. Notice that the command is stored in the history
buffer, which can be accessed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the input window.
3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Angular Units. The Angular Units for
Parametric Functions dialog box appears.
4. In the drop down menu for Units for angular parametric functions, select "Degrees DEG."
5. Click on OK.
2.3.3.3.Define Parameters
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters
dialog box appears.
2. Type the following parameters and their values in the Selection field. Click on Accept after you
define each parameter. For example, first type exx = 2.07e11 in the Selection field and then click
on Accept. Continue entering the remaining parameters and values in the same way.
Parameter
EXX
W_HEX
W_FLAT
L_SHANK
L_HANDLE
BENDRAD
L_ELEM
NO_D_HEX
TOL
Value
2.07E11
.01
W_HEX* TAN(30)
.075
.2
.01
.0075
2
25E-6
Description
Young's modulus is 2.07E11 Pa
Width of hex across flats = .01 m
Width of flat = .0058 m
Length of shank (short end) .075 m
Length of handle (long end) .2 m
Bend radius .01 m
Element length .0075 m
Number of divisions along hex flat = 2
Tolerance for selecting node = 25E-6 m
Note: You can type the labels in upper- or lowercase; ANSYS always displays the
labels in uppercase.
3. Click on Close.
4. Click on SAVE_DB on the Toolbar.
2.3.3.4.Define the Element Types

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.
2. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
3. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Structural Solid."
4. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Brick 8node 185."
5. Click on OK to define it as element type 1. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes.
6. Click on Options. The SOLID185 element type options dialog box appears.
7. In the element technology scroll box, scroll to "Simple Enhanced Str" and select it.
8. Click OK. The element type options dialog box closes. Click on Add in the element types box.
9. Scroll up the list on the right to "Quad 4node 182." Click once to select it.
10. Click on OK to define Quad 4node182 as element type 2. The Library of Element Types dialog box
closes.
11. Click on Options. The PLANE182 element type options dialog box appears.
12. In the scroll box for element technology, scroll to "Simple Enhanced Str" and select it.
13. Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
2.3.3.5.Define Material Properties

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The
Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3. Type the text EXX in the EX field (for Young's modulus), and .3 for PRXY.
Click on OK. This sets Young's modulus to the parameter specified above. Material Model Number
1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
2.3.3.6.Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Polygon> By
Side Length. The Polygon by Side Length dialog box appears.
2. Enter 6 for number of sides.
3. Enter W_FLAT for length of each side.
4. Click on OK. A hexagon appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
2.3.3.7.Create Keypoints Along a Path

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active
CS. The Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2. Enter 7 for keypoint number. Type a 0 in each of the X, Y, Z location fields.
3. Click on Apply.
4. Enter 8 for keypoint number.
5. Enter 0,0,-L_SHANK for the X, Y, Z location, and click on Apply.
7. Enter 0,L_HANDLE,-L_SHANK for the X, Y, Z location, and click on OK.
2.3.3.8.Create Lines Along a Path

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options. The
Window Options dialog box appears.
2. In the Location of triad drop down menu, select "At top left."
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog
box appears.
5. Click on "Iso" to generate an isometric view and click on Close.
6. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle
of Rotation dialog box appears.
7. Enter 90 for angle in degrees.
8. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes X."
9. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog
box appears.
11. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to turn keypoint numbering on.
12. Click the Line numbers radio button to turn line numbering on.
13. Click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines>
Straight Line. The Create Straight Line picking menu appears.
15. Click once on keypoints 4 and 1 to create a line between keypoints 1 and 4. (If you have trouble
reading the keypoint numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use the controls on the Pan-ZoomRotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.)
16. Click once on keypoints 7 and 8 to create a line between keypoints 7 and 8.
17. Click once on keypoints 8 and 9 to create a line between keypoints 8 and 9.
18. Click on OK.
2.3.3.9.Create Line from Shank to Handle

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Line Fillet. The
Line Fillet picking menu appears.
2. Click once on lines 8 and 9.
3. Click on OK in the picking menu. The Line Fillet dialog box appears.
4. Enter BENDRAD for Fillet radius and click on OK.
2.3.3.10.Cut Hex Section

In this step, you cut the hex section into two quadrilaterals. This step is required to satisfy mapped
meshing.
box appears.
2. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to Off.
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Areas.
5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Divide>
With Options> Area by Line. The Divide Area by Line picking menu appears.
6. Click once on the shaded area, and click on OK.
7. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines.
8. Click once on line 7. (If you have trouble reading the line numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window,
use the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls>
Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.)
9. Click on OK. The Divide Area by Line with Options dialog box appears. In the Subtracted lines will
be drop down menu, select Kept. Click OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Create Component. The
Create Component dialog box appears.
11. Enter BOTAREA for component name.
12. In the Component is made of drop down menu, select "Areas."
13. Click on OK.
2.3.3.11.Set Meshing Density

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Lines> Picked
Lines. The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears.
2. Enter 1,2,6 in the picker, then press ENTER.
3. Click on OK in the picking menu. The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears.
4. Enter NO_D_HEX for number of element divisions and click on OK.
2.3.3.12.Set Element Type for Area Mesh

In this step, set the element type to PLANE182, all quadrilaterals for the area mesh.
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem
Attributes. The Element Attributes dialog box appears.
2. In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 PLANE182 and click on OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesher Opts. The Mesher Options
dialog box appears.
4. In the Mesher Type field, click on the Mapped radio button and then click on OK. The Set Element
Shape dialog box appears.
5. Click on OK to accept the default of Quad for 2-D shape key.
2.3.3.13.Generate Area Mesh
In this step, generate the area mesh you will later drag.
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Mapped> 3 or
4 sided. The Mesh Areas picking box appears.
2. Click on Pick All.
3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.3.3.14.Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements

2. In the Element type number drop down menu, select 1 SOLID185 and click on OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Global> Size. The
Global Element Sizes dialog box appears.
4. Enter L_ELEM for element edge length and click on OK.
5. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.
6. Click the Line numbers radio button to on if it is not already selected.
7. Click on OK.
9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Extrude> Areas>
Along Lines. The Sweep Areas along Lines picking box appears.
10. Click on Pick All. A second picking box appears.
11. Click once on lines 8, 10, and 9 (in that order).
12. Click on OK. The 3-D model appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
2.3.3.15.Select BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly. The
Select Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2. Click on OK to accept the default of select BOTAREA component.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas. The Clear Areas
picking menu appears.
5. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
2.3.3.16.Apply Displacement Boundary Condition at End of Wrench
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly. The
Select Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2. Click on OK to accept the default of select BOTAREA component.
3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears.
4. In the top drop down menu, select "Lines."
5. In the second drop down menu, select "Exterior."
6. Click on Apply.
7. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
8. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to."
9. Click on the "Lines, all" radio button to select it.
10. Click on OK.
11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
12. Click on Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
13. In the scroll list for DOFs to be constrained, click on "ALL DOF."
14. Click on OK.
15. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
16. In the top drop down menu, select "Lines."
17. Click on the "Sele All" button, then click on Cancel.
2.3.3.17.Display Boundary Conditions

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols dialog box appears.
2. Click on the "All Applied BCs" radio button for Boundary condition symbol.
3. In the Surface Load Symbols drop down menu, select "Pressures."
4. In the Show pres and convect as drop down menu, select "Arrows."
5. Click on OK.
2.3.3.18.Apply Pressure on Handle

In this step, apply pressure on the handle to represent 100 N finger force.
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog appears.
2. In the top drop down menu, select "Areas."
3. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location."
4. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it.
5. Enter BENDRAD,L_HANDLE for Min, Max, and click on Apply.
6. Click on "X coordinates" to select it.

7. Click on Reselect.
8. Enter W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT for Min, Max, and click on Apply.
11. Click on the "Areas, all" radio button to select it.
12. Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it.
13. Click on Apply.
16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button.
17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max.
18. Click on OK.
19. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data. The Get Scalar Data dialog
box appears.
20. In the scroll box on the left, scroll to "Model Data" and select it.
21. In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "For selected set" and select it.
22. Click on OK. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears.
23. Enter "minyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined.
24. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it.
25. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Min Y coordinate" to select it.
26. Click on Apply.
27. Click on OK again to select the default settings. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box
appears.
28. Enter "maxyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined.
29. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it.
30. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Max Y coordinate" to select it.
31. Click on OK.
dialog box appears.
33. Type the text PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on
Accept.
34. Click on Close.
35. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure>
On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears.
36. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears.
37. Enter PTORQ for Load PRES value and click on OK.
39. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes.
2.3.3.19.Write the First Load Step

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The Write Load
Step File dialog appears.
2. Enter 1 for load step file number n.
3. Click on OK.
2.3.3.20.Define Downward Pressure

In this step, you define the downward pressure on top of the handle, representing 20N (4.5 lb) of force.
dialog box appears.
2. Type the text PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on
Accept.
3. Click on Close.
4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog appears.
5. In the top drop down menu, select "Areas."
7. Click on the "Z coordinates" radio button to select it.
8. Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it.
9. Enter -(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2)) for Min, Max.
10. Click on Apply.
13. Click on the Areas, all radio button to select it, and click on Apply.
16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button.
17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max.
18. Click on OK.

20. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears.
21. Enter PDOWN for Load PRES value and click on OK.
23. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes.
2.3.3.21.Write Second Load Step

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The Write Load
Step File dialog box appears.
2. Enter 2 for Load step file number n, and click on OK.
2.3.3.22.Solve from Load Step Files

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files. The Solve Load Step Files
dialog box appears.
2. Enter 1 for Starting LS file number.
3. Enter 2 for Ending LS file number, and click on OK.
4. Click on the Close button after the Solution is done! window appears.
2.3.3.23.Read First Load Step and Review Results

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List
Reaction Solution dialog box appears.
3. Click on OK to accept the default of All Items.
4. Review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
5. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols dialog box appears.
6. Click on the "None" radio button for Boundary condition symbol, and click on OK.
7. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Edge Options. The Edge Options dialog
box appears.
8. In the Element outlines for non-contour/contour plots drop down menu, select "Edge Only/All."
9. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The
Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears.
11. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog
box appears.
13. Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle
of Rotation dialog box appears.
15. Enter 120 for Angle in degrees.
16. In the Relative/absolute drop down menu, select "Relative angle."
17. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes Y."
18. Click on OK.
19. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal
Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
20. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, click on "Intensity
SINT."
21. Click on OK.
22. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog
box appears.
23. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
2.3.3.24.Read the Next Load Step and Review Results

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Next Set.
2. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List
Reaction Solution dialog box appears.
3. Click on OK to accept the default of All Items.
5. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot Ctrls.
6. Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
8. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button if it is not already selected and click on OK.
9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot Ctrls.
10. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
11. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal
Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
12. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "Intensity
SINT" and select it.
13. Click on OK.
2.3.3.25.Zoom in on Cross-Section
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Offset WP by Increments. The Offset WP
tool box appears.
2. Enter 0,0,-0.067 for X, Y, Z Offsets and click on OK.
3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Hidden Line Options. The Hidden-Line
Options dialog box appears.
4. In the drop down menu for Type of Plot, select "Capped hidden."
5. In the drop down menu for Cutting plane is, select "Working plane."
6. Click on OK.
7. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan-Zoom-Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate tool
box appears.
8. Click on "WP."
9. Drag the Rate slider bar to 10.
10. On the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box, click on the large round dot several times to zoom in on the
cross section.
2.3.3.26.Exit ANSYS
1. Choose QUIT from the Toolbar.
2. Choose Quit - No Save!
3. Click on OK.
2.4.A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example static analysis of an Allen wrench using the ANSYS commands shown
below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/FILNAME,pm02
! Jobname to use for all subsequent files
/TITLE,Static analysis of an Allen wrench
/UNITS,SI
! Reminder that the SI system of units is used
/SHOW
! Specify graphics driver for interactive run; for
! batch
! run plots are written to pm02.grph
! Define parameters for future use
EXX=2.07E11
! Young's modulus (2.07E11 Pa = 30E6 psi)
W_HEX=.01
! Width of hex across flats (.01m=.39in)
*AFUN,DEG
! Units for angular parametric functions
W_FLAT=W_HEX*TAN(30)
! Width of flat
L_SHANK=.075
! Length of shank (short end) (.075m=3.0in)
L_HANDLE=.2
! Length of handle (long end) (.2m=7.9 in)
BENDRAD=.01
! Bend radius of Allen wrench (.01m=.39 in)
L_ELEM=.0075
! Element length (.0075 m = .30 in)
NO_D_HEX=2
! Number of divisions on hex flat
TOL=25E-6
! Tolerance for selecting nodes (25e-6 m = .001 in)
/PREP7
ET,1,SOLID185,,3 ! Eight-node brick element using simplified enhanced
! strain formulation
ET,2,PLANE182,3 ! Four-node quadrilateral (for area mesh)using
! simplified enhanced strain formulation
MP,EX,1,EXX
! Young's modulus for material 1
MP,PRXY,1,0.3
! Poisson's ratio for material 1
RPOLY,6,W_FLAT
! Hexagonal area
K,7
! Keypoint at (0,0,0)
K,8,,,-L_SHANK
! Keypoint at shank-handle intersection
K,9,,L_HANDLE,-L_SHANK
! Keypoint at end of handle
L,4,1
! Line through middle of hex shape
L,7,8
! Line along middle of shank
L,8,9
! Line along handle
LFILLT,8,9,BENDRAD
! Line along bend radius between shank and
! handle
/VIEW,,1,1,1
! Isometric view in window 1
/ANGLE,,90,XM
! Rotates model 90 degrees about X
/PNUM,LINE,1
! Line numbers turned on
LPLOT
/PNUM,LINE,0
! Line numbers off
L,1,4
! Hex section is cut into two quadrilaterals
ASBL,1,7,,,KEEP ! to satisfy mapped meshing requirements for bricks
CM,BOTAREA,AREA ! Component name BOTAREA for the two areas
! Generate area mesh for later drag
LESIZE,1,,,NO_D_HEX
! Number of divisions along line 1
LESIZE,2,,,NO_D_HEX
LESIZE,6,,,NO_D_HEX
TYPE,2
! PLANE182 elements to be meshed first
MSHAPE,0,2D
! Mapped quad mesh
MSHKEY,1
SAVE
! Save database before meshing
AMESH,ALL
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench end to be used in vdrag
EPLOT
! Now drag the 2-D mesh to produce 3-D elements
TYPE,1
!
ESIZE,L_ELEM
!
VDRAG,2,3,,,,,8,10,9
!
/TYPE,,HIDP
!
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench
EPLOT
CMSEL,,BOTAREA
!
ACLEAR,ALL
!
ASEL,ALL
FINISH
Type pointer set to SOLID185

Element size
Drag operation to create 3-D mesh
Precise hidden line display
Select BOTAREA component and
delete the 2-D elements
! Apply loads and obtain the solution

/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
! Static analysis (default)
/TITLE,Allen wrench -- Load step 1
! First fix all nodes around bottom of shank

CMSEL,,BOTAREA
! Bottom areas of shank
LSEL,,EXT
! Exterior lines of those areas
NSLL,,1
! Nodes on those lines
D,ALL,ALL
! Displacement constraints
LSEL,ALL
/PBC,U,,1
! Displacement symbols turned on
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on end of wrench
NPLOT
!Now apply pressure on handle to represent 100-N (22.5-lb) finger
!force
ASEL,,LOC,Y,BENDRAD,L_HANDLE
! Areas on handle
ASEL,R,LOC,X,W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT
! Two areas on one side of handle...
NSLA,,1
! ...and all corresponding nodes
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL
! Reselects
! nodes at back end of handle (3
! element lengths)
*GET,MINYVAL,NODE,,MNLOC,Y
! Get minimum Y value of selected
! nodes
*GET,MAXYVAL,NODE,,MXLOC,Y
! Get maximum Y value of selected
! nodes
PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL))
! Pressure equivalent to 100 N
SF,ALL,PRES,PTORQ
! PTORQ pressure on all selected
! nodes
ALLSEL
! Restores full set of all entities
/PSF,PRES,,2
! Pressure symbols turned on
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 1
NPLOT
LSWRITE
! Writes first load step
/TITLE, Allen wrench -- load step 2
! Downward pressure on top of handle, representing 20-N (4.5 -lb)
! force
PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL))
ASEL,,LOC,Z,-(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2))
! Area on top flat of handle...
NSLA,,1
! ...and all corresponding nodes
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL
! Reselects
! nodes at back end of handle (3
! element lengths)
SF,ALL,PRES,PDOWN
! PDOWN pressure at all selected
! nodes
ALLSEL
/TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 2
NPLOT
LSWRITE
! Writes second load step
SAVE
! Save database before solution
LSSOLVE,1,2
! Initiates solution for load step files 1
! and 2
FINISH
!Review the results
/POST1
SET,1
! Reads load step 1 results
PRRSOL
! Reaction solution listing
/PBC,DEFA
! No BC symbols
/PSF,DEFA
! No surface load symbols
/EDGE,,1
! Edges only, no interior element outlines
/TITLE,Deformed allen wrench caused by torque
PLDISP,2
! Deformed shape overlaid with undeformed
! edge plot
/GSAVE,pldisp,gsav
! Saves graphics specifications on
! pldisp.gsav
/PLOPTS,INFO,ON
! Turns on entire legend column
/PLOPTS,LEG1,OFF
! Turns off legend header
/ANGLE,,120,YM,1
! Additional rotation about model Y (to see
! high stress areas)
/TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque
PLNSOL,S,INT
! Stress intensity contours
/GSAVE,plnsol,gsav
! Saves graphics specifications to
! plnsol.gsav
SET,2
! Reads load step 2 results
PRRSOL
! Reaction solution listing
/GRESUME,pldisp,gsav
! Resumes graphics specifications from
! pldisp.gsav
/TITLE,Deformed allen wrench caused by torque and force
PLDISP,2
/GRESUME,plnsol,gsav
! Resumes graphics specifications from
! plnsol.gsav
/TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque and force
PLNSOL,S,INT
WPOF,,,-0.067
! Offset the working plane for cross-section

! view
/TYPE,1,5
! Capped hidden display
/CPLANE,1
! Cutting plane defined to use the WP
/VIEW, 1 ,WP
! View will be normal to the WP
/DIST,1,.01
! Zoom in on the cross section
/TITLE,Cross section of the allen wrench under torque and force loading
PLNSOL,S,INT
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL
2.5.Where to Find Other Examples

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual and the Mechanical APDL Tutorials,
describe additional structural static analyses.
The Verification Manual consists of test case analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the
ANSYS family of products. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems,
the Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input
instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element
experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model
and input data with accompanying comments.
The Verification Manual includes the following structural static analysis test cases:
VM1 - Statically Indeterminate Reaction Force Analysis
VM2 - Beam Stresses and Deflections
VM4 - Deflection of a Hinged Support
VM11 - Residual Stress Problem
VM12 - Combined Bending and Torsion
VM13 - Cylindrical Shell Under Pressure
VM16 - Bending of a Solid Beam
VM18 - Out-of-plane Bending of a Curved Bar
VM20 - Cylindrical Membrane Under Pressure
VM25 - Stresses in a Long Cylinder
VM29 - Friction on a Support Block
VM31 - Cable Supporting Hanging Loads
VM36 - Limit Moment Analysis
VM39 - Bending of a Circular Plate with a Center Hole
VM41 - Small Deflection of a Rigid Beam
VM44 - Bending of an Axisymmetric Thin Pipe Under Gravity Loading
VM53 - Vibration of a String Under Tension
VM59 - Lateral Vibration of an Axially Loaded Bar
VM63 - Static Hertz Contact Problem
VM78 - Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam
VM82 - Simply Supported Laminated Plate Under Pressure
VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends
VM135 - Bending of a Beam on an Elastic Foundation
VM141 - Diametric Compression of a Disk
VM148 - Bending of a Parabolic Beam
VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System
VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation
VM201 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
VM206 - Stranded Coil with Voltage Excitation
VM211 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
VM216 - Lateral Buckling of a Right-Angle Frame
Mechanical APDL Verification Manual
Table of Contents
I. Verification Test Case Descriptions
1. Introduction
1.1. Program Overview
1.2. Program Verification
1.3. Finding Test Cases of Interest
1.4. Accessing Test Case Inputs
1.5. Verification Manual Versus Other Manuals
1.6. Verification Manual Contents
1.7. Expected Results
1.8. Test Case Selection and Method of Solution
1.9. Numerical Comparisons
1.10. References
1.11. Test Case Format
1.12. Symbols and Nomenclature
1.13. Memory Requirements and Run Times
1.14. Abbreviation and Symbol List
1.15. Units Abbreviation List
1.16. Index by Element Number
VM1 - Statically Indeterminate Reaction Force Analysis
VM2 - Beam Stresses and Deflections
VM3 - Thermally Loaded Support Structure
VM4 - Deflection of a Hinged Support
VM5 - Laterally Loaded Tapered Support Structure
VM6 - Pinched Cylinder
VM7 - Plastic Compression of a Pipe Assembly
VM8 - Parametric Calculation of Point-to-Point Distances
VM9 - Large Lateral Deflection of Unequal Stiffness Springs
VM10 - Bending of a Tee-Shaped Beam
VM12 - Combined Bending and Torsion
VM13 - Cylindrical Shell Under Pressure
VM14 - Large Deflection Eccentric Compression of a Column
VM15 - Bending of a Circular Plate Using Axisymmetric Elements
VM16 - Bending of a Solid Beam (Plane Elements)
VM17 - Snap-Through Buckling of a Hinged Shell
VM18 - Out-of-Plane Bending of a Curved Bar
VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-Supported Beam
VM20 - Cylindrical Membrane Under Pressure
VM21 - Tie Rod with Lateral Loading
VM22 - Small Deflection of a Belleville Spring
VM23 - Thermal-structural Contact of Two Bodies
VM24 - Plastic Hinge in a Rectangular Beam
VM25 - Stresses in a Long Cylinder
VM26 - Large Deflection of a Cantilever
VM27 - Thermal Expansion to Close a Gap
VM28 - Transient Heat Transfer in an Infinite Slab
VM29 - Friction on a Support Block
VM30 - Solid Model of Surface Fillet
VM31 - Cable Supporting Hanging Loads
VM32 - Thermal Stresses in a Long Cylinder
VM33 - Transient Thermal Stress in a Cylinder
VM34 - Bending of a Tapered Plate (Beam)
VM35 - Bimetallic Layered Cantilever Plate with Thermal Loading
VM36 - Limit Moment Analysis
VM37 - Elongation of a Solid Bar
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_VMTOC.html[28/04/2013 07:07:56 p.m.]
VM38
VM39
VM40
VM41
VM42
VM43
VM44
VM45
VM46
VM47
VM48
VM49
VM50
VM51
VM52
VM53
VM54
VM55
VM56
VM57
VM58
VM59
VM60
VM61
VM62
VM63
VM64
VM65
VM66
VM67
VM68
VM69
VM70
VM71
VM72
VM73
VM74
VM75
VM76
VM77
VM78
VM79
VM80
VM81
VM82
VM83
VM84
VM85
VM86
VM87
VM88
VM89
VM90
VM91
VM92
VM93
VM94
VM95
VM96
VM97
VM98
Plastic Loading of a Thick-Walled Cylinder

Bending of a Circular Plate with a Center Hole
Large Deflection and Rotation of a Beam Pinned at One End
Small Deflection of a Rigid Beam
Barrel Vault Roof Under Self Weight
Bending of an Axisymmetric Thick Pipe
Bending of an Axisymmetric Thin Pipe
Natural Frequency of a Spring-Mass System
2-D End Notched Flexure Problem
Torsional Frequency of a Suspended Disk
Natural Frequency of a Motor-Generator
Electrostatic Field Analysis of Quadpole Wires
Fundamental Frequency of a Simply Supported Beam
Electrostatic Forces Between Charged Spheres
Automobile Suspension System Vibration
Vibration of a String Under Tension
Vibration of a Rotating Cantilever Blade
Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane
Hyperelastic Thick Cylinder Under Internal Pressure
Torsional Frequencies of a Drill Pipe
Centerline Temperature of a Heat Generating Wire
Lateral Vibration of an Axially-loaded Bar
Natural Frequency of a Cross-ply Laminated Shell
Longitudinal Vibration of a Free-free Rod
Vibration of a Wedge
Static Hertz Contact Problem
Thermal Expansion to Close a Gap at a Rigid Surface
Transient Response of a Ball Impacting a Flexible Surface
Vibration of a Flat Plate
Radial Vibrations of a Circular Ring
PSD Response of a Two DOF Spring-mass System
Seismic Response
Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
Transient Response of a Spring-Mass-Damper System
Logarithmic Decrement
Free Vibration with Coulomb Damping
Transient Response to an Impulsive Excitation
Transient Response to a Step Excitation
Harmonic Response of a Guitar String
Transient Response to a Constant Force
Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam
Transient Response of a Bilinear Spring Assembly
Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force
Transient Response of a Drop Container
Simply Supported Laminated Plate Under Pressure
Impact of a Block on a Spring Scale
Displacement Propagation Along a Bar with Free Ends
Transient Displacements in a Suddenly Stopped Moving Bar
Harmonic Response of a Dynamic System
Equivalent Structural Damping
Response of an Eccentric Weight Exciter
Natural Frequencies of a Two-mass-spring System
Harmonic Response of a Two-Mass-Spring System
Large Rotation of a Swinging Pendulum
Insulated Wall Temperature
Temperature Dependent Conductivity
Heat-generating Plate
Heat Transfer from a Cooling Spine
Temperature Distribution in a Short, Solid Cylinder
Temperature Distribution Along a Straight Fin
Temperature Distribution Along a Tapered Fin
VM99 - Temperature Distribution in a Trapezoidal Fin

VM100 - Heat Conduction Across a Chimney Section
VM101 - Temperature Distribution in a Short Solid Cylinder
VM102 - Cylinder with Temperature Dependent Conductivity
VM103 - Thin Plate with Central Heat Source
VM104 - Liquid-Solid Phase Change
VM105 - Heat Generating Coil with Temperature Conductivity
VM106 - Radiant Energy Emission
VM107 - Thermocouple Radiation
VM108 - Temperature Gradient Across a Solid Cylinder
VM109 - Temperature Response of a Suddenly Cooled Wire
VM110 - Transient Temperature Distribution in a Slab
VM111 - Cooling of a Spherical Body
VM112 - Cooling of a Spherical Body
VM113 - Transient Temperature Distribution in an Orthotropic Metal Bar
VM114 - Temperature Response to Increasing Temperature
VM115 - Thermal Response of a Heat-generating Slab
VM116 - Heat Conducting Plate with Sudden Cooling
VM117 - Electric Current Flowing in a Network
VM118 - Centerline Temperature of a Heat-generating Wire
VM119 - Centerline Temperature of an Electrical Wire
VM120 - Microstrip Transmission Line Capacitance
VM121 - Voltage Forced Coil
VM122 - Pressure Drop in a Turbulent Flowing Fluid
VM123 - Laminar Flow in a Piping System
VM124 - Discharge of Water from a Reservoir
VM125 - Radiation Heat Transfer Between Concentric Cylinders
VM126 - Heat Transferred to a Flowing Fluid
VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Line Elements)
VM128 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Area Elements)
VM129 - Numerical Differentiation and Integration
VM130 - Fourier Series Generation for a Saw Tooth Wave
VM131 - Acceleration of a Rotating Crane Boom
VM132 - Stress Relaxation of a Tightened Bolt Due to Creep
VM133 - Motion of a Rod Due to Irradiation Induced Creep
VM134 - Plastic Bending of a Clamped I-Beam
VM135 - Bending of a Beam on an Elastic Foundation
VM136 - Large Deflection of a Buckled Bar (the Elastica)
VM137 - Large Deflection of a Circular Membrane
VM138 - Large Deflection Bending of a Circular Plate
VM139 - Bending of a Long Uniformly Loaded Rectangular Plate
VM140 - Stretching, Twisting and Bending of a Long Shaft
VM141 - Diametral Compression of a Disk
VM142 - Stress Concentration At a Hole in a Plate
VM143 - Fracture Mechanics Stress for a Crack in a Plate
VM144 - Bending of a Composite Beam
VM145 - Stretching of an Orthotropic Solid
VM146 - Bending of a Reinforced Concrete Beam
VM147 - Gray-Body Radiation within a Frustum of a Cone
VM148 - Bending of a Parabolic Beam
VM149 - Rotation of a Tank of Fluid
VM150 - Acceleration of a Tank of Fluid
VM151 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Circular Plate
VM152 - 2-D Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Membrane
VM153 - 3-D Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Membrane
VM154 - Vibration of a Fluid Coupling
VM155 - Shape Optimization of a Cantilever Beam
VM156 - Natural Frequency of a Nonlinear Spring-Mass System
VM157 - Optimization of a Frame Structure
VM158 - Motion of a Bobbing Buoy
VM159 - Temperature-controlled Heater
VM160
VM161
VM162
VM163
VM164
VM165
VM166
VM167
VM168
VM169
VM170
VM171
VM172
VM173
VM174
VM175
VM176
VM177
VM178
VM179
VM180
VM181
VM182
VM183
VM184
VM185
VM186
VM187
VM188
VM189
VM190
VM191
VM192
VM193
VM194
VM195
VM196
VM197
VM198
VM199
VM200
VM201
VM202
VM203
VM204
VM205
VM206
VM207
VM208
VM209
VM210
VM211
VM212
VM213
VM214
VM215
VM216
VM217
VM218
VM219
VM220
Solid Cylinder with Harmonic Temperature Load

Heat Flow From an Insulated Pipe
Cooling of a Circular Fin of Rectangular Profile
Groundwater Seepage (Permeability Analogy)
Drying of a Thick Wooden Slab (Diffusion Analogy)
Current-Carrying Ferromagnetic Conductor
Long Cylinder in a Sinusoidal Magnetic Field
Transient Eddy Currents in a Semi-Infinite Solid
Magnetic Field in a Nonferrous Solenoid
Permanent Magnet Circuit With an Air Gap
Magnetic Field From a Square Current Loop
Permanent Magnet Circuit With an Elastic Keeper
Stress Analysis of a Long, Thick, Isotropic Solenoid
Centerline Temperature of an Electrical Wire
Bimetallic Beam Under Thermal Load
Natural Frequency of a Piezoelectric Transducer
Frequency Response of Electrical Input Admittance
Natural Frequency of a Submerged Ring
2-D Double Cantilever Beam Problem
Dynamic Double Rotation of a Jointed Beam
Bending of a Curved Beam
Natural Frequency of a Flat Circular Plate
Transient Response of a Spring-mass System
Harmonic Response of a Spring-mass System
Straight Cantilever Beam
AC Analysis of a Slot Embedded Conductor
Transient Analysis of a Slot Embedded Conductor
Bending of a Curved Beam
Force Calculation on a Current Carrying Conductor
Hollow Sphere in a Uniform Magnetic Field
Ferromagnetic Inductor
Hertz Contact Between Two Cylinders
Cooling of a Billet by Radiation
Adaptive Analysis of 2-D Heat Transfer with Convection
Element Birth/Death in a Fixed Bar
Toggle Mechanism
Counter-Balanced Loads on a Block
IGES Write/Read for Thick-Walled Cylinder
Large Strain In-plane Torsion Test
Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body (Shear Deformation)
Viscoelastic Sandwich Seal Analysis
Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
Transverse Vibrations of a Shear Beam
Dynamic Load Effect on Supported Thick Plate
Solid Model of an Axial Bearing
Adaptive Analysis of an Elliptic Membrane
Stranded Coil with Voltage Excitation
Stranded Coil Excited by External Circuit
RL Circuit with Controlled Source
Static analysis of Double Bellows Air Spring
Pyramid Validation of Tetrahedron to Hexahedron
Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
Modal Analysis of a Rectangular Cavity
Harmonic Response Analysis of a Coaxial Cable
Harmonic Response of a Rectangular Waveguide
Thermal-Electric Hemispherical Shell with Hole
Lateral Buckling of a Right Angle Frame
Portal Frame Under Symmetric Loading
Hyperelastic Circular Plate
Frequency Response of a Prestressed Beam using APDL MATH commands
Eddy Current Loss in Thick Steel Plate
VM221 - Inductance Calculation of a Transformer

VM222 - Warping Torsion Bar
VM223 - Electro-Thermal Microactuator Analysis
VM224 - Implicit Creep under Biaxial Load
VM225 - Rectangular Cross-Section Bar with Preload
VM226 - Fourier Series Analysis of a Diode Rectified Circuit
VM227 - Radiation Between Finite Coaxial Cylinders
VM228 - Radiation Between Infinite Coaxial Cylinders
VM229 - Friction Heating of Sliding Block
VM230 - Analytical Verification of PDS Results
VM231 - Piezoelectric Rectangular Strip Under Pure Bending Load
VM232 - PDS Response Surface Study
VM233 - Static Force Computation of a 3-D Solenoid Actuator
VM234 - Cyclic Loading of a Rubber Block
VM235 - Frequency Response of a Prestressed Beam
VM236 - Hysteresis Calculation of a Beam Under Electrostatic Load
VM237 - RLC Circuit with Piezoelectric Transducer
VM238 - Wheatstone Bridge Connection of Piezoresistors
VM239 - Mechanics of the Revolute and Universal Joints
VM240 - Thermal Expansion of Rigid Beams in a Composite Bar
VM241 - Static Force Computation of a 3-D Solenoid Actuator
VM242 - Series Expansion Study of an Annular Plate
VM243 - Cantilever Beam with Triangular Loading Defined by Function
VM244 - Modal Analysis of a Cyclic Symmetric Annular Plate
VM245 - Squeeze Film Damping: Rectangular Plate
VM246 - Cyclic Analysis of an End-Loaded Hollow Cylindrical Cantilever Beam
VM247 - Campbell Diagrams and Critical Speeds Using Symmetric Bearings
VM248 - Delamination Analysis of Double Cantilever Beam
VM249 - Gasket Material Under Uniaxial Compression Loading - 2-D Analysis
VM250 - Gasket Material Under Uniaxial Compression Loading - 3-D Analysis
VM251 - Shape Memory Alloy Under Uniaxial Tension Load
VM252 - Gurson Bar-Necking Benchmark with Applied Displacement - 2-D Analysis
VM253 - Gurson Hydrostatic Tension Benchmark - 3-D Analysis
VM254 - Campbell Diagrams and Critical Speeds Using Symmetric Orthotropic Bearings
VM255 - Delamination Analysis of Double Cantilever Beam Using Contact Based Debonding
Capability
VM256 - Fracture mechanics stress for a crack in a plate using CINT command
VM257 - Transient dynamic analysis of a swing comprising of two rigid links and a beam with
midspan mass.
VM258 - Spin-up maneuver of a flexible beam.
VM259 - Missing mass with rigid responses effects in spectrum analysis for BM3 piping model.
VM260 - Two-Dimensional Consolidation Settlement Problem
VM261 - Rotating beam with internal viscous damping.
VM262 - Two-Dimensional Fractural Problem under Thermal Loading.
VM263 - Critical speeds for a rotor bearing system with axisymmetric elements.
VM264 - Terzaghi's one-dimensional consolidation settlement problem.
VM265 - Elastic Rod Impacting a Rigid Wall.
VM266 - 3D Crossing Beams in Contact with Friction.
VM267 - Inclined Crack in 2D Plate under uniform tension loading.
VM268 - Mullins effect on a rubber tube model subjected to tension loading.
VM269 - Deformation of tube and sphere composed of neo-hookean material under axisymmetric
conditions.
VM270 - Forces in permanent magnets
VM271 - Convection treatment problem for a hollow cylinder with fluid flow
II. Benchmark Study Descriptions
1. Overview
1.1. Description of the Benchmark Studies
1.2. Benchmark Test Case Content and Nomenclature
1.3. Running the Benchmark Test Cases

1.4. Energy Norm
1.5. Benchmark Test Case Coverage Index
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
Benchmark
C1 - Built-In Plate Under Uniformly Distributed Load

C2 - Elliptic Membrane Under a Uniformly Load
C3 - Barrel Vault Roof Under Self Weight
C4 - Simply-Supported Thin Annular Plate
C5 - Simply-Supported Solid Square Plate
C6 - 2-D Heat Transfer With Convection
C7 - One-Dimensional Transient Heat Transfer
C8 - Aluminum Bar Impacting a Rigid Boundary
D1 - Straight Cantilever Beam Under Unit Load
D2 - Barrel Vault Roof Under Self Weight
D3 - Free-Free Vibration of a Solid Beam
III. ANSYS LS-DYNA Study Descriptions

1. ANSYS LS-DYNA Study Overview
VME1 - Response of Spring-Mass System to Step Input
VME2 - Drop Analysis of a Block Onto a Spring Scale
VME3 - Response of Spring-Mass-Damper System
VME4 - Undamped Vibration Absorber
VME5 - Pinned Bar Under Gravity Loading
VME6 - Projectile with Air Resistance
IV. NAFEMS Benchmarks
1. NAFEMS Benchmarks Overview
VMFEBSTA-LE1 - Linear elastic analysis on an elliptical membrane
VMFEBSTA-LE5 - Linear elastic analysis on a Z-section cantilevered plate
VMLSB2-LE8 - Linear elastic axisymmetric shell with pressure loading
VMLSB2-LE9 - Linear elastic axisymmetric branched shell with pressure loading
VMLSB2-LE11 - Linear elastic axisymmetric shell with pressure loading
VMP09-T2 - Pin-ended double cross: In-plane vibration
VMP09-T4 - Cantilever with off-centre point masses
VMP09-T5 - Deep simply-supported beam
VMP09-T12 - Free thin square plate
VMP09-T15 - Clamped thin rhombic plate
VMP09-T33 - Free annular membrane
VMP09-T52 - Simply-supported 'solid' square plate
VMR027-3A - 2-D Plane Stress - Biaxial (negative) Load Secondary Creep
VMR027-3B - 2-D Plane Stress - Biaxial (negative) Displacement Secondary Creep
VMR027-4C - 2-D Plane Stress - Shear Loading Secondary Creep
VMR027-5B - 2-D Plane Strain - Biaxial Displacement Secondary Creep
VMR027-6B - 3-D - Triaxial Displacement Secondary Creep
VMR027-10A - 2-D Plane Stress - Biaxial (negative) Load Primary Creep
VMR027-10B - 2-D Plane Stress - Biaxial (negative) Displacement Primary Creep
VMR027-10C - 2-D Plane Stress - Biaxial (negative) Stepped Load - Primary Creep
VMR027-12B - 2-D Plane Stress - Uniaxial Displacement Primary-Secondary Creep
VMR027-12C - 2-D Plane Stress - Stepped Load Primary - Secondary Creep
VMR029-T1 - Elastic large deflection response of a z-shaped cantilever upper end load
VMR029-T4 - Lateral torsional buckling of an elastic cantilever subjected to transverse end load
VMR029-T5 - Large deflection of a curved elastic cantilever under transverse end load
VMR029-T7 - Large displacement elastic response of a hinged spherical shell under uniform
pressure loading
VMR029-T9 - Large elastic deflection of a pinched hemispherical shell
VMR038-2A - J integral value for centered crack plate with BISO material model
VMR038-2B - J integral value for centered crack plate with elastic perfectly plactic material
VMR038-2E - J integral value for centered crack plate with elastic perfectly plastic material
VMR038-2g - Centered crack plate under thermal loading with elastic perfectly plastic material
VMR038-3A - J integral value for compact tension specimen with BISO material model
VMR038-4A - J integral value for three point bend specimen with power law hardening
VMR049-CR1 - Constant-Load Creep Benchmark
VMR049-CR2 - Constant-Displacement Creep Benchmark
VMR049-CR3 - Variable-Load Uniaxial Creep Benchmark
VMR049-CR4 - Pressurised Cylinder Creep Benchmark
VMR049-CR5 - Torsional Creep of Square Shaft
VMR049-CR6 - Thermally Induced Creep Benchmark
VMR049-PL1 - 2D Plane Strain Plasticity Benchmark
VMR049-PL2 - 2D Plane Stress Plasticity Benchmark
VMR049-PL3 - 3D Plasticity Benchmark
VMR049-PL5 - Pressurised Cylinder Plasticity Benchmark
V. NRC Piping Benchmarks
1. NRC Piping Benchmarks Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
Piping Benchmarks using Archived Elements

Piping Benchmarks using Current Technology Elements
Demonstration Problem 1
VM-NR1677-01-1-a - NUREG/CR-1677: Volume 1, Benchmark Problem No.

VM-NR6645-01-1-a - VM-NR6645-01-1-a
VM-NR1677-01-1 - NUREG/CR-1677: Volume 1, Benchmark Problem No. 1
VM-NR6645-01-1 - NUREG/CR-6645-01-1
A. Verification Test Case Input Listings
A.1. VM1 Input Listing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
A.12.
A.13.
A.14.
A.15.
A.16.
A.17.
A.18.
A.19.
A.20.
A.21.
A.22.
A.23.
A.24.
A.25.
A.26.
A.27.
A.28.
A.29.
A.30.
A.31.
A.32.
A.33.
A.34.
A.35.
A.36.
A.37.
A.38.
A.39.
A.40.
A.41.
A.42.
A.43.
A.44.
A.45.
A.46.
A.47.
A.48.
A.49.
A.50.
A.51.
A.52.
A.53.
A.54.
A.55.
A.56.
A.57.
A.58.
A.59.
A.60.
A.61.
A.62.
A.63.
A.64.
A.65.
A.66.
A.67.
A.68.
A.69.
A.70.
A.71.
A.72.
VM12
VM13
VM14
VM15
VM16
VM17
VM18
VM19
VM20
VM21
VM22
VM23
VM24
VM25
VM26
VM27
VM28
VM29
VM30
VM31
VM32
VM33
VM34
VM35
VM36
VM37
VM38
VM39
VM40
VM41
VM42
VM43
VM44
VM45
VM46
VM47
VM48
VM49
VM50
VM51
VM52
VM53
VM54
VM55
VM56
VM57
VM58
VM59
VM60
VM61
VM62
VM63
VM64
VM65
VM66
VM67
VM68
VM69
VM70
VM71
VM72
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing

A.134.
A.135.
A.136.
A.137.
A.138.
A.139.
A.140.
A.141.
A.142.
A.143.
A.144.
A.145.
A.146.
A.147.
A.148.
A.149.
A.150.
A.151.
A.152.
A.153.
A.154.
A.155.
A.156.
A.157.
A.158.
A.159.
A.160.
A.161.
A.162.
A.163.
A.164.
A.165.
A.166.
A.167.
A.168.
A.169.
A.170.
A.171.
A.172.
A.173.
A.174.
A.175.
A.176.
A.177.
A.178.
A.179.
A.180.
A.181.
A.182.
A.183.
A.184.
A.185.
A.186.
A.187.
A.188.
A.189.
A.190.
A.191.
A.192.
A.193.
A.194.
VM134
VM135
VM136
VM137
VM138
VM139
VM140
VM141
VM142
VM143
VM144
VM145
VM146
VM147
VM148
VM149
VM150
VM151
VM152
VM153
VM154
VM155
VM156
VM157
VM158
VM159
VM160
VM161
VM162
VM163
VM164
VM165
VM166
VM167
VM168
VM169
VM170
VM171
VM172
VM173
VM174
VM175
VM176
VM177
VM178
VM179
VM180
VM181
VM182
VM183
VM184
VM185
VM186
VM187
VM188
VM189
VM190
VM191
VM192
VM193
VM194
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
A.195.
A.196.
A.197.
A.198.
A.199.
A.200.
A.201.
A.202.
A.203.
A.204.
A.205.
A.206.
A.207.
A.208.
A.209.
A.210.
A.211.
A.212.
A.213.
A.214.
A.215.
A.216.
A.217.
A.218.
A.219.
A.220.
A.221.
A.222.
A.223.
A.224.
A.225.
A.226.
A.227.
A.228.
A.229.
A.230.
A.231.
A.232.
A.233.
A.234.
A.235.
A.236.
A.237.
A.238.
A.239.
A.240.
A.241.
A.242.
A.243.
A.244.
A.245.
A.246.
A.247.
A.248.
A.249.
A.250.
A.251.
A.252.
A.253.
A.254.
A.255.
VM195
VM196
VM197
VM198
VM199
VM200
VM201
VM202
VM203
VM204
VM205
VM206
VM207
VM208
VM209
VM210
VM211
VM212
VM213
VM214
VM215
VM216
VM217
VM218
VM219
VM220
VM221
VM222
VM223
VM224
VM225
VM226
VM227
VM228
VM229
VM230
VM231
VM232
VM233
VM234
VM235
VM236
VM237
VM238
VM239
VM240
VM241
VM242
VM243
VM244
VM245
VM246
VM247
VM248
VM249
VM250
VM251
VM252
VM253
VM254
VM255
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
A.256.
A.257.
A.258.
A.259.
A.260.
A.261.
A.262.
A.263.
A.264.
A.265.
A.266.
A.267.
A.268.
A.269.
A.270.
A.271.
VM256
VM257
VM258
VM259
VM260
VM261
VM262
VM263
VM264
VM265
VM266
VM267
VM268
VM269
VM270
VM271
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
B. Benchmark Input Listings

B.1. Benchmark C1 Input Listing
B.9. Benchmark D1 Input Listing
C. ANSYS LS-DYNA Input Listings
C.1.
C.2.
C.3.
C.4.
C.5.
C.6.
VME1
VME2
VME3
VME4
VME5
VME6
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
D. NAFEMS Input Listings

D.1. VM-P09-t2 188 Input Listing
D.18. VM-R027-3A 181 Input Listing
D.20.
D.21.
D.22.
D.23.
D.24.
D.25.
D.26.
D.27.
D.28.
D.29.
D.30.
D.31.
D.32.
D.33.
D.34.
D.35.
D.36.
D.37.
D.38.
D.39.
D.40.
D.41.
D.42.
D.43.
D.44.
D.45.
D.46.
D.47.
D.48.
D.49.
D.50.
D.51.
D.52.
D.53.
D.54.
D.55.
D.56.
D.57.
D.58.
D.59.
D.60.
D.61.
D.62.
D.63.
D.64.
D.65.
D.66.
D.67.
D.68.
D.69.
D.70.
D.71.
D.72.
D.73.
D.74.
D.75.
D.76.
D.77.
D.78.
D.79.
D.80.
VM-R027-3A 183 Input Listing

VM-R027-3B 181 Input Listing
VM-R027-4C 181 Input Listing
VM-R029-T1 181 Input Listing
VMR038-2A 182 Input Listing
VMR038-2A 183 Input Listing
D.81. VMR038-2B 182 Input Listing

D.82. VMR038-2B 183 Input Listing
D.83. VMR038-2E 182 Input Listing
D.84. VMR038-2g 182 Input Listing
D.85. VMR038-3A 182 Input Listing
D.89. VMLSB2-LE8 208 Input Listing
D.99. VM-R049-1B 181 Input Listing
D.103. VM-R049-1C 181 Input Listing
D.107. VM-R049-2 181 Input Listing
D.124. VM-R049-PL1A 182 Input Listing
D.126. VM-R049-PL1B 182 Input Listing
D.142.
D.143.
D.144.
D.145.
D.146.
D.147.
D.148.
VM-R049-PL5A 182 Input Listing

VM-R049-PL5A 183 Input Listing
VM-R049-PL5B 182 Input Listing
VM-R049-PL5B 183 Input Listing
VMFEBSTA-LE1 181 Input Listing
E. NRC Piping Benchmarks Input Listings

E.1. vm-nr1677-1-1a-a Input Listing
E.9. vm-nr1677-2-1b-a Input Listing
E.10. vm-nr1677-2-1c-a Input Listing
E.21. vm-nr1677-1-1a Input Listing
E.29. vm-nr1677-2-1b Input Listing
E.30. vm-nr1677-2-1c Input Listing
E.41. demonstration-problem1-290 Input Listing
E.46. demonstration-problem2-16-18 Input Listing
E.47. demonstration_problem3-289-290 Input Listing
E.49. demonstration-problem3-16-18 Input Listing
Part I, Verification Test Case Descriptions
PartI, Verification Test Case Descriptions

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/vm.testcases.html[28/04/2013 07:08:03 p.m.]
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter1:Introduction
The ANSYS computer program is a large-scale multipurpose finite element program which may be used
for solving several classes of engineering analyses. The analysis capabilities of ANSYS include the ability
to solve static and dynamic structural analyses, steady-state and transient heat transfer problems,
mode-frequency and buckling eigenvalue problems, static or time-varying magnetic analyses, and
various types of field and coupled-field applications. The program contains many special features which
allow nonlinearities or secondary effects to be included in the solution, such as plasticity, large strain,
hyperelasticity, creep, swelling, large deflections, contact, stress stiffening, temperature dependency,
material anisotropy, and radiation. As ANSYS has been developed, other special capabilities, such as
substructuring, submodeling, random vibration, kinetostatics, kinetodynamics, free convection fluid
analysis, acoustics, magnetics, piezoelectrics, coupled-field analysis and design optimization have been
added to the program. These capabilities contribute further to making ANSYS a multipurpose analysis
tool for varied engineering disciplines.
The ANSYS program has been in commercial use since 1970, and has been used extensively in the
aerospace, automotive, construction, electronic, energy services, manufacturing, nuclear, plastics, oil,
and steel industries. In addition, many consulting firms and hundreds of universities use ANSYS for
analysis, research, and educational use. ANSYS is recognized worldwide as one of the most widely used
and capable programs of its type.
The primary purpose of this manual is to demonstrate a wide range of ANSYS elements and capabilities
in straightforward problems which have "classical" or readily-obtainable theoretical solutions.
Furthermore, the close agreement of the ANSYS solutions to the theoretical results in this manual is
intended to provide user confidence in the ANSYS solutions. An attempt has been made to include most
element types and major solution capabilities of ANSYS in this set of test cases. These problems may
then serve as the basis for additional validation and qualification of ANSYS capabilities by the user for
specific applications that may be of interest.
The following Verification Manual topics are available:
Program Overview
Program Verification
Finding Test Cases of Interest
Accessing Test Case Inputs
Verification Manual Versus Other Manuals
Verification Manual Contents
Expected Results
Test Case Selection and Method of Solution
Numerical Comparisons
References
Test Case Format
Symbols and Nomenclature
Memory Requirements and Run Times
Abbreviation and Symbol List
Units Abbreviation List
Index by Element Number
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_CH1.html[28/04/2013 07:08:17 p.m.]
1.1. Program Overview
1.1.Program Overview
The ANSYS element library contains more than sixty elements for static and dynamic analyses, over
twenty for heat transfer analyses, and includes numerous magnetic, field, and special purpose elements.
This variety of elements allows the ANSYS program to analyze 2-D and 3-D frame structures, piping
systems, 2-D plane and axisymmetric solids, 3-D solids, flat plates, axisymmetric and 3-D shells and
nonlinear problems including contact (interfaces) and cables.
The input data for an ANSYS analysis are prepared using a preprocessor. The general preprocessor
(PREP7) contains powerful solid modeling and mesh generation capabilities, and is also used to define all
other analysis data (geometric properties (real constants), material properties, constraints, loads, etc.),
with the benefit of database definition and manipulation of analysis data. Parametric input, user files,
macros and extensive online documentation are also available, providing more tools and flexibility for the
analyst to define the problem. Extensive graphics capability is available throughout the ANSYS program,
including isometric, perspective, section, edge, and hidden-line displays of 3-D structures, x-y graphs of
input quantities and results, and contour displays of solution results.
A graphical user interface is available throughout the program, to guide new users through the learning
process and provide more experienced users with multiple windows, pull-down menus, dialog boxes,
tool bar, and online documentation.
The analysis results are reviewed using postprocessors, which have the ability to display distorted
geometries, stress and strain contours, flow fields, safety factor contours, contours of potential field
results (thermal, electric, magnetic), vector field displays mode shapes and time history graphs. The
postprocessors can also be used for algebraic operations, database manipulations, differentiation, and
integration of calculated results. Root-sum-square operations may be performed on seismic modal
results. Response spectra may be generated from dynamic analysis results. Results from various loading
modes may be combined for harmonically loaded axisymmetric structures.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_CH1_2.html[28/04/2013 07:08:32 p.m.]
1.2. Program Verification
1.2.Program Verification
The ANSYS program is continuously being verified by the developers (ANSYS, Inc.) as new capabilities
are added.The verification of the ANSYS program is conducted in accordance with written procedures
that form a part of an overall Quality Assurance program at ANSYS, Inc. This manual represents a small
subset of the Quality Assurance test case library which is used in full when testing new versions of
ANSYS. This test library and the test cases in this manual represent comparisons of ANSYS solutions
with known theoretical solutions, experimental results, or other independently calculated solutions.
The test cases explore the functionality of ANSYS in validated results. The test cases are based on
published works in the disciplines of structures, dynamics, heat transfer, electromagnetics, and fluid
flow. While the ANSYS solution to these test cases has been verified, some differences have been
examined and are considered acceptable.
In order to solve some test cases, specific ANSYS products may be required. The test cases appropriate
to each product can be determined from the following table. Most test cases can be solved within the
limitations of the educational ANSYS product. The test case input listings are available through a
hyperlink in the test description.
For ANSYS users who may have further need for formal verification of the program, ANSYS, Inc. has
testing services available that allow automated testing of ANSYS on a customer's computer. The user is
provided with input data, output data, comparator software, and procedures for automating the testing
and reporting process. Readers interested in contracting for such services may contact the ANSYS, Inc.
Quality Assurance Group.
1.3. Finding Test Cases of Interest
1.3.Finding Test Cases of Interest

There are several possible methods of locating a test which contains topics of interest to the user. The
Index topics display the related verification problem number. If you are using the online documentation,
the verification problem numbers in Index by Element Number are hyperlinks to each verification test
case description. You can always do a text search while using the online documentation to find specific
information. Finally, the code for each VM problem is contained in an appendix at the end of this
manual.
1.4. Accessing Test Case Inputs
1.4.Accessing Test Case Inputs

In the online help, the input file for each test case is linked to its description in each Overview section
labeled "Input Listing." If you select the link, the test case input file appears in the browser window. The
input listing may be printed.
To read an input listing into ANSYS, copy the input listing into a text editor, save it as a text file, then
select File>Read Input from... on the ANSYS main menu to send the input to ANSYS. Nested macros
may not function properly unless they are read from a file. Formatting commands will not function
interactively if not read from a file.
Additionally, each test case input listing appears in AppendixA.
1.5. Verification Manual Versus Other Manuals
1.5.Verification Manual Versus Other Manuals

The test cases in this manual are primarily intended for verification of the ANSYS program. An attempt
has been made to include most significant analysis capabilities of the ANSYS program in this manual.
Although they are valuable as demonstration problems, the test cases are not presented as step-by-step
examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts. Most users with limited finite element
experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing the finite element model and the
input data listing with its accompanying comments. Problem sketches and modeling notes are included.
The reader should refer to the online help and to this manual for complete input data instructions.
Users desiring more detailed instructions for solving problems or in-depth treatment of specific topics
should refer to other ANSYS documentation as described in Guide to the ANSYS Documentation in the
Command Reference. Introductory documentation such as the Mechanical APDL Tutorials should be the
first stop for new and existing users needing basic information on using the ANSYS program. Seminar
notes on several broad topics are also available. These notes are written in a form designed for
classroom instruction, and include theory, ANSYS implementation, exercises, and examples. Broad
subjects such as dynamics, heat transfer, nonlinearities, magnetics, and optimization are covered in
these notes. Mechanical APDL Tutorials are also available for various specific topics. These publications
focus on particular features or program areas, supplementing other ANSYS reference documents with
theory, procedures, guidelines, examples, and references.
1.6. Verification Manual Contents
1.6.Verification Manual Contents

The intent of this manual is to demonstrate the full scope of the analysis capability available in the
ANSYS program. This manual will also assist new users of the ANSYS program in running compact test
cases and for understanding basic capability. All report results and input listings correspond to ANSYS
13.0.
Verification Manual test cases are available on the ANSYS 13.0 installation media provided to the
customer in the verif subdirectory under the data directory. All test cases also appear in three
appendixes at the end of this manual.
1.7. Expected Results
1.7.Expected Results
ANSYS is a program intended for solving practical engineering problems. Many theoretical problems are
not realistic in that the assumptions necessary to obtain a closed-form analytical solution make the
mathematical model depart from a practical application problem. Examples of these assumptions are:
step force changes, step temperature changes, perfectly plastic impacts, infinitely rigid supports, etc.
Imposing these conditions in a finite element analysis often requires more effort to duplicate the
theoretical result than would be required to solve the "real world" problem.
Theoretical solutions are generally based on a continuous or differential approach. In some cases, an
exact comparison with a finite-element solution would require an infinite number of elements and/or an
infinite number of iterations separated by an infinitely small step size. Such a comparison is neither
practical nor desirable.
Some of the ANSYS solutions in this manual are also compared against experimental data obtained from
textbooks or technical publications. The experimental measurements are often presented in the form of
graphs of relevant parameters. Hence the simulation results are also presented as graphs so that the
corresponding values can be compared on the same graph. Experimental data represent the real-world
physics reproduced in a controlled manner, and provides more complex details than theoretical
solutions.
The examples in this manual have been modeled to give reasonably accurate comparisons ("engineering
accuracy") with a low number of elements and iterations. In some cases, even fewer elements and/or
iterations will still yield an acceptable engineering accuracy. There are also cases where larger
differences may exist with regard to references, for example when comparing against experimental
solutions. These differences have been examined and are considered acceptable. A survey of the results
comparisons in this manual shows an average accuracy within 1-2% of the target solution.
1.8. Test Case Selection and Method of Solution
1.8.Test Case Selection and Method of Solution

The problems solved in this manual and the method of solution were selected with verification as the
primary objective. Some problems could have been solved more directly or in a manner other than the
way presented. In some cases the same problem is solved in several different ways to demonstrate and
verify other elements or capabilities of the program.
Since ANSYS is a program capable of solving very complicated practical engineering problems having no
closed-form theoretical solutions, the relatively simple problems solved in this manual do not illustrate
the full capability of the ANSYS program.
1.9. Numerical Comparisons
1.9.Numerical Comparisons
The ANSYS solutions in this manual are compared with solutions from textbooks or technical
publications. In some cases noted below, the target (theoretical) answers reported in this manual may
differ from those shown in the reference. Any problems having significantly different recalculated values
are noted as such. Differences between ANSYS results and target values are reported as ratios
(ANSYS:Target) except in cases where the target solution is zero or non-numerical in nature.
Some textbook solutions are based on slide rule accuracy. For example, the reference for problem
number 3 reports the stress to be 10,200 psi. Using a hand calculator to recalculate the results shows
the result to be 10,152.258 psi. The ANSYS calculation yields 10,152 psi. In problems like this, an
appropriate number of significant digits are used in comparing solutions.
Some references have incorrect answers printed and some have incorrect equations. Reference's
answers presented without regard to sign are reported with the appropriate sign. Theoretical derivations
not having a specific numerical example in the text are solved for a representative numerical example
and both the theoretical and ANSYS results are given. In cases where only the results but not the input
data are given in the theoretical reference (for example, where only tabular or graphical results are
presented), the input data are back-calculated from a convenient solution point. Graphical solution
results are reported to an appropriate accuracy.
Different computers and different operating systems may yield slightly different results for some of the
test cases in this manual, since numerical precision varies from machine to machine. Solutions which are
nonlinear, iterative, have equally-valid alternatives for master degree of freedom selection (TOTAL
command), or have convergence options activated, are among the most likely to exhibit machinedependent numerical differences. Because of this, an effort has been made to report an appropriate and
consistent number of significant digits in both the target and the ANSYS solution. If you run these test
cases on your own computer hardware, be advised that an ANSYS result reported in this manual as
0.01234 may very well show up in your printout as 0.012335271.
It should be noted that only those items corresponding to the given theoretical solution values are
reported for each problem. In most cases the same finite element solution also contains a considerable
amount of other useful numerical solution data.
1.10. References
1.10.References
The textbooks and references used for the verification tests were chosen for several reasons. Well
known and recognized textbooks were used whenever possible; other texts were used if they were
readily available to the author. Periodical or technical journal references were used in instances where
no textbook solutions could be found for an application of interest. The books should be available for
purchase or through most engineering libraries. Periodicals are of the type normally available in
university libraries. In most cases the reference listed is not the only source of the theory or of a similar
sample problem.
1.11. Test Case Format
1.11.Test Case Format

Test cases use the following format:
A description of the test case, including the dimensions, loading, material properties, and other
relevant data.
Theoretical reference(s).
Figures describing the problem, including either the ANSYS finite element model showing node and
element locations, or the ANSYS "solid model," showing keypoints, line segments, areas and/or
volumes (as applicable).
Analysis assumptions, modeling notes, and comments.
Target results, ANSYS results, and normalized ratio.
ANSYS input data listing, including comments.
Graphics displays of the results (optional).
Additional information containing references to analysis guides with similar problems and other test
cases using similar features (optional).
1.12. Symbols and Nomenclature
1.12.Symbols and Nomenclature

The majority of the nomenclature used in this manual follows what is considered commonly-used form.
Exceptions and special circumstances are described when used. A few specific cases deserve definition,
where many authors vary in their usage of nomenclature/symbols and there is no clear "standard."
In the text, vectors are shown by {A} or , the former being used primarily when symbolizing vector
unknowns. Matrices are shown as [K], and |a| is used to denote absolute value. Natural logarithms use
"ln" and base 10 logarithms are shown as "log".
In the figures, node and keypoint locations are denoted by in the figures. Node numbers are
unitalicized (1), keypoint numbers are shown italicized ( 1) and line numbers are shown italicized with
prefix "L" ( L2). Element numbers are enclosed with a circle
, and volume numbers are enclosed with a hexagon
, area numbers are enclosed with a box

.
1.13. Memory Requirements and Run Times
1.13.Memory Requirements and Run Times

The ANSYS program is supported on many different computers. Memory size, run time, and cost will
vary from computer to computer. The test cases in this manual are small enough to require only a
minimum memory size.
The test cases generally require a very short run time each, although some are somewhat larger and
longer running to allow the inclusion of meaningful tests for some of the more advanced capabilities
included in ANSYS.
The benchmark test cases in Description of the Benchmark Studies are small to moderately-sized tests
as well, but the run time for these is very dependent on the parameters chosen for the specific test.
1.14.Abbreviation and Symbol List

Abbreviation
Explanation
a
A
B
Br
Acceleration
Area, Vector magnetic potential, Amplitude
Magnetic flux density
Residual induction
c
C
d
MDOF
Viscous damping constant, Specific heat

Thermal capacitance, Fluid conductance
Diameter
Master Degrees of freedom (See Define Master Degrees of Freedom (for Modal
Analysis) and Define Master Degrees of Freedom (for Transient Analysis) in
Structural Analysis Guide
Young's modulus of elasticity
Frequency of vibration, Friction factor
Force
Gravitational acceleration
Shear modulus
Average convection coefficient, Height
Magnetic field intensity
Coercive force
E
f
F
g
G
h
H
Hc
I
ITS
J
k
KI
L
m
M
Nu
P, p
Pr
q
r
R
Re
t
T
u
V, v
w
W
Moment of inertia, Electrical current

Integration time step
Torsional moment of inertia, Electrical current density
Spring constant, Thermal conductivity
Stress intensity factor
Length
Inductance, Length
Mass
Moment
Nusselt number
Pressure
Prandtl number
Heat flow rate
Heat generation rate
Radius
Electrical resistance, Reaction
Reynolds number
Thickness, Time
Temperature
Displacement
Velocity, Voltage
Flow rate, Width
Weight
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_CH1_15_1.html[28/04/2013 07:10:15 p.m.]
Centroid location
yp
Coefficient of thermal expansion, Thermal diffusivity

Weight density
Deflection
Strain, Emissivity, Permittivity
Poisson's ratio
Angle
Damping ratio
Magnetic permeability, Viscosity, Coefficient of friction
Mass density, Electrical resistivity
Yield stress
Period of vibration, Shear stress

Circular frequency of vibration, Fluid flow rate, Angular velocity
Electrical conductivity, direct stress
Other symbols and abbreviations are defined where used.

3.4. Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution
3.4.Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution

In this step, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options, and begin
the finite element solution for the natural frequencies, as follows:
Enter the Solution Processor
Define Analysis Type and Options
Define Master Degrees of Freedom
Apply Loads
Specify Load Step Options
Solve
Participation Factor Table Output
3.4.1.Enter the Solution Processor

1. Enter the ANSYS solution processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
3.4.2.Define Analysis Type and Options

After you have entered the solution processor, you define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS
offers the options listed in Table3.1:Analysis Types and Options for a modal analysis. Each of the
options is explained in detail below.
Table3.1Analysis Types and Options
Option
Command
New Analysis
ANTYPE
Analysis Type: Modal (see Note

below)
Mode-extraction Method
ANTYPE
Number of Modes to Extract
MODOPT
No. of Modes to Expand (see

Note below)
Mass Matrix Formulation
MXPAND
Prestress Effects Calculation
PSTRES
MODOPT
LUMPM
Control Output to the Results File OUTRES
GUI Path
MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type>
New Analysis
New Analysis> Modal
Analysis Options
Analysis Options
Analysis Options
Analysis Options
Analysis Options
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts >
Output Ctrls > DB/Results Files
When you specify a modal analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for modal analyses appears.
The Solution menu is either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions you took prior to this
step in the current session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options that are valid and/or
recommended for modal analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access
other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be
encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option. For details, see Using
Abridged Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide .
3.4.2.1.Option: New Analysis (ANTYPE)

Select New Analysis.
Restarts are not valid in a modal analysis. If you need to apply different sets of boundary conditions,
perform a new analysis each time (or use the partial-solution procedure described in "Solution" in the
Basic Analysis Guide ).
3.4.2.2.Option: Analysis Type: Modal (ANTYPE)

Use this option to specify a modal analysis.
3.4.2.3.Option: Mode-Extraction Method (MODOPT)

Select one of the following mode-extraction methods:
Mode-Extraction
Method
Block Lanczos
PCG Lanczos
Comments
Used for large symmetric eigenvalue problems. This method uses the
sparse matrix solver, overriding any solver specified via the EQSLV
command.
Used for very large symmetric eigenvalue problems (500,000+ degrees
of freedom), and is especially useful to obtain a solution for the lowest
modes to learn how the model will behave. This method uses the PCG
iterative solver and therefore has the same limitations (that is, it does
not support superelements, Lagrange multiplier option on contact
elements, mixed u-P formulation elements, etc.).
This method works with the various Lev_Diff values on the PCGOPT
command. It also works with MSAVE to reduce memory usage.
By default, this method does not perform a Sturm sequence check;
however, internal heuristics have been developed to guard against
missing modes. If a Sturm sequence check is absolutely necessary, it
can be activated via the PCGOPT command.
Supernode
This method is the only eigenvalue solver optimized to run in a

distributed manner in Distributed ANSYS.
Used to solve for many modes (up to 10,000) in one solution. Typically,
the reason for seeking many modes is to perform a subsequent modesuperposition or PSD analysis to solve for the response in a higher
frequency range.
This method typically offers faster solution times than Block Lanczos if
the number of modes requested is more than 200. The accuracy of the
solution can be controlled via the SNOPTION command.
Reduced (Householder) Faster than the Block Lanczos method because it uses reduced
(condensed) system matrices to calculate the solution; however, it is less
accurate because the reduced mass matrix is approximate. (See
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods.)
Unsymmetric
Used for problems with unsymmetric matrices, such as fluid-structure
interaction problems.
Damped
QR damped
Used for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such as bearing

problems.
Faster and achieves better calculation efficiency than the damped
method. It uses the reduced modal damped matrix to calculate complex
damped frequencies in modal coordinates.
For more detailed information, see Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods.

For most applications, you will use the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, or reduced method. The
unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped methods are applicable in special applications. (The damped,
unsymmetric, and QR damped methods may not available, depending upon the ANSYS, Inc. license in
use at your site.)
When you specify a mode-extraction method, the program automatically chooses the appropriate
equation solver.
3.4.2.4.Option: Number of Modes to Extract (MODOPT)

This option is required for all mode-extraction methods except the reduced method.
For the unsymmetric and damped methods, requesting a larger number of modes than necessary
reduces the possibility of missed modes, but results in more solution time.
3.4.2.5.Option: Number of Modes to Expand (MXPAND)

This option allows you to specify the number of extracted modes to expand (i.e., write to the results
file), and whether to compute element quantities (e.g., stress, strains, forces, energies, etc.) for
subsequent postprocessing or for downstream spectrum or mode-superposition analyses. If you intend
to perform a subsequent mode-superposition analysis (e.g., spectrum, PSD, transient, or harmonic),
expand all extracted modes and calculate the element results during the modal analysis
(MXPAND,ALL,,,YES). These element results are used in the combination or expansion pass in order to
reduce computation time.
Note: In the single-point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and dynamic design analysis
method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the
spectrum analysis based on the significance factor ( SIGNIF) on the MXPAND
command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis,
use MXPAND,-1. If you only want frequencies, or intend to expand only certain
modes in a frequency range, use MXPAND,-1, and expand in a subsequent step.
See Step 4: Expand the Modes for more information.
3.4.2.6.Option: Results File Output (OUTRES)

Use OUTRES to expand only items of interest and in the areas of interest to limit the size of the results
file Jobname.RST. Note that for subsequent mode-superposition analyses (e.g., spectrum, PSD, transient,
or harmonic), you should use OUTRES during the modal analysis to control their output as well.
Note: The FREQ field on OUTRES (and OUTPR) can only be ALL or NONE, meaning the
data can be requested for all modes or no modes. For instance, you cannot write
information for every other mode.
3.4.2.7.Option: Mass Matrix Formulation (LUMPM)
Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element-dependent) or lumped mass
approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some
problems involving "skinny" structures such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass
approximation often yields better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter
run time and lower memory requirements.
3.4.2.8.Option: Prestress Effects Calculation (PSTRES)

Use this option to calculate the modes of a prestressed structure. By default, no prestress effects are
included; that is, the structure is assumed to be stress-free. To include prestress effects, element files
from a previous static (or transient) analysis must be available; see Performing a Prestressed Modal
Analysis. If prestress effects are turned on, the lumped mass setting (LUMPM) in this and subsequent
solutions must be the same as it was in the prestress static analysis.
You can use only axisymmetric loads for prestressing harmonic elements such as PLANE25 and
SHELL61.
3.4.2.9.Additional Modal Analysis Options

After you complete the fields on the Modal Analysis Options dialog box, click OK. A dialog box specific to
the selected extraction method appears. You see some combination of the following fields: FREQB , FREQE ,
PRMODE, Nrmkey. Refer to the MODOPT command description for the meaning of these fields.
3.4.3.Define Master Degrees of Freedom

If you intend to use the reduced mode-extraction method in your modal analysis, you must define
master degrees of freedom (MDOFs).
MDOFs are significant degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure.
Generally, you should select at least twice as many MDOFs as the number of modes of interest. ANSYS,
Inc. recommends that you define as many MDOFs as you can, based on your knowledge of the dynamic
characteristics of the structure (M,MGEN), and also let the program select a few additional MDOFs
based on stiffness-to-mass ratios (TOTAL). You can list the defined MDOFs (MLIST), and delete
extraneous MDOFs (MDELE).
Command(s):
GUI:
M
MainMenu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define
For more information about master degrees of freedom, see Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient
Modal Analysis.
3.4.4.Apply Loads
After defining master degrees of freedom, apply loads on the model. For a modal analysis, the only
"loads" valid in a typical modal analysis are zero-value displacement constraints. (If you input a nonzero
displacement constraint, the program assigns a zero-value constraint to that degree of freedom instead.)
For directions in which no constraints are specified, the program calculates rigid-body (zero-frequency)
as well as higher (nonzero frequency) free body modes. Table3.2:Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis
shows the commands to apply displacement constraints. Notice that you can apply them either on the
solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a
general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite-element loads, see "Loading" in the Basic Analysis
Guide.
If you are going to perform a downstream harmonic or transient mode-superposition analysis, you can
apply other load types as well (see Applying Multiple Loads for use in Mode-Superposition Harmonic and
Transient Analysis).
Note: Loads specified using tabular boundary conditions with TIME as the primary
variable (see the *DIM command) will have the table value at TIME equal to zero.
Table3.2Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis
Load Type
Displacement (UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)
Category
Cmd
Family
Constraints D
GUI Path
MainMenu> Solution> Define
Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
3.4.4.1.Applying Loads Using Commands

Table3.3:Load Commands for a Modal Analysis lists all the commands you can use to apply loads in a
modal analysis.
Table3.3Load Commands for a Modal Analysis
Load Type
Solid
Model or
FE
Entity
Displacement
Solid Model
Solid Model
Solid Model
Finite Elem
Keypoints
Lines
Areas
Nodes
Apply
DK
DL
DA
D
Delete
DKDELE
DLDELE
DADELE
DDELE
List
DKLIST
DLLIST
DALIST
DLIST
Operate
Apply
Settings
DTRAN
DTRAN
DTRAN
DSCALE DSYM,
DCUM
3.4.4.2.Applying Loads Using the GUI

All loading operations (except List; see Listing Loads) are accessed through a series of cascading menus.
From the Solution menu, you select the operation (apply, delete, and so on), then the load type
(displacement, force, and so on), and then the object to which you are applying the load (keypoint, line,
node, and so on).
For example, to apply a displacement load to a line, follow this GUI path:
GUI:
MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On lines
3.4.4.3.Listing Loads
To list existing loads, follow this GUI path:
GUI:
UtilityMenu> List>Loads> load type
3.4.5.Specify Load Step Options

The only load step options available for a modal analysis are damping options.
Table3.4Load Step Options
Option
Damping (Dynamics) Options
Alpha (mass) Damping
Beta (stiffness) Damping
Material-Dependent Damping Ratio
Element Damping (applied via element real constant or material
tables)
Command
ALPHAD
BETAD
MP,DAMP
R, TB
Damping is valid only for the damped and QR damped mode-extraction methods. Damping is ignored for
the other mode-extraction methods.
If you include damping and specify the damped mode-extraction method, the calculated eigenvalues and
eigenvectors are complex. If you include damping and specify the QR damped mode-extraction method,
the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode-superposition
analysis. See Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods for details. For more information about different
forms of damping, see Damping.
Damping specified in a non-damped modal analysis.Damping can be specified in a non-damped
modal analysis if a spectrum or mode-superposition analysis is to follow the modal analysis. Although
the damping does not affect the eigenvalue solution, it is used to calculate an effective damping ratio for
each mode, which is then used in the subsequent analysis; see the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications .
3.4.6.Solve
Before you solve, save (SAVE) a backup copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve
your model by reentering the program and issuing RESUME.
Now start the solution calculations.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3.4.6.1.Output
The output from the solution consists mainly of the natural frequencies, which are printed as part of the
printed output ( Jobname.OUT) and also written to the mode shape file ( Jobname.MODE). The printed output
may include reduced mode shapes and the participation factor table, depending on your analysis options
and output controls. No mode shapes are written to the database or to the results file, so you cannot
postprocess the results yet. To do so, you need to expand the modes (explained next).
3.4.7.Participation Factor Table Output

The participation factor table lists participation factors, mode coefficients, and mass distribution
percentages for each mode extracted. The participation factors and mode coefficients are calculated
based on an assumed unit displacement spectrum in each of the global Cartesian directions and rotation
about each of these axes. The reduced mass distribution is also listed. Rotational participation factors
will be calculated when a real eigensolver mode-extraction method (such as Block Lanczos, PCG
Lanczos, or Supernode) is used.
Retrieving a participation factor or mode coefficient.You can retrieve a participation factor or
mode coefficient by issuing a *GET command.
Note: The calculation of the ratio of the effective mass to the total mass is based on the
total mass printed out in the MASS SUMMARY. Since it is independent of the
direction, the ratio may be greater than 1.0 for elements where the masses along
X, Y and Z are averaged (for example MASS21) or for superelements.
3.4.8.Exit the Solution Processor

You must now exit the solution processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
MainMenu> Finish
3.8.Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods

The basic equation solved in a typical undamped modal analysis is the classical eigenvalue problem:
where:
[K] = stiffness matrix
{i} = mode shape vector (eigenvector) of mode i
i = natural circular frequency of mode i (
is the eigenvalue)
[M] = mass matrix

Many numerical methods are available to solve the equation. ANSYS offers these methods:
Block Lanczos Method
PCG Lanczos Method
Supernode (SNODE) Method
Reduced (Householder) Method
Unsymmetric Method
Damped Method
QR Damped Method
The damped and QR damped methods solve different equations. For more information, see Damped
Method and QR Damped Method in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications .
The Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, and reduced mode-extraction methods are the most
commonly used:
Table3.5Symmetric System Eigensolver Options
Eigensolver
Application
Block Lanczos To find many modes (about 40+) of large models.

Recommended when the model consists of poorly shaped
solid and shell elements. This solver performs well when
the model consists of shells or a combination of shells and
solids.
PCG Lanczos To find few modes (up to about 100) of very large models
(500,000+ degrees of freedom). This solver performs well
when the lowest modes are sought for models that are
dominated by well-shaped 3-D solid elements (that is,
models that would typically be good candidates for the
PCG iterative solver for a similar static or full transient
analysis).
Supernode
To find many modes (up to 10,000) efficiently. Use this
method for 2-D plane or shell/beam structures (100
modes or more) and for 3-D solid structures (250 modes
or more).
Reduced
To find all modes of small to medium models (less than
10,000 degrees of freedom). Can be used to find few
modes (up to about 40) of large models with proper
Memory
Disk
Required Required
Medium
High
Medium
Low
Medium
Low
Low
Low
selection of master degrees of freedom (MDOFs), but

accuracy of frequencies depends on the MDOFs selected.
The PCG Lanczos, unsymmetric, and damped methods are the only eigenvalue solvers that will run a
fully distributed solution in Distributed ANSYS.
3.8.1.Block Lanczos Method

The Block Lanczos eigenvalue solver uses the Lanczos algorithm where the Lanczos recursion is
performed with a block of vectors. The Block Lanczos method uses the sparse matrix solver, overriding
any solver specified via the EQSLV command.
The Block Lanczos method is especially powerful when searching for eigenfrequencies in a given part of
the eigenvalue spectrum of a given system. The convergence rate of the eigenfrequencies will be about
the same when extracting modes in the midrange and higher end of the spectrum as when extracting
the lowest modes. Therefore, when you use a shift frequency ( FREQB ) to extract n modes beyond the
starting value of FREQB , the algorithm extracts the n modes beyond FREQB at about the same speed as it
extracts the lowest n modes.
3.8.2.PCG Lanczos Method

The PCG Lanczos method internally uses the Lanczos algorithm, combined with the PCG iterative solver.
This method will be significantly faster than the Block Lanczos method for the following cases:
Large models that are dominated by 3-D solid elements and do not have ill-conditioned matrices
due, for example, to poorly shaped elements
Only a few of the lowest modes are requested
Having ill-conditioned matrices or asking for many modes (e.g., more than 100 modes) can lead to an
inefficient solution time with this method.
The PCG Lanczos method finds only the lowest eigenvalues. If a range of eigenfrequencies is requested
on the MODOPT command, the PCG Lanczos method will find all of the eigenfrequencies below the
lower value of the eigenfrequency range as well as the number of requested eigenfrequencies in the
given eigenfrequency range. Thus the PCG Lanczos method is not recommended for problems when the
lower value of the input eigenfrequency range is far from zero.
3.8.3.Supernode (SNODE) Method

The Supernode (SNODE) solver is used to solve large, symmetric eigenvalue problems for many modes
(up to 10,000 and beyond) in one solution. Typically, the reason for seeking many modes is to perform
a subsequent mode-superposition or PSD analysis to solve for the response in a higher frequency range.
A supernode is a group of nodes from a group of elements. The supernodes for the model are
generated automatically by the ANSYS program. This method first calculates eigenmodes for each
supernode in the range of 0.0 to FREQE* RangeFact (where RangeFact is specified by the SNOPTION
command and defaults to 2.0), and then uses the supernode eigenmodes to calculate the global
eigenmodes of the model in the range of FREQB to FREQE (where FREQB and FREQE are specified by the
MODOPT command).
Typically, this method offers faster solution times than Block Lanczos or PCG Lanczos if the number of
modes requested is more than 200. The accuracy of the Supernode solution can be controlled by the
SNOPTION command. For more information, see Supernode Method in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
The lumped mass matrix option (LUMPM,ON) is not allowed when using the Supernode modehttps://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR3_15.html[28/04/2013 07:10:28 p.m.]
extraction method. The consistent mass matrix option will be used regardless of the LUMPM setting.
3.8.4.Reduced (Householder) Method

The reduced method uses the HBI algorithm (Householder-Bisection-Inverse iteration) to calculate the
eigenvalues and eigenvectors. It is relatively fast because it works with a small subset of degrees of
freedom called master degrees of freedom (MDOFs). Using MDOFs leads to an exact [K] matrix but an
approximate [M] matrix (usually with some loss in mass). The accuracy of the results, therefore,
depends on how well [M] is approximated, which in turn depends on the number and location of
masters. Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis presents guidelines to select master
degrees of freedom.
3.8.5.Unsymmetric Method
The unsymmetric method, which also uses the full [K] and [M] matrices, is meant for problems where
the stiffness and mass matrices are unsymmetric (for example, acoustic fluid-structure interaction
problems). The real part of the eigenvalue represents the natural frequency and the imaginary part is a
measure of the stability of the system - a negative value means the system is stable, whereas a positive
value means the system is unstable. Sturm sequence checking is not available for this method.
Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the higher end of the frequencies extracted.
3.8.6.Damped Method
The damped method (MODOPT,DAMP) is meant for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such
as rotor dynamics applications. It uses full matrices ([K], [M], and the damping matrix [C]). Sturm
sequence checking is not available for this method. Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the
higher end of the frequencies extracted.
3.8.6.1.Damped Method--Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvalue

The imaginary part of the eigenvalue, , represents the steady-state circular frequency of the system.
The real part of the eigenvalue, , represents the stability of the system. If is less than zero, then the
displacement amplitude will decay exponentially, in accordance with EXP(). If is greater than zero,
then the amplitude will increase exponentially. (Or, in other words, negative gives an exponentially
decreasing, or stable, response; and positive gives an exponentially increasing, or unstable, response.)
If there is no damping, the real component of the eigenvalue will be zero.
The eigenvalue results reported are actually divided by (2*), giving the frequency in Hz
(cycles/second). In other words:
Imaginary part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2*)
Real part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2*)
3.8.6.2.Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector

In a damped system, the response at different nodes can be out of phase. At any given node, the
amplitude will be the vector sum of the real and imaginary components of the eigenvector.
3.8.7.QR Damped Method

The QR damped method (MODOPT,QRDAMP) combines the advantages of the Block Lanczos method
with the complex Hessenberg method. The key concept is to approximately represent the first few
complex damped eigenvalues by modal transformation using a small number of eigenvectors of the
undamped system. After the undamped mode shapes are evaluated by using the real eigensolution
(Block Lanczos method), the equations of motion are transformed to these modal coordinates.
Using the QR algorithm, a smaller eigenvalue problem is then solved in the modal subspace. This
approach gives good results for lightly damped systems and can also apply to any arbitrary damping
type (proportional or non-proportional symmetric damping or nonsymmetrical gyroscopic damping
matrix). This approach also supports nonsymmetrical stiffness if present in the model.
The QR Damp eigensolver applies to models having an unsymmetrical global stiffness matrix where only
a few elements contribute nonsymmetrical element stiffness matrices. For example, in a brake-friction
problem, the local part of a model with friction contacts generates a nonsymmetrical stiffness matrix in
contact elements. When a non-symmetric stiffness matrix is encountered the eigenfrequencies and mode
shapes obtained by the QR Damp eigensolver must be verified by rerunning the analysis with the nonsymmetric eigensolver. If a non-symmetric stiffness matrix is encountered a warning message cautioning
the user is output by the QR Damp eigensolver right after the completion of the Block Lanczos
eigensolution.
The QR Damp eigensolver works best when there is a larger modal subspace to converge and is
therefore the best option for larger models. Because the accuracy of this method is dependent on the
number of modes used in the calculations, a sufficient number of fundamental modes should be present
(especially for highly damped systems) to provide good results. The QR damped method is not
recommended for critically damped or overdamped systems. This method outputs both the real and
imaginary eigenvalues (frequencies), but outputs only the real eigenvectors (mode shapes). When
requested however, complex mode shapes of damped systems are computed.
In general, ANSYS recommends using the Damp eigensolver for small models. It produces more
accurate eigensolutions than the QR Damp eigensolver for damped systems.
EQSLV
EQSLV
EQSLV, Lab , TOLER , MULT , --, KeepFile

Specifies the type of equation solver.
Lab
SOLUTION : Analysis Options

MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Equation solver type:

SPARSE Sparse direct equation solver. Applicable to real-value or complex-value symmetric
and unsymmetric matrices. Available only for STATIC, HARMIC (full method only),
TRANS (full method only), SUBSTR, and PSD spectrum analysis types [ANTYPE].
Can be used for nonlinear and linear analyses, especially nonlinear analysis where
indefinite matrices are frequently encountered. Well suited for contact analysis
where contact status alters the mesh topology. Other typical well-suited applications
are: (a) models consisting of shell/beam or shell/beam and solid elements (b)
models with a multi-branch structure, such as an automobile exhaust or a turbine
fan. This is an alternative to iterative solvers since it combines both speed and
robustness. Generally, it requires considerably more memory (~10x) than the PCG
solver to obtain optimal performance (running totally in-core). When memory is
limited, the solver works partly in-core and out-of-core, which can noticeably slow
down the performance of the solver. See the BCSOPTION command for more
details on the various modes of operation for this solver.
This solver can be run in shared memory parallel or distributed memory parallel
(Distributed ANSYS) mode. When used in Distributed ANSYS, this solver preserves all
of the merits of the classic or shared memory sparse solver. The total sum of
memory (summed for all processes) is usually higher than the shared memory
sparse solver. System configuration also affects the performance of the distributed
memory parallel solver. If enough physical memory is available, running this solver
in the in-core memory mode achieves optimal performance. The ideal configuration
when using the out-of-core memory mode is to use one processor per machine on
multiple machines (a cluster), spreading the I/O across the hard drives of each
machine, assuming that you are using a high-speed network such as Infiniband to
efficiently support all communication across the multiple machines.
This solver supports use of the GPU accelerator capability.
JCG Jacobi Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver, in-memory option. Available only
for STATIC, HARMIC (full method only), and TRANS (full method only) analysis
types [ANTYPE]. Can be used for structural and multiphysics applications.
Applicable for symmetric, unsymmetric, complex, definite, and indefinite matrices.
Recommended for 3-D harmonic analyses in structural and multiphysics applications.
Efficient for heat transfer, electromagnetics, piezoelectrics, and acoustic field
problems.
(Distributed ANSYS) mode. When used in Distributed ANSYS, in addition to the
limitations listed above, this solver is available only for STATIC and TRANS (full
method) analyses where the stiffness is symmetric, and does not support the fast
thermal option (THOPT).
This solver supports use of the GPU accelerator capability. When using the GPU
accelerator capability, in addition to the limitations listed above, this solver is
available only for STATIC and TRANS (full method) analyses where the stiffness is
symmetric, and does not support the fast thermal option (THOPT).
ICCG Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver. Available for
STATIC, HARMIC (full method only), and TRANS (full method only) analysis types
[ANTYPE]. Can be used for structural and multiphysics applications, and for
symmetric, unsymmetric, complex, definite, and indefinite matrices. The ICCG solver
requires more memory than the JCG solver, but is more robust than the JCG solver
for ill-conditioned matrices.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_EQSLV.html[28/04/2013 07:10:42 p.m.]
EQSLV
QMR Quasi-Minimal Residual iterative equation solver. Available for the HARMIC (full
method only) analysis type [ANTYPE]. Can be used for high-frequency
electromagnetic applications, and for symmetric, complex, definite, and indefinite
matrices. The QMR solver is more stable than the ICCG solver.
PCG Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient iterative equation solver (licensed from
Computational Applications and Systems Integration, Inc.). Requires less disk file
space than SPARSE and is faster for large models. Useful for plates, shells, 3-D
models, large 2-D models, p-method analyses, and other problems having
symmetric, sparse, definite or indefinite matrices for nonlinear analysis. Requires
twice as much memory as JCG. Available only for analysis types [ANTYPE] STATIC,
TRANS (full method only), or MODAL (with PCG Lanczos option only). Also available
for the use pass of substructure analyses (MATRIX50). The PCG solver can robustly
solve equations with constraint equations (CE, CEINTF, CPINTF, and CERIG).
With this solver, you can use the MSAVE command to obtain a considerable
memory savings.
The PCG solver can handle ill-conditioned problems by using a higher level of
difficulty (see PCGOPT). Ill-conditioning arises from elements with high aspect
ratios, contact, and plasticity.
(Distributed ANSYS) mode. When used in Distributed ANSYS, this solver preserves all
of the merits of the classic or shared memory PCG solver. The total sum of memory
(summed for all processes) is about 30% more than the shared memory PCG solver.
This solver supports use of the GPU accelerator capability.
AMG Algebraic Multigrid iterative equation solver. Available for STATIC analyses and
TRANS (full method only) analyses. The AMG solver is applicable to symmetric
matrices. This solver is not available for substructure analyses, either generation or
use pass. It is very efficient for single-field structural analyses (where the solution
DOFs are combinations of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ). For applications
such as single-field thermal analyses (where the solution DOF is TEMP), the AMG
solver is less efficient. Recommended for ill-conditioned problems in which the ICCG
solver would have difficulty converging; applicable in both single- and multiprocessor
environments. In terms of CPU time when used in a single-processor environment,
the AMG solver performs better than the ICCG solver for ill-conditioned problems,
and it delivers about the same level of performance for ordinary problems. In a
multiprocessor environment, the AMG solver scales better than the ICCG solver on
shared memory parallel machines. Also handles indefinite matrix problems for
nonlinear analyses. The AMG solver is part of ANSYS' High Performance Computing,
which is a separately-licensed product. For detailed information on multiprocessor
solvers, see Improving ANSYS Performance and High Performance Computing in the
ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide . See Starting an ANSYS Session from
Command Level in the Operations Guide for information on how to specify the
HPCHPC add-on at ANSYS start-up.
TOLER
Iterative solver tolerance value. Used only with the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient, Incomplete
Cholesky Conjugate Gradient, Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient, Quasi-Minimal Residual, and
Algebraic Multigrid equation solvers. For the PCG solver, the default is 1.0E-8. The value 1.0E-5
may be acceptable in many situations. When using the PCG Lanczos mode extraction method, the
default solver tolerance value is 1.0E-4. For the JCG and ICCG solvers with symmetric matrices,
and for the AMG solver, the default is 1.0E-8. For the JCG and ICCG solvers with unsymmetric
matrices, and for the QMR solver, the default is 1.0E-6. Iterations continue until the SRSS norm of
the residual is less than TOLER times the norm of the applied load vector. For the PCG solver in the
linear static analysis case, 3 error norms are used. If one of the error norms is smaller than TOLER ,
and the SRSS norm of the residual is smaller than 1.0E-2, convergence is assumed to have been
reached. See Iterative Solver in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for details.
Note: When used with the Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient equation solver,
EQSLV
can be modified between load steps (this is typically useful for

nonlinear analysis).
TOLER
If a Lev_Diff value of 5 is specified on the PCGOPT command (either program- or user-specified),

TOLER has no effect on the accuracy of the obtained solution from the PCG solver; a direct solver is
used when Lev_Diff = 5.
MULT
--
Multiplier (defaults to 2.5 for nonlinear analyses; 1.0 for linear analyses) used to control the
maximum number of iterations performed during convergence calculations. Used only with the Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient equation solver (PCG). The maximum number of iterations is equal
to the multiplier ( MULT ) times the number of degrees of freedom (DOF). If MULT is input as a
negative value, then the maximum number of iterations is equal to abs( MULT ). Iterations continue
until either the maximum number of iterations or solution convergence has been reached. In
general, the default value for MULT is adequate for reaching convergence. However, for illconditioned matrices (that is, models containing elements with high aspect ratios or material type
discontinuities) the multiplier may be used to increase the maximum number of iterations used to
achieve convergence. The recommended range for the multiplier is 1.0 MULT 3.0. Normally, a
value greater than 3.0 adds no further benefit toward convergence, and merely increases time
requirements. If the solution does not converge with 1.0 MULT 3.0, or in less than 10,000
iterations, then convergence is highly unlikely and further examination of the model is
recommended. Rather than increasing the default value of MULT , consider increasing the level of
difficulty ( Lev_Diff ) on the PCGOPT command.
Unused field.
KeepFile
Determines whether files from a SPARSE solver run should be deleted or retained. Applies only to
Lab = SPARSE for static and full transient analyses.
DELE Deletes all files from the SPARSE solver run, including the factorized file, .LN22 , upon
FINISH or /EXIT (default).
KEEP Retains all necessary files from the SPARSE solver run, including the .LN22 file, in the
working directory.
Command Default
The sparse direct solver is the default solver for all analyses, with the exception of modal/buckling
analyses.
For modal/buckling analyses, there is no default solver. You must specify a solver with the MODOPT or
BUCOPT command.
Notes
The selection of a solver can affect the speed and accuracy of a solution. For a more detailed discussion
of the merits of each solver, see Solution in the Basic Analysis Guide .
If you use MODOPT,LANB or BUCOPT,LANB, the internal solver used is EQSLV,SPARSE. If you use
MODOPT,LANPCG, the internal solver used is EQSLV, PCG.
You may only specify the solver type in the first load step. You may, however, modify the solver
tolerance in subsequent load steps for the iterative solvers.
Some solvers are not supported in Distributed ANSYS. For details, see the description of each solver
given above and the Distributed ANSYS restrictions listed below. Distributed ANSYS requires HPC
licenses. The GPU accelerator capability also requires HPC licenses. For more information, see the
Distributed ANSYS Guide .
This command is also valid in PREP7.
EQSLV
Distributed ANSYS Restriction.The SPARSE and PCG solvers are fully supported in Distributed
ANSYS and run a fully distributed solution. The JCG and AMG solvers are partially supported in
Distributed ANSYS. The ICCG and QMR solvers are not supported.
Product Restrictions
Command
Option Lab
SPARSE
JCG
ICCG
QMR
PCG
AMG
Available Products
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
PR
PR
PR
PR
PR
PR
PRN
PRN
PRN
PRN
PRN
PRN
DS DSS <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS [1]

<> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
<> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
<> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
DS DSS <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS [1]
<> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
1. The ANSYS DesignSpace (DS) and ANSYS DesignSpace - Structural (DSS) products do not support
distributed solutions (Distributed ANSYS).
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options

Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Sol'n Options
2.6. SOLUTION Commands
2.6.SOLUTION Commands
These commands are used to load and solve the model. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table2.60Analysis Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to set general analysis options.
ABEXTRACT
Extracts the alpha-beta damping multipliers for Rayleigh damping.
ACCOPTION
Specifies GPU accelerator capability options.
ADAMS
Performs solutions and writes flexible body information to a modal
neutral file.
ADAPT
Adaptively meshes and solves a model.
ANTYPE
Specifies the analysis type and restart status.
BCSOPTION
Sets memory option for the sparse solver.
CECHECK
Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
CHECK
Checks current database items for completeness.
CINT
Defines parameters associated with contour integral calculations.
CMATRIX
Performs electrostatic field solutions and calculates the self and
mutual capacitances between multiple conductors.
CMSOPT
Specifies component mode synthesis (CMS) analysis options.
CNCHECK
Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
CNKMOD
Modifies contact element key options.
CUTCONTROL
Controls time-step cutback during a nonlinear solution.
CYCOPT
Specifies the harmonic index solution for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
DDOPTION
Sets domain decomposer option for Distributed ANSYS.
DMPEXT
Extracts modal damping coefficients in a specified frequency range.
DSPOPTION
Sets the memory option for the distributed sparse solver.
EMATWRITE
Forces the writing of all the element matrices to File.EMAT.
EQSLV
Specifies the type of equation solver.
ERESX
Specifies extrapolation of integration point results.
ESCHECK
Perform element shape checking for a selected element set.
ESSOLV
Performs a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis.
EXPASS
Specifies an expansion pass of an analysis.
GAUGE
Gauges the problem domain for an edge-element formulation.
GMATRIX
Performs electric field solutions and calculates the self and mutual
conductances between multiple conductors.
HFADP
Turns a high-frequency adaptive error calculation on or off.
HFEIGOPT
Specifies high frequency electromagnetic modal analysis options.
HFMODPRT
Calculates electromagnetic field distribution for a modal port.
HFPA
Specifies a radiation scan angle for a phased array antenna analysis.
HFPCSWP
Calculates the propagating constants of a transmission line or
waveguide over a frequency range.
HFSCAT
Specifies a high-frequency scattering analysis.
LMATRIX
Calculates the differential inductance matrix and the total flux linkage
in each coil for an N-winding system.
LPRT
Defines impedance and calibration lines for excitation eigenfield.
LUMPM
Specifies a lumped mass matrix formulation.
MADAPT
Adaptively meshes and solves an edge-based model.
MONITOR
Controls contents of three variable fields in nonlinear solution monitor
file.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CH2_6.html[28/04/2013 07:10:48 p.m.]
MSAVE
OPNCONTROL
PCGOPT
PERTURB
PSCONTROL
PSOLVE
RATE
RESVEC
RSTOFF
SEEXP
SEGEN
SEOPT
SNOPTION
SOLCONTROL
/SOLU
SOLVE
SPADP
SPFSS
SPSCAN
SPSWP
STABILIZE
STAOPT
TOFFST
Sets the memory saving feature for the PCG and DPCG solvers.
Sets decision parameter for automatically increasing the time step
interval.
Controls PCG solver options.
Sets linear perturbation analysis options.
Turns off shared-memory parallel operations during solution.
Directs the program to perform a partial solution.
Specifies whether the effect of creep strain rate will be used in the
solution of a load step.
Calculates residual vectors in a modal analysis, or includes residual
vectors in a modal superposition transient/harmonic analysis.
Offsets node or element IDs in the FE geometry record.
Specifies options for the substructure expansion pass.
Automatically generate superelements.
Specifies substructure analysis options.
Specifies Supernode (SNODE) eigensolver options.
Specifies whether to use optimized nonlinear solution defaults and
some enhanced internal solution algorithms.
Enters the solution processor.
Starts a solution.
Automatically refines a HF119 tetrahedral element mesh based on Sparameter convergence.
Performs frequency sweep or angle sweep calculations to determine
reflection and transmission parameters of a frequency selective
surface.
Performs a harmonic analysis of a unit cell over a range of angles and
extracts the S-parameter.
Computes S-parameters over a frequency range and writes them to a
file.
Activates stabilization for all elements that support nonlinear
stabilization.
Specifies static analysis options.
Specifies the temperature offset from absolute zero to zero.
Table2.61Nonlinear Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for nonlinear analyses.
ARCLEN
Activates the arc-length method.
ARCTRM
Controls termination of the solution when the arc-length method
(ARCLEN,ON) is used.
Specifies buckling analysis options.
BUCOPT
CNVTOL
Sets convergence values for nonlinear analyses.
CRPLIM
Specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.
/GST
Turns Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) on or off.
LNSRCH
Activates a line search to be used with Newton-Raphson.
MXPAND
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or
buckling analysis.
NCNV
Sets the key to terminate an analysis.
NEQIT
Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations for nonlinear
analyses.
NLDIAG
Sets nonlinear diagnostics functionality.
NLGEOM
Includes large deformation effects in a static or full transient analysis.
NLHIST
NROPT
PRED
PSTRES
SSTIF
Specify result items to track during solution.

Specifies the Newton-Raphson options in a static or full transient
analysis.
Activates a predictor in a nonlinear analysis.
Specifies whether prestress effects are calculated or included.
Activates stress stiffness effects in a nonlinear analysis.
Table2.62Dynamic Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for dynamic analyses.
ALPHAD
Defines the mass matrix multiplier for damping.
BETAD
Defines the stiffness matrix multiplier for damping.
DMPRAT
Sets a constant damping ratio.
FRQSCL
Turns on automatic scaling of the entire mass matrix and frequency
range for modal analyses using the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or
Supernode mode extraction method.
HARFRQ
Defines the frequency range in the harmonic response analysis.
HREXP
Specifies the phase angle for the harmonic analysis expansion pass.
HROPT
Specifies harmonic analysis options.
HROUT
Specifies the harmonic analysis output options.
LVSCALE
Scales the load vector for mode superposition analyses.
MDAMP
Defines the damping ratios as a function of mode.
MDPLOT
Plots frequency-dependent modal damping coefficients.
MIDTOL
Sets middle step residual criterion values for structural transient
analysis.
MODCONT
Creates multiple load vectors in a modal analysis.
MODOPT
Specifies modal analysis options.
MXPAND
Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or
buckling analysis.
QRDOPT
Specifies additional QRDAMP modal analysis option.
RIGID
Specifies known rigid body modes (if any) of the model.
TIMINT
Turns on transient effects.
TINTP
Defines transient integration parameters.
TRNOPT
Specifies transient analysis options.
Table2.63Spectrum Options
These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for spectrum analyses.
ADDAM
Specifies the acceleration spectrum computation constants for the
analysis of shock resistance of shipboard structures.

COVAL
Defines PSD cospectral values.
CQC
Specifies the complete quadratic mode combination method.
DSUM
Specifies the double sum mode combination method.
FREQ
Defines the frequency points for the SV vs. FREQ tables.
GRP
Specifies the grouping mode combination method.
MMASS
Specifies the missing mass response calculation.
NRLSUM
Specifies the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) sum mode combination
method.
PFACT
Calculates participation factors for the PSD or multi-point response
spectrum table.
PSDCOM
Specifies the power spectral density mode combination method.
PSDFRQ
Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum vs. FREQ tables of
PSDGRAPH
PSDRES
PSDSPL
PSDUNIT
PSDVAL
PSDWAV
QDVAL
ROCK
ROSE
RIGRESP
SED
SPDAMP
SPFREQ
SPGRAPH
SPOPT
SPUNIT
SPVAL
SRSS
SV
SVPLOT
SVTYP
VDDAM
PSD and multi-point spectrum analyses.

Displays input PSD curves
Controls solution output written to the results file from a PSD analysis.
Defines a partially correlated excitation in a PSD analysis.
Defines the type of PSD or multi-point response spectrum.
Defines PSD or multi-point response spectrum values.
Defines a wave propagation excitation in a PSD analysis.
Defines PSD quadspectral values.
Specifies a rocking response spectrum.
Specifies the Rosenblueth mode combination method.
Selects the spectrum type and other spectrum options.
Defines the excitation direction for a single-point response spectrum.
Defines input spectrum damping in a multi-point response spectrum
analysis.
Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum tables SPVAL vs.
SPFREQ for multi-point spectrum analyses.
Displays input spectrum curves for MPRS analysis.
Defines the type of multi-point response spectrum.
Defines multi-point response spectrum values.
Specifies the square root of sum of squares mode combination
method.
Defines spectrum values to be associated with frequency points.
Displays input spectrum curves.
Defines the type of single-point response spectrum.
Specifies the velocity spectrum computation constants for the analysis
of shock resistance of shipboard structures.

These SOLUTION commands are used to define options for individual load steps.
AUTOTS
Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
CAMPBELL
Campbell diagramPrepares the result file for a subsequent analysis.
CECMOD
Modifies the constant term of a constraint equation during solution.
DELTIM
Specifies the time step sizes to be used for this load step.
EXPSOL
Specifies the solution to be expanded for reduced analyses.
HMAGSOLV
Specifies 2-D or axisymmetric harmonic magnetic solution options and
initiates the solution.
KBC
Specifies stepped or ramped loading within a load step.
KUSE
Specifies whether or not to reuse the factorized matrix.
MAGOPT
Specifies options for a 3-D magnetostatic field analysis.
MAGSOLV
Specifies magnetic solution options and initiates the solution.
MODE
Specifies the harmonic loading term for this load step.
NSUBST
Specifies the number of substeps to be taken this load step.
NUMEXP
Specifies solutions to be expanded from reduced analyses.
TIME
Sets the time for a load step.
TREF
Defines the reference temperature for the thermal strain calculations.
TSRES
Defines an array of key times at which the time-stepping strategy
changes.
UPCOORD
Modifies the coordinates of the active set of nodes, based on the
current displacements.
USRCAL
WRFULL
Allows user-solution subroutines to be activated or deactivated.

Stops solution after assembling global matrices.
Table2.65Solid Constraints
These SOLUTION commands are used to define constraints on the solid model.
DA
Defines symmetry or antisymmetry degree-of-freedom constraints on
areas.
DADELE
Deletes degree-of-freedom constraints on an area.
DALIST
Lists the degree-of-freedom constraints on an area.
DK
Defines degree-of-freedom constraints at keypoints.
DKDELE
Deletes degree-of-freedom constraints at a keypoint.
DKLIST
Lists the degree-of-freedom constraints at keypoints.
DL
Defines symmetry or antisymmetry degree-of-freedom constraints on
lines.
DLDELE
Deletes degree-of-freedom constraints on a line.
DLLIST
Lists degree-of-freedom constraints on a line.
DTRAN
Transfers solid model degree-of-freedom constraints to the finite
element model.
Table2.66Solid Forces
These SOLUTION commands are used to define forces on the solid model.
FK
Defines force loads at keypoints.
FKDELE
Deletes force loads at a keypoint.
FKLIST
Lists the forces at keypoints.
FTRAN
Transfers solid model forces to the finite element model.
Table2.67Solid Surface Loads

These SOLUTION commands are used to define surface loads on the solid model.
SFA
Specifies surface loads on the selected areas.
SFADELE
Deletes surface loads from areas.
SFALIST
Lists the surface loads for the specified area.
SFL
Specifies surface loads on lines of an area.
SFLDELE
Deletes surface loads from lines.
SFLLIST
Lists the surface loads for lines.
SFTRAN
Transfer the solid model surface loads to the finite element model.
Table2.68Solid Body Loads

These SOLUTION commands are used to define body loads on the solid model.
BFA
Defines a body force load on an area.
BFADELE
Deletes body force loads on an area.
BFALIST
Lists the body force loads on an area.
BFK
Defines a body force load at a keypoint.
BFKDELE
Deletes body force loads at a keypoint.
BFKLIST
Lists the body force loads at keypoints.
BFL
Defines a body force load on a line.
BFLDELE
Deletes body force loads on a line.
BFLLIST
Lists the body force loads on a line.
BFTRAN
Transfers solid model body force loads to the finite element model.
BFV
BFVDELE
BFVLIST
Defines a body force load on a volume.

Deletes body force loads on a volume.
Lists the body force loads on a volume.
Table2.69Inertia
These SOLUTION commands are used to define inertial loads on the model.
ACEL
Specifies the linear acceleration of the structure.
CGLOC
Specifies the origin location of the acceleration coordinate system.
CGOMGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of the global origin.
CMACEL
Specifies the translational acceleration of an element component.
CMDOMEGA
Specifies the rotational acceleration of an element component about a
user-defined rotational axis.
CMOMEGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a
user-defined rotational axis.

CMROTATE
Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a
user-defined rotational axis

CORIOLIS
Applies the Coriolis effect to a rotating structure.
DCGOMG
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the global origin.
DOMEGA
Specifies the rotational acceleration of the structure.
IRLF
Specifies that inertia relief calculations are to be performed.
OMEGA
Specifies the rotational velocity of the structure.
SYNCHRO
Specifies whether the excitation frequency is synchronous or
asynchronous with the rotational velocity of the structure.

Table2.70Miscellaneous Loads
These SOLUTION commands are for miscellaneous load definition and control.
BIOT
Calculates the Biot-Savart source magnetic field intensity.
FMAGBC
Applies force and torque boundary conditions to an element component.
HFPORT
Specifies input data for waveguide or transmission line ports or an incident
plane wave.
IC
Specifies initial conditions at nodes.
ICDELE
Deletes initial conditions at nodes.
ICE
Specifies initial conditions on elements.
ICEDELE
Deletes initial conditions on elements.
ICELIST
Lists initial conditions on elements.
ICLIST
Lists the initial conditions.
INISTATE
Applies initial state data to an element or a selection of elements.
MPCHG
Changes the material number attribute of an element.
OUTPR
Controls the solution printout.
OUTRES
Controls the solution data written to the database.
PGRAPH
Specifies the location from which graphics data will be retrieved for viewing.
PGSAVE
Creates a PowerGraphics (PGR) file from results data.
PGWRITE
Writes selected solution data to the PGR file for faster postprocessing access.
PLWAVE
Specifies a free-space time-harmonic incident plane electromagnetic wave in
the global Cartesian coordinate system.
RESCONTROL
Controls file writing for multiframe restarts.
SBCLIST
Lists solid model boundary conditions.
SBCTRAN
Transfers solid model loads and boundary conditions to the FE model.
WSPRINGS
Creates weak springs on corner nodes of a bounding box of the currently
selected elements.
Table2.71Load Step Operations
These SOLUTION commands are used to write and solve multiple load steps.
LSCLEAR
Clears loads and load step options from the database.
LSDELE
Deletes load step files.
LSREAD
Reads load and load step option data into the database.
LSSOLVE
Reads and solves multiple load steps.
LSWRITE
Writes load and load step option data to a file.
Table2.72Master Degrees of Freedom

These SOLUTION commands are used to define master degrees of freedom.
M
Defines master degrees of freedom for reduced and superelement
generation analyses.
MDELE
Deletes master degrees of freedom.
MGEN
Generates additional master degrees of freedom from a previously
defined set.
MLIST
Lists the master degrees of freedom.
TOTAL
Specifies automatic master degree-of-freedom generation.
Table2.73Gap Conditions
These SOLUTION commands are used to define gaps for transient dynamic analyses.
GP
Defines a gap condition for transient analyses.
GPDELE
Deletes gap conditions.
GPLIST
Lists the gap conditions.
Table2.74Rezoning
These SOLUTION commands are used in analyses that employ rezoning.
REZONE
Initiates a rezoning operation, sets rezoning options, and rebuilds the
database.
MAPSOLVE
Maps the solved node and element solutions from an original mesh to
a new mesh.
REMESH
Specifies the starting and ending remeshing points.
AREMESH
Generates an area for creating a new mesh for rezoning.
Table2.75Birth and Death

These SOLUTION commands are used for the birth and death option for elements.
EALIVE
Reactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
EKILL
Deactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
ESTIF
Specifies the matrix multiplier for deactivated elements.
Table2.76FE Constraints
These SOLUTION commands are used to define constraints on the finite element
model.
D
Defines degree-of-freedom constraints at nodes.
DCUM
Specifies that degree-of-freedom constraint values are to be
accumulated.
DDELE
DJ
DJDELE
DJLIST
DLIST
DSCALE
DSYM
DVAL
GSBDATA
GSLIST
LDREAD
Deletes degree-of-freedom constraints.

Specify boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of
a joint element.
Deletes boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of
a joint element.
Lists boundary conditions applied to joint elements.
Lists degree-of-freedom constraints.
Scales degree-of-freedom constraint values.
Specifies symmetry or antisymmetry degree-of-freedom constraints on
nodes.
Defines values at enforced group.
Specifies the constraints or applies the load at the ending point for the
generalized plane strain element option.
When using generalized plane strain, lists the input data or solutions.
Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
Table2.77FE Forces
These SOLUTION commands are used to define nodal loads on the finite element
model.
F
Specifies force loads at nodes.
FCUM
Specifies that force loads are to be accumulated.
FDELE
Deletes force loads on nodes.
FJ
Specify forces or moments on the components of the relative motion
of a joint element.
FJDELE
Deletes forces (or moments) on the components of the relative motion
of a joint element.
FJLIST
Lists forces and moments applied on joint elements.
FLIST
Lists force loads on the nodes.
FSCALE
Scales force load values in the database.
Table2.78FE Surface Loads

These SOLUTION commands are used to define surface loads on the finite element
model.
SF
Specifies surface loads on nodes.
SFBEAM
Specifies surface loads on beam elements.
SFCUM
Specifies that surface loads are to be accumulated.
SFDELE
Deletes surface loads.
SFE
Specifies surface loads on elements.
SFEDELE
Deletes surface loads from elements.
SFELIST
Lists the surface loads for elements.
SFFUN
Specifies a varying surface load.
SFGRAD
Specifies a gradient (slope) for surface loads.
SFLIST
Lists surface loads.
SFSCALE
Scales surface loads on elements.
Table2.79FE Body Loads

These SOLUTION commands are used to define body loads on the finite element
model.
BF
Defines a nodal body force load.
BFCUM
BFDELE
BFE
BFECUM
BFEDELE
BFELIST
BFESCAL
BFLIST
BFSCALE
BFUNIF
LDREAD
RIMPORT
TUNIF
Specifies that nodal body force loads are to be accumulated.

Deletes nodal body force loads.
Defines an element body force load.
Specifies whether to ignore subsequent element body force loads.
Deletes element body force loads.
Lists the element body force loads.
Scales element body force loads.
Lists the body force loads on nodes.
Scales body force loads at nodes.
Assigns a uniform body force load to all nodes.
Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
Imports initial stresses from an explicit run into ANSYS.
Assigns a uniform temperature to all nodes.
Table2.80Status
These SOLUTION commands are for use with the STAT command.
ATYPE
Specifies "Analysis types" as the subsequent status topic.
BIOOPT
Specifies "Biot-Savart options" as the subsequent status topic.
DEACT
Specifies "Element birth and death" as the subsequent status topic.
DYNOPT
Specifies "Dynamic analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
GAP
Specifies "Reduced transient gap conditions" as the subsequent status
topic.
GENOPT
Specifies "General options" as the subsequent status topic.
INRTIA
Specifies "Inertial loads" as the subsequent status topic.
LSOPER
Specifies "Load step operations" as the subsequent status topic.
MASTER
Specifies "Master DOF" as the subsequent status topic.
NLOPT
Specifies "Nonlinear analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
OUTOPT
Specifies "Output options" as the subsequent status topic.
SMBODY
Specifies "Body loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status
topic.
SMCONS
Specifies "Constraints on the solid model" as the subsequent status
topic.
SMFOR
Specifies "Forces on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMSURF
Specifies "Surface loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status
topic.
SOLUOPT
Specifies "Solution options" as the subsequent status topic.
SPTOPT
Specifies "Spectrum analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
Table2.81Explicit Dynamics
These SOLUTION commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDADAPT
Activates adaptive meshing in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDALE
Assigns mesh smoothing to explicit dynamic elements that use the
ALE formulation.
EDBVIS
Specifies global bulk viscosity coefficients for an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDCADAPT
Specifies adaptive meshing controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCPU
Specifies CPU time limit for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCSC
Specifies whether to use subcycling in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCTS
Specifies mass scaling and scale factor of computed time step for an
EDDAMP
EDDRELAX
EDDUMP
EDENERGY
EDFPLOT
EDGCALE
EDHGLS
EDHIST
EDHTIME
EDINT
EDIS
EDLOAD
EDOPT
EDOUT
EDPL
EDPVEL
EDRC
EDRD
EDRI
EDRST
EDRUN
EDSHELL
EDSOLV
EDSTART
EDTERM
EDTP
EDVEL
EDWRITE
REXPORT
explicit dynamic analysis.

Defines mass weighted (Alpha) or stiffness weighted (Beta) damping
for an explicit dynamics model.
Activates initialization to a prescribed geometry or dynamic relaxation
for the explicit analysis.
Specifies output frequency for the explicit dynamic restart file
(d3dump).
Specifies energy dissipation controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Allows plotting of explicit dynamics forces.
Defines global ALE controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies the hourglass coefficient for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies time-history output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies the time-history output interval for an explicit dynamic
analysis.
Specifies number of integration points for explicit shell and beam
output.
Specifies stress initialization in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis.
Specifies loads for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies the type of output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies time-history output (ASCII format) for an explicit dynamic
analysis.
Plots a time dependent load curve in an explicit dynamic analysis.
Applies initial velocities to parts or part assemblies in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
Specifies rigid/deformable switch controls in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
Switches a part from deformable to rigid or from rigid to deformable
in an explicit dynamic analysis.
Defines inertia properties for a new rigid body that is created when a
deformable part is switched to rigid in an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies the output interval for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies serial or parallel processing for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies shell computation controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies "explicit dynamics solution" as the subsequent status topic.
Specifies status (new or restart) of an explicit dynamic analysis.
Specifies termination criteria for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Plots explicit elements based on their time step size.
Applies initial velocities to nodes or node components in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
Writes explicit dynamics input to an LS-DYNA input file.
Exports displacements from an implicit run to ANSYS LS-DYNA.
Table2.82FLOTRAN Checkout
These SOLUTION commands are used for a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLOCHECK
Sets up and runs a zero-iteration FLOTRAN analysis.
Table2.83Radiosity
These SOLUTION commands are used to calculate the radiation view factors and to
specify the solution parameters for the Radiosity solver method.
HEMIOPT
Specifies options for Hemicube view factor calculation.
RADOPT
RDEC
RSOPT
RSURF
RSYMM
SPCNOD
SPCTEMP
STEF
V2DOPT
VFOPT
QSOPT
Specifies Gauss-Seidel Radiosity Solver options.

Defines the decimation parameters.
Creates or loads the radiosity mapping data file for SURF251 or
SURF252 element types.
Generates the radiosity surface elements and stores them in the
database.
Defines the plane of symmetry or center of rotation for the radiosity
method.
Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiosity method.
Defines a free-space ambient temperature for radiation using the
Radiosity method.
Specifies Stefan-Boltzmann radiation constant.
Specifies 2-D/axisymmetric view factor calculation options.
Specifies options for view factor file.
Specifies quasi static radiation options.
Table2.84ANSYS Multi-field solver Definition Commands

These SOLUTION commands are used to define the fields for an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
MFCMMAND
Captures field solution options in a command file.
MFELEM
Defines a field by grouping element types.
MFEM
Adds more element types to a previously defined field number.
MFEXTER
Defines external fields for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFFNAME
Specifies a file name for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
Table2.85ANSYS Multi-field solver Global Controls
These SOLUTION commands set global controls for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFANALYSIS
Turns an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis on or off.
MFCLEAR
Deletes ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis settings.
MFFR
Sets up Multi-Field relaxation factors for field solutions.
MFINTER
Specifies the interface load transfer interpolation option for an ANSYS
Multi-field solver analysis.
MFLIST
Lists the settings for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFORDER
Specifies field solution order for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFPSIMUL
Sets up a field solver group to simultaneously process with code
coupling analyses.
MFSORDER
Sets up the solution sequence of simultaneous field solver groups for
code coupling analyses.
MFWRITE
Writes an ANSYS master input file for MFX multiple code coupling.
Table2.86ANSYS Multi-field solver Time Controls

These SOLUTION commands set time controls for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFCALC
Specifies a calculation frequency for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
MFDTIME
Sets time step increment for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFOUTPUT
Specifies results file output frequency for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFRSTART
Specifies a restart time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFTIME
Sets end time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
Table2.87ANSYS Multi-field solver Load Transfer

These SOLUTION commands are used to define load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
MFLCOMM
Defines a load transfer for code coupling analyses.
MFSURFACE
Defines a surface load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFVOLUME
Defines volume load transfer across interface for an ANSYS Multi-field
solver analysis.
Table2.88ANSYS Multi-field solver Convergence Controls
These SOLUTION commands are used to define convergence controls for an ANSYS
MFCONV
Sets convergence values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFITER
Sets the maximum number of stagger iterations for an ANSYS Multi-
field solver analysis.
MFRELAX
Sets relaxation values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
Table2.89ANSYS Multi-field solver Interface Mapping

These SOLUTION commands are used to define mapping details for an ANSYS
field solver analysis.
MFBUCKET
Turns a bucket search on or off.
MFCI
Sets the pixel resolution used by the CPP interpolation scheme.
MFMAP
Calculates, saves, resumes, or deletes mapping data in an ANSYS
MFTOL
Turns normal distance checking on for surface mapping in an ANSYS
Multi
Chapter 11: Component Mode Synthesis
Chapter11:Component Mode Synthesis

Component mode synthesis (CMS) is a form of substructure coupling analysis frequently employed in
structural dynamics.
CMS allows you to derive the behavior of the entire assembly from its constituent components. First, the
dynamic behavior of each of the components is formulated. Then, by enforcing equilibrium and
compatibility along component interfaces, ANSYS forms the dynamic characteristics of the full system
model.
CMS is available in the ANSYS Mechanical and ANSYS Structural products.
The following CMS topics are available:
Understanding Component Mode Synthesis
Employing Component Mode Synthesis
Sample Component Mode Synthesis Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADVCMS.html[28/04/2013 07:10:54 p.m.]
Chapter 10: Substructuring
Chapter10:Substructuring
Substructuring is a procedure that condenses a group of finite elements into one element represented as
a matrix. The single-matrix element is called a superelement. You can use a superelement in an analysis
as you would any other ANSYS element type. The only difference is that you first create the
superelement by performing a substructure generation analysis.
Substructuring is available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, the ANSYS Mechanical, and the ANSYS Structural
products.
The following substructing topics are available:
Benefits of Substructuring
Using Substructuring
Sample Analysis Input
Top-Down Substructuring
Automatically Generating Superelements
Nested Superelements
Prestressed Substructures
Where to Find Examples
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADV5.html[28/04/2013 07:10:58 p.m.]
10.1. Benefits of Substructuring
10.1.Benefits of Substructuring
Substructuring reduces computer time and allows solution of very large problems with limited computer
resources. Nonlinear analyses and analyses of structures containing repeated geometrical patterns are
typical candidates for employing substructuring. In a nonlinear analysis, you can substructure the linear
portion of the model so that the element matrices for that portion need not be recalculated at every
equilibrium iteration. In a structure with repeated patterns (such as the four legs of a table), you can
generate one superelement to represent the pattern and simply make copies of it at different locations,
thereby saving a significant amount of computer time.
You can also use substructuring on models with large rotations. For these models, ANSYS assumes each
substructure to rotate about its mass center. In 3-D cases, the substructures contain three rigid body
rotations and three translational motions. With a large rotation model, you do not constrain the
substructure until the use pass because each substructure is treated as a single finite element that
should allow rigid body motions.
An example is an analysis that is too large for the computer in terms of model size or disk space
requirements. In such a situation, you can analyze the model in pieces, where each piece is a
superelement small enough to fit on the computer.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADVSBT.html[28/04/2013 07:11:02 p.m.]
10.2. Using Substructuring
10.2.Using Substructuring
A substructure analysis involves three distinct steps, called passes :
1. Generation pass
2. Use pass
3. Expansion pass.
Figure 10.1 shows the data flow for a complete substructure analysis and some of the files involved.
Figure10.1Applicable Solvers in a Typical Substructuring Analysis
The three passes are explained in detail next.

Note: Perform each step while using the same version of ANSYS. Do not go from one
version of ANSYS to another while performing these steps.
10.2.1.Generation Pass: Creating the Superelement

The generation pass is where you condense a group of "regular" finite elements into a single
superelement. The condensation is done by identifying a set of master degrees of freedom, used mainly
to define the interface between the superelement and other elements and to capture dynamic
characteristics for dynamic analyses. Figure 10.2 shows a plate-like structure that is to be analyzed with
contact (interface) elements. Since the contact elements require an iterative solution, substructuring the
plate portion can result in a significant savings in computer time. The master DOF required in this case
are the degrees of freedom that connect the plate to the contact elements.
Figure10.2Example of a Substructuring Application
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADV5_2.html[28/04/2013 07:11:07 p.m.]
The procedure to generate a superelement consists of two main steps:

1. Build the model.
2. Apply loads and create the superelement matrices.
10.2.1.1.Building the Model

In this step, you specify the jobname and analysis title and then use /PREP7 to define the element
types, element real constants, material properties, and the model geometry. These tasks are common to
most analyses and are described in the Basic Analysis Guide . For the generation pass, you should keep
in mind the following additional points:
Jobname-This takes on special significance in a substructure analysis. By using jobnames effectively, you
can eliminate much of the file handling inherent in a three-pass analysis.
Use one of these methods to specify the jobname:
Command(s):
GUI:
/FILNAME
Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname
For example,
/FILNAME,GEN
gives the jobname GEN to all files produced by the generation pass. The default jobname is file or
whatever name was specified while entering the ANSYS program.
Element Types - Most ANSYS element types can be used to generate a substructure. In general, the
only restriction is that elements within the superelement are assumed to be linear and cannot use
Lagrange multipliers. If you include bilinear elements, they will be treated as linear elements (in their
initial state).
Caution: Coupled-field elements used in a direct method coupled-field analysis with load
vector coupling are not valid in a substructure analysis. Other elements in the
same shape family should be used instead. See the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide
for details. In addition, elements with Lagrange multipliers cannot be used in
substructuring. These type of elements include MPC184, CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, and CONTA178
with appropriate KEYOPT(2) setting, and elements PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, and SOLID285 when
using KEYOPT(6) > 0.
Material Properties - Define all necessary material properties. For example, if the mass matrix is to be
generated, density (DENS) (or mass in some form) must be defined; if the specific heat matrix is to be
generated, the specific heat (C) must be defined; and so on. Again, because a superelement is linear,
any nonlinear material properties will be ignored.
Model Generation - In the generation pass, you are mainly concerned with creating the superelement
portion of the model. The nonsuperelement portion, if any, is defined later in the use pass. However,
you should plan the modeling approach for both portions before you start building the model. In
particular, decide on how you want to connect the superelement to the other elements. To ensure the
connection, use the same node numbers at the interface. (Other methods requiring less effort on your
part are discussed in the use pass section later in this chapter.)
Edge Outline - Adjust the edge outline used to plot the superelement in the use pass [/EDGE]. A
smaller angle will produce more edges.
One approach might be to develop the entire model, save it on a named database file, and select only
the portion to be substructured for the generation pass. In the use pass then, you can RESUME
(Utility Menu> File> Resume from) from the named database file, unselect the portion that was
substructured and replace it with the superelement matrix.
10.2.1.2.Applying Loads and Creating the Superelement Matrices

The "solution" from a substructure generation pass consists of the superelement matrix (or matrices). As
with any other analysis, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options,
and initiate the solution. Details of how to do these tasks are explained below.
Enter SOLUTION using either of these methods.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
Define the analysis type and analysis options.The applicable options are explained below.
Analysis Type - Choose a substructure generation using one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
New analysis or restart - If you are starting a new analysis, choosing the analysis type (as described
above) is all you need to do. However, if the run is a restart, you must also indicate this by setting
STATUS = REST on the ANTYPE command (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Restart). A
restart is applicable if you need to generate additional load vectors. (The files Jobname.EMAT,
Jobname.ESAV , and Jobname.DB from the initial run must be available for the restart.)
Note: Restarting a substructuring analysis is valid only if the backsubstitution method is
chosen. You cannot restart a run if the full resolve option is selected using the
SEOPT command.
Name of the superelement matrix file - Specify the name ( Sename) to be assigned to the superelement
matrix file. The program will automatically assign the extension SUB, so the complete file name will be
Sename.SUB . The default is to use the jobname [/FILNAME]. To specify the name of the superelement
matrix file:
Command(s):
GUI:
SEOPT
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Equation Solver - The SPARSE solver is the only solver available for the generation pass of the
substructure analysis. To specify an equation solver:
Command(s):
GUI:
EQSLV
Matrices to be generated - You can request generation of just the stiffness matrix (or conductivity
matrix, magnetic coefficient matrix, etc.); stiffness and mass matrices (or specific heat, etc.); or
stiffness, mass, and damping matrices. The mass matrix is required if the use pass is a structural
dynamic analysis or if you need to apply inertia loads in the use pass. For the thermal case, the specific
heat matrix is required only if the use pass is a transient thermal analysis. Similar considerations apply to
other disciplines and to the damping matrix. To make your request, use the SEOPT command as
described above.
Matrices to be printed - This option allows you to print out the superelement matrices. You can request
listing of both matrices and load vectors, or just the load vectors. The default is not to print any
matrices. To print out the matrices, use the SEOPT command:
Expansion Pass Method - Allows you to select the expansion pass method you plan to use during
subsequent expansion passes with this superelement. The backsubstitution method (default) saves the
factorized matrix files needed to perform a backsubstitution of the master DOF solution during the
expansion pass. The full resolve method does not save any factorized matrix files. The factorized matrix
files are named Sename.LNxx for the sparse solver.
Note: Factorized matrix files can become very large as the problem size increases, but
are not needed if the full resolve method is chosen during the expansion pass.
During the expansion pass, the full resolve method reforms the elements used to create the
superelement, reassembles the global stiffness matrix, and applies the master DOF solution as
displacement boundary conditions internally.
Note: You cannot restart a substructure analysis with the full resolve expansion pass
method chosen.
Mass matrix formulation - Applicable only if you want the mass matrix to be generated. You can choose
between the default formulation (which depends on the element type) and a lumped mass
approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for dynamic
analyses involving "skinny" structures, such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass
approximation has been shown to give better results. To specify a lumped mass approximation, use one
of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
LUMPM
Modes to be used - For superelements being used in a subsequent dynamic analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL,
HARMONIC, or TRANSIENT], you may include mode shapes as extra degrees of freedom to obtain better
accuracy [CMSOPT]. See the chapter on Component Mode Synthesis for more information.
Define master degrees of freedom using one of these methods.
Command(s):
GUI:
M
Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define
In a substructure, master DOFs serve three purposes:
They serve as the interface between the superelement and other elements. Be sure to define
master DOFs at all nodes that connect to nonsuperelements, as shown in Figure 10.2. All degrees
of freedom at these nodes should be defined as master DOFs ( Lab = ALL on the M command).
Master DOFs must be defined even if you plan to have no elements in the model other than a
superelement.
If the superelement is to be used in a dynamic analysis, master DOFs characterize the dynamic
behavior of the structure if the Component Mode Synthesis method [CMSOPT] is not used. See
"Modal Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide for guidelines.
If constraints [D] or force loads [F] are to be applied in the use pass, master DOFs must be
defined at those locations with the M command.
If this superelement is to be transformed [SETRAN] later in the use pass or used in a large deflection
analysis [NLGEOM,ON], then all nodes that have master DOFs must have all six DOFs (UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) defined and active.
For large deflections, master DOFs are typically defined at the joints of the flexible body and are at the
nodes connected to a joint element (MPC184), another rigid or flexible body node, or ground. At least
two master DOFs must be defined for each substructure, as the average rotation of the superelement is
computed from the average rotation of its master DOF. If only one node is a joint node, then another
must be chosen at the free end. See the Multibody Analysis Guide for more details.
Apply loads on the model.You can apply all types of loads in a substructure generation pass (see
Table10.1:Loads Applicable in a Substructure Analysis), but keep in mind the following points:
The program will generate a load vector that includes the effect of all applied loads. One load
vector per load step is written to the superelement matrix file. This load vector is the equivalent
load for the combined loads in the load step. A maximum of 31 load vectors are allowed.
Nonzero DOF constraints can be used in the generation pass and will become part of the load
vector. (In the expansion pass, if the load step being expanded contains nonzero DOF constraints,
the database must have matching DOF values. If it does not, the DOF constraints must be
respecified [D] in the expansion pass.)
Application of constraints [D] or force loads [F] can be postponed until the use pass, but master
DOF must be defined at those locations with the M command or corresponding GUI path.
Note: If a mass matrix is generated, apply the degree of freedom constraints in the
use pass at the master DOF (defined in the generation pass) to ensure that
all mass is accounted for in the substructure. For analyses with acceleration
loadings, the load should be applied in the generation pass and used in the
use pass for greater accuracy, rather than apply the acceleration load on the
reduced mass matrix.
Similarly, application of linear and angular accelerations can be postponed until the use pass, but
only if a mass matrix is generated. This is recommended if you plan to rotate the superelement in
the use pass, because load vector directions are "frozen" and rotated with the superelement.
The Maxwell force flag (MXWF label on the SF family of commands) is normally used in a magnetic
analysis to flag element surfaces on which the magnetic force distribution is to be calculated. This
flag has no effect (and therefore should not be used) for a superelement in a magnetic analysis.
If you intend to create an imaginary force vector, you should generate it as a real load vector,
then use it as an imaginary load vector in the use pass (SFE,,,, KVAL = 2) and expansion pass
(SEEXP,,,ImagKy = ON).
For large rotation analyses - Do not apply constraints to the model in this pass. You will apply
constraints for large rotation analyses in the use pass.
Table10.1Loads Applicable in a Substructure Analysis

Load Name
Load
Category
Commands[1]
Solid Model Loads
Finite Element Loads
DK, DKLIST, DKDELE,

DL, DLLIST, DLDELE,
DA, DALIST, DADELE,
DTRAN
Force Heat Flow Rate Mag. Forces
FK, FKLIST, FKDELE,
Flux ...
FTRAN
Pressure Convection
Surface Loads SFL, SFLLIST, SFLDELE,
Maxwell Surface ...
SFA, SFALIST,
SFADELE, SFGRAD,
SFTRAN
Displacement Temperature Constraints

Mag. Potential ...
Temperature Heat
Generation Rate Current
Density ...
Body Loads
Gravity, Linear and Angular Inertia Loads

Acceleration
BFK, BFKLIST,
BFKDELE, BFL,
BFLLIST, BFLDELE,
BFA, BFALIST,
BFADELE, BFV,
BFVLIST, BFVDELE,
BFTRAN
D, DSYM, DLIST,
DDELE, DSCALE, DCUM
F, FLIST, FDELE,
FSCALE, FCUM
SF, SFLIST, SFDELE,
SFE, SFELIST,
SFEDELE, SFBEAM,
SFGRAD, SFFUN,
SFSCALE, SFCUM
BF, BFLIST, BFDELE,
BFE, BFELIST,
BFEDELE, BFSCALE,
BFCUM
ACEL, DOMEGA
1. The menu path used to access each command in the GUI will vary depending on the engineering
discipline of the analysis (structural, magnetic, etc.). For a list of menu paths, see the description
of individual commands in the Command Reference.
Specify load step options.The only options valid for the substructure generation pass are dynamics
options (damping).
Damping (Dynamics Options) - Applicable only if the damping matrix is to be generated.

To specify damping in the form of alpha (mass) damping:
Command(s):
GUI:
ALPHAD
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
To specify damping in the form of beta (stiffness) damping:

Command(s):
GUI:
BETAD
To specify damping in the form of material-dependent beta damping:

Command(s):
GUI:
MP,DAMP
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural>
Damping
Save a backup copy of the database on a named file.Doing this is required because you need to
work with the same database in the expansion pass. To save a backup copy, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
Utility Menu> File> Save as Jobname.db
Start solution calculations using one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Output from the solution consists of the
superelement matrix file, Sename.SUB , where Sename is the name assigned as an analysis
option [
SEOPT] or the jobname [
/FILNAME]. The matrix file includes a load vector calculated based on the applied
loads. (The load vector will be zero if no loads are defined.)
Repeat for additional load steps (that is, to generate additional load vectors).The load
vectors are numbered sequentially (starting from 1) and appended to the same superelement matrix file.
See "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide for other methods for multiple load steps.
Leave SOLUTION using one of these methods.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Main Menu> Finish
10.2.2.Use Pass: Using the Superelement

The use pass is where you use the superelement in an analysis by making it part of the model. The
entire model may be a superelement or, as in the plate example, the superelement may be connected to
other nonsuperelements (see Figure 10.2). The solution from the use pass consists only of the reduced
solution for the superelement (that is, the degree of freedom solution only at the master DOF) and
complete solution for nonsuperelements.
The use pass can involve any ANSYS analysis type (except a FLOTRAN or explicit dynamics analysis).
The only difference is that one or more of the elements in the model is a superelement that has been
previously generated. The individual analysis guides contain detailed descriptions about performing
various analyses. In this section, we will concentrate on the steps you need to make the superelement a
part of your model.
10.2.2.1.Clear the Database and Specify a New Jobname

The use pass consists of a new model and new loads. Therefore, the first step is to clear the existing
database. This has the same effect as leaving and re-entering the ANSYS program. To clear the
database, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
/CLEAR
Utility Menu> File> Clear & Start New
By default, clearing the database causes the START.ANS file to be reread. (You can change this setting if
you so desire.)
Caution: If you are using the command input method to clear the database, additional
commands may not be stacked on the same line (using the $ delimiter) as the
/CLEAR command.
Be sure to define a jobname that is different from the one used for the generation pass. This way, you
can ensure that no generation pass files will be overwritten. To define a jobname, use one of these
methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
/FILNAME
Utility Menu >File> Change Jobname
10.2.2.2.Build the Model

This step is performed in PREP7 and consists of the following tasks:
1. Define MATRIX50 (the superelement) as one of the element types. Use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
ET
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete
2. Define other element types for any nonsuperelements. Nonlinear behavior may or may not be
allowed, depending on the type of analysis to be performed.
3. Define element real constants and material properties for the nonsuperelements. Nonlinear
properties may or may not be allowed, depending on the type of analysis to be performed.
4. Define the geometry of the nonsuperelements. Take special care in defining the interfaces where
the nonsuperelements connect to the superelements. The interface node locations must exactly
match the locations of the corresponding master nodes on the superelements (see Figure 10.3).
There are three ways to ensure connectivity at these interfaces:
Use the same node numbers as the ones in the generation pass.
Use the same node number increment (or offset) between interface nodes in the generation
pass and interface nodes in the use pass. (Use SETRAN, as described below in step 5b.)
Couple the two sets of nodes in all degrees of freedom using the CP family of commands
[CP, CPINTF, etc.]. This method is helpful if you cannot use one of the above two methods.
For example, to define a set of coupled degrees of freedom use one of the following:
Command(s):
GUI:
CP
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs
If the superelement is not connected to any other elements, you do not need to define any
nodes in the use pass.
Figure10.3Node Locations
Interface nodes between superelement and nonsuperelement must exactly match the master node
locations.
5. Define the superelement by pointing to the proper element type reference number and reading in
the superelement matrix. To point to the element type:
Command(s):
GUI:
TYPE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem
Attributes
Now read in the superelement matrix using one of these methods (you may first need to use other
commands to modify the matrix, as explained below):
Command(s):
GUI:
SE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements>
Superelements> From .SUB File
a. If there are no nonsuperelements in the model, or if there are nonsuperelements and the
interface nodes have the exact same node numbers as the master nodes on the
superelement, then simply read in the superelement using the SE command:
TYPE,...! Element type reference number
SE,GEN! Reads in superelement from file GEN.SUB
The Sename field on the SE command shown above identifies the name of the superelement
matrix file. The extension .SUB is assumed, so the complete file name is Sename.SUB ( GEN.SUB
in the above example). The superelement is given the next available element number.
b. If there are nonsuperelements in the model and the interface nodes have a constant node
number offset from the master nodes, you must first create a new superelement matrix with
new node numbers and then read in the new matrix.
To create a new superelement matrix, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
SETRAN
Superelements> By CS Transfer
Superelements> By Geom Offset
To read in the new matrix, use one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
SE
Superelements> From .SUB File
For example, given an existing superelement matrix file GEN.SUB and a node number offset
of 2000, the commands would be:
SETRAN,GEN,,2000,GEN2,SUB
TYPE,...
SE,GEN2
! Creates new superelement GEN2.SUB with

!
node offset = 2000
! Element type reference number
! Reads in new superelement from file GEN2.SUB
c. If there are nonsuperelements in the model and the interface nodes have no relationship
with the master nodes (as would be the case with automatically meshed models), first
observe the following caution.
Caution: It is quite likely that the node numbers of the master nodes from the
generation pass overlap with node numbers in the use pass model.
In such cases, reading in the superelement [SE] will cause existing
use pass nodes to be overwritten by the superelement's master
nodes. To avoid overwriting existing nodes, use a node number
offset [SETRAN] before reading in the superelement. In any case,
save the database [SAVE] before issuing the SE command.
Thus you should first save the database [SAVE], use the SETRAN command to create a
new superelement matrix with a node number offset, and then use the SE command to read
in the new matrix. The CPINTF command (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Coupling/Ceqn> Coincident Nodes) can then be used to connect the pairs of nodes at
the interface. For example, given a superelement matrix file called GEN.SUB:
*GET,MAXNOD,NODE,,NUM,MAX
SETRAN,GEN,,MAXNOD,GEN2,SUB
SE,GEN2
NSEL,...
CPINTF,ALL
! MAXNOD = maximum node number

! Creates new superelement with
!
node offset = MAXNOD, name = GEN2.SUB
! Reads in new superelement
! Select all nodes at the interface
! Couples each pair of interface nodes in
! all DOF
NSEL,ALL
d. If the superelement is to be transformed - moved or copied to a different position, or

symmetrically reflected - you must first use the SETRAN command or SESYMM command
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Superelements> By
Reflection), with the appropriate node number offsets, to create new superelement matrix
files and then use SE to read in the new matrices. Connecting the superelements to the
nonsuperelements is done the same way as above - by using common node numbers, a
constant node number offset, or the CPINTF command.
Note: If you use SETRAN to transfer the superelement to a different coordinate
system, the superelement's master nodes are rotated with it by default. This
is typically useful if the original superelement's master nodes are rotated, into
a cylindrical system for example. (In this case, the transfer does not effect
the superelement stiffness matrix.) If the original superelement has no
rotated nodes, it is likely that the transferred superelement will not need
rotated nodes either. You can prevent node rotation in such cases by setting
the NOROT field on SETRAN to 1. (The superelement stiffness matrix and
load vector are modified by the program for this type of transfer.)
6. Verify the location of the superelement using graphics displays and listings. Superelements are
represented by an edge outline display, the data for which are written to the matrix file in the
generation pass. To produce a graphics display:
Command(s):
GUI:
EPLOT
Utility Menu> Plot> Elements
To produce a listing:
Command(s):
GUI:
SELIST
Utility Menu> List> Other> Superelem Data
7. Save the complete model database:

Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
Utility Menu> File> Save as Jobname.db
Leave PREP7 using one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Main Menu> Finish
10.2.2.3.Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

This step is performed during the solution phase of the analysis. The procedure to obtain the use-pass
solution depends on the analysis type. As mentioned earlier, you can subject a superelement to any type
of analysis. You should, of course, have the appropriate matrices generated during the generation pass.
For example, if you intend to do a structural dynamic analysis, the mass matrix must be available. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Enter SOLUTION using one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options.
For large rotation analyses - turn large deformation effects on [NLGEOM,ON], and define the
proper number of substeps for the nonlinear analysis.
3. Apply loads on the nonsuperelements. These may consist of DOF constraints and symmetry
conditions [D family of commands], force loads [F family], surface loads [SF family], body loads
[BF family], and inertia loads [ACEL, etc.]. Remember that inertia loads will affect the
superelement only if its mass matrix was generated in the generation pass.
Note: For large rotation analyses, be sure to apply the proper constraints in this
step.
4. Apply superelement load vectors (if any) using one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
SFE
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For
Superelement
One load vector per load step (created during the generation pass) is available on the
superelement matrix file, and is identified by its reference number:
SFE,63,1,SELV,0,0.75
applies, on element number 63, load vector number 1, with the load applied as a real load and
with a scale factor of 0.75. Thus the ELEM field represents the element number of the
superelement, LKEY represents the load vector number (default = 1), Lab is SELV, KVAL is for a real
or imaginary load vector, and VAL1 represents the scale factor (default = 0.0). (See the SFE
command description for more information.)
Note: The load vector orientation is fixed (frozen) to the superelement, so if the
superelement is used in a rotated position, the load vector rotates with it. The
same applies to the degree of freedom directions (UX, UY, ROTY, etc.). They
too are fixed to the superelement and will rotate with the superelement if it is
rotated (unless NOROT = 1 on the SETRAN command, in which case the nodal
coordinate systems will not be rotated).
5. Specify load step options that are appropriate for the analysis type. Use the EQSLV command to
select an appropriate equation solver based on the chosen analysis type and the physics of the
problem.
Note: Some solvers, such as the AMG solver, are not available for the use pass.
6. Initiate the solution:
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
Results from the solution consist of the complete solution for nonsuperelements and the reduced
solution - DOF solution at masters - for the superelements. The complete solution for
nonsuperelements is written to the results file ( Jobname.RST, RTH , or RMG ), which you can
postprocess using normal postprocessing procedures.
The reduced solution is written to the file Jobname.DSUB. You can review this file using one of these
methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
SEDLIST
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Superelem DOF
Utility Menu> List> Results> Superelem DOF Solu To expand the reduced
solution to all elements within the superelement, you will need to perform the
expansion pass, explained next.
7. Leave SOLUTION:
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Main Menu> Finish
10.2.3.Expansion Pass: Expanding Results Within the Superelement

The expansion pass is where you start with the reduced solution and calculate the results at all degrees
of freedom in the superelement. If multiple superelements are used in the use pass, a separate
expansion pass will be required for each superelement.
The procedure for the expansion pass assumes that the .EMAT , .ESAV , .SUB , .LN22 , .DB , and .SELD files
from the generation pass and the .DSUB file from the use pass are available. For larger substructures, the
files .LN09 and .LN20 will also be required if they were created in the generation pass. The expansion
pass logic automatically detects which, if any, factorized matrix files are available and chooses the
appropriate expansion pass method and solver accordingly. If an offset of node numbers was used in
the use pass [SETRAN or SESYMM], it will automatically be taken into account in the expansion pass.
The backsubstitution method uses the reduced solution from the use pass and substitutes it back into
the available factorized matrix file to calculate the complete solution. The full resolve solution reforms
the element stiffness matrices originally used to create the superelement. The global stiffness matrix for
these elements is then assembled. The reduced solution is applied to the model as displacement
boundary conditions, and the complete solution within the superelement is solved.
Note: The displacement boundary conditions are automatically applied internally at the
master degrees of freedom during the expansion pass solution and are not deleted
when the solution completes. If any subsequent analyses are to be performed,
users must be aware these boundary conditions exist in the model, and delete
them, if necessary.
The expansion pass logic for substructuring analyses first searches for the superelement .LN22 file and,
if found, chooses the sparse solver to perform a backsubstitution (the EQSLV command is ignored).
Otherwise, the program will stop the expansion pass and give a message suggesting an alternate
expansion method.
If the .LN22 file is not detected for the specified superelement, the full resolve method is chosen. The
PCG solver is chosen by default for the full resolve method. You can select the sparse solver using the
EQSLV command to override the default. Other equation solvers cannot be used with the full resolve
method.
1. Clear the database:
Command(s):
GUI:
/CLEAR
Utility Menu> File> Clear & Start New
This has the same effect as leaving and re-entering the ANSYS program.
2. Change the jobname to what it was during the generation pass. This way, the program can easily
identify the files required for the expansion pass:
Command(s):
GUI:
/FILNAME
3. Restore the generation pass database:

Command(s):
GUI:
RESUME
Utility Menu> File> Resume Jobname.db
4. Enter SOLUTION using one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
5. Activate the expansion pass and its options:

Command(s):
GUI:
EXPASS
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass
Expansion pass on or off - Choose "on."

Name of superelement to be expanded - Specify the name ( Sename):
Command(s):
GUI:
SEEXP
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand
Superelem
(The complete name of the file is assumed to be Sename.SUB .)
Name of the reduced solution file from use pass - Specify the name ( Usefil) using the SEEXP
command (or the menu path shown above). The complete name of the file is assumed to be
Usefil.DSUB .
Real or imaginary component of displacement - Applicable only if the use pass was a harmonic
response analysis. Use the Imagky key on the SEEXP command (or the menu path shown above).
If all solutions are to be expanded (NUMEXP,ALL), Imagky is ignored and both the real and
imaginary solutions are expanded.
6. Identify the use pass solution(s) to be expanded. You can either expand a single solution
[EXPSOL] or a range of solutions (including all) [NUMEXP]:
Single Solution - use either the load step and substep numbers or the time (or frequency) to
identify a solution:
Command(s):
GUI:
EXPSOL
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> By Load Step
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> By Time/Freq
Note: If the load step being expanded contains nonzero DOF constraints, the
database must have matching DOF values. If it does not, the DOF constraints
must be respecified [D] in the expansion pass.
Range of Solutions - Identify the number of solution and time or frequency range:
Command(s):
GUI:
NUMEXP
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Range of
Solu's
7. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a substructure expansion pass are output
controls:
Output Controls - These options control printed output, database and results file output, and
extrapolation of results.
If you want to include any results data on the printed output file ( Jobname.OUT):
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTPR
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
If you want to control the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST):

Command(s):
GUI:
OUTRES
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File
If you want to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default):
Command(s):
GUI:
ERESX
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
8. Start expansion pass calculations:
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for additional use pass solutions to be expanded. If you need to expand the
solution for a different superelement, you will need to leave and re-enter SOLUTION.
Note: If the superelement to be expanded contains contact elements and has
multiple use passes, use separate expansions (repeating steps 1 through 7) or
issue the NUMEXP command to expand multiple load steps together.
10. Finally, leave SOLUTION:
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Main Menu> Finish
11. Postprocess results in the superelement using standard techniques.

Note: An expansion pass is not valid if the use pass was a PSD analysis.
/CLEAR
/CLEAR
/CLEAR, Read
Clears the database.
Read
DATABASE : Set Up
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> FL EM EH DY PP <> EME MFS
File read option:

START Reread start130.ans file (default).
NOSTART Do not reread start130.ans file.
Notes
Resets the ANSYS database to the conditions at the beginning of the problem. Sets the import and
Boolean options back to the ANSYS default. All items are deleted from the database and memory values
are set to zero for items derived from database information. All files are left intact. This command is
useful between multiple analyses in the same run, or between passes of a multipass analysis (such as
between the substructure generation, use, and expansion passes). Should not be used in a do-loop since
loop counters will be reset. The start130.ans file will be reread (by default) after the database is
cleared, unless Read is set to NOSTART. Additional commands cannot be stacked (using the $ separator)
on the same line as the /CLEAR command.
Use care when placing the /CLEAR command within branching constructs (for example, those
employing *DO or *IF commands). The command deletes all parameters including the looping
parameter for do-loops. (You can preserve your iteration parameter by issuing a PARSAV command
prior to the /CLEAR command, then following the /CLEAR command with a PARRES command.)
/CLEAR resets the jobname to match the currently open session .LOG and .ERR files. This will return
the jobname to its original value, or to the most recent value specified on /FILNAME with KEY = 1.
This command is valid only at the Begin level.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Clear & Start New
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CLEAR.html[28/04/2013 07:11:17 p.m.]
2.2. DATABASE Commands
2.2.DATABASE Commands
These commands are used to operate on the database in a global sense. The commands are grouped by
functionality.
Table2.5Set Up
These DATABASE commands can be used to initialize the database, save it to a file, or
annotate it with titles and systems of units.
/CLEAR
Clears the database.
RESUME
Resumes the database from the database file.
SAVE
Saves all current database information.
/SMBC
Controls the display of solid model boundary condition symbols and
labels.
STAT
Displays the status of database settings.
/STITLE
Defines subtitles.
/TITLE
Defines a main title.
UNDO
Allows the user to modify or save commands issued since the last
RESUME or SAVE command.

Annotates the database with the system of units used.
/UNITS
Table2.6Selecting
These DATABASE commands are used to select subsets of database entities for further
operations.
ALLSEL
Selects all entities with a single command.
ASLL
Selects those areas containing the selected lines.
ASEL
Selects a subset of areas.
ASLV
Selects those areas contained in the selected volumes.
DOFSEL
Selects a degree-of-freedom label set for reference by other
commands.
ESEL
Selects a subset of elements.
ESLA
Selects those elements associated with the selected areas.
ESLL
Selects those elements associated with the selected lines.
ESLN
Selects those elements attached to the selected nodes.
ESLV
Selects elements associated with the selected volumes.
KSEL
Selects a subset of keypoints or hard points.
KSLL
Selects those keypoints contained in the selected lines.
KSLN
Selects those keypoints associated with the selected nodes.
LSEL
Selects a subset of lines.
LSLA
Selects those lines contained in the selected areas.
LSLK
Selects those lines containing the selected keypoints.
NSEL
Selects a subset of nodes.
NSLA
Selects those nodes associated with the selected areas.
NSLE
Selects those nodes attached to the selected elements.
NSLK
Selects those nodes associated with the selected keypoints.
NSLL
Selects those nodes associated with the selected lines.
NSLV
Selects those nodes associated with the selected volumes.
PARTSEL
Selects a subset of parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
VSEL
Selects a subset of volumes.
VSLA
Selects those volumes containing the selected areas.
Table2.7Components
These DATABASE commands allow selected subsets of entities to be named as
components for easy selection later on.
CM
Groups geometry items into a component.
CMDELE
Deletes a component or assembly definition.
CMEDIT
Edits an existing component or assembly.
CMGRP
Groups components and assemblies into an assembly.
CMLIST
Lists the entities contained in a component or assembly.
CMMOD
Modifies the specification of a component.
CMPLOT
Plots the entities contained in a component or assembly.
CMSEL
Selects a subset of components and assemblies.
CMWRITE
Writes components and assemblies to a file.
Table2.8Working Plane
These DATABASE commands turn on, move, rotate, and modify the working plane,
which is used for picking operations.
KWPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of keypoints.
KWPLAN
Defines the working plane using three keypoints.
LWPLAN
Defines the working plane normal to a location on a line.
NWPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average location of nodes.
NWPLAN
Defines the working plane using three nodes.
WPAVE
Moves the working plane origin to the average of specified points.
WPCSYS
Defines the working plane location based on a coordinate system.
WPLANE
Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations.
WPOFFS
Offsets the working plane.
WPROTA
Rotates the working plane.
WPSTYL
Controls the display and style of the working plane.
Table2.9Coordinate System
These DATABASE commands define and manipulate coordinate systems.
CLOCAL
Defines a local coordinate system relative to the active coordinate
system.
CS
Defines a local coordinate system by three node locations.
CSCIR
Locates the singularity for non-Cartesian local coordinate systems.
CSDELE
Deletes local coordinate systems.
CSKP
Defines a local coordinate system by three keypoint locations.
CSLIST
Lists coordinate systems.
CSWPLA
Defines a local coordinate system at the origin of the working plane.
CSYS
Activates a previously defined coordinate system.
LOCAL
Defines a local coordinate system by a location and orientation.
Table2.10Picking
These DATABASE commands are generated by the GUI when picking operations are
performed.
FITEM
Identifies items chosen by a picking operation (GUI).
FLST
Specifies data required for a picking operation (GUI).
RESUME
RESUME
RESUME, Fname , Ext , --, NOPAR , KNOPLOT

Resumes the database from the database file.
DATABASE : Set Up
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS FL EM EH DY PP <> EME MFS
Fname
File name and directory path (248 characters maximum, including the characters needed for the
directory path). An unspecified directory path defaults to the working directory; in this case, you
can use all 248 characters for the file name.
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).

The extension defaults to DB if Fname is blank.
-NOPAR
Unused field.
Parameter resume key:
0 All data in the database, including the scalar parameters, are replaced with the data saved
on File.DB (default).
1 All data in the database, except the scalar parameters, are replaced with the data saved on
File.DB .
Note: This option should not be used if array parameters are defined, since
existing array parameters might be redefined with arbitrary values. See
PARSAV and PARRES for a more general method of preventing the
replacement of both scalar and array parameters.)
KNOPLOT
If equal to 1, will suppress automatic plot. Otherwise, if the GUI is on and this RESUME command
was not read from a file, the selected elements from Fname are plotted. (If there are no selected
elements, selected nodes are plotted. If no nodes, volumes; if no volumes, areas; if no areas,
lines; if no lines, keypoints. If there are no selected keypoints, the screen is erased.)
Notes
The RESUME command resumes a database file into the ANSYS program. The command causes the
database file ( File.DB) to be read, thereby resetting the database (including any geometry settings)
either a) as it was at the last SAVE command, or b) as it was saved with the last /EXIT command,
whichever was last. For multiple load step analyses (because only the data for one load step at a time
may reside in the database), the load step data restored to the database will correspond to the load step
data written when the save occurred.
If the database file was saved in another ANSYS product, it may contain element type and KEYOPT
specifications which are invalid in the "resuming" product. Immediately after the database resume is
completed, you should redefine these invalid element types and KEYOPT settings to valid ones (ET,
KEYOPT).
This command is valid in any processor. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first
load step.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>Resume from
Utility Menu>File>Resume Jobname.db
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_RESUME.html[28/04/2013 07:11:32 p.m.]
RESUME
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_RESUME.html[28/04/2013 07:11:32 p.m.]
PARSAV
PARSAV
PARSAV, Lab , Fname , Ext , -Writes parameters to a file.
APDL : Parameters
Argument Descriptions
Lab
Write operation:
SCALAR--
Write only scalar parameters (default).
ALL--
Write scalar and array parameters. Parameters may be numeric or alphanumeric.
Fname
The file name defaults to Jobname.
Ext
Filename extension (8 character maximum).

The extension defaults to PARM if Fname is blank.
--
Unused field.
Notes
Writes the current parameters to a coded file. Previous parameters on this file, if any, will be
overwritten. The parameter file may be read with the PARRES command.
PARSAV/PARRES operations truncate some long decimal strings, and can cause differing values in
your solution data when other operations are performed. A good practice is to limit the number of
decimal places you will use before and after these operations.
This command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Parameters>Save Parameters
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_PARSAV.html[28/04/2013 07:11:39 p.m.]
2.4. APDL Commands
2.4.APDL Commands
These commands make up the ANSYS Parametric Design Language (APDL). The commands are grouped
by functionality.
Table2.18Parameter Definition
These APDL commands are used to define parameters and their values.
*AFUN
Specifies units for angular functions in parameter expressions.
*ASK
Prompts the user to input a parameter value.
*DEL
Deletes a parameter (GUI).
*DIM
Defines an array parameter and its dimensions.
*GET
Retrieves a value and stores it as a user-named parameter.
/INQUIRE
Returns system information to a parameter.
PARRES
Reads parameters from a file.
PARSAV
Writes parameters to a file.
*SET
Assigns values to user-named parameters.
*STATUS
Lists the current parameters and abbreviations.
*TAXIS
Defines table index numbers.
*TREAD
Reads data from an external file into a table array parameter.
*VFILL
Fills an array parameter.
*VGET
Retrieves values into an array parameter.
*VREAD
Reads data and produces an array parameter vector or matrix.
Table2.19Macro Files
These APDL commands are used to build and execute command macros.
*CFCLOS
Closes the "command" file.
*CFOPEN
Opens a "command" file.
*CFWRITE
Writes an ANSYS command (or similar string) to a "command" file.
*CREATE
Opens (creates) a macro file.
/DFLAB
Changes degree of freedom labels for user custom elements.
*END
Closes a macro file.
/MAIL
Mails file to specifed address.
/MKDIR
Creates a directory.
*MSG
Writes an output message via the ANSYS message subroutine.
/PMACRO
Specifies that macro contents be written to the session log file.
/PSEARCH
Specifies a directory to be searched for "unknown command" macro
files.
/RMDIR
Removes (deletes) a directory.
/TEE
Writes a list of commands to a specified file at the same time that the
commands are being executed.
*ULIB
Identifies a macro library file.
*USE
Executes a macro file.
Table2.20Abbreviations
These APDL commands can be used to define abbreviations for longer commands, and
to create user-defined commands.
*ABBR
Defines an abbreviation.
2.4. APDL Commands
ABBRES
ABBSAV
/UCMD
Reads abbreviations from a coded file.

Writes the current abbreviation set to a coded file.
Assigns a user-defined command name.
Table2.21Array Parameters
These APDL commands are used to operate on parameter arrays (i.e., vectors and
matrices).
/DIRECTORY
Put the file names in the current directory into a string parameter
array.
*MFOURI
Calculates the coefficients for, or evaluates, a Fourier series.
*MFUN
Copies or transposes an array parameter matrix.
*MOPER
Performs matrix operations on array parameter matrices.
*MWRITE
Writes a matrix to a file in a formatted sequence.
*SREAD
Reads a file into a string array parameter.
*TOPER
Operates on table parameters.
*VABS
Applies the absolute value function to array parameters.
*VCOL
Specifies the number of columns in matrix operations.
*VCUM
Allows array parameter results to add to existing results.
*VEDIT
Allows numerical array parameters to be graphically edited.
*VFACT
Applies a scale factor to array parameters.
*VFUN
Performs a function on a single array parameter.
*VITRP
Forms an array parameter by interpolation of a table.
*VLEN
Specifies the number of rows to be used in array parameter
operations.
*VMASK
Specifies an array parameter as a masking vector.
*VOPER
Operates on two array parameters.
*VPLOT
Graphs columns (vectors) of array parameters.
*VPUT
Restores array parameter values into the ANSYS database.
*VSCFUN
Determines properties of an array parameter.
*VSTAT
Lists the current specifications for the array parameters.
*VWRITE
Writes data to a file in a formatted sequence.
Table2.22Process Controls
These APDL commands can be used to control the order in which other commands are
processed.
*CYCLE
Bypasses commands within a do-loop.
*DO
Defines the beginning of a do-loop.
*DOWHILE
Loops repeatedly through the next *ENDDO command.
*ELSE
Separates the final if-then-else block.
*ELSEIF
Separates an intermediate if-then-else block.
*ENDDO
Ends a do-loop and starts the looping action.
*ENDIF
Ends an if-then-else.
*EXIT
Exits a do-loop.
*GO
Causes a specified line on the input file to be read next.
*IF
Conditionally causes commands to be read.
*REPEAT
Repeats the previous command.
*RETURN
Returns input stream to a higher level.
/WAIT
Introduces a delay before reading the next command.
2.4. APDL Commands
Table2.23Matrix Operations (APDL Math)

These APDL Math commands can be used to create, manipulate, and solve matrices.
*AXPY
Performs the matrix operation M2= v*M1 + w*M2.
*COMP
Compresses the columns of a matrix using a specified algorithm.
*DMAT
Creates a dense matrix.
*EIGEN
Performs a modal solution with unsymmetric or damping matrices.
*EXPORT
Exports a matrix to a file in the specified format.
*FREE
Deletes a matrix or a solver object and frees its memory allocation.
*ITENGINE
Performs a solution using an iterative solver.
*LSBAC
Performs the solve (forward/backward substitution) of a factorized
linear system.
*LSENGINE
Creates a linear solver engine.
*LSFACTOR
Performs the numerical factorization of a linear solver system.
*MULT
Performs the matrix multiplication M3 = M1(T1)*M2(T2).
*NRM
Computes the norm of the specified matrix or vector.
*PRINT
Prints the matrix values to a file.
*SMAT
Creates a sparse matrix.
*VEC
Creates a vector.
*AFUN
*AFUN
*AFUN, Lab
Specifies units for angular functions in parameter expressions.
APDL : Parameters
Lab
Specifies the units to be used:

RAD--
Use radians for input and output of parameter angular functions (default).
DEG--
Use degrees for input and output of parameter angular functions.
STAT--
Show current setting (DEG or RAD) for this command.
Command Default
Use radians for input or output of parameter angular functions.
Notes
Only the SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ANGLEK, and ANGLEN functions [*SET, *VFUN]
are affected by this command.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Parameters>Angular Units
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_AFUN.html[28/04/2013 07:11:49 p.m.]
*SET
*SET
*SET, Par , VALUE , VAL2 , VAL3 , VAL4 , VAL5 , VAL6 , VAL7 , VAL8 , VAL9 , VAL10
Assigns values to user-named parameters.
APDL : Parameters
Par
An alphanumeric name used to identify this parameter. Par may be up to 32 characters, beginning
with a letter and containing only letters, numbers, and underscores. Examples: ABC A3X TOP_END.
ANSYS command names, function names, label names, component and assembly names, etc.,
should not be used. Parameter names beginning with an underscore (e.g., _LOOP) are reserved
for use by ANSYS and should be avoided. Parameter names ending in an underscore are not listed
by the *STATUS command. Array parameter names must be followed by a subscript, and the
entire expression must be 32 characters or less. Examples: A(1,1) NEW_VAL(3,2,5) RESULT(1000).
There is no character parameter substitution for the Par field. Table parameters that are used in
command fields (where constant values are normally given) are limited to 32 characters.
VALUE
Numerical value or alphanumeric character string (up to 32 characters enclosed in single quotes) to
be assigned to this parameter. Examples: A(1,3)=7.4 B='ABC3'. May also be a parameter or a
parametric expression. Examples: C=A(1,3) A(2,2)=(C+4)/2. If blank, delete this parameter.
Example: A= deletes parameter A.
VAL2 , VAL3 , VAL4 , VAL5 , VAL6 , VAL7 , VAL8 , VAL9 , VAL10
If Par is an array parameter, values VAL2 through VAL10 (up to the last nonblank value) are
sequentially assigned to the succeeding array elements of the column. Example:
*SET,A(1,4),10,11 assigns A(1,4)=10, A(2,4)=11. *SET,B(2,3),'file10','file11' assigns
B(2,3)='file10', B(3,3)='file11'.
Notes
Assigns values to user-named parameters that may be substituted later in the run. The equivalent (and
recommended) format is
Par
= VALUE ,VAL2 ,VAL3 , . . . , VAL10
which may be used in place of *SET,Par , ... for convenience.

Parameter Definitions
Parameters (numeric or character) may be scalars (single valued) or arrays (multiple valued in one, two,
or three dimensions). An unlimited number of parameter names may be defined in any ANSYS run. For
very large numbers of parameters, it is most efficient to define them in alphabetical order.
Parameter values may be redefined at any time. Array parameters may also be assigned values within a
do-loop [*DO] for convenience. Internally programmed do-loop commands are also available with the
*VXX commands (*VFILL). Parameter values (except for parameters ending in an underscore) may be
listed with the *STATUS command, displayed with the *VPLOT command (numeric parameters only),
and modified with the *VEDIT command (numeric parameters only).
Older ANSYS-supplied macro files may use parameter names that do not begin with an underscore.
Using these macros embedded in your own macros may cause conflicts if the same parameter names
are used.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SET_st.html[28/04/2013 07:12:03 p.m.]
*SET
Parameters can also be resolved in comments created by the /COM command (see /COM for complete
documentation). A parameter can be deleted by redefining it with a blank VALUE . If the parameter is an
array, the entire array is deleted. Parameters may also be defined by a response to a query with the
*ASK command or from an "ANSYS-supplied" value with the *GET command.
Array Parameters
Array parameters must be dimensioned [*DIM] before being assigned values unless they are the result
of an array operation or defined using the implied loop convention. Scalar parameters that are not
defined are initialized to a "near" zero value. Numeric array parameters are initialized to zero when
dimensioned, and character array parameters are initialized to blank. An existing array parameter must
be deleted before it can be redimensioned. Array parameter names must be followed by a subscript list
(enclosed in parentheses) identifying the element of the array. The subscript list may have one, two, or
three values (separated by commas). Typical array parameter elements are A(1,1), NEW_VAL(3,2,5),
RESULT(1000). Subscripts for defining an array element must be integers (or parameter expressions that
evaluate to integers). Non-integer values are rounded to the nearest integer value. All array parameters
are stored as 3-D arrays with the unspecified dimensions set to 1. For example, the 4th array element of
a 1-dimensional array, A(4), is stored as array element A(4,1,1). Arrays are patterned after standard
FORTRAN conventions.
Numerical Parameter Substitution

If the parameter name Par is input in a numeric argument of a command, the numeric value of the
parameter (as assigned with *SET, *GET, =, etc.) is substituted into the command at that point.
Substitution occurs only if the parameter name is used between blanks, commas, parentheses, or
arithmetic operators (or any combination) in a numeric argument. Substitution can be prevented by
enclosing the parameter name Par within single quotes ( ' ), if the parameter is alone in the argument; if
the parameter is part of an arithmetic expression, the entire expression must be enclosed within single
quotes to prevent substitution. In either case the character string will be used instead of the numeric
value (and the string will be taken as 0.0 if it is in a numeric argument).
A forced substitution is available in the text fields of the /TITLE, /STITLE, /TLABEL, /AN3D, /SYP
( ARG1 --ARG8 ), and *ABBR commands by enclosing the parameter within percent (%) signs. Also,
parameter substitution may be forced within the file name or extension fields of commands having these
fields by enclosing the parameter within percent (%) signs. Array parameters [*DIM] must include a
subscript (within parentheses) to identify the array element whose value is to be substituted, such as
A(1,3). Out-of-range subscripts result in an error message. Non-integer subscripts are allowed when
identifying a TABLE array element for substitution. A proportional linear interpolation of values among
the nearest array elements is performed before substitution. Interpolation is done in all three
dimensions.
Note: Interpolation is based upon the assigned index numbers which must be defined
when the table is filled [*DIM].
Character Parameter Substitution

Most alphanumeric arguments permit the use of character parameter substitution. When the parameter
name Par input, the alphanumeric value of the parameter is substituted into the command at that point.
Substitution can be suppressed by enclosing the parameter name within single quotes ( ' ). Forced
substitution is available in some fields by enclosing the parameter name within percent (%) signs. Valid
forced substitution fields include command name fields, Fname (filename) or Ext (extension) arguments,
*ABBR command ( Abbr arguments), /TITLE and /STITLE commands ( Title argument) and
/TLABEL command ( Text argument). Character parameter substitution is also available in the *ASK,
/AN3D, *CFWRITE, *IF, *ELSEIF, *MSG, *SET, *USE, *VREAD, and *VWRITE commands.
Character array parameters must include a subscript (within parentheses) to identify the array element
whose value is to be substituted.
*SET
Parameter Expressions
If a parameter operation expression is input in a numeric argument, the numeric value of the expression
is substituted into the command at that point. Allowable operation expressions are of the form
E1oE2oE3...oE10
where E1, E2, etc. are expressions connected by operators (o). The allowable operations (o) are
+ - * / ** < >
For example, A+B**C/D*E is a valid operation expression. The * represents multiplication and the **
represents exponentiation.
Note: Exponentiation of a negative number (without parentheses) to an integer power
follows standard FORTRAN hierarchy conventions; that is, the positive number is
exponentiated and then the sign is attached. Thus, -4**2 is evaluated as -16. If
parentheses are applied, such as (-4)**2, the result is 16.
A parameter is evaluated as a number within parentheses before exponentiation. Exponentiation of a
negative number to a non-integer power is performed by exponentiating the positive number and
prepending the minus sign, for example, -4**2.3 is -(4**2.3). The < and > operators allow conditional
substitution. For example, E1<E2 substitutes the value of E1 if the comparison is true or the value of E2
if the comparison is false.
Spaces should not be used around operation symbols since * (a space and a star) makes the rest of
the line a comment. Operation symbols (or symbols and signs) may not be immediately adjacent to each
other. Parentheses may be used to separate symbols and signs, to determine a hierarchy of operations,
or for clarity. For example, A**(-B) must be used instead of A**-B. Numbers ending with +0nn or -0nn
are assumed to be of exponential form (as written on files by some computer systems) so that 123-002
is 123E-2 while 123-2 is 121. This form of exponential data should not be input directly. The default
hierarchy follows the standard FORTRAN conventions, namely:
operations in parentheses (innermost first)
then exponentiation (right to left)
then multiplication or division (left to right)
then unary association (such as +A or -A)
then addition or subtraction (left to right)
then logical evaluations (left to right).
Expressions (E) may be a constant, a parameter, a function, or another operation expression (of the
form E1oE2oE3...oE10). Functions are of the form FTN(A) where the argument (A) may itself be of the
form E1oE2oE3...oE10. Operations are recursive to a level of four deep (three levels of internally nested
parentheses). Iterative floating point parameter arithmetic should not be used for high precision input
because of the accumulated numerical round off-error. Up to 10 expressions are accepted within a set
of parenthesis.
Valid functions (which are based on standard FORTRAN functions where possible) are:
SIN(X )
COS(X )
TAN(X )
ASIN( X )
ACOS(X )
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arcsine
Arccosine
*SET
ATAN( X )
ATAN2( Y ,X )
SINH( X )
COSH(X )
TANH(X )
SQRT(X )
ABS( X )
SIGN( X,Y )
NINT(X )
MOD(X,Y )
EXP( X )
LOG( X )
LOG10(X )
RAND( X ,Y )
GDIS( X ,Y )
LWCASE(CPARM )
UPCASE(CPARM )
VALCHR(CPARM )
CHRVAL(PARM)
IBSET(b1,n2)
IBCLR(b1,n2)
BTEST(b1,n2)
BITAND(b1,b2)
BITOR(b1,b2)
BITXOR(b1,b2)
BITSET(b1,b2)
BITCLEAR(b1,b2)
Arctangent
Arctangent ( Y / X ) with the sign of each component considered
Hyperbolic sine
Hyperbolic cosine
Hyperbolic tangent
Square root
Absolute value
Absolute value of X with sign of Y. Y =0 results in positive sign
Nearest integer
Remainder of X/Y Y =0 returns zero (0)
Exponential
Natural log
Common log
Random number, where X is the lower bound, and Y is the upper
bound
Random sample of Gaussian distributions, where X is the mean, and Y
is the standard deviation
Lowercase equivalent of character parameter CPARM
Uppercase equivalent of character parameter CPARM
Numeric value of character parameter CPARM (If CPARM is a numeric
parameter, returns 0.0)
Character value of numerical parameter PARM. For ABS( PARM) < 10,
character value format is F8.5; for 10 ABS( PARM) < 1000, format
is F8.3; for 1,000 ABS( PARM)< 10,000,000, format is F8.0. For
10,000,000 PARM < 100,000,000, format is also F8.0. Otherwise
result is 0.0 and is not a character value.
Set the n2 bit in value b1 (bits are numbered from 0 to 31)
Clear the n2 bit in value b1
Test the n2 bit in value b1 (return true (1.0) if bit is set)
Bitwise AND of value b1 and b2
Bitwise OR of value b1 and b2
Bitwise XOR of value b1 and b2
Set the b2 bits in b1
Clear the b2 bits in b1
Function arguments ( X ,Y , etc.) must be enclosed within parentheses and may be numeric values,
parameters, or expressions. Input arguments for angular functions must evaluate to radians by default.
Output from angular functions are also in radians by default. See the *AFUN command to use degrees
instead of radians for the angular functions. See the *VFUN command for applying these parameter
functions to a sequence of array elements. Additional functions, called "get functions" are described with
the *GET command. For SINH, COSH, TANH, and EXP, if X > 80, the value returned is zero.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Delete>Structural>Section
Utility Menu>Parameters>Scalar Parameters
*STATUS
*STATUS
*STATUS, Par , IMIN , IMAX , JMIN , JMAX , KMIN , KMAX , LMIN , LMAX , MMIN , MMAX , KPRI
Lists the current parameters and abbreviations.
APDL : Parameters
Par
Specifies the parameter or sets of parameters listed. For array parameters, use IMIN , IMAX , etc. to
specify ranges. Use *DIM to define array parameters. Use *VEDIT to review array parameters
interactively. Use *VWRITE to print array values in a formatted output. If Par is blank, list all
scalar parameter values, array parameter dimensions, and abbreviations. If ARGX , list the active
set of local macro parameters (ARG1 to ARG9 and AR10 to AR99) [*USE].
The following are possible values for Par
ALL or blank -Lists all parameters (except local macro parameters and those with names beginning or
ending with an underbar) and toolbar abbreviations.
_PRM -Lists only parameters with names beginning with an underbar (_). These are ANSYS internal
parameters.
PRM_ -Lists only parameters with names ending with an underbar (_). A good APDL programming
convention is to ensure that all parameters created by your system programmer are named
with a trailing underbar.
ABBR -Lists all toolbar abbreviations.
PARM -Lists all parameters (except local macro parameters and those with names beginning or
ending with an underbar).
PARNAME
--
Lists only the parameter specified. PARNAME cannot be a local macro parameter name.
ARGX
-Lists all local macro parameter values (ARG1- AR99) that are non-zero or non-blank.
IMIN , IMAX , JMIN , JMAX , KMIN , KMAX , LMIN , LMAX , MMIN , MMAX
Range of array elements to display (in terms of the dimensions (row, column, plane, book, and
shelf). Minimum values default to 1. Maximum values default to the maximum dimension values.
Zero may be input for IMIN , JMIN , and KMIN to display the index numbers. See *TAXIS command
to list index numbers of 4- and 5-D tables.
KPRI
Use this field to list your primary variable labels (X, Y, Z, TIME, etc.).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_STATUS_st.html[28/04/2013 07:12:08 p.m.]
*STATUS
1
List the labels (default). YES , Y , or ON are also valid entries.
0
Do not list the labels. NO, N, or OFF are also valid entries.
Notes
You cannot obtain the value for a single local parameter (e.g., *STATUS,ARG2). You can only request
all local parameters simultaneously using *STATUS,ARGX.
Menu Paths
Utility
Utility
Utility
Utility
Menu>List>Other>Named Parameter
Menu>List>Other>Parameters
Menu>List>Status>Parameters>All Parameters
Menu>List>Status>Parameters>Named Parameters
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_STATUS_st.html[28/04/2013 07:12:08 p.m.]
*DIM
*DIM
*DIM, Par , Type , IMAX , JMAX , KMAX , Var1 , Var2 , Var3 , CSYSID
Defines an array parameter and its dimensions.
APDL : Parameters
Par
Name of parameter to be dimensioned. See *SET for name restrictions.

Type
Array type:
ARRAY--
Arrays are similar to standard FORTRAN arrays (indices are integers) (default). Index
numbers for the rows, columns, and planes are sequential values beginning with one. Used
for 1-, 2-, or 3-D arrays.
ARR4 --
Same as ARRAY, but used to specify 4-D arrays.
ARR5 --
Same as ARRAY, but used to specify 5-D arrays.
CHAR--
Array entries are character strings (up to 8 characters each). Index numbers for rows,
columns, and planes are sequential values beginning with one.
TABLE--
Array indices are real (non-integer) numbers which must be defined when filling the table.
Index numbers for the rows and columns are stored in the zero column and row "array
elements" and are initially assigned a near-zero value. Index numbers must be in ascending
order and are used only for retrieving an array element. When retrieving an array element
with a real index that does not match a specified index, linear interpolation is done among
the nearest indices and the corresponding array element values [*SET]. Used for 1-, 2-, or
3-D tables.
TAB4 --
Same as TABLE, but used to specify 4-D tables.
TAB5 --
Same as TABLE, but used to specify 5-D tables.
STRING -Array entries are character strings (up to IMAX each). Index numbers for columns and planes
are sequential values beginning with 1. Row index is character position in string.
IMAX
Extent of first dimension (row) (For Type = STRING, IMAX is rounded up to the next multiple of
eight and has a limit of 256). Defaults to 1.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_DIM.html[28/04/2013 07:12:15 p.m.]
*DIM
JMAX
Extent of second dimension (column). Defaults to 1.

KMAX
Extent of third dimension (plane). Defaults to 1.

Var1
Variable name corresponding to the first dimension (row) for Type = TABLE. Defaults to Row.
Var2
Variable name corresponding to the second dimension (column) for Type = TABLE. Defaults to
Column.
Var3
Variable name corresponding to the third dimension (plane) for Type = TABLE. Defaults to Plane.
CSYSID
An integer corresponding to the coordinate system ID Number.
Notes
Up to three dimensions (row, column, and plane) may be defined using ARRAY and TABLE. Use ARR4,
ARR5, TAB4, and TAB5 to define up to five dimensions (row, column, plane, book, and shelf). An index
number is associated with each row, column, and plane. For array and table type parameters, element
values are initialized to zero. For character and string parameters, element values are initialized to
(blank). A defined parameter must be deleted [*SET] before its dimensions can be changed. Scalar
(single valued) parameters should not be dimensioned. *DIM,A,,3 defines a vector array with elements
A(1), A(2), and A(3). *DIM,B,,2,3 defines a 2x3 array with elements B(1,1), B(2,1), B(1,2), B(2,2),
B(1,3), and B(2,3). Use *STATUS,Par to display elements of array Par . You can write formatted data
files (tabular formatting) from data held in arrays through the *VWRITE command.
If you use table parameters to define boundary conditions, then Var1 , Var2 , and/or Var3 can either
specify a primary variable (listed in Table:*DIM - Primary Variables) or can be an independent
parameter. If specifying an independent parameter, then you must define an additional table for the
independent parameter. The additional table must have the same name as the independent parameter
and may be a function of one or more primary variables or another independent parameter. All
independent parameters must relate to a primary variable.
Tabular load arrays can be defined in both global Cartesian (default) or local (see below) coordinate
systems by specifying CSYSID, as defined in LOCAL. For batch operations, you must specify your
coordinate system first.
The following constraints apply when you specify a local coordinate system for your tabular loads:
Only Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems are supported
Angle values for Y in cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems must be input in degrees and must be
positive values between 0 and 360 degrees ( 0 Y 360)
Angle values for Z in spherical coordinate system must be input in degrees and must be positive values
between -90 and +90 ( -90 Z 90)
If you are specifying a 4- or 5-D array or table, four additional fields ( LMAX , MMAX , Var4 , and Var5 ) are
available. Thus, for a 4-D table, the command syntax would be:
*DIM,Par,Type,IMAX,JMAX,KMAX,LMAX,Var1,Var2,Var3,Var4,CSYSID
*DIM
For a 5-D table, the command syntax would be:

*DIM,Par,Type,IMAX,JMAX,KMAX,LMAX,MMAX,Var1,Var2,Var3,Var4,Var5,CSYSID
You cannot create or edit 4- or 5-D arrays or tables using the GUI.
See Array Parameters for a detailed discussion on and examples for using array parameters.
Table:*DIM - Primary Variables
Primary Variable
Time
Frequency
X-coordinate location
Y-coordinate location
Z-coordinate location
Temperature
Velocity
Pressure
Cyclic sector number
Label for Var1, Var2, Var3

TIME
FREQ
X
Y
Z
TEMP
VELOCITY
PRESSURE
SECTOR
Note: The X, Y, and Z coordinate locations listed above are valid in gobal Cartesian, or
local (Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical) coordinate systems. The VELOCITY label
is applicable only to the calculated fluid velocity in element FLUID116.
When using PRESSURE as a primary variable, the underlying element must have the
pressure DOF associated with it. For example, if you use FLUID141 or FLUID142,
apply SF,ALL,CONV,%presh%,20.0 to apply a tabular film coefficient that will be
evaluated correctly, based on the pressure. However, if the underlying element is
SURF151 or SURF152, the film coefficient will not change because there is no
underlying pressure.
The frequency label (FREQ) is valid for harmonic analyses only.
If you use table parameters to define boundary conditions, the table names ( Par ) must not exceed 32
characters.
In thermal analyses, if you apply tabular loads as a function of temperature but the rest of the model is
linear (e.g., includes no temperature-dependent material properties or radiation ), you should turn on
Newton-Raphson iterations (NROPT,FULL) to evaluate the temperature-dependent tabular boundary
conditions correctly.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>Parameters>Array Parameters>Define/Edit
1.16.Index by Element Number

Element and
Keywords
Element Options
BEAM188 - 3-D Finite Strain Beam

Static Structural
Static Structural
Tapered Section
BEAM189 - 3-D Finite Strain Beam
Static Structural
CIRCU94 - Piezoelectric Circuit

Transient Piezoelectric -
circuit
CIRCU124 - General Circuit Element
Current Conduction,
Static, Harmonic
Transient
CIRCU125 - Common or Zener Diode

Transient
COMBIN14 - Spring-Damper
Coupled Field
Longitudinal
Modal
Longitudinal
Modal
Torsional
Modal, Harmonic
Longitudinal
Response
Static
Longitudinal
Transient Dynamic
Longitudinal
Spectral Analysis
Longitudinal
COMBIN37 - Control
Steady-State Thermal
COMBIN39 - Nonlinear Spring
Transient Dynamic
COMBIN40 - Combination
Static Structural
Static Structural
Mass
Modal, Transient
Mass
Dynamic
Modal, Spectrum
Mass
Modal, Harmonic
Mass
Response
Transient Dynamic
Mass
Transient Dynamic
Mass, Friction
Transient Dynamic
Mass, Gap
Transient Dynamic
Mass, Damping, Gap
Transient Dynamic
Mass, Damping
Harmonic Response
Mass, Damping
Test Cases
VM216, VM217, VM222, VM239,

VM247, VM257
VM34
VM216, VM217, VM222, VM258
VM237
VM117, VM207, VM208

VM226
VM226
VM171
VM45, VM52, VM89, VM154, VM247
VM47
VM90
VM197
VM9
VM259
VM159
VM156
VM36
VM69
VM182
VM68
VM183
VM9, VM79
VM73
VM81
VM83
VM71, VM72, VM74, VM75
VM86, VM88
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_CH1_IDXELEMNUM.html[28/04/2013 07:12:32 p.m.]
Harmonic Response
Mass
COMBI214 - 2-D Spring-Damper Bearing
Modal
Longitudinal
CONTAC12 - 2-D Point-to-Point Contact 1
Static Structural
Gap Size by Node Location
Static Structural
Friction, Nonzero SeparatedInterface Stiffness
Transient Electrostatic
VM87
VM254, VM263, VM261
VM27
VM29
VM236
CONTAC52 - 3-D Point-to-Point Contact 1

Static Structural
Gap Size by Node Location
VM27
CONTA171 - 2-D Surface-to-Surface Contact
Static Structural
VM211, VM255
Thermal Structural
VM229
Contact
CONTA172 - 2-D 3-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
Static Structural
VM211
Transient Thermal
VM229
CONTA173 - 3-D Surface-to-Surface Contact
Static Structural
VM211
Static Structural
VM211
CONTA175 - 2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact
VM191, VM201, VM65, VM23, VM64

Static Structural,
Transient Dynamic
CONTA176 - 3-D Line-to-Line Contact
Static Structural
VM266
CONTA177 - 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
Transient Dynamic
VM265
CONTA178 - 3-D Node-to-Node Contact
Static Structural
VM63
CPT213 - 2-D 8-Node Coupled Pore Pressure Mechanical Solid Element
Static Structural
VM260, VM264
FLUID29 - 2-D Acoustic Fluid
Coupled Field, Modal
Structure at Interface
VM177
Analysis
Acoustics, Modal
No Structure at Interface
VM177
Analysis
Coupled Field,
Structure at Interface
VM177
Harmonic Response
Acoustics, Harmonic
No Structure at Interface
VM177
Response
FLUID38 - Dynamic Fluid Coupling
Modal
VM154
FLUID79 - 2-D Contained Fluid
Fluid Flow
VM149

Fluid Flow
FLUID81 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid

Modal
Mode 1
FLUID116 - Thermal Fluid Pipe
Fluid Flow
Fluid Flow
Flow Losses (Additional Length)
Fluid Flow
Flow Losses (Loss Coefficient)
Pump Head
FLUID136 - 3-D Squeeze Film Fluid Element
Harmonic
FLUID141 - 2-D Fluid-Thermal

CFD Thermal
Axisymmetric
CFD Multispecies
Axisymmetric
CFD Non Newtonian
Axisymmetric
CFD, Thermal, Fluid
Flow
CFD, Thermal, Fluid

Flow
HF120 - 3-D High Frequency Brick Solid
Mode-frequency
Magnetic
Full Harmonic Magnetic
INFIN9 - 2-D Infinite Boundary
Static Magnetic
Static Magnetic
AZ Degree of Freedom
Static Magnetic
Coupled Field
INFIN110 - 2-D Infinite Solid

Electrostatic, Harmonic
Electrostatic
INTER115 - 3-D Magnetic Interface

Static Magnetic
INTER192 - 2-D 4-Node Gasket

Static Structural

Static Structural

Static Structural

Static Structural
INTER202 - 2-D 4-Node Cohesive Zone
VM150
VM154
VM122
VM126
VM123
VM124
VM245
VM121
VM209
VM219
VM178
VM46
VM212
VM213
VM188
VM165
VM190
VM172
VM49, VM206, VM207
VM51
VM189
VM249
VM249
VM250
VM250
Static Structural
LINK11 - Linear Actuator

Static Structural
LINK31 - Radiation Link

LINK33 - 3-D Conduction Bar
Transient Thermal
LINK34 - Convection
AUX12
Analogous Diffusion Variables
Link
Temperature-Dependent Film
Coefficient
LINK68 - Thermal-Electric Line
Current Conduction
Coupled Field
Multi-field Coupling
LINK180 - 3-D Spar (or Truss)
Static Structural
Static Structural
Creep and Initial Strain
Static Structural
Plasticity
Static Structural
Stress Stiffening
Static Structural
Thermal Stress
Modal, Static Structural
Modal, Static Structural,
Harmonic
Transient Dynamic
Transient Dynamic
Plasticity
MASS21 - Structural Mass
Static Structural
Modal
Modal
Rotary Inertia
Transient Dynamic
Harmonic Response
MASS71 - Thermal Mass

Transient Thermal
MATRIX27 - Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix

Static Structural
MATRIX50 - Superelement (or Substructure)

Static Structural,
Substructure
Radiation Matrix
Steady-State Thermal, Substructural
Substruction
Steady-State Thermal AUX12
MPC184 - Multipoint Constraint Elements
VM248
VM195
VM106, VM107
VM92, VM93, VM94, VM95, VM110,
VM114, VM115, VM116,
VM125, VM147
VM164
VM92, VM94, VM95,VM97, VM107,
VM109, VM110, VM159
VM116
VM117
VM170
VM1, VM4, VM146, VM194
VM132
VM11
VM31
VM3, VM27
VM53
VM76
VM84, VM85, VM91
VM80
VM131
VM45, VM57, VM89, VM254
VM47, VM48, VM52,VM57
VM65, VM77, VM80,VM81, VM91,
VM156, VM257
VM90
VM109, VM159
VM41
VM141
VM125
VM147
Static Structural
Transient Dynamics
PIPE288 - 2-D Coupled-Field Solid

Static Structural
Modal
PLANE13 - 2-D Coupled-Field Solid

Coupled Field
Plane Strain with Multi-field
Coupling
Coupled Field
Axisymmetric w/ AZ DOF and Multifield Coupling
Coupled Field
Plane Stress with Multi-field
Coupling
Harmonic Magnetic
Coupled Field
AZ and VOLT Degree of Freedom,
Transient Magnetic
Coupled Field
AZ and VOLT Degree of Freedom,
Static Magnetic
Coupled Field
Thermal-Structural Coupling
Harmonic Response
Transient Thermal
Static Structural
PLANE25 - 4-Node Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural

Static Structural
Mode 1
Modal
Mode 0 and 2
PLANE35 - 2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid
Steady-State Thermal Axisymmetric
Steady-State Radiosity
PLANE53 - 2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
Static Magnetic,
Harmonic
PLANE55 - 2-D Thermal Solid
Steady-State Thermal Axisymmetric
Transient Thermal
Axisymmetric
Steady-State Thermal Axisymmetric, Analogous Flow Field
VM195, VM239, VM240

VM179, VM257, VM258
VM7
VM48, VM57
VM171
VM172
VM174
VM166
VM185
VM167
VM186
VM165
VM23
VM189
VM229
VM231
Solid
VM43
VM67
VM58
VM228
VM188, VM206, VM207, VM220
VM32, VM102
VM111
VM163
VM98, VM99, VM100,VM105,
VM118, VM193
VM104, VM113
Transient Thermal
PLANE75 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Thermal Solid

Steady-State Thermal Mode 1
VM108
PLANE77 - 2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid
Transient Thermal
Axisymmetric
VM112
Transient Thermal
VM28
Steady-State Radiosity
VM227
PLANE78 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
Steady-State Thermal Mode 2
VM160
PLANE83 - 8-Node Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Solid

Static Structural
Modes 0 and 1
VM140
PLANE121 - 2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid
Electrostatic
VM49, VM120
PLANE182 - 2-D Structural Solid
Spectrum Analysis
VM259
Static Structural
VM191, VM201, VM211, VM248,

VM249, VM251, VM252, VM255,
VM262, VM267, VM268, VM269
Creep
VM224
Static Structural
Rate-independent Viscoplasticity
VM198
Static Structural
Rate-dependent Viscoplasticity
VM199
PLANE183 - 2-D 8-Node Structural Solid
Static Structural
VM56, VM142, VM180, VM211,

VM243, VM249, VM251, VM252,
VM256
Creep
VM224
Static Structural,
Plane Stress with Thickness Input
VM141
Substructure
Static Structural
Axisymmetric
VM63, VM200
Modal
Axisymmetric
VM181
Static Structural
VM198
Static Structural
VM199
PLANE223 - 2-D 8-Node Coupled-Field Solid
VM237
Static and Transient
Piezoelectric
Static Piezoresistive
VM238
VM119
Coupled Field
VM174
Transient Thermal
VM229
PRETS179 - Pretension
Static Structural
Preloading
VM225
SHELL28 - Shear/Twist Panel
Modal
VM202
SHELL41 - Membrane Shell
Static Structural
VM20, VM153
Static Structural, Modal
VM153
SHELL61 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
Static Structural
Mode 1
VM44
Modal, Static Structural Mode 0, 1, and 2
VM152
Modal
Mode 0, 1, and 2
VM151
SHELL63 - Elastic Shell 1
Static Structural
Static Structural
Snap-Through Buckling
Modal
Coupled Field,
Harmonic Response
VM34, VM39, VM54,VM139

VM17
VM54, VM62, VM66
VM177
SHELL131 - 4-Node Thermal Shell

Steady State Thermal
SHELL157 - Coupled Thermal-Electric Shell

Coupled-Field
SHELL181 - Finite Strain Shell

Static Structural
Modal
Substructure
Harmonic
Transient Dynamic
Static, Large Deflection

SHELL208 - 2-Node Finite Strain Axisymmetric Shell
Static, Large Deflection
Static Structural
Static Structural
Stress Stiffening, Large Deflection
Static Structural, Modal Stress Stiffening
SHELL281 - 8-Node Finite Strain Shell
Static Structural
Modal
Substructure
Response Spectrum
Analysis
Modal Analysis
Modal Harmonic
Response
SOLID5 - 3-D Coupled-Field Solid
Coupled Field
Static Structural
Displacement Field
Multi-field Coupling, Anisotropic
Material Properties
Coupled Field,
Multi-field Coupling, Anisotropic
Harmonic Response
Material Properties
Coupled Field
MAG Degree of Freedom
Static Structural
SOLID62 - 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
Coupled Field
SOLID65 - 3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid

Static Structural
Cracking
SOLID70 - 3-D Thermal Solid
Transient Thermal
SOLID87 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid

VM97, VM103
VM215
VM6, VM7, VM17, VM20, VM34,
VM39, VM42, VM54, VM82, VM242
VM54, VM62, VM66, VM153
VM141
VM177
VM265
VM26, VM218
VM218
VM13, VM15, VM22
VM137, VM138
VM55
VM6, VM17, VM42, , VM26, VM35,
VM144, VM78
VM54, VM62, VM66
VM141
VM203
VM60
VM203
VM173
VM184, VM187
VM175
VM176
VM33
VM168
VM173
VM172
VM146
VM95, VM101, VM118
VM192
VM96
SOLID90 - 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid

SOLID96 - 3-D Magnetic-Scalar Solid
Harmonic Response
CMVP Formulation
SOLID97 - 3-D Magnetic Solid
Coupled Field
SOLID98 - Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid

Static Structural
Displacement Field
Static Magnetic
MAG Degree of Freedom
SOLID117 - 3-D 20-Node Magnetic Solid
Static Magnetic
SOLID122 - 3-D 20-Node Electrostatic Solid

Electrostatic
SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid

Static Structural
Static Structural
Material Matrix
Static Structural
Static Structural
Static Structural
VM161, VM162
VM189
VM172, VM189
VM184, VM187
VM169, VM190
VM241
VM51
VM7, VM37, VM56, VM82, VM143,
VM191, VM196, VM201, VM211,
VM225, VM240, VM250, VM251,
VM253, VM256, VM144
VM145
VM198
VM199
VM56, VM82, VM143, VM144,
VM148, VM200, VM210, VM211,
VM250, VM253, VM256, VM269
SOLID187 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid

Static Structural
VM184, VM187, VM244, VM246

SOLID226 - 3-D Thermal-Electric Solid
Transient Thermal
VM33
Coupled Field
VM119
SOLID272 - General axisymmetric solid with 4 base nodes
Modal Analysis
VM263
SOLSH190 - 3-D Structural Solid Shell
Static Structural
VM37, VM54, VM82, VM139, VM144

Modal
VM54, VM66
SOURC36 - Current Source
Static Magnetic
VM168, VM190
SURF151 - 2-D Thermal Surface Effect
Steady-State Thermal AUX12
VM147
VM58
Static Structural
No Midside Nodes
VM192
SURF153 - 2-D Structural Surface Effect
Static Structural
Axisymmetric, No Midside Nodes
VM38
Static Structural
Axisymmetric, No Midside Nodes
VM38
TARGE169 - 2-D Target Segment

Static Structural
Thermal Structural
Contact
Static Structural
Transient Dynamics
Static Structural
VM23, VM64, VM65, VM191,

VM201, VM211, VM255
VM229
VM191, VM201, VM211, VM239,

VM266
VM257, VM265
VM199
1. Documentation for this element is found in the Feature Archive.

BEAM188
BEAM188
3-D 2-Node Beam
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS

BEAM188 Element Description

BEAM188 is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick beam structures. The element is
based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects. The element provides
options for unrestrained warping and restrained warping of cross-sections.
The element is a linear, quadratic, or cubic two-node beam element in 3-D. BEAM188 has six or seven
degrees of freedom at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations
about the x, y, and z directions. A seventh degree of freedom (warping magnitude) is optional. This
element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
The element includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with large deflection. The
provided stress-stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability
problems (using eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear
stabilization).
Elasticity, plasticity, creep and other nonlinear material models are supported. A cross-section associated
with this element type can be a built-up section referencing more than one material.
Figure188.1BEAM188 Geometry
BEAM188 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

BEAM188 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, which is a first-order shear-deformation theory:
transverse-shear strain is constant through the cross-section (that is, cross-sections remain plane and
undistorted after deformation).
The element can be used for slender or stout beams. Due to the limitations of first-order sheardeformation theory, slender to moderately thick beams can be analyzed. Use the slenderness ratio of a
beam structure (GAL 2 / (EI) ) to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
A
Area of the cross-section
L
Length of the member (not the element length)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_BEAM188.html[28/04/2013 07:12:38 p.m.]
BEAM188
EI
Flexural rigidity
Calculate the ratio using some global distance measures, rather than basing it upon individual element
dimensions. The following illustration shows an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever
beam subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to any other application, the
example serves well as a general guideline. A slenderness ratio greater than 30 is recommended.
Figure188.2Transverse-Shear Deformation Estimation
Slenderness Ratio (GAL 2 /(EI))

25
50
100
1000
Timoshenko / Euler-Bernoulli
1.120
1.060
1.030
1.003
The element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS
command.
BEAM188 does not use higher-order theories to account for variation in distribution of shear stresses.
Use solid elements if such effects must be considered.
BEAM188 supports restrained warping analysis by making available a seventh degree of freedom at
each beam node. By default, BEAM188 elements assume that the warping of a cross-section is small
enough that it can be neglected (KEYOPT(1) = 0). You can activate the warping degree of freedom by
using KEYOPT(1) = 1. With the warping degree of freedom activated, each node has seven degrees of
freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, and WARP. With KEYOPT(1) = 1, bimoment and bicurvature
are output.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 (linear, default), BEAM188 is based on linear shape functions. It uses one point of
integration along the length; therefore, all element solution quantities are constant along the length. For
example, when SMISC quantities are requested at nodes I and J, the centroidal values are reported for
both end nodes. This option is recommended if the element is used as stiffener and it is necessary to
maintain compatibility with a first-order shell element (such as SHELL181). Only constant bending
moments can be represented exactly with this option. Mesh refinement is generally required in typical
applications.
When KEYOPT(3) = 2 (quadratic), BEAM188 has an internal node in the interpolation scheme, effectively
making this a beam element based on quadratic shape functions. Two points of integration are used,
resulting in linear variation of element solution quantities along the length. Linearly varying bending
moments are represented exactly.
When KEYOPT(3) = 3 (cubic), BEAM188 has two internal nodes and adopts cubic shape functions.
Quadratically varying bending moments are represented exactly. Three points of integration along the
length are used, resulting in quadratic variation of element solution quantities along the length. Unlike
typical cubic (Hermitian) formulations, cubic interpolation is used for all displacements and rotations.
Quadratic and cubic options are recommended when higher-order element interpolations are desired in
situations where:
The element is associated with tapered cross-sections.
BEAM188
Nonuniform loads (including tapered distributed loads) exist within the element; in this case, the
cubic option gives superior results over the quadratic option.
(For partially distributed loads and non-nodal point loads, only the cubic option is valid.)
The element may undergo highly nonuniform deformation (for example, when individual frame
members in civil engineering structures are modeled with single elements).
In practice, when two elements with restrained warping come together at a sharp angle, you need to
couple the displacements and rotations, but leave the out-of-plane warping decoupled. This is normally
accomplished by having two nodes at a physical location and using appropriate constraints. This process
is made easier (or automated) by the ENDRELEASE command, which decouples the out-of plane
warping for any adjacent elements with cross-sections intersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
BEAM188 allows change in cross-sectional inertia properties as a function of axial elongation. By default,
the cross-sectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved after deformation.
The default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you can choose to keep the
cross-section constant or rigid. Scaling is not an option for nonlinear general beam sections
(SECTYPE,,GENB).
Two limitations are associated with the quadratic and cubic options in BEAM188:
Although the elements employ higher-order interpolations, the initial geometry of BEAM188 is
treated as straight.
Because the internal nodes are inaccessible, no boundary/loading/initial conditions are allowed on
these internal nodes.
As a result of the limitations associated with the quadratic and cubic options, you will notice
discrepancies in the results between BEAM189 and the quadratic option of BEAM188 if the midside
nodes of the BEAM189 model have specified boundary/loading/initial conditions and/or the midside
nodes are not located exactly at the element midpoint. Similarly, the cubic option of BEAM188 may not
be identical to a traditional cubic (Hermitian) beam element.
For the mass matrix and evaluation of consistent load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that
used for stiffness matrix is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices.
Use LUMPM,ON to activate lumped mass matrix. Consistent mass matrix is used by default. An added
mass per unit length can be input with the ADDMAS section controls. See "BEAM188 Input Summary".
The St. Venant warping functions for torsional behavior are determined in the undeformed state, and
are used to define shear strain even after yielding. No options are available for recalculating in deformed
configuration the torsional shear distribution on cross-sections during the analysis and possible partial
plastic yielding of cross-sections. As such, large inelastic deformation due to torsional loading should be
treated and verified with caution. Under such circumstances, alternative modeling using solid or shell
elements is recommended.
BEAM188 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, coordinate system, and pressure directions for this element are shown in
Figure 188.1. BEAM188 is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system.
Node K is a preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
nodes and beam meshing, see Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes in the Modeling and
Meshing Guide . See the LMESH and LATT command descriptions for details on generating the K node
automatically.
BEAM188 can also be defined without the orientation node K. In this case, the element x-axis is oriented
from node I (end 1) toward node J (end 2). If no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the
element y-axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. For the case where the
element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is
oriented parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). To control the element orientation about the element
BEAM188
x-axis, use the orientation-node option. If both are defined, the orientation-node option takes
precedence. The orientation node K, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the element x and
z-axes (as shown). If using this element in a large-deflection analysis, be aware that the location of the
orientation node K is used only to initially orient the element.
The number of degrees of freedom depends on the value of KEYOPT(1). When KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the
default), six degrees of freedom occur at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z
directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, a seventh degree of
freedom (warping magnitude) is also considered.
The beam element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. (See Beam Analysis and cross-sections in the
Structural Analysis Guide for details). A section is associated with the beam elements by specifying the
section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute. In addition to a
constant cross-section, you can also define a tapered cross-section by using the TAPER option on the
SECTYPE command (see Defining a Tapered Beam).
BEAM188 ignores any real constant data. See the SECCONTROLS command for defining the
transverse-shear stiffness and added mass.
A summary of the element input is given in "BEAM188 Input Summary".
BEAM188 Cross-Sections
BEAM188 can be associated with these cross-section types:
Standard library section types or user meshes which define the geometry of the beam crosssection (SECTYPE,,BEAM). The material of the beam is defined either as an element attribute
(MAT), or as part of section buildup (for multi-material cross-sections).
Generalized beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), where the relationships of generalized
stresses to generalized strains are input directly.
Tapered beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,TAPER), where a standard library section or user mesh
defines each end of the beam.
Standard Library Sections
BEAM188 elements are provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.)
automatically at a number of section points using SECTYPE and SECDATA. Each section is assumed to
be an assembly of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four
integration points and each can be associated with an independent material type.
Figure188.3Cross-Section Cells
BEAM188
The number of cells in the cross-sections influences the accuracy of section properties and ability to
model nonlinear stress-strain relationship through the cross-section. The element has a nested structure
of integration (along the length and in the cross-section).
When the material associated with the elements has inelastic behavior or when the temperature varies
across the section, constitutive calculations are performed at the section integration points. For more
common elastic applications, the element uses precalculated properties of the section at the element
integration points; however, the stresses and strains are calculated in the output pass at the section
integration points. Element output is available at the integration points, as well as values extrapolated to
the element and section nodes.
If the section is assigned the subtype ASEC, only the generalized stresses and strains (axial force,
bending moments, transverse shears, curvatures, and shear strains) are available for output. 3-D
contour plots and deformed shapes are not available. The ASEC subtype is displayed only as a thin
rectangle to verify beam orientation.
BEAM188 is helpful for analyzing built-up beams (that is, those fabricated of two or more pieces of
material joined together to form a single, solid beam). The pieces are assumed to be perfectly bonded
together; therefore, the beam behaves as a single member.
The multi-material cross-section capability is applicable only where the assumptions of a beam behavior
(Timoshenko or Bernoulli-Euler beam theory) holds.
In other words, what is supported is a simple extension of a conventional Timoshenko beam theory. It
can be used in applications such as:
Bimetallic strips
Beams with metallic reinforcement
Sensors where layers of a different material has been deposited
BEAM188 does not account for coupling of bending and twisting at the section stiffness level. The
transverse shears are also treated in an uncoupled manner. This can have a significant effect on layered
composite and sandwich beams if the lay-up is unbalanced.
Always validate the application of BEAM188, either with experiments or other numerical analysis. Use the
restrained warping option with built-up sections after due verification.
KEYOPT(15) specifies the format of the .rst results file. For KEYOPT(15) = 0, the format gives only one
averaged result at each section corner node; therefore, this option typically applies to homogeneous
sections. For KEYOPT(15) = 1, the format gives one result for each section integration point; therefore,
this option typically applies to built-up sections with multiple materials (and generates a larger results
file).
BEAM188
Generalized Beam Cross-Sections

When using nonlinear general beam sections, neither the geometric properties nor the material is
explicitly specified. Generalized stress implies the axial force, bending moments, torque, and transverseshear forces. Similarly, generalized strain implies the axial strain, bending curvatures, twisting curvature,
and transverse-shear strains. (For more information, see nonlinear general beam sections.) This is an
abstract method for representing cross-section behavior; therefore, input often consists of experimental
data or the results of other analyses.
Generally, BEAM188 supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverseshear strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS
command.
When the beam element is associated with a generalized beam (SECTYPE,,GENB) cross-section type,
the relationship of transverse-shear force to the transverse-shear strain can be nonlinear elastic or
plastic, an especially useful capability when flexible spot welds are modeled. In such a case, the
SECCONTROLS command does not apply.
Tapered Beam Cross-Sections
A linearly tapered beam is defined by specifying a standard library section or user mesh at each end of
the beam. The section geometries are specified at global coordinates, then linear interpolated and
evaluated at the element. The sections at the end points must be topologically identical. (For more
information, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM188 Loads
Forces are applied at the nodes (which also define the element x-axis). If the centroidal axis is not
colinear with the element x-axis, applied axial forces will cause bending. Applied shear forces cause
torsional strains and moment if the centroid and shear center of the cross-section are different. The
nodes should therefore be located at the desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the
OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments of the SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program
uses the centroid as the reference axis for the beam elements.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures can be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 188.1. Positive normal pressures act into the
element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
At both ends of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:
At the element x-axis (T(0,0))
At one unit from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(1,0))
At one unit from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,1))
Element locations (T(y,z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 188.1.
For beam elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of
values, 1 through 6 for temperatures T I(0,0), T I(1,0), T I(0,1), T J (0,0), T J (1,0), and T J (0,1). This input
can be used to specify temperature gradients that vary linearly both over the cross section and along
the length of the element.
The following defaults apply to element temperature input:
If all temperatures after the first are unspecified, they default to the first. This pattern applies a
uniform temperature over the entire element. (The first coordinate temperature, if unspecified,
defaults to TUNIF.)
If all three temperatures at node I are input, and all temperatures at node J are unspecified, the
BEAM188
node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures. This pattern applies a
temperature gradient that varies linearly over the cross section but remains constant along the
length of the element.
For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Alternatively, temperatures at nodes I and J can be defined using nodal body loads
(BF,NODE ,TEMP, VAL1 ). When using a nodal body load to define a temperature, a uniform temperature is
applied over the cross section at the specified node.
You can apply an initial stress state to this element via the INISTATE command. For more information,
see "Initial State" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
BEAM188 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (K, the orientation node, is optional but recommended)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT(1) = 0
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Section Controls
TXZ, TXY, ADDMAS (See SECCONTROLS)
(TXZ and TXY default to A*GXZ and A*GXY, respectively, where A = cross-sectional area)
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY,or NUXY), GXY, GXZ
ALPX, (or CTEX, or THSX)
DENS, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressure--
face 1 (I-J) (-z normal direction)
face 2 (I-J) (-y normal direction)
face 3 (I-J) (+x tangential direction)
face 4 (I) (+x axial direction)
face 5 (J) (-x axial direction)
--I and J denote the end nodes.
Use a negative value for loading in the opposite direction.
Issue the SFBEAM command to specify surface loads.
For faces 1, 2, and 3, offsets apply only if you are using the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(0,0), T(1,0), T(0,1) at each end node
Special Features
BEAM188
Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL) [1]
Viscoelasticity (PRONY, SHIFT) [1]
Viscoplasticity/Creep (CREEP, RATE) [1]
Other material (USER) [1]
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Nonlinear stabilization
Birth and death (requires KEYOPT(11) = 1)
Automatic selection of element technology [2]
Generalized cross-section (nonlinear elastic, elasto-plastic, temperature-dependent)
Linear perturbation
1. Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. See
"Structures with Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of the material models.
2. See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and ETCONTROL for more
information about selecting element technologies.
KEYOPT(1)
Warping degree of freedom:
0--
Six degrees of freedom per node, unrestrained warping (default)
1--
Seven degrees of freedom per node (including warping). Bimoment and bicurvature are
output.
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling, applies only if NLGEOM,ON has been invoked:
0--
Cross-section is scaled as a function of axial stretch (default)
1--
Section is assumed to be rigid (classical beam theory)
KEYOPT(3)
Shape functions along the length:
0--
Linear (default)
2--
Quadratic
3--
BEAM188
Cubic
KEYOPT(4)
Shear stress output:
0--
Output only torsion-related shear stresses (default)
1--
Output only flexure-related transverse-shear stresses
2--
Output a combined state of the previous two types
KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(7), and KEYOPT(9)
active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(6)
Output control for section forces/moments and strains/curvatures:
0--
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures at integration points along the length
(default)
1--
Same as KEYOPT(6) = 0 plus current section area
2--
Same as KEYOPT(6) = 1 plus element basis directions (X,Y,Z)
3--
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(7)
Output control at integration points (not available when section subtype = ASEC):
0--
None (default)
1--
Maximum and minimum stresses/strains
2--
Same as KEYOPT(7) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section point
KEYOPT(9)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes (not available when
BEAM188
section subtype = ASEC):

0--
None (default)
1--
2--
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains along the exterior boundary of the crosssection
3--
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at all section nodes
KEYOPT(11)
Set section properties:
0--
Automatically determine if preintegrated section properties can be used (default)
1--
Use numerical integration of section
KEYOPT(12)
Tapered section treatment:
0--
Linear tapered section analysis; cross-section properties are evaluated at each Gauss point
(default). This is more accurate, but computationally intensive.
1--
Average cross-section analysis; for elements with tapered sections, cross-section properties
are evaluated at the centroid only. This is an approximation of the order of the mesh size;
however, it is faster.
KEYOPT(15)
Results file format:
0--
Store averaged results at each section corner node (default).
1--
Store non-averaged results at each section integration point. (The volume of data may be
excessive. This option is typically useful for built-up sections with multiple materials only.)
BEAM188 Output Data
BEAM188
The solution output associated with these elements is in two forms:

Nodal displacements and reactions included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as described in Table188.1:BEAM188 Element Output Definitions
To view 3-D deformed shapes for BEAM188, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for
static or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, you
must expand the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc =
YES option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in beam design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
bending in each direction separately; therefore, BEAM188 provides a linearized stress output as part of
its SMISC output record, as indicated in the following definitions:
SDIR is the stress component due to axial load.
SDIR = Fx/A, where Fx is the axial load (SMISC quantities 1 and 14) and A is the area of the crosssection.
SByT and SByB are bending-stress components.
SByT = -Mz * ymax / Izz
SByB = -Mz * ymin / Izz
SBzT = Mz * z max / Iyy
SBzB = Mz * z min / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments in the beam coordinate system (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16), as
shown in Figure 188.1. Coordinates ymax , ymin , z max , and z min are the maximum and minimum y, z
coordinates in the cross-section measured from the centroid. Values Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia
of the cross-section. Except for the ASEC type of beam cross-section, the program uses the maximum
and minimum cross-section dimensions. For the ASEC type of cross-section, the maximum and minimum
in each of y and y direction is assumed to be +0.5 to -0.5, respectively.
Corresponding definitions for the component strains are:
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELByT = -Kz * ymax
EPELByB = -Kz * ymin
EPELBzT = Kz * z max
EPELBzB = Kz * z min
where Ex, Ky, and Kz are generalized strains and curvatures (SMISC quantities 7,8,9, 20,21 and 22).
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. BEAM188 always employs
combined stresses in order to support nonlinear material behavior. When the elements are associated
with nonlinear materials, the component stresses can at best be regarded as linearized approximations
and should be interpreted with caution.
When using KEYOPT(7) with the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3), the integration point at the middle of
the element is reported last in the integration-point printout.
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name
BEAM188
method (ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT.
The R column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not
available.
Table188.1BEAM188 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
C.G.:X, Y, Z
Area
SF:y, z
SE:y, z
S:xx, xy, xz
EPEL:xx, xy, xz
EPTO:xx, xy, xz
EPTT:xx, xy, xz
EPPL:xx, xy, xz
EPCR:xx, xy, xz
EPTH:xx
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:EPEQ
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
TQ
TE
Ky, Kz
Ex
Fx
My, Mz
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
EPELDIR
EPELByT
Definition
Element number
Element connectivity
Material number
Element center of gravity
Area of cross-section
Section shear forces
Section shear strains
Section point stresses
Elastic strains
Section point total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL +
EPCR)
Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR+EPTH)
Section point plastic strains
Section point creep strains
Section point thermal strains
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain
Accumulated equivalent creep strain
Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not yielding)
Plastic work
Strain energy densities
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
3
3
3
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
3
3
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
5
5
5
5
5
Torsional moment
Torsional strain
Curvature
Axial strain
Axial force
Bending moments
Warping bimoment
Warping bicurvature
Axial direct stress
Bending stress on the element +Y side of the beam
Bending stress on the element -Y side of the beam
Bending stress on the element +Z side of the beam
Bending stress on the element -Z side of the beam
Axial strain at the end
Bending strain on the element +Y side of the beam.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
4
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
4
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
BEAM188
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
Bending strain on the element -Y side of the beam.

Bending strain on the element +Z side of the beam.
Bending strain on the element -Z side of the beam.
Temperatures at all section corner nodes.
Integration point locations
State variables
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
7
1. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item.

2. See KEYOPT(6) description.
3. See KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(9) descriptions.
5. Available if the element has a nonlinear material.
6. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI command is used.
7. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and TB,STATE command are used.
More output is described via the PRESOL command in POST1.
Table188.2:BEAM188 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item
and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. Table188.2:BEAM188 Item and
Sequence Numbers uses the following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table188.1:BEAM188 Element Output Definitions
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J
Table188.2BEAM188 Item and Sequence Numbers
ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Item
I
Output Quantity Name

Fx
My
Mz
TQ
SFz
SFy
Ex
Ky
Kz
TE
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
BEAM188
SEz
SEy
Area
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
EPELDIR
EPELByT
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
S:xx, xy, xz
EPEL:xx, xy, xz
EPTH:xx
EPPL:xx, xy, xz
EPCR:xx, xy, xz
EPTO:xx, xy, xz
EPTT:xx, xy, xz
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
LS
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPPL
LEPCR
LEPTO
LEPTT
11
12
13
27
24
25
26
29
28
31
32
33
34
35
41
42
43
44
45
51-53
CI[1],
CI[1],
AI[3],
CI[1],
CI[1],
CI[1],
CI[1],
DI[2]
DI[2]
BI[4]
DI[2]
DI[2]
DI[2]
DI[2]
30
36
37
38
39
40
46
47
48
49
50
54-56
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
AJ[3],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
BJ[4]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
1. CI and CJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element solution
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes (section
corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. CI and
CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, CI
and CJ are given as follows:
CI = ( nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
CJ = ( nnMax + nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes, and COMP is the stress or strain
component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can be visualized
with SECPLOT,,6.
2. DI and DJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section
integration points (section integration points where results are available), at element
Node I and J respectively. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the
ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = ( nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
DJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells, and COMP is the stress or strain
component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can be visualized with
SECPLOT,,7.
3. AI and AJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element thermal
BEAM188
strain quantities LEPTH at RST section nodes (section corner nodes where results are
available), at element Node I and J respectively. AI and AJ are applicable only when
KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, AI and AJ are given as follows:
AI = nn
AJ = nnMax + nn
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes. Locations of RST section nodes
can be visualized with SECPLOT,,6.
4. BI and BJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
thermal strain quantities LEPTH at RST section integration points (section integration
points where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. BI and BJ are
applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in
section cell nc, BI and BJ are given as follows:
BI = ( nc - 1) * 4 + i
BJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 4 + i
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells. Locations of RST section cells can
be visualized with SECPLOT,,7.
Transverse-Shear Stress Output

The BEAM188 formulation is based on three stress components:
one axial
two shear stress
The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. BEAM188 is based on first-order sheardeformation theory, also popularly known as Timoshenko beam theory. The transverse-shear strain is
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. The
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear-stress distribution coefficients across the beam
cross-section, and made available for output purposes. By default, the program outputs only the shear
stresses caused by torsional loading. Use KEYOPT(4) to activate output of shear stresses caused by
flexure or transverse loading.
The accuracy of transverse-shear distribution is directly proportional to the mesh density of cross-section
modeling (for determination of warping, shear center and other section geometric properties). The
traction-free state at the edges of a cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the crosssection.
By default, the program uses a mesh density (for cross-section modeling) that provides accurate results
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear-center determination. The default
mesh employed is also appropriate for nonlinear material calculations; however, more refined crosssection models may be necessary if the shear stress distribution due to transverse loads must be
captured very accurately. Increasing cross-section mesh size does not imply larger computational cost if
the associated material is linear. Use the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands to adjust cross-section
mesh density.
The transverse-shear distribution calculation ignores the effects of Poisson's ratio. The Poisson's ratio
affects the shear-correction factor and shear-stress distribution slightly, and this effect is ignored.
BEAM188 Assumptions and Restrictions

The beam must not have zero length.
BEAM188
By default (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the effect of warping restraint is assumed to be negligible.

Cross-section failure or folding is not accounted for.
Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if offsets are present.
The element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (that is, the default choice
in solution control).
Only moderately "thick" beams can be analyzed. See "BEAM188 Element Technology and Usage
Recommendations" for more information.
Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). Prestress
effects can be activated by the PSTRES command.
When the element is associated with nonlinear general beam sections (SECTYPE,,GENB),
additional restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Nonlinear General
Beam Sections.
The element coordinate system (/PSYMB,ESYS) is not relevant.
BEAM188 Product Restrictions

When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element
in addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional.
The only special features allowed are stress stiffening and large deflections.
7.1. Types of Buckling Analyses
7.1.Types of Buckling Analyses

Two techniques are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and
ANSYS Professional programs for predicting the buckling load and buckling mode shape of a structure:
nonlinear buckling analysis, and eigenvalue (or linear) buckling analysis. Because the two methods can
yield dramatically different results, it is necessary to first understand the differences between them.
7.1.1.Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

Nonlinear buckling analysis is usually the more accurate approach and is therefore recommended for
design or evaluation of actual structures. This technique employs a nonlinear static analysis with
gradually increasing loads to seek the load level at which your structure becomes unstable, as depicted
in Figure 7.1 (a).
Using the nonlinear technique, your model can include features such as initial imperfections, plastic
behavior, gaps, and large-deflection response. In addition, using deflection-controlled loading, you can
even track the post-buckled performance of your structure (which can be useful in cases where the
structure buckles into a stable configuration, such as "snap-through" buckling of a shallow dome).
7.1.2.Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Eigenvalue buckling analysis predicts the theoretical buckling strength (the bifurcation point) of an ideal
linear elastic structure. (See Figure 7.1 (b).) This method corresponds to the textbook approach to
elastic buckling analysis: for instance, an eigenvalue buckling analysis of a column will match the
classical Euler solution. However, imperfections and nonlinearities prevent most real-world structures
from achieving their theoretical elastic buckling strength. Thus, eigenvalue buckling analysis often yields
unconservative results, and should generally not be used in actual day-to-day engineering analyses.
Figure7.1Buckling Curves
(a) Nonlinear load-deflection curve, (b) Linear (Eigenvalue) buckling curve

VM216
VM216
Lateral Buckling of a Right Angle Frame
Overview
Reference:
Analysis Type(s):
Element Type(s):
Input Listing:
J. C. Simo, L. Vu-Quoc, "Three-Dimensional Finite-Strain Rod Model,

Part II", Computer Methods in Applied Mechanical Engineering , Vol. 58,
1986, pp. 79-116.
Static Analysis (ANTYPE = 0)
3-D Linear Finite Strain Beam Elements (BEAM188)
3-D Quadratic Finite Strain Beam Elements (BEAM189)
vm216.dat
Test Case
A 0.6in thick plate that is 30in wide is fashioned into a cantilever right angle frame, and is subjected to
an in-plane fixed end load (Fx). The frame is driven to buckling mode by a perturbation load (Fz)
applied at the free end, normal to the plane of the frame. This perturbation is removed close to the
buckling load. Determine the critical load.
Figure216.1Right Angle Frame Problem Sketch
Material Properties
Ex = 71240 psi
Nuxy = 0.31
Geometric Properties
lzz = 0.54 in
Loading
Fz = 1 x 10 -3 lb
Fx = 1.485 lb
lyy = 1350 in4

t = 0.6 in
w = 30 in
L = 240 in
Analysis Assumptions and Modeling Notes

A first analysis is performed using BEAM188 elements. A second analysis is also performed using
BEAM189 elements.
Results Comparison
Critical Load
BEAM188
BEAM189
Target
1.09
1.09
ANSYS
1.067
1.065
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_VM216.html[28/04/2013 07:13:08 p.m.]
Ratio
0.979
0.978
VM216
Figure216.2Displacement Tip vs. Applied End Force (Fx)
Figure216.3Deformed Shape, Side View
Figure216.4Deformed Shape, Top View
VM216
ANTYPE
ANTYPE
ANTYPE, Antype, Status, LDSTEP, SUBSTEP, Action

Specifies the analysis type and restart status.

MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS FL EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Antype
Analysis type (defaults to the previously specified analysis type, or to STATIC if none specified):
STATICor0 Perform a static analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
BUCKLEor1 Perform a buckling analysis. Implies that a previous static solution was
performed with prestress effects calculated [PSTRES,ON]. Valid for structural
degrees of freedom only.
MODALor2 Perform a modal analysis. Valid for structural and fluid degrees of freedom.
HARMICor3 Perform a harmonic analysis. Valid for structural, fluid, magnetic, and electrical
degrees of freedom.
TRANSor4 Perform a transient analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
SUBSTRor7 Perform a substructure analysis. Valid for all degrees of freedom.
SPECTRor8 Perform a spectrum analysis. Implies that a previous modal analysis was
performed. Valid for structural degrees of freedom only.
Status
Specifies the status of the analysis (new or restart):

NEW Specifies a new analysis (default). If NEW, the remaining fields on this command
are ignored.
RESTART Specifies a restart of a previous analysis. Valid only for structural static, structural
transient (full or mode-superposition methods), and thermal analyses. For modal
and substructure (backsubstitution method only) analyses, reuse the previous
.MODE and .SUB files, respectively.
This option resumes the .rdb file created at the start of solution. If boundary
conditions are deleted in solution (for example, after being used to create an initial
velocity or to establish initial contact), they will need to be deleted again after
issuing this command.
For modal analysis, reuses the existing modes extracted from the previous modal
analysis. Valid only with Antype = MODAL with Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or
Supernode modal solver. The load vectors, residual vectors, and enforced motion
vectors will be recalculated and stored.
VTREST Specifies the restart of a previous VT Accelerator analysis. Valid only with Antype =
STATIC, HARMIC, or TRANS.
LDSTEP
Specifies the load step at which a multiframe restart will begin.

For full transient and nonlinear static structural or thermal analyses, the default is the highest load
step number found in the Jobname.Rnnn files for the current jobname in the current directory.
For mode-superposition transient analyses, the default is none.
SUBSTEP
Specifies the substep at which a multiframe restart will begin.

For full transient and nonlinear static structural or thermal analyses, the default is the highest
substep number found for the specified LDSTEP in the Jobname.Rnnn files in the current directory.
For mode-superposition transient analyses, the default is none.
Action
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_ANTYPE.html[28/04/2013 07:13:13 p.m.]
ANTYPE
Specifies the manner of a multiframe restart. Not used for traditional restarts.
CONTINUE ANSYS will continue the analysis based on the specified LDSTEP and SUBSTEP
(default). The current load step will be continued. If the end of the load step is
encountered in the .Rnnn file, a new load step will be started. ANSYS will delete
all .Rnnn files, or .Mnnn files for mode-superposition transient analyses, beyond
the point of restart and will update the .LDHI file if a new load step is
encountered.
ENDSTEP At restart, force the specified load step ( LDSTEP) to end at the specified substep
( SUBSTEP), even though the end of the current load step has not been reached.
At the end of the specified substep, all loadings will be scaled to the level of the
current ending and stored in the .LDHI file. A run following this ENDSTEP will
start a new load step. This feature allows you to change the load level in the
middle of a load step. ANSYS will update the .LDHI file and delete all .Rnnn files,
or .Mnnn files for mode-superposition transient analyses, beyond the point of
ENDSTEP. The .Rnnn or .Mnnn file at the point of ENDSTEP will be rewritten to
record the rescaled load level.
RSTCREATE At restart, retrieve information to be written to the results file for the specified
load step ( LDSTEP) and substep ( SUBSTEP). Be sure to use OUTRES to write the
results to the results file. This action does not affect the .LDHI or .Rnnn files.
Previous items stored in the results file at and beyond the point of RSTCREATE
will be deleted. This option is not available for restart of a mode-superposition
transient analysis.
PERTURB At restart, a linear perturbation analysis (MODAL) will be performed for the
specified load step ( LDSTEP) and substep ( SUBSTEP). This action does not affect
the .LDHI , .Rnnn , or .RST files.
Note: For a linear perturbation analysis, you must set Action =
PERTURB; otherwise, the existing restart files, such as the
.LDHI , .Rnnn , or .RST file, may be modified by the linear
perturbation analysis. Use the PERTURB command to
indicate the desired analysis type (MODAL or BUCKLING).
Command Default
New static analysis.
Notes
The analysis type Antype cannot be changed if it is a restart run. Always save parameters before doing a
restart. You can perform a multiframe restart only for structural static, structural transient (full or modesuperposition methods), and thermal analyses.
If you use ANTYPE to change your analysis type in the same SOLVE session, ANSYS issues the
following note: Some analysis options have been reset to their defaults. Please verify current settings or
respecify as required. Typically, ANSYS resets commands such as NLGEOM, SSTIF, and EQSLV to
their default values.
Command
Option
Antype
Available Products
ANTYPE
STATIC
BUCKLE
MODAL
HARMONIC
TRANS
SUBSTR
SPECTR
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
PR PRN DS DSS FL EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PR PRN DS DSS <> <> EH <> PP <> EME MFS
PR PRN <> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
PR <> <> <> FL EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis

Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Restart
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Restart
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Basic
PSTRES
PSTRES
PSTRES, Key
Specifies whether prestress effects are calculated or included.
SOLUTION : Nonlinear Options

MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Key
Prestress key:
OFF Do not calculate (or include) prestress effects (default).
ON Calculate (or include) prestress effects.
Notes
The PSTRES command specifies whether or not prestress effects are to be calculated or included. The
command should be issued after the ANTYPE command.
Prestress effects are calculated in a static or transient analysis for inclusion in a buckling, modal,
harmonic (Method = FULL or REDUC), transient (Method = REDUC), or substructure generation analysis.
If used in the solution processor (/SOLU), this command is valid only within the first load step.
If the prestress effects are to be calculated in a nonlinear static or transient analysis (for a prestressed
modal analysis of a large-deflection solution), you can issue a SSTIF,ON command (rather than a
PSTRES,ON command) in the static analysis.
If you apply thermal body forces during a static analysis to calculate prestress effects, do not delete the
forces during any subsequent full harmonic response analyses. If you delete the thermal body forces,
the thermal prestress effects will not be included in the harmonic response analysis. Temperature loads
used to define the thermal prestress will also be used in the full harmonic response analysis as
sinusoidally time-varying temperature loads.
A prestress effect applied with non-follower loads resists rigid body rotation of the model. For example,
an unsupported beam with axial tensile forces applied to both ends will have two nonzero rotational rigid
body modes.
If tabular loading (*DIM,,TABLE) was used in the prestress static analysis step, the corresponding
value of TIME will be used for tabular evaluations in the modal analysis.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_PSTRES.html[28/04/2013 07:13:18 p.m.]
/SOLU
/SOLU
/SOLU
SESSION : Processor Entry

Notes
This command is valid only at the Begin Level.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Solution
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SOLU_sl.html[28/04/2013 07:13:26 p.m.]
2.1. SESSION Commands
2.1.SESSION Commands
These commands provide general control to the ANSYS session. The commands are grouped by
functionality.
Table2.1Run Controls
These SESSION commands control the overall characteristics of the ANSYS session,
including the jobname, Graphical User Interface behavior, and file switching.
/BATCH
Sets the program mode to "batch."
/CONFIG
Assigns values to ANSYS configuration parameters.
/CWD
Changes the current working directory.
/EOF
Exits the file being read.
/EXIT
Stops the run and returns control to the system.
/FILNAME
Changes the jobname for the analysis.
HELP
Displays help information on ANSYS commands and element types.
/INPUT
Switches the input file for the commands that follow.
KEYW
Sets a keyword used by the GUI for context filtering (GUI).
MEMM
Allows the current session to keep allocated memory
/MENU
Activates the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
/MSTART
Controls the initial GUI components.
/NERR
Limits the number of warning and error messages displayed.
/OUTPUT
Redirects text output to a file or to the screen.
PAUSE
Temporarily releases (pauses) the currently used product license so
that another application can use it.

/STATUS
Lists the status of items for the run.
/SYP
Passes a command string and arguments to the operating system.
/SYS
Passes a command string to the operating system.
/UI
Activates specified GUI dialog boxes.
/UIS
Controls the GUI behavior.
UNPAUSE
Restores use of a temporarily released (paused) product license.
(Applicable only after a previously issued PAUSE command.)

Table2.2Processor Entry
These SESSION commands are used to enter and exit the various processors in the
program.
/AUX2
Enters the binary file dumping processor.
/AUX3
Enters the results file editing processor.
/AUX12
Enters the radiation matrix generation processor.
/AUX15
Enters the IGES file transfer processor.
FINISH
Exits normally from a processor.
/OPT
Enters the design optimizer.
/POST1
Enters the database results postprocessor.
/POST26
Enters the time-history results postprocessor.
/PREP7
Enters the model creation preprocessor.
/QUIT
Exits a processor.
/SOLU
Table2.3Files
These SESSION commands are for file operations, such as deleting, copying,
listing.
ANSTOAQWA
Creates an AQWA-LINE input file from the current ANSYS model.
ANSTOASAS
Creates an ASAS input file from the current ANSYS model.
/ASSIGN
Reassigns a file name to an ANSYS file identifier.
/CLOG
Copies the session log file to a named file.
/COPY
Copies a file.
/DELETE
Deletes a file.
/FDELE
Deletes a binary file after it is used.
LGWRITE
Writes the database command log to a file.
*LIST
Displays the contents of an external, coded file.
/RENAME
Renames a file.
and
Table2.4List Controls
These SESSION commands are used to control listings and printed program output.
C***
Places a comment in the output.
/COM
Places a comment in the output.
/GO
Reactivates suppressed printout.
/GOLIST
Reactivates the suppressed data input listing.
/GOPR
Reactivates suppressed printout.
/NOLIST
Suppresses the data input listing.
/NOPR
Suppresses the expanded interpreted input data listing.
/AUX2
/AUX2
/AUX2
AUX2 : Binary Files

SESSION : Processor Entry
Notes
Enters the binary file dumping processor (ANSYS auxiliary processor AUX2). This processor is used to
dump the contents of certain ANSYS binary files for visual examination.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>File>List>Binary Files
Utility Menu>List>Files>Binary Files
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_AUX2.html[28/04/2013 07:13:35 p.m.]
2.9. AUX2 Commands
2.9.AUX2 Commands
These commands are used to examine the contents of binary files produced by the program. The
commands are grouped by functionality.
Table2.113Binary Files
These AUX2 commands are used to dump the contents of binary files.
/AUX2
DUMP
Dumps the contents of a binary file.
FILEAUX2
Specifies the binary file to be dumped.
FORM
Specifies the format of the file dump.
HBMAT
Writes an assembled global matrix in Harwell-Boeing format.
PSMAT
Writes an assembled global matrix to a postscript format that
graphically displays nonzero matrix values.

PTR
Dumps the record of a binary file.
DUMP
DUMP
DUMP, NSTRT , NSTOP

Dumps the contents of a binary file.
AUX2 : Binary Files

NSTRT , NSTOP
Dump file from record NSTRT (defaults to 1) to NSTOP (defaults to NSTRT ). If NSTRT = HEAD, dump
only record 1 of the file ( NSTOP and the format specification are ignored). If NSTRT = ALL, dump the
entire file.
Notes
Dumps the file named on the AUX2 FILEAUX2 command according the format specified on the FORM
command.
Menu Paths
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_DUMP.html[28/04/2013 07:13:47 p.m.]
FILEAUX2
FILEAUX2
FILEAUX2, Fname , Ident , -Specifies the binary file to be dumped.
Fname
AUX2 : Binary Files

The file name defaults to the current Jobname if Ident is specified.
Ident
--
ANSYS filename identifier. See the Basic Analysis Guide for file descriptions and identifiers. If not
an ANSYS identifier, Ident will be used as the filename extension.
Unused field.
Notes
Specifies the binary file to be dumped with the DUMP command.
Menu Paths
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_FILEAUX2.html[28/04/2013 07:13:51 p.m.]
Mechanical APDL Basic Analysis Guide
Table of Contents
1. Getting Started with ANSYS
1.1. Building the Model
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.1.3.
1.1.4.
1.1.5.
Specifying a Jobname and Analysis Title

Defining Element Types
Defining Element Real Constants
Defining Material Properties
Creating the Model Geometry

1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
1.2.4.
Defining the Analysis Type and Analysis Options

Applying Loads
Specifying Load Step Options
Initiating the Solution

2. Loading
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
What Are Loads?

Load Steps, Substeps, and Equilibrium Iterations
The Role of Time in Tracking
Stepped Versus Ramped Loads
Applying Loads
2.5.1. Solid-Model Loads: Advantages and Disadvantages
2.5.2. Finite-Element Loads: Advantages and Disadvantages
2.5.3. DOF Constraints
2.5.4. Applying Symmetry or Antisymmetry Boundary Conditions
2.5.5. Transferring Constraints
2.5.6. Forces (Concentrated Loads)
2.5.7. Surface Loads
2.5.8. Applying Body Loads
2.5.9. Applying Inertia Loads
2.5.10. Applying Coupled-Field Loads
2.5.11. Axisymmetric Loads and Reactions
2.5.12. Loads to Which the Degree of Freedom Offers No Resistance
2.5.13. Initial State Loading
2.5.14. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters
2.6. Specifying Load Step Options

2.6.1.
2.6.2.
2.6.3.
2.6.4.
2.6.5.
2.6.6.
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
General Options
Dynamics Options
Nonlinear Options
Output Controls
Biot-Savart Options
Spectrum Options
2.7. Creating Multiple Load Step Files

2.8. Defining Pretension in a Joint Fastener
2.8.1.
2.8.2.
2.8.3.
2.8.4.
Applying Pretension
Applying Pretension
Example Pretension
Example Pretension
to a Fastener Meshed as a Single Piece

to a Fastener Meshed as Two Pieces
Analysis
Analysis (GUI Method)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_bas/Hlp_G_BasTOC.html[28/04/2013 07:13:56 p.m.]
3. Using the Function Tool

3.1. Function Tool Terminology
3.2. Using the Function Editor
3.2.1. How the Function Editor Works
3.2.2. Creating a Function with the Function Editor
3.2.3. Using Your Function
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
Using the Function Loader

Applying Boundary Conditions Using the Function Tool
Function Tool Example
Graphing or Listing a Function
3.6.1. Graphing a Function
3.6.2. Listing a Function
4. Initial State
4.1. Specifying and Editing Initial State Values
4.2. Initial State Element Support
4.3. Initial State Application
4.3.1. Initial Stress Application
4.3.2. Initial Strain Application
4.3.3. Initial Plastic Strain Application
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
Initial State File Format

Using Coordinate Systems with Initial State
Initial State Limitations
Example Problems Using Initial State
4.7.1.
4.7.2.
4.7.3.
4.7.4.
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
Initial
Initial
Initial
Initial
Stress Problem Using the IST File

Stress Problem Using the INISTATE Command
Strain Problem Using the INISTATE Command
Plastic Strain Problem Using the INISTATE Command
4.8. Writing Initial State Values

4.8.1. Example: Output From the INISTATE Command's WRITE Option
5. Solution
5.1. Selecting a Solver
5.2. Types of Solvers
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
5.2.4.
5.2.5.
5.2.6.
The
The
The
The
The
The
Sparse Direct Solver

Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) Solver
Jacobi Conjugate Gradient (JCG) Solver
Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) Solver
Quasi-Minimal Residual (QMR) Solver
Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) Solver
5.3. Solver Memory and Performance

5.3.1.
5.3.2.
5.3.3.
5.3.4.
Running ANSYS Solvers under Shared Memory

Using ANSYS' Large Memory Capabilities with the Sparse Solver
Disk Space (I/O) and Postprocessing Performance for Large Memory Problems
Memory Usage on Windows 32-bit Systems
5.4. Using Special Solution Controls for Certain Types of Structural Analyses
5.4.1. Using Abridged Solution Menus

5.4.2. Using the Solution Controls Dialog Box
5.4.3. Accessing More Information
5.5. Using the PGR File to Store Data for Postprocessing
5.5.1. PGR File Capability
5.5.2. Selecting Information for the PGR File
5.5.3. PGR Commands
5.6. Obtaining the Solution
5.7. Solving Multiple Load Steps
5.7.1. Using the Multiple SOLVE Method
5.7.2. Using the Load Step File Method
5.7.3. Using the Array Parameter Method
5.8. Terminating a Running Job
5.9. Restarting an Analysis
5.9.1. Multiframe Restart
5.9.2. VT Accelerator Re-run
5.10. Exercising Partial Solution Steps
5.11. Singularities
5.12. Stopping Solution After Matrix Assembly
6. An Overview of Postprocessing
6.1. Postprocessors Available
6.2. The Results Files
6.3. Types of Data Available for Postprocessing
7. The General Postprocessor (POST1)
7.1. Reading Results Data into the Database
7.1.1.
7.1.2.
7.1.3.
7.1.4.
7.1.5.
7.1.6.
Reading in Results Data

Other Options for Retrieving Results Data
Creating an Element Table
Special Considerations for Principal Stresses
Reading in FLOTRAN Results
Resetting the Database
7.2. Reviewing Results in POST1

7.2.1.
7.2.2.
7.2.3.
7.2.4.
7.2.5.
7.2.6.
7.2.7.
Displaying Results Graphically

Surface Operations
Integrating Surface Results
Listing Results in Tabular Form
Mapping Results onto a Path
Estimating Solution Error
Using the Results Viewer to Access Your Results File Data
7.3. Using the PGR File in POST1

7.3.1. Specifying a New PGR File in POST1
7.3.2. Appending to an Existing PGR File in POST1
7.4. Additional POST1 Postprocessing
7.4.1. Rotating Results to a Different Coordinate System
7.4.2.
7.4.3.
7.4.4.
7.4.5.
7.4.6.
7.4.7.
7.4.8.
Performing Arithmetic Operations Among Results Data

Creating and Combining Load Cases
Mapping Results onto a Different Mesh or to a Cut Boundary
Creating or Modifying Results Data in the Database
Splitting Large Results Files
Magnetics Command Macros
Comparing Nodal Solutions From Two Models (RSTMAC)
8. The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26)

8.1. The Time-History Variable Viewer
8.2. Entering the Time-History Postprocessor
8.2.1. Interactive
8.2.2. Batch
8.3. Defining Variables
8.3.1. Interactive
8.3.2. Batch
8.4. Processing Your Variables to Develop Calculated Data
8.4.1. Interactive
8.4.2. Batch
8.5. Importing Data
8.5.1. Interactive
8.5.2. Batch Mode
8.6. Exporting Data
8.6.1. Interactive Mode
8.6.2. Batch Mode
8.7. Reviewing the Variables
8.7.1. Plotting Result Graphs
8.7.2. Listing Your Results in Tabular Form
8.8. Additional Time-History Postprocessing
8.8.1. Random Vibration (PSD) Results Postprocessing
8.8.2. Generating a Response Spectrum
8.8.3. Data Smoothing
9. Selecting and Components
9.1. Selecting Entities
9.1.1.
9.1.2.
9.1.3.
9.1.4.
Selecting Entities Using Commands

Selecting Entities Using the GUI
Selecting Lines to Repair CAD Geometry
Other Commands for Selecting
9.2. Selecting for Meaningful Postprocessing

9.3. Grouping Geometry Items into Components and Assemblies
9.3.1. Creating Components
9.3.2. Nesting Assemblies
9.3.3. Selecting Entities by Component or Assembly
9.3.4. Adding or Removing Components

9.3.5. Modifying Components or Assemblies
10. Getting Started with Graphics
10.1. Interactive Versus External Graphics
10.2. Identifying the Graphics Device Name (for UNIX)
10.2.1.
10.2.2.
10.2.3.
10.2.4.
Graphics
Graphics
Graphics
Graphics
Device Names Available

Drivers and Capabilities Supported on UNIX Systems
Device Types Supported on UNIX Systems
Environment Variables
10.3. Specifying the Graphics Display Device Type (for Windows)

10.4. System-Dependent Graphics Information
10.4.1. Adjusting Input Focus
10.4.2. Deactivating Backing Store
10.4.3. Setting Up IBM RS/6000 3-D OpenGL Supported Graphics Adapters
10.4.4. Displaying X11 Graphics over Networks
10.4.5. HP Graphics Drivers
10.4.6. Producing GraphicDisplays on an HP PaintJet Printer
10.4.7. PostScript Hard-Copy Option
10.4.8. IBM RS/6000 Graphics Drivers
10.4.9. Silicon Graphics Drivers
10.4.10. Sun UltraSPARC Graphics Drivers (32 and 64 bit versions)
10.5. Creating Graphics Displays
10.5.1.
10.5.2.
10.5.3.
10.5.4.
10.5.5.
10.5.6.
GUI-Driven Graphics Functions

Command-Driven Graphics Functions
Immediate Mode Graphics
Replotting the Current Display
Erasing the Current Display
Aborting a Display in Progress
10.6. Multi-Plotting Techniques

10.6.1.
10.6.2.
10.6.3.
10.6.4.
Defining the Window Layout

Choosing What Entities Each Window Displays
Choosing the Display Used for Plots
Displaying Selected Entities
11. General Graphics Specifications

11.1. Using the GUI to Control Displays
11.2. Multiple ANSYS Windows, Superimposed Displays
11.2.1.
11.2.2.
11.2.3.
11.2.4.
11.2.5.
11.2.6.
Defining ANSYS Windows

Activating and Deactivating ANSYS Windows
Deleting ANSYS Windows
Copying Display Specifications Between Windows
Superimposing (Overlaying) Multiple Displays
Removing Frame Borders
11.3. Changing the Viewing Angle, Zooming, and Panning

11.3.1.
11.3.2.
11.3.3.
11.3.4.
Changing the Viewing Direction

Rotating the Display About a Specified Axis
Determining the Model Coordinate System Reference Orientation
Translating (or Panning) the Display
11.3.5.
11.3.6.
11.3.7.
11.3.8.
Magnifying (Zooming in on) the Image

Using the Control Key to Pan, Zoom, and Rotate - Dynamic Manipulation Mode
Resetting Automatic Scaling and Focus
Freezing Scale (Distance) and Focus
11.4. Controlling Miscellaneous Text and Symbols

11.4.1.
11.4.2.
11.4.3.
11.4.4.
11.4.5.
11.4.6.
Using Legends in Your Displays

Controlling Entity Fonts
Controlling the Location of the Global XYZ Triad
Turning Triad Symbols On and Off
Changing the Style of the Working Plane Grid
Turning the ANSYS Logo On and Off
11.5. Miscellaneous Graphics Specifications

11.5.1.
11.5.2.
11.5.3.
11.5.4.
11.5.5.
Reviewing Graphics Control Specifications

Restoring Defaults for Graphics Slash Commands
Saving the Display Specifications on a File
Recalling Display Specifications from a File
Pausing the ANSYS Program
11.6. 3-D Input Device Support

12. PowerGraphics
12.1.
12.2.
12.3.
12.4.
12.5.
Characteristics of PowerGraphics
When to Use PowerGraphics
Activating and Deactivating PowerGraphics
How to Use PowerGraphics
What to Expect from a PowerGraphics Plot
12.5.1. Viewing Your Element Model
12.5.2. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results
13. Creating Geometry Displays

13.1. Creating Displays of Solid-Model Entities
13.2. Changing the Specifications for Your Geometry Displays
13.2.1.
13.2.2.
13.2.3.
13.2.4.
Changing the Style of Your Display

Applying Styles to Enhance the Model Appearance
Controlling Numbers and Colors
Displaying Loads and Other Special Symbols
14. Creating Geometric Results Displays

14.1. Using the GUI to Display Geometric Results
14.2. Options for Creating Geometric Results Displays
14.3. Changing the Specifications for POST1 Results Displays
14.3.1.
14.3.2.
14.3.3.
14.3.4.
Controlling Displaced Shape Displays

Controlling Vector Symbols in Your Results Display
Controlling Contour Displays
Changing the Number of Contours
14.4. Q-Slice Techniques

14.5. Isosurface Techniques
14.6. Controlling Particle Flow or Charged Particle Trace Displays
15. Creating Graphs
15.1. Graph Display Actions

15.2. Changing the Specifications for Graph Displays
15.2.1. Changing the Type, Style, and Color of Your Graph Display
15.2.2. Labeling Your Graph
15.2.3. Defining X and Y Variables and Their Ranges
16. Annotation
16.1.
16.2.
16.3.
16.4.
2-D Annotation
Creating Annotations for ANSYS Models
3-D Annotation
3-D Query Annotation
17. Animation
17.1.
17.2.
17.3.
17.4.
17.5.
Creating Animated Displays Within ANSYS

Using the Basic Animation Commands
Using One-Step Animation Macros
Capturing Animated Display Sequences Off-Line
The Stand Alone ANIMATE Program
17.5.1. Installing the ANIMATE Program
17.5.2. Running the ANIMATE Program
17.6. Animation in the Windows Environment

17.6.1. How ANSYS Supports AVI Files
17.6.2. How the DISPLAY Program Supports AVI Files
17.6.3. Other Uses for AVI Files
18. External Graphics
18.1. External Graphics Options
18.1.1.
18.1.2.
18.1.3.
18.1.4.
Printing Graphics in Windows

Exporting Graphics in Windows
Printing Graphics in UNIX
Exporting Graphics in UNIX
18.2. Creating a Neutral Graphics File

18.3. Using the DISPLAY Program to View and Translate Neutral Graphics Files
18.3.1.
18.3.2.
18.3.3.
18.3.4.
18.3.5.
18.3.6.
Getting Started with the DISPLAY Program

Viewing Static Images on a Terminal Screen
Viewing Animated Sequences on a Screen
Capturing Animated Sequences Offline
Exporting Files to Desktop Publishing or Word Processing Programs
Editing the Neutral Graphics File with the UNIX GUI
18.4. Obtaining Hardcopy Plots

18.4.1. Activating the Hardcopy Capability of Your Terminal on UNIX Systems
18.4.2. Obtaining Hardcopy on External Devices Using the DISPLAY Program
18.4.3. Printing Graphics Displays on a Windows-Supported Printer
19. The Report Generator
19.1. Starting the Report Generator
19.1.1. Specifying a Location for Captured Data and Reports
19.1.2. Understanding the Behavior of the ANSYS Graphics Window
19.1.3. A Note About the Graphics File Format

19.2. Capturing an Image
19.2.1. Interactive
19.2.2. Batch
19.3. Capturing Animation
19.3.1. Interactive
19.3.2. Batch
19.4. Capturing a Data Table
19.4.1. Interactive
19.4.2. Batch
19.5. Capturing a Listing
19.5.1. Interactive
19.5.2. Batch
19.6. Assembling a Report
19.6.1. Interactive Report Assembly
19.6.2. Batch Report Assembly
19.6.3. Report Assembly Using the JavaScript Interface
19.7. Setting Report Generator Defaults
20. File Management and Files
20.1. File Management Overview
20.1.1. Executing the Run Interactive Now or DISPLAY Programs from Windows Explorer
20.2. Changing the Default File Name
20.3. Sending Output to Screens, Files, or Both
20.4. Text Versus Binary Files
20.4.1. ANSYS Binary Files over NFS
20.4.2. Files that ANSYS Writes
20.4.3. File Compression
20.5. Reading Your Own Files into the ANSYS Program
20.6. Writing Your Own ANSYS Files from the ANSYS Program
20.7. Assigning Different File Names
20.8. Reviewing Contents of Binary Files (AUX2)
20.9. Operating on Results Files (AUX3)
20.10. Other File Management Commands
21. Memory Management and Configuration
21.1. ANSYS Work and Swap Space Requirements
21.2. How ANSYS Uses its Work Space
21.3. How and When to Perform Memory Management
21.3.1. Allocating Memory to ANSYS Manually
21.3.2. Changing the Amount of ANSYS Work Space
21.3.3. Changing Database Space From the Default
21.4. Using the Configuration File
21.5. Understanding ANSYS Memory Error Messages

Chapter 1: Getting Started with ANSYS
Chapter1:Getting Started with ANSYS

The ANSYS program has many finite-element analysis capabilities, ranging from a simple, linear, static
analysis to a complex, nonlinear, transient dynamic analysis. The analysis guides in the ANSYS
documentation set describe specific procedures for performing analyses for different engineering
disciplines.
The process for a typical ANSYS analysis involves three general tasks:
Building the Model
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_bas/Hlp_G_BAS1.html[28/04/2013 07:14:02 p.m.]
1.1.Building the Model

Building a finite element model requires more of your time than any other part of the analysis. First, you
specify a jobname and analysis title. Then, you use the PREP7 preprocessor to define the element types,
element real constants, material properties, and the model geometry.
1.1.1.Specifying a Jobname and Analysis Title

This task is not required for an analysis, but is recommended.
1.1.1.1.Defining the Jobname

The jobname is a name that identifies the ANSYS job. When you define a jobname for an analysis, the
jobname becomes the first part of the name of all files the analysis creates. (The extension or suffix for
these files' names is a file identifier such as .DB .) By using a jobname for each analysis, you ensure that
no files are overwritten.
If you do not specify a jobname, all files receive the name FILE or file , depending on the operating
system. You can change the default jobname as follows:
By using the initial jobname entry option when you enter the ANSYS program, either via the
launcher or on the ANSYS execution command.
From within the ANSYS program, you can use either of the following:
Command(s): /FILNAME
GUI:
The /FILNAME command is valid only at the Begin level. It lets you change the jobname even if you
specified an initial jobname at ANSYS entry. The jobname applies only to files you open after using
/FILNAME and not to files that were already open. If you want to start new files (such as the log file,
Jobname.LOG, and error file Jobname.ERR) when you issue /FILNAME, set the Key argument on
/FILNAME to 1. Otherwise, those files that were already open will still have the initial jobname.
1.1.1.2.Defining an Analysis Title

The /TITLE command (Utility Menu> File> Change Title), defines a title for the analysis. ANSYS
includes the title on all graphics displays and on the solution output. You can issue the /STITLE
command to add subtitles; these will appear in the output, but not in graphics displays.
1.1.1.3.Defining Units
The ANSYS program does not assume a system of units for your analysis. Except in magnetic field
analyses, you can use any system of units so long as you make sure that you use that system for all the
data you enter. (Units must be consistent for all input data.)
For micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS), where dimensions are on the order of microns, see the
conversion factors in System of Units in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide .
Using the /UNITS command, you can set a marker in the ANSYS database indicating the system of
units that you are using. This command does not convert data from one system of units to another; it
simply serves as a record for subsequent reviews of the analysis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_bas/Hlp_G_BAS1_2.html[28/04/2013 07:14:08 p.m.]
1.1.2.Defining Element Types

The ANSYS element library contains more than 150 different element types. Each element type has a
unique number and a prefix that identifies the element category: PLANE182, SOLID185, BEAM188,
ELBOW290, and so on. The following element categories are available:
BEAM
CIRCUit
COMBINation
CONTACt
FLUID
HF (High Frequency)
HYPERelastic
INFINite
INTERface
LINK
MASS
MATRIX
MESH
Multi-Point Constraint
PIPE
PLANE
PRETS (Pretension)
SHELL
SOLID
SOURCe
SURFace
TARGEt
TRANSducer
USER
VISCOelastic (or viscoplastic)
The element type determines, among other things:

The degree-of-freedom set (which in turn implies the discipline - structural, thermal, magnetic,
electric, quadrilateral, brick, etc.)
Whether the element lies in 2-D or 3-D space.
BEAM188, for example, has six structural degrees of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ), is a line
element, and can be modeled in 3-D space. PLANE77 has a thermal degree of freedom (TEMP), is an 8node quadrilateral element, and can be modeled only in 2-D space.
You must be in PREP7, the general preprocessor, to define element types. To do so, you use the ET
family of commands (ET, ETCHG, etc.) or their GUI path equivalents; see the Command Reference for
details. You define the element type by name and give the element a type reference number. For
example, the commands shown below define two element types, BEAM188 and SHELL181, and assign
them type reference numbers 1 and 2 respectively.
ET,1,BEAM188
ET,2,SHELL181
This table of type reference number versus element name is called the element type table. While
defining the actual elements, you point to the appropriate type reference number using the TYPE
command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes).
Key Options
Many element types have key options , or KEYOPTs, and are referred to as KEYOPT(1), KEYOPT(2), etc.
For example, KEYOPT(3) for BEAM188 allows you to choose the shape function along the length of the
beam, and KEYOPT(8) for SHELL181 allows you to specify how layer data should be stored.
Specify KEYOPTs via the ET command or the KEYOPT command (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete).
1.1.3.Defining Element Real Constants
Element real constants are properties that depend on the element type, such as the cross-sectional
properties of a beam element. Not all element types require real constants, and different elements of the
same type may have different real constant values.
You can specify real constants using the R family of commands (R, RMODIF, etc.) or their equivalent
menu paths; see the Command Reference for further information. As with element types, each set of
real constants has a reference number, and the table of reference number versus real constant set is
called the real constant table. While defining the elements, you point to the appropriate real constant
reference number using the REAL command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Elements> Elem Attributes).
While defining real constants, keep these rules and guidelines in mind:
When using one of the R commands, you must enter real constants in the order shown in Table
4.n.1 for each element type in the Element Reference.
For models using multiple element types, use a separate real constant set (that is, a different REAL
reference number) for each element type. The ANSYS program issues a warning message if
multiple element types reference the same real constant set. However, a single element type may
reference several real constant sets.
To verify your real constant input, use the RLIST and ELIST commands, with RKEY = 1 (shown
below). RLIST lists real constant values for all sets. The command ELIST,,,,,1 produces an easierto-read list that shows, for each element, the real constant labels and their values.
Command(s):
GUI:
Command(s):
GUI:
ELIST
Utility
Utility
Utility
Utility
Menu>
Menu>
Menu>
Menu>
List>
List>
List>
List>
Elements>
Elements>
Elements>
Elements>
Attributes + RealConst
Attributes Only
Nodes + Attributes
Nodes + Attr + RealConst
RLIST
Utility Menu> List> Properties> All Real Constants
Utility Menu> List> Properties> Specified Real Const
For line and area elements that require geometry data (cross-sectional area, thickness, diameter,
etc.) to be specified as real constants, you can verify the input graphically by using the following
commands in the order shown:
Command(s): /ESHAPE and
EPLOT
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape
GUI:
Utility Menu> Plot> Elements
ANSYS displays the elements as solid elements, using a rectangular cross-section for link and shell
elements and a circular cross-section for pipe elements. The cross-section proportions are determined
from the real constant values.
1.1.3.1.Creating Cross Sections

If you are building a model using BEAM188or BEAM189, you can use the section commands (SECTYPE,
SECDATA, etc.) or their GUI path equivalents to define and use cross sections in your models. See
"Beam Analysis and Cross Sections" in the Structural Analysis Guide for information on how to use the
BeamTool to create cross sections.
1.1.4.Defining Material Properties

Most element types require material properties. Depending on the application, material properties can be
linear (see Linear Material Properties) or nonlinear (see Nonlinear Material Properties).
As with element types and real constants, each set of material properties has a material reference
number. The table of material reference numbers versus material property sets is called the material
table. Within one analysis, you may have multiple material property sets (to correspond with multiple
materials used in the model). ANSYS identifies each set with a unique reference number.
While defining the elements, you point to the appropriate material reference number using the MAT
command.
1.1.4.1.Linear Material Properties

Linear material properties can be constant or temperature-dependent, and isotropic or orthotropic. To
define constant material properties (either isotropic or orthotropic), use one of the following:
Command(s):
GUI:
MP
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models
(See Material Model Interface for details on the GUI.)

You also must specify the appropriate property label; for example EX, EY, EZ for Young's modulus, KXX,
KYY, KZZ for thermal conductivity, and so forth. For isotropic material you need to define only the Xdirection property; the other directions default to the X-direction value. For example:
MP,EX,1,2E11
MP,DENS,1,7800
MP,KXX,1,43
! Young's modulus for material ref. no. 1 is 2E11

! Density for material ref. no. 1 is 7800
! Thermal conductivity for material ref. no 1 is 43
Besides the defaults for Y- and Z-direction properties (which default to the X-direction properties), other
material property defaults are built in to reduce the amount of input. For example, Poisson's ratio
(NUXY) defaults to 0.3, shear modulus (GXY) defaults to EX/2(1+NUXY)), and emissivity (EMIS) defaults
to 1.0. See the Element Reference for details.
You can choose constant, isotropic, linear material properties from a material library available through
the GUI. Young's modulus, density, coefficient of thermal expansion, Poisson's ratio, thermal conductivity
and specific heat are available for 10 materials in four unit systems.
Caution: The property values in the material library are provided for your convenience.
They are typical values for the materials you can use for preliminary analyses
and noncritical applications. As always, you are responsible for all data input to
the ANSYS program.
To define temperature-dependent material properties, you can use the MP command in combination
with the MPTEMP or MPTGEN command. You also can use the MPTEMP and MPDATA commands.
The MP command allows you to define a property-versus-temperature function in the form of a
polynomial. The polynomial may be linear, quadratic, cubic, or quartic:
Property = C0 + C1 T + C2 T 2 + C3 T 3 + C4 T 4
Cn are the coefficients and T is the temperature. You enter the coefficients using the C0 , C1 , C2 , C3 ,
and C4 arguments on the MP command. If you specify just C0 , the material property is constant; if you
specify C0 and C1 , the material property varies linearly with temperature; and so on. When you specify
a temperature-dependent property in this manner, the program internally evaluates the polynomial at
discrete temperature points with linear interpolation between points (that is, piecewise linear
representation) and a constant-valued extrapolation beyond the extreme points. You must use the
MPTEMP or MPTGEN command before the MP command for second and higher-order properties to
define appropriate temperature steps.
The second way to define temperature-dependent material properties is to use a combination of
MPTEMP and MPDATA commands. MPTEMP (or MPTGEN) defines a series of temperatures, and
MPDATA defines corresponding material property values. For example, the following commands define
a temperature-dependent enthalpy for material 4:
MPTEMP,1,1600,1800,2000,2325,2326,2335
! 6 temperatures (temps 1-6)
MPTEMP,7,2345,2355,2365,2374,2375,3000
! 6 more temps (temps 7-12)
MPDATA,ENTH,4,1,53.81,61.23,68.83,81.51,81.55,82.31
! Corresponding
MPDATA,ENTH,4,7,84.48,89.53,99.05,112.12,113.00,137.40 ! enthalpy values
If an unequal number of property data points and temperature data points are defined, the ANSYS
program uses only those locations having both points defined for the property function table. To define a
different set of temperatures for the next material property, you should first erase the current
temperature table by issuing MPTEMP (without any arguments) and then define new temperatures
(using additional MPTEMP or MPTGEN commands).
The MPPLOT command displays a graph of material property versus temperature. Figure 1.1 shows a
plot of the enthalpy-temperature curve defined in the example above. The MPLIST command lists
material properties.
Figure1.1Sample MPPLOT Display
Following are some notes about temperature-dependent material properties:

To modify a property data point on an existing curve, simply redefine the desired data point by
issuing MPDATA with the appropriate location number. For example, to change the ENTH value in
location 6 of the above enthalpy-temperature curve from 82.31 to 83.09, the command would be
MPDATA,ENTH,4,6,83.09
To modify a temperature data point on an existing curve, you need two commands: MPTEMP with
the appropriate location number to specify the new temperature value, and MPDRES to associate
the new temperature table with the material property. For example, to change the temperature in
location 7 of the above enthalpy-temperature curve from 2345 to 2340, the commands would be:
MPTEMP,7,2340
MPDRES,ENTH,4
! Modifies location 7, retains other locations

! Associates ENTH for material 4 with new temps
You need to use the MPDRES command to modify stored properties. Whenever you define a
temperature-dependent property, the temperature-property data pairs are immediately stored in the
database. Modifying the temperature data points affects only material properties that are subsequently
defined, not what is already stored. The MPDRES command forces modification of what is already
stored in the database. Two additional fields on MPDRES allow you to modify a stored property and
store it under a new label or a new material reference number.
The MPTRES command allows you to replace the current temperature table with that of a previously
defined material property in the database. You can then use the previous temperature data points for
another property.
For temperature-dependent secant coefficients of thermal expansion (ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ), if the base
temperature for which they are defined (the definition temperature) differs from the reference
temperature (the temperature at which zero thermal strains exist, defined by MP,REFT or TREF), then
use the MPAMOD command to convert the data to the reference temperature. This conversion is not
necessary when you input the thermal strains (THSX, THSY, THSZ) or the instantaneous coefficients of
thermal expansion (CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ).
ANSYS accounts for temperature-dependent material properties during solution when element matrices
are formulated. The materials are evaluated at once (at or near the centroid of the element) or at each
of the integration points. For more information about how ANSYS evaluates temperature-dependent
material properties, see Linear Material Properties.
You can save linear material properties (whether they are temperature-dependent or constant) to a file
or restore them from a text file. (See Using Material Library Files for a discussion of material library
files.) You also can use CDWRITE,MAT to write both linear and nonlinear material properties to a file.
Note: If you are using the CDWRITE command in any of the ANSYS-derived products
(ANSYS Emag, ANSYS Professional, etc.), you must edit the Jobname.CDB file that
CDWRITE creates to remove commands which are not available in the derived
product. You must do this before reading the Jobname.CDB file.
1.1.4.2.Nonlinear Material Properties

Nonlinear material properties are usually tabular data, such as plasticity data (stress-strain curves for
different hardening laws), magnetic field data (B-H curves), creep data, swelling data, hyperelastic
material data, etc. The first step in defining a nonlinear material property is to activate a data table
using the TB command (see Material Model Interface for the GUI equivalent). For example, TB,BH,2
activates the B-H table for material reference number 2.
To enter the tabular data, use the TBPT command. For example, the following commands define a B-H
curve:
TBPT,DEFI,150,.21
TBPT,DEFI,300,.55
TBPT,DEFI,460,.80
TBPT,DEFI,640,.95
TBPT,DEFI,720,1.0
TBPT,DEFI,890,1.1
TBPT,DEFI,1020,1.15
TBPT,DEFI,1280,1.25
TBPT,DEFI,1900,1.4
You can verify the data table through displays and listings using the TBPLOT or TBLIST commands.
Figure 1.2 shows a sample TBPLOT (of the B-H curve defined above):
Figure1.2Sample TBPLOT Display
1.1.4.3.Anisotropic Elastic Material Properties

Some element types accept anisotropic elastic material properties, which are usually input in the form of
a matrix. (These properties are different from anisotropic plasticity, which requires different stress-strain
curves in different directions.) Among the element types that allow elastic anisotropy are PLANE13 (the
2-D coupled-field solid), SOLID5 and SOLID98 (the 3-D coupled-field solids).
The procedure to specify anisotropic elastic material properties resembles that for nonlinear properties.
You first activate a data table using the TB command (with Lab = ANEL) and then define the terms of
the elastic coefficient matrix using the TBDATA command. Be sure to verify your input with the TBLIST
command. See Data Tables - Implicit Analysis in the Element Reference manual and the appropriate
element descriptions for more information.
1.1.4.4.Material Model Interface

ANSYS includes an intuitive hierarchical tree structure interface for defining material models. A logical
top-down arrangement of material categories guides you in defining the appropriate model for your
analysis. You use this material model interface in all ANSYS analyses except for CFD analyses that
require the use of any of the FLDATA family of commands.
1.1.4.4.1.Accessing the Interface

You access the material model interface from Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears, which originally displays
the top level of the tree structure, as shown in Figure 1.3.
Figure1.3Material Model Interface Initial Screen
1.1.4.4.2.Choosing Material Behavior

The Material Models Available window on the right displays a list of material categories (for example,
Favorites, Structural, Thermal, CFD, Electromagnetics).
Note: If you choose an ANSYS LS-DYNA element type, only one category, LS-DYNA
appears.
If a category is preceded by a folder icon, there are subcategories available under the main category.
When you double-click on the category, the subcategories appear indented, and below the category as
shown in Figure 1.4.
Figure1.4Material Model Interface Tree Structure
For example, under Structural are categories Linear, Nonlinear, and others. The models are further
categorized so that you will eventually see a vertical list of material property sets or material models that
are included under that category (for example, under von Mises Plasticity are: Bilinear, Multilinear, and
Nonlinear). Once you have decided which material property set or model you will use, you then choose
it by double-clicking on the item. A dialog box appears that prompts you for the required input data for
that particular model or property set. Details of a data input dialog box are presented in Entering
Material Data.
Material Favorites Folder

A Material Favorite is a template of material properties. It is used as a short cut to frequently used
properties, instead of navigating through the detailed tree structure each session. You can create a
named template based on a currently defined material model through Favorite>New Favorite.You can
also delete a named template through Favorite menu. For any consecutive sesisons of ANSYS, you will
then be able to access this named template in the Favorites folder shown in the Material Models
Available window.
1.1.4.4.3.Entering Material Data

Included in a data input dialog box is a table whose rows and columns you can alter depending on the
requirements of the specific material property or model you have chosen. A typical data input dialog box
is shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure1.5A Data Input Dialog Box
There are two interaction areas within a material data input dialog box: the data input table, and a
series of action buttons that appear at the bottom. Depending on the material item you are defining, the
labels in the table vary, as do the number of rows and columns that appear initially. The material item
also dictates the number of rows and columns that you are allowed to add or delete. In most cases, the
columns represent temperatures, and the rows represent data values (for example, density as a linear
isotropic property, or constants for a particular nonlinear model).
Temperature Dependent Data
Initially, the table is set up for temperature independent data so the temperature field is grayed out. At
this point, should you decide to enter data for various temperatures, you can quickly add columns of
text fields for the data representing each temperature. You can add or delete the temperature
dependent data at any time. You do not need to predetermine if the data should be temperature
dependent.
Adding and Deleting Columns
To add a column, position the text cursor in any field in the existing column, then click on the Add
Temperature button. A new column appears to the right of the existing column, and both temperature
fields become active, as shown in Figure 1.6.
Figure1.6Data Input Dialog Box - Added Column
You then enter the two temperatures and the associated data in the rows. You can add more
temperature columns, as needed, by following the same procedure. You can insert columns between
existing columns by clicking the text cursor in a field within a column that is to the left of where you
want to insert the new column, then clicking on the Add Temperature button. A scroll bar appears
across the bottom of the table when the number of columns exceeds the width of the dialog box.
You can delete a temperature column by positioning the text cursor in any field within the column, and
clicking on the Delete Temperature button.
Adding and Deleting Rows
You may have the need to add another row of constants or other data for a specific temperature. You
add or delete rows in a similar way as is described above for adding or deleting columns. To add a row,
click the text cursor in any field in an existing row, then click on the Add Row (or Add Point) button.
A new row appears beneath the existing row, as shown in Figure 1.7.
Figure1.7Data Input Dialog Box - Added Row
You can add more rows, as needed, by following the same procedure. You can insert rows between
existing rows by positioning the text cursor in a field in the top row, then clicking on the Add Row (or
Add Point) button. A vertical scroll bar appears in the table when the number of rows exceeds the
height of the dialog box.
You can delete a row by positioning the text cursor in any field within the row, and clicking on the
Delete Row (or Delete Point) button.
Entering/Editing Data in Text Fields
When a data dialog box first appears, one of the text fields is selected (black highlight), meaning that
the field is ready to accept and display data as you type. You can use the arrow keys to move the
selection status to other text fields. Also, pressing the Tab key allows you to move the selection status
to the text field positioned to the right of the field that is currently selected.
When you start typing within a text field, the highlight is replaced by the characters that you type. You
can use the left and right arrow keys to position the text cursor anywhere within the field should you
need to replace or delete characters in that field.
To edit data, you must first select the text field either by clicking on the field, or using the arrow keys to
move the selection status to the particular field.
To copy/paste data, select the text fields whose data you want to copy, use Ctrl-c to copy the data to
the clipboard, select the empty destination text fields, then paste the data into these fields using Ctrl-v.
You select multiple adjacent text fields either by dragging the mouse from the first field to the last field,
or by clicking on the first field, holding down the Shift key, then clicking on the last field. For selecting
multiple nonadjacent text fields, click on each field while you hold down the Ctrl key.
Action Buttons
Add Temperature: Adds a new column of data entry fields to the right of the column where the
text cursor is currently positioned. If the button does not appear, the material item has no
temperature dependency.
Delete Temperature: Deletes the column of data entry fields where the text cursor is currently
positioned. If the button does not appear, the material item has no temperature dependency.
Add Row (or Add Point): Adds a new row of data entry fields beneath the row where the text
cursor is currently positioned. If the button does not appear, the material item has no provision for
adding more data.
Delete Row (or Delete Point): Deletes the row of data entry fields where the text cursor is
currently positioned. If the button does not appear, the material item requires that all data entry
fields must be completed.
Graph: Displays a graph of the current data in the ANSYS Graphics window. If required, you can
change the data in the table and click on the Graph button again before clicking on the OK
button.
OK: Commits all data that you have entered to the ANSYS database and removes this dialog
box[1]. Material Model Number # appears in the Material Models Defined tree structure
window, where # = 1 for the first model, or the number that you specified in the Define
Material ID dialog box.
Cancel: Cancels all data entered, and removes the dialog box[1].
Help: Displays help information that is specific to the particular material property or material
constant.
1. Click on OK or Cancel to remove the data input dialog box. Pressing the Enter key will not remove
the dialog box.
If a button appears, but is grayed out, then the function is defined for the particular material property,
but you have not yet entered enough data for the function to become active.
Some material data input dialog boxes may include other buttons or interaction components that are
necessary for completely defining a material property or model. See A Dialog Box and Its Components in
the Operations Guide if you need help on the use of any of these interaction components.
Considerations for a Structural Analysis
When performing a structural analysis, several inelastic material models (listed by double-clicking on the
following in the tree structure: Structural, Nonlinear, Inelastic) require you to input values for elastic
material properties (elastic modulus and/or Poisson's ratio) in addition to the inelastic constants that are
specific to the model (for example, Yield Stress and Tangent Modulus for the Bilinear Isotropic
Hardening model). In these instances, you must enter the elastic material properties before you enter
the inelastic constants. If you try to enter the inelastic constants first, a Note appears stating that you
must first enter the elastic properties. After you click on OK in the Note, a data input dialog box appears
that prompts you for the elastic material properties. After you enter these properties and click on OK,
another data input dialog box appears that prompts you for the inelastic constants associated with the
specific model you chose.
1.1.4.4.4.Logging/Editing Material Data

The Material Models Defined window (the left window in the Define Material Model Behavior
dialog box) displays a log of each material model you have specified. After you have chosen OK in the
data input dialog box, this window displays a folder icon, and Material Model Number # (the first #
is 1 by default), followed by the properties defined for this model. You can define additional models with
unique numbers by choosing Material> New Model, then typing a new number in the Define
Material ID dialog box. If you double-click on any material model or property (furthest to the right in
the tree), the associated data input dialog box appears where you can edit the data, if you choose.
1.1.4.4.5.Example: Defining a Single Material Model

This example and the following two examples show typical uses of the material model interface for use
in structural analyses. If your specialty or interest is in performing analyses other than structural
analyses, it is recommended that you still read and perform these examples to become familiar with
maneuvering within the material model interface. You are then encouraged to try one of your own
problems in your particular discipline, or try one of the many sample problems presented throughout the
various ANSYS analysis guides. Here is a sampling of these problems:
Performing a Steady-State Thermal Analysis (GUI Method) in the Thermal Analysis Guide .
Example of a Current-Carrying Conductor in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
Example problems in the High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
Example: Structural-Thermal Harmonic Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide .
The first example below is intended to show you how to completely define a single material model. It
steps you through a procedure that uses the material model interface to define a model for simulating
nonlinear isotropic hardening, using the Voce law, in a large strain structural analysis at two
temperatures.
1. From the ANSYS Main Menu, click on the following menu path: Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural,
Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3. Enter values for material properties, as required (EX for elastic modulus, and PRXY for Poisson's
ratio). Click on OK. Material Model Number 1 properties appear listed in the Material Models
Defined window.
4. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Nonlinear,
Inelastic, Rate Independent, Isotropic Hardening Plasticity, von Mises Plasticity,
Nonlinear. A dialog box appears that includes a table where you can add temperature columns or
add rows for material data, as needed for your application. Note that the temperature field is
grayed out. This is because ANSYS assumes a temperature independent application, by default, so
you would not need to enter a temperature value. Because this example is temperature dependent
(involving two temperatures), you must first add another temperature column, as described in the
next step.
5. Click on the Add Temperature button. A second column appears.
6. Enter the first temperature in the Temperature row and the T1 column.
7. Enter the Voce constants required for the first temperature in the rows under the T1 column (see
Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference).
8. Enter the second temperature in the Temperature row, and the T2 column.
9. Enter the Voce constants required for the second temperature in the rows under the T2 column.
Note that if you needed to input constants for a third temperature, you would position the cursor
in the Temperature row of the T2 column, then click on the Add Temperature button again.
This would cause a third column to appear.
This material model only requires four constants per temperature. If you were using another
model that allowed more constants, the Add Row button would be active. For those models, the
same functionality is included for adding or inserting rows by using the Add Row (or Add Point)
button.
10. Click on OK. The dialog box closes. The properties defined for that material are listed under
Material Model Number 1.
1.1.4.4.6.Example: Editing Data in a Material Model

This example shows you how to use some of the basic editing features within the material model
interface. It assumes that you have completed the previous example (see Example: Defining a Single
Material Model), and that the completed material model is listed in the Material Models Defined
window.
Editing data typically falls into two general categories: changing data within an existing material
property, and copying an entire material property set to form another model with slightly different
properties.
Consider a case where you need to change the constants that you assigned to the Nonlinear Isotropic
model. To perform this task:
1. Double-click on Nonlinear Isotropic. The associated dialog box appears with the existing data
displayed in the fields.
2. Edit the constants in the appropriate fields, and click on OK.
Note that if you needed to change any of the other material properties, you would double-click on
Linear Isotropic in the previous step. This would cause the dialog box associated with linear
isotropic properties to appear. You could then edit those properties.
Consider another case where you have the requirement for two material models, where the second
model is the same as the first except that it needs to include constants for one more temperature. To
perform this task:
1. In the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box, click on the following menu path: Edit>
Copy, then choose 1 for from Material number, and enter 2 for to Material number. Click on
OK. The Material Models Defined window now includes Material Model Number 2 in its list.
If you double-click on Material Model Number 2, the identical material properties appear below
Material Model Number 2 as those listed for Material Model Number 1.
2. Double-click on Nonlinear Isotropic under Material Model Number 2. The associated dialog
box appears.
3. Move the text cursor to the Temperature row in the column furthest to the right, and click on the
Add Temperature button. A T3 column appears.
4. In the new column, enter the new temperature and the four constants associated with this
temperature.
5. Click on OK. The dialog box closes. If you double-click on Nonlinear Isotropic under Material
Model Number 2, the associated dialog box appears and reflects the new temperature data that
you added for Material Model Number 2.
1.1.4.4.7.Example: Defining a Material Model Combination

This example is intended to show you how to define a material based on a combination of two material
models. It steps you through a procedure that uses the material model interface to define a material for
simulating cyclic softening at one temperature. This is accomplished by using the Nonlinear Isotropic
model combined with the Chaboche model.
If you performed either of the previous examples in this section, start a new ANSYS session before
beginning the following example.
1. From the ANSYS Main Menu, click on the following menu path: Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural,
3. Enter values for material properties, as required (EX for elastic modulus, and PRXY for Poisson's
ratio). Click on OK. Material Model Number 1 and Linear Isotropic appear in the Material
Models Defined window.
4. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Nonlinear,
Inelastic, Rate Independent, Combined Kinematic and Isotropic Hardening Plasticity,
von Mises Plasticity.
5. Double-click on Chaboche and Nonlinear Isotropic. A dialog box appears for defining the
constants for the Chaboche model.
6. Enter the first three constants associated with the Chaboche model (click on the Help button for
information on these constants).
7. The Chaboche model allows you to specify more constants. If you choose to specify more
constants, click on the Add Row button, and enter the next constant.
8. Repeat the previous step for all the remaining Chaboche constants that you want to define.
9. Click on OK. The dialog box closes and another dialog box appears for defining the constants for
the Nonlinear Isotropic model.
10. Enter the constants associated with the Nonlinear Isotropic model (click on the Help button for
information on these constants).
11. Click on OK. The dialog box closes. Under Material Model Number 1, the following are listed:
Linear Isotropic, Chaboche, and Nonlinear Isotropic. You can then edit any of the data (see
Example: Editing Data in a Material Model).
1.1.4.4.8.Material Model Interface - Miscellaneous Items

Other characteristics of the material model interface are the following:
Any batch files you use to enter material data will be converted to material models and will appear
listed in the Material Models Defined window of the Define Material Model Behavior dialog
box.
The material model interface does not import data from the ANSYS material library discussed in
Using Material Library Files.
1.1.4.5.Using Material Library Files

Although you can define material properties separately for each finite element analysis, ANSYS lets you
store a material property set in an archival material library file, then retrieve the set and reuse it in
multiple analyses. (Each material property set has its own library file.) The material library files also
enable several ANSYS users to share commonly used material property data.
The material library feature offers you other advantages:
Because the archived contents of material library files are reusable, you can use them to define
other, similar material property sets quickly and with fewer errors. For example, suppose that you
have defined material properties for one grade of steel and want to create a material property set
for another grade of steel that is slightly different. You can write the existing steel material
property set to a material library file, read it back into ANSYS under a different material number,
and then, within ANSYS, make the minor changes needed to define properties for the second type
of steel.
Using the /MPLIB command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Library> Library Path), you can define a material library read and write path. Doing this allows
you to protect your material data resources in a read-only archive, while giving ANSYS users the
ability to write their material data locally without switching paths.
You can give your material library files meaningful names that reflect the characteristics of the
data they contain. For example, the name of a material library file describing properties of a steel
casting might be STEELCST.SI_MPL . (See Creating (Writing) a Material Library File for an explanation
of file naming conventions.)
You can design your own directory hierarchy for material library files. This enables you to classify
and catalog the files by material type (plastic, aluminum, etc.), by units, or by any category you
choose.
The next few paragraphs describe how to create and read material library files. For additional
information, see the descriptions of the /MPLIB, MPREAD, and MPWRITE commands in the Element
Reference.
1.1.4.6.Format of Material Library Files

Material library files are ANSYS command files. The file format supports both linear and nonlinear
properties. You can reuse material library files because the commands in them are written so that, once
you read a material property set into the ANSYS database, you can associate that set with any material
number you wish.
1.1.4.7.Specifying a Default Read/Write Path for Material Library Files
Before you create any material library files, define a default read path and write path for those files:
Command(s):
GUI:
/MPLIB,R-W_opt ,PATH
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Library> Library Path
Note: The ANSYS-supplied material library is located at <drive:>\Program Files\Ansys

Inc\v130\ANSYS\matlib.
In place of R-W_opt , specify READ (to set the read path), WRITE (to set the write path), or STAT to see
what read and write paths currently are in use. In place of PATH , specify the path to be used for material
library files.
1.1.4.8.Creating (Writing) a Material Library File

To create an archival material library file, perform these steps:
1. To tell the ANSYS program what system of units you are using, issue the /UNITS command. For
example, to specify the international system of units, you would issue the command /UNITS,SI.
You cannot access the /UNITS command directly from the GUI.
2. Define a material property using the MP command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material
Props> Isotropic). To do so, you must specify a material number and at least one material
property value (for example, magnetic permeability or MURX).
3. From the PREP7 preprocessor, issue the command shown below:
MPWRITE,Filename,,,LIB,MAT
Filename is the name to assign to the material library file. Issue MPWRITE (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Library> Export Library) and specify the filename for
the material library file.
Issuing MPWRITE writes the material data specified by material number MAT into the named file in the
current working directory. (If you previously specified a material library write path by issuing the
/MPLIB command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Library> Library
Path), ANSYS writes the file to that location instead.)
Naming conventions for a material library file are as follows:
The name of the file is the name you specify on the MPWRITE command. If you do not specify a
filename, the default name is JOBNAME.
The extension of a material library filename follows the pattern .xxx_MPL , where xxx identifies the
system of units for this material property sets. For example, if the system of units is the CGS
system, the file extension is .CGS_MPL . The default extension, used if you do not specify a units
system before creating the material library file, is .USER_MPL . (This indicates a user-defined system
of units.)
1.1.4.9.Reading a Material Library File

To read a material library file into the ANSYS database, perform these steps:
1. Use the /UNITS command or its GUI equivalent to tell the ANSYS program what system of units
you are using.
Note: The default system of units for ANSYS is SI. The GUI lists only material library
files with the currently active units.
2. Specify a new material reference number or an existing number that you wish to overwrite:
Command(s):
GUI:
MAT
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem
Attributes
Caution: Overwriting an existing material in the ANSYS database deletes all of the
data associated with it.
3. To read the material library file into the database, use one of the following:
Command(s):
GUI:
MPREAD,Filename ,,,LIB
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Library> Import
Library
The LIB argument supports a file search hierarchy. The program searches for the named material library
file first in the current working directory, then in your home directory, then in the read path directory
specified by the /MPLIB command, and finally in the ANSYS-supplied directory /ansys130/matlib. If
you omit the LIB argument, the programs searches only in the current working directory.
1.1.5.Creating the Model Geometry

Once you have defined material properties, the next step in an analysis is generating a finite element
model - nodes and elements - that adequately describes the model geometry. The graphic below shows
some sample finite element models:
Figure1.8Sample Finite Element Models
There are two methods to create the finite element model: solid modeling and direct generation. With
solid modeling , you describe the geometric shape of your model, then instruct the ANSYS program to
automatically mesh the geometry with nodes and elements. You can control the size and shape in the
elements that the program creates. With direct generation , you "manually" define the location of each
node and the connectivity of each element. Several convenience operations, such as copying patterns of
existing nodes and elements, symmetry reflection, etc. are available.
Details of the two methods and many other aspects related to model generation - coordinate systems,
working planes, coupling, constraint equations, etc. - are described in the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
3.2. The Mechanical APDL Product Launcher
3.2.The Mechanical APDL Product Launcher

3.2.1.Starting an ANSYS Session from the Start Menu/Launcher
Use the Mechanical APDL Product Launcher when you want to run an ANSYS program, one of the
auxiliary programs, or to access a modifiable ANSYS file. You can access some launcher functionality
directly from the Windows Start Menu. To access ANSYS functionality, including the launcher, on
Windows systems, choose Start> Programs> ANSYS 13.0 and select the appropriate option.
To activate the launcher on UNIX/Linux systems, enter the following command:
launcher130
You can also place one of the following commands in your .login or .profile file:
.login
file command:
launcher130 >& /dev/null &

.profile
file command:
launcher130 > /dev/null 2> &1 &
Either command causes the launcher to appear automatically when you log onto the system.
Note: Mechanical APDL does not support the Product Launcher on HP-UX systems.
Start Menu Options on Windows

To activate the launcher on Windows, choose Start> Programs> ANSYS 13.0> Mechanical APDL
Product Launcher
From the ANSYS Start Menu, you can select other options in addition to the launcher:
Utilities, such as the ANS_ADMIN, CAD Configuration Manager, and Product Configuration utilities
Help
Applications, such as ANSYS, FLUENT, CFX, etc.
ANSYS Client Licensing
Uninstall
You can run ANSYS directly by choosing ANSYS from the Start Menu. If you have not yet run the
launcher, selected any products, or defined any profiles, the highest product that your site is licensed for
will be run, or the product as specified by your license administrator using the Specify Product Order
option of the ANSLIC_ADMIN utility (see the ANSYS, Inc. Licensing Guide ). If you have run the
launcher, then running the product directly from the Start Menu will start the product with the last
launcher configuration.
Back To Top
The Launcher Log File

The launcher creates a log file named launcher.130.log. This file contains a history of launcher
selections along with any error messages that may occur. On UNIX/Linux systems, this file is written to
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ope/launcherhelp.html[28/04/2013 07:14:18 p.m.]
your home directory. On Windows, it is written to the directory specified with the TEMP environment
variable. If TEMP is not set, the file is written to the root directory of the value specified on the
WINDIR environment variable. The log file is always written by default. You can turn off the log file via
the Options menu, but we do not recommend doing so.
Back To Top
Launcher Tasks
Use the launcher to select product settings, such as the simulation environment, the specific license, and
any add-on modules or analysis type you want to run. Based on your product selections, you can then
specify file management, customization/preferences, and solver setup options. Product settings and the
options under each tab are explained below. You may not see all options, depending on your product
selection.
The launcher tabs are:
The File Management Tab
The Customization/Preferences Tab
The High Performance Computing Setup Tab
You can also access launcher-specific functionality via the menu bar. The File, Profiles, Options,
Tools, Links, and Help menus are explained in later sections.
In addition to the tabs and the menu bar options, the launcher also has additional buttons at the
bottom.
Run launches the product you have selected with the settings specified on the various tabs.
Cancel Run allows you to cancel an ANSYS Batch run. For an ANSYS Batch run, the analysis must
be nonlinear or full transient (linear or nonlinear), or use the PCG, ICCG, or JCG solver (linear or
nonlinear solutions). The cancel run request will be ignored for any other types of analyses.
For an ANSYS Batch run, Cancel Run creates a file in the working directory called Jobname.ABT. If
you are running multiple jobs, be sure to specify a unique jobname for each job.
Queue allows you to launch a batch run at a later time. When you click the Queue button, you will
be prompted to enter a delayed start time and date. This option is only available on UNIX/Linux
systems.
Product Help launches the help file for the selected simulation environment.
In most places where you can specify path names, you can specify paths using drive letters or UNC
paths. However, you may encounter places where UNC paths cannot be used. If you see a message
indicating that UNC paths are not available, re-enter the path using drive letters.
3.2.1.1.Product Settings
Here you specify your simulation environment, license, and add-on modules. The simulation environment
indicates which interface you want to use to run interactively or allows you to start a batch run. Options
include:
ANSYS
ANSYS Batch
LS-DYNA Solver
Depending on which environment you select and what licenses are available at your site, the remaining
product selection choices and the options under the remaining tabs will vary.
In the License field, select a license from the available types. Only those licenses that are both available
for your site and valid with the simulation environment selected will be shown. All applicable licenses will
be shown, regardless of your license preference settings.
The order in which products are listed can be modified using the ANSLIC_ADMIN's Specify Product
Order option or the Set License Preferences for User option. See the ANSYS, Inc. Licensing Guide
for more information. Once a product has been run via the launcher, the launcher profile will take
precedence over changes to the product order made via the ANSLIC_ADMIN utility.
You can then select from available add-on modules or other product-specific options. You will only be
able to pick modules/options that are available for the selected product and/or environment. If a choice
is not shown, it is not available for the product or environment that you have selected. If a choice is
grayed out, then that choice is available for the selected product and environment, but your site does
not have the necessary license. To obtain a license for any grayed-out option, please contact your
ANSYS sales representative.
Possible Add-on Modules include:
LS-DYNA (-dyn)
Enables LS-DYNA. Applicable only for ANSYS Structural and higher license levels.
ANSYS DesignXplorer (-dvt)
Enables the ANSYS DesignXplorer advanced task. The DesignXplorer module is part of the ANSYS
Workbench product and is used to compute the requested results for the entire range of all design
parameters with one solve. See the DesignXplorer online help for more information.
Possible Analysis Types available with the LS-DYNA Solver environment include:
Typical LS-DYNA Analysis
Implicit-to-Explicit Sequential Solution
Simple Restart Analysis
Small Restart Analysis
Full Restart Analysis
See the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more information on these analysis types.
3.2.1.2.The File Management Tab

This tab contains the information necessary to manage your files, such as location of your working
directory and job name. The available options will differ depending on the simulation environment you
selected.
If you selected the ANSYS simulation environment, you can specify:
Working directory
Sets the directory in which the ANSYS run will be executed. The program writes files it generates
to this directory. To change the working directory, type the new directory name in the Working
Directory text box or press the Browse button to display a file selection dialog box. On
Windows, you must use an absolute path.
You can also specify the working directory by defining the ANSYS130_WORKING_DIRECTORY
environment variable. If ANSYS130_WORKING_DIRECTORY is set, the launcher will use that
setting as the default. However, any working directory that is specified via the launcher (such as a
profile) overrides the ANSYS130_WORKING_DIRECTORY environment variable setting.
If you run ANSYS as an administrator using a particular working directory, and then run as a nonadministrator using the same directory, you may encounter permission problems with the .log file.
Users with administrator privileges should not use the same working directory as non-administrator
users.
Jobname
Defines the base filename used for all files generated by the ANSYS run. The initial jobname
defaults to file . You can change it to any alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long.
If you selected the ANSYS Batch simulation environment, you can specify the above items as well as
the following:
Input file
Specifies the file of ANSYS commands you are submitting for batch execution. You can either type
in the desired filename or click the Browse button to display a file selection dialog box or click on
Edit to view the file in an editor. If you specify a relative path, it will be relative from the working
directory as specified in the launcher.
Output file
Specifies the file to which ANSYS directs text output by the program. If you specify a relative path,
it will be relative from the working directory as specified in the launcher. If the filename already
exists in the working directory, it will be renamed to jobname.out.<timestamp> when a new batch
job is started. The timestamp is in the format YYYY-MM-DD@hh_mm_ss and reflects the date that
the file was renamed , not the date the original file was created. You can choose to overwrite the
output file rather than rename it by unchecking the Save Existing Output Files From Batch
Runs item under the Options menu on the launcher.
The Working directory and Jobname options include Update I/O path and Update I/O
name toggles, respectively. If these toggles are checked, the directory path that appears in the
Input file name and the name that appears in the Output file name text boxes will be updated
automatically to match the specified Working directory and Jobname.
Include input listing in output
Includes or excludes the input file listing at the beginning of the output file.
On UNIX/Linux systems, if you wish to start your batch job at a later date, click the Queue button. You
will be prompted to enter a start date and time. To use this option, you must have permission to run
the at command on UNIX/Linux systems, meaning your user name must appear in the at.allow file. If
that file does not exist, the at.deny file is checked to see if access should be denied. If neither file
exists, only users with root access may use this feature. If at.deny is empty, global usage is permitted.
These files consist of one user name per line and can be modified only by the superuser. The location of
the at.allow and at.deny files on each hardware platform is listed below:
Sun: /usr/lib/cron
IBM: /var/adm/cron
Linux: /etc
If you selected the LS-DYNA Solver simulation environment, you can specify the working directory as
described above, and the following:
Keyword Input File

Specify the name of the file.k that ANSYS writes. On Windows systems, the file must reside in
the working directory.
Restart Dump File
Specify the name of the small restart input file. On Windows systems, the file must reside in the
working directory. For more information, see the EDSTART command.
3.2.1.3.The Customization/Preferences Tab

The settings under this tab allow you to specify detailed settings about your working environment, such
as memory settings, parallel/distributed processing settings, custom executables, and additional
parameters. The available options will differ depending on the simulation environment you selected on
the first tab.
If you selected the ANSYS or ANSYS Batch simulation environment, you can specify:
Use Custom Memory Settings
Specifies the use of custom memory settings rather than using the default memory model. You
must select custom memory settings in order to set the -m or -db options. See Memory
Management and Configuration in the Basic Analysis Guide for information about memory
management.
Total Workspace (MB)
Specifies the initial allocation of memory requested for the ANSYS run. It defaults to 1 GB (1024
MB) for 64-bit machines or 512 MB for 32-bit machines. These values are sufficient for most
modest-sized models. Choosing a higher number allows more space for solution of large models,
and choosing a lower number allows more concurrent ANSYS runs. This option is not valid unless
Use Custom Memory Settings is selected.
Note: If a config130.ans file exists with its own work space specification
(VIRT_MEM), the work space value specified on the launcher overrides the
value specified in the config130.ans file.
Database (MB)
Specifies the portion (in megabytes) of total memory that the database will use for the initial
allocation. It defaults to 512 MB for 64-bit machines or 256 MB for 32-bit machines. These values
are sufficient for most modest-sized models. Enter a negative value to use a fixed database size
throughout the run. This option is not valid unless Use Custom Memory Settings is selected.
Custom ANSYS Executable
The launcher provides an option to start a customized ANSYS executable.
If you run a custom executable from the Customization/Preferences tab of the launcher:
Enter the full pathname to the custom executable in the ANSYS Custom Executable field.
Executable names must be one of the following:
ansys.exe
(Windows)
ansyscust.e130
(UNIX/Linux)
ansyscustdis.e130
(Distributed ANSYS on UNIX/Linux)
You cannot specify a custom Distributed ANSYS executable on Windows.

See Running Your Custom Executable in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for
more information.
Additional Parameters
You can use this option to set parameter values at ANSYS start-up.
For example, you can set ANSYS modeling parameters at program start-up using the format -name
value . For instance, -rad1 2.825 -rad2 5.675 -thick .25 defines three parameters: rad1=2.825,
rad2=5.675, and thick=0.25. The parameter name must be at least two characters long. See the
ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide for details about ANSYS parameters.
Note: If a parameter with the same name is defined in the launcher and in the
start130.ans file and the start130.ans file is read, the definition in the
start130.ans file overrides the definition specified in the launcher.
ANSYS Language
Specifies a translated language file. If you specify a language that does not have the associated
translated files, the launcher defaults to US English. ANSYS, Inc. does not provide translated files
for all products. For information on the availability of translated language files, contact your ANSYS
sales representative.
Graphics Device Name
Sets the graphics device. The GUI requires a terminal that supports graphics. For UNIX/Linux
systems, the graphics device can be X11 (default), X11c, or 3D. Choose 3D if you have a 3-D
graphics device; otherwise, use the default. For Windows systems, the graphics device can be
WIN32 (default), WIN32c, or 3D. Not available with the ANSYS Batch simulation environment.
Send output to
(UNIX/Linux only) Directs the output of the ANSYS program to the screen only, to an output file
only, or to both. For systems that support two-way redirection of output, the default is to send
output to both the screen and the output file ( Jobname.OUT). If queuing is used, output will be
directed to the output file only.
Read start.ans at start-up
Indicates whether the start130.ans file is read at start-up. You can include commands to be
executed when the program starts up in the start130.ans file. See Setting Preferences with the
start130.ans File for more information. Uncheck the box to not read the start130.ans at start-up.
If you selected the LS-DYNA Solver simulation environment, you can specify the following items:
Memory (words)
Specify the memory to be used, in words. For more information, see the EDSTART command.
File Size
Specify the scale factor for binary file size. For more information, see the EDSTART command.
Number of CPUs
Specify the number of CPUs to be used for shared memory parallel processing.
Enable Consistency Checking
Specify if consistency is to be forced or not for shared memory parallel processing. Forcing
consistency will ensure that calculations are performed in the same order across all machines,
avoiding differences in results that could otherwise occur.
Enable Double Precision Analysis
For more accurate results, you can use the double-precision capabilities of ANSYS LS-DYNA. This
feature is especially useful in sequential explicit-to-implicit springback types of analyses.
For more information on these settings or ANSYS LS-DYNA in general, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's
Guide.
3.2.1.4.The High Performance Computing Setup Tab

Use this tab to launch ANSYS to use the GPU accelerator capability, to run shared-memory ANSYS with
multiple processors, or to run Distributed ANSYS with the proper MPI configuration. You can also use
this tab to launch an ANSYS LS-DYNA MPP run.
To use the GPU accelerator capability, click Use GPU Accelerator Capability (also available when
using shared-memory ANSYS). To use the GPU accelerator capability, you must have a supported GPU
card and at least one ANSYS HPC Pack license. For more information, see GPU Accelerator Capability in
the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide .
To activate shared-memory ANSYS with multiple processors, click Use Shared-Memory Parallel
(SMP) and specify the number of processors. You will need an ANSYS Mechanical HPC license for each
processor after the first two.
To activate the distributed settings, click Use Distributed Computing. You then need to specify
machine information using one of the following methods:
A local machine with multiple processors
Multiple machines, specifying the machines via the launcher
Multiple machines, specifying the machines via an existing MPI file
You will need an ANSYS Mechanical HPC license for each processor after the first two.
If you are running on a Linux system running HP MPI, you can specify secure shell (ssh) instead of
remote shell (rsh). You can also choose to use the working directory as specified on the File
Management tab as the directory structure on the master and all nodes. If you select this option, all
machines will require the identical directory structure matching the working directory specified on the
launcher. This option will override any existing MPI_WORKDIR settings on the master or the nodes.
For detailed information on using this tab, see the Distributed ANSYS Guide . This tab is not available in
all simulation environments.
For detailed information on using the ANSYS LS-DYNA parallel processing capabilities, see the ANSYS LSDYNA User's Guide .
3.2.2.Launcher Menu Options

You can find launcher-specific controls under several launcher menu options. The menu options are:
File
Use the File menu to exit.
Profiles
Use the Profiles menu to save a specific launcher configuration. The profile you are currently
running is displayed in the launcher title bar. An asterisk (*) follows the profile name if you have
changed any settings from what is saved.
Click Save Profile to save the current launcher configurations. You can enter a name for
this profile. The last run profile will automatically be set as the default unless you specify
otherwise. If you want to set a subsequent profile as the default, you will need to check the
Set as Default box when you define that profile.
Click Load Profile to select the last run profile, the initial settings (the default configuration
as shipped by ANSYS), or one of your saved profiles.
Click Manage Profiles to rename a profile, specify a different default profile, unset a default
profile, or delete a profile.
On UNIX/Linux, once you've run the launcher at least once and established a last run profile, you
can quickly run now using the most recent launcher configuration by typing:
launcher130 -runae
will launch the ANSYS environment. You can launch other simulation environments using the
following options instead of runae :
runae
ANSYS Batch: -runbatch

ANSYS LS-DYNA: -rundyna
When you run now, you can also specify a particular profile using the -profile profilename
option:
launcher130 -runae -profile myprofile1
where myprofile1 is the name of a previously-defined profile. You can specify default as the
profile name to launch the product using your default profile:
launcher130 -runae -profile default
Options
Use the Options menu to select or deselect the following options:
Close the launcher on run
Write out the launcher log file ( launcher.130.log)
Show the hostname in the launcher title bar
Use detailed working directory browse dialog box
Pause at the end of a run (where applicable)
Specify your terminal emulator (UNIX/Linux only)
Save existing output files from batch runs
Use 'nohup' to start batch runs with output sent To 'File Only' (UNIX/Linux only)
Delete all settings/profiles
Reset ANSYS GUI configuration (Windows only)
Use C Shell Scripts For Runs Submitted Through the Batch 'Queue' (UNIX/Linux only)
If you choose to use the detailed working directory browse dialog box, it shows you what files are
contained in each directory, allows you to create a new directory, and allows you to filter on file
type. The standard browse dialog displays only the directories from which to choose.
By default, the launcher saves existing output files from batch runs. When a new file is created,
the old one is renamed to jobname.out.<timestamp> when the batch job is started. The timestamp
is in the format YYYY-MM-DD@hh_mm_ss and reflects the date that the file was renamed , not the
date the original file was created. To overwrite the output file rather than renaming it, uncheck the
Save Existing Output Files From Batch Runs item under the Options menu on the launcher.
Use the Reset ANSYS GUI Configuration option to return the ANSYS GUI to its default
configuration if you've rearranged the menus or toolbars. This option is especially useful if you've
moved an ANSYS GUI component out of your screen's viewable area.
The Use 'nohup' To Start Batch Runs With Output Sent To 'File Only' option is required
only on some systems. On some systems, you may need to select this option to allow batch jobs
to continue running after you log out of a session. Please refer to your system documentation to
determine if your system automatically provides the nohup capability. We do not recommend
using this setting on systems that automatically set nohup.
The Delete All Settings/Profiles option deletes all profiles saved for this release and sets all
Options menu settings back to the defaults. The launcher will also close automatically.
The Use C Shell Scripts For Runs Submitted Through the Batch 'Queue' option is
necessary on some machines that require a C shell script rather than a Bourne shell script. For the
machines that require C shell scripts, if a Bourne shell script is submitted, the run will fail (possibly
with an "export: Command not found" message). If your machine requires Bourne shell scripts and
you select this option (i.e., your machine does NOT require C shell scripts), the run will fail. This
option is only used when runs are submitted via the Queue option.
Tools
Use the Tools menu to view the ANSYS command line, to open a file in a text editor, or to access
ANSYS's auxiliary programs. You may or may not see all of these programs and utilities, depending
on what products you have installed. The programs you can access include:
ANIMATE utility (Windows only)
DISPLAY utility
Results Tracker utility. See the NLHIST command for more information.
CFX Launcher. This option is only applicable if you have a CFX product installed. On
Windows, this will open the launcher for the last-installed version of CFX. This version will
typically be the latest version of CFX you have on your machine. However, if you installed an
earlier version of CFX after a later version, then this option will open the launcher of that
earlier version. On UNIX/Linux systems, this option will search for the CFX launcher first in
the default CFX installation directory; if not found, then it searches for the version of CFX
that appears first in your path.
You can also display your license status, run the ANSLIC_ADMIN utility, or view the launcher log
file from the Tools menu. For more information on the ANSLIC_ADMIN utility, see the ANSYS,
Inc. Licensing Guide .
Links
Use the Links menu to access related web sites, such as the ANSYS Customer Portal and the
ANSYS Home Page.
Help
Use the Help menu to access more information. From this menu, you can access:
Launcher help for more detailed information on this launcher.

Site Information.
The About Launcher information.
COMBIN37
COMBIN37
Control
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
COMBIN37 Element Description

COMBIN37 is a unidirectional element with the capability of turning on and off during an analysis. The
element has one degree of freedom at each node, either a translation in a nodal coordinate direction,
rotation about a nodal coordinate axis, pressure, or temperature. Similar unidirectional elements (without
remote control capability) are COMBIN14, COMBIN39, and COMBIN40. The element has many
applications, such as controlling heat flow as a function of temperature (thermostat), controlling
damping as a function of velocity (mechanical snubber), controlling flow resistance as a function of
pressure (relief valve), controlling friction as a function of displacement (friction clutch), etc. See
COMBIN37 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
details about this element.
Figure37.1COMBIN37 Geometry
COMBIN37 Input Data

The functioning of this element is shown in Figure 37.1. The element is defined by two pairs of nodes,
these being active nodes (I, J) and optional control nodes (K, L). Generally in the cases using UX, UY, or
UZ as the active degrees of freedom, it is recommended to have the active nodes be coincident as this
eliminates the possibility of moment disequilibrium. However, for visualization purposes, it may be useful
to give node J a slightly greater coordinate value than node I. The element is defined such that a
positive displacement of node J relative to node I will stretch the spring. Thus, if nodes I and J are
interchanged, the same nodal motions will compress the spring.
Certain parameters associated with the control nodes are used to determine whether the control
element is part of the structure (on) or not (off) and, thus, can be used to disconnect regions of the
model during time dependent or iterative analyses. Other input values are stiffness (STIF), damping
coefficient (DAMP), concentrated nodal masses (MASI, MASJ), on/off control values (ONVAL, OFFVAL),
element load (AFORCE: positive pulls node I in the positive nodal coordinate direction, and pulls node J
in the negative nodal coordinate direction), initial on/off element status (START: -1 if explicitly off, 0 if
determined from starting value of control parameter, 1 if explicitly on), several nonlinear constants (C1,
C2, C3, C4), and a limiting sliding force (FSLIDE).
The FSLIDE value represents the absolute value of the spring force that must be exceeded before sliding
occurs. If FSLIDE is 0.0, the sliding capability of the element is removed, that is, a rigid connection is
assumed. For structural analyses, units are force/length or moment/rotation for stiffness,
force*time/length or moment*time/rotation for damping, force*time2 /length or moment*time2 /rotation
for mass, and force or moment for element load. For thermal analyses with temperature degrees of
freedom, stiffness represents conductance and has units of heat/time*degrees, mass represents thermal
capacitance with units of heat/degrees, and element load represents heat flow with units of heat/time.
Also, in analyses with pressure degrees of freedom, stiffness represents flow conductance with units of
length 2 /time. Stiffness, damping, mass, and element load should be defined on a full 360 basis for
axisymmetric analyses.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_COMBIN37.html[28/04/2013 07:15:00 p.m.]
COMBIN37
The active nodes (I, J) have only one degree of freedom each, selected with the KEYOPT(3) option. The
control nodes (K, L) can have the same, or a different, degree of freedom as specified with KEYOPT(2).
The KEYOPT(1) option assigns to the parameters of the control nodes either the value of the degree of
freedom, the first or second derivative of the value, the integral of the value, or time, for example:
Control nodes need not be connected to any other element. If node L is not defined, the control
parameter is based only upon node K. If time is the control parameter (KEYOPT(1)), control nodes K
and L need not be defined.
When the element is active and used in structural analyses, the element acts like any other
spring/damper/mass element (such as COMBIN14, MASS21, and COMBIN40). In addition, the element
can exhibit nonlinear behavior according to the function: RVMOD = RVAL + C1|CPAR| C2 + C3|CPAR|C4,
where RVMOD is the modified value of an input real constant value RVAL (identified by KEYOPT(6)), C1
through C4 are other real constants, and CPAR is the control parameter (see KEYOPT(1)). RVMOD may
also be defined by user subroutine USERRC and is accessed by KEYOPT(9) = 1. Note, FSLIDE modified
to a negative value is set to zero. In a field analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom
acts in a manner analogous to the displacement.
As illustrated in Figure 37.2, the KEYOPT(4) and KEYOPT(5) options, when used in combination with
ONVAL and OFFVAL, set the control behavior of the element. The element is either on or off depending
on the position of the control parameter with respect to the values of ONVAL and OFFVAL. Also, note
that when KEYOPT(4) = 0 and the control parameter (CPAR) is within the ONVAL/OFFVAL interval, the
element's status depends on the direction of the CPAR (i.e., on going from on to off, and vice-versa). If
ONVAL = OFFVAL = 0.0 (or blank), the on/off capability is ignored and the element is always active.
A summary of the element input is given in "COMBIN37 Input Summary". A general description of
element input is given in Element Input.
COMBIN37 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L (or I, J, K or I, J)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRESS, or TEMP (depending on KEYOPT(2) and KEYOPT (3)
below)
Real Constants
STIF, DAMP, MASJ, ONVAL, OFFVAL, AFORCE,
MASI, START, C1, C2, C3, C4,
FSLIDE
See Table37.1:COMBIN37 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Note: The DAMP real constant represents the damping coefficient for the damper
component of the element, and should not be confused with the DAMP
material property listed below.
Material Properties
COMBIN37
DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Control parameter:
0, 1--
Control on value (UK-UL) (or UK if L not defined)
2--
Control on first derivative of value with respect to time
3--
Control on second derivative of value with respect to time
4--
Control on integral of value with respect to time (zero initial condition assumed)
5--
Control on time value (KEYOPT(2) and nodes K and L ignored)
KEYOPT(2)
Degree of freedom for control nodes (K and L):
N--
Use degree of freedom N as listed for KEYOPT(3) (defaults to KEYOPT(3))
KEYOPT(3)
Degree of freedom for active nodes (I and J):
0, 1--
UX (Displacement along nodal X axes)
2--
UY (along nodal Y)
3--
UZ (along nodal Z)
4--
COMBIN37
ROTX (rotation about nodal X axes)

5--
ROTY (about nodal Y)
6--
ROTZ (about nodal Z)
7--
PRESS
8--
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
ON-OFF range behavior (see Figure 37.2):
0--
Overlapping ranges
1--
Unique ranges
KEYOPT(5)
ON-OFF position behavior (see Figure 37.2):
0--
OFF-either-ON (or OFF-ON-OFF if unique)
1--
ON-either-OFF (or ON-OFF-ON if unique)
KEYOPT(6)
Real constants used for RVMOD function (used if C1 or C3 is not equal to zero; see "COMBIN37
Input Data"):
0, 1--
Use STIF for nonlinear function. (Both STIF and FSLIDE cannot be zero).
2--
Use DAMP
3--
Use MASJ
4--
Use ONVAL
COMBIN37
5--
Use OFFVAL
6--
Use AFORCE
7--
Use MASI
8--
Use FSLIDE
KEYOPT(9)
Method to define nonlinear behavior:
0--
Use RVMOD expression for real constant modifications
1--
Real constants modified by user subroutine USERRC
Note: See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features information about user
written subroutines
Table37.1COMBIN37 Real Constants
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
STIF
DAMP
MASJ
ONVAL
OFFVAL
AFORCE
MASI
START
C1
C2
C3
C4
FSLIDE
Description
Spring stiffness
Damping coefficient
Nodal mass at node J
"ON" control value
"OFF" control value
Element load
Nodal mass at node I
Initial on/off element status
First scalar in RVMOD equation
First exponent in RVMOD equation
Second scalar in RVMOD equation
Second exponent in RVMOD equation
Limiting sliding force
COMBIN37 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:
Nodal degree of freedom results included in the overall nodal solution
COMBIN37
Additional element output as shown in Table37.2:COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions.

The active nodal displacements and forces correspond to the degree of freedom selected with the
KEYOPT(3) option. For axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360 basis.
The element value STRETCH is the relative deflection at the end of the substep less the amount of
sliding (e.g., UJ-UI-SLIDE). STATUS and OLDST indicate if the element is on or off at the end of the
current and previous substeps, respectively. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure37.2COMBIN37 Behavior as a Function of Control Parameter

available.
Table37.2COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
ACTIVE NODES
CONTROL NODES
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Nodes - K, L
Location where results are reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
COMBIN37
CONTROL PARAM
STAT
OLDST
UI
UJ
UK
UL
STRETCH
SFORCE
AFORCE
SLSTAT
OLDSLS
SLIDE
CPAR value (see KEYOPT(1)) of the control nodes

Element status
STAT value of the previous time step
Displacement of node I
Displacement of node J
Displacement of node K
Displacement of node L
Relative displacement
Spring force in element
Applied force in the element
Sliding status
Sliding status value of the previous time step
Amount of sliding
Y
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
Y
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
1. If the value of the element status is:

0 - OFF
1 - ON
2. For the thermal and fluid options, analogous items are output. Thermal option output items TEMPI,
TEMPJ, TEMPK, TEMPL, DELTEMP, SHEAT, and AHEAT and fluid option output items PRESI,
PRESJ, PRESK, PRESL, DELPRES, SFLOW, and AFLOW are respectively analogous to output items
UI, UJ, UK, UL, STRETCH, SFORCE, and AFORCE.
3. Output only if FSLIDE is greater than zero. If the value of the sliding status is:
0 - No sliding
1 - Sliding right (node J moving to right of node I)
-1- Sliding left (node J moving to left of node I)
4. If FSLIDE is greater than zero
5. Available only at centroid as a *GET item.
Table37.3:COMBIN37 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The
following notation is used in Table37.3:COMBIN37 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table37.2:COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
Table37.3COMBIN37 Item and Sequence Numbers
COMBIN37

Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
SFORCE
AFORCE
STAT
OLDST
SLSTAT
OLDSLS
STRETCH
UI
UJ
UK
UL
CPAR
SLIDE
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Analogous thermal and fluid option output items use the same item and sequence numbers. See
footnote 2 of Table37.2:COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions.
COMBIN37 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element may have only one degree of freedom per node which is specified in the nodal
coordinate system (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System).
The element assumes only a one-dimensional action.
Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
No moment effects are included due to noncoincident nodes. That is, if the nodes are offset from
the line of action, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
The nonlinear capabilities of the element operate only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic
analyses.
If used in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status (on or off), throughout the
analysis.
The real constants for this element are not allowed to be changed from their initial values.
The element can not be deactivated with the EKILL command.
Only the lumped mass matrix is available.
COMBIN37 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Structural.
KEYOPT(2)= 8 is not allowed.
KEYOPT(3)= 8 is not allowed.
COMBIN37
COMBIN14
COMBIN14
Spring-Damper


COMBIN14 has longitudinal or torsional capability in 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D applications. The longitudinal
spring-damper option is a uniaxial tension-compression element with up to three degrees of freedom at
each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or torsion is considered. The
torsional spring-damper option is a purely rotational element with three degrees of freedom at each
node: rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. No bending or axial loads are considered.
The spring-damper element has no mass. Masses can be added by using the appropriate mass element
(see MASS21). The spring or the damping capability may be removed from the element. See COMBIN14
in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about
this element. A general spring or damper is also available in the stiffness matrix element (MATRIX27).
Another spring-damper element (having its direction of action determined by the nodal coordinate
directions) is COMBIN40.
2-D elements must lie in a z = constant plane
COMBIN14 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 14.1. The
element is defined by two nodes, a spring constant (k) and damping coefficients (c v ) 1 and (c v ) 2 . The
damping capability is not used for static or undamped modal analyses. The longitudinal spring constant
should have units of Force / Length, the damping coefficient units are Force * Time / Length. The
torsional spring constant and damping coefficient have units of Force * Length / Radian and Force *
Length * Time / Radian, respectively. For a 2-D axisymmetric analysis, these values should be on a full
360 basis.
The damping portion of the element contributes only damping coefficients to the structural damping
matrix. The damping force (F) or torque (T) is computed as:
F x = - c v dux /dt or T = - c v d/dt
where c v is the damping coefficient given by c v = (c v ) 1 + (c v ) 2 v.
v is the velocity calculated in the previous substep. The second damping coefficient (c v ) 2 is available to
produce a nonlinear damping effect characteristic of some fluid environments. If (c v ) 2 is input (as real
constant CV2), KEYOPT(1) must be set to 1.
COMBIN14
KEYOPT(2) = 1 through 6 is used for defining the element as a one-dimensional element. With these
options, the element operates in the nodal coordinate system (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal
Coordinate System). The KEYOPT(2) = 7 and 8 options allow the element to be used in a thermal or
pressure analysis.
A preload in the spring may be specified in one of two ways, either through an initial (force-free) length
(ILENGTH) or an initial force (IFORCE) input. Only 2-D or 3-D springs support this input (KEYOPT(2) =
0). Only one of the input options may be used to define the preload. If the initial length is different than
the input length defined by the nodal coordinates, a preload is presumed to exist. If an initial force is
given, a negative value indicates the spring is initially in compression and a positive value indicates
tension. For the 3-D torsional spring option (KEYOPT(3) = 1), ILENGTH is interpreted as the initial
number of turns (rotations) in the spring (the spring is pre-wound) and IFORCE is the torque preload in
the spring. The right-hand rule from node I to node J is used to define positive and negative turns as
well as positive and negative torque. In a nonlinear analysis, the preload is ramped in the first load step
if KBC,0 is set.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ if KEYOPT (3) = 0
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 1
UX, UY if KEYOPT (3) = 2
see list below if KEYOPT(2) > 0
Real Constants
K, CV1, CV2, (Blank), (Blank), ILENGTH, IFORCE
See Table14.1:COMBIN14 Real Constants for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear (if CV2 is not zero)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Solution type:
COMBIN14
0--
Linear Solution (default)
1--
Nonlinear solution (required if CV2 is nonzero)
KEYOPT(2)
Degree of freedom selection for 1-D behavior:
0--
Use KEYOPT(3) options
1--
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UX degree of freedom)
2--
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UY degree of freedom)
3--
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UZ degree of freedom)
4--
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTX degree of freedom)
5--
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTY degree of freedom)
6--
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTZ degree of freedom)
7--
Pressure degree of freedom element
8--
Temperature degree of freedom element
KEYOPT(3)
Note: KEYOPT(2) overrides KEYOPT(3)
Degree of freedom selection for 2-D and 3-D behavior:

0--
3-D longitudinal spring-damper
1--
3-D torsional spring-damper
COMBIN14
2--
2-D longitudinal spring-damper (2-D elements must lie in an X-Y plane)
No.
Name
1
2
3
4, 5
6
K
CV1
CV2
(Blank)
ILENGTH
IFORCE
Description
Spring constant
Damping coefficient
Damping coefficient (KEYOPT(1) must be set to 1)
-Initial force-free length (Initial number of turns if torsional spring
(KEYOPT(3) = 1))
Initial force (or torque if torsional spring (KEYOPT(3) = 1))

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table14.2:COMBIN14 Element Output Definitions.
Several items are illustrated in Figure 14.2. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Figure14.2COMBIN14 Stress Output

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
COMBIN14
FORC or TORQ
STRETCH or TWIST
RATE
VELOCITY
DAMPING FORCE or
TORQUE
Spring force or moment

Stretch of spring or twist of spring (radians)
Spring constant
Velocity
Damping force or moment (zero unless ANTYPE,TRANS
and damping present)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic
Name
Item
E
Item
E

FORC
STRETCH
VELOCITY
DAMPING FORCE
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
1
2
3

If KEYOPT(2) is zero, the length of the spring-damper element must not be zero (that is, nodes I
and J should not be coincident, since the node locations determine the spring orientation).
The longitudinal spring element stiffness acts only along its length. The torsion spring element
stiffness acts only about its length, as in a torsion bar.
The element allows only a uniform stress in the spring.
In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner analogous
to the displacement.
Only the KEYOPT(2) = 0 option supports stress stiffening or large deflection. Also, if KEYOPT(3) =
1 (torsion) is used with large deflection, the coordinates will not be updated.
The spring or the damping capability may be deleted from the element by setting K or CV equal to
zero, respectively.
If CV2 is not zero, the element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
The preload may not change after the first load step. Any changes are ignored.
COMBIN14
The restrictions described below only apply if KEYOPT(2) is greater than zero.
If KEYOPT(2) is greater than zero, the element has only one degree of freedom. This degree of
freedom is specified in the nodal coordinate system and is the same for both nodes (see Elements
that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System). If the nodal coordinate systems are rotated relative
to each other, the same degree of freedom may be in different directions (thereby giving possibly
unexpected results). The element, however, assumes only a 1-D action. Nodes I and J, then, may
be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
For noncoincident nodes and KEYOPT(2) = 1, 2, or 3, no moment effects are included. That is, if
the nodes are offset from the line of action, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to
stretch the spring. If, for a given set of conditions, nodes I and J are interchanged, a positive
displacement of node J relative to node I tends to compress the spring.

ANSYS Professional.
Structural Analysis:
No damping capability; CV1 and CV2 are not allowed.
Only stress stiffening and large deflections are allowed.
KEYOPT(2) = 7 or 8 is not allowed.
The DAMP material property is not allowed.
ANSYS Professional.
Thermal Analysis:
KEYOPT(2) defaults to 8.
KEYOPT(3) is not applicable.
DesignSpace.
KEYOPT(2) = 7 is not applicable.
In the Mechanical application, KEYOPT(2) = 7 and KEYOPT(2) = 8 are not applicable .
MASS21
MASS21
Structural Mass

MASS21 Element Description

MASS21 is a point element having up to six degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y, and z
directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. A different mass and rotary inertia may be
assigned to each coordinate direction. See MASS21 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
Another element with a full mass matrix capability (off-diagonal terms) is MATRIX27.
Figure21.1MASS21 Geometry
MASS21 Input Data

The mass element is defined by a single node, concentrated mass components (Force*Time 2 /Length) in
the element coordinate directions, and rotary inertias (Force*Length*Time 2 ) about the element
coordinate axes. The element coordinate system may be initially parallel to the global Cartesian
coordinate system or to the nodal coordinate system (KEYOPT(2)). The element coordinate system
rotates with the nodal coordinate rotations during a large deflection analysis. Options are available to
exclude the rotary inertia effects and to reduce the element to a 2-D capability (KEYOPT(3)). If the
element requires only one mass input, it is assumed to act in all appropriate coordinate directions. The
coordinate system for this element is shown in Figure 21.1.
KEYOPT(1) = 1 defines the mass in volume*density form, which allows plotting of the mass using
/ESHAPE, as well as the use of a temperature-dependent density.
A summary of the element input is given in "MASS21 Input Summary". Element Input gives a general
description of element input.
MASS21 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 0
UX, UY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 3
(degrees of freedom are in the nodal coordinate system)
Real Constants
MASSX, MASSY, MASSZ, IXX, IYY, IZZ, if KEYOPT (3) = 0
MASS, if KEYOPT (3) = 2
MASS, IZZ, if KEYOPT (3) = 3
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_MASS21.html[28/04/2013 07:15:11 p.m.]
MASS21
MASS, if KEYOPT (3) = 4

(MASSX, MASSY, and MASSZ are concentrated mass components in the element coordinate
directions. IXX, IYY, and IZZ are rotary inertias about the element coordinate axes. See also
KEYOPT(2)).
Material Properties
DENS (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Real constant interpretation (mass/volume or rotary inertia/density):
0--
Interpret real constants as masses and rotary inertias
1--
Interpret real constants as volumes and rotary inertias/density (Density must be input as a
material property)
KEYOPT(2)
Initial element coordinate system:
0--
Element coordinate system is initially parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate system
1--
Element coordinate system is initially parallel to the nodal coordinate system
KEYOPT(3)
Rotary inertia options:
0--
3-D mass with rotary inertia
2--
3-D mass without rotary inertia
3--
2-D mass with rotary inertia
MASS21
4--
2-D mass without rotary inertia
MASS21 Output Data

Nodal displacements are included in the overall displacement solution. There is no element solution
output associated with the element unless element reaction forces and/or energies are requested.
MASS21 Assumptions and Restrictions

2-D elements are assumed to be in a global Cartesian Z = constant plane.
The mass element has no effect on the static analysis solution unless acceleration or rotation is
present, or inertial relief is selected [IRLF].
The standard mass summary printout is based on the average of MASSX, MASSY, and MASSZ if
(KEYOPT(3) = 0).
In an inertial relief analysis, the full matrix is used. All terms are used during the analysis.
MASS21 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
The only special feature allowed is large deflection.
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications Theory Reference
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
1.1. Purpose of the Theory Reference
1.2. Understanding Theory Reference Notation
1.3. Applicable Products
1.3.1. ANSYS Products
1.3.2. ANSYS Workbench Products
1.4. Using the Theory Reference for the ANSYS Workbench Product
1.4.1. Elements Used by the ANSYS Workbench Product
1.4.2. Solvers Used by the ANSYS Workbench Product
1.4.3. Other Features
2. Structures
2.1. Structural Fundamentals
2.1.1. Stress-Strain Relationships
2.1.2. Orthotropic Material Transformation for Axisymmetric Models
2.1.3. Temperature-Dependent Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
2.2. Derivation of Structural Matrices
2.3. Structural Strain and Stress Evaluations
2.3.1. Integration Point Strains and Stresses
2.3.2. Surface Stresses
2.3.3. Shell Element Output
2.4. Combined Stresses and Strains
2.4.1.
2.4.2.
2.4.3.
2.4.4.
2.4.5.
2.4.6.
2.4.7.
Combined Strains
Combined Stresses
Failure Criteria
Maximum Strain Failure Criteria
Maximum Stress Failure Criteria
Tsai-Wu Failure Criteria
Safety Tools in the ANSYS Workbench Product
3. Structures with Geometric Nonlinearities

3.1. Understanding Geometric Nonlinearities
3.2. Large Strain
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
3.2.6.
Theory
Implementation
Definition of Thermal Strains
Element Formulation
Applicable Input
Applicable Output
3.3. Large Rotation

3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
Theory
Implementation
Element Transformation
Deformational Displacements
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/ansys.theory.html[28/04/2013 07:15:14 p.m.]
3.3.5.
3.3.6.
3.3.7.
3.3.8.
Updating Rotations
Applicable Input
Applicable Output
Consistent Tangent Stiffness Matrix and Finite Rotation
3.4. Stress Stiffening

3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.4.6.
Overview and Usage

Theory
Implementation
Pressure Load Stiffness
Applicable Input
Applicable Output
3.5. Spin Softening

3.6. General Element Formulations
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
3.6.6.
3.6.7.
Fundamental Equations
Classical Pure Displacement Formulation
Mixed u-P Formulations
u-P Formulation I
u-P Formulation II
u-P Formulation III
Volumetric Constraint Equations in u-P Formulations
3.7. Constraints and Lagrange Multiplier Method

4. Structures with Material Nonlinearities
4.1. Understanding Material Nonlinearities
4.2. Rate-Independent Plasticity
4.2.1. Theory
4.2.2. Yield Criterion
4.2.3. Flow Rule
4.2.4. Hardening Rule
4.2.5. Plastic Strain Increment
4.2.6. Implementation
4.2.7. Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Matrix
4.2.8. Specialization for Hardening
4.2.9. Specification for Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening
4.2.10. Specialization for Bilinear Kinematic Hardening
4.2.11. Specialization for Multilinear Kinematic Hardening
4.2.12. Specialization for Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening
4.2.13. Specialization for Anisotropic Plasticity
4.2.14. Hill Potential Theory
4.2.15. Generalized Hill Potential Theory
4.2.16. Specialization for Drucker-Prager
4.2.17. Cap Model
4.2.18. Gurson's Model
4.2.19. Gurson Plasticity with Isotropic/Chaboche Kinematic Hardening
4.2.20. Cast Iron Material Model
4.3. Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Including Creep and Viscoplasticity)
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
4.3.3.
4.3.4.
4.3.5.
Creep
Rate-Dependent Plasticity
Anand Viscoplasticity
Extended Drucker-Prager (EDP) Creep Model
Cap Creep Model
4.4. Gasket Material

4.4.1. Stress and Deformation
4.4.2. Material Definition
4.4.3. Thermal Deformation
4.5. Nonlinear Elasticity
4.5.1. Overview and Guidelines for Use
4.6. Shape Memory Alloy
4.6.1. The Continuum Mechanics Model
4.7. Hyperelasticity
4.7.1.
4.7.2.
4.7.3.
4.7.4.
4.7.5.
4.7.6.
4.7.7.
4.7.8.
4.7.9.
Finite Strain Elasticity

Deviatoric-Volumetric Multiplicative Split
Isotropic Hyperelasticity
Anisotropic Hyperelasticity
USER Subroutine
Output Quantities
Hyperelasticity Material Curve Fitting
Experimental Response Functions
Material Stability Check
4.8. Bergstrom-Boyce
4.9. Mullins Effect
4.9.1. The Pseudo-elastic Model
4.10. Viscoelasticity
4.10.1.
4.10.2.
4.10.3.
4.10.4.
4.10.5.
4.10.6.
4.10.7.
4.10.8.
Small Strain Viscoelasticity

Constitutive Equations
Numerical Integration
Thermorheological Simplicity
Large-Deformation Viscoelasticity
Visco-Hypoelasticity
Large Strain Viscoelasticity
Shift Functions
4.11. Concrete
4.11.1.
4.11.2.
4.11.3.
4.11.4.
The
The
The
The
Domain
Domain
Domain
Domain
(Compression - Compression - Compression)

(Tension - Compression - Compression)
(Tension - Tension - Compression)
(Tension - Tension - Tension)
4.12. Swelling
4.13. Cohesive Zone Material Model
4.13.1. Interface Elements
4.13.2. Contact Elements
4.14. Fluid Material Models
4.14.1. Liquid
4.14.2. Gas
4.14.3. Pressure-Volume Data
5. Electromagnetics
5.1. Electromagnetic Field Fundamentals

5.1.1.
5.1.2.
5.1.3.
5.1.4.
5.1.5.
5.1.6.
5.1.7.
5.1.8.
Magnetic Scalar Potential

Solution Strategies
Magnetic Vector Potential
Limitation of the Node-Based Vector Potential
Edge-Based Magnetic Vector Potential
Harmonic Analysis Using Complex Formalism
Nonlinear Time-Harmonic Magnetic Analysis
Electric Scalar Potential
5.2. Derivation of Electromagnetic Matrices

5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
5.2.4.

Magnetic Vector Potential
Electric Scalar Potential
5.3. Electromagnetic Field Evaluations

5.3.1.
5.3.2.
5.3.3.
5.3.4.
5.3.5.
5.3.6.
5.3.7.
Magnetic Scalar Potential Results

Magnetic Vector Potential Results
Magnetic Forces
Joule Heat in a Magnetic Analysis
Electric Scalar Potential Results
Electrostatic Forces
5.4. Stranded Coil Analyses

5.4.1. Governing Equations
5.4.2. A-VOLT-EMF Formulation
5.4.3. A-CURR Formulation
5.5. High-Frequency Electromagnetic Field Simulation
5.5.1.
5.5.2.
5.5.3.
5.5.4.
High-Frequency Electromagnetic Field FEA Principle

Boundary Conditions and Perfectly Matched Layers (PML)
Excitation Sources
High-Frequency Parameters Evaluations
5.6. Inductance, Flux and Energy Computation by LMATRIX and SENERGY Macros
5.6.1.
5.6.2.
5.6.3.
5.6.4.
5.6.5.
5.6.6.
5.6.7.
Differential Inductance Definition

Review of Inductance Computation Methods
Inductance Computation Method Used
Transformer and Motion Induced Voltages
Absolute Flux Computation
Inductance Computations
Absolute Energy Computation
5.7. Electromagnetic Particle Tracing

5.8. Capacitance Computation
5.9. Open Boundary Analysis with a Trefftz Domain
5.10. Conductance Computation
6. Heat Flow
6.1. Heat Flow Fundamentals
6.1.1. Conduction and Convection
6.1.2. Radiation
6.2. Derivation of Heat Flow Matrices
6.3. Heat Flow Evaluations
6.3.1. Integration Point Output
6.3.2. Surface Output
6.4. Radiation Matrix Method
6.4.1.
6.4.2.
6.4.3.
6.4.4.
Non-Hidden Method
Hidden Method
View Factors of Axisymmetric Bodies
Space Node
6.5. Radiosity Solution Method

6.5.1. View Factor Calculation - Hemicube Method
7. Fluid Flow
7.1. Fluid Flow Fundamentals
7.1.1.
7.1.2.
7.1.3.
7.1.4.
7.1.5.
7.1.6.
7.1.7.
7.1.8.
Continuity Equation
Momentum Equation
Compressible Energy Equation
Incompressible Energy Equation
Turbulence
Pressure
Multiple Species Transport
Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) Formulation
7.2. Derivation of Fluid Flow Matrices

7.2.1.
7.2.2.
7.2.3.
7.2.4.
7.2.5.
7.2.6.
Discretization of Equations
Transient Term
Advection Term
Diffusion Terms
Source Terms
Segregated Solution Algorithm
7.3. Volume of Fluid Method for Free Surface Flows

7.3.1.
7.3.2.
7.3.3.
7.3.4.
7.3.5.
7.3.6.
Overview
CLEAR-VOF Advection
CLEAR-VOF Reconstruction
Treatment of Finite Element Equations
Treatment of Volume Fraction Field
Treatment of Surface Tension Field
7.4. Fluid Solvers

7.5. Overall Convergence and Stability
7.5.1.
7.5.2.
7.5.3.
7.5.4.
Convergence
Stability
Residual File
Modified Inertial Relaxation
7.6. Fluid Properties

7.6.1. Density
7.6.2. Viscosity
7.6.3.
7.6.4.
7.6.5.
7.6.6.
7.6.7.
Thermal Conductivity
Specific Heat
Surface Tension Coefficient
Wall Static Contact Angle
Multiple Species Property Options
7.7. Derived Quantities

7.7.1.
7.7.2.
7.7.3.
7.7.4.
7.7.5.
Mach Number
Total Pressure
Y-Plus and Wall Shear Stress
Stream Function
Heat Transfer Film Coefficient
7.8. Squeeze Film Theory

7.8.1. Flow Between Flat Surfaces
7.8.2. Flow in Channels
7.9. Slide Film Theory
8. Acoustics
8.1. Acoustic Fluid Fundamentals
8.1.1. Governing Equations
8.1.2. Discretization of the Lossless Wave Equation
8.2. Derivation of Acoustics Fluid Matrices
8.3. Absorption of Acoustical Pressure Wave
8.3.1. Addition of Dissipation due to Damping at the Boundary
8.4. Acoustics Fluid-Structure Coupling
8.5. Acoustics Output Quantities
9. This chapter intentionally omitted.
11. Coupling
11.1. Coupled Effects
11.1.1. Elements
11.1.2. Coupling Methods
11.2.
11.3.
11.4.
11.5.
11.6.
11.7.
11.8.
Thermoelasticity
Piezoelectrics
Electroelasticity
Piezoresistivity
Thermoelectrics
Review of Coupled Electromechanical Methods
Porous Media Flow
12. Shape Functions

12.1. Understanding Shape Function Labels
12.2. 2-D Lines
12.2.1. 2-D Lines without RDOF
12.2.2. 2-D Lines with RDOF
12.3. 3-D Lines
12.3.1.
12.3.2.
12.3.3.
12.3.4.
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
2-Node
2-Node
3-Node
4-Node
Lines without RDOF

Lines with RDOF
Lines
Lines
12.4. Axisymmetric Shells

12.4.1. Axisymmetric Shell without ESF
12.5. Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells and General Axisymmetric Surfaces
12.5.1. Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells
12.5.2. General Axisymmetric Surfaces
12.6. 3-D Shells
12.6.1.
12.6.2.
12.6.3.
12.6.4.
12.6.5.
12.6.6.
12.6.7.
12.6.8.
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-D
3-Node
6-Node
3-Node
4-Node
4-Node
8-Node
4-Node
4-Node
Triangular Shells without RDOF (CST)

Triangular Shells without RDOF (LST)
Triangular Shells with RDOF but without SD
Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF and without ESF (Q4)
Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF but with ESF (QM6)
Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF
Quadrilateral Shells with RDOF but without SD and without ESF
Quadrilateral Shells with RDOF but without SD and with ESF
12.7. 2-D and Axisymmetric Solids

12.7.1.
12.7.2.
12.7.3.
12.7.4.
12.7.5.
12.7.6.
12.7.7.
2-D
2-D
2-D
2-D
2-D
2-D
2-D
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
3-Node Triangular Solids (CST)

6-Node Triangular Solids (LST)
4-node Quadrilateral Solid without ESF (Q4)
4-node Quadrilateral Solids with ESF (QM6)
8-Node Quadrilateral Solids (Q8)
4-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids
8-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids
12.8. Axisymmetric Harmonic Solids

12.8.1.
12.8.2.
12.8.3.
12.8.4.
12.8.5.
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric
Harmonic
Harmonic
Harmonic
Harmonic
Harmonic
3-Node
6-Node
4-Node
4-Node
8-Node
Triangular Solids
Triangular Solids
Quadrilateral Solids without ESF
Quadrilateral Solids with ESF
Quadrilateral Solids
12.9. 3-D Solids

12.9.1. 4-Node Tetrahedra
12.9.2. 4-Node Tetrahedra by Condensation
12.9.3. 10-Node Tetrahedra
12.9.4. 10-Node Tetrahedra by Condensation
12.9.5. 5-Node Pyramids by Condensation
12.9.6. 13-Node Pyramids by Condensation
12.9.7. 6-Node Wedges without ESF by Condensation
12.9.8. 6-Node Wedges with ESF by Condensation
12.9.9. 15-Node Wedges by Condensation
12.9.10. 15-Node Wedges Based on Wedge Shape Functions
12.9.11. 8-Node Bricks without ESF
12.9.12. 8-Node Bricks with ESF
12.9.13. 20-Node Bricks
12.9.14. 8-Node Infinite Bricks
12.9.15. 3-D 20-Node Infinite Bricks
12.9.16. General Axisymmetric Solids
12.10. Low Frequency Electromagnetic Edge Elements

12.10.1. 3-D 20-Node Brick (SOLID117)
12.11. High Frequency Electromagnetic Tangential Vector Elements
12.11.1.
12.11.2.
12.11.3.
12.11.4.
Tetrahedral Elements (HF119)

Hexahedral Elements (HF120)
Triangular Elements (HF118)
Quadrilateral Elements (HF118)
13. Element Tools

13.1. Element Shape Testing
13.1.1. Overview
13.1.2. 3-D Solid Element Faces and Cross-Sections
13.1.3. Aspect Ratio
13.1.4. Aspect Ratio Calculation for Triangles
13.1.5. Aspect Ratio Calculation for Quadrilaterals
13.1.6. Angle Deviation
13.1.7. Angle Deviation Calculation
13.1.8. Parallel Deviation
13.1.9. Parallel Deviation Calculation
13.1.10. Maximum Corner Angle
13.1.11. Maximum Corner Angle Calculation
13.1.12. Jacobian Ratio
13.1.13. Warping Factor
13.2. Integration Point Locations
13.2.1. Lines (1, 2, or 3 Points)
13.2.2. Quadrilaterals (2 x 2 or 3 x 3 Points)
13.2.3. Bricks and Pyramids (2 x 2 x 2 Points)
13.2.4. Triangles (1, 3, or 6 Points)
13.2.5. Tetrahedra (1, 4, 5, or 11 Points)
13.2.6. Triangles and Tetrahedra (2 x 2 or 2 x 2 x 2 Points)
13.2.7. Wedges (3 x 2 or 3 x 3 Points)
13.2.8. Wedges (2 x 2 x 2 Points)
13.2.9. Bricks (14 Points)
13.2.10. Nonlinear Bending (5 Points)
13.2.11. General Axisymmetric Elements
13.3. Temperature-Dependent Material Properties
13.4. Positive Definite Matrices
13.4.1. Matrices Representing the Complete Structure
13.4.2. Element Matrices
13.5. Lumped Matrices
13.5.1. Diagonalization Procedure
13.5.2. Limitations of Lumped Mass Matrices
13.6. Reuse of Matrices
13.6.1. Element Matrices
13.6.2. Structure Matrices
13.6.3. Override Option
13.7. Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements
13.7.1.
13.7.2.
13.7.3.
13.7.4.
13.7.5.
K w = 0 through 3
K w = 5 through 7
Presence of Both Waves and Current
MacCamy-Fuchs Corrections
Morison's Equation
13.8. Nodal and Centroidal Data Evaluation

14. Element Library
14.1.
14.2.
14.3.
14.4.
14.5.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
14.5.1. Other Applicable Sections
14.6.
14.7.
14.8.
14.9.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
14.9.1. Introduction
14.9.2. Theory
14.10. Not Documented

14.11. LINK11 - Linear Actuator
14.11.1. Assumptions and Restrictions
14.11.2. Element Matrices and Load Vector
14.11.3. Force, Stroke, and Length
14.13. PLANE13 - 2-D Coupled-Field Solid
14.14. COMBIN14 - Spring-Damper
14.14.1. Types of Input
14.14.2. Stiffness Pass
14.14.3. Output Quantities
14.15.
14.16.
14.17.
14.18.
14.19.
14.20.
14.21.
14.22.
14.23.
14.24.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
PLANE25 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Structural Solid

14.24.3. Use of Temperature
14.26. MATRIX27 - Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix

14.27. SHELL28 - Shear/Twist Panel
14.27.2. Commentary
14.27.3. Output Terms
14.28. FLUID29 - 2-D Acoustic Fluid
14.30. LINK31 - Radiation Link
14.30.1. Standard Radiation (KEYOPT(3) = 0)
14.30.2. Empirical Radiation (KEYOPT(3) = 1)
14.30.3. Solution
14.32. LINK33 - 3-D Conduction Bar
14.32.2. Matrices and Load Vectors
14.32.3. Output
14.33. LINK34 - Convection Link
14.33.1. Conductivity Matrix
14.33.2. Output
14.34. PLANE35 - 2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid
14.35. SOURC36 - Current Source
14.35.1. Description
14.36. COMBIN37 - Control
14.36.1.
14.36.2.
14.36.3.
14.36.4.
Element Characteristics
Element Matrices
Adjustment of Real Constants
Evaluation of Control Parameter
14.37. FLUID38 - Dynamic Fluid Coupling

14.37.1.
14.37.2.
14.37.3.
14.37.4.
Description
Assumptions and Restrictions
Damping Matrix Formulation
14.38. COMBIN39 - Nonlinear Spring

14.38.1. Input
14.38.2. Element Stiffness Matrix and Load Vector
14.38.3. Choices for Element Behavior

14.39. COMBIN40 - Combination
14.39.1.
14.39.2.
14.39.3.
14.39.4.
Characteristics of the Element

Element Matrices for Structural Applications
Determination of F1 and F2 for Structural Applications
Thermal Analysis
14.40. SHELL41 - Membrane Shell

14.40.2. Wrinkle Option
14.41. PLANE42 - 2-D Structural Solid
14.44. SOLID45 - 3-D Structural Solid
14.46. INFIN47 - 3-D Infinite Boundary
14.46.1.
14.46.2.
14.46.3.
14.46.4.
14.46.5.
Introduction
Theory
Reduced Scalar Potential
Difference Scalar Potential
Generalized Scalar Potential

14.49. MATRIX50 - Superelement (or Substructure)
14.52. PLANE53 - 2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
14.52.3. VOLT DOF in 2-D and Axisymmetric Skin Effect Analysis
14.54. PLANE55 - 2-D Thermal Solid
14.54.2. Mass Transport Option
14.55.
14.56.
14.57.
14.58.
14.59.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented

14.59.3. Stress, Force, and Moment Calculations
14.60. SOLID62 - 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid

14.63. SOLID65 - 3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid
14.63.1.
14.63.2.
14.63.3.
14.63.4.
14.63.5.
14.63.6.
14.63.7.
14.63.8.

Description
Linear Behavior - General
Linear Behavior - Concrete
Linear Behavior - Reinforcement
Nonlinear Behavior - Concrete
Modeling of a Crack
Modeling of Crushing

14.65. LINK68 - Coupled Thermal-Electric Line
14.66. SOLID70 - 3-D Thermal Solid
14.66.2. Fluid Flow in a Porous Medium
14.67. MASS71 - Thermal Mass
14.67.1. Specific Heat Matrix
14.67.2. Heat Generation Load Vector
14.68.
14.69.
14.70.
14.71.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented

14.73. PLANE77 - 2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid
14.74. PLANE78 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
14.75. FLUID79 - 2-D Contained Fluid
14.76.1.
14.76.2.
14.76.3.
14.76.4.
14.76.5.
Other Applicable Sections

Material Properties
Free Surface Effects
Other Assumptions and Limitations
14.77. FLUID81 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid

14.77.3. Load Vector Correction
14.79. PLANE83 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Structural Solid
14.80.
14.81.
14.82.
14.83.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented

14.86. SOLID90 - 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid
14.87.
14.88.
14.89.
14.90.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
14.90.1. Electric Circuit Elements

14.90.2. Piezoelectric Circuit Element Matrices and Load Vectors
14.92. SOLID96 - 3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid
14.93. SOLID97 - 3-D Magnetic Solid
14.94. SOLID98 - Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
14.105. TRANS109 - 2-D Electromechanical Transducer
14.106. INFIN110 - 2-D Infinite Solid
14.106.1. Mapping Functions
14.106.2. Matrices

14.108.
14.109.
14.110.
14.111.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
14.111.1. Element Matrix Derivation

14.111.2. Formulation
14.112. FLUID116 - Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe
14.112.1.
14.112.2.
14.112.3.
14.112.4.

Combined Equations
Thermal Matrix Definitions
Fluid Equations
14.113. SOLID117 - 3-D 20-Node Magnetic Edge

14.113.2. Matrix Formulation of Low Frequency Edge Element and Tree Gauging
14.115. HF119 - 3-D High-Frequency Magnetic Tetrahedral Solid
14.115.2. Solution Shape Functions - H (curl) Conforming Elements
14.116. HF120 - High-Frequency Magnetic Brick Solid
14.116.2. Solution Shape Functions - H(curl) Conforming Element
14.117. PLANE121 - 2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid
14.118. SOLID122 - 3-D 20-Node Electrostatic Solid
14.119. SOLID123 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid
14.120. CIRCU124 - Electric Circuit
14.120.1. Electric Circuit Elements
14.120.2. Electric Circuit Element Matrices
14.121. CIRCU125 - Diode
14.121.1. Diode Elements
14.121.2. Norton Equivalents
14.121.3. Element Matrix and Load Vector
14.122. TRANS126 - Electromechanical Transducer
14.125. FLUID129 - 2-D Infinite Acoustic

14.126.1. Mathematical Formulation and F.E. Discretization
14.126.2. Finite Element Discretization
14.127. SHELL131 - 4-Node Layered Thermal Shell
14.128. SHELL132 - 8-Node Layered Thermal Shell
14.129.
14.130.
14.131.
14.132.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented

14.134. FLUID138 - 3-D Viscous Fluid Link Element
14.135. FLUID139 - 3-D Slide Film Fluid Element
14.137. FLUID141 - 2-D Fluid-Thermal
14.138.1.
14.138.2.
14.138.3.
14.138.4.

Distributed Resistance Main Diagonal Modification
Turbulent Kinetic Energy Source Term Linearization
Turbulent Kinetic Energy Dissipation Rate

14.140. ROM144 - Reduced Order Electrostatic-Structural
14.140.1. Element Matrices and Load Vectors
14.140.2. Combination of Modal Coordinates and Nodal Displacement at Master Nodes
14.140.3. Element Loads
14.141.
14.142.
14.143.
14.144.
14.145.
14.146.
14.147.
14.148.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
14.148.1.
14.148.2.
14.148.3.
14.148.4.
14.149.
14.150.
14.151.
14.152.
14.153.
Matrices and Load Vectors

Adiabatic Wall Temperature as Bulk Temperature
Film Coefficient Adjustment
Radiation Form Factor Calculation

Not Documented
SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect
SHELL157 - Thermal-Electric Shell

14.155. SURF159 - General Axisymmetric Surface with 2 or 3 Nodes
14.156.
14.157.
14.158.
14.159.
14.160.
14.161.
14.162.
14.163.
14.164.
14.165.
LINK160 - Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)

BEAM161 - Explicit 3-D Beam
PLANE162 - Explicit 2-D Structural Solid
SHELL163 - Explicit Thin Structural Shell
SOLID164 - Explicit 3-D Structural Solid
COMBI165 - Explicit Spring-Damper
MASS166 - Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
LINK167 - Explicit Tension-Only Spar
SOLID168 - Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid

14.165.2. Segment Types
14.166. TARGE170 - 3-D Target Segment
14.166.2. Segment Types
14.166.3. Reaction Forces
14.167. CONTA171 - 2-D 2-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
14.170.1.
14.170.2.
14.170.3.
14.170.4.
14.170.5.
14.170.6.
14.170.7.
14.170.8.
14.170.9.
Introduction
Contact Kinematics
Frictional Model
Contact Algorithm
Energy and Momentum Conserving Contact
Debonding
Thermal/Structural Contact
Electric Contact
Magnetic Contact
14.171. CONTA175 - 2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact

14.171.2. Contact Models
14.171.3. Contact Forces
14.172. CONTA176 - 3-D Line-to-Line Contact
14.172.2. Contact Kinematics
14.173. CONTA177 - 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
14.174. CONTA178 - 3-D Node-to-Node Contact
14.174.2. Contact Algorithms
14.174.3. Element Damper
14.175. PRETS179 - Pretension
14.176. LINK180 - 3-D Spar (or Truss)
14.176.2. Element Mass Matrix
14.177. SHELL181 - 4-Node Shell
14.177.1.
14.177.2.
14.177.3.
14.177.4.
14.177.5.

Assumed Displacement Shape Functions
Membrane Option
Warping
14.178. PLANE182 - 2-D 4-Node Structural Solid

14.178.2. Theory
14.180. MPC184 - Multipoint Constraint
14.180.1. Slider Element
14.180.2. Joint Elements
14.181. SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid
14.181.1. SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid
14.181.2. SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Layered Solid
14.181.4. Theory
14.182. SOLID186 - 3-D 20-Node Homogenous/Layered Structural Solid
14.182.1. SOLID186 - 3-D 20-Node Homogenous Structural Solid
14.182.2. SOLID186 - 3-D 20-Node Layered Structural Solid
14.183. SOLID187 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
14.184. BEAM188 - 3-D 2-Node Beam
14.184.2. Stress Evaluation
14.185. BEAM189 - 3-D 3-Node Beam
14.186. SOLSH190 - 3-D 8-Node Layered Solid Shell
14.186.2. Theory
14.188. INTER192 - 2-D 4-Node Gasket
14.190.1. Element Technology
14.192.
14.193.
14.194.
14.195.
14.196.
14.197.
14.198.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
INTER202 - 2-D 4-Node Cohesive

14.199. INTER203 - 2-D 6-Node Cohesive
14.200.1. Element Technology

14.204. SHELL208 - 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell
14.208. CPT212 - 2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid
14.210. COMBI214 - 2-D Spring-Damper Bearing
14.210.1. Matrices
14.210.2. Output Quantities
14.214.
14.215.
14.216.
14.217.
14.218.
14.219.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented

14.222. SOLID226 - 3-D 20-Node Coupled-Field Solid
14.223. SOLID227 - 3-D 10-Node Coupled-Field Solid
14.226. PLANE230 - 2-D 8-Node Electric Solid

14.227. SOLID231 - 3-D 20-Node Electric Solid
14.228. SOLID232 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid
14.229. PLANE233 - 2-D 8-Node Electromagnetic Solid
14.232. SOLID236 - 3-D 20-Node Electromagnetic Solid
14.233. SOLID237 - 3-D 10-Node Electromagnetic Solid
14.234.
14.235.
14.236.
14.237.
14.238.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
HSFLD241 - 2-D Hydrostatic Fluid
14.238.2. Element Matrices and Load Vectors
14.239.
14.240.
14.241.
14.242.
14.243.
14.244.
14.245.
14.246.
14.247.
14.248.
14.249.
14.250.
14.251.
14.252.
14.253.
14.254.
14.255.
14.256.
14.257.
14.258.
14.259.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
SURF251 - 2-D Radiosity Surface
SURF252 - 3-D Thermal Radiosity Surface
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
REINF263 - 2-D Smeared Reinforcing

14.260. REINF264 - 3-D Discrete Reinforcing

14.261. REINF265 - 3-D Smeared Reinforcing
14.261.2. Stiffness and Mass Matrices of a Reinforcing Layer
14.262.
14.263.
14.264.
14.265.
14.266.
14.267.
14.268.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes

14.269. SOLID273 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes
14.270.
14.271.
14.272.
14.273.
14.274.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
SOLID278 - 3-D 8-Node Homogenous/Layered Thermal Solid
14.274.1. SOLID278 - 3-D 8-Node Homogenous Thermal Solid

14.274.2. SOLID278 - 3-D 8-Node Layered Thermal Solid
14.275. SOLID279 - 3-D 20-Node Homogenous/Layered Thermal Solid
14.275.1. SOLID279 - 3-D 20-Node Homogenous Thermal Solid
14.275.2. SOLID279 - 3-D 20-Node Layered Thermal Solid
14.277. SHELL281 - 8-Node Shell
14.277.3. Membrane Option
14.278.
14.279.
14.280.
14.281.
Not Documented
Not Documented
Not Documented
SOLID285 - 3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with Nodal Pressures

14.281.2. Theory
14.284. PIPE288 - 3-D 2-Node Pipe
14.284.2. Ocean Effects
14.284.3. Stress Evaluation
14.285. PIPE289 - 3-D 3-Node Pipe
14.286. ELBOW290 - 3-D 3-Node Elbow

15. Analysis Tools
15.1. Acceleration Effect
15.2. Inertia Relief
15.3. Damping Matrices
15.3.1. Transient (FULL or REDUCED) Analysis and Damped Modal Analysis
15.3.2. Harmonic (FULL or REDUCED) Analysis
15.3.3. Mode-Superposition Analysis
15.4. Rotating Structures
15.4.1. Coriolis Matrix and Coriolis Force in a Rotating Reference Frame
15.4.2. Gyroscopic Matrix in a Stationary Reference Frame
15.4.3. Rotating Damping Matrix in a Stationary Reference Frame
15.5. Element Reordering
15.5.1.
15.5.2.
15.5.3.
15.5.4.
Reordering Based on Topology with a Program-Defined Starting Surface

Reordering Based on Topology with a User- Defined Starting Surface
Reordering Based on Geometry
Automatic Reordering
15.6. Automatic Master Degrees of Freedom Selection

15.7. Automatic Time Stepping
15.7.1.
15.7.2.
15.7.3.
15.7.4.
15.7.5.
15.7.6.
15.7.7.
Time Step Prediction

Time Step Bisection
The Response Eigenvalue for 1st Order Transients
The Response Frequency for Structural Dynamics
Creep Time Increment
Plasticity Time Increment
Midstep Residual for Structural Dynamic Analysis
15.8. Solving for Unknowns and Reactions

15.8.1. Reaction Forces
15.8.2. Disequilibrium
15.9. Equation Solvers
15.9.1. Direct Solvers
15.9.2. Sparse Direct Solver
15.9.3. Iterative Solver
15.10. Mode Superposition Method
15.10.1. Modal Damping
15.10.2. Residual Vector Method
15.11. Extraction of Modal Damping Parameter for Squeeze Film Problems
15.12. Reduced Order Modeling of Coupled Domains
15.12.1.
15.12.2.
15.12.3.
15.12.4.
15.12.5.
Selection of Modal Basis Functions

Element Loads
Mode Combinations for Finite Element Data Acquisition and Energy Computation
Function Fit Methods for Strain Energy
Coupled Electrostatic-Structural Systems
15.12.6. Computation of Capacitance Data and Function Fit

15.13. Newton-Raphson Procedure
15.13.1.
15.13.2.
15.13.3.
15.13.4.
15.13.5.
15.13.6.
Overview
Convergence
Predictor
Adaptive Descent
Line Search
Arc-Length Method
15.14. Constraint Equations

15.14.1. Derivation of Matrix and Load Vector Operations
15.15. This section intentionally omitted
15.16. Eigenvalue and Eigenvector Extraction
15.16.1. Reduced Method
15.16.2. Supernode Method
15.16.3. Block Lanczos
15.16.4. PCG Lanczos
15.16.5. Unsymmetric Method
15.16.6. Damped Method
15.16.7. QR Damped Method
15.16.8. Shifting
15.16.9. Repeated Eigenvalues
15.16.10. Complex Eigensolutions
15.17. Analysis of Cyclic Symmetric Structures
15.17.1. Modal Analysis
15.17.2. Complete Mode Shape Derivation
15.17.3. Cyclic Symmetry Transformations
15.18. Mass Moments of Inertia
15.18.1. Accuracy of the Calculations
15.18.2. Effect of KSUM, LSUM, ASUM, and VSUM Commands
15.19.
15.20.
15.21.
15.22.
Energies
ANSYS Workbench Product Adaptive Solutions
Reduced-Order Modeling for State-Space Matrices Export
Enforced Motion in Structural Analysis
15.22.1. Generalized Methods for Transient and Harmonic Analyses

15.22.2. Method for a Structure Subjected to Global Support Acceleration
15.22.3. Large Mass Method
17. Analysis Procedures
17.1. Static Analysis
17.1.2. Description of Structural Systems
17.1.3. Description of Thermal, Magnetic and Other First Order Systems
17.2. Transient Analysis
17.2.2. Description of Structural and Other Second Order Systems
17.2.3. Description of Thermal, Magnetic and Other First Order Systems

17.3. Mode-Frequency Analysis
17.3.2. Description of Analysis
17.4. Harmonic Response Analyses
17.4.1.
17.4.2.
17.4.3.
17.4.4.
17.4.5.
17.4.6.
17.4.7.
17.4.8.

Description of Analysis
Complex Displacement Output
Nodal and Reaction Load Computation
Solution
Variational Technology Method
Automatic Frequency Spacing
Rotating Forces on Rotating Structures
17.5. Buckling Analysis

17.6. Substructuring Analysis
17.6.1.
17.6.2.
17.6.3.
17.6.4.
17.6.5.
Assumptions and Restrictions (within Superelement)

Statics
Transients
Component Mode Synthesis (CMS)
17.7. Spectrum Analysis

17.7.3. Single-Point Response Spectrum
17.7.4. Damping
17.7.5. Participation Factors and Mode Coefficients
17.7.6. Combination of Modes
17.7.7. Reduced Mass Summary
17.7.8. Effective Mass and Cumulative Mass Fraction
17.7.9. Dynamic Design Analysis Method
17.7.10. Random Vibration Method
17.7.11. Description of Method
17.7.12. Response Power Spectral Densities and Mean Square Response
17.7.13. Cross Spectral Terms for Partially Correlated Input PSDs
17.7.14. Spatial Correlation
17.7.15. Wave Propagation
17.7.16. Multi-Point Response Spectrum Method
17.7.17. Missing-Mass Response
17.7.18. Rigid Responses
17.8. Linear Perturbation Analysis
17.8.1.
17.8.2.
17.8.3.
17.8.4.
17.8.5.

Modal Analysis Based on Linear Perturbation
Application of Perturbation Loads
Downstream Analysis Using the Solution of a Linear Perturbation Analysis
18. Preprocessing and Postprocessing Tools
18.1. Integration and Differentiation Procedures

18.1.1.
18.1.2.
18.1.3.
18.1.4.
Single Integration Procedure

Double Integration Procedure
Differentiation Procedure
Double Differentiation Procedure
18.2. Fourier Coefficient Evaluation

18.3. Statistical Procedures
18.3.1.
18.3.2.
18.3.3.
18.3.4.
18.3.5.
18.3.6.
Mean, Covariance, Correlation Coefficient

Random Samples of a Uniform Distribution
Random Samples of a Gaussian Distribution
Random Samples of a Triangular Distribution
Random Samples of a Beta Distribution
Random Samples of a Gamma Distribution
19. Postprocessing
19.1. POST1 - Derived Nodal Data Processing
19.1.1. Derived Nodal Data Computation
19.2. POST1 - Vector and Surface Operations
19.2.1. Vector Operations
19.2.2. Surface Operations
19.3. POST1 - Path Operations
19.3.1.
19.3.2.
19.3.3.
19.3.4.
Defining the Path

Defining Orientation Vectors of the Path
Mapping Nodal and Element Data onto the Path
Operating on Path Data
19.4. POST1 - Stress Linearization

19.4.1. Cartesian Case
19.4.2. Axisymmetric Case (General)
19.4.3. Axisymmetric Case
19.5. POST1 - Fatigue Module
19.6. POST1 - Electromagnetic Macros
19.6.1. Flux Passing Thru a Closed Contour
19.6.2. Force on a Body
19.6.3. Magnetomotive Forces
19.6.4. Power Loss
19.6.5. Terminal Parameters for a Stranded Coil
19.6.6. Energy Supplied
19.6.7. Terminal Inductance
19.6.8. Flux Linkage
19.6.9. Terminal Voltage
19.6.10. Torque on a Body
19.6.11. Energy in a Magnetic Field
19.6.12. Relative Error in Electrostatic or Electromagnetic Field Analysis
19.6.13. SPARM Macro-Parameters
19.6.14. Electromotive Force
19.6.15. Impedance of a Device
19.6.16. Computation of Equivalent Transmission-line Parameters
19.6.17. Quality Factor
19.7. POST1 - Error Approximation Technique

19.7.1. Error Approximation Technique for Displacement-Based Problems
19.7.2. Error Approximation Technique for Temperature-Based Problems
19.7.3. Error Approximation Technique for Magnetics-Based Problems
19.8. POST1 - Crack Analysis
19.9. POST1 - Harmonic Solid and Shell Element Postprocessing
19.9.1. Thermal Solid Elements (PLANE75, PLANE78)
19.9.2. Structural Solid Elements (PLANE25, PLANE83)
19.9.3. Structural Shell Element (SHELL61)
19.10. POST26 - Data Operations
19.11. POST26 - Response Spectrum Generator (RESP)
19.11.1. Time Step Size
19.12. POST1 and POST26 - Interpretation of Equivalent Strains
19.12.1.
19.12.2.
19.12.3.
19.12.4.
19.12.5.
19.13.
19.14.
19.15.
19.16.
Physical Interpretation of Equivalent Strain

Elastic Strain
Plastic Strain
Creep Strain
Total Strain
POST26 - Response Power Spectral Density

POST26 - Computation of Covariance
POST1 and POST26 Complex Results Postprocessing
POST1 - Modal Assurance Criterion (MAC)
20. Design Optimization

20.1. Introduction to Design Optimization
20.1.1. Feasible Versus Infeasible Design Sets
20.1.2. The Best Design Set
20.1.3. Optimization Methods and Design Tools
20.2. Subproblem Approximation Method
20.2.1. Function Approximations
20.2.2. Minimizing the Subproblem Approximation
20.2.3. Convergence
20.3. First Order Optimization Method
20.3.1. The Unconstrained Objective Function
20.3.2. The Search Direction
20.3.3. Convergence
20.4. Topological Optimization
20.4.1.
20.4.2.
20.4.3.
20.4.4.
20.4.5.
General Optimization Problem Statement

Maximum Static Stiffness Design
Minimum Volume Design
Maximum Dynamic Stiffness Design
Element Calculations
21. Probabilistic Design

21.1. Uses for Probabilistic Design
21.2. Probabilistic Modeling and Preprocessing

21.2.1. Statistical Distributions for Random Input Variables
21.3. Probabilistic Methods
21.3.1.
21.3.2.
21.3.3.
21.3.4.
Introduction
Common Features for all Probabilistic Methods
Monte Carlo Simulation Method
The Response Surface Method
21.4. Regression Analysis for Building Response Surface Models

21.4.1.
21.4.2.
21.4.3.
21.4.4.
21.4.5.
General Definitions
Linear Regression Analysis
F-Test for the Forward-Stepwise-Regression
Transformation of Random Output Parameter Values for Regression Fitting
Goodness-of-Fit Measures
21.5. Probabilistic Postprocessing

21.5.1.
21.5.2.
21.5.3.
21.5.4.
21.5.5.
Statistical Procedures
Correlation Coefficient Between Sampled Data
Cumulative Distribution Function
Evaluation of Probabilities From the Cumulative Distribution Function
Inverse Cumulative Distribution Function
Bibliography
1.4.Using the Theory Reference for the ANSYS Workbench Product

Many of the basic concepts and principles that are described in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications apply to both products; for instance, element formulations, number of
integration points per element, stress evaluation techniques, solve algorithms, contact mechanics. Items
that will be of particular interest to ANSYS Workbench users include the elements and solvers. They are
listed below; for more information on these items, see the appropriate sections later in this manual.
1.4.1.Elements Used by the ANSYS Workbench Product

COMBIN14 (Spring-Damper)
MASS21 (Structural Mass)
LINK33 (3-D Conduction Bar)
SOURC36 (Current Source)
PLANE55 (2-D Thermal Solid)
SOLID70 (3-D Thermal Solid)
PLANE77 (2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid)
SOLID87 (3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid)
SOLID90 (3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid)
SOLID117 (3-D 20-Node Magnetic Solid)
SHELL131 (4-Node Thermal Shell)
SHELL132 (8-Node Thermal Shell)
SURF151 (2-D Thermal Surface Effect)
SURF152 (3-D Thermal Surface Effect)
SURF153 (2-D Structural Surface Effect)
SURF154 (3-D Structural Surface Effect)
SURF156 (3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect)
TARGE169 (2-D Target Segment)
TARGE170 (3-D Target Segment)
CONTA172 (2-D 3-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact)
CONTA174 (3-D 8-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact)
CONTA175 (2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact)
PRETS179 (Pretension)
SHELL181 (3-D Finite Strain Shell, full integration option)
PLANE182 (2-D 4-Node Structural Solid)
PLANE183 (2-D 8-Node Structural Solid
MPC184 Multipoint Constraint)
SOLID186 (3-D 20-Node Structural Solid)
SOLID187 (3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid)
BEAM188 (3-D Linear Finite Strain Beam)
SOLSH190 (3-D 8-Node Structural Solid Shell)
MESH200 (Meshing Facet)
FOLLW201 (Follower Load)
SHELL281 (8-Node Structural Shell)
1.4.2.Solvers Used by the ANSYS Workbench Product

Sparse
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_intro4.html[28/04/2013 07:15:21 p.m.]
The ANSYS Workbench product uses this solver for most structural and all thermal analyses.
PCG
The ANSYS Workbench product often uses this solver for some structural analyses, especially those with
thick models; i.e., models that have more than one solid element through the thickness.
Boeing Block Lanczos

The ANSYS Workbench product uses this solver for modal analyses.
Supernode
The ANSYS Workbench product uses this solver for modal analyses.
1.4.3.Other Features
Shape Tool
The shape tool used by the ANSYS Workbench product is based on the same topological optimization
capabilities as discussed in Topological Optimization. Note that the shape tool is only available for stress
shape optimization with solid models; no surface or thermal models are supported. Frequency shape
optimization is not available. In the ANSYS Workbench product, the maximum number of iteration loops
to achieve a shape solution is 40; in the ANSYS environment, you can control the number of iterations.
In the ANSYS Workbench product, only a single load case is considered in shape optimization.
Solution Convergence
This is discussed in ANSYS Workbench Product Adaptive Solutions.
Safety Tool
The ANSYS Workbench product safety tool capability is described in Safety Tools in the ANSYS
Workbench Product.
Fatigue Tool
The ANSYS Workbench product fatigue capabilities are described by Hancq, et al.([316]).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_intro4.html[28/04/2013 07:15:21 p.m.]
LINK33
LINK33
3-D Conduction Bar
MP ME <> PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
LINK33 Element Description

LINK33 is a uniaxial element with the ability to conduct heat between its nodes. The element has a
single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node point. The conducting bar is applicable to a
steady-state or transient thermal analysis.
If the model containing the conducting bar element is also to be analyzed structurally, the bar element
should be replaced by an equivalent structural element. See LINK33 in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
Figure33.1LINK33 Geometry
LINK33 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this conducting bar are shown in Figure
33.1. The element is defined by two nodes, a cross-sectional area, and the material properties. Specific
heat and density are ignored for steady-state solutions. The thermal conductivity is in the element
longitudinal direction.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Heat generation rates may be input as element
body loads at the nodes. The node J heat generation rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat generation
rate HG(I).
A summary of the element input is given in "LINK33 Input Summary". A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.
LINK33 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
AREA - Cross-sectional area
Material Properties
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_LINK33.html[28/04/2013 07:15:40 p.m.]
LINK33
KXX, DENS, C, ENTH

Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Heat Generation--
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None
LINK33 Output Data

Nodal temperatures included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table33.1:LINK33 Element Output Definitions
The heat flow rate is in units of Heat/Time and is positive from node I to node J. A general description of
solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Table33.1LINK33 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
LENGTH
AREA
TEMP(I, J)
HEAT RATE
THERMAL FLUX
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Material number
Volume
Length
Input area
Temperatures - I, J
Heat flow rate from node I to node J
Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area)

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
LINK33
Table33.2:LINK33 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following
notation is used in Table33.2:LINK33 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table33.1:LINK33 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Table33.2LINK33 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E

HEAT RATE
TEMPI
TEMPJ
THERMAL FLUX
LENGTH
AREA
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
1
2
LINK33 Assumptions and Restrictions

Heat is assumed to flow only in the longitudinal element direction.
The element must not have a zero length, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
A free end of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
LINK33 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
The birth and death special feature is not allowed.
14.32.LINK33 - 3-D Conduction Bar
Matrix or Vector
Conductivity and Specific Heat
Matrices; and Heat Generation
Load Vector
Shape Functions
Equation1213
Integration Points
None
14.32.1.Other Applicable Sections

Heat Flow describes the derivation of thermal element matrices and load vectors as well as heat flux
evaluations.
14.32.2.Matrices and Load Vectors

The conductivity matrix is:
(14
39)
where:
A = area (input as AREA on R command)
K x = conductivity (input as KXX on MP command)
L = distance between nodes
The specific heat matrix is:
(14
40)
where:
= density (input as DENS on MP command)
Cp = specific heat (input as C on MP command)
This specific heat matrix is a diagonal matrix with each diagonal being the sum of the corresponding row
of a consistent specific heat matrix. The heat generation load vector is:
(14
41)
where:
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_el33.html[28/04/2013 07:15:49 p.m.]
14.32.3.Output
The output is computed as:
(14
42)
and
(14
43)
where:
q = thermal flux (output as THERMAL FLUX)
T I = temperature at node I
T J = temperature at node J
Q = heat rate (output as HEAT RATE)
12.3. 3-D Lines
12.3.3-D Lines
This section contains shape functions for line elements without and with rotational degrees of freedom
(RDOF).
Figure12.23D Line Element
12.3.1.3-D 2-Node Lines without RDOF

These shape functions are for 3-D 2-node line elements without RDOF, such as LINK33, LINK68, or
BEAM188.
(12
6)
(12
7)
(12
8)
(12
9)
(12
10)
(12
11)
(12
12)
(12
13)
(12
14)
12.3.2.3-D 2-Node Lines with RDOF

These shape functions are for 3-D 2-node line elements with RDOF.
(12
15)
(12
16)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_shp2.html[28/04/2013 07:15:58 p.m.]
12.3. 3-D Lines
(12
17)
(12
18)
12.3.3.3-D 3-Node Lines

These shape functions are for 3-D 3-node line elements such as BEAM188 and BEAM189.
(12
19)
(12
20)
(12
21)
(12
22)
(12
23)
(12
24)
(12
25)
12.3.4.3-D 4-Node Lines

These shape functions are for 3-D 4-node line elements such as BEAM188.
(12
26)
(12
27)
(12
28)
(12
29)
12.3. 3-D Lines
(12
30)
(12
31)
1.15. Units Abbreviation List
1.15.Units Abbreviation List

Abbreviation
AbA
A
A
BTU
cm
C
C
F
F
ft
G
gm
H
Hz
hr
in
kg
kip
ksi
m
mm
MPa
N
Oe
Pa
lb
psi
psig
rad
rpm
sec
S
T
W
Wb
Units
AbAmpere
Ampere
t-Ampere-turns
British Thermal Unit
centimeter
Celsius
Coulomb
Fahrenheit
Farad
feet
Gauss
gram
Henry
Hertz
hour
inch
Kilogram
Kilopound (1000 pound force)
Kilopounds per square inch
meter
millimeter
Megapascal
Newton
Oersted
Pascal
pound force
pounds per square inch
pounds per square inch (gauge)
radian
revolutions per minute
second
Siemen
Tesla
Watt
Weber
Ohm
5.5.Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the dynamic response. It is
available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and ANSYS Structural products. You should
consider using this method if you do not want to include nonlinearities (other than simple node-to-node
contact) in the analysis.
The procedure for a reduced transient dynamic analysis consists of these main steps:
1. Build the model.
2. Obtain the reduced solution.
3. Review the results of the reduced solution.
4. Expand the solution (expansion pass).
5. Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method, except that no nonlinearities are allowed
(other than simple node-to-node contact, which is specified in the form of a gap condition instead of an
element type). Details of the other steps are explained below.
5.5.1.Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution , we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the master DOF. The tasks
required to obtain the reduced solution are explained in the following sections. For the following tasks,
you need to first enter the SOLUTION processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
5.5.1.1.Define the Analysis Type and Options

These are the same as the analysis options that are described for the full method (in Set Solution
Controls and Set Additional Solution Options) except for the following differences:
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a
reduced transient dynamic analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of solution
commands (which are listed in Set Solution Controls and Set Additional Solution Options) and the
standard corresponding menu paths.
Restarts are not available (ANTYPE).
Choose the reduced method of solution (TRNOPT).
When you specify a reduced transient analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for that
specific type of analysis appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged,
depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your session. The abridged menu contains
only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for reduced transient analyses. If
you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution options (that is,
solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for this type of
analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from the Solution menu. For details, see Using
Abridged Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide .
Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
5.5.1.2.Define Master Degrees of Freedom

Master DOF are essential degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure.
For a reduced transient dynamic analysis, master DOF are also required at locations where you want to
define gap conditions, forces, or nonzero displacements. You can list the defined master DOF or delete
master DOF as well. See Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis for guidelines to
choose master DOF.
M,
Command(s): MGEN,
TOTAL,
MLIST,
MDELE
MainMenu>
MainMenu>
MainMenu>
GUI:
MainMenu>
MainMenu>
Solution>
Solution>
Solution>
Solution>
Solution>
Master
Master
Master
Master
Master
DOFs>
DOFs>
DOFs>
DOFs>
DOFs>
User Selected> Define

User Selected> Copy
Program Selected
User Selected> List All
User Selected> Delete
5.5.1.3.Define Gap Conditions

Define any gap conditions.
Command(s):
GUI:
GP
MainMenu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
You can also list the defined gaps and delete gaps.
Command(s): GPLIST,
GPDELE
MainMenu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> List All
GUI:
MainMenu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Delete
5.5.1.3.1.Gap Conditions
Gap conditions can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF) nodes or between
master DOF nodes and ground, as shown in the following figure.
Figure5.2Examples of Gap Conditions
Gap conditions are similar to gap elements and are specified between surfaces that are expected to
contact (impact) each other during the transient. The program accounts for the gap force, which
develops when the gap closes, by using an equivalent nodal load vector.
Some guidelines to define gap conditions are presented below:
Use enough gap conditions to obtain a smooth contact stress distribution between the contacting
surfaces.
Define a reasonable gap stiffness. If the stiffness is too low, the contacting surfaces may overlap
too much. If the stiffness is too high, a very small time step will be required during impact. A
general recommendation is to specify a gap stiffness that is one or two orders of magnitude higher
than the adjacent element stiffness. You can estimate the adjacent element stiffness using AE/L,
where A is the contributing area around the gap condition, E is the elastic modulus of the softer
material at the interface, and L is the depth of the first layer of elements at the interface.
The nonlinear gap damping provided through the DAMP field of the GP command runs faster than a
full transient analysis using a gap element COMBIN40. Only TRNOPT = MSUP allows the nonlinear
gap damping action. Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced transient analysis method.
5.5.1.4.Apply Initial Conditions to the Model

The following loading restrictions apply in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
Only displacements, forces, and translational accelerations (such as gravity) are valid. Acceleration
loading is not allowed if the model contains any master DOF at any nodes with rotated nodal
coordinate systems.
Forces and nonzero displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
As mentioned for the full method, multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a
transient analysis. The first load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent
load steps are used for the transient loading, as explained next.
Establish initial conditions. The only initial condition that may be explicitly established is the initial
displacement (u o ); that is, initial velocity and acceleration must be zero ( = 0,
= 0).
Displacements cannot be deleted in subsequent load steps, therefore they cannot be used to
specify an initial velocity. In a reduced transient analysis, a static solution is always performed as
the first solution, using the loads given, to determine uo .
Specify load step options for the first load step. Valid options appear in Table5.4:Options for the
First Load Step-Reduced Analysis.
Table5.4Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis
Option
Command
GUI Path
Dynamics Options
Transient Integration
Parameters
Damping
General Options
Integration Time Step
TINTP
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts>

Time/Frequenc> Time Integration
ALPHAD,
BETAD,
MP,DAMP

Time/Frequenc> Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Other> Change Mat Props> Material
Models> Structural> Damping
DELTIM

Time/Frequenc> Time- Time Step
Output Control Options

Printed Output
OUTPR

Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
5.5.1.4.1.Dynamics Options
Dynamic options include the following:
Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)

Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time integration technique.
The default is to use the constant average acceleration scheme; see the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for further details.
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis. You
can specify four forms of damping in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP)
Element damping (COMBIN14, and so on)
See Damping for further details.
5.5.1.4.2.General Options
The only valid general option is Integration Time Step (DELTIM). The integration time step is assumed
to be constant throughout the transient.
Note: If you do issue the TIME command for the first load step, it will be ignored. The
first solution is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
5.5.1.4.3.Output Control Options

Use the Printed Output (OUTPR) option to output the displacement solution at the master DOF.
5.5.1.5.Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File

Write the first load step to a load step file ( Jobname.S01).
Command(s):
GUI:
LSWRITE
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.5.1.6.Specify Loads and Load Step Options

Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion, writing each load step to a load
step file (LSWRITE).
The following load step options are valid for the transient load steps:
General Options
Time (specifies the time at the end of the load step) (TIME)
Stepped (KBC,1) or ramped loads (KBC)
Output Controls
Printed output (OUTPR)
Reduced displacement file (OUTRES)
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is to
write the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are
gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
5.5.1.7.Obtaining the Solution

Solving a reduced transient dynamic analysis involves the same steps as those involved in solving a full
transient analysis. See the following sections for a description of those steps:
Save a Backup Copy of the Database
Start the Transient Solution
5.5.2.Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced transient dynamic solution are written to the reduced displacement file,
Jobname.RDSP . They consist of time-varying displacements at the master DOF. You can review the master
DOF displacements as a function of time using POST26. (POST1 cannot be used, because the complete
solution at all DOF is not available.)
The procedure to use POST26 is the same as described for the full method, except for the following
differences:
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command (MainMenu> TimeHist
Postpro> Settings> File) to specify that data are to be read from Jobname.RDSP. For example, if
the jobname is TRANS , the FILE command would be: FILE,TRANS,RDSP. (By default, POST26
looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced transient solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use
only the NSOL command to define variables.
5.5.3.Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete displacement, stress,
and force solution at all degrees of freedom. These calculations are done only at time points that you
specify. Before you begin the expansion pass, therefore, you should review the results of the reduced
solution (using POST26) and identify the critical time points.
Note: An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly
in displacements at specific points on the structure, then the reduced solution could
satisfy your requirements. However, if you want to determine displacements at
non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the stress or force solution, then you
must perform an expansion pass.
The .RDSP , .EMAT , .ESAV , .DB , and .TRI files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
The procedure for the expansion pass is explained below.
5.5.3.2.Expanding the Solution

1. Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
Note: You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and
reenter (/SOLU) before performing the expansion pass.
2. Activate the expansion pass and its options.
Table5.5Expansion Pass Options
Option
Command
Expansion Pass On/Off
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to be
Expanded
Single Solution to Expand
NUMEXP
EXPSOL
GUI Path
ExpansionPass
ExpansionPass> Range of Solu's
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By
Time/Freq
Option: Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS)

Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to be Expanded (NUMEXP)

Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over the
specified time range. The solutions nearest these times will be expanded. Also specify
whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
Option: Single Solution to Expand (EXPSOL)
Use this option to identify a single solution for expansion if you do not need to expand
multiple solutions in a range. You can specify it either by load step and substep number or by
time. Also specify whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are output
controls:
Output Controls
Printed Output (OUTPR)

Use this option to include any results data on the output file ( Jobname.OUT).
Database and Results File Output (OUTRES)

This option controls the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST).
Extrapolation of Results (ERESX)

Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the
nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
Note: The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE.
ERESX allows you to review element integration point results by
copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4. Start expansion pass calculations.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as
a separate load step on the results file.
6. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Close the Solution window.
5.5.4.Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

You review results for an expansion pass in the same way that you review results for most structural
analyses. See Review the Results in Structural Static Analysis .
You can review these results using POST1. (If you expanded solutions at several time points, you can
also use POST26 to obtain graphs of stress versus time, strain versus time, and so on.) The procedure
to use POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method.
3.9.Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis

Matrix reduction is a way to reduce the size of the matrices of a model and perform a faster and less
computationally expensive analysis. It is used primarily in dynamic analyses such as modal, harmonic,
and transient analyses. Matrix reduction is also used in substructure analyses to generate a
superelement.
Matrix reduction allows you to build a detailed model, as you would for a static stress analysis, and use
only a "dynamic" portion of it for a dynamic analysis. Select the "dynamic" portion by identifying key
degrees of freedom, called master degrees of freedom (MDOFs), that characterize the dynamic behavior
of the model. The program then calculates reduced matrices and the reduced degree-of-freedom
solution in terms of the MDOF. You can then expand the solution to the full degree-of-freedom set by
performing an expansion pass. The main advantage of this procedure is the savings in CPU time to
obtain the reduced solution, especially for dynamic analyses of large problems.
3.9.1.Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction

The program uses the Guyan Reduction procedure to calculate the reduced matrices. The key
assumption in this procedure is that for the lower frequencies, inertia forces on the slave degrees of
freedom (those degrees of freedom being reduced out) are negligible compared to elastic forces
transmitted by the MDOF. Therefore, the total mass of the structure is apportioned among only the
MDOF. The net result is that the reduced stiffness matrix is exact, whereas the reduced mass and
damping matrices are approximate. For details about how the reduced matrices are calculated, refer to
Statics and Transients in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
3.9.1.1.Guidelines for Selecting Master Degrees of Freedom

Selecting master degrees of freedom (MDOFs) is an important step in a reduced analysis. The accuracy
of the reduced mass matrix (and hence the accuracy of the solution) depends on the number and
location of masters. For a given problem, you can select many different sets of MDOFs and will probably
obtain acceptable results in all cases.
You can select masters using M and MGEN commands, or you can have the program select masters
during solution using the TOTAL command. ANSYS, Inc. recommends that you do both: select a few
masters yourself, and also have the program select masters. In this way, the program can pick up any
modes that you may have missed. The following list summarizes the guidelines for selecting MDOFs:
The total number of MDOFs should be at least twice the number of modes of interest.
Select MDOFs in directions in which you expect the structure or component to vibrate. For a flat
plate, for example, you should select at least a few MDOFs in the out-of-plane direction, as shown
by (a) in the following figure. In cases where motion in one direction induces a significant motion
in another direction, select MDOFs in both directions, as shown by (b) in the figure:
Figure3.2Selecting Master Degrees of Freedom (1)
(a) Possible out-of-plane masters for a flat plate

(b) Motion in X induces motion in Y
Select masters at locations having relatively large mass or rotary inertia and relatively low stiffness,
as shown in the following figure. Examples of such locations are overhangs and "loosely"
connected structures. Conversely, do not select masters at locations with relatively small mass, or
at locations with high stiffness (such as degrees of freedom close to constraints).
Figure3.3Selecting Master Degrees of Freedom (2)
Select masters at locations with

(a) large rotary inertia
(b) large mass
If your primary interest is in bending modes, you can neglect rotational and "stretching" degrees of
freedom.
If the degree of freedom to be chosen belongs to a coupled set, select only the first (primary)
degrees of freedom of the coupled set.
Select MDOFs at locations where forces or nonzero displacements are to be applied.
For axisymmetric shell models (SHELL61 or SHELL208), select as masters the global UX degree of
freedom at all nodes on those sections of the model that are parallel to or nearly parallel to the
center line, so oscillatory motions between MDOFs can be avoided (see Figure 3.4). This
recommendation can be relaxed if the motion is primarily parallel to the centerline. For
axisymmetric harmonic elements with MODE = 2 or greater, select as masters both UX and UZ
degrees of freedom.
Figure3.4Selecting Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model
The best way to check the validity of the MDOF set is to rerun the analysis with twice (or half) the
number of masters and to compare the results. Another way is to review the reduced mass distribution
printed during a modal solution. The reduced mass should be, at least in the dominant direction of
motion, within 10-15 percent of the total mass of the structure.
3.9.1.2.Understanding Program-Selected MDOFs

If you allow the program select masters (TOTAL), the distribution of masters selected will depend on
the order in which elements are processed during the solution. For example, different MDOF sets may be
selected depending on whether the elements are processed from left to right or from right to left.
However, this difference usually yields insignificant differences in the results.
For meshes with uniform element sizes and properties (for example, a flat plate), the distribution of
masters will, in general, not be uniform. In such cases, you should specify some MDOF of your own (M,
MGEN). The same recommendation applies to structures with an irregular mass distribution, where the
program-selected MDOF may be concentrated in the higher-mass regions.
17.6.Substructuring Analysis
The substructure analysis (ANTYPE,SUBSTR) uses the technique of matrix reduction to reduce the
system matrices to a smaller set of DOFs. Matrix reduction is also used by the reduced modal, reduced
harmonic and reduced transient analyses.
The following substructuring analysis topics are available:
Assumptions and Restrictions (within Superelement)
Statics
Transients
Component Mode Synthesis (CMS)
17.6.1.Assumptions and Restrictions (within Superelement)

1. Any degree of freedom (DOF) may be used.
2. The elements have constant stiffness, damping, and mass effects (e.g., material properties do not
change with temperature).
3. Coupled-field elements using load-vector coupling and elements with Lagrange multipliers cannot
be used.
17.6.2.Description of Analysis
A superelement (substructure) may be used in any analysis type. It simply represents a collection of
elements that are reduced to act as one element. This one (super) element may then be used in the
actual analysis (use pass) or be used to generate more superelements (generation or use pass). To
reconstruct the detailed solutions (e.g., displacements and stresses) within the superelement, an
expansion pass may be done. See the Basic Analysis Guide for loads which are applicable to a
substructure analysis.
17.6.3.Statics
Consider the basic form of the static equations (Equation171):
(17
91)
{F} includes nodal, pressure, and temperature effects. It does not include {F nr} (see Newton-Raphson
Procedure). The equations may be partitioned into two groups, the master (retained) DOFs, here
denoted by the subscript m, and the slave (removed) DOFs, here denoted by the subscript s.
(17
92)
or expanding:
(17
93)
(17
94)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_anproc6.html[28/04/2013 07:17:17 p.m.]
The master DOFs should include all DOFs of all nodes on surfaces that connect to other parts of the
structure. If accelerations are to be used in the use pass or if the use pass will be a transient analysis,
master DOFs throughout the rest of the structure should also be used to characterize the distributed
mass. The automatic selection of master DOFs is discussed in more detail in Automatic Master Degrees
of Freedom Selection, and guidelines for their selection are given in Modal Analysis of the Structural
Analysis Guide . Solving Equation1794 for {us},
(17
95)
Substituting {us} into Equation1793
(17
96)
or,
(17
97)
where:
(17
98)
(17
99)
(17
100)
and
are the superelement coefficient (e.g., stiffness) matrix and load vector, respectively.
In the preceding development, the load vector for the superelement has been treated as a total load
vector. The same derivation may be applied to any number of independent load vectors, which in turn
may be individually scaled in the superelement use pass. For example, the analyst may wish to apply
thermal, pressure, gravity, and other loading conditions in varying proportions. Expanding the right-hand
sides of Equation1793 and Equation1794 one gets, respectively:
(17
101)
(17
102)
where:
N = number of independent load vectors.
Substituting into Equation1799:
(17
103)
To have independently scaled load vectors in the use pass, expand the left-hand side of Equation17
103
(17
104)
Substituting Equation17104 into Equation17103 :
(17
105)
If the load vectors are scaled in the use pass such that:
(17
106)
where bi is the scaling factor ( FACT on the LVSCALE command), then Equation1795 becomes:
(17
107)
Equation17107 is used in the expansion pass to obtain the DOF values at the slave DOFs if the
backsubstitution method is chosen (SEOPT command). If the resolve method is chosen for expansion
pass, then the program will use Equation1792 to resolve for {us}. In doing so, the program makes
{um} as the internally prescribed displacement boundary conditions since {um} are known in expansion
pass. As the program treats DOFs associated with {um} as displacement boundary conditions, the
reaction forces by resolve method will be different from that computed at those master DOFs by the
backsubstitution method. However, they are all in self-equilibrium satisfying Equation1792.
The above section Statics is equally applicable at an element level for elements with extra displacement
shapes. The master DOFs become the nodal DOFs and the slave DOFs become the nodeless or extra
DOFs.
17.6.4.Transients
The general form of the equations for transients is Equation175 and Equation1729:
(17
108)
For substructuring, an equation of the form:
(17
109)
is needed.
and
are computed as they are for the static case (Equation1798 and Equation17
99). The computation of the reduced mass matrix is done by:
(17
110)
This simplification was suggested by Guyan([14]) because direct partitioning and condensation are not
practical (the condensed matrices would be functions of the time derivatives of displacement and very
awkward to implement). The damping matrix is handled similarly:
(17
111)
Equation17107 is also used to expand the DOF values to the slave DOFs in the transient case if the
backsubstitution method is chosen. If the resolve method is chosen, the program will use Equation17
92 and make {um} as displacement boundary conditions the same way as the static expansion method
does.
17.6.5.Component Mode Synthesis (CMS)

Component mode synthesis is an option used in substructure analysis (accessed with the CMSOPT
command). It reduces the system matrices to a smaller set of interface DOFs between substructures and
truncated sets of normal mode generalized coordinates (see Craig([344])).
For a undamped system, each CMS substructure is defined by a stiffness and a mass matrix. The matrix
equation of the motion is:
(17
112)
Partitioning the matrix equation into interface and interior DOFs:
(17
113)
where subscripts m and s refer to:
m = master DOFs defined only on interface nodes
s = all DOFs that are not master DOFs
The physical displacement vector, (u), may be represented in terms of component generalized
coordinates (see Craig([344])) as in Equation17114.
(17
114)
where:
y = truncated set of generalized modal coordinates
[T] = transformation matrix.
Fixed-Interface Method
For the fixed-interface method (see Craig and Bampton([345])), the transformation matrix has the form:
(17
115)
where:
[Gsm] = -[K ss] -1 [Ksm] = redundant static constraint modes (see Craig and Bampton([345]))
s = fixed-interface normal modes (eigenvectors obtained with interface nodes fixed)
[I] = identity matrix
Free-Interface Method
For the free-interface method, the transformation matrix has the form:
(17
116)
where:
[ sr ] = matrix of inertia relief modes
[ m] = matrix of the master dof partition of the free-interface normal modes (eigenvectors obtained
with interface dofs free).
[ s] = matrix of the slave dof partition of the free-interface normal modes.
Residual Flexibility Free Interface Method
For the Residual Flexiblility Free interface (RFFB) method, the transformation matrix has the form:
(17
117)
where:
[R mm], [R sm] = submatrices of residual vectors [R]
(see Residual Vector Method)
After applying the transformation in Equation17114 into the matrix equation of motion Equation17
112 , the equation of motion in the reduced space is obtained. The reduced stiffness and mass matrices
of the CMS substructure will be:
(17
118)
(17
119)
In the reduced system, master DOFs will be used to couple the CMS superelement to other elements
and/or CMS superelements.
15.13.Newton-Raphson Procedure
The following Newton-Raphson procedure topics are available:
Overview
Convergence
Predictor
Adaptive Descent
Line Search
Arc-Length Method
15.13.1.Overview
The finite element discretization process yields a set of simultaneous equations:
(15
145)
where:
[K] = coefficient matrix
{u} = vector of unknown DOF (degree of freedom) values
{F a} = vector of applied loads
If the coefficient matrix [K] is itself a function of the unknown DOF values (or their derivatives) then
Equation15145 is a nonlinear equation. The Newton-Raphson method is an iterative process of solving
the nonlinear equations and can be written as (Bathe([2])):
(15
146)
(15
147)
where:
= Jacobian matrix (tangent matrix)
i = subscript representing the current equilibrium iteration
= vector of restoring loads corresponding to the element internal loads
Both
and
are evaluated based on the values given by {ui}. The right-hand side of
Equation15146 is the residual or out-of-balance load vector; i.e., the amount the system is out of
equilibrium. A single solution iteration is depicted graphically in Figure 15.9 for a one DOF model. In a
structural analysis,
is the tangent stiffness matrix, {ui} is the displacement vector and
restoring force vector calculated from the element stresses. In a thermal analysis,
is the
is the
conductivity matrix, {ui} is the temperature vector and
is the resisting load vector calculated from
the element heat flows. In an electromagnetic analysis,
is the Dirichlet matrix, {ui} is the magnetic
potential vector, and
is the resisting load vector calculated from element magnetic fluxes. In a
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_tool10.html[28/04/2013 07:17:32 p.m.]
transient analysis,
is the effective coefficient matrix and
which includes the inertia and damping effects.
is the effective applied load vector
As seen in the following figures, more than one Newton-Raphson iteration is needed to obtain a
converged solution. The general algorithm proceeds as follows:
1. Assume {u0 }. {u0 } is usually the converged solution from the previous time step. On the first time
step, {u0 } = {0}.
2. Compute the updated tangent matrix
and the restoring load
from configuration {ui}.
3. Calculate {u i} from Equation15146.

4. Add {u i} to {ui} in order to obtain the next approximation {ui + 1 } (Equation15147).
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until convergence is obtained.
Figure15.9Newton-Raphson Solution - One Iteration
Figure 15.10 shows the solution of the next iteration (i + 1) of the example from Figure 15.9. The
subsequent iterations would proceed in a similar manner.
The solution obtained at the end of the iteration process would correspond to load level {F a}. The final
converged solution would be in equilibrium, such that the restoring load vector
(computed from
a
the current stress state, heat flows, etc.) would equal the applied load vector {F } (or at least to within
some tolerance). None of the intermediate solutions would be in equilibrium.
Figure15.10Newton-Raphson Solution - Next Iteration
If the analysis included path-dependent nonlinearities (such as plasticity), then the solution process
requires that some intermediate steps be in equilibrium in order to correctly follow the load path. This is
accomplished effectively by specifying a step-by-step incremental analysis; i.e., the final load vector {F a}
is reached by applying the load in increments and performing the Newton-Raphson iterations at each
step:
(15
148)
where:
[Kn,i ] = tangent matrix for time step n, iteration i
= total applied force vector at time step n
= restoring force vector for time step n, iteration i
This process is the incremental Newton-Raphson procedure and is shown in Figure 15.11. The NewtonRaphson procedure guarantees convergence if and only if the solution at any iteration {ui} is near the
exact solution. Therefore, even without a path-dependent nonlinearity, the incremental approach (i.e.,
applying the loads in increments) is sometimes required in order to obtain a solution corresponding to
the final load level.
Figure15.11Incremental Newton-Raphson Procedure
When the stiffness matrix is updated every iteration (as indicated in Equation15146 and Equation15
148) the process is termed a full Newton-Raphson solution procedure ( NROPT,FULL or

NROPT,UNSYM). Alternatively, the stiffness matrix could be updated less frequently using the modified
Newton-Raphson procedure (NROPT,MODI). Specifically, for static or transient analyses, it would be
updated only during the first or second iteration of each substep, respectively. Use of the initial-stiffness
procedure (NROPT,INIT) prevents any updating of the stiffness matrix, as shown in Figure 15.12. If a
multistatus element is in the model, however, it would be updated at iteration in which it changes
status, irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option. The modified and initial-stiffness Newton-Raphson
procedures converge more slowly than the full Newton-Raphson procedure, but they require fewer
matrix reformulations and inversions. A few elements form an approximate tangent matrix so that the
convergence characteristics are somewhat different.
Figure15.12Initial-Stiffness Newton-Raphson
15.13.2.Convergence
The iteration process described in the previous section continues until convergence is achieved. The
maximum number of allowed equilibrium iterations (input on NEQIT command) are performed in order
to obtain convergence.
Convergence is assumed when
(15
149)
and/or
(15
150)
where {R} is the residual vector:
(15
151)
which is the right-hand side of the Newton-Raphson Equation15146. {u i} is the DOF increment
vector, R and u are tolerances (CNVTOL,,,TOLER ) and Rref and uref are reference values
(CNVTOL,,VALUE ). || || is a vector norm; that is, a scalar measure of the magnitude of the vector
(defined below).
Convergence, therefore, is obtained when size of the residual (disequilibrium) is less than a tolerance
times a reference value and/or when the size of the DOF increment is less than a tolerance times a
reference value. The default is to use out-of-balance convergence checking only. The default tolerance
are .001 (for both u and R ).
There are three available norms (CNVTOL,,,, NORM ) to choose from:
1. Infinite norm
2. L1 norm
3. L2 norm
For DOF increment convergence, substitute u for R in the above equations. The infinite norm is simply
the maximum value in the vector (maximum residual or maximum DOF increment), the L1 norm is the
sum of the absolute value of the terms, and the L2 norm is the square root of the sum of the squares
(SRSS) value of the terms, also called the Euclidean norm. The default is to use the L2 norm.
The default out-of-balance reference value Rref is ||{F a}||. For DOFs with imposed displacement
constraints, the default Rref value is {F nr} at those DOFs.
In the following cases, the default Rref value is the specified or default minimum reference value set via
the CNVTOL,,,,, MINREF command:
For structural DOFs if Rref falls below 1.0E-2 (typically occurring in rigid-body motion analyses,
such as those involving stress-free rotation)
For thermal DOFs if Rref falls below 1.0E-6
For EMAG DOFs if Rref falls below 1.0E-12
For all other DOFs if Rref is equal to 0.0
The default reference value uref is ||{u}||.
15.13.3.Predictor
The solution used for the start of each time step n {un,0 } is usually equal to the current DOF solution
{un -1 }. The tangent matrix [Kn,0 ] and restoring load {F n,0 } are based on this configuration. The
predictor option (PRED command) extrapolates the DOF solution using the previous history in order to
take a better guess at the next solution.
In static analyses, the prediction is based on the displacement increments accumulated over the previous
time step, factored by the time-step size:
(15
152)
where:
{u n } = displacement increment accumulated over the previous time step
n = current time step
(15
153)
and is defined as:
(15
154)
where:
t n = current time-step size
t n-1 = previous time-step size
is not allowed to be greater than 5.
In transient analyses, the prediction is based on the current velocities and accelerations using the
Newmark formulas for structural DOFs:
(15
155)
where:
= current displacements, velocities and accelerations
t n = current time-step size
= Newmark parameter (input on TINTP command)
For thermal, magnetic and other first order systems, the prediction is based on the trapezoidal formula:
(15
156)
where:
{un - 1 } = current temperatures (or magnetic potentials)
= current rates of these quantities
= trapezoidal time integration parameter (input on TINTP command)
See Transient Analysis for more details on the transient procedures.
The subsequent equilibrium iterations provide DOF increments {u} with respect to the predicted DOF
value {un,0 }, hence this is a predictor-corrector algorithm.
15.13.4.Adaptive Descent
Adaptive descent ( Adptky on the NROPT command) is a technique which switches to a stiffer matrix if
convergence difficulties are encountered, and switches back to the full tangent as the solution
convergences, resulting in the desired rapid convergence rate (Eggert([152])).
The matrix used in the Newton-Raphson equation (Equation15146) is defined as the sum of two
matrices:
(15
157)
where:
[KS ] = secant (or most stable) matrix
[KT] = tangent matrix
= descent parameter
The program adaptively adjusts the descent parameter () during the equilibrium iterations as follows:
1. Start each substep using the tangent matrix ( = 0).
2. Monitor the change in the residual ||{R}||2 over the equilibrium iterations:
If it increases (indicating possible divergence):
remove the current solution if < 1, reset to 1 and redo the iteration using the secant
matrix
if already at = 1, continue iterating
If it decreases (indicating converging solution):
If = 1 (secant matrix) and the residual has decreased for three iterations in a row (or 2 if
was increased to 1 during the equilibrium iteration process by (a.) above), then reduce by a
factor of 1/4 (set it to 0.25) and continue iterating.
If the < 1, decrease it again by a factor of 1/4 and continue iterating. Once is below
0.0156, set it to 0.0 (use the tangent matrix).
3. If a negative pivot message is encountered (indicating an ill-conditioned matrix):
If < 1, remove the current solution, reset = 1 and redo the iteration using the secant
matrix.
If = 1, bisect the time step if automatic time stepping is active, otherwise terminate the
execution.
The nonlinearities which make use of adaptive descent (that is, they form a secant matrix if > 0)
include: plasticity, contact, stress stiffness with large strain, nonlinear magnetics using the scalar
potential formulation, the concrete element SOLID65 with KEYOPT(7) = 1, and the membrane shell
element SHELL41 with KEYOPT(1) = 2. Adaptive descent is used by default in these cases unless the
line search or arc-length options are on. It is only available with full Newton-Raphson, where the matrix
is updated every iteration. Full Newton-Raphson is also the default for plasticity, contact and large strain
nonlinearities.
15.13.5.Line Search
The line search option (accessed with LNSRCH command) attempts to improve a Newton-Raphson
solution {ui} by scaling the solution vector by a scalar value termed the line search parameter.
Consider Equation15147 again:
(15
158)
In some solution situations, the use of the full {u i} leads to solution instabilities. Hence, if the line
search option is used, Equation15158 is modified to be:
(15
159)
where:
s = line search parameter, 0.05 < s < 1.0
s is automatically determined by minimizing the energy of the system, which reduces to finding the zero
of the nonlinear equation:
(15
160)
where:
gs = gradient of the potential energy with respect to s
An iterative solution scheme based on regula falsi is used to solve Equation15160 (Schweizerhof and
Wriggers([153])). Iterations are continued until either:
1. gs is less than 0.5 go , where go is the value of Equation15160 at s = 0.0 (that is, using
for {F nr (s{u})}).
2. gs is not changing significantly between iterations.

3. Six iterations have been performed.
If go > 0.0, no iterations are performed and s is set to 1.0. s is not allowed below 0.05.
The scaled solution {u i} is used to update the current DOF values {ui+1} in Equation15147 and the
next equilibrium iteration is performed.
15.13.6.Arc-Length Method
The arc-length method (accessed with ARCLEN,ON) is suitable for nonlinear static equilibrium solutions
of unstable problems. Applications of the arc-length method involves the tracing of a complex path in
the load-displacement response into the buckling/post buckling regimes. The arc-length method uses the
explicit spherical iterations to maintain the orthogonality between the arc-length radius and orthogonal
directions as described by Forde and Stiemer([174]). It is assumed that all load magnitudes are
controlled by a single scalar parameter (i.e., the total load factor). Unsmooth or discontinuous loaddisplacement response in the cases often seen in contact analyses and elastic-perfectly plastic analyses
cannot be traced effectively by the arc-length solution method. Mathematically, the arc-length method
can be viewed as the trace of a single equilibrium curve in a space spanned by the nodal displacement
variables and the total load factor. Therefore, all options of the Newton-Raphson method are still the
basic method for the arc-length solution. As the displacement vectors and the scalar load factor are
treated as unknowns, the arc-length method itself is an automatic load step method (AUTOTS,ON is not
needed). For problems with sharp turns in the load-displacement curve or path dependent materials, it is
necessary to limit the arc-length radius (arc-length load step size) using the initial arc-length radius
(using the NSUBST command). During the solution, the arc-length method will vary the arc-length
radius at each arc-length substep according to the degree of nonlinearities that is involved.
The range of variation of the arc-length radius is limited by the maximum and minimum multipliers
( MAXARC and MINARC on the ARCLEN command).
In the arc-length procedure, nonlinear Equation15146 is recast associated with the total load factor :
(15
161)
where is normally within the range -1.0 l 1.0. Writing the proportional loading factor in an
incremental form yields at substep n and iteration i (see Figure 15.13):
(15
162)
where:
= incremental load factor (as shown in Figure 15.13)
Figure15.13Arc-Length Approach with Full Newton-Raphson Method
The incremental displacement {u i} can be written into two parts following Equation15162:
(15
163)
where:
= displacement due to a unit load factor
= displacement increment from the conventional Newton-Raphson method
These are defined by:
(15
164)
(15
165)
In each arc-length iteration, it is necessary to use Equation15164 and Equation15165 to solve for
and
. The incremental load factor in Equation15163 is determined by the arc-length
equation which can be written as, for instance, at iteration i (see Figure 15.13):
(15
166)
where:
= scaling factor (with units of displacement) used to ensure the correct scale in the equations
un = sum of all the displacement increments ui of this iteration
The arc-length radius
first iteration, i.e.
i is forced, during the iterations, to be identical to the radius iteration
1 at the
(15
167)
While the arc-length radius 1 at iteration 1 of a substep is determined by using the initial arc-length
radius (defined by the NSUBST command), the limit range (defined by the ARCLEN command) and
some logic of the automatic time (load) step method (Automatic Time Stepping).
Equation15163 together with Equation15166 uniquely determines the solution vector (ui, )T.
However, there are many ways to solve for approximately. The explicit spherical iteration method is
used to ensure orthogonality (Forde and Stiemer([174])). In this method, the required residual ri (a
scalar) for explicit iteration on a sphere is first calculated. Then the arc-length load increment factor is
determined by formula:
(15
168)
The method works well even in the situation where the vicinity of the critical point has sharp solution
changes. Finally, the solution vectors are updated according to (see Figure 15.13):
(15
169)
and
(15
170)
where:
n = current substep number
Values of n and are available in POST26 (SOLU command) corresponding to labels ALLF and
ALDLF, respectively. The normalized arc-length radius label ARCL (SOLU) corresponds to value
where is the initial arc-length radius defined (by the NSUBST command) through Equation15166
(an arc-length radius at the first iteration of the first substep).
In the case where the applied loads are greater or smaller than the maximum or minimum critical loads,
arc-length will continue the iterations in cycles because || does not approach unity. It is recommended
to terminate the arc-length iterations (using the ARCTRM or NCNV commands).
Bibliography
Bibliography
[1] Ahmad, S., Irons, B. M. and Zienkiewicz, O. C.. "Analysis of Thick and Thin Shell Structures by
Curved Finite Elements". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 2, No. 3. pp.
419451. 1970.
[2] K. J. Bathe. Finite Element Procedures . Prentice-Hall. Englewood Cliffs. 1996.
[3] M. A. Biot. Mechanics of Incremental Deformation . John Wiley and Sons. New York, 1965.
[4] L. H. Chen. "Piping Flexibility Analysis by Stiffness Matrix". ASME, Journal of Applied Mechanics .
December 1959.
[5] R. D. Cook. Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, Second Edition . John Wiley and
Sons. New York. 1981.
[6] R. D. Cook. "Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick, Thin and Sandwich Plates" . International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 5, No. 2. pp. 277-288. 1972.
[7] D. F. Cuniff and G. J. O'Hara. "Normal Mode Theory for Three-Directional Motion" . NRL Report.
6170. U. S. Naval Research Laboratory. Washington D. C.. 1965.
[8] M. M. Denn. Optimization by Variational Methods. McGraw-Hill. New York. 1969.
[9] K. D. Henshell. "Automatic Masters for Eigenvalue Economization" . Earthquake Engineering and
Structural Dynamics. Vol. 3. pp. 375-383. 1975.
[10] M. C. Imgrund. ANSYS Verification Manual. Swanson Analysis Systems, Inc.. 1992.
[11] W. Flugge. Stresses in Shells. Springer Verla. Berlin. 1967.
[12] R. J. Fritz. "The Effect of Liquids on the Dynamic Motions of Immersed Solids" . ASME Journal of
Engineering for Industry. February, 1972.
[13] T. V. Galambos. Structural Members and Frames . Prentice-Hall. Englewood Cliffs. 1968.
[14] R. J. Guyan. "Reduction of Stiffness and Mass Matrices". AIAA Journal . Vol. 3, No. 2. February,
1965.
[15] A. S. Hall and R. W. Woodhead. Frame Analysis . John Wiley and Sons. New York. 1961.
[16] C. Rajakumar and C. R. Rogers. "The Lanczos Algorithm Applied to Unsymmetric Generalized
Eigenvalue Problem" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 32. pp. 10091026. 1992.
[17] B. M. Irons. "A Frontal Solution Program for Finite Element Analysis". International Journal for
Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 2, No. 1. January, 1970, pp. 5-23 Discussion May, 1970, p. 149.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_biblio.html[28/04/2013 07:18:00 p.m.]
Bibliography
[18] J. H. Wilkinson. The Algebraic Eigenvalue Problem. Clarendon Press. Oxford. pp. 515-569. 1988.
[19] P. C. Kohnke and J. A. Swanson. "Thermo-Electric Finite Elements". Proceedings, International
Conference on Numerical Methods in Electrical and Magnetic Field Problems. Santa Margherita Liqure
Italy. June 1-4, 1976.
[20] P. C. Kohnke. "Large Deflection Analysis of Frame Structures by Fictitious Forces" . International
Journal of Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 12, No. 8. pp. 1278-1294. 1978.
[21] C. F. Kollbrunner and K. Basler. Torsion in Structures. Springer-Verlag. Berlin. 1969.
[22] E. J. Konopinski. Classical Descriptions of Motion. Freeman and Company. San Francisco. 1969.
[23] E. Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.. New York. 1962.
[24] S. G. Lekhnitskii. Theory of Elasticity of an Anisotropic Elastic Body. Holden-Day. San Francisco.
1963.
[25] R. J. Melosh and R. M. Bamford. "Efficient Solution of Load-Deflection Equations" . ASCE Journal of
the Structural Division . Vol. 95, No. ST4, Proc. Paper 6510, Apr., 1969. pp. 661-676 Discussions Dec.,
1969, Jan., Feb., May, 1970, Closure, Feb., 1971.
[26] Kanok-Nukulchai. "A Simple and Efficient Finite Element for General Shell Analysis". International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 14. pp. 179-200 . 1979.
[27] J. T. Oden. Mechanics of Elastic Structures. McGraw-Hill. New York . 1968.
[28] J. S. Przemieniecki. Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis . McGraw-Hill. New York. 1968.
[29] W. C. Schnobrich and M. Suidan. "Finite Element Analysis of Reinforced Concrete". ASCE Journal of
the Structural Division . ST10. pp. 2109-2122 . October, 1973.
[30] P. Seide. "Large Deflection of Rectangular Membranes Under Uniform Pressure". International
Journal of Non-Linear Mechanics . Vol. 12. pp. 397-406.
[31] L. Skjelbreia and J. A. Hendrickson. "Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory" . Proceedings, Seventh
Conference on Coastal Engineering . Ch. 10, pp. 184-196. 1961.
[32] S. Timoshenko and S. Woinowskey-Kreiger. Theory of Plates and Shells. McGraw-Hill. New York .
1959.
[33] D. M. Tracey. "Finite Elements for Three Dimensional Elastic Crack Analysis". Nuclear Engineering
and Design. Vol. 26. 1973.
[34] E. H. Vanmarcke. "Structural Response to Earthquakes" . Seismic Risk and Engineering Decisions.
Elsvier Scientific Publishing Co.. Amsterdam-Oxford, New York. edited by C. Lomnitz and E.
Rosemblueth. pp. 287-337. 1976.
[35] J. D. Wheeler. "Method of Calculating Forces Produced by Irregular Waves". Journal of Petroleum
Bibliography
Technology. Vol. 22. pp. 359-367. 1970.

[36] K. J. Willam. University of Colorado, Boulder. , Private Communication . 1982.
[37] K. J. Willam and E. D. Warnke. "Constitutive Model for the Triaxial Behavior of Concrete".
Proceedings, International Association for Bridge and Structural Engineering . Vol. 19. ISMES. Bergamo,
Italy. p. 174. 1975.
[38] E. L. Wilson, R. L. Taylor, W. P., Doherty, and J. Ghaboussi. "Incompatible Displacement Models" .
Numerical and Computer Methods in Structural Mechanics . edited by S. J. Fenves, et al.. Academic
Press, Inc.. N. Y. and London. pp. 43-57. 1973.
[39] O. C. Zienkiewicz. The Finite Element Method . McGraw-Hill Company. London. 1977.
[40] ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Division 1, Subsection NC, Class 2 Components .
1974.
[41] "Regulatory Guide". Published by the U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Regulatory Guide 1.92,
Revision 1. February 1976.
[42] Kumar K. Tamma and Raju R. Namburu. "Recent Advances, Trends and New Perspectives Via
Enthalpy-Based Finite Element Formulations for Applications to Solidification Problems" . International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 30. pp. 803-820. 1990.
[43] Shore Protection Manual, Published by the U. S. Army Coastal Engineering Research Center . Vol. I,
Third Edition. 1977.
[44] F. P. Beer and R. E. Johnston. Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Statics and Dynamics. McGraw-Hill.
New York. 1962.
[45] E. Hinton, A. Rock, and O. Zienkiewicz. "A Note on Mass Lumping and Related Processes in the
Finite Element Method". International Journal of Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics. Vol.
4. pp. 245-249 . 1976.
[46] R. D. Krieg and D. B. Krieg. "Accuracies of Numerical Solution Methods for the Elastic-Perfectly
Plastic Model" . Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology. Transactions of the ASME. Vol. 99 No. 4, Series J.
pp. 510-515. November, 1977.
[47] William T. Thomson. Theory of Vibrations with Applications . Prentice Hall. pp. 343-352. 1971.
[48] R. J. Roark and W. C. Young. Formulas for Stress and Strain . McGraw-Hill. New York. 1975.
[49] R. L. Taylor, P. J. Beresford, and E. L. Wilson. "A Non-Conforming Element for Stress Analysis".
International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 10. pp. 1211-1219. 1976.
[50] R. Hill. The Mathematical Theory of Plasticity . Oxford University Press. New York. 1983.
Bibliography
[51] C. F. Shih. D. Lee. "Further Developments in Anisotropic Plasticity". Journal of Engineering Materials
and Technology. Vol. 100. pp. 294-302. July 1978.
[52] S. Valliappan. "Nonlinear Analysis for Anistropic Materials" . International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering . Vol. 10. pp. 597-606. 1976.
[53] J. F. Besseling. "A Theory of Elastic, Plastic, and Creep Deformations of an Initially Isotropic
Material Showing Aisotropic Strain-Hardening Creep Recovery and Secondary Creep" . Journal of Applied
Mechanics. pp. 529-536. December 1958.
[54] R. J. Owen, A. Prakash, and O. C. Zienkiewicz. "Finite Element Analysis of Non-Linear Composite
Materials by Use of Overlay Sytems" . Computers and Structures, Pergamon Press . Vol. 4. pp. 1251-1267.
[55] J. P. Holman. Heat Transfer. Fourth Edition. McGraw-Hill. New York. 1976.
[56] J. L. Batoz, K. J. Bathe, and L. W. Ho. "A Study of Three-Node Triangular Plate Bending Elements".
International Journal of Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 15. pp. 1771-1812. 1980.
[57] A. Razzaque. "On the Four Noded Discrete Kirchhoff Shell Elements". Accuracy Reliability Training in
FEM Technology. edited by Robinson, J.. pp. 473-483. 1984.
[58] P. M. Gresho and R. L. Lee. "Don't Suppress the Wiggles - They're Telling You Something" . Finite
Element Methods for Convection Dominated Flows. Vol. 34. ASME Publication AMD. pp. 37-61. 1979.
[59] R. G. Dean. Evaluation and Development of Water Wave Theories for Engineering Application.
prepared for U. S. Army Corp of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Research Center. November 1974.
[60] ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . Section III, Division 1-1974, Subsection NB, Class 1
Components.
[61] American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping, ANSI B31.1-1977, Published by
the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
[62] R. M. Orris and M. Petyt. "Finite Element Study of Harmonic Wave Propagation in Periodic
Structures" . Journal of Sound and Vibration. pp. 223-236. 1974.
[63] J. L. Gordon. "OUTCUR: An Automated Evaluation of Two-Dimensional Finite Element Stresses"
according to ASME. Paper No. 76-WA/PVP-16. ASME Winter Annual Meeting. December 1976.
[64] M. J. D. Powell. "An Efficient Method for Finding the Minimum of a Function of Several Variables
Without Calculating Derivatives" . Computer Journal . Vol. 7. pp. 155-162. 1964.
[65] E. L. Wilson, A. Der Kiereghian, and E. Bayo. "A Replacement for the SRSS Method in Seismic
Analysis". Earthquake and Structural Dynamics. Vol. 9, No. 2. University of California, Berkeley. pp. 187.
March 1981.
[66] C. C. Rankin. F. A. Brogan. "An Element Independent Corotational Procedure for the Treatment of
Bibliography
Large Rotations". Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology. Vol. 108. pp. 165-174. May 1986.
[67] J. Argyris. "An Excursion into Large Rotations" . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engineering . Vol. 32. pp. 85-155. 1982.
[68] S. Tse, I. E. Morse, and R. T. Hinkle. Mechanical Vibrations. Allyn and Bacon. Boston. 1963.
[69] M. V. K. Chari. "Finite Element Solution of the Eddy Current Problem in Magnetic Structures . IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems . Vol. PAS-93. pp. 62-72 . 1974.
[70] J. R. Brauer. "Finite Element Analysis of Electromagnetic Induction in Transformers" . paper A77122-5, IEEE Winter Power Meeting. New York City. 1977.
[71] S. C. Tandon. M. V. K. Chari. "Transient Solution of the Diffusion Equation by the Finite Element
Method". Journal of Applied Physics . March 1981.
[72] P. P. Silvester, H. S. Cabayan, and B. T. Browne. "Efficient Techniques for Finite Element Analysis
of Electric Machines". IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems . Vol. PAS-92. pp. 1274-1281.
1973.
[73] M. V. K. Chari and J. D'Angelo. "Finite Element Analysis of Magneto-Mechanical Devices" . Fifth
International Workshop in Rare Earth-Cobalt Permanent Magnets and Their Application. 7-10, Paper No.
V1-1.. Roanoke, VA. June 1981.
[74] O. W. Anderson. "Transform Leakage Flux Program Based on the Finite Element Method". IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems . Vol. PAS-92, No. 2. 1973.
[75] O. C. Zienkiewicz, J. Lyness, and D. R Owen. "Three-Dimensional Magnetic Field Determination
Using a Scalar Potential - A Finite Element Solution" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. MAG-13, No.
5. pp. 1649-1656. 1977.
[76] J. L. Coulomb and G. Meunier. "Finite Element Implementation of Virtual Work Principle for
Magnetic for Electric Force and Torque Calculation . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. Mag-2D, No.
5. pp. 1894-1896. 1984.
[77] F. C. Moon. Magneto-Solid Mechanics . John Wiley and Sons. New York. 1984.
[78] A. J. Baker. Finite Element Computational Fluid Mechanics . McGraw-Hill Book Company. New York.
pp. 266-284. 1983.
[79] S. NW. Yuan. Foundations of Fluid Mechanics . Prentice-Hall International, Inc.. London. pp. 71-102.
1976.
[80] Ray W. Clough and Joseph Penzien. Dynamics of Structures. McGraw-Hill. New York. p. 559. 1975.
[81] H. Allik and J. R. Hughes. "Finite Element for Piezoelectric Vibration" . International Journal
Numerical Methods of Engineering . No. 2. pp. 151-157. 1970.
Bibliography
[82] N. P. Eer Nisse. "Variational Method for Electroelastic Vibration Analysis". IEEE Transactions on
Sonics and Ultrasonics. Vol. SU-14, No. 4. 1967.
[83] J. Sato, M. Kawabuchi, and A. Fukumoto. "Dependence of the Electromechanical Coupling
Coefficient on the Width-to-Thickness Ratio of Plant-Shaped Piezoelectric Transducers Used for
Electronically Scanned Ultrasound Diagnostic Systems". Journal of Acoustics Society of America. No. 66
6. pp. 1609-1611 . 1979.
[84] E. L. Kinsler. et. al.. Fundamentals of Acoustics . John Wiley and Sons. New York. pp. 98-123. 1982.
[85] A. Craggs. "A Finite Element Model for Acoustically Lined Small Rooms" . Journal of Sound and
Vibration. Vol. 108, No. 2. pp. 327-337.
[86] O. C. Zienkiewicz. R. E. Newton. "Coupled Vibrations of a Structure Submerged in a Compressible
Fluid". Proceedings of the Symposium on Finite Element Techniques. University of Stuttgart. Germany.
June 1969.
[87] Lawrence E. Malvern. Introduction to the Mechanics of a Continuous Medium . Prentice-Hall, Inc..
Englewood Cliffs, NJ. 1969.
[88] R. Siegal and J. R. Howell. Thermal Radiation Heat Transfer. Second Edition. Hemisphere Publishing
Corporation. 1981.
[89] ANSI/IEEE Standard on Piezoelectricity IEEE Standard . pp. 176. 1987.
[90] E. E. Antonova. D. C. Looman. Finite elements for thermoelectric device analysis in ANSYS. ICT
2005 24th International Conference on Thermoelectrics. pp. 215-218. 2005.
[91] E. Onate, J. Rojek, R. L. Taylor, and O. C. Zienkiewicz. Finite calculus formulation for
incompressible solids using linear triangles and tetrahedra . International Journal for Numerical Methods
in Engineering . Vol. 59. pp. 14731500. 2004.
[92] A. F. Fossum and J. T. Fredrich. Cap plasticity model and compactive and dilatant prefailure
deformation . Pacific Rocks 200: Rock Around the Rim . A. A. Balkema. pp. 1169-1176. 2000.
[93] Stephen W. Tsai. Composites Design. Third Edition, Section 11.6. Think Composites. Dayton, Ohio.
1987.
[94] J. Weiss. "Efficient Finite Element Solution of Multipath Eddy Current Problems" . IEEE Transactions
on Magnetics . Vol. MAG-18, No. 6. pp. 1710-1712. 1982.
[95] V. K. Garg and J. Weiss. "Finite Element Solution of Transient Eddy-Current Problems in MultiplyExcited Magnetic Systems". IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. MAG-22, No. 5. pp. 1257-1259 . 1986.
[96] E. N. Dvorkin. "On Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Shell Structures" . Ph.D Thesis.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 1984.
Bibliography
[97] E. N. Dvorkin and K. J. Bathe. "A Continuum Mechanics Based Four-Node Shell Element for General
Nonlinear Analysis". Engineering Computations . Vol. 1. pp. 77-88. 1984.
[98] K. J. Bathe and E. N. Dvorkin. "A Formulation of General Shell Elements - The Use of Mixed
Interpolation of Tensorial Components" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol.
22. pp. 697-722. 1986.
[99] M. Hoit and E. L. Wilson. "An Equation Numbering Algorithm Based on a Minimum Front Criteria" .
Computers and Structures. Vol. 16. pp. 225-239. 1983.
[100] E. Cuthill and J. McKee. "Reducing the Band Width of Sparse Symmetric Matrices". Proceedings of
the ACM National Conference. New York. 1969.
[101] A. Georges and D. McIntyre. "On the Application of the Minimum Degree Algorithm to Finite
Element Systems". SIAM Journal of Numerical Analysis . Vol. 15. 1978.
[102] O. C. Zienkiewicz and J. Z. Zhu. "A Simple Error Estimator and Adaptive Procedure for Practical
Engineering Analysis". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 24. pp. 337-357.
1987.
[103] I. Babuska and W. C. Rheinboldt. "Analysis of Optimal Finite Element Meshes in R" . Mathematics
of Computation. Vol. 33. pp. 431-463. 1979.
[104] W. Carnegie. "Vibrations of Rotating Cantilever Blading" . Journal of Mechanical Engineering
Science . Vol. 1. No. 3. 1959.
[105] P. G. Bergan and E. Mollestad. "An Automatic Time-Stepping Algorithm for Dynamic Problems" .
Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 49. 1985.
[106] P. C. Paris and G. C. Sih. "Stress Analysis of Cracks". Fracture Toughness and Testing and its
Applications . American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, STP 381. pp. 30-83. 1965.
[107] G. J. O'Hara and R. O. Belsheim. "Interim Design Values for Shock Design of Shipboard
Equipment". NRL Memorandum Report 1396. U.S. Naval Research Laboratory. Washington D.C.. 1963.
[108] A. Markovsky, T. F. Soules, and M. R. Vukcevich. "Mathematical and Computational Aspects of a
General Viscoelastic Theory" . G. E. Lighting and Research and Technical Services Operation . Report No.
86-LRL-2021. February 1986.
[109] G. W. Scherer and S. M. Rekhson. "Viscoelastic-Elastic Composites: I, General Theory" . Journal of
the American Ceramic Society . Vol. 65, No. 7. 1982.
[110] O. S. Narayanaswamy. "A Model of Structural Relaxation in Glass" . Journal of the American
Ceramic Society . Vol. 54, No. 10. pp. 491-498. 1971.
[111] O. C. Zienkiewicz, M. Watson, and I. P. King. "A Numerical Method of Visco-Elastic Stress
Analysis". International Journal of Mechanical Science . Vol. 10. pp. 807-827. 1968.
Bibliography
[112] R. L. Taylor, K. S. Pister, and G. L. Goudreas. "Thermochemical Analysis of Viscoelastic Solids" .

[113] D. J. Allman. "A Compatible Triangular Element Including Vertex Rotations for Plane Elasticity
Analysis". Computers and Structures. Vol. 19. pp. 1-8. 1984.
[114] R. D. Cook. "On the Allman Triangle and a Related Quadrilateral Element" . Computers and
Structures. Vol. 22. pp. 1065-1067. 1986.
[115] R. H. MacNeal and R. L. Harder. "A Refined For-Noded Membrane Element with Rotational
Degrees of Freedom" . Computers and Structures. Vol. 28, No. 1. pp. 75-84.
[116] S. J. Garvey. "The Quadrilateral Shear Panel". Aircraft Engineering . p. 134. May 1951.
[117] Shah M. Yunus, Timothy P. Pawlak, and R. D. Cook. "Solid Elements with Rotational Degrees of
Freedom Part 1 and Part 2" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 31. pp.
573-610. 1991.
[118] O. A. Mohammed. "Magnetic Vector Potential Based Formulation and Computation of Nonlinear
Magnetostatic Fields and Forces in Electrical Devices by Finite Elements" . Ph.D. Dissertation . Virginia
Polytechnic Institute and State University. Blacksburg, VA . May 1983.
[119] I. D. Mayergoyz. "A New Scalar Potential Formulation for Three-Dimensional Magnetostatic
Problems" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. MAG-23, No. 6. pp. 3889-3894. 1987.
[120] Oszkar Biro and Kurt Preis. "On the Use of the Magnetic Vector Potential in the Finite Element
Analysis of Three-Dimensional Eddy Currents" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 25, No. 4. pp.
3145-3159 . July 1989.
[121] J. Robinson. Basic and Shape Sensivity Tests for Membrane and Plate Bending Finite Elements .
Robinson and Associates. January 1985.
[122] Y. Kagawa, T. Yamabuchi, and S. Kitagami. "Infinite Boundary Element and its Application to a
Combined Finite-Boundary Element Technique for Unbounded Field Problems" . Boundary Elements VIII .
ed. C. A. Brebbia. Springer-Verlag,. New York, NY. 1986.
[123] J. T. Oden and N. Kikuchi. "Finite Element Methods for Constrained Problems in Elasticity".
International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 18, No. 5. pp. 701-725. 1982.
[124] T. Sussman and K. J. Bathe. "A Finite Element Formulation for Nonlinear Incompressible Elastic
and Inelastic Analysis". Computers and Structures. Vol. 26, No. 1/2. pp. 357-409. 1987.
[125] O. C. Zienkiewicz, Y. C. Liu, and G. C. Huang. "Error Estimates and Convergence Rates for Various
Incompressible Elements". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 28, No. 9.
pp. 2191-2202. 1989.
[126] H. C. Huang and R. W. Lewis. "Adaptive Analysis for Heat Flow Problems Using Error Estimation
Techniques" . Paper presented at the 6th International Conference on Numerical Methods in Thermal
Bibliography
Problems. Also University of Wales, University College of Swansea Internal Report CR/635/89 April 1989.
[127] G. G. Weber, A. M. Lush, A. Zavaliangos, and L. Anand. "An Objective Time-Integration Procedure
for Isotropic Rate-Independent Elastic-Plastic Constitutive Equations" . International Journal of Plasticity .
Vol. 6. pp. 701-749. 1990.
[128] G. M. Eggert and P. R. Dawson. "A Viscoplastic Formulation with Plasticity for Transient Metal
Forming" . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 70. pp. 165-190. 1988.
[129] R. Narayanaswami and H. M. Adelman. "Inclusion of Transverse Shear Deformation in Finite
Element Displacement Formulations" . American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics Journal . Vol.
12, No. 11. pp. 1613-1614. 1974.
[130] I. Kaljevic, S. Saigal, and A. Ali. "An Infinite Boundary Element Formulation for Three-Dimensional
Potential Problems" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 35, No. 10. pp.
2079-2100. 1992.
[131] Simo et al.. "Finite Deformation Post-Buckling Analysis Involving Inelasticity and Contact
Constraints" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 23. pp. 779-800. 1986.
[132] H. Parisch. "A Consistent Tangent Stiffness Matrix for Three-Dimensional Non-Linear Contact
Analysis". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol.28. pp. 1803-1812. 1989.
[133] Bayo. "A Modified Lagrangian Formulation for the Dynamic Analysis of Constrained Mechanical
Systems". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 71. pp. 183-195. 1988.
[134] Jiang and Rodgers. "Combined Lagrangian Multiplier and Penalty Function Finite Element
Technique for Elastic Impact Analysis". Computers and Structures. Vol. 30. pp. 1219-1229. 1988.
[135] Giannakopoulos. "The Return Mapping Method for the Integration of Friction Constitutive
Relations". Computers and Structures. Vol. 32. pp. 157-167. 1989.
[136] Ridic and Owen. "A Plasticity Theory of Friction and Joint Elements". Computational Plasticity:
Models, Software, and Applications . Part II. Proceedings of the Second International Conference,
Barcelona, Spain, Pineridge Press, Swanse. pp. 1043-1062. Editors Owen, Hinton, Ornate. 1989.
[137] Wriggers, VuVan, and Stein. "Finite Element Formulation of Large Deformation Impact-Contact
Problems with Friction" . Computers and Structures. Vol. 37. pp. 319-331. 1990.
[138] Stein, Wriggers and VuVan. "Models of Friction, Finite-Element Implementation and Application to
Large Deformation Impact-Contact Problems" . Computational Plasticity: Models, Software, and
Applications . Part II. Proceedings of the Second International Conference, Barcelona, Spain, Pineridge
Press, Swansea. pp. 1015-1041. Editors Owen, Hinton, Ornate. 1989.
[139] S. M. Yunus, P. C. Kohnke, and S. Saigal. "An Efficient Through-Thickness Integration Scheme in
an Unlimited Layer Doubly Curved Isoparametric Composite Shell Element" . International Journal for
Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 28. pp. 2777-2793. 1989.
[140] E. R. Geddes. "An Analysis of the Low Frequency Sound Field in Non-Rectangular Enclosures Using
the Finite Element Method". Ph.D Thesis, Pennsylvania State University. 1982.
[141] M. Gyimesi, D. Lavers, T. Pawlak, and D. Ostergaard. "Application of the General Potential
Formulation in the ANSYSProgram" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 29. pp. 1345-1347. 1993.
Bibliography
[142] C. Rajakumar and A. Ali. "A Solution Method for Acoustic Boundary Element Eigenproblem With
Sound Absorption Using Lanczos Algorithm" . Proceedings of 2nd International Congress on Recent
Developments in Air- and Structure-Borne Sound and Vibration. Auburn University, AL. pp. 1001-1010 .
March 4-6, 1992.
[143] H. Nishimura, M. Isobe, and K. Horikawa. "Higher Order Solutions of the Stokes and the Cnoidal
Waves". Journal of the Faculty of Engineering . Vol. XXXIV, No. 2. The University of Tokyo. Footnote on
page 268. 1977.
[144] G. Mahinthakumar and S.R.H. Hoole. "A Parallelized Element by Element Jacobi Conjugate
Gradients Algorithm for Field Problems and a Comparison with Other Schemes" . Applied
Electromagnetics in Materials . Vol. 1. pp. 15-28. 1990.
[145] T.J.R. Hughes. Analysis of Transient Algorithms with Particular Reference to Stability Behavior .
Computation Methods for Transient Analysis . Vol. 1. edited by T. Belytschko and K. J. Bathe. NorthHolland, Amsterdam. pp. 67-155. 1983.
[146] L. Anand. "Constitutive Equations for the Rate-Dependent Deformation of Metals at Elevated
Temperatures". Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology. Vol. 104. pp. 12-17. 1982.
[147] S. B. Brown, K. H. Kim, and L. Anand. "An Internal Variable Constitutive Model for Hot Working of
Metals". International Journal of Plasticity . Vol. 5. pp. 95-130. 1989.
[148] John M. Dickens. Numerical Methods for Dynamic Substructure Analysis. PH.D. Thesis from
University of California, Berkeley. 1980.
[149] M. Gyimesi and J. D. Lavers. "Generalized Potential Formulation for 3-D Magnetostatic Problems" .
IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 28, No. 4. 1992.
[150] W. R. Smythe. Static and Dynamic Electricity . McGraw-Hill Book Co.. New York, NY. 1950.
[151] N. A. Demerdash, T. W. Nehl, F. A. Fouad, and O. A. Mohammed. "Three Dimensional Finite
Element Vector Potential Formulation of Magnetic Fields in Electrical Apparatus" . IEEE Transactions on
Power Apparatus and Systems . Vol. PAS-100, No. 8. pp. 4104-4111. 1981.
[152] G. M. Eggert, P. R. Dawson, and K. K. Mathur. "An Adaptive Descent Method for Nonlinear
Viscoplasticity. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 31. pp. 1031-1054.
1991.
[153] K. H. Schweizerhof and P. Wriggers. "Consistent Linearization for Path Following Methods in
Nonlinear FE Analysis". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 59. pp. 261-279.
1986.
[154] O. C. Zienkiewicz and I. C. Cormeau. "Visco-plasticity - Plasticity and Creep in Elastic Solids - A
Unified Numerical Solution Approach". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol.
8. pp. 821-845. 1974.
[155] J. C. Simo and R. L. Taylor. "Consistent Tangent Operators for Rate-Independent Elastoplasticity" .
Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 48. pp. 101-118. 1985.
Bibliography
[156] T. J. R. Hughes. "Numerical Implementation of Constitutive Models: Rate-Independent Deviatoric

Plasticity". Theoretical Foundation for Large-Scale Computations for Nonlinear Material Behavior . edited
by S. Nemat-Nasser, R. J. Asaro, and G. A. Hegemier. Martinus Nijhoff Publishers. Dordrecht, The
Netherlands . 1984.
[157] T. J. R. Hughes and E. Carnoy. "Nonlinear Finite Element Shell Formulation Accounting for Large
Membrane Strains". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 39. pp. 69-82 . 1983.
[158] J. Nedelec. "Mixed finite elements in R3" . Numer. Math., Vol.35. pp. 315-341. 1980.
[159] L. Anand. "Constitutive Equations for Hot-Working of Metals". International Journal of Plasticity .
Vol. 1. pp. 213-231. 1985.
[160] M. Abramowitz and I. A. Stegun. Handbook of Mathematical Functions with Formulas, Graphs, and
Mathematical Tables. National Bureau of Standards Applied Mathematics Series 55. p. 966. 1972.
[161] C. G. Swain and M. S. Swain. "A Uniform Random Number Generator That is Reproducible,
Hardware-Independent, and Fast". Journal of Chemical Information and Computer Sciences . pp. 56-58.
1980.
[162] Edwin Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 3rd Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. 1972.
[163] Paul G. Hoel. Introduction to Mathematical Statistics . 3rd Edition. Johnn Wiley & Sons, Inc.. p.
196. 1962.
[164] Neter, John et al.. Applied Statistics . Allyn and Bacon, Inc.. Boston, MA. 1978.
[165] T. J. R. Hughes. The Finite Element Method Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis .
Prentice-Hall, Inc.. Englewood Cliffs, NJ . 1987.
[166] E. L. Wilson and Tetsuji Itoh. "An Eigensolution Strategy for Large Systems". Computers and
Structures. Vol. 16, No. 1-4. pp. 259-265. 1983.
[167] T. Yokoyama. "Vibrations of a Hanging Timoshenko Beam Under Gravity" . Journal of Sound and
Vibration. Vol. 141, No. 2. pp. 245-258. 1990.
[168] J. L. Coulomb. "A Methodology for the Determination of Global Electromechanical Quantities from
a Finite Element Analysis and its Application to the Evaluation of Magnetic Forces, Torques and
Stiffness" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. MAG-19, No. 6. 1983. pp. 2514-2519.
[169] O. C. Zienkiewicz, C. Emson, and P. Bettess. "A Novel Boundary Infinite Element". International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 19. pp. 393-404. 1983.
[170] F. Damjanic and D. R. J. Owen. "Mapped Infinite Elements in Transient Thermal Analysis".
Computers and Structures. Vol. 19, No. 4. pp. 673-687. 1984.
Bibliography
[171] J. M. M. C. Marques and D. R. J. Owen. "Infinite Elements in Quasi-Static Materially Nonlinear

Problems" . Computers and Structures. Vol. 18, No. 4. pp. 739-751. 1984.
[172] Hui Li, Sunil Saigal, Ashraf Ali, and Timothy P. Pawlak. "Mapped Infinite Elements for 3-D Vector
Potential Magnetic Problems" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 37. pp.
343-356. 1994.
[173] M. Gyimesi, J. Lavers, T. Pawlak, and D. Ostergaard. "Biot-Savart Integration for Bars and Arcs" .
IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 29, No. 6. pp. 2389-2391. 1993.
[174] W. R. B. Forde and S. F. Stiemer. "Improved Arc Length Orthogonality Methods for Nonlinear
Finite Element Analysis". Computers & Structures. Vol. 27, No. 5. pp. 625-630. 1987.
[175] B. Nour-Omid and C. C. Rankin. "Finite Rotation Analysis and Consistent Linearization Using
Projectors". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 93. pp. 353-384 . 1991.
[176] C.R.I. Emson and J. Simkin. "An Optimal Method for 3-D Eddy Currents" . IEEE Transactions on
Magnetics . Vol. MAG-19, No. 6. pp. 2450-2452. 1983.
[177] P.L. Viollet. "The Modelling of Turbulent Recirculating Flows for the Purpose of Reactor ThermalHydraulic Analysis". Nuclear Engineering and Design. 99. pp. 365-377. 1987.
[178] B.E. Launder and D.B. Spalding. "The Numerical Computation of Turbulent Flows" . Computer
Methods In Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 3. pp 269-289. 1974.
[179] J.G. Rice and R.J. Schnipke. "A Monotone Streamline Upwind Finite Element Method for
Convection-Dominated Flows" . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 48.
pp.313-327. 1985.
[180] F.H. Harlow and A.A. Amsden. "A Numerical Fluid Dynamics Calculation Method for All Flow
Speeds" . Journal of Computational Physics . Vol 8. 1971.
[181] F.M. White. Viscous Fluid Flow . Second Edition. McGraw-Hill. New York. 1991.
[182] S.V. Patankar. Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow . Hemisphere, New York. 1980.
[183] Magnus R. Hestenes and Eduard Stiefel. "Methods of Conjugate Gradients for Solving Linear
System". Journal of Research of the National Bureau of Standards . Vol. 49, No.6. 1952.
[184] J.K. Reid. "On the Method of Conjugate Gradients for the Solution of Large Sparse Sets of linear
Euqations" . Proceedings of the Conference on Large Sparse Sets of Linear Equations. edited by J.K. Reid.
Academic Press. pp. 231-254. 1971.
[185] H.C. Elman. "Preconditioned Conjugate-Gradient Methods for Nonsymmetric Systems of Linear
Equations" . Advances In Computer Methods For Partial Differential Equations IV . edited by Vichnevetsky,
R., Stepleman. IMACS. pp. 409-413. 1981.
Bibliography
[186] J.J. More and S.J. Wright. Optimization Software Guide . SIAM. Philadelphia. p. 13. 1993.
[187] R.W. Bilger. "A Note on Favre Averaging in Variable Density Flows" . Combustion Science and
Technology. Vol. 11. pp. 215-217. 1975.
[188] M. C. McCalla. Fundamentals of Computer-Aided Circuit Simulation. Kluwer Academic. 1988.
[189] P.A. Vermeer and A. Verrujit. "An Accuracy Condition for Consolidation by Finite Elements".
International Journal for Numerical and Analytical Methods in Geomechanics . Vol. 5. pp. 1-14. 1981.
[190] Stephen W. Tsai and H. Thomas Hahn. Introduction to Composite Materials . Section 7.2.
Technomic Publishing Company. 1980.
[191] G.E.P. Box, W.G. Hunter, and J.S. Hunter. Statistics for Experimenters . Chapter 10. John Wiley &
Sons. 1978.
[192] Barna Szabo and Ivo Babuska. Finite Element Analysis . John Wiley & Sons. 1991.
[193] M.T. Chen. A. Ali. An Efficient and Robust Integration Technique for Applied Random Vibration
Analysis. Computers and Structures. Vol. 66 No. 6. pp. 785798. 1998.
[194] R.S. Harichandran. Random Vibration Under Propagating Excitation: Closed-Form Solutions.
Journal of Engineering Mechanics ASCE . Vol. 118, No. 3. pp. 575-586. 1992.
[195] R.G. Grimes, J.G. Lewis, and H.D. Simon. A Shifted Block Lanczos Algorithm for Solving Sparse
Symmetric Generalized Eigenproblems . SIAM Journal Matrix Analysis Applications . Vol. 15 No. 1. pp.
228-272 . 1996.
[196] C. Rajakumar and C.R. Rogers. The Lanczos Algorithm Applied to Unsymmetric Generalized
Eigenvalue Problems . International Journal for Numercial Method in Engineering . Vol. 32. pp. 10091026. 1991.
[197] D.K. Gartling. "Finite Element Methods for Non-Newtonian Flows" . report SAND92-0886, CFD
Dept., . Sandia National Laboratories. Albuquerque, NM. 1992.
[198] M.J. Crochet, A.R. Davies, and K. Walters. Numerical Simulation of Non-Newtonian Flow . Elsevier
Science Publishers B.V.. 1984.
[199] John O. Hallquist. LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual. Livermore Software Technology Corporation.
1998.
[200] O. Biro, K. Preis, C. Magele, W. Renhart, K.R. Richter, and G. Vrist. "Numerical Analysis of 3D
Magnetostatic Fields" . IEEE Transaction on Magnetics . Vol. 27, No. 5. pp. 3798-3803. 1991.
[201] M. Gyimesi and D Ostergaard. "Non-Conforming Hexahedral Edge Elements for Magnetic Analysis".
ANSYS, Inc. internal development, submitted to COMPUMAG. Rio. 1997.
Bibliography
[202] Gyimesi, M. and Lavers, D., "Application of General Potential Formulation to Finite Elements",
Second Japan Hungarian Joint Seminar on Electromagnetics, Sapporo, Japan 1992. Applied
Electromagnetics in Materials and Computational Technology, ed. T. Honma, I. Sebestyen, T. Shibata.
Hokkaido University Press. 1992.
[203] K. Preis, I. Bardi, O. Biro, C. Magele, Vrisk G., and K. R. Richter. "Different Finite Element
Formulations of 3-D Magnetostatic Fields" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 28, No. 2. pp. 10561059. 1992.
[204] J.C. Nedelec. "Mixed Finite Elements in R3" . Numerical Methods. Vol. 35. pp. 315-341. 1980.
[205] J.S. Van Welij. "Calculation of Eddy Currents in Terms of H on Hexahedra" . IEEE Transactions on
Magnetics . Vol. 18. pp. 431-435. 1982.
[206] A. Kameari. "Calculation of Transient 3D Eddy Current Using Edge Elements". IEEE Transactions
on Magnetics . Vol. 26. pp. 466-469. 1990.
[207] J. Jin. The Finite Element Method in Electromagnetics. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.. New York. 1993.
[208] H. Whitney. Geometric Integration Theory . Princeton U. P.. Princeton. 1957.
[209] J.A. Stratton. Electromagnetic Theory . Section 1.14. McGraw-Hill. New York. 1941.
[210] K.M. Mitzner. "An Integral Equation Approach to Scattering From a Body of Finite Conductivity".
Radio Science . Vol. 2. pp. 1459-1470. 1967.
[211] R. Mittra and O. Ramahi. "Absorbing Boundary Conditions for the Direct Solution of Partial
Differential Equations Arising in Electromagnetic Scattering Problems" . Finite Element Finite Difference
Methods in Electromagnetic Scattering . Vol. II. pp. 133-173. 1989.
[212] D. Peric and D.R.J. Owen. "Computational Model for 3-D Contact Problems with Friction Based on
the Penalty Method". International Journal for Numercial Method in Engineering . Vol. 35. pp. 1289-1309.
1992.
[213] S. Cescotto and R. Charilier. "Frictional Contact Finite Elements Based on Mixed Variational
Principles". International Journal for Numercial Method in Engineering . Vol. 36. pp. 1681-1701. 1992.
[214] S. Cescotto and Y.Y. Zhu. "Large Strain Dynamic Analysis Using Solid and Contact Finite Elements
Based on a Mixed Formulation - Application to Metalforming". Journal of Metals Processing Technology.
Vol. 45. pp. 657-663. 1994.
[215] J.C. Simo and T.A. Laursen. "An Augmented Lagrangian Treatment of Contact Problems Involving
Friction" . Computers and Structures. Vol. 42, No. 1. pp. 97-116. 1992.
[216] T.A. Laursen and J.C. Simo. "Algorithmic Symmetrization of Coulomb Frictional Problems Using
Augmented Lagrangians". Computers Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 108, No. 1 &
2. pp. 133-146. 1993.
Bibliography
[217] A. Barry, J. Bielak, and R.C. MacCamy. "On absorbing boundary conditions for wave
propagations". Journal of Computational Physics . Vol. 792. pp. 449-468 . 1988.
[218] L.F. Kallivokas, J. Bielak, and R.C. MacCamy. "Symmetric Local Absorbing Boundaries in Time and
Space" . Journal of Engineering Mechanics . Vol. 1179. pp. 2027-2048. 1991.
[219] T.J.R. Hughes. "Generalization of Selective Integration Procedures to Anisotropic and Nonlinear
Media" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 15, No. 9. pp. 1413-1418.
1980.
[220] J.C. Nagtegaal, D.M. Parks, and J.R. Rice. "On Numerically Accurate Finite Element Solutions in the
Fully Plastic Range". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 4. pp. 153-178.
1974.
[221] Miklos Gyimesi and Dale Ostergaard. "Mixed Shape Non-Conforming Edge Elements". CEFC '98.
Tucson, AZ. 1998.
[222] Dale Ostergaard and Miklos Gyimesi. "Analysis of Benchmark Problem TEAM20 with Various
Formulations" . Proceedings of the TEAM Workshop, COMPUMAG Rio. pp. 18-20 . 1997.
[223] Dale Ostergaard and Miklos Gyimesi. "Magnetic Corner: Accurate Force Computations" . Analysis
Solutions. Vol 1, Issue 2. pp. 10-11. 1997-98.
[224] A.N. Brooks and T.J.R. Hughes. "Streamline Upwind/Petro-Galkerin Formulation for Convection
Dominated Flows with Particular Emphasis on the Incompressible Navier-Stokes Equations" . Computer
Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 32. pp. 199-259 . 1982.
[225] N.A. Demerdash and A.A. Arkadan. "Notes on FEM Modeling of Permanent Magnets in Electrical
Devices" . FEM for Electromagnetic Applications . Section 3. p.26-7, 17, 19. 1981.
[226] N.A. Demerdash and T.W. Nehl. "Determination of Inductances in Ferrite Type Magnet Electric
Machinery by FEM" . IEEE Trans. on MAG. Vol.18. pp.1052-54. 1982.
[227] T.W. Nehl, F.A. Faud, and N.A. Demerdash. "Determination of Saturated Values of Rotation
Machinery Incremental and Apparent Inductances by an Energy Perturbation Method". IEEE Trans. on
PAS . Vol.101. pp.4441-51 . 1982.
[228] Miklos Gyimesi, Vladimir Zhulin, and Dale Ostergaard. "Particle Trajectory Tracing in ANSYS". Fifth
International Conference on Charged Particle Optics, Delft University, Netherlands. To be Published in
Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research, Section A. 1998.
[229] Miklos Gyimesi and Ostergaard. Dale . "Inductance Computation by Incremental Finite Element
Analysis". CEFC 98. Tucson, Arizona. 1998.
[230] Computer-Aided Generation of Nonlinear Reduced-Order Dynamic Macromodels - I: Non-StressStiffened Case. Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems . S. 262269. June 2000.
[231] N.A. Demerdash and D.H. Gillott. "A New Approach for Determination of Eddy Currents and Flux
Bibliography
Penetration in Nonlinear Ferromagnetic Materials" . IEEE Trans. on Magnetics . Vol. 10. pp. 682-685.
1974.
[232] D.P. Flanagan and T. Belytschko. "A Uniform Strain Hexahedron and Quadrilateral with Orthogonal
Hourglass Control" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 17. pp. 679-706.
1981.
[233] F. Vogel. "Topological Optimization of Linear-Elastic Structures with ANSYS 5.4." . NAFEMS
Conference on Topological Optimization. 1997.
[234] H.P. Mlejnek and R. Schirrmacher. "An Engineer's Approach to Optimal Material Distribution and
Shape Finding". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 106. pp. 1-26. 1993.
[235] M.P. Bendsoe and N. Kikucki. "Generating Optimal Topologies in Structural Design Using a
Homogenization Method". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 71. pp. 197224. 1988.
[236] Javier Bonet and Richard D. Wood. Nonlinear Continuum Mechanics for Finite Element Analysis .
Cambridge University Press. 1997..
[237] J.C. Simo and L. Vu-Quoc. "A Three Dimensional Finite Strain Rod Model. Part II: Computational
Aspects" . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 58. pp. 79-116. 1986.
[238] Adnan Ibrahimbegovic. "On Finite Element Implementation of Geometrically Nonlinear Reissner's
Beam Theory: Three-dimensional Curved Beam Elements". Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engineering . Vol. 122. pp. 11-26. 1995.
[239] Istvan Vago and Miklos Gyimesi. Electromagnetic Fields . Published by Akademiiai Kiado. Budapest,
Hungary. 1998.
[240] S. Flugge. "Electric Fields and Waves". Encyclopedia of Physics . Vol. 16. Springer, Berlin . 1958.
[241] M. Lagally. Vorlesungen uber Vektorrechnung. Geest u. Portig, Peipzip. 1964.
[242] D.P. Flanagan and T. Belytschko. "A Uniform Strain Hexahedron and Quadrilateral with Orthogonal
Hourglass Control" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 17. pp. 679-706.
1981.
[243] H.B. Calllen. Thermodynamics and Introduction to Thermostatistics . 2nd Edition. p. 84. Wiley &
Sons. New York, NY. 1985.
[244] J.L. Chaboche. "Equations for Cyclic Plasticity and Cyclic Viscoplasticity" . International Journal of
Plasticity . Vol. 7. pp. 247-302. 1989.
[245] J.L. Chaboche. "On Some Modifications of Kinematic Hardening to Improve the Description of
Ratcheting Effects". International Journal of Plasticity . Vol. 7. pp. 661-678. 1991.
Bibliography
[246] Timoshenko. Theory of Elastic Stability. McGraw Hill Book Company. 1961.
[247] M. Schulz and F. C. Fillippou. "Generalized Warping Torsion Formulation" . Journal of Engineering
Mechanics. pp. 339-347. 1998.
[248] M. Gyimesi and D. Ostergaard. "Electro-Mechanical Capacitor Element for MEMS Analysis in
ANSYS". Proceedings of Modelling and Simulation of Microsystems Conference . pp. 270 . Puerto Rico.
1999.
[249] M. Schulz and F. C. Fillippou. "Capacitance Computation with Ammeter Element" . University of
Toronto, Department of Electrical Engineering, Unpublished Report available upon request from ANSYS,
Inc.. , 1993.
[250] J. Mehner and S.D. Senturia. Computer-Aided Generation of Nonlinear Reduced-Order Dynamic
Macromodels - II: Stress-Stiffened Case. Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems, . S. 270279. June
2000.
[251] Hieke, A., Siemens and IBM. "ANSYS APDL for Capacitance" . Proceedings from `Second
International Conference on Modeling and Simulation of Microsystems, Semiconductors, Sensors and
Actuators'. pp. 172. San Juan, Puerto Rico. 1999.
[252] J.C. Simo and T.J.R. Hughes. Computational Inelasticity. Springer-Verlag. 1997.
[253] E. Voce. Metallurgica. Col. 51, pp. 219 . 1955.
[254] W.H. Press. Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scienfitic Computing . Cambridge University Press.
1993.
[255] M. Gyimesi, D. Lavers, D Ostergaard, and T. Pawlak. "Hybrid Finite Element - Trefftz Method for
Open Boundary Anslysis". COMPUMAG, Berlin 1995, IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, Vol. 32, No. 3, pp.
671-674 1996.
[256] M. Gyimesi and D. Lavers. "Application of the Trefftz Method to Exterior Problems" . University of
Toronto, Department of Electrical Engineering, unpublished report. Available upon request from ANSYS,
Inc.. 1992.
[257] M. Gyimesi and D. Lavers. "Application of the Trefftz Method to Exterior Problems" . University of
Toronto, Department of Electrical Engineering, unpublished report. Available upon request from ANSYS,
Inc.. 1993.
[258] M. Gyimesi and D. Lavers. "Implementation to the Exterior Trefftz Element" . University of Toronto,
Department of Electrical Engineering, unpublished report. Available upon request from ANSYS, Inc.. ,
1993.
[259] E. Trefftz. "Ein Gegenstuck zum Ritz'schen Verfahren". Proceedings of the Second International
Congress on Applied Mechanics. Zurich. 1926.
[260] E. Trefftz. "Mechanik det elastischen Korper" . In Vol. VI of Handbuch der Physik, Berlin 1928.
Translated from Matematicheskais teoriia Uprognosti, L. GTTI 1934.
Bibliography
[261] I. Herrera. "Trefftz Method". in progress, Boundary Element Methods, Vol. 3. Wiley, New York .
1983.
[262] O.C. Zienkiewicz. "The Generalized Finite Element Method and Electromagnetic Problems" .
COMPUMAG Conference. 1978.
[263] A.P. Zielinski and O.C. Zienkiewicz. "Generalized Finite Element Analysis with T-Complete
Boundary Solution Function". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 21. pp.
509-528. 1985.
[264] O.C. Zienkiewicz, D.W. Kelly, and P Bettess. "The Coupling of the Finite Element Method and
Boundary Solution Procedures". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 11. pp.
355-375. 1977.
[265] O.C. Zienkiewicz, D.W. Kelly, and P. Bettess. "Marriage a la mode - The Best of Both Worlds Finite
Element and Bpoundary Integrals". Energy Methods in Finite Element Analysis . John Wiley. New York.
1979.
[266] J. Jirousek and L. Guex. "The Hybrid-Trefftz Finite Element Model and its Application to Plate
Bending" . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 23. pp. 651-693. 1986.
[267] I.D. Mayergoyz, M.V.C. Chari, and A. Konrad. "Boundary Galerkin's Method for Three-Dimensional
Finite Element Electromagnetic Field Computation" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 19, No. 6. pp.
2333-2336. 1983.
[268] M.V.K. Chari. "Electromagnetic Field Computation of Open Boundary Problems by Semi-Analytic
Approach". IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 23, No. 5. pp. 3566-3568. 1987.
[269] M.V.K. Chari and G. Bedrosian. "Hybrid Harmonic/Finite element Method for Two-Dimensional
Open Boundary Problems" . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics . Vol. 23, No. 5. pp. 3572-3574. 1987.
[270] E.M. Arruda and M.C. Boyce. "A Three-dimensional Constitutive Model for the Large STretch
Behavior of Rubber Elastic Materials . Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. Vol. 41 2. pp. 389412. 1993.
[271] J.S. Bergstrom. "Constitutive Modeling of the Large Strain Time-dependent Behavior of
Elastomers" . Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. Vol. 45 5. pp. 931-954. 1998.
[272] M.W. Glass. "Chaparral - A library package for solving large enclosure radiation heat transfer
problems" . Sandia National Laboratories. Albuquerque, NM. 1995.
[273] A.R. Diaz and N. Kikucki. "Solutions to Shape and Topology Eigenvalue Optimization Problems
using a Homogenization Method". International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 35.
pp 1487-1502. 1992.
[274] P. Ladeveze and D. Leguillon. "Error estimation procedure in the finite element method and
applications" . SIAM Journal of Numerical Analysis . Vol. 20 3. pp. 483-509. 1983.
Bibliography
[275] J.L. Synge. The Hypercircle in Mathematical Physics . Cambridge University Press. 1957.
[276] M.F. Cohen and D.P. Greenberg. "The Hemi-Cube: A Radiosity Solution for Complex
Environments". Computer Graphics. Vol. 19, No. 3. pp. 31-40. 1985.
[277] M.L. Williams, R.F. Landel, and J.D. Ferry. "The Temperature Dependence of Relaxation
Mechanisms in Amorphous Polymers and Other Glass-forming Liquids" . Journal of the American Chemical
Society . Vol. 77. pp. 3701-3706. 1955.
[278] A. Huerta and W.K. Liu. "Viscous Flow with Large Free Surface Motion" . Computer Methods in
Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 69. pp. 277-324. 1988.
[279] W. Weaver and P.R. Johnston. Structural Dynamics by Finite Elements . pp. 413-415. Prentice-Hall.
1987.
[280] Y.Y. Zhu and S. Cescotto. "Transient Thermal and Thermomechanical Analysis by Mixed FEM" .
Computers and Structures. Vol. 53. pp. 275-304. 1994.
[281] J.U. Brackbill, D.B. Kothe, and C. Zemach. "A Continuum Method for Modeling Surface Tension" .
Journal of Computational Physics . Vol. 100. pp. 335-354 . 1992.
[282] D.B. Kothe and R.C. Mjolsness. "RIPPLE: A New Model for Incompressible Flows with Free
Surfaces" . AIAA Journal . Vol. 30. pp. 2694-2700. 1992.
[283] J.R. Richards, A.M. Lenhoff, and A.N. Beris. "Dynamic Breakup of Liquid-Liquid Jets". Physics of
Fluids. Vol. 8. pp. 2640-2655. 1994.
[284] G.P. Sasmal and J.I. Hochstein. "Marangoni Convection with a Curved and Deforming Free Surface
in a Cavity" . Transaction of ASME, Journal of Fluid Engineering . Vol. 116. pp. 577-582. 1994.
[285] G. Wang. "Finite Element Simulations of Gas-Liquid Flows with Surface Tension" . Presented at the
2000 International Mechanical Engineering Congress and Exposition. Orlando, FL. 11/2000.
[286] M. Gyimesi and D. Ostergaard. "Finite Element Based Reduced Order Modeling of Micro Electro
Mechanical Sytems MEMS". Presented at MSM 2000. San Diego, CA . 3/2000.
[287] D. Ostergaard, M. Gyimesi, Bachar Affour, Philippe Nachtergaele, and Stevan Stirkovich. "Efficient
Reduced Order Modeling for System Simulation of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems MEMS from FEM
Models" . Symposium on Design Test Integration and Packaging of MEMS/MOEMS. Paris, France. 5/2000.
[288] M. Gyimesi, Jian-She, Wang, and D. Ostergaard. "Capacitance Computation by Hybrid P-Element
and Trefftz Method". Presented at CEFC 2000, Milwaukee, WI 6/2000 and published in IEEE Trans. MAG,
Vol. 37, pp. 368083 9/2001.
[289] M. Gyimesi and D. Ostergaard. "Capacitance Computation by Hybrid P-Element and Trefftz
Method". Presented at MSM 2000. San Diego, CA . 3/2000.
Bibliography
[290] M. Gyimesi and D. Ostergaard. "Incremental Magnetic Inductance Computation" . ANSYS

Conference and Exhibition. Pittsburgh, PA. 1998.
[291] Andreas Hieke. "Tiny Devices, Big Problems: Computation of Capacitance in Microelectronic
Structures" . ANSYS Solutions. Vol. 2, No. 3. pp. 11-15. 2000.
[292] M.S. Gadala and J. Wang. "Simulation of Metal Forming Processes with Finite Element Methods" .
[293] R.M. McMeeking and J.R. Rice. "Finite Element Formulations for Problems of Large Elastic-Plastic
Deformation". International Journal of Solids and Structures. Vol. 121. pp. 601-616. 1975.
[294] M.A. Crisfield. Non-linear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Vol. 2, Advanced Topics.
John Wiley & Sons. 1997.
[295] R. W. Ogden. Nonlinear Elastic Deformations . Dover Publications, Inc.. 1984.
[296] P. Perzyna. Fundamental problems in viscoplasticity . Advances in Applied Mechanics . Vol. 9. pp.
313-377. Academic Press. New York. 1968.
[297] D. Peirce, C.F. Shih, and A. Needleman. A tangent modulus method for rate dependent solids .
Computers & Structures. Vol. 18. pp. 975888. 1984.
[298] D. Peirce and D.R.J. Owen. A model for large deformations of elasto-viscoplastic solids at finite
strains: computational issues, Finite Inelastic Deformations: Theory and applications, Springer-Verlag,
Berlin 1992.
[299] J.L. Volakis, A. Chatterjee, and C. Kempel L.. Finite Element Method for Electromagnetics:
Antennas, Microwave Circuits and Scattering Applications . IEEE Press. 1998.
[300] T. Itoh, G. Pelosi, and P.P. Silvester. Finite Element Software for Microwave Engineering . John
Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1996.
[301] L. Zhao and A.C. Cangellaris. "GT-PML: Generalized Theory of Perfectly Matched Layers and Its
Application to the Reflectionless Truncation of Finite-Difference Time-Domain Grids" . IEEE Trans. on
Microwave Theory and Techniques. Vol. 44. pp. 2555-2563.
[302] Alan George and Joseph W-H Liu. Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite Systems .
Prentice-Hall, Inc.. 1981.
[303] M. Abramowitz and I. A. Stegun. Pocketbook of Mathematical Functions, abridged version of the
Handbook of Mathematical Functions . Harry Deutsch, 1984.
[304] A. H-S Ang and W. H. Tang. Probability Concepts in Engineering Planning and Design. Volume 1 Basic Principles. John Wiley & Sons. 1975.
[305] A. H-S Ang and W. H. Tang. Probability Concepts in Engineering Planning and Design, D.. Volume
Bibliography
2 - Decision, Risk, and Reliability. John Wiley & Sons. 1990.

[306] G. E. P. Box. D. W. Behnken. Some New Three Level Designs for the Study of Quantitative
Variables. Vol. 2, No. 4. pp. 455-476. Technometrics. 1960.
[307] G. E. P. Box and D. R. Cox. An Analysis of Transformations . Journal of the Royal Statistical
Society . Series B, Vol. 26. pp. 211-252. 1964.
[308] J. M. Hammersley and D. C. Handscomb. Monte Carlo Methods, . John Wiley & Sons. New York.
1964.
[309] R.L. Iman and W. J. Conover. Small Sample Sensitivity Analysis Techniques for Computer Models,
with an Application to Risk Assessment . Communications in Statistics, Part A - Theory and Methods. Vol
A9, No. 17. pp. 1749-1842. 1980.
[310] D. Kececioglu. Reliability Engineering Handbook . Vol. 1. Prentice-Hall Inc.. Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey. 1991.
[311] P.-L. Liu and A. Der Kiureghian. Multivariate Distribution Models with Prescribed Marginals and
Covariances. Probabilistic Engineering Mechanics . Vol. 1, No. 2. pp. 105-112. 1986.
[312] D. C. Montgomery. Design and Analysis of Experiments. John Wiley & Sons. New York. 1991.
[313] R. C. Myers. Response Surface Methodology . Allyn and Bacon, Inc.. Boston. 1971.
[314] J. Neter, M. H. Kutner, C. J. Nachtsheim, and W. Wasserman. Applied Linear Statistical Models .
4th edition. McGraw-Hill. 1996.
[315] D. J. Sheskin. Handbook of Parametric and Nonparametric Statistical Procedures . CRC Press Inc..
Florida. 1997.
[316] D.A. Hancq, A.J. Walter, and J.L. Beuth. Development of an Object-Oriented Fatigue Tool.
Engineering with Computers . Vol. 16. pp. 131-144. 2000.
[317] David J. Benson and John O. Hallquist. A Single Surface Contact Algorithm for the Post-Buckling
Analysis of Shell Structures . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 78, No. 2.
1990.
[318] J.C. Simo and M.S. Rifai. A Class of Mixed Assumed Strain Methods and the Method of
Incompatible Modes. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 29. pp. 1595
1638 . 1990.
[319] J.C. Simo and F. Armero. Gometrically Non-linear Enhanced Strain Mixed Methods and the
Method of Incompatible Modes. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 33. pp.
14131449. 1992.
[320] J.C. Simo, F. Armero, and R.L. Taylor. Improved Versions of Assumed Enhanced Strain Tri-Linear
Elements for 3D Finite Deformation Problems . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engieering .
Bibliography
Vol. 10. pp. 359386. 1993.

[321] U. Andelfinger and E Ramm. EAS-Elements for Two-Dimensional, Three-Dimensional, Plate and
Shell Structures and Their Equivalence to HR-Elements. International Journal for Numerical Methods in
Engineering . Vol. 36. pp. 13111337. 1993.
[322] J.C. Nagtegaal and D.D. Fox. Using Assumed Enhanced Strain Elements for Large Compressive
Deformation. International Journal for Solids and Structures. Vol. 33. pp. 31513159. 1996.
[323] Jian S. Wang and Dale F. Ostergaard. Finite Element-Electric Circuit Coupled Simulation Method
for Piezoelectric Transducer . Proceedings of the IEEE Ultrasonics Symposium . Vol. 2. pp. 11051108.
1999.
[324] A.C. Pipkin. "Lectures in Viscoelasticity Theory" . Springer, New York. 1986.
[325] D.A. Drozdov. Finite elasticity and viscoelasticity: A course in the nonlinear mechanics of solids .
World Pub. Co.. Singapore. 1996.
[326] G.W. Scherer. Relaxation in glass and composites. John-Wiley & Sons. New York. 1986.
[327] J.C. Simo. "On fully three-dimensional finite strain viscoelastic damage model: Formulation and
computational aspects" . Comput. Meth. In Appl. Mech. Eng.. Vol. 60. pp. 153-173. 1987.
[328] G.A. Holzapfel. "On large strain viscoelasticity: continuum formulation and finite element
applications to elastomeric structures" . Int. J. Numer. Meth. Eng.. Vol. 39. pp. 3903-3926. 1996.
[329] M. Gyimesi, D. Ostergaard, and I. Avdeev. "Triangle Transducer for Micro Electro Mechanical
Systems MEMS Simulation in ANSYS Finite Element Program" . MSM. Puerto Rico. 2002.
[330] M. Gyimesi and D. Ostergaard. "A Transducer Finite Element for Dynamic Coupled ElectrostaticStructural Coupling Simulation of MEMS Devices" . MIT Conference. Cambridge, MA. 2001.
[331] I. Avdeev, M. Gyimesi, M. Lovell, and D. Onipede. "Beam Modeling for Simulation of Electro
Mechanical Transducers Using Strong Coupling Approach". Sixth US. National Congress on Computational
Mechanics. Dearborn, Michigan . 2001.
[332] W. F. Chen and D. J. Han. Plasticity for Structural Engineers . Springer-Verlag. New York. 1988.
[333] P. Guillaume. Derivees d'ordre superieur en conception optimale de forme. These de l'universite
Paul Sabatier de Toulouse. 1994.
[334] H. E. Hjelm. "Yield Surface for Gray Cast iron under Biaxial Stress" . Journal of Engineering
Materials and Technology. Vol. 116. pp. 148-154. 1994.
[335] J. Mehner, F. Bennini, and W. Dotzel. Computational Methods for Reduced Order Modeling of
Coupled Domain Simulations . pp. 260263. 11th International Conference on Solid-State Sensors and
Actutors Transducers 01. Munich, Germany. 2001.
Bibliography
[336] J. Mehner and F. Bennini. A Modal Decomposition Technique for Fast Harmonic and Transient
Simulations of MEMS. pp. 477484. International MEMS Workshop 2001 IMEMS. Singapore. 2001.
[337] J. J. Blech. On Isothermal Squeeze Films. Journal of Lubrication Technology. Vol.105. pp. 615620. 1983.
[338] Griffin, W. S., et al.. A Study of Squeeze-film Damping . Journal of Basic Engineering . pp. 451456. 1966.
[339] W. E. Langlois. Isothermal Squeeze Films. Quarterly Applied Mathematics. Vol. 20, No. 2. pp.
131-150. 1962.
[340] Mehner, J. E., et al.. Simulation of Gas Film Damping on Microstructures with Nontrivial
Geometries . Proc. of the MEMS Conference. Heidelberg, Germany. 1998.
[341] not used.
[342] T. Veijola. Equivalent Circuit Models for Micromechanical Inertial Sensors . ircuit Theory
Laboratory Report Series CT-39 . Helsinki University of Technology. 1999.
[343] F. Sharipov. Rarefied Gas Flow Through a Long Rectangular Channel . Journal Vac. Sci. Technol. .
A175. pp. 3062-3066. 1999.
[344] R. R. Craig. A Review of Time Domain and Frequency Domain Component Mode Synthesis
Methods . International Journal of Analytical and Experimental Modal Analysis . Vol. , No. 2. pp. 59-7.
1987.
[345] R. R. Craig and M. D. D. Bampton. Coupling of Substructures for Dynamic Analysis. AIAA
Journal . Vol. 12. pp. 1313-1319. 1968.
[346] M. Gyimesi, I. Avdeev, and D. Ostergaard. Finite Element Simulation of Micro Electro Mechanical
Systems MEMS by Strongly Coupled Electro Mechanical Transducers . IEEE Transactions on Magnetics .
Vol. 40, No. 2. pg. 557560. 2004.
[347] F., Auricchio, R. L., Taylor, and J. Lubliner. Shape-Memory Alloys: Macromodeling and Numerical
Simulations of the Superelastic Behavior. Computational Methods in Applied Mechanical Engineering .
Vol. 146. pp. 281312. 1997.
[348] T. Belytschko, W. K. Liu, and B. Moran. Nonlinear Finite Elements for Continua and Structures .
Computational Methods in Applied Mechanical Engineering . John Wiley and Sons. 2000.
[349] David C. Wilcox. Reassessment of the Scale-Determining Equation for Advanced Turbulence
Models . AIAA Journal . Vol. 26. pp. 12991310. 1988.
[350] F. R. Menter. Two-Equation Eddy-Viscosity Turbulence Models for Engineering Applications . AIAA
Journal . Vol. 32. pp. 15981605. 1994.
Bibliography
[351] J. Chung and G. M. Hulbert. A Time Integration Algorithm for Structural Dynamics with Improved
Numerical Dissipation: The Generalized- Method. Journal of Applied Mechanics . Vol. 60. pp. 371. 1993.
[352] H. M. Hilber, T. J. R. Hughes, and R. L. Taylor. Improved Numerical Dissipation for Time
Integration Algorithm in Structural Dynamics . Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics. Vol. 5.
pp. 283. 1977.
[353] W. L. Wood, M. Bossak, and O. C. Zienkiewicz. An Alpha Modification of Newmark Method.
International Journal of Numerical Method in Engineering . Vol.15. p1562. 1981.
[354] D.J.; Segalman, C.W.G.; Fulcher, G.M.; Reese, and R.V., Jr. Field. An Efficient Method for
Calculating RMS von Mises Stress in a Random Vibration Environment . pp. 117-123. Proceedings of the
16th International Modal Analysis Conference. Santa Barbara, CA. 1998.
[355] G.M., Reese, R.V. Field Jr., and D.J. Segalman. A Tutorial on Design Analysis Using von Mises
Stress in Random Vibration Environments. The Shock and Vibration Digest . Vol. 32, No. 6. pp. 466-474
. 2000.
[356] Alan J. Chapman. Heat Transfer. 4th Edition. Macmillan Publishing Company. 1984.
[357] J.H. Wilkinson and C. Reinsch. Linear Algebra. Handbook for Automatic Computation. Vol. II. pp.
418439. Springer-Verlag. New York, NY. 1971.
[358] L.D. Landau and E.M. Lifshitz. Electrodynamics of Continuous Media . Course of Theoretical
Physics . Vol. 8. 2nd Edition. Butterworth-Heinemann. Oxford. 1984.
[359] J. F. Nye. Physical Properties of Crystals: Their Representation by Tensors and Matrices . Clarendon
Press. Oxford. 1957.
[360] J.D. Beley, C. Broudiscou, P. Guillaume, M. Masmoudi, and F. Thevenon. Application de la
methode des derivees d'ordre eleve a l'optimisation des structures . Revue Europeenne des Elements
Finis. Vol. 5, No. 5-6. pp. 537-567. 1996.
[361] R. Michalowski. Z. Mroz. Associated and non-associated sliding rules in contact friction problems .
Archives of Mechanics. Vol. 30, No. 3. pp. 259-276. 1978.
[362] H.D. Nelson and J.M. McVaugh. The Dynamics of Rotor-Bearing Systems Using Finite Elements.
Journal of Engineering for Industry. 1976.
[363] X-P Xu and A. Needleman. Numerical simulations of fast crack growth in brittle solids . Journal of
the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. Vol. 42. pp. 1397-1434. 1994.
[364] D. Guo, F.L. Chu, and Z.C. Zheng. The Influence of Rotation on Vibration of a Thick Cylindrical
Shell. Journal of Sound and Vibration. Vol. 242 3. pp. 492. 2001.
[365] G. Alfano and M.A. Crisfield. Finite Element Interface Models for the Delamination Anaylsis of
Laminated Composites: Mechanical and Computational Issues . International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering . Vol. 50. pp. 1701-1736. 2001.
Bibliography
[366] A.L. Gurson. Continuum Theory of Ductile Rupture by Void Nucleation and Growth: Part I-Yield
Criterion and Flow Rules for Porous Ductile Media . Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology.
Vol. 1. pp. 2-15. 1977.
[367] A. Needleman and V. Tvergaard. An Analysis of Ductile Rupture in Notched Bars . Journal of
Mechanical Physics Solids. Vol. 32, No. 6. pp. 461-490. 1984.
[368] M. Geradin and D. Rixen. Mechanical Vibrations: Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics.
pp. 194. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.. 1997.
[369] K.J. Bathe and C. A. Almeida. A Simple and Effective Pipe Elbow Element Linear Analysis.
Journal of Applied Mechanics . Vol. 47, No. 1. pp. 93-100. 1980.
[370] A. M. Yan and R. J. Jospin. An Enhanced Pipe Elbow Element Application in Plastic Limit
Analysis of Pipe Structures . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 46. pp.
409-431. 1999.
[371] J.S. Bergstrom and M.C. Boyce. Constitutive Modeling of the Large Strain Time-Dependent
Behavior of Elastomers . Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. Vol. 46. pp. 931-954. 1998.
[372] J.S. Bergstrom and M.C. Boyce. Large Strain Time-Dependent Behavior of Filled Elastomers, .
Mechanics of Materials . Vol. 32. pp. 627-644. 2000.
[373] H. Dal and M. Kaliske. Bergstrom-Boyce Model for Nonlinear Finite Rubber Viscoelasticity:
Theoretical Aspects and Algorithmic Treatment for the FE Method. Computational Mechanics. Vol. 44.
pp. 809-823. 2009.
[374] A.K. Gupta. Response Spectrum Method In Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures . CRC
Press. 1992.
[375] NRC Regulatory Guide. Published by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Regulatory Guide
1.92, Revision 2. July 2006.
[376] T. A. Laursen and V. Chawla. Design of Energy Conserving Algorithms for Frictionless Dynamic
Contact Problems . International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering . Vol. 40. pp. 863886.
1997.
[377] F. Armero and E. Petcz. Formulation and Analysis of Conserving Algorithms for Dynamic
Contact/Impact problems . Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 158. pp. 269300. 1998..
[378] R.W. Ogden and D. G. Roxburgh. A Pseudo-Elastic Model for the Mullins Effect in Filled Rubber .
Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Series A (Mathematical and Physical Sciences) . Vol. 455 No.
1988. pp. 2861-2877. 1999.
[379] K., J. Bose, A. Hurtado, and . Modeling of Stress Softening in Filled Elastomers . Constitutive
Models for Rubber III Proceedings of the 3rd European Conference on Constitutive Models for Rubber
(ECCMR). pp. 223-230. Edited by J. C. Busfield and A. H. Muhr. Taylor and Francis. London. 2003.
Bibliography
[380] M. Geradin and N. Kill. A New Approach to Finite Element Modelling of Flexible Rotors,.
Engineering Computing . Vol. 1. March 1984.
[381] M. E. Gurtin. An Introduction to Continuum Mechanics . Academic Press. Orlando, Florida. 1981.
[382] M. A. Puso and T. A. Laursen. A Mortar Segment-to-Segment Contact Method for Large
Deformation Solid Mechanics. Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 193. pp.
601-629. 2004.
[383] M. A. Puso and T. A. Laursen. A Mortar Segment-to-Segment Frictional Contact Method for Large
Deformations. Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 193. pp. 4891-4913.
2004.
[384] S. Arndt, B. Svenson, and E. Klingbeil. Modellierung der Eigenspannungen an der Rispitze mit
einem Schdigungsmodell. Technische Mechanik. Vol. 4. pp. 323-332. 1997.
[385] J. Besson and C. Guillemer-Neel. An Extension of the Green and Gurson Models to Kinematic
Hardening. Mechanics of Materials . Vol. 35. pp. 1-18. 2003.
[386] I.S. Sandler, F.L. DiMaggio, and G.Y. Baladi. Generalized Cap Model for Geological Materials .
Journal of the Geotechnical Engineering Division . Vol. 102. pp. 683-699. 1976.
[387] D. Pelessone. A Modified Formulation of the Cap Model . Gulf Atomic Report GA-C19579,
prepared for the Defense Nuclear Agency under Contract DNA-001086-C-0277. January, 1989.
[388] L.E. Schwer and Y.D. Murray. A Three-Invariant Smooth Cap Model with Mixed Hardening.
International Journal for Numerical and Analytical methods in Geomechanics . Vol. 18. pp. 657-688.
1994.
[389] C.D. Foster, R.A. Regueiro, A.F. Fossum, and R.I. Borja. Implicit Numerical Integration of a
Three-Invariant, Isotropic/Kinematic Hardening Cap Plasticity Model for Geomaterials . Computer
Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering . Vol. 194. pp. 50-52, 5109-5138. 2005.
[390] Ruijie Liu, Guoyu Lin, and Grama Bhashyam. Transformation of the Sandler and Rubin
Nonsmooth Cap Model to the Pelessone Smooth Cap Model . ASCE Journal of Engineering Mechanics .
Vol. 136. pp. 680-685. 2010.
[391] WS Atkins PLC, . Shell New Wave. Engineering Software Report. No. ESR960611.
[392] L.A. O'Neill, E. Fakas, and M. Cassidy. "A Novel Application of Constrained New Wave Theory for
Floatover Deck Installations". Proc. OMAE04. Canada 2004.
[393] R. Pinna and M. Cassidy. "Dynamic Analysis of a Monopod Platform Using Constrained New Wave" .
Proc. OMAE04. Canada 2004.
[394] W.J. Pierson and L. Moskowitz. A Proposed Spectral Form of Fully Developed Wind Seas Based on
the Similarity Theory of S. A. Kitaigorodskii . Journal of Geophysical Research . Vol. 69. pp. 5181-5190.
Bibliography
1964.
[395] D.E. Hasselmann, M. Dunckel, and J.A. Ewing. Directional Wave Spectra Observed During
JONSWAP 1973 . Journal Physical Oceanography. Vol. 10. pp. 1264-1280. 1980.
[396] American Petroleum Institute, . Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing
Fixed Offshore Platforms Working Stress Design . API RP2A-WSD . Ed. 20. 1993.
Appendix A. Verification Test Case Input Listings
AppendixA.Verification Test Case Input Listings

Table of Contents
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_VMTXT.html[28/04/2013 07:18:27 p.m.]

A.117.
A.118.
A.119.
A.120.
A.121.
A.122.
A.123.
A.124.
A.125.
A.126.
A.127.
A.128.
A.129.
A.130.
A.131.
A.132.
A.133.
A.134.
A.135.
A.136.
A.137.
A.138.
A.139.
A.140.
A.141.
A.142.
A.143.
A.144.
A.145.
A.146.
A.147.
A.148.
A.149.
A.150.
A.151.
A.152.
A.153.
A.154.
A.155.
A.156.
A.157.
A.158.
A.159.
A.160.
A.161.
A.162.
A.163.
A.164.
A.165.
A.166.
A.167.
A.168.
A.169.
A.170.
A.171.
A.172.
A.173.
A.174.
A.175.
A.176.
A.177.
VM117
VM118
VM119
VM120
VM121
VM122
VM123
VM124
VM125
VM126
VM127
VM128
VM129
VM130
VM131
VM132
VM133
VM134
VM135
VM136
VM137
VM138
VM139
VM140
VM141
VM142
VM143
VM144
VM145
VM146
VM147
VM148
VM149
VM150
VM151
VM152
VM153
VM154
VM155
VM156
VM157
VM158
VM159
VM160
VM161
VM162
VM163
VM164
VM165
VM166
VM167
VM168
VM169
VM170
VM171
VM172
VM173
VM174
VM175
VM176
VM177
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
A.178.
A.179.
A.180.
A.181.
A.182.
A.183.
A.184.
A.185.
A.186.
A.187.
A.188.
A.189.
A.190.
A.191.
A.192.
A.193.
A.194.
A.195.
A.196.
A.197.
A.198.
A.199.
A.200.
A.201.
A.202.
A.203.
A.204.
A.205.
A.206.
A.207.
A.208.
A.209.
A.210.
A.211.
A.212.
A.213.
A.214.
A.215.
A.216.
A.217.
A.218.
A.219.
A.220.
A.221.
A.222.
A.223.
A.224.
A.225.
A.226.
A.227.
A.228.
A.229.
A.230.
A.231.
A.232.
A.233.
A.234.
A.235.
A.236.
A.237.
A.238.
VM178
VM179
VM180
VM181
VM182
VM183
VM184
VM185
VM186
VM187
VM188
VM189
VM190
VM191
VM192
VM193
VM194
VM195
VM196
VM197
VM198
VM199
VM200
VM201
VM202
VM203
VM204
VM205
VM206
VM207
VM208
VM209
VM210
VM211
VM212
VM213
VM214
VM215
VM216
VM217
VM218
VM219
VM220
VM221
VM222
VM223
VM224
VM225
VM226
VM227
VM228
VM229
VM230
VM231
VM232
VM233
VM234
VM235
VM236
VM237
VM238
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
A.239.
A.240.
A.241.
A.242.
A.243.
A.244.
A.245.
A.246.
A.247.
A.248.
A.249.
A.250.
A.251.
A.252.
A.253.
A.254.
A.255.
A.256.
A.257.
A.258.
A.259.
A.260.
A.261.
A.262.
A.263.
A.264.
A.265.
A.266.
A.267.
A.268.
A.269.
A.270.
A.271.
VM239
VM240
VM241
VM242
VM243
VM244
VM245
VM246
VM247
VM248
VM249
VM250
VM251
VM252
VM253
VM254
VM255
VM256
VM257
VM258
VM259
VM260
VM261
VM262
VM263
VM264
VM265
VM266
VM267
VM268
VM269
VM270
VM271
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
Listing
This appendix contains all of the input listings for the VM test cases documented in PartI:Verification
Test Case Descriptions.
VM1 Input Listing
VM1 Input Listing

/COM,ANSYS MEDIA REL. 130 (09/30/2010) REF. VERIF. MANUAL: REL. 130
/VERIFY,VM1
/PREP7
/TITLE, VM1, STATICALLY INDETERMINATE REACTION FORCE ANALYSIS
C***
STR. OF MATL., TIMOSHENKO, PART 1, 3RD ED., PAGE 26, PROB.10
ANTYPE,STATIC
! STATIC ANALYSIS
ET,1,LINK180
R,1,1
! CROSS SECTIONAL AREA (ARBITRARY) = 1
MP,EX,1,30E6
N,1
N,2,,4
N,3,,7
N,4,,10
E,1,2
! DEFINE ELEMENTS
EGEN,3,1,1
D,1,ALL,,,4,3
! BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND LOADING
F,2,FY,-500
F,3,FY,-1000
FINISH
/SOLU
OUTPR,BASIC,1
OUTPR,NLOAD,1
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
NSEL,S,LOC,Y,10
FSUM
*GET,REAC_1,FSUM,,ITEM,FY
NSEL,S,LOC,Y,0
FSUM
*GET,REAC_2,FSUM,,ITEM,FY
*DIM,LABEL,CHAR,2
*DIM,VALUE,,2,3
LABEL(1) = 'R1, lb','R2, lb '
*VFILL,VALUE(1,1),DATA,900.0,600.0
*VFILL,VALUE(1,2),DATA,ABS(REAC_1),ABS(REAC_2)
*VFILL,VALUE(1,3),DATA,ABS(REAC_1 / 900) ,ABS( REAC_2 / 600)
/OUT,vm1,vrt
/COM
/COM,------------------- VM1 RESULTS COMPARISON --------------------/COM,
/COM,
|
TARGET
|
ANSYS
|
RATIO
/COM,
*VWRITE,LABEL(1),VALUE(1,1),VALUE(1,2),VALUE(1,3)
(1X,A8,'
',F10.1,' ',F10.1,'
',1F5.3)
/COM,---------------------------------------------------------------/OUT
FINISH
*LIST,vm1,vrt
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_vm/Hlp_V_VM1TXT.html[28/04/2013 07:18:32 p.m.]
Chapter 1: About This Manual
Chapter1:About This Manual

Welcome to the Command Reference. This manual contains a complete dictionary of detailed ANSYS
command descriptions, arranged in alphabetical order for ease of access. It is the definitive reference for
correct command usage, providing comprehensive specifications for every argument of every ANSYS
command.
The Command Reference is intended to give you information on individual ANSYS commands. Although
this manual also contains lists of commands arranged by functional grouping, this manual is not intended
to be your primary source of procedural information -- look in the appropriate analysis guides for
introductory and procedural guidelines concerning when and where to use commands.
Command references given in the various analysis guides refer to the command descriptions given in
Command Dictionary of this manual. These descriptions are organized in dictionary form to allow you to
look up the commands conveniently. The alphabetical ordering of commands that begin with a star (*)
or a slash (/) ignores those symbols for ordering purposes.
Once you have reviewed a command in the Command Reference, you should also read the theoretical
description of the command as given in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications , if indicated.
The following Command Reference topics are available:
Conventions Used in this Manual
ANSYS Product Capabilities
Terminology
ANSYS Command Characteristics
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CH1.html[28/04/2013 07:19:17 p.m.]
Mechanical APDL Command Reference
Table of Contents
1. About This Manual
1.1. Conventions Used in this Manual
1.1.1. Product Codes
1.1.2. Applicable ANSYS Products
1.2. ANSYS Product Capabilities
1.3. Terminology
1.4. ANSYS Command Characteristics
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.4.5.
1.4.6.
1.4.7.
1.4.8.
Data Input
Free-Format Input
Nonrestrictive Data Input
Condensed Data Input
Units
Defaults
File Names
Star and Slash Commands
2. Command Groupings
2.3. GRAPHICS Commands
2.4. APDL Commands
2.5. PREP7 Commands
2.7. POST1 Commands
2.8. POST26 Commands
2.9. AUX2 Commands
2.10. AUX3 Commands
2.11. AUX12 Commands
2.12. AUX15 Commands
2.13. OPTIMIZATION Commands
2.14. VARIATIONAL TECHNOLOGY Commands
2.15. PROBABILISTIC Design Commands
2.16. DISPLAY Program Commands
2.17. REDUCED Order Modeling Commands
2.18. Menu-Inaccessible Commands
3. Command Dictionary
I. Connection Commands
~CAT5IN - Transfers a .CATPart file into the ANSYS program.
~CATIAIN - Transfers a CATIA model into the ANSYS program.
~PARAIN - Transfers a Parasolid file into the ANSYS program.
~PROEIN - Transfers a Pro/ENGINEER part into the ANSYS program.
~SATIN - Transfers a .SAT file into the ANSYS program.
~UGIN - Transfers a NX part into the ANSYS program.
II. A Commands
A - Defines an area by connecting keypoints.
AADD - Adds separate areas to create a single area.
AATT - Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed areas.
ABEXTRACT - Extracts the alpha-beta damping multipliers for Rayleigh damping.
*ABBR - Defines an abbreviation.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CmdTOC.html[28/04/2013 07:19:22 p.m.]
ABBRES - Reads abbreviations from a coded file.

ABBSAV - Writes the current abbreviation set to a coded file.
ABS - Forms the absolute value of a variable.
ACCAT - Concatenates multiple areas in preparation for mapped meshing.
ACCOPTION - Specifies GPU accelerator capability options.
ACEL - Specifies the linear acceleration of the global Cartesian reference frame for the analysis.
ACLEAR - Deletes nodes and area elements associated with selected areas.
ADAMS - Performs solutions and writes flexible body information to a modal neutral file
(Jobname.MNF) for use in an ADAMS analysis.
ADAPT - Adaptively meshes and solves a model.
ADD - Adds (sums) variables.
ADDAM - Specifies the acceleration spectrum computation constants for the analysis of shock
resistance of shipboard structures.
ADELE - Deletes unmeshed areas.
ADGL - Lists keypoints of an area that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
ADRAG - Generates areas by dragging a line pattern along a path.
AESIZE - Specifies the element size to be meshed onto areas.
AFILLT - Generates a fillet at the intersection of two areas.
AFLIST - Lists the current data in the database.
AFSURF - Generates surface elements overlaid on the surface of existing solid elements and
assigns the extra node as the closest fluid element node.
*AFUN - Specifies units for angular functions in parameter expressions.
AGEN - Generates additional areas from a pattern of areas.
AGLUE - Generates new areas by "gluing" areas.
AINA - Finds the intersection of areas.
AINP - Finds the pairwise intersection of areas.
AINV - Finds the intersection of an area with a volume.
AL - Generates an area bounded by previously defined lines.
ALIST - Lists the defined areas.
ALLSEL - Selects all entities with a single command.
ALPHAD - Defines the mass matrix multiplier for damping.
AMAP - Generates a 2-D mapped mesh based on specified area corners.
AMESH - Generates nodes and area elements within areas.
/AN3D - Specifies 3-D annotation functions
ANCNTR - Produces an animated sequence of a contoured deformed shape.
ANCUT - Produces an animated sequence of Q-slices.
ANCYC - Applies a traveling wave animation to graphics data in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
ANDATA - Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of results data.
ANDSCL - Produces an animated sequence of a deformed shape.
ANDYNA - Produces an animated sequence of contour values through substeps.
/ANFILE - Saves or resumes an animation sequence to or from a file.
ANFLOW - Produces an animated sequence of particle flow in a flowing fluid or a charged particle
traveling in an electric or magnetic field.
/ANGLE - Rotates the display about an axis.
ANHARM - Produces a time-transient animated sequence of time-harmonic results or complex
mode shapes.
ANIM - Displays graphics data in animated form.
ANISOS - Produces an animated sequence of an isosurface.
ANMODE - Produces an animated sequence of a mode shape.
ANMRES - Performs animation of results over multiple results files in an explicit dynamic structural
analysis or fluid flow analysis with remeshing.
/ANNOT - Activates graphics for annotating displays (GUI).
ANORM - Reorients area normals.
ANSOL - Specifies averaged nodal data to be stored from the results file in the solution coordinate
system.
ANSTOAQWA - Creates an AQWA-LINE input file from the current ANSYS model.
ANSTOASAS - Creates an ASAS input file from the current ANSYS model.
ANTIME - Produces a sequential contour animation over a range of time.
ANTYPE - Specifies the analysis type and restart status.
/ANUM - Specifies the annotation number, type, and hot spot (GUI).
AOFFST - Generates an area, offset from a given area.
AOVLAP - Overlaps areas.

APLOT - Displays the selected areas.
APPEND - Reads data from the results file and appends it to the database.
APTN - Partitions areas.
ARCLEN - Activates the arc-length method.
ARCTRM - Controls termination of the solution when the arc-length method is used.
AREAS - Specifies "Areas" as the subsequent status topic.
AREFINE - Refines the mesh around specified areas.
AREMESH - Generates an area in which to create a new mesh for rezoning.
AREVERSE - Reverses the normal of an area, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
AROTAT - Generates cylindrical areas by rotating a line pattern about an axis.
ARSCALE - Generates a scaled set of areas from a pattern of areas.
ARSYM - Generates areas from an area pattern by symmetry reflection.
ASBA - Subtracts areas from areas.
ASBL - Subtracts lines from areas.
ASBV - Subtracts volumes from areas.
ASBW - Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from areas (divides areas).
ASEL - Selects a subset of areas.
*ASK - Prompts the user to input a parameter value.
ASKIN - Generates an area by "skinning" a surface through guiding lines.
ASLL - Selects those areas containing the selected lines.
ASLV - Selects those areas contained in the selected volumes.
/ASSIGN - Reassigns a file name to an ANSYS file identifier.
ASUB - Generates an area using the shape of an existing area.
ASUM - Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected areas.
ATAN - Forms the arctangent of a complex variable.
ATRAN - Transfers a pattern of areas to another coordinate system.
ATYPE - Specifies "Analysis types" as the subsequent status topic.
/AUTO - Resets the focus and distance specifications to "automatically calculated."
AUTOTS - Specifies whether to use automatic time stepping or load stepping.
/AUX2 - Enters the binary file dumping processor.
/AUX3 - Enters the results file editing processor.
/AUX12 - Enters the radiation processor.
/AUX15 - Enters the IGES file transfer processor.
AVPRIN - Specifies how principal and vector sums are to be calculated.
AVRES - Specifies how results data will be averaged when PowerGraphics is enabled.
/AXLAB - Labels the X and Y axes on graph displays.
*AXPY - Performs the matrix operation M2= v*M1 + w*M2.
III. B Commands
/BATCH - Sets the program mode to "batch."
BCSOPTION - Sets memory option for the sparse solver.
BETAD - Defines the stiffness matrix multiplier for damping.
BF - Defines a nodal body force load.
BFA - Defines a body force load on an area.
BFADELE - Deletes body force loads on an area.
BFALIST - Lists the body force loads on an area.
BFCUM - Specifies that nodal body force loads are to be accumulated.
BFDELE - Deletes nodal body force loads.
BFE - Defines an element body force load.
BFECUM - Specifies whether to ignore subsequent element body force loads.
BFEDELE - Deletes element body force loads.
BFELIST - Lists the element body force loads.
BFESCAL - Scales element body force loads.
BFINT - Activates the body force interpolation operation.
BFK - Defines a body force load at a keypoint.
BFKDELE - Deletes body force loads at a keypoint.
BFKLIST - Lists the body force loads at keypoints.
BFL - Defines a body force load on a line.
BFLDELE - Deletes body force loads on a line.
BFLIST - Lists the body force loads on nodes.

BFLLIST - Lists the body force loads on a line.
BFSCALE - Scales body force loads at nodes.
BFTRAN - Transfers solid model body force loads to the finite element model.
BFUNIF - Assigns a uniform body force load to all nodes.
BFV - Defines a body force load on a volume.
BFVDELE - Deletes body force loads on a volume.
BFVLIST - Lists the body force loads on a volume.
BIOOPT - Specifies "Biot-Savart options" as the subsequent status topic.
BIOT - Calculates the Biot-Savart source magnetic field intensity.
BLC4 - Creates a rectangular area or block volume by corner points.
BLC5 - Creates a rectangular area or block volume by center and corner points.
BLOCK - Creates a block volume based on working plane coordinates.
BOOL - Specifies "Booleans" as the subsequent status topic.
BOPTN - Specifies Boolean operation options.
BSAX - Specifies the axial strain and axial force relationship for beam sections.
BSMD - Specifies mass density for a nonlinear general beam section.
BSM1 - Specifies the bending curvature and moment relationship in plane XZ for beam sections.
BSM2 - Specifies the bending curvature and moment relationship in plane XY for beam sections.
BSPLIN - Generates a single line from a spline fit to a series of keypoints.
BSS1 - Specifies the transverse shear strain and force relationship in plane XZ for beam sections.
BSS2 - Specifies the transverse shear strain and force relationship in plane XY for beam sections.
BSTE - Specifies a thermal expansion coefficient for a nonlinear general beam section.
BSTQ - Specifies the cross section twist and torque relationship for beam sections.
BTOL - Specifies the Boolean operation tolerances.
BUCOPT - Specifies buckling analysis options.
IV. C Commands
C*** - Places a comment in the output.
CALC - Specifies "Calculation settings" as the subsequent status topic.
CAMPBELL - Prepares the result file for a subsequent Campbell diagram of a prestressed
structure.
CBDOF - Activates cut boundary interpolation (for submodeling).
CBMD - Specifies preintegrated section mass matrix for composite-beam sections.
CBMX - Specifies preintegrated cross-section stiffness for composite beam sections.
CBTE - Specifies a thermal expansion coefficient for a composite beam section.
CBTMP - Specifies a temperature for composite-beam input.
CDOPT - Specifies format to be used for archiving geometry.
CDREAD - Reads a file of solid model and database information into the database.
CDWRITE - Writes geometry and load database items to a file.
CE - Defines a constraint equation relating degrees of freedom.
CECHECK - Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
CECMOD - Modifies the constant term of a constraint equation during solution.
CECYC - Generates the constraint equations for a cyclic symmetry analysis
CEDELE - Deletes constraint equations.
CEINTF - Generates constraint equations at an interface.
CELIST - Lists the constraint equations.
CENTER - Defines a node at the center of curvature of 2 or 3 nodes.
CEQN - Specifies "Constraint equations" as the subsequent status topic.
CERIG - Defines a rigid region.
CESGEN - Generates a set of constraint equations from existing sets.
CFACT - Defines complex scaling factors to be used with operations.
*CFCLOS - Closes the "command" file.
*CFOPEN - Opens a "command" file.
*CFWRITE - Writes an ANSYS command (or similar string) to a "command" file.
/CFORMAT - Controls the graphical display of alphanumeric character strings for parameters,
components, assemblies, and tables.
CGLOC - Specifies the origin location of the acceleration coordinate system.
CGOMGA - Specifies the rotational velocity of the global origin.
CHECK - Checks current database items for completeness.
CHKMSH - Checks area and volume entities for previous meshes.

CINT - Defines parameters associated with fracture parameter calculations
CIRCLE - Generates circular arc lines.
CISOL - Stores fracture parameter information in a variable.
/CLABEL - Specifies contour labeling.
/CLEAR - Clears the database.
CLOCAL - Defines a local coordinate system relative to the active coordinate system.
CLOG - Forms the common log of a variable
/CLOG - Copies the session log file to a named file.
CLRMSHLN - Clears meshed entities.
CM - Groups geometry items into a component.
CMACEL - Specifies the translational acceleration of an element component
/CMAP - Changes an existing or creates a new color mapping table.
CMATRIX - Performs electrostatic field solutions and calculates the self and mutual capacitances
between multiple conductors.
CMDELE - Deletes a component or assembly definition.
CMDOMEGA - Specifies the rotational acceleration of an element component about a user-defined
rotational axis.
CMEDIT - Edits an existing assembly.
CMGRP - Groups components and assemblies into an assembly.
CMLIST - Lists the contents of a component or assembly.
CMMOD - Modifies the specification of a component.
CMOMEGA - Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a user-defined
rotational axis.
CMPLOT - Plots the entities contained in a component or assembly.
CMROTATE - Specifies the rotational velocity of an element component about a user-defined
rotational axis
CMSEL - Selects a subset of components and assemblies.
CMSFILE - Specifies a list of component mode synthesis (CMS) results files for plotting results on
the assembly.
CMSOPT - Specifies component mode synthesis (CMS) analysis options.
CMWRITE - Writes components and assemblies to a file.
CNCHECK - Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
CNKMOD - Modifies contact element key options.
CNVTOL - Sets convergence values for nonlinear analyses.
/COLOR - Specifies the color mapping for various items.
/COM - Places a comment in the output.
*COMP - Compresses the columns of a matrix using a specified algorithm.
COMPRESS - Deletes all specified sets.
CON4 - Creates a conical volume anywhere on the working plane.
CONE - Creates a conical volume centered about the working plane origin.
/CONFIG - Assigns values to ANSYS configuration parameters.
CONJUG - Forms the complex conjugate of a variable.
/CONTOUR - Specifies the uniform contour values on stress displays.
/COPY - Copies a file.
CORIOLIS - Applies the Coriolis effect to a rotating structure.
COUPLE - Specifies "Node coupling" as the subsequent status topic.
COVAL - Defines PSD cospectral values.
CP - Defines (or modifies) a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPCYC - Couples the two side faces of a cyclically symmetric model for loadings that are the same
on every segment.
CPDELE - Deletes coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPINTF - Defines coupled degrees of freedom at an interface.
/CPLANE - Specifies the cutting plane for section and capped displays.
CPLGEN - Generates sets of coupled nodes from an existing set.
CPLIST - Lists the coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPMERGE - Merges different couple sets with duplicate degrees of freedom into one couple set.
CPNGEN - Defines, modifies, or adds to a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPSGEN - Generates sets of coupled nodes from existing sets.
CQC - Specifies the complete quadratic mode combination method.
*CREATE - Opens (creates) a macro file.
CRPLIM - Specifies the creep criterion for automatic time stepping.

CS - Defines a local coordinate system by three node locations.
CSCIR - Locates the singularity for non-Cartesian local coordinate systems.
CSDELE - Deletes local coordinate systems.
CSKP - Defines a local coordinate system by three keypoint locations.
CSLIST - Lists coordinate systems.
CSWPLA - Defines a local coordinate system at the origin of the working plane.
CSYS - Activates a previously defined coordinate system.
/CTYPE - Specifies the type of contour display.
CURR2D - Calculates current flow in a 2-D conductor.
CUTCONTROL - Controls time-step cutback during a nonlinear solution.
/CVAL - Specifies nonuniform contour values on stress displays.
CVAR - Computes covariance between two quantities.
/CWD - Changes the current working directory.
/CYCEXPAND - Graphically expands displacements, stresses and strains of a cyclically symmetric
model.
*CYCLE - Bypasses commands within a do-loop.
CYCLIC - Specifies a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCOPT - Specifies solution options for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCPHASE - Provides tools for determining minimum and maximum possible result values from
frequency couplets produced in a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYL4 - Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume anywhere on the working plane.
CYL5 - Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume by end points.
CYLIND - Creates a cylindrical volume centered about the working plane origin.
CZDEL - Edits or clears cohesive zone sections.
CZMESH - Create and mesh an interface area composed of cohesive zone elements.
V. D Commands
D - Defines degree-of-freedom constraints at nodes.
DA - Defines DOF constraints on areas.
DADELE - Deletes DOF constraints on an area.
DALIST - Lists the DOF constraints on an area.
DAMORPH - Move nodes in selected areas to conform to structural displacements.
DATA - Reads data records from a file into a variable.
DATADEF - Specifies "Directly defined data status" as the subsequent status topic.
DCGOMG - Specifies the rotational acceleration of the global origin.
DCUM - Specifies that DOF constraint values are to be accumulated.
DCVSWP - Performs a DC voltage sweep on a ROM element.
DDELE - Deletes degree-of-freedom constraints.
DDOPTION - Sets domain decomposer option for Distributed ANSYS.
DEACT - Specifies "Element birth and death" as the subsequent status topic.
DEFINE - Specifies "Data definition settings" as the subsequent status topic.
*DEL - Deletes a parameter or parameters (GUI).
DELETE - Specifies sets in the results file to be deleted before postprocessing.
/DELETE - Deletes a file.
DELTIM - Specifies the time step sizes to be used for this load step.
DEMORPH - Move nodes in selected elements to conform to structural displacements.
DERIV - Differentiates a variable.
DESIZE - Controls default element sizes.
DESOL - Defines or modifies solution results at a node of an element.
DETAB - Modifies element table results in the database.
/DEVDISP - Controls graphics device options.
/DEVICE - Controls graphics device options.
/DFLAB - Changes degree-of-freedom labels for user custom elements.
DIG - Digitizes nodes to a surface.
DIGIT - Specifies "Node digitizing" as the subsequent status topic.
*DIM - Defines an array parameter and its dimensions.
/DIRECTORY - Put the file names in the current directory into a string parameter array.
DISPLAY - Specifies "Display settings" as the subsequent status topic.
/DIST - Specifies the viewing distance for magnifications and perspective.
DJ - Specifies boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of a joint element.

DJDELE - Deletes boundary conditions on the components of relative motion of a joint element.
DJLIST - Lists boundary conditions applied to joint elements.
DK - Defines DOF constraints at keypoints.
DKDELE - Deletes DOF constraints at a keypoint.
DKLIST - Lists the DOF constraints at keypoints.
DL - Defines DOF constraints on lines.
DLDELE - Deletes DOF constraints on a line.
DLIST - Lists DOF constraints.
DLLIST - Lists DOF constraints on a line.
*DMAT - Creates a dense matrix.
DMOVE - Digitizes nodes on surfaces and along intersections.
DMPEXT - Extracts modal damping coefficients in a specified frequency range.
DMPRAT - Sets a constant damping ratio.
DNSOL - Defines or modifies solution results at a node.
*DO - Defines the beginning of a do-loop.
DOF - Adds degrees of freedom to the current DOF set.
DOFSEL - Selects a DOF label set for reference by other commands.
DOMEGA - Specifies the rotational acceleration of the structure.
*DOWHILE - Loops repeatedly through the next *ENDDO command.
DSCALE - Scales DOF constraint values.
/DSCALE - Sets the displacement multiplier for displacement displays.
DSET - Sets the scale and drawing plane orientation for a digitizing tablet.
DSPOPTION - Sets memory option for the distributed sparse solver.
DSUM - Specifies the double sum mode combination method.
DSURF - Defines the surface upon which digitized nodes lie.
DSYM - Specifies symmetry or antisymmetry degree-of-freedom constraints on nodes.
DSYS - Activates a display coordinate system for geometry listings and plots.
DTRAN - Transfers solid model DOF constraints to the finite element model.
DUMP - Dumps the contents of a binary file.
/DV3D - Sets 3-D device option modes.
DVAL - Defines values at enforced base.
DVMORPH - Move nodes in selected volumes to conform to structural displacements.
DYNOPT - Specifies "Dynamic analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
VI. E Commands
E - Defines an element by node connectivity.
EALIVE - Reactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
EDADAPT - Activates adaptive meshing in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDALE - Assigns mesh smoothing to explicit dynamic elements that use the ALE formulation.
EDASMP - Creates a part assembly to be used in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDBOUND - Defines a boundary plane for sliding or cyclic symmetry.
EDBX - Creates a box shaped volume to be used in a contact definition for explicit dynamics.
EDBVIS - Specifies global bulk viscosity coefficients for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCADAPT - Specifies adaptive meshing controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCGEN - Specifies contact parameters for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCLIST - Lists contact entity specifications in an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCMORE - Specifies additional contact parameters for a given contact definition in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
EDCNSTR - Defines various types of constraints for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCONTACT - Specifies contact surface controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCPU - Specifies CPU time limit for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCRB - Constrains two rigid bodies to act as one in an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCSC - Specifies whether to use subcycling in an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDCTS - Specifies mass scaling and scale factor of computed time step for an explicit dynamics
analysis.
EDCURVE - Specifies data curves for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDDAMP - Defines mass weighted (Alpha) or stiffness weighted (Beta) damping for an explicit
dynamics model.
EDDBL - Selects a numerical precision type of the explicit dynamics analysis.
EDDC - Deletes or deactivates/reactivates contact surface specifications in an explicit dynamic

analysis.
EDDRELAX - Activates initialization to a prescribed geometry or dynamic relaxation for the explicit
analysis.
EDDUMP - Specifies output frequency for the explicit dynamic restart file (d3dump).
EDELE - Deletes selected elements from the model.
EDENERGY - Specifies energy dissipation controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDFPLOT - Allows plotting of explicit dynamics forces and other load symbols.
EDGCALE - Defines global ALE controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
/EDGE - Displays only the "edges" of an object.
EDHGLS - Specifies the hourglass coefficient for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDHIST - Specifies time-history output for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDHTIME - Specifies the time-history output interval for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDINT - Specifies number of integration points for explicit shell and beam output.
EDIPART - Defines inertia for rigid parts in an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDIS - Specifies stress initialization in an explicit dynamic full restart analysis.
EDLCS - Defines a local coordinate system for use in explicit dynamics analysis.
EDLOAD - Specifies loads for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDMP - Defines material properties for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDNB - Defines a nonreflecting boundary in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDNDTSD - Allows smoothing of noisy data for explicit dynamics analyses and provides a
graphical representation of the data.
EDNROT - Applies a rotated coordinate nodal constraint in an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDOPT - Specifies the type of output for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDOUT - Specifies time-history output (ASCII format) for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDPART - Configures parts for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDPC - Selects and plots explicit dynamic contact entities.
EDPL - Plots a time dependent load curve in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDPVEL - Applies initial velocities to parts or part assemblies in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRC - Specifies rigid/deformable switch controls in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRD - Switches a part from deformable to rigid or from rigid to deformable in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDREAD - Reads explicit dynamics output into variables for time-history postprocessing.
EDRI - Defines inertia properties for a new rigid body that is created when a deformable part is
switched to rigid in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRST - Specifies the output interval for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDRUN - Specify LS-DYNA serial or parallel processing.
EDSHELL - Specifies shell computation controls for an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDSOLV - Specifies "explicit dynamics solution" as the subsequent status topic.
EDSP - Specifies small penetration checking for contact entities in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDSTART - Specifies status (new or restart) of an explicit dynamics analysis.
EDTERM - Specifies termination criteria for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDTP - Plots explicit elements based on their time step size.
EDVEL - Applies initial velocities to nodes or node components in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDWELD - Defines a massless spotweld or generalized weld for use in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDWRITE - Writes explicit dynamics input to an LS-DYNA input file.
/EFACET - Specifies the number of facets per element edge for PowerGraphics displays.
EGEN - Generates elements from an existing pattern.
*EIGEN - Performs a modal solution with unsymmetric or damping matrices.
EINTF - Defines two-node elements between coincident or offset nodes.
EKILL - Deactivates an element (for the birth and death capability).
ELBOW - Specifies degrees of freedom to be coupled for end release and applies section
constraints to elbow elements.
ELEM - Specifies "Elements" as the subsequent status topic.
ELIST - Lists the elements and their attributes.
*ELSE - Separates the final if-then-else block.
*ELSEIF - Separates an intermediate if-then-else block.
EMAGERR - Calculates the relative error in an electrostatic or electromagnetic field analysis.
EMATWRITE - Forces the writing of all the element matrices to File.EMAT.
EMF - Calculates the electromotive force (emf), or voltage drop along a predefined path.
EMFT - Summarizes electromagnetic forces and torques.

EMID - Adds or removes midside nodes.
EMIS - Specifies emissivity as a material property for the Radiation Matrix method.
EMODIF - Modifies a previously defined element.
EMORE - Adds more nodes to the just-defined element.
EMSYM - Specifies circular symmetry for electromagnetic sources.
EMTGEN - Generates a set of TRANS126 elements.
EMUNIT - Specifies the system of units for magnetic field problems.
EN - Defines an element by its number and node connectivity.
*END - Closes a macro file.
*ENDDO - Ends a do-loop and starts the looping action.
*ENDIF - Ends an if-then-else.
ENDRELEASE - Specifies degrees of freedom to be decoupled for end release.
ENERSOL - Specifies the total energies to be stored.
ENGEN - Generates elements from an existing pattern.
ENORM - Reorients shell element normals or line element node connectivity.
ENSYM - Generates elements by symmetry reflection.
/EOF - Exits the file being read.
EORIENT - Reorients solid element normals.
EPLOT - Produces an element display.
EQSLV - Specifies the type of equation solver.
ERASE - Explicitly erases the current display.
/ERASE - Specifies that the screen is to be erased before each display.
EREAD - Reads elements from a file.
EREFINE - Refines the mesh around specified elements.
EREINF - Generates reinforcing elements from selected existing (base) elements.
ERESX - Specifies extrapolation of integration point results.
ERNORM - Controls error estimation calculations.
ERRANG - Specifies the element range to be read from a file.
ESCHECK - Perform element shape checking for a selected element set.
ESEL - Selects a subset of elements.
/ESHAPE - Displays elements with shapes determined from the real constants or section
definition.
ESIZE - Specifies the default number of line divisions.
ESLA - Selects those elements associated with the selected areas.
ESLL - Selects those elements associated with the selected lines.
ESLN - Selects those elements attached to the selected nodes.
ESLV - Selects elements associated with the selected volumes.
ESOL - Specifies element data to be stored from the results file.
ESORT - Sorts the element table.
ESSOLV - Performs a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis.
ESTIF - Specifies the matrix multiplier for deactivated elements.
ESURF - Generates elements overlaid on the free faces of existing selected elements.
ESYM - Generates elements from a pattern by a symmetry reflection.
ESYS - Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.
ET - Defines a local element type from the element library.
ETABLE - Fills a table of element values for further processing.
ETCHG - Changes element types to their corresponding types.
ETCONTROL - Control the element technologies used in element formulation (for applicable
elements).
ETDELE - Deletes element types.
ETLIST - Lists currently defined element types.
ETYPE - Specifies "Element types" as the subsequent status topic.
EUSORT - Restores original order of the element table.
EWRITE - Writes elements to a file.
*EXIT - Exits a do-loop.
/EXIT - Stops the run and returns control to the system.
EXP - Forms the exponential of a variable.
EXPAND - Displays the results of a modal cyclic symmetry analysis.
/EXPAND - Allows the creation of a larger graphic display than represented by the actual finite
element analysis model.
EXPASS - Specifies an expansion pass of an analysis.

*EXPORT - Exports a matrix to a file in the specified format.
EXPROFILE - Exports ANSYS interface loads to a CFX Profile file.
EXPSOL - Specifies the solution to be expanded for reduced analyses.
EXTOPT - Controls options relating to the generation of volume elements from area elements.
EXTREM - Lists the extreme values for variables.
EXUNIT - Indicates units assumed for an interface load for ANSYS to CFX transfer.
VII. F Commands
F - Specifies force loads at nodes.
/FACET - Specifies the facet representation used to form solid model displays.
FATIGUE - Specifies "Fatigue data status" as the subsequent status topic.
FC - Provides failure criteria information and activates a data table to input temperature-dependent
stress and strain limits.
FCCHECK - Checks both the strain and stress input criteria for all materials.
FCDELE - Deletes previously defined failure criterion data for the given material.
FCLIST - To list what the failure criteria is that you have input.
FCUM - Specifies that force loads are to be accumulated.
FCTYP - Activates or removes failure-criteria types for postprocessing.
FDELE - Deletes force loads on nodes.
/FDELE - Deletes a binary file after it is used.
FE - Defines a set of fatigue event parameters.
FEBODY - Specifies "Body loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
FECONS - Specifies "Constraints on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FEFOR - Specifies "Forces on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FELIST - Lists the fatigue event parameters.
FESURF - Specifies "Surface loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
FILE - Specifies the data file where results are to be found.
FILEAUX2 - Specifies the binary file to be dumped.
FILEAUX3 - Specifies the results file to be edited.
FILEDISP - Specifies the file containing the graphics data.
FILL - Generates a line of nodes between two existing nodes.
FILLDATA - Fills a variable by a ramp function.
/FILNAME - Changes the Jobname for the analysis.
FINISH - Exits normally from a processor.
FIPLOT - Plots a FiberSIM model.
FITEM - Identifies items chosen by a picking operation (GUI).
FJ - Specify forces or moments on the components of the relative motion of a joint element.
FJDELE - Deletes forces (or moments) on the components of the relative motion of a joint
element.
FJLIST - Lists forces and moments applied on joint elements.
FK - Defines force loads at keypoints.
FKDELE - Deletes force loads at a keypoint.
FKLIST - Lists the forces at keypoints.
FL - Defines a set of fatigue location parameters.
FLDATA - Sets up a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLDATA1 - Controls which features of the solution algorithm are activated.
FLDATA2 - Sets iteration and output controls for steady state analyses.
FLDATA3 - Sets the convergence monitors for the degree of freedom set.
FLDATA4 - Sets controls for transient analyses based on transient time and convergence monitors
or sets time integration method.
FLDATA4A - Sets controls for transient analyses based on the number of time steps.
FLDATA5 - Sets output and storage controls.
FLDATA6 - Controls the output of the convergence monitor.
FLDATA7 - Specifies the type of fluid property.
FLDATA8 - Specifies the NOMI coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA9 - Specifies the COF1 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA12 - Sets the property update frequency flag.
FLDATA13 - Sets the property variation flag.

FLDATA14 - Specifies the reference temperature.
FLDATA15 - Specifies the reference pressure.
FLDATA16 - Specifies the bulk modulus parameter.
FLDATA17 - Specifies the specific heat ratio.
FLDATA18 - Selects the algebraic solver.
FLDATA19 - Specifies the number of TDMA sweeps.
FLDATA20 - Specifies the number of conjugate direction search vectors.
FLDATA20A - Specifies the amount of fill-in when preconditioning the coefficient matrix.
FLDATA20B - Specifies the number of fill-ins for the ILU preconditioner.
FLDATA21 - Specifies the convergence criterion for FLOTRAN algebraic solvers.
FLDATA22 - Specifies the maximum number of semi-direct iterations.
FLDATA23 - Specifies the solver minimum normalized rate of change.
FLDATA24 - Sets the turbulence model and the constants used in the Standard k- Model and the
Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
FLDATA24A - Sets constants for the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
FLDATA24B - Sets constants for the k- Turbulence Model due to Shih (NKE).
FLDATA24C - Sets constants for the Nonlinear Turbulence Model of Girimaji (GIR).
FLDATA24D - Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Turbulence Model (SZL).
FLDATA24E - Sets constants for the k- turbulence model.
FLDATA24F - Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport (SST)
turbulence model.
FLDATA24G - Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model.
FLDATA24H - Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model.
FLDATA25 - Sets solution and property relaxation factors.
FLDATA26 - Sets stability controls.
FLDATA27 - Controls dependent variable printing.
FLDATA28 - Specifies that variable results are to be replaced.
FLDATA29 - Re-initializes a results variable.
FLDATA30 - Controls the quadrature orders.
FLDATA31 - Specifies dependent variable caps.
FLDATA32 - Controls restart options.
FLDATA33 - Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term.
FLDATA34 - Sets modified inertial relaxation factors.
FLDATA35 - Specifies tolerances for the lower and upper bound of the volume fraction.
FLDATA36 - Specifies ambient reference values outside of the fluid for the volume of fluid (VOF)
method.
FLDATA37 - Specifies segregated solution or film coefficient algorithms.
FLDATA38 - Specifies the mass type for a fluid transient analysis.
FLDATA39 - Specifies remeshing parameters for transient fluid flow and fluid-solid interaction
analyses.
FLDATA40 - Controls activation of thermal stabilization near walls.
FLIST - Lists force loads on the nodes.
FLLIST - Lists the fatigue location parameters.
FLOCHECK - Sets up and runs a zero-iteration FLOTRAN analysis.
FLOTRAN - Specifies "FLOTRAN data settings" as the subsequent status topic.
FLREAD - Reads the residual file written by the FLOTRAN CFD option.
FLST - Specifies data required for a picking operation (GUI).
FLUXV - Calculates the flux passing through a closed contour.
FMAGBC - Applies force and torque boundary conditions to an element component.
FMAGSUM - Summarizes electromagnetic force calculations on element components.
/FOCUS - Specifies the focus point (center of the window).
FOR2D - Calculates magnetic forces on a body.
FORCE - Selects the element nodal force type for output.
FORM - Specifies the format of the file dump.
/FORMAT - Specifies format controls for tables.
FP - Defines the fatigue S vs. N and Sm vs. T tables.
FPLIST - Lists the property table stored for fatigue evaluation.
*FREE - Deletes a matrix or a solver object and frees its memory allocation.
FREQ - Defines the frequency points for the SV vs. FREQ tables.
FRQSCL - Turns on automatic scaling of the entire mass matrix and frequency range for modal
analyses using the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or Supernode mode extraction method.
FS - Stores fatigue stress components at a node.
FSCALE - Scales force load values in the database.
FSDELE - Deletes a stress condition for a fatigue location, event, and loading.
FSLIST - Lists the stresses stored for fatigue evaluation.
FSNODE - Calculates and stores the stress components at a node for fatigue.
FSPLOT - Displays a fatigue stress item for a fatigue location and event.
FSSECT - Calculates and stores total linearized stress components.
FSSPARM - Calculates reflection and transmission properties of a frequency selective surface.
FSUM - Sums the nodal force and moment contributions of elements.
FTCALC - Performs fatigue calculations for a particular node location.
FTRAN - Transfers solid model forces to the finite element model.
FTSIZE - Defines the fatigue data storage array.
FTWRITE - Writes all currently stored fatigue data on a file.
FVMESH - Generates nodes and tetrahedral volume elements from detached exterior area
elements (facets).
VIII. G Commands
GAP - Specifies "Reduced transient gap conditions" as the subsequent status topic.
GAPF - Defines the gap force data to be stored in a variable.
GAUGE - Gauges the problem domain for a magnetic edge-element formulation.
/GCMD - Controls the type of element or graph display used for the GPLOT command.
/GCOLUMN - Allows the user to apply a label to a specified curve.
GENOPT - Specifies "General options" as the subsequent status topic.
GEOM - Defines the geometry specifications for the radiation matrix calculation.
GEOMETRY - Specifies "Geometry" as the subsequent status topic.
*GET - Retrieves a value and stores it as a scalar parameter or part of an array parameter.
/GFILE - Specifies the pixel resolution on Z-buffered graphics files.
/GFORMAT - Specifies the format for the graphical display of numbers.
/GLINE - Specifies the element outline style.
/GMARKER - Specifies the curve marking style.
GMATRIX - Performs electric field solutions and calculates the self and mutual conductance
between multiple conductors.
GMFACE - Specifies the facet representation used to form solid models.
*GO - Causes a specified line on the input file to be read next.
/GO - Reactivates suppressed printout.
/GOLIST - Reactivates the suppressed data input listing.
/GOPR - Reactivates suppressed printout.
GP - Defines a gap condition for transient analyses.
GPDELE - Deletes gap conditions.
GPLIST - Lists the gap conditions.
GPLOT - Controls general plotting.
/GRAPHICS - Defines the type of graphics display.
/GRESUME - Sets graphics settings to the settings on a file.
/GRID - Selects the type of grid on graph displays.
/GROPT - Sets various line graph display options.
GRP - Specifies the grouping mode combination method.
/GRTYP - Selects single or multiple Y-axes graph displays.
/GSAVE - Saves graphics settings to a file for later use.
GSBDATA - Specifies the constraints or applies the load at the ending point for generalized plane
strain option.
GSGDATA - Specifies the reference point and defines the geometry in the fiber direction for the
generalized plane strain element option.
GSLIST - When using generalized plane strain, lists the input data or solutions.
GSSOL - Specifies which results to store from the results file when using generalized plane strain.
/GST - Turns Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) on or off.
GSUM - Calculates and prints geometry items.
/GTHK - Sets line thicknesses for graph lines.
/GTYPE - Controls the entities that the GPLOT command displays.

IX. H Commands
HARFRQ - Defines the frequency range in the harmonic response analysis.
/HBC - Determines how boundary condition symbols are displayed in a display window.
HBMAT - Writes an assembled global matrix in Harwell-Boeing format.
/HEADER - Sets page and table heading print controls.
HELP - Displays help information on ANSYS commands and element types.
HELPDISP - Displays help information on DISPLAY program commands.
HEMIOPT - Specifies options for Hemicube view factor calculation.
HFADP - Turns a high-frequency adaptive error calculation on or off.
HFANG - Defines or displays spatial angles of a spherical radiation surface for antenna parameter
calculations.
HFARRAY - Defines phased array antenna characteristics.
HFDEEM - Calibrates S-parameter phase shift.
HFEIGOPT - Specifies high frequency electromagnetic modal analysis options.
HFEREFINE - Automatically refines high-frequency tetrahedral elements (HF119) or lists highfrequency brick elements (HF120) with the largest error.
HFMODPRT - Calculates electromagnetic field distribution for a modal port.
HFPA - Specifies a radiation scan angle for a phased array antenna analysis.
HFPCSWP - Calculates propagating constants and characteristic impedance of a transmission line
or waveguide over a frequency range.
HFPOWER - Calculates power terms of a multi-port network.
HFPORT - Specifies input data for waveguide, plane wave, lumped gap, modal, and modal lumped
gap ports.
HFSCAT - Specifies a high-frequency scattering analysis.
HFSYM - Indicates the presence of symmetry planes for the computation of high-frequency
electromagnetic fields in the near and far field domains (beyond the finite element region).
HMAGSOLV - Specifies 2-D or axisymmetric harmonic magnetic solution options and initiates the
solution.
HPGL - Specifies various HP options.
HPTCREATE - Defines a hard point.
HPTDELETE - Deletes selected hardpoints.
HRCPLX - Computes and stores in the database the time-harmonic solution at a prescribed phase
angle.
HREXP - Specifies the phase angle for the harmonic analysis expansion pass.
HROPT - Specifies harmonic analysis options.
HROUT - Specifies the harmonic analysis output options.
X. I Commands
IC - Specifies initial conditions at nodes.
ICDELE - Deletes initial conditions at nodes.
ICE - Specifies initial conditions on elements.
ICEDELE - Deletes initial conditions on elements.
ICELIST - Lists initial conditions on elements.
ICLIST - Lists the initial conditions.
/ICLWID - Scales the line width of circuit builder icons.
/ICSCALE - Scales the icon size for elements supported in the circuit builder.
ICVFRC - Sets the initial volume fraction field for a geometry.
*IF - Conditionally causes commands to be read.
IGESIN - Transfers IGES data from a file into ANSYS.
IGESOUT - Writes solid model data to a file in IGES Version 5.1 format.
/IMAGE - Allows graphics data to be captured and saved.
IMAGIN - Forms an imaginary variable from a complex variable.
IMESH - Generates nodes and interface elements along lines or areas.
IMMED - Allows immediate display of a model as it is generated.
IMPD - Calculates the impedance of a conductor at a reference plane.
INISTATE - Defines initial state data and parameters.
/INPUT - Switches the input file for the commands that follow.
/INQUIRE - Returns system information to a parameter.

INRES - Identifies the data to be retrieved from the results file.
INRTIA - Specifies Inertial loads as the subsequent status topic.
INT1 - Integrates a variable.
INTSRF - Integrates nodal results on an exterior surface.
IOPTN - Controls options relating to importing a model.
IRLF - Specifies that inertia relief calculations are to be performed.
IRLIST - Prints inertia relief summary table.
*ITENGINE - Performs a solution using an iterative solver.
XI. J Commands
JPEG - Provides JPEG file export for ANSYS displays.
JSOL - Specifies result items to be stored for the joint element.
XII. K Commands
K - Defines a keypoint.
KATT - Associates attributes with the selected, unmeshed keypoints.
KBC - Specifies stepped or ramped loading within a load step.
KBETW - Creates a keypoint between two existing keypoints.
KCALC - Calculates stress intensity factors in fracture mechanics analyses.
KCENTER - Creates a keypoint at the center of a circular arc defined by three locations.
KCLEAR - Deletes nodes and point elements associated with selected keypoints.
KDELE - Deletes unmeshed keypoints.
KDIST - Calculates and lists the distance between two keypoints.
KEEP - Stores POST26 definitions and data during active session.
KESIZE - Specifies the edge lengths of the elements nearest a keypoint.
KEYOPT - Sets element key options.
KEYPTS - Specifies "Keypoints" as the subsequent status topic.
KEYW - Sets a keyword used by the GUI for context filtering (GUI).
KFILL - Generates keypoints between two keypoints.
KGEN - Generates additional keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
KL - Generates a keypoint at a specified location on an existing line.
KLIST - Lists the defined keypoints or hard points.
KMESH - Generates nodes and point elements at keypoints.
KMODIF - Modifies an existing keypoint.
KMOVE - Calculates and moves a keypoint to an intersection.
KNODE - Defines a keypoint at an existing node location.
KPLOT - Displays the selected keypoints.
KPSCALE - Generates a scaled set of (meshed) keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
KREFINE - Refines the mesh around specified keypoints.
KSCALE - Generates a scaled pattern of keypoints from a given keypoint pattern.
KSCON - Specifies a keypoint about which an area mesh will be skewed.
KSEL - Selects a subset of keypoints or hard points.
KSLL - Selects those keypoints contained in the selected lines.
KSLN - Selects those keypoints associated with the selected nodes.
KSUM - Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected keypoints.
KSYMM - Generates a reflected set of keypoints.
KTRAN - Transfers a pattern of keypoints to another coordinate system.
KUSE - Specifies whether or not to reuse the factorized matrix.
KWPAVE - Moves the working plane origin to the average location of keypoints.
KWPLAN - Defines the working plane using three keypoints.
XIII. L Commands
L - Defines a line between two keypoints.
L2ANG - Generates a line at an angle with two existing lines.
L2TAN - Generates a line tangent to two lines.
LANG - Generates a straight line at an angle with a line.
LARC - Defines a circular arc.
/LARC - Creates annotation arcs (GUI).

LAREA - Generates the shortest line between two keypoints on an area.
LARGE - Finds the largest (the envelope) of three variables.
LATT - Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed lines.
LAYER - Specifies the element layer for which data are to be processed.
LAYERP26 - Specifies the element layer for which data are to be stored.
LAYLIST - Lists real constants material properties for layered elements.
LAYPLOT - Displays the layer stacking sequence for layered elements.
LCABS - Specifies absolute values for load case operations.
LCASE - Reads a load case into the database.
LCCALC - Specifies "Load case settings" as the subsequent status topic.
LCCAT - Concatenates multiple lines into one line for mapped meshing.
LCDEF - Creates a load case from a set of results on a results file.
LCFACT - Defines scale factors for load case operations.
LCFILE - Creates a load case from an existing load case file.
LCLEAR - Deletes nodes and line elements associated with selected lines.
LCOMB - Combines adjacent lines into one line.
LCOPER - Performs load case operations.
LCSEL - Selects a subset of load cases.
LCSL - Divides intersecting lines at their point(s) of intersection.
LCSUM - Specifies whether to process non-summable items in load case operations.
LCWRITE - Creates a load case by writing results to a load case file.
LCZERO - Zeroes the results portion of the database.
LDELE - Deletes unmeshed lines.
LDIV - Divides a single line into two or more lines.
LDRAG - Generates lines by sweeping a keypoint pattern along path.
LDREAD - Reads results from the results file and applies them as loads.
LESIZE - Specifies the divisions and spacing ratio on unmeshed lines.
LEXTND - Extends a line at one end by using its slope.
LFILLT - Generates a fillet line between two intersecting lines.
LFSURF - Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing solid elements and assigns
the extra node as the closest fluid element node.
LGEN - Generates additional lines from a pattern of lines.
LGLUE - Generates new lines by "gluing" lines.
LGWRITE - Writes the database command log to a file.
/LIGHT - Specifies the light direction for the display window.
LINA - Finds the intersection of a line with an area.
LINE - Specifies "Lines" as the subsequent status topic.
/LINE - Creates annotation lines (GUI).
LINES - Specifies the length of a printed page.
LINL - Finds the common intersection of lines.
LINP - Finds the pairwise intersection of lines.
LINV - Finds the intersection of a line with a volume.
LIST - Lists out the sets in the results file.
*LIST - Displays the contents of an external, coded file.
LLIST - Lists the defined lines.
LMATRIX - Calculates an inductance matrix and the total flux linkage for an N-winding coil
system.
LMESH - Generates nodes and line elements along lines.
LNSRCH - Activates a line search to be used with Newton-Raphson.
LOCAL - Defines a local coordinate system by a location and orientation.
LOVLAP - Overlaps lines.
LPLOT - Displays the selected lines.
LPRT - Defines impedance and calibration lines for excitation eigenfield.
LPTN - Partitions lines.
LREFINE - Refines the mesh around specified lines.
LREVERSE - Reverses the normal of a line, regardless of its connectivity or mesh status.
LROTAT - Generates circular lines by rotating a keypoint pattern about an axis.
LSBA - Subtracts areas from lines.
*LSBAC - Performs the solve (forward/backward substitution) of a factorized linear system.
LSBL - Subtracts lines from lines.
LSBV - Subtracts volumes from lines.

LSBW - Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from lines (divides lines).
LSCLEAR - Clears loads and load step options from the database.
LSDELE - Deletes load step files.
LSEL - Selects a subset of lines.
*LSENGINE - Creates a linear solver engine.
*LSFACTOR - Performs the numerical factorization of a linear solver system.
LSLA - Selects those lines contained in the selected areas.
LSLK - Selects those lines containing the selected keypoints.
LSOPER - Specifies "Load step operations" as the subsequent status topic.
/LSPEC - Specifies annotation line attributes (GUI).
LSREAD - Reads load and load step option data into the database.
LSSCALE - Generates a scaled set of lines from a pattern of lines.
LSSOLVE - Reads and solves multiple load steps.
LSTR - Defines a straight line irrespective of the active coordinate system.
LSUM - Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected lines.
LSWRITE - Writes load and load step option data to a file.
/LSYMBOL - Creates annotation symbols (GUI).
LSYMM - Generates lines from a line pattern by symmetry reflection.
LTAN - Generates a line at the end of, and tangent to, an existing line.
LTRAN - Transfers a pattern of lines to another coordinate system.
LUMPM - Specifies a lumped mass matrix formulation.
LVSCALE - Scales the load vector for mode superposition analyses.
LWPLAN - Defines the working plane normal to a location on a line.
XIV. M Commands
M - Defines master degrees of freedom for reduced and superelement generation analyses.
MADAPT - Adaptively meshes and solves an edge-based model.
MAGOPT - Specifies options for a 3-D magnetostatic field analysis.
MAGSOLV - Specifies magnetic solution options and initiates the solution.
/MAIL - Mails file to the specifed address.
MAPSOLVE - Maps solved node and element solutions from an original mesh to a new mesh.
MASTER - Specifies "Master DOF" as the subsequent status topic.
MAT - Sets the element material attribute pointer.
MATER - Specifies "Material properties" as the subsequent status topic.
MCHECK - Checks mesh connectivity.
MDAMP - Defines the damping ratios as a function of mode.
MDELE - Deletes master degrees of freedom.
MDPLOT - Plots frequency-dependent modal damping coefficients calculated by DMPEXT.
MEMM - Allows the current session to keep allocated memory
/MENU - Activates the Graphical User Interface (GUI).
MESHING - Specifies "Meshing" as the subsequent status topic.
MFANALYSIS - Turns an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis on or off.
MFBUCKET - Turns a bucket search on or off.
MFCALC - Specifies a calculation frequency for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFCI - Sets the control parameters used by the conservative (CPP) interpolation scheme.
MFCLEAR - Deletes ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis settings.
MFCMMAND - Captures field solution options in a command file.
MFCONV - Sets convergence values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFDTIME - Sets time step sizes for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFELEM - Defines a field by grouping element types.
MFEM - Add more element types to a previously defined field number.
MFEXTER - Defines external fields for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFFNAME - Specifies a file name for a field in an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFFR - Setup Multi-Field relaxation factors for field solutions.
MFIMPORT - Imports a new field into a current ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFINTER - Specifies the interface load transfer interpolation option for an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFITER - Sets the number of stagger iterations for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFLCOMM - Defines a load transfer for code coupling analyses.
MFLIST - Lists the settings for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.

MFMAP - Calculates, saves, resumes, or deletes mapping data in an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
MFORDER - Specifies field solution order for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFOUTPUT - Specifies results file output frequency for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
*MFOURI - Calculates the coefficients for, or evaluates, a Fourier series.
MFPSIMUL - Sets up a field solver group to simultaneously process with code coupling analyses.
MFRC - Controls file writing for multiframe restarts for the ANSYS Multi-field solver.
MFRELAX - Sets relaxation values for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFRSTART - Specifies restart status for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFSORDER - Sets up the solution sequence of simultaneous field solver groups for code coupling
analyses.
MFSURFACE - Defines a surface load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFTIME - Sets end time for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFTOL - Turns normal distance checking on for surface mapping in an ANSYS Multi-field solver
analysis.
*MFUN - Copies or transposes an array parameter matrix.
MFVOLUME - Defines a volume load transfer for an ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
MFWRITE - Writes an ANSYS master input file for MFX multiple code coupling.
MGEN - Generates additional MDOF from a previously defined set.
MIDTOL - Sets midstep residual criterion values for structural transient analyses.
/MKDIR - Creates a directory.
MLIST - Lists the MDOF of freedom.
MMASS - Specifies the missing mass response calculation.
MMF - Calculates the magnetomotive force along a path.
MODCONT - Specify additional modal analysis options.
MODE - Specifies the harmonic loading term for this load step.
MODIFY - Changes the listed values of the data in a set.
MODMSH - Controls the relationship of the solid model and the FE model.
MODOPT - Specifies modal analysis options.
MONITOR - Controls contents of three variable fields in nonlinear solution monitor file.
*MOPER - Performs matrix operations on array parameter matrices.
MOPT - Specifies meshing options.
MORPH - Specifies morphing and remeshing controls.
MOVE - Calculates and moves a node to an intersection.
MP - Defines a linear material property as a constant or a function of temperature.
MPAMOD - Modifies temperature-dependent secant coefficients of thermal expansion.
MPCHG - Changes the material number attribute of an element.
MPCOPY - Copies linear material model data from one material reference number to another.
MPDATA - Defines property data to be associated with the temperature table.
MPDELE - Deletes linear material properties.
MPDRES - Reassembles existing material data with the temperature table.
/MPLIB - Sets the default material library read and write paths.
MPLIST - Lists linear material properties.
MPPLOT - Plots linear material properties as a function of temperature.
MPREAD - Reads a file containing material properties.
MPRINT - Specifies that radiation matrices are to be printed.
MPTEMP - Defines a temperature table for material properties.
MPTGEN - Adds temperatures to the temperature table by generation.
MPTRES - Restores a temperature table previously defined.
MPWRITE - Writes linear material properties in the database to a file (if the LIB option is not
specified) or writes both linear and nonlinear material properties (if LIB is specified) from the
database to a file.
/MREP - Enables you to reissue the graphics command macro "name" during a replot or zoom
operation.
MSADV - Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term in a species transport equation.
MSAVE - Sets the solver memory saving option. This option only applies to the PCG solver.
MSCAP - Activates and controls mass fraction capping for a species.
MSDATA - Defines multiple species data applicable to all species.
*MSG - Writes an output message via the ANSYS message subroutine.
MSHAPE - For elements that support multiple shapes, specifies the element shape to be used for
meshing.
MSHCOPY - Simplifies the generation of meshes that have matching node element patterns on
two different line groups (in 2-D) or area groups (3-D).
MSHKEY - Specifies whether free meshing or mapped meshing should be used to mesh a model.
MSHMID - Specifies placement of midside nodes.
MSHPATTERN - Specifies pattern to be used for mapped triangle meshing.
MSMASS - Specifies the mass type for a transient species analysis.
MSMETH - Specifies the method of solution of the species transport equations.
MSMIR - Sets modified inertial relaxation factors for multiple species.
MSNOMF - Specifies the initial value of nominal mass fraction for a species.
MSPROP - Defines the fluid properties of a species.
MSQUAD - Specifies the quadrature order for multiple species elements.
MSRELAX - Specifies relaxation factors for a multiple species transport analysis.
MSSOLU - Specifies solution options for multiple species transport.
MSSPEC - Specifies the name, molecular weight, and Schmidt number of a species.
/MSTART - Controls the initial GUI components.
MSTERM - Sets the convergence monitors for species.
MSTOLE - Adds two extra nodes from FLUID116 elements to SURF151 or SURF152 elements for
convection analyses.
MSVARY - Allows species properties to vary between global iterations.
*MULT - Performs the matrix multiplication M3 = M1(T1)*M2(T2).
*MWRITE - Writes a matrix to a file in a formatted sequence.
MXPAND - Specifies the number of modes to expand and write for a modal or buckling analysis.
XV. N Commands
N - Defines a node.
NANG - Rotates a nodal coordinate system by direction cosines.
NAXIS - Generates nodes for general axisymmetric element sections.
NCNV - Sets the key to terminate an analysis.
NDELE - Deletes nodes.
NDIST - Calculates and lists the distance between two nodes.
NDSURF - Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing elements and assigns the
extra node as the closest fluid element node.
NEQIT - Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations for nonlinear analyses.
/NERR - Limits the number of warning and error messages displayed.
NFORCE - Sums the nodal forces and moments of elements attached to nodes.
NGEN - Generates additional nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NKPT - Defines a node at an existing keypoint location.
NLDIAG - Sets nonlinear diagnostics functionality.
NLDPOST - Gets element component information from nonlinear diagnostic files.
NLGEOM - Includes large-deflection effects in a static or full transient analysis.
NLHIST - Specify result items to track during solution.
NLIST - Lists nodes.
NLOG - Forms the natural log of a variable.
NLOPT - Specifies "Nonlinear analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
NMODIF - Modifies an existing node.
NOCOLOR - Removes color from graphics displays.
NODES - Specifies "Nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
/NOERASE - Prevents the screen erase between displays.
/NOLIST - Suppresses the data input listing.
NOOFFSET - Prevents the CDREAD command from offsetting specified data items
NOORDER - Re-establishes the original element ordering.
/NOPR - Suppresses the expanded interpreted input data listing.
NORA - Rotates nodal coordinate systems to surface normal
NORL - Rotates nodal coordinate systems perpendicular to line normal
/NORMAL - Allows displaying area elements by top or bottom faces.
NPLOT - Displays nodes.
NPRINT - Defines which time points stored are to be listed.
NREAD - Reads nodes from a file.
NREFINE - Refines the mesh around specified nodes.
NRLSUM - Specifies the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) sum mode combination method.
*NRM - Computes the norm of the specified matrix or vector.
NROPT - Specifies the Newton-Raphson options in a static or full transient analysis.
NROTAT - Rotates nodal coordinate systems into the active system.
NRRANG - Specifies the range of nodes to be read from the node file.
NSCALE - Generates a scaled set of nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NSEL - Selects a subset of nodes.
NSLA - Selects those nodes associated with the selected areas.
NSLE - Selects those nodes attached to the selected elements.
NSLK - Selects those nodes associated with the selected keypoints.
NSLL - Selects those nodes associated with the selected lines.
NSLV - Selects those nodes associated with the selected volumes.
NSMOOTH - Smooths selected nodes among selected elements.
NSOL - Specifies nodal data to be stored from the results file.
NSORT - Sorts nodal data.
NSTORE - Defines which time points are to be stored.
NSUBST - Specifies the number of substeps to be taken this load step.
NSVR - Defines the number of variables for user-programmable element options.
NSYM - Generates a reflected set of nodes.
/NUMBER - Specifies whether numbers, colors, or both are used for displays.
NUMCMP - Compresses the numbering of defined items.
NUMEXP - Specifies solutions to be expanded from reduced analyses.
NUMMRG - Merges coincident or equivalently defined items.
NUMOFF - Adds a number offset to defined items.
NUMSTR - Establishes starting numbers for automatically numbered items.
NUMVAR - Specifies the number of variables allowed in POST26.
NUSORT - Restores original order for nodal data.
NWPAVE - Moves the working plane origin to the average location of nodes.
NWPLAN - Defines the working plane using three nodes.
NWRITE - Writes nodes to a file.
XVI. O Commands
OCDATA - Defines an ocean environment using non-table data.
OCDELETE - Deletes ocean information from the ANSYS database.
OCLIST - Summarizes all currently defined ocean environments.
OCTABLE - Defines an ocean environment using table data.
OCTYPE - Specifies the type of ocean environment data to follow.
OMEGA - Specifies the rotational velocity of the structure.
OPADD - Forms a set of optimization parameters by adding two sets.
OPANL - Defines the analysis file to be used for optimization looping.
OPCLR - Clears the optimization database.
OPDATA - Identifies the file where optimization data is to be saved.
OPDEL - Deletes optimization design sets.
OPEQN - Controls curve fitting for the subproblem approximation method.
OPERATE - Specifies "Operation data" as the subsequent status topic.
OPEXE - Initiates optimization looping.
OPFACT - Defines the type of factorial evaluation to be performed.
OPFRST - Defines specifications for the first order optimization method.
OPGRAD - Specifies which design set will be used for gradient evaluation.
OPKEEP - Specifies whether to save the best-set results and database file.
OPLFA - Displays the results of a factorial evaluation.
OPLGR - Graphs the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPLIST - Displays the parameters for design sets.
OPLOOP - Specifies controls for optimization looping.
OPLSW - Graphs the results of a global sweep generation.
OPMAKE - Creates a design set using active scalar parameter values.
OPNCONTROL - Sets decision parameter for automatically increasing the time step interval.
OPPRNT - Activates detailed optimization summary printout.
OPRAND - Defines the number of iterations for a random optimization.
OPRESU - Reads optimization data into the optimization database.
OPRFA - Prints the results of a factorial evaluation.

OPRGR - Prints the results of a gradient evaluation.
OPRSW - Prints the results of a global sweep generation.
OPSAVE - Writes all optimization data to a file.
OPSEL - Selects design sets for subsequent optimization looping.
OPSUBP - Defines number of iterations for subproblem approximation method.
OPSWEEP - Specifies the reference point and number of evaluation points for a sweep
generation.
/OPT - Enters the design optimizer.
OPTYPE - Specifies the optimization method to be used.
OPUSER - Defines specifications for user-supplied external optimization.
OPVAR - Specifies the parameters to be treated as optimization variables.
OUTOPT - Specifies "Output options" as the subsequent status topic.
OUTPR - Controls the solution printout.
/OUTPUT - Redirects text output to a file or to the screen.
OUTRES - Controls the solution data written to the database.
XVII. P Commands
PADELE - Deletes a defined path.
/PAGE - Defines the printout and screen page size.
PAGET - Writes current path information into an array variable.
PAPUT - Retrieves path information from an array variable.
PARESU - Restores previously saved paths from a file.
PARTSEL - Selects a subset of parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
PARRES - Reads parameters from a file.
PARSAV - Writes parameters to a file.
PASAVE - Saves selected paths to an external file.
PATH - Defines a path name and establishes parameters for the path.
PAUSE - Temporarily releases the current product license.
/PBC - Shows boundary condition (BC) symbols and values on displays.
/PBF - Shows magnitude of body force loads on displays.
PCALC - Forms additional labeled path items by operating on existing path items.
PCGOPT - Controls PCG solver options.
PCIRC - Creates a circular area centered about the working plane origin.
/PCIRCLE - Creates an annotation circle (GUI).
/PCOPY - Automatically generates hard copies for HP UNIX work stations.
PCROSS - Calculates the cross product of two path vectors along the current path.
PDANL - Defines the analysis file to be used for probabilistic looping.
PDCDF - Plots the cumulative distribution function.
PDCFLD - Calculates a correlation field and stores it into an ANSYS array.
PDCLR - Clears the probabilistic design database.
PDCMAT - Prints the correlation coefficient matrix.
PDCORR - Specifies the correlation between two random input variables.
PDDMCS - Specifies options for Monte Carlo Simulations using direct sampling.
PDDOEL - Defines design of experiment levels for an individual random input variable.
PDEF - Interpolates an item onto a path.
PDEXE - Executes the probabilistic analysis.
PDHIST - Plots the frequency histogram.
PDINQR - Evaluates statistical characteristics of a random input variable.
PDLHS - Specifies options for Monte Carlo Simulations using Latin-Hypercube sampling.
PDMETH - Specifies the probabilistic analysis method.
PDOT - Calculates the dot product of two path vectors along the current path.
PDPINV - Prints the result of the inversion of a probability.
PDPLOT - Plots the distribution curves of a defined random input variable.
PDPROB - Prints a probability result.
PDRESU - Reads the probabilistic model data and loads it into the database.
PDROPT - Specifies the options for an HTML report.
/PDS - Enters the probabilistic design system.
PDSAVE - Writes the probabilistic model data to a file.
PDSCAT - Plots a scatter graph.
PDSENS - Plots the probabilistic sensitivities.

PDSHIS - Plots the sample history values.
PDUSER - Specifies options for user-specified sampling methods.
PDVAR - Specifies the parameters to be treated as probabilistic design variables.
PDWRITE - Generates an HTML report for the probabilistic analyses.
PERBC2D - Generates periodic constraints for 2-D planar magnetic field analyses.
PERI - Specifies periodic boundary conditions in an incompressible flow analysis.
PERTURB - Sets linear perturbation analysis options.
PFACT - Calculates participation factors for the PSD or multi-point response spectrum table.
PGRAPH - Specifies the location from which graphics data will be retrieved for viewing.
PGRSET - Defines the data set to be read from the PGR file.
PGSAVE - Creates a PowerGraphics (PGR) file from results data.
PGSELE - Select a subset of elements for display with the PGR viewer.
PGWRITE - Writes selected solution data to the PGR file for faster post processing access.
PHYSICS - Writes, reads, or lists all element information
/PICE - Shows initial conditions on elements as contours on displays.
PIVCHECK - Prevents a batch mode, linear static analysis from stopping when a negative or zero
equation solver pivot value is encountered.
PLCAMP - Plots Campbell diagram data for applications involving rotating structure dynamics.
PLCINT - Plots the fracture parameter (CINT) result data.
PLCPLX - Specifies the part of a complex variable to display.
PLCRACK - Displays cracking and crushing locations in SOLID65 elements.
PLDISP - Displays the displaced structure.
PLESOL - Displays the solution results as discontinuous element contours.
PLETAB - Displays element table items.
PLFAR - Plots electric far fields and far field parameters.
PLFSS - Plots reflection and transmission parameters of a frequency selective surface solution.
PLF2D - Generates a contour line plot of equipotentials.
PLLS - Displays element table items as contoured areas along elements.
PLNEAR - Plots the electric field in the near zone exterior to the equivalent source surface.
PLNSOL - Displays results as continuous contours.
/PLOPTS - Controls graphics options on subsequent displays.
PLORB - Displays the orbital motion of a rotating structure
PLOT - Forms a display.
PLOTTING - Specifies "Plotting settings" as the subsequent status topic.
PLPAGM - Displays path items along the path geometry.
PLPATH - Displays path items on a graph.
PLSCH - Converts and plots scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters on a Smith chart.
PLSECT - Displays membrane and membrane-plus-bending linearized stresses.
PLSYZ - Converts and plots network parameters versus frequency or plots losses versus
frequency.
PLTD - Displays TDR/TDT waveforms, an impedance profile, or a total waveform.
PLTIME - Defines the time range for which data are to be displayed.
PLTLINE - Plots port transmission line data generated by the HFPCSWP or SPSWP macros.
PLTRAC - Displays a particle flow or charged particle trace on an element display.
PLVAR - Displays up to ten variables in the form of a graph.
PLVAROPT - Displays up to ten parameters in the form of a graph.
PLVECT - Displays results as vectors.
PLVFRC - Displays volume fractions in a volume of fluid (VOF) analysis.
PLWAVE - Specifies a free-space time-harmonic incident plane electromagnetic wave.
/PMACRO - Specifies that macro contents be written to the session log file.
PMAP - Creates mapping of the path geometry by defining path interpolation division points.
PMGTRAN - Summarizes electromagnetic results from a transient analysis.
PMLOPT - Defines perfectly matched layers (PMLs) for a high-frequency analysis.
PMLSIZE - Determines number of PML layers.
/PMORE - Creates an annotation polygon (GUI).
PNGR - Provides PNG file export for ANSYS displays.
/PNUM - Controls entity numbering/coloring on plots.
POINT - Specifies "Point flow tracing settings" as the subsequent status topic.
POLY - Creates a polygonal area based on working plane coordinate pairs.
/POLYGON - Creates annotation polygons (GUI).
/POST1 - Enters the database results postprocessor.

/POST26 - Enters the time-history results postprocessor.
POUTRES - Controls the nodal DOF and computed element results graphics data that is written to
the PGR file.
POWERH - Calculates the rms power loss in a conductor or lossy dielectric.
PPATH - Defines a path by picking or defining nodes, or locations on the currently active working
plane, or by entering specific coordinate locations.
PRANGE - Determines the path range.
PRCAMP - Prints Campbell diagram data for applications involving rotating structure dynamics.
PRCINT - Lists the fracture parameter (CINT) results data.
PRCPLX - Defines the output form for complex variables.
PRED - Activates a predictor in a nonlinear analysis.
PRENERGY - Prints the total energies of a model or the energies of the specified components.
/PREP7 - Enters the model creation preprocessor.
PRERR - Prints SEPC and TEPC.
PRESOL - Prints the solution results for elements.
PRETAB - Prints the element table items.
PRFAR - Prints electric far fields and far field parameters.
PRI2 - Creates a polygonal area or a prism volume by vertices (GUI).
PRIM - Specifies "Solid model primitives" as the subsequent status topic.
PRINT - Specifies "Print settings" as the subsequent status topic.
*PRINT - Prints the matrix values to a file.
PRISM - Creates a prism volume based on working plane coordinate pairs.
PRITER - Prints solution summary data.
PRJSOL - Prints joint element output.
PRNEAR - Prints the electric field in the near zone exterior to the equivalent source surface.
PRNLD - Prints the summed element nodal loads.
PRNSOL - Prints the nodal solution results.
PROD - Multiplies variables.
PRORB - Prints the orbital motion characteristics of a rotating structure
PRPATH - Prints path items along a geometry path.
PRRFOR - Used with the FORCE command. Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
PRRSOL - Prints the constrained node reaction solution.
PRSECT - Calculates and prints linearized stresses along a section path.
PRSYZ - Converts and lists scattering, admittance, or impedance parameters.
PRTIME - Defines the time range for which data are to be listed.
PRVAR - Lists variables vs. time (or frequency).
PRVAROPT - Lists up to ten optimization parameters.
PRVECT - Prints results as vector magnitude and direction cosines.
PSCONTROL - Turn shared-memory parallel operations on or off during solution.
PSCR - Specifies various PostScript options.
PSDCOM - Specifies the power spectral density mode combination method.
PSDFRQ - Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum tables PSDVAL vs. PSDFRQ for PSD
analysis.
PSDGRAPH - Displays input PSD curves
PSDRES - Controls solution output written to the results file from a PSD analysis.
PSDSPL - Defines a partially correlated excitation in a PSD analysis.
PSDUNIT - Defines the type of input PSD.
PSDVAL - Defines PSD values.
PSDWAV - Defines a wave propagation excitation in a PSD analysis.
/PSEARCH - Specifies a directory to be searched for "unknown command" macro files.
PSEL - Selects a path or paths.
/PSF - Shows surface load symbols on model displays.
PSMAT - Writes an assembled global matrix to a postscript format that graphically displays
nonzero matrix values.
PSMESH - Create and mesh a pretension section
PSOLVE - Directs the program to perform a partial solution.
/PSPEC - Creates annotation polygon attributes (GUI).
/PSTATUS - Displays the global or window display specifications.
PSTRES - Specifies whether prestress effects are calculated or included.
/PSYMB - Shows various symbols on displays.
PTR - Dumps the record of a binary file.

PTXY - Defines coordinate pairs for use in polygons and prisms.
PVECT - Interpolates a set of items onto a path.
/PWEDGE - Creates an annotation wedge (GUI).
XVIII. Q Commands
QDVAL - Defines PSD quadspectral values.
QFACT - Calculates the quality factor for high-frequency electromagnetic resonators.
QRDOPT - Specifies additional QRDAMP modal analysis option.
QSOPT - Specifies quasi static radiation options.
QUAD - Generates a quadratic line of nodes from three nodes.
/QUIT - Exits a processor.
QUOT - Divides two variables.
XIX. R Commands
R - Defines the element real constants.
RACE - Defines a "racetrack" current source.
RADOPT - Specifies Gauss-Seidel Radiosity Solver options.
RAPPND - Appends results data from the database to the results file.
RATE - Specifies whether the effect of creep strain rate will be used in the solution of a load step.
/RATIO - Distorts the object geometry.
RBE3 - Distributes the force/moment applied at the master node to a set of slave nodes, taking
into account the geometry of the slave nodes as well as weighting factors.
RCON - Specifies "Real constants" as the subsequent status topic.
RDEC - Defines the decimation parameters.
RDELE - Deletes real constant sets.
REAL - Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
REALVAR - Forms a variable using only the real part of a complex variable.
RECTNG - Creates a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane.
REMESH - Specifies the starting and ending remeshing points, and other options, for manual
rezoning.
/RENAME - Renames a file.
REORDER - Specifies "Model reordering" as the subsequent status topic.
*REPEAT - Repeats the previous command.
/REPLOT - Automatically reissues the last display command for convenience.
RESCONTROL - Controls file writing for multiframe restarts.
RESET - Resets all POST1 or POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
/RESET - Resets display specifications to their initial defaults.
RESP - Generates a response spectrum.
RESUME - Resumes the database from the database file.
RESVEC - Calculates or includes residual vectors.
RESWRITE - Appends results data from the database to a results file.
*RETURN - Returns input stream to a higher level.
REXPORT - Exports displacements from an implicit run to ANSYS LS-DYNA.
REZONE - Initiates the rezoning process, sets rezoning options, and rebuilds the database.
RFORCE - Specifies the total reaction force data to be stored.
/RGB - Specifies the RGB color values for indices and contours.
RIGID - Specifies known rigid body modes (if any) of the model.
RIGRESP - Specifies the rigid response calculation.
RIMPORT - Imports initial stresses from an explicit dynamics run into ANSYS.
RLIST - Lists the real constant sets.
RMALIST - Lists all defined master nodes for a ROM method.
RMANL - Assigns model database, dimensionality, and operating direction for the ROM method.
RMASTER - Defines master nodes for the ROM method.
RMCAP - Defines lumped capacitance pairs between conductors C1 and C2 for a ROM method.
RMCLIST - Lists all lumped capacitance pairs defined.
/RMDIR - Removes (deletes) a directory.
RMFLVEC - Writes eigenvectors of fluid nodes to a file for use in damping parameter extraction.
RMLVSCALE - Defines element load vector scaling for a ROM use pass.
RMMLIST - Lists all mode specifications for the ROM method.

RMMRANGE - Defines and edits various modal parameters for the ROM method.
RMMSELECT - Selects modes for the ROM method.
RMNDISP - Extracts neutral plane displacements from a test load or element load solution for the
ROM method.
RMNEVEC - Extracts neutral plane eigenvectors from a modal analysis for the ROM method.
RMODIF - Modifies real constant sets.
RMORE - Adds real constants to a set.
RMPORDER - Defines polynomial orders for ROM functions.
RMRESUME - Resumes ROM data from a file.
RMRGENERATE - Performs fitting procedure for all ROM functions to generate response surfaces.
RMROPTIONS - Defines options for ROM response surface fitting.
RMRPLOT - Plots response surface of ROM function or its derivatives with respect to the
dominant mode(s).
RMRSTATUS - Prints status of response surface for ROM function.
RMSAVE - Saves ROM data to file.
RMSMPLE - Runs finite element solutions and obtains sample points for the ROM method.
RMUSE - Activates ROM use pass for ROM elements.
RMXPORT - Exports ROM model to external VHDL-AMS simulator.
ROCK - Specifies a rocking response spectrum.
ROSE - Specifies the Rosenblueth mode combination method.
RPOLY - Creates a regular polygonal area centered about the working plane origin.
RPR4 - Creates a regular polygonal area or prism volume anywhere on the working plane.
RPRISM - Creates a regular prism volume centered about the working plane origin.
RPSD - Computes response power spectral density (PSD).
RSFIT - Fit a response surface for an output parameter in a solution set.
RSOPT - Creates or loads the radiosity mapping data file for SURF251 or SURF252 element types.
RSPLIT - Creates one or more results file(s) from the current results file based on subsets of
elements.
RSPLOT - Plot a response surface.
RSPRNT - Print a response surface.
RSSIMS - Performs Monte Carlo simulations on response surface(s).
RSTMAC - Calculates modal assurance criterion (MAC) and matches nodal solutions from two
results files.
RSTOFF - Offsets node or element IDs in the FE geometry record.
RSURF - Generates the radiosity surface elements (SURF251/SURF252) and stores them in the
database.
RSYMM - Defines the plane of symmetry or center of rotation for the radiosity method.
RSYS - Activates a coordinate system for printout or display of element and nodal results.
RTHICK - Defines variable thickness at nodes for shell elements.
XX. S Commands
SABS - Specifies absolute values for element table operations.
SADD - Forms an element table item by adding two existing items.
SALLOW - Defines the allowable stress table for safety factor calculations.
SAVE - Saves all current database information.
SBCLIST - Lists solid model boundary conditions.
SBCTRAN - Transfers solid model loads and boundary conditions to the FE model.
SDELETE - Deletes sections from the database.
SE - Defines a superelement.
SECCONTROLS - Supplements or overrides default section properties.
SECDATA - Describes the geometry of a section.
SECFUNCTION - Specifies shell section thickness as a tabular function.
SECJOINT - Defines local coordinate systems at joint element nodes and other data for joint
elements.
/SECLIB - Sets the default section library path for the SECREAD command.
SECLOCK - Specifies locks on the components of relative motion in a joint element.
SECMODIF - Modifies a pretension section
SECNUM - Sets the element section attribute pointer.
SECOFFSET - Defines the section offset for cross sections.
SECPLOT - Plots the geometry of a beam, pipe, shell, or reinforcing section to scale.
SECREAD - Reads a custom section library or a user-defined section mesh into ANSYS.
SECSTOP - Specifies stops on the components of relative motion in a joint element.
SECTYPE - Associates section type information with a section ID number.
SECWRITE - Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh section information.
SED - Defines the excitation direction for response spectrum and PSD analyses.
SEDLIST - Lists the DOF solution of a superelement after the use pass.
SEEXP - Specifies options for the substructure expansion pass.
/SEG - Allows graphics data to be stored in the local terminal memory.
SEGEN - Automatically generate superelements.
SELIST - Lists the contents of a superelement matrix file.
SELM - Specifies "Superelements" as the subsequent status topic.
SELTOL - Sets the tolerance for subsequent select operations.
SENERGY - Determines the stored magnetic energy or co-energy.
SEOPT - Specifies substructure analysis options.
SESYMM - Performs a symmetry operation on a superelement within the use pass.
*SET - Assigns values to user-named parameters.
SET - Defines the data set to be read from the results file.
SETFGAP - Updates or defines the real constant table for squeeze film elements.
SETRAN - Creates a superelement from an existing superelement.
SEXP - Forms an element table item by exponentiating and multiplying.
SF - Specifies surface loads on nodes.
SFA - Specifies surface loads on the selected areas.
SFACT - Allows safety factor or margin of safety calculations to be made.
SFADELE - Deletes surface loads from areas.
SFALIST - Lists the surface loads for the specified area.
SFBEAM - Specifies surface loads on beam and pipe elements.
SFCALC - Calculates the safety factor or margin of safety.
SFCUM - Specifies that surface loads are to be accumulated.
SFDELE - Deletes surface loads.
SFE - Specifies surface loads on elements.
SFEDELE - Deletes surface loads from elements.
SFELIST - Lists the surface loads for elements.
SFFUN - Specifies a varying surface load.
SFGRAD - Specifies a gradient (slope) for surface loads.
SFL - Specifies surface loads on lines of an area.
SFLDELE - Deletes surface loads from lines.
SFLEX - Sets flexibility factors for the currently defined pipe element section.
SFLIST - Lists surface loads.
SFLLIST - Lists the surface loads for lines.
SFSCALE - Scales surface loads on elements.
SFTRAN - Transfer the solid model surface loads to the finite element model.
/SHADE - Defines the type of surface shading used with Z-buffering.
SHELL - Selects a shell element or shell layer location for results output.
/SHOW - Specifies the device and other parameters for graphics displays.
/SHOWDISP - Defines the display driver name.
SHPP - Controls element shape checking.
/SHRINK - Shrinks elements, lines, areas, and volumes for display clarity.
SLIST - Summarizes the section properties for all defined sections in the current session.
SLOAD - Load a pretension section.
SMALL - Finds the smallest of three variables.
*SMAT - Creates a sparse matrix.
SMAX - Forms an element table item from the maximum of two other items.
/SMBC - Controls the display of solid model boundary condition symbols and labels.
SMBODY - Specifies "Body loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMCONS - Specifies "Constraints on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMFOR - Specifies "Forces on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMIN - Forms an element table item from the minimum of two other items.
SMOOTH - Allows smoothing of noisy data and provides a graphical representation of the data.
SMRTSIZE - Specifies meshing parameters for automatic (smart) element sizing.
SMSURF - Specifies "Surface loads on the solid model" as the subsequent status topic.
SMULT - Forms an element table item by multiplying two other items.

SNOPTION - Specifies Supernode (SNODE) eigensolver options.
SOCEAN - Specifies an ocean environment and associates it with an element section.
SOLCONTROL - Specifies whether to use optimized nonlinear solution defaults and some
enhanced internal solution algorithms.
SOLU - Specifies solution summary data per substep to be stored.
/SOLU - Enters the solution processor.
SOLUOPT - Specifies "Solution options" as the subsequent status topic.
SOLVE - Starts a solution.
SORT - Specifies "Sort settings" as the subsequent status topic.
SOURCE - Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
SPACE - Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiation Matrix method.
SPADP - Automatically refines a HF119 tetrahedral element mesh based on S-parameter
convergence.
SPARM - Calculates parameters between ports of a network system.
SPCNOD - Defines a space node for radiation using the Radiosity method.
SPCTEMP - Defines a free-space ambient temperature for radiation using the Radiosity method.
SPDAMP - Defines input spectrum damping in a multi-point response spectrum analysis.
SPEC - Specifies "Miscellaneous specifications" as the subsequent status topic.
SPFREQ - Defines the frequency points for the input spectrum tables SPVAL vs. SPFREQ for multipoint spectrum analysis.
SPFSS - Performs frequency sweep or angle sweep calculations to determine reflection and
transmission parameters of a frequency selective surface.
SPGRAPH - Displays input spectrum curves for MPRS analysis.
SPH4 - Creates a spherical volume anywhere on the working plane.
SPH5 - Creates a spherical volume by diameter end points.
SPHERE - Creates a spherical volume centered about the working plane origin.
SPICE - Generates a SPICE subcircuit model using S-parameters from a Touchstone file.
SPLINE - Generates a segmented spline through a series of keypoints.
SPLOT - Displays the selected areas and a faceted view of their underlying surfaces
SPMWRITE - Calculates the state-space matrices and writes them to the SPM file.
SPOINT - Defines a point for moment summations.
SPOPT - Selects the spectrum type and other spectrum options.
SPREAD - Turns on a dashed tolerance curve for the subsequent curve plots.
SPSCAN - Performs a harmonic analysis of a unit cell over a range of angles and extracts the Sparameter.
SPSWP - Computes S-parameters over a frequency range and writes them to a file.
SPTOPT - Specifies "Spectrum analysis options" as the subsequent status topic.
SPUNIT - Defines the type of multi-point response spectrum.
SPVAL - Defines multi-point response spectrum values.
SQRT - Forms the square root of a variable.
*SREAD - Reads a file into a string array parameter.
SRSS - Specifies the square root of sum of squares mode combination method.
SSBT - Specifies preintegrated bending thermal effects for shell sections.
/SSCALE - Sets the contour multiplier for topographic displays.
SSLN - Selects and displays small lines in the model.
SSMT - Specifies preintegrated membrane thermal effects for shell sections.
SSPA - Specifies a preintegrated membrane stiffness for shell sections.
SSPB - Specifies a preintegrated coupling stiffness for shell sections.
SSPD - Specifies a preintegrated bending stiffness for shell sections.
SSPE - Specifies a preintegrated transverse shear stiffness for shell sections.
SSPM - Specifies mass density for a preintegrated shell section.
SSTIF - Activates stress stiffness effects in a nonlinear analysis.
SSUM - Calculates and prints the sum of element table items.
STABILIZE - Activates stabilization for all elements that support nonlinear stabilization.
STAOPT - Specifies static analysis options.
STAT - Displays the status of database settings.
*STATUS - Lists the current parameters and abbreviations.
/STATUS - Lists the status of items for the run.
STEF - Specifies Stefan-Boltzmann radiation constant.
/STITLE - Defines subtitles.
STORE - Stores data in the database for the defined variables.

SUBSET - Reads results for the selected portions of the model.
SUCALC - Create new result data by operating on two existing result data sets on a given surface.
SUCR - Create a surface.
SUDEL - Delete geometry information as well as any mapped results for specified surface.
SUEVAL - Perform operations on a mapped item and store result in a scalar parameter.
SUGET - Moves surface geometry and mapped results to an array parameter.
SUMAP - Map results onto selected surface(s).
SUMTYPE - Sets the type of summation to be used in the following load case operations.
SUPL - Plot result data on all selected surfaces or on a specified surface.
SUPR - Print global status, geometry information and/or result information.
SURESU - Read a set of surface definitions and result items from a file and make them the
current set.
SUSAVE - Saves surface definitions to a file.
SUSEL - Selects a subset of surfaces
SUVECT - Create new result data by operating on two existing result vectors on a given surface.
SV - Defines spectrum values to be associated with frequency points.
SVPLOT - Displays input spectrum curves.
SVTYP - Defines the type of single-point response spectrum.
SWADD - Adds more surfaces to an existing spot weld set.
SWDEL - Deletes spot weld sets.
SWGEN - Creates a new spot weld set.
SWLIST - Lists spot weld sets.
SYNCHRO - Specifies whether the excitation frequency is synchronous or asynchronous with the
rotational velocity of a structure.
/SYP - Passes a command string and arguments to the operating system.
/SYS - Passes a command string to the operating system.
XXI. T Commands
TALLOW - Defines the temperature table for safety factor calculations.
*TAXIS - Defines table index numbers.
TB - Activates a data table for nonlinear material properties or special element input.
TBCOPY - Copies a data table from one material to another.
TBDATA - Defines data for the material data table.
TBDELE - Deletes previously defined material data tables.
TBEO - Sets special options or parameters for material data tables.
TBFIELD - Defines values of field variables for the material data tables.
TBFT - Performs material curve-fitting operations.
TBLE - Specifies "Data table properties" as the subsequent status topic.
TBLIST - Lists the material data tables.
TBMODIF - Modifies data for the material data table (GUI).
TBPLOT - Displays the material data table.
TBPT - Defines a point on a nonlinear data curve.
TBTEMP - Defines a temperature for a material data table.
TCHG - Converts 20-node degenerate tetrahedral elements to their 10-node non-degenerate
counterparts.
/TEE - Writes a list of commands to a specified file at the same time that the commands are being
executed.
TERM - Specifies various terminal driver options.
THOPT - Nonlinear transient thermal solution option.
TIFF - Provides TIFF file Export for ANSYS Displays.
TIME - Sets the time for a load step.
TIMERANGE - Specifies the time range for which data are to be stored.
TIMINT - Turns on transient effects.
TIMP - Improves the quality of tetrahedral elements that are not associated with a volume.
TINTP - Defines transient integration parameters.
/TITLE - Defines a main title.
/TLABEL - Creates annotation text (GUI).
TOCOMP - Defines single or multiple compliance as the topological optimization function.
TODEF - Defines parameters for and initializes topological optimization.
TOEXE - Executes one topological optimization iteration.

TOFFST - Specifies the temperature offset from absolute zero to zero.
TOFREQ - Defines single or mean frequency formulation as the topological optimization function.
TOGRAPH - Plots iteration solution of topological optimization.
TOLIST - Lists all topological optimization functions currently defined.
TOLOOP - Execute several topological optimization iterations.
*TOPER - Operates on table parameters.
TOPLOT - Plot current topological density distribution.
TOPRINT - Print iteration solution history of topological optimization.
TORQ2D - Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field.
TORQC2D - Calculates torque on a body in a magnetic field based on a circular path.
TORQSUM - Summarizes electromagnetic torque calculations on element components.
TORUS - Creates a toroidal volume.
TOSTAT - Displays topological optimization status and results information.
TOTAL - Specifies automatic MDOF generation.
TOTYPE - Specifies solution method for topological optimization.
TOVAR - Specifies the objective and constraints for the topological optimization problem.
TRANS - Reformats File.GRPH for improved performance with plotters.
TRANSFER - Transfers a pattern of nodes to another coordinate system.
*TREAD - Reads data from an external file into a table array parameter.
TREF - Defines the reference temperature for the thermal strain calculations.
/TRIAD - Shows the global XYZ coordinate triad on displays.
/TRLCY - Specifies the level of translucency.
TRNOPT - Specifies transient analysis options.
TRPDEL - Deletes particle flow or charged particle trace points.
TRPLIS - Lists the particle flow or charged particle trace points.
TRPOIN - Defines a point through which a particle flow or charged particle trace will travel.
TRTIME - Defines the options used for the PLTRAC (particle flow or charged particle trace)
command.
TSHAP - Defines simple 2-D and 3-D geometric surfaces for target segment elements.
/TSPEC - Creates annotation text attributes (GUI).
TSRES - Defines an array of key times at which the time-stepping strategy changes.
TUNIF - Assigns a uniform temperature to all nodes.
TVAR - Changes time to the cumulative iteration number.
/TXTRE - Controls application of texture to selected items.
/TYPE - Defines the type of display.
TYPE - Sets the element type attribute pointer.
TZAMESH - Meshes the areas of a volume to create Trefftz nodes.
TZDELE - Deletes the Trefftz superelement, associated constraint equations and all supporting
Trefftz files.
TZEGEN - Generates a Trefftz domain substructure and defines a Trefftz superelement for use in
electrostatic analysis.
XXII. U Commands
/UCMD - Assigns a user-defined command name.
/UDOC - Determines position and content for the multi-legend options.
/UI - Activates specified GUI dialog boxes.
UIMP - Defines constant material properties (GUI).
/UIS - Controls the GUI behavior.
*ULIB - Identifies a macro library file.
UNDELETE - Removes results sets from the group of sets selected for editing.
UNDO - Allows the user to modify or save commands issued since the last RESUME or SAVE
command.
/UNITS - Annotates the database with the system of units used.
UNPAUSE - Restores use of a temporarily released product license.
UPCOORD - Modifies the coordinates of the active set of nodes, based on the current
displacements.
UPGEOM - Adds displacements from a previous analysis and updates the geometry of the finite
element model to the deformed configuration.
*USE - Executes a macro file.
/USER - Conveniently resets /FOCUS and /DIST to USER.

USRCAL - Allows user-solution subroutines to be activated or deactivated.
USRDOF - Specifies the degrees of freedom for the user-defined element USER300.
USRELEM - Specifies the characteristics of the user-defined element USER300.
XXIII. V Commands
V - Defines a volume through keypoints.
V2DOPT - Specifies 2-D/axisymmetric view factor calculation options.
VA - Generates a volume bounded by existing areas.
*VABS - Applies the absolute value function to array parameters.
VADD - Adds separate volumes to create a single volume.
VARDEL - Deletes a variable (GUI).
VARNAM - Names (or renames) a variable.
VATT - Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed volumes.
VCLEAR - Deletes nodes and volume elements associated with selected volumes.
*VCOL - Specifies the number of columns in matrix operations.
/VCONE - Defines the view cone angle for perspective displays.
VCROSS - Forms element table items from the cross product of two vectors.
*VCUM - Allows array parameter results to add to existing results.
VDDAM - Specifies the velocity spectrum computation constants for the analysis of shock
resistance of shipboard structures.
VDELE - Deletes unmeshed volumes.
VDGL - Lists keypoints of a volume that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
VDOT - Forms an element table item from the dot product of two vectors.
VDRAG - Generates volumes by dragging an area pattern along a path.
*VEC - Creates a vector.
*VEDIT - Allows numerical array parameters to be graphically edited.
VEORIENT - Specifies brick element orientation for volume mapped (hexahedron) meshing.
VEXT - Generates additional volumes by extruding areas.
*VFACT - Applies a scale factor to array parameters.
*VFILL - Fills an array parameter.
VFOPT - Specifies options for view factor file.
VFQUERY - Queries and prints element Hemicube view factors and average view factor.
VFSM - Scales view factor matrix to yield row sum values equal to one.
*VFUN - Performs a function on a single array parameter.
VGEN - Generates additional volumes from a pattern of volumes.
*VGET - Retrieves values and stores them into an array parameter.
VGET - Moves a variable into an array parameter vector.
VGLUE - Generates new volumes by "gluing" volumes.
/VIEW - Defines the viewing direction for the display.
VIMP - Improves the quality of the tetrahedral elements in the selected volume(s).
VINP - Finds the pairwise intersection of volumes.
VINV - Finds the intersection of volumes.
*VITRP - Forms an array parameter by interpolation of a table.
*VLEN - Specifies the number of rows to be used in array parameter operations.
VLIST - Lists the defined volumes.
VLSCALE - Generates a scaled set of volumes from a pattern of volumes.
*VMASK - Specifies an array parameter as a masking vector.
VMESH - Generates nodes and volume elements within volumes.
VOFFST - Generates a volume, offset from a given area.
VOLUMES - Specifies "Volumes" as the subsequent status topic.
*VOPER - Operates on two array parameters.
VOVLAP - Overlaps volumes.
*VPLOT - Graphs columns (vectors) of array parameters.
VPLOT - Displays the selected volumes.
VPTN - Partitions volumes.
*VPUT - Restores array parameter values into the ANSYS database.
VPUT - Moves an array parameter vector into a variable.
*VREAD - Reads data and produces an array parameter vector or matrix.
VROTAT - Generates cylindrical volumes by rotating an area pattern about an axis.
VSBA - Subtracts areas from volumes.

VSBV - Subtracts volumes from volumes.
VSBW - Subtracts intersection of the working plane from volumes (divides volumes).
/VSCALE - Scales the length of displayed vectors.
*VSCFUN - Determines properties of an array parameter.
VSEL - Selects a subset of volumes.
VSLA - Selects those volumes containing the selected areas.
*VSTAT - Lists the current specifications for the array parameters.
VSUM - Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected volumes.
VSWEEP - Fills an existing unmeshed volume with elements by sweeping the mesh from an
adjacent area through the volume.
VSYMM - Generates volumes from a volume pattern by symmetry reflection.
/VT - Enters the Variational Technology preprocessor.
VTCLR - Clears the Variational Technology database.
VTDISC - Defines an element component as a discrete input variable for the DesignXplorer.
VTEVAL - Triggers evaluation of generated results based on input variables specified via the
VTVMOD command.
VTFREQ - Defines the frequency as input variable for the harmonic sweep functionality of VT
Accelerator.
VTGEOM - Defines a geometry parameter created with ANSYS MeshMorpher as a DesignXplorer
input variable.
VTIN - Defines an inertial load as an input variable for DesignXplorer.
VTMETH - Defines the solution options for the DesignXplorer.
VTMP - Defines a material property as an input variable for DesignXplorer.
VTOP - Defines options value for the DesignXplorer.
VTPOST - Launches the DesignXplorer postprocessing application.
VTRAN - Transfers a pattern of volumes to another coordinate system.
VTREAL - Defines a real constant property as an input variable for the DesignXplorer.
VTRFIL - Specifies the file to which DesignXplorer results are written.
VTRSLT - Defines a result quantity for the DesignXplorer.
VTSEC - Defines a section property as an input variable for DesignXplorer.
VTSFE - Defines a surface load as an input variable for the DesignXplorer.
VTSL - Selects a subset of elements associated with an VT input variable.
VTSTAT - Print the status of the DesignXplorer definitions and settings into a separate window.
VTTEMP - Defines the temperature as input variable for the DesignXplorer.
VTVMOD - Modifies the status or current value of an input variable for the DesignXplorer.
VTYPE - Specifies the viewing procedure used to determine the form factors for the Radiation
Matrix method.
/VUP - Specifies the global Cartesian coordinate system reference orientation.
*VWRITE - Writes data to a file in a formatted sequence.
XXIV. W Commands
/WAIT - Causes a delay before the reading of the next command.
WAVES - Initiates reordering.
WERASE - Erases all reordering wave lists.
WFRONT - Estimates wavefront statistics.
/WINDOW - Defines the window size on the screen.
WMID - Specifies reordering options for the WAVES command.
WMORE - Adds more nodes to the starting wave list.
WPAVE - Moves the working plane origin to the average of specified points.
WPCSYS - Defines the working plane location based on a coordinate system.
WPLANE - Defines a working plane to assist in picking operations.
WPOFFS - Offsets the working plane.
WPROTA - Rotates the working plane.
WPSTYL - Controls the display and style of the working plane.
WRFULL - Stops solution after assembling global matrices.
WRITE - Writes the radiation matrix file.
WSORT - Initiates element reordering based upon a geometric sort.
WSPRINGS - Creates weak springs on corner nodes of a bounding box of the currently selected
elements.
WSTART - Defines a starting wave list.

XXV. X Commands
/XFRM - Controls the centroid or the axis of dynamic rotation.
/XRANGE - Specifies a linear abscissa (X) scale range.
XVAR - Specifies the X variable to be displayed.
XVAROPT - Specifies the parameter to be used as the X-axis variable.
XXVI. Y Commands
/YRANGE - Specifies a linear ordinate (Y) scale range.
XXVII. Z Commands
/ZOOM - Zooms a region of a display window.
1.1.Conventions Used in this Manual

ANSYS documentation uses the following conventions to help you identify various types of information:
Type style or
text
BOLD
Bold>Bold
ITALICS
Italics
TYPEWRITER
Indicates
Uppercase, bold text indicates command names (such as K, DDELE) or
elements (LINK180).
Bold text in mixed case indicates a GUI menu path, a series of menu choices
for accessing a command from the GUI. One or more angle brackets (>)
separate menu items in a menu path. Frequently in text, an ANSYS command
is followed by its GUI equivalent in parentheses, as shown in this example:
*GET command (Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data)
Uppercase italic letters indicate command arguments for numeric values (such
as VALUE , INC , TIME ). On some commands, non-numeric convenience labels
(for example, ALL and P) can also be entered for these arguments.
Mixed case italic letters indicate command arguments for alphanumeric values
(for example, Lab or Fname ). The documentation also uses italic text for
emphasis.
A typewriter font indicates command input listings and ANSYS output listings.
Note: Any mention of a command or element name in this volume implies a reference to
the appropriate command or element description (in the Command Reference or
Element Reference manuals, respectively) for more detailed information.
Often it is necessary to refer to another command within a text description. Interpret the string [CMD]
as "see the CMD command." For example, "... the element coordinate system [ESYS] should be used
to ...," means you can refer to the ESYS command for information related to the element coordinate
system. Where several commands are referenced, the form [CMD1, CMD2, etc.] is used. In some
cases only the primary command of a related group may be referenced.
1.1.1.Product Codes
Below and to the right of the short description of each command, you will see a list of product codes.
These codes represent the products in the ANSYS Family of Products. The command is valid only for
those products whose symbols are listed. A command that is valid in the entire set of products would
have the following list of products:
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS FL EM EH DY PP VT EME MFS
The codes represent each of the products in the ANSYS suite of products:
Code
MP
ME
ST
PR
PRN
DS
DSS
FL
EM
Product
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
Multiphysics
Mechanical
Structural
Professional - Nonlinear Thermal
Professional - Nonlinear Structural
DesignSpace
DesignSpace - Structural
FLOTRAN
Emag - Low Frequency
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CH1_2_1.html[28/04/2013 07:19:36 p.m.]
EH
DY
PP
VT
EME
MFS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
ANSYS
Emag - High Frequency

LS-DYNA
PrepPost
DesignXplorer
Mechanical/ANSYS Emag
Mechanical/CFX-Flo
For a list of the features included in each product, see ANSYS Product Capabilities.
If the symbol for a product does not appear, then that command is either not valid or not applicable in
the corresponding product, and should not be issued when using that product. For example, if the PR
and FL symbols are not listed, the pertinent command is not valid in the ANSYS Professional or ANSYS
FLOTRAN products, but is valid in each of the remaining ANSYS products.
In most cases, commands and elements that are valid in ANSYS Multiphysics are also valid in the ANSYS
ED and ANSYS Multiphysics 1, 2, and 3 products. Exceptions are noted under Product Restrictions for the
applicable command or element. ANSYS ED and ANSYS Multiphysics 1, 2, and 3 are not listed as
separate product codes.
1.1.2.Applicable ANSYS Products

This document applies to the following ANSYS products:
ANSYS Multiphysics (includes all structural, thermal, electromagnetics, and computational fluid dynamics
(CFD) capabilities, excludes explicit dynamics)
ANSYS Mechanical (includes all structural and thermal capabilities; excludes electromagnetics, CFD, and
explicit dynamics capabilities)
ANSYS Structural (includes all structural linear and nonlinear capabilities)
ANSYS Professional (Nonlinear Thermal and Nonlinear Structural)
ANSYS Emag (Low Frequency and High Frequency)
ANSYS FLOTRAN
ANSYS LS-DYNA
ANSYS PrepPost
ANSYS ED
ANSYS Mechanical/ANSYS Emag (combination of All Mechanical and Emag capabilities)
ANSYS Mechanical/CFX-Flo (combination of All Mechanical and CFX-Flo capabilities)
Some command arguments and element key option (KEYOPT) settings have defaults in the derived
products that are different from those in ANSYS Multiphysics. These cases are clearly documented under
the Product Restrictions section of the affected commands and elements. If you intend to use your
derived product input file in ANSYS Multiphysics, you should explicitly input these settings in the derived
product, rather than letting them default; otherwise, behavior in ANSYS Multiphysics will be different.
While ANSYS connection capabilities and High Performance Computing are included as part of the
ANSYS release distribution, they are separately-licensed products. Consult your ASD if you want to install
and run any of the separately-licensed products at your site.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CH1_2_1.html[28/04/2013 07:19:36 p.m.]
K, NPT , X, Y, Z
Defines a keypoint.
NPT
PREP7 : Keypoints
Reference number for keypoint. If zero, the lowest available number is assigned [NUMSTR].
X, Y, Z
Keypoint location in the active coordinate system (may be R, , Z or R, , ). If X = P, graphical

picking is enabled and all other fields (including NPT ) are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Notes
Defines a keypoint in the active coordinate system [CSYS] for line, area, and volume descriptions. A
previously defined keypoint of the same number will be redefined. Keypoints may be redefined only if it
is not yet attached to a line or is not yet meshed. Solid modeling in a toroidal system is not
recommended.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>In Active CS
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Keypoints>On Working Plane
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_K.html[28/04/2013 07:19:42 p.m.]
NUMSTR
NUMSTR
NUMSTR, Label , VALUE

Establishes starting numbers for automatically numbered items.
PREP7 : Database
Label
Apply starting number to one of the following sets of items:

NODE Node numbers. Value defaults (and is continually reset) to 1 + maximum node number
in model. Cannot be reset lower.
ELEM Element numbers. Value defaults (and is continually reset) to 1 + maximum element
number in model. Cannot be reset lower.
KP Keypoint numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing
keypoints are not overwritten.
LINE Line numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing lines are
not overwritten.
AREA Area numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing areas
are not overwritten.
VOLU Volume numbers. Value defaults to 1. Only undefined numbers are used. Existing
volumes are not overwritten.
DEFA Default. Returns all starting numbers to their default values.
VALUE
Starting number value.
Notes
Establishes starting numbers for various items that may have numbers automatically assigned (such as
element numbers with the EGEN command, and node and solid model entity numbers with the mesh
[AMESH, VMESH, etc.] commands). Use NUMSTR,STAT to display settings. Use NUMSTR,DEFA to
reset all specifications back to defaults. Defaults may be lowered by deleting and compressing items
(i.e., NDELE and NUMCMP,NODE for nodes, etc.).
Note: A mesh clear operation (VCLEAR, ACLEAR, LCLEAR, and KCLEAR) automatically
sets starting node and element numbers to the highest unused numbers. If a
specific starting node or element number is desired, issue NUMSTR after the clear
operation.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Reset Start Num
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Set Start Number
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Numbering Ctrls>Start Num Status
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_NUMSTR.html[28/04/2013 07:19:46 p.m.]
2.5. PREP7 Commands
2.5.PREP7 Commands
These commands are used to create and set up the model. The commands are grouped by functionality.
Table2.24Database
These PREP7 commands are used to read model data into the database, list out the
database, and control the numbering of entities in the database.
AFLIST
Lists the current data in the database.
CDREAD
Reads a file of solid model and database information into the
database.
CDWRITE
Writes geometry and load database items to a file.
CDOPT
Specifies format to be used for archiving geometry.
CECHECK
Check constraint equations and couplings for rigid body motions.
CHECK
Checks current database items for completeness.
CNCHECK
Provides and/or adjusts the initial status of contact pairs.
FC
Provides failure criteria information and activates a data table to input
temperature-dependent stress and strain limits.
FCCHECK
Checks both the strain and stress input criteria for all materials.
FCDELE
Deletes previously defined failure criterion data for the given material.
FCLIST
To list what the failure criteria is that you have input.
IGESOUT
Writes solid model data to a file in IGES Version 5.1 format.
MFIMPORT
Imports a new field into a current ANSYS Multi-field solver analysis.
NOOFFSET
Prevents the CDREAD command from offsetting specified data items.
NUMCMP
Compresses the numbering of defined items.
NUMMRG
Merges coincident or equivalently defined items.
NUMOFF
Adds a number offset to defined items.
NUMSTR
Establishes starting numbers for automatically numbered items.
/PREP7
Enters the model creation preprocessor.
Table2.25Element Type
These PREP7 commands define the type of elements to be used in the model.
DOF
Adds degrees of freedom to the current degree-of-freedom set.
ELBOW
Specifies degrees of freedom to be coupled for end release and
applies section constraints to elbow elements.

ET
Defines a local element type from the element library.
ETCHG
Changes element types to their corresponding types.
ETCONTROL
Controls the element technologies used in element formulation (for
applicable elements).
ETDELE
Deletes element types.
ETLIST
Lists currently defined element types.
KEYOPT
Sets element key options.
NSVR
Defines the number of variables for user-programmable element
options.
Table2.26Real Constants
R
These PREP7 commands define the model real constants.

Defines the element real constants.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
RDELE
RLIST
RMODIF
RMORE
SETFGAP
Deletes real constant sets.

Lists the real constant sets.
Modifies real constant sets.
Adds real constants to a set.
Updates real constant table for squeeze film elements.
Table2.27Materials
These PREP7 commands are used to define the linear material properties.
EMUNIT
Specifies the system of units for magnetic field problems.
MP
Defines a linear material property.
MPAMOD
Modifies temperature-dependent coefficients of thermal expansion.
MPCHG
Changes the material number attribute of an element.
MPCOPY
Copies material model data from one material reference number to
another.
MPDATA
Defines property data to be associated with the temperature table.
MPDELE
Deletes linear material properties.
MPDRES
Reassembles existing material data with the temperature table.
/MPLIB
Sets the default material library read and write paths.
MPLIST
Lists linear material properties.
MPPLOT
Plots linear material properties as a function of temperature.
MPREAD
Reads a file containing material properties.
MPTEMP
Defines a temperature table for material properties.
MPTGEN
Adds temperatures to the temperature table by generation.
MPTRES
Restores a temperature table previously defined.
MPWRITE
Writes linear material properties in the database to a file (if the Lib
option is not specified) or writes both linear and nonlinear material
properties (if Lib is specified) from the database to a file.
TBFT
Performs curve-fitting operations on materials.
UIMP
Defines constant material properties (GUI).
Table2.28Material Data Tables

These PREP7 commands create and modify the data tables, used to define nonlinear
materials, for example.
TB
Activates a material data table.
TBCOPY
Copies a data table from one material to another.
TBDATA
Defines data for the material data table.
TBDELE
Deletes previously defined material data tables.
TBEO
Sets special options or parameters for material data tables.
TBFIELD
Defines values of field variables for the material data tables.
TBLIST
Lists the material data tables.
TBMODIF
Modifies data for the material data table (GUI).
TBPLOT
Displays the material data table.
TBPT
Defines a point on a stress-strain or B-H curve.
TBTEMP
Defines a temperature for the material data table.
Table2.29Primitives
These PREP7 commands are used to create primitive shapes for modeling.
BLC4
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by corner points.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
BLC5
BLOCK
CON4
CONE
CYL4
CYL5
CYLIND
PCIRC
POLY
PRI2
PRISM
PTXY
RECTNG
RPOLY
RPR4
RPRISM
SPH4
SPH5
SPHERE
TORUS
Creates a rectangular area or block volume by center and corner

points.
Creates a block volume based on working plane coordinates.
Creates a conical volume anywhere on the working plane.
Creates a conical volume centered about the working plane origin.
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume anywhere on the working
plane.
Creates a circular area or cylindrical volume by end points.
Creates a cylindrical volume centered about the working plane origin.
Creates a circular area centered about the working plane origin.
Creates a polygonal area based on working plane coordinate pairs.
Creates a polygonal area or a prism volume by vertices (GUI).
Creates a prism volume based on working plane coordinate pairs.
Defines coordinate pairs for use in polygons and prisms.
Creates a rectangular area anywhere on the working plane.
Creates a regular polygonal area centered about the working plane
origin.
Creates a regular polygonal area or prism volume anywhere on the
working plane.
Creates a regular prism volume centered about the working plane
origin.
Creates a spherical volume anywhere on the working plane.
Creates a spherical volume by diameter end points.
Creates a spherical volume centered about the working plane origin.
Creates a toroidal volume.
Table2.30Keypoints
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., keypoints.
GSUM
Calculates and prints geometry items.
K
Defines a keypoint.
KBETW
Creates a keypoint between two existing keypoints.
KCENTER
Creates a keypoint at the center of a circular arc defined by three
locations.
KDELE
Deletes unmeshed keypoints.
KDIST
Calculates and lists the distance between two keypoints.
KFILL
Generates keypoints between two keypoints.
KGEN
Generates additional keypoints from a pattern of keypoints.
KL
Generates a keypoint at a specified location on an existing line.
KLIST
Lists the defined keypoints or hard points.
KMODIF
Modifies an existing keypoint.
KMOVE
Calculates and moves a keypoint to an intersection.
KNODE
Defines a keypoint at an existing node location.
KPLOT
Displays the selected keypoints.
KPSCALE
Generates a scaled set of (meshed) keypoints from a pattern of
keypoints.
KSCALE
Generates a scaled pattern of keypoints from a given keypoint pattern.
KSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected keypoints.
KSYMM
Generates a reflected set of keypoints.
KTRAN
Transfers a pattern of keypoints to another coordinate system.
SOURCE
Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
Table2.31Hard Points
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., hard points.
HPTCREATE
Defines a hard point.
HPTDELETE
Deletes selected hard points.
Table2.32Lines
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., lines.
BSPLIN
Generates a single line from a spline fit to a series of keypoints.
CIRCLE
Generates circular arc lines.
GSUM
L
Defines a line between two keypoints.
L2ANG
Generates a line at an angle with two existing lines.
L2TAN
Generates a line tangent to two lines.
LANG
Generates a straight line at an angle with a line.
LARC
Defines a circular arc.
LAREA
Generates the shortest line between two keypoints on an area.
LCOMB
Combines adjacent lines into one line.
LDELE
Deletes unmeshed lines.
LDIV
Divides a single line into two or more lines.
LDRAG
Generates lines by sweeping a keypoint pattern along path.
LEXTND
Extends a line at one end by using its slope.
LFILLT
Generates a fillet line between two intersecting lines.
LGEN
Generates additional lines from a pattern of lines.
LLIST
Lists the defined lines.
LPLOT
Displays the selected lines.
LREVERSE
Reverses the normal of a line, regardless of its connectivity or mesh
status.
LROTAT
Generates circular lines by rotating a keypoint pattern about an axis.
LSSCALE
Generates a scaled set of lines from a pattern of lines.
LSTR
Defines a straight line irrespective of the active coordinate system.
LSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected lines.
LSYMM
Generates lines from a line pattern by symmetry reflection.
LTAN
Generates a line at the end of, and tangent to, an existing line.
LTRAN
Transfers a pattern of lines to another coordinate system.
SPLINE
Generates a segmented spline through a series of keypoints.
SSLN
Selects and displays small lines in the model.
Table2.33Areas
A
AATT
ADELE
ADGL
ADRAG
AFILLT
AGEN
AL
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., areas.
Defines an area by connecting keypoints.
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed areas.
Deletes unmeshed areas.
Lists keypoints of an area that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
Generates areas by dragging a line pattern along a path.
Generates a fillet at the intersection of two areas.
Generates additional areas from a pattern of areas.
Generates an area bounded by previously defined lines.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
ALIST
ANORM
AOFFST
APLOT
AREVERSE
AROTAT
ARSCALE
ARSYM
ASKIN
ASUB
ASUM
ATRAN
GSUM
SPLOT
Lists the defined areas.

Reorients area normals.
Generates an area, offset from a given area.
Displays the selected areas.
Reverses the normal of an area, regardless of its connectivity or mesh
status.
Generates cylindrical areas by rotating a line pattern about an axis.
Generates a scaled set of areas from a pattern of areas.
Generates areas from an area pattern by symmetry reflection.
Generates an area by "skinning" a surface through guiding lines.
Generates an area using the shape of an existing area.
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected areas.
Transfers a pattern of areas to another coordinate system.
Displays the selected areas and a faceted view of their underlying
surfaces
Table2.34Volumes
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., volumes.
EXTOPT
Controls options relating to the generation of volume elements from
area elements.
GSUM
V
Defines a volume through keypoints.
VA
Generates a volume bounded by existing areas.
VDELE
Deletes unmeshed volumes.
VDGL
Lists keypoints of a volume that lie on a parametric degeneracy.
VDRAG
Generates volumes by dragging an area pattern along a path.
VEXT
Generates additional volumes by extruding areas.
VGEN
Generates additional volumes from a pattern of volumes.
VLIST
Lists the defined volumes.
VLSCALE
Generates a scaled set of volumes from a pattern of volumes.
VOFFST
Generates a volume, offset from a given area.
VPLOT
Displays the selected volumes.
VROTAT
Generates cylindrical volumes by rotating an area pattern about an
axis.
VSUM
Calculates and prints geometry statistics of the selected volumes.
VSYMM
Generates volumes from a volume pattern by symmetry reflection.
VTRAN
Transfers a pattern of volumes to another coordinate system.
Table2.35Booleans
These PREP7 commands are used to perform Boolean operations on solid model
entities.
AADD
Adds separate areas to create a single area.
AGLUE
Generates new areas by "gluing" areas.
AINA
Finds the intersection of areas.
AINP
Finds the pairwise intersection of areas.
AINV
Finds the intersection of an area with a volume.
AOVLAP
Overlaps areas.
APTN
Partitions areas.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
ASBA
ASBL
ASBV
ASBW
BOPTN
BTOL
LCSL
LGLUE
LINA
LINL
LINP
LINV
LOVLAP
LPTN
LSBA
LSBL
LSBV
LSBW
VADD
VGLUE
VINP
VINV
VOVLAP
VPTN
VSBA
VSBV
VSBW
Subtracts areas from areas.

Subtracts lines from areas.
Subtracts volumes from areas.
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from areas (divides
areas).
Specifies Boolean operation options.
Specifies the Boolean operation tolerances.
Divides intersecting lines at their point(s) of intersection.
Generates new lines by "gluing" lines.
Finds the intersection of a line with an area.
Finds the common intersection of lines.
Finds the pairwise intersection of lines.
Finds the intersection of a line with a volume.
Overlaps lines.
Partitions lines.
Subtracts areas from lines.
Subtracts lines from lines.
Subtracts volumes from lines.
Subtracts the intersection of the working plane from lines (divides
lines).
Adds separate volumes to create a single volume.
Generates new volumes by "gluing" volumes.
Finds the pairwise intersection of volumes.
Finds the intersection of volumes.
Overlaps volumes.
Partitions volumes.
Subtracts areas from volumes.
Subtracts volumes from volumes.
Subtracts intersection of the working plane from volumes (divides
volumes).
Table2.36Meshing
These PREP7
ACCAT
ACLEAR
AESIZE
AMAP
AMESH
AREFINE
CHKMSH
CLRMSHLN
CPCYC
CZDEL
CZMESH
DESIZE
EORIENT
EREFINE
ESIZE
commands are used to mesh solid models with nodes and elements.
Concatenates multiple areas in preparation for mapped meshing.
Deletes nodes and area elements associated with selected areas.
Specifies the element size to be meshed onto areas.
Generates a 2-D mapped mesh based on specified area corners.
Generates nodes and area elements within areas.
Refines the mesh around specified areas.
Checks area and volume entities for previous meshes.
Clears meshed entities.
Couples the two side faces of a cyclically symmetric model for
loadings that are the same on every segment.

Edits or clears cohesive zone sections.
Creates and meshes a cohesive zone group of elements.
Controls default element sizes.
Reorients solid element normals.
Refines the mesh around specified elements.
Specifies the default number of line divisions.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
ESYS
FVMESH
GSGDATA
IMESH
KATT
KCLEAR
KESIZE
KMESH
KREFINE
KSCON
LATT
LCCAT
LCLEAR
LESIZE
LMESH
LREFINE
MAT
MCHECK
MODMSH
MOPT
MSHAPE
MSHCOPY
MSHKEY
MSHMID
MSHPATTERN
NREFINE
PSMESH
REAL
RTHICK
SHPP
SMRTSIZE
TCHG
TIMP
TYPE
VATT
VCLEAR
VIMP
VMESH
VEORIENT
VSWEEP
Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.

Generates nodes and tetrahedral volume elements from detached
exterior area elements (facets).
Specifies the reference point and defines the geometry in the fiber
direction for the generalized plane strain element option.
Generates nodes and interface elements along lines or areas.
Associates attributes with the selected, unmeshed keypoints.
Deletes nodes and point elements associated with selected keypoints.
Specifies the edge lengths of the elements nearest a keypoint.
Generates nodes and point elements at keypoints.
Refines the mesh around specified keypoints.
Specifies a keypoint about which an area mesh will be skewed.
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed lines.
Concatenates multiple lines into one line for mapped meshing.
Deletes nodes and line elements associated with selected lines.
Specifies the divisions and spacing ratio on unmeshed lines.
Generates nodes and line elements along lines.
Refines the mesh around specified lines.
Sets the element material attribute pointer.
Checks mesh connectivity.
Controls the relationship of the solid model and the FE model.
Specifies meshing options.
For elements that support multiple shapes, specifies the element
shape to be used for meshing.
Simplifies the generation of meshes that have matching node element
patterns on two different line groups (in 2-D) or area groups (3-D).
Specifies whether free meshing or mapped meshing should be used to
mesh a model.
Specifies placement of midside nodes.
Specifies pattern to be used for mapped triangle meshing.
Refines the mesh around specified nodes.
Splits an initially continuous group of beam, shell, plane, or solid
elements into two unconnected groups, tied together with PRETS179
pretension elements.
Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
Defines variable thickness at nodes for shell elements.
Controls element shape checking.
Specifies meshing parameters for automatic (smart) element sizing.
Converts 20-node degenerate tetrahedral elements to their 10-node
non-degenerate counterparts.
Improves the quality of tetrahedral elements that are not associated
with a volume.
Sets the element type attribute pointer.
Associates element attributes with the selected, unmeshed volumes.
Deletes nodes and volume elements associated with selected volumes.
Improves the quality of the tetrahedral elements in the selected
volume(s).
Generates nodes and volume elements within volumes.
Specifies brick element orientation for volume mapped (hexahedron)
meshing.
Fills an existing unmeshed volume with elements by sweeping the
2.5. PREP7 Commands
mesh from an adjacent area throughout the volume.

Table2.37Nodes
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., nodes.
CENTER
Defines a node at the center of curvature of 2 or 3 nodes.
FILL
Generates a line of nodes between two existing nodes.
MOVE
Calculates and moves a node to an intersection.
N
Defines a node.
NAXIS
Generates or clears nodes for general axisymmetric element sections.
NANG
Rotates a nodal coordinate system by direction cosines.
NDELE
Deletes nodes.
NDIST
Calculates and lists the distance between two nodes.
NGEN
Generates additional nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NKPT
Defines a node at an existing keypoint location.
NLIST
Lists nodes.
NMODIF
Modifies an existing node.
NORA
Rotates nodal coordinate systems to surface normal.
NPLOT
Displays nodes.
NREAD
Reads nodes from a file.
NROTAT
Rotates nodal coordinate systems into the active system.
NRRANG
Specifies the range of nodes to be read from the node file.
NSCALE
Generates a scaled set of nodes from a pattern of nodes.
NSMOOTH
Smooths selected nodes among selected elements.
NSYM
Generates a reflected set of nodes.
NWRITE
Writes nodes to a file.
QUAD
Generates a quadratic line of nodes from three nodes.
SOURCE
Defines a default location for undefined nodes or keypoints.
TRANSFER
Transfers a pattern of nodes to another coordinate system.
Table2.38Elements
These PREP7 commands are used to create, modify, list, etc., elements.
AFSURF
Generates surface elements overlaid on the surface of existing solid
elements and assigns the extra node as the closes fluid element node.
E
Defines an element by node connectivity.
EDELE
Deletes selected elements from the model.
EGEN
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
EINTF
Defines two-node elements between coincident nodes.
ELIST
Lists the elements.
EMID
Adds or removes midside nodes.
EMODIF
Modifies a previously defined element.
EMORE
Adds more nodes to the just-defined element.
EMTGEN
Generates a set of TRANS126 elements
EN
Defines an element by its number and node connectivity.
ENDRELEASE
Specifies degrees of freedom to be decoupled for end release.
ENGEN
Generates elements from an existing pattern.
ENORM
Reorients shell element normals or line element node connectivity.
ENSYM
Generates elements by symmetry reflection.
EORIENT
Reorients solid element normals.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
EPLOT
EREAD
EREINF
ERRANG
ESURF
ESYM
ESYS
EWRITE
FIPLOT
INISTATE
LAYLIST
LAYPLOT
LFSURF
MAT
NDSURF
REAL
SWADD
SWDEL
SWGEN
SWLIST
TSHAP
TYPE
UPGEOM
USRDOF
USRELEM
Produces an element display.

Reads elements from a file.
Generates reinforcing elements from selected existing (base)
elements.
Specifies the element range to be read from a file.
Generates elements overlaid on the free faces of existing elements.
Generates elements from a pattern by a symmetry reflection.
Sets the element coordinate system attribute pointer.
Writes elements to a file.
Plots a FiberSIM model.
Applies initial state data to an element or a selection of elements.
Lists real constants material properties for layered elements.
Displays the layer stacking sequence for layered elements.
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing solid
elements and assigns the extra node as the closest fluid element
node.
Sets the element material attribute pointer.
Generates surface elements overlaid on the edge of existing elements
and assigns the extra node as the closest fluid element node.
Sets the element real constant set attribute pointer.
Adds more surfaces to an existing spot weld set.
Deletes spot weld sets.
Creates a new spot weld set.
Lists spot weld sets.
Defines simple 2-D and 3-D geometric surfaces for target segment
elements.
Sets the element type attribute pointer.
Adds displacements from a previous analysis and updates the
geometry to the deformed configuration.
Specifies the degrees of freedom for the user-defined element
USER300.
Specifies the characteristics of the user-defined element USER300.
Table2.39Superelements
These PREP7 commands are used to create and modify superelements.
SE
Defines a superelement.
SEDLIST
Lists the degree-of-freedom solution of a superelement after the use
pass.
SELIST
Lists the contents of a superelement matrix file.
SESYMM
Performs a symmetry operation on a superelement within the use
pass.
SETRAN
Creates a superelement from an existing superelement.
Table2.40Digitizing
These PREP7 commands are used to define nodes by tablet digitizing.
DIG
Digitizes nodes to a surface.
DMOVE
Digitizes nodes on surfaces and along intersections.
DSET
Sets the scale and drawing plane orientation for a digitizing tablet.
DSURF
Defines the surface upon which digitized nodes lie.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
Table2.41Coupled Degrees of Freedom

These PREP7 commands are used to define, modify, list, etc., coupled degrees of
freedom.
CP
Defines (or modifies) a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPDELE
Deletes coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPINTF
Defines coupled degrees of freedom at an interface.
CPLGEN
Generates sets of coupled nodes from an existing set.
CPLIST
Lists the coupled degree of freedom sets.
CPNGEN
Defines, modifies, or adds to a set of coupled degrees of freedom.
CPSGEN
Generates sets of coupled nodes from existing sets.
Table2.42Constraint Equations
These PREP7 commands are used to define, modify, list, etc., constraint equations.
CE
Defines a constraint equation relating degrees of freedom.
CECYC
Generates the constraint equations for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CEDELE
Deletes constraint equations.
CEINTF
Generates constraint equations at an interface.
CELIST
Lists the constraint equations.
CERIG
Defines a rigid region.
CESGEN
Generates a set of constraint equations from existing sets.
RBE3
Distributes the force/moment applied at the master node to a set of
slave nodes, taking into account the geometry of the slave nodes as
well as weighting factors.
Table2.43Element Reordering
These
NOORDER
WAVES
WERASE
WFRONT
WMID
WMORE
WSORT
WSTART
PREP7 commands are used to reorder the model wavefront.

Re-establishes the original element ordering.
Initiates reordering.
Erases all reordering wave lists.
Estimates wavefront statistics.
Specifies reordering options for the WAVES command.
Adds more nodes to the starting wave list.
Initiates element reordering based upon a geometric sort.
Defines a starting wave list.
Table2.44FLOTRAN Options
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the options and output controls
FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA
Sets up a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLDATA1
Controls which features of the solution algorithm are activated.
FLDATA2
Sets iteration and output controls for steady state analyses.
FLDATA3
Sets the convergence monitors for the degree of freedom set.
FLDATA4
Sets controls for transient analyses based on transient time and
convergence monitors or sets time integration method.
FLDATA4A
Sets controls for transient analyses based on the number of time
steps.
FLDATA5
Sets output and storage controls.
FLDATA6
Controls the output of the convergence monitor.
for a
2.5. PREP7 Commands
Table2.45FLOTRAN Property
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the fluid properties for a FLOTRAN CFD
analysis.
FLDATA7
Specifies the type of fluid property.
FLDATA8
Specifies the NOMI coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA9
Specifies the COF1 coefficient of the fluid property equation.
FLDATA10
FLDATA11
FLDATA12
Sets the property update frequency flag.
FLDATA13
Sets the property variation flag.
Table2.46FLOTRAN Operating
These PREP7 commands are used to specify the operating conditions for a FLOTRAN
CFD analysis.
FLDATA14
Specifies the reference temperature.
FLDATA15
Specifies the reference pressure.
FLDATA16
Specifies the bulk modulus parameter.
FLDATA17
Specifies the specific heat ratio.
Table2.47FLOTRAN Solver
These PREP7 commands are used to control the solver for a FLOTRAN CFD analysis.
FLDATA18
Selects the algebraic solver.
FLDATA19
Specifies the number of TDMA sweeps.
FLDATA20
Specifies the number of conjugate direction search vectors.
FLDATA20A
Specifies the amount of fill-in when preconditioning the coefficient
matrix.
FLDATA20B
Specifies the number of fill-ins for the ILU preconditioner.
FLDATA21
Specifies the convergence monitor.
FLDATA22
Specifies the maximum number of semi-direct iterations.
FLDATA23
Specifies the solver minimum normalized rate of change.
Table2.48FLOTRAN Turbulence
These PREP7 commands are used to control the turbulence setting for a FLOTRAN CFD
analysis.
FLDATA24
Sets the turbulence model and the constants used in the Standard k-
Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
FLDATA24A
Sets constants for the Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG).
FLDATA24B
Sets constants for the New k- Model due to Shih (NKE).
FLDATA24C
Sets constants for the Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR).
FLDATA24D
Sets constants for the Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL).
FLDATA24E
Sets constants for the k- Model.
FLDATA24F
Sets the turbulent production clip factor for the Shear Stress Transport
(SST) model.
FLDATA24G
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST)
model.
FLDATA24H
Sets constants in the k- regime for the Shear Stress Transport (SST)
model.
FLDATA40
Controls activation of thermal stabilization near walls.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
Table2.49FLOTRAN Stability
These PREP7 commands are used to control the stability settings for a FLOTRAN CFD
analysis.
FLDATA25
Sets solution and property relaxation factors.
FLDATA26
Sets stability controls.
FLDATA34
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors.
Table2.50FLOTRAN Miscellaneous
These PREP7 commands are used to control miscellaneous settings for a FLOTRAN
CFD analysis.
FLDATA27
Controls dependent variable printing.
FLDATA28
Specifies that variable results are to be replaced.
FLDATA29
Re-initializes a results variable.
FLDATA30
Controls the quadrature orders.
FLDATA31
Specifies dependent variable caps.
FLDATA32
Controls restart options.
FLDATA33
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term.
FLDATA35
Specifies tolerances for the lower and upper bound of the volume
fraction.
FLDATA36
Specifies ambient reference values outside of the fluid for the volume
of fluid (VOF) method.
FLDATA37
Specifies the segregated solution algorithm.
FLDATA38
Specifies the mass type for a fluid transient analysis.
FLDATA39
Specifies remeshing parameters for transient fluid flow and fluid-solid
interaction analyses.
ICVFRC
Sets the initial volume fraction field for a geometry.
PERI
Specifies periodic boundary conditions in an incompressible flow
analysis.
PLVFRC
Displays volume fractions in a volume of fluid (VOF) analysis.
Table2.51FLOTRAN Multiple Species

These PREP7 commands are used for multiple species transport in a FLOTRAN CFD
analysis.
MSADV
Specifies the approach to discretize the advection term in a species
transport equation.
MSCAP
Activates and controls mass fraction capping for a species.
MSDATA
Defines multiple species data applicable to all species.
MSMASS
Specifies the mass type for a transient species analysis.
MSMETH
Specifies the method of solution of the species transport equations.
MSMIR
Sets modified inertial relaxation factors for multiple species.
MSNOMF
Specifies the initial value of nominal mass fraction for a species.
MSPROP
Defines the fluid properties of a species.
MSQUAD
Specifies the quadrature order for multiple species elements.
MSRELAX
Specifies relaxation factors for a multiple species transport analysis.
MSSOLU
Specifies solution options for multiple species transport.
MSSPEC
Specifies the name, molecular weight, and Schmidt number of a
species.
MSTERM
Sets the convergence monitors for species.
MSVARY
Allows species properties to vary between global iterations.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
Table2.52Status
These PREP7 commands are for use with the STAT command.
AREAS
Specifies "Areas" as the subsequent status topic.
BOOL
Specifies "Booleans" as the subsequent status topic.
CEQN
Specifies "Constraint equations" as the subsequent status topic.
COUPLE
Specifies "Node coupling" as the subsequent status topic.
DIGIT
Specifies "Node digitizing" as the subsequent status topic.
ELEM
Specifies "Elements" as the subsequent status topic.
ETYPE
Specifies "Element types" as the subsequent status topic.
FATIGUE
Specifies "Fatigue data status" as the subsequent status topic.
FEBODY
Specifies "Body loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
FECONS
Specifies "Constraints on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FEFOR
Specifies "Forces on nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
FESURF
Specifies "Surface loads on elements" as the subsequent status topic.
FLOTRAN
Specifies "FLOTRAN data settings" as the subsequent status topic.
GEOMETRY
Specifies "Geometry" as the subsequent status topic.
KEYPTS
Specifies "Keypoints" as the subsequent status topic.
LINE
Specifies "Lines" as the subsequent status topic.
MATER
Specifies "Material properties" as the subsequent status topic.
MESHING
Specifies "Meshing" as the subsequent status topic.
NODES
Specifies "Nodes" as the subsequent status topic.
PRIM
Specifies "Solid model primitives" as the subsequent status topic.
RCON
Specifies "Real constants" as the subsequent status topic.
REORDER
Specifies "Model reordering" as the subsequent status topic.
SELM
Specifies "Superelements" as the subsequent status topic.
TBLE
Specifies "Data table properties" as the subsequent status topic.
VOLUMES
Specifies "Volumes" as the subsequent status topic.
Table2.53Explicit Dynamics
These PREP7 commands are used for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDASMP
Creates a part assembly to be used in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDBOUND
Defines a boundary plane for sliding or cyclic symmetry.
EDBX
Creates a box shaped volume to be used in a contact definition.
EDCGEN
Specifies contact parameters for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCLIST
Lists all contact entity specifications in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCMORE
Specifies additional contact parameters for a given contact definition
in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCNSTR
Defines various types of constraints for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCONTACT
Specifies contact surface controls for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDCRB
Constrains two rigid bodies to act as one in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
EDCURVE
Specifies data curves for an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDDBL
Sets the single or double precision version of LS-DYNA into effect.
EDDC
Deletes or deactivates/reactivates contact entity specifications in an
explicit dynamic analysis.
EDIPART
Defines inertia for rigid parts in an explicit dynamic analysis.
EDLCS
Defines a local coordinate system for use in explicit dynamic analysis.
EDMP
Defines material properties for an explicit dynamic analysis.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
EDNB
EDNDTSD
EDNROT
EDPART
EDPC
EDSP
EDWELD
Defines a nonreflecting boundary in an explicit dynamic analysis.

Allows smoothing of noisy data for explicit dynamic analyses and
provides a graphical representation of the data.
Applies a rotated coordinate nodal constraint in an explicit dynamic
analysis.
Configures parts for an explicit dynamic analysis.
Selects and plots explicit dynamic contact entities.
Specifies small penetration checking for contact entities in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
Defines a massless spotweld or generalized weld for use in an explicit
dynamic analysis.
Table2.54Sections
BSAX
BSM1
BSM2
BSMD
BSS1
BSS2
BSTE
BSTQ
CBMD
CBMX
CBTE
CBTMP
SDELETE
SECCONTROLS
SECDATA
SECJOINT
/SECLIB
SECLOCK
SECNUM
SECOFFSET
SECPLOT
SECREAD
SECSTOP
SECTYPE
SECWRITE
SFLEX
These PREP7 commands manage sections.

Specifies axial strain and force for a nonlinear general beam section.
Specifies bending moment and curvature in plane XZ for a nonlinear
general beam section.
Specifies bending moment and curvature in plane XY for a nonlinear
Specifies mass density for a nonlinear general beam section.
Specifies transverse shear force and strain in plane XZ for a nonlinear
Specifies transverse shear force and strain in plane XY for a nonlinear
Specifies a thermal expansion coefficient for a nonlinear general beam
section.
Specifies cross section torque and twist for a nonlinear general beam
section.
Specifies preintegrated mass-density matrix for composite-beam
sections.
Specifies preintegrated cross-section stiffness for composite-beam
sections.
Specifies a thermal expansion coefficient for a composite-beam
section.
Specifies a temperature for the composite-beam section matrix.
Deletes sections from the database.
Supplements or overrides default section properties.
Describes the geometry of a section.
Defines local coordinate systems at joint element nodes and other
data for joint elements.
Sets the default section library path for the SECREAD command.
Specifies locks on the element degrees of freedom.
Sets the element section attribute pointer.
Defines the section offset for cross sections.
Plots the geometry of a section to scale.
Reads a custom section library or a user-defined section mesh into
ANSYS.
Specifies stops on the element degrees of freedom.
Associates section type information with a section ID number.
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh section information.
Sets section flexibility factors for pipe elements.
2.5. PREP7 Commands
SLIST
Summarizes the section properties for all defined sections in the
current session of ANSYS.

Associates an ocean environment with the most recently defined
element section. Used with the ocean family of commands.

Specifies the bending thermal effects quantity for a preintegrated shell
section.
Specifies the membrane thermal effects quantity for a preintegrated
shell section.
Specifies the membrane stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell
section.
Specifies the coupling stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell
section.
Specifies the bending stiffness quantity for a preintegrated shell
section.
Specifies the transverse shear stiffness quantity for a preintegrated
shell section.
Specifies the mass density and stress-free initial temperature for a
preintegrated shell section.
SOCEAN
SSBT
SSMT
SSPA
SSPB
SSPD
SSPE
SSPM
Table2.55Ocean
These PREP7 commands define ocean environment data.

To associate your ocean environment with an element section, issue the SOCEAN
command.
OCDATA
Defines an ocean environment using non-table data.
OCDELETE
Deletes all ocean environment data associated with the specified
ocean ID number ( OCID ) from the ANSYS database.

Summarizes all currently defined ocean environments.
OCLIST
OCTABLE
Defines an ocean environment using table data.
OCTYPE
Specifies the type of ocean environment data to follow (basic, current,
or wave).
Table2.56Morphing
These PREP7 commands are used to adjust the finite element mesh in the nonstructural regions to coincide with the deflections of the structural regions.
MORPH
Specifies morphing and remeshing controls.
DAMORPH
Move nodes in selected areas to conform to structural displacements.
DEMORPH
Move nodes in selected elements to conform to structural
displacements.
DVMORPH
Move nodes in selected volumes to conform to structural
displacements.
Table2.57Trefftz Domain
These PREP7 commands are used in the Trefftz method for modeling the open
domain.
TZAMESH
Meshes the areas of a volume to create Trefftz nodes.
TZDELE
Deletes the Trefftz superelement, associated constraint equations and
all supporting Trefftz files.
TZEGEN
Generates a Trefftz domain substructure and defines a Trefftz
superelement for use in electrostatic analysis.

Table2.58Perfectly Matched Layers
2.5. PREP7 Commands
This PREP7 command is used to create perfectly matched layers (PMLs) designed to
absorb high frequency waves.
PMLOPT
Defines perfectly matched layers (PMLs) for a high-frequency analysis.
PMLSIZE
Determines number of PML layers.
Table2.59Special Purpose
These PREP7 commands are used for special-purpose operations.
/CYCEXPAND
Verifies a cyclically symmetric model by graphically expanding it
partially or into the full 360 degrees.
CYCLIC
Specifies a cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCOPT
Specifies solution options for a cyclic symmetry analysis.
EMSYM
Specifies circular symmetry for electromagnetic sources.
HFEREFINE
Automatically refines high-frequency tetrahedral elements (HF119) or
lists high-frequency brick elements (HF120) with the largest error.
Adds two extra nodes from FLUID116 elements to SURF152 elements
MSTOLE
for convection analyses.
PERBC2D
Generates periodic constraints for 2-D planar magnetic field analyses.
PHYSICS
Writes, reads, or lists all element information.
RACE
Defines a "racetrack" current source.
AFLIST
AFLIST
AFLIST
Lists the current data in the database.
PREP7 : Database
Notes
Lists the current data and specifications in the database. If batch, lists all appropriate data. If interactive,
lists only summaries.
Menu Paths
Utility Menu>List>Other>Database Summary
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_AFLIST.html[28/04/2013 07:19:57 p.m.]
Mechanical APDL Tutorials
Table of Contents
Welcome to the ANSYS Tutorials
1. Start Here
1.1. About These Tutorials
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.1.3.
1.1.4.
Preparing Your Screen

Formats and Conventions Used
Jobnames and Preferences
Choosing a Tutorial
1.2. Glossary
2. Structural Tutorial
2.1. Static Analysis of a Corner Bracket
2.1.1.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
2.1.6.
2.1.7.
2.1.8.
Problem Specification
Problem Description
Build Geometry
Define Materials
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
3. Thermal Tutorial
3.1. Solidification of a Casting
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.1.3.
3.1.4.
3.1.5.
3.1.6.
3.1.7.
3.1.8.
3.1.9.
Problem Description
Prepare for a Thermal Analysis
Input Geometry
Define Materials
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
4. Electromagnetics Tutorial
4.1. Magnetic Analysis of a Solenoid Actuator
4.1.1.
4.1.2.
4.1.3.
4.1.4.
4.1.5.
4.1.6.
4.1.7.
4.1.8.
Problem Description
Input Geometry
Define Materials
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
5. Micro-Electromechanical System (MEMS) Tutorial

5.1. Multiphysics Analysis of a Thermal Actuator
5.1.1. Problem Specification
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_tut/Hlp_UI_Tutorials.html[28/04/2013 07:20:17 p.m.]
5.1.3.
5.1.4.
5.1.5.
5.1.6.
5.1.7.
5.1.8.
Import Geometry
Define Materials
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
6. Explicit Dynamics Tutorial

6.1. Drop Test of a Container (Explicit Dynamics)
6.1.1.
6.1.2.
6.1.3.
6.1.4.
6.1.5.
6.1.6.
6.1.7.
6.1.8.
6.1.9.
Problem Description
Define Analysis Type
Input Geometry
Define Element Type, Real Constants, Material Model Properties
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
7. Contact Tutorial
7.1. Interference Fit and Pin Pull-Out Contact Analysis
7.1.1.
7.1.2.
7.1.3.
7.1.4.
7.1.5.
7.1.6.
7.1.7.
7.1.8.
7.1.9.
Problem Description
Input Geometry
Define Material Property and Element Type
Generate Mesh
Specify Solution Criteria
Load Step 1
Load Step 2
Postprocessing
8. Modal Tutorial
8.1. Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing
8.1.1.
8.1.2.
8.1.3.
8.1.4.
8.1.5.
8.1.6.
8.1.7.
8.1.8.
Problem Description
Input Geometry
Define Materials
Generate Mesh
Apply Loads
Obtain Solution
Review Results
9. Probabilistic Design System (PDS) Tutorial

9.1. Probabilistic Design of a Simple Plate with a Single Force Load
9.1.1.
9.1.2.
9.1.3.
9.1.4.
9.1.5.
9.1.6.
9.1.7.
Problem Description
Specify Analysis File
Define Input and Output
Obtain Solution
Perform Postprocessing
Generate Report
10. ANIMATE Program
The ANSYS Tutorials provide an introduction to the extensive capabilities of the ANSYS family of
products. Each tutorial is a complete step-by-step ANSYS analysis procedure. You can choose from
several analysis disciplines. The tutorials are designed to be run interactively, on the same screen as the
ANSYS program. Included are full color ANSYS graphics and animations that are exact replicas of what
appear at several points within the steps of the tutorials. A glossary of terms is also included that you
can view as a stand-alone document with an alphabetical listing of the terms, or you can view the
definition of terms on demand by simply clicking on linked terms within the context of the tutorials.
Before you begin a tutorial, read the Start Here section for recommendations on preparing your screen
for displaying the tutorial window on the same screen as ANSYS, as well as descriptions of the formats
and conventions used in the tutorials.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_tut/tutpreface.html[28/04/2013 07:20:23 p.m.]
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis
Chapter3:Modal Analysis
Use modal analysis to determine the vibration characteristics (natural frequencies and mode shapes) of
a structure or a machine component while it is being designed. It can also serve as a starting point for
another, more detailed, dynamic analysis, such as a transient dynamic analysis, a harmonic response
analysis, or a spectrum analysis.
The following modal analysis topics are available:
Uses for Modal Analysis
Understanding the Modal Analysis Process
Building the Model for a Modal Analysis
Applying Prestress Effects in a Modal Analysis
Modal Analysis Examples
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods
Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis
Using the Residual-Vector Method to Improve Accuracy
Reusing Eigenmodes
Applying Multiple Loads for use in Mode-Superposition Harmonic and Transient Analysis
Reusing Extracted Eigenmodes in LANB, LANPCG and SNODE method
Enforced Motion Method for Mode-Superposition Transient and Harmonic Analyses
3.1. Uses for Modal Analysis
3.1.Uses for Modal Analysis

You use modal analysis to determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure. The
natural frequencies and mode shapes are important parameters in the design of a structure for dynamic
loading conditions. They are also required if you want to perform a spectrum analysis or a modesuperposition harmonic or transient analysis.
You can perform a modal analysis on a prestressed structure, such as a spinning turbine blade. Another
useful feature is modal cyclic symmetry, which allows you to review the mode shapes of a cyclically
symmetric structure by modeling just a sector of it.
Modal analysis in the ANSYS, Inc. family of products is a linear analysis. Any nonlinearities, such as
plasticity and contact (gap) elements, are ignored even if they are defined. You can select from among
several mode-extraction methods: Block Lanczos, Supernode, PCG Lanczos, reduced, unsymmetric,
damped, and QR damped. The damped and QR damped methods allow you to include damping in the
structure. The QR damped method also allows for unsymmetrical damping and stiffness matrices. Details
about mode-extraction methods are covered later in this section.
3.2. Understanding the Modal Analysis Process
3.2.Understanding the Modal Analysis Process

The general process for a modal analysis consists of these primary operations:
1. Build the model.
2. Apply loads and obtain the solution.
3. Expand the modes.
4. Review the results.
3.3. Building the Model for a Modal Analysis
3.3.Building the Model for a Modal Analysis

When building your model with the intention of performing a modal analysis, the following conditions
apply:
Only linear behavior is valid in a modal analysis.
If you specify nonlinear elements, ANSYS treats them as linear. For example, if you include contact
elements, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status and never change.
Material properties can be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
Define both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in
some form). ANSYS ignores nonlinear properties.
If applying element damping, define the required real constants for the specific element type
(COMBIN14, COMBIN37, and so on). For more details about damping definition, see Damping.
Chapter 2: Loading
Chapter2:Loading
The primary objective of a finite element analysis is to examine how a structure or component responds
to certain loading conditions. Specifying the proper loading conditions is, therefore, a key step in the
analysis. You can apply loads on the model in a variety of ways in the ANSYS program. With the help of
load step options, you can control how the loads are actually used during solution.
The following loading topics are available:
What Are Loads?
Load Steps, Substeps, and Equilibrium Iterations
The Role of Time in Tracking
Stepped Versus Ramped Loads
Applying Loads
Specifying Load Step Options
Creating Multiple Load Step Files
Defining Pretension in a Joint Fastener
2.1. What Are Loads?
2.1.What Are Loads?

The word loads in ANSYS terminology includes boundary conditions and externally or internally applied
forcing functions, as illustrated in Figure 2.1. Examples of loads in different disciplines are:
Structural: displacements, velocities, accelerations, forces, pressures, temperatures (for thermal strain),
gravity
Thermal: temperatures, heat flow rates, convections, internal heat generation, infinite surface
Magnetic: magnetic potentials, magnetic flux, magnetic current segments, source current density, infinite
surface
Electric: electric potentials (voltage), electric current, electric charges, charge densities, infinite surface
Fluid: velocities, pressures
Figure2.1Loads
Boundary conditions, as well as other types of loading, are shown.
Loads are divided into six categories: DOF constraints, forces (concentrated loads), surface loads, body
loads, inertia loads, and coupled-field loads.
A DOF constraint fixes a degree of freedom (DOF) to a known value. Examples of constraints are
specified displacements and symmetry boundary conditions in a structural analysis, prescribed
temperatures in a thermal analysis, and flux-parallel boundary conditions.
In a structural analysis, a DOF constraint can be replaced by its differentiation form, which is a
velocity constraint. In a structural transient analysis, an acceleration can also be applied, which is
the second order differentiation form of the corresponding DOF constraint.
A force is a concentrated load applied at a node in the model. Examples are forces and moments in
a structural analysis, heat flow rates in a thermal analysis, and current segments in a magnetic
field analysis.
A surface load is a distributed load applied over a surface. Examples are pressures in a structural
analysis and convections and heat fluxes in a thermal analysis.
A body load is a volumetric or field load. Examples are temperatures and fluences in a structural
analysis, heat generation rates in a thermal analysis, and current densities in a magnetic field
analysis.
2.1. What Are Loads?
Inertia loads are those attributable to the inertia (mass matrix) of a body, such as gravitational
acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration. You use them mainly in a structural
analysis.
Coupled-field loads are simply a special case of one of the above loads, where results from one
analysis are used as loads in another analysis. For example, you can apply magnetic forces
calculated in a magnetic field analysis as force loads in a structural analysis.
3.5.Reviewing the Results

Results from a modal analysis (that is, the modal expansion pass) are written to the structural results
file, Jobname.RST. Results consist of:
Natural frequencies
Expanded mode shapes
Relative stress and force distributions (if requested).
You can review these results in POST1 (/POST1), the general postprocessor. Some typical
postprocessing operations for a modal analysis are described below. For a complete description of all
postprocessing functions, see "An Overview of Postprocessing" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
3.5.1.Points to Remember
If you want to review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the
solution was calculated.
3.5.2.Reviewing Results Data

1. Read in results data from the appropriate substep. Each mode is stored on the results file as a
separate substep. If you expand six modes, for instance, your results file will have one load step
consisting of six substeps.
Command(s):
GUI:
SET, LSTEP, SBSTEP

MainMenu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Load Step
If the results data are complex, you can retrieve the real part, the imaginary part, the amplitude or
the phase using KIMG in the SET command.
SET, LSTEP, SBSTEP , , KIMG
2. Perform any desired POST1 operations. Typical modal analysis POST1 operations are explained
below:
3.5.3.Option: Listing All Frequencies

You may want to list the frequencies of all modes expanded. A sample output from this command is
shown below.
*****
SET
1
2
3
4
INDEX OF DATA SETS ON RESULTS FILE *****

TIME/FREQ
LOAD STEP
SUBSTEP CUMULATIVE
22.973
1
1
1
40.476
1
2
2
78.082
1
3
3
188.34
1
4
4
Command(s):
GUI:
SET,LIST
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results
3.5.4.Option: Display Deformed Shape

Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
Use the KUND field on PLDISP to overlay the nondeformed shape on the display.
3.5.5.Option: List Master Degree of Freedom

Command(s):
GUI:
MLIST,ALL
MainMenu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> List All
Note: To display the master degrees of freedom graphically, plot the nodes
(UtilityMenu> Plot> Nodes or command NLIST).
3.5.6.Option: Line Element Results

Command(s):
GUI:
ETABLE
MainMenu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table
For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use the ETABLE command to access derived data
(stresses, strains, and so on). Results data are identified by a combination of a label and a sequence
number or component name on the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General
Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
3.5.7.Option: Contour Displays

Command(s): PLNSOL or
PLESOL
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or
GUI:
Element Solu
Use these options to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX,
EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the nondeformed shape on
the display.
You can also contour element table data and line element data:
Command(s): PLETAB,
PLLS
MainMenu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table
GUI:
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res
Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the
PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where
elements of different materials, different shell thicknesses, or other
discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
"Selecting and Components" in the Basic Analysis Guide ) to select elements of
the same material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL.
3.5.8.Option: Tabular Listings

PRNSOL (nodal results)
Command(s):
PRRSOL (reaction data), and so on
NSORT,
ESORT
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes
GUI:
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Elems
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them.
3.5.9.Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, EXPASS,
MXPAND, SET, and PLDISP commands.
/POST1
/POST1
/POST1
Enters the database results postprocessor.
SESSION :
Processor Entry
POST1 : Set Up
Notes
Enters the general database results postprocessor (POST1). All load symbols (/PBC, /PSF, or /PBF)
are automatically turned off with this command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_POST1.html[28/04/2013 07:23:56 p.m.]
/PBC
/PBC
/PBC, Item , --, KEY , MIN , MAX , ABS

Shows boundary condition (BC) symbols and values on displays.
GRAPHICS : Labeling
Item
Label identifying the item:

U Applied translational constraints (UX, UY, UZ).
ROT Applied rotational constraints (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ).
TEMP Applied temperatures (TEMP, TBOT, TE2, TE3, . . ., TTOP).
PRES Applied fluid pressures.
V Applied flow velocities (VX, VY, VZ).
SP0n Mass fraction of species n, where n = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is given a
user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0 n.
ENKE Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
ENDS Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
VOLT Applied voltages.
MAG Applied scalar magnetic potentials.
A Applied vector magnetic potentials.
CHRG Applied electric charge.
ForFORC Applied structural forces (FX, FY, FZ).
MorMOME Applied structural moments (MX, MY, MZ).
HEAT Applied heat flows (HEAT, HBOT, HE2, HE3, . . ., HTOP).
FLOW Applied fluid flow.
AMPS Applied current flow.
FLUX Applied magnetic flux.
CSG Applied magnetic current segments.
MAST Master degrees of freedom.
CP Coupled nodes.
CE Nodes in constraint equations.
NFOR POST1 nodal forces.
NMOM POST1 nodal moments
RFOR POST1 reaction forces.
RMOM POST1 reaction moments (MX, MY, MZ).
PATH Path geometry (undistorted) associated with the PATH command after a PDEF
or PVECT command has been issued.
ACEL Global acceleration (ACELX, ACELY, ACELZ vector).
OMEG Global angular velocity (OMEGX, OMEGY, OMEGZ vector) and acceleration
(DOMEGX, DOMEGY, DOMEGZ vector).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_PBC.html[28/04/2013 07:24:05 p.m.]
/PBC
WELD Applied spotwelds (ANSYS LS-DYNA).

ALL Represents all appropriate labels.
-KEY
Unused field.
Symbol key:
0 Do not show symbol.
1 Show symbol.
2 Plot value next to symbol.
MIN
MAX
ABS
Minimum value in a range of values plotted on screen.

Maximum value in a range of values plotted on screen.
Absolute number. If KEY = 2 and ABS = 0, a number falling between the MIN and MAX is displayed.
If ABS is not specified, it defaults to 0. If KEY = 2 and ABS = 1, an absolute value falling between
the MIN and MAX is displayed. ABS = 1 lets you eliminate the display of numbers whose absolute
values are less than a desired tolerance. For example, if ABS = 1, MIN = 10 and MAX = 1e8, values
such as .83646 and -5.59737 are not displayed.
Command Default
No symbols displayed.
Notes
The /PBC command adds degree of freedom constraint, force load, and other symbols to displays.
Symbols are applied to the selected nodes only. All arrow and arrowhead symbols are oriented in the
nodal coordinate system and lie in two perpendicular planes. Force arrows are scaled proportional to
their magnitude. (If KEY = 1, use /VSCALE to change arrow length.) For scalar quantities, the specific
component direction (i.e., x, y, or z) of the symbol has no meaning, but the positive or negative sense
(e.g., positive or negative x) represents a positive or negative scalar value, respectively.
The effects of the /PBC command are not cumulative (that is, the command does not modify an
existing setting from a previously issued /PBC command). If you issue multiple /PBC commands during
an analysis, only the setting specified by the most recent /PBC command applies.
Use /PSTATUS or /PBC,STAT to display settings. Use /PBC,DEFA to reset all specifications back to
default. See the /PSF and /PBF commands for other display symbols.
In a cyclic symmetry analysis, the /PBC command is deactivated when cyclic expansion is active
(/CYCEXPAND,,ON). To view boundary conditions on the basic sector, deactivate cyclic expansion
(/CYCEXPAND,,OFF) and issue this command:/PBC,ALL,,1
Issuing the command /PBC,PATH, ,1 displays all defined paths.
The /PBC command is valid in any processor.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane
Main Menu>General Postproc>Path Operations>Plot Paths
/PBC
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Define Path>On Working Plane

Main Menu>Preprocessor>Path Operations>Plot Paths
Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Symbols
MSSPEC
MSSPEC
MSSPEC, SPNUM , Name , MOLWT , SCHMIDT

Specifies the name, molecular weight, and Schmidt number of a species.
PREP7 : FLOTRAN Multiple Species
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> <> <> PP <> <> <>
SPNUM
Name
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.

Name to be assigned to the species, up to 4 characters long. Defaults to SP01 for species 1, SP02
for species 2, ..., SP06 for species 6. This name can be used in place of the species number when
specifying mass fraction boundary conditions and in postprocessing.
Note: The GUI always shows the default names, not the user-defined names.) Name
should not be the same as an existing degree of freedom label.
MOLWT
Molecular weight for the species. Required only for gases (determined by the property type on
MSPROP command). Defaults to 29.0.
SCHMIDT
Schmidt number (diffusion term divisor) for the species. Required only for gases (determined by
the property type on MSPROP command). Defaults to 1.0.
Notes
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction.This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_MSSPEC.html[28/04/2013 07:24:11 p.m.]
MSPROP
MSPROP
MSPROP, SPNUM , Label , Type , NOMINAL, COF1 , COF2 , COF3

Defines the fluid properties of a species.
PREP7 : FLOTRAN Multiple Species

MP <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> <> <> PP <> <> <>
SPNUM
Label
Species number, from 1 to 6. Must be specified.

Label identifying the property being defined:
DENS Density.
VISC Viscosity.
COND Thermal conductivity.
MDIF Mass diffusion coefficient.
SPHT Specific heat.
Type
Type of property:
CONSTANT Constant property (default). The property does not vary with temperature.
LIQUID Liquid property. Density varies according to a second order polynomial
relationship, and all other properties follow Sutherland's law for liquids.
GAS Gas property. Density varies according to the ideal gas law, and all other
properties follow Sutherland's law for gases.
NOMINAL
Nominal value of the property being defined. For CONSTANT fluid types, the property remains at
this value and does not vary. For GAS and LIQUID property types, this is the value of the property
corresponding to the temperature defined by COF1 .
COF1
Temperature corresponding to the NOMINAL value of the property (for GAS and LIQUID property
types only; see Notes section). Not required for Label = SPHT.
COF2 , COF3
Second and third coefficients for temperature variation of the property. Not required for Label =
SPHT.
Notes
If the property type is CONSTANT, the equation used is as follows:
Lab
= NOMINAL
If the property type is LIQUID, a second order polynomial relationship is used for density, and
Sutherland's law for liquids is used for the other properties:
DENS = NOMINAL + COF2 *(T-COF1 ) + COF3 *(T-COF1 ) 2
Property = NOMINAL * EXP[ COF2 *(1/T-1/COF1 ) + COF3 *(1/T-1COF1 ) 2 ]
where T is the temperature of the node where the property is being calculated.
If the property type is GAS, the ideal gas law is used for density, and Sutherland's law for gases is used
for other properties:
DENS = NOMINAL * (P/ COF2 / (T/COF1 )
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_MSPROP.html[28/04/2013 07:24:18 p.m.]
MSPROP
Property = NOMINAL * (T/COF1 ) 1.5 * ( COF1 + COF2 )/(T + COF2 )]

where P and T are the pressure and temperature of the node where the property is being calculated.
Specific heat is always a CONSTANT. Also, property types ( Type ) such as TABLE, USER, POWL, BIN, etc.
are not available for individual species. They are valid only for the bulk fluid.
If a property type is entered incorrectly (e.g. a misspelling), a CONSTANT property type is assumed and
the property is assigned the NOMINAL value.
This command is valid for the multiple species transport option in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction.This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
Main Menu>Solution>FLOTRAN Set Up>Multiple Species
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_MSPROP.html[28/04/2013 07:24:18 p.m.]
3.6.Applying Prestress Effects in a Modal Analysis

The following topics concerning adding prestress effect to a modal analysis are available:
Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis
Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution
3.6.1.Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis

Use a prestressed modal analysis to calculate the frequencies and mode shapes of a prestressed
structure, such as a spinning turbine blade. This procedure is suitable for the prestressed modal analysis
of a small deflection solution. If the prior static analysis includes large-deflection effects (NLGEOM,ON),
it is recommended that you use the linear perturbation procedure described in Performing a Prestressed
Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution.
The procedure for performing a prestressed modal analysis is essentially the same as that of a standard
modal analysis, except that you first need to prestress the structure by performing a static analysis:
1. Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). The
same lumped mass setting (LUMPM) used here must also be used in the later prestressed modal
analysis. Structural Static Analysis describes the procedure to obtain a static solution. Use
EMATWRITE,YES if you want to look at strain energies from the modal analysis.
This step can also be a transient analysis. If so, save the EMAT and ESAV files at the desired time
point.
2. Enter the solution processor once again and obtain the modal solution, also with prestress effects
activated (reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT (if created) and Jobname.ESAV from the static
analysis must be available.
If another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed modal analyses, it is necessary
to rerun the static analysis, or keep a copy of the EMAT file from the static analysis.
3. Expand the modes and review them in the postprocessor.
3.6.2.Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection

Solution
To calculate the frequencies and mode shapes of a deformed structure or a structure involving nonlinear
(sliding) contact, you can perform a prestressed modal analysis (using the linear perturbation analysis
procedure) following a large-deflection (NLGEOM,ON) static analysis.
To obtain the modal solution of a deformed structure, follow these steps:
1. Perform a nonlinear static solution with the prestress load. Use the RESCONTROL command to
define the necessary restart files.
2. Restart the previous static solution from the desired load step and substep.
3. Issue the PERTURB command to define the analysis type, material behavior to be used, contact
status ( ContKey = CURRENT, STICKING, or BONDED) and load values to be retained from the
previous static solution ( LoadControl = ALLKEEP, INERKEEP, PARKEEP, or NOKEEP).
4. Modify the behavior of individual contact pairs, as needed, using the CNKMOD command.
5. Issue the SOLVE, ELFORM command to regenerate the matrices.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR3_OtherModal.html[28/04/2013 07:24:40 p.m.]
6. Issue the MODOPT and MXPAND commands to specify the modal analysis option.
7. Issue the SOLVE command to perform the eigensolution.
8. Postprocess the results from the Jobname.RSTP file.
For detailed information about the linear perturbation analysis procedure, see "Linear Perturbation
Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR3_OtherModal.html[28/04/2013 07:24:40 p.m.]
NLGEOM
NLGEOM
NLGEOM, Key
Includes large-deflection effects in a static or full transient analysis.

MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Key
Large-deflection key:
OFF Ignores large-deflection effects (that is, a small-deflection analysis is specified). This
option is the default.
ON Includes large-deflection (large rotation) effects or large strain effects, according to the
element type.
Command Default
Large-deflection effects are ignored.
Notes
Large-deflection effects are categorized as either large deflection (or large rotation) or large strain,
depending on the element type. These are listed (if available) under Special Features in the input data
table for each element in the Element Reference. If used during the solution (/SOLU), this command is
valid only within the first load step.
In a large-deflection analysis, pressure loads behave differently than other load types. For more
information, see Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis.
The gyroscopic matrix (that occurs due to rotational angular velocity) does not support large-deflection
effects. The theoretical formulations for the gyroscopic matrix support small deflection (linear
formulation) only.
In ANSYS Professional NLT, large deflection effects should not be turned on if 2-D solid (PLANE n) or 3-D
solid (SOLID n) elements are defined. ANSYS Professional NLS supports NLGEOM,ON for plane and solid
elements.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_NLGEOM.html[28/04/2013 07:24:52 p.m.]
3.10.Using the Residual-Vector Method to Improve Accuracy

The residual vector method improves the accuracy of a mode-superposition transient or modesuperposition harmonic analysis.
A mode-superposition solution tends to be less accurate when the applied dynamic loads excite the
higher resonant frequency modes of a structure. Many modes are often necessary to render an accurate
mode-superposition solution.
The residual vector method can help in such cases. The method's improved convergence properties
require fewer natural frequencies and modes from the eigensolution.
3.10.1.Understanding the Residual Vector Method

To use the residual vector method, you must first calculate residual vectors in the modal analysis. You
can use either of these modal analysis mode-extraction methods:
Block Lanczos (MODOPT,LANB)
PCG Lanczos (MODOPT,LANPCG)
SNODE method (MODOPT,SNODE)
ANSYS stores the calculated residual vectors in the .mode file (a permanent, binary file) and uses them in
the subsequent mode-superposition or mode-superposition harmonic analysis.
3.10.2.Using the Residual Vector Method

Use the following procedure to calculate residual vectors:
1. Build the model.
2. Specify the mode-extraction method (MODOPT,LANB or MODOPT,LANPCG).
3. Activate residual vector calculation (RESVEC,ON).
4. Specify pseudo-constraints (D,,,SUPPORT) if rigid body motion is present.
5. Specify the load vectors (F, BF, SF, etc.).
6. Solve the modal analysis. (ANSYS generates an .mode file containing the residual vectors.)
7. Issue a FINISH command.
8. Set up a mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis, and include the previously calculated
residual vectors (RESVEC,ON).
Note: A load vector is also generated in Step 6. Ensure that you do not duplicate
any loading.
9. Solve the mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis. ANSYS includes the residual vectors
in those calculations.
Specifying Pseudo-Constraints
If rigid body motion exists, specify only the minimum number of displacement constraints necessary to
prevent rigid body motion: three constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) for 2-D models
and six (or fewer) for 3-D models.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strresvec.html[28/04/2013 07:25:47 p.m.]
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strresvec.html[28/04/2013 07:25:47 p.m.]
5.4.Performing a Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

The mode-superposition method scales the mode shapes obtained from a modal analysis and sums
them to calculate the dynamic response. For more detailed information, see Mode Superposition Method
in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
This method is available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS
Professional products. The procedure to use the method consists of five main steps:
1. Build the model.
2. Obtain the modal solution.
3. Obtain the mode-superposition transient solution.
4. Expand the mode-superposition solution.

Building the model for a mode-superposition transient dynamic analysis is the same as that described for
the full method. See Build the Model for more information.
5.4.2.Obtain the Modal Solution

Modal Analysis describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following are some additional hints:
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, reduced, or QR
damped. (The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode-superposition.) If
your model has damping and/or an unsymmetric stiffness matrix, use the QR Damp modeextraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP).
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the dynamic response.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at those nodes
at which forces and gap conditions are to be defined.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD,
BETAD, MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include in the
modal analysis. During the transient analysis, you can define additional damping, including a
constant modal damping ratio (DMPRAT) or the modal damping ratio as a function of mode
(MDAMP). Note that a constant structural material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not
applicable in a transient analysis. For more details about damping definitions, see Damping
Specify displacement constraints, if any. These constraints will be ignored if they are specified in
the mode-superposition transient solution instead of in the modal solution.
If you need to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on) in the
transient dynamic analysis, you must specify them in the modal analysis. The loads are ignored for
the modal solution, but a load vector will be calculated and written to the mode shape file
( Jobname.MODE), and the element load information will be written to Jobname.MLV. You can then use
this load vector for the transient solution.
You do not need to expand the modes for the mode-superposition solution. If you need to review
mode shapes from a reduced modal solution, however, you must expand the mode shapes.
Expanding the modes and calculating the element results will, however, reduce computation time
for a subsequent expansion of the transient results.

The model data (for example, nodal rotations) should not be changed between the modal and
transient analyses.
5.4.3.Obtain the Mode-Superposition Transient Solution

In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to calculate the transient
response. The following requirements apply:
The mode shape file ( Jobname.MODE) must be available.
The full file ( Jobname.FULL) if linear acceleration (ACEL) is present.
The database must contain the same model for which the modal solution was obtained.
5.4.3.1.Obtaining the Solution

The procedure to obtain the mode-superposition transient solution is described below:
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as the analysis options
described for the full method (in Set Solution Controls and Set Additional Solution Options), except
for the following differences:
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options
for a mode-superposition transient analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard
set of solution commands (which are listed in Set Solution Controls and Set Additional
Solution Options) and the standard corresponding menu paths.
Restarts are available (ANTYPE).
Choose the mode-superposition method of solution (TRNOPT).
When you specify a mode-superposition transient analysis, a Solution menu appropriate for
the specified analysis type appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or
unabridged, depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your session. The
abridged menu contains only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for
mode-superposition transient analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you
want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use,
but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged
Menu option from the Solution menu. For details, see Using Abridged Solution Menus in the
Specify the number of modes you want to use for the solution (TRNOPT). This determines
the accuracy of the transient solution. At a minimum, you should use all modes that you think
will contribute to the dynamic response. If you expect higher frequencies to be excited, for
example, the number of modes specified should include the higher modes. The default is to
use all modes calculated in the modal solution.
To include the contribution of higher frequency modes, add the residual vectors calculated in
the modal analysis (RESVEC,ON).
If you do not want to use rigid body (0 frequency) modes, use MINMODE on the TRNOPT
command to skip over them.
Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
3. Define gap conditions, if any. They can only be defined between two nodal degrees of freedom
(DOF) or between a nodal DOF and ground. For reduced mode-extraction methods, gaps can only
be defined at master DOF. If you used the QR damped mode-extraction method, gap conditions
are not supported. More details about gap conditions are presented in Gap Conditions.
Command(s):
GUI:
GP
MainMenu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
4. Apply loads to the model. The following loading restrictions apply in a mode-superposition
transient dynamic analysis:
Only nodal forces (F) and accelerations applied via the ACEL command are available.
Note: For consistent reaction forces, apply accelerations in the modal analysis
rather than in the transient analysis.
A load vector created in the modal analysis can be included via the LVSCALE command
(MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super) to
apply the load vector from the modal solution. You can use such a load vector to apply
element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) on the model. If you use LVSCALE,
ensure that all nodal forces (F) defined in the modal analysis solution are removed in the
transient analysis. Generally, you should apply nodal forces in the transient part of the
analysis.
Imposed nonzero displacements are ignored.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at
master DOF.
Multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient analysis. The first
load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for
the transient loading, as explained next.
5. Establish initial conditions. In modal superposition transient analyses, a first solution is done at
TIME = 0. This establishes the initial condition and time step size for the entire transient analysis.
Generally, the only load applicable for the first load step is initializing nodal forces. For this pseudostatic analysis, the mode-superposition method may yield poor results at TIME = 0 if nonzero loads
are applied.
The following load step options are available for the first load step:
Table5.2Options for the First Load Step: Mode-Superposition Analysis
Option
Command
Dynamics Options
Transient Integration TINTP
Parameters
Damping
ALPHAD,
BETAD,
DMPRAT,
MDAMP
GUI Path
Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models>
Structural> Damping
General Options
Integration Time Step DELTIM
Printed Output
OUTPR

Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step
Dynamics options include the following:
Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)

Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time integration
technique. The default is to use the constant average acceleration scheme; see your
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for further
details.
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your
analysis. You can specify five forms of damping in a mode-superposition transient
dynamic analysis:
Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Constant damping ratio (DMPRAT)
Modal damping (MDAMP)
Constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in a transient
analysis. See Damping for further details.
The only valid general option for the first load step is integration time step (DELTIM), which
is assumed to be constant throughout the transient. By default, the integration time step is
assumed to be 1/(20 f ), where f is the highest frequency chosen for the solution. The
DELTIM command is valid only in the first load step and is ignored in subsequent load steps.
Note: If you do issue the TIME command in the first load step, it will be
ignored. The first solution is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
The output control option for the first load step is printed output (OUTPR). Use this option
to control printout of the displacement solution at the master DOF.
6. Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion.
General options include the following:
Time Option (TIME)

This option specifies time at the end of the load step.
Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC)

This option indicates whether to ramp the load change over the load step (KBC) or to
step-apply the load change (KBC,1). The default is ramped.
Output control options include the following:

Use this option to control printed output.

This option controls the data on the reduced displacement file.
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is
to write the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless
there are gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution). If you
expanded element results during the modal analysis, then OUTRES is not applicable as the
modal coordinates and not the displacements are written to Jobname.RDSP.
7. By default, if you used the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or the Supernode option for the modal
analysis (MODOPT,LANB or LANPCG or SNODE), the modal coordinates (the factors to multiply
each mode by) are written to the file Jobname.RDSP and no output controls apply. If however you
explicitly request not to write the element results to the .MODE file (MXPAND,,,,,,NO), the actual
nodal displacements are written to the .RDSP file. In that case, you may use a nodal component
with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced
displacement file Jobname.RFRQ. The expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes
and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements have been written to the .RFRQ
file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify
the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,FREQ,component. Repeat the OUTRES
command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RDSP file. Only one
output frequency is allowed. (The program uses the last frequency specified by OUTRES.)
8. Save a backup copy of the database to a named file.
Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
9. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Note: As an alternative method of resolution, you can issue the LSWRITE command to
write each load step to a load step file ( Jobname.S01) and then issue LSSOLVE to
start the transient solution.
The mode-superposition transient solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RDSP,
regardless of whether the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, reduced, or QR damped method was
used for the modal solution . You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in
stress results.
5.4.4.Expand the Mode-Superposition Solution

The expansion pass starts with the transient solution on jobname.RDSP and calculates the displacement,
stress, and force solution. These calculations are performed only at the time points you specify. Before
you begin the expansion pass, therefore, you should review the results of the transient solution (using
POST26) and identify the critical time points.
Note: An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you your primary interest
is the displacement at specific points on the structure, then the displacement
solution on jobname.RDSP could satisfy your requirements. However, if you are

interested in the stress or force solution, then you must perform an expansion
pass.
The .RDSP and .DB files from the transient solution, along with the .MODE , .EMAT , .ESAV and .MLV
files from the modal solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the transient solution was calculated.
The procedure for the expansion pass is explained below.
5.4.4.2.Expanding the Solution

1. Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Activate the expansion pass and its options.
Option
Command
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to be
Expanded
NUMEXP
EXPSOL
GUI Path
ExpansionPass
ExpansionPass> Range of Solu's
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By
Time/Freq

Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to be Expanded (NUMEXP)
Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over the
specified time range. The solutions nearest these times will be expanded. Also specify
whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
time. Also specify whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both).
3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are output
controls:
Output Controls

Note: If element results were calculated in the modal analysis, then no
element output is available in the expansion pass. Use /POST1 to
review the element results.


Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the
nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
Note: The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
6. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Close the Solution window.
5.4.4.3.Reviewing the Results of the Expanded Solution

analyses. See Review the Results in "Structural Static Analysis".
You can review these results using POST1. (If you expanded solutions at several time points, you can
also use POST26 to obtain graphs of stress versus time, strain versus time, and so on.) The procedure
to use POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method.

Results consist of displacements, stresses, and reaction forces at each time-point for which the solution
was expanded. You can review these results using POST26 or POST1, as explained for the full method
(see Review the Results).
5.4.6.Sample Input for a Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a mode-superposition transient analysis is shown below:
!
Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
-----! Generate model
--FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Obtain the Modal Solution

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
MODOPT,LANB
! Block Lanczos
MXPAND,,,,YES
! Expand the results and calculate element results
D,...
! Constraints
SF,...
! Element loads
ACEL,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
! Obtain the Mode-Superposition Transient Solution
/SOLU
! Reenter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,TRANS
! Transient analysis
TRNOPT,MSUP,...
! Mode-superposition method
LVSCALE,...
! Scale factor for element loads
F,...
! Nodal Loads
MDAMP,...
! Modal damping ratios
DELTIM,...
! Integration time step sizes
SOLVE
! Solve 1st load step
--! Remember: The 1st load step is
--!
solved statically at time=0.
-----! Loads, etc. for 2nd load step
TIME,...
! Time at end of second load step
KBC,...
! Ramped or stepped loads
OUTRES,...
! Results-file data controls
--SOLVE
! Solve 2nd load step (first transient load step)
FINISH
! Review results of the mode-superposition solution
/POST26
! Enter POST26
FILE,,RDSP
! Results file is Jobname.RDSP
SOLU,...
! Store solution summary data
NSOL,...
! Store nodal result as a variable
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
PRVAR,...
! List variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution
/SOLU
! Reenter SOLUTION
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass
NUMEXP,...
! No. of solutions to expand; time range
OUTRES,...
! Results-file data controls
SOLVE
FINISH
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution
/POST1
SET,...
! Read desired set of results into database
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PRRSOL,...
! Reaction loads
PLNSOL,...
! Contour plot of nodal results
PRERR
! Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy)
-----! Other postprocessing as desired
--FINISH
See the Command Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, ACEL, TRNOPT,
LVSCALE, MDAMP, DELTIM, TIME, KBC, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, FILE, SOLU, NSOL, PLVAR,
PRVAR, EXPASS, NUMEXP, OUTRES, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
15.10.Mode Superposition Method

Mode superposition method is a method of using the natural frequencies and mode shapes from the
modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) to characterize the dynamic response of a structure to transient
(ANTYPE,TRANS with TRNOPT,MSUP, Transient Analysis), or steady harmonic (ANTYPE,HARM with
HROPT,MSUP, Harmonic Response Analyses) excitations.
The equations of motion may be expressed as in Equation175:
(15
97)
{F} is the time-varying load vector, given by
(15
98)
where:
{F nd } = time varying nodal forces
s = load vector scale factor (input on LVSCALE command)
{F s} = load vector from the modal analysis (see below)
The load vector {F s} is computed when doing a modal analysis and its generation is the same as for a
substructure load vector, described in Substructuring Analysis.
The following development is similar to that given by Bathe([2]):
Define a set of modal coordinates yi such that
(15
99)
where:
{i} = the mode shape of mode i
n = the number of modes to be used (input as MAXMODE on TRNOPT or HROPT commands)
Note that Equation1599 hinders the use of nonzero displacement input, since defining yi in terms of
{u} is not straight forward. The inverse relationship does exist (Equation1599) for the case where all
the displacements are known, but not when only some are known. Substituting Equation1599 into
Equation1597,
(15
100)
Premultiply by a typical mode shape {i}T :
(15
101)
The orthogonal condition of the natural modes states that

(15
102)
(15
103)
In the mode superposition method using the Lanczos and other extraction methods, only Rayleigh or
constant damping is allowed so that:
(15
104)
Applying these conditions to Equation15101, only the i = j terms remain:
(15
105)
The coefficients of
1. Coefficient of
, and yj, are derived as follows:

:
By the normality condition (Equation1742),

(15
106)
2. Coefficient of
The damping term is based on treating the modal coordinate as a single DOF system (shown in
Equation1597) for which:
(15
107)
and
(15
108)
Figure15.5Single Degree of Freedom Oscillator
Equation15108 can give a definition of j:

(15
109)
From (Tse([68])),
(15
110)
where:
j = fraction of critical damping for mode j
and,
(15
111)
where:
j = natural circular frequency of mode j
Combining Equation15109 thru Equation15106 with Equation15107,
(15
112)
3. Coefficient of yj:
From Equation1739,
(15
113)
Premultiply by {j}T,
(15
114)
Substituting Equation15106 for the mass term,
(15
115)
For convenient notation, let
(15
116)
represent the right-hand side of Equation15105. Substituting Equation15106, Equation15
112, Equation15115 and Equation15116 into Equation15105, the equation of motion of the
modal coordinates is obtained:
(15
117)
Since j represents any mode, Equation15117 represents n uncoupled equations in the n
unknowns yj. The advantage of the uncoupled system (ANTYPE,TRAN with TRNOPT,MSUP) is
that all the computationally expensive matrix algebra has been done in the eigensolver, and long
transients may be analyzed inexpensively in modal coordinates with Equation1599. In harmonic
analysis (ANTYPE,HARM with HROPT,MSUP), frequencies may be scanned faster than by the
reduced harmonic response (ANTYPE,HARM with HROPT,REDUC) method.
The yj are converted back into geometric displacements {u} (the system response to the loading)
by using Equation1599. That is, the individual modal responses yj are superimposed to obtain
the actual response, and hence the name mode superposition.
If the modal analysis was performed using the reduced method (MODOPT,REDUC), then the
matrices and load vectors in the above equations would be in terms of the master DOFs (i.e.,
).
For the QR damped mode extraction method, the differential equations of motion in modal
coordinate as deduced from Equation15207 with the right hand side force vector of Equation15
101. They are written as:
(15
118)
where:
[] = real eigenvector matrix normalized with respect to mass coming from the LANCZOS run of
QRDAMP (see QR Damped Method for more details.
= diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues i squared.
[Kunsym] = unsymmetric part of the stiffness matrix.
It can be seen that if [C] is arbitrary and/or [K] is unsymmetric, the modal matrices are full so that
the modal equations are coupled.
15.10.1.Modal Damping
The modal damping, j, is the combination of several ANSYS damping inputs:
(15
119)
where:
= uniform mass damping multiplier (input on ALPHAD command)
= uniform stiffness damping multiplier (input on BETAD command)
= constant damping ratio (input on DMPRAT command)
= modal damping ratio (input on MDAMP command)
Because of the assumption in Equation15104, explicit damping in such elements as COMBIN14 is not
allowed by the mode superposition procedure except when using the QRDAMP eigensolver. In addition
constant stiffness matrix multiplier m (input as DAMP on MP command) and constant material damping
coefficients (input as DMPR on MP command) are not applicable in modal damping since the resulting
modal damping matrices are not uncoupled in the modal subspace (see Equation15104 and
Equation15207).
15.10.2.Residual Vector Method

In modal superposition analysis, the dynamic response will be approximate when the applied loading
excites the higher frequency modes of a structure. To improve the accuracy of dynamic response, the
residual vector method employs additional modal transformation vectors (designated as residual vectors)
in addition to the eigenvectors in the modal transformation (Equation1599).

The residual vector method uses extra residual vectors computed at the modal analysis part
(ANTYPE,MODAL) with residual vector calculation flag turned on (RESVEC,ON) to characterize the high
frequency response of a structure to dynamic loading in modal superposition transient (ANTYPE,TRANS
with TRNOPT,MSUP), or modal superposition harmonic (ANTYPE,HARM with HROPT,MSUP) analyses.
Because of the improved convergence properties of this method, fewer eigenmodes are required from
the eigensolution.
The dynamic response of the structure can be divided into two terms:
(15
120)
where:
xL = lower mode contributions (Equation1599)
xH = higher mode contributions, which can be expressed as the combination of residual vectors.
First, the flexibility matrix can be expressed as:
(15
121)
where:
[G] = generalized inverse matrix of stiffness matrix K (see Geradin and Rixen([368])
{} i = elastic normal modes
n = total degree of freedom of the system
The residual flexibility matrix is given by:

(15
122)
Define residual vectors as:
(15
123)
where:
[F] = matrix of force vectors
Orthogonalize the residual vectors with respect to the retained elastic normal modes gives
orthogonalized residual vectors {R }j.
Then the basis vectors for modal subspace are formed by:
(15
124)
which will be used in modal superposition transient and harmonic analysis.

17.2.Transient Analysis
The following transient analysis topics are available:
Description of Structural and Other Second Order Systems
Description of Thermal, Magnetic and Other First Order Systems
The transient analysis solution method (ANTYPE,TRANS) used depends on the DOFs involved.
Structural, acoustic, and other second order systems (that is, the systems are second order in time) are
solved using one method and the thermal, magnetic, electrical and other first order systems are solved
using another. Each method is described subsequently. If the analysis contains both first and second
order DOFs (e.g. structural and magnetic), then each DOF is solved using the appropriate method. For
matrix coupling between first and second order effects such as for piezoelectric analysis, a combined
procedure is used.
17.2.1.Assumptions and Restrictions

1. Initial conditions are known.
2. Gyroscopic or Coriolis effects are included in a structural analysis when requested (using the
CORIOLIS command).
17.2.2.Description of Structural and Other Second Order Systems

The transient dynamic equilibrium equation of interest is as follows for a linear structure:
(17
5)
where:
[M] = structural mass matrix
[C] = structural damping matrix
[K] = structural stiffness matrix
{ } = nodal acceleration vector
{ } = nodal velocity vector
{u} = nodal displacement vector
{F a} = applied load vector
There are two methods in the ANSYS program which can be employed for the solution of Equation175:
the central difference time integration method and the Newmark time integration method (including an
improved algorithm called HHT). The central difference method is used for explicit transient analyses and
is described in the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual([199]). The Newmark method and HHT method are
used for implicit transient analyses and are described below.
The Newmark method uses finite difference expansions in the time interval t, in which it is assumed
that (Bathe([2])):
(17
6)
(17
7)
where:
, = Newmark integration parameters
t = t n+1 - t n
{un } = nodal displacement vector at time t n
{ n } = nodal velocity vector at time t n
{ n } = nodal acceleration vector at time t n
{un + 1 } = nodal displacement vector at time t n + 1
{ n + 1 } = nodal velocity vector at time t n + 1
{ n + 1 } = nodal acceleration vector at time t n + 1
Since the primary aim is the computation of displacements {un + 1 }, the governing Equation175 is
evaluated at time t n + 1 as:
(17
8)
The solution for the displacement at time t n + 1 is obtained by first rearranging Equation176 and
Equation177, such that:
(17
9)
(17
10)
where:
Noting that { n + 1 } in Equation179 can be substituted into Equation1710, equations for { n + 1 }

and { n + 1 } can be expressed only in terms of the unknown {un + 1 }. The equations for { n + 1 } and
{ n + 1 } are then combined with Equation178 to form:
(17
11)
Once a solution is obtained for {un + 1 }, velocities and accelerations are updated as described in
Equation179 and Equation1710.
For the nodes where the velocity or the acceleration is given (velocity or acceleration loading) a
displacement constraint is calculated from Equation177.
As described by Zienkiewicz([39]), the solution of Equation178 by means of Newmark Equation176

and Equation177 is unconditionally stable for:
(17
12)
The Newmark parameters are related to the input as follows:
(17
13)
where:
= amplitude decay factor (input on TINTP command).
Alternatively, the and parameters may be input directly (using the TINTP command). By inspection
of Equation1712 and Equation1713, unconditional stability is achieved when

and 0. Thus all solutions of Equation1712 are stable if 0. For a piezoelectric analysis, the
Crank-Nicholson and constant average acceleration methods must both be requested, that is, = 0.25,
= 0.5, and (THETA) = 0.5 (using the TINTP command).
Typically the amplitude decay factor () in Equation1713 takes a small value (the default is 0.005).
The Newmark method becomes the constant average acceleration method when = 0, which in turns
means
and
(Bathe([2])). Results from the constant average acceleration method do not
show any numerical damping in terms of displacement amplitude errors. If other sources of damping are
not present, the lack of numerical damping can be undesirable in that the higher frequencies of the
structure can produce unacceptable levels of numerical noise (Zienkiewicz([39])). A certain level of
numerical damping is usually desired and is achieved by degrading the Newmark approximation by
setting > 0.
In particular, it is desirable to have a controllable numerical damping in the higher frequency modes,
since using finite elements to discretize the spatial domain, the results of these higher frequency modes
are less accurate. However, the addition of high frequency numerical damping should not incur a loss of
accuracy nor introduce excessive numerical damping in the important low frequency modes. In the full
transient analysis, the HHT time integration method (Chung and Hulbert([351])) has the desired
property for the numerical damping.
The basic form of the HHT method is given by:
(17
14)
where:
Comparing Equation1714 with Equation175, one can see that the transient dynamic equilibrium
equation considered in the HHT method is a linear combination of two successive time steps of n and
n+1. m and f are two extra integration parameters for the interpolation of the acceleration and the
displacement, velocity and loads.

Introducing the Newmark assumption as given in Equation176 and Equation1717 into Equation17
14, the displacement {un+1} at the time step n+1 can be obtained:
(17
15)
where:
The four parameters , , f , and m used in the HHT method are related to the input as follows (Hilber
et al([352])),
(17
16)
= amplitude decay factor (input on TINTP command)

Alternatively, , , f , and m can be input directly (using the TINTP command). But for the
unconditional stability and the second order accuracy of the time integration, they should satisfy the
following relationships:
(17
17)
If both m and f are zero when using this alternative, the HHT method is same as Newmark method.
Using this alternative, two other methods of parameter determination are possible. Given an amplitude
decay factor , the four integration parameters can be chosen as follows (Wood et al([353])):
(17
18)
or they can be chosen as follows (Chung and Hulbert([351])):
(17
19)
The parameters chosen according to Equation1716, or Equation1718, Equation1719 all satisfy the
conditions set in Equation1717. They are unconditionally stable and the second order accurate.
Equation1716 and Equation1718 have a similar amount of numerical damping. Equation1719 has
the least numerical damping for the lower frequency modes. In this way,
percentage of numerical damping for the highest frequency of the structure.
is approximately the
17.2.2.1.Solution
Three methods of solution for the Newmark method (Equation1711) are available: full, reduced and
mode superposition (TRNOPT command) and each are described subsequently. Only the full solution
method is available for HHT (Equation1714).
Full Solution Method

The full solution method (TRNOPT,FULL) solves Equation1711 directly and makes no additional
assumptions. In a nonlinear analysis, the Newton-Raphson method (Newton-Raphson Procedure) is
employed along with the Newmark assumptions. Automatic Time Stepping discusses the procedure for
the program to automatically determine the time step size required for each time step.
Inherent to the Newmark method is that the values of {uo }, { o }, and { o } at the start of the
transient must be known. Nonzero initial conditions are input either directly (with the IC commands) or
by performing a static analysis load step (or load steps) prior to the start of the transient itself. Static
load steps are performed in a transient analysis by turning off the transient time integration effects (with
the TIMINT,OFF command). The transient itself can then be started (by TIMINT,ON). The default with
transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS) is for the transient to be running (TIMINT,ON); that is, to start
the transient immediately. (This implies {u} = } = { } = 0. The initial conditions are outlined in the
subsequent paragraphs. Cases referring to no previous load step mean that the first load step is
transient.
Initial Displacement. The initial displacements are:
(17
20)
where:
{uo } = vector of initial displacements
= displacement vector specified by the initial conditions (IC command)
{us} = displacement vector resulting from a static analysis (TIMINT,OFF) of the previous load step
Initial Velocity. The initial velocities are:
(17
21)
where:
{ o } = vector of initial velocities
= vector of velocities specified by the initial conditions (IC commands)
{us} = displacements from a static analysis (TIMINT,OFF) of the previous load step
{us-1 } = displacement corresponding to the time point before {us} solution. {us-1 } is {0} if {us} is the
first solution of the analysis (i.e. load step 1 substep 1).
t = time increment between s and s-1
If the previous load step was run as a static analysis (TIMINT,OFF), initial velocities are calculated
using the previous two displacements and the previous time increment. Using either a single substep
(NSUBST,1) or ramped loading (KBC,0) within the previous load step will result in nonzero initial
velocities (assuming nonzero displacement), as shown in Figure 17.2. Zero initial velocities may be
obtained by using multiple substeps (NSUBST,>1) and stepped loading (KBC,1).
Figure17.2Effect of Number of Substeps (NSUBST) and Ramping (KBC) on Initial Velocity
for TIMINT,OFF
Initial Acceleration. The initial acceleration is simply:

(17
22)
where:
{ o } = vector of initial accelerations
If a nonzero initial acceleration is required as for a free fall problem, an extra load step at the beginning
of the transient can be used. This load step would have a small time span, step boundary conditions,
and a few time steps which would allow the acceleration to be well represented at the end of the load
step.
Nodal and Reaction Load Computation. Inertia, damping and static loads on the nodes of each element are computed.
The inertial load part of the element output is computed by:
(17
23)
where:
[Me] = element mass matrix

{ e} = element acceleration vector
The acceleration of a typical DOF is given by Equation179 for time t n+1. The acceleration vector { e}
is the average acceleration between time t n + 1 and time t n , since the Newmark assumptions
(Equation176 and Equation177) assume the average acceleration represents the true acceleration.
The damping load part of the element output is computed by:
(17
24)
where:
[Ce] = element damping matrix

{ e} = element velocity vector
The velocity of a typical DOF is given by Equation1710.
The static load is part of the element output computed in the same way as in a static analysis (Solving
for Unknowns and Reactions). The nodal reaction loads are computed as the negative of the sum of all
three types of loads (inertia, damping, and static) over all elements connected to a given fixed
displacement node.
Back To Top
Reduced Solution Method

The reduced solution method (TRNOPT,REDUC) uses reduced structure matrices to solve the timedependent equation of motion (Equation175) for linear structures. The solution method imposes the
following additional assumptions and restrictions:
1. Constant [M], [C], and [K] matrices. (A gap condition is permitted as described below.) This
implies no large deflections or change of stress stiffening, as well as no plasticity, creep, or
swelling.
2. Constant time step size.
3. No element load vectors. This implies no pressures or thermal strains. Only nodal forces applied
directly at master DOF or acceleration effects acting on the reduced mass matrix are permitted.
4. Nonzero displacements may be applied only at master DOF.
Description of Analysis.This method usually runs faster than the full transient dynamic analysis by several orders of magnitude,
principally because the matrix on the left-hand side of Equation1711 needs to be inverted only once
and the transient analysis is then reduced to a series of matrix multiplications. Also, the technique of
matrix reduction discussed in Substructuring Analysis is used in this method, so that the matrix
representing the system will be reduced to the essential DOFs required to characterize the response of
the system. These essential DOFs are referred to as the master degrees of freedom. Their automatic
selection is discussed in Automatic Master Degrees of Freedom Selection and guidelines for their manual
selection are given in Modal Analysis of the Structural Analysis Guide . The reduction of Equation1711
for the reduced transient method results in:
(17
25)
where the coefficients (a i) are defined after Equation1710. The ^ symbol is used to denote reduced
matrices and vectors.
may contain prestressed effects (PSTRES,ON) corresponding to a non-
varying stress state as described in Stress Stiffening. These equations, which have been reduced to the
master DOFs, are then solved by inverting the left-hand side of Equation1725 and performing a matrix
multiplication at each time step.
For the initial conditions, a static solution is done at time = 0 using the given loads to define
, and
are assumed to be zero.
A quasi-linear analysis variation is also available with the reduced method. This variation allows
interfaces (gaps) between any of the master DOFs and ground, or between any pair of master DOFs. If
the gap is initially closed, these interfaces are accounted for by including the stiffness of the interface in
the stiffness matrix, but if the gap should later open, a force is applied in the load vector to nullify the
effect to the stiffness. If the gap is initially open, it causes no effect on the initial solution, but if it
should later close, a force is again applied in the load vector.
The force associated with the gap is:
(17
26)
where:
kgp = gap stiffness (input as STIF, GP command)
ug = uA - uB - ugp
uA, uB = displacement across gap (must be master degrees of freedom)
ugp = initial size of gap (input as GA P, GP command)
This procedure adds an explicit term to the implicit integration procedure. An alternate procedure is to
use the full method, modeling the linear portions of the structure as superelements and the gaps as gap
elements. This latter procedure (implicit integration) normally allows larger time steps because it
modifies both the stiffness matrix and load vector when the gaps change status.
Expansion Pass.The expansion pass of the reduced transient analysis involves computing the displacements at slave
DOFs (see Equation17107) and computing element stresses.
Nodal load output consists of the static loads only as described for a static analysis (Solving for
Unknowns and Reactions). The reaction load values represent the negative of the sum of the above
static loads over all elements connected to a given fixed displacement node. Damping and inertia forces
are not included in the reaction loads.
Back To Top
Mode Superposition Method

The mode superposition method (TRNOPT,MSUP) uses the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a
linear structure to predict the response to transient forcing functions. This solution method imposes the
following additional assumptions and restrictions:
1. Constant [K] and [M] matrices. (A gap condition is permitted as described under the reduced
solution method.) This implies no large deflections or change of stress stiffening, as well as no
plasticity, creep, or swelling.
2. Constant time step size.
3. There are no element damping matrices. However, various types of system damping are available.
4. Time varying imposed displacements are not allowed.
The development of the general mode superposition procedure is described in Mode Superposition
Method. Equation15117 and Equation15118 are integrated through time for each mode by the
Newmark method.
The initial value of the modal coordinates at time = 0.0 are computed by solving Equation15117 with
and
assumed to be zero.
(17
27)
where:
{F o } = the forces applied at time = 0.0
The load vector, which must be converted to modal coordinates (Equation15116) at each time step, is
given by
(17
28)
where:
{F nd } = nodal force vector
s = load vector scale factor (input as FACT, LVSCALE command)
{F s} = load vector from the modal analysis (see Mode Superposition Method).
{F gp } = gap force vector (Equation1726) (not available for QR damped eigensolver).
{F ma} = inertial force ({F ma} = [M] {a})
{a} = acceleration vector ( input with ACEL command) (see Acceleration Effect)
In the modal superposition method, the damping force associated with gap is added to Equation1726:
(17
29)
where:
Cgp = gap damping (input as DAMP, GP command)
{ g } = { A} - { B}
{ A} - { B} = velocity across gap
If the modal analysis was performed using the reduced method (MODOPT,REDUC), then the matrices
and vectors in the above equations would be in terms of the master DOFs (e.g. { }).
Expansion Pass.The expansion pass of the mode superposition transient analysis involves computing the displacements
at slave DOFs if the reduced modal analysis (MODOPT,REDUC) was used (see Equation17107) and
computing element stresses.
Nodal load output consists of the static loads only as described for a static analysis (Solving for
Unknowns and Reactions). The reaction load values represent the negative of the sum of the static loads
over all elements connected to a given fixed displacement node. Damping and inertia forces are not
included in the reaction loads.
17.2.3.Description of Thermal, Magnetic and Other First Order Systems

The governing equation of interest is as follows:
(17
30)
where:
[C] = damping matrix
[K] = coefficient matrix
{u} = vector of DOF values
{ } = time rate of the DOF values
{F a} = applied load vector
In a thermal analysis, [C] is the specific heat matrix, [K] the conductivity matrix, {u} the vector of nodal
temperatures and {F a} the applied heat flows. Table17.2:Nomenclature relates the nomenclature used
in Derivation of Heat Flow Matrices and Derivation of Electromagnetic Matrices for thermal, magnetic and
electrical analyses to Equation1730.
Table17.2Nomenclature
{u}
{F a}
Thermal
{T} temperature
{Q a} heat flow
Scalar Magnetic
{} scalar potential
{F a} flux
Vector Magnetic
{A} vector potential
{F a} current segment
Electrical
{V} voltage
{Ia} current
The reduced and the mode superposition procedures do not apply to first order systems.
The procedure employed for the solution of Equation1730 is the generalized trapezoidal rule
(Hughes([165])):
(17
31)
where:
= transient integration parameter (input on TINTP command)
t = t n + 1 - t n
{un } = nodal DOF values at time t n
{ n } = time rate of the nodal DOF values at time t n (computed at previous time step)
Equation1730 can be written at time t n + 1 as:
(17
32)
Substituting { n + 1 } from Equation1731 into this equation yields:

(17
33)
The solution of Equation1733 employs the same solvers used for static analysis in Static Analysis.
Once {un+1} is obtained, { n + 1 } is updated using Equation1731. In a nonlinear analysis, the
Newton-Raphson method (Newton-Raphson Procedure) is employed along with the generalized
trapezoidal assumption, Equation1731.
The transient integration parameter (input on TINTP command) defaults to 0.5 (Crank-Nicholson
method) if solution control is not used (SOLCONTROL,OFF) and 1.0 (backward Euler method) if
solution control is used (SOLCONTROL,ON). If = 1, the method is referred to as the backward Euler
method. For all > 0, the system equations that follow are said to be implicit. In addition, for the more
limiting case of 1/2, the solution of these equations is said to be unconditionally stable; i.e.,
stability is not a factor in time step (t) selection. The available range of (using TINTP command) is
therefore limited to
(17
34)
which corresponds to an unconditionally stable, implicit method. For a piezoelectric analysis, the CrankNicholson and constant average acceleration methods must both be requested with (ALPHA) = 0.25,
(DELTA) = 0.5, and = 0.5 (on the TINTP command). Since the { n } influences {un + 1 }, sudden
changes in loading need to be handled carefully for values of < 1.0. See the Basic Analysis Guide for
more details.
The generalized-trapezoidal method requires that the values of {uo } and { o } at the start of the
transient must be known. Nonzero initial conditions are input either directly (with the IC command) (for
{uo }) or by performing a static analysis load step (or load steps) prior to the start of the transient itself.
Static load steps are performed in a transient analysis by turning off the transient time integration effects
(with the TIMINT,OFF command). The transient itself can then started (TIMINT,ON). The default for
transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS) is to start the transient immediately (TIMINT,ON). This implies
({u} = { } = {0}). The initial conditions are outlined in the subsequent paragraphs.
Initial DOF Values.The initial DOF values for first order systems are:
(17
35)
where:
{uo } = vector of initial DOF values
{a} = vector of uniform DOF values
= DOF vector directly specified (IC command)

{us} = DOF vector resulting from a static analysis (TIMINT,OFF) of the previous load step available
{a} is set to TEMP (BFUNIF command) and/or to the temperature specified by the initial conditions (IC
commands) for thermal DOFs (temperatures) and zero for other DOFs.
Nodal and Reaction Load Computation.Damping and static loads on the nodes of each element are computed.
The damping load part of the element output is computed by:
(17
36)
where:
[Ce] = element damping matrix

{ e} = element velocity vector
The velocity of a typical DOF is given by Equation1731. The velocity vector { e} is the average
velocity between time t n and time t n + 1 , since the general trapezoidal rule (Equation1731) assumes
the average velocity represents the true velocity.
The static load is part of the element output computed in the same way as in a static analysis (Solving
for Unknowns and Reactions). The nodal reaction loads are computed as the negative of the sum of both
types of loads (damping and static) over all elements connected to a given fixed DOF node.
CORIOLIS
CORIOLIS
CORIOLIS, Option, --, --, RefFrame , RotDamp

Applies the Coriolis effect to a rotating structure.
SOLUTION : Inertia
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Option
Flag to activate or deactivate the Coriolis effect:

1 (ON or YES) Activate. This value is the default.
0 (OFF or NO) Deactivate.
--, --
Unused fields.
RefFrame
Flag to activate or deactivate a stationary reference frame.

1 (ON or YES) Activate.
0 (OFF or NO) Deactivate. This value is the default.
RotDamp
Flag to activate or deactivate rotating damping effect.

1 (ON or YES) Activate.
0 (OFF or NO) Deactivate. This value is the default.
Notes
The CORIOLIS command is used for analyses in either a rotating or a stationary reference frame, and
performs differently according to the designated RefFrame value. Specific restrictions and elements apply
to each case, as follows:
Rotating Reference Frame ( RefFrame = OFF):
The command applies the Coriolis effect in the following structural element types: MASS21, SHELL181,
PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, SHELL281,
PIPE288 and PIPE289. It also applies this effect in the PLANE223, SOLID226, and SOLID227 analyses
with structural degrees of freedom.
In a rotating reference frame, both the coriolis and spin-softening effects contribute to the gyroscopic
moment. Therefore, ANSYS applies spin-softening by default for dynamic analyses. If a rotational
velocity is specified (or), centrifugal forces will be included.
To include coriolis effects in a large deflection prestressed analysis (NLGEOM, ON), issue both the
CORIOLIS and the OMEGA (or CMOMEGA) commands in the static prestress portion of the analysis.
In a nonlinear transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS and NLGEOM, ON), any spinning motion applied
through either the IC of the D commands will include the coriolis effect without having to issue the
CORIOLIS command. Refer to Rotating Structure Analysis in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide
for more information.
Stationary Reference Frame ( RefFrame = ON):
The command activates the gyroscopic damping matrix in the following structural elements: MASS21,
BEAM188, SHELL181, BEAM189, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SHELL281,
PIPE288, and PIPE289.
The rotating structure must be axisymmetric about the axis of rotation.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CORIOLIS.html[28/04/2013 07:26:36 p.m.]
CORIOLIS
Static analysis (ANTYPE, STATIC) does not support Coriolis effects with a stationary reference frame.
However, you can include the gyroscopic effects in a small deflection prestresses analysis (NLGEOM,
OFF and PSTRES, ON) by issuing the CORIOLIS command in the static prestressed dynamic analysis.
Rotating damping effect ( RotDamp = ON) applies only for the stationary reference frame. Therefore, this
effect is supported only by the elements listed above that generate a gyroscopic damping matrix.
Proportional damping must be present in the element (MP,DAMP or BETAD). It is also supported by
element COMBI214 with non zero and axisymmetric damping characteristics (non zero real constants
C11=C22 and C21=C12=0).
For more information about using the CORIOLIS command, see Rotating Structure Analysis in the
Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide and also in the Rotordynamic Analysis Guide . For details about the
Coriolis and gyroscopic effects, see the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications .
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular
Veloc>Coriolis
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Inertia>Angular Veloc>Coriolis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CORIOLIS.html[28/04/2013 07:26:36 p.m.]
8.3. Using a Rotating Reference Frame
8.3.Using a Rotating Reference Frame

The primary application for a rotating (rather than a stationary) frame of reference is in the field of
flexible body dynamics where, generally, the structure has no stationary parts and the entire structure is
rotating. Analyses of this type, therefore, consider only the Coriolis force.
Note: The gyroscopic effect is not included in the dynamics equations expressed in a
rotating reference frame. Therefore, if the structure contains a part with large
inertia - such as a large disk - the results obtained in the rotating reference frame
may not compare well with stationary reference frame results.
ANSYS computes the displacement field with respect to the coordinate system attached to the structure
and rotating with it at the specified angular velocity (CORIOLIS,Option = ON,,,RefFrame = OFF).
Elements Supported
The Coriolis matrix and forces are available for the structural elements listed in the notes section of the
CORIOLIS command.
Analysis Types Supported
The following analysis types support rotating structure analysis using a rotating reference frame:
Static (ANTYPE,STATIC)
Inertia effects are forces computed by multiplying the Coriolis damping matrix by the velocity of the
structure.
If you issue the CORIOLIS command in a prestressed analysis, ANSYS does not take the Coriolis
force into account in the static portion of the analysis.
In a large-deflection prestressed analysis (NLGEOM,ON and PSTRES,ON), ANSYS generates
the Coriolis matrix and uses it in the subsequent prestressed modal, harmonic, or transient
analysis.
In a small-deflection prestressed analysis (PSTRES,ON only), ANSYS does not generate the
Coriolis matrix but still takes the Coriolis force into account in the subsequent prestressed
modal, harmonic, or transient analysis.
Modal (ANTYPE,MODAL)
Support is also available for prestressed modal analysis.
Transient (ANTYPE,TRANS)
Harmonic (ANTYPE,HARMIC)
Spin Softening
In a dynamic analysis, the Coriolis matrix and the spin-softening matrix contribute to the gyroscopic
moment in the rotating reference frame; therefore, ANSYS includes the spin-softening effect by default
in dynamic analyses whenever you apply the Coriolis effect in the rotating reference frame
(CORIOLIS,ON).
Supercritical Spin Softening

As shown by equations (3-77) through (3-79) in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications , the diagonal coefficients in the stiffness matrix become
negative when the rotational velocity is larger than the resonant frequency.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADVROTFR.html[28/04/2013 07:26:50 p.m.]
8.3. Using a Rotating Reference Frame
In such cases, the solver may be unable to properly handle the negative definite stiffness
matrix. Additional details follow:
In a static (ANTYPE,STATIC), a full transient (ANTYPE,TRANS with TRNOPT,FULL),
or a full harmonic (ANTYPE,HARM with TRNOPT,FULL) analysis, the spin-softening
effect is more accurately accounted for by large deflections (NLGEOM,ON). If the
stiffness matrix becomes negative definite, ANSYS issues a warning message about the
negative pivot.
In a modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL), apply a negative shift (MODOPT,,, FREQB ) to
extract the possible negative eigenfrequencies.
If negative frequencies exist, mode-superposition transient and harmonic analyses are
not supported .
Coriolis Effect in a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
In a nonlinear transient analysis with large deflection effects (NLGEOM, ON ), rotation
motion imparted through either the IC command or the D command contributes the Coriolis
effect as part of the nonlinear transient algorithm. The CORIOLIS command should not be
activated in this case. However, beam elements (BEAM188 and BEAM189), and pipe
elements (PIPE288 and PIPE289 ) may produce approximate results when simulating Coriolis
effect as above, due to the approximations involved in their inertia calculations.
Campbell Diagram
Because natural frequencies are subject to sudden changes around critical speeds in a
rotating frame, ANSYS recommends using a stationary reference frame to create a Campbell
diagram (PRCAMP or PLCAMP).
Example Analysis
For examples of a rotating structure analysis using a rotating reference frame, see Sample Coriolis
Analysis, and Example: Piezoelectric Analysis with Coriolis Effect in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADVROTFR.html[28/04/2013 07:26:50 p.m.]
8.2. Using a Stationary Reference Frame
8.2.Using a Stationary Reference Frame

The primary application for a stationary (rather than a rotating) frame of reference is in the field of
rotordynamics where a rotating structure (rotor) is modeled along with a stationary support structure.
Examples of such an application include a gas turbine engine rotor-stator assembly or an electric turbo
generator, where the rotor spins inside a specially designed housing.
The rotating part of the structure to be modeled must be axisymmetric. The gyroscopic damping matrix
generated is valid only for a linear analysis.
ANSYS computes the displacement field with respect to the global coordinate system
(CORIOLIS,Option = ON,,,RefFrame = ON), referred to as the stationary reference frame.
Elements Supported
Elements that are part of the rotating structure generate the gyroscopic matrix that arises due to the
rotational angular velocity. The gyroscopic matrix is available for the elements listed in the notes section
of the CORIOLIS command.
For a beam element, the angular velocity vector is aligned along the length and the point mass is
aligned along one of the principal axes. The rotating structure must be axisymmetric about the spin axis.
For SHELL281 and other triangular-shaped elements with midside nodes, modeling a shell structure with
the gyroscopic matrix turned on (CORIOLIS,ON, , ,ON) may yield anomalies with the QR damp
eigensolver. This is especially true when only a limited number of modes are extracted. In this case, use
the damped eigensolver (MODOPT, DAMP).
Analysis Types Supported
The following analysis types support rotating structure analysis using a stationary reference frame:
Modal (ANTYPE,MODAL)
Transient (ANTYPE,TRANS)
Harmonic (ANTYPE,HARMIC)
For transient and harmonic analyses, the mode-superposition method (TRNOPT, MSUP, or
HROPT,MSUP) is supported for instances where the gyroscopic matrix does not need updating (see
below). For the mode-superposition method, only the QR Damp mode-extraction method
(MODOPT,QRDAMP) is supported.
For a varying rotational velocity, mode superposition analysis (transient or harmonic) is not supported,
since the modal gyroscopic matrix is not updated. This is especially true for cases where:
an unbalance or asynchronous rotating force exists in a harmonic analysis (SYNCHRO command)
a start-up or stop simulation is performed in a transient analysis (use the KBC command to ramp
the rotational velocity within one loadstep).
To include unbalance or general asynchronous rotating forces in a harmonic analysis, use the
SYNCHRO command.
For a transient analysis involving a rotating structure with a stationary reference frame, support for a
start or stop simulation is available. Issue the KBC command to ramp the rotational velocity.
For a prestressed analysis that includes gyroscopic effects, issue the CORIOLIS, ON,,,ON command in
the static prestress portion of the analysis.
Postprocessing
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_adv/Hlp_G_ADVSTATFR.html[28/04/2013 07:26:55 p.m.]
Besides general results, the following specific outputs are available:

Campbell diagram (PRCAMP and PLCAMP) see 8.2.1
Note: For a prestressed structure, set the Campbell key (CAMPBELL,ON) in the
first solution pass. Doing so allows a Campbell diagram analysis.
Orbits (PRORB and PLORB) see 8.2.3
Animation of the whirl (ANHARM)
8.2.1.Campbell Diagram
In a modal analysis with multiple load steps corresponding to different angular velocities , a Campbell
diagram (PLCAMP or PRCAMP) shows the evolution of the natural frequencies.
ANSYS determines eigenfrequencies at each load step. The plot showing the variation of eigenfrequency
with respect to rotational speed may not be readily apparent. For example, if the gyroscopic effect is
significant on an eigenmode, its frequency tends to split so much that it crosses the other frequency
curves as the speed increases. For more information, see Generating a Successful Campbell
Diagram below.
Critical Speeds
The PRCAMP command also prints out the critical speeds for a rotating synchronous (unbalanced) or
asynchronous force. The critical speeds correspond to the intersection points between frequency curves
and the added line F=s. (where s represents SLOPE > 0 as specified via PRCAMP). Because the critical
speeds are determined graphically, their accuracy depends upon the quality of the Campbell diagram.
To retrieve and store critical speeds as parameters, use the *GET command.
Whirls and Stability
As eigenfrequencies split with increasing spin velocity, ANSYS identifies forward (FW) and backward
(BW) whirls, and unstable frequencies. To obtain more information to help you determine how a
particular frequency becomes unstable, issue the PLCAMP or PRCAMP command and specify a stability
value ( STABVAL) of 1. You can also view the logarithmic decrements by specifying STABVAL = 2. For more
information about complex eigenvalues and corresponding logarithmic decrements, see Complex
Eigensolutions in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
Note: For a rotating structure meshed in shell elements lying in a plane perpendicular to
the rotational velocity axis - such as a thin disk - the whirl effects are not plotted or
printed by the PRCAMP or PLCAMP commands. However, they can be visualized
using the ANHARM command.
To retrieve and store frequencies and whirls as parameters, use the *GET command.
Prestressed Structure
For a prestressed structure, set the Campbell key (CAMPBELL,ON) in the static solution portion of the
analysis. Doing so modifies the result file so that it can accommodate a subsequent Campbell diagram
analysis. In this case, static and modal solutions are calculated alternately and only the modal solutions
are retained.
Generating a Successful Campbell Diagram
To help you obtain a good Campbell diagram plot or printout, the sorting option is active by default
(PLCAMP,ON or PRCAMP,ON). ANSYS compares complex mode shapes and pairs similar mode shapes.
(Because eigenmodes at zero velocity are real modes, ANSYS does not pair them with complex modes.)
If the plot is unsatisfactory even with sorting enabled, try the following:
Start the Campbell analysis with a non-zero rotational velocity.
Modes at zero rotational velocity are real modes and may be difficult to pair with complex modes
obtained at non-zero rotational velocity.
Increase the number of load steps.
It helps if the mode shapes change significantly as the spin velocity increases.
Change the frequency window.
To do so, use the shift option (PLCAMP,,,FREQB or PRCAMP,,,FREQB ). It helps if some modes fall
outside the default frequency window.
Overcoming Memory Problems
To run the Campbell analysis (PRCAMP or PLCAMP), the scratch memory needed may be important as
complex mode shapes are read from the result file for two consecutive load steps. If your computer has
insufficient scratch memory, try the following:
Decrease the number of extracted modes (MODOPT,,NMODE )
Generate the result file for a reduced set of selected nodes (for example, nodes on the axis of
rotation). Issue OUTRES,ALL,NONE and then OUTRES,Item ,Freq ,Cname where Item =NSOL,
Freq =ALL and Cname is the name of a node-based component.
For the sorting process and whirl calculation to be successful, the set of selected nodes must
represent the dynamics of the structure. In general, nodes on the spin axis contribute to the
bending mode shapes that are needed in the Campbell analysis.
Example Analysis
For an example of a rotating structure analysis using a stationary reference frame, see Sample Campbell
Diagram Analysis.
8.2.2.Harmonic Analysis for Unbalance or General Rotating Asynchronous

Forces
Some forces may rotate synchronously (for example, unbalance) or asynchronously with the structure. In
such cases, use the SYNCHRO command to update the amplitude of the rotational velocity vector with
the frequency of excitation at each frequency step of the harmonic analysis.
Forces are defined as static (F), as shown in this example where X is the assumed spin axis:
Force
Real (VALUE)
Imaginary (VALUE2)
FY
F 0 cos
-F 0 sin
FZ
-F 0 sin
-F 0 cos
where:
F 0 is the amplitude of the force. For unbalance, the amplitude is equal to the mass times the
distance of the unbalance mass to the spin axis.
is the phase of the force, needed only when several such forces, each with a different
relative phase, are defined.

If the forces are caused by an unbalance mass, multiplication of the amplitude of the static forces (F) by
the square of the spin velocity is unnecessary. ANSYS performs the calculation automatically at each
frequency step.
Because the rotational velocity commands (OMEGA and CMOMEGA) define only the orientation of the
spin axis, a harmonic analysis using the SYNCHRO command requires that you define the frequency of
excitation (HARFRQ) instead. For example, if the frequency of excitation is f, then:
= 2f/RATIO
where:
is the new magnitude of the rotational velocity vector used to calculate the gyroscopic
matrices.
is the ratio between the frequency of excitation and the frequency of the rotational
velocity of the structure, as specified via the SYNCHRO command. If no RATIO value is
specified, an unbalance force is assumed; in all other cases, a general rotating force is
assumed.
RATIO
Example Analysis
For an example of a harmonic analysis for unbalance forces, see Sample Unbalance Harmonic Analysis.
8.2.3.Orbits
When a structure is rotating about an axis and undergoes vibration motion, the trajectory of a node
executed around the axis is generally an ellipse designated as a whirl orbit.
In a local coordinate system xyz where x is the spin axis, the ellipse at node I is defined by semi-major
axis A, semi-minor axis B, and phase (PSI), as shown:
Angle (PHI) defines the initial position of the node (at t = 0). To compare the phases of
two nodes of the structure, you can examine the sum + .
Values YMAX and ZMAX are the maximum displacements along y and z axes, respectively.
You can print out the A, B, PSI, PHI, YMAX, and ZMAX values via a PRORB (print orbits)
command. Angles are in degrees and within the range of -180 through +180. The position
vector of local axis y in the global coordinate system is printed out along with the elliptical
orbit characteristics. You can also animate the orbit (ANHARM) for further examination. For
a typical usage example of these commands, see Sample Unbalance Harmonic Analysis.
To retrieve and store orbits characteristics as parameters, use the *GET command after issuing the
PRORB command.
3.11. Reusing Eigenmodes
3.11.Reusing Eigenmodes
ANSYS analyses that require the eigenmodes from the modal analysis can reuse the modes from an
earlier modal analysis solution. The user can reuse the Jobname.MODE file that is created in a modal
analysis for use in the following modal based methods:
Spectrum Analysis (ANTYPE, SPECTRUM)
Modal Transient Analysis/Harmonic Analysis
QR Damp Complex Modes Extraction
This section outlines the procedures for saving and reusing the eigenmodes from an earlier modal
analysis.
3.11.1.Spectrum Analysis (ANTYPE, SPECTRUM)

To run a spectrum analysis, users must first perform a modal analysis to generate the MODE file. For
multiple spectrum analyses, a unique MODE file can be used when the modReuseKey on the SPOPT
command is activated. This prepares the database and the necessary files for a new spectrum analysis
that reuses an existing Jobname.MODE.
3.11.2.Modal Transient Analysis/Harmonic Analysis

To use new load vectors, residual vector, and/or enforced motion in modal transient or modal harmonic
analyses with existing modal analysis results, refer to Reusing Extracted Eigenmodes in LANB, LANPCG
and SNODE method
3.11.3.QR Damp Complex Modes Extraction

In QR damp eigensolver the solution occurs in two steps. First the Block Lanczos eigensolver is used to
extract the symmetric matrix eigenmodes. These eigenmodes then are used in the second pass to build
the modal subspace (see QR Damped Method) matrix of the non-symmetric eigensystem and compute
the complex eigenmodes.
When an existing Jobname.MODE containing the eigenmodes of the symmetric eigensolution of the model
is available, it can be reused in the second pass by turning on the reuse flag ( ReuseKey ) in the QRDOPT
command.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strrresuseeigen.html[28/04/2013 07:27:52 p.m.]
SPOPT
SPOPT
SPOPT, Sptype, NMODE , Elcalc, modReuseKey

SOLUTION : Spectrum Options

Sptype
Spectrum type:
SPRS Single point excitation response spectrum (default). See also the SVTYP command.
MPRS Multiple point excitation response spectrum.
DDAM Dynamic design analysis method.
PSD Power spectral density.
NMODE
Use the first NMODE modes from the modal analysis. Defaults to all extracted modes, as specified by
the MODOPT and BUCOPT commands. NMODE cannot be larger than 10000.
Elcalc
Element results calculation key (for Sptype = PSD only):

NO Do not calculate element results and reaction forces (default).
YES Calculate element results and reaction forces, as well as the nodal degree of freedom
solution.
modReuseKey
Key for existing MODE file reuse when running multiple spectrum analyses:
NO No spectrum analysis has been performed yet (default).
YES This is not the first spectrum analysis. The MODE file will be reused and the necessary files
will be cleaned up for the new spectrum analysis.
Notes
Valid only for a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR). This operation must be preceded by a modal
solution (ANTYPE,MODAL) with the appropriate files available. If used in SOLUTION, this command is
valid only within the first load step.
Only Sptype = SPRS is allowed in ANSYS Professional.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SPOPT.html[28/04/2013 07:28:06 p.m.]
SVTYP
SVTYP
SVTYP, KSV , FACT , KeyInterp

Defines the type of single-point response spectrum.
SOLUTION : Spectrum Options

KSV
Response spectrum type:

0 Seismic velocity response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as velocities with units of
length/time).
1 Force response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as force amplitude multipliers).
2 Seismic acceleration response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as accelerations with
units of length/time 2 ).
3 Seismic displacement response spectrum loading (SV values interpreted as displacements
with units of length).
4 PSD loading (SV values interpreted as acceleration 2 /(cycles/time), such as (in/sec2 ) 2 /Hz
(not g2 /Hz)). (Not recommended)
FACT
Scale factor applied to spectrum values (defaults to 1.0). Values are scaled when the solution is
initiated [SOLVE]. Database values remain the same.
KeyInterp
Key to activate or deactivate the linear interpolation between input response spectrum points and
input response spectrum curves:
0 (OFF or NO) Deactivate linear and use logarithmic interpolation. This value is the default.
1 (ON or YES) Activate linear interpolation.
Command Default
Seismic velocity response spectrum.
Notes
Defines the type of single-point response spectrum [SPOPT]. The seismic excitation direction is defined
with the SED command.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Spectrum>SinglePt>Settings
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SVTYP.html[28/04/2013 07:28:19 p.m.]
SOLVE
SOLVE
SOLVE, Action
Starts a solution.

Action
Action to be performed on solve (used only for linear perturbation analyses).

ELFORM Reform all appropriate element matrices in the first phase of a linear perturbation
analysis.
Notes
Starts the solution of one load step of a solution sequence based on the current analysis type and option
settings. Use Action = ELFORM only in the first phase of a linear perturbation analysis.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>DesignXplorer>Solution>Solve
Menu>Drop Test>Solve
Menu>Solution>Run FLOTRAN
Menu>Solution>Solve
Menu>Solution>Solve>Current LS
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SOLVE.html[28/04/2013 07:28:33 p.m.]
Chapter 9: Linear Perturbation Analysis
Chapter9:Linear Perturbation Analysis

In many engineering applications, the linear behavior of a structure based on a prior linear or nonlinear
preloaded status is of interest. The linear perturbation analysis is designed to solve a linear problem from
this preloaded stage. Typically, in the nonlinear analysis, the Newton-Raphson procedure is used (see
Nonlinear Structural Analysis ). Frequently, the mode frequency of the structure based on the prior
application of loading is of interest. The tangent matrix from the Newton-Raphson analysis can be used
in the modal analysis in order to obtain the preloaded solution, since the linear stiffness matrix without
preloading would not give an accurate modal solution.
Generally speaking, the linear perturbation analysis can be any analysis type. However, the program
currently supports only linear perturbation modal analyses and linear perturbation buckling analyses,
with the base analysis being linear in the buckling case. This documentation focuses on linear
perturbation for modal analysis.
Most current-technology elements are supported in a linear perturbation analysis; see Elements
Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis in the Element Reference.
The following linear perturbation topics are available:
Understanding Linear Perturbation
General Procedure for Linear Perturbation Analysis
Considerations for Load Generation and Controls
Considerations for Perturbed Stiffness Matrix Generation
Considerations for Rotating Machinery
Sample Inputs for Linear Perturbation Analysis
Comparison of Linear Perturbation and Prestressed Modal Procedures
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinperturb.html[28/04/2013 07:28:38 p.m.]
2.17. Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis
2.17.Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis

Most current-technology elements support linear perturbation analysis (see Linear Perturbation Analysis
in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ). Since linear perturbation
is based on a solution at a particular time from a linear or nonlinear analysis, known as the base (or
prior) analysis, the element behaviors are based on the properties and behavior of the base analysis, but
are different from the base analysis.
The following elements can be used in a linear perturbation analysis as well as any of its downstream
analyses:
Table2.12Elements that Support Linear Perturbation
Category
Spars
Beams
Pipes
2-D Solids
3-D Solids
Shells
Solid-Shell
Interface
Contact
Specialty
Element Name(s)
LINK180
BEAM188, BEAM189
PIPE288, PIPE289
PLANE182, PLANE183
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID285
SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, SHELL281
SOLSH190
INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174,
CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, CONTA178
COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, SURF153, SURF154, SURF156,
PRETS179, MPC184, MESH200, FOLLW201, COMBI214
2.17.1.Material Behavior of Structural Elements in Linear Perturbation

In general, the base analysis of the linear perturbation can be a nonlinear analysis with nonlinear
materials, geometric nonlinearity, or contact elements included in the model. In the linear perturbation
analysis, the geometric nonlinearity at the substep where linear perturbation is initiated is completely
inherited in
of Equation17195 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications . This includes large deformation, large rotation, and contact effects. The linear perturbation
analysis can be understood as an iteration in the nonlinear base analysis. In the linear perturbation
analysis, all of the nonlinear effects are taken into consideration and frozen so that the loading and
deformation is linear. The nonlinear effects are also carried to the stress expansion pass and the
following downstream analysis, if any.
Any nonlinear material must behave linearly in the linear perturbation analysis. For hyperelastic materials
in the base analysis, the material properties are assumed to be linear elastic, and the material property
data (or material Jacobian) is obtained based on the tangent of the hyperelastic material's constitutive
law at the point where restart or linear perturbation is initiated. For any nonlinear materials other than
hyperelastic materials in the base analysis, the material properties are assumed to be linear elastic, and
the material data is the same as the linear portion of the nonlinear materials (that is, the parts defined
by MP commands). This assumption holds for the linear perturbation analysis as well as any
downstream analysis after the linear perturbation analysis.
2.17.2.Interpretation of Structural Element Results after a Linear

Perturbation Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/ELlinearpert.html[28/04/2013 07:28:50 p.m.]
After a linear perturbation analysis, the reported stress and elastic strain are the values due to the linear
perturbation analysis; for example, for linear perturbation modal analysis, the stress and elastic strain
are the values due to the mode shapes. As discussed above, the effects of any geometric nonlinearity
are taken into consideration in the stress expansion.
Since linear perturbation can be understood as an extra iteration of a base analysis, all the historydependent results of the base analysis are inherited in the results of the linear perturbation analysis.
Therefore, any plastic strains, creep strains, swelling strains, thermal strains, and contact results from
the base analysis are available in the result data of the linear perturbation analysis. Note that the total
strain will be the sum of all the strains (for example, PLNSOL,EPTO). The nonlinear solution quantities
such as equivalent stress, stress state ratio, and plastic state variable (for example, PLESOL,NL,...) are
also available. The one exception is that hydrostatic pressure is the value from the linear perturbation
analysis instead of from the base analysis.
For hyperelastic materials, the strain after the linear perturbation analysis is the elastic strain due to the
linear perturbation analysis, and the total strain will be the same as the elastic strain. For plane stress
cases, the direct strain in the Z direction is calculated with the incompressible condition for hyperelastic
materials, and with linear elastic material properties for any material other than hyperelastic materials.
The energy densities (for example, PLESOL,SEND,...) are inherited from the base analysis, except for
the elastic energy density which is energy density calculated in the linear perturbation analysis.
However, the reported strain energy (for example, PRESOL,SENE) includes the elastic part due to linear
perturbation and others inherited from the base analysis (if any).
If the base analysis includes geometric nonlinearity, the Euler angles or the geometric nonlinear effects
of the base analysis are available in the results file. Thus, all the output quantities of the linear
perturbation analysis are reported consistently in global, local, and rotated local coordinate systems, as
in the base analysis.
2.17.3.Loads, Initial Conditions, and Other Limitations in Linear

Perturbation
The following restrictions apply to linear perturbation analysis:
Perturbation loads cannot be non-mechanical loading such as initial conditions (INISTATE
command), thermal loading, and swelling effects. These loads are not allowed to be modified or
deleted during the linear perturbation analysis.
No element can be activated or deactivated using the birth and death feature during a the second
phase of a linear perturbation analysis; however, this is allowed in the first phase of linear
perturbation.
Linear perturbation analyses do not support user materials (user subroutine UserMat).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/ELlinearpert.html[28/04/2013 07:28:50 p.m.]
17.8.Linear Perturbation Analysis

The following linear perturbation analysis topics are available:
Modal Analysis Based on Linear Perturbation
Application of Perturbation Loads
Downstream Analysis Using the Solution of a Linear Perturbation Analysis

The following assumptions and restrictions apply to the linear perturbation method:
Valid for structural degrees of freedom (DOFs) only.
Supports only certain structural element types. See Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation
Analysis in the Element Reference for a complete list.
Performed by first running a linear or nonlinear static or full (TRNOPT,FULL) transient analysis,
then restarting the analysis with the appropriate linear perturbation analysis type.
For a linear perturbation modal analysis, the mass density and damping information should be
supplied in the analysis phase of the static or full transient procedure (if they are needed later for
the linear perturbation analysis).
17.8.2.Description of Analysis
In many engineering applications, the linear behavior of a structure based on a prior linear or nonlinear
preloaded status is of interest. The linear perturbation analysis procedure is designed to solve a linear
problem from this preloaded case. Typically, the Newton-Raphson procedure is used in the nonlinear
analysis (see Figure 15.9). Without loss of generality, the nonlinear static problem is discussed here. A
similar process can apply to linear static and linear or nonlinear full transient analyses.
In the case of a nonlinear static analysis, the mode frequency of the structure based on load level
is needed. The tangent matrix
can be used in the modal analysis in order to obtain the effect of
preload since the linear stiffness matrix without preloading will not give the correct solution.
Equation15146 at iteration i is recast here for convenience of discussion:
(17
194)
Here,
is the global tangent matrix which can be symbolically segregated into other matrices as
follows:
(17
195)
where:
= the part of the tangent stiffness contributed from the material property
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thylinpert.html[28/04/2013 07:28:59 p.m.]
= the stress stiffening matrix introduced by non-zero stresses from the structure; superscript N
indicates nonlinear (that is, the stress stiffening matrix is obtained from a nonlinear analysis not to be
confused with the linear stress stiffening matrix obtained from the first phase of a linear perturbation
buckling analysis)
= the load stiffening matrix introduced by external pressure loads or by follower force effect
(element FOLLW201)
= the total stiffness matrix contributed from contact elements of the model
= the spin-softening matrix introduced by rotational velocities
In the preload (or base) analysis,
could be generally nonlinear. In the subsequent linear
perturbation analysis, the material behavior must be linear. The ANSYS program uses the consistent
material Jacobian of hyperelastic materials at iteration i as the material behavior in the linear
perturbation analysis. For other nonlinear materials, the ANSYS program uses the linear portion of the
material in the linear perturbation analysis. For any linear materials, the same behaviors are assumed in
both the base and the linear perturbation analyses (see the PERTURB command).
In the case of contact analysis from the static or full transient runs,
is by default the consistent
tangent (total) stiffness matrix from the contact elements based on their status at iteration i. However,
you are optionally allowed to change contact behavior and, hence, contact stiffness globally by using the
PERTURB command in the linear perturbation analysis or the CNKMOD command for individual contact
pairs. All contact behavior can be changed into the following form (similar to KEYOPT(12) in the contact
element descriptions; for example, CONTA174) from whatever behavior it was in the previous static or
full transient analysis to:
1
2
3
4
-----
Rough
No separation (sliding permitted)
Bonded
No separation (always)
17.8.3.Modal Analysis Based on Linear Perturbation

A modal analysis can be performed by using the linear perturbation analysis procedure. The effect of the
structure from the previous static or full transient analysis is included. The theoretical steps can be
summarized as follows:
1. Perform a static or full transient analysis; use the RESCONTROL command to create the restart
files for the load points of interest (i.e., at various substeps of a load step).
2. Restart the analysis at the load point of interest and issue the commands PERTURB,MODAL and
SOLVE,ELFORM. The ANSYS program will regenerate the total tangent stiffness matrix
from
the restart point.
3. If a downstream analysis is desired using the load vector from the modal analysis, the perturbation
load can be defined or modified here (see Application of Perturbation Loads and also the
PERTURB command description) for the downstream analyses.
4. Upon the onset of the second SOLVE command, the nodal coordinates will be updated
automatically if large-deflection is included (NLGEOM,ON). The ANSYS program will then calculate
the eigensolution using the following equation (similar to Equation15184):

(17
196)
where:
= total tangent matrix from the load point of interest
{i} = eigenvector
[M] = structural mass matrix
The structural material behavior in a linear perturbation analysis is discussed above and can be
controlled by the PERTURB command. The UNSYM and DAMP eigensolvers can be used as well.
In the case of the DAMP eigensolution, the following equation (similar to Equation15203) is
solved:
(17
197)
where [Ci] = structural damping matrix.
5. Along with the modal solution phase, a stress expansion pass is carried out (see Interpretation of
Structural Element Results after a Linear Perturbation Analysis in the Element Reference for
details). Basically, the material property specified by the PERTURB,,AUTO command behaves
linearly, with the exception of hyperelastic materials. In the case of hyperelasticity, the material
property is assumed for stress or strain calculations. In order to use the appropriate material
property and to obtain the total sum of elastic strain/stress due to the linear perturbation analysis
and the base analysis, a stress expansion pass should be done along with the modal analysis. A
separate expansion pass (EXPASS command) is not allowed after the linear perturbation analysis.
17.8.4.Application of Perturbation Loads

The total perturbed loads are optionally needed in a modal analysis. One of the obvious reasons they
would be needed for modal analysis is that a downstream mode superposition (MSUP) analysis needs
loads.
The total perturbed loads are calculated as follows:
(17
198)
where:
{F end } = total loads at the end of the load step of the current restart load point (load applications are
read from the .LDHI file, see Figure 17.7). By default, {F end } only contains loads contributed by
displacement boundary conditions, inertia loads, and thermal loads (see the PERTURB command).
{F add } = additional (new) loads prescribed by the user in the second phase of the linear perturbation
analysis (after the first SOLVE command is invoked). This additional loading is optional.
Figure 17.7 provides a graphic example of the definitions for the different load vectors. Two ramped load
steps are shown in the figure. Since a linear perturbation analysis is started at load step = 2, substep =
3, the load vectors by definition are {F end } = 40 lb and {F restart } = 25 lb.
Figure17.7Linear Perturbation Started from Loadstep = 2, Substep = 3
{F restart } is the total loads at the current restart point. It is useful for other types of linear perturbation
analysis, such as buckling analysis.
Special consideration is required if extra displacement boundary conditions are added or if constraint
equations are added or deleted during the linear perturbation analysis because these modifications could
introduce discontinuities into the structure.
In the first phase of a linear perturbation analysis, the ANTYPE,,RESTART command will resume the
Jobname.RDB database and read in the .LDHI file to establish the {F end } load.
For Type = MODAL, {F perturbed } will be calculated and stored in the .FULL and .MODE files for a
subsequent mode-superposition, PSD, or other type of modal-based linear dynamic analysis.
17.8.5.Downstream Analysis Using the Solution of a Linear Perturbation

Analysis
Following the linear perturbation analysis, other analysis types can be performed by using the
information from the linear perturbation analysis.
If the linear perturbation analysis is a modal analysis, the following analysis types are possible by using
the .MODE file generated by the linear perturbation analysis and the database of the model:
harmonic or transient analysis of the mode superposition (MSUP) method
response spectrum analysis
random vibration analysis
Note that the deformed mesh due to the prior static or full transient analysis is used in the linear
perturbation analysis and in the downstream analysis.
In all the above listed analyses, the first load vector used will be {F perturbed } from Equation17198. If
more loading cases are required, it is required to regenerate a new {F perturbed } load vector by using the
MODCONT command. Only linear material properties are supported in these analyses. The program
assumes the analyses are purely linear.
Mechanical APDL Element Reference
Table of Contents
1. About This Reference
1.1. Conventions Used in This Reference
1.1.1. Product Codes
1.1.2. Applicable ANSYS Products
1.2. ANSYS Product Capabilities
2. General Element Features
2.1. Element Input
2.1.1.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
2.1.6.
2.1.7.
2.1.8.
2.1.9.
Element Name
Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Special Features
KEYOPTs
2.2. Solution Output

2.2.1. Nodal Solution
2.2.2. Element Solution
2.3. Coordinate Systems
2.3.1. Element Coordinate Systems
2.3.2. Elements that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System
2.4. Linear Material Properties
2.4.1.
2.4.2.
2.4.3.
2.4.4.
2.4.5.
2.4.6.
2.4.7.
2.4.8.
2.4.9.
Defining Linear Material Properties

Stress-Strain Relationships
Damping
Thermal Expansion
Emissivity
Specific Heat
Film Coefficients
Temperature Dependency
How ANSYS Evaluates Linear Material Properties
2.5. Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis)

2.5.1. Nonlinear Stress-Strain Material Models
2.5.2. Hyperelastic Material Models
2.5.3. Special Hyperelastic Material Models
2.5.4. Viscoelastic Material Model
2.5.5. Magnetic Material Model (TB,BH)
2.5.6. High-Frequency Electromagnetic Material Models
2.5.7. Anisotropic Elastic Material Model (TB,ANEL)
2.5.8. Piezoelectric Material Model (TB,DPER)
2.5.9. Piezoresistive Material Model (TB,PZRS)
2.5.10. Anisotropic Electric Permittivity Material Model (TB,DPER)
2.5.11. Rate-Dependent Plastic (Viscoplastic) Material Models (TB,RATE)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_ElemTOC.html[28/04/2013 07:29:16 p.m.]
2.5.12.
2.5.13.
2.5.14.
2.5.15.
2.5.16.
2.5.17.
2.5.18.
2.5.19.
2.5.20.
2.5.21.
2.5.22.
Gasket Material Model (TB,GASKET)

Creep Equations (TB,CREEP)
Shape Memory Alloy Material Model (TB,SMA)
Swelling Equation Constants (TB,SWELL)
MPC184 Joint Material Models (TB,JOIN)
Contact Friction (TB,FRIC)
Cohesive Zone Material Constants (TB,CZM)
Fluid Material Models (TB,FLUID)
Material Strength Limits (TB,FCLI)
Understanding Field Variable Interpolation
GUI-Inaccessible Material Properties
2.6. Material Model Combinations

2.7. Explicit Dynamics Materials
2.8. Node and Element Loads
2.9. Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements
2.10. Shell Elements
2.11. Generalized Plane Strain (Current-Technology Solid Element Option)
2.12. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
2.12.1. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads
2.13. General Axisymmetric Elements
2.13.1. Example: 3-D General Axisymmetric Model
2.14. Shear Deflection
2.15. Geometric Nonlinearities
2.16. Mixed u-P Formulation Elements
2.16.1.
2.16.2.
2.16.3.
2.16.4.
Overview of Mixed u-P Element Technologies

Mixed u-P Element Summary
Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations
Mixed u-P Models and Overconstraint or No Unique Solution

2.17.1. Material Behavior of Structural Elements in Linear Perturbation
2.17.2. Interpretation of Structural Element Results after a Linear Perturbation Analysis
2.17.3. Loads, Initial Conditions, and Other Limitations in Linear Perturbation
2.18. Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies
2.18.1. Current-Technology Element Benefits
2.19. Automatic Selection of Element Technologies
2.20. User-Defined Elements
3. Element Characteristics
3.1. Element Classifications
3.2. Pictorial Summary
3.3. GUI-Inaccessible Elements
4. Element Library
I. Element Library
LINK11 - Linear Actuator
PLANE13 - 2-D Coupled-Field Solid
COMBIN14 - Spring-Damper

MATRIX27 - Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
SHELL28 - Shear/Twist Panel
FLUID29 - 2-D Axisymmetric Harmonic Acoustic Fluid
LINK31 - Radiation Link
LINK33 - 3-D Conduction Bar
LINK34 - Convection Link
PLANE35 - 2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid
SOURC36 - Current Source
COMBIN37 - Control
FLUID38 - Dynamic Fluid Coupling
COMBIN39 - Nonlinear Spring
COMBIN40 - Combination
SHELL41 - Membrane Shell
MATRIX50 - Superelement (or Substructure)
PLANE53 - 2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
PLANE55 - 2-D Thermal Solid
SOLID62 - 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
SOLID65 - 3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid
LINK68 - Coupled Thermal-Electric Line
SOLID70 - 3-D Thermal Solid
MASS71 - Thermal Mass
PLANE77 - 2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid
FLUID81 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
SOLID96 - 3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid
SOLID97 - 3-D Magnetic Solid
SOLID98 - Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
TRANS109 - 2-D Electromechanical Transducer
FLUID116 - Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe
SOLID117 - 3-D 20-Node Magnetic Solid
HF118 - 2-D High-Frequency Quadrilateral Solid
HF119 - 3-D High-Frequency Tetrahedral Solid
HF120 - 3-D High-Frequency Brick Solid
PLANE121 - 2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid
SOLID122 - 3-D 20-Node Electrostatic Solid
SOLID123 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid
CIRCU124 - Electric Circuit
CIRCU125 - Diode
TRANS126 - Electromechanical Transducer
FLUID129 - 2-D Infinite Acoustic
FLUID130 - 3-D Infinite Acoustic
FLUID138 - 3-D Viscous Fluid Link Element
FLUID139 - 3-D Slide Film Fluid Element

ROM144 - Reduced Order Electrostatic-Structural
SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect
SHELL157 - Thermal-Electric Shell
SURF159 - General Axisymmetric Surface
LINK160 - Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)
BEAM161 - Explicit 3-D Beam
PLANE162 - Explicit 2-D Structural Solid
SHELL163 - Explicit Thin Structural Shell
SOLID164 - Explicit 3-D Structural Solid
COMBI165 - Explicit Spring-Damper
MASS166 - Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
LINK167 - Explicit Tension-Only Spar
SOLID168 - Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
CONTA175 - 2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact
CONTA176 - 3-D Line-to-Line Contact
CONTA177 - 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
CONTA178 - 3-D Node-to-Node Contact
PRETS179 - Pretension
LINK180 - 3-D Spar (or Truss)
SHELL181 - 4-Node Structural Shell
PLANE182 - 2-D 4-Node Structural Solid
PLANE183 - 2-D 8-Node or 6-Node Structural Solid
MPC184 - Multipoint Constraint Element
MPC184-Link/Beam - Multipoint Constraint Element: Rigid Link or Rigid Beam
MPC184-Slider - Multipoint Constraint Element: Slider
MPC184-Revolute - Multipoint Constraint Element: Revolute Joint
MPC184-Universal - Multipoint Constraint Element: Universal Joint
MPC184-Slot - Multipoint Constraint Element: Slot Joint
MPC184-Point - Multipoint Constraint Element: Point-in-plane Joint
MPC184-Translational - Multipoint Constraint Element: Translational Joint
MPC184-Cylindrical - Multipoint Constraint Element: Cylindrical Joint
MPC184-Planar - Multipoint Constraint Element: Planar Joint
MPC184-Weld - Multipoint Constraint Element: Weld Joint
MPC184-Orient - Multipoint Constraint Element: Orient Joint
MPC184-Spherical - Multipoint Constraint Element: Spherical Joint
MPC184-General - Multipoint Constraint Element: General Joint
MPC184-Screw - Multipoint Constraint Element: Screw Joint
SOLID187 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
BEAM188 - 3-D 2-Node Beam
BEAM189 - 3-D 3-Node Beam
SOLSH190 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid Shell
MESH200 - Meshing Facet
FOLLW201 - Follower Load

SHELL208 - 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell
SHELL209 - 3-Node Axisymmetric Shell
CPT212 - 2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid
COMBI214 - 2-D Spring-Damper Bearing
FLUID220 - 3-D Acoustic Fluid 20-Node Solid Element
FLUID221 - 3-D Acoustic Fluid 10-Node Solid Element
SOLID226 - 3-D 20-Node Coupled-Field Solid
SOLID227 - 3-D 10-Node Coupled-Field Solid
PLANE230 - 2-D 8-Node Electric Solid
SOLID231 - 3-D 20-Node Electric Solid
SOLID232 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid
PLANE233 - 2-D 8-Node Electromagnetic Solid
SOLID236 - 3-D 20-Node Electromagnetic Solid
SOLID237 - 3-D 10-Node Electromagnetic Solid
SURF251 - 2-D Radiosity Surface
SURF252 - 3-D Thermal Radiosity Surface
REINF264 - 3-D Discrete Reinforcing
SHELL281 - 8-Node Structural Shell
SOLID285 - 3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with Nodal Pressures
PIPE288 - 3-D 2-Node Pipe
PIPE289 - 3-D 3-Node Pipe
ELBOW290 - 3-D 3-Node Elbow
USER300 - User-Defined Element
Bibliography
Chapter 1: About This Reference
Chapter1:About This Reference

Welcome to the Element Reference. This reference contains a complete library of detailed ANSYS
element descriptions, arranged in order by element number. It is the definitive reference for element
documentation.
For detailed information about the features included in the element documentation, see General Element
Features. For a classification table of element types and a pictorial summary list of element
characteristics, see Element Characteristics .
This reference is not a primary source of procedural information. See the appropriate analysis guides for
conceptual and procedural information.
The following Element Reference topics are available:
Conventions Used in This Reference
ANSYS Product Capabilities
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH1.html[28/04/2013 07:29:22 p.m.]
Chapter 2: General Element Features
Chapter2:General Element Features

The element library consists of approximately 200 element formulations or types. Individual elements are
described in Element Library .
Many features are common to all elements in the library. This chapter addresses the common features.
Some element types or features may not be available based on the product-licensing options active at
your site. Any restrictions for an element are documented in the "Product Restrictions" section for that
element.
The following element feature topics are available:
Element Input
Solution Output
Coordinate Systems
Linear Material Properties
Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis)
Material Model Combinations
Explicit Dynamics Materials
Node and Element Loads
Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements
Shell Elements
Generalized Plane Strain (Current-Technology Solid Element Option)
Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
General Axisymmetric Elements
Shear Deflection
Geometric Nonlinearities
Mixed u-P Formulation Elements
Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis
Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies
Automatic Selection of Element Technologies
User-Defined Elements
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH2.html[28/04/2013 07:29:30 p.m.]
Chapter 4: Element Library
Chapter4:Element Library
This chapter describes each element, in numerical order. Descriptions common to several elements
appear in separate sections of General Element Features and are referenced where applicable. Read
About This Reference and General Element Features before reading the element descriptions in
PartI:Element Library .
More detailed information about each element is available in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications , which describes how the element input items (such as the real
constants, material properties, KEYOPT switches, etc.) are used to produce the element output.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH4_1.html[28/04/2013 07:29:35 p.m.]
Part I, Element Library
PartI, Element Library

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_ElemLib.html[28/04/2013 07:29:48 p.m.]
3.12. Applying Multiple Loads for use in Mode-Superposition Harmonic and Transient Analysis
3.12.Applying Multiple Loads for use in Mode-Superposition Harmonic

and Transient Analysis
In ANSYS mode-superposition harmonic and transient analysis, only nodal forces are allowed to be
applied directly. The other loads (SF, SFE, BF, ACEL, OMEGA, etc.) can only be applied in modal
analysis, and then they can be applied and scaled using the LVSCALE command in the modesuperposition harmonic and transient analysis. Nodal force can also be applied more efficiently using this
multiple loads method.
3.12.1.Understanding the Multiple Loads Method

To use the multiple loads method, you must first generate load vectors in the modal analysis. You can
use any of these modal analysis mode-extraction methods:
ANSYS stores the generated load vectors in the Jobname.MODE file and uses them in the subsequent
mode-superposition transient or mode-superposition harmonic analysis.
3.12.2.Using the Multiple Loads Method

The procedure for generating multiple load vectors is as follows:
1. Build the model.
2. Specify the mode-extraction method (MODOPT,LANB, MODOPT,LANPCG or SNODE).
3. Activate multiple load vectors generation (MODCONT,ON). Use the IgnoreThermalStrain key if
you wish to ignore thermal strains in the generated load vector.
4. Specify the set of loads (F, BF, SF, etc.).
5. Issue SOLVE (performing the modal extraction and generating the first load vector).
6. Delete the first set of loads and apply the second set of loads.
7. Issue SOLVE (generating the second load vector).
8. Repeat step 6 and 7 for any additional load vectors.
Using load vectors generated in mode-superposition transient and harmonic analysis:
1. Set up a mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis.
2. Scale the load vectors by using LVSCALE command.
3. Solve the mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strappmullo.html[28/04/2013 07:30:27 p.m.]
SF
SF
SF, Nlist , Lab , VALUE , VALUE2

Specifies surface loads on nodes.
Nlist
Lab
SOLUTION : FE Surface Loads

MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> FL EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Nodes defining the surface upon which the load is to be applied. Use the label ALL or P, or a
component name. If ALL, all selected nodes [NSEL] are used (default). If P, graphical picking is
enabled and all remaining command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI).
Valid surface load label. Load labels are listed under "Surface Loads" in the input table for each
element type in the Element Reference.
Discipline
Structural
Thermal
Acoustic fluid
Magnetic
Electric
Infinite element
High-frequency
electromagnetic
Surface Load Label

PRES
FREQ
CONV[1]
HFLUX[1]
RAD
RDSF
FSI[2]
IMPD
MXWF
MCI
CHRGS
MXWF
INF
IMPD
FSIN[3]
pressure
frequency (harmonic analyses only)
convection
heat flux
radiation
surface-to-surface radiation
fluid-structure interaction flag
impedance boundary flag
Maxwell force flag
magnetic circuit interface
surface charge density
Maxwell force flag
Exterior surface flag for INFIN110
and INFIN111
number 1-50 for a waveguide
exterior port
surface shielding properties
Maxwell surface flag of equivalent
source surface
surface impedance
field-surface interface number
FFLX
Fluid flow flux
PORT
SHLD
MXWF
Field-surface
interface
Poromechanics
Label Description
1. Thermal labels CONV and HFLUX are mutually exclusive.

2. For an acoustic analysis, apply the fluid-structure interaction flag (Label = FSI) to only the
FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID220, and FLUID221 elements.
3. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis, apply the field-surface interface flag (Label = FSIN)
twice: once for the fluid side (FLUID141 or FLUID142 elements) and once for the solid side.
VALUE
Surface load value or table name reference for specifying tabular boundary conditions.
If Lab = PRES, VALUE is the real component of the pressure.
If Lab = CONV, VALUE is typically the film coefficient and VALUE2 (below) is typically the bulk
temperature. If VALUE = -N, the film coefficient may be a function of temperature and is
determined from the HF property table for material N [MP]. The temperature used to evaluate the
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_SF.html[28/04/2013 07:30:33 p.m.]
SF
film coefficient is usually the average between the bulk and wall temperatures, but may be userdefined for some elements.
If Lab = MCI, VALUE indicates current direction (-1; current flow into the element face (IN), +1;
current flow out of the element face (OUT). If Lab = RAD, VALUE is surface emissivity.
If Lab = PORT, VALUE is a port number representing a waveguide exterior port. The port number
must be an integer between 1 and 50.
If Lab = SHLD, VALUE is surface conductivity.
If Lab = IMPD, VALUE is resistance in ohms/square.
If Lab = RDSF, VALUE is the emissivity value; the following conditions apply: If VALUE is between 0
and 1, apply a single value to the surface. If VALUE = -N, the emissivity may be a function of the
temperature, and is determined from the EMISS property table for material N (MP). The material N
does not need to correlate with the underlying solid thermal elements.
If Lab = FSIN in a Multi-field solver (single or multiple code coupling) analysis, VALUE is the surface
interface number. If Lab = FSIN in a unidirectional ANSYS to CFX analysis, VALUE is not used
unless the ANSYS analysis is performed using the Multi-field solver.
VALUE2
Second surface load value (if any).
If Lab = PRES, VALUE2 is the imaginary component of the pressure. Imaginary pressures can only
be used by SURF153, SURF154 and SURF159, and can only be used for a full harmonic response
analysis (HROPT,FULL), or by a mode superposition harmonic response analysis (HROPT,MSUP)
if the mode extraction method is Block Lanczos (MODOPT,LANB), PCG Lanczos
(MODOPT,LANPCG), or Supernode (MODOPT,SNODE).
If Lab = CONV, VALUE2 is typically the bulk temperature.
If Lab = RAD, VALUE2 is the ambient temperature.
If Lab = SHLD, VALUE2 is relative permeability and defaults to 1.0.
If Lab = IMPD, VALUE2 is reactance in ohms/square.
If Lab = RDSF, VALUE2 is the enclosure number. Radiation will occur between surfaces flagged with
the same enclosure numbers. If the enclosure is open, radiation will also occur to ambient. If
VALUE2 is negative radiation direction is reversed and will occur inside the element for the flagged
radiation surfaces. Negative value of enclosure number is applicable for FLUID141 and FLUID142
elements, to model radiation occurring between surfaces inside the fluid domain.
If Lab = FSIN in a unidirectional ANSYS to CFX analysis, VALUE2 is the surface interface number
(not available from within the GUI).
If Lab = PORT, VALUE2 is not used.
Notes
Individual nodes may not be entered for this command. The node list is to identify a surface and the
Nlist field must contain a sufficient number of nodes to define an element surface. The loads are
internally stored on element faces defined by the specified nodes. All nodes on an element face
(including midside nodes, if any) must be specified for the face to be used, and the element must be
selected.
If all nodes defining a face are shared by an adjacent face of another selected element, the face is not
free and will not have a load applied. If more than one element can share the same nodes (for example,
a surface element attached to a solid element), select the desired element type before issuing the SF
command. The SF command applies only to area and volume elements.
For shell elements, if the specified nodes include face one (which is usually the bottom face) along with
other faces (such as edges), only face one is used. Where faces cannot be uniquely determined from
the nodes, or where the face does not fully describe the load application, use the SFE command. A load
key of 1 (which is typically the first loading condition on the first face) is used if the face determination
is not unique. A uniform load value is applied over the element face.
SF
See the SFBEAM command for applying surface loads to beam elements. See the SFGRAD command
for an alternate tapered load capability. See the SFFUN command for applying loads from a node vs.
value function. Also see the SFE command for applying tapered loads on individual element faces. Use
the SFDELE command to delete loads applied with this command. Use the SFCUM command to
accumulate (add) surface loads applied with SF.
Tabular boundary conditions ( VALUE = %tabname% and/or VALUE2 = %tabname%) are available for the
following surface load labels ( Lab ) only: PRES (real and/or imaginary components), CONV (film
coefficient and/or bulk temperature) or HFLUX, and RAD (surface emissivity and ambient temperature).
Use the *DIM command to define a table.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define
Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On
Nodes
Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Node
Components
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Define Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Trefftz Domain>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppImped_E>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Boundary>AppShield>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>AppSurfChar>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Excitation>EMPorts>Exterior Port>On
Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Electric>Flag>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Main Menu>Solution>Define Loads>Apply>Field Surface Intr>On Nodes
SF
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>Solution>Define
Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Field Surface>On Nodes

Loads>Apply>Fluid/ANSYS>Impedance>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppInfinite>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Flag>AppMCI>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Magnetic>Other>AppMaxwell>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Node Components
Loads>Apply>Structural>Pressure>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Thermal>Convection>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Thermal>Heat Flux>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Thermal>Radiation>On Nodes
Loads>Apply>Thermal>Surface Rad>On Nodes
NSEL
NSEL
NSEL, Type , Item , Comp , VMIN , VMAX , VINC , KABS

Selects a subset of nodes.
Type
DATABASE : Selecting
Label identifying the type of select:

S Select a new set (default).
R Reselect a set from the current set.
A Additionally select a set and extend the current set.
U Unselect a set from the current set.
ALL Restore the full set.
NONE Unselect the full set.
INVE Invert the current set (selected becomes unselected and vice versa).
STAT Display the current select status.
The following fields are used only with Type = S, R, A, or U:

Item
Comp
VMIN
VMAX
VINC
KABS
Label identifying data. Valid item labels are shown in the table below. Some items also require a
component label. If Item = PICK (or simply P), graphical picking is enabled and all remaining
command fields are ignored (valid only in the GUI). Defaults to NODE.
Component of the item (if required). Valid component labels are shown in the table below.
Minimum value of item range. Ranges are node numbers, set numbers, coordinate values, load
values, or result values as appropriate for the item. A component name (as specified on the CM
command) may also be substituted for VMIN ( VMAX and VINC are ignored).
Maximum value of item range. VMAX defaults to VMIN for input values. For result values, VMAX
defaults to infinity if VMIN is positive, or to zero if VMIN is negative.
Value increment within range. Used only with integer ranges (such as for node and set numbers).
Defaults to 1. VINC cannot be negative.
Absolute value key:
0 Check sign of value during selection.
1 Use absolute value during selection (sign ignored).
Command Default
All nodes are selected.
Notes
Selects a subset of nodes. For example, to select a new set of nodes based on node numbers 1 through
7, use NSEL,S,NODE,,1,7. The subset is used when the ALL label is entered (or implied) on other
commands, such as NLIST,ALL. Only data identified by node number are selected. Data are flagged as
selected and unselected; no data are actually deleted from the database.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_NSEL.html[28/04/2013 07:30:39 p.m.]
NSEL
When selecting nodes by results, the full graphics value is used, regardless of whether PowerGraphics is
on.
Solution result data consists of two types, 1) nodal degree of freedom--results initially calculated at the
nodes (such as displacement, temperature, pressure, etc.), and 2) element--results initially calculated
elsewhere (such as at an element integration point or thickness location) and then recalculated at the
nodes (such as stresses, strains, etc.). Various element results also depend upon the recalculation
method and the selected results location [AVPRIN, RSYS, FORCE, LAYER and SHELL].
You must have all the nodes (corner and midside nodes) on the external face of the element selected to
use Item = EXT.
For Selects based on non-integer numbers (coordinates, results, etc.), items that are within the range
VMIN-Toler and VMAX+ Toler are selected. The default tolerance Toler is based on the relative values
of VMIN and VMAX as follows:
If VMIN = VMAX, Toler = 0.005 x VMIN.
If VMIN = VMAX = 0.0, Toler = 1.0E-6.
If VMAX VMIN, Toler = 1.0E-8 x (VMAX-VMIN).
Use the SELTOL command to override this default and specify Toler explicitly.
Table:NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels
Valid Item and Component Labels NSEL, Type,Item,Comp,VMIN,VMAX,VINC,KABS
Valid item and component labels for input values are:
Item
Comp
Description
NODE
Node number.
EXT
Nodes on exterior of selected elements (ignore remaining

fields).
LOC
X, Y, Z
X, Y, or Z location in the active coordinate system.
ANG
XY, YZ, ZX
THXY, THYZ, or THZX rotation angle.
M
Master node number.

CP
Coupled set number.

CE
Constraint equation set number.

D
U
Any of X, Y, or Z structural displacements. Amplitude only, if
complex.
"
UX, UY, UZ
X, Y, or Z structural displacement. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
ROT
Any of X, Y, or Z structural rotations. Amplitude only, if
complex.
"
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ X, Y, or Z structural rotation. Amplitude only, if complex.
"
TEMP, TBOT, TE2, Temperature.
TE3, . . ., TTOP
"
PRES
Pressure.
"
VOLT
Electric potential.
"
MAG
Magnetic scalar potential.
"
V
Any of X, Y, or Z fluid velocities.
"
VX, VY, VZ
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity.
"
A
Any of X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potentials. Amplitude only, if
complex.
NSEL
"
AX, AY, AZ
"
"
"
CURR
EMF
ENKE, ENDS
F
FX, FY, FZ
M
F
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
MX, MY, MZ
HEAT, HBOT, HE2,
HE3, . . ., HTOP
FLOW
AMPS
FLUX
CSG
"
CSGX, CSGY,
"
"
BF
"
"
"
"
"
CSGZY,
CHRG
CHRGD
TEMP
FLUE
HGEN
JS
JSX, JSY, JSZ
MVDI
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential. Amplitude only, if

complex.
Current.
Electromotive force drop.
Turbulent kinetic energy or energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
Any of X, Y, or Z structural forces. Amplitude only, if complex.
X, Y, or Z structural force. Amplitude only, if complex.
Any of X, Y, or Z structural moments. Amplitude only, if
complex
X, Y, or Z structural moment. Amplitude only, if complex.
Heat flow.
Fluid flow.
Current flow.
Magnetic flux.
Any of X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment components.
Amplitude only, if complex.
X, Y, or Z magnetic current segment component. Amplitude
only, if complex.
if complex.
Electric charge.
Electric charge density.
Nodal temperature.
Nodal fluence.
Nodal heat generation rate.
Any of X, Y, or Z current densities. Amplitude only, if complex.
X, Y, or Z current density. Amplitude only, if complex.
Magnetic virtual displacements flag.
Table:NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for Nodal DOF Result Values
Item
U
ROT
TEMP
PRES
VOLT
MAG
V
A
CURR
EMF
ENKE
ENDS
Comp
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
Description
X, Y, or Z structural displacement or vector sum.
X, Y, or Z structural rotation or vector sum.
Temperature.
Pressure.
Electric potential.
Magnetic scalar potential.
X, Y, or Z fluid velocity or vector sum.
X, Y, or Z magnetic vector potential or vector sum.
Current.
Electromotive force drop.
Turbulent kinetic energy (FLOTRAN).
Turbulent energy dissipation (FLOTRAN).
Table:NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for Element Result Values
Item
S
"
"
Comp
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
1, 2, 3
INT, EQV
Description
Component stress.
Principal stress.
Stress intensity or equivalent stress.
NSEL
EPTO
"
"
EPEL
"
"
EPPL
"
"
EPCR
"
"
EPTH
"
"
EPSW
NL
"
"
"
"
"
CONT
"
"
"
"
"
TG
TF
PG
EF
D
H
B
FMAG
TOPO
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
1,2,3
INT, EQV
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
1, 2, 3
INT, EQV
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
1,2,3
INT, EQV
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
1,2,3
INT, EQV
X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
1, 2, 3
INT, EQV
SEPL
SRAT
HPRES
EPEQ
PSV
PLWK
STAT1
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
X, Y, Z, SUM
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
Component total strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR).

Principal total strain.
Total strain intensity or total equivalent strain.
Component elastic strain.
Principal elastic strain.
Elastic strain intensity or elastic equivalent strain.
Component plastic strain.
Principal plastic strain.
Plastic strain intensity or plastic equivalent strain.
Component creep strain.
Principal creep strain.
Creep strain intensity or creep equivalent strain.
Component thermal strain.
Principal thermal strain.
Thermal strain intensity or thermal equivalent strain.
Swelling strain.
Equivalent stress (from stress-strain curve).
Stress state ratio.
Hydrostatic pressure.
Accumulated equivalent plastic strain.
Plastic state variable.
Plastic work/volume.
Contact status.
Contact penetration.
Contact pressure.
Contact friction stress.
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction).
Contact sliding distance.
Component thermal gradient or vector sum.
Component thermal flux or vector sum.
Component pressure gradient or vector sum.
Component electric field or vector sum.
Component electric flux density or vector sum.
Component magnetic field intensity or vector sum.
Component magnetic flux density or vector sum.
Component electromagnetic forces or vector sum.
Densities used for topological optimization.
1. For more information on the meaning of contact status and its possible values, see Reviewing
Results in POST1 in the Contact Technology Guide .
Table:NSEL - Valid Item and Component Labels for FLOTRAN Nodal Result Values
Item
TTOT
HFLU
HFLM
COND
PCOE
PTOT
Comp
Description
Total temperature.
Heat flux.
Heat transfer (film) coefficient.
Fluid laminar conductivity.
Pressure coefficient.
Total (stagnation) pressure.
NSEL
MACH
STRM
DENS
VISC
EVIS
CMUV
ECON
YPLU
TAUW
Mach number.
Stream function. (2-D applications only.)
Fluid density.
Fluid laminar viscosity.
Fluid effective viscosity.
Turbulent viscosity coefficient.
Fluid effective conductivity.
Y+, a turbulent law of the wall parameter.
Shear stress at the wall.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Create>Circuit>Delete Elements
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Delete>Pre-tens Elemnts
Utility Menu>Select>Entities
3.13. Reusing Extracted Eigenmodes in LANB, LANPCG and SNODE method
3.13.Reusing Extracted Eigenmodes in LANB, LANPCG and SNODE

method
Reusing eigenmodes that have already been generated can save significant time in an analysis. Modal
extraction typically requires more time than element loads generation, residual vector calculation, and
enforced static modes calculation.
3.13.1.Understanding the Reuse Eigenmodes

To use the extracted eignemodes method, you must have already done a modal analysis. You can use
either of one these modal analysis mode-extraction methods:
ANSYS calculates the new load vector, residual vectors, and enforced static modes, and updates the
existing MODE file. ANSYS then uses them in the subsequent mode-superposition analysis.
3.13.2.Reusing the Existing Eigenmodes

The procedure for calculating residual vectors is as follows:
1. Resume the database of the existing modal analysis.
2. Specify ANTYPE,MODAL,RESTART
3. Apply the new load and/or activate residual vector calculation or enforced motion (MODCONT).
4. Issue SOLVE.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/str_mod_reexeiglanblan.html[28/04/2013 07:31:21 p.m.]
MODOPT
MODOPT
MODOPT, Method, NMODE , FREQB , FREQE , Cpxmod/PRMODE , Nrmkey, --, BlockSize

Specifies modal analysis options.
SOLUTION : Dynamic Options

MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Method
Mode-extraction method to be used for the modal analysis.

LANB Block Lanczos
LANPCG PCG Lanczos
SNODE Supernode modal solver
REDUC Householder (reduced)
UNSYM Unsymmetric matrix
DAMP Damped system
QRDAMP Damped system using QR algorithm
VT Solve with the Variational Technology method of ANSYS DesignXplorer
NMODE
The number of modes to extract. The value can depend on the value supplied for Method. Defaults
to the number of master DOFs when Method = REDUC. For the other methods, NMODE has no
default and must be specified. If Method = LANB, LANPCG, or SNODE, the number of modes that
can be extracted can equal the DOFs in the model after the application of all boundary conditions.
Recommendation:
When Method = REDUC, NMODE should be less than half of the number of master DOFs.
When Method = LANPCG, NMODE should be less than 100 to be computationally efficient.
When Method = SNODE, NMODE should be greater than 100 for 2-D plane or 3-D shell/beam
models and greater than 250 for 3-D solid elements to be computationally efficient.
FREQB
The beginning, or lower end, of the frequency range of interest.

For Method = LANB, UNSYM, DAMP, and QRDAMP, FREQB also represents the first shift point for the
eigenvalue iterations. If values for UNSYM or DAMP are zero or blank, the default value is -1.0. For
the other methods, the default is internally computed. Eigenvalue extraction is most accurate near
the shift point; multiple shift points are used internally in the LANB and QRDAMP methods. For
LANB, LANPCG, UNSYM, DAMP, and QRDAMP methods with a positive FREQB , eigenvalues are
output beginning at the shift point and increase in magnitude. For UNSYM and DAMP methods with
a negative FREQB value, eigenvalues are output beginning at zero magnitude and increase.
Choosing higher FREQB values with the LANPCG and SNODE methods may lead to inefficient
solution times because these methods will find all eigenvalues between zero and FREQB before
finding the requested modes between FREQB and FREQE .
FREQE
The ending, or upper end, of the frequency range of interest (in Hz). The default for Method =
SNODE is described below. The default for all other methods is to calculate all modes, regardless
of their maximum frequency.
The default is 100 Hz for Method = SNODE. To maintain solution efficiency, you should not set the
FREQE value too high; for example, not higher than 5000 Hz for an industrial problem. The higher
the FREQE value used for the SNODE method, the more solution time it will take and the more
eigenvalues it could produce. For example, if FREQE is set to 1e8, it will cause the underlying
supernodal structures to find all the possible eigenvalues of each group of supernodes; hence, it
will take an excessive amount of solution time.
Cpxmod/PRMODE
CPXMOD (Valid
only when Method = QRDAMP).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_MODOPT.html[28/04/2013 07:31:26 p.m.]
MODOPT
ON Calculate complex eigenmode shapes.

OFF Do not calculate complex eigenmode shapes. This is the default.
PRMODE
The number of reduced modes to print. Valid only when Method = REDUC.
Nrmkey
Mode shape normalization key:

OFF Normalize the mode shapes to the mass matrix (default).
ON Normalize the mode shapes to unity instead of to the mass matrix. If a subsequent
spectrum or mode superposition analysis is planned, the mode shapes should be
normalized to the mass matrix ( Nrmkey = OFF).
--
Unused field.
BlockSize
The block vector size to be used with the Block Lanczos eigensolver (used only when Method =
LANB). BlockSize must be an integer value between 0 and 16. When BlockSize = zero or blank,
the code decides the block size internally (normally, a value of 8 is used). Typically, higher
BlockSize values are more efficient under each of the following conditions:
When running in out-of-core mode and there is not enough physical memory to buffer all of
the files written by the Block Lanczos eigensolver (and thus, the time spent doing I/O is
considerable).
Many modes are requested (>100).
Higher-order solid elements dominate the model.
The memory usage only slightly increases as BlockSize is increased. It is recommended that you
use a value divisible by 4 (4, 8, 12, or 16).
Notes
Specifies modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) options. Additional options used only for the Supernode
(SNODE) eigensolver are specified by the SNOPTION command. If Method = LANPCG, ANSYS
automatically switches to the PCG solver internally for this modal analysis. You can further control the
efficiency of the PCG solver with the PCGOPT and EQSLV commands.
The Block Lanczos method is strongly recommended for high-frequency magnetic eigenvalue problems.
The initial frequency guess is not critical. The ratio of FREQE to FREQB can be up to 1e6. The PCG Lanczos
method is not supported for high-frequency magnetic eigenvalue problems.
For models that involve a non-symmetric element stiffness matrix, as in the case of a contact element
with frictional contact, the QR damp eigensolver (MODOPT, QRDAMP) extracts modes in the modal
subspace formed by the eigenmodes from the symmetrized eigenproblem. The QR damp eigensolver
symmetrizes the element stiffness matrix on the first pass of the eigensolution, and in the second pass,
eigenmodes are extracted in the modal subspace of the first eigensolution pass. For such non-symmetric
eigenproblems, you should verify the eigenvalue and eigenmode results using the non-symmetric matrix
eigensolver (MODOPT, UNSYM ).
The UNSYM, DAMP, and QRDAMP options cannot be followed by a subsequent spectrum analysis.
Distributed ANSYS Restriction.All extraction methods, except VT, are supported within Distributed
ANSYS. However, PCG Lanczos, UNSYM, and DAMP are the only distributed eigensolvers that will run a
fully distributed solution. The Block Lanczos and Supernode eigensolvers are not distributed
eigensolvers; therefore, you will not see the full performance improvements with these methods that you
would with a fully distributed solution. The REDUC and QRDAMP methods are supported, but do not use
MODOPT
distributed memory parallelism within Distributed ANSYS.
Command
Option
Method
LANB
LANPCG
SNODE
REDUC
UNSYM
DAMP
QRDAMP
VT
Available Products
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> EH <> PP <> EME MFS [1]
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS [1]
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> EH <> PP <> EME MFS
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS [1]
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> VT <> <>
1. The ANSYS DesignSpace (DS) and ANSYS DesignSpace - Structural (DSS) products do not support
distributed solutions (Distributed ANSYS).
Menu Paths
Main Menu>DesignXplorer>Solution>Solve
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
Main Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Analysis Options
3.14.Enforced Motion Method for Mode-Superposition Transient and

Harmonic Analyses
For mode superposition transient and harmonic analyses, the enforced motion method can be used to
solve for structures experiencing base excitation from imposed motions such as an acceleration or
displacement.
3.14.1.Understanding the Enforced Motion Method

To use the enforced motion method, you must select one of the following modal analysis modeextraction methods:
ANSYS calculates pseudo-static modes and writes them to the MODE file (a permanent, binary file)
during the modal analysis, and then uses them in the subsequent mode-superposition analysis.
3.14.2.Using the Enforced Motion Method

The procedure for calculating pseudo-static modes in a modal analysis is as follows:
1. Specify modal analysis (ANTYPE, MODAL).
2. Turn on the enforced motion calculation key by using the MODCONT, ,ON command.
3. Specify the support points that will have the imposed motion with an enforced base identification
number using the D command.
4. Issue a SOLVE command.
Specify acceleration or/and displacement value using the DVAL command in the downstream modesuperposition transient/harmonic analysis.
3.14.3.Sample Input for Enforced Motion Mode-Superposition Analysis

A sample input listing for a mode-superposition transient analysis follows:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
--CM,BASE1,NODE
--CM,BASE2,NODE
FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Define enforced bases
! Define the enforced bases in Modal analysis

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
MODOPT,LANB,10
MODCONT,,ON
! TURN ON Enforced Motion Key
D,...
! Constraints
F,...
! Loads
SF,...
CMSEL,S,BASE1,NODE
D,ALL,UZ,1
! Define base identification number of BASE1
CMSEL,S,BASE2,NODE
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strenfmotmetmod.html[28/04/2013 07:34:30 p.m.]
D,ALL,UZ,2
SOLVE
FINISH
! Mode-Superposition Transient Analysis
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANSIENT
TRNOPT,MSUP,10
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
KBC,1
DELTIM,0.001
DVAL,1,ACC,%ACC1%
!Define Acceleration on Bases
DVAL,2,ACC,%ACC2%
SOLVE
TIME,
SOLVE
SAVE
FINISH
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strenfmotmetmod.html[28/04/2013 07:34:30 p.m.]
MODE
MODE
MODE, MODE , ISYM

Specifies the harmonic loading term for this load step.
SOLUTION : Load Step Options

MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MODE
ISYM
Number of harmonic waves around circumference for this harmonic loading term (defaults to 0).
Symmetry condition for this harmonic loading term (not used when MODE = 0):
1 Symmetric (UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP use cosine terms; UZ uses sine term) (default).
-1 Antisymmetric (UX, UY, ROTZ, temp use sine terms; UZ uses cosine term).
Command Default
MODE
= 0, ISYM = 1.
Notes
Used with axisymmetric elements having nonaxisymmetric loading capability (e.g., PLANE25, SHELL61,
FLUID81, etc.). For analysis types ANTYPE,MODAL, HARMIC, TRANS, and SUBSTR, the term must be
defined in the first load step and may not be changed in succeeding load steps.
Menu Paths
Main Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Other>For Harmonic Ele
Main Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Other>For Harmonic Ele
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_MODE.html[28/04/2013 07:34:40 p.m.]
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis
Chapter4:Harmonic Response Analysis

Any sustained cyclic load will produce a sustained cyclic response (a harmonic response) in a structural
system. Harmonic response analysis gives you the ability to predict the sustained dynamic behavior of
your structures, thus enabling you to verify whether or not your designs will successfully overcome
resonance, fatigue, and other harmful effects of forced vibrations.
The following harmonic response analysis topics are available:
Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis
Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis
Three Solution Methods
Performing a Harmonic Response Analysis
Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)
Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis
Mode-Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis
Additional Harmonic Response Analysis Details
4.1. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis
4.1.Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis

Harmonic response analysis is a technique used to determine the steady-state response of a linear
structure to loads that vary sinusoidally ( harmonically) with time. The idea is to calculate the structure's
response at several frequencies and obtain a graph of some response quantity (usually displacements)
versus frequency. "Peak" responses are then identified on the graph and stresses reviewed at those
peak frequencies.
This analysis technique calculates only the steady-state, forced vibrations of a structure. The transient
vibrations, which occur at the beginning of the excitation, are not accounted for in a harmonic response
analysis (see Figure 4.1).
Figure4.1Harmonic Response Systems
Typical harmonic response system. F o and are known. uo and are unknown (a).
Transient and steady-state dynamic response of a structural system (b).
Harmonic response analysis is a linear analysis. Some nonlinearities, such as plasticity will be ignored,
even if they are defined. You can, however, have unsymmetric system matrices such as those
encountered in a fluid-structure interaction problem (see "Acoustics" in the Coupled-Field Analysis
Guide). Harmonic analysis can also be performed on a prestressed structure, such as a violin string
(assuming the harmonic stresses are much smaller than the pretension stress). See Prestressed Full
Harmonic Response Analysis for more information on prestressed harmonic analyses.
Chapter 1: Acoustics
Chapter1:Acoustics
Acoustics is the study of the generation, propagation, absorption, and reflection of sound pressure
waves in a fluid medium. Applications for acoustics include the following:
Sonar - the acoustic counterpart of radar
Design of concert halls, where an even distribution of sound pressure is desired
Noise minimization in machine shops
Noise cancellation in automobiles
Underwater acoustics
Design of speakers, speaker housings, acoustic filters, mufflers, and many other similar devices.
Geophysical exploration
Types of Acoustic Analysis

An acoustic analysis, available in the ANSYS Multiphysics and ANSYS Mechanical programs only, usually
involves modeling the fluid medium and the surrounding structure. Typical quantities of interest are the
pressure distribution in the fluid at different frequencies, pressure gradient, particle velocity, the sound
pressure level, as well as, scattering, diffraction, transmission, radiation, attenuation, and dispersion of
acoustic waves. A coupled acoustic analysis takes the fluid-structure interaction into account. An
uncoupled acoustic analysis models only the fluid and ignores any fluid-structure interaction .
The ANSYS program assumes that the fluid is compressible, but allows only relatively small pressure
changes with respect to the mean pressure. Also, the fluid is assumed to be non-flowing and inviscid
(that is, viscosity causes no dissipative effects). Uniform mean density and mean pressure are assumed,
with the pressure solution being the deviation from the mean pressure, not the absolute pressure.
The following acoustics topics are available:
Solving Acoustics Problems
Building the Model
Meshing the Model
Reviewing Results
Fluid-Structure Interaction
Sample Applications
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_flu/Hlp_G_COU4.html[28/04/2013 07:36:07 p.m.]
4.2. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis
4.2.Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a harmonic response analysis that
you use to do any other type of finite element analysis. Likewise, you choose similar options from the
graphical user interface (GUI) to build and solve models no matter what type of analysis you are doing.
Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) and Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command
or Batch Method) show a sample harmonic response analysis done via the GUI and via commands,
respectively.
For detailed, alphabetized descriptions of the ANSYS commands, see the Command Reference.
4.5.Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will determine the harmonic response of a two-mass-spring system.
Determine the response amplitude (X i) and phase angle ( i) for each mass (mi) of the system shown
below when excited by a harmonic force (F 1 sint) acting on mass m 1 .
Material properties for this problem are:
m 1 = m 2 = 0.5 lb-sec2 /in
k1 = k2 = kc = 200 lb/in
Loading for this problem is:
F 1 = 200 lb
The spring lengths are arbitrarily selected and are used only to define the spring direction. Two master
degrees of freedom are selected at the masses in the spring direction. A frequency range from zero to
7.5 Hz with a solution at 7.5/30 = 0.25 Hz intervals is chosen to give an adequate response curve.
POST26 is used to get an amplitude versus frequency display.
4.5.3.Problem Diagram
Figure4.4Two-Mass-Spring-System

2. Type the text "Harmonic Response of Two-Mass-Spring System" and click on OK.

3. Scroll down the list on the left to "Combination" and select it.
4. Click once on "Spring-damper 14" in the list on the right.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Scroll up the list on the left to "Structural Mass" and select it.
7. Click once on "3D mass 21" in the list on the right.
8. Click on OK. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes.
4.5.3.3.Define the Real Constants

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants.
2. Click on Add. The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3. Click once on Type 1 to highlight it.
4. Click on OK. The Real Constants for COMBIN14 dialog box appears.
5. Enter 200 for the spring constant (K). Click on OK.
6. Repeat steps 2-4 for Type 2, MASS21.
7. Enter .5 for mass in X direction and click on OK.
8. Click on Close to close the Real Constants dialog box.
4.5.3.4.Create the Nodes

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.
2. Enter 1 for node number.
3. Enter 0, 0, 0 for the X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
4. Click on Apply.
6. Enter 1, 0, 0 for the X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
7. Click on OK.
box appears.
9. Click once on "Node numbers" to turn node numbers on.
10. Click on OK.
11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between
Nds. A picking menu appears.
12. In the ANSYS Graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 4 (on the left and right sides of the
screen). A small box appears around each node.
13. Click on OK on the picking menu. The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
14. Click on OK to accept the default of 2 nodes to fill. Nodes 2 and 3 appear in the graphics window.
4.5.3.5.Create the Spring Elements

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto
Numbered> Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2. In the graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 2.
3. Click on Apply. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4. Click once on nodes 2 and 3.
5. Click on Apply. A line appears between the selected nodes.
6. Click once on nodes 3 and 4.
7. Click on OK. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4.5.3.6.Create the Mass Elements

Attributes.
2. Enter 2 for element type number.
3. Enter 2 for real constant set number and click on OK.
Numbered> Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
5. In the graphics window, click once on node 2.
6. Click on Apply.
7. Click once on node 3 and click on OK.
4.5.3.7.Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
2. Click once on "Harmonic" and click on OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.
4. Click once on "Full" to select the solution method.
5. Click once on "Amplitud + phase" to select the DOF printout format and click on OK.
6. Click OK in the Full Harmonic Analysis dialog box.
7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout.
8. Click on "Last substep" to set the print frequency and click on OK.
9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and
Substeps.
10. Enter 0 and 7.5 for the harmonic frequency range.
11. Enter 30 for the number of substeps.
12. Click once on "Stepped" to specify stepped boundary conditions.
13. Click on OK.
4.5.3.8.Define Loads and Boundary Conditions

Displacement> On Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2. Click on Pick All. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
3. In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it (make sure no other
selections are highlighted).
4. Click on OK.
6. In the graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 4.
7. Click on OK. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
8. In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX" to highlight it and click once on
"UY" to deselect it.
9. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/
Moment> On Nodes. A picking menu appears.
11. In the graphics window, click once on node 2.
12. Click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
13. In the scroll box for direction of force/moment, click once on "FX."
14. Enter 200 for the real part of force/moment and click on OK.
4.5.3.9.Solve the Model

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.
2. Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
3. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4. When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
4.5.3.10.Review the Results

For this sample, you will review the time-history results of nodes 2 and 3.
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined TimeHistory Variables dialog box appears.
2. Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
3. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
4. Enter 2 for reference number of variable.
6. Enter 2UX for the user-specified label.
7. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
8. Click on OK.
9. Click on Add in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. The Add Time-History Variable
dialog box appears.
10. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
11. Enter 3 for reference number of variable.
13. Enter 3UX for the user-specified label.
14. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
15. Click on OK.
16. Click on Close.
17. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs. The Graph Controls dialog box
appears.
18. In the scroll box for type of grid, scroll to "X and Y lines" to select it.
19. Click on OK.
20. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph TimeHistory Variables dialog box appears. Your graph should look like this:
21. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph.

22. Enter 3 for 2nd variable to graph.
23. Click on OK. A graph appears in the graphic window.
4.5.3.11.Exit ANSYS
You are now finished with this sample problem.
1. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit.
2. Choose the save option you want and click on OK.
4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
4.6.Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example harmonic response analysis of a two-mass-spring system by using the
following ANSYS commands instead of the GUI.
/PREP7
/TITLE, Harmonic response
ET,1,COMBIN14,,,2
ET,2,MASS21,,,4
R,1,200
R,2,.5
N,1
N,4,1
FILL
E,1,2
E,2,3
E,3,4
TYPE,2
REAL,2
E,2
E,3
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,FULL
HROUT,OFF
OUTPR,BASIC,1
NSUBST,30
HARFRQ,,7.5
KBC,1
D,1,UY,,,4
D,1,UX,,,4,3
F,2,FX,200
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,2,2,U,X,2UX
NSOL,3,3,U,X,3UX
/GRID,1
/AXLAB,Y,DISP
PLVAR,2,3
FINISH
of a two-mass-spring system
! Spring constant = 200
! Mass = 0.5
! Spring element
! Spring element
! Mass element
! Mass element
! Harmonic response analysis

! Full harmonic response
! Print results as amplitudes and phase angles
!
!
!
!
!
30 Intervals within freq. range

Frequency range from 0 to 7.5 HZ
Step boundary condition
Constrain all 44 DOF
Constrain nodes 1 and 4 in UX
! Store UX Displacements
! Turn grid on
! Y-axis label disp
! Display variables 2 and 3
4.4.Performing a Harmonic Response Analysis

We will first describe how to do a harmonic response analysis using the full method, and then list the
steps that are different for the reduced and mode-superposition methods.
4.4.1.Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure for a full harmonic response analysis consists of three main steps:
1. Build the model.
2. Apply loads and obtain the solution.

Guide.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form)
must be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or
temperature-dependent. Nonlinear material properties, if any, are ignored.
Only linear behavior is valid in a harmonic response analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, will be
treated as linear elements. If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are
calculated based on their initial status and are never changed. The reported nodal forces due to
contact elements (FSUM,,CONT and NFORCE,CONT) are also based on the initial configuration,
which may violate equilibrium conditions.
For a full harmonic response analysis, you can define frequency-dependent elastic material
properties by using TB,ELASTIC and TBFIELD; use TB,SDAMP and TBFIELD to define your
structural damping coefficients. SDAMP specifies damping in terms of the loss factor, which is equal
to 2 times the damping ratio. For more details about damping definition, see Damping.
4.4.3.Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

In this step, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options, and initiate
the finite element solution. Details of how to do these tasks are explained below.
Note: Peak harmonic response occurs at forcing frequencies that match the natural
frequencies of your structure. Before obtaining the harmonic solution, you should
first determine the natural frequencies of your structure by obtaining a modal
solution (as explained in Modal Analysis ).
4.4.3.1.Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor

Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
4.4.3.2.Define the Analysis Type and Options

ANSYS offers these options for a harmonic response analysis:
Option
Command
New Analysis
ANTYPE
Analysis Type: Harmonic

Response
Solution Method
ANTYPE
Solution Listing Format
HROUT
LUMPM
Equation Solver
EQSLV
HROPT
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis
Analysis> Harmonic
Options
Options
Options
Options
Analysis Type> New

Analysis Type> New
Analysis Type> Analysis
Each of these options is explained in detail below.

Option: New Analysis (ANTYPE)
Choose New Analysis. Restarts are not valid in a harmonic response analysis; if you need to apply
additional harmonic loads, do a new analysis each time.
Option: Analysis Type: Harmonic Response (ANTYPE)
Choose Harmonic Response as the analysis type.
Option: Solution Method (HROPT)
Choose one of the following solution methods:
Full method
Reduced method
Mode-superposition method
Option: Solution Listing Format (HROUT)
This option determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output
( Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and
phase angles.
Option: Mass Matrix Formulation (LUMPM)
Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element dependent) or lumped mass
approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some
problems involving "skinny" structures such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass
approximation often yields better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a
shorter run time and lower memory requirements.
After you complete the fields on the Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box, click on OK to reach a
second Harmonic Analysis dialog box, where you choose an equation solver.
Option: Equation Solver (EQSLV)
You can choose the sparse direct solver (SPARSE), the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient (JCG) solver, or
the Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) solver. See the EQSLV command description
or Selecting a Solver in the Basic Analysis Guide for details on selecting a solver.
4.4.3.3.Apply Loads on the Model

A harmonic analysis, by definition, assumes that any applied load varies harmonically (sinusoidally) with
time. To completely specify a harmonic load, three pieces of information are usually required: the
amplitude, the phase angle , and the forcing frequency range (see Figure 4.2).
Figure4.2Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle
The amplitude is the maximum value of the load, which you specify using the commands shown in
Table4.2:Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis.
The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame of reference. On the
complex plane (see Figure 4.2), it is the angle measured from the real axis. The phase angle is required
only if you have multiple loads that are out of phase with each other. For example, the unbalanced
rotating antenna shown in Figure 4.3 will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support points.
The phase angle cannot be specified directly; instead, you specify the real and imaginary components of
the out-of-phase loads using the VALUE and VALUE2 fields of the appropriate displacement and force
commands. Pressures and other surface and body loads can only be specified with a phase angle of 0
(no imaginary component) with the following exceptions: nonzero imaginary components of pressures
can be applied via the SURF153, SURF154, SURF156, and SURF159 elements in a full harmonic response
analysis, or using a mode-superposition harmonic response analysis if the mode-extraction method is
Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or Supernode (see the SF and SFE commands). Figure 4.2 shows how to
calculate the real and imaginary components.
The forcing frequency range is the frequency range of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). It is specified
later as a load step option with the HARFRQ command.
Figure4.3An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna
An unbalanced rotating antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support
points.
Note: A harmonic analysis cannot calculate the response to multiple forcing functions
acting simultaneously with different frequencies (for example, two machines with
different rotating speeds running at the same time). However, POST1 can
superimpose multiple load cases to obtain the total response.
Table4.2:Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a to a
harmonic response analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the solid model
(keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general
discussion of solid-model loads versus finite element loads, see "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
Table4.2Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis
Load Type
Category
Constraints
Displacement (UX,
UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,
ROTZ)
Force, Moment (FX, Forces
FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ)
Pressure (PRES)
Surface Loads
Temperature (TEMP), Body Loads
Fluence (FLUE)
Gravity, Spinning, etc. Inertia Loads
Cmd
Family
GUI Path
MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads>

Apply> Structural> Displacement

Apply> Structural> Force/Moment
Apply> Structural> Pressure
Apply> Structural> Temperature
Apply> Structural> Other
SF
BF
-
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
4.4.3.3.1.Applying Loads Using Commands

Table4.3:Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis lists all the commands you can use to
apply loads in a harmonic response analysis.

Table4.3Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis
Load Type
Solid
Model or
FE
Entity
Apply
Delete
List
Operate
Apply
Settings
Displacement Solid
Model
Solid
Model
Solid
Model
Finite
Elem
Force
Solid
Model
Finite
Elem
Pressure
Solid
Model
Solid
Model
Finite
Elem
Finite
Elem
Keypoints DK
DKDELE
DKLIST
DTRAN
Lines
DL
DLDELE
DLLIST
DTRAN
Areas
DA
DADELE
DALIST
DTRAN
Nodes
DDELE
DLIST
DSCALE
FKDELE
FKLIST
FTRAN
DSYM,
DCUM
-
FLIST
FSCALE
FCUM
Temperature, Solid
Fluence
Model
Solid
Model
Solid
Model
Solid
Model
Finite
Elem
Keypoints BFK
Finite
Elem
-
Elements BFE
Inertia
Keypoints FK
Nodes
FDELE
Lines
SFL
SFLDELE SFLLIST SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Areas
SFA
SFADELE SFALIST SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Nodes
SF
SFDELE
Elements SFE
SFLIST
SFSCALE SFGRAD,
SFCUM
SFEDELE SFELIST SFSCALE SFGRAD,
SFBEAM,
SFFUN,
SFCUM
BFKDELE BFKLIST BFTRAN
-
Lines
BFL
BFLDELE BFLLIST BFTRAN
Areas
BFA
BFADELE BFALIST BFTRAN
Volumes
BFV
BFVDELE BFVLIST BFTRAN
Nodes
BF
BFDELE
ACEL,
OMEGA,
DOMEGA,
CGLOC,
CGOMGA,
DCGOMG
BFSCALE BFCUM,
BFUNIF,
TUNIF
BFEDELE BFELIST BFSCALE BFCUM
-
BFLIST
4.4.3.3.2.Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI

These steps for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most other analyses. See Applying Loads
Using the GUI and Listing Loads for more information.
4.4.3.4.Specify Load Step Options

The following options are available for a harmonic response analysis:
Option
Command
General Options
Number of Harmonic
Solutions
Stepped or Ramped Loads
KBC
Dynamics Options
Forcing Frequency Range
HARFRQ
Damping

Printed Output
Database and Results File
Output
Extrapolation of Results
NSUBST
ALPHAD, BETAD,
DMPRAT,
MP,DAMP,
MP,DMPR,
TB,SDAMP
OUTPR
OUTRES
ERESX
GUI Path
Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps
Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step or Freq
and Substeps
Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps
Other> Change Mat Props> Material
Models> Structural> Damping
Output Ctrls> DB/ Results File
Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
Note: When specifying frequency dependent damping using TB,SDAMP you must specify
the material property using TB,ELAS.
4.4.3.4.1.General Options
General options include the following:
Number of Harmonic Solutions (NSUBST)

You can request any number of harmonic solutions to be calculated. The solutions (or substeps)
will be evenly spaced within the specified frequency range (HARFRQ). For example, if you specify
10 solutions in the range 30 to 40 Hz, the program will calculate the response at 31, 32, 33, ...,
39, and 40 Hz. No response is calculated at the lower end of the frequency range.
Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC)

The loads may be stepped or ramped. By default, they are ramped, that is, the load amplitude is
gradually increased with each substep. By stepping the loads (KBC,1), the same load amplitude
will be maintained for all substeps in the frequency range.
Note: Surface and body loads do not ramp from their previous load step values.
They always ramp from zero or from the value specified via BFUNIF.
4.4.3.4.2.Dynamics Options
Dynamics options include the following:
Forcing Frequency Range (HARFRQ)

The forcing frequency range must be defined (in cycles/time) for a harmonic analysis. Within this
range, you then specify the number of solutions to be calculated.
Damping
Damping in some form should be specified; otherwise, the response will be infinity at the resonant
frequencies. ALPHAD and BETAD result in a frequency-dependent damping ratio, whereas
DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. Damping can also be
specified for individual materials using MP,DAMP and MP,DMPR. See Damping for further details.
Note: If no damping is specified in a direct harmonic analysis (full or reduced), the
program uses zero damping by default.
Alpha (Mass) Damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (Stiffness) Damping (BETAD)
Constant Structural Damping Ratio (DMPRAT)
Material Dependent (Stiffness) Damping Multiplier (MP,DAMP)
Constant Structural Material Damping Coefficient (MP,DMPR)
4.4.3.4.3.Output Controls
Output control options include the following:



Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead
of extrapolating them (default).
4.4.3.5.Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File

You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s):
SAVE
GUI:
4.4.3.6.Start Solution Calculations

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
4.4.3.7.Repeat for Additional Load Steps

Repeat the process for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If
you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one
load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load steps
on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the Basic Analysis Guide .
4.4.3.8.Leave SOLUTION
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH

The results data for a harmonic analysis are the same as the data for a basic structural analysis with the
following additions: If you defined damping in the structure, the response will be out-of-phase with the
loads. All results are then complex in nature and are stored in terms of real and imaginary parts.
Complex results will also be produced if out-of-phase loads were applied. See Review the Results in
Structural Static Analysis .
You can review these results using either POST26 or POST1. The normal procedure is to first use
POST26 to identify critical forcing frequencies - frequencies at which the highest displacements (or
stresses) occur at points of interest in the model - and to then use POST1 to postprocess the entire
model at these critical forcing frequencies.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific frequencies.
POST26 allows you to review results at specific points in the model over the entire frequency
range.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a harmonic response analysis are explained below. For a
complete description of all postprocessing functions, see "An Overview of Postprocessing" in the Basic
Analysis Guide .
The points to remember for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most structural analyses. See
Points to Remember in Structural Static Analysis .
4.4.4.3.Using POST26
POST26 works with tables of result item versus frequency, known as variables . Each variable is assigned
a reference number, with variable number 1 reserved for frequency.

1. Define the variables using these options:
Command(s): NSOL,
ESOL,
RFORCE
GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
Note: The NSOL command is for primary data (nodal displacements), the ESOL
command for derived data (element solution data, such as stresses), and the
RFORCE command for reaction force data. To specify the total force, static
component of the total force, damping component, or the inertia component,
use the FORCE command.
2. Graph the variables (versus frequency or any other variable). Then use PLCPLX to work with just
the amplitude, phase angle, real part, or imaginary part.
Command(s): PLVAR,
PLCPLX
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph
3. Get a listing of the variable. To list just the extreme values, use the EXTREM command. Then use
the PRCPLX command to work with amplitude and phase angle or real and imaginary part.
Command(s): PRVAR,
EXTREM,
PRCPLX
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables> List Extremes
GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> List
Many other functions, such as performing math operations among variables (in complex arithmetic),
moving variables into array parameters, moving array parameters into variables, etc., are available in
POST26; see "The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26)" in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the model, you can identify the
critical frequencies for further POST1 postprocessing.
4.4.4.4.Using POST1
1. You can use the SET command to read in the results for the desired harmonic solution. It can read
in either the real component, the imaginary component, the amplitude, or the phase.
2. Display the deformed shape of the structure, contours of stresses, strains, etc., or vector plots of
vector items (PLVECT). To obtain tabular listings of data, use PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRRSOL, etc.
Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape

PLESOL
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal
GUI:
Solu or Element Solu
Use these options to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains
(EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed
shape on the display.
Option: Vector Plots
Command(s):
GUI:
PLVECT
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot>
Predefined
Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...),
strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...).
Command(s):
PRRSOL (reaction data) etc.
NSORT,
ESORT
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution
GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution
Many other functions, such as mapping results on to a path, transforming results to different coordinate
systems, load case combinations, etc., are available in POST1; see "Solution" in the Basic Analysis Guide
for details.
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, HARFRQ, DMPRAT,
NSUBST, KBC, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and
PLNSOL commands.

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional harmonic analyses.
instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element
experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model
and input data with accompanying comments.
The Verification Manual includes a variety of harmonic analysis test cases:
VM76 - Harmonic Response of a Guitar String
VM86 - Harmonic Response of a Dynamic System
VM87 - Equivalent Structural Damping
VM88 - Response of an Eccentric Weight Exciter
VM90 - Harmonic Response of a Two-Mass-Spring System
VM176 - Frequency Response of Electrical Input Admittance for a Piezoelectric Transducer
VM177 - Natural Frequency of a Submerged Ring
VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System
VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-Supported Thick Square Plate
4.8.Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the harmonic solution. The
procedure for a reduced harmonic analysis consists of five main steps:
1. Build the model.
2. Apply the loads and obtain the reduced solution.
3. Review the results of the reduced solution.
4. Expand the solution (expansion pass).
5. Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method. Details of the other steps are explained
below.
4.8.1.Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution , we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the master DOF. The tasks
required to obtain the reduced solution are as follows:
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and options. Options for the reduced solution are the same as described
for the full method except for the following differences:
Choose the reduced solution method.
You can include prestress effects (PSTRES). This requires element files from a previous
static (or transient) analysis that also included prestress effects. See Prestressed Harmonic
Response Analysis for details.
3. Define master degrees of freedom. Master DOF are essential or dynamic degrees of freedom that
characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced harmonic response dynamic
analysis, master DOF are also required at locations where you want to apply forces or nonzero
displacements. See Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis for guidelines to
choose master DOF.
4. Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except
for the following restrictions:
Only displacements and forces are valid. Element loads such as pressures, temperatures, and
accelerations are not allowed.
Forces and nonzero displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
5. Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the full method except that the
OUTRES and ERESX commands are not available, and the constant material damping coefficient
(MP,DMPR) is not applicable for the reduced method. The OUTPR command controls the printout
of the nodal solution at the master DOF (OUTPR,NSOL,ALL (or NONE)).
6. Save a copy of the database.

Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load
steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not
overlap from one load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you
to store the load steps on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the
9. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
4.8.2.Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced harmonic solution are written to the reduced harmonic displacement file,
Jobname.RFRQ . They consist of displacements at the master DOF, which vary harmonically at each forcing
frequency for which the solution was calculated. As with the full method, these displacements will be
complex in nature if damping was defined or if out-of-phase loads were applied. You can review the
master DOF displacements as a function of frequency using POST26. (POST1 cannot be used, because
the complete solution at all DOF is not available.)
The procedure to use POST26 is the same as described for the full method, except for the following
differences:
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command to specify that data are to be read
from Jobname.RFRQ. For example, if HARMONIC is the jobname, the FILE command would be:
FILE,HARMONIC,RFRQ. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written by a
reduced harmonic solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use
only the NSOL command to define variables.
4.8.3.Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete displacement, stress,
and force solution at all degrees of freedom. These calculations are done only at frequencies and phase
angles that you specify. Therefore, before you begin the expansion pass, you should review the results
of the reduced solution (using POST26) and identify the critical frequencies and phase angles.
An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements at
specific points on the structure, then the reduced solution could satisfy your requirements. However, if
you want to determine displacements at non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the stress solution,
then you must perform an expansion pass.
The .RFRQ , .TRI , .EMAT , and .ESAV files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
4.8.3.2.Expanding the Modes

1. Reenter the ANSYS solution processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
2. Activate the expansion pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
Option
Command
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to Expand NUMEXP

Freq. Range for Expansion NUMEXP
Phase Angle for Expansion HREXP
Stress Calculations On/Off
NUMEXP,
EXPSOL
Nodal Solution Listing

Format
HROUT
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
ExpansionPass
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Range of
Solu's
ExpansionPass> Singe Expand> Range of
Solu's
Solu's
Solu's
Analysis Options

Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to Expand (NUMEXP,NUM)
Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over a
frequency range (specified next). For example, NUMEXP,4,1000,2000 specifies four solutions
in the frequency range 1000 to 2000 (that is, expanded solutions at 1250, 1500, 1750, and
2000).
Option: Frequency Range for Expansion (NUMEXP, BEGRNG, ENDRNG)
Specify the frequency range. See the example above. If you do not need to expand multiple
solutions, you can use EXPSOL to identify a single solution for expansion (either by its load
step and substep numbers or by its frequency value).
Option: Phase Angle for Expansion (HREXP)
If multiple solutions are to be expanded over a frequency range (NUMEXP), we suggest that
you request both the real and imaginary parts to be expanded (HREXP,ALL). This way, you
can easily combine the two parts in POST26 to review the peak values of displacements,
stresses, and other results.
If, on the other hand, a single solution is to be expanded (EXPSOL), you can specify the
phase angle at which peak displacements occurred using HREXP,angle.
Option: Stress Calculations On/Off (NUMEXP or EXPSOL)
You can turn off stress and force calculations if you are not interested in them. Default is to
calculate stresses and forces.
Option: Nodal Solution Listing Format (HROUT)
Determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output
( Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes
and phase angles.
3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output
controls:
Printed Output
Use this option to include any results data on the printed output file ( Jobname.OUT).
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTPR
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu
Printout
Database and Results File Output

Use this option to control the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST).
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTRES
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File
Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes
instead of extrapolating them (default).
Note: The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE.
Command(s):
GUI:
ERESX
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration
Pt
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
Caution: Subsequent spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one
load step.
6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH

This step is the same as the corresponding step in a basic structural analysis with the following
additions: You can review the results using POST1. (If you expanded solutions at several frequencies,
you can also use POST26 to obtain graphs of stress versus frequency, strain versus frequency, etc.)
The procedure to use POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method, except for one
difference: if you requested expansion at a specific phase angle (HREXP,angle ), there is only one
solution available for each frequency. Use the SET command to read in the results.
See Review the Results in Structural Static Analysis .
4.8.5.Sample Input
A sample input listing for a reduced harmonic response analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
! Jobname
/TITLE,...
! Title
/PREP7
! Enter PREP7
--FINISH
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution
/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,HARMIC
! Harmonic analysis
HROPT,REDU
! Reduced method
HROUT,...
! Harmonic analysis output options
M,...
! Master DOF
TOTAL,...
D,...
! Constraints
F,...
! Loads (real and imaginary components)
HARFRQ,...
! Forcing frequency range
DMPRAT,...
! Damping ratio
NSUBST,...
! Number of harmonic solutions
KBC,...
SAVE
SOLVE
! Initiate multiple load step solution
FINISH
! Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
/POST26
FILE,,RFRQ
! Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ
NSOL,...
PLCPLX,...
! Define how to plot complex variables
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
PRCPLX,...
! Define how to list complex variables
PRVAR,...
! List variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution

/SOLU
EXPASS,ON
EXPSOL,...
HREXP,...
OUTRES,...
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
Reenter SOLUTION
Expansion pass
Expand a single solution
Phase angle for expanded solution

/POST1
SET,...
! Read results for desired frequency
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PRRSOL,...
! List reactions
PLNSOL,...
-----! Other postprocessing as desired
--FINISH
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, M, TOTAL, HARFRQ,
DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL,
HREXP, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
4.9.Mode-Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

The mode-superposition method sums factored mode shapes (obtained from a modal analysis) to
calculate the harmonic response. It is the only method allowed in the ANSYS Professional program. The
procedure to use the method consists of five main steps:
1. Build the model.
3. Obtain the mode-superposition harmonic solution.
4. Expand the mode-superposition solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as described for the full method. The remaining steps are described
below.
4.9.1.Obtain the Modal Solution

Modal Analysis describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following are some additional hints:
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, reduced, or QR
damped. (The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.) If
your model has damping and/or an unsymmetric stiffness matrix, use the QR Damp modeextraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP).
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the harmonic response.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at which
harmonic loads will be applied.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD,
BETAD, MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during the
modal analysis. During the harmonic analysis, you can define additional damping, including a
constant modal damping ratio (DMPRAT), constant structural material damping coefficients
(MP,DMPR), or the modal damping ratio as a function of mode (MDAMP). For more details about
damping definition, see Damping.
If you need to apply harmonically varying element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations,
and so on), specify them in the modal analysis. ANSYS ignores the loads for the modal solution,
but calculates a load vector and writes it to the mode shape file ( Jobname.MODE) and also writes
the element load information to the Jobname.MLV file (see Applying Multiple Loads for use in ModeSuperposition Harmonic and Transient Analysis). You can then use the load vector for the harmonic
solution. Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and the load vector created in
the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command to apply both the real and imaginary (if
they exist) components of the load vector from the modal solution.
You do nott need to expand the modes for the mode-superposition solution, but if you plan to
review the mode shapes from a reduced modal analysis, you must expand the mode shapes. You
should, however, expand the modes and calculate the element results in order to save
computation time in the subsequent expansion of the harmonic results.
Do not change the model data (for example, nodal rotations) between the modal and harmonic
analyses.
4.9.2.Obtain the Mode-Superposition Harmonic Solution

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STR4_MODESUPER.html[28/04/2013 07:40:16 p.m.]
In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to calculate the harmonic
response. The mode shape file ( Jobname.MODE) must be available, and the database must contain the
same model for which the modal solution was obtained. If the modal solution was performed using the
Supernode or Block Lanczos method using the default mass formulation (not the lumped mass
approximation), the full file ( Jobname.FULL) must also be available. The following tasks are involved:
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as described for the full
method, except for the following differences:
Choose the mode-superposition method of solution (HROPT).
Specify the modes you want to use for the solution (HROPT). This determines the accuracy
of the harmonic solution. Generally, the number of modes specified should cover about 50
percent more than the frequency range of the harmonic loads.
To include the contribution of higher frequency modes, add the residual vectors calculated in
the modal analysis (RESVEC,ON).
Optionally, cluster the solutions about the structure's natural frequencies (HROUT) for a
smoother and more accurate tracing of the response curve.
Optionally, at each frequency, print a summary table that lists the contributions of each
mode to the response (HROUT). Note, OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode
contributions at each frequency.
3. Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except
for the following restrictions:
Only forces, accelerations, and the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use
the LVSCALE command to apply the load vector from the modal solution. Note that ALL
loads from the modal analysis are scaled, including forces and accelerations. To avoid load
duplication, delete any loads that were applied in the modal analysis.
Note: You should apply accelerations in the modal analysis rather than in the
harmonic analysis in order to obtain consistent reaction forces.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at
master DOF.
4. Specify load step options.
You can request any number of harmonic solutions to be calculated (NSUBST). The
solutions (or substeps) will be evenly spaced within the specified frequency range
(HARFRQ). For example, if you specify 10 solutions in the range 30 to 40 Hz, the program
will calculate the response at 31, 32, 33, ..., 39, and 40 Hz. No response is calculated at the
lower end of the frequency range.
For the cluster option, the NSUBST command specifies the number of solutions on each side
of a natural frequency if the clustering option (HROUT) is chosen. The default is to calculate
four solutions, but you can specify any number of solutions from 2 through 20. (Any value
over this range defaults to 10 and any value below this range defaults to 4.)
Damping in some form should be specified; otherwise, the response will be infinity at the
resonant frequencies. ALPHAD and BETAD result in a frequency-dependent damping ratio,
whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. MDAMP
specifies a damping ratio for each individual mode. Damping can also be specified for
individual materials using MP,DMPR. See Damping for further details.
5. By default, if you used the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or the Supernode option for the modal
analysis (MODOPT,LANB or LANPCG or SNODE), the modal coordinates (the factors to multiply
each mode by) are written to the file Jobname.RFRQ and no output controls apply. If however you
explicitly request not to write the element results to the .MODE file (MXPAND,,,,,,NO), the actual
nodal displacements are written to the .RFRQ file. In that case, you may use a nodal component
with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced
displacement file Jobname.RFRQ. The expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes
and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements have been written to the .RFRQ
file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify
the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,ALL,component. Repeat the OUTRES command
for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RFRQ file.
6. Save a copy of the database.
Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load
steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not
overlap from one load step to the next.
9. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
The mode-superposition harmonic solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RFRQ,
regardless of whether the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, reduced, or QR damped method was
used for the modal solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress
results.
4.9.3.Expand the Mode-Superposition Solution

The expansion pass starts with the harmonic solution on Jobname.RFRQ and calculates the displacement,
stress, and force solution. These calculations are done only at frequencies and phase angles that you
specify. Therefore, before you begin the expansion pass, you should review the results of the harmonic
solution (using POST26) and identify the critical frequencies and phase angles.
An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements at
specific points on the structure, then the displacement solution could satisfy your requirements.
However, if you want to determine the stress or force solution, then you must perform an expansion
pass.
The .RFRQ and .DB files from the harmonic solution, and the , .MODE , .EMAT , .ESAV and .MLV files
from the modal solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the harmonic solution was calculated.
The procedure for the expansion pass follows:

1. Reenter the ANSYS solution processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
Option
Command
EXPASS
No. of Solutions to Expand NUMEXP

EXPSOL
Phase Angle for Expansion HREXP

Nodal Solution Listing
Format
HROUT
GUI Path
ExpansionPass
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Range of
Solu's
ExpansionPass> Singe Expand> By Time
Freq
Solu's
Analysis Options

Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to Expand (NUMEXP,NUM)
Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over a
frequency range (specified next). For example, NUMEXP,4,1000,2000 specifies four solutions
in the frequency range 1000 to 2000 (that is, expanded solutions at 1250, 1500, 1750, and
2000).
frequency. Also specify whether to calculate stresses and forces ( default is to calculate
both). .
Option: Phase Angle for Expansion (HREXP)
If multiple solutions are to be expanded over a frequency range (NUMEXP), we suggest that
you request both the real and imaginary parts to be expanded (HREXP,ALL). This way, you
can easily combine the two parts in POST26 to review the peak values of displacements,
stresses, and other results.
If, on the other hand, a single solution is to be expanded (EXPSOL), you can specify the
phase angle at which peak displacements occurred using HREXP,angle.
Option: Stress Calculations On/Off (NUMEXP or EXPSOL)
You can turn off stress and force calculations if you are not interested in them. Default is to
calculate stresses and forces.
Option: Nodal Solution Listing Format (HROUT)
Determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output
( Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes
and phase angles.
3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output
controls:

Use this option to include any results data on the printed output file ( Jobname.OUT). Note that
if the element results were calculated in the modal analysis, then no element output is
available in the expansion pass. Use /POST1 to review element results.

Use this option to control the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST).

Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes
instead of extrapolating them (default). Note that if the element results were calculated in
the modal analysis , then this option is not applicable
Note: The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH

analyses. See Review the Results in Structural Static Analysis .
You can review these results using POST1. (If you expanded solution at several frequency points, you
can also use POST26 to obtain graphs of displacement versus frequency, stress versus frequency, etc.)
The only POST1 (or POST26) procedure difference between this method and the full method is that if
you requested expansion at a specific phase angle (HREXP, angle) there is only one solution available
for each frequency. Use the SET command to read in the results.
4.9.5.Sample Input
A sample input listing for a mode-superposition harmonic response analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
------FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,MODAL
! Modal analysis
MODOPT,LANB
! Block Lanczos
MXPAND,,,,YES.
! Expand and calculate element results
TOTAL,..
D,...
! Constraints
SF,...
! Element loads
SAVE
SOLVE
! Initiate modal solution
FINISH
! Obtain the Mode-Superposition Harmonic Solution
/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,MSUP,...
HROUT,...
LVSCALE,...
F,...
HARFRQ,...
DMPRAT,...
MDAMP,...
NSUBST,...
KBC,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Harmonic analysis
Mode-superposition method; number of modes to use
Harmonic analysis output options; cluster option
Scale factor for loads from modal analysis
Nodal loads
Forcing frequency range
Damping ratio
Modal damping ratios
Number of harmonic solutions
Ramped or stepped loads
! Initiate solution
! Review the Results of the Mode-Superposition Solution

/POST26
FILE,,RFRQ
! Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ
NSOL,...
PLCPLX,...
! Define how to plot complex variables
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
FINISH
! Expand the Solution (for Stress Results)
/SOLU! Re-enter SOLUTION
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass
EXPSOL,...
! Expand a single solution
HREXP,...
! Phase angle for expanded solution
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,...
! Read results for desired frequency
PLDISP,...
! Deformed shape
PLNSOL,...
--FINISH
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, HROPT, HROUT,
LVSCALE, F, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, MDAMP, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR,
EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, SET, and PLNSOL commands.
4.10. Additional Harmonic Response Analysis Details
4.10.Additional Harmonic Response Analysis Details

4.10.1.Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis
A prestressed harmonic response analysis calculates the dynamic response of a prestressed structure,
such as a violin string. The prestress influences the stiffness of the structure through the stressstiffening matrix contribution. Response to harmonically varying loads is computed using this effective
stiffness of the structure. The output stresses, therefore, will reflect the prestress effect on the structure.
4.10.1.1.Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed full harmonic analysis is essentially the same as that for any other
full harmonic analysis except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static analysis:
procedure to obtain the static solution is explained in Structural Static Analysis .
2. Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the full harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on
(reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be
available. Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed harmonic
response analyses, the static analysis will need to be rerun.
If thermal body forces were present during the static prestress analysis, these thermal body forces
must not be deleted during the full harmonic analysis or else the thermal prestress will vanish.
Hence, any temperature loads used to define the thermal prestress must also be used in the full
harmonic response analysis as sinusoidally time-varying temperature loads. You should be aware
of this limitation and exercise some judgement about whether or not to include temperature loads
in their static prestress analysis.
4.10.1.2.Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced harmonic analysis is essentially the same as that for any
other reduced harmonic analysis except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static
analysis:
procedure to obtain the static solution is explained in Structural Static Analysis .
2. Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the reduced harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on
(reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be
available. Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed harmonic
response analyses, the static analysis will need to be rerun.
4.10.1.3.Prestressed Mode-Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

To include prestress effects in a mode-superposition analysis, you must first perform a prestressed
modal analysis. See Modal Analysis for details. Once prestressed modal analysis results are available,
proceed as for any other mode-superposition analysis.
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis
Chapter5:Transient Dynamic Analysis

Transient dynamic analysis (sometimes called time-history analysis) is a technique used to determine the
dynamic response of a structure under the action of any general time-dependent loads. You can use this
type of analysis to determine the time-varying displacements, strains, stresses, and forces in a structure
as it responds to any combination of static, transient, and harmonic loads. The time scale of the loading
is such that the inertia or damping effects are considered to be important. If the inertia and damping
effects are not important, you might be able to use a static analysis instead (see Structural Static
Analysis ).
The basic equation of motion solved by a transient dynamic analysis is
(M){ } + (C){ } + (K){u} = {F(t)}
where:
(M) = mass matrix
(C) = damping matrix
(K) = stiffness matrix
{ } = nodal acceleration vector
{ } = nodal velocity vector
{u} = nodal displacement vector
{F(t)} = load vector
At any given time, t , these equations can be thought of as a set of "static" equilibrium equations that
also take into account inertia forces ((M){ }) and damping forces ((C){ }). The program uses the
Newmark time integration method or an improved method called HHT to solve these equations at
discrete time points. The time increment between successive time points is called the integration time
step.
The following topics are available for transient dynamic analysis:
Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis
Three Solution Methods
Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
Performing a Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis
Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)
Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis
Transient Dynamic Analysis Options
5.1. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.1.Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis

A transient dynamic analysis is more involved than a static analysis because it generally requires more
computer resources and more of your resources, in terms of the "engineering" time involved. You can
save a significant amount of these resources by doing some preliminary work to understand the physics
of the problem. For example, you can:
1. Analyze a simpler model first. A model of beams, masses, and springs can provide good insight
into the problem at minimal cost. This simpler model may be all you need to determine the
dynamic response of the structure.
2. If you are including nonlinearities, try to understand how they affect the structure's response by
doing a static analysis first. In some cases, nonlinearities need not be included in the dynamic
analysis.
3. Understand the dynamics of the problem. By doing a modal analysis, which calculates the natural
frequencies and mode shapes, you can learn how the structure responds when those modes are
excited. The natural frequencies are also useful for calculating the correct integration time step.
4. For a nonlinear problem, consider substructuring the linear portions of the model to reduce
analysis costs. Substructuring is described in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide .
5.2.Three Solution Methods

Three methods are available to do a transient dynamic analysis: full, mode-superposition , and reduced.
The ANSYS Professional program allows only the mode-superposition method. Before we study the
details of how to implement each of these methods, we will examine the advantages and disadvantages
of each.
5.2.1.Full Method
The full method uses the full system matrices to calculate the transient response (no matrix reduction).
It is the most general of the three methods because it allows all types of nonlinearities to be included
(plasticity, large deflections, large strain, and so on).
Note: If you do not want to include any nonlinearities, you should consider using one of
the other methods because the full method is also the most expensive method of
the three.
The advantages of the full method are:
It is easy to use, because you do not have to worry about choosing master degrees of freedom or
mode shapes.
It allows all types of nonlinearities.
It uses full matrices, so no mass matrix approximation is involved.
All displacements and stresses are calculated in a single pass.
It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements (although not
recommended), and element loads (pressures and temperatures) and allows tabular boundary
condition specification via TABLE type array parameters.
It allows effective use of solid-model loads.
The main disadvantage of the full method is that it is more expensive than either of the other methods.
For procedural information about using the full method, see Performing a Full Transient Dynamic
Analysis.
5.2.2.Mode-Superposition Method
The mode-superposition method sums factored mode shapes (eigenvectors) from a modal analysis to
calculate the structure's response. This is the only method available in the ANSYS Professional program.
Its advantages are:
It is faster and less expensive than the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the transient dynamic
analysis via the LVSCALE command.
It accepts modal damping (damping ratio as a function of mode number).
The disadvantages of the mode-superposition method are:
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not
allowed.
The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).

It does not accept imposed (nonzero) displacements.
For procedural information about using the mode-superposition method, see Performing a ModeSuperposition Transient Dynamic Analysis.
5.2.3.Reduced Method
The reduced method condenses the problem size by using master degrees of freedom and reduced
matrices. After the displacements at the master DOF have been calculated, the program expands the
solution to the original full DOF set. (See Using Matrix Reduction for a More Efficient Modal Analysis for
a more detailed discussion of the reduction procedure.) The advantage of the reduced method is:
It is faster and less expensive than the full method.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are:
The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as
the expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However,
the expansion pass might not be needed for some applications.)
Element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) cannot be applied. Accelerations, however, are
allowed.
All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solidmodel loads.)
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not
allowed.
The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).
For procedural information about using the reduced method, see Performing a Reduced Transient
Dynamic Analysis.
5.3.Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

Note - Before reading this section, you are encouraged to become familiar with the concepts presented
in Structural Static Analysis .
We will first describe how to do a transient dynamic analysis using the full method. We will then list the
steps that are different for the mode-superposition and reduced methods.
The procedure for a full transient dynamic analysis (available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS
Mechanical, and ANSYS Structural products) consists of these steps:
1. Build the Model
2. Establish Initial Conditions
3. Set Solution Controls
4. Set Additional Solution Options
5. Apply the Loads
6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step
8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database
9. Start the Transient Solution
10. Exit the Solution Processor
11. Review the Results

Guide.
Keep the following points in mind when building a model for a full transient dynamic analysis:
You can use both linear and nonlinear elements.
must be defined. Material properties may be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and
constant or temperature-dependent.
You can define damping using element damping, material damping and/or proportional damping
ratios. For more details about damping definition, see Damping.
Some comments on mesh density:
The mesh should be fine enough to resolve the highest mode shape of interest.
Regions where stresses or strains are of interest require a relatively finer mesh than regions where
only displacements are of interest.
If you want to include nonlinearities, the mesh should be able to capture the effects of the
nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore
a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
If you are interested in wave propagation effects (for example, a bar dropped exactly on its end),
the mesh should be fine enough to resolve the wave. A general guideline is to have at least 20
elements per wavelength along the direction of the wave.
5.3.2.Establish Initial Conditions

Before you can perform a full transient dynamic analysis on a model, you need to understand how to
establish initial conditions and use load steps.
A transient analysis, by definition, involves loads that are functions of time. To specify such loads, you
need to divide the load-versus-time curve into suitable load steps. Each "corner" on the load-time curve
may be one load step, as shown in Figure 5.1.
Figure5.1Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves
The first load step you apply is usually to establish initial conditions. You then specify the loads and load
step options for the second and subsequent transient load steps. For each load step, you need to specify
both load values and time values, along with other load step options such as whether to step or ramp
the loads, use automatic time stepping, and so on. You then write each load step to a file and solve all
load steps together. Establishing initial conditions is described below; the remaining tasks are described
later in this chapter.
The first step in applying transient loads is to establish initial conditions (that is, the condition at Time =
0). A transient dynamic analysis requires two sets of initial conditions (because the equations being
solved are of second order): initial displacement (u o ) and initial velocity (
). If no special action is
taken, both uo and are assumed to be zero. Initial accelerations ( ) are always assumed to be
zero, but you can specify nonzero initial accelerations by applying appropriate acceleration loads over a
small time interval.
The following text describes how to apply different combinations of initial conditions:
The term initial displacement as it appears in the following text can be any combination of
displacement and force loads. Also, all load steps in the example input fragments that are run
without applied transient effects (TIMINT,OFF) should be converged.
Zero initial displacement and zero initial velocity -- These are the default conditions, that is, if uo =
= 0, you do not need to specify anything. You may apply the loads corresponding to the first corner of
the load-versus-time curve in the first load step.
Nonzero initial displacement and/or nonzero initial velocity -- You can set these initial conditions with the
IC command.
Command(s):
GUI:
IC
MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define
Caution: Be careful not to define inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define
an initial velocity at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be
0.0, potentially leading to conflicting initial conditions. In most cases, you will
want to define initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF in your model. If
these conditions are not the same at every DOF, it is usually much easier to
define initial conditions explicitly, as documented below (rather than by using
the IC command).
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the TIMINT and IC commands.
Zero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - The nonzero velocity is established by applying
small displacements over a small time interval on the part of the structure where velocity is to be
specified. For example if
0.004, as shown below.
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,.001
TIME,.004
LSWRITE
DDEL,ALL,UY
TIMINT,ON
...
= 0.25, you can apply a displacement of 0.001 over a time interval of
!
!
!
!
!
!
Time integration effects off

Small UY displ. (assuming Y-direction velocity)
Initial velocity = 0.001/0.004 = 0.25
Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
Remove imposed displacements
Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - This is similar to the above case, except that
the imposed displacements are actual values instead of "small" values. For example, if uo = 1.0 and
= 2.5, you would apply a displacement of 1.0 over a time interval of 0.4:
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,1.0
TIME,.4
LSWRITE
DDELE,ALL,UY
TIMINT,ON
...
!
!
!
!
!
!
Time integration effects off

Initial displacement = 1.0
Initial velocity = 1.0/0.4 = 2.5
Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
Remove imposed displacements
Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - This requires the use of two substeps (NSUBST,2)
with a step change in imposed displacements (KBC,1). Without the step change (or with just one
substep), the imposed displacements would vary directly with time, leading to a nonzero initial velocity.
The example below shows how to apply uo = 1.0 and
= 0.0:
...
TIMINT,OFF
! Time integration effects off for static solution
D,ALL,UY,1.0
! Initial displacement = 1.0
TIME,.001
! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
LSWRITE
! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
! Transient solution
TIMINT,ON
! Time-integration effects on for transient solution
TIME,...
! Realistic time interval
DDELE,ALL,UY
! Remove displacement constraints
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
...
Nonzero initial acceleration - This can be approximated by specifying the required acceleration (ACEL)
over a small interval of time. For example, the commands to apply an initial acceleration of 9.81 would
look like this:
...
ACEL,,9.81
TIME,.001
! Initial Y-direction acceleration

! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
! The structure must be unconstrained in the initial load step, or
! else the initial acceleration specification will have no effect.
DDELE,...
! Remove displacement constraints (if appropriate)
LSWRITE
! Transient solution
TIME,...
! Realistic time interval
NSUBST, ...
! Use appropriate time step
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
D, ...
! Constrain structure as desired
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
LSWRITE
...
See the Command Reference for discussions of the ACEL, TIME, NSUBST, KBC, LSWRITE, DDELE,
and KBC commands.

This step for a transient dynamic analysis is the same as for a basic structural analysis (see Set Solution
Controls in Structural Static Analysis ) with the following additions:
If you need to establish initial conditions for the full transient dynamic analysis (as described in Establish
Initial Conditions), you must do so for the first load step of the analysis. You can then cycle through the
Solution Controls dialog box additional times to set individual load step options for the second and
subsequent load steps (as described in Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step).
5.3.3.1.Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Sol'n Control. The following sections provide brief descriptions of the options that appear on
each tab of the dialog box. For details about how to set these options, select the tab that you are
interested in and then click the Help button. Nonlinear Structural Analysis also contains details about
the nonlinear options introduced in this chapter.
5.3.3.2.Using the Basic Tab

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box.
The controls that appear on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data needed for the analysis.
Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not need to progress through the
remaining tabs unless you want to adjust the default settings for the more advanced controls. As soon
as you click OK on any tab of the dialog box, the settings are applied to the database and the dialog
box closes.
You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table2.1:Basic Tab Options. For specific
select the Basic tab, and click the Help button.
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include:
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Transient if you are
performing a new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large
deflection, large rotation, and large strain. Choose Large Displacement Transient if you expect
large deflections (as in the case of a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a
metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed
nonlinear analysis, if you have previously completed a static prestress or a full transient dynamic
analysis and you want to extend the time-history, or if you wish to use the Jobname.RSX
information from a previous VT Accelerator run. Note that in a VT Accelerator run, you cannot
restart a job in the middle; you can only rerun the job from the beginning with changes in the
input parameters.
When setting AUTOTS, remember that this load step option (which is also known as time-step
optimization in a transient analysis) increases or decreases the integration time step based on the
response of the structure. For most problems, we recommend that you turn on automatic time
stepping, with upper and lower limits for the integration time step. These limits, specified using
DELTIM or NSUBST, help to limit the range of variation of the time step; see Automatic Time
Stepping for more information. The default is ON.
NSUBST and DELTIM are load step options that specify the integration time step for a transient
analysis. The integration time step is the time increment used in the time integration of the
equations of motion. You can specify the time increment directly or indirectly (that is, in terms of
the number of substeps). The time step size determines the accuracy of the solution: the smaller
its value, the higher the accuracy. You should consider several factors in order to calculate a
"good" integration time step; see Guidelines for Integration Time Step for details.
When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind:
Caution: By default, only the last substep (time-point) is written to the results file
( Jobname.RST) in a full transient dynamic analysis. To write all substeps,
set the Frequency so that it writes all of the substeps. Also, by default,
only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file. If this number is
exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will
terminate with an error. Use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase
the limit (see "Memory Management and Configuration" in the Basic
Analysis Guide ).
5.3.3.3.Using the Transient Tab

You can use the Transient tab to set the options listed in Table5.1:Transient Tab Options. For specific
select the Transient tab, and click the Help button.
Table5.1Transient Tab Options
Option
For more information about this option, see:
Specify whether time integration effects

are on or off (TIMINT)
Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis in the

Structural Analysis Guide
Specify whether to ramp the load change

over the load step or to step-apply the
load change (KBC)
Stepped Versus Ramped Loads in the Basic

Analysis Guide
Specify mass and stiffness damping

(ALPHAD, BETAD)
Choose the time integration method,
Newmark or HHT (TRNOPT)
Damping in the Structural Analysis Guide
Define integration parameters (TINTP)
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and

Mechanical Applications
Stepping or Ramping Loads in the Basic Analysis

Guide
Transient Analysis in the Theory Reference for the

Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include:
TIMINT is a dynamic load step option that specifies whether time integration effects are on or off.
Time integration effects must be turned on for inertia and damping effects to be included in the
analysis (otherwise a static solution is performed), so the default is to include time integration
effects. This option is useful when beginning a transient analysis from an initial static solution; that
is, the first load steps are solved with the time integration effects off.
ALPHAD (alpha, or mass, damping) and BETAD (beta, or stiffness, damping) are dynamic load
step options for specifying damping options. Damping in some form is present in most structures
and should be included in your analysis. See Damping Option for other damping options.
TRNOPT ( TINTOPT) specifies the time integration method to be used. The default is Newmark
method.
TINTP is a dynamic load step option that specifies transient integration parameters. Transient
integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark and HHT time integration techniques.
5.3.3.4.Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs

The options on the remaining tabs in the Solution Controls dialog box for a full transient analysis are the
same as the ones you can set for a static structural analysis. See the following sections of Structural
Static Analysis for a list of these options:
Using the Sol'n Options Tab
Using the Nonlinear Tab
Using the Advanced NL Tab. Exception: You cannot use arc-length options in a full transient
analysis.
5.3.3.4.1.Set Additional Solution Options

The additional solution options that you can set for a full transient analysis are mostly the same as the
ones you can set for a static structural analysis. For a general description of what additional solution
options are, along with descriptions of those options that are the same, see the following sections of
Structural Static Analysis :
Stress Stiffening Effects
Newton-Raphson Option
Creep Criteria
Printed Output
Additional solution options for a full transient analysis that differ from those for a static analysis, or have
different descriptions are presented in the following sections.
You may also use the NLHIST command to monitor results of interest in real time during solution.
Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or reaction forces at
specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific elements
to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available. The result data are written to a file named
Jobname.nlh.
For example, a reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior occurs.
Nodal results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep while element nodal data
are written as specified via the OUTRES setting.
You can also track results during batch runs. To execute, either access the Launcher and select File
Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist130 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser
to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this utilty
to read the file at any time, even after the solution is complete.
To use this option, use either of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
NLHIST
Main Menu> Solution> Results Tracking
5.3.3.4.1.1.Prestress Effects
You may include prestress effects in your analysis. This requires element files from a previous static (or
transient) analysis; see Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis for details.
Command(s):
GUI:
PSTRES
MainMenu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
5.3.3.4.1.2.Damping Option
Use this load step option to include damping. Damping in some form is present in most structures and
should be included in your analysis. In addition to setting ALPHAD and BETAD on the Solution Controls
dialog box (as described in Using the Transient Tab), you can specify the following additional forms of
damping for a full transient dynamic analysis:
Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP)
Element damping (COMBIN14, and so on)
To use the MP form of damping:
Command(s):
GUI:
MP,DAMP
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props>
Material Models> Structural> Damping
Note that constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. See
Damping for further details.
5.3.3.4.1.3.Mass Matrix Formulation
Use this analysis option to specify a lumped mass matrix formulation. We recommend the default
formulation for most applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny" structures, such as
slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass approximation might provide better results. Also,
the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements.
To use this option:
Command(s):
GUI:
LUMPM
MainMenu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options

You are now ready to apply loads for the analysis. The loads shown in Table2.5:Loads Applicable in a
Static Analysis are also applicable to a transient dynamic analysis. In addition to these, you can apply
acceleration loads in a transient analysis (see DOF Constraints in the Basic Analysis Guide for more
information).
Except for inertia loads, velocity loads, and acceleration loads, you can define loads either on the solid
model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). In an analysis,
loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or deleted. For a general discussion of solid-model loads
versus finite-element loads, see "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
You can also apply time-dependent boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table (TABLE
type array parameter). See Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters.
5.3.5.Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step

As described in Establish Initial Conditions, you need to apply loads and save the load configuration to a
load step file for each corner of the load-versus-time curve. You may also want to have an additional
load step that extends past the last time point on the curve to capture the response of the structure
after the transient loading.
Command(s):
GUI:
LSWRITE
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.3.6.Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step

For each load step that you want to define for a full transient dynamic analysis, you need to repeat
steps 3-6. That is, for each load step, reset any desired solution controls and options, apply loads, and
write the load configuration to a file.
For each load step, you can reset any of these load step options: TIMINT, TINTP, ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, TIME, KBC, NSUBST, DELTIM, AUTOTS, NEQIT, CNVTOL, PRED, LNSRCH, CRPLIM,
NCNV, CUTCONTROL, OUTPR, OUTRES, ERESX, and RESCONTROL.
An example load step file is shown below:
TIME,...
Loads ...
KBC,...
LSWRITE
TIME,...
Loads ...
KBC,...
LSWRITE
TIME,...
Loads ...
KBC,...
LSWRITE
Etc.
! Time at the end of 1st transient load step

! Load values at above time
! Stepped or ramped loads
! Write load data to load step file
! Time at the end of 2nd transient load step
! Time at the end of 3rd transient load step
5.3.7.Save a Backup Copy of the Database

Save a copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the
program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
5.3.8.Start the Transient Solution

Use one of these methods to start the transient solution:
Command(s):
GUI:
LSSOLVE
MainMenu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files
For additional ways to create and solve multiple load steps (the array parameter method and the
multiple SOLVE method), see Solving Multiple Load Steps in the Basic Analysis Guide .
5.3.9.Exit the Solution Processor

Use one of these methods to exit the solution processor:
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH

You review results for a full transient analysis in the same way that you review results for most
structural analyses. See Review the Results in Structural Static Analysis .
You can review these results using either POST26, which is the time-history postprocessor, or POST1,
which is the general postprocessor.
POST26 is used to review results at specific points in the model as functions of time.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific time points.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a transient dynamic analysis are explained below. For a
complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Postprocessors Available in the Basic Analysis
Guide.
The points to remember for a full transient analysis are the same as those for most structural analyses.
See Points to Remember in Structural Static Analysis .
POST26 works with tables of result item versus time, known as variables . Each variable is assigned a
reference number, with variable number 1 reserved for time.
1. Define the variables.
NSOL (primary data, that is, nodal displacements)

ESOL (derived data, that is, element solution data, such as stresses)
Command(s): RFORCE (reaction force data)
FORCE (total force, or static, damping, or inertia component of total force)
SOLU (time step size, number of equilibrium iterations, response frequency, and
so on)
GUI:
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
Note: In the mode-superposition or reduced methods, only static force is available
with the FORCE command.
2. Graph or list the variables. By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the
model, you can identify the critical time points for further POST1 postprocessing.
Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables)
PRVAR,
EXTREM (list variables)
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
GUI:
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
5.3.10.4.Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions, such as performing math operations among variables, moving
variables into array parameters, and moving array parameters into variables, are available in POST26.
See "The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26)" in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
1. Read in model data from the database file.
Command(s):
GUI:
RESUME
2. Read in the desired set of results. Use the SET command to identify the data set by load step and
substep numbers or by time.
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
MainMenu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Time/Freq
3. Perform the necessary POST1 operations. The typical POST1 operations that you perform for a
transient dynamic analysis are the same as those that you perform for a static analysis. See
Typical Postprocessing Operations for a list of these operations.
Note: If you specify a time for which no results are available, the results that are
stored will be a linear interpolation between the two nearest time points.
5.3.11.Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a full transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model

/FILNAM,...
/TITLE,...
/PREP7
--FINISH
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

/SOLU
! Enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,TRANS
! Transient analysis
TRNOPT,FULL
! Full method
D,...
! Constraints
F,...
! Loads
SF,...
ALPHAD,...
! Mass damping
BETAD,...
! Stiffness damping
KBC,...
TIME,...
! Time at end of load step
AUTOTS,ON
! Auto time stepping
DELTIM,...
! Time step size
OUTRES,...
! Results file data options
LSWRITE
! Write first load step
-----! Loads, time, etc. for 2nd load step
--LSWRITE
! Write 2nd load step
SAVE
LSSOLVE,1,2
! Initiate multiple load step solution
FINISH
!
! Review the Results
/POST26
SOLU,...
! Store solution summary data
NSOL,...
ESOL,,,,
! Store element result as a variable
RFORCE,...
! Store reaction as a variable
PLVAR,...
! Plot variables
PRVAR,...
! List variables
FINISH
/POST1
SET,...
!
PLDISP,...
!
PRRSOL,...
!
PLNSOL,...
!
PRERR
!
-----! Other postprocessing as
--FINISH
Read desired set of results into database

Deformed shape
Reaction loads
Contour plot of nodal results
Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy)
desired
See the Command Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIME,
AUTOTS, DELTIM, OUTRES, LSWRITE, LSSOLVE, SOLU, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLVAR,
PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
5.6.Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example, you will perform a transient dynamic analysis using the reduced method to determine
the transient response to a constant force with a finite rise in time. In this problem, a steel beam
supporting a concentrated mass is subjected to a dynamic load.
A steel beam of length
concentrated mass, m.
value F 1 . If the weight
displacement response
in the beam.
and geometric properties shown in Problem Specifications is supporting a

The beam is subjected to a dynamic load F(t) with a rise time t r and a maximum
of the beam is considered to be negligible, determine the time of maximum
t max and the response ymax . Also determine the maximum bending stress bend
The beam is not used in this solution and its area is arbitrarily input as unity. The final time of 0.1 sec
allows the mass to reach its largest deflection. One master degree of freedom is selected at the mass in
the lateral direction. A static solution is done at the first load step. Symmetry could have been used in
this model. The time of maximum response (0.092 sec) is selected for the expansion pass calculation.
The following material properties are used for this problem:
E = 30 x 10 3 ksi
m = 0.0259067 kips-sec2 /in
The following geometric properties are used for this problem:
l = 800.6 in4
h = 18 in
= 20 ft = 240 in.
F 1 = 20 kips
t r = 0.075 sec
Figure5.3Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass
5.6.3.1.Specify the Title

2. Enter the text "Transient response to a constant force with a finite rise time."
3. Click on OK.
5.6.3.2.Define Element Types

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The
Element Types dialog box appears.
3. In the left scroll box, click on "Structural Beam."
4. In the right scroll box, click on "2 Node 188" and click on Apply.
5. In the left scroll box, click on "Structural Mass."
6. In the right scroll box, click on "3D mass 21," and click on OK.
7. In the Element Types dialog box, click once on "Type 2," and click on Options.
8. In the scroll box for Rotary inertia options, scroll to "2D w/o rot iner" and select it.
9. Click on OK.
10. In the Element Types dialog box, click once on "Type 1" and click on Options.
11. Choose Element Behavior K3: Cubic Form. Click on OK.
5.6.3.3.Define Real Constants

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sections. The
BeamTool dialog box appears.
2. Enter 18 for B (dimension in the y direction) and 1.647 for H (dimension in the z direction).
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete. The
Real Constants dialog box appears.
5. In the Real Constants dialog box, click on Add.

6. Click on Type 2 MASS21 and click on OK. The Real Constant Set Number 2 for MASS21 dialog box
appears.
7. Enter .0259067 in the 2-D mass field and click on OK.
8. Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The
3. Enter 30e3 for EX (Young's modulus), enter 0.3 for PRXY, and click on OK. Material Model Number
1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
5.6.3.5.Define Nodes
1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.
The Create Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2. Enter 1 for node number and click on Apply to define node 1 at 0,0,0.
4. Enter 240,0,0 for X, Y, Z coordinates and click on OK.
5. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between
Nds. The Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
6. Click once on nodes 1 and 3 in the Graphics window, and click on OK in the picking menu. The
Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
7. Click on OK to accept the default settings.
5.6.3.6.Define Elements
1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto
Numbered> Thru Nodes. The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears.
2. Click once on nodes 1 and 2, and click on Apply.
3. Click once on nodes 2 and 3, and click on OK.
4. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem
5. In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 MASS21.
6. In the Real constant set number drop down menu, select 2 and click OK.
7. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto
8. Click once on node 2 and click OK.

5.6.3.7.Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
2. Click on "Transient" to select it, and click on OK. The Transient Analysis dialog box appears.
3. Click on "Reduced" and click on OK.
4. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Reduced
Transient Analysis dialog box appears.
5. In the drop down menu for Damping effects, select "Ignore."
6. Click on OK.
5.6.3.8.Define Master Degrees of Freedom

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define. The
Define Master DOFs picking menu appears.
2. Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
3. In the drop down menu for 1st degree of freedom, select "UY."
4. Click on OK.
5.6.3.9.Define Symmetry Conditions

Displacement> Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
2. In the scroll box for Norml symm surface is normal to, scroll to z-axis and click on OK.
5.6.3.10.Set Load Step Options

1. Choose the menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> TimeTime Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2. Enter .004 for Time step size and click on OK.
5.6.3.11.Apply Loads for the First Load Step

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
2. Click on node 1 and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
3. Click on "UY" to select it and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
4. Click on node 3, and click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
5. Click on "UX" to select it. "UY" should remain selected. Click on OK.
Force/Moment> On Nodes. The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.

7. Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
8. In the drop down menu for Direction of force/mom, select "FY." Leave the value as blank (zero)
for the initial static solution.
9. Click on OK, and click on SAVE_DB on the Toolbar.
5.6.3.12.Specify Output
1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File. The Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
2. Click on the "Every substep" radio button and click on OK.
5.6.3.13.Solve the First Load Step

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.
4. Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears.
5.6.3.14.Apply Loads for the Next Load Step

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time-Time
Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2. Enter .075 for Time at end of load step and click on OK.
4. Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
5. Enter 20 for Force/moment value and click on OK.
5.6.4.Solve the Next Load Step

4. Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears
5.6.4.1.Set the Next Time Step and Solve

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time-Time
Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2. Enter .1 for Time at end of load step and click on OK.

7. Choose menu path MainMenu> Finish.
5.6.4.2.Run the Expansion Pass and Solve

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass. Set the
Expansion pass radio button to On and click on OK.
2. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> By Time/Freq. The Expand Single Solution by Time/Frequency dialog box appears.
3. Enter 0.092 for Time-point/Frequency and click on OK.
4. Choose menu path MainMenu >Solution> Solve> Current LS.
5.6.4.3.Review the Results in POST26

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> File. The File Settings dialog
box appears.
2. Click browse and select "file.rdsp" and click on open then OK.
3. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined TimeHistory Variables dialog box appears.
4. Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
5. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data picking menu
appears. Pick node 2 and click OK.
6. Accept the default of 2 for the reference number of the variable.
7. Make sure that 2 is entered for node number.
8. Enter NSOL for user-specified label.
9. In the right scroll box, click on "Translation UY" to select it.
10. Click on OK, then click on Close in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
11. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables.
12. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph and click on OK. The graph appears in the Graphics window.
13. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables.
14. Enter 2 for 1st variable to list and click on OK.
15. Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
5.6.4.4.Review the Results in POST1

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2. Choose menu path MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The
3. Click on "Def + undeformed" and click on OK.
5.6.4.5.Exit
1. Choose QUIT from the Toolbar.
2. Click on the save option you want, and click on OK.
5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
5.7.Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch

Method)
You can perform the example transient dynamic analysis of a bracket using the commands shown below
instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7
/TITLE, Transient Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time
ET,1,BEAM188,,,3
! 3-D beam using cubic option
ET,2,MASS21 ,,,4
! 2-D mass
SECTYPE,1,BEAM,RECT
SECDATA,18,1.647
R,2,.0259067
! Mass
MP,EX ,1,30000
MP,GXY ,1,11538
N,1
N,3,240
FILL
E,1,2
! Beam elements
EGEN,2,1,1
TYPE,2
REAL,2
E,2
! Type 2 element with real constant 2
M,2,UY
! Master degree of freedom in Y direction
DSYM,SYMM,Z
! Prevent out-of-plane displacement
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANS
TRNOPT,REDUC,,NODAMP
DELTIM,.004
D,1,UY
D,3,UX,,,,,UY
OUTPR,BASIC,1
OUTRES,ALL,1
F,2,FY,0
SOLVE
TIME,.075
F,2,FY,20
SOLVE
TIME,.1
SOLVE
FINISH
! Transient dynamic analysis

! Reduced transient analysis, ignore damping
! Integration time step size
! Force = 0 at Time = 0
! Time at end of load step
! Force is ramped to 20
! Constant force until time = 0.1
/SOLU
! Following is the expansion pass using BEAM188 and MASS21 elements
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass on
EXPSOL,,,0.092
! Time of maximum response
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NUMVAR,0
FILE,file,rdsp
NSOL,2,2,U,Y,NSOL
PLVAR,2
PRVAR,2
FINISH
/POST1
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,1
FINISH
! Define the variables

! Graph the variables
! List the variables
! Read in results
! Display deformed and undeformed shape
5.8.Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis

A prestressed transient dynamic analysis calculates the dynamic response of a prestressed structure,
such as a heat-treated part with residual thermal stresses. Prestressed-analysis procedures vary,
depending on the type of transient dynamic analysis being performed.
5.8.1.Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

You can include prestressing effects in a full transient dynamic analysis by applying the prestressing
loads in a preliminary static load step. (Do not remove these loads in subsequent load steps.) The
procedure consists of two steps:
1. Build your model, enter SOLUTION, and define a transient analysis type (ANTYPE,TRANS).
Apply all prestressing loads.
Turn time integration effects off (TIMINT,OFF).
Turn stress stiffening effects on (SSTIF,ON).
Set time equal to some small dummy value (TIME).
Write your first load step to Jobname.S01 (LSWRITE).
If prestressing effects develop because of nonlinear behavior (as in the case of residual thermal
stresses in a casting), several load steps might be required to complete the static prestressing
phase of your analysis. In the case of geometric nonlinearities (large deformation effects), you can
capture the prestressing effect by issuing NLGEOM,ON.
2. For all subsequent load steps, turn time integration effects on (TIMINT,ON), and proceed using
the full transient dynamic analysis procedures described previously. Once all load steps are written
to files (LSWRITE), you can initiate the multiple load step solution (LSSOLVE).
Note: If you intend to define initial conditions (IC), perform the static prestress solution
as a separate solution. To activate the gyroscopic damping matrix in a prestressed
transient analysis, perform a separate static solution with Coriolis effects activated
(CORIOLIS,ON,,,ON) in a stationary reference frame.
(MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define)
The IC command is valid only in the first load step.
5.8.2.Prestressed Mode-Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

In order to include prestress effects in a mode-superposition analysis, you must first do a prestressed
modal analysis. See Modal Analysis for details. Once prestressed modal analysis results are available,
proceed as for any other mode-superposition analysis.
5.8.3.Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis requires that you first prestress
the structure in a separate static analysis, as explained below. It is assumed that the transient (timevarying) stresses (which are superimposed on the prestress) are much smaller than the prestress itself.
If they are not, you should use the full transient dynamic analysis.
procedure to obtain a static solution is explained in Structural Static Analysis .
2. Reenter SOLUTION (/SOLU) and obtain the reduced transient solution, also with prestress effects
turned on (PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.DB , Jobname.EMAT, and Jobname.ESAV from the static
analysis must be available. Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and the
prestressed reduced transient dynamic analyses, the static analysis will need to be rerun.
5.9.Transient Dynamic Analysis Options

The following sections provide additional details about defining integration time step, automatic time
stepping, and damping.
5.9.1.Guidelines for Integration Time Step

The accuracy of the transient dynamic solution depends on the integration time step: the smaller the
time step, the higher the accuracy. A time step that is too large introduces an error that affects the
response of the higher modes (and hence the overall response). A time step that is too small wastes
computer resources. To calculate an optimum time step, adhere to the following guidelines:
1. Resolve the response frequency. The time step should be small enough to resolve the motion
(response) of the structure. Since the dynamic response of a structure can be thought of as a
combination of modes, the time step should be able to resolve the highest mode that contributes
to the response. For the Newmark time integration scheme, it has been found that using
approximately twenty points per cycle of the highest frequency of interest results in a reasonably
accurate solution. That is, if f is the frequency (in cycles/time), the integration time step (ITS) is
given by
ITS = 1/(20 f )
Smaller ITS values may be required if acceleration results are needed.
The following figure shows the effect of ITS on the period elongation of a single-DOF spring-mass
system. Notice that 20 or more points per cycle result in a period elongation of less than 1
percent.
Figure5.4Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation
For the HHT time integration method, the same guidelines for time step should be applied. Note
that if the same time step and time integration parameters are used, the HHT method will be more
accurate compared to the Newmark method.
An alternative way to select time step size is to use the midstep residual criterion. When this
criterion is used, the response frequency criterion is disabled by default. You have the option to
enable the response frequency criterion along with the midstep residual criterion (see item 6
below).
2. Resolve the applied load-versus-time curve(s). The time step should be small enough to "follow"
the loading function. The response tends to lag the applied loads, especially for stepped loads, as
shown in Figure 5.5. Stepped loads require a small ITS at the time of the step change so that the
step change can be closely followed. ITS values as small as 1/180f may be needed to follow
stepped loads.
Figure5.5Transient Input vs. Transient Response
3. Resolve the contact frequency. In problems involving contact (impact), the time step should be
small enough to capture the momentum transfer between the two contacting surfaces. Otherwise,
an apparent energy loss will occur and the impact will not be perfectly elastic. The integration time
step can be determined from the contact frequency ( f c) as:
where k is the gap stiffness, m is the effective mass acting at the gap, and N is the number of
points per cycle. To minimize the energy loss, at least thirty points per cycle of (N = 30) are
needed. Larger values of N may be required if acceleration results are needed. For the reduced
and mode-superposition methods, N must be at least 7 to ensure stability.
You can use fewer than thirty points per cycle during impact if the contact period and contact
mass are much less than the overall transient time and system mass, because the effect of any
energy loss on the total response would be small.
4. Resolve the wave propagation. If you are interested in wave propagation effects, the time step
should be small enough to capture the wave as it travels through the elements. See Build the
Model for a discussion of element size.
5. Resolve the nonlinearities. For most nonlinear problems, a time step that satisfies the preceding
guidelines is sufficient to resolve the nonlinearities. There are a few exceptions, however: if the
structure tends to stiffen under the loading (for example, large deflection problems that change
from bending to membrane load-carrying behavior), the higher frequency modes that are excited
will have to be resolved.
6. Satisfy the time step accuracy criterion. Satisfaction of the dynamics equations at the end of each
time step ensures the equilibrium at these discrete points of time. The equilibrium at the
intermediate time is usually not satisfied. If the time step is small enough, it can be expected that
the intermediate state should not deviate too much from the equilibrium. On the other hand, if the
time step is large, the intermediate state can be far from the equilibrium. The midstep residual
norm provides a measure of the accuracy of the equilibrium for each time step. You can use the
MIDTOL command to choose this criterion. See the MIDTOL command description for suggested
tolerance values. See also Midstep Residual for Structural Dynamic Analysis in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
After calculating the time step using the appropriate guidelines, use the minimum value for your
analysis. By using automatic time stepping, you can let the program decide when to increase or
decrease the time step during the solution. Automatic time stepping is discussed next.
Caution: Avoid using exceedingly small time steps, especially when establishing initial
conditions. Exceedingly small numbers can cause numerical difficulties. Based
on a problem time scale of unity, for example, time steps smaller than 10 -10
could cause numerical difficulties.
5.9.2.Automatic Time Stepping

Automatic time stepping, also known as time step optimization, attempts to adjust the integration time
step during solution based on the response frequency and on the effects of nonlinearities. The main
benefit of this feature is that the total number of substeps can be reduced, resulting in computer
resource savings. Also, the number of times that you might have to rerun the analysis (adjusting the
time step size, nonlinearities, and so on) is greatly reduced. If nonlinearities are present, automatic time
stepping gives the added advantage of incrementing the loads appropriately and retreating to the
previous converged solution (bisection) if convergence is not obtained. You can activate automatic time
stepping with the AUTOTS command. (For more information on automatic time stepping in the context
of nonlinearities, see Nonlinear Structural Analysis .)
Although it seems like a good idea to activate automatic time stepping for all analyses, there are some
cases where it may not be beneficial (and may even be harmful):
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub
assemblies), where the low-frequency energy content of part of the system may dominate the
high-frequency areas
Problems that are constantly excited (for example, seismic loading), where the time step tends to
change continually as different frequencies are excited
Kinematics (rigid-body motion) problems, where the rigid-body contribution to the response
frequency term may dominate

Several ANSYS, Inc. publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional transient
dynamic analyses.
program. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the Verification
Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and
printouts. However, most users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill
in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with
accompanying comments.
The Verification Manual includes a variety of transient dynamic analysis test cases:
VM9 - Large Lateral Deflection of Unequal Stiffness Springs
VM40 - Large Deflection and Rotation of a Beam Pinned at One End
VM65 - Transient Response of a Ball Impacting a Flexible Surface
VM71 - Transient Response of a Spring, Mass, Damping System
VM72 - Logarithmic Decrement
VM73 - Free Vibration with Coulomb Damping
VM74 - Transient Response to an Impulsive Excitation
VM75 - Transient Response to a Step Excitation
VM77 - Transient Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time
VM79 - Transient Response of a Bilinear Spring Assembly
VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force
VM81 - Transient Response of a Drop Container
VM84 - Displacement Propagation along a Bar with Free Ends
VM85 - Transient Displacements in a Suddenly Stopped Moving Bar
VM91 - Large Rotation of a Swinging Pendulum
VM156 - Natural Frequency of Nonlinear Spring-Mass System
VM158 - Motion of a Bobbing Buoy
VM179 - Dynamic Double Rotation of a Jointed Beam
VM182 - Transient Response of a Spring-Mass System
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis
Chapter6:Spectrum Analysis
A spectrum analysis is one in which the results of a modal analysis are used with a known spectrum to
calculate displacements and stresses in the model. It is mainly used in place of a time-history analysis to
determine the response of structures to random or time-dependent loading conditions such as
earthquakes, wind loads, ocean wave loads, jet engine thrust, rocket motor vibrations, and so on.
The following spectrum analysis topics are available:
Understanding Spectrum Analysis
Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis Process
Example Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)
Example Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
Performing a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis
Performing a DDAM Spectrum Analysis
Performing a Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis
Example Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
6.1.Understanding Spectrum Analysis

The spectrum is a graph of spectral value versus frequency that captures the intensity and frequency
content of time-history loads. Three types of spectra are available for a spectrum analysis:
Response Spectrum
Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS)
Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS)
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
Power Spectral Density (PSD)
SPRS is the only method available in the ANSYS Professional program.
6.1.1.Response Spectrum
A response spectrum input represents the maximum response of single-DOF systems to a time-history
loading function. It is a graph of response versus frequency, where the response might be displacement,
velocity, acceleration, or force. Two types of response spectrum analysis are possible: single-point
response spectrum and multi-point response spectrum. The output of a response spectrum analysis is
the maximum response of each mode to the input spectrum. While the maximum response of each
mode is known, the relative phase of each mode is unknown. To account for this, various mode
combination methods are used (rather than simply summing these maximum modal responses).
6.1.1.1.Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS)

In a single-point response spectrum (SPRS) analysis, you specify one response spectrum curve (or a
family of curves) at a set of points in the model, such as at all supports, as shown in Figure 6.1 (a).
6.1.1.2.Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS)

In a multi-point response spectrum (MPRS) analysis, you specify different spectrum curves at different
sets of points, as shown in Figure 6.1 (b).
Figure6.1Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra
6.1.2.Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
The Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) is a technique used to evaluate the shock resistance of
shipboard equipment. The technique is essentially a response spectrum analysis in which the spectrum is
obtained from a series of empirical equations and shock design tables provided in the U.S. Naval
Research Laboratory Report NRL-1396.
6.1.3.Power Spectral Density

The output of a response spectrum analysis is the maximum response of each mode to the input
spectrum. While the maximum response of each mode is known, the relative phase of each mode is
unknown. To account for this, various mode combination methods are used (rather than simply
summing these maximum modal responses). Power spectral density (PSD) is a statistical measure
defined as the limiting root mean-square (rms) value of a random variable. It is used in random
vibration analyses in which the instantaneous magnitudes of the response can be specified only by
probability distribution functions that show the probability of the magnitude taking a particular value. It
is assumed that the dynamic input has a zero mean value and the range of values takes the form of a
Gaussian or normal probability distribution.
A PSD is a graph of the PSD value versus frequency, where the PSD may be a displacement PSD,
velocity PSD, acceleration PSD, or force PSD, that captures both the power or intensity of the input
vibration and its frequency content. The PSD value is in (unit) 2 /Hz, such as g2 /Hz. . Mathematically, the
area under a PSD-versus-frequency curve is equal to the variance (square of the standard deviation) of
the input vibration. Likewise, the output also takes on a Gaussian distribution and zero mean value. The
output values of a PSD analysis are the response PSDs, with the area under the response PSD curve
being the variance (the square of the standard deviation) of the response.
Similar to response spectrum analysis, a random vibration analysis may be single-point or multi-point. In
a single-point random vibration analysis, you specify one PSD spectrum at a set of points in the model.
In a multi-point random vibration analysis, you specify different PSD spectra at different points in the
model.
6.1.4.Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses

Response spectrum and DDAM analyses are deterministic analyses because both the input to the
analyses and output from the analyses are actual maximum values. Random vibration analysis, on the
other hand, is probabilistic in nature, because both input and output quantities represent only the
probability that they take on certain values.
6.2.Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis Process

The general process for performing a single-point response spectrum analysis consists of six primary
steps:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Build the Model

Obtain the Spectrum Solution
Expand the Modes
Combine the Modes
Review the Results
6.2.1.Step 1: Build the Model

Guide.
Only linear behavior is valid in a spectrum analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as
linear. If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their
initial status and are never changed.
must be defined. Material properties can be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or
temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.
You can define damping using damping ratio, material damping and/or proportional damping. For
more details about damping definition, see Damping.
6.2.2.Step 2: Obtain the Modal Solution

The modal solution is required because the structure's mode shapes and frequencies must be available
to calculate the spectrum solution.
The procedure for obtaining the modal solution is described in Modal Analysis , but the following
additional recommendations apply:
Use the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, Supernode, or reduced method to extract the modes. (Other
methods are not valid for subsequent spectrum analysis.)
To include the missing-mass effect in the spectrum analysis, use the Block Lanczos or PCG Lanczos
method.
Extract a sufficient number of modes to characterize the structure's response in the frequency
range of interest.
Expand all the modes (MXPAND,ALL ). This is required if you eventually want to compute summed
forces and moments in postprocessing (for example, obtaining the forces across a cut in the model
using FSUM). You can also expand the modes after the spectrum solution if the size of the results
file Jobname.RST is an issue (see the use of the SIGNIF argument in the MXPAND command
documentation). In this case, use MXPAND,-1 to suppress the expansion during the modal
analysis, and follow the steps in Expanding the Modes. To include material-dependent damping in
the spectrum analysis, specify it in the modal analysis.
Constrain those degrees of freedom where you want to apply a base excitation spectrum.
At the end of the solution, exit the Solution processor.

If you intend to perform multiple independent spectrum analyses, keep a copy of the Jobname.MODE file
from the modal analysis. For more information, see Step 5: Combine the Modes.
6.2.3.Step 3: Obtain the Spectrum Solution

The procedure to obtain the spectrum solution is explained below. The mode file and the full file
( Jobname.MODE, Jobname.FULL) from the modal analysis must be available, and the database must contain
the model data. If the missing mass calculation is activated (MMASS command), the element matrices
file ( Jobname.EMAT) and the results file ( Jobname.RST) from the modal analysis must also be available.
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers the following analysis options for a
spectrum analysis. Not all modal analysis options and not all eigenvalue extraction techniques work
with all spectrum analysis options.
Option
Command
New Analysis
ANTYPE
Analysis Type:
Spectrum
Spectrum Type:
SPRS
No. of Modes to
Use for Solution
ANTYPE
SPOPT
SPOPT
GUI Path
Analysis
MainMenu> Solution>
Analysis> Spectrum
Options
Options
Analysis Type> New

Analysis Type> New
Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE]

Choose New Analysis.
Option: Analysis Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE]
Choose analysis type spectrum.
Option: Spectrum Type: Single-point Response Spectrum [SPOPT]
Choose Single-point Response Spectrum (SPRS).
Option: Number of Modes to Use for Solution [SPOPT]
Choose enough modes to cover the frequency range spanned by the spectrum and to
characterize the structure's response. The accuracy of the solution depends on the number of
modes used: the larger the number, the higher the accuracy.
3. Specify load step options. The following options are available for single-point response spectrum
analysis:

Option
Command
GUI Path
Spectrum Options
Type of Response SVTYP
Spectrum
Excitation Direction SED
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum>

Single Point> Settings
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum>
Single Point> Settings
Spectral-value- vs- FREQ, SV MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum>
frequency Curve
Single Point> Freq Table or Spectr Values
Damping (Dynamics Options)
Beta (Stiffness)
BETAD
Damping
Constant Damping DMPRAT MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Ratio
Modal Damping
MDAMP
Spectrum Options
These data include the following:
Type of Response Spectrum [SVTYP]

The spectrum type can be displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or PSD. All except
the force spectrum represent seismic spectra; that is, they are assumed to be specified
at the base. The force spectrum is specified at non-base nodes with the F or FK
command, and the direction is implied by labels FX, FY, FZ. The PSD spectrum
[SVTYP,4] is internally converted to a displacement response spectrum and is limited
to flat, narrowband spectra; a more robust random vibration analysis procedure is
described in Performing a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis.
Excitation Direction [SED]

In addition, the ROCK command allows you to specify a rocking spectrum.
Spectral-Value-Versus-Frequency Curve [FREQ, SV]

SV and FREQ commands are used to define the spectral curve with a maximum of 100
points. You can define a family of spectral curves, each curve for a different damping
ratio. Use the STAT command to list current spectrum curve values, and the SVPLOT
command to display the spectrum curves.
Missing Mass Effect [MMASS]

The missing mass effect reduces the error caused when the higher modes are
neglected in the analysis.
Rigid Responses Effect [RIGRESP]

If rigid responses are included, the combination of modal responses with frequencies in
the higher end of the spectrum frequency range will be more accurate.
If you specify more than one form of damping, the program calculates an effective damping
ratio at each frequency. The spectral value at this effective damping ratio is then calculated
by log-log interpolation of the spectral curves. If no damping is specified, the spectral curve
with the lowest damping is used. For more information about different forms of damping, see
Damping in Transient Dynamic Analysis .
The following forms of damping are available:
Beta (stiffness) Damping [BETAD]

This option results in a frequency-dependent damping ratio.
Constant Damping Ratio [DMPRAT]

This option specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies.
Modal Damping [MDAMP]

Note: Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but
only if specified in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a
material-dependent constant damping ratio (and not materialdependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
The output from the solution includes the Response Spectrum Calculation Summary. This table,
which is part of the printed output, lists the participation factors, mode coefficients (based on
lowest damping ratio), and the mass distribution for each mode. To obtain the response of each
mode (modal response), multiply the mode shape by the mode coefficient (based on lowest
damping ratio). You do this by retrieving the mode coefficient with the *GET command (Entity =
MODE) and using it as a scale factor in the SET command.
The mode coefficients based on the actual damping are listed in the Significant Mode Coefficients
(Including Damping) table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for additional response spectra, if any. Note that solutions are not written to
the Jobname.rst at this time.
6. Leave the SOLUTION processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
If needed, you can retrieve the frequencies, participation factors, mode coefficients and effective
damping ratios with the *GET command (Entity = MODE).
6.2.4.Step 4: Expand the Modes

Skip this step if you have expanded the modes during the modal solution step (recommended obtain
valid forces in postprocessing, for example, through FSUM).
6.2.4.1.File and Database Requirements

The mode shape file ( Jobname.MODE), and the Jobname.EMAT, and Jobname.ESAV, files must be available.
(For the reduced mode-extraction method, file Jobname.TRI is required as well.)
The database must contain the same model for which the modal solution was calculated.

1. Reenter the solution processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
Option
Command
Expansion Pass On/Off EXPASS

No. of Modes to
Expand
MXPAND
Freq. Range for

Expansion
MXPAND
Stress Calc. On/Off
MXPAND
Significance Factor
MXPAND
GUI Path
ExpansionPass
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand
Modes
Modes
Modes
Modes

Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS)
Select ON.
EXPASS is not valid in a Distributed ANSYS analysis.
Number of Modes to Expand (MXPAND, NMODE )
Specify the number. Remember that only expanded modes can be combined and reviewed in
the postprocessor. Default is no modes expanded.
Frequency Range for Expansion (MXPAND,, FREQB , FREQE )
This is another way to control the number of modes expanded. If you specify a frequency
range, only modes within that range are expanded.
Stress Calculations On/Off (MXPAND,,,, Elcalc)
Select ON only if you are interested in stresses, strains, forces, or energies. "Stresses" from a
modal analysis do not represent actual stresses in the structure, but give you an idea of the
relative stress distributions for each mode. Default is no stresses calculated.
Note: In a Distributed ANSYS analysis, you must use the MXPAND command
at the same time that the mode and mode shapes are computed if you
want to expand the modes. In a Distributed ANSYS run, MXPAND is
not supported during an expansion pass (EXPASS).
Significance Factor (MXPAND,,,,, SIGNIF)
Specify the factor used to determine if a mode is significant. Only modes that meet this
threshold will be expanded.
3. Specify load step options. The only options valid in a modal expansion pass are output controls:
Printed output
Use this option to include any results data (expanded mode shapes, stresses, and forces) on
the printed output file ( Jobname.OUT).
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTPR
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu
Printout
Database and results file output

Use this option to control the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST). The FREQ field on
OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE, meaning that the data are written for all modes or no
modes. For example, you cannot write information for every other mode.
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTRES
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File

The output consists of expanded mode shapes and, if requested, relative stress distributions for
each mode.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
5. Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
6.2.5.Step 5: Combine the Modes

Combine the modes in a separate solution phase. A maximum of 10,000 modes can be combined. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
/SOLU
GUI:
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define analysis type.

Command(s):
GUI:
ANTYPE
MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis

3. Choose one of the mode combination methods.
ANSYS offers five different mode combination methods for the single-point response spectrum
analysis:
Square Root of Sum of Squares (SRSS)
Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC)
Double Sum (DSUM)
Grouping (GRP)
Naval Research Laboratory Sum (NRLSUM)
Rosenblueth (ROSE)
The NRLSUM method is typically used in the context of the Dynamic Design and Analysis Method
(DDAM) spectrum analysis.
The following commands are used to invoke different methods of mode combinations:
SRSS,
CQC,
Command(s): DSUM,
GRP,
NRLSUM,
ROSE
MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum
Main
Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Opts> Single-pt resp
GUI:
Main Menu> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Spectrum-Single Point-Mode
Combine
These commands allow computation of three different types of responses:
Displacement (label = DISP )
Displacement response refers to displacements, stresses, forces, etc.
Velocity (label = VELO )
Velocity response refers to velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc.
Acceleration (label = ACEL )
Acceleration response refers to accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc.

The DSUM method also allows the input of time duration for earthquake or shock spectrum.
If the missing mass effect is included (MMASS), only displacement results are available (Label =
DISP).
If the effect of the rigid responses is included (RIGRESP), the mode combination methods
supported are SRSS, CQC and ROSE
Note: You must specify damping if you use the Complete Quadratic Combination
method of mode combination (CQC). In addition, if you use materialdependent damping [MP,DAMP,...], you must request that element results be
calculated in the modal expansion. ( Elcalc = YES on the MXPAND
command.)
4. Start solution.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
The mode combination phase writes a file of POST1 commands ( Jobname.MCOM). Read in this file in
POST1 to do the mode combinations, using the results file ( Jobname.RST) from the modal
expansion pass.
The file Jobname.MCOM contains POST1 commands that combine the maximum modal responses by
using the specified mode combination method to calculate the overall response of the structure.
The mode combination method determines how the structure's modal responses are to be
combined:
If you selected displacement as the response type (label = DISP ), displacements and stresses
are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
If you selected velocity as the response type (label = VELO ), velocities and stress velocities
are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
If you selected acceleration as the response type (label = ACEL ), accelerations and stress
accelerations are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Note: To compute the effects of multiple spectra independently--for example, for

three orthogonal directions (for which you then combine in a separate step)-repeat Step 3: Obtain the Spectrum Solution, Step 4: Expand the Modes, and
Step 5: Combine the Modes for each direction. (The preferred method is
simply to repeat Step 5: Combine the Modes as described in that step.)
After the first spectrum analysis and for each subsequent one, you must
activate the modReuseKey on the SPOPT command so that the database as
well as the needed files are ready for the new analysis.
To compute a velocity and/or an acceleration response in addition to a
displacement response, repeat Step 5: Combine the Modes and use the VELO
or ACEL label on the mode-combination commands (SRSS, CQC, GRP,
DSUM, NRLSUM, ROSE).
In this case, you must make a copy (/COPY) of the Jobname.MODE file from
the modal analysis step, and recopy it to Jobname.MODE prior to executing the
next independent step. By doing so, the Jobname.MODE files used for
generating the downstream mode combinations use the mode coefficients
only from that independent spectra input; without the copy operation, each
set of mode coefficients from each independent spectra calculation are
appended to Jobname.MODE and the mode combination is based on the entire
set of spectra rather than each independent set as intended.
Reminder : The existing Jobname.MCOM file is also overwritten by the additional

mode-combination step(s).
6.2.6.Step 6: Review the Results

Results from a single-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file,
Jobname.MCOM , in the form of POST1 commands. These commands calculate the overall response of the
structure by combining the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by one of the mode
combination methods). The overall response consists of the overall displacements (or velocities or
accelerations) and, if placed on the results file during the expansion pass, the overall stresses (or stress
velocities or stress accelerations), strains (or strain velocities or strain accelerations), and reaction forces
(or reaction force velocities or reaction force accelerations).
You can use POST1, the general postprocessor, to review the results.
Note: If you want a direct combination of the derived stresses (S1, S2, S3, SEQV, SI)
from the results file, issue the SUMTYPE,PRIN command before reading in the
Jobname.MCOM file. With the PRIN option, component stresses are not available.
Note that the command default (SUMTYPE,COMP) is to directly operate only on the unaveraged
element component stresses and compute the derived quantities from these. Refer to Creating and
Combining Load Cases in the Basic Analysis Guide . Also, see the Command Reference for a description of
the SUMTYPE command.
1. Read the commands on Jobname.MCOM:
Command(s):
GUI:
/INPUT
UtilityMenu> File> Read Input From
For example, issue /INPUT with the following arguments:

/INPUT,FILE,MCOM!Assumes the default jobname FILE
2. Display results:
Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
PLESOL
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal
GUI:
Solu or Element Solu
Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ ...),
strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ ...). If you previously
issued the SUMTYPE command, the results of the PLNSOL or PLESOL command are
affected by the particular SUMTYPE command option (SUMTYPE,COMP or
SUMTYPE,PRIN) that you selected.
Use the PLETAB command to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element
data.
Displacements, stresses, and strains are always in the element coordinate system
(RSYS,SOLU).
Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL
command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different
materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing
effect, use selecting (described in "Selecting and Components" in the Basic Analysis Guide ) to
select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, etc. before issuing PLNSOL.
You can view correct membrane results for shells (SHELL, MID) by using KEYOPT(8) = 2 (for
SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, SHELL281, and ELBOW290). These KEYOPTS write the
mid-surface node results directly to the results file, and allow the membrane results to be
directly operated on during squaring operations. The default method of averaging the TOP
and BOT squared values to obtain a MID value can possibly yield incorrect MID values.
Option: Vector Displays
Command(s):
GUI:
PLVECT
MainMenu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot>
Predefined
3. List results:
PRNSOL (nodal results),
PRESOL (element-by-element results),
Command(s): PRRSOL (reaction data),
FSUM,
NFORCE,
PRNLD (nodal element forces sum)
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution
GUI:
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution
MainMenu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution
Note: The summation of the element nodal forces (FSUM, PRNLD, and NFORCE
commands) is done prior to the combination of those forces.
4. Other Capabilities:
Many other postprocessing functions, such as mapping results onto a path, transforming results to
different coordinate systems, and load case combinations, are available in POST1. See The General
Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
The modal solution and spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis
[ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass, with spectrum loads [SV, SVTYP, SED, FREQ].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal
analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
Mechanical APDL Modeling and Meshing Guide
Table of Contents
1. Understanding Model Generation
1.1. What Is Model Generation?
1.2. Typical Steps Involved in Model Generation Within ANSYS
1.2.1. Comparing Solid Modeling and Direct Generation
1.3. Importing Solid Models Created in CAD systems
2. Planning Your Approach
2.1. Choosing a Model Type (2-D, 3-D, etc.)
2.2. Choosing Between Linear and Higher Order Elements
2.2.1. Linear Elements (No Midside Nodes)
2.2.2. Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes)
2.3. Limitations on Joining Different Elements
2.4. Finding Ways to Take Advantage of Symmetry
2.4.1. Some Comments on Axisymmetric Structures
2.5. Determining How Much Detail to Include
2.6. Determining the Appropriate Mesh Density
3. Coordinate Systems
3.1. Global and Local Coordinate Systems
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.1.3.
3.1.4.
3.1.5.
Global Coordinate Systems

Local Coordinate Systems
The Active Coordinate System
Surfaces
Closed Surfaces and Surface Singularities
3.2. Display Coordinate System

3.3. Nodal Coordinate Systems
3.3.1. Data Interpreted in the Nodal Coordinate System
3.4. Element Coordinate Systems
3.5. The Results Coordinate System
4. Using Working Planes
4.1. Creating a Working Plane
4.1.1.
4.1.2.
4.1.3.
4.1.4.
4.1.5.
Defining a New Working Plane

Controlling the Display and Style of the Working Plane
Moving the Working Plane
Rotating the Working Plane
Recreating a Previously-defined Working Plane
4.2. Working Plane Enhancements

4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.2.4.
Snap Increment
Display Grid
Retrieval Tolerance
Coordinate Type
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mod/Hlp_G_ModTOC.html[28/04/2013 07:49:11 p.m.]
4.2.5. Working Plane Tracking

5. Solid Modeling
5.1. An Overview of Solid Modeling Operations
5.2. Creating Your Solid Model from the Bottom Up
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
5.2.4.
5.2.5.
Keypoints
Hard Points
Lines
Areas
Volumes
5.3. Creating Your Solid Model from the Top Down: Primitives
5.3.1. Creating Area Primitives
5.3.2. Creating Volume Primitives
5.4. Sculpting Your Model with Boolean Operations
5.4.1. Boolean Operation Settings
5.4.2. Entity Numbering After Boolean Operations
5.4.3. Intersect
5.4.4. Pairwise Intersect
5.4.5. Add
5.4.6. Subtract
5.4.7. Working Plane Subtract
5.4.8. Classify
5.4.9. Overlap
5.4.10. Partition
5.4.11. Glue (or Merge)
5.4.12. Alternatives to Boolean Operations
5.5. Updating after Boolean Operations
5.6. Moving and Copying Solid Model Entities
5.6.1. Generating Entities from a Pattern
5.6.2. Generating Entities by Symmetry Reflection
5.6.3. Transferring a Pattern of Entities to a Coordinate System
5.7. Scaling Solid Model Entities
5.8. Solid Model Loads
5.8.1.
5.8.2.
5.8.3.
5.8.4.
5.8.5.
Transferring Solid Model Loads

Displaying Load Symbols
Turning Off Large Symbols for Node and Keypoint Locations
Selecting a Format for the Graphical Display of Numbers
Listing Solid Model Loads
5.9. Mass and Inertia Calculations

5.10. Considerations and Cautions for Solid Modeling
5.10.1.
5.10.2.
5.10.3.
5.10.4.
5.10.5.
5.10.6.
Representation of Solid Model Entities

When a Boolean Operation Fails
Graphically Identifying Degeneracies
Listing the Keypoints Associated with Degeneracies
Some Suggested Corrective Actions
Other Hints
6. Importing Solid Models from IGES Files

6.1. Working With IGES Files
6.1.1. Using the SMOOTH Method

7. Generating the Mesh
7.1. Free or Mapped Mesh
7.2. Setting Element Attributes
7.2.1. Creating Tables of Element Attributes
7.2.2. Assigning Element Attributes Before Meshing
7.3. Mesh Controls
7.3.1. The MeshTool
7.3.2. Element Shape
7.3.3. Choosing Free or Mapped Meshing
7.3.4. Controlling Placement of Midside Nodes
7.3.5. Smart Element Sizing for Free Meshing
7.3.6. Default Element Sizes for Mapped Meshing
7.3.7. Local Mesh Controls
7.3.8. Interior Mesh Controls
7.3.9. Creating Transitional Pyramid Elements
7.3.10. Converting Degenerate Tetrahedral Elements to Their Nondegenerate Forms
7.3.11. Doing Layer Meshing
7.3.12. Setting Layer Meshing Controls via the GUI
7.3.13. Setting Layer Meshing Controls via Commands
7.3.14. Listing Layer Mesh Specifications on Lines
7.4. Controls Used for Free and Mapped Meshing
7.4.1. Free Meshing
7.4.2. Mapped Meshing
7.5. Meshing Your Solid Model
7.5.1.
7.5.2.
7.5.3.
7.5.4.
7.5.5.
7.5.6.
7.5.7.
7.5.8.
7.5.9.
Generating the Mesh Using xMESH Commands

Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes
Generating a Volume Mesh From Facets
Additional Considerations for Using xMESH Commands
Generating a Volume Mesh By Sweeping
Generating an Interface Mesh for Gasket Simulations
Aborting a Mesh Operation
Element Shape Checking
Mesh Validity Checking
7.6. Changing the Mesh

7.6.1.
7.6.2.
7.6.3.
7.6.4.
7.6.5.
Remeshing the Model

Using the Mesh Accept/Reject Prompt
Clearing the Mesh
Refining the Mesh Locally
Improving the Mesh (Tetrahedral Element Meshes Only)
7.7. Meshing Hints

7.8. Using CPCYC and MSHCOPY Commands
7.8.1.
7.8.2.
7.8.3.
7.8.4.
7.8.5.
7.8.6.
CPCYC Example
CPCYC Results
MSHCOPY Example
Low Sector Boundary
Area Elements from MSHCOPY and AMESH
Meshing the Sector Volume(s)
8. Revising Your Model

8.1. Refining a Mesh Locally
8.1.1.
8.1.2.
8.1.3.
8.1.4.
8.1.5.
How to Refine a Mesh

Refinement Commands and Menu Paths
Transfer of Attributes and Loads
Other Characteristics of Mesh Refinement
Restrictions on Mesh Refinement
8.2. Moving and Copying Nodes and Elements

8.3. Keeping Track of Element Faces and Orientations
8.3.1. Controlling Area, Line, and Element Normals
8.4. Revising a Meshed Model: Clearing and Deleting
8.4.1. Clearing a Mesh
8.4.2. Deleting Solid Model Entities
8.4.3. Modifying Solid Model Entities
8.5. Understanding Solid Model Cross-Reference Checking
8.5.1. Circumventing Cross-Reference Checking (A Risky Activity)
9. Direct Generation
9.1. Nodes
9.1.1. Reading and Writing Text Files That Contain Nodal Data
9.2. Elements
9.2.1.
9.2.2.
9.2.3.
9.2.4.
9.2.5.
9.2.6.
9.2.7.
Prerequisites for Defining Element Attributes

Defining Elements
Reading and Writing Text Files That Contain Element Data
A Note About Overlapping Elements
Modifying Elements By Changing Nodes
Modifying Elements By Changing Element Attributes
A Note About Adding and Deleting Midside Nodes
10. Number Control and Element Reordering

10.1. Number Control
10.1.1.
10.1.2.
10.1.3.
10.1.4.
Merging Coincident Items

Compressing Item Numbers
Setting Starting Numbers
Adding Number Offsets
10.2. Element Reordering

11. Coupling and Constraint Equations
11.1. What Is Coupling?
11.2. How to Create Coupled Degree of Freedom Sets
11.2.1.
11.2.2.
11.2.3.
11.2.4.
Creating and Modifying Coupled Sets at Specified Nodes

Coupling Coincident Nodes
Generating More Coupled Sets
Listing and Deleting Coupled Sets
11.3. Additional Considerations for Coupling

11.4. What Are Constraint Equations?
11.5. How to Create Constraint Equations
11.5.1.
11.5.2.
11.5.3.
11.5.4.
11.5.5.
11.5.6.
The Direct Method

Modifying Constraint Equations
Direct vs. Automatic Constraint Equation Generation
Listing and Deleting Constraint Equations
Program Modification of Constraint Equations
Troubleshooting Problems with Constraint Equations
11.6. Additional Considerations for Constraint Equations

12. Combining and Archiving Models
12.1. Combining Models
12.2. Archiving Models
12.2.1. Log File ( File.LOG )
12.2.2. Database File ( File.DB)
12.2.3. CDWRITE File(s)
13. Interfaces With Other Programs
13.1. Interfacing With Computer Aided Design (CAD) Products
13.2. Other Interfaces
Chapter 1: Understanding Model Generation
Chapter1:Understanding Model Generation

The ultimate purpose of a finite element analysis is to recreate mathematically the behavior of an actual
engineering system. In other words, the analysis must be an accurate mathematical model of a physical
prototype. In the broadest sense, this model comprises all the nodes, elements, material properties, real
constants, boundary conditions, and other features that are used to represent the physical system.
The following model-generation topics are available:
What Is Model Generation?
Typical Steps Involved in Model Generation Within ANSYS
Importing Solid Models Created in CAD systems
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mod/Hlp_G_MOD1.html[28/04/2013 07:49:17 p.m.]
1.1. What Is Model Generation?
1.1.What Is Model Generation?

In ANSYS terminology, model generation usually takes on the narrower meaning of generating the
nodes and elements that represent the spatial volume and connectivity of the actual system. Thus,
model generation in this discussion means the process of defining the geometric configuration of the
model's nodes and elements. The ANSYS program offers the following approaches to model generation:
Creating a solid model within ANSYS.
Using direct generation.
Importing a model created in a computer-aided design (CAD) system.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mod/Hlp_G_MOD1_1.html[28/04/2013 07:49:22 p.m.]
6.3.Example Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example problem, you determine the seismic response of a beam structure. This problem is the
same as VM70 in the Verification Manual.
A simply supported beam of length , mass per unit length m, and section properties shown in Problem
Specifications, is subjected to a vertical motion of both supports. The motion is defined in terms of a
seismic displacement response spectrum. Determine the nodal displacements, reactions forces, and the
element solutions.
E = 30 x 10 6 psi
m = 0.2 lb-sec2 /in2
I = (1000/3) in4
A = 273.9726 in2
= 240 in
h = 14 in
Figure6.2Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports
Response Spectrum
Frequency, Hz
0.1
10.0
Displacement, in.
0.44
0.44
6.3.4.Procedure
1. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Change Title.
2. Type the text "Seismic Response of a Beam Structure" and click on OK.
6.3.4.2.Define the Element Type

3. Scroll down the list on the left to "Structural Beam" and select it.
4. Click on "2 Node 188" in the list on the right.
6. Click on Options in the Element Types dialog box.
7. Choose Element Behavior K3 : Cubic Form. Click on OK.
6.3.4.3.Define the Cross-Section Area

2. Enter 71.6 for B and 3.82 for H.
3. Click on Close to close the BeamTool dialog box.

3. Enter 30E6 for EX (Young's modulus), 0.30 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and then click on OK.
Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4. Double-click on Density. A dialog box appears.
5. Enter 73E-5 for DENS (density), and click on OK.
6.3.4.5.Define Keypoints and Line

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active
CS. The Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.

3. Click on Apply to accept the default X, Y, Z coordinates of 0,0,0.
5. Enter 240,0,0 for X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
6. Click on Apply.
8. Enter 0,1,0 for X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively.
9. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog
box appears.
11. Click on "keypoint numbers" to turn keypoint numbering on.
12. Click on OK.
13. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines>
Straight Line. A picking menu appears.
14. Click on keypoint 1, and then on keypoint 2. A straight line appears between the two keypoints.
15. Click on OK. The picking menu closes.
6.3.4.6.Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line

1. Choose menu path Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize >
Global > Size. The Global Element Sizes dialog box appears.
2. Enter 8 for the number of element divisions and click on OK. The Global Element Sizes dialog box
closes.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> All Lines. The
Line Attributes dialog box appears.
4. Click on Pick orientation keypoint(s) and click on OK. A picking menu appears.
5. In the graphic window, click once on the keypoint 3 and click on OK.
6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Lines. A picking menu
appears.
7. Click on Pick All. The picking menu closes.
6.3.4.7.Set Boundary Conditions

2. In the graphics window, click once on the node at the left end of the beam.
3. Click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
4. In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it.
5. Click on OK.
6. Repeat steps 1-3 and select the node at the right end of the beam.
7. In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX." Both "UX" and "UY" should be
highlighted.
8. Click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box closes.
Displacement> Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes box dialog appears.
10. 10. In the scroll box for Norml symm surface is normal to, scroll to z-axis and click on OK.
6.3.4.8.Specify Analysis Type and Options

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. The New Analysis
dialog box appears.
2. Click on "Modal" to select it and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Modal
Analysis dialog box appears.
4. Click on "Reduced" as the mode-extraction method [MODOPT].
5. Enter 1 for the number of modes to expand.
6. Click on the Calculate elem. results dialog button [MXPAND] to specify YES.
7. Click on OK. The Modal Analysis dialog box closes, and the Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box
appears.
8. Enter 3 for the No. of modes to print and click on OK. The Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box
closes.
9. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define. The
10. Choose Pick All. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
11. Select UY for the 1st degree of freedom and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box
closes.
6.3.4.9.Solve the Modal Analysis

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. The Solve Current Load Step
dialog box appears, along with a status window.
2. Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
6.3.4.10.Set Up the Spectrum Analysis

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. The New Analysis
dialog box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing the analysis type is only
valid within the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION. This will
reset load step count to 1." Click on CLOSE to close the warning message box.
2. Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point>
Settings. The Settings for Single-point Response Spectrum dialog box appears.
4. Select "Seismic displac" in the scroll box as the type of response spectrum.
5. Enter 0,1,0 for excitation direction into the excitation direction input windows and click on OK.
6.3.4.11.Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table

Freq Table. The Frequency Table dialog box appears.
2. Enter 0.1 for FREQ1, enter 10 for FREQ2, and click on OK.
Spectr Values. The Spectrum Values - Damping Ratio dialog box appears.
4. Click on OK to accept the default of no damping. The Spectrum Values dialog box appears.
5. Enter 0.44 and 0.44 for FREQ1 and FREQ2, respectively.
6. Click on OK. The Spectrum Values dialog box closes.
6.3.4.12.Select Mode Combination Method

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point>
Mode Combine. The Mode Combination Methods dialog box appears.
2. Select SRSS as the mode combination method.
3. Enter 0.15 for the significant threshold.
4. Select displacement for the type of output. Click OK. The Mode Combination Methods dialog box
closes.
6.3.4.13.Solve Spectrum Analysis

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. The Solve Current Load Step
dialog box appears, along with a status window.
2. Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
6.3.4.14.Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and Reaction Solutions

1. Choose menu path Main Menu > General Postproc > Results Summary. The SET Command
listing window appears.
2. Review the information in the listing window, and click on Close. The SET Command listing
window closes.
3. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Read Input From. The Read File dialog box appears.
4. From the left side of the Read File dialog box, select the directory containing your results from the
scroll box.
5. From the right side of the Read File dialog box, select the Jobname.MCOM file from the scroll box.
6. Click on OK. The Read File dialog box closes.
7. Issue a PRNSOL,DOF command.
8. Issue a PRESOLcommand.
9. Issue a PRRSOL,F command.
6.3.4.15.Exit ANSYS
You have completed this example analysis.
6.4. Example Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
6.4.Example Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example spectrum analysis using the ANSYS commands shown below instead of
GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7
/TITLE Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
ET,1,BEAM188
KEYOPT,1,3,3
SECTYPE,1,BEAM,RECT
SECDATA,71.6,3.82
MP,EX,1,30E6
MP,PRXY,1,0.30
MP,DENS,1,73E-5
K,1
K,2,240
K,3,0,1,0
! Define orientation keypointL,1,2
ESIZE,,8
LATT,,,,,,3
! Use orientation keypointLMESH,1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,0
DSYM,SYMM,Z
D,ALL,UY
NSEL,S,LOC,X,240
D,ALL,UX,,,,,UY
NSEL,ALL
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
MODOPT,REDUC,,,,3
MXPAND,1,,,YES
M,ALL,UY
OUTPR,BASIC,1
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT,SPRS
SED,,1
SVTYP,3
FREQ,.1,10
SV,,.44,.44
SRSS,0.15,DISP
! Mode-frequency analysis
! Householder, print first 3 reduced mode shapes
! Expand first mode shape, calculate element stresses
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Spectrum analysis
Single point spectrum
Global Y-axis as spectrum direction
Seismic displacement spectrum
Frequency points for SV vs. freq. table
Spectrum values associated with frequency points
Square Root of Sum of Squares Mode combination
with signif=0.15 and displacement solution requested
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,LIST
/INP,,MCOM
PRNSOL,DOF
PRESOL,ELEM
PRRSOL,F
FINISH
! Print nodal solution

! Print element solution in element format
! Print reaction solution

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional spectrum analyses.
ANSYS program. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the
Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions
and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element experience should
be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data
with accompanying comments.
The Verification Manual includes a variety of spectrum analysis test cases:
VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-Supported Beam
VM68 - PSD Response of a Two DOF Spring-Mass System
VM69 - Seismic Response
VM70 - Seismic Response of a Beam Structure
VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-Supported Thick Square Plate
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, D, EXPASS, MXPAND,
SPOPT, SVTYP, SED, FREQ, SV, SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM, ROSE, MMASS, RIGRESP
and DMPRAT commands.
6.6.Performing a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis

The procedure for a PSD analysis consists of six main steps:
1. Build the model.
3. Obtain the spectrum solution.
4. Combine the modes.
Of these, the first two steps are the same as described for a single-point response spectrum analysis.
The procedure for the remaining three steps is explained below. Random vibration analysis is not
available in the ANSYS Professional program.
6.6.1.Obtain the PSD Solution

To obtain the PSD spectrum solution, the database must contain the model data as well as the modal
solution data. If you leave ANSYS after running the modal analysis, you must save the database. In
addition, the following files from the modal solution must be available: Jobname.MODE, .ESAV , .EMAT ,
.FULL (only for Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, and Supernode methods), .RST .
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options:

For spectrum type [SPOPT], choose Power Spectral Density (PSD).
If you are interested in element results and reaction forces, specify YES for Elcalc on the
SPOPT command. Element results and reaction forces caused by the spectrum are calculated
only if they were also requested during the modal expansion pass. Note that you must have
asked for element results during the modal analysis as well (MXPAND)
3. Specify load step options. The following options are available for a random vibration analysis:
Spectrum Data
Type of PSD
Command(s):
GUI:
PSDUNIT
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD>
Settings
The PSD type can be displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration. Whether it
is a base excitation or a nodal excitation is specified in Steps 4 and 5. If a pressure PSD
is to be applied, the pressures should be applied in the modal analysis itself.
PSD-versus-frequency table
Define a piecewise-linear (in log-log scale) PSD versus frequency table. Since a curvefitting polynomial is used for the closed-form integration of the curve, you should graph
the input, which is overlaid with the fitted curve to ensure a good fit. If the fit is not
good, you should add one or more intermediate points to the table until you obtain a
good fit. For a good fit, the PSD values between consecutive points should not change
by more than an order of magnitude.
Command(s): PSDFRQ,
PSDVAL,
PSDGRAPH
PSD
vs Freq
GUI:
Graph PSD Tables
PSDFRQ and PSDVAL are used to define the PSD-versus-frequency table. Step 6
describes how to apply additional PSD excitations (if any).
You can issue STAT to list PSD tables and issue PSDGRAPH to graph them.
The following forms of damping are available: ALPHAD, BETAD, and MDAMP result in a
frequency-dependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to
be used at all frequencies. If you specify more than one form of damping, ANSYS calculates
an effective damping ratio at each frequency.
Note: If no damping is specified in a PSD analysis, a default DMPRAT of 1
percent is used.
Note: Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but only
if specified in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a materialdependent constant damping ratio (and not material-dependent beta
damping, as used in other analyses).
Alpha (Mass) Damping
Command(s):
GUI:
ALPHAD
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Damping
Beta (Stiffness) Damping

Command(s):
GUI:
BETAD
Damping

Command(s):
GUI:
DMPRAT
Damping
Frequency-Dependent Damping Ratio

Command(s):
GUI:
MDAMP
Damping
The remaining steps are specific to a random vibration analysis:

4. Apply the PSD excitation.
For base excitation, use the UX, UY, UZ labels and the ROTX , ROTY , ROTZ labels on the D (or
DK, or DL, or DA) command. A value of 0.0 (or blank) can be used to remove a
specification. Values other than 1.0 scale the participation factors.
For uniform base motion using the SED command, specify SEDX , SEDY , or SEDZ . A value of 0.0
(or blank) removes a specification.
For nodal excitation, use the FX, FY, FZ labels on the F (or FK) command. A value of 0.0 (or
blank) can be used to remove a specification. Values other than 1.0 scale the participation
factors.
For pressure PSD excitation (where the pressure distribution was provided in the modal
analysis), bring in the load vector from the modal analysis (LVSCALE). You can use the scale
factor to scale the participation factors.
Note: You can apply base excitations only at nodes that were constrained in the
modal analysis. If you applied the constraints using solid model constraints
(DK), you must use the same solid model commands in defining the PSD
excitation. Any loads applied during the preceding modal analysis must be
removed by deleting or zeroing them.
D (or
DK, or
DL, or
Command(s): DA) or
SED for base excitation
F (or
FK) for nodal excitation
LVSCALE for pressure PSD
MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Spectrum>
GUI:
Base PSD Excit> On Nodes
5. Begin participation factor calculations for the above PSD excitation.
Use the TBLNO field to indicate which PSD table to use, and Excit to specify whether the
calculations are for a base or nodal excitation.
Command(s):
GUI:
PFACT
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calculate PF
6. If you need to apply multiple PSD excitations on the same model, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each
additional PSD table. Then define, as necessary, the degree of correlation between the excitations,
using any of the following commands:
COVAL for cospectral values,
Command(s): QDVAL for quadspectral values,
PSDSPL for a spatial relationship,
PSDWAV for a wave propagation relationship,

PSDGRAPH to graph the data overlaid with the fitted curve
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Correlation
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph Tables
GUI:
When you use the PSDSPL or PSDWAV command, you must use SPATIAL or WAVE, respectively,
for Parcor on the PFACT command. PSDSPL and PSDWAV relationships might be quite CPU
intensive for multi-point base excitations. Nodal excitation and base excitation input must be
consistent when using PSDWAV and PSDSPL (for example, FY cannot be applied to one node
and FZ be applied to another). The PSDSPL and PSDWAV commands are not available for a
pressure PSD analysis.
7. Specify the output controls.
The only valid output control command for this analysis is PSDRES, which specifies the amount
and form of output written to the results file. Up to three sets of solution quantities can be
calculated: displacement solution, velocity solution, or acceleration solution. Each of these can be
relative to the base or absolute.
Command(s):
GUI:
PSDRES
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calc Controls
Table6.4:Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis shows a summary of the possible solution
sets. To limit the amount of data written to the results file, use OUTRES at the mode expansion
step.
Table6.4Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis
Solution
Displacement Solution (label
DISP on PSDRES)
Velocity Solution (label VELO on
PSDRES)
Acceleration Solution (label
ACEL on PSDRES)
Items
Displacements, stresses,
strains, forces
Velocities, stress velocities,
force velocities, etc.
Accelerations, stress accl's,
force accl's, etc.
Form
Relative, absolute, or
neither
neither
neither

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE

Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
6.6.2.Combine the Modes

The modes can be combined in a separate solution phase. A maximum of 10000 modes can be
combined. The procedure is as follows:
1. Enter Solution.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define analysis type.

3. Only the PSD mode combination method is valid in a random vibration analysis. This method
triggers calculation of the one-sigma (1 , the standard deviation of the response, see Review the
Results below) displacements, stresses, etc., in the structure. If you do not issue the PSDCOM
command, the program does not calculate the one-sigma response of the structure.
Command(s):
GUI:
PSDCOM
MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Mode
Combin
The SIGNIF and COMODE fields on the PSD mode combination method [PSDCOM] offer options to
reduce the number of modes to be combined (see the description of PSDCOM command). If you
want to exercise these options, it is prudent to print the modal covariance matrices in Obtain the
PSD Solution to first investigate the relative contributions of the modes toward the final solution.
4. Start the solution.
Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE

Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
Note: You can run multiple PSD analyses without performing the modal analysis each
time. To do so, you must activate modReuseKey on the SPOPT command after the
first PSD analysis and for each subsequent one so that the database and necessary
files are ready for the new analysis.

Results from a random vibration analysis are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They
consist of the following quantities:
1. Expanded mode shapes from the modal analysis
2. Static solution for base excitation [PFACT,,BASE]
3. The following output, if mode combinations are requested [PSDCOM] and based on the PSDRES
setting:
1 displacement solution (displacements, stresses, strains, and forces)

1 velocity solution (velocities, stress velocities, strain velocities, and force velocities)
1 acceleration solution (accelerations, stress accelerations, strain accelerations, and force
accelerations)
1 is the standard deviation of the response; that is, for any output value the expectation is that this
value will not be exceeded 68.3% of the time.
Note: Only component displacement, force, stress, and strain values are 1 values and
follow a Gaussian or normal distribution. Combined values (e.g. USUM, SI, SEQV,
S1, etc.), or component values transformed into another coordinate system are not
statistically meaningful, and they should be avoided. The exception is the SEQV
value, for which a special algorithm is used to compute its value, such that
multiplying it by 3 (the "3 " rule) yields a good approximation to its upper bound,
see Equivalent Stress Mean Square Response in the Theory Reference for the
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, and then calculate response PSDs in
POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Note: Postprocessing operations read your data from the results file. Only the solution
data you SAVE will be available if you resume the database after a SOLVE.
6.6.3.1.Reviewing the Results in POST1

To review results in POST1, you first need to understand how the results data are organized on the
results file. Table6.5:Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis shows the organization.
Note: Load step 2 is left blank if you specify only nodal PSD excitation. Also, if you
suppress the displacement, velocity, or acceleration solution using the PSDRES
command, the corresponding load step is left blank. Also, the superelement
displacement file ( .DSUB ) is not written for load steps 3, 4, or 5 in a PSD analysis.
Table6.5Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis
Load Step
Substep
1
2
3
Etc.
1
2
Etc.
1
1
1
2 (Base excit.
only)
3
4
5
Contents
Expanded modal solution for 1st mode
Expanded modal solution for 2nd mode
Expanded modal solution for 3rd mode
Etc.
Unit static solution for PSD table 1
Unit static solution for PSD table 2
Etc.
1 sigma displacement solution
1 sigma velocity solution (if requested)
1 sigma acceleration solution (if requested)
6.6.3.1.1.Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database
For example, to read in the 1 displacement solution, issue the command:

SET,3,1
You may use Fact on the SET command to multiply the result values to obtain, for example, the 2
values using Fact=2 (the response will be less than these 2 values 95.4% of the time), or use Fact=3
for the 3 values (99.7% of the time).
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
MainMenu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set
6.6.3.1.2.Display the Results

Use the same options available for the SPRS analysis.
Note: Nodal averaging performed by the PLNSOL command may not be appropriate in a
random vibration analysis because the result values are not actual values but
standard deviations. Instead, consider using the PLESOL command to display
unaveraged element results.
Note: Displacements, stresses, and strains are always in the solution nodal or element
coordinate system (RSYS,SOLU).
6.6.3.2.Calculating Response PSDs in POST26

You can calculate and display response PSDs for any results quantity available on the results file
(displacements, velocities, and/or accelerations) if the Jobname.RST and Jobname.PSD files are available. If
you are postprocessing in a new session, the Jobname.DB file corresponding to the PSD analysis solve
must be available for resume.
The procedure to calculate the response PSD is as follows:
1. Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST26
MainMenu> TimeHist PostPro
2. Store the frequency vector. NPTS is the number of frequency points to be added on either side of
natural frequencies in order to "smooth" the frequency vector (defaults to 5). The frequency vector
is stored as variable 1.
Command(s):
GUI:
STORE,PSD, NPTS
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Store Data
3. Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces,
etc.) are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL,
ESOL, and/or
RFORCE
GUI:
4. Calculate the response PSD and store it in the desired variable. The PLVAR command can then be
used to plot the response PSD.
Command(s):
GUI:
RPSD
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Resp PSD
5. You can integrate the response PSD to obtain the variance and take its square root to obtain its 1
value. For example:
RPSD,4,3,,3,2
! variable 4 is the relative accel RPSD of
INT1,5,4,1
*GET,VARIANCE,VARI,5,EXTREME,VLAST
STDDEV=SQRT(VARIANCE)
! variable 5 is the integral of the RPSD

! get the integral value
! convert to standard deviation (1-sigma)
var 3
Note: This value will correspond to the POST1 1 values. POST26, however, sums
all the modes for the response PSD whereas POST1 only sums the significant
modes. You may use this comparison to verify that the significance factor on
the PSDCOM command is small enough and that the curve fitting for the
input PSD curve was adequate.
6.6.3.3.Calculating Covariance in POST26

You can compute the covariance between two quantities available on the results file (displacements,
velocities, and/or accelerations), if the Jobname.RST and Jobname.PSD files are available.
The procedure to calculate the covariance between two quantities is as follows:
1. Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST26
MainMenu> TimeHist PostPro
2. Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces,
etc.) are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL,
ESOL, and/or
RFORCE
GUI:
3. Calculate the contributions of each response component (relative or absolute response) and store
them in the desired variable. The PLVAR command can then be used to plot the modal
contributions (relative response) followed by the contributions of pseudo-static and mixed part
responses to the total covariance.
Command(s):
GUI:
CVAR
MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Covariance
4. Obtain the covariance.

Command(s):
*GET,NameVARI,n,EXTREM,CVAR
GUI:
UtilityMenu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data
6.6.4.Sample Input
A sample input listing for a random vibration (PSD) analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model
/FILNAM,
/TITLE,
/PREP7
...
...
...
FINISH
!
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
MODOPT,LANB
MXPAND,...
D,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Obtain the Spectrum Solution
/SOLU! Reenter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT,PSD,...
PSDUNIT,...
PSDFRQ,...
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model
!
!
!
!
!
Enter SOLUTION
Modal analysis
Block Lanczos method
Number of modes to expand, ...
Constraints
! Initiates solution
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Spectrum analysis
Power Spectral Density; No. of modes;
Stress calcs. on/off
Type of spectrum
Frequency pts. (for spectrum values vs.
frequency tables)
Spectrum values
Damping ratio
Base excitation
Calculate participation factors
Output controls
PSDVAL,...
DMPRAT,...
D,0
PFACT,...
PSDRES,...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Combine modes using PSD method
/SOLU
! Re-enter SOLUTION
ANTYPE,SPECTR
! Spectrum analysis
PSDCOM,SIGNIF,COMODE
! PSD mode combinations with significance factor and
!
option for selecting a subset of modes for
!
combination
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Review the Results
/POST1
! Enter POST1
SET,...
! Read results from appropriate load step, substep
...! Postprocess as desired
...! (PLDISP; PLNSOL; NSORT; PRNSOL; etc.)
...
FINISH
!
! Calculate Response PSD
/POST26
! Enter POST26
STORE,PSD
! Store frequency vector (variable 1)
NSOL,2,...
! Define variable 2 (nodal data)
RPSD,3,2,,...
! Calculate response PSD (variable 3)
PLVAR,3
! Plot the response PSD
...
! Calculate Covariance
RESET
! Reset all POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
NSOL,2
! Define variable 2 (nodal data).
NSOL,3
! Define variable 3 (nodal data).
CVAR,4,2,3,1,1
! Calculate covariance between displacement
!
at nodes 2 and 3.
*GET,CVAR23U,VARI,4,EXREME,CVAR ! Obtain covariance.
FINISH
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, D, MXPAND, SPOPT,
PSDUNIT, PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, DMPRAT, PFACT, PSDCOM, SUMTYPE, and PSDRES commands.
6.7. Performing a DDAM Spectrum Analysis
6.7.Performing a DDAM Spectrum Analysis

The procedure for a DDAM spectrum analysis is the same as that for a single-point response spectrum
(SPRS) analysis (including file requirements), with the following exceptions:
Use the U. S. Customary system of units [ inches (not feet ), pounds , etc.] for all input data - model
geometry, material properties, element real constants, etc.
Choose DDAM instead of SPRS as the spectrum type [SPOPT command].
Use the ADDAM and VDDAM commands instead of SVTYP, SV, and FREQ to specify the
spectrum values and types. Specify the global direction of excitation using the SED command.
Based on the coefficients specified in the ADDAM and VDDAM commands, the program computes
the mode coefficients according to the empirical equations given in the Theory Reference for the
The most applicable mode combination method is the NRL sum method [NRLSUM]. Mode
combinations are done in the same manner as for a single-point response spectrum. Mode
combinations require damping.
No damping needs to be specified for solution because it is implied by the ADDAM and VDDAM
commands. If damping is specified, it is used for mode combinations but ignored for solution.
Note: As in the Single-point Response Spectrum analysis, DDAM spectrum analysis
requires six steps to systematically perform the analysis.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
The modal solution and DDAM spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal
analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass with DDAM spectrum loads [ADDAM, VDDAM, SED].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal
analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
DDAM spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
6.8.Performing a Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis

The procedure for a MPRS analysis consists of six steps:
1. Build the model.
3. Obtain the spectrum solution.
4. Combine the modes.
The first two steps for an MPRS analysis are the same as the steps described for a modal analysis. The
procedure for the remaining three steps is explained below.
Note: MPRS analysis is not available in ANSYS Professional.
6.8.1.Step 4: Obtain the Spectrum Solution

To obtain the MPRS spectrum solution, the database must contain the model data as well as the modal
solution data. If you exit ANSYS after running the modal analysis, you must save the database.
Additionally, the following files from the modal solution must be available: Jobname.MODE, .ESAV , .EMAT ,
.FULL (only for Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, and Supernode methods), and .RST .
1. Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
MainMenu> Solution
2. Define the analysis type and analysis options. For spectrum type (SPOPT), choose Multi-Point
Response Spectrum (MPRS).
3. Specify the damping (Dynamics Options).
The following forms of damping are available: BETADand MDAMP. These commands result in a
frequency-dependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be
used at all frequencies. If you specify more than one form of damping, ANSYS calculates an
effective damping ratio at each frequency.
Note: Material-dependent damping ratio (MP,DAMP) is also available, but only if
specified in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a material-dependent
constant damping ratio (and not material-dependent beta damping, as used
in other analyses).
Beta (Stiffness) Damping
Command(s):
GUI:
BETAD
Command(s):
GUI:
DMPRAT
Frequency-Dependent Damping Ratio

Command(s):
GUI:
MDAMP
4. Specify load step options. The following options are available:

Spectrum Data
Type of input spectrum
Command(s):
GUI:
SPUNIT
This command can not be accessed from a menu.
The input spectrum type can be displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration.
The type of excitation (base excitation or a nodal excitation) is specified in steps 4 and
5 of this procedure. If a pressure spectrum is to be applied, the pressures should be
applied in the modal analysis.
Spectrum value-versus-frequency table
Define the points of each spectrum curve. You can define a family of spectrum curves; each
curve is associated with a damping ratio.
SPFREQ,
Command(s): SPVAL,
SPDAMP,
SPGRAPH
GUI:
These commands can not be accessed from a menu.
You can issue STAT to list the tables and SPGRAPH to display them.
Missing mass and rigid responses
Missing Mass Effect [MMASS]
The missing mass effect reduces the error caused when the higher modes are neglected in
the analysis.
Rigid Responses Effect [RIGRESP]
If rigid responses are included, the combination of modal responses with frequencies in the
higher end of the spectrum frequency range will be more accurate.
5. Apply the excitation.
For base excitation, use the UX, UY, UZ and the ROTX , ROTY , ROTZ labels on the D (or DK, or
DL, or DA) command. A value of 0.0 (or blank) removes a specification. Values other than
1.0 scale the participation factors.
For uniform base motion using the SED command, specify SEDX , SEDY , or SEDZ . A value of 0.0
(or blank) removes a specification.
For nodal excitation, use the FX, FY, FZ on the F (or FK) command. A value of 0.0 (or blank)
removes a specification. Values other than 1.0 scale the participation factors.
For pressure excitation (where the pressure distribution was provided in the modal analysis),
bring in the load vector from the modal analysis (LVSCALE). You can use the scale factor to
scale the participation factors.
Note: You can apply base excitations only at nodes that were constrained in
the modal analysis. If you applied the constraints using solid model
constraints (DK), you must use the same solid model commands in
defining the MPRS excitation. Any loads applied during the preceding
modal analysis must be removed by deleting or zeroing them.
D (or
DK, or,
DL, or
Command(s): DA), or
SED for base excitation
F (or
FK) for nodal excitation
LVSCALE for pressure excitation
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
GUI:
Spectrum> Base PSD Excit> On Nodes
6. Begin participation factor calculations for the above MPRS excitation.
Use the TBLNO field to indicate which spectrum table to use, and Excit to specify whether the
calculations are for a base or nodal excitation.
Command(s):
GUI:
PFACT
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calculate PF
If you need to apply multiple MPRS excitations on the same model, repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 above
for each additional spectrum table.
6.8.2.Step 5: Combine the Modes

This step is the same as step 5 described in Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis Process;
however, the absolute sum method (AbsSumKey=yes on the SRSS command) acts as an additional
combination method.
Note: You can run multiple MPRS analyses without performing the modal analysis each
time. To do so, you must activate the modReuseKey on the SPOPT command after
the first MPRS analysis and for each subsequent one so that the database as well
as the necessary files are ready for the new analysis.
6.8.3.Step 6: Review the Results

This step is the same as step 6 described in Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis Process.
Intermediate results from a MPRS analysis are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They
consist of the following quantities:
1. Expanded mode shapes from the modal analysis (loadstep 1)
2. Static solutions for base excitation (PFACT,,BASE) (loadstep 2)
3. Missing mass responses if requested (MMASS) (loadstep 3)

6.9.Example Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis

(Command or Batch Method)
In this example problem, you determine the seismic response of a three-beam frame using ANSYS
commands.
A three-beam frame is subjected to vertical motion of both supports. The motion is defined in terms of
seismic acceleration response spectra. A multi-point response spectrum analysis is performed to
determine the nodal displacements.
Youngs modulus = 1e7 psi
Density = 3e-4 lb/in 3
Cross-sectional area = .1 in2
Area moment of inertia = .001 in4
Beam height = .1 in
Beam length = 100 in
Figure6.3Three-Beam Frame
6.9.4.Command Listing
Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/prep7
/title, MPRS of 3 beam frame
et,1,3
r,1,.1,.001,.1
mp,ex,1,1e7
mp,nuxy,1,.3
mp,dens,1,.0003
k,1
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/spectrum_multipoint.html[28/04/2013 07:53:16 p.m.]
k,2,
,100
k,3,100,100
k,4,100
l,1,2
l,2,3
l,3,4
esize,,10
lmesh,all
d,node(0,0,0),all
d,node(100,0,0),all
fini
/solu
antype,modal
modop,lanb,2
mxpand,2
solve
fini
! Lanczos eigensolver, request 2 modes

! Expand 2 modes
/solu
antype,spectrum ! Spectrum analysis
spopt,mprs
! Multi-point response (use all extracted modes by default)
! Spectrum #1
spunit,1,accg
! Define the type of 1st spectrum (acceleration)
spfreq,1,1.0,100.0
! Define the frequency range [1,100]Hz of 1st spectrum
spval,1,,1.0,1.0
! Define acceleration values of 1st spectrum
d,node(0,0,0),uy,1.0
! Define constraint
pfact,1
! Calculate participation factors of 1st spectrum
! (base excitation by default)
! Spectrum #2
spunit,2,accg
! Define the type of 2nd spectrum (acceleration)
spfreq,2,1.0,100.0
! Define the frequency range [1,100]Hz of 2nd spectrum
spval,2,,0.8,0.8
! Define acceleration values of 2nd spectrum
d,node(0,0,0),uy,0
! Remove previous constraint
d,node(100,0,0),uy,1.0 ! Define new constraint
pfact,2
! Calculate participation factors of 2nd spectrum
! (base excitation by default)
srss
! Combine using SRSS (displacement solution by default)
solve
fini
/post1
/inp,,mcom
prns,u,y
finish
! Input the mode combination file to perform the

! combination of displacement solutions
! Printout displacement uy
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/spectrum_multipoint.html[28/04/2013 07:53:16 p.m.]
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis
Chapter7:Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis is a technique used to determine buckling loads (critical loads at which a structure
becomes unstable) and buckled mode shapes (the characteristic shape associated with a structure's
buckled response).
The following buckling analysis topics are available:
Types of Buckling Analyses
Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis
Performing a Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
Performing a Post-Buckling Analysis
Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
7.2. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis
7.2.Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a buckling analysis that you use to do
any other type of finite element analysis. Likewise, you choose similar options from the graphical user
interface (GUI) to build and solve models no matter what type of analysis you are doing.
Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) and Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method) show
you how to perform an example eigenvalue buckling analysis via the GUI or via commands, respectively.
For detailed, alphabetized descriptions of the ANSYS commands, see the Command Reference.
7.6.Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will analyze the buckling of a bar with hinged ends.
Determine the critical buckling load of an axially loaded long slender bar of length with hinged ends.
The bar has a cross-sectional height h, and area A. Only the upper half of the bar is modeled because of
symmetry. The boundary conditions become free-fixed for the half-symmetry model. The moment of
inertia of the bar is calculated as I = Ah 2 /12 = 0.0052083 in4 .
The model is assumed to act only in the X-Y plane.
The following material properties are used:
E = 30 x 10 6 psi
The following geometric properties are used:
= 200 in
A = 0.25 in2
h = 0.5 in
Loading is a follows:
F = 1 lb.
Figure7.3Bar with Hinged Ends
After you enter the ANSYS program, follow these steps to set the title.
2. Enter the text "Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends" and click on OK.
7.6.3.2.Define the Element Type

In this step, you define BEAM188 as the element type.
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The
3. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
4. In the scroll box on the right, click on "2 Node 188" to select it.
6. Click on Options in the Element Types dialog box.
7. Choose Element Behavior K3 : Cubic Form. Click on OK.
7.6.3.3.Define the Real Constants and Material Properties

2. Enter .5 for B and .5 for H.
3. Click on OK.
6. Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the
Material Models Defined window on the left.
7.6.3.4.Define Nodes and Elements

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.
The Create Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
3. Click on Apply. Node location defaults to 0,0,0.
5. Enter 0,100,0 for the X, Y, Z coordinates.
6. Click on OK. The two nodes appear in the ANSYS Graphics window.
Note: The triad, by default, hides the node number for node 1. To turn the triad off,
choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls>
Window Options and select the "Not Shown" option for Location of triad.
Then click OK to close the dialog box.
7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between
Nds. The Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
8. Click on node 1, then 11, and click on OK. The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
9. Click on OK to accept the settings (fill between nodes 1 and 11, and number of nodes to fill 9).
11. Click on nodes 1 and 2, then click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Copy> Elements> Auto
Numbered. The Copy Elems Auto-Num picking menu appears.
13. Click on Pick All. The Copy Elements (Automatically-Numbered) dialog box appears.
14. Enter 10 for total number of copies and enter 1 for node number increment.
15. Click on OK. The remaining elements appear in the ANSYS Graphics window.
7.6.3.5.Define the Boundary Conditions

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> New
Analysis. The New Analysis dialog box appears.
2. Click OK to accept the default of "Static."
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Static or
Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
4. In the scroll box for stress stiffness or prestress, scroll to "Prestress ON" to select it.
5. Click on OK.
7. Click on node 1 in the ANSYS Graphics window, then click on OK in the picking menu. The Apply
U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
8. Click on "UY" and ROTZ to select them, and click on OK.
Displacements> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
10. Click on node 11 in the ANSYS Graphics window, then click on OK in the picking menu. The Apply
U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
11. Click on "UX" to select it, and click on OK.
13. Click on node 11, then click OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
14. In the scroll box for Direction of force/mom, scroll to "FY" to select it.
15. Enter -1 for the force/moment value, and click on OK. The force symbol appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window.
Displacement> Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes box dialog appears.
17. In the scroll box for Norml symm surface is normal to, scroll to z-axis and click on OK.
7.6.3.6.Solve the Static Analysis

2. Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
3. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4. Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.7.Solve the Buckling Analysis

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
Note: Click on Close in the Warning window if the following warning appears:
Changing the analysis type is only valid within the first load step. Pressing OK
will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION. This will reset the load step
count to 1.
2. In the New Analysis dialog box, click the "Eigen Buckling" option on, then click on OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The
Eigenvalue Buckling Options dialog box appears.
4. Enter 1 for number of modes to extract.
5. Click on OK.
6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> Expand Modes.
7. Enter 1 for number of modes to expand, and click on OK.
9. Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
10. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
11. Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.8.Review the Results

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.

3. Click the "Def + undeformed" option on. Click on OK. The deformed and undeformed shapes
appear in the ANSYS graphics window.
7.6.3.9.Exit ANSYS
7.3.Performing a Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

A nonlinear buckling analysis is a static analysis with large deflection active (NLGEOM,ON), extended to
a point where the structure reaches its limit load or maximum load. Other nonlinearities such as
plasticity may be included in the analysis. The procedure for a static analysis is described in Structural
Static Analysis , and nonlinearities are described in Nonlinear Structural Analysis .
7.3.1.Applying Load Increments

The basic approach in a nonlinear buckling analysis is to constantly increment the applied loads until the
solution begins to diverge. Be sure to use a sufficiently fine load increment as your loads approach the
expected critical buckling load. If the load increment is too coarse, the buckling load predicted may not
be accurate. Turn on bisection and automatic time stepping (AUTOTS,ON) to help avoid this problem.

With automatic time stepping on, the program automatically seeks out the buckling load. If automatic
time stepping is ON in a static analysis having ramped loading and the solution does not converge at a
given load, the program bisects the load step increment and attempts a new solution at a smaller load.
In a buckling analysis, each such convergence failure is typically accompanied by a "negative pivot"
message indicating that the attempted load equals or exceeds the buckling load. You can usually ignore
these messages if the program successfully obtains a converged solution at the next, reduced load. If
stress stiffness is active (SSTIF,ON), you should run without adaptive descent active
(NROPT,FULL,,OFF) to ensure that a lower bound to the buckling load is attained. The program
normally converges to the limiting load as the process of bisection and resolution continues to the point
at which the minimum time step increment (specified by DELTIM or NSUBST) is achieved. The
minimum time step will directly affect the precision of your results.
7.3.3.Unconverged Solution
An unconverged solution does not necessarily mean that the structure has reached its maximum load. It
could also be caused by numerical instability, which might be corrected by refining your modeling
technique. Track the load-deflection history of your structure's response to decide whether an
unconverged load step represents actual structural buckling, or whether it reflects some other problem.
Perform a preliminary analysis using the arc-length method (ARCLEN) to predict an approximate value
of buckling load. Compare this approximate value to the more precise value calculated using bisection to
help determine if the structure has indeed reached its maximum load. You can also use the arc-length
method itself to obtain a precise buckling load, but this method requires you to adjust the arc-length
radius by trial-and-error in a series of manually directed reanalyses.
7.3.4.Hints and Tips for Performing a Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

If the loading on the structure is perfectly in-plane (that is, membrane or axial stresses only), the outof-plane deflections necessary to initiate buckling will not develop, and the analysis will fail to predict
buckling behavior. To overcome this problem, apply a small out-of-plane perturbation, such as a modest
temporary force or specified displacement, to begin the buckling response. (A preliminary eigenvalue
buckling analysis of your structure may be useful as a predictor of the buckling mode shape, allowing
you to choose appropriate locations for applying perturbations to stimulate the desired buckling
response.) The imperfection (perturbation) induced should match the location and size of that in the real
structure. The failure load is very sensitive to these parameters.
Consider these additional hints and tips as you perform a nonlinear buckling analysis:
Forces (and displacements) maintain their original orientation, but surface loads will "follow" the
changing geometry of the structure as it deflects. Therefore, be sure to apply the proper type of
loads.
Carry your stability analysis through to the point of identifying the critical load in order to calculate
the structure's factor of safety with respect to nonlinear buckling. Merely establishing the fact that
a structure is stable at a given load level is generally insufficient for most design practice; you will
usually be required to provide a specified safety factor, which can only be determined by
establishing the actual limit load.
For those elements that support the consistent tangent stiffness matrix, activate the consistent
tangent stiffness matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1 and NLGEOM,ON) to enhance the convergence behavior
of your nonlinear buckling analyses and improve the accuracy of your results. This element
KEYOPT must be defined before the first load step of the solution and cannot be changed once the
solution has started.
Many other elements (such as BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL181, REINF264, SHELL281, and
ELBOW290) provide consistent tangent stiffness matrix with NLGEOM,ON.
7.4. Performing a Post-Buckling Analysis
7.4.Performing a Post-Buckling Analysis

A post-buckling analysis is a continuation of a nonlinear buckling analysis. After a load reaches its
buckling value, the load value may remain unchanged or it may decrease, while the deformation
continues to increase. For some problems, after a certain amount of deformation, the structure may
start to take more loading to keep deformation increasing, and a second buckling can occur. The cycle
may even repeat several times.
Because the post-buckling stage is unstable, special techniques must be used. Nonlinear stabilization can
help with local and global buckling, and the arc-length method is useful for global buckling. For more
information, see Unstable Structures.
Nonlinear stabilization analysis is more straightforward for a post-buckling analysis. Because the buckling
load is unknown at the beginning of an analysis, you can do perform a nonlinear analysis as usual using
automatic time stepping. When the buckling load is reached or a convergence problem occurs, you can
activate stabilization during a multiframe restart and continue the analysis. If the deformation becomes
stable later, you can deactivate stabilization until the next buckling occurs.
If only local buckling exists, the total load could still increase when buckling occurs because the total
loading is distributed differently. For these cases, nonlinear stabilization is the only applicable technique.
Because nonlinear stabilization cannot detect the negative slope of a load-vs.-displacement curve, it may
yield less accurate results for history-dependent materials, and the maximum loads (buckling loads) may
not be obvious. For such cases, use the arc-length method.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strpostbuck.html[28/04/2013 07:55:06 p.m.]
7.5.Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Again, remember that eigenvalue buckling analysis generally yields unconservative results, and should
usually not be used for design of actual structures. If you decide that eigenvalue buckling analysis is
appropriate for your application, follow this procedure:
1. Build the model.
2. Obtain the static solution.
3. Obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution.

Guide.
Only linear behavior is valid. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as linear. If you include
contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status in the
beginning of the static prestress run and are never changed.
Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) must be defined. Material properties may be
linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if
any, are ignored.
7.5.2.Obtain the Static Solution

The procedure to obtain a static solution is the same as described in Structural Static Analysis , with the
following exceptions:
Prestress effects (PSTRES) must be activated. Eigenvalue buckling analysis requires the stress
stiffness matrix to be calculated.
Unit loads are usually sufficient (that is, actual load values need not be specified). The eigenvalues
calculated by the buckling analysis represent buckling load factors. Therefore, if a unit load is
specified, the load factors represent the buckling loads. All loads are scaled. (Also, the maximum
permissible eigenvalue is 1,000,000 - you must use larger applied loads if your eigenvalue exceeds
this limit.)
It is possible that different buckling loads may be predicted from seemingly equivalent pressure
and force loads in a eigenvalue buckling analysis. The difference can be attributed to the fact that
pressure is considered as a follower load. The force on the surface depends on the prescribed
pressure magnitude and also on the surface orientation. Forces are not considered as follower
loads. As with any numerical analysis, it is recommended to use the type of loading which best
models the in-service component. See Pressure Load Stiffness of the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details.
Note that eigenvalues represent scaling factors for all loads. If certain loads are constant (for
example, self-weight gravity loads) while other loads are variable (for example, externally applied
loads), you need to ensure that the stress stiffness matrix from the constant loads is not factored
by the eigenvalue solution.
One strategy that you can use to achieve this end is to iterate on the eigensolution, adjusting the
variable loads until the eigenvalue becomes 1.0 (or nearly 1.0, within some convergence
tolerance). Design optimization could be useful in driving this iterative procedure to a final answer.
Consider, for example, a pole having a self-weight W 0 , which supports an externally-applied load,
A. To determine the limiting value of A in an eigenvalue buckling solution, you could solve
repetitively, using different values of A, until by iteration you find an eigenvalue acceptably close to
1.0.
Figure7.2Adjusting Variable Loads to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0
You can apply a nonzero constraint in the prestressing pass as the static load. The eigenvalues
found in the buckling solution will be the load factors applied to these nonzero constraint values.
However, the mode shapes will have a zero value at these degrees of freedom (and not the
nonzero value specified).
At the end of the solution, leave SOLUTION (FINISH).
7.5.3.Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution

This step requires file Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis. Also, the database must contain the model
data (issue RESUME if necessary). Follow the steps below to obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution.
Command(s):
GUI:
/SOLU
Main Menu> Solution
2. Specify the analysis type.

Command(s):
GUI:
ANTYPE,BUCKLE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
Note: Restarts are not valid in an eigenvalue buckling analysis.

Note: When you specify an eigenvalue buckling analysis, a Solution menu that is
appropriate for buckling analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either
"abridged" or "unabridged", depending on the actions you took prior to this
step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution
options that are valid and/or recommended for buckling analyses. If you are
on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution
options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use
may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged
Menu option from the Solution menu. For details, see Using Abridged
Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide .
3. Specify analysis options.

Command(s):
GUI:
BUCOPT, Method, NMODE , SHIFT , LDMULTE

Regardless of whether you use the command or GUI method, you can specify values for these
options:
For Method, specify the eigenvalue extraction method. The method available for buckling is
Block Lanczos. The Block Lanczos method uses the full system matrices. See Option: ModeExtraction Method (MODOPT) in this manual for more information about this solution
method.
For NMODE , specify the number of eigenvalues to be extracted. This argument defaults to one,
which is usually sufficient for eigenvalue buckling. We recommend that you request an
additional few modes beyond what is needed in order to enhance the accuracy of the final
solution.
For SHIFT , specify the lower end of the load multiplier range of interest (defaults to 0.0). This
value also acts as the initial shift point about which eigenvalues are calculated. The shift
point is helpful when numerical problems are encountered (due to negative eigenvalues, for
example).
For LDMULTE, specify the upper end of the load multiplier range of interest (defaults to + ).
By default, the program calculates buckling modes from 0.0 to positive infinity. Set LDMULTE =
CENTER if you want both the positive and negative eigenvalues about SHIFT; that is, both
the positive and negative (reverse load application) load factors.
Specify expansion pass options.
Command(s):
GUI:
MXPAND, NMODE ,,,Elcalc

Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes
Regardless of whether you use the command or GUI method, the following options are required
for the expansion pass:
For NMODE , specify the number of modes to expand. This argument defaults to the total
number of modes that were extracted.
For Elcalc, indicate whether you want ANSYS to calculate stresses. "Stresses" in an
eigenvalue analysis do not represent actual stresses, but give you an idea of the relative
stress or force distribution for each mode. By default, no stresses are calculated.
4. Specify load step options.
The only load step options valid for eigenvalue buckling are output controls.
Database and Results File Output:
Command(s):
GUI:
OUTRES
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> DB/Results File
Output File:
Command(s):
OUTPR,NSOL,ALL
GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
Note: The FREQ field on OUTPR OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE, meaning that
the data are written for all modes or no modes. For example, you cannot
write information for every other mode.

Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
Utility Menu> File> Save As

Command(s):
GUI:
SOLVE
The output from the solution mainly consists of the eigenvalues, which are printed as part of the
printed output ( Jobname.OUT). The eigenvalues represent the buckling load factors; if unit loads
were applied in the static analysis, they are the buckling loads. No buckling mode shapes are
written to the database or the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this,
you need to expand the solution (explained next).
Sometimes you may see both positive and negative eigenvalues calculated. Negative eigenvalues
indicate that buckling occurs when the loads are applied in an opposite sense.
7. Exit the SOLUTION processor.
Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH

Results from a buckling expansion pass are written to the structural results file, Jobname.RST. They
consist of buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes, and relative stress distributions. You can review
them in POST1, the general postprocessor.
Note: To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which
the buckling solution was calculated (issue RESUME if necessary). Also, the results
file ( Jobname.RST) from the expansion pass must be available.
1. List all buckling load factors.
Command(s):
GUI:
SET,LIST
Main Menu> General Postproc> Results Summary
2. Read in data for the desired mode to display buckling mode shapes. (Each mode is stored on the
results file as a separate substep.)
Command(s):
GUI:
SET,SBSTEP
Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
3. Display the mode shape.

Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
4. Contour the relative stress distributions.

PLESOL
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal
Solution
GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element
Solution
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, PSTRES, D, F, SF, BUCOPT, EXPASS,
MXPAND, OUTRES, SET, PLDISP, and PLNSOL commands.
7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
7.7.Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example buckling analysis of a bar with hinged ends using the ANSYS commands
shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/TITLE,Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends
/PREP7
ET,1,188
KEYOPT,1,3,3
SECTYPE,1,BEAM,RECT
SECDATA,0.5,0.5
MP,EX,1,30e6
N,1,0,0,0
N,11,0,100,0
FILL,1,11,9, , ,1,1,1,
E,1,2
EGEN,10,1,1
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
PSTRES,ON
NSEL,S,NODE,,1
D,ALL,UY,,,,,ROTZ
ALLSEL
NSEL,S,NODE,,11
D,ALL,UX
F,ALL,FY,-1
ALLSEL
DSYM,SYMM,z
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,BUCKLE
BUCOPT,LANB,1
MXPAND,1
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,1
FINISH

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional buckling analyses.
The Verification Manual contains a variety of buckling analysis test cases:
VM17 - Snap-Through Buckling of a Hinged Shell
VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Line Elements)
VM128 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Area Elements)
8.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior
8.1.Causes of Nonlinear Behavior

Nonlinear structural behavior arises from a number of causes, which can be grouped into these principal
categories:
Changing status
Geometric nonlinearities
Material nonlinearities
8.1.1.Changing Status (Including Contact)

Many common structural features exhibit nonlinear behavior that is status-dependent. For example, a
tension-only cable is either slack or taut; a roller support is either in contact or not in contact. Status
changes might be directly related to load (as in the case of the cable), or they might be determined by
some external cause.
Situations in which contact occurs are common to many different nonlinear applications. Contact forms a
distinctive and important subset to the category of changing-status nonlinearities.
See the Contact Technology Guide for detailed information on performing contact analyses using ANSYS.
8.1.2.Geometric Nonlinearities
If a structure experiences large deformations, its changing geometric configuration can cause the
structure to respond nonlinearly. An example would be the fishing rod shown in Figure 8.2. Geometric
nonlinearity is characterized by "large" displacements and/or rotations.
Figure8.2A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity
8.1.3.Material Nonlinearities
Nonlinear stress-strain relationships are a common cause of nonlinear structural behavior. Many factors
can influence a material's stress-strain properties, including load history (as in elastoplastic response),
environmental conditions (such as temperature), and the amount of time that a load is applied (as in
creep response).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRnlcause.html[28/04/2013 07:57:43 p.m.]
8.2.Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses

ANSYS employs the "Newton-Raphson" approach to solve nonlinear problems. In this approach, the load
is subdivided into a series of load increments. The load increments can be applied over several load
steps. Figure 8.3 illustrates the use of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations in a single DOF nonlinear
analysis.
Figure8.3Newton-Raphson Approach
Before each solution, the Newton-Raphson method evaluates the out-of-balance load vector, which is
the difference between the restoring forces (the loads corresponding to the element stresses) and the
applied loads. The program then performs a linear solution, using the out-of-balance loads, and checks
for convergence. If convergence criteria are not satisfied, the out-of-balance load vector is reevaluated,
the stiffness matrix is updated, and a new solution is obtained. This iterative procedure continues until
the problem converges.
A number of convergence-enhancement and recovery features, such as line search, automatic load
stepping, and bisection, can be activated to help the problem to converge. If convergence cannot be
achieved, then the program attempts to solve with a smaller load increment.
In some nonlinear static analyses, if you use the Newton-Raphson method alone, the tangent stiffness
matrix may become singular (or non-unique), causing severe convergence difficulties. Such occurrences
include nonlinear buckling analyses in which the structure either collapses completely or "snaps through"
to another stable configuration. For such situations, you can activate an alternative iteration scheme, the
arc-length method, to help avoid bifurcation points and track unloading.
The arc-length method causes the Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations to converge along an arc,
thereby often preventing divergence, even when the slope of the load vs. deflection curve becomes zero
or negative. This iteration method is represented schematically in Figure 8.4.
Figure8.4Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRnlbasin.html[28/04/2013 07:58:00 p.m.]
To summarize, a nonlinear analysis is organized into three levels of operation:

The "top" level consists of the load steps that you define explicitly over a "time" span (see the
discussion of "time" in "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide ). Loads are assumed to vary linearly
within load steps (for static analyses).
Within each load step, you can direct the program to perform several solutions ( substeps or time
steps) to apply the load gradually.
At each substep, the program will perform a number of equilibrium iterations to obtain a
converged solution.
Figure 8.5 illustrates a typical load history for a nonlinear analysis. Also see the discussion of load steps,
substeps, and equilibrium iterations in "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
Figure8.5Load Steps, Substeps, and Time
The ANSYS program gives you a number of choices when you designate convergence criteria: you can
base convergence checking on forces, moments, displacements, or rotations, or on any combination of
these items. Additionally, each item can have a different convergence tolerance value. For multipledegree-of-freedom problems, you also have a choice of convergence norms.
You should almost always employ a force-based (and, when applicable, moment-based) convergence
tolerance. Displacement-based (and, when applicable, rotation-based) convergence checking can be
added , if desired, but should usually not be used alone.
8.2.1.Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency

If all energy put into a system by external loads is recovered when the loads are removed, the system is
said to be conservative . If energy is dissipated by the system (such as by plastic deformation or sliding
friction), the system is said to be nonconservative. An example of a nonconservative system is shown in
Figure 8.6.
An analysis of a conservative system is path independent: loads can usually be applied in any order and
in any number of increments without affecting the end results. Conversely, an analysis of a
nonconservative system is path dependent: the actual load-response history of the system must be
followed closely to obtain accurate results. An analysis can also be path dependent if more than one
solution could be valid for a given load level (as in a snap-through analysis). Path dependent problems
usually require that loads be applied slowly (that is, using many substeps) to the final load value.
Figure8.6Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior
8.2.2.Substeps
When using multiple substeps, you need to achieve a balance between accuracy and economy: more
substeps (that is, small time step sizes) usually result in better accuracy, but at a cost of increased run
times. ANSYS provides automatic time stepping that is designed for this purpose.
Automatic time stepping adjusts the time step size as needed, gaining a better balance between
accuracy and economy. Automatic time stepping activates the ANSYS program's bisection feature.
Bisection provides a means of automatically recovering from a convergence failure. This feature will cut
a time step size in half whenever equilibrium iterations fail to converge and automatically restart from
the last converged substep. If the halved time step again fails to converge, bisection will again cut the
time step size and restart, continuing the process until convergence is achieved or until the minimum
time step size (specified by you) is reached.
8.2.3.Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis

Consider what happens to loads when your structure experiences large deflections. In many instances,
the loads applied to your system maintain constant direction no matter how the structure deflects. In
other cases, forces will change direction, "following" the elements as they undergo large rotations.
The ANSYS program can model both situations, depending on the type of load applied. Accelerations and
concentrated forces maintain their original orientation, regardless of the element orientation. Pressure
loads always act normal to the deflected element surface, and can be used to model "following" forces.
Figure 8.7 illustrates constant-direction and following forces.
Note: Nodal coordinate system orientations are not updated in a large deflection analysis.
Calculated displacements are therefore output in the original directions.
Figure8.7Load Directions Before and After Deflection
8.2.4.Rotations in a Large-Deflection Analysis

Applying an imposed rotation (D command) in a load step is done in a "rotation vector" form, where the
magnitude and rotation direction are given by the values of the ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ components on
the D command(s). For step loading (KBC,1), the imposed rotation values are applied at the beginning
of the load step. For ramped loading (KBC,0), the values are linearly ramped over the load step.
For compound rotations imposed over multiple load steps, each set of rotations is applied sequentially to
the previous deformed configuration. For example, rotating a body about a nodal x-axis first then
rotating it about a nodal y-axis is done simply as:
D,node,ROTX,value
D,node,ROTY,0.0
D,node,ROTZ,0.0
SOLVE
D,node,ROTY,value
D,node,ROTX,value
D,node,ROTZ,0.0
SOLVE
This simplifies the specification of compound motion such as a robotic arm. See examples presented in
AppendixA to find how different ways of specifying imposed rotations affect the final configuration.
The sequence in which the rotations are applied will determine how the constrained node rotates from
its initial configuration to its final configuration. The examples presented in AppendixA demonstrate the
effect of the order of imposed rotations on the final configuration.
The rotation components of the output displacements (ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ) are the sum of all
incremental rotations. They generally cannot be interpreted as a pseudovector or rotation vector.
8.2.5.Nonlinear Transient Analyses

The procedure for analyzing nonlinear transient behavior is similar to that used for nonlinear static
behavior: you apply the load in incremental steps, and the program performs equilibrium iterations at
each step. The main difference between the static and transient procedures is that time-integration
effects can be activated in the transient analysis. Thus, "time" always represents actual chronology in a
transient analysis. The automatic time stepping and bisection feature is also applicable for transient
analyses.
8.3.Using Geometric Nonlinearities

Small deflection and small strain analyses assume that displacements are small enough that the
resulting stiffness changes are insignificant.
In contrast, large strain analyses account for the stiffness changes that result from changes in an
element's shape and orientation. By issuing NLGEOM,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options), you activate large strain effects in those element types that
support this feature. The large strain feature is available in most of the solid elements (including all of
the large strain elements), as well as in most of the shell and beam elements. Large strain effects are
not available in the ANSYS Professional program. However, large deflection effects (NLGEOM
command) are supported for shell and beam elements in ANSYS Professional, if indicated as such in the
Element Reference.
The large strain procedure places no theoretical limit on the total rotation or strain experienced by an
element. (Certain ANSYS element types will be subject to practical limitations on total strain - see
below.) However, the procedure requires that strain increments must be restricted to maintain accuracy.
Thus, the total load should be broken into smaller steps.
8.3.1.Stress-Strain
In large strain solutions, all stress-strain input and results will be in terms of true stress and true (or
logarithmic) strain. (In one dimension, true strain would be expressed as = ln ( / 0 ). For smallstrain regions of response, true strain and engineering strain are essentially identical.) To convert strain
from small (engineering) strain to logarithmic strain, use ln = ln (1 + eng ). To convert from
engineering stress to true stress, use true = eng (1 + eng ). (This stress conversion is valid only for
incompressible plasticity stress-strain data.)
8.3.1.1.Large Deflections with Small Strain

This feature is available in all beam and most shell elements, as well as in a number of the nonlinear
elements. Issue NLGEOM,ON (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic
Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) to
activate large deflection effects for those elements that are designed for small strain analysis types that
support this feature.
8.3.2.Stress Stiffening
The out-of-plane stiffness of a structure can be significantly affected by the state of in-plane stress in
that structure. This coupling between in-plane stress and transverse stiffness, known as stress stiffening ,
is most pronounced in thin, highly stressed structures, such as cables or membranes. A drumhead,
which gains lateral stiffness as it is tightened, would be a common example of a stress-stiffened
structure.
Even though stress stiffening theory assumes that an element's rotations and strains are small, in some
structural systems (such as in Figure 8.8 (a)), the stiffening stress is only obtainable by performing a
large deflection analysis. In other systems (such as in Figure 8.8 (b)), the stiffening stress is obtainable
using small deflection, or linear, theory.
Figure8.8Stress-Stiffened Beams
To use stress stiffening in the second category of systems, you must issue PSTRES,ON (GUI path Main
Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) in your first load step.
Large strain and large deflection procedures include initial stress effects as a subset of their theory. For
most elements, initial stiffness effects are automatically included when large-deformation effects are
activated (NLGEOM,ON) (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( :
Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options).
8.4.Modeling Material Nonlinearities

A number of material-related factors can cause your structure's stiffness to change during the course of
an analysis. Nonlinear stress-strain relationships of plastic, multilinear elastic, and hyperelastic materials
will cause a structure's stiffness to change at different load levels (and, typically, at different
temperatures). Creep, viscoplasticity, and viscoelasticity will give rise to nonlinearities that can be time-,
rate-, temperature-, and stress-related. Swelling will induce strains that can be a function of
temperature, time, neutron flux level (or some analogous quantity), and stress. Any of these kinds of
material properties can be incorporated into an ANSYS analysis if you use appropriate element types.
Nonlinear constitutive models (TB) are not applicable for the ANSYS Professional program.
The following topics related to modeling material nonlinearities are available:
Nonlinear Materials
Material Model Combination Examples
8.4.1.Nonlinear Materials
If a material displays nonlinear or rate-dependent stress-strain behavior, use the TB family of
commands (TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBPT, TBCOPY, TBLIST, TBPLOT, TBDELE) [Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Nonlinear] to define the
nonlinear material property relationships in terms of a data table. The precise form of these commands
varies depending on the type of nonlinear material behavior being defined. The different material
behavior options are described briefly below. See theImplicit Analysis Data Tables in the Element
Reference for specific details for each material behavior type.
Topics covering the following general categories of nonlinear material models are available:
Plasticity
Multilinear Elasticity Material Model
Hyperelasticity Material Model
Bergstrom-Boyce Hyperviscoelastic Material Model
Mullins Effect Material Model
Anisotropic Hyperelasticity Material Model
Creep Material Model
Shape Memory Alloy Material Model
Viscoplasticity
Viscoelasticity
Swelling Material Model
User-Defined Material Model
8.4.1.1.Plasticity
Most common engineering materials exhibit a linear stress-strain relationship up to a stress level known
as the proportional limit. Beyond this limit, the stress-strain relationship will become nonlinear, but will
not necessarily become inelastic. Plastic behavior, characterized by nonrecoverable strain, begins when
stresses exceed the material's yield point . Because there is usually little difference between the yield
point and the proportional limit, the ANSYS program assumes that these two points are coincident in
plasticity analyses (see Figure 8.9).
Plasticity is a nonconservative, path-dependent phenomenon. In other words, the sequence in which
loads are applied and in which plastic responses occur affects the final solution results. If you anticipate
plastic response in your analysis, you should apply loads as a series of small incremental load steps or
time steps, so that your model will follow the load-response path as closely as possible. The maximum
plastic strain is printed with the substep summary information in your output ( Jobname.OUT).
Figure8.9Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve
The automatic time stepping feature [AUTOTS] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps) will respond to plasticity after the fact, by reducing the load
step size after a load step in which a large number of equilibrium iterations was performed or in which a
plastic strain increment greater than 15% was encountered. If too large a step was taken, the program
will bisect and resolve using a smaller step size.
Other kinds of nonlinear behavior might also occur along with plasticity. In particular, large deflection
and large strain geometric nonlinearities will often be associated with plastic material response. If you
expect large deformations in your structure, you must activate these effects in your analysis with the
NLGEOM command (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic
Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options). For
large strain analyses, material stress-strain properties must be input in terms of true stress and
logarithmic strain.
8.4.1.1.1.Plastic Material Models

The available material model options for describing plasticity behavior are described in this section. Use
the links in the following table to navigate to the appropriate section:
Bilinear Kinematic Hardening
Bilinear Isotropic Hardening
Anisotropic
Extended Drucker-Prager
Cast Iron
Multilinear Kinematic Hardening

Multilinear Isotropic Hardening
Hill Anisotropy
Gurson Plasticity
Cap Model
Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening

Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening
Drucker-Prager
Gurson-Chaboche
You may incorporate other options into the program by using User Programmable Features (see the
Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
Bilinear Kinematic Hardening Material Model.The Bilinear Kinematic Hardening (TB,BKIN)
option assumes the total stress range is equal to twice the yield stress, so that the Bauschinger effect is
included (see Figure 8.11). This option is recommended for general small-strain use for materials that
obey von Mises yield criteria (which includes most metals). It is not recommended for large-strain
applications. You can combine the BKIN option with creep and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more
complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Element Reference for the
combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model Combination Examples in this chapter for sample input
listings of material combinations. Stress-strain-temperature data are demonstrated in the following
example. Figure 8.10(a) illustrates a typical display [TBPLOT] of bilinear kinematic hardening
properties.
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3
! Define temperatures for Young's modulus

! C0 and C1 terms for Young's modulus
TB,BKIN,1,2
TBTEMP,0.0
TBDATA,1,44E3,1.2E6
TBTEMP,500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,0.8E6
TBLIST,BKIN,1
/XRANGE,0,0.01
TBPLOT,BKIN,1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate a data table

Temperature = 0.0
Yield = 44,000; Tangent modulus = 1.2E6
Temperature = 500
Yield = 29,330; Tangent modulus = 0.8E6
List the data table
X-axis of TBPLOT to extend from varepsilon=0 to 0.01
Display the data table
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command
descriptions for more information.
Figure8.10Kinematic Hardening
(a) Bilinear kinematic hardening, (b) Multilinear kinematic hardening

Figure8.11Bauschinger Effect
Multilinear Kinematic Hardening Material Model.The Multilinear Kinematic Hardening

(TB,KINH and TB,MKIN) options use the Besseling model, also called the sublayer or overlay model, so
that the Bauschinger effect is included. KINH is preferred for use over MKIN because it uses Rice's
model where the total plastic strains remain constant by scaling the sublayers. KINH allows you to
define more stress-strain curves (40 vs. 5), and more points per curve (20 vs. 5). Also, when KINH is
used with LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265, you can use TBOPT = 4 (or PLASTIC) to define the
stress vs. plastic strain curve. For either option, if you define more than one stress-strain curve for
temperature dependent properties, then each curve should contain the same number of points. The
assumption is that the corresponding points on the different stress-strain curves represent the
temperature dependent yield behavior of a particular sublayer. These options are not recommended for
large-strain analyses. You can combine either of these options with the Hill anisotropy option to simulate
more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Element Reference for the
combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model Combination Examples in this chapter for sample input
listings of material combinations. Figure 8.10(b) illustrates typical stress-strain curves for the MKIN
option.
A typical stress-strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.001,1.0
TBPT,,0.1012,1.2
TBPT,,0.2013,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.008,0.9
TBPT,,0.09088,1.0
TBPT,,0.12926,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

Temperature = 20.0
Strain = 0.001, Stress = 1.0
Temperature = 40.0
Strain = 0.12926, Stress = 1.05
In this example, the third point in the two stress-strain curves defines the temperature-dependent yield
behavior of the third sublayer.
A typical stress- plastic strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3,PLASTIC
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.0,1.0
TBPT,,0.1,1.2
TBPT,,0.2,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.0,0.9
TBPT,,0.0900,1.0
TBPT,,0.129,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

Temperature = 20.0
Plastic Strain = 0.0000,
Temperature = 40.0
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.2
Stress = 1.3
Stress = 0.9
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.05
Alternatively, the same plasticity model can also be defined using TB,PLASTIC, as follows:
TB,PLASTIC,1,2,3,KINH
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.0,1.0
TBPT,,0.1,1.2
TBPT,,0.2,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.0,0.9
TBPT,,0.0900,1.0
TBPT,,0.129,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

Temperature = 20.0
Temperature = 40.0
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.2
Stress = 1.3
Stress = 0.9
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.05
In this example, the stress - strain behavior is the same as the previous sample, except now the strain
value is the plastic strain. The plastic strain can be converted from total strain as follows:
Plastic Strain = Total Strain - (Stress/Young's Modulus).
A typical stress-strain temperature data input using MKIN is demonstrated by this example.
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3
TB,MKIN,1,2
TBTEMP,,STRAIN
TBDATA,1,3.67E-3,5E-3,7E-3,10E-3,15E-3
TBTEMP,0.0
TBDATA,1,44E3,50E3,55E3,60E3,65E3
TBTEMP,500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,37E3,40.3E3,43.7E3,47E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,MKIN,1
! Define temperature-dependent EX,

! as in BKIN example
! Activate a data table
! Next TBDATA values are strains
! Strains for all temps
! Temperature = 0.0
! Stresses at temperature = 0.0
! Temperature = 500
! Stresses at temperature = 500
Please see the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBPT, TBTEMP, TBDATA, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command
Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening Material Model.The following example is a typical data table with
no temperature dependency and one kinematic model:
TB,CHABOCHE,1
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
! Activate CHABOCHE data table

! Values for constants C1, C2, and C3
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants with two kinematic
models at two temperature points:
TB,CHABOCHE,1,2,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24,C25
! Activate CHABOCHE data table

! Define first temperature
! Values for constants C11, C12, C13,
! C14, and C15 at first temperature
! Define second temperature
! Values for constants C21, C22, C23,
! C24, and C25 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Bilinear Isotropic Hardening Material Model.The Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (TB,BISO)
option uses the von Mises yield criteria coupled with an isotropic work hardening assumption. This
option is often preferred for large strain analyses. You can combine BISO with Chaboche, creep,
viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model
Combinations in the Element Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model
Combination Examples in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
Multilinear Isotropic Hardening Material Model.The Multilinear Isotropic Hardening
(TB,MISO) option is like the bilinear isotropic hardening option, except that a multilinear curve is used
instead of a bilinear curve. This option is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load
histories in small-strain analyses. It is, however, recommended for large strain analyses. The MISO
option can contain up to 20 different temperature curves, with up to 100 different stress-strain points
allowed per curve. Strain points can differ from curve to curve. You can combine this option with
nonlinear kinematic hardening (CHABOCHE) for simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also
combine the MISO option with creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex
material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Element Reference for the combination
possibilities. Also, see Material Model Combination Examples in this chapter for sample input listings of
material combinations. The stress-strain-temperature curves from the MKIN example would be input for
a multilinear isotropic hardening material as follows:
/prep7
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3
TB,MISO,1,2,5
TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,2E-3,29.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,50E3
TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,55E3
TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,60E3
TBTEMP,500
TBPT,DEFI,2.2E-3,27.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,37E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,MISO,1
! Activate a data table

! Temperature = 0.0
! Strain, stress at temperature = 0
! Temperature = 500
! Strain, stress at temperature = 500
Alternatively, the same plasticity model can also be defined using TB,PLASTIC, as follows:
/prep7
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3
TB,PLASTIC,1,2,5,MISO
TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,0,29.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,1.59E-3,50E3
TBTEMP,500
TBPT,DEFI,0,27.33E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,PLASTIC,1
! Activate TB,PLASTIC data table

! Temperature = 0.0
! Plastic strain, stress at temperature = 0
! Temperature = 500
! Plastic strain, stress at temperature = 500
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBPT, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more
information.
Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening Material Model.The Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (TB,NLISO)
option is based on either the Voce hardening law or the power law (see the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details). The NLISO Voce hardening option is a
variation of BISO where an exponential saturation hardening term is appended to the linear term (see
Figure 8.12).
Figure8.12NLISO Stress-Strain Curve
The advantage of this model is that the material behavior is defined as a specified function which has
four material constants that you define through the TBDATA command. You can obtain the material
constants by fitting material tension stress-strain curves. Unlike MISO, there is no need to be concerned
about how to appropriately define the pairs of the material stress-strain points. However, this model is
only applicable to the tensile curve like the one shown in Figure 8.12. This option is suitable for large
strain analyses. You can combine NLISO with Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options
to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Element
Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model Combination Examples in this
chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants at two temperature
points:
TB,NLISO,1
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14
TBTEMP,200
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate NLISO data table

Define first temperature
Values for constants C11, C12, C13,
C14 at first temperature
Define second temperature
Values for constants C21, C22, C23,
C24 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Anisotropic Material Model.The Anisotropic (TB,ANISO) option allows for different bilinear stressstrain behavior in the material x, y, and z directions as well as different behavior in tension,
compression, and shear. This option is applicable to metals that have undergone some previous
deformation (such as rolling). It is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories
since work hardening is assumed. The yield stresses and slopes are not totally independent (see the
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details).
To define anisotropic material plasticity, use MP commands (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Other> Change Mat Props) to define the elastic moduli (EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, and
NUXZ). Then, issue the TB command [TB,ANISO] followed by TBDATA commands to define the yield
points and tangent moduli. (See Nonlinear Stress-Strain Materials in the Element Reference for more
information.)
Hill Anisotropy Material Model.The Hill Anisotropy (TB,HILL) option, when combined with other
material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity, and creep - all using the Hill potential. See Material
Model Combinations in the Element Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model
Combination Examples in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The Hill
potential may only be used with the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273,

SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265.
Drucker-Prager Material Model.The Drucker-Prager (TB,DP) option is applicable to granular
(frictional) material such as soils, rock, and concrete, and uses the outer cone approximation to the
Mohr-Coulomb law.
MP,EX,1,5000
MP,NUXY,1,0.27
TB,DP,1
TBDATA,1,2.9,32,0
! Cohesion = 2.9 (use consistent units),

! Angle of internal friction = 32 degrees,
! Dilatancy angle = 0 degrees
See the MP, TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Extended Drucker-Prager Material Model.The Extended Drucker-Prager (TB,EDP) option is
also available for granular materials. This option allows you to specify both the yield functions and the
flow potentials using the complex expressions defined in Extended Drucker-Prager the Element
Reference.
!Extended DP Material Definition
/prep7
mp,ex,1,2.1e4
mp,nuxy,1,0.45
!Linear Yield Function
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,2.2526,7.894657
!Linear Plastic Flow Potential
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,0.566206
tblist,all,all
See the EDP argument and associated specifications in the TB command, the Extended Drucker-Prager
in the Element Reference and also The Extended Drucker-Prager Model in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more information.
Gurson Plasticity Material Model.The Gurson Plasticity (TB,GURSON) option is used to model
porous metals. This option allows you to incorporate microscopic material behaviors, such as void
dilatancy, void nucleation, and void coalescence into macroscopic plasticity models. (The microscopic
behaviors of voids are described using the porosity variables defined in Gurson's Model in the Element
Reference.)
!The Gurson PLASTICITY Material Definition
/prep7
!!! define linear elasticity constants
mp,ex,1,2.1e4
! Young modulus
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
! Poison ratio
!!! define parameters related to Gurson model with
!!! the option of strain controlled nucleation with
!!! coalescence
f_0=0.005
! initial porosity
q1=1.5
! first Tvergaard constant
q2=1.0
! second Tvergaard constant
f_c=0.15
! critical porosity
f_F=0.20
! failure porosity
f_N=0.04
! nucleation porosity
s_N=0.1
! standard deviation of mean strain
strain_N=0.3
! mean strain
sigma_Y=50.0
! initial yielding strength
power_N=0.1
! power value for nonlinear isotropic
! hardening power law (POWE)
!!! define Gurson material
tb,gurson,1,,5,base
tbdata,1,sigma_Y,f_0,q1,q2
tb,gurson,1,,3,snnu
tbdata,1,f_N,strain_N,s_N
tb,gurson,1,,2,coal
tbdata,1,f_c,f_F
tb,nliso,1,,2,POWER
tbdata,,sigma_Y,power_N
tblist,all,all
See the GURSON argument and associated specifications in the TB command documentation, and also
Gurson's Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
information.
Gurson-Chaboche Material Model.The Gurson-Chaboche model is an extension of the Gurson
plasticity model. Like the Gurson model, the Gurson-Chaboche model is used for modeling porous metal
materials, but includes both isotropic and kinematic hardening effects. Compared to the Gurson model
with isotropic hardening only, the Gurson-Chaboche model can provide more realistic deformation
results.
The option first requires the input parameters for Gurson plasticity with isotropic hardening
(TB,GURSON). Additional input parameters follow for Chaboche kinematic hardening (TB,CHABOCHE).
The Gurson-Chaboche option accounts for microscopic material behaviors, such as void dilatancy, void
nucleation, and void coalescence into macroscopic plasticity models. (The microscopic behavior of voids
is described using the porosity variables defined in Gurson's Model Constants (TB,GURSON) in the
Element Reference.)
! Example: Modeling Gurson with Kinematic Hardening
ep=2.1e+5
nu=0.3
threeG=3.0*ep/2.0/(1.0+nu)
MP,EX,1,ep
MP,NUXY,1,nu
! GURSON COEFFICIENTS
Q1=1.5
! first tvergaard constant
Q2=1
! second tvergaard constant
Q3=Q1*Q1
F_0=1E-8
! initial porosity
F_N=0.04
! volume fraction / void nucleation
S_N=0.1
! third tvergaard constant
STRAIN_N=0.3
! mean strain for nucleations
POWER_N=0.1
SIGMA_Y=ep/300.0
TB,GURSON,1,,5,BASE
! define gurson base model
TBDATA,1,SIGMA_Y,F_0,Q1,Q2,Q3
TB,GURSON,1,,3,SNNU
! define gurson snnu
TBDATA,1,F_N,STRAIN_N,S_N
TB,NLISO,1,,2,POWER
! define nonlinear isotropic power hardening law
TBDATA,1,SIGMA_Y,POWER_N
TB,CHABOCHE,1,,2
! define chaboche kinematic hardening
TBDATA,1,SIGMA_Y,1.01e+3,2.87,1.06e+1,0.026
For more information, see Gurson Plasticity with Isotropic/Chaboche Kinematic Hardening in the Theory
Cast Iron Material Model.The Cast Iron (TB,CAST and TB,UNIAXIAL) option assumes a modified
von Mises yield surface, which consists of the von Mises cylinder in compression and a Rankine cube in
tension. It has different yield strengths, flows, and hardenings in tension and compression. Elastic
behavior is isotropic, and is the same in tension and compression. The TB,CAST command is used to
input the plastic Poisson's ration in tension, which can be temperature dependent. Use the TB,UNIAXIAL
command to enter the yield and hardening in tension and compression.
Cast Iron is intended for monotonic loading only and cannot be used with any other material model.
TB,CAST,1,,,ISOTROPIC
TBDATA,1,0.04
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,TENSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.550E-03,0.813E+04
TBPT,,0.100E-02,0.131E+05
TBPT,,0.250E-02,0.241E+05
TBPT,,0.350E-02,0.288E+05
TBPT,,0.450E-02,0.322E+05
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,COMPRESSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.203E-02,0.300E+05
TBPT,,0.500E-02,0.500E+05
TBPT,,0.800E-02,0.581E+05
TBPT,,0.110E-01,0.656E+05
TBPT,,0.140E-01,0.700E+05
Figure 8.13 illustrates the idealized response of gray cast iron in tension and compression.
Figure8.13Cast Iron Plasticity
See the TB and TBPT command descriptions for more information.

Cap Model.The Extended Drucker-Prager model (TB,EDP) with the cap yield option ( TBOPT = CYFUN)
is used for geomaterials under compaction. This option allows you to model rate-independent plasticity
or the combined effect of plasticity and creep. (See EDP Cap Material Constants and Implicit Creep
Equations in the Element Reference.)
! Define cap plasticity model
TB,EDP,1,,11,CYFUN
tbdata,
1,
1.0
tbdata,
2,
1.0
tbdata,
3,
-80
tbdata,
4,
10
tbdata,
5,
0.001
tbdata,
6,
2
tbdata,
7,
0.05
tbdata,
8,
1.0
! Define hardening for cap-compaction portion
tbdata,
9,
0.6
tbdata,
10,
3.0/1000
tbdata,
11,
0.0
! Define hardening for shear portion
tb,plastic,1,,2,miso
tbpt,defi,0.0,8.0
tbpt,defi,1.0,100.0
! Define creep function for shear portion
tb,creep,1,,4,1
tbeo,capc,shea
tbdata,1,1.0e-4,0.6,0.4,0.0
! Define creep function for compaction portion
tb,creep,1,,4,1
tbeo,capc,comp
tbdata,1,2.0e-4,0.5,0.5,0.0
For further information, see:

The TB,EDP command's cap model argument ( TBOPT ) and associated specifications.
EDP Cap Material Constants in the Element Reference.
Cap Creep Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
8.4.1.2.Multilinear Elasticity Material Model
The Multilinear Elastic (TB,MELAS) material behavior option describes a conservative (pathindependent) response in which unloading follows the same stress-strain path as loading. Thus,
relatively large load steps might be appropriate for models that incorporate this type of material
nonlinearity. Input format is similar to that required for the multilinear isotropic hardening option, except
that the TB command now uses the label MELAS.
8.4.1.3.Hyperelasticity Material Model

A material is said to be hyperelastic (TB,HYPER) if there exists an elastic potential function (or strain
energy density function), which is a scalar function of one of the strain or deformation tensors, whose
derivative with respect to a strain component determines the corresponding stress component.
Hyperelasticity can be used to analyze rubber-like materials (elastomers) that undergo large strains and
displacements with small volume changes (nearly incompressible materials). Large strain theory is
required (NLGEOM,ON). A representative hyperelastic structure (a balloon seal) is shown in Figure 8.14.
Figure8.14Hyperelastic Structure
All current-technology elements except for link and beam elements are suitable for simulating
hyperelastic materials. For more information, see Mixed u-P Formulation Elements in the Element
Reference.
The material response in ANSYS hyperelastic models can be either isotropic or anisotropic, and it is
assumed to be isothermal. Because of this assumption, the strain energy potentials are expressed in
terms of strain invariants. Unless indicated otherwise, the hyperelastic materials are also assumed to be
nearly or purely incompressible. Material thermal expansion is also assumed to be isotropic.
ANSYS supports several options of strain energy potentials for the simulation of incompressible or nearly
incompressible hyperelastic materials. All options are applicable to elements SHELL181, SHELL281,
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272,
SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Access these options through the TBOPT
argument of TB,HYPER.
One of the options, the Mooney-Rivlin option, is also applicable to explicit dynamics elements PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168. To access the Mooney-Rivlin option for these elements, use
TB,MOONEY.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the hyperelastic options defined by
TB,HYPER. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material
data curves and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability
(except for plotting) is available via batch and interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting for
more information.
The following topics describing each of the hyperelastic options (TB,HYPER,,,,TBOPT ) are available:
Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY)
Ogden Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN)
Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO)
Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,POLY)

Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE)
Gent Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,GENT)
Yeoh Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH)
Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ)
Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM)
Response Function Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE)
User-Defined Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER)
8.4.1.3.1.Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY)

Note that this section applies to using the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements SHELL181, SHELL281,
PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The Mooney-Rivlin option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY), which is the default, allows you to define 2, 3, 5, or
9 parameters through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 5 parameter
model you would issue TB,HYPER,1,,5,MOONEY.
The 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option has an applicable strain of about 100% in tension and 30% in
compression. Compared to the other options, higher orders of the Mooney-Rivlin option may provide
better approximation to a solution at higher strain.
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Mooney-Rivlin option with 3 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,3,MOONEY
TBDATA,1,0.163498
TBDATA,2,0.125076
TBDATA,3,0.014719
TBDATA,4,6.93063E-5
!Activate 3 parameter Mooney-Rivlin data table

!Define c10
!Define c01
!Define c11
!Define incompressibility parameter
!(as 2/K, K is the bulk modulus)
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material (TB,HYPER) in the Element Reference for a description of
the material constants required for this option.
8.4.1.3.2.Ogden Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN)

The Ogden option (TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN) allows you to define an unlimited number of parameters via
the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a three-parameter model, use
TB,HYPER,1,,3,OGDEN.
Compared to the other options, the Ogden option usually provides the best approximation to a solution
at larger strain levels. The applicable strain level can be up to 700 percent. A higher parameter value
can provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the
material constants, and it requires enough data to cover the whole range of deformation for which you
may be interested. For these reasons, a high parameter value is not recommended.
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,OGDEN
TBDATA,1,0.326996
TBDATA,2,2
TBDATA,3,-0.250152
TBDATA,4,-2
TBDATA,5,6.93063E-5
!Activate 2 parameter Ogden data table

!Define 1
!Define 1
!Define 2
!Define 2
!(Second incompressibility parameter d2 is zero)
Refer to Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of the
material constants required for this option.
8.4.1.3.3.Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO)

The Neo-Hookean option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO) represents the simplest form of strain energy potential,
and has an applicable strain range of 20-30%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Neo-Hookean option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,NEO
TBDATA,1,0.577148
TBDATA,2,7.0e-5
!Activate Neo-Hookean data table

!Define mu shear modulus
Refer to Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material in the Element Reference for a description of the material
constants required for this option.
8.4.1.3.4.Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,POLY)

The polynomial form option (TB,HYPER,,,,POLY) allows you to define an unlimited number of
parameters through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 3 parameter
model you would issue TB,HYPER,1,,3,POLY.
Similar to the higher order Mooney-Rivlin options, the polynomial form option may provide a better
approximation to a solution at higher strain.
For NPTS = 1 and constant c 01 = 0, the polynomial form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option
(see Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO) for a sample input listing). Also, for NPTS = 1,
it is equivalent to the 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option. For NPTS = 2, it is equivalent to the 5
parameter Mooney-Rivlin option, and for NPTS = 3, it is equivalent to the 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin
option (see Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY) for a sample input listing).
Refer to Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of
the material constants required for this option.
8.4.1.3.5.Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE)

The Arruda-Boyce option (TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE) has an applicable strain level of up to 300%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Arruda-Boyce option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BOYCE
TBDATA,1,200.0
TBDATA,2,5.0
TBDATA,3,0.001
!Activate Arruda-Boyce data table

!Define initial shear modulus
!Define limiting network stretch
Refer to Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of the
8.4.1.3.6.Gent Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,GENT)

The Gent option (TB,HYPER,,,,GENT) has an applicable strain level of up to 300%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Gent option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,GENT
TBDATA,1,3.0
!Activate Gent data table

TBDATA,2,42.0
TBDATA,3,0.001
!Define limiting I1 - 3
Refer to Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of the material
8.4.1.3.7.Yeoh Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH)

The Yeoh option (TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH) is a reduced polynomial form of the hyperelasticity option
TB,HYPER,,,,POLY. An example of a 2 term Yeoh model is TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH.
Similar to the polynomial form option, the higher order terms may provide a better approximation to a
solution at higher strain.
For NPTS = 1, the Yeoh form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option (see Neo-Hookean
Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO) for a sample input listing).
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Yeoh option with 2 terms and 1
incompressibility term:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH
TBDATA,1,0.163498
TBDATA,2,0.125076
TBDATA,3,6.93063E-5
!Activate 2 term Yeoh data table

!Define C1
!Define C2
!Define first incompressibility parameter
Refer to Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of the material
8.4.1.3.8.Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ)

The Blatz-Ko option (TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ) is the simplest option for simulating the compressible foam
type of elastomer. This option is analogous to the Neo-Hookean option of incompressible hyperelastic
materials.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Blatz-Ko option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BLATZ
TBDATA,1,5.0
!Activate Blatz-Ko data table

Refer to Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a description of the
8.4.1.3.9.Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM)

The Ogden compressible foam option (TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM) simulates highly compressible foam material.
An example of a 3 parameter model is TB,HYPER,1,,3,FOAM. Compared to the Blatz-Ko option, the
Ogden foam option usually provides the best approximation to a solution at larger strain levels. The
higher the number of parameters, the better the fit to the experimental data. It may however cause
numerical difficulties in fitting the material constants, and it requires sufficient data to cover the whole
range of deformation for which you may be interested. For these reasons, a high parameter value is not
recommended.
The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden foam option with two parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,FOAM
TBDATA,1,1.85
TBDATA,2,4.5
!Activate 2 parameter Ogden foam data table

!Define 1
!Define 1
TBDATA,3,-9.20
TBDATA,4,-4.5
TBDATA,5,0.92
TBDATA,6,0.92
!Define 2
!Define 2
!Define first compressibility parameter
!Define second compressibility parameter
Refer to Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference for a
description of the material constants required for this option.
8.4.1.3.10.Response Function Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE)

The response function hyperelastic option (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE) works with experimental data
(TB,EXPE).
The TB,HYPER command's NPTS argument defines the number of terms in the volumetric potential
function. The data table includes entries for the deformation limit cutoff for the stiffness matrix as the
first entry, and the volumetric potential function incompressibility parameters starting in the third
position. (The second position in the data table is unused.)
The following example input shows the use of the response function option with two terms in the
volumetric potential function:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,RESPONSE
TBDATA,1,1E-4
TBDATA,3,0.002
TBDATA,4,0.00001
!
!
!
!
Activate Response Function data table

Define deformation limit cutoff
Define first incompressibility parameter
Define second incompressibility parameter
For a description of the material constants required for this option, see Response Function Hyperelastic
Material Constants (TB,HYPER,,,,RESPONSE) in the Element Reference. For detailed information about
response functions determined via experimental data, see Experimental Response Functions in the
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
Experimental data for the model is entered via TB,EXPE and related commands. The response function
hyperelastic model must include experimental data for at least one of the following deformations:
uniaxial tension, equibiaxial tension, or planar shear. Any combination of these three deformations is also
valid.
For incompressible and nearly incompressible materials, uniaxial compression can be used in place of
equibiaxial tension. Volumetric behavior is specified with either experimental data or a polynomial
volumetric potential function. Incompressible behavior results if no volumetric model or data is given.
Volumetric experimental data is input as two values per data point with volume ratio as the independent
variable and pressure as the dependent variable. For uniaxial tension, uniaxial compression, equibiaxial
tension, and planar shear deformations, the experimental data is entered in either of these formats:
Two values per data point: engineering strain as the independent variable and engineering stress
as the dependent variable
Three values per data point: engineering strain in the loading direction as the independent
variable, engineering strain in the lateral direction as the first dependent variable, and engineering
stress as the second dependent variable. For uniaxial compression data, the lateral strain is ignored
and incompressibility is assumed for the experimental data.
The input format must be consistent within the table for an individual experimental deformation, but can
change between tables for different experimental deformations.
For example, incompressible uniaxial tension and planar shear data are used as input to the response
function hyperelastic material defined above. Three experimental data points for incompressible uniaxial
deformation are input with the following commands:
TB,EXPERIMENTAL,1,,,UNITENSION
TBFIELD,TEMP,21
TBPT,, 0.0,
0.0
! Activate uniaxial data table

! Temperature for following data
!
TBPT,, 0.2,
TBPT,, 1.0,
TBPT,, 4.0,
1.83
5.56
17.6
! 1st data point

! 2nd data point
! 3rd data point
Four experimental data points for incompressible planar shear deformation are input with the following
commands:
TB,EXPERIMENTAL,1,,,SHEAR
TBFIELD,TEMP,21
TBPT,, 0.0,
0.0
TBPT,, 0.24, 2.69
TBPT,, 0.96, 6.32
TBPT,, 4.2, 19.7
TBPT,, 5.1, 27.4
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Activate planar shear data table

Temperature for following data
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
data
data
data
data
point
point
point
point
The zero stress-strain point should be entered as an experimental data point; otherwise, interpolation or
extrapolation of the data to zero strain should yield a value of zero stress.
Data outside the experimental strain values are assumed to be constant; therefore, all experimental data
should cover the simulated deformation range as measured by the first deformation invariant (expressed
by Equation4208 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ).
The following table shows various I1 values and the corresponding engineering strains in each
experimental deformation for an incompressible material:
Example I1 Values and Corresponding Experimental Strains
I1
3.01
3.1
4.0
10.0
Uniaxial tension
Biaxial tension
Uniaxial compression
Planar shear
0.059
0.030
-0.057
0.051
0.193
0.098
-0.171
0.171
0.675
0.362
-0.461
0.618
2.057
1.232
-0.799
1.981
For example, a simulation that includes deformation up to I1 = 10.0 requires experimental data in
uniaxial tension up to about 206 percent engineering strain, biaxial tension to 123 percent, uniaxial
compression to -80 percent, and planar shear to 198 percent. The values in the table were obtained by
solving Equation4263 for uniaxial tension, Equation4272 for biaxial tension, Equation4279 for
planar shear (all described in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications ), and converting the biaxial tension strain to equivalent uniaxial compression strain.
Experimental data that does not include the lateral strain are assumed to be for incompressible material
behavior; however, this data can be combined with a volumetric potential function to simulate the
behavior of nearly incompressible materials. Combining incompressible experimental data with a
volumetric model that includes significant compressibility is not restricted, but should be considered
carefully before use in a simulation.
8.4.1.3.11.User-Defined Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER)

The User option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER) allows you to use the subroutine USERHYPER to define the
derivatives of the strain energy potential with respect to the strain invariants. Refer to the Guide to
ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description on writing a user hyperelasticity
subroutine.
8.4.1.4.Bergstrom-Boyce Hyperviscoelastic Material Model

Use the Bergstrom-Boyce material model (TB,BB) for modeling the strain-rate-dependent, hysteretic
behavior of materials that undergo substantial elastic and inelastic strains. Examples of such materials
include elastomers and biological materials. The model assumes an inelastic response only for shear
distortional behavior; the response to volumetric deformations is still purely elastic.

The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Bergstrom-Boyce option:
TB, BB,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
TBDATA,
!
TB, BB,
TBDATA,
1,
1,
2,
3,
4,
5,
6,
7,
, , ISO
1.31
9.0
4.45
9.0
0.33
-1
5.21
!Activate Bergstrom-Boyce
!Define material constant
!Define N0=( A lock )2
!Define N1=( B lock )2
1, , , PVOL
1, 0.001
ISO data table

A ,
B
c
m
!Activate Bergstrom-Boyce PVOL data table

! as 1/K, K is the bulk modulus
Additional Information
For a description of the material constants required for this option, see Bergstrom-Boyce Material
Constants (TB,BB) in the Element Reference. For more detailed information about this material model,
see the documentation for the TB,BB command, and Bergstrom-Boyce in the Theory Reference for the
8.4.1.5.Mullins Effect Material Model

Use the Mullins effect option (TB,CDM) for modeling load-induced changes to constitutive response
exhibited by some hyperelastic materials. Typical of filled polymers, the effect is most evident during
cyclic loading where the unloading response is more compliant than the loading behavior. The condition
causes a hysteresis in the stress-strain response and is a result of irreversible changes in the material.
The Mullins effect option is used with any of the nearly- and fully-incompressible isotropic hyperelastic
constitutive models (all TB,HYPER options with the exception of TBOPT = BLATZ or TBOPT = FOAM) and
modifies the behavior of those models. The Mullins effect model is based on maximum previous load,
where the load is the strain energy of the virgin hyperelastic material. As the maximum previous load
increases, changes to the virgin hyperelastic constitutive model due to the Mullins effect also increase.
Below the maximum previous load, the Mullins effect changes are not evolving; however, the Mullins
effect still modifies the hyperelastic constitutive response based on the maximum previous load.
To select the modified Ogden-Roxburgh pseudo-elastic Mullins effect model, use the TB command to set
TBOPT = PSE2. The pseudo-elastic model results in a scaled stress given by
where is a damage variable.

The functional form of the modified Ogden-Roxburgh damage variable is
, ( TBOPT = PSE2)
where W m is the maximum previous strain energy and W 0 is the strain energy for the virgin hyperelastic
material. The modified Ogden-Roxburgh damage function requires and enforces NPTS = 3 with the three
material constants r, m, and .
Select the material constants to ensure
over the range of application. This condition is
guaranteed for r > 0, m > 0, and 0; however, it is also guaranteed by the less stringent bounds r
> 0, m > 0, and (m + W m) > 0. The latter bounds are solution-dependent, so you must ensure that
the limits for are not violated if < 0.
Following is an example input fragment for the modified Ogden-Roxburgh pseudo-elastic Mullins effect
model:
TB,CDM,1,,3,PSE2
TBDATA,1,1.5,1.0E6,0.2
!Modified Ogden Roxburgh pseudo-elastic

!Define r, m, and
For a description of the material constants required for this option, see Mullins Effect Constants
(TB,CDM) in the Element Reference. For more detailed information about this material model, see the
documentation for the TB,CDM command, and Mullins Effect in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications .
8.4.1.6.Anisotropic Hyperelasticity Material Model

You can use anisotropic hyperelasticity to model the directional differences in material behavior. This is
especially useful when modeling elastomers with reinforcements, or for biomedical materials such as
muscles or arteries. You use the format TB,AHYPER,,,,TBOPT to define the material behavior.
The TBOPT field allows you to specify the isochoric part, the material directions and the volumetric part
for the material simulation. You must define one single TB table for each option.
You can enter temperature dependent data for anisotropic hyperelastic material with the TBTEMP
command. For the first temperature curve, you issue TB, AHYPER,,,TBOPT , then input the first
temperature using the TBTEMP command. The subsequent TBDATA command inputs the data.
See the TB command, and Anisotropic Hyperelasticity in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications for more information.
The following example shows the definition of material constants for an anisotropic hyperelastic material
option:
! defininig material constants for anistoropic hyperelastic option
tb,ahyper,1,1,31,poly
! a1,a2,a3
tbdata,1,10,2,0.1
! b1,b2,b3
tbdata,4,5,1,0.1
! c2,c3,c4,c5,c6
tbdata,7,1,0.02,0.002,0.001,0.0005
! d2,d3,d4,d5,d6
tbdata,12,1,0.02,0.002,0.001,0.0005
! e2,e3,e4,e5,e6
tbdata,17,1,0.02,0.002,0.001,0.0005
! f2,f3,f4,f5,f6
tbdata,22,1,0.02,0.002,0.001,0.0005
! g2,g3,g4,g5,g6
tbdata,27,1,0.02,0.002,0.001,0.0005
!compressibility parameter d
tb,ahyper,1,1,1,pvol
tbdata,1,1e-3
!orientation vector A=A(x,y,z)
tb,ahyper,1,1,3,avec
tbdata,1,1,0,0
!orientation vector B=B(x,y,z)
tb,ahyper,1,1,3,bvec
tbdata,1,1/sqrt(2),1/sqrt(2),0
8.4.1.7.Creep Material Model

Creep is a rate-dependent material nonlinearity in which the material continues to deform under a
constant load. Conversely, if a displacement is imposed, the reaction force (and stresses) will diminish
over time (stress relaxation; see Figure 8.15(a)). The three stages of creep are shown in Figure 8.15(b).
The ANSYS program has the capability of modeling the first two stages (primary and secondary). The
tertiary stage is usually not analyzed since it implies impending failure.
Figure8.15Stress Relaxation and Creep
Creep is important in high temperature stress analyses, such as for nuclear reactors. For example,
suppose you apply a preload to some part in a nuclear reactor to keep adjacent parts from moving. Over
a period of time at high temperature, the preload would decrease (stress relaxation) and potentially let
the adjacent parts move. Creep can also be significant for some materials such as prestressed concrete.
Typically, the creep deformation is permanent.
The program analyzes creep using two time-integration methods. Both are applicable to static or
transient analyses. The implicit creep method is robust, fast, accurate, and recommended for general
use. It can handle temperature dependent creep constants, as well as simultaneous coupling with
isotropic hardening plasticity models. The explicit creep method is useful for cases where very small time
steps are required. Creep constants cannot be dependent on temperature. Coupling with other plastic
models is available by superposition only.
The terms implicit and explicit as applied to creep, have no relationship to explicit dynamics, or any
elements referred to as explicit elements.
The implicit creep method supports the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288,
PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273,
SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265.
The explicit creep method supports legacy elements, such as SOLID62 and SOLID65.
The creep strain rate may be a function of stress, strain, temperature, and neutron flux level. Built-in
libraries of creep strain rate equations are used for primary, secondary, and irradiation induced creep.
(See Creep Equations in the Element Reference for discussions of, and input procedures for, these
various creep equations.) Some equations require specific units. For the explicit creep option in
particular, temperatures used in the creep equations should be based on an absolute scale.
The following topics related to creep are available:
Implicit Creep Procedure
Explicit Creep Procedure
8.4.1.7.1.Implicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the implicit creep method involves issuing the TB command with Lab =
CREEP, and choosing a creep equation by specifying a value for TBOPT . The following example input
shows the use of the implicit creep method. TBOPT = 2 specifies that the primary creep equation for
model 2 will be used. Temperature dependency is specified using the TBTEMP command, and the four
constants associated with this equation are specified as arguments with the TBDATA command.
TB,CREEP,1,1,4,2
TBTEMP,100
You can input other creep expressions using the user programmable feature and setting TBOPT = 100.
You can define the number of state variables using the TB command with Lab = STATE. The following
example shows how five state variables are defined.
TB,STATE,1,,5
You can simultaneously model creep [TB,CREEP] and isotropic, bilinear kinematic, and Hill anisotropy
options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Element
Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Material Model Combination Examples in this
chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
To perform an implicit creep analysis, you must also issue the solution RATE command, with Option =
ON (or 1). The following example shows a procedure for a time hardening creep analysis (See Figure
8.16).
Figure8.16Time Hardening Creep Analysis
The user applied mechanical loading in the first load step, and turned the RATE command OFF to
bypass the creep strain effect. Since the time period in this load step will affect the total time thereafter,
the time period for this load step should be small. For this example, the user specified a value of 1.0E-8
seconds. The second load step is a creep analysis. The RATE command must be turned ON. Here the
mechanical loading was kept constant, and the material creeps as time increases.
/SOLU
RATE,OFF
TIME,1.0E-8
...
SOLV
RATE,ON
TIME,100
...
SOLV
!First load step, apply mechanical loading

!Creep analysis turned off
!Time period set to a very small value
!Solve this load step
!Second load step, no further mechanical load
!Creep analysis turned on
!Time period set to desired value
!Solve this load step
The RATE command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or Hill potentials.
When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can use the RATE command with the
following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265.
When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can use the RATE command with the
following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265.
For most materials, the creep strain rate changes significantly at an early stage. Because of this, a
general recommendation is to use a small initial incremental time step, then specify a large maximum
incremental time step by using solution command DELTIM or NSUBST. For implicit creep, you may
need to examine the effect of the time increment on the results carefully because ANSYS does not
enforce any creep ratio control by default. You can always enforce a creep limit ratio using the creep
ratio control option in commands CRPLIM or CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT . A recommended value for a
creep limit ratio ranges from 1 to 10. The ratio may vary with materials so your decision on the best
value to use should be based on your own experimentation to gain the required performance and
accuracy. For larger analyses, a suggestion is to first perform a time increment convergence analysis on
a simple small size test.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the implicit creep options defined
in TB,CREEP. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material
more information.
8.4.1.7.2.Explicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the explicit creep method involves issuing the TB command with Lab =
CREEP and choosing a creep equation by adding the appropriate constant as an argument with the
TBDATA command. TBOPT is either left blank or = 0. The following example input uses the explicit creep
method. Note that all constants are included as arguments with the TBDATA command, and that there
is no temperature dependency.
TB,CREEP,1
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ,C6
For the explicit creep method, you can incorporate other creep expressions into the program by using
User Programmable Features ( see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, a small time step must be used with the explicit creep
method. Creep strains are not computed if the time step is less than 1.0e-6. A creep time step
optimization procedure is available [AUTOTS and CRPLIM] for automatically adjusting the time step as
appropriate.
8.4.1.8.Shape Memory Alloy Material Model

The Shape Memory Alloy (TB,SMA) material behavior option describes the super-elastic behavior of
nitinol alloy. Nitinol is a flexible metal alloy that can undergo very large deformations in loadingunloading cycles without permanent deformation. As illustrated in Figure 8.17, the material behavior has
three distinct phases: an austenite phase (linear elastic), a martensite phase (also linear elastic), and the
transition phase between these two.
Figure8.17Shape Memory Alloy Phases
Use the MP command to input the linear elastic behavior of the austenite phase, and the TB,SMA
command to input the behavior of the transition and martensite phases. Use the TBDATA command to
enter the specifics (data sets) of the alloy material. You can enter up to six sets of data.
SMAs can be specified for the following elements: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, and SOLSH190, SOLID272, SOLID273, and SOLID285.
A typical ANSYS input listing (fragment) will look similar to this:
MP,EX,1,60.0E3
MP,NUXY,1.0.3
TB,SMA,1,2
TBTEMP,10
TBDATA,1,520.0,600.0,300.0,200.0,0.07,0.12
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,420.0,540.0,300.0,200.0,0.10,0.15
! Define austenite elastic properties

!
! Define material 1 as SMA,
! with two temperatures
! Define first starting temp
! Define SMA parameters
!
! Define second starting temp
! Define SMA parameters
See TB, and TBDATA for more information.
8.4.1.9.Viscoplasticity
Viscoplasticity is a time-dependent plasticity phenomenon, where the development of the plastic strain is
dependent on the rate of loading. The primary application is high-temperature metal-forming (such as
rolling and deep drawing) which involves large plastic strains and displacements with small elastic
strains. (See Figure 8.18.)
Viscoplasticity is defined by unifying plasticity and creep via a set of flow and evolutionary equations. A
constraint equation preserves volume in the plastic region.
For more information about modeling viscoplasticity, see Nonlinear Stress-Strain Materials in the Element
Reference.
Figure8.18Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation
Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity)

The TB,RATE command option allows you to introduce the strain rate effect in material models to
simulate the time-dependent response of materials. Typical applications include metal forming and
micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS).
The Perzyna, Peirce, Anand and Chaboche material options (described in Rate-Dependent Plasticity in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ) are available, as follows:
Perzyna and Peirce options
Unlike other rate-dependent material options (such as creep or the Anand model), the Perzyna and
Peirce models include a yield surface. The plasticity, and thus the strain rate hardening effect, is
active only after plastic yielding. To simulate viscoplasticity, use the Perzyna and Peirce models in
combination with the TB command's BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options. Further, you can
simulate anisotropic viscoplasticity by combining the HILL option. (See Material Model Combinations
in the Element Reference for combination possibilities. For sample input listings of material
combinations, see Material Model Combination Examples in this guide.)
For isotropic hardening, the intent is to simulate the strain rate hardening of materials rather than
softening. Large-strain analysis is supported.
The Perzyna and Peirce rate-dependent material options apply to the following elements: LINK180,
SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189,
SHELL208, SHELL209, REINF264, and REINF265.
exponential visco-hardening (EVH) option
The exponential visco-hardening (EVH) rate-dependent material option uses explicit functions to
define the static yield stresses of materials and therefore does not need to combine with other
plastic options (such as BIO, MISO, NLISO, and PLASTIC) to define it. The option applies to the
following elements: PLANE182 and PLANE183 (except for plane stress), SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187,SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, and SOLSH190.
Anand option
The Anand rate-dependent material option using the Anand model applies to the following
elements: PLANE182 and PLANE183 (except for plane stress), SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187,SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, and SOLSH190.
8.4.1.10.Viscoelasticity
Viscoelasticity is similar to creep, but part of the deformation is removed when the loading is taken off.
A common viscoelastic material is glass. Some plastics are also considered to be viscoelastic. One type
of viscoelastic response is illustrated in Figure 8.19.
Figure8.19Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model)
Viscoelasticity is modeled for small- and large-deformation viscoelasticity with element types LINK180,
SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, SHELL209,
REINF264, and REINF265. You must input material properties using the TB family of commands.
For SHELL181, SHELL281, PIPE288, PIPE289, ELBOW290, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLID272, SOLID273, SOLID285, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, the underlying
elasticity is specified by either the MP command (hypoelasticity) or by the TB,HYPER command
(hyperelasticity). For LINK180, BEAM188, BEAM189, REINF264, and REINF265, the underlying elasticity
is specified using the MP command (hypoelasticity) only. The elasticity constants correspond to those of
the fast load limit. Use the TB,PRONY and TB,SHIFT commands to input the relaxation property. (See
the TB command description for more information).
!Small Strain Viscoelasticity
mp,ex,1,20.0E5 !elastic properties
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
tb,prony,1,,2,shear
!define viscosity parameters (shear)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
tb,prony,1,,2,bulk
!define viscosity parameters (bulk)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
!Large Strain Viscoelasticity
tb,hyper,1,,,moon
!elastic properties
tbdata,1,38.462E4,,1.2E-6
tb,prony,1,,1,shear
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
tb,prony,1,,1,bulk
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
!define viscosity parameters

!define viscosity parameters
See Viscoelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference and the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details about how to input viscoelastic material
properties using the TB family of commands.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the viscoelastic options defined by
TB,PRONY. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material
more information.
8.4.1.11.Swelling Material Model

Certain materials respond to neutron flux by enlarging volumetrically, or swelling . In order to include
swelling effects, you must write your own swelling subroutine, USERSW. (See the Guide to ANSYS User
Programmable Features) Swelling Equations in the Element Reference discusses how to use TB,SWELL
and the TB family of commands to input constants for the swelling equations. Swelling can also be
related to other phenomena, such as moisture content. The ANSYS commands for nuclear swelling can
be used analogously to define swelling due to other causes.
8.4.1.12.User-Defined Material Model

The User-Defined material model (TB,USER) describes input parameters for defining your own
material model via the UserMat subroutine.
For more information about user-defined materials, see User-Defined Materials in the Element
Reference, and Subroutine UserMat (Creating Your Own Material Model) in the Guide to ANSYS User
Programmable Features.
8.4.2.Material Model Combination Examples

You can combine several material model options to simulate complex material behaviors. Material Model
Combinations in the Element Reference presents the model options you can combine along with the
associated TB command labels and links to sample input listings.
The following example input listings are presented in sections identified by the TB command labels.
RATE and CHAB and BISO Example
RATE and CHAB and MISO Example
RATE and CHAB and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example
RATE and CHAB and NLISO Example
BISO and CHAB Example
MISO and CHAB Example
PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CHAB Example
NLISO and CHAB Example
PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and EDP Example
MISO and EDP Example
GURSON and BISO Example
GURSON and MISO Example
GURSON and PLAS (MISO) Example
NLISO and GURSON Example
RATE and BISO Example
MISO and RATE Example
RATE and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example
RATE and NLISO Example
BISO and CREEP Example
MISO and CREEP Example
PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CREEP Example
NLISO and CREEP Example
BKIN and CREEP Example
HILL and BISO Example
HILL and MISO Example
HILL and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example
HILL and NLISO Example
HILL and BKIN Example
HILL and MKIN Example
HILL and KINH Example
HILL, and PLAS (Kinematic Hardening) Example
HILL and CHAB Example
HILL and BISO and CHAB Example
HILL and MISO and CHAB Example
HILL and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CHAB Example
HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example
HILL and RATE and BISO Example
HILL and RATE and MISO Example
HILL and RATE and NLISO Example
HILL and CREEP Example
HILL, CREEP and BISO Example
HILL and CREEP and MISO Example
HILL, CREEP and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example
HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example
HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example
Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example
EDP and CREEP and PLAS (MISO) Example
CAP and CREEP and PLAS (MISO) Example
8.4.2.1.RATE and CHAB and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining viscoplasticity and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic
hardening plasticity and bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,185.0E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! RATE TABLE
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Element
Reference, and Viscoplasticity in this document.
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
Plastic Material Models in this document.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.2.RATE and CHAB and MISO Example

hardening plasticity and multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! RATE TABLE
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! THIS EXAMPLE ISOTHERMAL
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,9.7E-4,180
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
For information about the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Element
Reference, and the RATE option, see Viscoplasticity in the Element Reference, and in this document.
For information about the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference,
and Plastic Material Models in this document.
8.4.2.3.RATE and CHAB and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example

In addition to the TB,MISO example (above), you can also use material plasticity, the multilinear
isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO to combine viscoplasticity and Chaboche nonlinear
kinematic hardening plasticity. An example of the combination is as follows:
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
TB,CHAB,1
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! RATE TABLE
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.0,180
TBPT,,0.99795,380
! MISO TABLE
For information about the PLAS option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference,
8.4.2.4.RATE and CHAB and NLISO Example

hardening plasticity and nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! RATE TABLE
TB,CHAB,1,3,5
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TBTEMP,20,1
! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT
TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000
TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0
TBTEMP,40,2
TBDATA,1,880,204000,200,43800,500,10200
TBDATA,7,1000,2600,2000,500,0
TBTEMP,60,3
TBDATA,1,1080,244000,400,45800,700,12200
TBDATA,7,1400,3000,2800,900,0
TB,NLISO,1,2
TBTEMP,40,1
TBDATA,1,880,0.0,80.0,3
TBTEMP,60,2
TBDATA,1,1080,0.0,120.0,7
! NLISO TABLE
For information about the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference,
8.4.2.5.BISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with
Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,185.0E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
Plastic Material Models in this chapter.
8.4.2.6.MISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,9.7E-4,180
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.7.PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CHAB Example

In addition to the TB,MISO example (above), you can also use material plasticity. The multilinear
isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with Chaboche nonlinear kinematic
hardening in the following example:
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.0,180
TBPT,,0.99795,380
! MISO TABLE
8.4.2.8.NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1,3,5
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TBTEMP,20,1
! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT
TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000
TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0
TBTEMP,40,2
TBDATA,1,880,204000,200,43800,500,10200
TBDATA,7,1000,2600,2000,500,0
TBTEMP,60,3
TBDATA,1,1080,244000,400,45800,700,12200
TBDATA,7,1400,3000,2800,900,0
TB,NLISO,1,2
TBTEMP,40,1
TBDATA,1,880,0.0,80.0,3
TBTEMP,60,2
TBDATA,1,1080,0.0,120.0,7
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.9.PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and EDP Example

You can use the TB,PLAS capability in conjunction with Extended Drucker-Prager plasticity. The
multilinear isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with Extended Drucker-Prager
plasticity in the following example:
/prep7
mp,ex,1,2.1e4
mp,nuxy,1,0.1
! Elastic Properties
ys=7.894657
sl=1000.0
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,2.2526,ys
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,0.566206
tb,plas,1,1,2,miso
tbpt,defi,0.0,7.894
tbpt,defi,1,1007.894
For information on the EDP option, see Extended Drucker-Prager in the Element Reference, and Plastic
Material Models in this chapter.
8.4.2.10.MISO and EDP Example

The TB,MISO option can also be used to combine multilinear isotropic hardening with Extended DruckerPrager plasticity, as shown in the following example:
/prep7
mp,ex,1,2.1e4
mp,nuxy,1,0.1
! Elastic Properties
ys=7.894657
sl=1000.0
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,2.2526,ys
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,0.566206
tb,miso,1,1,2
tbpt,defi,0.000375905,7.894
tbpt,defi,1.047994952,1007.894
For information on the EDP option, see Extended Drucker-Prager in the Element Reference, and Plastic
8.4.2.11.GURSON and BISO Example

The TB,BISO option can also be used to combine bilinear isotropic hardening with Gurson plasticity, as
shown in the following example:
q1=1.5
q2=1
q3=q1*q1
sigma_Y=E/300.0
Yield=1.0/sigma_Y
rone=1.0
rthree=3.0
f_0= 0.04
f_N= 0.04
S_N=0.1
strain_N=0.3
Power_N=0.1
tb,GURS,1,,5,BASE
tbdata,1,sigma_Y,f_0,q1,q2,q3
! Gurson's BASE model
tb,GURS,1,,3,SNNU
tbdata,1,f_N,strain_N,S_N
! Gurson's SNNU model
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,Yield, Power_N
! BISO TABLE
For information on the GURSON option, see Gurson's Model in the Element Reference, and Plastic
8.4.2.12.GURSON and MISO Example

The TB,MISO option can also be used to combine multilinear isotropic hardening with Gurson plasticity,
as shown in the following example:
Young=1000000
sigma_Y=Young/300.0
yield=1.0d0/sigma_Y/3.1415926
! define elastic Properties
mp,ex,1,Young
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
! Define Gurson's coefficients
q1=1.5
q2=1
q3=q1*q1
f_0= 0.000000
f_N= 0.04
S_N=0.1
strain_N=0.3
Power_N=0.1
f_c=0.15
f_F=0.25
! Gurson Model
tb,gurs,1,,5,BASE
! BASE DEFINED
tb,gurs,1,,3,SNNU
! SNNU DEFINED
tb,gurs,1,,2,COAL
tbdata,1,f_c,f_F
! COAL DEFINED
tb,miso,,,6
tbpt,,0.003333333,
tbpt,,0.018982279,
tbpt,,0.103530872,
tbpt,,0.562397597,
tbpt,,1.006031106,
tbpt,,2.934546576,
3333.333333
3966.666667
4700
5566.666667
5900
6566.666667
8.4.2.13.GURSON and PLAS (MISO) Example
The TB,PLAS ,,, MISO option can also be used to combine multilinear isotropic hardening with Gurson
plasticity, as shown in the following example:
q1=1.5
q2=1
q3=q1*q1
sigma_Y=E/300.0
Yield=1.0/sigma_Y
rone=1.0
rthree=3.0
f_0= 0.04
f_N= 0.04
S_N=0.1
strain_N=0.3
Power_N=0.1
tb,GURS,1,,5,BASE
tb,GURS,1,,3,SNNU
tb,plas,1,,4,miso
tbpt, defi, 0.0, Yield
tbpt, defi, 1, 10.0*Yield
8.4.2.14.NLISO and GURSON Example

The TB,NLISO option can also be used to combine nonlinear isotropic hardening with Gurson plasticity,
as shown in the following example:
q1=1.5
q2=1
q3=q1*q1
sigma_Y=E/300.0
Yield=1.0/sigma_Y
rone=1.0
rthree=3.0
f_0= 0.04
f_N= 0.04
S_N=0.1
strain_N=0.3
Power_N=0.1
tb,GURS,1,,5,BASE
tb,GURS,1,,3,SNNU
tb,nliso,1,1,2,POWER
tbdata,1,sigma_Y,power_N
8.4.2.15.RATE and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the
TB,RATE command to model viscoplasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
Reference, and Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
8.4.2.16.MISO and RATE Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
8.4.2.17.RATE and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example

isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with RATE-dependent viscoplasticity in the
following example:
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
8.4.2.18.RATE and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with the

MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
8.4.2.19.BISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with implicit
creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Element Reference, and
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
8.4.2.20.MISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity with
implicit creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.21.PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CREEP Example

isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with implicit CREEP in the following
example:
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.22.NLISO and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity with implicit
creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.23.BKIN and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear kinematic hardening plasticity with implicit
creep.
MP,EX,1,1e7
MP,NUXY,1,0.32
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1,
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLE
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.24.HILL and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear isotropic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,HILL,1,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,1,1.0402,1.24897,1.07895,1,1
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,0.9,0.94,1.124,0.97,0.9,0.9
! HILL TABLE
TB,BISO,1,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,461.0,374.586
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,400.0,325.0
! BISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Element Reference, and Plastic Material
Models in this chapter.
8.4.2.25.HILL and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear isotropic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.4.2.26.HILL and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example

isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with HILL anisotropic plasticity in the
following example:
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.4.2.27.HILL and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with nonlinear isotropic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.4.2.28.HILL and BKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear kinematic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.4.2.29.HILL and MKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear kinematic
hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,MKIN,1,5,5
! MKIN TABLE
TBTEMP,,strain
TBDATA,1,0.0015,0.006,0.04,0.08,0.1
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,45000,60000,90000,115000,120000
TBTEMP,400
TBDATA,1,41040,54720,82080,104880,109440
TBTEMP,650
TBDATA,1,37800,50400,75600,96600,100800
TBTEMP,800
TBDATA,1,34665,46220,69330,88588,92440
TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,31140,41520,62280,79580,83040
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,20.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,400.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,650.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
For information on the MKIN option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.30.HILL and KINH Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear kinematic
hardening.
MP,EX,1,20E6
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,KINH,1,,3
TBPT,,5E-5,1E3
TBPT,,0.01,2E3
TBPT,,0.60,6E4
! KINH TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.90,0.95
! HILL TABLE
For information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.31.HILL, and PLAS (Kinematic Hardening) Example

In addition to the TB,KINH example (above), you can also use material plasticity. The kinematic
hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,KINH is combined with HILL anisotropic plasticity in the following
example:
MP,EX,1,20E6
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,KINH
TBPT,,0.00000,1E3
TBPT,,9.90E-3,2E3
TBPT,,5.97E-1,6E4
! KINH TABLE
TB,HILL,1
For information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.32.HILL and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with Chaboche nonlinear
kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,400,3,0
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
8.4.2.33.HILL and BISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with bilinear isotropic hardening
and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.34.HILL and MISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with multilinear isotropic
hardening and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,185,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.35.HILL and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CHAB Example

isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with HILL anisotropic plasticity and
Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening in the following example:
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,185,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,0.998,380
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.36.HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining anisotropic plasticity with nonlinear isotropic
hardening and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXY,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
!
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
!
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,0.0,100.0,5
! NLISO TABLE
!
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.37.HILL and RATE and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with bilinear isotropic
hardening plasticity.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
!
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
!
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
!
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,BISO,1,
TBDATA,1,45000,760000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,2,,PERZYNA
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,0.1,0.3
TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,0.3,0.5
! RATE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
8.4.2.38.HILL and RATE and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with multilinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.39.HILL and RATE and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity with nonlinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
8.4.2.40.HILL and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
!
!
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.41.HILL, CREEP and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with bilinear isotropic
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950
!
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4
!
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393
!
!
!
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
8.4.2.42.HILL and CREEP and MISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with multilinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.43.HILL, CREEP and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) Example

isotropic hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with HILL anisotropic plasticity and implicit
CREEP in the following example:
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,1,,7,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.44.HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with nonlinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,20.0E5
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
8.4.2.45.HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep with bilinear kinematic
MP,EX,1,1e7
MP,NUXY,1,0.32
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLES
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.15,1.05,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0

8.4.2.46.Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example

This input listing illustrates the combination of implicit hyperelasticity and viscoelasticity.
c10=293
c01=177
TB,HYPER,1,,,MOON
TBDATA,1,c10,c01
a1=0.1
a2=0.2
a3=0.3
t1=10
t2=100
t3=1000
tb,prony,1,,3,shear
tbdata,1,a1,t1,a2,t2,a3,t3
!!!! type 1 is Mooney-Rivlin
! define Prony constants
For information on hyperelasticity, see Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference, and
Hyperelasticity Material Model in this chapter.
For information on the viscoelasticity, see Viscoelastic Material Constants in the Element Reference, and
Viscoelasticity in this chapter.
8.4.2.47.EDP and CREEP and PLAS (MISO) Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling Extended Drucker-Prager with implicit creep and
with multilinear hardening.
ys=100.0
alpha=0.1
!
!define edp for material 1
!
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,alpha,ys
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,alpha
!
!define miso hardening for material 1
!
tbpt,defi,0.0,ys
tbpt,defi,1,1000+ys
!
!define implicit creep for material 1
!
tb,creep,1,,4,1
tbdata,1,1.0e-2,0.5,0.5,0.0
/solu
KBC,0
nlgeom,on
cnvtol,F,1.0,1.0e-10
rate,on
outres,all,all
time,5
nsub,100,1000,10
solv
For information on the EDP option, see:

The EDP argument and associated specifications in the TB command documentation
Extended Drucker-Prager in the Element Reference
Extended Drucker-Prager Creep Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications
For information about the MISO and other material-hardening options, see Multilinear Isotropic
Hardening in the Element Reference, and Plastic Material Models in this chapter.
For information about the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Element Reference, and
8.4.2.48.CAP and CREEP and PLAS (MISO) Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling geomaterial cap with implicit creep and multilinear
hardening.
TB,EDP,1,,11,CYFUN
tbdata,
1,
1.0
tbdata,
2,
1.0
tbdata,
3,
-80
tbdata,
4,
10
tbdata,
5,
0.001
tbdata,
6,
2
tbdata,
7,
0.05
tbdata,
8,
1.0
tbdata,
9,
0.6
tbdata,
10,
3.0/1000
tbdata,
11,
0.0
tbpt,defi,0.0,8.0
tbpt,defi,1.0,100.0
tb,creep,1,,4,1
tbeo,capc,shea
tbdata,1,1.0e-4,0.6,0.4,0.0
tb,creep,1,,4,1
tbeo,capc,comp
tbdata,1,2.0e-2,0.5,0.5,0.0nlgeom,on
cnvtol,F,1.0,1.0e-10
rate,on
outres,all,all
time,5
nsub,100,1000,10
solv
For information about the cap model, see:

The TB,EDP command's cap model argument ( TBOPT ) and associated specifications.
EDP Cap Material Constants in the Element Reference.
Cap Creep Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
For information about the MISO and other material-hardening options, see Multilinear Isotropic
Hardening in the Element Reference, and Plastic Material Models in this chapter.
For information about the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Element Reference, and
8.5. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS
8.5.Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS

ANSYS employs an automatic solution control method that, based on the physics of your problem, sets
various nonlinear analysis controls to the appropriate values. If you are not satisfied with the results
obtained with these values, you can manually override the settings. The following commands are set to
optimal defaults:
ARCLEN
AUTOTS
CDWRITE
CNVTOL
CUTCONTROL
DELTIM
EQSLV
KBC
LNSRCH
LSWRITE
MONITOR
NEQIT
NROPT
NSUBST
OPNCONTROL
PRED
SSTIF
TINTP
These commands and the settings they control are discussed in later sections. You can also refer to the
individual command descriptions in the Command Reference.
If you do choose to override the ANSYS-specified settings, or if you wish to use an input list from a
previous release of ANSYS, issue SOLCONTROL,OFF in the /SOLU phase. See the SOLCONTROL
command description for more details.
ANSYS' automatic solution control is active for the following analyses:
Single-field nonlinear or transient structural and solid mechanics analysis where the solution DOFs
are combinations of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ.
Single-field nonlinear or transient thermal analysis where the solution DOF is TEMP.
Note: The Solution Controls dialog box, which is described later in this chapter, cannot be
used to set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you must use the
standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu
paths.
8.6.Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis

The procedure for performing a nonlinear static analysis consists of these tasks:
Build the Model
Apply the Loads
Solve the Analysis
Review the Results
Terminating a Running Job; Restarting

This step is essentially the same for both linear and nonlinear analyses, although a nonlinear analysis
might include special elements or nonlinear material properties. See Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status)
Elements, and Modeling Material Nonlinearities, for more details. If your analysis includes large-strain
effects, your stress-strain data must be expressed in terms of true stress and true (or logarithmic)
strain. For more information on building models in ANSYS, see the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
After you have created a model in ANSYS, you set solution controls (analysis type, analysis options, load
step options, and so on), apply loads, and solve. A nonlinear solution will differ from a linear solution in
that it often requires multiple load increments, and always requires equilibrium iterations. The general
procedure for performing these tasks follows. See Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) for a sample
problem that walks you through a specific nonlinear analysis.

Setting solution controls for a nonlinear analysis involves the same options and method of access (the
Solution Controls dialog box) as those used for a linear structural static analysis. For a nonlinear
analysis, the default settings in the Solution Controls dialog box are essentially the same settings
employed by the automatic solution control method described in Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS.
See the following sections in Structural Static Analysis , with exceptions noted:
Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box
Using the Basic Tab
The Transient Tab
Using the Sol'n Options Tab
Using the Nonlinear Tab
Using the Advanced NL Tab
8.6.2.1.Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations

Special considerations for setting these options in a nonlinear structural static analysis include:
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Large Displacement Static if you are performing
a new analysis. (But, keep in mind that not all nonlinear analyses will produce large deformations.
See Using Geometric Nonlinearities for further discussion of large deformations.) Choose Restart
Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis. You cannot change this
setting after the first load step (that is, after you issue your first SOLVE command). You will
usually choose to do a new analysis, rather than a restart. Restarts are discussed in the Basic
Analysis Guide .
When working with time settings, remember that these options can be changed at any load step.
See "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options. Advanced
time/frequency options, in addition to those available on the Solution Controls dialog box, are
discussed in Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box.
A nonlinear analysis requires multiple substeps (or time steps; the two terms are equivalent) within
each load step so that ANSYS can apply the specified loads gradually and obtain an accurate
solution. The NSUBST and DELTIM commands both achieve the same effect (establishing a load
step's starting, minimum, and maximum step size), but by reciprocal means. NSUBST defines the
number of substeps to be taken within a load step, whereas DELTIM defines the time step size
explicitly. If automatic time stepping is off [AUTOTS], then the starting substep size is used
throughout the load step.
OUTRES controls the data on the results file ( Jobname.RST). By default, only the last substep is
written to the results file in a nonlinear analysis.
Only 1000 results sets (substeps) can be written to the results file, but you can use the command
/CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see the Basic Analysis Guide ).
8.6.2.2.Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls

Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced analysis options that you can set
on the Solution Controls dialog box.
8.6.2.2.1.Equation Solver
ANSYS' automatic solution control activates the sparse direct solver (EQSLV,SPARSE) for most cases.
Other options include the PCG and ICCG solvers. For applications using solid elements, the PCG solver
may be faster, especially for 3-D modeling.
If using the PCG solver, you may be able to reduce memory usage via the MSAVE command. The
MSAVE command triggers an element-by-element approach for the parts of the model that use
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187 SOLID272, SOLID273, and/or SOLID285 elements with linear material
properties. (MSAVE does not support the layered option of the SOLID185 and SOLID186 elements.) To
use MSAVE, you must be performing a static or a modal analysis with PCG Lanczos enabled. When
using SOLID185, SOLID186, and/or SOLID187, only small strain (NLGEOM,OFF) analyses are allowed.
Other parts of the model that do not meet the above criteria are solved using global assembly for the
stiffness matrix. MSAVE,ON can result in a memory savings of up to 70 percent for the part of the
model that meets the criteria, although the solution time may increase depending on the capabilities of
your computer and the element options selected.
The sparse direct solver, in sharp contrast to the iterative solvers included in ANSYS, is a robust solver.
Although the PCG solver can solve indefinite matrix equations, when the PCG solver encounters an illconditioned matrix, the solver will iterate to the specified number of iterations and stop if it fails to
converge. When this happens, it triggers bisection. After completing the bisection, the solver continues
the solution if the resulting matrix is well-conditioned. Eventually, the entire nonlinear load step can be
solved.
Use the following guidelines for selecting either the sparse or the PCG solver for nonlinear structural
analysis:
If it is a beam/shell or beam/shell and solid structure, choose the sparse direct solver.
If it is a 3-D solid structure and the number of DOF is relatively large (that is, 200,000 or more
DOF), choose the PCG solver.

If the problem is ill-conditioned (triggered by poor element shapes), or has a big difference in
material properties in different regions of the model, or has insufficient displacement boundary
constraints, choose the sparse direct solver.
8.6.2.3.Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls
Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced load step options that you can
set on the Solution Controls dialog box.
8.6.2.3.1.Automatic Time Stepping

ANSYS' automatic solution control turns automatic time stepping on [AUTOTS,ON]. An internal autotime step scheme ensures that the time step variation is neither too aggressive (resulting in many
bisection/cutbacks) nor too conservative (time step size is too small). At the end of a time step, the size
of the next time step is predicted based on four factors:
Number of equilibrium iterations used in the last time step (more iterations cause the time step
size to be reduced)
Predictions for nonlinear element status change (time step sizes are decreased when a status
change is imminent)
Size of the plastic strain increment
Size of the creep strain increment
8.6.2.3.2.Convergence Criteria
The program will continue to do equilibrium iterations until the convergence criteria [CNVTOL] are
satisfied (or until the maximum number of equilibrium equations is reached [NEQIT]). You can define
custom criteria if the default settings are not suitable.
ANSYS' automatic solution control uses L2-norm of force (and moment) tolerance ( TOLER ) equal to
0.5%, a setting that is appropriate for most cases. In most cases, an L2-norm check on displacement
with TOLER equal to 5% is also used in addition to the force norm check. The check that the
displacements are loosely set serves as a double-check on convergence.
By default, the program will check for force (and, when rotational degrees of freedom are active,
moment) convergence by comparing the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of the force imbalances
against the product of VALUE *TOLER . The default value of VALUE is the SRSS of the applied loads (or, for
applied displacements, of the Newton-Raphson restoring forces), or MINREF (which defaults to 0.01),
whichever is greater. The default value of TOLER is 0.005. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, TOLER defaults to 0.001
and MINREF defaults to 1.0 for force convergence.
You should almost always use force convergence checking. You can also add displacement (and, when
applicable, rotation) convergence checking. For displacements, the program bases convergence checking
on the change in deflections (u) between the current (i) and the previous (i-1) iterations: u=u i-ui-1 .
Note: If you explicitly define any custom convergence criteria [CNVTOL], the entire
default criteria will be overwritten. Thus, if you define displacement convergence
checking, you will have to redefine force convergence checking. (Use multiple
CNVTOL commands to define multiple convergence criteria.)
Using tighter convergence criteria will improve the accuracy of your results, but at the cost of more
equilibrium iterations. If you want to tighten (or loosen, which is not recommended) your criteria, you
should change TOLER by one or two orders of magnitude. In general, you should continue to use the
default value of VALUE ; that is, change the convergence criteria by adjusting TOLER , not VALUE . You
should make certain that the default value of MINREF = 0.001 makes sense in the context of your
analysis. If your analysis uses certain sets of units or has very low load levels, you might want to specify
a smaller value for MINREF.
Also, we do not recommend putting two or more disjointed structures into one model for a nonlinear
analysis because the convergence check tries to relate these disjointed structures, often producing some
unwanted residual force.
Checking Convergence in a Single and Multi-DOF System

To check convergence in a single degree of freedom (DOF) system, you compute the force (and
moment) imbalance for the one DOF, and compare this value against the established convergence
criteria ( VALUE *TOLER ). (You can also perform a similar check for displacement (and rotation)
convergence for your single DOF.) However, in a multi-DOF system, you might want to use a different
method of comparison.
The ANSYS program provides three different vector norms to use for convergence checking:
The infinite norm repeats the single-DOF check at each DOF in your model.
The L1 norm compares the convergence criterion against the sum of the absolute values of force
(and moment) imbalance for all DOFs.
The L2 norm performs the convergence check using the square root sum of the squares of the
force (and moment) imbalances for all DOFs. (Of course, additional L1 or L2 checking can be
performed for a displacement convergence check.)
Example
For the following example, the substep will be considered to be converged if the out-ofbalance force (checked at each DOF separately) is less than or equal to 5000*0.0005 (that
is, 2.5), and if the change in displacements (checked as the square root sum of the squares)
is less than or equal to 10*0.001 (that is, 0.01).
CNVTOL,F,5000,0.0005,0
CNVTOL,U,10,0.001,2
8.6.2.3.3.Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations

ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the value of NEQIT to between 15 and 26 iterations, depending
upon the physics of the problem. The idea is to employ a small time step with fewer quadratically
converging iterations.
This option limits the maximum number of equilibrium iterations to be performed at each substep
(default = 25 if solution control is off). If the convergence criteria have not been satisfied within this
number of equilibrium iterations, and if auto time stepping is on [AUTOTS], the analysis will attempt to
bisect. If bisection is not possible, then the analysis will either terminate or move on to the next load
step, according to the instructions you issue in the NCNV command.
8.6.2.3.4.Predictor-Corrector Option
ANSYS' automatic solution control will set PRED,ON if there are no SOLID65 elements present. If the
time step size is reduced greatly in the current substep, PRED is turned off. For transient analysis, the
predictor is also turned off.
You can activate a predictor on the DOF solution for the first equilibrium iteration of each substep. This
feature accelerates convergence and is particularly useful if nonlinear response is relatively smooth, as in
the case of ramped loads.
8.6.2.3.5.VT Accelerator
This option selects an advanced predictor-corrector algorithm based on Variational Technology to reduce
the overall number of iterations [STAOPT,VT for static analyses, TRNOPT,VT for transient]. It is
applicable to analyses that include large deflection [NLGEOM], hyperelasticity, viscoelasticity, and creep
nonlinearities. Rate-independent plasticity and nonlinear contact analyses may not show any
improvement in convergence rates; however, you may choose this option with these nonlinearities if you
wish to rerun the analysis with changes to the input parameters later.
8.6.2.3.6.Line Search Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will toggle line search on and off as needed. For most contact
problems, LNSRCH is toggled on. For most non-contact problems, LNSRCH is toggled off.
This convergence-enhancement tool multiplies the calculated displacement increment by a programcalculated scale factor (having a value between 0 and 1), whenever a stiffening response is detected.
Because the line search algorithm is intended to be an alternative to the adaptive descent option
[NROPT], adaptive descent is not automatically activated if the line search option is on. We do not
recommend activating both line search and adaptive descent simultaneously.
When an imposed displacement exists, a run cannot converge until at least one of the iterations has a
line search value of 1. ANSYS scales the entireU vector, including the imposed displacement value;
otherwise, a "small" displacement would occur everywhere except at the imposed DOF. Until one of the
iterations has a line search value of 1, ANSYS does not impose the full value of the displacement.
8.6.2.3.7.Cutback Criteria
For finer control over bisections and cutback in time step size, use [CUTCONTROL, Lab , VALUE , Option].
By default, for Lab = PLSLIMIT (maximum plastic strain increment limit), VALUE is set to 15%. This field
is set to such a large value for avoiding unnecessary bisections caused by high plastic strain due to a
local singularity which is not normally of interest to the user. For explicit creep ( Option = 0), Lab =
CRPLIM (creep increment limit) and VALUE is set to 10%. This is a reasonable limit for creep analysis. For
implicit creep ( Option = 1), there is no maximum creep criteria by default. You can however, specify any
creep ratio control. The number of points per cycle for second order dynamic equations ( Lab = NPOINT)
is set to VALUE = 13 by default to gain efficiency at little cost to accuracy.
8.6.3.Set Additional Solution Options

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These options do not appear
on the Solution Controls dialog box because they are used infrequently, and their default settings rarely
need to be changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these options
for those cases in which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
8.6.3.1.Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls

Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced analysis options that you can set for your analysis. As
noted above in Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set
the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution
commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.6.3.1.1.Stress Stiffness
To account for buckling, bifurcation behavior, ANSYS includes stress stiffness in all geometrically
nonlinear analyses. If you are confident of ignoring such effects, you can turn stress stiffening off
(SSTIF,OFF). This command has no effect when used with several ANSYS elements; see the Element
Reference for the description of the specific elements you are using.
Command(s):
GUI:
SSTIF
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
8.6.3.1.2.Newton-Raphson Option
ANSYS' automatic solution control uses the FULL Newton-Raphson option with adaptive descent off if
there is a nonlinearity present. However, when node-to-node, node-to-surface contact elements are
used for contact analysis with friction, then adaptive descent is automatically turned on. The underlying
contact elements require adaptive descent for convergence.
Command(s):
GUI:
NROPT
Valid only in a nonlinear analysis, this option specifies how often the tangent matrix is updated during
solution. The default behavior (NROPT,AUTO) allows the program to decide based on the kinds of
nonlinearities present in your model, and adaptive descent is activated automatically when appropriate.
The following additional options are available:
Full (NROPT,FULL):
The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix is updated at
every equilibrium iteration.
If adaptive descent is on (optional), the program will use the tangent stiffness matrix only as long
as the iterations remain stable (that is, as long as the residual decreases, and no negative main
diagonal pivot occurs). If divergent trends are detected on an iteration, the program discards the
divergent iteration and restarts the solution, using a weighted combination of the secant and
tangent stiffness matrices. When the iterations return to a convergent pattern, the program will
resume using the tangent stiffness matrix. Activating adaptive descent will usually enhance the
program's ability to obtain converged solutions for complicated nonlinear problems but is
supported only for elements indicated under "Special Features" in the Input Summary table (Table
4.n.1 for an element, where n is the element number) in the Element Reference.
Modified (NROPT,MODI):
The program uses the modified Newton-Raphson technique, in which the tangent stiffness matrix is
updated at each substep. The matrix is not changed during equilibrium iterations at a substep. This
option is not applicable to large-deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
Initial Stiffness (NROPT,INIT):
The program uses the initial stiffness matrix in every equilibrium iteration. This option can be less
likely to diverge than the full option, but it often requires more iterations to achieve convergence.
It is not applicable to large-deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
Full with unsymmetric matrix (NROPT,UNSYM):

The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix is updated at
every equilibrium iteration. In addition, it generates and uses unsymmetric matrices that you can
use for any of the following:
If you are running a pressure-driven collapse analysis, an unsymmetric pressure load
stiffness might be helpful in obtaining convergence. You can include pressure load stiffness
using SOLCONTROL,INCP.
If you are defining an unsymmetric material model using TB,USER, you would need
NROPT,UNSYM to fully use the property you defined.
If you are running a contact analysis, an unsymmetric contact stiffness matrix would fully
couple the sliding and the normal stiffnesses. See Determining Contact Stiffness and
Allowable Penetration in the Contact Technology Guide for details.
You should first try NROPT,FULL; then try NROPT,UNSYM if you experience convergence
difficulties. (Using an unsymmetric solver requires more computer time to obtain a solution than if
you use a symmetric solver.)
If a multistatus element is in the model, it is updated at the iteration in which it changes status,
irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option.
8.6.3.2.Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls
Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced load step options that you can set for your analysis. As
noted above in Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set
the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution
commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.6.3.2.1.Creep Criteria
If your structure exhibits creep behavior, you can specify a creep criterion for automatic time step
adjustment [CRPLIM,CRCR , Option]. (If automatic time stepping [AUTOTS] is off, this creep criterion
will have no effect.) The program will compute the ratio of creep strain increment ( cr, the change in
creep strain in the last time step) to the elastic strain ( el), for all elements. If the maximum ratio is
greater than the criterion CRCR , the program will then decrease the next time step size; if it is less, the
program might increase the next time step size. (The program will also base automatic time stepping on
the number of equilibrium iterations, impending element status change, and plastic strain increment.
The time step size will be adjusted to the minimum size calculated for any of these items.) For explicit
creep ( Option = 0), if the ratio cr / el is above the stability limit of 0.25, and if the time increment
cannot be decreased, a divergent solution is possible and the analysis will be terminated with an error
message. This problem can be avoided by making the minimum time step size sufficiently small
[DELTIM and NSUBST]. For implicit creep ( Option = 1), there is no maximum creep limit by default.
You can however, specify any creep ratio control.
Command(s):
GUI:
CRPLIM
Creep Criterion
Note: If you do not want to include the effects of creep in your analysis, use the RATE
command with Option = OFF, or set the time steps to be longer than the previous
time step, but not more than 1.0e-6 longer.
8.6.3.2.2.Time Step Open Control

This option is available for thermal analysis. (Remember that you cannot perform a thermal analysis
using the Solution Controls dialog box; you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution commands or
the standard corresponding menu paths instead.) This option's primary use is in unsteady state thermal
analysis where the final temperature stage reaches a steady state. In such cases, the time step can be
opened quickly. The default is that if the TEMP increment is smaller than 0.1 in three (NUMSTEP = 3)
contiguous substeps, the time step size can be "opened-up" (value = 0.1 by default). The time step size
can then be opened continuously for greater solution efficiency.
Command(s):
GUI:
OPNCONTROL
Open Control
8.6.3.2.3.Solution Monitoring
This option provides a facility to monitor a solution value at a specified node in a specified DOF. The
command also provides a means to quickly review the solution convergence efficiency, rather than
attempting to gather this information from a lengthy output file. For instance, if an excessive number of
attempts were made for a substep, the information contained in the file provides hints to either reduce
the initial time step size or increase the minimum number of substeps allowed through the NSUBST
command to avoid an excessive number of bisections.
Command(s):
GUI:
MONITOR
Monitor
Additionally, the NLHIST command allows you to monitor results of interest in real time during solution.
Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or reaction forces at
specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific elements
to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available. The result data are written to a file named
Jobname.nlh.
You can also track results during batch runs. To execute, either access the ANSYS Launcher and select
File Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist130 in the command line. Use the supplied file
browser to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and select it to invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this
utilty to read the file at any time, even after the solution is complete.
Command(s):
GUI:
NLHIST
Main Menu> Solution> Results Tracking
Note: Results tracking is not available with FLOTRAN analyses.
8.6.3.2.4.Birth and Death

Specify birth and death options as necessary. You can deactivate [EKILL] and reactivate [EALIVE]
selected elements to model the removal or addition of material in your structure. As an alternative to
the standard birth and death method, you can change the material properties for selected elements
[MPCHG] between load steps.
Command(s): EKILL,
EALIVE
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Birth & Death> Kill
Elements
GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Birth & Death> Activate
Elem
The program "deactivates" an element by multiplying its stiffness by a very small number (which is set
by the ESTIF command), and by removing its mass from the overall mass matrix. Element loads
(pressure, heat flux, thermal strains, and so on) for inactive elements are also set to zero. You need to
define all possible elements during preprocessing; you cannot create new elements in SOLUTION.
Those elements to be "born" in later stages of your analysis should be deactivated before the first load
step, and then reactivated at the beginning of the appropriate load step. When elements are reactivated,
they have a zero strain state, and (if NLGEOM,ON) their geometric configuration (length, area, and so
on) is updated to match the current displaced positions of their nodes. See the Advanced Analysis
Techniques Guide for more information on birth and death.
Another way to affect element behavior during solution is to change the material property reference
number for selected elements:
Command(s):
GUI:
MPCHG
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Change
Mat Num
Note: Use MPCHG with caution. Changing material properties in a nonlinear analysis may
produce unintended results, particularly if you change nonlinear [TB] material
properties.
8.6.3.2.5.Output Control
In addition to OUTRES, which you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box, there are several other
output control options that you can set for an analysis:
Command(s): OUTPR,
ERESX
Solu Printout
GUI:
Integration Pt
Printed output [OUTPR] includes any results data on the output file ( Jobname.OUT).
Extrapolation of results [ERESX] copies an element's integration point stress and elastic strain results to
the nodes instead of extrapolating them, if nonlinear strains (plasticity, creep, swelling) are present in
the element. The integration point nonlinear strains are always copied to the nodes.
See "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options.
Apply loads on the model. See Structural Static Analysis in this guide and "Loading" in the Basic Analysis
Guide for load information. Remember that inertia and point loads will maintain constant direction, but
surface loads will "follow" the structure in a large-deformation analysis. You can apply complex
boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table (TABLE type array parameter). See Applying
Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in this guide for more information.
8.6.5.Solve the Analysis

You solve a nonlinear analysis using the same commands and procedure as you do in solving a linear
static analysis. See Solve the Analysis in Structural Static Analysis . If you need to define multiple load
steps, you must respecify time settings, load step options, and so on, and then save and solve for each
of the additional load steps. Other methods for multiple load steps - the load step file method and the
array parameter method - are described in the Basic Analysis Guide .

Results from a nonlinear static analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains, and reaction
forces. You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history
postprocessor.
Remember that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that
substep should have been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option command OUTRES controls
which substep results are stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described
below.
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was
calculated.
8.6.6.2.Reviewing Results in POST1

1. Verify from your output file ( Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
If not, you probably will not want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why
convergence failed.
If your solution converged, then continue postprocessing.
2. Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST1
Main Menu> General Postproc
3. Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and
substep numbers or by time. (Note, however, that arc-length results should not be identified by
time.)
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
You can also use the SUBSET or APPEND commands to read in or merge results data for
selected portions of the model only. The LIST argument on any of these commands lists the
available solutions on the results file. You can also limit the amount of data written from the results
file to the database through the INRES command. Additionally, you can use the ETABLE
command to store result items for selected elements. See the individual command descriptions in
the Command Reference for more information.
Caution: If you specify a TIME value for which no results are available, the ANSYS
program performs a linear interpolation to calculate the results at that
value of TIME. Realize that this interpolation usually causes some loss of
accuracy in a nonlinear analysis (see Figure 8.20). Therefore, for a
nonlinear analysis, you should usually postprocess at a TIME that
corresponds exactly to the desired substep.
Figure8.20Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error
4. Display the results using any of the following options:

Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
In a large-deformation analysis, you might prefer to use a true scale display [/DSCALE,,1].
PLESOL
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu
GUI:
or Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. If you have
adjacent elements with different material behavior (such as can occur with plastic or multilinear
elastic material properties, with different material types, or with adjacent deactivated and activated
elements), you should take care to avoid nodal stress averaging errors in your results. Selecting
logic (described in the Basic Analysis Guide ) provides a means of avoiding such errors.
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape
on the display.
You can also contour element table data and line element data:
Command(s): PLETAB,
PLLS
Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table
GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem
Res
Use PLETAB to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element data.
PRRSOL (reaction data)
Command(s):
PRETAB
PRITER (substep summary data), and so on.
NSORT
ESORT
GUI:
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, report quality listings, and so
on - are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide
for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.

You can also review the load-history response of a nonlinear structure using POST26, the time-history
postprocessor. Use POST26 to compare one ANSYS variable against another. For instance, you might
graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of applied load, or you might list the
plastic strain at a node and the corresponding TIME value. A typical POST26 postprocessing sequence
might follow these steps:
1. Verify from your output file ( Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all desired load
steps. You should not base design decisions on unconverged results.
2. If your solution converged, enter POST26. If your model is not currently in the database, issue
RESUME.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST26
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro
3. Define the variables to be used in your postprocessing session. The SOLU command will cause
various iteration and convergence parameters to be read into the database, where you can
incorporate them into your postprocessing.
Command(s): NSOL,
ESOL,
RFORCE
GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
4. Graph or list the variables.

Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables)
PRVAR
EXTREM (list variables)
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST26. See "The Time-History Postprocessor
(POST26)" in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, NSUBST, AUTOTS, KBC, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV,
PRED, OUTRES, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
8.6.7.Terminating a Running Job; Restarting

You can stop a nonlinear analysis by creating an "abort" file ( Jobname.ABT). See "Solution" in the Basic
Analysis Guide for details. The program will also stop upon successful completion of the solution, or if a
convergence failure occurs.
You can often restart an analysis if it successfully completed one or more iterations before it terminated.
Restart procedures are covered in Restarting an Analysis in the Basic Analysis Guide .
8.7.Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

Many of the tasks that you need to perform in a nonlinear transient analysis are the same as (or similar
to) those that you perform in nonlinear static analyses (described in Performing a Nonlinear Static
Analysis) and linear full transient dynamic analyses (described in Structural Static Analysis ). However,
this section describes some additional considerations for performing a nonlinear transient analysis.
Remember that the Solution Controls dialog box, which is the method described in Performing a
Nonlinear Static Analysis, cannot be used to set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you
must use the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.

This step is the same as for a nonlinear static analysis. However, if your analysis includes timeintegration effects, be sure to include a value for mass density [MP,DENS]. If you want to, you can also
define material-dependent structural damping [MP,DAMP].
8.7.2.Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

1. Specify transient analysis type and define analysis options as you would for a nonlinear static
analysis:
New Analysis or Restart [ANTYPE]
Analysis Type: Transient [ANTYPE]
Large Deformation Effects [NLGEOM]
Large Displacement Transient (if using the Solution Controls dialog box to set analysis type)
2. Apply loads and specify load step options in the same manner as you would for a linear full
transient dynamic analysis. A transient load history usually requires multiple load steps, with the
first load step typically used to establish initial conditions (see the Basic Analysis Guide ). The
general, nonlinear, birth and death, and output control options available for a nonlinear static
analysis are also available for a nonlinear transient analysis.
In a nonlinear transient analysis, time must be greater than zero. See Transient Dynamic Analysis
for procedures for defining nonzero initial conditions.
For a nonlinear transient analysis, you must specify whether you want stepped or ramped loads
[KBC]. See the Basic Analysis Guide for further discussion about ramped vs. stepped loads.
You can also specify dynamics options: alpha and beta damping, time-integration effects, and
transient integration parameters.
ALPHAD,
Command(s): BETAD,
TIMINT,
TINTP
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Transient Tab)
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts>
GUI:
An explanation of the dynamics options follows.
Damping
Rayleigh damping constants are defined using the constant mass [ALPHAD] and stiffness
[BETAD] matrix multipliers. In a nonlinear analysis the stiffness may change drastically - do
not use BETAD, except with care. See Damping for details about damping.
Time-Integration Effects [TIMINT]
Time-integration effects are ON by default in a transient analysis. For creep, viscoelasticity,
viscoplasticity, or swelling, you should turn the time-integration effects off (that is, use a
static analysis). These time-dependent effects are usually not included in dynamic analyses
because the transient dynamic time step sizes are often too short for any significant amount
of long-term deformation to occur.
Except in kinematic (rigid-body motion) analyses, you will rarely need to adjust the transient
integration parameters [TINTP], which provide numerical damping to the Newmark and HHT
methods. (See your Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
for more information about these parameters.)
ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the defaults to a new time-integration scheme for use
by first order transient equations. This is typically used for unsteady state thermal problems
where = 1.0 (set by SOLCONTROL, ON); this is the backward Euler scheme. It is
unconditionally stable and more robust for highly nonlinear thermal problems such as phase
changes. The oscillation limit tolerance defaults to 0.0, so that the response first order
eigenvalues can be used to more precisely determine a new time step value.
Note: If you are using the Solution Controls dialog box to set solution controls, you
can access all of these options [ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIMINT, TINTP,
TRNOPT] on the Transient tab.
3. Write load data for each load step to a load step file.
Command(s):
GUI:
LSWRITE
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File

Command(s):
GUI:
SAVE
Utility Menu> File> Save As
5. Start solution calculations. Other methods for multiple load steps are described in "Getting Started
with ANSYS" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
Command(s):
GUI:
LSSOLVE
Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files
6. After you have solved all load steps, leave SOLUTION.

Command(s):
GUI:
FINISH
As in a nonlinear static analysis, you can use POST1 to postprocess results at a specific moment in time.
Procedures are much the same as described previously for nonlinear static analyses. Again, you should
verify that your solution has converged before you attempt to postprocess the results.
Time-history postprocessing using POST26 is essentially the same for nonlinear as for linear transient
analyses. See the postprocessing procedures outlined in Transient Dynamic Analysis .
More details of postprocessing procedures can be found in the Basic Analysis Guide .
8.8. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
8.8.Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

A sample input listing for a nonlinear transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model:
/PREP7
--! Similar to a linear full transient model, with
--! these possible additions: nonlinear material
--! properties, nonlinear elements
--FINISH
!
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution:
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANS
! TRNOPT,FULL by default
--! Establish initial conditions as in linear full
--! transient analysis
LSWRITE
! Initial-condition load step
NLGEOM,ON
! Nonlinear geometric effects (large deformations)
SSTIF,ON
! Stress stiffening effects
! NROPT=AUTO by default: Program will choose appropriate Newton-Raphson and
! Adaptive Descent options, depending on
! nonlinearities encountered
! Loads:
F,...
D,...
! Load Step Options:
TIME,...
! TIME at end of load step
DELTIM,...
! Time step controls (starting, min, max)
AUTOTS,ON
! Automatic time stepping, including bisection
! KBC=0 by default (ramped loading)
! Dynamic Options:
ALPHAD,...
! Mass damping
TIMINT,ON
! TIMINT,ON by default, unless you turned it OFF for
! initial-condition load step
! Nonlinear Options:
CNVTOL,...
! Convergence criteria
! NEQIT=25 by default
NCNV,,,...
! Nonconvergence termination controls
PRED,ON
! Predictor ON
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
! Results for every substep written to database
LSWRITE
! First "real" transient load step
--! Additional load steps, as needed
--LSSOLVE,1,3
! Initiate multiple l.s. solution
SAVE
FINISH
!
! Review the Results:
/POST26
! Time-History Postprocessor
SOLU,2,CNVG
! Check convergence
SOLU,3,FOCV
PRVAR,2,3
NSOL,...
! Store results (displacements, stresses, etc.) as
! variables
PLVAR,...
! Graph results vs. TIME to evaluate general quality
! of analysis, determine critical time step, etc.
FINISH
!
/POST1
! General Postprocessor
SET,...
! Read results from desired time step
PLDISP,...
! Postprocess as desired
PLNSOL,...
NSORT,...
PRNSOL,...
FINISH
See the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, LSWRITE, NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, DELTIM, AUTOTS, KBC,
ALPHAD, TIMINT, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, and SOLU command
8.9. Restarts
8.9.Restarts
Restart procedures for a transient analysis are essentially the same as for a static analysis; see
Restarting an Analysis in the Basic Analysis Guide .
5.9.Restarting an Analysis
Occasionally, you may need to restart an analysis after the initial run has been completed. For example,
you may want to add more load steps to the analysis. These may be additional loading conditions in a
linear static analysis or additional portions of a time-history loading curve in a transient analysis. Or, you
may need to recover from a convergence failure in a nonlinear analysis.
ANSYS allows a multiframe restart for structural static, structural transient (full or mode-superposition
methods), and thermal analyses. Distributed ANSYS supports multiframe restarts for nonlinear and full
transient analyses. You can also re-run a VT Accelerator analysis using information available from a
previous run.
The multiframe restart can resume a job at any point in the analysis for which information is saved,
allowing you to perform multiple analyses of a model and gives you more options for recovering from an
abnormal termination.
Rerunning an analysis completed with VT Accelerator can reduce the number of iterations needed to
obtain the solution for all load steps and substeps. Rerunning a VT Accelerator analysis is described in
VT Accelerator Re-run.
Requirements for Performing an Analysis Restart
The model must meet the following conditions to restart an analysis:
The analysis type must be either static (steady-state), harmonic (2-D magnetic only), thermal,
thermal-structural, or transient (full and mode superposition methods only). No other analysis can
be restarted.
At least one iteration must have been completed in the initial run.
The initial run should not have stopped due to a "killed" job, system break, or system crash.
You performed your initial analysis and generated the restart file under the same ANSYS version
number.
5.9.1.Multiframe Restart
If you are performing a nonlinear static or full transient structural analysis, or a static or transient
thermal or thermal-structural analysis, ANSYS by default sets up the parameters for a multiframe restart.
Multiframe restart allows you to save analysis information at many substeps during a run, then restart
the run at one of those substeps. Before running your initial analysis, you should use the RESCONTROL
command to set up the frequency at which restart files are saved within each load step of the run.
When you need to restart a job, use the ANTYPE command to specify the restart point and type of
restart. You can continue the job from the restart point (making any corrections necessary), or you can
terminate a load step at the restart point (rescaling all of the loading) then continue with the next load
step.
The sample input listing below shows how to set up the restart file parameters in an analysis then
restart the analysis, continuing from a specified load step and substep.
! Restart run:
/prep7
et,1,42,,,
mp,ex,1,10
mp,alpx,1,0.1
mp,alpy,1,0.1
mp,alpx,1,0.1
mp,nuxy,1,0.2
!Define nodes and elements
n,1
n,2,1
n,3,1,1
n,4,,1
n,5,2
n,6,2,1
e,1,2,3,4
e,2,5,6,3
finish
/solu
rescontrol,,all,1,5
!For all load steps, write the restart

!file .Rnnn at every substep, but allow
!a maximum of 5 restart files per load step
!Large strain analysis with temperature loadings
nlgeom,on
nsubst,6,6,6
d,1,all
d,2,uy
outres,all,all
solve
bfe,1,temp,1,1
bfe,2,temp,1,5
solve
rescontrol,file_summary
finish
/post1
set,last
presol
finish
/solu
antyp,,rest,1,3
!List information contained in all the

!.Rnnn files for this job
!Restart the analysis at load step 1,

!substep 3
solve
finish
/post1
set,last
prnsol
presol
finish
The sample input listing below shows how to terminate a load step at a particular substep, then
continue with the next load step.
/solu
antype,,rest,1,3,endstep !End load step 1 at substep 3
!when time (load factor) = 0.6125
!ldstep = 1, substep = 3, load
solve
!execute ENDSTEP, loads are
!rescaled to time = 0.6125
bfe,1,temp,1,2
!apply higher loads,
bfe,2,temp,1,6
solve
!execute solve to advance load
!factor from previous
!time = 0.6125 to time = 1.6125
/post1
set,last
presol
finish
The sample input listing below shows how to restart an analysis with old and new parameters.
/title, Multiframe Restart with Tabular Load.
/prep7
et,1,42
! Build model
n,1,0.0,0.0
n,2,0.0,0.5
n,3,0.0,1.0
n,4,1.0,0.0
n,5,1.0,0.5
n,6,1.0,1.0
e, 1,4,5,2
e, 2,5,6,3
mp,ex,1,1000.0
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
mp,alpx,1,1.e-4
d,1,all
d,2,ux,0.0
d,3,ux,0.0
d,4,uy,0.0
*dim,ftbl,table,4,1,,time
! Make tabular point load
ftbl(1,0)=1,2,3,4
ftbl(1,1)=2.5,5.0,7.5,10.0
nsel,all
f,all,fx,%ftbl%
flist
/solu
rescont,,all,all
nlgeo,on
time,4
DELTIM,1
outres,all,all
solve
! Apply it to all nodes
! Save all substeps for possible restart
! Solve with point loads and the *.RDB file is saved

! at the moment. The parameterized tabular point load
! FTBL is also saved into *.RDB
*dim,temtbl,table,4,1,,time ! Define table TEMTBL and use it for body load: temperature
temtbl(1,0)=1,2,3,4
temtbl(1,1)=250,500.0,750,1000.
! bf,all,TEMP,%temtbl%
! May use this to apply the body load table
! bflist
parsave,all,moreload
! Save all the APDL parameters and tables to file: moreload
! NOTE: *.RDB does not have information of table TEMTBL.
fini
/clear, nostart
/solu
ANTYPE,,RESTART,1,3,endstep
! Do restart ENDSTEP because we want to apply TEMTBL at

! TIME = 3.5 (LDSTEP=1,SUBSTEP=3) because we want to
! Apply the temperature load from TIME=3.5 onwards.
! Here, RESTART has resumed *.RDB database where the
! Table FTBL is saved.
solve
! Activate ENDSTEP
parresu,,moreload
!
!
!
!
*status
bf,all,TEMP,%temtbl%
bflist
time,4
! List all the ADPL information available at this point

! Apply temperature table load TEMTBL
For further load step, we want to apply table TEMTBL

as body force. NOTE: table TEMTBL is not in *.RDB. Therefore,
we have to use PARRESU command. APDL file "moreload" is
saved earlier.
! Solve up to TIME = 4.0 because the load step ENDSTEP only

! carries up to TIME = 3.5
solve
fini
/post1
set,last
prdis
prrsol
fini
The sample below demonstrates a restart after changing boundary conditions.

/prep7
et,1,21
r,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
n,1
e,1
fini
/solu
antyp,trans
timint,off
time,.1
nsub,2
kbc,0
d,1,ux,100
solve
timint,on
ddele,1,ux
! to apply initial velocity (IC command is preferred)
! this requires special handling by multi-frame restart

! if a reaction force exists at this dof, replace it with an
equal
! force using the endstop option
time,.2
nsub,5
rescontrol,define,all,1
outres,nsol,1
solve
fini
! request possible restart from any substep
/solu
antyp,,restart,2,3
solution
ddele,1,ux
solve
fini
/post26
nsol,2,1,ux
prvar,2
fini
/exit
! this command resumes the .rdb database created at the start of

! (restart from substep 3)
! re-specify boundary condition deleted during solution
! results show constant velocity through restart
Note: If you are using the Solution Controls dialog box to do a static or full transient
analysis, you can specify basic multiframe restart options on the dialog's Sol'n
Options tab. These options include the maximum number of restart files that you
want ANSYS to write for a load step, as well as how frequently you want the files
to be written. For an overview of the Solution Controls dialog box, see Using
Special Solution Controls for Certain Types of Structural Analyses. For details about
how to set options on the Solution Controls dialog box, access the dialog box
(Main Menu> Solution> Sol'n Control), select the tab that you are interested
in, and click the Help button.
5.9.1.1.Multiframe Restart Requirements

The following files are necessary to do a multiframe restart:
- This is an ANSYS database file saved automatically at the first iteration of the first
load step, first substep of a job. This file provides a complete description of the solution with all
initial conditions, and will remain unchanged regardless of how many restarts are done for a
particular job. When running a job, you should input all information needed for the solution including parameters (APDL), components, and mandatory solution setup information - before you
issue the first SOLVE. If you do not specify parameters before issuing the first SOLVE command,
the parameters will not be saved in the .RDB file. In this case, you must use PARSAV before you
begin the solution and PARRES during the restart to save and restore the parameters. If the
information stored in the .RDB file is not sufficient to perform the restart, you must input the
additional information in the restart session before issuing the SOLVE command.
Jobname.RDB
- This is the load history file for the specified job. This file is an ASCII file similar to
files created by LSWRITE and stores all loading and boundary conditions for each load step. The
loading and boundary conditions are stored for the FE mesh. Loading and boundary conditions
applied to the solid model are transferred to the FE mesh before storing in the Jobname.LDHI.
When doing a multiframe restart, ANSYS reads the loading and boundary conditions for the restart
load step from this file (similar to an LSREAD command). In general, you need the loading and
boundary conditions for two contiguous load steps because of the ramped load conditions for a
restart. You cannot modify this file because any modifications may cause an unexpected restart
condition. This file is modified at the end of each load step or when an
ANTYPE,,REST,LDSTEP,SUBSTEP,ENDSTEP command is encountered. For tabular loads or boundary
conditions, you should ensure that the APDL parameter tables are available at restart.
Jobname.LDHI
- For nonlinear static and full transient analyses. This file contains element saved
records similar to the .ESAV or .OSAV files. This file also contains all solution commands and status
for a particular substep of a load step. All of the .Rnnn files are saved at the converged state of a
substep so that all element saved records are valid. If a substep does not converge, no .Rnnn file
will be written for that substep. Instead, an .Rnnn file from a previously converged substep is
written. However, if the current substep number is 1, the .Rnnn file will be from the last substep of
the previous load step.
Jobname.Rnnn
- For mode-superposition transient analysis. This file contains the modal

displacements, velocities, and accelerations records and solution commands for a single substep of
a load step
Jobname.Mnnn
5.9.1.1.1.Multiframe Restart Limitations

Multiframe restart in nonlinear static and full transient analyses has the following limitations:
It does not support the KUSE command. A new stiffness matrix and the related .LN22 file will be
regenerated.
The .Rnnn file does not save the EKILL and EALIVE commands. If EKILL or EALIVE commands
are required in the restarted session, you must reissue these commands.
The .RDB file saves only the database information available at the first substep of the first load
step. If you input other information after the first load step and need that information for the
restart, you must input this information in the restart session. This situation often occurs when
parameters are used (APDL). You must use PARSAV to save the parameters during the initial run
and use PARRES to restore them in the restart. The situation also occurs when you want to
change element REAL constants values. Reissue the R command during the restart session in this
case.
You cannot restart a job at the equation solver level (for example, the PCG iteration level). The job
can only be restarted at a substep level (either transient or Newton-Raphson loop).
You cannot restart an analysis with a load step number larger than 9999.
Multiframe restart does not support the ENDSTEP option of ANTYPE when the arc-length method
is employed.
All loading and boundary conditions are stored in the Jobname.LDHI file; therefore, upon restart,
removing or deleting solid modeling loading and boundary conditions will not result in the removal
of these conditions from the finite element model. You must remove these conditions directly from
nodes and elements.
You cannot restart an analysis if the job was terminated by a Jobname.ABT file in the GUI.
You cannot save the database information (SAVE) before solving (SOLVE).
You cannot nest *DO loops into each other in restart.
5.9.1.2.Multiframe Restart Procedure

Use the following procedure to restart an analysis:
1. Enter the ANSYS program and specify the same jobname that was used in the initial run. To do so,
issue the /FILNAME command (Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname). Enter the SOLUTION
processor using /SOLU (Main Menu> Solution).
2. Determine the load step and substep at which to restart by issuing RESCONTROL,
FILE_SUMMARY. This command will print the substep and load step information for all .Rnnn files
in the current directory.
3. Resume the database file and indicate that this is a restart analysis by issuing
ANTYPE,,REST,LDSTEP,SUBSTEP,Action (Main Menu> Solution> Restart).
4. Specify revised or additional loads as needed. Be sure to take whatever corrective action is
necessary if you are restarting from a convergence failure.
5. Initiate the restart solution by issuing the SOLVE command. (See Obtaining the Solution for
details.) You must issue the SOLVE command when taking any restart action, including ENDSTEP
or RSTCREATE.
6. Postprocess as desired, then exit the ANSYS program.
If the files Jobname.LDHI and Jobname.RDB exist, the ANTYPE,,REST command will cause ANSYS to do
the following:
Resume the database Jobname.RDB
Rebuild the loading and boundary conditions from the Jobname.LDHI file
Rebuild the ANSYS solution commands and status from the .Rnnn file, or from the .Mnnn file in the
case of a mode-superposition transient analysis.
At this point, you can enter other commands to overwrite input restored by the ANTYPE command.
Note: The loading and boundary conditions restored from the Jobname.LDHI are for the FE
mesh. The solid model loading and boundary conditions are not stored on the
Jobname.LDHI .
After the job is restarted, the files are affected in the following ways:
The .RDB file is unchanged.
All information for load steps and substeps past the restart point is deleted from the .LDHI file.
Information for each new load step is then appended to the file.
All of the .Rnnn or .Mnnn files that have load steps and substeps earlier than the restart point will
be kept unchanged. Those files containing load steps and substeps beyond the restart point will be
deleted before the restart solution begins in order to prevent file conflicts.
For nonlinear static and full transient analyses, the results file .RST is updated according to the
restart. All results from load steps and substeps later than the restart point are deleted from the
file to prevent conflicts, and new information from the solution is appended to the end of the
results file.
For a mode-superposition transient analysis, the reduced displacements file .RDSP is updated
according to the restart. All results from load steps and substeps later than the restart point are
deleted from the file to prevent conflicts, and new information from the solution is appended to the
end of the reduced displacements file.
When a job is started from the beginning again (first substep, first load step), all of the restart files
( .RDB , .LDHI , and .Rnnn or .Mnnn ) in the current directory for the current jobname will be deleted before
the new solution begins.
You can issue a ANTYPE,,REST,LDSTEP,SUBSTEP,RSTCREATE command to create a results file for a
particular load step and substep of an analysis. Use the ANTYPE command with the OUTRES
command to write the results. A RSTCREATE session will not update or delete any of the restart files,
allowing you to use RSTCREATE for any number of saved points in a session. The RSTCREATE option is
not supported in mode-superposition analysis.
The sample input listing below shows how to create a results file for a particular substep in an analysis.
! Restart run:
/solu
antype,,rest,1,3,rstcreate
!Create a results file from load
!step 1, substep 3
outres,all,all
!Store everything into the results file
outpr,all,all
!Optional for printed output
solve
!Execute the results file creation
finish
/post1
set,,1,3
!Get results from load step 1,
!substep 3
prnsol
finish
5.9.2.VT Accelerator Re-run

Once you have performed an analysis using the VT Accelerator option [STAOPT,VT or TRNOPT,VT],
you may rerun the analysis; the number of iterations required to obtain the solution for all load steps
and substeps will be greatly reduced. You can make the following types of changes to the model before
rerunning:
Modified or added/removed loads (constraints may not be changed, although their value may be
modified)
Materials and material properties
Section and real constants
Geometry, although the mesh connectivity must remain the same (i.e. the mesh may be morphed)
VT Accelerator allows you to effectively perform parametric studies of nonlinear and transient analyses
in a cost-effective manner (as well as to quickly re-run the model, which is typically necessary to get a
nonlinear model operational).
5.9.2.1.VT Accelerator Re-run Requirements

When rerunning a VT Accelerator analysis, the following files must be available from the initial run:
Jobname.DB
the database file. It may be modified as listed in the previous section.
Jobname.ESAV
Jobname.RSX
Element saved data
Variational Technology results file
5.9.2.2.VT Accelerator Re-run Procedure

The procedure for rerunning a VT Accelerator analysis is as follows:
1. Enter the ANSYS program and specify the same jobname that was used in the initial run with
/FILNAME (Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname).
2. Resume the database file using RESUME (Utility Menu> File> Resume Jobname.db) and
make any modifications to the data.
3. Enter the SOLUTION processor using /SOLU (Main Menu> Solution), and indicate that this is a
restart analysis by issuing ANTYPE,,VTREST (Main Menu> Solution> Restart).
4. Because you are rerunning the analysis, you must reset the load steps and loads. If resuming a
database saved after the first load step of the initial run, you will need to delete the loads and
redefine the loads from the first load step.
5. Initiate the restart solution by issuing the SOLVE command. See Obtaining the Solution for details.
6. Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 for the additional load steps, if any.
8.10. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements
8.10.Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements

Nonlinear elements display an abrupt change in stiffness when they experience a change in status. For
example, when a cable goes slack, its stiffness suddenly drops to zero. When two separate bodies come
into contact, their overall stiffness changes drastically. These and other status-dependent stiffness
changes can be modeled by using nonlinear elements (described below), by applying birth and death
options to applicable elements (see the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide ), or by changing material
properties (MPCHG). Some of the nonlinear element features described below are available only in the
ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and ANSYS Structural products only. See the Element Reference
for details.
COMBIN14
COMBIN37
COMBIN39
COMBIN40
TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176,
CONTA177, and CONTA178
SHELL41
SOLID65
8.10.1.Element Birth and Death

Sometimes, an element's status changes between "existent" and "nonexistent." The birth and death
options (EKILL, EALIVE, ESTIF) (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other) can be used
to deactivate or reactivate selected elements in such cases. The birth and death feature is discussed in
detail in "Element Birth and Death" in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide .
8.11.Unstable Structures
A structure can become unstable when a load reaches its buckling value or when nonlinear material
becomes unstable. It is more common in slender structures than in bulky structures. The instability
could be global (such as a snap-through of a plate) or local (such as failure of a stiffener). Instability
problems usually pose convergence difficulties and therefore require the application of special nonlinear
techniques.
With ANSYS, you can apply three techniques to solve instability problems:
A tool for dealing with local instabilities as well as global instability. You can use it together with
nearly any other nonlinear solution technique, such as line search and automatic time stepping
(although not with the arc-length method).
Arc-length method
This method can circumvent global instability when forces are applied. More importantly, it can
simulate the negative slope portion of a load-vs.-displacement curve.
Running a static problem as a "slow dynamic" analysis
This method is not strictly a different technique; rather, you use a dynamic effect to prevent
divergence. This method is not especially easy to use because the analysis type changes, so you
must input mass, apply a damping factor if necessary, and use proper time-integration parameters.
ANSYS therefore recommends trying nonlinear stabilization or the arc-length method first.
Alternative methods are available to help achieve convergence. For example, you could apply
displacements instead of forces, if applicable. Or, you could apply artificial small stiffness to the unstable
degrees of freedom. These stiffnesses could be either permanent or activated/removed at some load
step by applying the stiffness using the control element COMBIN37. However, such methods may be
unreliable, impractical, or simply not applicable.
8.11.1.Understanding Nonlinear Stabilization

Convergence difficulty due to an unstable problem is usually the result of a large displacement for
smaller load increments. Nonlinear stabilization in ANSYS can be understood as adding an artificial
damper or dashpot element at each node of an element that supports this technique.
To better conceptualize the artificial dashpot element, think of it as having two nodes: one is the node
of the FE model that you create, the other is fixed on the ground. ANSYS calculates the damping force
such that it is proportional to the relative pseudo velocity of the two nodes of the artificial element,
which is equal to the velocity of the node belonging to the FE model.
The pseudo velocity is calculated as a displacement increment divided by the time increment of the
substep. Therefore, any DOF that tends to be unstable has a large displacement increment causing a
large damping (stabilization) force; this force, in turn, reduces the displacements at the DOF so that
stabilization is achieved.
For the DOFs that are stable, the dashpot elements have little effect on the results because the
displacements and the stabilization forces are small relative to the physical forces.
The coefficient used to calculate the damping (stabilization) force is the damping factor. Although it has
the same physical meaning and unit as physical damping, it is purely numerical in nonlinear stabilization.
ANSYS calculates a damping factor based on the energy dissipation ratio that you specify, or you can
input the damping factor value directly.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRUNST.html[28/04/2013 08:02:36 p.m.]
8.11.1.1.Input for Stabilization

The only command necessary for using nonlinear stabilization is STABILIZE. The command activates or
deactivates stabilization from one load step to another, or after a multiframe restart during a load step.
ANSYS assumes that the first substep of a load step is stable and calculates the basic properties of the
artificial dashpot elements based on this substep. Therefore, ANSYS does not apply stabilization for the
first substep unless you specify that it should do so (via the command's SubStpOpt option).
The following topics describe how to use the STABILIZE command in a nonlinear analysis:
Controlling the Stabilization Force
Applying a Constant or Reduced Stabilization Force
Using the Options for the First Substep
Setting the Limit Coefficient for Checking Stabilization Forces
8.11.1.1.1.Controlling the Stabilization Force

Two methods are available for controlling the stabilization force:
Applying an energy dissipation ratio (STABILIZE,,ENERGY,,,)
Applying a damping factor (STABILIZE,,DAMPING,,,)
Energy Dissipation Ratio
The energy dissipation ratio is the ratio of work done by stabilization forces to element potential energy.
The energy dissipation ratio should be between 0 and 1. Because the value is used with predicted
energies, ANSYS allows an input value greater than 1, but use it with caution. The greater the value of
the energy ratio or damping factor, the greater the stabilization force (assuming that the specified
number of substeps and time remain unchanged) so that the system has a stiffer response.
The specified value should be large enough to circumvent the divergence, but small enough to avoid
excessive stiffness. The ideal value is fully dependent on the specific problem, the time of the load step,
and the number of substeps.
You may need a few tries to determine the best value. Generally, use a smaller value for local instability
and a larger value for global instability. The smaller value should be used for solid elements and the
larger value should be used for shell, beam, and link elements. Use a smaller value if the specified time
for a load step is small and a larger value if the specified time for a load step is large.
With the energy dissipation method, ANSYS calculates the damping factor (based on the input energy
dissipation ratio) during the first substep after the command executes. ANSYS uses the calculated
damping factor by predicting the element potential energy and stabilization energy at the end of the load
step based on the data of the current substep, then setting the energy dissipation ratio equal to or
smaller than the specified value. This prediction could be inaccurate when the problem is highly
nonlinear. It is a good practice to examine the energies after the solution has completed because the
energy dissipation ratio of the solution could be greater than the ratio initially specified via the
STABILIZE command.
Damping Factor
The numerical damping factor is the value that ANSYS uses to calculate stabilization forces for all
subsequent substeps. The damping factor is highly dependent on the element size, shape, material, and
other factors including the size of the load step and time used in the load step. The damping factor
therefore varies from element to element.
During a run using the energy dissipation method, ANSYS calculates the damping factor and reports an
element volume weighted average value in the .out file. The value reported provides a reference value
for you to specify if you want to apply a damping factor as the stabilization control in a subsequent run.
When you input a damping factor as the stabilization control, ANSYS uses that value for all applicable
elements; therefore, the results can differ from those of a run where you use the energy dissipation
method exclusively.
The value used as a damping factor can usually have a much wider range of variance than the value
used for the energy dissipation ratio (which can only change from 0 to 1 in most analyses). If it
becomes apparent that your analysis is too sensitive to the energy dissipation ratio value, try using the
damping factor.
8.11.1.1.2.Applying a Constant or Reduced Stabilization Force

When stabilization is active, ANSYS can apply the stabilization force in two ways: constant
(STABILIZE,CONSTANT) or reduced (STABILIZE,REDUCE). The constant option keeps the damping
factor (calculated or input) unchanged during each substep of a load step. The reduced option reduces
the damping factor linearly to zero at the end of the load step.
Although the constant option works well in most cases, some stabilization forces usually remain at the
end of the load step. Unless the stabilization forces are very small, convergence difficulties may occur if
stabilization is deactivated in the next load step. It may be difficult to converge for the first substep of
the following load step because the stabilization forces suddenly becomes zero. In such a case, use the
reduced option for the previous load step.
Example
Convergence difficulties when using the constant option can occur in an analysis of creep
phenomena, where the load is usually applied quickly in the first load step, but no new load
is applied at the second load step (which usually has a very long time span). The stabilization
forces could be large at the end of the first load step because the time is short and pseudo
velocity is high at the first load step. In this case, if stabilization is needed for the first load
step, the reduced option is best. The second load step is usually stable so that stabilization is
unnecessary.
8.11.1.1.3.Using the Options for the First Substep

When stabilization is active, you can activate artificial dashpot elements (STABILIZE) for the first
substep of a load step.
In most analyses, stabilization is unnecessary because the structure is initially stable, so the first substep
should converge if the substep size is reasonable. When SubStpOpt = NO, ANSYS calculates all necessary
data for stabilization more accurately and achieves convergence more easily; therefore, ANSYS
recommends using this option whenever possible.
Convergence Problems at the First Substep
There are some situations where convergence is an issue at the first substep. For such cases, you can
specify substep option (STABILIZE,,,, SubStpOpt ) MINTIME or ANYTIME.
The MINTIME option activates stabilization only when the time increment reaches the
minimum time increment and the analysis still has not converged. Use this option for the first
load step only.
The ANYTIME option activates stabilization for any time increment tried for the first substep.
Use this option for any load step other than the first load step where constant stabilization is
active (STABILIZE,CONSTANT).
ANSYS uses the damping factor calculated at the previous load step to calculate the stabilization forces
for the first substep. If no such value is available, ANSYS assumes a deformation mode for the first
substep and calculate a damping factor for the first substep. In either case, ANSYS recalculates the
damping factor after a successful convergence based on the solution of the first substep and uses the
new value for all subsequent substeps.
Use caution with either substep option and check the final result to verify that the stabilization forces
and energies are not excessive.
Example
Specify SubStpOpt = ANYTIME for the current load step after you have applied a constant
stabilization force (STABILIZE,CONSTANT) in the previous load step and the first substep
did not converge, yet the current load step also requires stabilization. This option is especially
useful if you do not want to rerun the previous load step using the reduced method
(STABILIZE,REDUCE).
8.11.1.1.4.Setting the Limit Coefficient for Checking Stabilization Forces

When the L2-norm of the stabilization force exceeds the product of the L2-norm of the internal force and
the stabilization force coefficient, ANSYS issues a message displaying both the stabilization force norm
and the internal force norm. The message indicates that the stabilization force may be too large. In such
cases, verify the results carefully, and consider adjusting the stabilization force by updating either the
energy-dissipation ratio (STABILIZE,,ENERGY) or the damping factor (STABILIZE,,DAMPING).
If you want to change the stabilization force limit coefficient (by default 0.2, or 20 percent), issue a
STABILIZE,,,,, FORCELIMIT command. (To omit a stabilization force check, specify a value of 0.)
ANSYS checks the norms (and reports them if necessary) only after a substep has converged. The
stabilization force check has no effect on convergence.
8.11.1.2.Checking Results After Applying Stabilization

Stabilization can help with convergence problems, but it can also affect accuracy if the stabilization
energy or forces are too large. Although ANSYS automatically reports the stabilization force norms and
compares them to internal force norms, it is still very important to check the stabilization energy and
forces to determine whether or not they are excessive.
Stabilization energy, the work done by stabilization forces, should be compared to element potential
energy. The energies can be output in the .OUT file (via the OUTPR command). You can also access the
energies as follows:
In POST1, via PRENERGY, PRESOL, PLESOL, and ETABLE commands.
In POST26 by ENERSOL and ESOL commands.
If the stabilization energy (which could be larger than that specified via the STABILIZE command) is
much less than the potential energy (for example, within a 1.0 percent tolerance), the result should be
acceptable and there should be no need to check the stabilization forces further.
When stabilization energy is large, check the stabilization forces at each DOF for all substeps. If the
stabilization forces are much smaller than the applied loads and reaction forces (for example, within a
0.5 percent tolerance), the results are still acceptable. Such a case could occur when an elastic system
is loaded first, then unloaded significantly. It is possible that the final element potential energy is small
and stabilization energy is relatively large, but all stabilization forces are small. Currently, stabilization
forces are accessible in the .OUT file (via OUTPR ).
Even when both stabilization energy and forces are too large, the results could still be valid. Such a
scenario is possible when a large part of an elastic structure undergoes large rigid body motion (as in a
snap-through simulation). In such a case, the stabilization energy could be large as well as the
stabilization force for some DOFs at some substeps, but the results could still be acceptably accurate.
Nevertheless, consider the results along with other support data and use your own discretion.
8.11.1.3.Tips for Using Stabilization

You can use nonlinear stabilization to achieve convergence in an analysis of unstable nonlinear problems
such as post-buckling, snap-through simulation, and analyses where material is unstable. Although you
can activate nonlinear stabilization at the beginning of the solution, it is more efficient and accurate in
most cases to activate stabilization in a multiframe restart.
If you wish to activate stabilization after a restart, do not restart from the last converged substep.
Rather, restart from the next-to-last converged substep or at some other substep prior to the last
converged substep. (ANSYS needs one substep to prepare the data for stabilization.)
Because it is usually impossible to know when a system will become unstable during loading before an
analysis starts, ANSYS recommends running the nonlinear analysis as usual while saving restart files for
at least the last two converged substeps. If the analysis fails to converge because of instability, restart
the analysis with stabilization activated from the next-to-last converged substep or at some other
substep prior to the last converged substep. (ANSYS needs one substep to prepare the data for
stabilization.)
If the behavior of a problem is well known from a previous analysis and the structure loses stability very
soon after you begin to apply loads, you can activate stabilization at the beginning of the analysis.
Be aware that when stabilization is active, the results could vary if the number of substeps changes. The
behavior occurs because the pseudo velocity is different, which in turn causes different stabilization
forces. The more stable the system, the less significant the difference.
If restarting from a different substep, using a damping factor (STABILIZE,,DAMPING) can yield more
consistent results because the energy prediction may be different from substep to substep, which may
necessitate quite different damping factors.
Deactivating Stabilization
Each time that stabilization is deactivated (STABILIZE,OFF), the stabilization forces change suddenly,
which may cause convergence problems. Before completely deactivating stabilization in such cases, use
the reduced method of stabilization (STABILIZE,REDUCE) and specify the damping factor used for the
previous load step.
Example
Assume that load step 1 is unstable but solvable with stabilization. Load step 2 is stable and
requires no stabilization, yet does not converge if you deactivate stabilization
(STABILIZE,OFF). In this scenario, you can add a pseudo load step
(STABILIZE,REDUCE,DAMPING, VALUE ). The damping factor should be the value from load
step 1. Do not apply any new loads. This technique should help with convergence.
8.11.2.Using the Arc-Length Method

The arc-length method (ARCLEN and ARCTRM) is another way to solve unstable problems. The
method is restricted to static analyses with proportional (ramped) loads only and cannot be used with
rate-dependent materials, such as viscoelastic, viscoplastic, and creep materials. The arc-length method
cannot be used with tabular loads.
ANSYS calculates the reference arc-length radius from the load (or displacement) increment of the first
iteration of the first substep, using the following formula:
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified via the NSUBST command.
When choosing the number of substeps, consider that more substeps result in a longer solution time.
Ideally, you want the minimum number of substeps required to produce an optimally efficient solution.
You might have to make an educated guess of the desired number of substeps, and adjust and reanalyze as needed.
When the arc-length method is active, do not use line search (LNSRCH), the predictor (PRED),
adaptive descent (NROPT,,,ON), automatic time stepping (AUTOTS, TIME, DELTIM), or timeintegration effects (TIMINT). Likewise, do not try to base convergence on displacement (CNVTOL,U);
instead, use the force criteria (CNVTOL,F).
To help minimize the solution time, the maximum number of equilibrium iterations in a single substep
(NEQIT) should be less than or equal to 15.
If an arc-length solution fails to converge within the prescribed maximum number of iterations
(NEQIT), the program automatically bisects and continue the analysis. Bisection continues until a
converged solution is obtained or until the minimum arc-length radius is used. (The minimum radius is
defined by NSBSTP (NSUBST) and MINARC (ARCLEN).
In general, you cannot use this method to obtain a solution at a specified load or displacement value
because the value changes (along the spherical arc) as equilibrium is achieved. Figure 8.4 illustrates how
is used only as a starting point. The actual load at convergence is somewhat less.
the specified load
Similarly, it can be difficult to determine a value of limiting load or deflection within some known
tolerance when using the arc-length method in a nonlinear buckling analysis. Generally, you must adjust
the reference arc-length radius (NSUBST) by trial-and-error to obtain a solution at the limit point. It
may be more convenient to use standard Newton-Raphson iterations with bisection (AUTOTS) to
determine values of nonlinear buckling loads.
Avoid using the JCG solver (EQSLV) with the arc-length method. The arc-length procedure can result in
a negative definite stiffness matrix (negative pivot), which can cause a solution failure with the solver.
You can freely switch from the Newton-Raphson iteration method to the arc-length method at the start
of any load step. However, to switch from arc-length to Newton-Raphson iterations, you must terminate
the analysis and restart, deactivating the arc-length method in the first load step of the restart
(ARCLEN,OFF).
An arc-length solution terminates under these conditions:
When limits defined by the ARCTRM or NCNV commands are reached
When the solution converges at the applied load
When you use an abort file ( Jobname.ABT)
See the Basic Analysis Guide for information about termination and restart procedures.
Use the load-deflection curve as a guide for evaluating and adjusting your analysis to help you achieve
the desired results. It is usually good practice to graph your load-deflection curve (using POST26
commands) with every analysis.
Often, an unsuccessful arc-length analysis can be traced to an arc-length radius that is either too large
or too small. Driftback (where the analysis retraces its steps along the load-deflection curve) is a typical
difficulty caused by using a too large or too small arc-length radius. To better understand this problem,
examine the load-deflection curve; you can then adjust the arc-length radius size and range as needed
(NSUBST and ARCLEN).
The total arc-length load factor (SOLU,,ALLF) can be either positive or negative. Similarly, TIME, which
in an arc-length analysis is related to the total arc-length load factor, can also be either positive or
negative. Negative values of ALLF or TIME indicate that the arc-length feature is applying load in the
reverse direction in order to maintain stability in the structure. Negative ALLF or TIME values are
commonly seen in various snap-through analyses.
8.11.2.1.Checking Arc-Length Results

When reading arc-length results into the database for POST1 postprocessing (SET), always reference
the desired results data set by its load step and substep number ( LSTEP and SBSTEP) or by its data set
number ( NSET ).
Do not reference results by a TIME value, because TIME in an arc-length analysis is not always
monotonically increasing. (A single value of TIME might reference more than one solution.) Additionally,
the program cannot correctly interpret negative TIME values (which might be encountered in a snapthrough analysis).
If TIME becomes negative, define an appropriate variable range (/XRANGE or /YRANGE) before
creating any POST26 graphs.
8.11.3.Nonlinear Stabilization vs. the Arc-Length Method

You can use nonlinear stabilization for both local and global instability with few limitations related to
compatibility with other algorithms and materials. However, nonlinear stabilization cannot detect the
negative-slope portion of a load-vs.-displacement curve problem with global instability (if any).
Although the results obtained before the negative slope portion of the problem are always correct, the
results for the substeps after the negative-slope portion are also correct if the materials are not
deformation-history-dependent. (Consider the results to be questionable if the materials are
deformation-history-dependent.)
The arc-length method can detect the negative-slope portion of a load-vs.-displacement curve, but it
cannot solve problems with local instability and material softening. Other limitations exist, related mostly
to compatibility with certain algorithms and materials.
To help you understand when to use either method, the following table compares both methods and
their applications:
Nonlinear Stabilization vs. Arc-Length
Analysis Problem
Nonlinear Stabilization
Local instability or local buckling
Yes
Global instability or global buckling
Yes
Negative slope of load-vs.-displacement
Cannot detect this part of
curve
the curve, but other parts
can be simulated for
deformation-historyindependent materials,
and the preceding part
can be simulated for
deformation- historydependent materials
Rate-dependent materials and creep
Yes
Line search
Yes
Substep predictor (PRED,ON)
Yes [1]
Automatic time stepping
Yes
Arc-Length
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Different algorithm
Displacements as load
Yes
Activate/deactivate from load step to load Yes
step, or within a load step
Linear solver use
No restrictions
Time at converged substep
Positive
No
Limited
Restricted
Positive or negative
1. Solid elements only.

8.12.Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis

This section provides information to help you perform a successful nonlinear analysis. The following
topics are available:
Setting Up a Nonlinear Analysis
Overcoming Convergence Problems
8.12.1.Setting Up a Nonlinear Analysis

By taking your time and proceeding with reasonable caution, you can avoid many difficulties commonly
associated with nonlinear analyses. Consider the following suggestions:
Understand Your Program and Structure Behavior
Keep It Simple
Use an Adequate Mesh Density
Apply the Load Gradually
8.12.1.1.Understand Your Program and Structure Behavior

If you have not used a particular nonlinear feature before, construct a very simple model (containing
only a few elements), and make sure you understand how to handle this feature before you use it in a
large, complicated model.
Gain preliminary insight into your structure's behavior by analyzing a preliminary simplified model first.
For nonlinear static models, a preliminary linear static analysis can reveal which regions of your model
will first experience nonlinear response, and at what load levels these nonlinearities will come into play.
For nonlinear transient dynamic analyses, a preliminary model of beams, masses, and springs can
provide insight into the structure's dynamics at minimal cost. Preliminary nonlinear static, linear transient
dynamic, and/or modal analyses can also help you to understand various aspects of your structure's
nonlinear dynamic response before you undertake the final nonlinear transient dynamic analysis.
Read and understand the program's output messages and warnings. At a minimum, before you try to
postprocess your results, verify that your problem converged. For path-dependent problems, the
printout's equilibrium iteration record can be especially important in helping you to determine if your
results are valid or not.
8.12.1.2.Keep It Simple
Keep your final model as simple as possible. If you can represent your 3-D structure as a 2-D plane
stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric model, do so. If you can reduce your model size through the use of
symmetry or antisymmetry surfaces, do so. (However, if your model is loaded antisymmetrically, you can
generally not take advantage of antisymmetry to reduce a nonlinear model's size. Antisymmetry can also
be rendered inapplicable by large deflections.) If you can omit a nonlinear detail without affecting
results in critical regions of your model, do so.
Model transient dynamic loading in terms of static-equivalent loads whenever possible.
Consider substructuring the linear portions of your model to reduce the computational effort required for
intermediate load or time increments and equilibrium iterations.
8.12.1.3.Use an Adequate Mesh Density

Recognize that regions undergoing plastic deformation require a reasonable integration point density
(mesh density is particularly important in plastic-hinge regions). Higher-order elements use only the
corner integration points for nonlinear analyses, thus lower-order elements provide the same accuracy as
higher-order elements. However, ANSYS recommends Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies for
nonlinear analyses.
Provide an adequate mesh density on contact surfaces to allow contact stresses to be distributed in a
smooth fashion. Likewise, provide a mesh density adequate for resolving stresses; areas where stresses
or strains are of interest require a relatively fine mesh compared to that needed for displacement or
nonlinearity resolution.
Use a mesh density adequate to characterize the highest mode shape of interest. The number of
elements needed depends on the elements' assumed displacement shape functions, as well as on the
mode shape itself. Also, use a mesh density adequate to resolve any transient dynamic wave
propagation through your structure; if wave propagation is important, then provide at least 20 elements
to resolve one wavelength.
8.12.1.4.Apply the Load Gradually

For nonconservative, path-dependent systems, you need to apply the load in small enough increments
to ensure that your analysis will closely follow the structure's load-response curve.
You can sometimes improve the convergence behavior of conservative systems by applying the load
gradually, so as to minimize the number of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations required.
8.12.2.Overcoming Convergence Problems

This section provides information to help you fix convergence problems in a nonlinear analysis. The
following topics are available:
Overview of Convergence Problems
Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics
Tracking Convergence Graphically
Line Search
Nonlinear Stabilization
Arc-Length Method
Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response
Use the Rezoning Feature
Dispense with Extra Element Shapes
Using Element Birth and Death Wisely
Read Your Output
Graph the Load and Response History
8.12.2.1.Overview of Convergence Problems

When performing a nonlinear analysis you may encounter convergence difficulties due to a number of
reasons. Some examples may be initially open contact surfaces causing rigid body motion, large load
increments causing nonconvergence, material instabilities, or large deformations causing mesh distortion
that result in element shape errors. Solution control (SOLCONTROL) automatically adjusts solution
parameters and attempts to obtain a robust, accurate solution. In addition, several tools are available in
ANSYS that can help you identify potential problems before, during, and after a solution.
CHECK, MCHECK, and CNCHECK commands help you verify if there are any obvious problems with
the model before you start the solution. The CHECK command does an overall verification of the model,
including missing elastic properties, unconstrained model, and element shape checks. The MCHECK
command can help you identify defects in the mesh such as holes or cracks, especially when the mesh is
imported from a third party software. The CNCHECK command provides the initial contact status of
contact pairs, identifying whether the contacts are initially open or closed. If, for example, a part in your
model is constrained only through contact with other parts and if the contact surfaces are open, the
CNCHECK command can help you identify this potential error condition.
When you analyze models with large deformations, some portions of the initial mesh can become highly
distorted. Highly distorted elements can take on unacceptable shapes, providing inaccurate results. This
can cause your nonlinear solution to stop. When this happens, use the ESCHECK command to perform
shape checking of deformed elements in the postprocessor (based on the current set of results in
database). This deformed-shape checker will help you to identify the portions of your model that require
different meshing, thereby allowing them to retain acceptable shapes. Using ESCHECK at different time
points will help you to identify the load conditions that cause mesh deterioration.
A convergence failure can also indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the
result of some numerical problem in the finite element model.
The following sections detail some of the techniques that you can use to attempt to improve the
convergence performance of your analysis.
8.12.2.2.Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics

The nonlinear diagnostics tool NLDIAG can help you find problems in your model when an analysis will
not converge.
Identify Regions of High Residual Forces.Issue the NLDIAG,NRRE command to write the
Newton-Raphson residuals from equilibrium iterations to a file ( Jobname.nrxxx ). You can then contour
plot the residual forces via the PLNSOL,NRRE command, which will help to identify regions of high
residual forces.
Such a capability can be useful when you experience convergence difficulties in the middle of a load
step, where the model has a large number of contact surfaces and other nonlinearities. You can restart
the analysis and issue an NLDIAG,NRRE command to write out the residuals. By tracking the way the
residuals change over several equilibrium iterations you can identify a portion of your model where large
residuals persist. You can then focus on the nonlinearities in that area (for example, a contact pair's
properties) instead of having to deal with the entire model.
Identify Problem Elements.Typically, nonlinear analyses fail to converge for the following reasons:
Too large a distortion
Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots (nonlinear analyses)
Too large a plastic or creep strain increment
Elements where mixed u-P constraints are not satisfied (mixed u-P option of current-technology
solid elements only)
ANSYS has default limits which, when exceeded, determine when convergence criteria have been
violated. Some limits are user-controlled; for example, the CUTCONTROL command sets the maximum
plastic/creep strain increments allowed in an iteration. Other limits are fixed.
The NLDIAG,EFLG command identifies elements that violate the above criteria and records them in a
file ( Jobname.ndxxx ).
Note: Convergence problems may occur when material algorithms fail (e.g. local element
level Newton-Raphson convergence failure, or extreme element distortion). The
ANSYS error message identifies the corresponding element number and/or the
material ID for these cases. Be sure to read any error messages generated during
solution.
Process the Tracked Results.Issue the NLDPOST command to process the .ndxxx nonlinear
diagnostics files. The command creates components of elements that violate a certain criterion for a
particular equilibrium iteration (or iterations).
Identify contact pairs causing convergence difficulties.Issue the NLDIAG,CONT command to

write various contact information for all defined contact pairs to a single Jobname.cnd text file. The file is
written during solution at a user-specified frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step).
Information stored in this file will help identify when and how contact occurs, determine the regions
where contact is unstable, and identify the corresponding contact parameters. You can then focus on the
specific settings for those particular contact pairs that need attention.
Monitor the Diagnostics Results in Real Time.The NLHIST command allows you to monitor
results of interest in real time during solution. Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data
such as displacements or reaction forces at specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such
as stresses and strains at specific elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available.
The result data are written to a file named Jobname.nlh.
You can also track results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File
Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist130 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser
to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utility. You can use this utility
to read the file at any time, even after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted
correctly).
8.12.2.3.Tracking Convergence Graphically

As a nonlinear structural analysis proceeds, ANSYS computes convergence norms with corresponding
convergence criteria each equilibrium iteration. Available in both batch and interactive sessions, the
Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) feature displays the computed convergence norms and criteria while
the solution is in process. By default, GST is ON for interactive sessions and OFF for batch runs. To turn
GST on or off, use either of the following:
Command(s):
GUI:
/GST
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Grph Solu Track
Figure 8.21 shows a typical GST display:

Figure8.21Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST)
Feature
8.12.2.4.Automatic Time Stepping

Place an upper limit on the time step size (DELTIM or NSUBST), especially for complicated models.
Doing so ensures that all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included. This can be
important in the following situations:
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub
assemblies) in which the low-frequency energy content of the system could dominate the highfrequency areas.
Problems with short ramp times on some of their loads. If the time step size is allowed to become
too large, ramped portions of the load history may be inaccurately characterized.
Problems that include structures that are continuously excited over a range of frequencies (for
example, seismic problems).
Exercise caution when modeling kinematic structures (systems with rigid-body motions). These following
guidelines can usually help you to obtain a good solution:
Incorporate significant numerical damping (0.05 < < 0.1 on the TINTP command) into the
solution to filter out the high frequency noise, especially if a coarse time step is used. Do not use
-damping (mass matrix multiplier, ALPHAD command) in a dynamic kinematic analysis, as it will
dampen the rigid body motion (zero frequency mode) of the system.
Avoid imposed displacement history specifications, because imposed displacement input has
(theoretically) infinite jumps in acceleration, which causes stability problems for the Newmark timeintegration algorithm.
8.12.2.5.Line Search
Line search (LNSRCH) can be useful for enhancing convergence, but it can be expensive (especially
with plasticity). You might consider setting line search on in the following cases:
When your structure is force-loaded (as opposed to displacement-controlled).

If you are analyzing a "flimsy" structure which exhibits increasing stiffness (such as a fishing pole).
If you notice (from the program output messages) oscillatory convergence patterns.
8.12.2.6.Nonlinear Stabilization
You can use the nonlinear stabilization method to solve both locally and globally unstable problems, and
to overcome convergence for general problems. For more information, see Understanding Nonlinear
Stabilization.
8.12.2.7.Arc-Length Method
You can use the arc-length method (ARCLEN and ARCTRM) to obtain numerically stable solutions for
many physically unstable structures. For more information, see Using the Arc-Length Method.
8.12.2.8.Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response

If you do not want to use both nonlinear stabilization and the arc-length method to analyze a forceloaded structure that starts at, or passes through, a singular (zero stiffness) configuration, you can
sometimes use other alternatives to artificially inhibit divergence in your model's response:
In some cases, you can use imposed displacements instead of applied forces. This approach can
be used to start a static analysis closer to the equilibrium position, or to control displacements
through periods of unstable response (for example, snap-through or postbuckling).
Another technique that can be effective in circumventing problems due to initial instability is
running a static problem as a "slow dynamic" analysis (that is, using time-integration effects in an
attempt to prevent the solution from diverging in any one load step).
You can also apply temporary artificial stiffness to unstable DOFs, using control elements (such as
COMBIN37), or using the birth and death option on other elements. The idea here is to artificially
restrain the system during intermediate load steps in order to prevent unrealistically large
displacements from being calculated. As the system displaces into a stable configuration, the
artificial stiffness is removed.
8.12.2.9.Use the Rezoning Feature

If the solution fails to converge and the mesh is severely distorted, consider using manual rezoning.
Rezoning allows you to repair the distorted mesh and continue the simulation. The rezoning capability is
available for the PLANE182 and PLANE183 elements. For more information, see "Manual Rezoning" in
the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide .
8.12.2.10.Dispense with Extra Element Shapes

ANSYS provides "incompatible" modes" formulation (also referred to as "extra shapes") for modeling
bending applications. If your problem is predominantly bulk deformation, then you may choose to turn
extra shapes off to reduce CPU/storage requirements and enhance convergence. However, doing so
precludes the ability to model any bending.
8.12.2.11.Using Element Birth and Death Wisely
Realize that any sudden change in your structure's stiffness matrix is likely to cause convergence
problems. When activating or deactivating elements, try to spread the changes out over a number of
substeps. (Use a small time step size if necessary to accomplish this.) Also be aware of possible
singularities (such as sharp reentrant corners) that might be created as you activate or deactivate
elements. Such singularities can cause convergence problems.
8.12.2.12.Read Your Output

Remember that the ANSYS program performs a nonlinear analysis as a series of linear approximations
with corrections. The program printout gives you continuous feedback on the progress of these
approximations and corrections. (Printout either appears directly on your screen, is captured on
Jobname.OUT, or is written to some other file (/OUTPUT).) You can examine some of this same
information in POST1, using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR
commands. You should make sure that you understand the iteration history of your analysis before you
accept the results. In particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning statements without fully
understanding their meaning. A typical nonlinear output listing is shown in Figure 8.22.
Figure8.22Typical Nonlinear Output Listing
SOLVE
command
echo
Checking
Logic
Load step
summary
table
Load step 2
substep 1
Load step 2
substep 2
Load step 2
substep 3
*****
ANSYS SOLVE
COMMAND
*****
*** NOTE ***

CP=
13.891
TIME= 11:09:22
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to 1 (full Newton-Raphson solution
procedure) for all DOFs.
L O A D
S T E P
O P T I O N S
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . . . . . 200.00
AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON
INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . .
100
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . . 10000
MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . .
10
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. . . .
15
STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . . . . .
NO
TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . . . .YES (EXIT)
CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . .USE DEFAULTS
PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .NO PRINTOUT
DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS
ITEM
FREQUENCY
COMPONENT
BASI
-10
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.2006E+06 CRITERION= 1125.
EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1272E-01
LINE SEARCH PARAMETER =
1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1272E-01
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 4267.
CRITERION= 480.2
EQUIL ITER
2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.9019E-03
1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.9019E-03
CRITERION= 488.2
EQUIL ITER
1.000
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 778.5
CRITERION= 497.7
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 507.7
<<<
CONVERGED
>>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION
4
*** LOAD STEP
2
SUBSTEP
1 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
7
*** TIME =
101.000
TIME INC =
1.00000
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6674E+05 CRITERION= 594.3
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 502.9
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 512.9
<<<
CONVERGED
2
*** LOAD STEP
2
SUBSTEP
2 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
9
*** TIME =
102.000
TIME INC =
1.00000
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1333E+05 CRITERION= 575.4
EQUIL ITER
Equilbrium
iteration
summaries
Substep
summary

1.000
SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.5329E-02
CRITERION= 534.2
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 532.9
EQUIL ITER
1.000
CRITERION= 540.3
EQUIL ITER
LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 0.9578
CRITERION= 551.4
<<<
CONVERGED
4
*** LOAD STEP
2
SUBSTEP
3 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
13
*** TIME =
103.500
TIME INC =
1.50000
8.12.2.13.Graph the Load and Response History

This verification technique may be considered to be a graphical combination of two other techniques:
checking for reasonableness, and reviewing the iteration history. POST26 graphs of load and response
histories should agree with your informed expectations about your structure's behavior. The results of
interest (displacements, reaction forces, stresses, and so on) should show relatively smooth response
histories. Any non-smoothness may indicate that too coarse of a time step was used.
8.13.Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a nonlinear analysis of an elastic-plastic circular plate under the
action of a dead load and a cyclic point load. You will define a kinematic hardening plasticity curve, as
well as load step options, the maximum and minimum number of substeps for a load step, and the
various load steps that describe externally applied loads. You will also learn how to interpret the monitor
file that ANSYS writes for a nonlinear analysis.
ANSYS uses an incremental solution procedure to obtain a solution to a nonlinear analysis. In this
example, the total external load within a load step is applied in increments over a certain number of
substeps. As described earlier in this chapter, ANSYS uses a Newton-Raphson iterative procedure to
solve each substep. You must specify the number of substeps for each load step, since this number
controls the size of the initial load increment applied in the first substep of the each load step. ANSYS
automatically determines the size of the load increment for each subsequent substep in a load step. You
can control the size of the load increment for these subsequent substeps by specifying the maximum
and minimum number of substeps. If you define the number of substeps, the maximum and minimum
number of substeps all to be the same, then ANSYS uses a constant load increment for all substeps
within the load step.
You will use an axisymmetric model for the plate, using four-node PLANE182 elements with the
axisymmetric option to mesh the model. You will perform a geometrically nonlinear analysis. Specify the
kinematic constraints as follows: The nodes located at the center of the plate are constrained to have
zero radial displacement. The nodes located at the outer edge are constrained to have zero radial and
axial displacement. You will apply the dead load in load step 1 and the cyclic point load in six
subsequent load steps. See Problem Sketch.
You will specify 10 substeps for the first load to ensure that the increment of the dead load applied over
the first substep is 1/10 of the total load of 0.125 N/m 2 . You will also specify a maximum of 50 and a
minimum of 5 substeps to ensure that if the plate exhibits a severe nonlinear behavior during the
solution, then the load increment can be cut back to 1/50 the total load. If the plate exhibits mild
nonlinear behavior, then the load increment can be increased up to 1/5 the size of the total load.
For the subsequent six load steps that apply the cyclic point load, you will specify 4 substeps, with a
maximum of 25 and a minimum of 2 substeps.
For this example, you will monitor the history over the entire solution of the vertical displacement of the
node at the location where the point cyclic load is applied and the reaction force at the node located at
the bottom of the clamped edge.
The circular plate has a radius of 1.0 m and a thickness of 0.1 m. The following material properties are
used for this problem:
EX = 16911.23 Pa
PRXY = 0.3
The kinematic hardening plasticity curve for the material is:
Log Strain
0.001123514
0.001865643
0.002562402
True Stress (Pa)

19.00
22.80
25.08
0.004471788
0.006422389
29.07
31.73
The plate has a dead load acting as a uniform pressure of 0.125N/m 2 . The history of the cyclic point
load is shown here:
Figure8.23Cyclic Point Load History
8.13.3.1.Set the Analysis Title and Jobname

2. Type the text "Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate."
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname. The Change Jobname dialog box
appears.
5. Type the text axplate in the entry box and click OK.

3. In the list on the left, click once on "Structural Solid."
4. In the list on the right, click once on "Quad 4node 182."
6. Click on Options. The PLANE182 element type options dialog box appears.
7. In the scroll box for element behavior, scroll to "Axisymmetric" and select it.
8. Click on OK.

2. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3. Enter 16911.23 for EX (Young's modulus).
4. Enter .3 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio).
5. Click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
8.13.3.4.Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH)

1. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Nonlinear, Inelastic,
Rate Independent, Kinematic Hardening Plasticity, von Mises Plasticity, Multilinear (General). A
dialog box appears.
2. Enter the following Strain/Stress value pair in the table: 0.001123514, 19.00
3. Click on the Add Point button, and enter the next Strain/Stress value pair: 0.001865643, 22.80
4. Repeat the previous step to enter the following Strain/Stress value pairs: 0.002562402, 25.08;
0.004471788, 29.07; 0.006422389, 31.73.
5. Click on OK.
8.13.3.5.Label Graph Axes and Plot Data Tables

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes. The Axes
Modifications for Graph Plots dialog box appears.
2. Enter Total Strain for the X-axis label.
3. Enter True Stress for the Y-axis label and click OK.
5. In the Material Models Defined window, double-click in Material Model Number 1, and Multilinear
Kinematic (General). The dialog box appears that includes the Strain/Stress data pairs that you
entered.
6. Click on the Graph button. A graph of the data table values appears in the Graphics window. If
necessary, revise the stress/strain values and click on the Graph button again. Repeat revisions
and graphing as needed until you are satisfied with the graphed results. Click on OK.
8. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
8.13.3.6.Create Rectangle
dialog box appears.
2. Type "radius=1.0" in the Selection field and click Accept. This value is the radius of the plate.
3. Type "thick=0.1" in the Selection field and click Accept. This value is the thickness of the plate.
Click Close.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle>
By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
5. Enter "0, radius" for X-coordinates.
6. Enter "0, thick" for Y-coordinates and click on OK. A rectangle appears in the ANSYS Graphics
window.
8.13.3.7.Set Element Size

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. The MeshTool dialog
box appears.
2. Click Size Controls> Lines> Set. The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears. Click
on the two vertical lines (2 and 4). Click OK on the picking menu. The Element Sizes on Picked
Lines dialog box appears.
3. Enter 8 for number of element divisions and click on OK.
4. Repeat these steps (1-3), but choose horizontal lines 1 and 3, and specify 40 element divisions.
8.13.3.8.Mesh the Rectangle

1. On the MeshTool, pick Quad and Map, then click MESH. The Mesh Areas picking menu appears.
4. Click on Close on the MeshTool.
8.13.3.9.Assign Analysis and Load Step Options

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis
Options. The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2. Turn large-deformation effects ON and click OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File. The Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
4. Verify that All items are selected, and choose Every substep for the File write frequency. Click OK.
8.13.3.10.Monitor the Displacement

In this step, you monitor the displacement of the node located at the axes of symmetry, as well as the
reaction force at the fixed end of the plate.
dialog box appears.
2. Type "ntop = node(0,thick,0.0)" in the Selection field and click Accept.
3. Type "nright = node(radius,0.0,0.0)" in the Selection field and click Accept, then Close.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The
Monitor picking menu appears.
5. Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The Monitor dialog box
appears.
6. In the scroll box for Quantity to be monitored, scroll to "UY" and select it. Click OK.
7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The
Monitor picking menu appears.
8. Type "nright" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The Monitor dialog
box appears.
9. In the scroll box for Variable to redefine, scroll to "Variable 2" and select it. In the scroll box for
Quantity to be monitored, scroll to "FY" and select it. Click OK.
8.13.3.11.Apply Constraints
2. Select Nodes and By Location in the first two selection boxes. Verify that X coordinates are
selected, and enter "radius" in the Min, Max field. Click OK.
4. Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
5. Click on "All DOF" for DOFs to be constrained. Click OK.
Verify that Nodes, By Location, and X coordinates are selected. Enter "0" in the Min, Max field and
click OK. This will select the nodes at the X=0 position.
8. Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
9. Click on "UX" for DOFs to be constrained. Click on All DOF to deselect it.
10. Enter "0.0" as the Displacement value. Click OK.
Verify that Nodes and By Location are selected.
12. Click on Y coordinates and enter "thick" in the Min, Max field. Click OK.
14. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on nodes dialog box appears.
15. Enter "0.125" in the Load PRES value field and click OK.
8.13.3.12.Solve the First Load Step

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and
Substps. The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
2. Enter 10 as the number of substeps, enter 50 as the maximum number of substeps, and enter 5 as
the minimum number of substeps. Click OK.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the
/STAT window, and click on Close.
4. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box.
5. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
6. Choose Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.13.3.13.Solve the Next Six Load Steps

1. Choose Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2. Enter "f = 0.010" in the Selection field and click on Accept. Click on Close.
3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and
Substps. The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
4. Enter "4" for the number of substeps, "25" for the maximum number of substeps, and "2" for the
minimum number of substeps. Click OK.
6. Enter "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu.
The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
7. Select "FY" in the Direction of force/mom selection box. Enter "-f" in the Force/moment value field.
Click OK.
8. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the
/STAT window, and click on Close.
9. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box.
10. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
11. Repeat Steps 5-10, entering "f" in the Force/moment value field at Step 7.
12. Repeat Steps 5-11 two more times, for a total of three cycles (six substeps).
8.13.3.14.Review the Monitor File

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> List> Files> Other. The List File dialog box appears. Select
the axplate.mntr file and click on OK.
2. Review the time step size, vertical displacement, and reaction force evolution over the entire
solution.
3. Click Close.
8.13.3.15.Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results.

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Last Set.
3. Click on Def + undef edge for items to be plotted. Click OK. The deformed mesh appears in the
ANSYS Graphics window.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element
Solu. The Contour Element Solution Data dialog box appears.
5. In the selection box on the left, choose Strain-plastic. In the selection box on the right, choose Eqv
plastic EPEQ. Click OK. The contour plot appears in the Graphics window.
6. Choose Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.13.3.16.Define Variables for Time-History Postprocessing

2. Verify that Nodes and By Num/Pick are selected in the first two boxes. Click OK. The Select nodes
3. Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK.
Choose Elements in the first drop-down selection box. Choose Attached to in the second dropdown selection box. Verify that Nodes is selected. Click OK.
5. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
6. Choose Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
7. Click on Element results. Click OK. The Define Elemental Data picking menu appears.
8. Click on the top left element in the ANSYS Graphics window. Click OK on the picking menu. The
Define Nodal Data picking menu appears.
9. Click on the top left node of the top left element. Click OK on the picking menu. The Define
Element Results Variable dialog box appears.
10. Verify that the reference number of the variable is 2.
11. Choose Stress in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-direction SY in the selection list on the
right. Click OK. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box reappears, with a second variable
listed (ESOL). The dialog box should show element number 281, node number 50, item S,
component Y, and name SY.
12. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 3.
13. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-elastic in the selection list on the
left. Choose Y-dir'n EPEL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
14. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 4.
15. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-plastic in the selection list on the
left. Choose Y-dir'n EPPL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
16. Click on Close on the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
17. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Add. The Add TimeHistory Variables dialog box appears.
18. Enter 5 for the reference number for result, enter 3 as the 1st variable, and enter 4 as the 2nd
variable. Click OK. This adds the elastic and plastic strains that you stored as variables 3 and 4.
Their sum is the total strain, and it is stored as variable 5.
8.13.3.17.Plot Time-History Results

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph. The Graph Settings
dialog box appears.
2. Click on Single variable for the X-axis variable and enter 5 as the single variable number. Click OK.
3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes. The Axes
Modifications for Graph Plots dialog box appears.
4. Enter Total Y-Strain as the X-axis label.
5. Enter Y-Stress as the Y-axis label. Click OK.
6. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph TimeHistory Variables dialog box appears.
7. Enter 2 as the first variable to graph. Click OK.
8.13.3.18.Exit ANSYS
1. Choose QUIT from the ANSYS Toolbar.
2. Click on the save option you want, and click on OK.
8.14.Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example nonlinear static analysis of a copper cylinder impacting a rigid wall using
the commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are
comments.
/BATCH,LIST
/title, Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate
/filnam,axplate
/prep7
radius=1.0
! Radius of the plate (m)
thick=0.1
! Thickness of plate (m)
YM=16911.23
et,1,PLANE182,,,1
! PLANE182 axisymmetric element
mp,ex,1,YM
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
! Define a Kinematic Hardening Plasticity curve using the KINH material model
tb,KINH,1,1,5
! Define the true stress vs. total log strain curve for this material model
! using 5 points. First point defines the elastic limit
tbpt,,0.001123514,19.00
tbpt,,0.001865643,22.80
tbpt,,0.002562402,25.08
tbpt,,0.004471788,29.07
tbpt,,0.006422389,31.73
! Set the axles labels for the stress-strain curve plot
/axlab,X,Log Strain (N/m^2)
/axlab,Y,True Stress (N/m^2)
tbpl,KINH,1
! Plot and verify the material stress-strain curve
! Define a rectangle which is the axisymmetric cross section of the plate.

! The rectangle has a length equal to the radius of the plate and a height equal
! to the thickness of the plate
rect,,radius,,thick
! Select the left and right bounding lines of the created rectangle and set
! the line division to 8 (8 elements through the thickness of the plate)
FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2
FITEM,5,2
FITEM,5,4
CM,_Y,LINE
LSEL, , , ,P51X
!*
CM,_Y1,LINE
CMSEL,,_Y
LESIZE,_Y1, , ,8,1,
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
!*
! Select the top and bottom bounding lines of the created rectangle and set
! the line division to 40 (40 elements through the radius of the plate)
FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2
FITEM,5,1
FITEM,5,3
CM,_Y,LINE
LSEL, , , ,P51X
!*
CM,_Y1,LINE
CMSEL,,_Y
LESIZE,_Y1, , ,40,1,
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
!*
CM,_Y,AREA
ASEL, , , ,
1
CM,_Y1,AREA
CHKMSH,'AREA'
CMSEL,S,_Y
amesh,all
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
CMDEL,_Y2
fini
/solve
nlgeom,on! Turn on geometric nonlinearity
! Get the node numbers for the nodes located at the top
! of the axis of symmetry and at bottom right of the model
ntop = node(0,thick,0)
nright = node(radius,0,0)
! Activate the monitoring of the displacement and reaction force histories
! during the analysis. This will be written out to the monitor file ratch.mntr
monitor,1,ntop,uy
monitor,2,nright,fy
outres,all,all
! Output all the results for all substeps to the

! results file for later postprocessing
! Select the nodes located at right end and constrain their radial (x) and
! axial (y) direction displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,radius
d,all,all
! Select the nodes located at left end and constrain their radial (x) direction
! displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,0.0
d,all,ux,0.0
! Define the load for Load Step 1.
! Select the nodes located at top surface of plate and apply a uniform pressure
! of 0.125 N/m^2 as dead load on the plate.
nsel,s,loc,y,thick
sf,all,pres,0.125
alls! Select all nodes
! Define the number of substeps (10). Also define maximum number of
! substeps (50), and the minimum number of substeps (5) for the automatic
! time stepping algorithm.
nsub,10,50,5
solve
f = 0.01
! Solve load step 1

! Define the parameter, f, used to apply
! the cyclic point load.
! Over six load steps apply a cyclic point load of magnitude f = 0.01 units
! applied at the center of the plate over three cycles
! Start Cycle 1
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
! Define load for load step 2

! Set the number of substeps, max and min number
! of substeps
! Solve load step 2
! of substeps
! Solve load step 3
! Start Cycle 2
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all

! of substeps
! Solve load step 4
nsubst,4,25,2
solve

! of substeps
! Solve load step 5
! Start Cycle 3
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
save
fini
/post1
set,last
! (final state)
pldi,2
ples,nl,epeq

! of substeps
! Solve load step 6
! of substeps.
! Solve load step 7
! Read in the results from the last substep of

! the last step.
!
!
!
!
Plot the deformed mesh with the undeformed

edge only
Plot the total accumulated equivalent
plastic strains
!
!
!
!
!
Plot the mesh

Select the node where the point load is attached
Select the element attached to this node
Get the number of this element
Select back everything in the model
fini
/post26
eplo
nsel,s,node,,ntop
esln
elem=elnext(0)
alls
! Define variable 2 to be Y component of stress at the node where the point

! load is applied
ESOL,2,elem,ntop,S,Y,
! Define variable 3 to be Y component of elastic strain at the node where the
! point load is applied
ESOL,3,elem,ntop,EPEL,Y,
! Define variable 4 to be Y component of plastic strain at the node where the
! point load is applied
ESOL,4,elem,ntop,EPPL,Y,
! Add the elastic and plastic strains in variables 3 and 4 and store the total
! strain in variable 5.
ADD,5,3,4, , , , ,1,1,0,
xvar,5
! Set the axes for subsequent x-y plot to be variable 5
! Define the x and y axes labels for subsequent x-y plot

/axlab,x,Total Y-Strain
/axlab,y,Y-Stress
plvar,2
fini
/eof
/exit,nosav
! Plot the Y-stress stored in variable 2

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional nonlinear analyses.
The Verification Manual includes a variety of nonlinear analysis test cases:
VM7 - Plastic Compression of a Pipe Assembly
VM24 - Plastic Hinge in a Rectangular Beam
VM38 - Plastic Loading of a Thick-Walled Cylinder Under Pressure
VM56 - Hyperelastic Thick Cylinder Under Internal Pressure
VM78 - Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam
VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force
VM104 - Liquid-Solid Phase Change
VM124 - Discharge of Water from a Reservoir
VM126 - Heat Transferred to a Flowing Fluid
VM132 - Stress Relaxation of a Bolt Due to Creep
VM133 - Motion of a Rod Due to Irradiation Induced Creep
VM134 - Plastic Bending of a Clamped I-Beam
VM146 - Bending of a Reinforced Concrete Beam
VM185 - Current Carrying Ferromagnetic Conductor
VM198 - Large Strain In-Plane Torsion Test
VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation
VM200 - Viscoelastic Sandwich Seal Analysis
VM218 - Hyperelastic Circular Plate
VM220 - Eddy Current Loss in Thick Steel Plate
9.1. Understanding Linear Perturbation
9.1.Understanding Linear Perturbation

The linear perturbation analysis can be viewed as an iteration on top of a base (or prior) linear or
nonlinear analysis. During the linear perturbation process, all of the linear or nonlinear effects from the
base analysis are taken into account and are frozen so that the perturbation loads can generate
structural results (such as deformation, stresses, and strains) linearly by using the "frozen" solution
matrices. The linear or nonlinear effects from the base analysis are also carried over to the stress
expansion pass, if applicable. However, for any downstream analysis, such as a linear dynamic analysis,
only linear effects are accounted for.
If the linear or nonlinear effects from the base analysis are not of interest, there is no need to perform a
linear perturbation analysis; a simple one-step linear or nonlinear analysis can serve that purpose.
Two key points are of fundamental importance for carrying out a linear perturbation analysis:
1. The total tangent stiffness matrix from the prior solution (the base analysis) must be obtained for
the current linear perturbation analysis. This matrix is regenerated in the first phase of the linear
perturbation procedure.
2. The total perturbation loads must be established. This load vector is calculated in the second phase
of the linear perturbation procedure.
This chapter will explain points (1) and (2) in detail. Input examples are given to aid the understanding
of the procedure.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strunderlinper.html[28/04/2013 08:05:19 p.m.]
9.2.General Procedure for Linear Perturbation Analysis

The procedure for linear perturbation analysis is designed with the goal of simplicity and ease of use.
With the aid of a restart from the base analysis, it is easy to envision how the snapshot of the solution
matrices from the base analysis is regenerated and used. All other control keys (commands) are
optional. The figure below describes the flow of this procedure.
Figure9.1Flowchart of Modal Linear Perturbation Analysis
For advanced usage of this analysis type, controls are available to affect how the snapshot matrices are
modified to reflect the real-world engineering applications. These include contact status controls and
loading controls.
9.2.1.The Base (Prior) Analysis

The base analysis (the analysis prior to the linear perturbation analysis) can be a linear or nonlinear,
static or full (TRNOPT,FULL) transient analysis. The nonlinearity in the base analysis can be due to
nonlinear materials, geometric nonlinearity, or nonlinear contact elements being used. If the base
analysis is linear static only (that is, only prestress effects are to be included in the model), the
multiframe restart option has to been invoked by using the RESCONTROL,LINEAR command, which is a
non-default option for linear static analysis. If the base analysis is nonlinear static or nonlinear or linear
full transient, then multiframe restart is automatically invoked. Only the converged substeps of the load
step are saved for multiframe restart. thereby automatically guaranteeing that a valid restarting point
will be used for the linear perturbation analysis.
9.2.2.First Phase of the Linear Perturbation Analysis

The purpose for the first phase in the linear perturbation analysis procedure is to regenerate the solution
snapshot from the base analysis. Normally, this phase only requires the following command stream:
/SOLU
ANTYPE,,RESTART,loadstep,substep,PERTURB
.... (other limited commands are allowed)
PERTURB,MODAL
SOLVE,ELFORM
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertproc.html[28/04/2013 08:05:33 p.m.]
(do not exit solution module yet; do not issue FINISH command)
Upon execution of the SOLVE,ELFORM command, the program will restart the base analysis and
regenerate
and other possible solution matrices. Then, by default, the program will remove all
external loads inherited from the base analysis, except for displacement boundary conditions, inertia
loads, and thermal loads. Since this phase is strictly used to regenerate solution matrices from the base
analysis, all other actions (commands) are not typically used. However, the following items can be
modified so that the final solution matrices used in the linear perturbation analysis can serve various
purposes for the engineering analysis:
Change contact status via PERTURB or CNKMOD command.
Issue CMROTATE if you want to perform a partial nonlinear prestressed modal analysis for brake
squeal simulation.
Modify element real constants (RMODIF).
Modify material properties (TBMODIF or MP command); for example, to change the contact
friction coefficient.
Material behavior can be controlled by the PERTURB command. Currently, MatKey = AUTO is the
only option available to select how nonlinear material behavior will be used. (For more information,
see Material Behavior of Structural Elements in Linear Perturbation in the Element Reference.)
Issue the CORIOLIS command if you want to include Coriolis effects in the modal analysis when
the base analysis is static.
Other commands that are allowed in this phase of the linear perturbation are: MP, EALIVE, EKILL, and
ESTIF.
It is important to understand what matrices are used in the linear perturbation analysis. If the base
analysis is nonlinear, the consistent tangent matrix from the prior Newton-Raphson iterations will be
regenerated based on the material behavior specified by the PERTURB command and based on the
current geometry configuration if large-deflection effects are included (NLGEOM,ON). If contact
elements are present in the base analysis, the stiffness matrix will include the effects of contact based on
the contact status as set by the PERTURB or CNKMOD command. If the base analysis is linear, the
linear stiffness matrix plus the stress stiffening matrix will be used (automatically included). The spinsoftening or gyroscopic effect will also be included in this matrix regeneration phase as long as this spinsoftening or gyroscopic effect is included in the base analysis.
Note: Other commands such as PSTRES, SSTIF, EMATWRITE, OMEGA, and
CMOMEGA are not needed in this phase, as they are automatically accounted for.
9.2.3.Second Phase of the Linear Perturbation Analysis

As described in Figure 9.1, this second phase of the linear perturbation analysis consists of the following
actions:
1. Apply possible linear perturbation loads.
2. Update the nodal coordinates by using the total displacement from the base analysis (similar to the
UPCOORD command, but executed automatically and internally in this phase). From this point on,
the deformed mesh will be used for postprocessing results from the linear perturbation.
3. Regenerate other needed matrices such as mass and damping matrices ([M] and [C]).
4. Perform the linear analysis. Currently, only modal or buckling analysis is available.
User action is only needed for steps (1) and (4) above. Steps (2) and (3) are performed automatically by
the program. To accomplish these steps, the following command input is needed:
MODOPT,eigensolver,number_of_modes,
. . .
(include commands to add or remove linear perturbation loads)
MXPAND,number_of_modes,
SOLVE
FINISH
Note that the second phase is performed immediately following the SOLVE,ELFORM command without
exiting the solution processor (/SOLU); this is in order to correctly retain the snapshot of the restart
status from the base analysis. Also, for the case of geometric nonlinearity, the nodal coordinates may be
updated automatically based on the restart point (you do not need to issue the UPCOORD command).
In a linear perturbation modal or buckling analysis, after the solution phase, a stress expansion pass is
typically carried out. A stress expansion should be done along with the modal/buckling analysis in order
to use the appropriate material property and to obtain the total sum of elastic strain/stress due to the
linear perturbation analysis and the base analysis. A separate expansion pass (EXPASS command) is not
allowed after the linear perturbation analysis.
9.2.4.Stress Expansion from Modal Linear Perturbation Analysis

Just as in a standard linear analysis, once the solution eigenvectors are available, the stresses or strains
of the structure can be calculated.
In general, there are two choices in calculating incremental (perturbation) stresses, depending on
whether a linear or nonlinear material property is used. The ANSYS program uses the linear portion of
the nonlinear material constitutive law to recover stresses for all materials, except for hyperelasticity. For
hyperelasticity, the material property is based on the tangent of the hyperelastic material's constitutive
law at the restart point.
Since a linear perturbation analysis can be understood as an extra "iteration" of a base analysis, all the
history-dependent results of the base analysis are inherited in the results of the linear perturbation
analysis. Therefore, any plastic strains, creep strains, swelling strains, thermal strains, and contact
results from the base analysis are available in the results data of the linear perturbation analysis. Note
that the total strain will be the sum of all the strains (for example, PLNSOL,EPTO). The nonlinear
solution quantities such as equivalent stress, stress state ratio, and plastic state variable are also
available. For detailed information about element results from a linear perturbation, see Interpretation of
Structural Element Results after a Linear Perturbation Analysis in the Element Reference.
For contact elements, the contact status or contact forces are frequently of interest. The ANSYS program
uses the same contact status in calculations of both the stiffness matrix for the linear perturbation
analysis and contact results for the expansion pass.
9.2.5.Reviewing Results of a Linear Perturbation Analysis

In the expansion pass, the ANSYS program calculates strains and stresses and stores them in the
Jobname.RSTP file, along with the eigenmode solution. One of the reasons for the creation of the
Jobname.RSTP file is that all the existing restart files from the base analysis are preserved for possible
future use. The same linear perturbation or restart analysis can be performed repeatedly from the same
restarting point. The Jobname.RSTP file only stores the results of the linear perturbation analysis. Results
of the base analysis types are still stored in the Jobname.RST file.
The stresses at the restarting point of the base static or full transient analysis should be obtained from
the Jobname.RST file of the base analysis.
9.2.6.Downstream Analysis Following the Linear Perturbation Analysis

Following the linear perturbation analysis, other analysis types can be performed by using the
information from the linear perturbation analysis.
If the linear perturbation analysis is a modal analysis, the following analysis types are possible by using
the .MODE file generated by the perturbation and the database of the model:
Harmonic or transient analysis using the mode superposition (MSUP) method
Response spectrum analysis
Random vibration analysis
Note that the deformed mesh due to the prior static or full transient analysis is used in the linear
perturbation analysis and in the downstream analysis.
In all the above listed analyses, the first load vector used will be {F perturbed }. If more loading cases are
required, a new {F perturbed } load vector must be regenerated by using the MODCONT command. Only
linear material properties are supported in these analyses. The program assumes the analyses are purely
linear.
9.3.Considerations for Load Generation and Controls

Generally, structural loads can be divided into two categories: mechanical loads and non-mechanical
loads. Non-mechanical loads relevant to this procedure include thermal, swelling, initial stresses/strains,
and other initial conditions. In the base analysis, a combination of mechanical and non-mechanical loads
is freely applied without any restrictions. However, for linear perturbation analysis, only mechanical loads
are allowed in the second phase of the analysis. In a modal linear perturbation analysis, the total loads
obtained from the second phase of the analysis may be used in the downstream analysis following the
linear perturbation modal analysis. If a downstream analysis is not needed, then this load generation
step in linear perturbation modal analysis procedure can be ignored.
It is recommended that all the loads from the base analysis be deleted (which is the default, except for
displacement boundary conditions, inertia loads, and non-mechanical loads). Non-mechanical loads need
to remain unmodified so that a complicated nonlinear snapshot for various solution matrices and
element history variables can be regenerated in the first phase of linear perturbation. New mechanical
loads should be applied at the second phase of the linear perturbation process.
9.3.1.Generation and Control of Mechanical Loads

The total perturbed loads are calculated as follows:
where:
{F end } = total loads at the end of the load step of the current restart point (load applications are read
from the .LDHI file). By default, all loads of {F end } are deleted except for displacement boundary
conditions, inertia loads, and non-mechanical loads.
{F add } = additional (new) loads prescribed by the user in the second phase of the linear perturbation
analysis (after the first SOLVE,ELFORM command is invoked). This additional loading is optional.
In the first phase of a linear perturbation analysis, the ANTYPE,,RESTART command will resume the
Jobname.RDB database and read in the Jobname.LDHI file to establish the {F end } load. New load
application (adding to {F add }) or load removal (changing {F end }) can be done only in the second phase
of the linear perturbation analysis (after the first SOLVE,ELFORM command). This allows flexibility in
controlling the final {F perturbed } that will be used.
For a linear perturbation modal analysis, {F perturbed } will be calculated and stored in the Jobname.FULL
and Jobname.MODE files for a subsequent mode superposition, PSD, or other type of modal-based linear
dynamic analysis.
9.3.2.Generation and Control of Non-mechanical Loads

Non-mechanical loads need to remain unmodified so that a complicated nonlinear snapshot for various
solution matrices and element history variables can be regenerated in the first phase of linear
perturbation. Thus, total load contributions to {F perturbed } will include non-mechanical loads in the first
phase of linear perturbation. Among all non-mechanical loads, thermal loads are most frequently used.
In the second phase of a linear perturbation modal analysis, the thermal loads inherited from the base
analysis will not be included in the load vectors {F perturbed }. However, in the second phase of a linear
perturbation eigenvalue buckling analysis, the thermal load inherited from the base analysis will be
included in {F perturbed }.
In the stress expansion pass of the linear perturbation modal analysis, thermal effects will not contribute
any strain in the total strain calculation; that is, the thermal strain will be zero in this expansion pass.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertload.html[28/04/2013 08:05:43 p.m.]
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertload.html[28/04/2013 08:05:43 p.m.]
9.4. Considerations for Perturbed Stiffness Matrix Generation
9.4.Considerations for Perturbed Stiffness Matrix Generation

The first phase of linear perturbation analysis depends heavily on the multiframe restart procedure; it
also inherits the limitation of the multiframe restart (see Multiframe Restart Limitations in the Basic
Analysis Guide ). These limitations include the following:
The Jobname.Rnnn file does not save the EKILL and EALIVE commands. If EKILL or EALIVE
commands are required in the first phase of the linear perturbation analysis, you must reissue
these commands before the SOLVE,ELFORM command is executed.
The Jobname.RDB file saves only the database information available at the first substep of the first
load step. If you input other information after the first load step and need that information for the
restart, you must input this information in the first phase of the linear perturbation. This situation
often occurs when APDL parameters are used. You must use PARSAV to save the parameters
during the initial run and use PARRES to restore them in the restart. The situation also occurs
when you want to change element real constants values; reissue the R command in the first phase
of the linear perturbation analysis.
This limitation also applies to all other commands which modify element material properties or real
constants from the base analysis in the second or later load step(s).
All loading and boundary conditions from the base analysis are stored in the Jobname.LDHI file;
therefore, upon the first phase of a linear perturbation analysis, changing the boundary conditions
will not be allowed. At the end of the first phase (after the SOLVE,ELFORM command is
completed), the program will automatically manipulate the boundary conditions according to the
specification of the LoadControl key on the PERTURB command. However, any type of load
manipulation is allowed in the second phase of the linear perturbation analysis so that the desired
perturbation loads can be easily obtained.
Before execution of the SOLVE,ELFORM command, the settings for regeneration of prior solution
matrices with additional or specific requirements should be made. These specific requirements can be
met by using the following commands (these are optionally needed):
CMROTATE -- Used to specify the rotational velocity of an element component about a user-defined
rotational axis. It is needed in brake squeal analysis in conjunction with the QR damped eigensolver
(MODOPT,QRDAMP).
QRDOPT -- Used by QR damped eigensolver for reuse of symmetric eigenmodes from the Block
Lanczos eigensolver (LANB).
CNKMOD -- Used for modifying contact status from the base analysis locally for each contact pair. The
ContKey parameter on the PERTURB command can modify the contact status globally.
MP -- Used for modifying contact frictional coefficient, MU.
TBMODIF -- Used for modifying certain material properties. Use of this command is not recommended,
except for modifying frictional coefficients (similar to MP command usage).
EALIVE, EKILL, ESTIF -- These are used for reproducing the element birth/dead status at the point
of the multiframe restart. They may not be used to change element status from the restarted point.
CORIOLIS -- Used for including Coriolis effects in the modal analysis when the base analysis is static.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertstiff.html[28/04/2013 08:05:55 p.m.]
9.5. Considerations for Rotating Machinery
9.5.Considerations for Rotating Machinery

When modeling rotating machinery, there are special considerations for performing a linear perturbation
modal analysis that includes Coriolis effects. If the base analysis is a full transient analysis, the program
will include Coriolis effects in the transient analysis whenever the Coriolis effect in the rotating reference
frame (CORIOLIS,ON) is applied. These Coriolis effects are automatically carried over to the linear
perturbation analysis. It is recommended that you include Coriolis effects (if they need to be accounted
for) in the full transient analysis to achieve an accurate linear perturbation analysis.
If the base analysis is a static analysis, then the linear perturbation procedure depends on whether the
Coriolis effects are based on a rotating reference frame or a stationary reference frame:
1. If it is in a rotating reference frame, then two cases are possible:
If large deformation is included in the base analysis (NLGEOM,ON), the Coriolis effects can
be included in the base analysis and will then carry into the linear perturbation analysis.
Another option is to issue the CORIOLIS command in the first phase of the linear
perturbation modal analysis if the Coriolis force is not taken into account in the base static
analysis.
If large deformation is not included in the base analysis (NLGEOM,OFF), Coriolis effects will
not be included in the base static analysis. In the first phase of the linear perturbation modal
analysis, the CORIOLIS command is explicitly needed to account for the Coriolis effects.
2. If it is in a stationary reference frame:
It is recommended that you issue CORIOLIS and OMEGA/CMOMEGA commands to
include gyroscopic effects in the base analysis; then the gyroscopic effects are carried into
the linear perturbation analysis.
The above scenarios can be summarized in the following table.
Rotating Reference Frame - Nonlinear Prestressed Modal Solution
1. Static solve (issue CORIOLIS,ON and OMEGA/CMOMEGA)
2. First linear perturbation solve (CORIOLIS command is optional; use LoadControl =
INERKEEP on PERTURB command to retain OMEGA loads from base analysis)
3. Second linear perturbation solve (CORIOLIS and OMEGA commands are not needed)
Rotating Reference Frame - Linear Prestressed Modal Solution
1. Static solve (issue OMEGA/CMOMEGA)
2. First linear perturbation solve (issue CORIOLIS,ON; use LoadControl = INERKEEP on
PERTURB command to retain OMEGA loads from base analysis)
Stationary Reference Frame - Linear or Nonlinear Prestressed Modal Solution
1. Static solve (Issue CORIOLIS,ON,,,ON and OMEGA/CMOMEGA)
2. First linear perturbation solve (CORIOLIS command is optional -- it is needed if it is not
issued in base analysis; use LoadControl = INERKEEP on PERTURB command to retain
OMEGA loads from base analysis)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strllinpertrotmach.html[28/04/2013 08:06:09 p.m.]
9.5. Considerations for Rotating Machinery
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strllinpertrotmach.html[28/04/2013 08:06:09 p.m.]
9.6. Sample Inputs for Linear Perturbation Analysis
9.6.Sample Inputs for Linear Perturbation Analysis

This section contains sample input listings for four linear perturbation analysis examples.
Example9.1Simple Example of a Modal Linear Perturbation Analysis
/batch,list
/title, A simple problem to demonstrate the linear perturbation procedure
/com
BASE ANALYSIS
/prep7
mp,ex,1,10
! Simple material
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
mp,dense,1,0.5
n,1,
n,2,1
n,3,1,1
n,4,0,1
n,5,2,0
n,6,2,1
n,7,3,0
n,8,3,1
et,1,182,,,1
e,1,2,3,4
e,2,5,6,3,
e,7,8,6,5
allsel,all
d,1,all
d,4,ux
f,8,fy,-2.0
dlist
finish
! Apply a lateral point load at node 8
/solution
antype,static
nlgeom,on
rescontrol,,all,1
nsub,5,5,5
solve
finish
!
!
!
!
Static analysis
Large deformation and large strain
Get restart files for all substeps
Use fixed time steps
!! Begin modal linear perturbation analysis

/solu
/com
FIRST PHASE OF LINEAR PERTURBATION
antype,,restart,1,3,perturb ! Restart at 1st loadstep, 3rd substep,
! from the base nonlinear static analysis
perturb,modal
solve,elform
! Execute 1st phase of linear perturbation, recovering Kt of NLGEOM,on
!!
/com
SECOND PHASE OF LINEAR PERTURBATION
dlist,all
! Displacement boundary conditions are not deleted
flist,all
! Lateral point load at node 8 has been deleted internally at SOLVE,elform
f,8,fy,-4.0
! Apply new load for downstream analysis,
f,8,fx,-2.0
! (downstream analysis is not shown in this simple example)
! This newly applied point load does not affect modal solution
flist
modopt,lanb,3
! Solve for lowest 3 modes by using block Lanczos
mxpand,3,,,yes
! Expand mode the same time
outres,esol,all
solve
! Execute 2nd phase of linear perturbation: modal analysis
dlist
! Verify perturbation loads again
flist
fini
/post1
file,,rstp ! Use *.rstp file to review results from linear perturbation
set,list
! It should list 3 eigen-modes
set,last
! List stresses of the 3rd mode
prnsol,sige
finish
/exit,nosave
Example9.2Linear Perturbation Analysis with Large Rotation Effects

/batch,list
/title, Example of a linear pertubed modal analysis with large rigid body rotation
/com, *================================================================================
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertinputs.html[28/04/2013 08:06:25 p.m.]
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
/com,
* Objective:
* The objective of this example is to demonstrate a linear perturbed modal solve
* with rigid body rotation. Stress, strain, and frequency results are also shown
* in global coordinates and element coordinates.
*
* Materials: linear elastic anisotropic
*
* Element features: Full integration, nonlayered structural solids using pure
* displacement formulation, esys defined.
*
* Description:
* A solid bar is meshed with SOLID185 elements. Large rigid rotation is
* performed followed by modal analysis using linear perturbation.
*
*===================================================================================
/com, ***********************************************
/com, Rigid rotation and perturbed modal analysis
/com, ***********************************************
*afun,deg
/prep7
/triad,lbot
/view,1,1,0,0
/angl,1,-90
/graph,full
ROTXY=0
ROTYZ=0
ROTZX=-90
et,1,185
n,1,0,0,0
! Define nodes
n,2,.5,0,0
n,3,.5,1,0
n,4,0,1,0
ngen,11,10,1,4,1,0,0,1
en,1,1,2,3,4,11,12,13,14
! Define elements
egen,10,10,1
mp,ex,1,1.0e6
! Define material
mp,ey,1,1.0e7
mp,ez,1,1.0e8
mp,nuxy,1,1.0e-8
mp,nuxz,1,1.0e-8
mp,nuyz,1,1.0e-8
mp,gxy,1,1e5
mp,gxz,1,1e5
mp,gyz,1,1e5
mp,dens,1,0.3/386.4
local,11,0,0,0,0,ROTXY,ROTYZ,ROTZX
csys,0
/psymb,cs,1
emodif,all,esys,11
tref,0
tunif,0
nsel,s,node,,1,4
d,all,ux,0
d,all,uy,0
d,all,uz,0
allsel,all
finish
!! Rigid rotation of 90 degrees
/solu
antype,static
nlgeom,on
! Large deflection
nsubst,1,1,1
save,case1,db,,model
NSTEP=9
DSTEP=90/NSTEP
*do,ISTEP,1,NSTEP
THETA=DSTEP*ISTEP
nsel,s,node,,3,4
d,all,uz,-sin(THETA)
d,all,uy,cos(THETA)-1
allsel
solve
*enddo
finish
!! Linear perturbed modal analysis
/solu
/com
First phase of linear perturbation
antype,static,restart,,,perturb
! Restart from the last substep of the rigid rotation
perturb,modal
solve,elform
of NLGEOM,on
/com
! Set linear perturbed modal analysis

! Execute 1st phase of linear perturbation, recovering Kt
Second phase of linear perturbation
outres,all,all
modopt,lanb,2
mxpand,2,,,yes
solve
analysis
finish
! Solve for first 2 modes by using block Lanczos

! Expand mode at the same time
! Execute 2nd phase of linear perturbation: modal
/post1
file,,rstp
perturbation
! Use *.rstp file to review results from linear
set,list
set,1,1
esel,s,elem,,1
! List 2 eigenmodes
! List strains and stresses of element 1 in the first mode
rsys,0
presol,s
presol,epto
rsys,solu
presol,s
presol,epto
! List results in global coordinates
! List results in element coordinates
finish
/exit,nosave
Example9.3Contact Status Control in a Linear Perturbation Analysis

/batch,list
/title, An Example showing contact status key control in linear perturbation
/com,
/com, * This example is to verify the contact status key (CURRENT/STICKING)
/com, * on the PERTURB command, and also to verify the modification of
/com, * contact status to individual pairs by using the CNKMOD command.
/com, *
/com, * The model: a thin circular plate with a rib along the outer radius,
/com, * which is connected by contact elements CONTA172 and TARGE169.
/com, * The rib is connected to the plate by means of a force in the radial
/com, * direction. Another force is applied in the tangential direction on
/com, * the rib to generate sliding contact.
/com, * Original contact behavior: No separation (sliding allowed)
/com, * Case 1: Using CURRENT as contact status key on PERTURB command
/com, * Case 2: Using STICKING as contact status key on PERTURB command.
/com, * Case 3: Using CNKMOD command to modify individual contact pair to be standard.
/com, *
/com,
Case 1: Using CURRENT as contact status key on PERTURB command
/prep7
et,1,182
r,1,0.1
mp,ex,1,30e6
mp,dens,1,7.324
mp,prxy,,0.3
csys,1
pcirc,10,5,0,90
pcirc,10,15,40,50
allsel,all
esize,0.7
cyclic
! A cyclic symmetric static problem
mshkey,1
amesh,all
allsel,all
/com, Original contact definition
et,2,172
mat,2
mp,mu,2,0.0001
keyopt,2,4,2
keyopt,2,2,0
keyopt,2,12,2
keyopt,2,5,1
! Penalty function
! No-Separation contact (sliding allowed)
type,2
real,2
lsel,s,line,,7
lmesh,all
allsel,all
et,3,169
lsel,s,line,,1
type,3
real,2
esurf,,reverse
lmesh,all
allsel,all
/com, Boundary Condition
nsel,s,loc,x,5
d,all,all,0
nsel,all
allsel,all
nsel,s,loc,x,15
esln,s
cm,load,elem
allsel,all
nsel,s,loc,x,13,14
nsel,r,loc,y,40
cm,comp1,node
nsel,all
nrotate,all
finish
/SOLU
! Enter the base nonlinear static analysis
antype,static
rescontrol,define,all,1
outres,all,all
nlgeom,on
nsubs,20,20,20
kbc,0
nsel,s,loc,x,15
f,all,fx,-3e4
allsel,all
solve
! 1st loadstep
time,2.0
nsubs,20,20,20
kbc,0
f,comp1,fy,10
allsel,all
solve
finish
! 2nd loadstep
/post1
set,last
/cycexpand,,on
esel,s,type,,2
/com, Contact status after Base static analysis: sliding
presol,cont,stat
esel,all
allsel,all
/cycexpand,,off
finish
/solu
antype,static,restart,,,perturb
perturb,modal,,current,allkeep
solve,elform
modopt,lanb,6
mxpand,6,,,yes
solve
finish
! Enter linear perturbed modal analysis

! by using last loadstep and substep.
! Keep all the loads as in Base static run.
! First phase of linear perturbation
! Second phase of linear perturbation

! Completion of linear perturbation
/post1
file,,rstp
set,list
/cycexpand,,on
set,1,5
! Use the 5th mode, Harmonic Index = 0 to see solution
esel,s,type,,2
presol,cont,stat ! Expected contact status: sliding (same as Base static analysis)
esel,all
/cycexpand,,off
/delete,test1,rstp
finish
/clear,nostart
/com, Case 2: Use sticking as contact status key on PERTURB command
/solu
antype,static,restart,1,10,perturb
perturb,modal,,sticking,allkeep
solve,elform
! Restart from loadstep 1, substep 10 (uy=2)

! Modify the contact from sliding to sticking
modopt,lanb,6
mxpand,6,,,yes
solve
finish
/post1
file,,rstp
set,list
/cycexpand,,on
set,1,5
esel,s,type,,2
presol,cont,stat ! Expected contact status: sticking
esel,all
/cycexpand,,off
/delete,test1,rstp
finish
/clear,nostart
/com, Case 3: Use CNKMOD command to modify individual contact pairs
/solu
antype,static,restart,1,10,perturb
cnkmod,2,12,3
perturb,modal,,current,allkeep
analysis
solve,elform
modopt,lanb,6
mxpand,6,,,yes
solve
finish
/post1
file,,rstp
set,list
/cycexpand,,on
set,1,5
esel,s,type,,2
presol,cont,stat
esel,all
/cycexpand,,off
finish
/exit,nosave
! Restart from load step 1, substep 10 (uy=2)

! Change from Keyopt(12)=2 to Keyopt(12)=3 (bonded)
! Retain the contact status same as in Base static
! Expected contact status: Sticking
Example9.4Prestressed QRDAMP Linear Perturbation Analysis

/batch,list
/title, Example:a simple model for QRDAMP-NLGEOM,ON prestressed case
/com,
Use UNSYM eigensolver to compare with QRDAMP solution
/com,
Use CMROTATE command to simulate rotational velocity
pres1 = 500
k1 = 1.e+4
k2 = 1.e+2
/prep7
et,1,185,,2
mp,ex,1,3.0e5
mp,nuxy,1,.3
mp,dens,1,.05
mp,mu,1,.3
! Make friction large
lp = 0.5
hp = 0.5
block,-lp,lp,-lp,lp, ,hp
block,-lp,lp,-lp,lp,hp,2*hp
esize,1.0
vmesh,1,2
!! Allow sliding contact between blocks
et,2,174
et,3,170
keyopt,2,9,1
keyopt,2,10,1
r,3
type,2
real,3
vsel,s,,,1,,,1
nsel,r,loc,z,hp
esurf
type,3
vsel,s,,,2,,,1
nsel,r,loc,z,hp
esurf
alls
!! Put springs on UX
et,4,14
keyopt,4,2,1
r,4,k1
et,5,14
keyopt,5,2,1
r,5,k2
lsp = -hp/2
n,1000,-lp, lp,lsp
n,1001,-lp,-lp,lsp
n,1002, lp, lp,lsp
n,1003, lp,-lp,lsp
type,4
real,4
e,1000,node(-lp,lp,0)
e,1001,node(-lp,-lp,0)
e,1002,node(lp,lp,0)
type,5
real,5
e,1003,node(lp,-lp,0)
!! Put springs on UY
et,6,14
keyopt,6,2,2
r,6,k1
et,7,14
keyopt,7,2,2
r,7,k2
type,6
real,6
type,7
real,7
!! Put springs on UZ
et,8,14
keyopt,8,2,3
r,8,k1
et,9,14
keyopt,9,2,3
r,9,k2
type,8
real,8
type,9
real,9
finish
/solution
antype,static
!! Apply zero displacement on second node of springs

nsel,,loc,z,lsp
d,all,all,0
allsel
!! Apply zero UX displacement on constrained plate
vsel,s,,,1,,,1
nsel,r,loc,x,-lp
d,all,ux,0
!! Force UX displacement on free plate
vsel,s,,,2,,,1
nsel,r,loc,x,-lp
d,all,ux,.01
!! Apply zero UY displacement on free plate
vsel,s,,,2,,,1
nsel,r,loc,y,-lp
d,all,uy,0
allsel
!! Apply pressure on free plate
nsel,s,loc,z,2*hp
sf,all,pres, pres1
solc,,,nopl
nsel,all
esel,,type,,2
cm,contact2,elem
allsel
! Make a contact component
outres,all,last
nlgeom,on
nropt,unsym
! Use unsymmetric option for frictional contact

! so that QRDAMP or UNSYM eigensolver can be used
solve
finish
/solution
antype,,restart,,,perturbation
perturb,modal
qrdopt,yes
! Allow reuse of QRDAMP Lanczos modes later
cmrot,contact2,0.0,0.0,1.9 ! Apply rotational velocity along rotZ
solve,elform
! 1st phase of perturbation
!! Free blocks to see rigid body modes, if any.
!! This is an example of modifying loads or B.C. in the 2nd
!! phase of linear perturbation.
vsel,s,,,1,2,,1
ddele,all,all
allsel
modopt,qrdamp,20,,,yes
! Try QRDAMP eigensolver
!! modopt,unsym,20,,,yes
! Alternatively use UNSYM eigensolver
solve
! 2nd phase of perturbation
finish
/exit,nosa
9.7. Comparison of Linear Perturbation and Prestressed Modal Procedures
9.7.Comparison of Linear Perturbation and Prestressed Modal

Procedures
The ANSYS program also provides a partial solution procedure (PSOLVE command) to perform a mode
frequency analysis based on prior linear or nonlinear static or full transient analyses. This partial solution
procedure is similar to the method described in Performing a Prestressed Modal Analysis. This partial
solution procedure (which can be used when the base analysis is a small deflection analysis) has the
following limitations compared to the standard linear perturbation analysis procedure described here:
In the partial solution procedure, a modal analysis can be done only at the last substep of the last
load step of the prior analysis. In the linear perturbation procedure, a modal analysis can be done
at any time point during the prior analysis as long as the multiframe restart file is made available.
In the partial solution procedure, the stress expansion pass is done assuming the material property
is linear for the entire model. If it contains hyperelasticity or another nonlinear material that does
not have an easy segregation from the linear material property in the constitutive law, the stress
expansion pass is not allowed. In the linear perturbation procedure, the stress expansion pass uses
linear material properties and is always allowed.
In the partial solution procedure, the stress expansion pass does not have any effects of the
previous nonlinear analysis; any nonlinear history-dependent properties and large rotation effects
are lost. However, in the linear perturbation stress expansion pass, all of the nonlinear effects,
including history dependent and large rotation effects, are taken into consideration and handled
consistently. This guarantees correct results for the linear perturbation analysis.
In the partial solution procedure, the nodal coordinate update for the original mesh is done by an
external UPCOORD command (this is optional). In the linear perturbation procedure, the nodal
coordinate update is done automatically at the beginning of the second phase of the solution; the
stress expansion is done based on the updated geometry.
In the partial solution procedure, all prestress and spin-softening effects are invoked by the
commands PSTRES, OMEGA, and CMOMEGA at the earlier stage of the analysis, as well as in
the PSOLVE phase. In the linear perturbation procedure, all of the prestress effects are included
automatically, independent of PSTRES, OMEGA, or CMOMEGA command settings, in the phases
of a linear perturbation analysis. Also, even though the base analysis is linear, the prestress effects
are still taken into account in the subsequent linear perturbation analysis.
If the base analysis includes geometric nonlinearity (NLGEOM,ON), the solution accuracy from a
QR damped (MODOPT,QRDAMP) linear perturbation analysis is greatly improved, while in the
partial solution procedure, the solution may be less accurate compared to that from the UNSYM
eigensolver. The architectural development of the linear perturbation code enables this
improvement on QRDAMP.
In the partial solution procedure, eigenvalue buckling analysis is not supported. In the linear
perturbation procedure, buckling analysis is supported if the base analysis is linear, including linear
with bonded contact.
Performing a partial solution requires prior knowledge of wanting to do a prestressed modal
analysis and requires use of the EMATWRITE command to force writing of the .EMAT file.
EMATWRITE is not needing in the linear perturbation analysis procedure.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertcomp.html[28/04/2013 08:06:37 p.m.]

Several ANSYS, Inc. publications, particularly the Verification Manual and the Technology Demonstration
Guide, describe additional linear perturbation analysis examples.
instructions and printouts. However, most users who have at least some finite element experience can
infer the necessary details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with
accompanying comments.
The Verification Manual includes the following linear perturbation analysis test cases:
VM53
VM54
VM55
VM59
Vibration of a String Under Tension

Vibration of a Rotating Cantilever Blade
Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane
Lateral Vibration of an Axially-loaded Bar
The Technology Demonstration Guide presents a series of analysis problems from a variety of
engineering disciplines. Each problem description provides information about the nature and physical
characteristics of the problem, specific modeling techniques, material properties, boundary conditions
and loading, analysis details, and solution controls. The guide includes the following example problems
that use linear perturbation analysis methods:
"Centrifugal Impeller Analysis Using Cyclic Symmetry and Linear Perturbation"
"Brake Squeal Analysis"
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strlinpertother.html[28/04/2013 08:06:48 p.m.]
Chapter 10: Material Curve Fitting
Chapter10:Material Curve Fitting

Use material curve fitting to derive coefficients from experimental data that you provide for your
material. Curve fitting involves comparing your experimental data to certain preexisting nonlinear
material models. With this feature, you compare experimental data versus program-calculated data for
different nonlinear models. Based on these comparisons, you decide which material model to use during
solution.
Curve fitting is based on the data table configurations outlined in the TB command. The data
manipulations and constructions are performed by the TBFT command.
The following material curve-fitting topics are available:
Applicable Material Behavior Types
Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
Creep Material Curve Fitting
Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRmcf.html[28/04/2013 08:07:00 p.m.]
10.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types
10.1.Applicable Material Behavior Types

ANSYS supports curve fitting for hyperelastic, creep and viscoelastic material behavior. Temperature
dependency is supported for all three behaviors.
Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
For hyperelastic material models, your stress-strain curves can be converted to any of the available
ANSYS-supported hyperelastic models, including Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Neo-Hookean, Polynomial,
Arruda-Boyce, Gent, and Yeoh. Compressible hyperelastic Ogden hyper-foam and Blatz-Ko models
are also supported.
Creep Material Curve Fitting
For creep material models, your creep strain rate or creep strain as a function of time, stress or
temperature can be converted to any of the thirteen ANSYS-supported implicit creep models.
Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
For viscoelastic material models, your shear modulus vs. time and/or bulk modulus vs. time data is
converted to ANSYS-supported Prony series format.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strmcftypes.html[28/04/2013 08:07:05 p.m.]
10.2.Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

Hyperelastic curve fitting is a tool for estimating your material constants by inputting your experimental
data and comparing it to the ANSYS-supported hyperelastic material models. You perform curve fitting
either interactively (GUI) or via batch commands. You input your experimental data, choose a model
from one of nine supplied hyperelastic models, perform a regression analysis, graphically view the curvefitting results, compare the fits to the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the database
as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands for the subsequent finite element analyses.
ANSYS hyperelastic models can define three types of behavior: purely incompressible, nearly
incompressible, and compressible. Hyperelastic curve fitting is based on the HYPER option of the TB
command.
10.2.1.Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material

Behavior
The steps for hyperelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:
1 Prepare Experimental Data
2 Input the Data
3 Select a Material Model Option
4 Initialize the Coefficients
5 Specify Control Parameters and

Solve
6 Plot Your Experimental Data and
Analyze
7 Write Data to TB Command
The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by

a space or a comma.
The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by browsing
to the file location (GUI) or by specifying the filename and
path (batch) on the command line.
The material options for the applicable curve-fitting
regimen are defined in the TB command. ANSYS supports
nine hyperelastic models. Once you pick a model, you can
still change to another model if an ideal fit is not realized.
Depending on the model, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a
linear or nonlinear regression process. The hyperelastic
material models, along with the associated process for each
are listed in Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model
Types.
You will specify the type of error norm to be used to
generate the curve fit.
You review and verify the results by comparing the
experimental data and the regression errors. If the results
you obtain are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to
perform a new curve-fitting solution.
Write your curve-fitting results to the database in the TB
command table format.
10.2.1.1.Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. Your hyperelastic curve fitting data needs to be a comma
or space delimited file, referencing your stress vs. strain values.
Hyperelastic curve fitting supports three main behaviors:
Case 1 - Totally Incompressible Models (see Table10.1:Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2
Models and Blatz-Ko)
Case 2 - Nearly Incompressible Models (see Table10.1:Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2
Models and Blatz-Ko)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRmcfhyp.html[28/04/2013 08:07:10 p.m.]
Case 3 - Compressible Models (see Table10.2:Experimental Details for Case 3 Models)

The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.
Table10.1Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type
Uniaxial Test
Biaxial Test
Planar/Shear Test
Simple Shear Test
Volumetric Test
Column 1
Column 2
Engineering Strain
Engineering
Engineering Strain
Engineering
Engineering Strain (in Engineering
loading direction)
Engineering Shear
Engineering
Strain
Stress
Volume Ratio (J)
Column 3
Stress
Stress
Stress
Shear
(Optional) Engineering
Normal Stress (normal to the
edge of shear stress)
Hydrostatic Pressure
Table10.2Experimental Details for Case 3 Models

Experiment Type
Column 1
Uniaxial Test
Engineering Strain
Biaxial Test
Engineering Strain
Shear Test
Simple Shear Test
Engineering Strain
loading direction)
Engineering Shear
Volumetric Test
Volume Ratio (J)
Column 2
Lateral Direction Engineering
Strain
Engineering Strain (in thickness
direction)
(in
Engineering Strain (in thickness
direciton)
Strain Engineering Shear Stress
Column 3
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
(Optional)
Engineering
Normal Stress
(normal to the
edge of shear
stress)
Note: J is the ratio of current volume to the original volume.

All stresses output by ANSYS in POST1/POST26 are true stresses and logarithmic
strains.
10.2.1.2.Input the Data

Use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. First, designate whether they are
uniaxial, biaxial, shear, simple shear, or volumetric, and then designate the location in the Option2,
Option3 , and Option4 fields. All of the stress values will be engineering stress, except for the volumetric
option (true stress). The file should be a simple, delimited set of stress and strain values similar to the
following:
0.9703
0.9412
0.9127
0.8847
60.00
118.2
175.2
231.1
For temperature-dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the top of the experimental
data using the
/temp,value
line. This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An example of a typical data
input using these attributes follows:
/temp,100
0.9703 60.00
0.9412 118.2
0.9127 175.2
0.8847 231.1
Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees. You can add additional data sets
at other temperatures, in additional files. One file can have data at only one temperature.
For compressible materials, the curve-fitting tool's default behavior is to solve only for stress as a
function of strain and lateral strain. To force the curve-fitting tool to also fit experimental lateral strain
data to generate the coefficients for the Ogden compressible foam model, add the line /USEL,1 near the
top of the experimental data file. This option is valid for uniaxial, biaxial and shear test data.
10.2.1.2.1.Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
=
Option2 =
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option1
UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, SSHE or VOLU

name of file containing experimental data
file name extension
file directory
10.2.1.2.2.GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the filename of your data file,
and also include the appropriate path. You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate
input is performed for each Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).
10.2.1.3.Select a Material Model Option

Use the FADD option of the TBFT command to define your constitutive model. Table10.3:Hyperelastic
Curve-Fitting Model Types below lists the models that are available for hyperelastic curve fitting. When
volumetric data is supplied, a compressible or nearly incompressible model is implied, and only the
designated options will be available. When no volumetric data is supplied, the model is understood to be
incompressible, and those model options will be available. Supplying zero coefficients for the volumetric
data field will also denote an incompressible model.
Table10.3Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types
Model Name
Mooney-Rivlin
Polynomial
Yeoh
Neo-Hookean
Ogden
Arruda-Boyce
Gent
Blatz-Ko
Ogden Hyperfoam
Abbreviation
moon
poly
yeoh
neoh
ogde
boyc
gent
blat
foam
Order/Options
2, 3, 5, 9
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
No. of
Coefficients [1]
2/3/5/9+1
see below [2]
N+N
1+1
2*N+N
2+1
2+1
1
2*N+N
Linear/Nonlinear
Fitting
Linear
Linear
Linear
Linear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
1. The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric coefficients and the
number of volumetric coefficients.
2. The number of coefficients for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.
Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the experimental data
you supply will require additional fields.
More information about the hyperelastic models available for curve fitting can be found in Hyperelastic
Material Models.
10.2.1.3.1.Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
= model name, as specified in Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above)

Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting
Model Types (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each hyperelastic
model type.
Option2
10.2.1.3.2.GUI
A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable material model option.
The options displayed will be dependent on the format of your experimental data file.
10.2.1.4.Initialize the Coefficients

Depending on the model you choose, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or a nonlinear regression
process. In both cases, the initial coefficients you supply will determine how accurate and efficient your
curve fit will be. The initial values of the coefficients generally come from experience, and also from
studying the function that defines the model you are attempting to compare/fit your data to. For most
hyperelastic models, 1 or -1 is a good starting point. However, coefficient values can vary greatly
depending on the model chosen. The Gent model, for instance, provides good fit with initial coefficient
values as high as 1000.
You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients ( Option4 = FIX on the TBFT command). You specify a
value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on.
You can then release the coefficient you fixed and operate on it after the others are optimized. By
default, all of the coefficients are free to vary. The capability to fix coefficients applies only to nonlinear
curve fits (as listed in Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types).
For temperature-dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a
reference temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only
to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.
You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete
temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT,SOLVE
entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.
With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a
TBFT,SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other
temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each desired discrete temperature value and solve
again.
You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients
are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the
initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however,
overridden when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values are specified at
discrete temperature values. The curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular
temperature. If no coefficients are specified at a discrete temperature, the initial coefficients set before
temperature dependency was turned on are used.
10.2.1.4.1.Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name (see Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for the
available models)
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of the coefficient
To set Option4 for a reference temperature, or for temperature dependency:

TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for the
available models.
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option4 = tdep, Option5 = 1 turns on temperature dependency, and Option5 = 0 turns it
off. If Option4 = tref, Option5 will be either all, or the reference temperature.
TBFT,FIX,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for the
available models.
Option3 = not applicable
Option5 = 1 for fixed and 0 to vary
10.2.1.4.2.GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you pick. You can modify
individual coefficients to initialize them at values you believe are more appropriate.
10.2.1.5.Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Depending on the model, your hyperelastic curve fitting will be either a linear or nonlinear regression
process (see Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for details). Your error norms
can be either normalized or unnormalized. Normalized error norms (the default regression option)
generally give better results than the unnormalized error norms, since normalized error gives equal
weight to all of your data points.
The solution control parameters of a nonlinear regression include:
1. number of iterations
2. residual tolerance
3. coefficient change tolerance
The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change tolerance of your error
norm are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met. When you use nonlinear regression, you
must initialize your coefficients.
10.2.1.5.1.Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = model name. See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types
(above) for possible values.
Option4 = curve-fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
10.2.1.5.2.GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution control parameters, and the
solver options) interactively. You select the appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve to
generate the coefficients. You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary to
ensure an accurate result. The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.
10.2.1.6.Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual
errors. You can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. The first column is always your Xaxis, with each additional column plotted separately as a function of column one.
You should try to reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For
example, if your data contains time, temperature, stress, and creep strain, and you wish to see the
creep strain vary as a function of time at different temperatures and stresses in the plot, you add your
experimental data using multiple TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI operations) by
splitting the file into multiple experimental files as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of
temperature and stress.
10.2.1.6.1.GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data. Your plots will show columns 2 and above as separate curves,
plotted as a function of column 1. The data in column 1 is always the X-axis. By default, all the
experiments are plotted in the GUI window. To view specific data and its corresponding fitting result,
you can click the right mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view
the results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be found for different data fields in the curve-fitting GUI
window.
Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more
fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial
and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for both of
these functions. RMB also allows you to set the number of points used to generate the plot, and also
change the minimum X value and the maximum X value in a plot. You can also hide a particular curve
within a graph, turn the legend and/or axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale
and regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button to eliminate a specific curve and clarify or refine the
remaining curve.
10.2.1.6.2.Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit and the error
norm/residual values. When you plot the curve, the error norm/residual values are printed in the curvefitting GUI window. Error norm values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to
accept the results, but are not always the best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the curves and
visually assessing the result is usually the best indication. If the results are unacceptable, you may want
to go back to step 3 and solve again, either by picking a different model, increasing the order, or
redefining your initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters. You can continue to use
your original experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you get an acceptable solution.
10.2.1.7.Write Data to TB Command

After you are satisfied with your curve-fitting results, you can write the curve-fitting data to the ANSYS
database using TBFT,FSET. Both the GUI and the command line convert the coefficients to the
appropriate form before writing to ANSYS TB tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material
property set for use in subsequent analyses.
10.2.1.7.1.Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name. See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table10.3:Hyperelastic Curve-Fitting Model Types
(above) for possible values.
10.2.1.7.2.GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the representative curve
data, you are returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full
range of material behavior.
10.3.Creep Material Curve Fitting

ANSYS provides thirteen creep models, along with the tools to generate and fit derived coefficients to
your experimental data. Interactive (GUI) or command line (batch) input is available. You input your
experimental data, choose a model from one of the supplied creep models, and then perform a
regression analysis. You then graphically view the curve-fitting result, and compare it for fit with your
experimental data. If the curve is acceptable, you write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS
nonlinear data table commands (ANSYS TB command format) for the subsequent finite element
analyses.
10.3.1.Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior

The steps for creep curve fitting are defined as follows:
2 Input the Data into ANSYS

Solve
6 Plot the Experimental Data and
Analyze
The experimental data must be a plain text file with

headers to describe the data types and attributes. The
test data must be delimited by a space or a comma.
The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by
browsing to the file location in the GUI or by specifying
the location on the command line.
The material options for the applicable curve-fitting
regimen are defined in the TB command. ANSYS
supports thirteen implicit creep models. Once you pick a
model, you can still switch to another model if an ideal
fit is not realized.
Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial
values of the coefficients to be determined can be very
important for a successful solution.
You choose the error norm to be used for an acceptable
curve fit.
You review and verify the results by comparing them
with the experimental data and the regression errors. If
they are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to obtain a
new curve-fitting solution.
Write curve-fitting results in the TB command format to
the ANSYS database.

You need to provide accurate experimental test data in order to achieve valid curve-fitting results. For
creep analyses, you use either the creep strain value or creep strain rate, derived as a function of time,
temperature, stress, and/or creep strain. The type of data you need to provide will depend on the creep
model you choose. The experimental data is named "creep" to distinguish it from other types of data,
such as uniaxial, tension, biaxial, etc. The creep data must be a plain text file that contains the headers
and the test data in table form, delimited by a space or a comma.
The header is used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of
the data. There are five different creep data types; see Table10.4:Creep Data Types and Abbreviations.
Table10.4Creep Data Types and Abbreviations
Time
Equivalent Creep Strain
time
creq
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRmcfcrp.html[28/04/2013 08:07:36 p.m.]
Equivalent Creep Strain Rate

Equivalent Stress
Temperature
dcreq
seqv
temp
The header format to define each column's data-type is /n, abbr, where n is the index of the data
column in the file, and abbr is the abbreviation for the type of data in the column, as described in
Table10.4:Creep Data Types and Abbreviations.
A typical data input is shown below:
/1,seqv
! indicates
/2,creq
! indicates
/3,temp
! indicates
/4,dcreq
! indicates
4000
0.00215869
100
4000
0.00406109
100
4000
0.00664691
100
4000
0.0102068
100
4000
0.0151416
100
first column is stress

second column is creep strain
third column is temperature
fourth column is creep strain rate
0.000203055
0.000181314
0.000165303
0.000152217
0.000140946
When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it as an attribute. For
instance, in the above example, the stress and temperature are constant throughout the range. You
define this data as an attribute.
The header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value , where attr is the data-type abbreviation, and
value is the value of the attribute. The constant stress and temperature values above can be written into
the file header, as follows:
/seqv,4000
! indicate
/temp,100
! indicate
/1,creq
! indicate
/2,dcreq
! indicate
0.00215869 0.000203055
0.00406109 0.000181314
0.00664691 0.000165303
0.0102068 0.000152217
0.0151416 0.000140946
0.0220102 0.000130945
this creep has a constant stress of 4000

this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100
first column is creep strain
second column is creep strain rate
Thirteen model types are available for creep curve fitting. The model you choose determines the
experimental data required for the curve-fitting process. The following table describes the creep data
required to perform curve fitting for each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain
hardening, you need to input both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.
Table10.5Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute
Creep Model
Strain Hardening
Time Hardening
Generalized Exponential
Generalized Graham
Generalized Blackburn
Modified Time Hardening
Modified Strain Hardening
Generalized Garofalo
Exponential Form
Norton
Combined Time Hardening
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
Generalized Time Hardening
creq
x
x
x
dcreq
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
time
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
seqv
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
temp
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
10.3.1.2.Input the Data into ANSYS

The experimental data must be read into ANSYS from a plain text file. You prepare this file according to
the previous section, including both header information and formatted test data. The header portion is
required for creep analyses. Each file is viewed as a data set in ANSYS, and can be a complete set of
experimental test data or a part of a series of files of experimental test data. You can include several
data sets, such as tests performed at different stress levels and/or temperatures, when you perform
creep curve fitting. There are two ways to input the experimental data.
10.3.1.2.1.Batch
The EADD argument of the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location of your data files.
The command syntax is:
=
Option2 =
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option1
creep
name of file containing experimental data
file name extension
file directory
10.3.1.2.2.GUI
In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with the appropriate path if
the file is not in the default directory) into the appropriate area. You can also browse to a file in a
particular location. Use the Add Data Set button to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting.
There is no restriction on the number of data sets you can add.

The 13 models available for creep curve fitting are defined in Table10.6:Creep Models and
Abbreviations. Pick the one that best satisfies your requirements, and use the creep model abbreviation
from the table in subsequent fitting operations. You'll find it helpful to view the formula before you solve.
It will help you determine the initial coefficients you might use and also help you determine the format
of your experimental data. Also see Table10.6:Creep Models and Abbreviations to determine a starting
point for the initial creep model coefficients.
10.3.1.3.1.Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
= creep model abbreviation. See Table10.6:Creep Models and Abbreviations.

Option3 = not used for creep curve fitting.
Option2
The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated names for Option2
(above).
Table10.6Creep Models and Abbreviations
Model Number
1
2
Name
Strain Hardening
Time Hardening
Fitting Name/Option2
shar
thar
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Generalized Graham
Modified Time Hardening
Modified Strain Hardening
Exponential Form
Norton
Prim+Sec Time Hardening
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
Generalized Time Hardening
gexp
ggra
gbla
mtha
msha
ggar
expo
nort
psth
psrp
gtha
Note: The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose. See
Table10.5:Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute for the data types required for
each creep model.
10.3.1.3.2.GUI
You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All of the options and
constraints listed for batch input apply.

Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. A successful curve fit depends greatly on the initial
coefficient values; certain variances will prevent your curve fit from converging. When a solution doesn't
converge, you can adjust the initial value of specific coefficients and rerun the problem (you do not need
to input the data again). In general, the more parameters a model has, the more difficult it is to get the
solution to converge.
Models with many parameters will sometimes converge more easily if you fix (hold constant) your
coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other
coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coefficients to obtain a solution. By
default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.
Although some creep models implicitly address temperature dependency, other models lack this
capability. For both types of models, you can account for temperature dependency by generating
coefficients at discrete temperature values.
You solve for separate coefficients at each of your desired discrete temperatures. If the equation
implicitly supports temperature dependency already, that portion is eliminated by appropriately fixing the
coefficient to a specific value. For example, if you have e(-C*T), then C is set to 0 to eliminate this term.
To do this, you turn on temperature dependency by setting the tdep parameter to 1.
For temperature-dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a
reference temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only
to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data.
entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.
With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a
TBFT,SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other
temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and
solve again.
You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients
are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the
initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however,
overridden when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values is specified at
discrete temperatures. The curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature.
If no coefficients are specified at discrete temperatures, the initial coefficients set before temperature
dependency was turned on are used.
10.3.1.4.1.Batch
You define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option of the TBFT
command, as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
= creep model name

Option5 = value of coefficient
Then you can modify the coefficients with the FIX option of the TBFT command.
Option2
TBFT,FIX,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option5 =
Option2
creep model name

order, if applicable
index of coefficient
0 variable, 1 fixed
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option5 =
all.
Option2
creep model name

order, if applicable
tdep or tref
For Option4 = tdep, 1 to turn on, 0 to turn off. For Option4 = tdep, a specific temp value, or
10.3.1.4.2.GUI
The models listed in Table10.6:Creep Models and Abbreviations are available directly from the GUI.
When you pick a model from the choices, ANSYS automatically configures the coefficients for the model.
You can then make modifications, including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.

Your error norm, your maximum number iterations allowed, and your error tolerance will affect the
accuracy of your results. There are two available error norms available for the regression. The default
error norm calculation option is normalized curve fitting. It usually yields better results than
unnormalized curve fitting, since normalized fitting gives equal weight to all data points when minimizing
the error norms.
Other available solve criteria are number of iterations, residual tolerance, and coefficient change
tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance and coefficient change tolerance is met or if
the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are updated after every iteration during the
solve process.
10.3.1.5.1.Batch
The batch command is:

TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2
Option3
Option4
Option5
Option6
Option7
=
=
=
=
=
=
creep function name (See Table10.6:Creep Models and Abbreviations)

not applicable for creep models
error norm: 0 = unnormalized, 1 = normalized (default)
maximum number of iterations
tolerance of residual changes
tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
10.3.1.5.2.GUI
After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves automatically to the solution phase.
Each of the options specified in the command line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill in
box, and each option must be specified before Solve will begin. The coefficients are updated in the GUI
after the solution is complete.
10.3.1.6.Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted coefficients and also the residual
errors. You can then plot your data and visually interpret the results. Column one is your X- axis, with
each additional column plotted separately as a function of column one.
You should reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For example,
if your data contains time, temperature, stress and creep strain, you may wish to see the creep strain
vary as a function of time, at different temperatures and stresses in the plot. Add your experimental
data using multiple TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI method). Split the file into
multiple experimental fields as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of temperature and stress.
Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and
View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you
can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots right on top of each other, provided both of
these function are already solved for. RMB also allows you to see the number of points used to generate
the plot, and also change the Minimum X Value and the Maximum X Value in a plot. You can use the
middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a particular curve within a graph.
10.3.1.6.1.GUI
You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each window of your display
can be used to display each one of the data sets you are plotting against column one.
10.3.1.6.2.Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

Use the GUI to graphically review the curve-fitting result and ensure a good fit throughout the range of
data. Use the plotted curve-fitting results both to determine the degree of fit at various locations and to
verify the error norm/residual value. You can then determine the quality of a curve fitting and decide
whether to accept the results. If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3, and
then solve again with a new model, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and also
modifying some of the other control parameters. You can continue to use your experimental data,
repeating step 3 through step 6 until you obtain a satisfactory solution.

After you are satisfied with your curve-fitting results, you can write the curve-fitting data to the ANSYS
database using TBFT, FSET. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to the appropriate
form before writing to ANSYS TB tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material property set for
use in subsequent analyses.
10.3.1.7.1.Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
= creep model abbreviation

Option2
10.3.1.7.2.GUI
When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the fitted coefficients of
your creep model as a creep data table in ANSYS material database. You are then returned to the
material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
10.3.2.Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models

The following tips will help to ensure successful curve fitting. They are only suggestions, and do not
represent a singular method or strategy. Also, following them does not guarantee a solution. Refer to
Creep Equations (TB,CREEP) for additional details on each implicit creep model.
Name
Strain Hardening
Time Hardening
Generalized Graham
Notes
Strain hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to
temperature dependency. If you do not have temperaturedependent data, set C4 to zero. If you have difficulty solving
temperature-dependent data, use experimental data for only one
temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then add data for your
other temperatures. Then release C4 and solve for all coefficients.
You can also solve for just C4 by fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
Time hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to
temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then add data for your
other temperatures. Then release C4 and solve for all coefficients.
You can also solve for just C4 by fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
Generalized exponential has 5 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to
temperature dependency. If you do not have temperaturedependent data, set C4 to zero. Use a low value for C5 (e.g., 1e-3)
to avoid floating-point overflows in the exponential term. If you
have difficulty solving for temperature-dependent data, use
experimental data for only one temperature, fix C4 to zero, then
solve. Then add data for your other temperatures, release C4 and
solve for all coefficients. You can also solve for just C4 by fixing
C1, C2 and C3.
Generalized Graham has 8 coefficients. You use C8 for
temperature, fix C8 to zero, and solve. Then add data for other
temperatures, release C8 and solve for the remaining coefficients
individually.
6
7
10
11
12
13
Generalized Blackburn has 7 coefficients. It is advisable to look at

the exponential terms and try to keep them from floating-point
overflows. To keep e C2 within floating-point range, make sure the
initial value of C2 is such that C2 is close to 1. Similarly try to
keep /C4 and C7 close to 1.
Modified Time Hardening Modified time hardening has 4 coefficients. C4 is for temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, fix
C4 to zero.
Modified Strain Hardening Modified Strain Hardening has 3 coefficients. This model can be
complex for curve fitting. To keep the
term from
2
going negative, C1 is replaced with C1 but converted to the
proper form before beings written to the ANSYS database.
Generalized Garofalo has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to
temperature dependency. If you do not have temperaturedependent data, set C4 to zero. To keep the Sinh term within
floating-point range, keep c2 close to one when you initialize the
coefficients.
Exponential Form
Exponential form has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to
temperature dependency. If you do not have temperaturedependent data, set C3 to zero. To keep e C2 within floating-point
range, keep /C2 close to one.
Norton
Norton model has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature-dependent data, set
C3 to zero.
Prim+Sec Time Hardening Time hardening has 7 coefficients. This is a complex model. Here it
is advisable to solve for temperature independent data first and
then introduce temperature related data.
Prim+Sec Rational
Rational polynomial is a very complex model for curve fitting, with
Polynomial
10 coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is advisable
that you split the experimental data into primary creep data and
secondary creep data. Primary creep data is the initial part of the
curve that covers the nonlinearity in the strain rate. Fit only the
secondary data by fixing C1 to 1 and then set all other coefficients
except C2, C3 and C4 to zero. Use a low value of C3 to keep
10 C3 within floating-point range. Coefficients C5 to C10 in curve
fitting refers to coefficients C7 to C12 in the implicit creep equation
(rational polynomial). Then add the primary creep data, release all
coefficients, and solve.
Generalized Time
Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6 to zero if you
Hardening
have temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients
set C5 close to 1 to avoid floating-point overflows.
10.4.Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Viscoelastic material curve fitting determines your material constants by relating your experimental data
to the Prony series expansion for both the shear and bulk modulus of the ANSYS hypoviscoelastic
material option. Curve fitting is performed either interactively or via batch commands. You input the
experimental data, define the order of Prony series expansion, perform nonlinear regression, view the
curve-fitting results graphically, compare the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the
database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands for the subsequent finite elements analyses. Current
tools allow you to fit shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift functions, along with discrete
temperature dependencies for multiple data sets.
10.4.1.Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic

Material Model
The steps for Viscoelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:
2 Input the Data into ANSYS
Solve
6 Plot the Experimental Data and
Analyze
The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by

a space or a comma.
The experimental data can be read into ANSYS from the
GUI or via batch commands, as a plain text file.
This includes Prony series expansion of shear and/or bulk
moduli as well as shift function. The supported shift
functions include WLF and TN.
Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial
value of your coefficients is very important for a successful
solution.
Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control
parameters, and perform the nonlinear regression.
Graphically view the curve-fitting results. Review and verify
the results by comparing them with the experimental data
and the regression errors. If any factor is not acceptable,
repeat steps 3 to 7 to obtain a new curve-fitting solution.
Write your curve-fitting results in TB command format to
the ANSYS database.

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. To use curve fitting with viscoelastic materials, the
experimental data must be shear modulus and/or bulk modulus as a function of time and temperature.
The experimental data is named sdec or bdec to distinguish it from other data types, such as
hyperelastic or creep. This also makes documenting your analyses more convenient.
Your viscoelastic test data must be a plain text file with headers to define the test data. The data file
should be in table form, delimited by a space or a comma. The header defines the test data type and
the temperature for your test data. For viscoelastic curve fitting with multiple temperatures, you can
evaluate coefficients at each discrete temperature point and write it as a temperature-dependent Prony
data table, or you can use the Williams-Landau-Ferry (WLF) or Tool-Narayanaswamy (TN) shift functions
to account for the temperature dependency. (See Shift Functions in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .) A separate data file must be provided for each discrete
temperature. The viscoelastic test data can be any of 4 data types, see Table10.7:Viscoelastic Data
Types and Abbreviations.
Table10.7Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRmcfvis.html[28/04/2013 08:08:04 p.m.]
Time
Shear modulus
Bulk modulus
Temperature
time
smod
bmod
temp
The headers are used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of
the data.
The following listing contains the appropriate headers, followed by the delimited data:
/temp,100
! define temperature attribute
0.01
2992.53
1
2978.514207
2
2965.45541
4
2942.293214
6
2922.530649
8
2905.612202
10
2891.073456
20
2842.506984
40
2798.142793
60
2772.383729
80
2750.631843
100
2730.398114
200
2643.125432
400
2517.475394
600
2431.262053
800
2366.580897
1000
2313.955396
2000
2117.922594
4000
1833.734397
6000
1627.199197
8000
1470.6806
10000
1347.264527
20000
964.0141125
40000
586.1405449
60000
392.186777
80000
277.2706253
100000 202.0025278
200000 46.87056342
400000 2.669209118
600000 0.156653269
800000 0.0137224
1000000 0.005591539
10.4.1.2.Input the Data into ANSYS

You use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. The experimental data must be
read into ANSYS from a plain text file. The experimental data must be prepared as discussed in the
previous section, and include both the header information and the formatted test data. Each file is
viewed as a data set in ANSYS, and can be the complete set of experimental test data or a part of an
experimental test data.
You can include several data sets, including tests performed at different temperatures. Although different
data sets can have the same/or different temperature, each file can have only one temperature. Multiple
temperature data sets must be input with multiple files.
Two types of data may be required for viscoelastic curve fitting, either shear modulus vs. time and/or
bulk modulus vs. time. The data can also be a function of temperature, which can then be accounted for
by either WLF or TN shift function. You can use the GUI or batch command to input your experimental
data.
10.4.1.2.1.Batch
= index corresponding to the ANSYS material number

Option1 = experimental data type, either sdec or bdec
ID
= name of file containing experimental data

Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory
Option2
Note: "sdec" refers to the shear modulus as a function of time and bdec refers to the
bulk modulus as a function of time.
10.4.1.2.2.GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided. You can also browse to
a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type ( Option1 = sdec, or bdec)

The TBFT command provides the curve-fitting tools for viscoelastic material modeling. You represent
your viscoelastic material behavior by a set of Prony-series expansions of shear and/or bulk moduli to
characterize the shear and the bulk deformation of the material. You can also use the shift functions to
characterize the material's temperature dependency.
First you define a case casename to associate the set of coefficients for the Prony expansions with the
shift functions that characterize the material behavior. You can use the casename to define several
different options that characterize the same test data, and then to compare the curve-fitting results. To
define the material model, you must first define a casename , and then specify the order of shear and
bulk moduli and the type of the shift function(s), if required. You need to create an additional case to
define different shear order, bulk order or shift options. Once you create a case, the number of shear
terms, bulk terms, or shift options cannot be changed.
10.4.1.3.1.Batch
You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a case and setting the
order of shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options. You create the case with the TBFT, FCASE
command. The first line will include FCASE, ID, NEW. Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk
terms, and the shift function. The case is actually created only after the option is issued. The following
syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3
= PVHE (refers to Prony Viscohypoelastic)

Option3 = user specified casename
Option2
TBFT,FADD,ID,CATEGORY,Option2,Option3
= VISCO
Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift
Option3 = dependent on Option2 as follows:
CATEGORY
Option2
= pshear or bulk, Option3 = NONE, or 1 to N
Option2
= shift, Option3 = NONE or TN or WLF
TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINI
10.4.1.3.2.GUI
You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve-fitting window. Each of the
shear, bulk and shift options can be selected, and you can fill in the appropriate casename in a text box
field. As you choose the options, the coefficient table is automatically created.

The initial values chosen for your coefficients determines the success of your viscoelastic curve-fitting
operations. A complete model has (2*N G+1) + (2* Nk +1) + NS number of the coefficients, where
NG is the order of the Prony series expansion of the shear modulus,
Nk is the order of the Prony series expansion of the bulk modulus, and
NS is the number of coefficients of the shift function. (NS = 2 for the TN option, and NS = 3 for
the WLF option.)
The coefficients are ordered as shear terms first, then the bulk terms, and then the shift function. The
coefficients are ordered as A0 G, A1 G, 1 G, A2 G, 2 G, An G, and n G for shear modulus, and A0 K, A1 K,
1 K, A2 K, 2 K, An K, and n K for bulk modulus.
A shift function must be used together with your shear and/or bulk modulus for temperature-dependent
experimental data.
The default coefficient is set to 1, but it is good practice to redefine the initial values before solving.
When initializing your coefficients, set An Ks to 1 and n Ks to time values that are equally distributed in
the log scale, spanning the data range from minimum to maximum time.
For example, consider the shear-decay versus time-data file. If the time values vary from 1 to 10000,
and if you use third-order Prony, logical guesses for 1 G , 2 G and 3 G that span this range could be 1 G
= 1, 2 G = 100, and 3 G = 10,000 (also (1), (10) and (10,000) or (1), (1,000) and (10,000),
respectively).
The equations below describe the relationship between the Prony Coefficient (n ) and the corresponding
coefficient generated in curve fitting (An ). K and G are the shear modulus and bulk modulus at t = 0.
This was done to keep all n G and n K values used in the TB tables positive.
n K = (An K * An K) / K
n G = (An G * An G) / G
A good guess for the WLF or TN parameter is the reference temperature you used during your partial
solve for shear and bulk. The index of the reference/base temperatures is the sum of NumShear +
NumBulk + 1.
You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You specify a value for a coefficient and keep it
unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed
coefficient later if desired. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary.
You estimate coefficients for temperature-dependent data either by using the shift function or by setting
the temperature-dependency flag and setting a reference temperature before you solve for the
coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value
header line in the experimental data.
command initiates three separate solve operations at those three discrete temperature values, and
generate data at three corresponding discrete temperatures.
With temperature dependency specified and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a
TBFT,SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that discrete temperature. To solve for coefficients
at other temperatures, set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values
and solve again.
You can initialize the coefficients before or after activating temperature dependency. If the coefficients
initialize before setting temperature dependency, the specified coefficients become the initial coefficients
for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when
temperature dependency is active and another set of values is specified at a discrete temperature value.
The curve-fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are
specified at discrete temperature values, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was
activated are used.
10.4.1.4.1.Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option5 =
Option2
casename
not applicable
value of coefficient
For example:
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5
! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2

! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5
Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET command or to release
a previously fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option5 =
Option2
casename
not applicable
1 to fix, 0 to vary
For example:
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1.! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1 ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with the appropriate
temp header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table10.7:Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (above) for the
models available.
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then 1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. If Option 4
= tref, this value will be a specific temperature, or all.
10.4.1.4.2.GUI
The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve-fitting GUI window when the
order of shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift function are defined. Specify values for your
coefficients in the coefficients table in the curve-fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to
fix them or allow them to vary.

Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. You can use either normalized or
unnormalized error norm for the regression. The normalized error norm is the default regression option
for calculating the error. This error norm generally gives better results than the unnormalized error
norm, since the normalized error gives equal weight to all data points.
The solution control parameters for nonlinear regression include number of iterations, residual tolerance,
and coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance of error norm and
coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are
updated when the solution is completed. In general it is very difficult to directly solve a complete case
including coefficients of the shear modulus, the bulk modulus and the shift function. Three solver options
including shear modulus only, bulk modulus, and shift function (or all) are provided to allow you to solve
only Prony coefficients of the shear modulus, Prony coefficients of the bulk modulus, and coefficients of
the shift function. In many cases, however, the coefficients of shift function can't be solved until the
shear or bulk modulus are solved. It is normal for a solution to not converge at first, but to stop when
the maximum iterations criteria is reached. At that point, you should examine the curve-fitting results
and the solution history before proceeding any further. You can then adjust parameters and resolve the
problem whenever it is necessary.
10.4.1.5.1.Temperature-Dependent Solutions Using the Shift Function

For viscoelastic curve fitting using the shift function, follow these three steps to perform the regression:
1. Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.
Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
Solve
2. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. The reference temperature should be the same for both shear and bulk. Only
data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
TBFT,SOLVE
3. Solve the shift function (or all) coefficients:
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.
TREF is not used when you solve for all parameters. All temperature data is used to estimate the
coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Note: For GUI operations, when only the shear and bulk buttons are checked, only your
shear coefficients are solved. To solve for both shear and bulk, you must check all
three buttons.
10.4.1.5.2.Temperature-Dependent Solutions Without the Shift Function

If you do not use the shift function, discrete data must be supplied to account for temperature
dependency. Follow these steps to perform the regression:
1. Set the temperature-dependency flag using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2. Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any):
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR.
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
Initialize the coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.
3. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any):
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK.
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate the shear coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.
Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the same time.
1. Set the temperature dependency flag using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2. Solve for ALL coefficients.
Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE.
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear and bulk coefficients
TBFT,SOLVE
Repeat the above steps for all of the desired temperatures.
10.4.1.5.3.Batch
Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
Option5 =
Option2
casename
not applicable
comp
pshea (for Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)
The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
=
Option3 =
Option4 =
(default)
Option5 =
Option6 =
Option7 =
Option2
visco function name (See Table10.7:Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations.)

not applicable
curve-fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
maximum number of iterations
tolerance of residual changes
tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
10.4.1.5.4.GUI
The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver
options. Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE, you can go back and modify your
parameters as necessary to obtain a good curve fit.
10.4.1.6.Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

The best way to verify a good fit between your experimental data and the provided curves is to plot
your curves and visually inspect them.
10.4.1.6.1.GUI
The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.
10.4.1.6.2.Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

All of your data is plotted as a function of column 1 for the X-axis. Columns 2 and above are each
plotted in a separate graph, in a separate window, with the corresponding fitted data as a function of
column 1. By default, all the shear data sets and/or the bulk data sets as well as the corresponding
fitting results are plotted in two separated graphs in a GUI window. To view a specific data and its
corresponding fitting result, you click the right mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a
desired option. You can also use the right mouse button to turn the legend and/or axis on and off. The
scales can be also switched between log scale and regular scale. With the middle button, you can
eliminate certain curves from each window's display in order to see the remaining data more clearly.
Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend, and
View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. RMB also allows
you to see the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and
the maximum X value in a plot. You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a
particular curve within a graph.
Reviewing your curve-fitting result graphically is the only way to ensure a good fit. After plotting the
curve-fitting results, you can then review multiple plots and also verify the error norm/residual value that
is printed in the curve-fitting GUI window. This information helps you determine the quality of a curve fit
and decide whether to accept the results. If not, you may want to go back to step 3, solve again by
changing the order of the Prony series, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and possibly
other control parameters. You can continue to use your original data, repeating step 3 through step 6
until you are satisfied with the solution.
After a successful curve fitting, the last step is to write the curve-fitting data as ANSYS Prony data table
(the TB,PRONY command) to the database. The GUI or the command line converts the coefficients to
the appropriate form before writing TB commands.
The curve-fitting tool calculates coefficients that differ from those shown in the TB,PRONY table. The
following equations are used to convert the calculated coefficients to the TB,PRONY format:
Curve-Fitting Equation:
ANSYS Prony Equation:
i and i (i = 1 to N) are the Prony coefficients (entered via the TB,PRONY) command. A0 is not entered
in the Prony table.
Conversion Procedure:
10.4.1.7.1.Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3
= case
Option3 = casename
Option2
10.4.1.7.2.GUI
Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically written to the ANSYS
material database according Prony data table. Please note that the coefficients you see in the curvefitting module are different from those in the TB tables. The values remain the same, but the values
are different. The values shown in ANSYS are the square of the values derived during curve fitting.
They are also normalized to make at time 0 = 1.
Chapter 11: Gasket Joints Simulation
Chapter11:Gasket Joints Simulation

Gasket joints are essential components in most structural assemblies. Gaskets as sealing components
between structural components are usually very thin and made of various materials, such as steel,
rubber and composites.
From a mechanics perspective, gaskets act to transfer force between components. The primary
deformation of a gasket is usually confined to one direction, namely, through thickness. The stiffness
contributions from membrane (in plane) and transverse shear are much smaller in general compared to
the through thickness. The stiffness contribution therefore is assumed to be negligible, although the TB
command provides options to account for transverse shear.
A typical example of a gasket joint is in engine assemblies. A thorough understanding of the gasket joint
is critical in engine design and operation. This includes an understanding of the behavior of gasket joint
components themselves in an engine operation, and the interaction of the gasket joint with other
components.
Interface elements (INTER nnn ) are used to model gaskets. By default, these elements account for both
gasket through-thickness and transverse shear stiffness. However, you can modify the transverse shear
stiffness by using the transverse shear option of the gasket material data table. You can also exclude the
transverse shear stiffness via an element key option (KEYOPT) setting. For more information, see the TB
command documentation and the documentation for each interface element.
The following topics concerning gasket joint simulation are available:
Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis
Finite Element Formulation
ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
Material Definition
Meshing Interface Elements
Solution Procedure and Result Output
Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRgas.html[28/04/2013 08:09:00 p.m.]
3.2.Pictorial Summary
The following tables contain numerically listed elements by group name with graphic pictorial and
element description.
BEAM Elements
CIRCU Elements
COMBIN Elements
CONTAC Elements
CPT Elements
FLUID Elements
FOLLW Elements
HF Elements
HSFLD Elements
INFIN Elements
INTER Elements
LINK Elements
MASS Elements
MATRIX Elements
BEAM Elements
MESH Elements
MPC Elements
PIPE Elements
PLANE Elements
PRETS Elements
REINF Elements
ROM Elements
SHELL Elements
SOLID Elements
SOLSH Elements
SOURC Elements
SURF Elements
TARGE Elements
TRANS Elements
Graphic Pictorials
BEAM161
Explicit Dynamics 3-D Beam
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, VX, VY,
AX, AY, AZ
BEAM188
Structural 3-D 2-Node Beam
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
BEAM189
Structural 3-D 3-Node Beam
3 nodes 3-D space
CIRCU Elements
Graphic Pictorials
CIRCU94
Coupled-Field Piezoelectric Circuit
2 or 3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT, CURR
CIRCU124
Magnetic Electric Circuit
2-6 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT, CURR, EMF
CIRCU125
Magnetic Electric Diode
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
COMBIN Elements
Graphic Pictorials
COMBIN14
Combination Spring-Damper
2 nodes 3-D space
COMBIN37
Combination Control
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES,
TEMP
COMBIN39
Combination Nonlinear Spring
2 nodes 3-D space
TEMP
COMBIN40
Combination
2 nodes 3-D space
TEMP
COMBI165
Explicit Dynamics Spring-Damper
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, VX, VY,
VZ, AX, AV, AZ
COMBI214
Combination Spring-Damper Bearing
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
CONTAC Elements
Graphic Pictorials
CONTA171
2-D 2-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT, AZ
CONTA172
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT, AZ
CONTA173
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
CONTA174
8 nodes 3-D space
CONTA175
2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact
1 node 2-D/3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, AX, MAG
CONTA176
3-D Line-to-Line Contact
3 nodes 3-D space

DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CONTA177
3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CONTA178
3-D Node-to-Node Contact
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CPT Elements
Graphic Pictorials
CPT212
2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical
Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
CPT213
Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
CPT215
Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, PRES
CPT216
Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
CPT217
Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
FLUID Elements
Graphic Pictorials
FLUID29
2-D Acoustic Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
FLUID30
3-D Acoustic Fluid
8 nodes 3-D space
FLUID38
Dynamic Fluid Coupling
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID79
2-D Contained Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
FLUID80
3-D Contained Fluid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID81
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID116
Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES, TEMP
FLUID129
2-D Infinite Acoustic
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID130
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID136
3-D Squeeze Film Fluid
4, 8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID138
3-D Viscous Fluid Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID139
3-D Slide Film Fluid
2, 32 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID141
2-D Fluid-Thermal
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
FLUID142
3-D Fluid-Thermal
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
FLUID220
3-D Acoustic Fluid
20 nodes 3-D space
FLUID221
3-D Acoustic Fluid
10 nodes 3-D space
FOLLW Elements
Graphic Pictorials
FOLLW201
3-D Follower Load
1 node 3-D space
HF Elements
Graphic Pictorials
HF118
2-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric
Quadrilateral Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: AX
HF119
3-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric
Tetrahedral Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX
HF120
3-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric Brick
Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX
HSFLD Elements
Graphic Pictorials
HSFLD241
2-D Hydrostatic Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, HDSP, PRES
HSFLD242
3-D Hydrostatic Fluid
9 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, HDSP, PRES
INFIN Elements
Graphic Pictorials
INFIN9
2-D Infinite Boundary
2 nodes 2-D space

DOF: AZ, TEMP
INFIN47
3-D Infinite Boundary
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: MAG, TEMP
INFIN110
2-D Infinite Solid
DOF: AZ, VOLT, TEMP
INFIN111
3-D Infinite Solid
DOF: MAG, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, TEMP
INTER Elements
Graphic Pictorials
INTER115
3-D Magnetic Electric Interface
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX, AY, AZ, MAG
INTER192
Structural 2-D Interface 4-Node Gasket
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER193
6 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER194
16 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER195
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER202
Structural 2-D Interface 4-Node Cohesive
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER203
6 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER204
16 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER205
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
LINK Elements
Graphic Pictorials
LINK11
Structural 3-D Linear Actuator
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
LINK31
Radiation Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK33
Thermal 3-D Conduction Bar
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK34
Convection Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK68
Coupled Thermal-Electric Line
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP, VOLT
LINK160
Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ
LINK167
Explicit Tension-Only Spar
3 nodes 3-D space
LINK180
Structural 3-D Spar (or Truss)
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
MASS Elements
Graphic Pictorials
MASS21
Structural Mass
1 node 3-D space

MASS71
Thermal Mass
1 node 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
MASS166
Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
1 node 3-D space
MATRIX Elements
Graphic Pictorials
MATRIX27
Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
2 nodes 3-D space
MATRIX50
Superelement (or Substructure)
2-D or 3-D space
DOF: Determined from included element types
MESH Elements
Graphic Pictorials
MESH200
Meshing Facet
2-20 nodes 2-D/3-D space
DOF: None
KEYOPT Dependent
MPC Elements
Graphic Pictorials
MPC184
Structural Multipoint Constraint
KEYOPT Dependent
PIPE Elements
Graphic Pictorials
PIPE288
3-D 2-Node Pipe
3 nodes 3-D space
PIPE289
3-D 3-Node Pipe
4 nodes 3-D space
ELBOW290
3-D 3-Node Elbow
3 nodes 3-D space
PLANE Elements
Graphic Pictorials
PLANE13
2-D Coupled-Field Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP, AZ, UX, UY, VOLT
PLANE25
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Structural Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
PLANE35
2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid
6 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE53
2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT, AZ, CURR, EMF
PLANE55
2-D Thermal Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE75
2-D Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Thermal
Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE77
2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE78
2-D Axisymmetric - Harmonic 8-Node Thermal
Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE83
2-D Axisymmetric - Harmonic 8-Node Structural
Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
PLANE121
2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT
PLANE162
Explicit 2-D Structural Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, VX, VY, AX, AY

PLANE182
2-D 4-Node Structural Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
PLANE183
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
PLANE223
2-D 8-Node Coupled-Field Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
PLANE230
2-D 8-Node Electric Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT
PLANE233
2-D 8-Node Electromagnetic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
PRETS Elements
Graphic Pictorials
PRETS179
2-D/3-D Pretension Combination
3 nodes 2-D/3-D space
DOF: UX
REINF Elements
Graphic Pictorial
REINF263
2-D Smeared Reinforcing
Up to 8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
REINF264
3-D Discrete Reinforcing
REINF265
ROM Elements
Graphic Pictorial
ROM144
Reduced Order Electrostatic-Structural CoupledField
DOF: EMF, VOLT, UX

SHELL Elements
Graphic Pictorials
SHELL28
Structural 3-D Shear/Twist Panel
4 nodes 3-D space
SHELL41
Structural 3-D Membrane Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SHELL61
2-D Axisymmetric - Harmonic Structural Shell
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
SHELL131
4-Node Thermal Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, . . . TTOP
SHELL132
8-Node Thermal Shell
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, . . . TTOP
SHELL157
Thermal-Electric Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP, VOLT
SHELL163
Explicit Thin Structural Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ,
SHELL181
4-Node Structural Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
SHELL208
2-Node Axisymmetric Shell
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ
SHELL209
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ
SHELL281
8 nodes 3-D space

SOLID Elements
Graphic Pictorials
SOLID5
8 nodes 3-D space
SOLID62
3-D Magneto-Structural Coupled-Field Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT
SOLID65
3-D Reinforced Concrete Structural Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID70
3-D Thermal Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID87
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID90
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID96
3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: MAG
SOLID97
3-D Magnetic Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, CURR, EMF
SOLID98
Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
SOLID117
3-D 20-Node Magnetic Edge
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AZ
SOLID122
3-D 20-Node Electrostatic Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID123
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID164
8 nodes 3-D space
SOLID168
Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural
Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
SOLID185
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID186
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID187
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID226
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
SOLID227
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
SOLID231
3-D 20-Node Electric Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID232
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID236
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
SOLID237
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
SOLID272
4- to 48-Node General Axisymmetric Solid
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID273
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID273
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID278
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID279
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID285
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with
Nodal Pressure
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, HDSP
SOLSH Elements
Graphic Pictorials
SOLSH190
Structural Solid Shell
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOURC Elements
Graphic Pictorials
SOURC36
Magnetic Electric Current Source
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: None
SURF Elements
Graphic Pictorials
SURF151
2-D Thermal Surface Effect
DOF: TEMP
SURF152
4 to 10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SURF153
2-D Structural Surface Effect
DOF: UX, UY
SURF154
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF156
3-D Structural Surface Line Load
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF159
3-D General Axisymmetric Surface
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF251
2-D Radiosity Surface
2 nodes 2-D space
SURF252
3-D Thermal Radiosity Surface
3 or 4 nodes, 3-D space
TARGE Elements
Graphic Pictorials
TARGE169
Contact 2-D Target Segment
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP
TARGE170
Contact 3-D Target Segment
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
TRANS Elements
Graphic Pictorials
TRANS109
2-D Electromechanical Solid
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, VOLT
TRANS126
Electromechanical Transducer
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX-VOLT, UY-VOLT, UZ-VOLT
11.1. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis
11.1.Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis

A gasket joint analysis involves the same overall steps that are involved in any ANSYS nonlinear analysis
procedure. Most of these steps however warrant special considerations for a gasket joint analysis.
Presented below are the overall steps with the special considerations noted, along with links to
applicable sections where more detailed information is included on that topic.
1. Build or import the model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the
model for a gasket joint analysis. You perform this step as you would in any typical ANSYS
analysis. See Building the Model in the Basic Analysis Guide . For further details on building the
model, see the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
2. Define element type. To properly simulate gasket joints, you must define structural element
types and corresponding interface element types. See ANSYS Family of Interface Elements in this
chapter for more details on this topic, and in particular, see Element Selection for a table of
corresponding structural and interface elements.
3. Define material. Use TB,GASKET to define the gasket joint material. You can use TB,GASKET to
define four types of data input: general parameters, transverse shear stiffness, compression
(loading), and tension (unloading). You specify the type using TBOPT . You then input the sets of
data using the TBDATA and TBPT commands, as applicable. You can also plot most of the gasket
data types using the TBPLOT command. See Material Definition in this chapter for more details on
this topic.
4. Mesh the model. Use the AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural element types,
and use the IMESH command to mesh the gasket layer. Special restrictions apply to the IMESH
command in terms of matching the source and target. Also, the order in which you execute these
commands is critical. You can also mesh interface layers using the VDRAG command, and can
generate interface elements directly using the EGEN command. Each of these commands involve
special considerations for interface elements. See Meshing Interface Elements in this chapter for
more details on this topic.
5. Solve. There are special solving considerations when you perform a gasket joint analysis. These
are primarily concerned with the gasket element stiffness loss, and the gasket element's use with
contact elements. See Solution Procedure and Result Output in this chapter for more details on
this topic.
6. Review Results. You can print or plot any of four gasket output items: stresses (also pressure),
total closure, total inelastic closure, and thermal closure, using the PRESOL, PRNSOL, PLESOL,
PLNSOL, or ESOL commands. You can also use these items with the *GET command in POST1.
See Reviewing the Results in this chapter for more details on this topic.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRgaspe.html[28/04/2013 08:10:15 p.m.]
11.2. Finite Element Formulation
11.2.Finite Element Formulation

The primary deformation behavior of gasket joints is through-thickness deformation. It is therefore
difficult to use solid continuum elements to effectively model gasket joints. The interface elements,
which are based on the relative deformation of the top and bottom surfaces, offer a direct means to
quantify through-thickness deformation of the gasket joints. Thus the pressure versus closure behavior
can be directly applied to characterize the gasket material.
The element formulation is based on a corotational procedure. Refer to Gasket Material in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for further details.
11.2.1.Element Topologies
An interface element is composed of bottom and top surfaces. ANSYS provides several types of interface
elements for the analysis of the gasket joints. Figure 11.1 shows the geometry of a 3-D 8-node interface
element available in ANSYS. An element midplane is created by averaging the coordinates of node pairs
from the bottom and top surfaces of the elements. The numerical integration of interface elements is
performed in the element midplane. The Gauss integration scheme is used for the numerical integration.
Figure11.1Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element
11.2.2.Thickness Direction
The thickness direction is defined as the normal direction of the mid plane of the element at the
integration point, and computed inside of ANSYS. The positive direction is defined by the right-hand rule
going around the nodes in the midplane. The through thickness deformation is quantified by the relative
deformation of bottom and top surfaces along the thickness direction. The thickness direction is then
noted as the X-direction according to the ANSYS notation convention. No ESYS coordinate system is
allowed for the elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgafe.html[28/04/2013 08:10:42 p.m.]
11.3.ANSYS Family of Interface Elements

ANSYS offers 4 types of elements to simulate gaskets. They are referred to as interface elements and
are summarized as follows:
INTER192 - 2-D, 4-node, linear element.
INTER193 - 2-D, 6-node, quadratic element.
INTER195 - 3-D, 8-node, linear element
The 2-D elements, INTER192 and INTER193, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
11.3.1.Element Selection
The simulation of an entire gasket joint assembly, consisting of the gasket and the structural elements
on either side of the gasket, involves choosing interface elements and structural elements that have the
same characteristics. Use the following table as a guideline for choosing interface and structural
elements that have the same characteristics:
For elements with Use this interface
element:
these
characteristics:
2-D,
2-D,
3-D,
3-D,
linear
quadratic
quadratic
linear
INTER192
INTER193
INTER194
INTER195
... with one of these structural elements:

PLANE182
PLANE183
SOLID96, SOLID186, SOLID187
SOLID62, SOLID65, SOLID185, SOLSH190,
SOLID272, SOLID272, SOLID285
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used.
Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,195
defines element type 1 as element INTER195.
11.3.2.Applications
In general, linear and quadratic elements are chosen for the following reasons:
Fewer nodes produce a smaller model that runs faster with less computer resources.
Quadratic elements are necessary if stress gradients are present in surrounding bodies.
If elements are to follow a curved boundary closely, quadratic elements are ideal because their
edges are arcs.
With a free mesh (tetrahedral elements) the mid-node (quadratic) is required for an accurate
solution.
When a surrounding structure can be considered as a 2-D structure, for example, plane stress / strain /
axisymmetric, 2-D elements are the ideal choice. A good example of the use of 2-D element INTER192
or INTER193 is the gasket between the "flanged" ends of pipe line. In this case the gasket properties do
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgafi.html[28/04/2013 08:11:13 p.m.]
not vary significantly with geometric location.

For a 3-D structure such as an internal combustion engine, 3-D element INTER194 or INTER195 is a
good choice for simulating the gasket between the cylinder head and block. In this case there is no
"nice" geometry because the gasket must fill in between two complicated surfaces, in between cylinders,
and around other holes and passages. Also the gasket properties can vary in different zones. For
example in a cylinder head, there is usually a much stiffer zone immediately around the cylinder to
contain combustion pressure (called the "fire ring"). The remainder of the gasket is much softer.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgafi.html[28/04/2013 08:11:13 p.m.]
11.4.Material Definition
11.4.1.Material Characteristics
The TB command option GASKET allows gasket joints to be simulated with the ANSYS interface
elements, in which there is only one element through the thickness, and the through thickness
deformation is decoupled from the in plane deformation. The gasket material is usually under
compression. The material under compression is highly nonlinear. The gasket material also exhibits quite
complicated unloading behavior when compression is released. The GASKET option allows you to directly
input data for the experimentally measured complex pressure closure curve for the material model
(compression curve), and also for several unloading pressure closure curves. When no unloading curves
are defined, the material behavior follows the compression curve while it is unloaded.
As it is a joint component, there often exists an initial gap or void. On the other hand, from a modeling
point of view, it is a lot easier to fill the spaces or volumes between the adjacent components with the
interface meshes, and then set an initial gap for the gasket material to account for it. As long as the
closure is less than the initial gap, no pressure is acted on the gaskets. Also, when it is under tension
loading, there will be an open gap. Therefore, gasket joints generally do not have tension pressure. A
stress cap is used to restrict tension pressure in the gasket joint elements.
The GASKET material option must be used with interface elements INTER192, INTER193, INTER194,
and INTER195.
Figure 11.2 shows the experimental pressure vs. closure (relative displacement of top and bottom gasket
surfaces) data for a graphite composite gasket material. The sample was unloaded and reloaded 5 times
along the loading path and then unloaded at the end of the test to determine the materials unloading
stiffness.
Figure11.2Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material
11.4.2.Input Format
You input gasket material data using TB,GASKET. The material data consists of 2 main parts: general
parameters and pressure closure behaviors. The general parameters define initial gasket gap, stable
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgamd.html[28/04/2013 08:11:52 p.m.]
stiffness for numerical stabilization, and stress cap for a gasket in tension. The pressure closure behavior
includes gasket compression (loading) and tension data (unloading).
The TB command specification for defining a gasket material is:
TB,GASKET,MAT ,NTEMP ,NPTS ,TBOPT
where TBOPT = one of the following types of gasket material data:
PARA: gasket material general parameters.
COMP: gasket compression data.
LUNL: gasket linear unloading data.
NUNL: gasket nonlinear unloading data.
TSS: gasket transverse shear stiffness data.
You input the general parameters using the TBDATA command, then input the compression and
unloading data using the TBPT command.
Presented in the following sections are examples of inputs for the various types of gasket data.
11.4.2.1.Define General Parameters

( TBOPT = PARA)
The gasket material general parameters include the initial gap, stable stiffness and the maximum tension
stress cap. These parameters are defined as C1, C2, and C3 in the following example:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,PARA
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
Refer to Gasket Materials in the Element Reference for further details on these parameters.
11.4.2.2.Define Compression Load Closure Curve

( TBOPT = COMP)
The compression pressure closure curve gasket material definition option is defined as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,COMP
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values.

The following input listing is an example defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a
gasket joint material with 10 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, ,10,COMP
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
! define compression data
11.4.2.3.Define Linear Unloading Data

( TBOPT = LUNL)
The linear unloading gasket material definition option is a simple way to define the gasket unloading
behavior. Several unloading slopes can be defined to accommodate the comprehensive unloading
behavior as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: NPTS is the number of unloading points; xi is the closure where unloading started, and yi is
unloading slope.
The following input listing is an example showing the linear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material
with 3 unloading points
TB,GASKET,1, ,3,LUNL
! define linear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.25100E+12
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.25500E+12
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.10600E+13
A sample plot representing linear unloading curves is shown in Figure 11.3.

Figure11.3Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves
11.4.2.4.Define Nonlinear Unloading Data

( TBOPT = NUNL)
The nonlinear unloading gasket material definition option provides a more comprehensive way of
defining gasket material unloading behavior. The input listing format is:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,NUNL
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. Several unloading curves can be defined.
An example showing the nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading points
is as follows:
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL
! define first nonlinear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, 0.22350E+08
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
! define second nonlinear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
! define third nonlinear unloading data
A sample plot representing nonlinear unloading curves is shown in Figure 11.4.

Figure11.4Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves
11.4.3.Temperature Dependencies
Inputting temperature dependent gasket material properties follows the standard ANSYS procedure for
inputting temperature dependent data for other materials. The following format shows this procedure.
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL
TBTEMP,T1
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
TBTEMP,T2
TBPT,,x1,y1
TBPT,,x2,y2
ANSYS will automatically interpolate the temperature data to the material points using linear
interpolation. When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.
The following is an example input listing defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a
gasket joint material with 5 temperature points and up to 10 data points for each temperature point,
and 3 nonlinear unloading curves with each curve having 5 temperatures and 5 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, 5,10,COMP
! define compression data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
0.40000E-04,
0.60000E-04,
0.78000E-04,
0.12000E-03,
0.19000E-03,
0.28600E-03,
0.35800E-03,
0.43200E-03,
0.50500E-03,
0.15150E+09
0.24900E+09
0.30000E+09
0.37200E+09
0.47400E+09
0.58500E+09
0.67350E+09
0.78000E+09
0.89550E+09
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+08
0.50500E+08
0.83000E+08
0.10000E+09
0.12400E+09
0.15800E+09
0.19500E+09
0.22450E+09
0.26000E+09
0.29850E+09
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.90000E+07
0.25250E+08
0.41500E+08
0.50000E+08
0.62000E+08
0.79000E+08
0.97500E+08
0.11225E+09
0.13000E+09
0.14925E+09
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.36000E+07
0.10100E+08
0.16600E+08
0.20000E+08
0.24800E+08
0.31600E+08
0.39000E+08
0.44900E+08
0.52000E+08
0.59700E+08
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+07
0.50500E+07
0.83000E+07
0.10000E+08
0.12400E+08
0.15800E+08
0.19500E+08
0.22450E+08
0.26000E+08
0.29850E+08
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define first nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+09
0.82500E+07
0.27500E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.50000E+08
0.41250E+07
0.13750E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.20000E+08
0.16500E+07
0.55000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+08
0.82500E+06
0.27500E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define second nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, 0.22350E+08
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+09
0.74500E+07
0.30000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.97500E+08
0.37250E+07
0.15000E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.39000E+08
0.14900E+07
0.60000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+08
0.74500E+06
0.30000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define third nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+09
0.11300E+08
0.45000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.14925E+09
0.56500E+07
0.22500E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.59700E+08
0.22600E+07
0.90000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+08
0.11300E+07
0.45000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
Sample plots of compression and unloading curves for gasket data to two temperatures is shown in
Figure 11.5.
Figure11.5Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures
11.4.4.Plotting Gasket Data

You can plot gasket compression, linear unloading and nonlinear unloading data using the TBPLOT
command. The use of this command to plot gasket data is as follows:
TBPLOT,GASKET,MAT ,TBOPT ,TEMP ,SEGN
where TBOPT specifies the gasket material option to be plotted, TEMP specifies plotting either all of the
temperature dependent data curves, or a curve at a specified temperature, and SEGN specifies whether
or not to add the segment numbers to the curves.
11.5.Meshing Interface Elements

Three options are available for meshing interface elements:
For meshing gasket layers as an area or volume, use the IMESH command.
For meshing gasket layers by dragging an area mesh along a path, use the VDRAG command.
For generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
There are special requirements for meshing interface elements. See Generating an Interface Mesh for
Gasket Simulations in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for further details on this type of meshing.
The following example input listing shows the use of the IMESH command.
/batch,list
/title, Test to demonstrate the use of IMESH command
/com, ************************************************************
/com, *
*
/com, * This is a simple test to demonstrate the use of IMESH
*
/com, * command to generate gasket elements. The model consists *
/com, * of two blocks with gasket elements (INTER194) defined
*
/com, * between them.
*
/com, *
*
/com, ************************************************************
/prep7
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Types
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,187
! Solid tetrahedral element
et,2,194
! Interface layer element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Parameters
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
EH=1.0
IH=0.1
DX=0
DY=0
DZ=IH
Z1=EH
Z2=Z1+IH
Z3=Z2+EH
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Keypoints
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
k,1,0,0
k,2,1,0
k,3,1,1
k,4,0,1
k,5,0,0,z1
k,6,1,0,z1
k,7,1,1,z1
k,8,0,1,z1
k,9,0,0,z2
k,10,1,0,z2
k,11,1,1,z2
k,12,0,1,z2
k,13,0,0,z3
k,14,1,0,z3
k,15,1,1,z3
k,16,0,1,z3
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate First Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Second Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgame.html[28/04/2013 08:12:12 p.m.]
!* Generate Middle Volume

!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Size
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
esize,,4
!
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Mesh First Volume with Element Type 1
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,1
mat,1
vmesh,1
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Interface Layer with IMESH command
!* using Element Type 2 (INTER194)
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,2
mat,2
imesh,area,6,7,0,DX,DY,DZ,TOL
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Mesh Second Volume with Element Type 1
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,1
mat,1
vmesh,2
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Plot Elements
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
/view,1 ,1,1,1
eplot
finish
Figure 11.6 shows the geometry of the finite element model, a thin interface layer between two block
volumes. Figure 11.7 shows the mesh with solid brick element, SOLID185, in top and bottom of block
volumes, and Figure 11.8 shows the mesh of interface element, INTER195, in the interface layer
between the two blocks. Figure 11.9 shows the mesh with solid tetrahedral element, SOLID187, in top
and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 11.10 shows the mesh of interface element (degenerated
wedge), INTER194, in the interface layer between the two blocks.
Figure11.6Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry
Figure11.7Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element
Figure11.8Interface Layer Mesh
Figure11.9Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh
Figure11.10Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements
11.6.Solution Procedure and Result Output

Gasket material behavior is highly nonlinear. The full Newton-Raphson solution procedure (the standard
ANSYS nonlinear method) is the default method for performing this type of analysis. Other solution
procedures for gasket solutions are not recommended.
As with most nonlinear problems, convergence behavior of a gasket joint analysis depends on the
problem type. ANSYS provides a comprehensive solution hierarchy; therefore, it is best to use the
default solution options unless you are certain about the benefits of any changes.
Some special considerations for solving a gasket problem are as follows:
By default, a zero stress cap is enforced on the gasket. When the element goes into tension, it
loses its stiffness and sometimes causes numerical instability.
It is always a good practice to place the lower and upper limit on the time step size (DELTIM or
NSUBST). Start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it up. This practice ensures that
all modes and behaviors of interest are accurately included.
When modeling gasket interfaces as sliding contact , it is usually necessary to include adequate
gasket transverse shear stiffness. By default, the gasket elements account for a small transverse
shear stiffness. You can modify the transverse shear stiffness if needed (TB,GASKET,,,,TSS)
command. For better solution stability, use nodal contact detection.
When modeling gasket interfaces via a matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), it
is better to exclude transverse shear stiffness to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between
the gasket and mating components.
Like any other type of nonlinear analysis, the ANSYS program performs a series of linear approximations
with corrections. A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can
merely be the result of some numerical problem in the finite element model. The program printout gives
you continuous feedback on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (The printout either
appears directly on your screen, is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some other file
[/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same information in POST1, using the PRITER command,
or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands. Understand the iteration history of your analysis
before you accept the results. In particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning statements
without fully understanding their meaning. A typical output listing with gasket nonlinearity only is shown
in Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing. When other types of nonlinearity such as contact or materials
are included, additional information will be printed out.
11.6.1.Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing

S O L U T I O N
PROBLEM DIMENSIONALITY. . .
DEGREES OF FREEDOM. . . . .
ANALYSIS TYPE . . . . . . .
PLASTIC MATERIAL PROPERTIES
NEWTON-RAPHSON OPTION . . .
. . . . .
. UX
UY
. . . . .
INCLUDED.
. . . . .
O P T I O N S
. . .
UZ
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .3-D
. .STATIC (STEADY-STATE)
. .YES
. .PROGRAM CHOSEN
*** NOTE ***

CP=
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
Present time 0 is less than or equal to the previous time.
Time will default to 1.
*** NOTE ***
CP=
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to the FULL Newton-Raphson

solution procedure for ALL DOFs.
*** NOTE ***
CP=
The conditions for direct assembly have been met.

files will be produced.
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
No .emat or .erot
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgaso.html[28/04/2013 08:12:34 p.m.]
L O A D
S T E P
O P T I O N S
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . . . . . 1.0000
AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON
INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . .
200
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . . 20000
MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . . . .
20
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. . . .
15
STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . . . . .
NO
TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . . . .YES (EXIT)
CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . .USE DEFAULTS
COPY INTEGRATION POINT VALUES TO NODE . . . . .YES, FOR ELEMENTS WITH
ACTIVE MAT. NONLINEARITIES
PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .NO PRINTOUT
DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS
ITEM
FREQUENCY
COMPONENT
ALL
ALL
SVAR
ALL
Range of element maximum matrix coefficients in global coordinates
Maximum= 4.326388889E+11 at element 0.
Minimum= 388758681 at element 0.
*** ELEMENT MATRIX FORMULATION TIMES
TYPE NUMBER
ENAME
TOTAL CP AVE CP
1
2
2 SOLID185
0.000
0.000000
1 INTER195
0.000
0.000000
Time at end of element matrix formulation CP= 0.
ALL CURRENT ANSYS DATA WRITTEN TO FILE NAME=
FOR POSSIBLE RESUME FROM THIS POINT
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4200E+07 CRITERION= 0.2143E+05
SPARSE MATRIX DIRECT SOLVER.
Number of equations =
24,
Memory available (MB) =
0.0
DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE
EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED.
Maximum wavefront =
, Memory required (MB)
0
=
0.0
= 0.1130E-04 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06

NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4000E-05
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1367E-08 CRITERION= 51.35

<<< CONVERGED
= 0.3257E-20 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 <<< CONVERGED
EQUIL ITER
2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC = -0.2234E-20
2
*** ELEMENT RESULT CALCULATION TIMES
TYPE
NUMBER
1
2
ENAME
2
1
SOLID185
INTER195
TOTAL CP
0.000
0.000
*** NODAL LOAD CALCULATION TIMES

TYPE NUMBER
ENAME
TOTAL CP
1
2
2
1
SOLID185
INTER195
0.000
0.000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
*** LOAD STEP

1
SUBSTEP
1 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
*** TIME = 0.500000E-02
TIME INC = 0.500000E-02
*** AUTO STEP TIME: NEXT TIME INC = 0.50000E-02 UNCHANGED

EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
2 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
3
*** TIME = 0.100000E-01
TIME INC = 0.500000E-02
*** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.75000E-02 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000)
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
3 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
4
*** TIME = 0.175000E-01
TIME INC = 0.750000E-02
EQUIL ITER

<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
4 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
5
*** TIME = 0.287500E-01
TIME INC = 0.112500E-01
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
5 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
6
*** TIME = 0.456250E-01
TIME INC = 0.168750E-01
EQUIL ITER
<<< CONVERGED
1
*** LOAD STEP
1
SUBSTEP
6 COMPLETED.
CUM ITER =
7
*** TIME = 0.709375E-01
TIME INC = 0.253125E-01

Results from a gasket joint analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains and reaction forces
of the structural components and the gasket joint layer information (gasket pressure, closure, etc.). You
can review these results in POST1 (the general postprocessor) or in POST26 (the time-history
postprocessor). See the Output Data sections of the element descriptions for any of the interface
elements (for example INTER192) for a description of the available output components.
Note that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that substep
should have been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option command OUTRES controls which
substep results are stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described
below.
calculated.
11.7.2.Reviewing Results in POST1

If not, you probably won't want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why
convergence failed.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST1
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
4. Display the results using any of the following options. Note that gasket results, such as pressure
and closure, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system.
Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgapo.html[28/04/2013 08:12:48 p.m.]
PLESOL
GUI:
or
Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When
displaying the gasket pressure distribution, if other structural mating components are not included,
ANSYS will plot the geometry of those components in gray. To have a better visualization of a
gasket pressure plot, it is better for you to select gasket elements only.
Command(s): PRESOL (element-by-element results)
PRITER (substep summary data), etc.
GUI:
Option: Animation
You can also animate gasket results over time:
Command(s):
GUI:
ANTIME
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Time
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST1. See "The General Postprocessor (POST1)"
in the Basic Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear
analyses.

graph the gasket closure vs. gasket pressure, which should correspond to the material behavior defined
by TB,GASKET. You might also graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of
applied load, or you might list the gasket pressure at a node and the corresponding TIME value. A typical
POST26 postprocessing sequence for a gasket analysis is the same as the sequence for a typical
nonlinear analysis. See steps 1 through 4 in Reviewing Results in POST26 included in Nonlinear
Structural Analysis .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgapo.html[28/04/2013 08:12:48 p.m.]
11.8.Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch

Method)
This is a simple finite element model created to demonstrate the gasket material simulation. Two block
elements with element type SOLID185 were generated as supporters and a gasket element INTER195
was created. The whole system is fixed along one side of each axes to prevent rigid body motion. A
prescribed displacement is placed on top of the supporter element. The gasket material is assumed to
have a nonlinear compression behavior with 5 different linear unloading slopes. A pressure stress cap of
1.0e-5 is imposed so that no tension stress is generated. Two load steps were used.
The ANSYS commands are shown below.
/batch,list
/title, Test to Verify Gasket Material and Element
/com, **************************************************************
/com, *
*
/com, * This is a simple test case to verify gasket material and
*
/com, * element.
*
/com, *
*
/com, * The test case is set up with two solid SOLID185 elements
*
/com, * with gasket element (INTER195) defined between them.
*
/com, * Displacement is applied to one SOLID185 element while the *
/com, * other SOLID185 element is fixed.
*
/com, * The problem is solved in two load steps. In the first
*
/com, * load step negative z-displacement is applied to one
*
/com, * SOLID195 element causing compression of gasket elements.
*
/com, * Then, in the second load step, a reverse displacement is
*
/com, * applied causing the unloading (tension) of gasket element. *
/com, * A Stress Cap of 1.0E-05 is enforced so that there is no
*
/com, * tension pressure in gasket material.
*
/com, *
*
/com, **************************************************************
/prep7
!*+++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Types
!*+++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,185
et,2,195
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Linear Elastic Material Type 1
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
mp,ex,1,2.1E12
mp,nuxy,1,0.0
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Initial Gap, Stable Stiffness, Stress Cap
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
delta0 = 0.00e-3
stiff0 = 0.0e7
scap
= 1.0e-5
tb,gasket,2,,,para
tbdata, 1,delta0,stiff0,scap
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Gasket Compression Curve
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tb,gask,2,1,13,comp
tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 0.161226E+07
tbpt,,0.511600E-03, 0.520884E+07
tbpt,,0.562400E-03, 0.113134E+08
tbpt,,0.613200E-03, 0.200499E+08
tbpt,,0.664000E-03, 0.259960E+08
tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 0.290345E+08
tbpt,,0.765600E-03, 0.357453E+08
tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 0.440064E+08
tbpt,,0.867200E-03, 0.563189E+08
tbpt,,0.918000E-03, 0.748254E+08
tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 0.967287E+08
tbpt,,0.101960E-02, 0.129001E+09
tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 0.157147E+09
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Gasket Linear Unloading Curve
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tb,gask,2,1,5,lunl
tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 2.430000E+11
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STgaga.html[28/04/2013 08:13:15 p.m.]
tbpt,,0.714800E-03,
tbpt,,0.816400E-03,
tbpt,,0.968800E-03,
tbpt,,0.109326E-02,
3.565000E+11
5.92300E+11
1.088000e+12
1.490000E+12
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* List Gasket Material Model
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tblist,gask,all
!*++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Parameters
!*++++++++++++++++++
n1
= 20
n2
= n1*100
n3
= n1
dis1 = -0.0008
dis2 = -0.000001
pres = 1.0e7
pres2 = 10
pres3 = 1.4E8
dp
= -2.0e7
elb
= 1.0
elg
= 0.1
!*+++++++++++++++
!* Generate Nodes
!*+++++++++++++++
n,1,
n,2,1.0
n,3,1.0,1.0
n,4,0.0,1.0
ngen,2,4,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb
ngen,2,8,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb+elg
ngen,2,12,1,4,,0.0,0.0,2*elb+elg
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Front and Back SOLID185 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,185,,1
mat,1
e,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Middle INTER195 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,2,195,,
type,2
mat,2
e,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Boundary Condition
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z
d,all,uz
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,x
d,all,ux
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,y
d,all,uy
nsel,all
finish
/solu
!*+++++++++++++++++++
!* Apply Displacement
!*+++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis1
nsel,all
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve First Load Step, Compress the Elements
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
solve
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve Second Load Step, Open the Elements
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis2
nall
solve
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Postprocess the Results
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
/post1
set,last
pres,s
pres,epto
pres,epel
prns,epel
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Post26, Print and Plot Gasket Element Results
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
/post26
esol,2,3, ,s,x,press
esol,3,3, ,epel,x,delta
add,4,2, , ,press,,,-1,
! change sign for plotting
add,5,3,,,delta,,,-1,
! change sign for plotting
prvar,2,3,4,5
xvar,5
plvar,4
finish
/exit,nosave
Presented below is the POST26 output resulting from this analysis.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------***** ANSYS POST26 VARIABLE LISTING *****
TIME
0.50000E-01
0.10000
0.15000
0.20000
0.25000
0.30000
0.35000
0.40000
0.45000
0.50000
0.55000
0.60000
0.65000
0.70000
0.75000
0.80000
0.85000
0.90000
0.95000
1.0000
1.0500
1.1000
1.1500
1.2000
1.2500
1.3000
1.3500
1.4000
1.4500
1.5000
1.5500
1.6000
1.6500
1.7000
1.7500
1.8000
1.8500
1.9000
1.9500
2.0000
3 S
X
press
-139488.
-278977.
-418465.
-557953.
-697442.
-836930.
-976418.
-0.111591E+07
-0.125539E+07
-0.139488E+07
-0.153437E+07
-0.278389E+07
-0.557968E+07
-0.989280E+07
-0.152775E+08
-0.208613E+08
-0.250737E+08
-0.277640E+08
-0.310936E+08
-0.357955E+08
-0.227277E+08
-0.965988E+07
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
3 EPELX
delta
-0.398672E-04
-0.797343E-04
-0.119601E-03
-0.159469E-03
-0.199336E-03
-0.239203E-03
-0.279070E-03
-0.318937E-03
-0.358804E-03
-0.398672E-03
-0.438539E-03
-0.477349E-03
-0.514686E-03
-0.550578E-03
-0.585450E-03
-0.620132E-03
-0.656120E-03
-0.693558E-03
-0.730387E-03
-0.765909E-03
-0.738405E-03
-0.710900E-03
-0.680150E-03
-0.640200E-03
-0.600250E-03
-0.560300E-03
-0.520350E-03
-0.480400E-03
-0.440450E-03
-0.400500E-03
-0.360550E-03
-0.320600E-03
-0.280650E-03
-0.240700E-03
-0.200750E-03
-0.160800E-03
-0.120850E-03
-0.809000E-04
-0.409500E-04
-0.100000E-05
4 ADD
press
139488.
278977.
418465.
557953.
697442.
836930.
976418.
0.111591E+07
0.125539E+07
0.139488E+07
0.153437E+07
0.278389E+07
0.557968E+07
0.989280E+07
0.152775E+08
0.208613E+08
0.250737E+08
0.277640E+08
0.310936E+08
0.357955E+08
0.227277E+08
0.965988E+07
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
5 ADD
delta
0.398672E-04
0.797343E-04
0.119601E-03
0.159469E-03
0.199336E-03
0.239203E-03
0.279070E-03
0.318937E-03
0.358804E-03
0.398672E-03
0.438539E-03
0.477349E-03
0.514686E-03
0.550578E-03
0.585450E-03
0.620132E-03
0.656120E-03
0.693558E-03
0.730387E-03
0.765909E-03
0.738405E-03
0.710900E-03
0.680150E-03
0.640200E-03
0.600250E-03
0.560300E-03
0.520350E-03
0.480400E-03
0.440450E-03
0.400500E-03
0.360550E-03
0.320600E-03
0.280650E-03
0.240700E-03
0.200750E-03
0.160800E-03
0.120850E-03
0.809000E-04
0.409500E-04
0.100000E-05
Chapter 12: Interface Delamination and Failure Simulation
Chapter12:Interface Delamination and Failure Simulation

An interface exists anywhere two materials are joined together. The interface between the layers of a
composite structure is of special interest, because when this type of structure is subjected to certain
types of external loading, the failure process (delamination) takes on a unique character. Interface
delamination is traditionally simulated using fracture mechanics methods, such as nodal release
technique.
Alternatively, you can use the cohesive zone model to simulate interface delamination and other fracture
pheneomenonn. This approach introduces failure mechanisms by using the hardening-softening
relationships between the separations and incorporating the corresponding tractions across the interface.
This technique is also well suited for modeling the fracture process in a homogenous medium, since
fracture can be viewed as a separation process between two surfaces.
An interface delamination and failure simulation is performed by first separating the model into two
components or groups of elements. A cohesive zone is then defined between these two groups. ANSYS
offers two options to model the interface:
Interface elements with a cohesive zone material model
Contact elements with a bonded contact option and a cohesive zone material model
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRdelam.html[28/04/2013 08:13:37 p.m.]
12.1.Modeling Interface Delamination with Interface Elements

You can use interface elements to model interface delamination at the interface of two materials. ANSYS
offers a set of four interface elements designed specifically to represent the cohesive zone between the
interface and to account for the separation across the interface.
12.1.1.Analyzing Interface Delamination

An interface delamination analysis with interface elements involves the same overall steps that are
involved in any ANSYS nonlinear analysis procedure. Most of these steps however warrant special
considerations for behavior at the cohesive zone. Presented below are the overall steps with the special
considerations noted, along with links to applicable sections where more detailed information is included
on that topic.
1. Build or import the model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the
model for an interface delamination analysis. You perform this step as you would in any typical
ANSYS analysis. See Building the Model in the Basic Analysis Guide . For further details on building
the model, see the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
2. Define element type. To properly simulate the cohesive zone, you must define structural
element types and corresponding interface element types. See Element Selection in this chapter for
3. Define material. Use TB,CZM with TBOPT = EXPO to define the cohesive zone material that
characterizes the separation behavior at the interface. You then input the sets of data using the
TBDATA commands, as applicable.
4. Mesh the model. Use the AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural elements, and
use the CZMESH command to mesh the cohesive zone element interface along the layers. Special
restrictions apply to the CZMESH command in terms of matching the source and target. Also, the
order in which you execute these commands is critical. You can only use CZMESH after the
underlying solid model has been meshed. You can also generate interface elements directly using
theEGEN command. Each of these commands involves special consideration for interface elements.
See Meshing and Boundary Conditions in this chapter for more details on this topic.
5. Solve. There are special solving consideration when you perform an interface delamination
analysis. These are primarily concerned with the interface element stiffness loss or softening. Care
should be taken to avoid the numerical instability that may be caused by the delamination and
failure of the interface.
6. Review Results. You can print or plot your cohesive zone output items using the PRESOL,
PRNSOL, PLESOL, PLNSOL, or ESOL commands. See Reviewing the Results in this chapter for
12.1.2.ANSYS Family of Interface Elements

ANSYS offers 4 types of elements to simulate interface delamination and failure. They are summarized
as follows:
INTER202 - 2-D, 4-node, linear element.
INTER205 - 3-D, 8-node, linear element
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strmodintdelam.html[28/04/2013 08:13:51 p.m.]
The 2-D elements, INTER202 and INTER203, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
12.1.2.1.Element Definition
An interface element is composed of bottom and top surfaces. Figure205.1:"INTER205 Geometry" in
the Element Reference shows the geometry of a 3-D 8-node interface element. The element midplane
can be created by averaging the coordinates of node pairs from the bottoms and top surfaces of the
element. The numerical integration of the interface elements is performed in the element midplane. The
Gauss integration scheme is used for the numerical integrations.
12.1.2.2.Element Selection
The simulation of an entire assembly, consisting of the cohesive zone and the structural elements on
either side of the cohesive zone, requires that the interface elements and structural elements have the
same characteristics. When you issue the CZMESH command, the appropriate interface element(s) will
be selected automatically, depending on the adjacent structural elements. You can also manually specify
your interface elements. Use the following table as a guideline for choosing interface and structural
elements that have the same characteristics:
For elements with
these
characteristics:
2-D,
2-D,
3-D,
3-D,
linear
quadratic
quadratic
linear
... with one of these structural elements:
... use this

interface
element:
INTER202
INTER203
INTER204
INTER205
PLANE182
PLANE183
SOLID186, SOLID187
SOLID65, SOLID185, SOLSH190, SOLID272,
SOLID273, SOLID285
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used.
Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,205
defines element type 1 as element INTER205.
12.1.3.Material Definition
12.1.3.1.Material Characteristics
The CZM option of the TB command lets you define interface separation behavior with ANSYS interface
elements. The interface is represented by a single element set of these elements. The interface
deformation is characterized by a traction separation law (see below), with the deformation occurring
only within the interface elements (the cohesive zone). The tension or shear deformations within this
zone are of primary interest. The surface behavior of the material is highly nonlinear in either case, and
the resulting softening or loss of stiffness changes character rapidly as the element separation increases.
Unloading behavior is not addressed in this configuration.
12.1.3.2.Material Constants
The cohesive zone model (TB,CZM with TBOPT = EXPO) uses a traction separation law defined as:
for normal traction at the interface, and
for shear traction at the interface, where:
The material constants max ,
, and
are input as C1, C2, and C3. The input format is
TB,CZM,,,,
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
This CZM material option must be used with interface elements INTER202, INTER203, INTER204, and
INTER205.
12.1.4.Meshing and Boundary Conditions

12.1.4.1.Meshing
There are three options available for meshing interface elements:
Use the CZMESH command to generate the interface. You must either define the model into two
components or groups of elements (between which the cohesive zone interface elements will
reside), or specify a coordinate value for the line or plane that will divide the model.
Use the E command to directly generate interface elements from a set of nodes.
For generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
12.1.4.2.Boundary Conditions
The interface delamination and failure process involves the stiffness softening and complete loss of the
interface stiffness, which in turn will cause numerical instability of the solution. You should therefore
apply your constraints as boundary conditions. Using forces or pressures will generally cause rigid body
motion after the fracture, and will result in other solution difficulties.
12.1.5.Solution Procedure and Result Output

Interface traction-separation behavior is highly nonlinear. The full Newton-Raphson solution procedure
(the standard ANSYS nonlinear method), is the default method for performing this type of analysis.
Other solution procedures for interface analyses are not recommended.
Like most nonlinear problems, convergence behavior of an interface delamination analysis depends
strongly on the particular problem to be solved. ANSYS has provided a comprehensive solution control
strategy, therefore it is always recommended that you use the ANSYS default solution options, unless
you are sure about the benefits of any changes.
Some special considerations for solving an interface delamination problem:
When the element breaks apart under external loading, it will lose its stiffness and may cause
numerical instability.
It is always a good practice to place the lower and upper limit on the time step size using the
DELTIM or NSUBST commands, and to start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it
up. This ensures that all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included and
that the problem is solved effectively.
When interface elements are under tension, the normal stiffness is exponentially related to the
separation. That is, the greater the separation, the lower the normal stiffness of the elements.
When interface elements are under compression, you can align contact elements with the interface
elements to obtain better penetration control.
A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result of
some numerical problem in the finite element model.
12.1.6.Reviewing the Results

Results from an interface delamination analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains and
reaction forces of the structural components and the cohesive zone layer information (interface tension,
separation, etc.). You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, or in POST26, the
time-history postprocessor. See the Output Data sections of the element descriptions for any of the
interface elements (for example INTER202) for a description of the available output components.
Note that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that substep
should have been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option command OUTRES controls which
substep results are stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described
below.
calculated.

If not, you probably won't want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why
convergence failed.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST1
Command(s):
GUI:
SET
4. Display the results using any of the following options. Note that cohesive zone element results,
such as tension and separation, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system.

Command(s):
GUI:
PLDISP

PLESOL
GUI:
or
Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When
displaying the interface tension distribution, if other structural mating components are not included,
ANSYS will plot the geometry of those components in gray. To have a better visualization of an
interface tension plot, it is better for you to select the interface elements only.
Command(s): PRESOL (element-by-element results)
PRITER (substep summary data), etc.
GUI:
Option: Animation
You can also animate interface results over time:
Command(s):
GUI:
ANTIME
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST1. See "The General Postprocessor (POST1)"
in the Basic Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear
analyses.

graph the interface separation vs. interface tension, which should correspond to the material behavior
defined by TB,CZM. You might also graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of
applied load, or you might list the interface tension at a node and the corresponding TIME value. A
typical POST26 postprocessing sequence for an interface delamination analysis is the same as the
sequence for a typical nonlinear analysis. See steps 1 through 4 in Reviewing Results in POST26 included
in Nonlinear Structural Analysis .
12.2.Modeling Interface Delamination with Contact Elements

Interface delamination with contact elements is referred to as debonding. Debonding is modeled with
contact elements which are bonded and have a cohesive zone material model defined. There are several
advantages to using debonding to model interface delamination. Existing models with contact definitions
can be easily modified to include debonding, and standard contact and debonding can be simulated with
the same contact definitions.
12.2.1.Analyzing Debonding
Modeling debonding with contact elements involves the same steps as any other contact analysis. (For a
detailed discussion on how to set up a contact analysis, see "Surface-to-Surface Contact".) Therefore, if
you are familiar with setting up a contact analysis you can easily include debonding in your model. You
simply add a bonded contact option and a cohesive zone material model for the contact elements.
12.2.2.Contact Elements
Debonding can be defined in any model that includes the following types of contact:
Surface-to-surface (CONTA171 through CONTA174)
Node-to-surface (CONTA175)
Line-to-line (CONTA176)
Line-to-surface (CONTA177) contact
The contact elements must use bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) with the augmented
Lagrangian method or pure penalty method (KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1). Debonding is activated by associating
a cohesive zone material model (input with TB,CZM) with the contact elements.
12.2.3.1.Material Characteristics
ANSYS provides two cohesive zone material models with bilinear behavior to represent debonding. The
material behavior, defined in terms of contact stresses (normal and tangential) and contact separation
distances (normal gap and tangential sliding), is characterized by linear elastic loading followed by linear
softening. The slope of the curve depends on contact stiffness and a debonding parameter which is
defined in terms of material constants. Debonding allows three modes of separation:
Mode I debonding for normal separation
Mode II debonding for tangential separation
Mixed mode debonding for normal and tangential separation
Debonding is also characterized by convergence difficulties during material softening. Artificial damping is
provided to overcome these problems. An option for tangential slip under compressive normal contact
stress for mixed mode debonding is also provided.
After debonding is completed, the surface interaction is governed by standard contact constraints for
normal and tangential directions. Frictional contact is used if friction is specified for the contact elements.
12.2.3.2.Material Constants
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strmoddebond.html[28/04/2013 08:14:01 p.m.]
The cohesive zone material model with bilinear behavior (TB,CZM with TBOPT = CBDD or CBDE ) is
defined as:
and
where:
P = normal contact stress (tension)
y = tangential contact stress in y direction
z = tangential contact stress in z direction
K n = normal contact stiffness
K t = tangential contact stiffness
un = contact gap
uy = contact slip distance in y direction
uz = contact slip distance in z direction
d = debonding parameter
To model bilinear material behavior with tractions and separation distances, use TB,CZM with TBOPT =
CBDD. You also input the following material constants with the TBDATA command:
Constant
C1
Symbol
max
C2
maximum normal contact stress

contact gap at the completion of debonding
C3
maximum equivalent tangential contact stress
max
C4
tangential slip at the completion of debonding
C5
C6
Meaning
artificial damping coefficient

flag for tangential slip under compressive normal contact
stress
To model bilinear material behavior with tractions and critical fracture energies, use TB,CZM with TBOPT
= CBDE. You also input the following material constants with the TBDATA command:
Constant
Symbol
Meaning
C1
max
C2
Gcn
critical fracture energy for normal separation
C3
max
C4
Gct
critical fracture energy for tangential slip
C5
C6

stress
The following is an example of how to define a cohesive zone material with the TB and TBDATA
commands:
TB,CZM,,,,CBDD
! bilinear behavior with tractions and separation distances
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4,C5,C6
For more information on defining a cohesive zone material in a contact analysis, see Cohesive Zone
Material Constants for Contact Elements (TB,CZM,,,,CBDD and TB,CZM,,,,CBDE ) in the Element
Reference.
12.2.4.Result Output
All applicable output quantities for contact elements are also available for debonding:
Output Quantities
Symbol
Meaning
PRES
SFRIC
P
t
normal contact stress

tangential constant stress
TAUR and TAUS
components (tangential constant stress)
GAP
y and z
un
SLIDE
ut
tangential slip
TASR and TASS
uy and uz
components (tangential slip)
contact gap
Additionally, debonding specific output quantities are also available. These are output as NMISC data:
Output Quantities
Symbol
Meaning
DTSTART
DPARAM
(no symbol)
dn , dt , or dm
debonding time history

debonding parameter
DENERI and DENERII
Gn and Gt
fracture energies
Chapter 13: Fracture Mechanics
Chapter13:Fracture Mechanics
Cracks and flaws occur in many structures and components for several reasons. The material may be
inherently defective. Cracks may be introduced during the manufacturing stage, or later as a result of
environmental conditions. The presence of such cracks or flaws can significantly degrade the structural
integrity of a component under the action of applied loads and environmental conditions.
Fracture mechanics uses concepts from applied mechanics to develop an understanding of the stress and
deformation fields around a crack tip when a crack is present in a structure. A sound knowledge of these
stress and deformation fields helps in developing fail-safe and safe-life designs for structures. Such
fracture-mechanics-based design concepts are widely used, but are not limited to, the fields of nuclear,
aerospace, civil, and mechanical engineering.
The following topics concerning fracture analysis are available:
Introduction to Fracture
Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
Numerical Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters
Learning More About Fracture Mechanics
13.1.Introduction to Fracture
Structural design concepts traditionally use a strength-of-material approach for designing a component.
This approach does not anticipate the elevated stress levels due to the existence of cracks. The
presence of such stresses can lead to catastrophic failure of the structure.
Fracture mechanics accounts for the cracks or flaws in a structure. The fracture mechanics approach to
the design of structures includes flaw size as one important variable, and fracture toughness replaces
strength of material as a relevant material parameter.
Fracture analysis is typically carried out either using the energy criterion or the stress-intensity-factor
criterion. When the energy criterion is used, the energy required for a unit extension of the crack (the
energy release rate) characterizes the fracture toughness. When the stress-intensity-factor criterion is
used, the critical value of the amplitude of the stress and deformation fields characterizes the fracture
toughness. Under certain circumstances, the two criteria are equivalent.
The following additional introductory topics concerning fracture are available:
Fracture Modes
Fracture Mechanics Parameters
Crack Growth Simulation
13.1.1.Fracture Modes
Depending on the failure kinematics (that is, the relative movement of the two surfaces of the crack),
three fracture modes are distinguishable, as shown in Figure 13.1:
Mode I Opening or tensile mode
Mode II Shearing or sliding mode
Mode III Tearing or out-of-plane mode
Fracture is generally characterized by a combination of fracture modes.
Figure13.1Schematic of the Fracture Modes
13.1.2.Fracture Mechanics Parameters

Typical fracture mechanics parameters describe either the energy-release rate or the amplitude of the
stress and deformation fields ahead of the crack tip.
The following parameters are widely used in fracture mechanics analysis:
Stress-intensity factor
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFRINTRO.html[28/04/2013 08:14:44 p.m.]
Energy-release rate
J-Integral
The stress intensity factor and energy release rate are limited to linear elastic fracture mechanics. The JIntegral is applicable to both linear elastic and nonlinear elastic-plastic materials.
13.1.2.1.The Stress-Intensity Factor

For a linear elastic material the stress and strain fields ahead of the crack tip are expressed as:
where K is the stress-intensity factor, r and are coordinates of a polar coordinate system (as shown in
Figure 13.2). These equations apply to any of the three fracture modes.
Figure13.2Schematic of a Crack Tip
For a Mode I crack, the stress field is given as:
13.1.2.2.Energy-Release Rate
The energy-release rate is based on the energy criterion for fracture proposed by Griffith and further
development by Irwin. In this approach, the crack growth occurs when the energy available for crack
growth is sufficient to overcome the resistance of the material.[1]
The energy-release rate G is defined in elastic materials as the rate of change of potential energy
released from a structure when a crack opens. For example, the following illustration shows a crack of
length 2a in a large elastic body with modulus E subject to a tensile stress ():
The energy-release rate is given by:
At the moment of fracture, G is equal to the critical energy-release rate Gc, a function of the fracture
toughness. The value of Gc for a material can be determined via a relatively straightforward set of crack
experiments.
For a single-fracture mode, the stress-intensity factor and the energy-release rate are related by:
where G is the energy-release rate,

for plane strain, and
material Youngs modulus, and is the Poissons ratio.)
for plane stress. (E is the
For more information, see VCCT Energy-Release Rate Calculation.
13.1.2.3.J-Integral
J-Integral is one of the most widely accepted parameters for elastic-plastic fracture mechanics. The JIntegral is defined as follows [2]:
where W is the strain energy density, T is the kinematic energy density, represents the stresses, u is
the displacement vector, and is the contour over which the integration is carried out.
For a crack in a linear elastic material, the J-Integral represents the energy-release rate. Also, the
amplitudes of the crack-tip stress and deformation fields are characterized by the J-Integral for a crack
in a nonlinear elastic material.
For more information, see J-Integral Calculation and J-Integral as a Stress-Intensity Factor.
13.1.2.4.J-Integral as a Stress-Intensity Factor

Hutchinson [3] and Rice and Rosengren [4] independently showed that the J-Integral characterizes the
crack-tip field in a nonlinear elastic material. They each assumed a power law relationship between
plastic strain and stress. If elastic strain is included, the relationship for uniaxial deformation is given as:
where 0 is the reference stress (the yield stress of the material), and 0 = 0 /E, is a dimensionless
constant, and n is the hardening component. They showed that, at a distance very close to the crack tip
and well within the plastic zone, the crack-tip stress and strain ahead of crack tip can be expressed as:
and
For elastic material, n = 1 and the above equation predicts the

linear elastic fracture mechanics.
singularity which is consistent with
13.1.3.Crack Growth Simulation

Fracture/crack growth is a phenomenon in which two surfaces are separated from each other, or
material is progressively damaged under external loading. The following methods are available for
simulating such failure:
The Interface Element Method
The Cohesive Zone Method
Gursons Model Method
13.1.3.1.The Interface Element Method

This method uses interface elements (INTER nnn ) to simulate the fracture by separating the interface
elements between two materials with one or more user-specified fracture criteria. This approach applies
to homogenous material fracture as well as interfacial fracture in biomaterial systems. It is most suitable
for composite material interface delamination with good numerical stability.
13.1.3.2.The Cohesive Zone Method

This method uses interface (INTER nnn ) or contact (CONTAnnn ) elements to allow the separation of the
surfaces and the cohesive material model to describe the separation behavior of the surfaces. This
approach applies to both the simulation of fracture in a homogeneous material as well as interfacial
delamination along the interface between two materials. For more information, see Interface
Delamination and Failure Simulation.
13.1.3.3.Gursons Model Method

Gurson's model is a plasticity model (TB,GURSON) used to simulate ductile metal damage. The model is
a micromechanics-based ductile damage model incorporating the void volume fraction into plasticity
constitutive equation to represent the ductile damage process of void grow, void nucleation, and void
coalescence. For more information, see Gurson's Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications and the TB,GURSON command documentation.

13.2.Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems

A fracture analysis is a combination of stress analysis and fracture mechanics parameter calculation. The
stress analysis is a standard linear elastic or nonlinear elastic plastic analysis.
Because high stress gradients exist in the region around the crack tip, the finite element modeling of a
component containing a crack requires special attention in that region.
The 2-D and 3-D representations of the region around the crack tip and the terminology used is outlined
in the following section. The edge or tip of the crack is referred to as a crack tip in a 2-D model and
crack front in a 3-D model, as illustrated in Figure 13.3.
Figure13.3Crack Tip and Crack Front
(a) 2-D models and (b) 3-D models

The following additional topics related to solving fracture problems are available :
Modeling the Crack-Tip Region
Calculating Fracture Parameters
13.2.1.Modeling the Crack-Tip Region

Stress and deformation fields around the crack tip generally have high gradients. The precise nature of
these fields depends on the material, geometry, and other factors. To capture the rapidly varying stress
and deformation fields, use a refined mesh in the region around the crack tip. For linear elastic
problems, the displacements near the crack tip (or crack front) vary as
, where r is the distance from
the crack tip. The stresses and strains are singular at the crack tip, varying as
. To produce this
singularity in stresses and strains, the crack tip mesh should have certain characteristics:
The crack faces should be coincident.
The elements around the crack tip (or crack front) should be quadratic, with the midside nodes
placed at the quarter points. (Such elements are called singular elements.)
Figure 13.4 shows examples of singular elements for 2-D and 3-D fracture models.
Figure13.4Singular Element Examples
(a) 2-D models and (b) 3-D models

The following additional topics for modeling the crack-tip region are available:
Modeling 2-D Linear Elastic Fracture Problems
Modeling 3-D Linear Elastic Fracture Problems
13.2.1.1.Modeling 2-D Linear Elastic Fracture Problems

The recommended element type for a 2-D fracture model is PLANE183, the 8-node quadratic solid. The
first row of elements around the crack tip should be singular, as illustrated in Figure 13.4 (a).
The PREP7 preprocessor's KSCON command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls>
Concentrat KPs> Create), which assigns element division sizes around a keypoint, is particularly
useful in a fracture model. It automatically generates singular elements around the specified keypoint.
Other fields on the command allow you to control the radius of the first row of elements, the number of
elements in the circumferential direction, and more. Figure 13.5 shows a fracture model generated with
the help of KSCON.
Figure13.5Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model
Take advantage of symmetry where possible. In many cases, you need to model only one half of the
crack region, with symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions, as shown below.
Figure13.6Using Symmetry to Your Advantage
For reasonable results, the first row of elements around the crack tip should have a radius of
approximately a / 8 or smaller, where a is the crack length. In the circumferential direction, roughly one
element every 30 or 40 is recommended.
The crack-tip elements should not be distorted and should take the shape of isosceles triangles.
13.2.1.2.Modeling 3-D Linear Elastic Fracture Problems

The recommended element type for 3-D models is SOLID186, the 20-node brick element. As shown in
Figure 13.4 (b), the first row of elements around the crack front should be singular elements. Notice
that the element is wedge-shaped, with the KLPO face collapsed into the line KO.
Generating a 3-D fracture model is considerably more involved than a 2-D model. The KSCON
command is not available for 3-D modeling. You must verify that the crack front is along edge KO of the
elements.
Element size recommendations are the same as for 2-D models. In addition, aspect ratios should not
exceed approximately 4 to 1 in all directions.
For curved crack fronts, the element size along the crack front depends on the amount of local
curvature. A general guideline is to have at least one element every 15 to 30 along a circular crack
front.
All element edges should be straight, including the edge on the crack front.
13.2.2.Calculating Fracture Parameters

You can evaluate the following fracture parameters:
J-Integral
Energy-release rate (GI, GII, GIII)
Stress-intensity factors (KI, K II, K III)
The J-Integral, energy-release rate, and stress-intensity factors are calculated during the solution phase
of the analysis (CINT). The results are stored to the .rst results file for postprocessing.
The stress-intensity factors can also be calculated during (POST1) postprocessing (KCALC).
For more information, see Numerical Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters.
13.3.Numerical Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters

Several tools are available for evaluating fracture mechanics parameters:
The J-Integral calculation is based on the domain integral approach and is performed during the
solution phase of the analysis (CINT).
Direct energy-release rate calculation, based on the virtual crack closure technique (VCCT), is
performed at solution (CINT).
Stress-intensity factors can be calculated via the interaction integral approach during solution
(CINT) or via displacement extrapolation during postprocessing (KCALC).
13.3.1.J-Integral Calculation
The J-Integral evaluation is based on the domain integral method by Shih[5]. The domain integration
formulation applies area integration for 2-D problems and volume integration for 3-D problems. Area and
volume integrals offer much better accuracy than contour integral and surface integrals, and are much
easier to implement numerically. The method itself is also very easy to use.
The following topics concerning J-Integral calculation are available:
Understanding the Domain Integral Method
J-Integral Calculation
13.3.1.1.Understanding the Domain Integral Method

For a 2-D problem, and in the absence of thermal strain, path dependent plastic strains, body forces
within the integration of area, and pressure on the crack surface, the domain integral representation of
the J-Integral is given by:
where q is referred to as the crack-extension vector. The direction of q is the simple x-axis of the local
coordinate system ahead of the crack tip. The q vector is chosen as zero at nodes along the contour ,
and is a unit vector for all nodes inside except the midside nodes, if there are any, that are directly
connected to . ANSYS refers to these nodes with a unit q vector as virtual crack-extension nodes .
For higher-order elements (such as PLANE183 and SOLID186), the q vector at mid-side nodes takes the
averaged values from the corresponding corner nodes. The discretized form of the J-Integral is given by:
where ne is the number of elements to be integrated, wiw is the weight function, and Aie is the area of
the element represented by ie.
For the 3-D problem, domain integral representation of the J-Integral becomes a volume integration,
which again is evaluated over a group of elements. The implementation becomes more complicated;
however, the principal is similar to the 2-D problem.
13.3.1.1.1.Virtual Crack-Extension Nodes and J-Integral Contours
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFRNUMEVAL.html[28/04/2013 08:15:28 p.m.]
Virtual crack-extension nodes are one of the most important input data elements required for J-Integral
evaluation. It is also referred to as the crack-tip node component.
For the 2-D crack problem, the crack-tip node component usually contains one node which is also the
crack-tip node. The first contour for the area integration of the J-Integral is evaluated over the elements
associated with the crack-tip node component. The second contour for the area integration of the JIntegral is evaluated over the elements adjacent to the first contour of elements. This procedure is
repeated for all contours. To ensure correct results, the elements for the contour integration should not
reach the outer boundary of the model (with the exception of the crack surface).
For the 3-D crack problem, the crack-tip node component is comprised of the nodes along the crack
front. The crack-tip node component is not required to be sorted. The 3-D J-Integral contour follows a
procedure similar to that of the 2-D contour.
13.3.1.1.2.Element Selection and Material Behavior

J-Integral or stress-intensity evaluation (accessed via the CINT command) supports the following
elements:
PLANE182
PLANE183
SOLID185
SOLID186
SOLID187
J-Integral or stress-intensity evaluation supports the following material behavior:
Linear elasticity
Plasticity
13.3.1.2.J-Integral Calculation
ANSYS calculates the J-Integral at the solution phase of the analysis after a substep has converged,
then stores the value to the results file.
The CINT command initiates the J-Integral calculation and also specifies the parameters necessary for
the calculation.
Perform the J-Integral calculation as follows:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Initiate a New J-Integral Calculation

Define Crack Information
Specify the Number of Contours to Calculate
Define a Crack Symmetry Condition
Specify Output Controls
13.3.1.2.1.Step 1: Initiate a New J-Integral Calculation

To start a J-Integral calculation, use the CINT command's NEW option and provide a number to identify
the input information for the J-Integral calculation. The command syntax is:
CINT,NEW,n
where n is the number identifying this J-Integral calculation.
For example:
CINT,NEW,1
! initiate a new J-Integral calculation as # 1
13.3.1.2.2.Step 2: Define Crack Information

The crack-tip node component and the crack-extension direction are both necessary for a J-Integral
calculation. Two methods using the CINT command are available for specifying the values:
Define the crack-tip node component and the crack-plane normal.
This approach applies for both 2-D crack geometry and 3-D flat crack surfaces. It offers a simple
way to define a 3-D J-Integral calculation, as you need only define the crack-tip (front) node
component and the normal of the crack plane. Use this method when the crack plane is flat.
Define the crack-extension node component and crack-extension direction.
This approach applies for 3-D curve crack planes, where a unique normal may not exist. However,
you must define the crack-extension node component and the crack-extension direction at each
crack-tip node location. Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes
form the crack tip, as in the case of a collapsed crack-tip mesh.
13.3.1.2.2.1.Define the Crack-Tip Node Component and Crack-Plane Normal

For 2-D crack geometry, define a crack-tip node component (usually a node located at the crack tip).
You can also define a group of nodes around the crack tip, including the node at the crack tip. ANSYS
uses this group of nodes as the starting nodes to form the necessary information for the contour
integration automatically.
For 3-D flat crack geometry, you must define a crack-tip node component that includes all of the nodes
along the crack front. At each node location, however, only one node can exist. All nodes in the crack-tip
node component must be connectable, and they must form a line based on the element connectivity
associated with it. This line is the crack front. ANSYS uses it to automatically determine the elements for
the contour integration. The procedure is similar to 2-D crack geometry, and is done through all the
nodes along the crack front.
CINT,CTNC,CMNAME
After the crack-tip node component is defined, use the CINT command's NORM option to define the
normal of the crack plane. The program automatically converts it into the crack-extension vector q,
based on the element information. The crack-extension vector is taken along the perpendicular direction
to the plane formed by the crack-plane normal and the tangent direction of the crack-tip node, and is
normalized to a unit vector.
CINT,NORM,par1,par2
where par1 is the coordinate system number and par2 is the axis of coordinate system par1.
Example 1
!local coordinate system
LOCAL,11,0,,,,
! select nodes located along the crack front and define it as crack front/tip node component
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip
CM,CRACK_TIP_NODE_CM
! Define a new J-Integral calculation
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_TIP_NODE_CM
CINT,NORM,11,2
Example 2
! select nodes located along the crack front and define it as crack front/tip node component
LSEL,,,,
NSLL
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM,NODE
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM,
13.3.1.2.2.2.Define the Crack-Extension Node Component and Crack-Extension

Direction
Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes form the crack tip, as in the
case of a collapsed crack-tip mesh:
1. Define a node component consisting of one or more nodes forming the crack tip. The
node component can have one or more nodes.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMNAME
2. Identify the crack-tip node separately if the node component has more than one node.
If a crack-tip node is not identified, then the first node of the node component is taken to be the
first node.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMNAME,node1
3. Define the crack-extension direction.

Identify the local coordinate system associated with the crack under consideration.
Identify the local axis (for the above CS) along which the crack is supposed to extend.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMNAME,node1,11,2
Alternatively, define the crack-extension direction by directly specifying the global X Y and Z
components of the crack-extension vector.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMNAME,node1, , , compx, compy, compz
Repeat this method for all node locations along the crack front.
Example 1
! local coordinate systems
local,11,0,,,,
local,12,0,,,,
local,n,0,,,,
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CMn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1,,11,2
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2,,n,2
Example 2
! Crack-extension node component and
!
crack-extension direction specification using vectors
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1, , , ,Vx1,Vy1,Vz1
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2, , , ,Vx2,Vy2,Vz2
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2, , , ,Vxn,Vyn,Vzn
13.3.1.2.3.Step 3: Specify the Number of Contours to Calculate

Specify the number of contours for the J-Integral evaluation, as follows:
CINT,NCON,n
where n is the number of contours.

For 3-D crack geometry, every node along the crack front has the same number of contours.
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_SET,NODE
CINT,NCON,6
13.3.1.2.4.Step 4: Define a Crack Symmetry Condition

If the crack is located along a symmetry plane, and only a half model is created, define a symmetric
condition so that ANSYS can account for it:
CINT,SYMM,ON
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,SYMM,ON
! crack 1 is a symmetrical crack
13.3.1.2.5.Step 5: Specify Output Controls

ANSYS calculates the J-Integral at the solution level and stores it to the results file for postprocessing. JIntegral output uses all the defaults from the OUTRES command. The command OUTRES,ALL includes
CINT command results. However, you can issue an OUTRES,CINT command to control the specific
output for J-Integral results only.
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,SYMM,ON
CINT,NCON,5
OUTRES,CINT,10
! output J-Integral every 10 substeps
13.3.2.VCCT Energy-Release Rate Calculation

The approach for evaluating the energy-release rate is based on the virtual crack-closure technique
(VCCT). The energy-release rate calculation occurs during the solution phase of the analysis and the
results are saved for postprocessing.
The following energy-release rate calculation topics are available:
Using VCCT for Energy-Release Rate Calculation
Process for Calculating the Energy-Release Rate
13.3.2.1.Using VCCT for Energy-Release Rate Calculation

VCCT is based on the assumption that the energy needed to separate a surface is the same as the
energy needed to close the same surface. The implementation described here uses the modified crackclosure method (a VCCT-based method) and assumes further that stress states around the crack tip do
not change significantly when the crack grows by a small amount (a).
13.3.2.1.1.2-D Crack Geometry

For 2-D crack geometry with a low-order element mesh, the energy-release rate is defined as:
where:
GI and GII = mode I and II energy-release rate, respectively
u and v = relative displacement between the top and bottom nodes of the crack face in local
coordinates x and y, respectively
Rx and Ry = reaction forces at the crack-tip node
a = crack extension, as shown in the following figure:
Figure13.72-D Crack Geometry Schematic
13.3.2.1.2.3-D Crack Geometry

For 3-D crack geometry with a low-order element mesh, the energy-release rate is defined as:
where:
GI, GII, and GIII = mode I, II, and III energy-release rate, respectively
u, v, and w= relative displacement between the top and bottom nodes of the crack face in local
coordinates x, y, and z, respectively
Rx , Ry , and Rz = reaction forces at the crack-tip node
A = crack-extension area, as shown in the following figure:
Figure13.83-D Crack Geometry Schematic
13.3.2.2.Process for Calculating the Energy-Release Rate

The CINT command's VCCT option initiates the energy-release rate calculation.
Similar to the J-integral calculation, CINT specifies the parameters necessary for the calculation.
For CINT element-type and material-behavior support, see Element Selection and Material Behavior.
Following is the general process for calculating the energy-release rate:
Step
Step
Step
Step
1:
2:
3:
4:
Initiate a New Energy-Release Rate Calculation

13.3.2.2.1.Step 1: Initiate a New Energy-Release Rate Calculation

Issue the CINT command twice, as shown:
CINT,NEW,n
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
where n is the identifier for this energy-release rate calculation (for example, 1).
13.3.2.2.2.Step 2: Define Crack Information

Similar to the J-integral calculation, the crack-tip node component and the crack-extension direction are
both necessary for the energy-release rate calculation.
VCCT requires the finite element mesh to be in the crack-extension direction. To ensure the accuracy of
the energy-release rate calculation, it is crucial that you correctly define the crack extension. How you
do so depends upon whether the crack plane is flat or not:
Specifying Crack Information When the Crack Plane Is Flat
Specifying Crack Information When the Crack Plane Is Not Flat
13.3.2.2.2.1.Specifying Crack Information When the Crack Plane Is Flat
This approach applies to both 2-D crack geometry and 3-D flat crack surfaces. It offers a simple way to
define a 3-D energy-release rate calculation, as you need only define the crack-tip (front) node
component and the normal of the crack plane.
2-D Flat Crack Geometry
For 2-D crack geometry, define a crack-tip node component (usually a node located at the crack
tip). You can also define a group of nodes around the crack tip, including the node at the crack
tip. The program uses this group of nodes to form the necessary information for the VCCT
calculation automatically.
3-D Flat Crack Geometry
For 3-D flat crack surfaces, define a crack-tip node component that includes all of the nodes along
the crack front. At each node location, however, only one node can exist.
All nodes in the crack-tip node component must be connectable, and they must form a line based
on the element connectivity associated with it. This line is the crack front. The program uses it to
determine the elements and the nodes needed for the VCCT calculation automatically.
VCCT is not applicable in the case of a collapsed crack-tip mesh.
CINT,CTNC,Par1 , Par2 , Par3
where CTNC specifies a crack-tip node component, Par1 is the crack-tip node component
name, Par2 is the crack-extension direction calculation-assist node (any node on the open
side of the crack), and Par3 is the crack fronts end-node crack-extension direction override.
The Par1 and Par2 values help to identify the crack-extension direction. Although the program
automatically calculates the energy-release rate at the crack tip using the local coordinate system, it is
usually best to use Par2 to define a crack face node to help align the extension directions of the cracktip nodes.
By default, the program uses the external surface to determine the crack-extension direction and normal
when the crack-tip node hits the free surface. You can use Par3 to override this default.
After the crack-tip node component is defined, define the normal of the crack plane. The program
automatically converts it into the crack-extension vector q, based on the element information. The crackextension vector is taken along the perpendicular direction to the plane formed by the crack-plane
normal and the tangent direction of the crack-tip node, and is normalized to a unit vector.
CINT,NORM,Par1 , Par2
where Par1 is the coordinate system number and Par2 is the coordinate system axis.
Example 1:
!
Local coordinate system
LOCAL,11,0,,,,
! select nodes located along the crack front and
! define it as crack front/tip node component
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip
!
Define a new the energy-release rate calculation
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,NORM,11,2
Example 2:
!
Select nodes located along the crack front and
!
define it as crack front/tip node component
LSEL,,,,
NSLL
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM
13.3.2.2.2.2.Specifying Crack Information When the Crack Plane Is Not Flat

This approach applies to 3-D curved crack planes, where a unique normal may not exist. However, you
must define the crack-extension node component and the crack-extension direction at each crack-tip
node location:
1. Define a node component consisting of one or more nodes forming the crack tip.
The node component can have one or more nodes.
Example: CINT,CENC,CompName
2. If the node component has more than one node, identify the crack-tip node
separately.
If a crack-tip node is not identified, the first node of the node component is used as the first node.
Example: CINT,CENC,CompName ,Node1
Identify the local coordinate system associated with the crack under consideration, and identify the
local axis along which the crack should extend.
Example: CINT,CENC,CompName ,Node1,11,2
Alternatively, define the crack-extension direction by directly specifying the global X, Y, and Z
Example: CINT,CENC,CompName ,Node1,,,compx,compy,compz
Repeat this method for all node locations along the crack front. Although the program automatically
calculates the local coordinate system at the crack tip to determine the energy-release rate, it is usually
best to use the NORM option to help align the calculated normals of the crack-tip nodes.
Example 1:
!
Local coordinate systems
local,11,0,,,,
local,12,0,,,,
local,n,0,,,,
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CMn,,n,2
Example 2:
!
Crack-extension node component and
!
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1,,,,Vx1,Vy1,Vz1
CINT,CENC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CMn,,,,Vxn,Vyn,Vzn
Local Crack-Tip Coordinate System

The VCCT calculation is based on the local crack-tip coordinate systems. To ensure the accuracy
of the energy-release rate calculation, it is crucial to have a local crack-tip coordinate system in
which the local x-axis is pointed to the crack extension, the local y-axis is pointed to the normal of
the crack surfaces or edges, and the local z-axis pointed to the tangential direction of the crack
front.
Local coordinate systems must be consistent across all nodes along the crack front. A set of
inconsistent coordinate systems results in irregular behavior of the energy-release rate distribution
along crack front.
The program automatically calculates the local coordinate systems based on the input crack front
nodes and the normal of the crack surface or extension directions. Because there may be not
enough information to determine a set of consistent coordinate systems, however, ANSYS, Inc.
recommends:
Using the CINT command's CTNC option to define a crack-face node to help identify the
coordinate systems, or
Using the CINT command's NORM option, followed by the CENC option, to define the
coordinate systems.
13.3.2.2.3.Step 3: Define a Crack Symmetry Condition

If the crack is located along a symmetry plane, and only a half model is created, define a symmetric
condition so that the program can account for it. To do so, issue the following command:
CINT,SYMM,ON
Example:
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,SYMM,ON
! crack 1 is a symmetrical crack
13.3.2.2.4.Step 4: Specify Output Controls

Similar to the J-Integral calculation, the program calculates the energy-release rate during the solution
phase of the analysis and stores the results in the .rst file for postprocessing.
Energy-release rate output uses all of the defaults from the OUTRES command. The OUTRES,ALL
command includes CINT command results. However, you can issue an OUTRES,CINT command to
control the specific output for energy-release rate results only.
Example:
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,VCCT
CINT,CTNCP,CRACK_TIP_NODE_CM
CINT,SYMM,ON
OUTRES,CINT,10
! output CINT results every 10 substeps
13.3.3.Stress-Intensity Factors Calculation

Two approaches for evaluating stress-intensity factors are available:
Interaction integral method -- ANSYS performs the stress-intensity factors calculation at
solution and stores the results to the result file for postprocessing.
Displacement extrapolation method -- ANSYS performs the stress-intensity factors calculation
during postprocessing.
13.3.3.1.Calculating Stress-Intensity Factors via Interaction Integrals

Similar to the domain integral method for J-Integral evaluation, the interaction integral method for
stress-intensity factors calculation applies area integration for 2-D problems and volume integration for
3-D problems. In comparison to the traditional displacement extrapolation method, the interaction
integral method offers better accuracy, fewer mesh requirements, and ease of use.
The following topics are available:
Understanding Interaction Integral Formulation
Calculating the Stress-Intensity Factors
13.3.3.1.1.Understanding Interaction Integral Formulation

The interaction integral is defined as
where
are the stress, strain and displacement,
are the stress, strain and displacement of the auxiliary field,
and qi is the crack-extension vector.
The interaction integral is associated with the stress-intensity factors as
where
(i = 1,2,3) are the mode I, II and III stress-intensity factors,
(i = 1,2,3) are the auxiliary mode I, II and III stress-intensity factors,
E* = E for plane stress and E* = E / (1 E is the Youngs modulus,
is the Poisson ratio,
and is the shear modulus.
2 ) for plane strain,
13.3.3.1.2.Calculating the Stress-Intensity Factors

ANSYS calculates the stress intensity factors via interaction integral evaluation at the solution phase of
the analysis, and then stores the values to the results file.
The CINT command's SIFS option initiates the stress-intensity factors calculations. Similar to the Jintegral calculation, CINT is also used to specify the parameters necessary for the calculation. For
element type and material behavior support for CINT, see Element Selection and Material Behavior.
Following is the general process for calculating the stress-intensity factors:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Initiate a New Stress-Intensity Factors Calculation

Specify the Number of Contours
13.3.3.1.2.1.Step 1: Initiate a New Stress-Intensity Factors Calculation

To start a stress-intensity factors calculation, issue the CINT command twice, as follows:
CINT,NEW,n
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
where n is the number identifying this stress-intensity factors calculation.
For example:
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
! initiate a new calculation as #1

! specify stress-intensity factor calculations
13.3.3.1.2.2.Step 2: Define Crack Information

Similar to the J-integral calculation, the crack-tip node component and the crack-extension direction are
both necessary for the stress-intensity factors calculation. Two methods, both involving the CINT
command, are available for specifying the values:
Define the crack-tip node component and the crack-plane normal.
This approach applies for both 2-D crack geometry and 3-D flat crack surfaces. It offers a simple
way to define a 3-D stress-intensity-factors calculation, as you need only define the crack-tip
(front) node component and the normal of the crack plane. Use this method when the crack plane
is flat.
Define the crack-extension node component and crack-extension direction.
This approach applies for 3-D curve crack planes, where a unique normal may not exist. However,
you must define the crack-extension node component and the crack-extension direction at each
crack-tip node location. Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes
form the crack tip, as in the case of a collapsed crack-tip mesh.
The auxiliary crack-tip field is based on the crack-extension direction. To ensure the accuracy of the
stress-intensity factors calculation, it is crucial that you correctly define the crack-extension definition.
Define the Crack-Tip Node Component and Crack-Plane Normal

For 2-D crack geometry, define a crack-tip node component (usually a node located at the crack tip).
You can also define a group of nodes around the crack tip, including the node at the crack tip. The
program uses this group of nodes as the starting nodes to form the necessary information for the
contour integration automatically.
For 3-D flat crack geometry, you must define a crack-tip node component that includes all of the nodes
along the crack front. At each node location, however, only one node can exist. All nodes in the crack-tip
node component must be connectable, and they must form a line based on the element connectivity
associated with it. This line is the crack front. ANSYS uses it to automatically determine the elements for
the contour integration. The procedure is similar to 2-D crack geometry, and is done through all the
nodes along the crack front.
CINT,CTNC,Par1 , Par2 , Par3
where Par1 is the crack-tip node component name, Par2 defines the crack-extension direction
calculation-assist node (any node on the open side of the crack), and Par3 is crack fronts end-node
crack-extension direction-override flag.
The Par2 and Par3 values help to identify the crack-extension direction. Although the ANSYS program
automatically calculates the local coordinate system at crack tip for stress-intensity factors calculations, it
is usually best to Par2 to define a crack face node to help align the extension directions of the crack-tip
nodes. By default, the ANSYS program uses the external surface to determine the crack-extension
direction and normal when the crack-tip node hits the free surface; however, you can use Par3 to
override this default with the calculated coordinate system.
After the crack-tip node component is defined, use the CINT command's NORM option to define the
normal of the crack plane. The program automatically converts it into the crack-extension vector q,
based on the element information. The crack-extension vector is taken along the perpendicular direction
to the plane formed by the crack-plane normal and the tangent direction of the crack-tip node, and is
normalized to a unit vector.
CINT,NORM,Par1 , Par2
where Par1 is the coordinate system number and Par2 is the axis of coordinate system Par1 .
Example 1
! local coordinate system
LOCAL,11,0,,,,
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip
! Define a new stress intensity factors calculation
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,NORM,11,2
Example 2
LSEL,,,,
NSLL
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM,
Define the Crack-Extension Node Component and Crack-Extension Direction

Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes form the crack tip, as in the
case of a collapsed crack-tip mesh:
1. Define a node component consisting of one or more nodes forming the crack tip.
The node component can have one or more nodes.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMName
2. Identify the crack-tip node separately if the node component has more than one node.
If a crack-tip node is not identified, the first node of the node component is taken to be the first
node.
Example:
CINT,CENCP,CMName,node1

Identify the local coordinate system associated with the crack under consideration.
Identify the local axis (for the above CS) along which the crack is supposed to extend.
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMName,node1,11,2
Alternatively, define the crack-extension direction by directly specifying the global X Y and Z
Example:
CINT,CENC,CMName,node1,,,compx,compy,compz
Repeat this method for all node locations along the crack front. Although the ANSYS program
automatically calculates the local coordinate system at the crack tip to determine stress-intensity factors,
it is usually best to use the NORM option to help align the calculated normals of the crack-tip nodes.
Example 1
! local coordinate systems
local,11,0,,,,
local,12,0,,,,
local,n,0,,,,
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2,,n,2
Example 2
! Crack-extension node component and
!
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,CENCOMP,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2,,,,Vxn,Vyn,Vzn
Local Crack-Tip Coordinate System

The auxiliary crack-tip field is based on the local crack-tip coordinate systems. To ensure the accuracy of
the stress-intensity factors calculation, it is crucial to have a correct local crack-tip coordinate system in
which the local x-axis is pointed to the crack extension, the local y-axis is pointed to the normal of the
crack surfaces or edges, and the local z-axis pointed to the tangential direction of the crack front.
The local coordinate systems must be consistent across all nodes along the crack front. A set of
inconsistent coordinate systems results in no path dependency of the calculated stress-intensity factors
and irregular behavior of the stress-intensity factor distribution along crack front. The ANSYS program
automatically calculate the local coordinate systems based on the input crack front nodes and the normal
of the crack surface or extension directions; however, because there may be not enough information to
determine a set of consistent coordinate systems, ANSYS, Inc. recommends using the CINT command's
CTNC option to define a crack-face node to help identify the coordinate systems, or use the NORM
option with the CENC option to define the coordinate systems.
13.3.3.1.2.3.Step 3: Specify the Number of Contours

The interaction integral, and thus the stress-intensity factors, have the same contour-independent
behavior as the J-Integral. You can specify the number of contours for the interaction integral
evaluation, as follows:
CINT,NCON,n
where n is the number of contours.
For 3-D crack geometry, every node along the crack front has the same number of contours.
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,CTNC,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_SET,NODE
CINT,NCON,6
13.3.3.1.2.4.Step 4: Define a Crack Symmetry Condition

In general, there is no crack symmetry condition for a mixed-mode crack. When a crack symmetry
condition is defined, however, stress-intensity factor KII and KIII are both set to zero. The calculated
interaction integral is timed by a factor of two and is used to calculate the stress intensity factor KI.
The command to define a symmetric condition is as follows:
CINT,SYMM,ON
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,SYMM,ON
! crack #1 is a symmetrical crack
13.3.3.1.2.5.Step 5: Specify Output Controls

Similar to the J-Integral calculation, ANSYS calculates the stress-intensity factors during the solution
phase of the analysis and stores it to the results file for postprocessing. Stress-intensity factors output
uses all the defaults from the OUTRES command. The command OUTRES,ALL includes CINT command
results. However, you can issue an OUTRES,CINT command to control the specific output for stressintensity factors results only.
Example
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,TYPE,SIFS
CINT,SYMM,ON
CINT,NCON,5
OUTRES,CINT,10
! output CINT results every 10 substeps
13.3.3.2.Calculating Stress-Intensity Factors via Displacement Extrapolation

The POST1 ppostprocessing KCALC command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs>
Stress Int Factr) calculates the mixed-mode stress-intensity factors K I, K II, and K III. The command is
limited to linear elastic problems with a homogeneous, isotropic material near the crack region.
To calculate stress-intensity factors using the displacement extrapolation method, follow these steps
within the POST1 postprocessor:
Step 1: Define a Local Crack-Tip or Crack-Front Coordinate System
Step 2: Define a Path Along the Crack Face
Step 3: Calculate K I, K II, and K III
13.3.3.2.1.Step 1: Define a Local Crack-Tip or Crack-Front Coordinate System

The X axis must be parallel to the crack face (perpendicular to the crack front in 3-D models) and the Y
axis perpendicular to the crack face (as shown in Figure 13.3).
This coordinate system must be the active model coordinate system (CSYS) and results coordinate
system (RSYS) when KCALC executes.
LOCAL (or
Command(s): CLOCAL,
CS,
CSKP, etc.
Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Local Coordinate Systems> Create Local CS> At
GUI:
Specified Loc
13.3.3.2.2.Step 2: Define a Path Along the Crack Face

The first node on the path should be the crack-tip node. For a half-crack model, two additional nodes
are required, both along the crack face. For a full-crack model, where both crack faces are included, four
additional nodes are required: two along one crack face and two along the other.
Command(s): PATH (or
PPATH)
GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
The following figure illustrates the two cases for a 2-D model.
Figure13.9Typical Crack Face Path Definitions
(a) half-crack model and (b) full-crack model
13.3.3.2.3.Step 3: Calculate KI , KII, and KIII

The KPLAN field on the KCALC command specifies whether the model is plane-strain or plane-stress.
Except for the analysis of thin plates, the asymptotic or near-crack-tip behavior of stress is usually
thought to be that of plane strain. The KCSYM field specifies whether the model is a half-crack model
with symmetry boundary conditions, a half-crack model with antisymmetry boundary conditions, or a
full-crack model.
Command(s):
GUI:
KCALC
Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Stress Int Factr
13.4. Learning More About Fracture Mechanics
13.4.Learning More About Fracture Mechanics

A considerable body of literature exists concerning fracture mechanics. The following list of resources
offers a wealth of information but is by no means exhaustive:
1. Anderson, T. L. Fracture Mechanics -- Fundamentals and Applications . 2nd ed. Boca Raton: CRC,
1994.
2. Rice, J. R. A Path Independent Integral and the Approximate Analysis of Strain Concentration by
Notched and Cracks. Journal of Applied Mathematics. 35 (1968): 379-386.
3. Hutchinson, J. W. Singular Behavior at the End of a Tensile Crack in a Hardening Material.
Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. 16, 1 (1968): 13-31.
4. Rice, J. R. and G. F. Rosengren. Plane Strain Deformation Near a Crack Tip in a Power Law
Hardening Material. Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. 16 (1968): 1-12.
5. Shih, C. F., B. Moran, and T. Nakamura. Energy Release Rate Along a Three-Dimensional Crack
Front in a Thermally Stressed Body. International Journal of Fracture . 30, 2 (1986): 79-102.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFRREADLST.html[28/04/2013 08:15:59 p.m.]
Chapter 14: Composites
Chapter14:Composites
Composite materials have been used in structures for centuries. In recent times, composite parts have
been used extensively in aircraft structures, automobiles, sporting goods, and many consumer products.
Composite materials are those containing more than one bonded material, each with different structural
properties. The main advantage of composite materials is the potential for a high ratio of stiffness to
weight. Composites used for typical engineering applications are advanced fiber or laminated
composites, such as fiberglass, glass epoxy, graphite epoxy, and boron epoxy.
ANSYS allows you to model composite materials with specialized elements called layered elements. After
you build your model using these elements, you can perform any structural analysis (including
nonlinearities such as large deflection and stress stiffening).
The following topics related to composites are available:
Modeling Composites
The FiberSIM-ANSYS Interface
14.1.Modeling Composites
Composites are somewhat more difficult to model than an isotropic material such as iron or steel.
Because each layer may have different orthotropic material properties, you must exercise care when
defining the properties and orientations of the various layers.
The following composite modeling topics are available:
Selecting the Proper Element Type
Defining the Layered Configuration
Specifying Failure Criteria
Composite Modeling and Postprocessing Tips
14.1.1.Selecting the Proper Element Type

The following element types are available to model layered composite materials: SHELL181, SHELL281,
SOLSH190, SOLID185 Layered Solid, and SOLID186 Layered Solid.
The element you select depends upon your application and the type of results that must be calculated.
See the individual element descriptions to determine if a specific element can be used in your ANSYS
product. All layered elements allow failure criterion calculations.
SHELL181 -- Finite Strain Shell
A 4-node 3-D shell element with 6 degrees of freedom at each node. The element has full nonlinear
capabilities including large strain and allows 255 layers. The layer information is input using the section
commands (SECxxxxx ) rather than real constants. Failure criteria is available via FC and other FCxxx
commands.
SHELL281 -- Finite Strain Shell
An 8-node element with six degrees of freedom at each node. The element is suitable for analyzing thin
to moderately-thick shell structures and is appropriate for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain
nonlinear applications. The layer information is input using the section commands (SECxxxxx ) rather
than real constants. Failure criteria is available via FC and other FCxxx commands.
SOLSH190 -- 3-D Layered Structural Solid Shell
An 8-node 3-D solid shell element with three degrees of freedom per node (UX, UY, UZ). The element
can be used for simulating shell structures with a wide range of thickness (from thin to moderately
thick). The element has full nonlinear capabilities including large strain. The layer information is input
using the section commands rather than real constants. The element can be stacked to model throughthe-thickness discontinuities. Failure criteria is available using the FC commands.
SOLID185 Layered Solid -- 3-D Layered Structural Solid Element
A 3-D 8-Node Layered Solid used for 3-D modeling of solid structures. It is defined by eight nodes
having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. The
element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain
capabilities. It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible
elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials. The element allows for prism and
tetrahedral degenerations when used in irregular regions. Various element technologies such as B-bar,
uniformly reduced integration, and enhanced strains are supported. Failure criteria is available via FC
and other FCxxx commands. SOLID278 is a companion thermal element.
SOLID186 Layered Solid -- 3-D Layered Structural Solid Element
A higher-order version of the SOLID185 element. SOLID279 is a companion thermal element.
14.1.1.1.Other Element Types with Composite Capabilities

In addition to the layered elements mentioned above, other composite element capabilities are available,
but are not considered further here:
SOLID65 -- This 3-D reinforced concrete solid element models an isotropic medium with optional
reinforcing in three different user-defined orientations.
BEAM188 and BEAM189 -- These 3-D finite strain beam elements can have their sections built up
with multiple materials.
14.1.2.Defining the Layered Configuration

The most important characteristic of a composite material is its layered configuration. Each layer may be
made of a different orthotropic material and may have its principal directions oriented differently. For
laminated composites, the fiber directions determine layer orientation.
Specify individual layer properties to define the layered configuration.
The following topics related to defining the layered configuration are available:
Specifying Individual Layer Properties
Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures
Node Offset
14.1.2.1.Specifying Individual Layer Properties

With this method, the layer configuration is defined layer-by-layer from bottom to top. The bottom layer
is designated as layer 1, and additional layers are stacked from bottom to top in the positive Z (normal)
direction of the element coordinate system. You need to define only half of the layers if stacking
symmetry exists.
At times, a physical layer will extend over only part of the model. In order to model continuous layers,
these dropped layers may be modeled with zero thickness. Figure 14.1 shows a model with four layers,
the second of which is dropped over part of the model.
Figure14.1Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer
For each layer, the following properties are specified in the element real constant table (R, RMORE,
RMODIF) accessed with REAL attributes:
Material properties (via a material reference number MAT)
Layer orientation angle commands (THETA)
Layer thickness (TK)
You can also define layered sections via the Section Tool (Prep>Sections>Shell - Add/edit). For
each layer, the following are specified in the section definition via the section commands (SECTYPE,
SECDATA) or the Section Tool accessed with the SECNUM attributes.
Material properties (via a material reference number MAT)
Layer orientation angle commands (THETA)

Layer thickness (TK)
Number of integration points per layer (NUMPT)
Layer Property Descriptions
Following is more information about each of the layer properties:
Material Properties -- As with any other element, the MP command defines the linear material
properties, and the TB command is used to define the nonlinear material data tables. The only
difference is that the material attribute number for each layer of an element is specified in the
element's real constant table. For the layered elements, the MAT command attribute is used only
for the DAMP and REFT arguments of the MP command. The linear material properties for each
layer may be either isotropic or orthotropic. Typical fiber-reinforced composites contain orthotropic
materials and these properties are most often supplied in the major Poisson's ratio form. Material
property directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system, defined by the element coordinate
system and the layer orientation angle.
Layer Orientation Angle -- Defines the orientation of the layer coordinate system with respect to
the element coordinate system. It is the angle (in degrees) between X-axes of the two systems. By
default, the layer coordinate system is parallel to the element coordinate system. All elements have
a default coordinate system which you can change using the ESYS element attribute (ESYS) . You
may also write your own subroutines to define the element and layer coordinate systems (USERAN
and USANLY); for more information, see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.
Layer Thickness -- If the layer thickness is constant, you only need to specify TK(I), the thickness
at node I. Otherwise, the thicknesses at the four corner nodes must be input. Dropped layers may
be represented with zero thickness.
Number of integration points per layer -- Allows you to determine in how much detail the program
should compute the results. For very thin layers, when used with many other layers, one point
would be appropriate. But for laminates with few layers, more would be needed. The default is
three points. This feature applies only to sections defined via the SEC xxxxx section commands.
14.1.2.2.Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures

Sandwich structures have two thin faceplates and a thick, but relatively weak, core. Figure 14.2
illustrates sandwich construction.
Figure14.2Sandwich Construction
You can model sandwich structures with SHELL181 or SHELL281; however, both elements model the
transverse-shear deflection using an energy-equivalence method that makes the need for a sandwich
option unnecessary.
14.1.2.3.Node Offset
For SHELL181 and SHELL281 using sections defined via the section commands (SECxxxxx ), nodes can
be offset during the definition of the section via the SECOFFSET command.
The figures below illustrate how you can conveniently model ply drop-off in shell elements that are
adjacent to each other. In Figure 14.3, the nodes are located at the middle surfaces and these surfaces
are aligned. In Figure 14.4, the nodes are located at the bottom surfaces and these surfaces are
aligned.
Figure14.3Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane
Figure14.4Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface
14.1.3.Specifying Failure Criteria

Failure criteria are used to learn if a layer has failed due to the applied loads. You can choose from
three predefined failure criteria or specify up to six failure criteria of your own (user-written criteria).
The predefined criteria are:
Maximum Strain Failure Criterion-- Allows nine failure strains.
Maximum Stress Failure Criterion -- Allows nine failure stresses.
Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion -- Allows nine failure stresses and three additional coupling
coefficients.
The failure strains, stresses, and coupling coefficients may be temperature-dependent. For details about
the data required for each criterion, see the Element Reference .
Failure criteria are orthotropic, so you must input the failure stress or failure strain values for all
directions. (The exception is that compressive values default to tensile values.)
If you do not want the failure stress or strain to be checked in a particular direction, specify a large
number in that direction.
14.1.3.1.Using the FC Family of Commands

To specify a failure criterion, use the family of FC commands. These FC commands can be used for any
2-D or 3-D structural solid element or any 3-D structural shell element: FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST.
A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands follows:
FC,1,TEMP,,
100,
FC,1,S,XTEN, 1500,
FC,1,S,YTEN, 400,
FC,1,S,ZTEN,10000,
FC,1,S,XY , 200,
200
1200
500
8000
200
! Temperatures
! Maximum stress components
FC,1,S,YZ ,10000,
FC,1,S,XZ ,10000,
FCLIST,
,100
FCLIST,
,150
FCLIST,
,200
PRNSOL,S,FAIL
8000
8000
!
!
!
!
List status
List status
List status
Use Failure
of Failure Criteria at 100.0 degrees

Criteria
14.1.3.2.User-Written Failure Criteria

You can specify user-written failure criteria via user subroutine USERFC. This subroutine should be
linked with the ANSYS program beforehand. For more information, see "User-Programmable Features
and Nonstandard Uses"in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide .
14.1.4.Composite Modeling and Postprocessing Tips

Following are a few helpful hints and tips for modeling and postprocessing composite elements:
Dealing with Coupling Effects
Obtaining Accurate Interlaminar Shear Stresses
Verifying Your Input Data
Specifying Results File Data
Selecting Elements with a Specific Layer Number
Specifying a Layer for Results Processing
Transforming Results to Another Coordinate System
14.1.4.1.Dealing with Coupling Effects

Composites exhibit several types of coupling effects, such as coupling between bending and twisting,
coupling between extension and bending, etc. This is due to stacking of layers of differing material
properties. As a result, if the layer stacking sequence is not symmetric, you may not be able to use
model symmetry even if the geometry and loading are symmetric, because the displacements and
stresses may not be symmetric.
14.1.4.2.Obtaining Accurate Interlaminar Shear Stresses

Interlaminar shear stresses are usually important at the free edges of a model. For relatively accurate
interlaminar shear stresses at these locations, the element size at the boundaries of the model should be
approximately equal to the total laminate thickness. For shells, increasing the number of layers per
actual material layer does not necessarily improve the accuracy of interlaminar shear stresses.
Interlaminar transverse-shear stresses in shell elements are based on the assumption that no shear is
carried at the top and bottom surfaces of the element. These interlaminar shear stresses are only
computed in the interior and are not valid along the shell element boundaries. Use of shell-to-solid
submodeling is recommended to accurately compute all of the free edge interlaminar stresses.
14.1.4.3.Verifying Your Input Data

Because a large amount of input data is necessary for composites, it is a good idea to verify the data
before proceeding with the solution. The following commands are available for this purpose:
ELIST -- Lists the nodes and attributes of all selected elements.
EPLOT -- Displays all selected elements. Using the /ESHAPE,1 command before EPLOT causes
shell elements to be displayed as solids with the layer thicknesses obtained from real constants or
section definition (see Figure 14.5.
/PSYMB,LAYR, n followed by EPLOT -- Displays layer number n for all selected layered elements.
Use this method to display and verify each individual layer across the entire model. To use
/PSYMB,LAYR with smeared reinforcing elements (REINF265), first set the vector-mode graphics
option (/DEVICE,VECTOR,1).
/PSYMB,ESYS,1 followed by EPLOT -- Displays the element coordinate system triad for those
elements whose default coordinate system has been changed.
Figure14.5Example of an Element Display
LAYPLOT -- Displays the layer stacking sequence from real constants in the form of a sheared
deck of cards. (See Figure 14.6.) The layers are crosshatched and color coded for clarity. The
hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant THETA) and the color indicates layer material
number (MAT). You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
SECPLOT -- Displays the section stacking sequence from sections in the form of a sheared deck of
cards. (See Figure 14.6.) The sections are crosshatched and color coded for clarity. The hatch lines
indicate the layer angle (THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT) defined by
the SECDATA command. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
14.1.4.4.Specifying Results File Data

By default, only data for the bottom of the first (bottom) layer, top of the last (top) layer, and the layer
with the maximum failure criterion value are written to the results file. If you are interested in data for
all layers, set KEYOPT(8) = 1. Be aware, though, that this may result in a large results file.
Figure14.6Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence
14.1.4.5.Selecting Elements with a Specific Layer Number

Use the ESEL,S,LAYER command to select elements that have a certain layer number. If an element
has a zero thickness for the requested layer, the element is not selected.
For energy output, the results are applicable only to the entire element. You cannot get output results
for individual layers.
14.1.4.6.Specifying a Layer for Results Processing

Use the LAYER command (in the POST1 postprocessor) or the LAYERP26 (in the POST26
postprocessor) to specify the layer number for which results should be processed.
The SHELL command specifies a TOP, MID, or BOT location within the layer.
The default in POST1 is to store results for the bottom of the bottom layer, and the top of the top layer,
and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value. In POST26, the default is layer 1.
If KEYOPT(8) = 1 (data stored for all layers), the LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP and
BOT results for the specified layer number. MID values are then calculated by average TOP and BOT
values.
If KEYOPT (8) = 2 is set for SHELL181 or SHELL281 during SOLUTION, then LAYER and LAYERP26
commands store the TOP, BOTTOM, and MID results for the specified layer number. In this case, MID
values are directly retrieved from the results file. For transverse-shear stresses with KEYOPT(8) = 0,
therefore, POST1 can only show a linear variation, whereas the element solution printout or KEYOPT(8)
= 2 can show a parabolic variation.
14.1.4.7.Transforming Results to Another Coordinate System

By default, the POST1 postprocessor displays all results in the global Cartesian coordinate system. Issue
the RSYS command to transform the results to a different coordinate system. In particular, RSYS,SOLU
allows you to display results in the layer coordinate system if LAYER is issued with a nonzero layer
number.
14.2.The FiberSIM-ANSYS Interface

FiberSIM (a product of Vistagy, Inc.) is a fiber draping tool used within popular CAD systems. FiberSIM
provides accurate fiber paths for structural analysis, allows you to optimize potential laminate
architectures, and generates flat patterns for product definition.
The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface allows you to use the information contained in a FiberSIM .xml file in
your ANSYS model. (ANSYS does not use FiberSIM .fml files.) Generated by FiberSIM's draping
calculations, the .xml file data contains the order of layers (including dropped layer information) and the
layer orientation. In ANSYS, you supplement that information by adding material and thickness
information to each layer via ANSYS section (SECxxx ) commands.
Elements Supported
The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface applies to the following elements only: SHELL181, SOLID185 Layered
Solid, SOLID186 Layered Solid, SOLSH190, and SHELL281. When using solid elements, only one solid
element thru the thickness should be used. The interface does not support the VT Accelerator or ANSYS
DesignXplorer products.
Available Topics
The following FiberSIM-ANSYS interface topics are available:
Understanding the FiberSIM XML File
Using FiberSIM Data in ANSYS
FiberSIM-to-ANSYS Translation Details
14.2.1.Understanding the FiberSIM XML File

The FiberSIM .xml file contains detailed orientation data for each layer in the laminate. Each FiberSIM
ply is represented as a triangular facet mesh with node data (X, Y, Z) followed by facet connectivity data
(node1, node2, node3, warp, weft). The data is necessary in ANSYS, where the fiber orientation is
required over the entire layer surface. You map the FiberSIM .xml data to existing ANSYS elements
using the FiberSIM orientation data. The warp and weft are the angles in radians from side node 1 node 2 of the facet of the two fiber orientations. Hence, warp is used to define the layer orientation.
Weft is not used.
For sections incorporating FiberSIM data, the .xml file containing the FiberSIM data must exist in its
original format. ANSYS cannot use the data if you have altered the file in any way (for example, by
opening the file in an XML editor, making changes, and then saving it again).
ANSYS accepts long ply names (up to 72 characters) if they are present in the FiberSIM file.
In this example, the sample.xml FiberSIM file demonstrates an extremely simple model of a square with
five layers, including one partially dropped layer:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<Laminate_Layup PART_NAME="LAMINATE1">
<Orientation XYZ="0.0 0.0 0.0"/>
<Ply NAME="STEEL">
<Material NAME="PPG-PL-3K-D1" THICKNESS="0.266700" CURED_THICKNESS="0.190500"/>
<Mesh_Point_Table COUNT="4" RECORD="XYZ">
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
0.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
</Mesh_Point_Table>
<Mesh_Polygon_Table COUNT="2" RECORD="NODES,WARP,WEFT">
1 2 3,0.200000,1.745329<R/>
4 2 3,0.200000,1.745329<R/>
</Mesh_Polygon_Table>
</Ply>
<Ply NAME="ALUM">
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFbrSIM.html[28/04/2013 08:18:25 p.m.]

0.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
0.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
</Mesh_Point_Table>
1 2 3,0.400000,1.919862<R/>
4 2 3,0.400000,1.919862<R/>
</Ply>
<Ply NAME="ALUM5">
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
0.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
</Mesh_Point_Table>
1 2 3,0.600000,2.094395<R/>
4 2 3,0.600000,2.094395<R/>
</Ply>
<Ply NAME="ALUM">
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
0.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
</Mesh_Point_Table>
3 4 1,0.800000,2.268928<R/>
</Ply>
<Ply NAME="STEEL">
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 0.000000 0.000000<R/>
0.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
30.000000 30.000000 0.000000<R/>
</Mesh_Point_Table>
1 2 3,1.000000,2.443461<R/>
4,2,3,1.000000,2.443461<R/>
</Ply>
</Laminate_Layup>
You may want to examine a FiberSIM .xml file before use to verify that the geometry data in the .xml
file and in the ANSYS model use the same system of units and the same coordinate system. An effective
method for doing so is to convert each layer to an ANSYS PREP7 input file and then plot it, as follows:
1. Select the layer of interest and delete the remainder of the file.
2. Remove the warp and weft angles as well as the <R/> symbols.
3. Using a spreadsheet program or text editor, convert the nodal and element blocks into ANSYS N
and E commands. (Include columns for the command names and commas.)
4. Add /PREP7 and ET,1,200,4 commands at the beginning of the file.
5. Run the input file and plot the results.
FiberSIM's XML File Format
Beginning with FiberSIM 5.1, the FiberSIM XML file contains a material-attribute line of code for each
ply, similar to the following:
ANSYS uses only the CURED_THICKNESS attribute and ignores the others. ANSYS considers the cured
thickness to be the layer thickness when TKFLG = 0 (SECCONTROLS).
Limitations of the FiberSIM XML File

The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface assumes that all layers are built up starting at one side and going
through all layers to the other side. FiberSIM has an option where layers are built up from both sides,
ending in the middle; however, the interface does not support this option.
The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface supports only plies, and not cores.
14.2.2.Using FiberSIM Data in ANSYS

The general process for using FiberSIM .xml file data in your ANSYS simulation follows:
1. Create nodes.
2. Define material properties.
3. Specify element types.
4. Issue section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA, SECCONTROLS, SECOFFSET, SECREAD, and
SLIST) as needed to apply material properties and thickness to flat layers.
5. Define elements.
6. Specify nodal DOF constraints as needed.
7. Solve.
The FiberSIM-ANSYS translation combines the layup order and layer orientations from FiberSIM with the
material and thickness information that you provide via ANSYS section (SECxxx ) commands.
The following simple input file illustrates each part of the process:
/bat,list
/show,sample,grph
/prep7
/title, Sample FiberSIM input data handling using SHELL281 !
! Create nodes
!
n,21
n,22,10
n,23,10,7
n,24, ,7
ngen,2,10,11,14,1,,,4
!
! Define material properties
!
mp, ex,1,30e6 ! steel
mp, ex,2,10e6 ! alum
mp, ex,3,11e6 ! alum5
mp,prxy,1,.3
mp,prxy,2,.3
mp,prxy,3,.3
mp,dens,1,.00003
mp,dens,2,.00001
mp,dens,3,.00001
!
! Setup for element 2 using section commands and
! FiberSIM to define layer info
et,2,281
keyopt,2,8,1
sectype,4,shell,fibersim, lamin1
secdata,0.2,1,,,STEEL
secdata,1.0,2,,,ALUM
secdata,0.2,3,,,ALUM5
seccontrols, , , , .05 , , , ,100,0.155, 0 , 15 , 0 , 0
!
secoffset,bot
secread,sample,xml
/com
==================== issue slist,all
slist,all
!
! Define elements
!
type,2 $real,6 $secn,4 $e,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28 !

!
! Check information
!
/view,1,4,1,1
/eshape,1
eplot
/com laylist,1 =======================
laylist,1
/com layplot,1 =======================
layplot,1
finish
!
! Model is finished
! Apply the loads
!
/solution
outpr,,1
d,all,all
!
! Apply in-plane load
!
d,21,ux,.003
solve
d,all,all
!
! Apply lateral acceleration, acting on the density and added mass !
acel,,,100
solve
finish
!
! Examine the results
!
/graphics,power
/post1
nlist,all
set,1,1
layer,5
presol,s,comp
prnsol,s,comp
layer,0
/eshape,1
plnsol,s,x
finish
14.2.3.FiberSIM-to-ANSYS Translation Details

Following is a general description of the process that the ANSYS program uses to convert FiberSIM data
for use in an ANSYS simulation:
1. ANSYS computes the element centroid.
2. For each layer, ANSYS searches the FiberSIM .xml file to find the first triangular facet that includes
the centroid to the tolerances specified via the SECCONTROLS command.
3. If no facets are found, ANSYS assumes a dropped layer for that element.
4. If ANSYS finds more than one qualifying facet, it uses only the first one to define the angle of the
layer.
5. If ANSYS finds no facets in any layer, it assumes that an error has occurred and terminates. If you
input a non-zero edge tolerance value (SECCONTROLS,,,,,,,,EDGTOL), the error message includes
the distance to the nearest FiberSIM triangle.
You can monitor the search process by setting the SECCONTROLS command's NEL option. The option
generates debug output for the specified number of elements.
When a layer has darts and the cut ends of the material are brought close together, the layer is not
continuous across those parts. Therefore, ensure that a sufficient number of ANSYS elements are
defined in those areas so that at least one element across the transition does not include that layer.
For large models, the search process can be time-consuming; therefore, for iterative analyses during the
solution phase, ANSYS saves the layer information in the element saved-data file ( .ESAV ). ANSYS does
not save the layer information during preprocessing and postprocessing, however, so operations such as
LAYPLOT and PRESOL,S,X may require more time to execute than expected.
The CDWRITE command cannot archive FiberSIM data. Instead, retain the FiberSIM .xml file and
reenter the section (SECxxxxx ) commands necessary to generate the complete model.
Chapter 15: Fatigue
Chapter15:Fatigue
Fatigue is the phenomenon in which a repetitively loaded structure fractures at a load level less than its
ultimate static strength. For instance, a steel bar might successfully resist a single static application of a
300 kN tensile load, but might fail after 1,000,000 repetitions of a 200 kN load.
The primary factors that contribute to fatigue failures include:
Number of load cycles experienced
Range of stress experienced in each load cycle
Mean stress experienced in each load cycle
Presence of local stress concentrations
A formal fatigue evaluation accounts for each of these factors as it calculates how "used up" a certain
component will become during its anticipated life cycle.
The following fatigue-related topics are available:
How ANSYS Calculates Fatigue
Fatigue Terminology
Evaluating Fatigue
15.1. How ANSYS Calculates Fatigue
15.1.How ANSYS Calculates Fatigue

The ANSYS fatigue calculations rely on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III (and
Section VIII, Division 2) for guidelines on range counting, simplified elastic-plastic adaptations, and
cumulative fatigue summation by Miner's rule.
For fatigue evaluations based on criteria other than those of the ASME Code, you can either write your
own macro, or else interface your ANSYS results with an appropriate third-party program (see the
ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide for more information on these two features).
The ANSYS program features the following fatigue-calculation capabilities:
You can postprocess existing stress results to determine the fatigue usage factors for any solidelement or shell-element model. (You can also manually input stresses for fatigue evaluation of
line-element models.)
You can store stresses at a preselected number of locations for a preselected number of events
and loadings within the event.
You can define stress concentration factors for each location and scale factors for each event.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFATCALC.html[28/04/2013 08:19:06 p.m.]
15.2. Fatigue Terminology
15.2.Fatigue Terminology
A location is a node in your model for which fatigue stresses are to be stored. You would typically
choose locations that represent points on the structure that would be susceptible to fatigue damage.
An event is a set of stress conditions that occur at different times during a unique stress cycle. See
Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors later in this chapter for more information.
A loading is one of the stress conditions that is part of an event.
The alternating stress intensity is a measure of the difference in stress state between any two loadings.
The program does not adjust the alternating stress intensity for mean-stress effects.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRFATTERM.html[28/04/2013 08:19:16 p.m.]
15.3.Evaluating Fatigue
You perform a fatigue evaluation in POST1, the general postprocessor, after you have completed a
stress solution. The procedure normally consists of five general steps:
1. Enter POST1 (/POST1) and resume your database.
2. Establish the size (the number of locations, events, and loadings), define the fatigue material
properties, identify stress locations, and define stress concentration factors.
3. Store stresses at locations of interest for various events and loadings; assign event repetitions and
scale factors.
4. Activate the fatigue calculations.
The following fatigue-evaluation topics describe each step in detail and provide additional information:
Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database
Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations
Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
Activate the Fatigue Calculations
Review the Results
Other Approaches to Range Counting
Sample Input
15.3.1.Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database

In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, you need to follow these steps:
1. Enter POST1.
Command(s):
GUI:
/POST1
2. Read your database file ( Jobname.DB ) into active memory. (If your intended fatigue evaluation is a
continuation of an ongoing ANSYS session, then Jobname.DB will already be in memory.) A results
file ( Jobname.RST) with nodal stress results should also be available; you will read results data into
memory later.
Command(s):
GUI:
RESUME
15.3.2.Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations

Define the following data:
Maximum number of locations, events, and loadings
Fatigue material properties
Stress locations and stress concentration factors (SCFs)
1. Define the maximum number of stress locations, events, and loadings.

By default, your fatigue evaluation can consider up to five nodal locations, ten events, and three
loadings within an event. You can use the following option to establish larger dimensions (that is,
allow more locations, events, or loadings), if necessary.
Command(s):
GUI:
FTSIZE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Size Settings
2. Define material fatigue properties.

In order to calculate usage factors, and to include the effect of simplified elastic-plastic
computations, you must define material fatigue properties. The material properties of interest in a
fatigue evaluation are:
The S-N curve, a curve of alternating stress intensity ((S max - Smin )/2) versus allowable
number of cycles. The ASME S-N curves already account for maximum mean stress effects.
You should adjust your S-N curve to account for mean-stress effects, if necessary. If you do
not input an S-N curve, alternating stress intensities will be listed in decreasing order for all
possible combinations of stress conditions, but no usage factors will be calculated.
Command(s):
GUI:
FP
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> S-N
Table
The Sm-T curve, a curve of design stress-intensity value versus temperature. This curve is
needed if you want the program to detect whether or not the nominal stress range has gone
plastic.
Command(s):
GUI:
FP
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Sm_T
Table
Elastic-plastic material parameters M and N (strain hardening exponents). These parameters

are required only if you desire simplified elastic-plastic code calculations. These parameters'
values can be obtained from the ASME Code.
Command(s):
GUI:
FP
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Elasplas Par
The following example illustrates the use of the FP command to input material fatigue
properties:
! Define the S-N table:
FP,1,10,30,100,300,1000,10000
FP,7,100000,1000000
FP,21,650,390,240,161,109,59
FP,27,37,26
! Define the Sm-T table:
FP,41,100,200,300,400,500,600
FP,47,650,700,750,800
FP,51,20,20,20,18.7,17.4,16.4
FP,57,16.1,15.9,15.5,15.1
! Allowable Cycles, N
!
"
! Alternating Stress! Intensity Range, S, ksi
! Temperature,F
!
"
! "Design Stress-Intensity
! Value", Sm (=2/3*Sy or
! 1/3 *Su), ksi
! Define the elastic-plastic material parameters:
FP,61,1.7,.3
!
M and N
3. Define stress locations and stress concentration factors.

The following option allows you to explicitly define a nodal location of interest to your fatigue
evaluation, define stress concentration factors (SCFs) for that location, and assign a short (20
character) title to that location.
Command(s):
GUI:
FL
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Note: Not all fatigue analyses will require the FL command. Locations are automatically
defined for nodes when FS, FSNODE, or FSSECT are issued (see below). If your
model contains sufficient grid detail, your stresses could be accurate enough that
you would not need to apply calculated SCFs. (Supplemental SCFs for surface, size,
or corrosion effects might still be required, however.) Where only one location is
being examined, you could omit a title. If explicit definition of locations, SCFs, or
titles are not required, you could forgo the FL command entirely.
Here is an example of some FL commands for a cylinder with a global Y axis, having two wall
thicknesses of interest, where SCFs are to be applied (to the axial linearized stresses) at the outside
wall.
FL,1,281,,,,Line 1 at inside
FL,2,285,,1.85,,Line 1 at outside
FL,3,311,,,,Line 2 at inside
FL,4,315,,2.11,,Line 2 at outside
Figure15.1Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs)
15.3.3.Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors

15.3.3.1.Storing Stresses
In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, the program must know the stresses at different events and
loadings for each location, as well as the number of repetitions of each event. You can store stresses for
each combination of location, event, and loading, using the following options:
Manually stored stresses
Nodal stresses from Jobname.RST
Stresses at a cross-section
Caution: The program never assumes that a "zero" stress condition exists. If zero stress
is one of the conditions to be considered, it must be explicitly input for each
event in which it may occur.
The following command sequences schematically illustrate how to store stresses. In some situations, you
might prefer to use LCASE instead of SET.
Manually stored stresses:
FS
Nodal stresses retrieved from Jobname.RST:
SET, FSNODE
Stresses at a cross-section:
PATH, PPATH, SET, FSSECT
(Cross-section calculations also require data from Jobname.RST.)
You can use more than one method of storing stresses in an event. Each of these methods is explained
in detail below.
15.3.3.1.1.Manually Stored Stresses

You can use this option to store stresses and the temperature "manually" (without direct access to the
results file Jobname.RST). In such cases, you are not using the fatigue module in POST1 as a
postprocessor, but simply as a fatigue calculator. Line elements, such as beams, must be handled in this
way since the fatigue module is not able to access data from a results file other than for solid elements
or shell elements.
Command(s):
GUI:
FS
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Specified Val
Command input for this option is demonstrated by the following example:

FS,201,1,2,1,-2.0,21.6,15.2,4.5,0.0,0.0
FS,201,1,2,7,450.3
In this example, only the total stresses (items 1-6) and the temperature (item 7) are input. If the
linearized stresses were also to be input, they would follow the temperatures as items 8 through 13.
Note: In the special case of a beam element having only axial stress, you would input
only one stress component (SX), leaving the rest of the stress fields blank.
15.3.3.1.2.Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST

When you use this option, you cause a nodal stress vector containing six stress components to be stored
directly from the results database. Stress components stored with this option can be modified with a
subsequent FS command.
Note: You must issue a SET command, and possibly a SHELL command, before
executing FSNODE. SET will read results for a particular load substep from the
results file ( Jobname.RST) into the database. SHELL allows you to select results
from the top, middle, or bottom surfaces for shell elements (default is the top
surface).
Command(s):
GUI:
FSNODE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> From rst File
Input by means of FSNODE is demonstrated by the following example for an event at one nodal
location:
SET,1
! Define data set for load step 1
FSNODE,123,1,1
!
!
!
!
!
!
SET,2
FSNODE,123,1,2
SET,3
FSNODE,123,1,3
Stress vector at node 123 assigned to event 1,

loading 1.
Define data set for load step 2
...event 1, loading 2
...load step 3
...event 1, loading 3
Figure15.2Three Loadings in One Event
15.3.3.1.3.Stresses at a Cross-Section
This option calculates and stores total linearized stresses at the ends of a section path (as defined by a
preceding PATH and PPATH command). Because you will normally want the linearization to take place
over a thickness representing the shortest distance between the two surfaces, use only the two surface
nodes to describe the path in the PPATH command. This option retrieves stress information from the
results database; therefore FSSECT must also be preceded by a SET command. Stress components
stored with an FSSECT command can be modified with a subsequent FS command.
Command(s):
GUI:
FSSECT
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> At Cross Sect
Input by means of FSSECT is demonstrated in the following example. If node locations are not assigned
with an FL command, the FSSECT commands in this example will automatically assign location numbers
to the two path nodes, 391 and 395. (See Figure 15.3.)
PATH,Name,2
PPATH,1,391
PPATH,2,395
SET,1
FSSECT,,1,1
! Define the path using the two surface nodes
! Store stresses at nodes 391 and 395
Figure15.3Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT
15.3.3.2.Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses

Use the following options to list, plot, or delete stored stresses.
List the stored stresses per location, per event, per loading, or per stress condition:
Command(s):
GUI:
FSLIST
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> List Stresses
Display a stress item as a function of loading number for a particular location and event:
Command(s):
GUI:
FSPLOT
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Plot Stresses
Delete a stress condition stored for a particular location, event, and loading:
Command(s):
GUI:
FSDELE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Dele Stresses
Delete all stresses at a particular location:

Command(s):
GUI:
FL
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Delete all stresses for all loadings in a particular event:

Command(s):
GUI:
FE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Erase Event Data
15.3.3.3.Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors

This option assigns the number of occurrences to the event numbers (for all loadings at all locations of
the event). It can also be used to apply scale factors to all of the stresses that make up its loadings.
Command(s):
GUI:
FE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Assign Events
An example of this command usage is given below:

FE,1,-1
FE,2,100,1.2
*REPEAT,3,1
FE,5,500
! Erase all parameters and fatigue stresses formerly

! used for event 1.
! Assign 100 occurrences to events 2, 3 and 4,
! and scale by 1.2.
! Assign 500 occurrences to event 5.
15.3.3.4.Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors

Structures are usually subjected to a variety of maximum and minimum stresses, which occur in
unknown (or even random) order. Therefore, you must take care to achieve an accurate count of the
number of repetitions of all possible stress ranges, in order to obtain a valid fatigue usage factor.
The ANSYS program automatically calculates all possible stress ranges and keeps track of their number
of occurrences, using a technique commonly known as the "rain flow" range-counting method. At a
selected nodal location, a search is made throughout all of the events for the pair of loadings (stress
vectors) that produces the most severe stress-intensity range. The number of repetitions possible for
this range is recorded, and the remaining number of repetitions for the events containing these loadings
is decreased accordingly. At least one of the source events will be "used up" at this point; remaining
occurrences of stress conditions belonging to that event will subsequently be ignored. This process
continues until all ranges and numbers of occurrences have been considered.
Caution: It can be surprisingly easy to misuse the range-counting feature of the fatigue
module. You must take pains to assemble events carefully if you want your
fatigue evaluation to yield accurate usage factors.
Consider the following guidelines when assembling events:
Understand the internal logic of the ANSYS range-counting algorithm. See POST1 - Fatigue Module
in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details on
how the ANSYS program performs range counting.
Because it can be difficult to predict the exact load step at which a maximum (or minimum) 3-D
stress state occurs, good practice often requires that you include several clustered loadings in each
event, in order to successfully capture the extreme stress state. (See Figure 15.2.)
You will obtain consistently conservative results if you include only one extreme stress condition
(either a local maximum or a local minimum) in any given event. If you group more than one
extreme condition in a single event, you will sometimes generate unconservative results, as
illustrated by the following example:
Consider a load history made up of two slightly different cycles:
Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +50.0 to -50.1 ksi
Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to -50.0 ksi
These load cycles will obviously sum to 1500 repetitions having an alternating stress intensity of about
50 ksi. However, carelessly grouping these loadings into only two events will result in an inaccurate
range count. Let's see how this would happen:
Event 1,
loading 1: Sx = 50.0
loading 2: Sx = -50.1
500 repetitions
Event 2,
loading 1: Sx = 50.1
loading 2: Sx = -50.0
1000 repetitions
The possible alternating stress intensities are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
From
From
From
From
From
From
E1,L1
E1,L1
E1,L1
E1,L2
E1,L2
E2,L1
to
to
to
to
to
to
E1,L2:
E2,L1:
E2,L2:
E2,L1:
E2,L2:
E2,L2:
50.05 ksi
0.05 ksi
50.00 ksi
50.10 ksi
0.05 ksi
50.05 ksi
Sorting these combinations by decreasing alternating stress intensity gives:

d.
a.
f.
c.
b.
From
From
From
From
From
E1,L2
E1,L1
E2,L1
E1,L1
E1,L1
to
to
to
to
to
E2,L1:
E1,L2:
E2,L2:
E2,L2:
E2,L1:
50.10 ksi
50.05 ksi
50.05 ksi
50.00 ksi
0.05 ksi
e.
From E1,L2 to E2,L2:
0.05 ksi
The range counting then proceeds as follows:

d.
a.
f.
c.
b.
e
500 cycles of E1,L2 to E2,L1

this uses up 500 cycles of E1 and E2

E1 is all used up
this uses up 500 more cycles of E2
both events are all used up
Thus, only 1000 repetitions of about 50 ksi range would be counted, instead of the known 1500 cycles.
This error results solely from improper assembly of events.
If the loadings had each been described as separate events (such that E1,L1 E1; E1,L2
E3; and E2,L2 E4), then the following range counts would be obtained:
d.
a.
f.
c.
b.
e.
500 cycles of E2 to E3
E2; E2,L1
this uses up 500 cycles of E2 and E3

E2 is all used up
uses up 500 more cycles of E3, and 500 of E4
uses up 500 more cycles of E4
E3 is all used up
E2 and E4 are both all used up
Cumulative fatigue damage in this case would properly be calculated for 1500 repetitions of about 50 ksi
range.
Conversely, using separate events for each maximum and each minimum stress condition could
sometimes become too conservative. In such cases, carefully choose those loadings that should be
counted together, and group them into the same events. The following example illustrates how
some events can appropriately contain multiple extreme stress conditions:
Consider a load history made up of these two load cycles:
Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +100.1 to +100.0 ksi
Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to +50.0 ksi
It is readily apparent that the worst possible combination of these cycles would yield 500 repetitions
having alternating stress intensity of about 25 ksi range.
Proceeding as in the above example, grouping these loadings into two events would produce an
accurate count of 500 repetitions of about 25 ksi range. Treating each loading as a separate event
would yield an over-conservative count of 1000 repetitions of about 25 ksi range.
15.3.4.Activate the Fatigue Calculations

Now that you have locations, stresses, events, and material parameters all specified, you can execute
the fatigue calculations at a specified location. The location is specified by either the location number or
the node itself.
Command(s):
GUI:
FTCALC
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Calculate Fatig

Fatigue calculation results are printed in the output. If you have routed your output [/OUTPUT] to a
file (for example Jobname.OUT), then you can review the results by listing that file.
Command(s):
GUI:
*LIST
Utility Menu> List> Files> Other> Jobname.OUT
If you have input an S-N curve, output is in the form of a table of alternating stress intensities (listed in
decreasing order) with corresponding pairs of event/loadings, as well as cycles used, cycles allowed,
temperature, and partial usage factor. Following that, the cumulative usage factor is shown for that
particular location. This information is repeated for all locations.
As has been just mentioned, FTCALC output shows the contributing pairs of events and loadings for any
given alternating stress-intensity range. This information can help you isolate the transients
(events/loadings) causing the most fatigue damage.
A convenient way to modify your events would be to write all stored fatigue data on Jobname.FATG. (This
option could be executed either before or after FTCALC.) Data are written to Jobname.FATG in terms of
equivalent fatigue module commands. You can modify your events by editing Jobname.FATG; then use the
/INPUT command to reread the modified fatigue commands.
Command(s):
GUI:
FTWRITE
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Write Fatig Data
15.3.6.Other Approaches to Range Counting

Earlier, we discussed the "rain flow" range-counting method. This technique is useful whenever the
exact time-history of various loadings is not known. However, if in your fatigue analysis the time-history
is known, you can avoid the undue conservatism of this procedure simply by running a separate fatigue
analysis [FTCALC] for each sequential event and then adding the usage factors manually.
15.3.7.Sample Input
A sample input listing for a fatigue evaluation is shown below:
! Enter POST1 and Resume the Database:
/POST1
RESUME,...
! Number of Locations, Events, and Loadings
FTSIZE,...
! Material Fatigue Properties:
FP,1,....
! N values
FP,21,...
! S values
FP,41,...
! T values
FP,51,...
! Sm values
FP,61,...
! Elastic-plastic material parameters
! Locations, Stress Concentration Factors, and Location Titles
FL,...
! Store Stresses (3 Different Methods)
! Store Stresses Manually:
FS,...
! Retrieve Stresses from the Results File:
SET,...
FSNODE,...
! Store Stresses at a Cross-Section:
PPATH,...
SET,...
FSSECT,...
! Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
FE,...
! Activate the Fatigue Calculations
FTCALC,...
! Review the Results (List the output file)
FINISH
See the Command Reference for a discussion of the FTSIZE, FP, FL, FS, FSNODE, PPATH, FSSECT,
FE, and FTCALC commands.
Chapter 16: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections
Chapter16:Beam Analysis and Cross Sections

Beam elements are used to create a mathematical one-dimensional idealization of a 3-D structure. They
offer computationally efficient solutions when compared to solid and shell elements.
The discussions here apply only to BEAM188 and BEAM189. Compared to other beam elements, these
provide more robust nonlinear analysis capabilities, and significant improvements in cross-section data
definition, analysis, and visualization.
The following topics are available for beam analysis and cross sections:
Overview of Cross Sections
How to Create Cross Sections
Creating Cross Sections
Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections
Using Preintegrated Composite Beam Sections
Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries
Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method
16.1. Overview of Cross Sections
16.1.Overview of Cross Sections

A cross section defines the geometry of the beam in a plane perpendicular to the beam axial direction.
ANSYS supplies a library of eleven commonly-used beam cross section shapes, and permits user-defined
cross section shapes. When a cross section is defined, ANSYS builds a numeric model using a nine node
cell for determining the properties (Iyy, Izz, etc.) of the section and for the solution to the Poisson's
equation for torsional behavior.
Figure 16.1 shows the centroid and shear center of the cross section and the calculated section
properties:
Figure16.1Plot of a Z Cross Section
Cross sections and user section meshes may be saved and stored in cross section library files. You may
assign beam cross sections as attributes of a line using the LATT command. These section definitions
will be incorporated into the generated beam elements when the line is meshed with BEAM188or
BEAM189.
16.2.How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1. Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section subtype.
2. Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for
managing cross section libraries:
Table16.1ANSYS Cross Section Commands
Command
PRESOL
SECTYPE
SECDATA
SECOFFSET
SECCONTROLS
SECNUM
SECPLOT
SECWRITE
/SECLIB
SECREAD
SLIST
SDELETE
Purpose
Prints section results
Associates section Subtype with SECID
Defines section geometry data
Defines section offset for beam cross sections
Overrides program calculated properties.
Identifies the SECID to be assigned to an element
Plots geometry of a beam section to scale
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh or a custom cross
section
Sets default section library path for SECREAD
Reads a user defined section library, mesh, or custom cross section
Summarizes section properties
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the Command Reference.
16.2.1.Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID number. For example,
the following command assigns a section identification number (2) to a predefined cross section shape
(circular solid):
Command(s):
GUI:
SECTYPE, 2, BEAM, CSOLID

MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> CommonSectns
To define your own cross sections, use the subtype MESH. To define a cross section with integrated
properties such as Iyy and Izz, use the subtype ASEC.
16.2.2.Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute

Pointer
Use the SECDATA command to define the geometry of a cross section. Continuing with the example
SECTYPE command shown above, note that the CSOLID subtype has two dimensions: the radius and
the number of cells along its circumference. Thus, the SECDATA command shown below specifies 5 as
the radius of the circular solid beam, and 8 as the number of cells along its circumference. The
SECNUM command sets the element section attribute pointer to 2.

Command(s): SECDATA, 5, 8 and
SECNUM, 2
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> CommonSectns
GUI:
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Attributes> Default Attribs
16.2.2.1.Determining the Number of Cells to Define

In general, you do not need to set the number of cells when building a cross section. ANSYS will
calculate values for the cross section such as the area of the section and the moments of inertia about
the coordinate axes using default integration rules and will produce results that are numerically exact.
Since the torsion constant is derived from the mesh, the accuracy of the torsion constant is directly
proportional to the mesh size of the cross section. The default mesh used by ANSYS yields acceptable
engineering accuracy.
There are two ways to specify the mesh size for common sections:
invoking SECTYPE,,,,, REFINEKEY to set the level of mesh refinement for thin-walled sections
(CTUBE, CHAN, I, Z, L, T, HATS, and HREC)
specifying the number of divisions using SECDATA for solid sections (RECT, QUAD, and CSOLID)
The thin wall sections have a minimum of two integration points through thickness, so results produced
using thin wall sections should be acceptable for materially nonlinear analysis.
However, when doing a plasticity analysis, the cell defaults may need to be changed for the solid
sections. Here are examples of ANSYS-generated solid section cell meshes and the type of analysis you
may wish to use them with.
Figure16.2Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh
16.2.3.Meshing a Line Model with BEAM188 or BEAM189 Elements

Before you mesh a line with BEAM188 or BEAM189 elements, some of its attributes must be defined.
These attributes include:
The material set attribute pointer to be associated with the generated beam elements.
The beam element type to be used in meshing the line.
The orientation of the cross section with respect to the beam element axis. For detailed
information about orientation nodes and beams, see Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation
Nodes in the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
The cross section ID to be assigned to the generated beam elements.

Issue the LATT command to associate these attributes with the selected, unmeshed line:
Command(s):
GUI:
LATT, MAT , , TYPE , , KB, KE, SECNUM

MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked LinesSee the
LATT command description for the meaning of MAT and TYPE .
The following arguments are described here in terms of their applicability to beams.
KB
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model. All beam elements generated will have their
beam section oriented such that the beam z-axis will lie in the plane defined by two line end
keypoints and this keypoint number.
KE
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model (optional). This keypoint determines the beam
orientation at the end of the line as described above. If KE is given, KB determines the beam
orientation at the beginning of the line. This is useful for creating twisted beams.
SECNUM
Corresponds to the beam section defined by the SECTYPE command with the section ID number
as given by the SECNUM.
16.3.Creating Cross Sections

There are two main types of beam cross sections:
common sections
custom sections
Common sections are described by a standard geometry and a single material. Custom sections are
defined by an arbitrary geometry and may consist of several materials.
In addition, you can use defined sections to create tapered beams (for BEAM188 and BEAM189 only).
See Defining a Tapered Beam for more information.
16.3.1.Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections>
Beam> CommonSectns) are all associated with the BeamTool in the GUI. The appearance of the
BeamTool varies depending on the cross section subtype you select:
Figure16.3BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed
The top part of the BeamTool relates a section ID number to a subtype (and, optionally, a section
name) [SECTYPE]. The middle of the BeamTool defines the section offset information, if needed
[SECOFFSET]. The bottom contains the fields for section geometry information [SECDATA]. The
dimensions defined by the SECDATA command are determined by the subtype selected. For
documentation about a particular variant of the BeamTool, select the subtype that you want information
about, and then click on the Help button on the BeamTool. The subtype dimensions are also
documented in the SECDATA command description.
16.3.2.Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh

If you need to define a cross section that is not common, you must create a user mesh file. To create a
user mesh file, create a 2-D solid model and save it using the SECWRITE command (MainMenu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From Areas). This procedure is
outlined in greater detail below:
1. Create all areas (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas).
2. Overlap the areas (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans>
Overlap> Areas) or glue them (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate>
Booleans> Glue> Areas) where appropriate.
3. Save the model.
4. Set the number of line divisions for all lines (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size
Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> Picked Lines or use the MeshTool).
5. Select MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From
Areas. A picker appears. Pick the area(s) of the cells.
6. ANSYS creates cells on the areas. ANSYS may display bad shape messages during the mesh - these
messages can be ignored. However, you may see an "Unable to mesh area ...." message. If you
do, clear the elements from all areas (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas)
and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. Write the .SECT file out to a unique name in the Write Section Library File dialog box and click on
OK.
8. Read in the user mesh file (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
CustomSectns> Read Sect Mesh) to calculate the section properties. Material properties must
be defined to calculate the cross section shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and
the shear centers.
Note: Even if you have already set LESIZE, you will see the following message:
Line element sizes may need to be specified for desired cross-section
mesh. Please refer to the LESIZE command.
If you have already set the line element size, click on the Close button to
continue. If you have not already set it, issue LESIZE with the appropriate
information.
When creating cells on the area using the GUI, you do not need to define a plane
element type. On the other hand, a plane element type must be defined if the user
issues the SECWRITE command explicitly. MESH200 with KEYOPT(1) = 7 and
PLANE183 are the only valid plane element types.
16.3.3.Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and

Multiple Materials
When performing a plasticity analysis, you may need to refine the cross section mesh. A cross section
consisting of more than one material may be defined to represent layers, reinforcements or sensors.
When defining a multiple-material cross section, you will need to specify the material that each cross
section cell is made of. You can take a previously-created cross section and modify it.
To create a custom cross section with a refined mesh and/or multiple materials, perform the following
tasks:
1. Either read a common section (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
CustomSectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Common) from the ANSYS database or read a custom
section from a .SECT file. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom)
2. ANSYS displays a MESH200 plot in the Graphics Window.
3. Refine the section mesh. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Edit/Built-up> Refine Mesh)
4. Modify the cell materials. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Edit/Built-up> Modify Material) If you want to create a multiple-material section, define the
materials. This is necessary to calculate the shear correction factors and material-weighted
centroids.
5. Save the section to a .SECT file using SECWRITE (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections>
Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Save).
6. To calculate the section properties and use a custom section in the analysis, read in the user mesh
file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect Mesh).
Note: If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the
SECTYPE and SECREAD commands to recompute the cross section.
When a cross section has multiple materials, and /ESHAPE is used to produce
contour plots of stresses (and other quantities), the element averages the stresses
across material boundaries. To limit this behavior, use small cross section cells
around the material boundaries.
When using the SECWRITE command explicitly, a section with multiple materials
can be created by assigning material attributes to the areas. During meshing, the
elements inherit the material attribute from the area and this attribute is written to
the .SECT file.
A material number (MAT) specified for a custom section overrides any existing
material setting.
16.3.4.Defining Composite Cross Sections

A composite cross section is a cross section consisting of at least two materials and meshed with a userdefined mesh. When creating a composite section, define the materials before running the SECREAD
command. This is necessary to calculate the shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and
the shear centers.
Note: If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the
SECREAD command to recompute the cross section.
You can save composite cross sections as custom cross sections. For information on custom cross
sections, see Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections
16.3.5.Defining a Tapered Beam
For BEAM188 and BEAM189, you can define tapered beams using the TAPER option on the SECTYPE
command (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Taper Sections). The tapered section
varies linearly between two specified locations, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2). Thus, two SECDATA
commands are required to define the taper as shown below. At each of these end points, a valid beam
section ID must be input (station-1 and station-2 in the example below).
SECTYPE,SECID ,TAPER
SECDATA,station-1,x1,y1,z1
SECDATA,station-2,x2,y2,z2
The following is a typical command input stream used to create a tapered cross section:
sectype,1,beam,rect
secdata,.0001,0.5
sectype,2,beam,rect
secdata,3,0.5
sectype,3,taper
secdata,1,0.0,0.0
secdata,2,0.0,20.0
! define cross section at first end point

! define cross section at far end
! new Section ID for tapered beam analysis
! section 1 at location (0,0,0)
! section 2 at location (0,20,0)
Continuing with this example, you can then use 3 as the taper section ID when assigning mesh
attributes with the SECNUM or LATT command. The resulting beam cross section is (0.0001*0.5) at
end 1, and linearly tapers to (3*0.5) at end 2.
The following assumptions apply to tapered beams defined with this method:
The end sections must be defined prior to defining the taper.
Sections defined at the end points must be topologically identical.
A section cannot taper to a point (or zero area) at either end.
The arbitrary beam section type (ASEC on the SECTYPE command) is not supported for tapered
beams.
The program performs a number of checks (although not completely comprehensive) to ensure
topological equality. The following items are compared:
number of section nodes
number of section elements
section type
If both end stations refer to custom cross sections with multiple materials, you must ensure that
material IDs for the cells are the same for both ends.
At a Gauss point of integration, the BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements will find the closest point on the
line defined by station-1 and station-2. Using this information, a linear interpolation is performed for the
cross section mesh. Therefore, it is very important that the Gauss point be located within the end
points. ANSYS will produce error messages when this is not the case.
The tapered section treatment is significantly more expensive than a constant cross section (since
recomputation is necessary). If this is a concern, use KEYOPT(12) of the beam element to specify the
tapered section treatment.
KEYOPT(12) = 0 - Linear tapered section analysis (more accurate, but expensive)
KEYOPT(12) = 1 - Average cross section analysis (an approximation of the order of the mesh size,
but faster)
16.4.Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

The nonlinear general beam section (SECTYPE,,GENB) is an abstract cross section type that allows you
to define axial, flexural, torsional, and transverse shear behavior as a function of axial strain, bending
curvature, twist, and transverse shear strains.
The generalized section form of input does not require cross section geometry data or material data
independently. For purposes of evaluating mass matrices, ANSYS assumes a unit area of cross section.
This form of data is useful for including an experimentally measured nonlinear response of a beam-like
structural component, or for including complex behavior such as cross section distortion (not possible
when using normal beam sections).
Nonlinear general beam sections also allow a nonlinear relationship of transverse shear forces to the
corresponding transverse shear strains. Often, the input of generalized beam sections may be a result of
a prior detailed slice analysis (for example, a segment of pipe analyzed using generalized plane strain
elements).
The behavior of beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of
the form:
where:
= Axial force
M1 = Bending moment in plane XZ
N
M2
= Bending moment in plane XY
= Torque
S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ
S2
= Transverse shear force in plane XY
= Axial strain
1 = Curvature in plane XZ
2 = Curvature in plane XY
= Twist of the cross section
1 = Transverse shear strain in plane XZ
2 = Transverse shear strain in plane XY
AE (, T)
= Axial stiffness as a function of axial strain and temperature

I1 E ( 1 ,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XZ
I2 E ( 2 ,T)
= Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XY
JG (,T)
= Torsional rigidity, as a function of torsion and temperature

A1 ( 1 ,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XZ
G
A2 G ( 2 ,T)
T
= Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XY
is the current temperature
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRNGBS.html[28/04/2013 08:21:11 p.m.]
Thermal expansion coefficients and mass density for the section as a function of temperature complete
the definition of a generalized cross section.
16.4.1.Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section

Each of the following commands specifies a particular component quantity necessary for defining a
nonlinear general beam section:
Table16.2ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data
Command
Quantity Defined and Data Specified
BSAX [1]
Axial strain and force
BSM1 [1]
, N, T
Bending curvature and moment in plane XZ
BSM2 [1]
1 , M 1 , T
Bending curvature and moment in plane XY
BSTQ [1]
2 , M 2 , T
Cross section twist and torque
BSS1 [1]
, , T
Transverse shear strain and force in plane XZ
BSS2 [1]
1 , S 1 , T
Transverse shear strain and force in plane XY
BSMD [2]
2 , S 2 , T
Mass density of the beam section (assuming a unit area)
DENS , T
BSTE [2]
Thermal expansion coefficient

ALPHA , T
1. Repeatable for six independent temperatures, and up to 20 strain values.

2. Repeatable for six different temperatures.
Temperature dependencies ( T).You can define each of the generalized section data components as
temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures ( T) by reissuing any command
as necessary. If you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data
supersedes the previous value.
16.4.1.1.Strain Dependencies
Each component of a nonlinear beam section definition (axial, bending, torque, and transverse shear)
can be a nonlinear function of the corresponding strain. The terms generalized stress and generalized
strain describe the data defined via the BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, and BSS2 commands.
The generalized stress to generalized strain relationship can be nonlinear. The nonlinear response can
be either purely elastic--that is, no permanent deformation, and fully recoverable deformation even
though the behavior is nonlinear--or elasto-plastic. The option of a purely elastic or elasto-plastic
response (SECTYPE) applies to all components of a beam section definition.
The following input illustrates a typical (temperature-independent) nonlinear axial behavior:

sectype,1,genb,plastic
bsax ,0.0008,200
bsax ,0.001 ,240
bsax ,0.0014,300
!
!
!
!
Elasto-plastic response
Axial strain 0.0008, Force of 200
Axial strain 0.001 , Force of 240
Axial Strain 0.0014, Force of 300
ANSYS conventions for defining a uniaxial elasto-plastic response apply. The range of strain values must
cover the anticipated maximum deformation of the structure. For all nonlinear beam section
specifications, the stiffness disappears if the structural response is beyond the maximum strain value of
the section data. You can define a maximum of 20 generalized stress-strain points at each temperature
value, and the successive slopes must be smaller than the first slope. Isotropic hardening is assumed for
the material response.
For a plastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,PLASTIC), you must define all section
components with two or more stress-strain points. However, you can define a linear behavior for any
section component by specifying a larger maximum strain value. Following is an example where axial
behavior is nonlinear, but bending response is linear:
sectype,1,genb,plastic
bsax,0.0008,200
bsax,0.001 ,240
bsax,0.0014,300
! bending
bsm1,0.1,10000
bsm1,1,100000
! Elasto-plastic response
For an elastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,ELASTIC), a single stress-strain point is
adequate for defining linear behavior.
16.4.2.Considerations for Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

You can define nonlinear general beam sections only when using element BEAM188 or BEAM189. When
using nonlinear beam section data, the following conditions apply:
The section data defined by each command listed in Table16.2:ANSYS Commands for Specifying
Nonlinear General Beam Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the
SECTYPE command.
Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE
quantities.
Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available.
Only the temperature of the beam axis is relevant.
Beam section rotary inertia is computed internally based on axial and bending stiffnesses provided.
If beam section rotary inertia of a more general form is available, use MASS21 elements (rather
than the BSMD command) to define beam section mass and rotary inertia at the beam nodes.
16.5.Using Preintegrated Composite Beam Sections

The behavior of beam elements is governed by the beam-section stiffness matrix and the section mass
matrix. A generalized nonlinear beam section (SECTYPE,,GENB) allows only diagonal terms in the
cross-section stiffness matrix defining the relationship between generalized stress and generalized
strains; it is therefore suitable only for beams with homogeneous and isotropic materials where the
coupling between different generalized strains is small. For composite beams made of dissimilar
constituent materials, or homogenous beams with orthotropic material and material orientation not
parallel to the beam axis, the coupling between different generalized strains can be significant and
generally leads to full cross-section stiffness matrix.
The preintegrated composite beam section (SECTYPE,,COMB,MATRIX) is an abstract cross section type
that allows you to define a fully populated but symmetrical cross-section stiffness and mass matrix
directly. You can use preintegrated composite beam sections when using BEAM188 or BEAM189
elements, provided that linear elastic material behavior is acceptable.
The full cross-section stiffness relates the generalized-stress to generalized-strain in the following form:
where
N = Axial force
M 1 = Bending moment in plane XZ
M 2 = Bending moment in plane XY
= Torque
S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ
S2 = Transverse shear force in plane XY
B m = Warping bi-moment
= Axial strain
1 = Curvature in plane XZ
2 = Curvature in plane XY
= Twist of the cross section
1 = Transverse shear strain in plane XZ
2 = Transverse shear strain in plane XY
B k = Warping bi-curvature
Sij(T) (where i = 1,7 and j = i,7) = Stiffness constants in the upper triangle of the cross-section
stiffness matrix as a function of temperature
T = the current temperature
With a unit beam length, the section mass matrix relates the resultant forces and torques to
accelerations and angular accelerations as follows (applicable to the local element coordinate system):
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_PREBEAMSECT_5.html[28/04/2013 08:21:30 p.m.]
where
Nx = Axial resultant force
Ny = Resultant force in beam Y coordinate direction
Nz = Resultant force in beam Z coordinate direction
M x = Torque about the beam axes
M y = Torque about the beam Y coordinate direction
M z = Torque about the beam Z coordinate direction
Ax = Axial acceleration
Ay = Acceleration in beam Y coordinate direction
Az = Acceleration in beam Z coordinate direction
Rx = Angular acceleration about beam axes
Ry = Angular acceleration about beam Y coordinate direction
Rz = Angular acceleration about beam Z coordinate direction Cij(T) (where i=1,7 and j = i,7) = mass or
moment of inertia terms in the upper triangle of the cross-section mass matrix as a function of
temperature
T = Current temperature
16.5.1.Defining a Composite Beam Section

preintegrated composite beam section:
Table16.3ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Composite Beam Section Data
Command
CBMX [1]
CBMD [1]
CBTMP [1]

Cross-section stiffness matrix. Upper triangle of 6 x 6 or 7 x 7 matrix. Row
and column 7 are used only when KEYOPT(1) = 1.
Cross-section mass matrix. Upper triangle of 6 x 6 matrix.
Temperature specification for a subsequent matrix.

T
CBTE [1]
Thermal expansion coefficient

ALPHA
1. Repeatable for six independent temperatures.

Temperature dependencies (T).You can define each of the preintegrated composite beam section
data components as temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by
reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the
most recent data supersedes the previous value.
16.5.1.1.Matrix Input
Each component (axial, bending, torque, transverse shear, and warping) of a preintegrated beam
section definition is input directly as a 7 x 7 matrix. The terms of the matrix are defined via the CBMX
command.
The following input example uses the CBMX command to define a (temperature-independent)
parameterized cross-section stiffness matrix for a circular solid cross section with unit radius:
Exx = 30e6
Nuxy = 0.3
Gxy = 0.5*Exx / (1+Nuxy)
Radius = 1
Pi = 3.14
Xarea = Pi * Radius**2
Izz = Pi/4 * Radius**4
Iyy = Pi/4 * Radius**4
J = Izz + Iyy
sectype,1,comb,matrix
cbmx,1, Exx*Xarea
cbmx,2, Exx*Iyy
cbmx,3, Exx*Izz
cbmx,4, Gxy*J
cbmx,5, Gxy*Xarea
cbmx,6, Gxy*Xarea
cbmx,7, 0
16.5.2.Considerations for Using Composite Beam Sections

You can define preintegrated composite beam sections when using element BEAM188 or BEAM189
elements. The following conditions apply:
Preintegrated Composite Beam Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined
(SECTYPE).
Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE
quantities.
The preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section stiffness at analysis
time.
Only the temperature of the beam axis is relevant.
16.5.3.Example: Composite Beam Section Input

The following input example compares the results of a preintegrated composite beam section to an
offset channel section:
/prep7
/com, Approximate material properties of steel in U.S. customary units
Exx = 30e6
nuxy = 0.3
gxy = 0.5*Exx / (1+nuxy)
/com, Parameterize length and number of elements to more easily study
/com, the effects of discretization and length-to-thickness ratio
leng = 25
nelem = 1
mp,ex,1,Exx
mp,prxy,1,nuxy
mp,gxy,1,gxy
et,1,188,1,,3
! Include warping and use the cubic shape function
offy = -8
offz = -10
/com,
/com, Define a beam channel section. Unequal lengths and thicknesses are
/com, used to demonstrate an unsymmetric section with noncoincident
/com, centroid and shear center.
/com,
/com, An arbitrary nodal offset is used to demonstrate coupling between
/com, axial and bending stiffness, as well as coupling between shear
/com, and torsional stiffness.
/com,
sectype,1,beam,chan
secdata,1,1.5,2, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2
secoffset,user,offy,offz
/com, For the channel section, generate elements along the x-axis
secnum,1
n,1
*do,i,1,nelem
loc = i*leng/nelem
n,i+1,loc
e,i,i+1
*enddo
/com,
/com, Retrieve the essential calculated and geometric properties from
/com, the channel section
/com,
*get,xarea,secp,1,prop,area
*get,iyy,secp,1,prop,iyy
*get,izz,secp,1,prop,izz
*get,iyz,secp,1,prop,iyz
*get,J,secp,1,prop,tors
*get,iw,secp,1,prop,warp
*get,scyy,secp,1,prop,scyy
*get,sczz,secp,1,prop,sczz
*get,cgy,secp,1,prop,cgy
*get,cgz,secp,1,prop,cgz
*get,offy,secp,1,prop,offy
*get,offz,secp,1,prop,offz
*get,shcy,secp,1,prop,shcy
*get,shcz,secp,1,prop,shcz
yc =
zc =
ys =
zs =
yssq
zssq
/com,
/com,
k44 =
k44 =
k44 =
offy - cgy
offz - cgz
offy - shcy
offz - shcz
= ys*ys
= zs*zs
! Distance between nodal offset and centroid

! Distance between nodal offset and shear center
Adjust the preintegrated torsional stiffness based on nodal offset

Gxy*J
k44 + ys*ys*Gxy*xarea*sczz
k44 + zs*zs*Gxy*xarea*scyy
/com,
/com, Use the material and channel section properties to define the 7x7
/com, upper triangle of the preintegrated section stiffness matrix
/com,
sectype,2,comb,matrix
cbmx,1, Exx*xarea, -zc*Exx*xarea, yc*Exx*xarea
cbmx,2, Exx*iyy+zc*zc*Exx*xarea, -Exx*Iyz-yc*zc*Exx*xarea
cbmx,3, Exx*izz+yc*yc*Exx*xarea
cbmx,4, k44, -ys*Gxy*xarea*sczz, zs*Gxy*xarea*scyy
cbmx,5, Gxy*xarea*sczz
cbmx,6, Gxy*xarea*scyy
cbmx,7, Exx*iw
slist
/com,
/com, For the preintegrated section, generate elements parallel to
/com, the x-axis and offset from the beam with channel section
secn,2
n,1001,,10
*do,i,1,nelem
loc = i*leng/nelem
n,i+1001,loc,10
e,i+1000,i+1001
*enddo
/com,
/com, Load the beams as cantilevers. Fix one end and apply a
/com, transverse load in the z-direction at the free end
d,1,all
f,nelem+1,fz,-100
d,1001,all
f,nelem+1001,fz,-100
fini
/sol
solve
finish
/post1
/com,
/com, COMPARE RESULTS:
/com,
prnsol,u
prnsol,rot
prnsol,warp
finish
All displacments, including warping, compare

well between beam and preintegrated sections
/exit,nosave
16.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries
16.6.Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries

Cross section data for common sections such as CHAN and RECT can be stored in cross section libraries.
To create standard cross sections for later use, create one or more cross sections, edit the Jobname.LOG
file, and copy the appropriate SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands into a separate file
with a SECT extension. These predefined cross sections can later be read into a model using the
/SECLIB command (MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Section Library> Import Library).
16.7.Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

You can use BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements to model not only straightforward beam bending and
shear response but also to model beam response that involves lateral-torsional buckling. To create this
type of model, you will need to create an adequately fine mesh of beam elements. You typically need to
model a single beam member using a series of short beam elements, as shown in Figure 16.4.
Figure16.4Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam
Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam, Modeled With 60 BEAM188 Elements

(Displayed Using /ESHAPE)
Buckling Analysis in the Structural Analysis Guide documents buckling analysis in detail. This sample
problem shows what happens when a cantilever beam is subjected to a concentrated end load, which
causes lateral-torsional buckling.
A straight, slender cantilever beam has one fixed end and one free end. A load is applied to the free
end. The model is analyzed using eigenvalue buckling calculations, followed by a nonlinear load versus
deflection study. The objective is to determine the critical value of the end load (indicated by P in Figure
16.5) at which the beam undergoes a bifurcation indicated by a large displacement in the lateral
direction.
Young's modulus = 1.0 X 10 4 psi
Poisson's ratio = 0.0

L = 100 in
H = 5 in
B = .2 in
P = 1 lb.
Figure16.5Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated
16.7.4.Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse

Eigenvalue buckling calculation is a linearized calculation, and is generally valid only for elastic
structures. The yielding of materials occurs usually at loads lesser than that predicted by eigenvalue
buckling analysis. This type of analysis tends to need less computation time than a full nonlinear
buckling analysis.
You can also perform a nonlinear load versus deflection study, which employs an arc length solution
strategy to identify critical loads. While the approach is more general, a collapse analysis may be
computationally intensive.
The nonlinear collapse analysis must be performed on a structure with imperfections built in to the
model, since a perfect model will not show signs of buckling. You can add imperfections by using
eigenvectors that result from an eigenvalue buckling analysis. The eigenvector determined is the closest
estimate of the actual mode of buckling. The imperfections added should be small when compared to a
typical thickness of the beam being analyzed. The imperfections remove the sharp discontinuity in the
load-deflection response. It is customary to use one to ten percent of the beam/shell thickness as the
maximum imperfection introduced. The UPGEOM command adds displacements from a previous
analysis and updates the geometry to the deformed configuration.
16.7.5.Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry

1. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Change Title.
2. Enter the text "Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis" and click on OK.
3. Start the model creation preprocessor and define the keypoints for the beam. Choose menu path
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS, and enter
these keypoint numbers and the coordinates in the dialog box as indicated:
Keypoint
Number
X Location
Y Location
Z Location
Click This Button to

Accept Values
1
2
3
0
100.0
50
0
0
5
0
0
0
Apply
Apply
OK
4. Create a straight line through keypoints 1 and 2. Choose menu path MainMenu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight Line
picker appears. Select keypoints 1 and 2 in the Graphics window and click on OK in the Create
Straight Line picker.
5. Save the model. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Save As. Enter buckle.db in the Save
Database to box and click on OK.
16.7.6.Define Element Type and Cross Section Information

1. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preferences and select the "Structural" check box. Click on OK
to continue.
3. Click on Add ... The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
4. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
5. In the scroll box on the right, click on "3D finite strain, 3 node 189" to select BEAM189.
6. Click on OK, and then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
7. Define a rectangular cross section for the beam. Choose menu path MainMenu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> CommonSectns. The BeamTool is displayed. ANSYS sets
the section ID to 1, and the subtype to RECT (signified by a rectangle on the subtype button) by
default. Since you will be creating a rectangular cross section, there is no need to change the
subtype.
8. In the lower half of the BeamTool, you will see a diagram of the cross section shape with
dimension variables labeled. Enter the width of the cross section, 0.2, in the box labeled B. Enter
the height of the cross section, 5.0, in the box labeled H. Click on Apply to set the cross section
dimensions.
9. Use the BeamTool to display information about the cross section. Click on the Preview button on
the BeamTool. A diagram and data summary of the cross section appear in the Graphics window.
You can also preview the mesh of the cross section by selecting the Meshview button. Click on
the Close button in the BeamTool to continue.
16.7.7.Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node

2. In the Material Models Available window on the right, double-click on the following: Structural,
3. Enter 1E4 for EX (Young's modulus).

4. Enter 0.0 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the
Material Models Defined window on the left.
5. Choose menu path Material> Exit to close the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
6. Replot the line by choosing menu path UtilityMenu> Plot> Lines.
7. Select the line and define the orientation node of the line as an attribute. Choose menu path
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines. The Line Attributes
picker appears. Select the line in the Graphics window and click on Apply in the Line Attributes
picker.
8. The Line Attributes dialog box appears. ANSYS includes the material attribute pointer to the
material set 1, the element type attribute pointer to the local element type 1, and the section
attribute pointer to the section ID 1 by default. Click on the radio button beside the Pick
Orientation Keypoint(s) label to change it to Yes and click on OK.
9. The Line Attributes picker reappears. Type 3 in the picker, press the Enter key, and click on OK.
10. Save the model. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not
already selected, select it. Select OK, and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the
existing file, click on OK.
16.7.8.Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation

1. Define the mesh size and number of divisions. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor>
Meshing> Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> All Lines. Enter 10 in the No. of Element
Divisions box and click on OK.
2. Mesh the line. Choose menu path MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. Click on
MESH on the MeshTool and the Mesh Lines picker appears. Pick the line in the Graphics window,
and then click on OK in the Mesh Lines picker. Click on Close in the MeshTool to close it.
3. Rotate the meshed line. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan, Zoom, Rotate. The
Pan, Zoom, Rotate tool appears. Select ISO and click on Close. The beam is rotated in the
Graphics window.
4. Verify the beam orientation. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and
Shape. Select the radio button next to the /ESHAPE label to turn /ESHAPE on and click on OK.
16.7.9.Define the Boundary Conditions

1. Define a boundary condition to the fixed end. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution>
Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Keypoints. The Apply U,ROT on KPs
picker appears.
2. Define keypoint 1 as the fixed end. In the picker, type 1, press the Enter key, then click on OK.
The Apply U,ROT on KPs dialog box appears.
3. Click on "All DOF" to select it, and click on OK. The boundary condition information appears in the
ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 1.
4. Apply a force to the free end. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On Keypoints. The Apply F/M on KPs picker appears.
5. Identify keypoint 2 as the free end. Type 2 in the picker, press the Enter key, and then click on
OK. The Apply F/M on KPs dialog box appears.
6. In the drop down list for Direction of force/mom, select FY.

7. Enter 1 for the Force/moment value in the Apply F/M on KPs dialog box, and click on OK. The
force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 2.
8. Save the model. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not
already selected, select it. Click on OK and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the
existing file, click on OK again.
16.7.10.Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

1. Set analysis options. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2. Use the sparse solver for the solution. In the Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box, make sure
that Sparse solver is selected in the drop down box beside the Equation solver label.
3. Include prestress effect, which will be stored for later use in the eigenvalue buckling calculation. In
the drop down list labeled Stress stiffness or prestress, select "Prestress ON." Click on OK to close
the Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box.
4. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary
information in the /STATUS command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK
in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution.
5. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
8. Select the "Eigen Buckling" option, then click on OK.
9. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The
Eigenvalue Buckling Options dialog box appears. Select the Block Lanczos option. Enter 4 in the
No. of modes to extract box, then click on OK.
10. Set the element calculation key for the MXPAND command. Choose menu path MainMenu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes.
11. In the Expand Modes dialog box, enter 4 in the No. of modes to expand box, change the No to Yes
beside the Calculate elem results label, and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary
information in the /STATUS command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK
in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution.
13. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
14. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Be sure the radio
button beside the label Display of element shapes ... (/ESHAPE) is set to On and click on OK.
15. Display the results summary. Choose menu path MainMenu> GeneralPostproc> Results
Summary. After you have reviewed the results, click on Close to close the window.
16. Choose menu path MainMenu> GeneralPostproc> Read Results> First Set.
17. Plot the first mode shape of the beam. Choose menu path MainMenu> GeneralPostproc>
Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Select Def +
undef edge and click on OK.
16.7.11.Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

1. Introduce model imperfections calculated by the previous analysis. Choose menu path
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Update Geom. In the Update nodes using results
file displacements dialog box, enter 0.002 in the Scaling factor box, 1 in the Load step box, 1 in the
Substep box, and file.rst in the Selection box. Click on OK.
3. Select the "Static" option, then click on OK.
4. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File and be sure the drop down lists display All Items and All entities respectively. Choose the
Every substep for the File write frequency radio button and click on OK.
5. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Select the
radio button beside Large deform effects, then click on OK.
6. Set the arc-length method, and set parameters for the termination of the solution. Choose menu
path MainMenu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Arc-Length Opts. Select the
Arc-length method on/off radio button and set it to On. Choose the pull down menu next to the
Lab label and select Displacement lim. Enter 1.0 in the Max desired U box. Enter 2 in the Node
number for VAL box. Choose the pull down menu next to the Degree of freedom label and select
UZ. Click on OK.
7. Define the number of substeps to be run during this load step. Choose menu path MainMenu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps. Enter 10000 in the
Number of substeps box and click on OK.
8. Solve the current model. Choose menu path MainMenu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.
Review the summary information in the /STATUS command window, then select Close from its
menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution. A Nonlinear
Solution window with a Stop button appears. A convergence graph is built, and can take several
minutes to complete.
9. You may receive a warning message. You should review the information in the message but you
do not need to close it. Continue waiting for the solution to complete. When the Solution is Done!
window appears, click on Close to close it.
16.7.12.Plot and Review the Results

1. Replot the beam. Choose menu path UtilityMenu> Plot> Elements.
2. Define the load point deflection to be read from the results file. Choose menu path MainMenu>
TimeHist PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box
appears, select Add.
3. When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, be sure the Nodal DOF result option is
selected. Click on OK.
4. The Define Nodal Data picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick node 2 (the end node on the
right side of the beam) and click on OK.
5. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable and Node number
are both set to 2. Enter TIPLATDI in the User-specified label box. Select Translation UZ from the
menu and click on OK.
6. Define the total reaction force to be read from the results file. Choose Add from the Defined TimeHistory Variables dialog box.
7. When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, choose the Reaction forces radio button
and then click on OK.
8. The Define Reaction Force picker appears. Pick the end node on the left side of the beam and click
on OK.
9. The Define Reaction Force Variable dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is set
to 3 and Node number is set to 1. Select Struct Force FY from the menu and click on OK. Click on
Close to close the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
10. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Multiply. In the
Multiply Time-History Variables dialog box, enter 4 in the Reference number for result box, -1.0 in
the 1st Factor box, and 3 in the 1st Variable box. Click on OK.
11. Display the X variable. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph.
Choose the single variable button, enter 2 in the Single variable no. box, and click on OK.
12. Plot the load versus deflection curve to confirm the critical load calculated by the eigenvalue
method. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist PostPro> Graph Variables. Enter 4 in the
1st variable to graph box. Click on OK.
13. List the variables versus time. Choose menu path MainMenu> TimeHist PostPro> List
Variables. Enter 2 in the 1st variable to list box and 4 in the 2nd variable box and click on OK.
14. Check the values in the PRVAR Command window to see how they compare against the values
generated by the eigenvalue buckling analysis. Expected results are: Critical buckling load, Pcr =
0.01892. Close the PRVAR Command window.
16.7.13.Plot and Review the Section Results

1. Replot the beam. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2. Define the compression stress at the base to be read from the results file. Choose menu path
Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History Variables
dialog box appears, select Add.
3. When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, be sure the by seq no. option is
selected. Click on OK.
4. The Define Element Results picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick element 1 (the end
element on the left side of the beam) and click on OK.
5. The Define Element Results by Seq No. dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is
set to 5 and Element number is set to 1. Enter BASESX in the User-specified label box. Select LS
from the menu.
6. To retrieve the X component of Stress from the bottom middle of the section (this is node 3, or the
2nd node where stress is stored), type 4 for the Comp Sequence number and click on OK.
7. Plot variable versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Graph
Variables. Enter 5 in the 1st variable to graph box. Click on OK.
8. List the variable versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> List
Variables. Enter 5 in the 1st variable to list box and click on OK.
9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
11. Choose a save option and click on OK.

16.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method
16.8.Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method

Here is the input file for the problem described in the previous section:
/GRAPHICS,POWER
/GST,ON
/SHOW,BUCKLE,GRPH
/PREP7
K,1,0,0,0
K,2,100.0,0,0
K,3,50,5,0
LSTR,1,2
ET,1,BEAM189
SECTYPE,1, BEAM, RECT
SECDATA, 0.2, 5.0
SLIST, 1, 1
MP,EX,1,1E4
MP,NUXY,1,0.0
LSEL,S, , , 1, 1, 1
LATT,1, ,1,0, 3, ,1
LESIZE, all, , ,10
SECNUM,1
LMESH,all
/VIEW,,1,1,1
/ESHAPE,1
EPLOT
DK,1, , , ,0,ALL
FK,2,FY,1.0
FINISH
/SOLU
PSTRES,ON
EQSLV,SPARSE
! EQSLV,SPARSE is the default for static and full transient
SOLVE
FINISH
/SOLU
ANTYPE,BUCKLE
BUCOPT,LANB,4
MXPAND,4,,,YES
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
/ESHAPE,1
/VIEW, 1 ,1,1,1
/ANG, 1
SET,LIST
SET,1,1
PLDISP,2
FINISH
/PREP7
UPGEOM,0.002,1,1,file,rst
/SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
NLGEOM,ON
ARCLEN,ON,25,0.0001
ARCTRM,U,1.0,2,UZ
NSUBST,10000
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,2,2,U,Z,TIPLATDI
RFORCE,3,1,F,Y
PROD,4,3, , , , , ,-1.0,1,1
XVAR,2
PLVAR,4
PRVAR,2,4
ESOL,5,1, ,LS,4
PLVAR,5
PRVAR,5
FINISH

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the Verification Manual, describe additional beam analyses.
The Verification Manual contains one beam test case:
VM222 - Warped Cantilever Beam
Chapter 17: Shell Analysis and Cross Sections
Chapter17:Shell Analysis and Cross Sections

Shell elements are used to create a mathematical 2-D idealization of a 3-D structure. They offer
computationally efficient solutions for modelling shell structures when compared to solid elements.
The discussion in this chapter applies to 3-D finite-strain shell elements such as SHELL181 and
SHELL281. Compared to other ANSYS shells, these shell elements provide more robust nonlinear
analysis capabilities, and significant improvements in cross-section data definition, analysis, and
visualization.
The method for defining shell sections described here can also be used to define the cross-sectional
properties of the layered thermal shell elements SHELL131 and SHELL132. However, information
presented here concerning integration points ( NUMPT on the SECDATA command) and section properties
(SECCONTROLS command) does not apply to SHELL131 and SHELL132.
The following topics are available for shell analysis and cross sections:
Understanding Cross Sections
How to Create Cross Sections
Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRSHELL.html[28/04/2013 08:23:30 p.m.]
17.1. Understanding Cross Sections
17.1.Understanding Cross Sections

A cross section defines the geometry of the shell in a plane parallel to the shell x-y plane. Through the
section family of commands, you can describe the z direction of the element by defining consecutive
layers. Each layer may vary in thickness, material type, orientation (from element x-axis), and number
of integration points.
Alternatively, you can define homogenous shell section behavior directly via preintegrated shell sections,
a method commonly used in analyses involving laminated composite structures. With preintegrated shell
sections, you can directly specify the membrane, bending, and coupling properties. The preintegrated
method also allows analysis of complex geometry (with repeated patterns such as corrugated sheets)
using equivalent shell section properties. For more information, see Using Preintegrated General Shell
Sections.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRSHELL_2.html[28/04/2013 08:23:41 p.m.]
17.2.How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1. Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section.
2. Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing
cross-section libraries:
Table17.1ANSYS Cross-Section Commands
Command
SECTYPE
SECDATA
SECCONTROLS
SECFUNCTION
SECNUM
SECOFFSET
SECPLOT
SLIST
SDELETE
Purpose
Associates section with SECID (section number)
Defines section geometry data
Overrides program calculated properties.
Specifies shell section thickness as a tabular function.
Identifies the SECID (section number) to be assigned to an element
Defines section offset for shell cross sections
Plots geometry of a shell section to scale
Summarizes section properties
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross-section commands, see the Command Reference.
Figure 17.1 shows the layer stacking of a shell section. The layer order, along with material and orientation of
each layer, is represented here:
Figure17.1Plot of a Shell Section
17.2.1.Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID number. For example, the
following command assigns a section identification number (2) to a shell section:
Command(s):
GUI:
SECTYPE, 2, SHELL
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
17.2.2.Defining Layer Data

Use the SECDATA command to define the layers of a shell section. Each consecutive SECDATA command
defines the next layer's thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points. (The number of
integration points input on SECDATA is not used by thermal shell elements.) The layer orientation angle is the
angle between the layer coordinate system and the x-axis of the element coordinate system.
You may designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located thru the thickness of each layer.
When only 1, the point is always located midway between the top and bottom surfaces. If 3 or more points, 2
points are located on the top and bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining points are distributed equal
distance between the 2 points. An exception occurs when designating 5 points, where the quarter point
locations are moved 5 percent toward their nearest layer surface to agree with the locations selected with real
constant input. The default for each layer is 3.
If a shell section has only one layer, and the number of section integration points is equal to one, then the
shell does not have any bending stiffness. This may result in solver difficulties, and may affect convergence
adversely.
Command(s): SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3
SECDATA, 0.5, 2, -45, 3
SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3
GUI:
17.2.3.Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties

Use the SECCONTROLS command to override the program calculated section properties. By default, the
program calculates shear correction factors and mass for each element based on the input section geometry
and material properties. Any values input on the SECCONTROLS command will replace the defaults.
(SECCONTROLS does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
Command(s):
GUI:
SECCONTROLS, 0.8, 0.0, 0.8, 1.0

17.2.4.Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells)

Use the SECFUNCTION command to associate a tabular thickness variation with the section. A table that
describes thickness with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system may be associated with a shell
section. This thickness is interpreted as the total thickness of a shell. The total thickness of a layered shell, and
all layer thickness values, will be scaled according to the tabular function.
Command(s):
GUI:
SECFUNCTION, %table_name%
17.2.5.Setting the Section Attribute Pointer

Use the SECNUM command to associate an element with a particular section. Any element created after the
SECNUM command will have this section identification number (2) as its section attribute.
Command(s):
GUI:
SECNUM, 2
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Define> Default Attribs
17.2.6.Associating an Area with a Section

Use the AATT command to associate an area with a shell section type. When the area is meshed, the new
elements are associated with the section specified on the AATT command. The section specified by the
SECNUM command is ignored.
Command(s):
GUI:
AATT, , , , , 2
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> All Areas
MainMenu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Areas
17.2.7.Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, SECOFFSET, SECFUNCTION, and SECCONTROLS commands (MainMenu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit) are all associated with the ShellTool in the GUI.
Figure17.2Shell Tool With Layup Page Displayed
The top part of the Layup page of the ShellTool relates a section ID number to a Shell section type (and,
optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle part of the page of the ShellTool defines each layer in the
positive Z direction of the element [SECDATA]. Note that the order of the rows in the spreadsheet ascends up
the page, resembling that stacking of the layers. (Integration point data for each layer is ignored by thermal
shell elements.) The bottom contains the fields for section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. You can
define tapered shells by specifying a section function relating thickness to global coordinates
[SECFUNCTION].
Figure17.3Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed
The transverse shear stiffness, hourglass coefficients and drill stiffness of the sections are calculated from the
section geometry and material properties. The default added mass per unit area of the section is always zero.
On the Section Controls page, you can override the program calculated quantities [SECCONTROLS]. (The
Section Controls page does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
Figure17.4Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed
On the Summary page, you can review the section properties.
17.2.8.Managing Cross-Section Libraries

Cross-section data for shell sections can be stored in cross-section libraries. To create standard cross sections
for later use, create one or more cross sections, edit the Jobname.LOG file, and copy the appropriate
SECCONTROLS, SECDATA, SECFUNCTION, SECOFFSET, and SECTYPE commands into a separate file
with a SECT extension.
17.3.Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections

You can use preintegrated general shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS) when using the SHELL181 or
SHELL281 element, provided that linear elastic material behavior is acceptable. Compared to standard
shell usage with independent material and section definitions, preintegration requires fewer system
resources because numerical integration through the thickness of the shell is not required.
The behavior of shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain relationship of
the form:
where:
{N} = {N11 , N22 , N12 } are membrane stress resultants per unit length
{M} ={ M11 , M22 , M12 } are bending stress resultants per unit length
{} = {11 , 22 , 12 } are membrane strains
{} = {11 ,22 ,12 } are curvatures
{S} = {S1 , S2 } are transverse shear forces per unit length
{}={1 ,2 } are transverse shear strains
[ A], [ B], [ D], and [ E] are the section-stiffness matrices for membrane, coupling, bending, and shear
behavior, respectively
{MT} are stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
{BT} are bending-related stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained
model
TI
is the stress-free initial temperature

T is the current temperature
(Subscripts 1 and 2 denote shell surface coordinates as employed by the shell element.)
The preintegrated form of input allows you to import homogenous section-stiffness constants evaluated
in other analyses or by third-party, special-purpose software tools. For example, defining preintegrated
section stiffnesses [ A], [ B], and [ D] is common in analyses of layered composites, corrugated shells, or
other complex section construction.
17.3.1.Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section

preintegrated shell section:
Table17.2ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data
Command
SSPA

Membrane stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [ A]
A11 , A21 , A31 ,A22 ,A32 ,A33 , T
SSPB [1]
Coupling stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [ B]

B11 , B21 , B31 ,B22 ,B32 ,B33 , T
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_PRESHELL_5.html[28/04/2013 08:24:08 p.m.]
SSPD [1]
Bending stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [ D]

D11 , D21 , D31 ,D22 ,D32 ,D33 , T
SSPE [1]
Transverse shear stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [ E]

E11 , E21 , E22 , T
SSMT
Membrane thermal effects -- {MT}

MT 11 , MT 22 , MT 12 , T
SSBT [1]
Bending thermal effects -- {BT}

BT 11 , BT 22 , BT 12 , T
SSPM
Mass density of the shell section (assuming a unit thickness)

DENS , T
1. If you are using the SHELL181 or SHELL281 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not
necessary to issue the SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, and SSBT commands. In this case, the only relevant
quantities are membrane stiffness (SSPA), membrane thermal effects (SSMT), and density
(SSPM).
Temperature dependencies ( T).You can define each of the preintegrated shell section data as
temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures ( T) by reissuing any command
as necessary. If you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data
supersedes the previous value.
17.3.2.Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections

You can define preintegrated shell sections only when using the SHELL181 or SHELL281 element. When
using preintegrated shell section data, the following conditions apply:
Preintegrated Shell Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the
SECTYPE command.
You cannot use the shell element with heat-transfer shells.
Shell stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE
quantities.
The thickness of the shell is assumed to remain constant even in a large-strain analysis.
The preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section stiffness at analysis
time.
If using preintegrated shell sections in a contact analysis, ANSYS recommends the pure Lagrange
multiplier method.
For standard layered-shell sections, you can obtain submatrices [ A], [ B], [ D], and [ E] via the SLIST
command's FULL option.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_PRESHELL_5.html[28/04/2013 08:24:08 p.m.]
Chapter 18: Reinforcing
Chapter18:Reinforcing
Reinforced materials are used extensively in civil construction, aircraft structures, automobiles, advanced
sports equipment, and medical devices. Reinforcing commonly appears in fiber or cable forms, such as
steel rebar in reinforced concrete, nylon strands in tires, and carbon fibers in various composite
materials.
ANSYS allows you to model the reinforcing fibers with specialized reinforcing elements. The reinforcing
elements interact with standard structural elements, referred to as the base elements, via the common
nodes.
Reinforcing sections (SECTYPE,,REINF) define the location and orientation of the reinforcing
(SECDATA). The sections are referenced by REINF264 and REINF265 elements.
The following topics related to reinforcing are available:
Assumptions About Reinforcing
Modeling Options for Reinforcing
Defining Reinforcing Sections and Elements
Reinforcing Simulation and Postprocessing
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRREINF.html[28/04/2013 08:24:28 p.m.]
18.1. Assumptions About Reinforcing
18.1.Assumptions About Reinforcing

The cross-section area of reinforcing fibers is small compared to the length of the fibers. The bending,
torsion, and transverse shear stiffness (all present in beam elements) are ignored in reinforcing
elements. ANSYS considers only the axial stiffness.
ANSYS assumes a secure bond between the reinforcing fibers and the base element. The relative
movement between these two components is not permitted; therefore, the motion of reinforcing fibers is
determined solely by the motion of the base element. Based on this simplification, ANSYS adopts the
same nodes and connectivity for a reinforcing element and its base element.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRRFPRERQ.html[28/04/2013 08:24:47 p.m.]
18.2. Modeling Options for Reinforcing
18.2.Modeling Options for Reinforcing

ANSYS provides discrete and smeared reinforcing modeling options.
Use the discrete modeling option (SECTYPE,SECID ,REINF,DISC) for reinforcing fibers with nonuniform
materials, cross-section areas, or arbitrary orientations. ANSYS models each fiber separately as a spar
having only uniaxial stiffness, as shown.
Figure18.1Discrete Reinforcing Modeling Option
Use the smeared option (SECTYPE,SECID ,REINF,SMEAR) for modeling reinforcing fibers that appear in
layered form. ANSYS treats one layer of fibers with identical material, orientation, and cross-section area
as a homogeneous membrane having unidirectional stiffness, as shown:
Figure18.2Smeared Reinforcing Modeling Option
For detailed information about the reinforcing options, see the documentation for the REINF264 and
REINF265 elements, and REINF264 - 3-D Discrete Reinforcing and REINF265 - 3-D Smeared Reinforcing
in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRRFMODEL.html[28/04/2013 08:25:01 p.m.]
18.3.Defining Reinforcing Sections and Elements

Use the following general process to create reinforcing elements:
1. Create the base elements.
2. Build the reinforcing sections.
3. Select the base elements that you want to reinforce.
4. Generate the reinforcing elements from the base elements (EREINF).
5. Inspect and verify the newly created reinforcing elements.
Reinforcing elements ignore any subsequent modifications made to the base elements. ANSYS
recommends issuing the EREINF command only after you have finalized the base elements. If you
delete or modify base elements after generating the reinforcing elements, remove all affected reinforcing
elements and reissue the EREINF command to avoid inconsistencies.
The EREINF command determines the reinforcing element type according to the base element type and
the current reinforcing section. (See the example input files in Example: Discrete Reinforcing and
Example: Smeared Reinforcing.) The command does not create any new reinforcing elements if the
current section is not a valid reinforcing section or if the section is incompatible with the base elements.
To define a section ID to associate with the subsequently-defined reinforcing elements, issue the
SECNUM command.
Reinforcing locations are given with respect to the base element. Unexpected reinforcing placement may
result from incorrectly oriented base elements. You can achieve the desired base element orientation via
the EORIENT or VEORIENT command. In some cases, you may need to create different reinforcing
sections for different base elements with inconsistent orientations.
As shown in the example input in Example: Discrete Reinforcing and Example: Smeared Reinforcing, you
can manually adjust the translucency of the base elements to show the reinforcing elements. Additional
automatic reinforcing display options are available via the ANSYS GUI (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Sections> Reinforcing> Display Options).
18.3.1.Example: Discrete Reinforcing

Following is typical sequence of commands for defining discrete reinforcing elements:
/batch,list
/show, sample,grph
/title, Sample input data for generating discrete reinforcing elements
/prep7
!
!
mp, ex,1,10e6 ! Base Material
mp, ex,2,30e6 ! Reinforcing Material
mp,prxy,1,.3
mp,prxy,2,.3
mp,dens,1,.00001
mp,dens,2,.00002
!
! Define base geometry
!
k,1, 0.,0.
k,2,10.,0.
l,1,2
!
! Define base elements
!
et,1,BEAM188
mat,1
sect,1,BEAM,I
secd,1.,1.,1.,0.2,0.2,0.3
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRRFDEF.html[28/04/2013 08:25:15 p.m.]
esize, 2.0
lmesh, 1
!
! Define discrete reinforcing section
!
sect,2,REINF,DISC
secd,2,0.01,BEAM,-0.25,0.1
secd,2,0.01,BEAM, 0 .0,0.1
secd,2,0.01,BEAM, 0.25,0.1
secd,2,0.01,BEAM,-0.25,0.9
secd,2,0.01,BEAM, 0 .0,0.9
secd,2,0.01,BEAM, 0.25,0.9
!
! Create reinforcing element via EREINF
!
esel,all
secn, 2 ! use reinforcing section!
EREINF
!
! Inspect newly created reinforcing elements
!
esel,s,type,,1
! adjust the translucency level of the
! base element to reveal the embedded reinforcing
! elements
/trlcy,elem,0.9
esel,all
/view,1,1,1,1
! Turn on the expaned element shapes
/eshape,1
eplot
fini
The input listing generates the following output:

Figure18.3Discrete Reinforcing Element Display (with Translucent Base Elements)
18.3.2.Example: Smeared Reinforcing

Following is a typical sequence of commands for defining smeared reinforcing elements:
/batch,list
/show, sample,grph
/title, Sample input data for generating smeared reinforcing elements
/prep7
!
!
mp, ex,1,10e6 ! Base Material
mp, ex,2,30e6 ! Reinforcing Material
mp,prxy,1,.3
mp,prxy,2,.3
mp,dens,1,.00001
mp,dens,2,.00002
!
! Define base geometry
!
CYLIND, 10.,12.,0.,20.,0,90.
!
! Define base elements
!
et,1,SOLID185
mat,1
esize, 2.0
vmesh, 1
!
! Define smeared reinforcing section
!
sect,1,REINF,SMEAR
secd,2,0.1,1.0,,45.0,ELEF,3,0.5
!
! Create reinforcing element via EREINF
!
esel,all
EREINF
!
! Inspect newly created reinforcing elements
!
esel,s,type,,1
! adjust the translucency level of the
! base element to reveal the embedded reinforcing
! elements
/trlcy,elem,0.9
esel,all
/view,1,1,1,1
! Turn on the expaned element shapes
/eshape,1
eplot
!
! Verify the reinforcing fiber orientation
!
! Switch to the vector plot
/dev,vect,1
! Select only reinforcing elements (optional)
esel,s,type,,2
/psymb,layr,-1
eplot
fini
The input listing generates the following output:

Figure18.4Smeared Reinforcing Element Display (with Translucent Base Elements)
Figure18.5Fiber Orientation Display on Smeared Reinforcing Elements
18.4. Reinforcing Simulation and Postprocessing
18.4.Reinforcing Simulation and Postprocessing

The REINF264 and REINF265 reinforcing elements have plasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large
deflection, initial stress, and large strain capabilities. You can use them in any type of simulation that
their base elements support.
Reinforcing elements allow tension-only (cable) and compression-only (gap) options. You can specify
those options via the SECCONTROLS command. A nonlinear iterative solution procedure is necessary
for simulating the tension-only or compression-only behaviors.
Reinforcing elements always list or display stress and strain results in local fiber directions. Therefore,
the coordinate system specified via the RSYS command has no effect. Reinforcing results display is
supported in both PowerGraphics and FullGraphics. In PowerGraphics mode, all reinforcing fibers
(discrete) or layers (smeared) are displayed shown concurrently. In FullGraphics mode, however, only
one reinforcing fiber or layer can be displayed at one time. To specify the desired layer or fiber to
display in FullGraphics mode, issue the LAYER command.
You can perform a failure analysis on the reinforcing elements. For more information, see Specifying
Failure Criteria.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_STRRFSIM.html[28/04/2013 08:25:32 p.m.]
Chapter 19: Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids
Chapter19:Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids

Hydrostatic fluid elements are used to model fluids that are fully enclosed by solids (containing vessels).
The available elements are:
HSFLD241 for 2-D models (plane stress, axisymmetric, or plane strain)
HSFLD242 for 3-D models
These elements are formulated for linear and nonlinear static and transient dynamic applications. For
more information, see HSFLD241 - 2-D Hydrostatic Fluid and HSFLD242 - 3-D Hydrostatic Fluid in the
The following topics related to using hydrostatic fluid elements are available:
Hydrostatic Fluid Element Features
Defining Hydrostatic Fluid Elements
Material Definitions and Loading
Example Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid Elements
Results Output
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydro.html[28/04/2013 08:25:48 p.m.]
19.1. Hydrostatic Fluid Element Features
19.1.Hydrostatic Fluid Element Features

The following are characteristics of the hydrostatic fluid elements, HSFLD241 and HSFLD242:
The fluid volume is fully enclosed within the solid so it has no free surface.
All hydrostatic fluid elements defining a fluid volume share a pressure node with a hydrostatic
pressure degree of freedom, so the fluid volume has uniform pressure, temperature and density.
The pressure node can be located anywhere within the fluid volume. It is automatically moved to
the geometric center of the fluid volume if there are no displacement degree-of-freedom
constraints specified. However, if the fluid volume is bounded by one or more symmetry lines or
planes, the pressure node must be on the symmetry line or plane or the intersecting corner or line
of multiple symmetry lines or planes, and it must have symmetry boundary conditions.
For 2-D models, the planar behavior of HSFLD241 elements (plane stress or plain strain) is based
on the underlying solid element. Use KEYOPT(3) to define axisymmetric behavior.
The fluid may be modeled as incompressible (use KEYOPT(6) = 1), or it may be modeled as
compressible by defining fluid material models (TB,FLUID). The effects of fluid viscosity are
ignored.
Fluid flow between two fluid volumes with separate pressure nodes may be modeled by connecting
the pressure nodes with FLUID116 coupled thermal-fluid pipe elements. In this case, you must set
KEYOPT(1) = 1 for the hydrostatic fluid elements to activate the HDSP and PRES (pressure)
degrees of freedom at the pressure node, and you must set KEYOPT(1) = 3 on the FLUID116
elements. The PRES (pressure) and HDSP (hydrostatic pressure) degrees of freedom are made to
be the same at the pressure node.
Inertial effects such as sloshing cannot be modeled due to a uniform pressure assumption.
However, fluid mass can be added to the hydrostatic fluid element surface nodes that are shared
with underlying solid or shell elements. Use KEYOPT(5) to distribute fluid mass to surface nodes.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydroelem.html[28/04/2013 08:26:02 p.m.]
19.2.Defining Hydrostatic Fluid Elements

Hydrostatic fluid elements must be associated with solid or shell elements. Use HSFLD241 with 2-D solid
or axisymmetric solid elements; use HSFLD242 with 3-D solid or shell elements.
Follow this general procedure to automatically generate the hydrostatic fluid elements on the faces of
selected solid or shell elements:
1. Build the model using solid or shell elements.
2. Select the solid or shell elements and the attached nodes that enclose the fluid volume.
3. Define a node to be used as the pressure node for the fluid volume.
4. Use the ESURF command with the pressure node ID specified as XNODE to generate hydrostatic
fluid elements.
5. Inspect and verify the newly created hydrostatic fluid elements; the elements should be triangleshaped (2-D or axisymmetric) or pyramid-shaped (3-D) with a common vertex at the pressure
node.
As an alternative to the above method, you can use the E or EN command to manually define
hydrostatic fluid elements that share nodes of underlying solid or shell elements. For the 2-D or
axisymmetric case (HSFLD241), nodes I through K (I, J for lower order; I, J, K for higher order) should
be shared with the underlying 2-D or axisymmetric solid element, and node L should be defined as the
pressure node. For the 3-D case (HSFLD242), nodes I through P (I through L for lower order; I through
P for higher order) should be shared with the underlying 3-D solid or shell element, and node Q should
be defined as the pressure node.
In general, the nodes should be ordered in a counter-clockwise manner to get a positive volume. If the
node ordering is not correct, it can be reversed by either using the ESURF command or changing the
order on the E or EN commands.
In some situations, the element volume may need to be negative with nodes ordered in the clockwise
direction. For example, when modeling an inflated tire inner tube, the pressure node will be located
outside of the fluid volume. In this case, some of the hydrostatic fluid elements filling the doughnutshaped fluid volume will need to have negative volume (see (1) in the figure below), while others will
have positive volume (see (2) in the figure below) such that the total volume of all the hydrostatic fluid
elements adds up to the volume of the enclosed fluid. For this reason, hydrostatic fluid elements with
negative volume are allowed. However, to avoid errors, a warning message is issued at the beginning of
the analysis for all hydrostatic fluid elements having negative volumes. An internal element component
containing all hydrostatic fluid elements with negative volumes is created and listed in this warning
message.
Figure19.1Negative and Positive Volumes for Hydrostatic Fluid Elements
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydrodefine.html[28/04/2013 08:26:38 p.m.]
(1) Hydrostatic fluid elements having

negative volume
(2) Hydrostatic fluid elements having

positive volume
Hydrostatic fluid elements do not require underlying solid or shell elements in following cases:
The fluid volume is enclosed by a rigid solid. Instead of adding very stiff underlying solid or shell
elements, displacement degree-of-freedom constraints may be imposed directly on the hydrostatic
fluid element nodes. Another alternative is to use a rigid body instead of stiff solid or shell
elements (see Modeling Rigid Bodies in the Contact Technology Guide ).
Some of the underlying solid or shell elements undergo large displacements while others do not.
For example, when a piston moves inside a fluid-filled cylinder, the fluid volume in contact with the
piston and the cylinder may be modeled by a hydrostatic fluid element with one node shared with
the solid or shell element on the piston, and the other node shared with the solid or shell element
on the cylinder. Such an arrangement allows the piston to displace without adversely affecting the
total fluid volume or pressure calculations. (For an example of this type of model, see Example
Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid Elements.)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydrodefine.html[28/04/2013 08:26:38 p.m.]
19.3.Material Definitions and Loading

19.3.1.Fluid Materials
Use the TB,FLUID command to define a material model for compressible hydrostatic fluid elements. All
elements sharing a pressure node must share the same material. There are three ways to define
material data for compressible fluids: liquid, gas, or pressure-volume data. See Fluid Material Models
(TB,FLUID) in the Element Reference for a complete description of these material models.
Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = LIQUID to define material behavior for a liquid, and specify
the following material constants using the TBDATA command:
Constant
C1
C2
C3
Symbol
K
0f
Meaning
Bulk modulus
Coefficient of thermal expansion
Initial density
Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = GAS to define material behavior for a gas, and specify the
following material constant using the TBDATA command:
Constant
C1
Symbol
0f
Meaning
Initial density
Since the compressible gas is modeled using the Ideal Gas Law, you must specify a reference pressure
(use real constant PREF on the hydrostatic fluid element) and you must specify a reference temperature
(use the TREF or MP,REFT command) with temperature offset (use the TOFFST command).
Use the TB,FLUID command with TBOPT = PVDATA to define compressible fluid behavior in terms of a
pressure-volume curve. Use the TBPT command to enter the data points ( X, Y) for the curve:
Constant
Meaning
Pressure value
Corresponding volume value
X
Y
Use the MP,DENS command to define initial density for a fluid with pressure-volume data.
Use the TBTEMP command to define temperature dependent material constants for all of the above
material options.
Use theMP,DENS and MP,ALPX commands to specify density and coefficient of thermal expansion,
respectively, for an incompressible fluid that allows thermal expansion.
19.3.2.Loads and Boundary Conditions

The following loads and boundary conditions can be applied to hydrostatic fluid elements:
Load
Command
Comments
Initial fluid pressure
IC
Apply initial fluid pressure at pressure node with

HDSP degree of freedom.
Initial fluid temperature
TREF or
MP,REFT
TREF applies to entire model.

MP,REFT applies to a specific material.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydromatload.html[28/04/2013 08:26:58 p.m.]
Temperature offset (from

absolute zero)
Temperature loads
Hydrostatic pressure DOF
constraint
TOFFST
BF
D
Fluid mass flow rate
By default, the temperature is set to TUNIF.

Apply this constraint type to the pressure node.
This constraint is equivalent to applying a surface
load on the underlying solid surface, as far as the
effect of fluid pressure on the underlying solid is
concerned. The change in hydrostatic pressure
value is assumed to occur as a result of the
addition or removal of fluid mass to or from the
containing vessel.
Apply fluid mass flow rate at the pressure node. A
positive value adds fluid mass to the containing
vessel, and a negative value results in removal of
fluid mass.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydromatload.html[28/04/2013 08:26:58 p.m.]
19.4.Example Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid Elements

The following example shows an axisymmetric model of a cylinder-piston arrangement. The contained
fluid in the cylinder is modeled with hydrostatic fluid elements, shown as triangular elements in the
figure below.
Figure19.2Meshed Model
Due to the gap between the cylinder and piston, a hydrostatic fluid element with no underlying solid
elements is added manually. The node numbering on this hydrostatic fluid element is reversed to
achieve a negative fluid volume that balances the extra fluid volume created by hydrostatic fluid
elements attached to the cylinder above the piston. The figure below shows a close-up view of the node
numbering in the area where the hydrostatic fluid element with negative volume and no underlying solid
element is defined.
Figure19.3Close-up View of Meshed Model
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydroexample.html[28/04/2013 08:27:25 p.m.]
The following sequence of commands generates this model, including the hydrostatic fluid elements,
material models, and boundary conditions.
/batch,list
/title, Sample input data for defining hydrostatic fluid elements
/prep7
!
! Define element types
!
et,1,182
!plane182
keyopt,1,3,1
!axisymmetric option
et,2,241
!hsfld241
keyopt,2,3,1
!
! Define material type
!
! Material properties for Steel
mp,ex,1,2.0e5
!Young's Modulus in N/mm^2
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
!Poisson's ratio
mp,dens,1,7.7e-9!Density in ton/mm^3
! Material properties for hydraulic fluid
tb,fluid,2,,,,liquid
tbdata,1,2000.0 !Bulk Modulus in N/mm^2
tbdata,2,6.4e-4 !Coefficient of thermal expansion
tbdata,3,8.42e-5!Density in ton/mm^3
!
! Define nodes, keypoints, areas
!
! Nodes
n,1,0.0,50.0
!pressure node
! Keypoints
k, 1, 0.0, 0.0
k, 2,25.0, 0.0
k, 3,25.0,100.0
k, 4,10.0,100.0
k, 5,10.0, 95.0
k, 6,20.0, 95.0
k, 7,20.0, 5.0
k, 8, 0.0, 5.0
k, 9, 0.0, 80.0
k,10,19.0, 80.0
k,11,19.0, 85.0
k,12, 2.5, 85.0
k,13, 2.5,185.0
k,14, 0.0,185.0
! Areas
a,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
a,9,10,11,12,13,14
!
! Define mesh
!
! Planar elements
type,1
mat,1
esize,2.5
amesh,all
! Hydrostatic fluid elements--automatic generation
type,2
mat,2
lsel,s,line,,6,9
nsll,s,1
esurf,1
allsel,all
! Hydrostatic fluid elements--E command
e,61,162,,1
!element with negative volume--nodes 61 and 162 swapped
!
! Define degree-of-freedom constraints (boundary conditions)
!
! Symmetry boundary condition on pressure node
d,1,ux,0.0
! Symmetry boundary condition on planar mesh

lsel,s,line,,8,14,6
nsll,s,1
d,all,ux,0.0
allsel,all
! Fixed boundary condition on planar mesh
lsel,s,line,,1
nsll,s,1
d,all,all,0.0
allsel,all
finish
19.5. Results Output
19.5.Results Output
Hydrostatic pressure can be output as the HDSP degree-of-freedom solution. The solution value is the
change in hydrostatic pressure from the value at the start of the analysis. In the case of compressible
gas, the solution value is the change in hydrostatic pressure with respect to the reference pressure. If
any pressure value is specified using the IC command, then the value is added to the solution.
The following element output quantities are available for the HSFLD241 and HSFLD242 elements:
Output Quantity
DENSITY
TVOL
TMAS
MFLO
TVOLO
Symbol
V
M
w
Vo
Meaning
Current fluid density
Current total fluid volume
Current total fluid mass
Current fluid mass flow rate
Original total fluid volume
These NMISC output quantities provide results for the entire fluid volume, so all hydrostatic fluid
elements sharing the pressure node have the same output value. See the HSFLD241 and HSFLD242
element descriptions for more information about output for these elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/strhydroresults.html[28/04/2013 08:27:46 p.m.]
Appendix A. Example Analyses with Multiple Imposed Rotations
AppendixA.Example Analyses with Multiple Imposed Rotations

Table of Contents
A.2.1. Sequentially Applied Rotations
A.2.2. Simultaneously Applied Rotations
The examples shown here demonstrate how the results change when the order of imposed rotations is
changed in a large defection analysis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/str_rotexamp.html[28/04/2013 08:28:10 p.m.]
A.1.Problem Description
A robotic arm, modeled with one BEAM188 element, is initially aligned along the global Z-axis with one
end at the origin. On the node at the origin displacements are fixed, and non-zero rotations are applied
in all three directions. Two ways of applying rotations are shown: sequential and simultaneous.
Animations are provided to show the differences in results.
The rotations are applied in the following manner:
Sequential rotations - The beam is first rotated by 60 clockwise about the X-axis, followed by a 90
counterclockwise rotation about the local z-axis, and finally another 90 counterclockwise rotation about
the local x-axis. The rotations about each axis are imposed in separate load steps.
Simultaneous rotations - The total values for the compound rotations are the same as the sequential
case, but the rotations are imposed in a single load step. The beam is rotated by 60 clockwise about
the X-axis, by (90)(sin(60)+cos(60)) counterclockwise about the Y-axis and by (90)(sin(60)cos(60)) clockwise about the Z-axis.
For the case of sequentially applied rotations, two sample inputs are given: one with imposed rotations
and the other with imposed rotational velocities. This demonstrates that the use of imposed rotations
and imposed rotational velocities both achieve the same results in a static analysis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/str_rotprobdesc.html[28/04/2013 08:28:14 p.m.]
A.2.Sample Inputs for Imposed Rotations

The following input listing shows the model setup, including node and element definitions, material
definitions, and section definitions. This PREP7 input was used for all the examples in this discussion.
Beam Model Setup
/BATCH,LIST
/PREP7
!Parameters
PI=3.1415926536
!Element type definitions
ET,1,188
!Beam element
!Node definitions
N,1,0.,0.,0.
N,2,0.,0.,0.6
!Material properties
MP,EX,1,2.01E11 !Young's modulus for Steel
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
!Poisson's ratio
!Section properties
SECTYPE,1,BEAM,RECT
SECDATA,0.1,0.2 !Beam cross-section
!Element definitions
TYPE,1
MAT,1
REAL,1
SECNUM,1
EN,1,1,2
FINISH
A.2.1.Sequentially Applied Rotations

The following input illustrates compound rotations imposed over multiple load steps with each
component applied sequentially on top of the previous deformed configuration.
Sequentially Applied Rotations
/SOLU
NLGEOM,ON
!Solution
!Geometrically nonlinear analysis
!Boundary conditions for Load Step 1

D,1,UX,0.0
!Displacement at Node 1 fixed in x-direction
D,1,UY,0.0
D,1,UZ,0.0
D,1,ROTX,-PI/6.0
!60 clockwise rotation at Node 1 about x-direction
D,1,ROTY,0.0
!Rotation at Node 1 fixed about y-direction
D,1,ROTZ,0.0
!Rotation at Node 1 fixed about z-direction
TIME,1.0
!Time at the end of Load Step 1
NSUB,10,100,10 !Initial, maximum and minimum number of substeps
OUTRES,ALL,ALL !Save results
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 1
!60 clockwise rotation at Node 1 about x-axis (from Load Step 1)
D,1,ROTX,-PI/6.0
!y-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis
D,1,ROTY,(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)
!z-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis
D,1,ROTZ,(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)
TIME,2.0
! Time at the end of Load Step 2
NSUB,10,100,10
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 2
!60 clockwise rotation at Node 1 about x-axis (from Load Step 1)
D,1,ROTX,-PI/6.0
!y-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis (from Load Step 2)
!and y-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local x-axis
D,1,ROTY,(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)+(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)
!z-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis (from Load Step 2)
!and z-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local x-axis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/apas02.html[28/04/2013 08:28:29 p.m.]
D,1,ROTZ,(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)-(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)
TIME,3.0
NSUB,10,100,10
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 3
FINISH
/POST26
!Time-history postprocessor
NSOL,2,1,ROT,X,ROTX1
!Store results for rotation about x-axis at Node 1
NSOL,3,1,ROT,Y,ROTY1
!Store results for rotation about y-axis at Node 1
NSOL,4,1,ROT,Z,ROTZ1
!Store results for rotation about z-axis at Node 1
NSOL,5,2,U,X,UX2
!Store results for x-displacement at Node 2
NSOL,6,2,U,Y,UY2
!Store results for y-displacement at Node 2
NSOL,7,2,U,Z,UZ2
!Store results for z-displacement at Node 2
PRVAR,2,3,4
!Print results
PRVAR,5,6,7
FINISH
The following input illustrates compound rotational velocities imposed over multiple load steps with each
component applied sequentially. The difference between imposing rotations and rotational velocities
should be noted.
Sequentially Applied Rotational Velocities
/SOLU
NLGEOM,ON
KBC,1
!Solution
!Step applied load/boundary condition

D,1,UX,0.0
D,1,UY,0.0
D,1,UZ,0.0
D,1,OMGX,-PI/6.0
!60/s clockwise rotational velocity at Node 1 about x-direction
D,1,OMGY,0.0
!Zero rotational velocity at Node 1 about y-direction
D,1,OMGZ,0.0
!Zero rotational velocity at Node 1 about z-direction
TIME,1.0
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 1
!Zero rotational velocity at Node 1 about x-direction
D,1,OMGX,0.0
!y-component of 90/s counterclockwise rotational velocity at Node 1 about local z-axis
D,1,OMGY,(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)
!z-component of 90/s counterclockwise rotational velocity at Node 1 about local z-axis
D,1,OMGZ,(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)
TIME,2.0
NSUB,10,100,10
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 2
!Zero rotational velocity at Node 1 about x-direction
D,1,OMGX,0.0
!y-component of 90/s counterclockwise rotational velocity at Node 1 about local x-axis
D,1,OMGY,(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)
!z-component of 90/s counterclockwise rotational velocity at Node 1 about local x-axis
D,1,OMGZ,-(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)
TIME,3.0
NSUB,10,100,10
OUTRES,ALL,ALL
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 3
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,5,2,U,X,UX2
NSOL,6,2,U,Y,UY2
NSOL,7,2,U,Z,UZ2
PRVAR,2,3,4
!Print results
PRVAR,5,6,7
FINISH
The following animation shows how the beam deforms under the sequentially applied load. The result is
the same for applied rotations and applied rotational velocities.
FigureA.1Rotated Configuration Resulting from Sequentially Applied Rotations
A.2.2.Simultaneously Applied Rotations

The following input illustrates compound rotations imposed over a single load step with all components
applied together.
Simultaneously Applied Rotations
/SOLU
NLGEOM,ON
!Solution

D,1,UX,0.0
D,1,UY,0.0
D,1,UZ,0.0
!60 clockwise rotation at Node 1 about x-axis
D,1,ROTX,-PI/6.0
!y-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis
!and y-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local x-axis
D,1,ROTY,(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)+(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)
!z-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local z-axis
!and z-component of 90 counterclockwise rotation at Node 1 about local x-axis
D,1,ROTZ,(PI/2.0)*COS(PI/6.0)-(PI/2.0)*SIN(PI/6.0)
TIME,1.0
SOLVE
!Solve Load Step 1
FINISH
/POST26
NSOL,5,2,U,X,UX2
NSOL,6,2,U,Y,UY2
NSOL,7,2,U,Z,UZ2
PRVAR,2,3,4
!Print results
PRVAR,5,6,7
FINISH
The following animation shows how the beam deforms under the simultaneously applied load.
FigureA.2Rotated Configuration Resulting from Simultaneously Applied Rotations
LINK160
LINK160
Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

LINK160 has three degrees of freedom at each node and carries an axial force.
This element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only. Refer to the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual for
more information.
LINK160 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 160.1. Node K determines the initial orientation of
the cross section. For this element, you can choose three materials: isotropic elastic, plastic kinematic,
and bilinear kinematic.
The element is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system. Node K defines a plane (with I
and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the length of the element and
through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it must not be
colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the element.
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads (displacements, forces, etc.). Also use EDLOAD to
apply loads on rigid bodies. For more information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis,
see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
A summary of the element input is given in "LINK160 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J, K (K is the orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ
Note: For explicit dynamics analyses, V (X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A (X,
Y, Z) refers to nodal acceleration. Although V (X, Y, Z) and A (X, Y, Z) appear
as DOFs, they are not actually physical DOFs. However, these quantities are
LINK160
Real Constants
computed as DOF solutions and stored for postprocessing.
Area - Cross-sectional area

Material Properties
EX, NUXY, DENS, DAMP (MP command)
RIGID (EDMP command)
BKIN, PLAW (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
This element supports all nonlinear features allowed for an explicit dynamic analysis.
KEYOPTS
None
LINK160 Output Data

Output data for LINK160 consists of the following: Axial force
To output the data, you must use the ETABLE command. For the ITEM label, specify SMISC. For the
COMP label, specify 1 for axial force. Then, you can use the PRETAB command to print the output
data.

The spar element assumes a straight bar, axially loaded at its ends with uniform properties from
end to end.
The length of the spar must be greater than zero, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
The cross-sectional area must be greater than zero.
The displacement shape function implies a uniform stress in the spar.

There are no product-specific restrictions for this element.
BEAM161
BEAM161
Explicit 3-D Beam
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

BEAM161 has several characteristics:
It is incrementally objective (rigid body rotations do not generate strains), allowing for the
treatment of finite strains that occur in many practical applications.
It is simple for computational efficiency and robustness.
It is compatible with the brick elements.
It includes finite transverse shear strains. However, the added computations needed to retain this
strain component, compared to those for the assumption of no transverse shear strain, are
significant.
The Belytschko beam element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2, 4, 5) is part of a family of structural finite
elements that use a "co-rotational technique" for treating large rotation.
more information.
BEAM161 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 161.1.
Node K determines the initial orientation of the cross section.
and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the centroidal line of the
element and through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it
must not be colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the
element. (For information about orientation nodes and beam meshing, see Meshing Your Solid Model in
the Modeling and Meshing Guide .)
BEAM161
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads and other load types described below. For detailed
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure
161.1. Note, however, that pressure is actually a traction load applied to the center line of the element .
Use the EDLOAD command to apply the pressure load, and input the pressure as a force per unit
length value. Positive normal pressures act into the element.
Base accelerations and angular velocities in the x, y, and z directions can be applied at the nodes using
the EDLOAD command. To apply these loads, you need to first select the nodes and create a
component. The load is then applied to that component.
You can also use the EDLOAD command to apply loads (displacements, forces, etc.) on rigid bodies.
You can choose from the following materials when working with BEAM161, with the restrictions as
noted:
Isotropic Elastic
Bilinear Kinematic (Except KEYOPT(1) = 2)
Plastic Kinematic (Except KEYOPT(1) = 2)
Viscoelastic (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
Power Law Plasticity (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
Piecewise Linear Plasticity (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
KEYOPT(1) allows you to specify one of four element formulations for BEAM161 (see "BEAM161 Input
Summary"). For details of real constants to be specified for each element formulation, see
Table161.1:BEAM161 Real Constants.
KEYOPT(2) is valid only with rectangular element formulations (KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1, 4).
The following illustrations show the valid standard beam cross sections when KEYOPT(4)>0, and
KEYOPT(5) = 2 (standard beam cross section).
Figure161.2Standard Beam Cross Sections
BEAM161
Figure161.3Standard Beam Cross Sections (continued)
BEAM161
KEYOPT(5) is not valid when KEYOPT(1) = 2.

A summary of the element input is given in "BEAM161 Input Summary". Additional information about
real constants for this element is provided in Table161.1:BEAM161 Real Constants. For more
information about this element, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Note: For explicit dynamics analyses, V(X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y,
Z) refers to nodal acceleration. Although V(X, Y, Z) and A(X, Y, Z) appear as
DOFs, they are not actually physical DOFs. However, these quantities are
Real Constants
See Table161.1:BEAM161 Real Constants for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
BEAM161
EX, NUXY, DENS, DAMP (MP command)

RIGID (KEYOPT(1) = 1,2) (EDMP command)
BKIN, EVISC, PLAW (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
Pressure--
face 1 (I-J) (+r tangential direction), face 2 (I-J) (-s normal direction), face 3 (I) (-t normal
direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Element formulation:
0, 1--
Hughes-Liu with cross section integration (default)
2--
Belytschko-Schwer resultant beam (resultant)
4--
Belytschko-Schwer full cross section integration
5--
Belytschko-Schwer circular beam with cross section integration
KEYOPT(2)
Quadrature rule:
1--
One integration point
0, 2--
2 x 2 Gauss quadrature (default)
3--
3 x 3 Gauss quadrature
4--
3 x 3 Lobatto quadrature
5--
4 x 4 Gauss quadrature
BEAM161
KEYOPT(4)
Note: KEYOPT(2) is valid only with rectangular element formulations (KEYOPT(1) =

0, 1, 4).
Integration rule for section:

0--
Standard integration option
n--
User-defined integration rule ID (valid range: 1 to 9999)
KEYOPT(5)
Cross section type:
0--
Rectangular cross section
1--
Circular cross section
2--
Arbitrary cross section (user defined integration rule) or standard beam cross section, if
KEYOPT (4) > 0.
Table161.1BEAM161 Real Constants
No.
1
Name
SHRF
Description
Use if...
KEYOPT (1) = 0,1, 4, or 5
Shear factor.
Default = 1.0
TS1
Recommended for rectangular sections =

5/6.
Beam thickness in s direction at node 1;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
TS2
if KEYOPT (5) = 2, then use for arbitrary

cross section only.
Beam thickness in s direction at node 2;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
TT1

cross section only.
Beam thickness in t direction at node 1;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
TT2

cross section only.
Beam thickness in t direction at node 2;
cross section only.
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
BEAM161
DS1
Beam outer diameter at node 1[1]
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
KEYOPT (4) = 0
DS2
Beam outer diameter at node 2[1]
KEYOPT (5) = 1
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
KEYOPT (4) = 0
DT1
Beam inner diameter at node 1[1]
KEYOPT (5) = 1
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
KEYOPT (4) = 0
DT2
Beam inner diameter at node 2[1]
KEYOPT (5) = 1
KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
KEYOPT (4) = 0
NSLOC
KEYOPT (5) = 1
Location of reference surface normal to s- KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, 4, or 5
axis
KEYOPT (4) = 0
= 1 side at s = 1
= 0 center
NTLOC
= -1 side at s = -1
Location of reference surface normal to t- KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, 4, or 5
axis
KEYOPT (4) = 0
= 1 side at t = 1
= 0 center
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
= -1 side at t = -1
Cross sectional area
KEYOPT (4) = 0
ISS
See Figure 161.4

Moment of inertia about s-axis
KEYOPT (1) = 2
KEYOPT (4) = 0
ITT
See Figure 161.4

Moment of inertia about t-axis
KEYOPT (1) = 2
KEYOPT (4) = 0
IRR
See Figure 161.4

Polar moment of inertia
KEYOPT (1) = 2
KEYOPT (4) = 0
SA
See Figure 161.4

Shear area
KEYOPT (1) = 2
KEYOPT (4) = 0
NIP
See Figure 161.4

Number of integration points
KEYOPT (1) = 2
KEYOPT (4) > 0 and KEYOPT
(5) = 2
RA
See Figure 161.6

Relative area of cross section; that is, the KEYOPT (4) > 0 and KEYOPT
actual cross-sectional area divided by the (5) = 2
area defined by the product of the
specified thickness in the s direction and
BEAM161
the thickness in the t direction.

15
ICST
See Figure 161.5.
Standard cross section type.
KEYOPT (4) > 0[2] and

KEYOPT (5) = 2 (standard
cross section only)
Note:
If this type is nonzero, then
NIP and RA should be zero.
Cross section types are:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
20
W
TF
D
TW
SREF
W-section
C-section
Angle section
T-section
Rectangular tubing
Z-section
Trapezoidal section
See Figure 161.2, Figure 161.3.

Flange width
Flange thickness
Depth
Web thickness
ICST
ICST
ICST
ICST
ICST
>
>
>
>
>
0,
0,
0,
0,
0,
and
and
and
and
and
NIP
NIP
NIP
NIP
NIP
=
=
=
=
=
RA
RA
RA
RA
RA
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
Location of reference surface normal to s

Note:
If KEYOPT (1) = 1 only
21
TREF
ICST > 0, and NIP = RA = 0
Location of reference surface normal to t

Note:
22, 25, 28, S(i)
...79
23, 26, 29, T(i)

...80
24, 27, 30, WF(i)
If KEYOPT (1) = 1 only

s coordinate of integration point
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3]
KEYOPT (4) > 0

KEYOPT (5) = 2, arbitrary
cross section only
NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST = 0
t coordinate of integration point
KEYOPT (4) > 0
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3]

cross section only
NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST = 0
BEAM161
...81
Weighting factor; that is, the area

associated with the integration point
divided by the actual cross-section area.
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3]
See Figure 161.4
KEYOPT (4) > 0

cross section only
NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST = 0
1. DS1, DS2, DT1, and DT2 are used only if KEYOPT (5) = 1. If KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2, then use TS1,
TS2, TT1, and TT2.
2. For KEYOPT (5) = 2, standard cross-section type, the integration point ID (KEYOPT (4) > 0) is not
used since NIP = RA = 0. However, you must provide this input in any case.
3. Specify S(i), T(i), and WF(i) for each integration point. For example, for 20 integration points,
specify S(1), T(1), WF(1), S(2), T(2), WF(2), ... S(20), T(20), WF(20).
Figure161.4Properties of Beam Cross Sections for Several Common Cross Sections
BEAM161
Figure161.5Definition of Relative Area for User Defined Integration Rule
Figure161.6Definition of Integration Points for User Defined Integration Rule
BEAM161 Output Data

To store output data for this element, you first need to specify the number of integration points for
which you want output data. Use the EDINT,,BEAMIP command during the solution phase of your
analysis to specify the number of integration points. By default, output is written for 4 integration points.
For the resultant beam formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2), there is no stress output (regardless of the BEAMIP
setting). If you set BEAMIP = 0, no stress output is written for any of the beam elements. In this case,
BEAM161
the beams will not appear in any POST1 plots because the program assumes they are failed elements.
To display the data for BEAM161, you must use the ETABLE command. Then, you can use the PRETAB
command to print the output data. The RSYS command has no effect when postprocessing output for
this element.
The following items are available on the results file.
Name
S (r, rs, rt)
EPEQ
EPTO
MFORr
N (s, t )
M (s, t )
TORQ
Definition
Stresses
Equivalent plastic strain
Axial strain
Member force in the element coordinate system, r direction
Out-of-plane (s, t) shear
Element (s, t) moments
Torsional resultant
For each of these output data, one set of values, given at the centroid, is output for the entire beam.
Table161.3:BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE and
ESOL commands using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information.
The following notation is used in Table161.3:BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE or ESOL command
E
1st IP
sequence number for the first integration point
nth
IP
sequence number for the nth integration point as defined by the EDINT command.
Table161.3BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers

MFORr
Ns
Nt
Ms
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

E
1st IP
nth IP
1
2
3
4
BEAM161
Mt
TORQ
Sr
Srs
Srt
EPEQ
EPTO
SMISC
SMISC
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
x
x
x
x
x
( n-1)
( n-1)
( n-1)
( n-1)
( n-1)
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
1. In this table, n refers to the current integration point for which you want output data.

The beam must not have a zero length.
The beam can have any open or single-cell closed cross-sectional shape for which the area and
moments of inertia are nonzero.
Warping torsion is assumed negligible and the warping moment of inertia is not used in the
stiffness computation.
Warping of the cross section is unconstrained and is the same for all cross-sections; therefore, the
torsional rotation of the cross-section is assumed to vary linearly along the length. However,
warping is not applicable to the resultant beam formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2).

PLANE162
PLANE162
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
PLANE162 Element Description

PLANE162 is used for modeling 2-D solid structures in ANSYS LS-DYNA. The element can be used either
as a planer or as an axisymmetric element. The element is defined by four nodes having six degrees of
freedom at each node: translations, velocities, and accelerations in the nodal x and y directions. A threenode triangle option is also available, but not recommended.
The element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only. When using this element, the model must only
contain PLANE162 elements - you cannot mix 2-D and 3-D explicit elements in the same model.
Furthermore, all PLANE162 elements in the model must be the same type (plane stress, plane strain, or
axisymmetric). Refer to the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual for more information.
Figure162.1PLANE162 Geometry
PLANE162 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 162.1. Use
KEYOPT(3) to specify whether the element is a plane stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric element. For
the axisymmetric option (KEYOPT(3) = 1), you may also use KEYOPT(2) to specify either area or volume
weighted axisymmetric elements.
KEYOPT(5) defines the element continuum treatment. Two different formulations are available:
Lagrangian (default) and Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE). In addition to setting KEYOPT(5) = 1, you
must also set appropriate parameters on the EDALE and EDGCALE commands in order for the ALE
formulation to take affect. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's
Guide for more information.
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads and other types of loads described below. For detailed
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide . Note that when the axisymmetric option (KEYOPT(3) = 1) is selected and KEYOPT(2) = 0
(area weighted option), nodal loads should be input per unit length of circumference. Likewise, when
KEYOPT(3) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1 (volume weighted option), nodal loads should be input per radian.
Other aspects of axisymmetric elements are covered in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements. Pressures are
always on a 360 basis, irrespective of the KEYOPT(2) setting.
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element faces (edges) as shown by the circled numbers
in Figure 162.1. Positive normal pressures act into the element.
Other loads that can be applied using the EDLOAD command include base accelerations and angular
velocities in the x and y directions, and displacements and forces on rigid bodies.
Several types of temperature loading are also available for this element. See Temperature Loading in the
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_PLANE162.html[28/04/2013 08:30:03 p.m.]
PLANE162
The material models available to use with this element will depend on the KEYOPT(3) setting.
KEYOPT(3) controls whether the element is a plane stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric element. For all
three of these options (KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2), you can choose the following materials:
Isotropic Elastic
Orthotropic Elastic
Elastic Fluid
Viscoelastic
Bilinear Isotropic
Temperature Dependent Bilinear Isotropic
Bilinear Kinematic
Plastic Kinematic
Power Law Plasticity
Rate Sensitive Power Law Plasticity
Strain Rate Dependent Plasticity
Piecewise Linear Plasticity
Composite Damage
Johnson-Cook Plasticity
Bamman
For the plane stress option (KEYOPT(3) = 0), you can also choose the following materials:
3-Parameter Barlat Plasticity
Barlat Anisotropic Plasticity
Transversely Anisotropic Elastic Plastic
Transversely Anisotropic FLD
For the axisymmetric and plane strain options (KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2), you can also choose the following
materials:
Blatz-Ko Rubber
Mooney-Rivlin Rubber
Elastic-Plastic Hydrodynamic
Closed Cell Foam
Low Density Foam
Crushable Foam
Honeycomb
Null
PLANE162
Zerilli-Armstrong
Steinberg
PLANE162 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, VX, VY, AX, AY
Note: For explicit dynamic analyses, V(X, Y) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y)
refers to nodal acceleration. Although V(X, Y) and A(X, Y) appear as DOFs,
they are not actually physical DOFs. However, these quantities are computed
as DOF solutions and stored for postprocessing.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, PRXY or NUXY, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX),
DENS, GXY, DAMP (MP command),
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command),
BKIN, BISO, MOONEY, EVISC, PLAW, FOAM, HONEY, COMP, EOS (TB command; see Material
Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (L-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures (see Temperature Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
Special Features
KEYOPT(2)
Weighting option (used for axisymmetric elements, KEYOPT(3) = 1):
0--
Area weighted axisymmetric element
1--
Volume weighted axisymmetric element
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
PLANE162
Plane stress
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0)
KEYOPT(5)
Element continuum treatment:
0--
Lagrangian (default)
1--
ALE (Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian)
PLANE162 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table162.1:PLANE162 Element Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 162.2. The element stresses are output in terms of the global
Cartesian coordinate system by default. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Figure162.2PLANE162 Stress Output
You can rotate stress results for PLANE162 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.
However, RSYS cannot be used to rotate strain results for this element type.
Table162.1PLANE162 Element Output Definitions
Name
S(X, Y, XY)
S(1, 2, 3)
SINT
SEQV
Definition
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
PLANE162
EPTO(X, Y, XY)
EPTO(1, 2, 3)
EPTO(INT)
EPTO(EQV)
EPEL(X, Y, XY)
EPEL(1, 2, 3)
EPEL(INT)
EPEL(EQV)
EPPL(EQV)
Total strains
Total principle strains
Total strain intensity
Total equivalent strain
Elastic strains
Principle elastic strains
Elastic strain intensity
Equivalent elastic strain
Note: Stress and total strain are always available. Some components of stress and strain
(for example, yz and zx components) are always zero. The availability of elastic
strain and equivalent plastic strain depends on the material model used for the
element (see Element Output Data in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for details).
Table162.2:PLANE162 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The
following notation is used in Table162.2:PLANE162 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity
Item
E
Table162.2PLANE162 Item and Sequence Numbers
EPEQ (equivalent plastic strain)

Item
E
NMISC
PLANE162 Assumptions and Restrictions

The area of the element must be nonzero.
The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 162.1, and the Y-axis must be the
axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.
A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers (see Triangle,
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements).
PLANE162 Product Restrictions

PLANE162
SHELL163
SHELL163
Explicit Thin Structural Shell
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
SHELL163 Element Description

SHELL163 is a 4-node element with both bending and membrane capabilities. Both in-plane and normal
loads are permitted. The element has 12 degrees of freedom at each node: translations, accelerations,
and velocities in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z-axes.
more information.
Figure163.1SHELL163 Geometry
SHELL163 Input Data

The following real constants are provided for SHELL163. SHRF is the shear factor. NIP is the number of
integration points through the thickness of the element, up to a maximum of 100. If NIP is input as 0 or
blank, ANSYS defaults the value to 2. T1 - T4 indicate the shell thickness at each of the 4 nodes. NLOC
specifies the location of the reference surface for KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, or 7. The reference surface is used
in the formulation of the element stiffness matrix. (NLOC does not define the location of the contact
surface.) If you set NLOC = 1 or -1 (top or bottom surface), you must set SHNU = -2 on the EDSHELL
command.
ESOP is the option for the spacing of integration points, and can be either 0 or 1. ESOP is used only if
KEYOPT(4) > 0. If you set ESOP = 0, you must define real constants S(i), and WF(i) to define the
integration point locations. If KEYOPT(3) = 1, then you must also define BETA(i) and MAT(i) for each
integration point. Set ESOP = 1 if the integration points are equally spaced through the thickness such
that the shell is subdivided into NIP layers of equal thickness (up to 100 layers).
The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of the element, with the thickness input at the
4 nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) need be input. If the thickness is not
constant, all four thicknesses must be input.
If you set ESOP = 0 and define the integration points using S(i), and WF(i), and possibly BETA(i) and
MAT(i), note the following:
If KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, 7, or 11, then the thicknesses you define will remain defined through the
results determination.
If KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, or 12, then the ANSYS program overrides any thickness values
you specify and averages the thicknesses for the results determination.
S(i) is the relative coordinate of the integration point and must be within the range -1 to 1. WF(i) is the
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_SHELL163.html[28/04/2013 08:30:13 p.m.]
SHELL163
weighting factor for the i-th integration point. It is calculated by dividing the thickness associated with
the integration point by the actual shell thickness (that is, t i/t); see Figure 163.2. In the user defined
shell integration rule, the ordering of the integration points is arbitrary. If using these real constants to
define integration points, then S(i) and WF(i) must both be specified for each integration point
(maximum of 100). BETA(i) is the material angle (in degrees) at the i-th integration point and must be
specified for each integration point. The material model (BKIN, MKIN, MISO, etc.) is not allowed to
change within an element, although the material properties (EX, NUXY, etc.), as defined per MAT(i), can
change. However, the density may not vary through the thickness of the shell element. If more than one
material is used, and the densities vary between materials, the density of the material of the first layer
will be used for the entire element.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, the integration rule is defined by KEYOPT(2). The Gauss rule (KEYOPT(2) = 0) is valid
for up to five layers (integration points). The trapezoidal rule (KEYOPT(2) = 1) allows up to 100 layers,
but is not recommended for less than 20 layers, especially if bending is involved.
Figure163.2Arbitrary Ordering of Integration Points for User Defined Shell Integration
Rule
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide .
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element midsurfaces. Positive normal pressures act into
the element (that is, positive pressure acts in the negative z direction). Note, however, that pressure is
actually applied to the midsurface . See Figure 163.3.
Figure163.3Nodal Numbering for Pressure Loads (Positive Pressure Acts in Negative Z
Direction)
component. The load is then applied to that component. Each node in the component will have the
specified load.
SHELL163
For this element, you can choose from the following materials:
Isotropic Elastic
Orthotropic Elastic
Bilinear Kinematic
Plastic Kinematic
Blatz-Ko Rubber
Bilinear Isotropic
Composite Damage
Modified Piecewise Linear Plasticity
3-Parameter Barlat Plasticity
Transversely Anisotropic Elastic Plastic
Transversely Anisotropic FLD
Elastic Viscoplastic Thermal
Bamman
The orthotropic elastic material model does not accept integration point angles (BETA(i)). Therefore, to
model a composite material, you need to use the composite damage material model. If you do not wish
to use the damage features of this material model, just set the required strength values to zero.
KEYOPT(1) allows you to specify 1 of 12 element formulations for SHELL163 (see "SHELL163 Input
Summary"). A brief description about each element formulation follows:
The Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is based on a degenerated continuum
formulation. This formulation results in substantially large computational costs, but it is effective when
very large deformations are expected. This formulation treats warped configurations accurately but does
not pass the patch test. It uses one-point quadrature with the same hourglass control as the BelytschkoTsay.
SHELL163
The Belytschko-Tsay (default) element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2) is the fastest of the explicit
dynamics shells. It is based on the Mindlin-Reissner assumption, so transverse shear is included. It does
not treat warped configurations accurately, so it should not be used in coarse mesh models. One-point
quadrature is used with hourglass control. A default value is set for the hourglass parameter. When
hourglassing appears, you should increase this parameter to avoid hourglassing. It does not pass the
patch test.
The BCIZ Triangular Shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 3) is based on a Kirchhoff plate theory and
uses cubic velocity fields. Three sets of quadrature points are used in each element, so it is relatively
slow. It passes the patch test only when the mesh is generated from three sets of parallel lines.
The C0 Triangular Shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 4) is based on a Mindlin-Reissner plate
theory and uses linear velocity fields. One quadrature point is used in the element formulation. This
formulation is rather stiff, so it should not be used for constructing an entire mesh, only to transition
between meshes.
The Belytschko-Tsay membrane element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 5) is the same as the BelytschkoTsay but with no bending stiffness.
The S/R Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 6) is the same as the Hughes-Liu, but instead of
using one-point quadrature with hourglass control, this formulation uses selective reduced integration.
This increases the cost by a factor of 3 to 4, but avoids certain hourglass modes; certain bending
hourglass modes are still possible.
The S/R corotational Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is the same as the S/R HughesLiu except it uses the corotational system.
The Belytschko-Leviathan shell formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 8) is similar to the Belytschko-Wong-Chiang
with one-point quadrature but it uses physical hourglass control, thus no user-set hourglass control
parameters need to be set.
The fully-integrated Belytschko-Tsay membrane element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 9) is the same as
the Belytschko-Tsay membrane except is uses a 2 x 2 quadrature instead of a one-point quadrature.
This formulation is more robust for warped configurations.
The Belytschko-Wong-Chiang formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 10) is the same as the Belytschko-Tsay except
the shortcomings in warped configuration are avoided. Costs about 10% more.
The fast (corotational) Hughes-Liu formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 11) is the same as the Hughes-Liu except
this formulation uses the corotational system.
The fully-integrated Belytschko-Tsay shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 12) uses a 2 x 2
quadrature in the shell plane and is about 2.5 times slower than KEYOPT(1) = 2. It is useful in
overcoming hourglass modes. The shear locking is remedied by introducing an assumed strain for the
transverse shear.
Of the twelve shell element formulations, only KEYOPT(1) = 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 are valid for
an explicit-to-implicit sequential solution. For metal forming analyses, KEYOPT(1) = 10 and 12 are
recommended in order to properly account for warping.
When the Mooney-Rivlin Rubber material model is used with SHELL163 elements, the LS-DYNA code will
automatically use a total Lagrangian modification of the Belytschko-Tsay formulation instead of using the
formulation you specify via KEYOPT(1). This program-chosen formulation is required to address the
special needs of the hyperelastic material.
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL163 Input Summary". A general description of
SHELL163 Input Summary
SHELL163
Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Note: For explicit dynamic analyses, V(X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y,
Real Constants
SHRF, NIP, T1, T2, T3, T4,
NLOC, ESOP, BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), MAT(i)
(BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), MAT(i) may repeat for each integration point, depending on the keyoption
settings.)
Specify NLOC only if KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, 7, or 11.
See Table163.1:SHELL163 Real Constants for descriptions of the real constants.
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ,
PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
DENS, DAMP (MP command)
RIGID, HGLS (except KEYOPT(1) = 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 12), ORTHO (EDMP command)
PLAW, BKIN, BISO, COMPOSITE, MOONEY, EOS (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS
LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
Pressure (applied on midsurface)
Body Loads
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
1--
Hughes-Liu
0, 2--
Belytschko-Tsay (default)
3--
BCIZ triangular shell
4--
C0 triangular shell
SHELL163
5--
Belytschko-Tsay membrane
6--
S/R Hughes-Liu
7--
S/R corotational Hughes-Liu
8--
Belytschko-Levithan shell
9--
Fully integrated Belytschko-Tsay membrane
10--
Belytschko-Wong-Chiang
11--
Fast (corotational) Hughes-Liu
12--
Fully integrated Belytschko-Tsay shell
KEYOPT(2)
Quadrature rule (used for standard integration rules, KEYOPT(4) = 0):
0--
Gauss rule (up to five integration points are permitted)
1--
Trapezoidal rule (up to 100 integration points are permitted)
KEYOPT(3)
Flag for layered composite material mode:
0--
Non-composite material mode
1--
Composite material mode; a material angle is defined for each through thickness integration
point
KEYOPT(4)
Integration rule ID:
0--
SHELL163
Standard integration option

n--
User-defined integration rule ID (valid range is 1 to 9999; if selected, it overrides the
integration rule set by KEYOPT(2))
Table163.1SHELL163 Real Constants
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Description
SHRF
Shear factor
NIP
Suggested value: 5/6; if left blank, defaults to 1

T1
T2
T3
T4
NLOC
If input as 0 or blank, defaults to 2.

Shell thickness at node I
Shell thickness at node J
Shell thickness at node K
Shell thickness at node L
Location of reference surface
= 1, top surface
= 0, middle surface
= -1, bottom surface
ESOP
Used only if KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, or 7.

Option for the spacing of integration points:
0 - Integration points are defined using real constants S(i) and
WF(i).
9, 13, 17,... BETA(i)

405
10, 14, 18, S(i)
...
406
11,15, 19,
...
WF(i)
407
12, 16, 20, MAT(i)
...
1 - Integration points are equally spaced through the thickness

such that the shell is subdivided into NIP layers of equal thickness.
Material angle at the i-th integration point.[1]
Coordinate of integration point in the range -1 to 1.
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 100 max)[1]
Weighting factor; that is, the thickness associated with the
integration point divided by the actual shell thickness.
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 100 max)[1]
Material ID for each layer. [1]
408
1. If KEYOPT(3) = 1, then BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), and MAT(i) should be specified for each integration
point. For example, for 20 integration points, you would specify BETA(1), S(1), WF(1), MAT(1),
BETA(2), S(2), WF(2), MAT(2), ..., BETA(20), S(20), WF(20), MAT(20). If KEYOPT(3) = 0, then
only S(i) and WF(i) need to be specified. The material used will be that specified by the MAT
SHELL163
command.
SHELL163 Output Data

To store output data for this element, you must specify the number of output locations for which you
want data using the EDINT,SHELLIP command during solution. To review the stored data for a specified
layer, use the LAYER,NUM command. However, be aware that the output location for this data is
always at the integration point. "Top" and "bottom" refer to the top or bottom integration point, which is
not necessarily the top or bottom surface.
Stress data is always output from the bottom of the shell to the top. See Figure 163.2.
In all cases (default and otherwise), strain is always output for two layers only: Layer 1 = bottom and
layer 2 = top.
The number of integration points specified by real constant NIP controls the output locations through the
thickness of the shell. If NIP = SHELLIP, then each layer corresponds to an integration point, and those
are the locations where you will get output data. If NIP>SHELLIP, then data is output only at the
SHELLIP number of locations (first bottom layer, then layers 2 through n moving up from the bottom). If
NIP<SHELLIP (but NIP>2), then results are output only for NIP number of layers.
By default, the number of integration points (NIP) is 2, and the number of output locations/layers
(SHELLIP) is 3. In this case, stress data is output in the following order: Layer 1 = bottom, layer 2 =
middle, and layer 3 = top. When SHELLIP = 3, the middle layer will be an interpolated value if NIP is an
even number or an actual value at an integration point if NIP is an odd number.
If NIP = 1, the integration point is at the element midplane, and only one stress and one strain value
are output.
For elements with 2 x 2 integration points in the shell plane (KEYOPT(1) = 6, 7, 9, 12), LS-DYNA
performs an averaging of any data output at those points in every layer so that the output is the same
for all shell formulations.
For the default RSYS setting, strains (EPTO) and generalized stresses (M, T, N) are output in the
element coordinate system, and stresses (S) are output in the global Cartesian system for all
formulations associated with SHELL163, except the Hughes-Liu formulation. Strain output (EPTO) for the
Hughes-Liu formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is output in the global Cartesian system.
You can rotate stress results for this element into another coordinate system using the RSYS command.
However, RSYS has no effect on the stress results for composite SHELL163 elements (KEYOPT(3) = 1).
In addition, RSYS cannot be used to rotate strain results for any of the SHELL163 element formulations.
The following items are available in the results file.
Table163.2SHELL163 Element Output Definitions
Name
S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
S(1, 2, 3)
SINT
SEQV
EPTO(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
EPTO(1, 2, 3)
EPTO(INT)
EPTO(EQV)
EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
Definition
Stresses
Principle stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Total strain
Elastic strains
SHELL163
EPEL(1, 2, 3)
EPEL(INT)
EPEL(EQV)
EPPL(EQV)
M(X, Y, XY)
N(X. Y)
T(X, Y, XY)
Thick

Element X, Y, and XY moments
Out-of-plane X, Y shear
In-plane element X, Y, and XY forces
Element thickness
Note: Stress and total strain are always available. The availability of elastic strain and
equivalent plastic strain depends on the material model used for the element (see
Element Output Data in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for details).
Table163.3:SHELL163 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
following notation is used in Table163.3:SHELL163 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table163.2:SHELL163 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Table163.3SHELL163 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E

MX
MY
MXY
NX
NY
TX
TY
TXY
EPEQ (top)[1]
EPEQ (middle)[1], [2]
EPEQ (bottom)[1]
Thick[1]
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1. The sequence numbers for NMISC items in this table are based on the assumption that the
number of integration points for output (SHELLIP on the EDINT command) is set to the default
value of 3.
2. If the number of integration points (NIP) is even, the middle EPEQ value (NMISC,2) will be an
SHELL163
interpolated value.
The SMISC quantities in the above table are independent of layers (that is, you will get one set of SMISC
quantities output per element). However, the NMISC items are layer-dependent, and the order of the
NMISC items is dependent on the SHELLIP and NIP values. The order shown in the table corresponds to
the default SHELLIP value (SHELLIP = 3). If NIP > 3, it is strongly recommended that you set SHELLIP
= NIP. In this case, the ETABLE output will go from top (NMISC,1) to bottom (NMISC, nwhere n is the
total number of layers). If SHELLIP is not equal to NIP, the order of NMISC items will vary. Therefore,
you should not use ETABLE to access the NMISC items when NIP > 3 and SHELLIP is not equal to NIP.
SHELL163 Assumptions and Restrictions

Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most often whenever the elements are not
numbered properly.
Zero thickness elements or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner are not
allowed.
A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in
Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements. In this event, the C0 triangular shell element
(KEYOPT(1) = 4) will be used.
An assemblage of flat shell elements can produce a good approximation to a curved shell surface
provided that each flat element does not extend over more than a 15 arc.
SHELL163 Product Restrictions

ANSYS ED.
Composite material shell elements are not allowed. KEYOPT(3) defaults to 0.
SOLID164
SOLID164
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
SOLID164 Element Description

SOLID164 is used for the 3-D modeling of solid structures. The element is defined by eight nodes having
the following degrees of freedom at each node: translations, velocities, and accelerations in the nodal x,
y, and z directions.
more information.
Figure164.1SOLID164 Geometry
SOLID164 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes. Orthotropic material properties may be defined. Use the EDMP
command to specify an orthotropic material and the EDLCS command to define the orthotropic material
directions.
By default, SOLID164 uses reduced (one point) integration plus viscous hourglass control for faster
element formulation. A fully integrated solid formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2) is also available.
KEYOPT(5) defines the element continuum treatment. Two different formulations are available:
Lagrangian (default) and Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE). In addition to setting KEYOPT(5) = 1, you
must also set appropriate parameters on the EDALE and EDGCALE commands in order for the ALE
formulation to take affect. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's
Guide for more information. Some material models that are normally available for this element type are
not supported when the ALE formulation is used. See the material list below for details.
164.1. Positive normal pressures act into the element.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_SOLID164.html[28/04/2013 08:30:24 p.m.]
SOLID164

For this element, you can choose from the materials listed below. The material models marked by an
asterisk (*) are not supported by the ALE formulation (KEYOPT(5) = 1).
Isotropic Elastic
Orthotropic Elastic*
Anisotropic Elastic*
Bilinear Kinematic
Plastic Kinematic
Viscoelastic*
Blatz-Ko Rubber*
Bilinear Isotropic
Composite Damage*
Concrete Damage*
Geological Cap
Piecewise Linear Plasticity*
Honeycomb*
Mooney-Rivlin Rubber*
Closed Cell Foam*
Low Density Foam
Viscous Foam*
Crushable Foam
SOLID164
Null
Zerilli-Armstrong
Bamman*
Steinberg
Elastic Fluid
SOLID164 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Z) refers to nodal acceleration. AlthoughV (X, Y, Z) and A(X, Y, Z) appear as
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command)
ANEL, MOONEY, EVISC, BISO, BKIN, PLAW, FOAM, HONEY, COMPOSITE, CONCR, GCAP, EOS (TB
command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N), face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face
6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
0, 1--
Constant stress solid element (default)
2--
SOLID164
Fully integrated selectively-reduced solid

KEYOPT(5)
Element continuum treatment:
0--
Lagrangian (default)
1--
ALE (Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian)
SOLID164 Output Data

Output for SOLID164 is listed in Table164.1:SOLID164 Element Output Definitions. If you issue
PRNSOL, a single set of stress and a single set of strain values is output at all eight nodes; that is, you
will get the same sets of values at each node. If you issue PRESOL, you will get only a single set of
values at the centroid.
You can rotate stress results for SOLID164 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.
Table164.1SOLID164 Element Output Definitions
Name
S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
S(1, 2, 3)
SINT
SEQV
EPTO(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
EPTO(1, 2, 3)
EPTO(INT)
EPTO(EQV)
EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
EPEL(1, 2, 3)
EPEL(INT)
EPEL(EQV)
EPPL(EQV)
Definition
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Total strains
Elastic strains
SOLID164 Assumptions and Restrictions

Zero volume elements are not allowed.
The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs most
frequently when the element is not numbered properly.
SOLID164
The element must have eight nodes.

A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L and duplicate O and P node
numbers (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). A tetrahedron shape is also available.
When the degenerated elements are used, be careful in choosing the element formulations. For the
tetrahedron shape, SOLID168 should be considered instead.
SOLID164 Product Restrictions

COMBI165
COMBI165
Explicit Spring-Damper
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
COMBI165 Element Description

COMBI165 allows you to model simple spring or damper systems, as well as the response of more
complicated mechanisms such as the energy absorbers used in passenger vehicle bumpers. These
mechanisms are often experimentally characterized in terms of force-displacement curves. This element
provides a variety of discrete element formulations that can be used individually or in combination to
model complex force-displacement relations.
COMBI165 is a two-node, 1-D element. You cannot define both spring and damper properties for the
same element. Separate spring and damper elements are required, but they may use the same nodes
(that is, you can overlay two different COMBI165 elements). A COMBI165 element can be attached to
any of the other explicit elements.
more information.
Figure165.1COMBI165 Geometry
Both figures above show two COMBI165 elements (a spring and a damper) attached to the same two
nodes.
COMBI165 Input Data

The real constants K d to TDL are optional and do not need to be defined.
For example, if K d , the dynamic magnification factor, is nonzero, the forces computed from the spring
elements are assumed to be the static values and are scaled by an amplification factor to obtain the
dynamic value:
For example, if it is known that a component shows a dynamic crush force at 15m/s equal to 2.5 times
the static crush force, use K d = 1.5 and V0 = 15, where V0 is the test velocity.
Here, clearance (CL) defines a compressive displacement which the spring sustains before beginning the
force-displacement relation given by the load curve. If a nonzero clearance is defined, the spring is
compressive only.
The deflection limit in compression (CDL) and tension (TDL) is restricted in its application to no more
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_COMBI165.html[28/04/2013 08:30:36 p.m.]
COMBI165
than one spring per node subject to this limit, and to deformable bodies only. For example, in the
former case, if three springs are in series, either the center spring or the two end springs may be
subject to a limit, but not all three. When the limiting deflection (FD) is reached, momentum
conservation calculations are performed and a common acceleration is computed in the appropriate
direction. An error termination will occur if a rigid body node is used in a spring definition where
compression is limited.
For this element, you can choose from the following materials:
Linear Elastic Spring
Linear Viscous Damper
Elastoplastic Spring
Nonlinear Elastic Spring
Nonlinear Viscous Damper
General Nonlinear Spring
Maxwell Viscoelastic Spring
Inelastic Tension or Compression-Only Spring
A summary of the element input is given in "COMBI165 Input Summary". A general description of
COMBI165 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ (KEYOPT(1) = 0)
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ (KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Real Constants
Kd - Dynamic magnification factor,
Vo - Test velocity,
CL - Clearance,
FD - Failure deflection,
CDL - Deflection limit (compression),
TDL - Deflection limit (tension)
Material Properties
DAMP (MP command), DISCRETE (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide )
Surface Loads
None
COMBI165
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Spring/damper type (translational or torsional):
0--
The material describes a translational spring/damper
1--
The material describes a torsional spring/damper
COMBI165 Output Data

Output data for COMBI165 consists of the following:
Table165.1COMBI165 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity Name[1]
MFORX/MMOMX
MFORY/MMOMY
MFORZ/MMOMZ
MFORSUM/MMOMSUM

Description
Item
X-component of member force/moment
Y-component of member force/moment
Z-component of member force/moment
Vector sum of X, Y, and Z components of
member force/moment
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
Seq.
No.
1
2
3
4
1. You must specify either force or moment via KEYOPT(1). Note that you cannot specify both force
and moment.
MFOR: KEYOPT(1) = 0
MMOM: KEYOPT(1) = 1
To output the element data in POST1, you must use the ETABLE command. Then, you can use the
PRETAB command to print the output data. The RSYS command has no effect when postprocessing
output for this element.
In POST26, you can postprocess the element data using the ESOL command only when postprocessing
the Jobname.RST file. The element results are not available on the Jobname.HIS file.
COMBI165 Assumptions and Restrictions

The time step size calculation is approximated by using the instantaneous stiffness and one-half
the nodal mass of the nodes joined by the spring. If the global time step size is controlled by an
explicit spring-damper element, instabilities can develop with the default time step size due to the
approximations in the step size calculation.
When used to interconnect under-integrated elements, the explicit spring-damper can sometimes
COMBI165
excite the zero-energy hourglass modes.

To ensure that parts are uniquely defined when using COMBI165, specify a unique set of real
constants (R), the element type (ET), and the material properties (TB) for each part. Defining a
unique material number (MAT) alone is insufficient.
COMBI165 Product Restrictions

MASS166
MASS166
Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
MASS166 Element Description

MASS166 is a point element having up to nine degrees of freedom: translations, velocities, and
accelerations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Figure166.1MASS166 Geometry
MASS166 Input Data

The mass element is defined by a single node with concentrated mass components
(Force*Time 2 /Length) in the element coordinate directions about the element coordinate axes. The
element also has an option for rotary inertia (without mass) which allows the definition of lumped rotary
inertia at a defined nodal point. For the inertia option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), six polar moment of inertia
values must be input instead of mass. To include both mass and rotary inertia, you must define two
MASS166 elements at the same node.
A summary of the element input is given in "MASS166 Input Summary". A general description of element
MASS166 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
If KEYOPT(1) = 0:
MASS - Concentrated mass (Force*Time 2 /Length) (must be > 0)
If KEYOPT(1) = 1:
IXX - Moment of inertia (must be > 0),
IXY - Moment of inertia,
IXZ - Moment of inertia,
IYY - Moment of inertia (must be > 0),
IYZ - Moment of inertia,
MASS166
IZZ - Moment of inertia (must be > 0)

Material Properties
None, but you must define realistic dummy material properties to make this element behave
correctly.
Note: These dummy properties will not be used in any solution.
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Rotary inertia option:
0--
3-D mass without rotary inertia (default)
1--
3-D rotary inertia (no mass)
MASS166 Output Data

Nodal displacements are included in the overall displacement solution. There is no printed or post
element data output for the mass element.
MASS166 Assumptions and Restrictions

None.
MASS166 Product Restrictions

LINK167
LINK167
Explicit Tension-Only Spar
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

LINK167 allows elastic cables to be realistically modeled; thus, no force will develop in compression.
This element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only.
LINK167 Input Data

Node K determines the initial orientation of the cross section.
and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the length of the element and
through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it must not be
colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the element.
Real constants for this element are link area (AREA) and offset for cable (OFFSET). For a slack element,
the offset should be input as a negative value. For an initial tensile force, the offset should be positive.
The force, F , generated by the link is nonzero if and only if the link is in tension. The force is given by:
F = K max ( L,0.)
where L is the change in length
L = current length - (initial length - offset)

and the stiffness is defined as:
You can use only the material type cable for this element. For this material, you need to define the
density (DENS) and Young's modulus (EX) or load curve ID. If you specify a load curve ID
(EDMP,CABLE,VAL1, where VAL1 is the load curve ID), the Young's modulus will be ignored and the
load curve will be used instead. The points on the load curve are defined as engineering stress versus
engineering strain (that is, the change in length over the initial length). Use the EDCURVE command to
define the load curve ID. The unloading behavior follows the loading.
A summary of the element input is given in "LINK167 Input Summary". Additional information about real
constants for this element is provided in Table161.1:BEAM161 Real Constants. For more information
LINK167
about this element, see the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual.

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
OFFSET - Offset value for cable
Material Properties
EX (MP command) or Load Curve ID (EDMP command),
DENS (MP command),
DAMP (MP command),
CABLE (EDMP command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPTs
None
LINK167 Output Data

Output for LINK167 consists of the following: Axial force
To output the data, you must use the ETABLE command. For the ITEM label, specify SMISC. For the
COMP label, specify 1 for axial force. Then, you can use the PRETAB command to print the output
data.

The sum of the element length plus the offset must be greater than zero.
LINK167

SOLID168
SOLID168
Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

SOLID168 is a higher order 3-D, 10-node explicit dynamic element. It is well suited to modeling irregular
meshes such as those produced from various CAD/CAM systems. The element is defined by ten nodes
having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
By default, SOLID168 uses a quadratic displacement behavior with five point integration (KEYOPT(1) = 0
or 1). A composite formulation which is an assemblage of linear sub-tetrahedral shapes (KEYOPT(1) = 2)
is also available. This second formulation effectively overcomes the difficulty of lumped mass calculations
and volume locking inherent to the quadratic elements.
SOLID168 Input Data

The element is defined by ten nodes. Orthotropic material properties may be defined. Use the EDMP
command to specify an orthotropic material and the EDLCS command to define the orthotropic material
directions.
168.1. Positive normal pressures act into the element.
component. The load is then applied to that component. You can also use the EDLOAD command to
apply loads (displacements, forces, etc.) on rigid bodies.
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide . For this element, you can choose from the materials listed below.
Isotropic Elastic
Orthotropic Elastic
Anisotropic Elastic
Bilinear Kinematic
Plastic Kinematic
SOLID168
Viscoelastic
Blatz-Ko Rubber
Bilinear Isotropic
Composite Damage
Concrete Damage
Geological Cap
Honeycomb
Closed Cell Foam
Low Density Foam
Viscous Foam
Crushable Foam
Null
Zerilli-Armstrong
Bamman
Steinberg
Elastic Fluid

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
SOLID168
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX),
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command)
ANEL, MOONEY, EVISC, BISO, BKIN, PLAW,
FOAM, HONEY, COMPOSITE, CONCR, GCAP, EOS
(TB command; see "Material Models" in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide )
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (J-I-K), face 2 (I-J-L), face 3 (J-K-L), face 4 (K-I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
See Temperature Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
0, 1 --
Quadratic interpolation
2 --
Composite (assemblages of linear tetrahedral shapes)

Output for SOLID168 is listed in Table168.1:SOLID168 Element Output Definitions. If you issue
PRNSOL, a single set of stress and a single set of strain values is output at all ten nodes; that is, you
will get the same sets of values at each node. If you issue PRESOL, you will get only a single set of
values at the centroid.
You can rotate stress results for SOLID168 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.
SOLID168
Name
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
EPTO:1, 2, 3
EPTO:INT
EPTO:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:INT
EPEL:EQV
EPPL:EQV
Definition
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Total strains
Elastic strains
Principal elastic strains
Equivalent elastic strains
Equivalent plastic strains

The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs most
frequently when the element is not numbered properly.
The element must have ten nodes.

LINK180
LINK180
3-D Spar (or Truss)
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS


LINK180 is a spar that can be used in a variety of engineering applications. This element can be used to
model trusses, sagging cables, links, springs, etc. This 3-D spar element is a uniaxial tensioncompression element with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z
directions. Tension-only (cable) and compression-only (gap) options are supported. As in a pin-jointed
structure, no bending of the element is considered. Plasticity, creep, rotation, large deflection, and large
strain capabilities are included.
By default, LINK180 includes stress stiffness terms in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. Elasticity, isotropic
hardening plasticity, kinematic hardening plasticity, Hill anisotropic plasticity, Chaboche nonlinear
hardening plasticity, and creep are supported.
See LINK180 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
LINK180 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes, the cross-sectional area (AREA), added mass per unit length
(ADDMAS), and the material properties. The element X-axis is oriented along the length of the element
from node I toward node J.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Temperatures may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature T(J)
defaults to T(I).
LINK180 allows a change in cross-sectional area as a function of axial elongation. By default, the crosssectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved, even after deformation. The
default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you may choose to keep the cross
section constant or rigid.
LINK180 offers tension-only or compression-only options. You can specify the desired behavior via the
third real constant. (See "LINK180 Input Summary" for details.) A nonlinear solution procedure is
necessary for these options; for more information, see the documentation for the SOLCONTROL
command.
The "LINK180 Input Summary" table summarizes the element input. Element Input gives a general
LINK180
Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
ADDMAS - Added mass (mass/length)
TENSKEY - Tension- or compression-only option:
0 -- Tension and compression (default)
1 -- Tension only
-1 -- Compression only
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY or NUXY), ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL)
Viscoelasticity (PRONY, SHIFT)
Viscoplasticity/Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. See
Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis) for details of the material models.
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling (applies only if large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON] apply ):
0--
Enforce incompressibility; cross section is scaled as a function of axial stretch (default).
1--
Section is assumed to be rigid.
LINK180
LINK180 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table180.1:LINK180 Element Output Definitions.
Several items are illustrated in Figure 180.2. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Output. Element results can be viewed in POST1 with PRESOL,ELEM. See the Basic Analysis Guide for
details.
Figure180.2LINK180 Stress Output

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
REAL
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
AREA
FORCE
Sxx
EPELxx
EPTOxx
EPEQ
Cur.Yld.Flag
Plwk
Pressure
Creq
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I, J
Material number
Real constant number
Center location
Temperatures T(I), T(J)
Cross-sectional area
Member force in the element coordinate system
Axial stress
Axial elastic strain
Total strain
Plastic equivalent strain
Current yield flag
Plastic strain energy density
Hydrostatic pressure
Creep equivalent strain
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
2
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
2
2
LINK180
Crwk_Creep
EPPLxx
EPCRxx
EPTHxx
Creep strain energy density

Axial plastic strain
Axial creep strain
Axial thermal strain
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3

2. Available only if the element has an appropriate nonlinear material.
3. Available only if the element temperatures differ from the reference temperature.
The element printout also includes 'INT, SEC PTS' (which are always '1, Y Z' where Y and Z both have
values of 0.0). These values are printed to maintain formatting consistency with the output printouts of
the BEAM188, BEAM189, PIPE288, and PIPE289 elements.
Table180.2:LINK180 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The
Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in
Table180.2:LINK180 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table180.1:LINK180 Element Output Definitions
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE and
ESOL
E
I,J
Output Quantity
Name
Sxx
EPELxx
EPTOxx
EPTHxx
EPPLxx
EPCRxx
FORCE
AREA
TEMP
Item
LS
LEPEL
LEPTO
LEPTH
LEPPL
LEPCR
SMISC
SMISC
LBFE

E
I
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
J
2
2
2
2
2
2
-

The spar element assumes a straight bar, axially loaded at its ends, and of uniform properties from
LINK180
end to end.
The length of the spar must be greater than zero, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
The temperature is assumed to vary linearly along the length of the spar.
The displacement shape function implies a uniform stress in the spar.
To simulate the tension-/compression-only options, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is
necessary.

BEAM189
BEAM189
3-D 3-Node Beam


The BEAM189 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick beam structures. The
element is based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects. The element
provides options for unrestrained warping and restrained warping of cross-sections.
The element is a quadratic three-node beam element in 3-D. With default settings, six degrees of
freedom occur at each node; these include translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about
the x, y, and z directions. An optional seventh degree of freedom (warping magnitude) is available. The
element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large-strain nonlinear applications.
The element includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided
stress-stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability problems
(using eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear stabilization).
Elasticity, plasticity, creep and other nonlinear material models are supported. A cross-section associated
with this element type can be a built-up section referencing more than one material.
BEAM189 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

BEAM189 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, which is a first-order shear-deformation theory:
transverse-shear strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and
undistorted after deformation.
The element can be used for slender or stout beams. Due to the limitations of first-order sheardeformation theory, slender to moderately thick beams can be analyzed. Use the slenderness ratio of a
beam structure (GAL 2 /(EI)) to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
A
L
EI
BEAM189
Flexural rigidity
Calculate the ratio using some global distance measures, rather than basing it upon individual element
dimensions. The following illustration shows an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever
beam subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to any other application, the
example serves well as a general guideline. A slenderness ratio greater than 30 is recommended.
Figure189.2Transverse-Shear Deformation Estimation

25
50
100
1000
1.120
1.060
1.030
1.003
These elements support an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses using the SECCONTROLS
command.
BEAM189 does not use higher-order theories to account for variation in distribution of shear stresses.
Use solid elements if such effects must be considered.
BEAM189 supports restrained warping analysis by making available a seventh degree of freedom at
each beam node. By default, BEAM189 elements assume that the warping of a cross-section is small
enough that it may be neglected (KEYOPT(1) = 0). You can activate the warping degree of freedom by
using KEYOPT(1) = 1. With the warping degree of freedom activated, each node has seven degrees of
freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTZ, ROTY, and WARP. With KEYOPT(1) = 1, bimoment and bicurvature
are output.
Unlike other cubic (Hermitian) polynomial-based elements, BEAM189 is based on quadratic polynomials;
therefore, offsets in specification of distributed pressure loads are not allowed.BEAM189 has linear
bending-moment variation. Refinement of the mesh is recommended in order to accommodate such
loading. BEAM189 is computationally efficient and has super-convergence properties with respect to
mesh refinement. For example, the quadratic beam with a two point Gaussian integration is known to be
of same accuracy as a Hermitian element.
In practice, when two elements with "restrained warping" come together at a sharp angle, you need to
couple the displacements and rotations, but leave the out-of-plane warping decoupled. This is normally
accomplished by having two nodes at a physical location and using appropriate constraints. This process
is made easier (or automated) by the ENDRELEASE command, which decouples the out-of plane
warping for any adjacent elements with cross-sections intersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
BEAM189 allows change in cross-sectional inertia properties as a function of axial elongation. By default,
the cross-sectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved after deformation.
The default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you can choose to keep the
cross-section constant or rigid. Scaling is not an option for nonlinear general beam sections
(SECTYPE,,GENB).
For the mass matrix and evaluation of consistent load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that
used for stiffness matrix is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices.
Avoid using LUMPM,ON as BEAM189 is a higher-order element. Consistent mass matrix is used by
default. An added mass per unit length may be input with the ADDMAS section controls. See "BEAM189
Input Summary".
BEAM189
The St. Venant warping functions for torsional behavior are determined in the undeformed state, and
are used to define shear strain even after yielding. No options are available for recalculating in deformed
configuration the torsional shear distribution on cross-sections during the analysis and possible partial
plastic yielding of cross-sections. As such, large inelastic deformation due to torsional loading should be
treated and verified with caution. Under such circumstances, alternative modeling using solid or shell
elements is recommended.
BEAM189 Input Data

Figure 189.1. BEAM189 is defined by nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system.
Node L is a preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
Meshing Guide . Also, see Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the same manual for the use of midside
nodes. See the LMESH and LATT command descriptions for details on generating the L node
automatically. For a description of the low-order beam, see BEAM188.
The element can also be defined without the orientation node L. In this case, the element x-axis is
oriented from node I (end 1) toward node J (end 2). When no orientation node is used, the default
orientation of the element y-axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. For
the case where the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the
element y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). For user control of the element
orientation about the element x-axis, use the L node option. If both are defined, the orientation node
option takes precedence. The orientation node L, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the
element x and z-axes (as shown). If using this element in a large-deflection analysis, be aware that the
location of the orientation node L is used only to initially orient the element.
The number of degrees of freedom depends on the value of KEYOPT(1). When KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the
default), six degrees of freedom occur at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z
directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, a seventh degree of
freedom (warping magnitude) is also considered.
The element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. (See Beam Analysis and Cross-Sections in the
Structural Analysis Guide for details.) A section is associated with the beam elements by specifying the
section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent attribute. In addition to a constant
cross-section, you can also define a tapered cross-section by using the TAPER option on the SECTYPE
command. (For more information, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM189 ignores any real constant data beginning with Release 6.0. See SECCONTROLS command for
defining the transverse-shear stiffness, and added mass.
A summary of the element input follows in "BEAM189 Input Summary".
BEAM189 Cross-Sections
BEAM189 can be associated with these cross-section types:
Standard library section types or user meshes which define the geometry of the beam crosssection (SECTYPE,,BEAM). The material of the beam is defined either as an element attribute
(MAT), or as part of section buildup (for multi-material cross-sections).
Generalized beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), where the relationships of generalized
stresses to generalized strains are input directly.
Tapered beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,TAPER), where a standard library section or user mesh
defines each end of the beam.
Standard Library Sections
BEAM189
BEAM189 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically at
a number of section points using SECTYPE and SECDATA. Each section is assumed to be an assembly
of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points and
each can be associated with an independent material type.
Figure189.3Cross-Section Cells
The number of cells in the cross-sections influences the accuracy of section properties and ability to
model nonlinear stress-strain relationship through the cross-section. The element has a nested structure
of integration (along the length and in the cross-section).
When the material associated with the elements has inelastic behavior or when the temperature varies
across the section, constitutive calculations are performed at the section integration points. For more
common elastic applications, the element uses precalculated properties of the section at the element
integration points. However, the stresses and strains are calculated in the output pass at the section
nodes.
If the section is assigned the subtype ASEC, only the generalized stresses and strains (axial force,
bending moments, transverse shears, curvatures, and shear strains) are available for output. 3-D
contour plots and deformed shapes are not available. The ASEC subtype is displayed only as a thin
rectangle to verify beam orientation. BEAM189 treats ASEC as a section type with just one cross-section
integration point.
BEAM189 is helpful for analyzing built-up beams, (that is, those fabricated of two or more pieces of
material joined together to form a single, solid beam). The pieces are assumed to be perfectly bonded
together; therefore, the beam behaves as a single member.
The multi-material cross-section capability is applicable only where the assumptions of a beam behavior
(Timoshenko or Bernoulli-Euler beam theory) holds.
In other words, what is supported is a simple extension of a conventional Timoshenko beam theory. It
may be used in applications such as:
bimetallic strips
beams with metallic reinforcement
sensors where layers of a different material has been deposited
BEAM189 does not account for coupling of bending and twisting at the section stiffness level. The
transverse shears are also treated in an uncoupled manner. This may have a significant effect on layered
composite and sandwich beams if the lay-up is unbalanced.
BEAM189
Always validate the application of BEAM189, either with experiments or other numerical analysis. Use the
restrained warping option with built-up sections after due verification.
file).
Generalized Beam Cross-Sections
When using nonlinear general beam sections, neither the geometric properties nor the material is
explicitly specified. Generalized stress implies the axial force, bending moments, torque, and transverseshear forces. Similarly, generalized strain implies the axial strain, bending curvatures, twisting curvature,
and transverse-shear strains. (For more information, see nonlinear general beam sections.) This is an
abstract method for representing cross-section behavior; therefore, input often consists of experimental
data or the results of other analyses.
Generally, BEAM189 supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverseshear strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS
command.
When the beam element is associated with a generalized beam (SECTYPE,,GENB) cross-section type,
the relationship of transverse-shear force to the transverse-shear strain can be nonlinear elastic or
plastic, an especially useful capability when flexible spot welds are modeled. In such a case, the
SECCONTROLS command does not apply.
Tapered Beam Cross-Sections
A linearly tapered beam is defined by specifying a standard library section or user mesh at each end of
the beam The section geometries are specified at global coordinates, then linear interpolated and
evaluated at the element. The sections at the end points must be topologically identical. (For more
information, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM189 Loads
Forces are applied at the nodes (which also define the element x-axis). If the centroidal axis is not
colinear with the element x-axis, applied axial forces will cause bending. Applied shear forces will cause
torsional strains and moment if the centroid and shear center of the cross-section are different. The
nodes should therefore be located at the points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY
and OFFSETZ arguments of the SECOFFSET command appropriately.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on
the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 189.1. Positive normal pressures act into
the element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
At both ends of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:
At one unit from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(1,0))
At one unit from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,1))
Element locations (T(y,z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 189.1.
For beam elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of
values, 1 through 6 for temperatures T I(0,0), T I(1,0), T I(0,1), T J (0,0), T J (1,0), and T J (0,1). This input
can be used to specify temperature gradients that vary linearly both over the cross section and along
the length of the element.
BEAM189

defaults to TUNIF.)
(BF,NODE ,TEMP, VAL1 ). When using a nodal body load to define a temperature, a uniform temperature is
applied over the cross section at the specified node. (BF command input is not accepted at node K.)

Nodes
I, J, K, L (the orientation node L is optional but recommended)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Section Controls
TXZ, TXY, ADDMAS (see SECCONTROLS)
(TXZ and TXY default to A*GXZ and A*GXY, respectively, where A = cross-sectional area)
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY,or NUXY), GXY, GXZ
ALPX, (or CTEX, or THSX)
DENS, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressure--
--I and J denote the end nodes.
Issue the SFBEAM command to specify surface loads.
Distributed pressure offsets are not available for faces 1, 2, and 3.
BEAM189
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(0,0), T(1,0), T(0,1) at each end node
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death (requires KEYOPT(11) = 1)
Generalized cross-section (nonlinear elastic, elasto-plastic, temperature-dependent)
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Warping degree of freedom:
0--
Six degrees of freedom per node, unrestrained warping (default)
1--
Seven degrees of freedom per node (including warping). Bimoment and bicurvature are
output.
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling:
0--
Cross-section is scaled as a function of axial stretch (default); applies only if NLGEOM,ON
has been invoked
1--
Section is assumed to be rigid (classical beam theory)
KEYOPT(4)
0--
BEAM189
Output only torsion-related shear stresses (default)

1--
2--
Output a combined state of the previous two types.
KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(7), and KEYOPT(9)
Active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(6)
0--
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures at integration points along the length
(default)
1--
2--
3--
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(7)
Output control at section integration point (not available when section subtype = ASEC):
0--
None (default)
1--
2--
Same as KEYOPT(7) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section point
KEYOPT(9)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes (not available when
section subtype = ASEC):
0--
None (default)
1--
BEAM189

2--
3--
KEYOPT(11)
Set section properties:
0--
Automatically determine if preintegrated section properties can be used (default)
1--
Use numerical integration of section
KEYOPT(12)
Tapered section treatment:
0--
Linear tapered section analysis; cross-section properties are evaluated at each Gauss point
(default). This is more accurate, but computationally intensive.
1--
Average cross-section analysis; for elements with tapered sections, cross-section properties
are evaluated at the centroid only. This is an approximation of the order of the mesh size;
however, it is faster.
KEYOPT(15)
0--
1--
excessive. This option is typically useful for built-up sections with multiple materials only.)
BEAM189 Output Data

Additional element output as described in Table189.1:BEAM189 Element Output Definitions
To view 3-D deformed shapes for BEAM189, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for
static or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, you
BEAM189
must expand the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc =
YES option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in beam design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
bending in each direction separately; therefore, BEAM189 provides a linearized stress output as part of
SByT and SByB are bending stress components.
SBzT = My * z max / Iyy
SBzB = My * z min / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16). Coordinates ymax , ymin , z max , and
z min are the maximum and minimum y, z coordinates in the cross-section measured from the centroid.
Values Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia of the cross-section. Except for the ASEC type of beam crosssection, the program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section dimensions. For the ASEC type of
cross-section, the maximum and minimum in each of y and z direction is assumed to be +0.5 to -0.5,
respectively.
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELBYT = -Kz * ymax
EPELBYB = -Kz * ymin
EPELBZT = Ky * z max
EPELBZB = Ky * z min
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. BEAM189 always employs
with nonlinear materials, the component stresses may at best be regarded as linearized approximations
available.
Name
Definition
BEAM189
EL
NODES
MAT
C.G.:X, Y, Z
Area
SF:y, z
SE:y, z
S:xx, xy, xz
EPEL:xx, xy, xz
EPTO:xx, xy, xz
EPTT:xx, xy, xz
EPPL:xx, xy, xz
EPCR:xx, xy, xz
EPTH:xx
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:EPEQ
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
TQ
TE
Ky, Kz
Ex
Fx
My, Mz
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
EPELDIR
EPELByT
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
Element number
Material number
Elastic strains
EPCR)
Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR +
EPTH)
Plastic work
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
2
2
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
-
Y
Y
Y
4
4
4
4
4
4
Torsional moment
Torsional strain
Curvature
Axial strain
Axial force
Bending moments
Warping bimoment
Warping bicurvature
Axial direct stress
Bending stress on the element +Y side of the beam
Bending stress on the element -Y side of the beam
Bending stress on the element +Z side of the beam
Bending stress on the element -Z side of the beam
Bending strain on the element +Y side of the beam.
Bending strain on the element -Y side of the beam.
Bending strain on the element +Z side of the beam.
Bending strain on the element -Z side of the beam.
Temperatures at all section corner nodes.
State variables
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
6
1. See KEYOPT(6) description
BEAM189
2. See KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(9) descriptions

3. See KEYOPT(1) description
5. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI command is used.
6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and TB,STATE command are used.
More output is described via the PRESOL command in POST1.
Table189.2:BEAM 189 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via ETABLE using the
and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. Table189.2:BEAM 189 Item and
Sequence Numbers uses the following notation:
Name
Item
I,J
Table189.2BEAM 189 Item and Sequence Numbers
Fx
My
Mz
TQ
SFz
SFy
Ex
Ky
Kz
TE
SEz
SEy
Area
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT

Item
I
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
27
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
28
31
32
33
34
30
36
37
38
39
BEAM189
SBzB
EPELDIR
EPELByT
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
S:xx, xy, xz
EPEL:xx,xz,xy
EPTH:xx
EPPL:xx,xz,xy
EPCR:xx,xz,xy
EPTO:xx, xy, xz
EPTT:xx, xy, xz
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
LS
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPPL
LEPCR
LEPTO
LEPTT
35
41
42
43
44
45
51-53
CI[1],
CI[1],
AI[3],
CI[1],
CI[1],
CI[1],
CI[1],
DI[2]
DI[2]
BI[4]
DI[2]
DI[2]
DI[2]
DI[2]
40
46
47
48
49
50
54-56
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
AJ[3],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
CJ[1],
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
BJ[4]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
DJ[2]
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes (section
corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. CI and
CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, CI
and CJ are given as follows:
CI = ( nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
CJ = ( nnMax + nn - 1) * 3 + COMP
component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can be visualized
with SECPLOT,,6.
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section
integration points (section integration points where results are available), respectively at
element Node I and J. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith
integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = ( nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
DJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can be visualized with
SECPLOT,,7.
3. AI and AJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element thermal
strain quantities LEPTH at RST section nodes (section corner nodes where results are
available), at element Node I and J respectively. AI and AJ are applicable only when
KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, AI and AJ are given as follows:
AI = nn
AJ = nnMax + nn
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes. Locations of RST section nodes
can be visualized with SECPLOT,,6.
4. BI and BJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
thermal strain quantities LEPTH at RST section integration points (section integration
BEAM189
points where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. BI and BJ are
applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in
section cell nc, BI and BJ are given as follows:
BI = ( nc - 1) * 4 + i
BJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 4 + i
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells. Locations of RST section cells can
For more usage details, see Plot and Review the Section Results and Sample Problem with Cantilever
Beams, Command Method.

The BEAM189 formulation is based on three stress components:
one axial
two shear stress
The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. BEAM189 is based on first-order sheardeformation theory, also popularly known as Timoshenko beam theory. The transverse-shear strain is
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. The
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear-stress distribution coefficients across the beam
cross-section, and made available for output purposes. By default, the program outputs only the shear
stresses caused by torsional loading. Use KEYOPT(4) to activate output of shear stresses caused by
The accuracy of transverse-shear distribution is directly proportional to the mesh density of cross-section
modeling (for determination of warping, shear center and other section geometric properties). The
traction-free state at the edges of a cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the crosssection.
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear-center determination. The default
captured very accurately. Increasing cross-section mesh size does not imply larger computational cost if
the associated material is linear. Use the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands to adjust cross-section
mesh density.

The beam must not have zero length.
By default (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the effect of warping restraint is assumed to be negligible.
Cross-section failure or folding is not accounted for.
Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if node-location offsets
are present.
The element allows curved member definition and linear-bending-moment variation. However, if a
cubic representation for lateral displacement is necessary and the members are initially straight,
ANSYS, Inc. recommends using BEAM188 with the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
BEAM189
The element includes the effects of transverse shear and accounts for the initial curvature of the
beams.
Only moderately "thick" beams can be analyzed. See the "BEAM189 Element Technology and
Usage Recommendations" section for more information.
When the element is associated with nonlinear general beam sections (SECTYPE,,GENB),
additional restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Nonlinear General
Beam Sections.

ANSYS Professional.
PIPE288
PIPE288
3-D 2-Node Pipe
PIPE288 Element Description

The PIPE288 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick pipe structures. The
element is based on Timoshenko beam theory. Shear-deformation effects are included.
PIPE288 is a linear, quadratic, or cubic two-node pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of
freedom at each node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z
directions). The element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear
applications.
PIPE288 includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided
Elasticity, hyperelasticity, plasticity, creep, and other nonlinear material models are supported. Internal
fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and hydrodynamic and
buoyant loading are available.
Figure288.1PIPE288 Geometry
PIPE288 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

PIPE288 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, a first-order shear-deformation theory. Transverse-shear
strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and undistorted after
deformation.
The element can be used for slender or stout pipes. Due to the limitations of first-order sheardeformation theory, only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. The slenderness ratio of a pipe
structure (GAL 2 / (EI) ) can be used to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
A
L
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_PIPE288.html[28/04/2013 08:32:03 p.m.]
PIPE288
EI
Flexural rigidity
For pipes, (GAL 2 / EI) can be reduced to: 2L2 / ((1 + ) (R o 2 + Ri2 )), or for thin-walled pipes: L2 / ((1
+ ) R2 ), where = Poisson's ratio, Ro = outer radius, Ri = inner radius, and R = average radius.
The following illustration provides an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever pipe
subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to other applications, the example
serves generally. ANSYS, Inc. recommends a slenderness ratio greater than 30.
Figure288.2Transverse-Shear-Deformation Estimation

25
50
100
1000
1.120
1.060
1.030
1.003
The PIPE288 element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverseshear strains.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 (linear, default), PIPE288 is based on linear shape functions. It uses one point of
integration along the length; therefore, all element solution quantities are constant along the length. For
example, when SMISC quantities are requested at nodes I and J, the centroidal values are reported for
both end nodes. This option is recommended if the element is used as stiffener and it is necessary to
maintain compatibility with a first-order shell element (such as SHELL181). Only constant bending
moments can be represented exactly with this option. Mesh refinement is generally required in typical
applications.
When KEYOPT(3) = 2 (quadratic), PIPE288 has an internal node in the interpolation scheme, effectively
making this a beam element based on quadratic shape functions. Two points of integration are used,
resulting in linear variation of element solution quantities along the length. Linearly varying bending
moments are represented exactly.
When KEYOPT(3) = 3 (cubic), PIPE288 has two internal nodes and adopts cubic shape functions.
Quadratically varying bending moments are represented exactly. Three points of integration along the
length are used, resulting in quadratic variation of element solution quantities along the length. Unlike
typical cubic (Hermitian) formulations, cubic interpolation is used for all displacements and rotations.
In general, the more complex the element, the fewer elements are needed. Quadratic and cubic options
are recommended when higher-order element interpolations are desired in situations where:
Nonuniform loads (including tapered distributed loads) exist within the element; in this case, the
cubic option gives superior results over the quadratic option.
(For partially distributed loads and non-nodal point loads, only the cubic option is valid.)
The element may undergo highly nonuniform deformation (for example, when individual frame
members in civil engineering structures are modeled with single elements).
PIPE288 supports both the thin-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 1) and the thick-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 2) options. The
thin-pipe option assumes a plain stress state in the pipe wall and ignore the stress in the wall thickness
PIPE288
direction. The thick-pipe option accounts for the full 3-D stress state and generally leads to more
accurate results in thick-walled pipes where through-the-thickness stress can be significant. The element
allows change in cross-sectional area in large-deflection analysis. While the thick-pipe option can
accurately determine the cross-section area change from the actual material constitutive properties, the
thin-pipe option calculates the approximate area change based on a simple material incompressibility
assumption.
Two limitations are associated with the quadratic and cubic options in PIPE288:
Although the elements employ higher-order interpolations, the initial geometry of PIPE288 is
treated as straight.
Because the internal nodes are inaccessible, no boundary/loading/initial conditions are allowed on
these internal nodes.
As a result of the limitations associated with the quadratic and cubic options, you will notice
discrepancies in the results between PIPE289 and the quadratic option of PIPE288 if the midside nodes
of the PIPE289 model have specified boundary/loading/initial conditions and/or the midside nodes are
not located exactly at the element midpoint. Similarly, the cubic option of PIPE288 may not be identical
to a traditional cubic (Hermitian) beam element.
For the mass matrix and load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that used for stiffness matrix
is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices. The LUMPM,ON
command activates lumped mass matrix. Consistent mass matrix is the default behavior. You can add
mass per unit length using the SECCONTROLS command's ADDMAS values. See "PIPE288 Input
Summary".
When ocean loading is applied (SOCEAN), the loading is nonlinear (that is, based on the square of the
relative velocity between the structure and the water). Accordingly, the full Newton-Raphson option
(NROPT,FULL) may be necessary to achieve optimal results. (Full Newton-Raphson is applied
automatically in an analysis involving large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON].)
PIPE288 Input Data

Figure 288.1. PIPE288 is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system. If ocean loading is
present, the global origin must be at the mean sea level, with the global Z-axis pointing away from the
center of the earth.
Because the section is round, the element orientation is important only for defining offsets and
temperatures, and interpreting bending moment directions and stress locations.
Node K is the preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
automatically.
PIPE288 can also be defined without the orientation node. The element x-axis is oriented from node I
toward node J. When no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the element y-axis is
automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. If the element is parallel to the global Zaxis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis. To
control the element orientation about the element x-axis, use the orientation-node option. If both are
defined, the orientation-node option takes precedence. The orientation node K, if used, defines a plane
(with I and J) containing the element x and z-axes (as shown). If this element is used in a largedeflection analysis, the location of the orientation node K only initially orients the element.
The pipe element is a one-dimensional line elements in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. A section is associated with the pipe elements
by specifying the section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
PIPE288
PIPE288 Cross-Sections
PIPE288 can be associated only with the pipe cross-section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). The material of the pipe
is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
PIPE288 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically at
a number of section points via the SECDATA command. Each section is assumed to be an assembly of
a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points.
Section integration points and section corner nodes are shown in Figure 288.3.
Figure288.3Typical Cross-Section Cell
file).
Section Flexibility
To apply section flexibility factors, use the SFLEX command. The command is valid only for linear
material properties and small strain analyses, and does not support offsets, temperature loading, or
initial state loading.
PIPE288 Loads
Internal fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and
hydrodynamic and buoyant loading, are available via the SOCEAN, OCDATA, and OCTABLE
commands. See the SECCONTROLS command for defining added mass.
Forces are applied at the nodes I and J. If the centroidal axis is not colinear with the element x-axis
because of offsets, applied axial forces will cause bending. The nodes should therefore be located at the
desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments of the
SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program uses the centroid as the reference axis
for the pipe elements.
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 288.1. Lateral pressures are input as force per
unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
On the first and second faces, pressures are the internal and external pressures, respectively.
The pressure input on the third face is the global Z coordinate location of the free surface of the fluid
internal to the pipe. This pressure is used only for the mass and pressure effect. If this value is zero, no
PIPE288
fluid inside of the pipe is considered. If the internal fluid free surface should be at Z = 0, use a very
small number instead. The free surface location is stepped, even if you issue a KBC,0 command.
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, temperatures can be input as element body loads at the inner and outer surfaces
at both ends of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly through the wall thickness. If
only two temperatures are specified, those two temperatures are used at both ends of the pipe element
(that is, there is no gradient along the length). If only the first temperature is specified, all others
default to the first. The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 0:
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both
nodes of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly in the element y and z directions. At
either end of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:
At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(R o ,0))
At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,R o ))
The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 1:
Element locations (T(Y,Z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 288.1.
For pipe elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
1 through 6 for temperatures T I(0,0), T I(1,0), T I(0,1), T J (0,0), T J (1,0), and T J (0,1). This input can be
used to specify temperature gradients that vary linearly both over the cross section and along the length
of the element.
defaults to TUNIF.)
(BF,NODE ,TEMP, VAL1 ). This specifies a uniform temperature over the cross section at the specified node.
PIPE288
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
PIPE288 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (an optional orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Section Information
Accessed via SECTYPE,,PIPE and SECDATA commands.
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ),
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressure--
face 1 - Internal pressure
face 2 - External pressure
face 3 - Height of free surface of fluid on inside of pipe
--I and J denote end nodes.
Input pressure values for faces 1, 2, and 3 via the SFE command. Input pressure values for
faces 4 through 8 via the SFBEAM command.
For faces 4, 5, and 6, offsets apply only if you are using the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
Body Loads
Temperatures--
TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 0.
TAVG(I), T y (I), T z(I), TAVG(J), T y (J), T z(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 1.
Special Features
Hyperelasticity (AHYPER, ANEL, BB, CDM, ELASTIC, HYPER) [1]
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Ocean loading
PIPE288
Linear perturbation
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0--
Through wall gradient
1--
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(3)
Shape functions along the length:
0--
Linear
2--
Quadratic
3--
Cubic
KEYOPT(4)
Hoop strain treatment
1--
Thin pipe theory
2--
Thick pipe theory
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0--
Internal and external pressures cause loads on end caps
1--
PIPE288
Internal and external pressures do not cause loads on end caps

KEYOPT(7), KEYOPT(9), KEYOPT(11), and KEYOPT(12)
Active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(7)
0--
Output section forces/moments, strains/curvatures, internal and external pressures, effective
tension, and maximum hoop stress (default)
1--
2--
3--
tension, and maximum hoop stress extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(8)
0--
Output a combined state of the following two types (default)
1--
Output only torsion-related shear stresses
2--
KEYOPT(9)
Output control at integration points:
0--
None (default)
1--
2--
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section node
KEYOPT(11)
PIPE288
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes:
0--
None (default)
1--
2--
3--
KEYOPT(12)
Hydrodynamic output:
0--
None (default)
1--
Additional centroidal hydrodynamic printout
KEYOPT(15)
0--
1--
excessive.)
PIPE288 Output Data

Additional element output as described in Table288.1:PIPE288 Element Output Definitions
For ways to view results, see the Basic Analysis Guide .
To view 3-D deformed shapes for PIPE288, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the
modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in pipe design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
PIPE288
bending in each direction separately; therefore, PIPE288 provides a linearized stress output as part of its
SMISC output record, as indicated in the following definitions:
SByT = -Mz * R0 / I
SByB = Mz * R0 / I
SBzT = My * R0 / I
SBzB = -My * R0 / I
where My, Mz are bending moments in the beam coordinate system (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16) as
shown in Figure 288.1, R0 is the outside radius, and I is the moment of inertia of the cross-section. The
program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section dimensions.
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELByT = -Kz * R0
EPELByB = Kz * R0
EPELBzT = Ky * R0
EPELBzB = -Ky * R0
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. PIPE288 always employs
available.
For the stress and strain components, X refers to axial, Y refers to hoop, and Z refers to radial.
Table288.1PIPE288 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
Definition
Element number
Material number
O
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
PIPE288
C.G.:X, Y, Z
Area
S:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPTO:x,y,z xy, yz, xz

Elastic strains

EPCR)
EPTT:x,y,z xy, yz, xz Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR +
EPTH)
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz, Section point plastic strains
xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz, Section point creep strains
xz
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz, Section point thermal strains
xz
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
Plastic work
NL:EPEQ
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
TQ
Torsional moment
TE
Torsional strain
SFy, SFz
SEy, SEz
Ky, Kz
Curvature
Ex
Axial strain
Fx
Axial force
My, Mz
Bending moments
INT PRESS
Internal pressure at integration point
EXT PRESS
External pressure at integration point
EFFECTIVE TENS
Effective tension on pipe
MAX HOOP STRESS Maximum hoop stress at integration point
SDIR
Axial direct stress
SByT
Bending stress on the element +Y side of the pipe
SByB
Bending stress on the element -Y side of the pipe
SBzT
Bending stress on the element +Z side of the pipe
SBzB
Bending stress on the element -Z side of the pipe
EPELDIR
EPELByT
Bending strain on the element +Y side of the pipe
EPELByB
Bending strain on the element -Y side of the pipe
EPELBzT
Bending strain on the element +Z side of the pipe
EPELBzB
Bending strain on the element -Z side of the pipe
TEMP
Temperatures at all section corner nodes
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
State variables
Y
2
3
3
1
Y
Y
Y
4
4
4
4
4
4
Y
Y
2
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
2
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
6
PIPE288
The following values apply to ocean loading only:

GLOBAL COORD
Element centroid location
VR, VZ
Radial and vertical fluid particle velocities (VR is always
> 0)
AR, AZ
Radial and vertical fluid particle accelerations
PHDYN
Dynamic fluid pressure head
ETA
Wave amplitude over integration point
TFLUID
Fluid temperature (printed if VISC is nonzero)
VISC
Viscosity (output if VISC is nonzero)
REN, RET
Normal and tangential Reynolds numbers (if VISC is
nonzero)
CT
Input tangential drag coefficients evaluated at Reynolds
numbers
CDY, CDZ
Input normal drag coefficients evaluated at Reynolds
numbers
CMY, CMZ
Input inertia coefficients evaluated at Reynolds numbers
URT, URN
Tangential (parallel to element axis) and normal relative
velocities
ABURN
Vector sum of normal (URN) velocities
AN
Accelerations normal to element
FX, FY, FZ
Hydrodynamic tangential and normal forces in element
coordinates
ARGU
Effective position of wave (radians)
7
7
Y
Y
7
7
7
7
7
7
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
7
7
Y
Y
7
7
7
Y
Y
Y
1. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item, or on the NMISC record for ocean
loading.
5. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI is used.
6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and the TB,STATE command are used.
More output is described via the PRESOL command in the POST1 postprocessor.
Table288.2:PIPE288 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available for the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table for more information. The output tables use the following
notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table288.1:PIPE288 Element Output Definitions
Item
E,I,J
PIPE288
sequence number for data at nodes E, I and J

Table288.2PIPE288 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity
Name
Fx
My
Mz
TQ
SFz
SFy
Ex
Ky
Kz
TE
SEz
SEy
Area
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
EPELDIR
EPELByT
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
INT PRESS [1]
EXT PRESS [1]
EFFECTIVE TENS [1]
MAX HOOP STRESS [1]
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
The following output
GLOBAL COORD
Item

E
I
SMISC
-1
SMISC
-2
SMISC
-3
SMISC
-4
SMISC
-5
SMISC
-6
SMISC
-7
SMISC
-8
SMISC
-9
SMISC
-10
SMISC
-11
SMISC
-12
SMISC
-13
SMISC
-27
SMISC
-28
SMISC
-31
SMISC
-32
SMISC
-33
SMISC
-34
SMISC
-35
SMISC
-41
SMISC
-42
SMISC
-43
SMISC
-44
SMISC
-45
SMISC
-51-53
SMISC
-61
SMISC
-62
SMISC
-63
SMISC
-64
LS
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPEL
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTH
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPPL
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPCR
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTO
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTT
-CI[2], DI[3]
quantities are valid for ocean loading only:
NMISC
1, 2, 3
--
J
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
30
36
37
38
39
40
46
47
48
49
50
54-56
65
66
67
68
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
--
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
PIPE288
VR, VZ
AR, AZ
PHDYN
ETA
TFLUID
VISC
REN, RET
CT
CDY, CDZ
CMY, CMZ
URT, URN
ABURN
AN
FX, FY, FZ
ARGU
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
4, 5
6, 7
8
9
10
11
12, 13
14
15, 16
17, 18
19, 20, 21
22
23, 24
25, 26, 27
28
----------------
----------------
1. Internal pressure (INT PRESS), external pressure (EXT PRESS), effective tension
(EFFECTIVE TENS), and maximum hoop stress (MAX HOOP STRESS) occur at
integration points, and not at end nodes.
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes
(section corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J
respectively. CI and CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section
corner node nn, CI and CJ are given as follows:
CI = ( nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
CJ = ( nnMax + nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
component (1 - x, 2 - y, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST
section integration points (section integration points where results are available), at
element Node I and J respectively. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) =
1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given
as follows:
DI = ( nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
DJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
component (1 - x, 2 - x, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can

The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. PIPE288 is based on first-order shear-
PIPE288
deformation theory, also popularly known as Timoshenko beam theory. The transverse-shear strain is
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. This
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear stress distribution coefficients across the pipe crosssection, and made available for output purposes. Use KEYOPT(8) to activate output of shear stresses
caused by flexure or transverse loading.
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear center determination. The default
captured very accurately. Use the SECDATA command to adjust cross-section mesh density.
The traction-free state at the edges of the cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the crosssection.
affects the shear correction factor and shear stress distribution slightly, and this effect is ignored.
PIPE288 Assumptions and Restrictions

The pipe cannot have zero length.
Cross-section distortion or collapse is not considered.
Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if offsets are present.
The element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (the default option in
solution control).
Only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. See "PIPE288 Element Technology and Usage
effects can be activated via the PSTRES command.
PIPE288 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
PIPE289
PIPE289
3-D 3-Node Pipe
PIPE289 Element Description

The PIPE289 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick pipe structures. The
element is based on Timoshenko beam theory. Shear deformation effects are included.
PIPE289 is a quadratic three-node pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of freedom at each
node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions). The
element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
PIPE289 includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided
Elasticity, hyperelasticity, plasticity, creep, and other nonlinear material models are supported. Internal
fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and hydrodynamic and
buoyant loading are available.
Figure289.1PIPE289 Geometry
PIPE289 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

PIPE289 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, a first-order shear-deformation theory. Transverse-shear
strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and undistorted after
deformation. (For cases where cross-section distortion must be considered, it is preferable to use
ELBOW290.)
The element can be used for slender or stout pipes. Due to the limitations of first-order sheardeformation theory, only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. The slenderness ratio of a pipe
structure (GAL 2 / (EI) ) can be used to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
A
PIPE289
L
EI
Flexural rigidity
For pipes, (GAL 2 / EI) can be reduced to: 2L2 / ((1 + ) (R o 2 + Ri2 )), or for thin-walled pipes: L2 / ((1
+ ) R2 ), where = Poisson's ratio, Ro = outer radius, Ri = inner radius, and R = average radius.
The following illustration provides an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever pipe
subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to other applications, the example
serves generally. ANSYS, Inc. recommends a slenderness ratio greater than 30.
Figure289.2Transverse-Shear-Deformation Estimation

25
50
100
1000
1.120
1.060
1.030
1.003
The element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains.
Unlike other cubic (Hermitian) polynomial-based elements, PIPE289 is based on quadratic polynomials;
therefore, offsets in specification of distributed pressure loads are not allowed. The element has linear
bending-moment variation. Refinement of the mesh is recommended in order to accommodate such
loading. The element is computationally efficient and has super-convergence properties with respect to
mesh refinement. For example, the quadratic beam with a two point Gaussian integration is known to be
of same accuracy as a Hermitian element.
PIPE289 supports both the thin-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 1) and the thick-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 2) options. The
thin-pipe option assumes a plain stress state in the pipe wall and ignore the stress in the wall thickness
direction. The thick-pipe option accounts for the full 3-D stress state and generally leads to more
accurate results in thick-walled pipes where through-the-thickness stress can be significant. The element
allows change in cross-sectional area in large-deflection analysis. While the thick-pipe option can
accurately determine the cross-section area change from the actual material constitutive properties, the
thin-pipe option calculates the approximate area change based on a simple material incompressibility
assumption.
For the mass matrix and load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that used for stiffness matrix
is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices. Avoid using LUMPM,ON
as PIPE289 is a higher-order element. Consistent mass matrix is the default behavior. You can add mass
per unit length using the SECCONTROLS command's ADDMAS values. See "PIPE289 Input Summary".
When ocean loading is applied (SOCEAN), the loading is nonlinear (that is, based on the square of the
relative velocity between the structure and the water). Accordingly, the full Newton-Raphson option
(NROPT,FULL) may be necessary to achieve optimal results. (Full Newton-Raphson is applied
automatically in an analysis involving large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON].)
PIPE289
PIPE289 Input Data

Figure 289.1. PIPE289 is defined by nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system. If ocean loading
is present, the global origin must be at the mean sea level, with the global Z-axis pointing away from the
center of the earth.
Because the section is round, the element orientation is important only for defining offsets and
temperatures, and interpreting bending moment directions and stress locations.
Node L is the preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
automatically.
You can define PIPE289 without the orientation node. The element x-axis is oriented from node I toward
node J. When no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the element y-axis is automatically
calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. If the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within
a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis. To control the
element orientation about the element x-axis, use the L (orientation) node option. If both are defined,
the orientation node option takes precedence.
The orientation node L, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the element x and z-axes (as
shown). If this element is used in a large-deflection analysis, the location of the orientation node only
initially orients the element.
The pipe element is a one-dimensional line elements in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. A section is associated with the pipe elements
by specifying the section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
PIPE289 Cross-Sections
PIPE289 can be associated only with the pipe cross-section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). The material of the pipe
is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
PIPE289 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically at
a number of section points using the SECDATA command. Each section is assumed to be an assembly
of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points.
Figure289.3Typical Cross-Section Cell
PIPE289
file).
Section Flexibility
To apply section flexibility factors, use the SFLEX command. The command is valid only for linear
material properties and small strain analyses, and does not support offsets, temperature loading, or
initial state loading.
PIPE289 Loads
Forces are applied at nodes I, J, and K. If the centroidal axis is not colinear with the element x-axis
because of node-location offsets, applied axial forces will cause bending. The nodes should therefore be
located at the desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ
arguments of the SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program uses the centroid as the
reference axis for the pipe elements.
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 289.1. Lateral pressures are input as force per
unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
On the first and second faces, pressures are the internal and external pressures, respectively.
The pressure on the third face is the global Z coordinate location of the free surface of the fluid internal
to the pipe. This pressure is used only for the mass and pressure effect. If this value is zero, no fluid
inside of the pipe is considered. If the internal fluid free surface should be at Z = 0, use a very small
number instead. The free surface location is stepped, even if you issue a KBC,0 command.
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, temperatures can be input as element body loads at the inner and outer surfaces
at both ends of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly through the wall thickness. If
only two temperatures are specified, those two temperatures are used at both ends of the pipe element
(that is, there is no gradient along the length). If only the first temperature is specified, all others
default to the first. The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 0:
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both
nodes of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly in the element y and z directions. At
either end of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:
At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(R o ,0))
At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,R o ))
The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 1:
PIPE289
Element locations (T(Y,Z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 289.1.
For pipe elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
1 through 6 for temperatures T I(0,0), T I(1,0), T I(0,1), T J (0,0), T J (1,0), and T J (0,1). This input can be
used to specify temperature gradients that vary linearly both over the cross section and along the length
of the element.
defaults to TUNIF.)
(BF,NODE ,TEMP, VAL1 ). This specifies a uniform temperature over the cross section at the specified node.
(BF command input is not accepted at node K.)
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
The end-cap pressure effect is included by default. The end-cap effect can be deactivated via
KEYOPT(6). When subjected to internal and external pressures, PIPE289 with end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 0)
is always in equilibrium; that is, no net forces are produced. Because the element curvature is not
considered for the end-cap orientations, the element is also in equilibrium without end caps (KEYOPT(6)
= 1), even when the element is curved.
PIPE289 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, and L (the optional, but recommended, orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom
Section Information
Material Properties
Surface Loads
PIPE289
Pressure--
face 1- Internal pressure
face 2 - External pressure
face 3 - Height of free surface of fluid on inside of pipe
--I and J denote end nodes.
Input pressure values for faces 1, 2, and 3 via the SFE command. Input pressure values for
faces 4 through 8 via the SFBEAM command
Distributed pressure offsets are not available for faces 4, 5, and 6.
Body Loads
Temperatures--
TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 0.
TAVG(I), T y (I), T z(I), TAVG(J), T y (J), T z(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 1.
Special Features
Hyperelasticity (AHYPER, ANEL, BB, CDM, ELASTIC, HYPER) [1]
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Ocean loading
Linear perturbation
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0--
Through wall gradient
1--
PIPE289
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(4)
Hoop strain treatment
1--
Thin pipe theory
2--
Thick pipe theory
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0--
1--
KEYOPT(7), KEYOPT(9), KEYOPT(11), and KEYOPT(12)
Ative only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(7)
0--
tension, and maximum hoop stress (default)
1--
2--
3--
tension, and maximum hoop stress extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(8)
0--
Output a combined state of the following two types (default)
1--
PIPE289
Output only torsion-related shear stresses

2--
KEYOPT(9)
Output control at integration points:
0--
None (default)
1--
2--
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section node
KEYOPT(11)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes:
0--
None (default)
1--
2--
3--
KEYOPT(12)
Hydrodynamic output:
0--
None (default)
1--
Additional centroidal hydrodynamic printout
KEYOPT(15)
0--
PIPE289
1--
excessive.)
PIPE289 Output Data

Additional element output as described in Table289.1:PIPE289 Element Output Definitions
For ways to view results, see the Basic Analysis Guide .
To view 3-D deformed shapes for PIPE289, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the
modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
Linearized Stress
bending in each direction separately; therefore, PIPE289 provides a linearized stress output as part of its
SMISC output record, as indicated in the following definitions:
SByT = -Mz * R0 / I
SByB = Mz * R0 / I
SBzT = My * R0 / I
SBzB = -My * R0 / I
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16), R0 is the outside radius, and I is the
moment of inertia of the cross-section. The program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section
dimensions.
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELByT = -Kz * R0
EPELByB = Kz * R0
EPELBzT = Ky * R0
EPELBzB = -Ky * R0
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. PIPE289 always employs
PIPE289
available.
For the stress and strain components, X refers to axial, Y refers to hoop, and Z refers to radial.
Table289.1PIPE289 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
C.G.:X, Y, Z
Area
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz,
xz
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:EPEQ
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
TQ
TE
SFy, SFz
SEy, SEz
Ky, Kz
Ex
Fx
Definition
Element number
Material number
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
3
3
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y

EPCR)
Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR +
EPTH)

Plastic work
4
4
4
4
4
4
Torsional moment
Torsional strain
Curvature
Axial strain
Axial force
Y
Y
2
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
PIPE289
My, Mz
Bending moments
INT PRESS
Internal pressure at integration point
EXT PRESS
External pressure at integration point
EFFECTIVE TENS
Effective tension on pipe
MAX HOOP STRESS Maximum hoop stress at integration point
SDIR
Axial direct stress
SByT
Bending stress on the element +Y side of the pipe
SByB
Bending stress on the element -Y side of the pipe
SBzT
Bending stress on the element +Z side of the pipe
SBzB
Bending stress on the element -Z side of the pipe
EPELDIR
EPELByT
Bending strain on the element +Y side of the pipe
EPELByB
Bending strain on the element -Y side of the pipe
EPELBzT
Bending strain on the element +Z side of the pipe
EPELBzB
Bending strain on the element -Z side of the pipe
TEMP
Temperatures at all section corner nodes
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
State variables
The following values apply to ocean loading only:
GLOBAL COORD
Element centroid location
VR, VZ
Radial and vertical fluid particle velocities (VR is always
> 0)
AR, AZ
Radial and vertical fluid particle accelerations
PHDYN
Dynamic fluid pressure head
ETA
Wave amplitude over integration point
TFLUID
Fluid temperature (printed if VISC is nonzero)
VISC
Viscosity (output if VISC is nonzero)
REN, RET
Normal and tangential Reynolds numbers (if VISC is
nonzero)
CT
Input tangential drag coefficients evaluated at Reynolds
numbers
CDY, CDZ
Input normal drag coefficients evaluated at Reynolds
numbers
CMY, CMZ
Input inertia coefficients evaluated at Reynolds numbers
URT, URN
Tangential (parallel to element axis) and normal relative
velocities
ABURN
Vector sum of normal (URN) velocities
AN
Accelerations normal to element
FX, FY, FZ
Hydrodynamic tangential and normal forces in element
coordinates
ARGU
Effective position of wave (radians)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
6
7
7
Y
Y
7
7
7
7
7
7
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
7
7
Y
Y
7
7
7
Y
Y
Y
1. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item, or on the NMISC record for ocean
loading.
PIPE289

6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and the TB,STATE command are used.
Table289.2:PIPE289 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available for the ETABLE command
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The output tables use the
following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table289.1:PIPE289 Element Output Definitions.
Item
E,I,J
Table289.2PIPE289 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity
Name
Fx
My
Mz
TQ
SFz
SFy
Ex
Ky
Kz
TE
SEz
SEy
Area
BM
BK
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
EPELDIR
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

E
I
----------------------
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
27
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
28
31
32
33
34
35
41
30
36
37
38
39
40
46
PIPE289
EPELByT
EPELByB
EPELBzT
EPELBzB
TEMP
INT PRESS [1]
EXT PRESS [1]
EFFECTIVE TENS [1]
MAX HOOP STRESS [1]
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz
The following output
GLOBAL COORD
VR, VZ
AR, AZ
PHDYN
ETA
TFLUID
VISC
REN, RET
CT
CDY, CDZ
CMY, CMZ
URT, URN
ABURN
AN
FX, FY, FZ
ARGU
SMISC
-42
SMISC
-43
SMISC
-44
SMISC
-45
SMISC
-51-53
SMISC
-61
SMISC
-62
SMISC
-63
SMISC
-64
LS
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPEL
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTH
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPPL
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPCR
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTO
-CI[2], DI[3]
LEPTT
-CI[2], DI[3]
quantities are valid for ocean loading only:
NMISC
1, 2, 3
-NMISC
4, 5
-NMISC
6, 7
-NMISC
8
-NMISC
9
-NMISC
10
-NMISC
11
-NMISC
12, 13
-NMISC
14
-NMISC
15, 16
-NMISC
17, 18
-NMISC
19, 20, 21
-NMISC
22
-NMISC
23, 24
-NMISC
25, 26, 27
-NMISC
28
--
47
48
49
50
54-56
65
66
67
68
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
CJ[2],
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
DJ[3]
-----------------
1. Internal pressure (INT PRESS), external pressure (EXT PRESS), effective tension
(EFFECTIVE TENS), and maximum hoop stress (MAX HOOP STRESS) occur at
integration points, and not at end nodes.
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes
(section corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J
respectively. CI and CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section
corner node nn, CI and CJ are given as follows:
CI = ( nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
CJ = ( nnMax + nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
PIPE289
component (1 - x, 2 - y, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can

solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST
section integration points (section integration points where results are available),
respectively at element Node I and J. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15)
= 1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are
given as follows:
DI = ( nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
DJ = ( ncMax + nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
component (1 - x, 2 - x, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can

The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. PIPE289 is based on first-order sheardeformation theory, also popularly known as Timoshenko beam theory. The transverse-shear strain is
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. This
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear stress distribution coefficients across the pipe crosssection, and made available for output purposes. Use KEYOPT(8) to output shear stresses caused by
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear center determination. The default
captured very accurately. Use the SECDATA command to adjust cross-section mesh density.
The traction-free state at the edges of the cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the crosssection.
PIPE289 Assumptions and Restrictions

The pipe cannot have zero length.
Cross-section distortion or collapse is not considered.
Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if node-location offsets
are present.
Only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. See "PIPE289 Element Technology and Usage
PIPE289
PIPE289 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
ELBOW290
ELBOW290
3-D 3-Node Elbow
ELBOW290 Element Description

The ELBOW290 element is suitable for analyzing pipe structures with initially circular cross-sections and
thin to moderately thick pipe walls. The element accounts for cross-section distortion, which can be
commonly observed in curved pipe structures under loading.
ELBOW290 is a quadratic (three-node) pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of freedom at
each node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions).
The element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change in
pipe thickness is accounted for in geometrically nonlinear analyses. The element accounts for follower
(load stiffness) effects of distributed pressures.
ELBOW290 can be used in layered applications for modeling laminated composite pipes. The accuracy in
modeling composite pipes is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory (generally referred to
as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
ELBOW290 supports the pipe cross-section defined via SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET
commands.
For more detailed information about this element, see ELBOW290 - 3-D 3-Node Elbow in the Theory
Figure290.1ELBOW290 Geometry
A general description of the element coordinate system is available in Coordinate Systems in this
document. Following is information about specific coordinate systems as they apply to ELBOW290.
Beam Coordinate Systems

The beam coordinate systems (x-y-z) are used for defining beam offsets and diametral temperature
gradients.
No orientation node (default)
Using orientation node L
The x axis is always the axial direction pointing from node I to node J. The optional orientation node L, if
used, defines a plane containing the x and z axes at node K. If this element is used in a large-deflection
analysis, the location of the orientation node L is used only to initially orient the element.
When no orientation node is used, z is perpendicular to the curvature plane, uniquely determined by the
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_ELBOW290.html[28/04/2013 08:32:30 p.m.]
ELBOW290
I, J, and K nodes. If I, J, and K are colinear, the y axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the
global X-Y plane. In cases where the element is parallel to the global Z axis (or within a 0.01 percent
slope of the axis), the element y axis is oriented parallel to the global Y axis.
For information about orientation nodes and beam meshing, see Generating a Beam Mesh With
Orientation Nodes in the Modeling and Meshing Guide . See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
same document for information about midside nodes. For details about generating the optional
orientation node L automatically, see the LMESH and LATT command descriptions.
Local Cylindrical Coordinate Systems

The cylindrical coordinate systems (A-R-T) are used for defining internal section motions (that is, axialA, radial-R, and hoop-T displacements and rotations).
The cylindrical systems are always created from the default beam coordinate systems (beam system
without orientation node L), with A being the same as beam axis x, and an angle (0 < < 360
degrees) from R to the beam axis y.
Element and Layer Coordinate Systems

The element coordinate systems (e1-e2-e3) are defined at the mid-surfaces of the pipe wall. The e1, e2,
and e3 axes are parallel respectively to cylindrical axes A, T, and R in the undeformed configuration.
Each element coordinate system is updated independently to account for large material rotation during a
geometrically nonlinear analysis. Support is not available for user-defined element coordinate systems.
The layer coordinate systems (L1-L2-L3) are identical to the element coordinate system if no layer
orientation angles are specified; otherwise, the layer coordinate system can be generated by rotating the
corresponding element coordinate system about the shell normal (axis e3). Material properties are
defined in the layer systems; therefore, the layer system is also called the material coordinate system.
ELBOW290
ELBOW290 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for ELBOW290 are shown in Figure 290.1. The element is defined by
nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system.
When using ELBOW290, the subtended angle should not exceed 45 degrees:
ELBOW290 Cross Sections
The element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately (via the SECDATA command). A section is associated with the element by specifying the
section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
ELBOW290 can only be associated with the pipe cross section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). For elements with
homogenous materials, the material of the pipe is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
The layup of a composite pipe can be defined with a shell section (SECTYPE). Shell section commands
provide the input options for specifying the thickness, material, orientation and number of integration
points through the thickness of the layers. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses used for
ELBOW290 element calculations (by scaling the input layer thickness) so that they are consistent with
the total wall thickness given by the pipe section. A single-layer shell section definition is possible,
allowing flexibility with regard to the number of integration points used and other options.
For shell section input, you can designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located
through the thickness of each layer. When only one integration point is specified, the point is always
located midway between the top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points are specified, one point is
located on the top surface, one point is located on the bottom surface, and the remaining points are
distributed at equal distances between the top and bottom points. The default number of integration
points for each layer is 3. When a single layer is defined and plasticity is present, however, the number
of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during solution.
In "Element and Layer Coordinate Systems", the layer coordinate system can be obtained by rotating the
corresponding element coordinate system about the shell normal (axis e3) by angle (in degrees). The
value of for each layer is given by the SECDATA command input for the shell section.
For details about associating a shell section with a pipe section, see the SECDATA command
documentation.
Cross-Section Deformation
The level of accuracy in elbow cross-sectional deformation is given by the number of Fourier terms
around the circumference of the cross section. The accuracy can be adjusted via KEYOPT(2) = n, where
n is an integer value from 0 through 8, as follows:
KEYOPT(2) = 0 -- Only uniform radial expansion and transverse shears through the pipe wall are
allowed. Suitable for simulating straight pipes without undergoing bending.
KEYOPT(2) = 1 -- Radial expansion and transverse shears are allowed to vary along the circumference
to account for bending. Suitable for straight pipes in small-deformation analysis.
KEYOPT(2) = 2 through 8 -- Allow general section deformation, including radial expansion, ovalization,
and warping. Suitable for curved pipes or straight pipes in large-deformation analysis. The default is
KEYOPT(2) = 2. Higher values for KEYOPT(2) may be necessary for pipes with thinner walls, as they
are more susceptible to complex cross-section deformation than are pipes with thicker walls.
Element computation becomes more intensive as the value of KEYOPT(2) increases. Use a KEYOPT(2)
ELBOW290
value that offers an optimal balance between accuracy and computational cost.
Cross-Section Constraints
The constraints on the elbow cross-section can be applied at the element nodes I, J, and K with the
following section degrees of freedom labels:
SE section radial expansion
SO section ovalization
SW section warping
SRA local shell normal rotation about cylindrical axis A
SRT local shell normal rotation about cylindrical axis T
SECT all section deformation
Only fixed cross-section constraints are allowed via the D command. Delete section constraints via the
DDELE command. For example, to constrain the warping and ovalization of the cross-section at node n,
issue this command:
D,n,SW,,,,,SO
To allow only the radial expansion of the cross-section, use the following commands:
D,n,SECT
DDELE,n,SE
It is not practical to maintain the continuity of cross-section deformation between two adjacent elements
joined at a sharp angle. For such cases, ANSYS recommends coupling the nodal displacements and
rotations but leaving the cross-section deformation uncoupled. The ELBOW command can automate the
process by uncoupling the cross-section deformation for any adjacent elements with cross-sections
intersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Forces are applied at the nodes. By default,
ELBOW290 element nodes are located at the center of the cross-section. Use the SECOFFSET
command's OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments for the pipe section to define locations other than the
centroid for force application.
Pressures may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in the
following illustration. Positive pressures act into the pipe wall.
ELBOW290
The end-cap pressure effect is included by default. The end-cap effect on one or both ends of the
element can be deactivated via KEYOPT(6). When subjected to internal and external pressures,
ELBOW290 with end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 0) is always in equilibrium; that is, no net forces are produced.
Without end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the element is also in equilibrium except for the case when the
element is curved. With end caps only at one end (KEYOPT(6) = 2 or 3), the element is obviously not in
equilibrium.
Pressure Load Stiffness
The effects of pressure load stiffness are included by default for this element. If an unsymmetric matrix
is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
Temperatures
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, a layer-wise pattern is used. T1 and T2 are temperatures at inner wall, T3 and
T4 and the interface temperatures between layer 1 and layer 2, ending with temperatures at the
exterior of the pipe. All undefined temperatures are default to TUNIF. If exactly ( NL + 1) temperatures
are given (where NL is the number of layers), then one temperature is taken as the uniform temperature
at the bottom of each layer, with the last temperature for the exterior of the pipe.
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both end
nodes of the element so that the temperature varies linearly in the beam y axis and z axis directions. At
both ends, the element temperatures are input at the section centroid (TAVG), at the outer radius from
the centroid in the element y direction (Ty), and at the outer radius from the centroid in the element zdirection (Tz). The first coordinate temperature TAVG defaults to TUNIF. If all temperatures after the
first are unspecified, they default to the first. If all temperatures at node I are input, and all
temperatures at node J are unspecified, the node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I
temperatures. For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. The following
graphic illustrates temperature input when KEYOPT(1) = 1:
ELBOW290
Transverse Shear Stiffness

ELBOW290 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation through the pipe wall. The transverse
shear stiffness of the element is a 2 x 2 matrix, as shown:
For a single-layer elbow with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are as follows:
where k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = pipe wall thickness.

You can override the default transverse shear stiffness values by assigning different values via the
SECCONTROLS command for the shell section.
ELBOW290 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, and L (the optional orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom
Section Information
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ, or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ
Specify DAMP only once for the element. (Issue the MAT command to assign the material
property set). REFT may be provided once for the element, or may be assigned on a per-layer
basis.
Surface Loads
Pressure--
Internal pressure
External pressure
Body Loads
Temperatures--
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 -- T1, T2 (at bottom of layer 1), T3, T4 (between layers 1-2); similarly
for between next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (2 * ( NL + 1)
maximum).
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 -- TAVG(I), Ty(I), Tz(I), TAVG(J), Ty(J), Tz(J)
Special Features
Hyperelasticity (AHYPER, ANEL, BB, CDM, ELASTIC, HYPER)
Elasticity (ELASTIC)
ELBOW290
Other material (USER, SDAMP)

Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. See "Structures with
Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for details of the material models.
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0--
Layerwise input
1--
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(2)
Number of Fourier terms (used for cross-sectional flexibility)
0--
Uniform radial expansion
1--
Nonuniform radial expansion to account for bending
2 through 8 -General section deformation (default = 2)
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0--
1--
2--
Internal and external pressures cause loads on element node I
3--
Internal and external pressures cause loads on element node J
KEYOPT(8)
ELBOW290
Specify layer data storage:

0--
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multilayer elements) (default)
1--
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multilayer elements)
2--
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single-layer and multilayer
elements. (The volume of data may be considerable.)
ELBOW290 Output Data

Additional element output as described in Table290.1:ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions
Integration Stations
Integration stations along the length and within the cross-section of the elbow are shown in Figure
290.2.
Figure290.2ELBOW290 Element Integration Stations
Element solution is available at all integration points through element printout (OUTPR). Solution via
the POST1 postprocessor is available at element nodes and selected section integration locations (see
KEYOPT(8) settings for more details).
Stress Output
Several items are illustrated in Figure 290.3:
Figure290.3ELBOW290 Stress Output
ELBOW290
KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output to the results file for processing with the LAYER
command. Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. KEYOPT(8) must be set to either
1 or 2 to output these stresses in the POST1 postprocessor. A general description of solution output is
given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
The element shell stress resultants (N11, M11, Q13, etc.) are parallel to the element coordinate system
(e1-e2-e3), as are the shell membrane strains and curvatures ( 11 , 11 , 13 , etc.) of the element. Shell
stress resultants and generalized shell strains are available via the SMISC option at the element end
nodes I and J only.
ELBOW290 also outputs beam-related stress resultants (Fx, My, TQ, etc) and linearized stresses (SDIR,
SByT, SByB, etc) at two element end nodes I and J to SMISC records. Beam stress resultants and
linearized stresses are parallel to the beam coordinate system (x-y-z).
Linearized Stress
bending in each direction separately. Therefore, ELBOW290 provides a linearized stress output as part of
SDIR = Fx/A, where Fx is the axial load (SMISC quantities 1 and 36) and A is the area of the cross
section (SMISC quantities 7 and 42).
SBzT = My * z max / Iyy
SBzB = My * z min / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,37,3,38). Coordinates ymax , ymin , z max , and
ELBOW290
z min are the maximum and minimum y, z coordinates in the cross section measured from the centroid.
Values Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia of the cross section.
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. ELBOW290 always employs
ELBOW290 does not provide extensive element printout. Because the POST1 postprocessor provides
more comprehensive output processing tools, ANSYS suggests issuing the OUTRES command to ensure
that the required results are stored in the database. To view 3-D deformed shapes for ELBOW290, issue
an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes
for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the modes with element results calculation active
via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option.
available.
Table290.1ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions
Name
Definition
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
AREA
XC, YC, ZC
LOCI:X, Y, Z
TEMP
Element number
Material number
Average wall thickness
T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 between layers 1-2,
similarly for between next layers, ending with
temperatures at top of layer NL (2 * ( NL + 1) maximum)
LOC
TOP, MID, BOT, or integration point location
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Stresses
S:INT
Stress intensity
S:EQV
Equivalent stress
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
Elastic strains
EPEL:EQV
Equivalent elastic strains [7]
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
Thermal strains
EPTH:EQV
Equivalent thermal strains [7]
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
Average plastic strains
EPPL:EQV
Equivalent plastic strains [7]
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
Average creep strains
EPCR:EQV
Equivalent creep strains [7]
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR)
EPTO:EQV
Total equivalent mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL +
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
5
Y
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
-
ELBOW290
EPCR)
Plastic work
2
2
2
2
2
2
Section axial force

Section bending moments
Section torsional moment
Axial direct stress
Bending stress on the element +y side of the pipe
Bending stress on the element -y side of the pipe
Bending stress on the element +z side of the pipe
Bending stress on the element -z side of the pipe
Wall in-plane forces (per unit length)
Wall out-of-plane moments (per unit length)
Wall transverse shear forces (per unit length)
Wall membrane strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
11 , 22 , 12
13 , 23
Wall curvatures
Wall transverse shear strains
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
State variables
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
Fx
My, Mz
TQ
SFy, SFz
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22, M12
Q13, Q23
11 , 22 , 12
1. The subsequent stress solution repeats for top, middle, and bottom surfaces.
2. Nonlinear solution output for top, middle, and bottom surfaces, if the element has a nonlinear
material.
3. Stresses, total strains, plastic strains, elastic strains, creep strains, and thermal strains in the
element coordinate system are available for output (at all section points through thickness). If
layers are in use, the results are in the layer coordinate system.
5. Available via an OUTRES,LOCI command only.
6. Available only via the UserMat subroutine and the TB,STATE command.
7. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio. For elastic and thermal, you set the value
(MP,PRXY). For plastic and creep, ANSYS sets the value at 0.5.
Table290.2:ELBOW290 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available for the ETABLE command
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The output tables use the
following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table290.1:ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions
ELBOW290
Item
I,J
Table290.2ELBOW290 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
I

Fx
My
Mz
TQ
SFz
SFy
Area
SDIR
SByT
SByB
SBzT
SBzB
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22
M12
Q13
Q23
11
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
22
SMISC
23
58
12
SMISC
24
59
11
SMISC
25
60
22
SMISC
26
61
12
SMISC
27
62
13
SMISC
28
63
23
SMISC
29
64
THICK
SMISC
30
65
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
14
ELBOW290 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element cannot have zero length.
ELBOW290
Zero wall thickness is not allowed. (Zero thickness layers are allowed.)
In a nonlinear analysis, the solution is terminated if the thickness at any integration point vanishes
(within a small numerical tolerance).
This element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (the default behavior in
solution control).
No slippage is assumed between the element layers. Shear deflections are included in the element;
however, normals to the center wall surface before deformation are assumed to remain straight
after deformation.
If multiple load steps are used, the number of layers must remain unchanged between load steps.
If the layer material is hyperelastic, the layer orientation angle has no effect .
Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). Apply
prestress effects via a PSTRES command.
The through-thickness stress SZ is always zero.
The effects of fluid motion inside the pipe are ignored.
ELBOW290 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
PLANE25
PLANE25
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a
current-technology element such as SOLID272 (KEYOPT(6) = 0).
PLANE25 is used for 2-D modeling of axisymmetric structures with nonaxisymmetric loading. Examples of
such loading are bending, shear, or torsion. The element is defined by four nodes having three degrees
of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z direction. For unrotated nodal coordinates,
these directions correspond to the radial, axial, and tangential directions, respectively.
See Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads for a description of various loading
cases. See PLANE25 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for
more details about this element. See PLANE83 for a multi-node version of this element.
PLANE25 Input Data

element input data includes four nodes, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on the MODE
command), the symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command) and the orthotropic material
properties. The MODE and ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
The material may be orthotropic, with directions corresponding to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Harmonically varying nodal
forces, if any, should be input on a full 360 basis.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Harmonically varying pressures may be input
as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 25.1. Positive
pressures act into the element.
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I
temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For
any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(2) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes. KEYOPT(3) is used for
temperature loading with MODE greater than zero and temperature-dependent material properties.
Material properties may only be evaluated at a constant (nonharmonically varying) temperature. If
PLANE25
MODE equals zero, material properties are always evaluated at the average element temperature.
KEYOPT(4), (5), and (6) provide various element printout options (see Element Solution).
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE25 Input Summary". Element Input gives a general

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Mode Number
Number of harmonic waves around the circumference (MODE)
Loading Condition
Symmetry condition (MODE)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Element coordinate system:
0--
Element coordinate system is parallel to the global coordinate system
1--
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side.
KEYOPT(2)
PLANE25
Extra displacement shapes:

0--
Include extra displacement shapes
1--
Suppress extra displacement shapes
KEYOPT(3)
If MODE is greater than zero, use temperatures for:
0--
Use temperatures only for thermal bending (evaluate material properties at TREF)
1--
Use temperatures only for material property evaluation (thermal strains are not computed)
KEYOPT(4)
Extra stress output:
0--
Basic element solution
1--
Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2--
Nodal Stress Solution
KEYOPT(5)
Combined stress output:
0--
No combined stress solution
1--
Combined stress solution at centroid and nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Include extra surface output (surface solution valid only for isotropic materials):
0--
1--
Surface solution for face I-J also
PLANE25
2--
Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also
PLANE25 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table25.1:PLANE25 Element Output Definitions.
Several items are illustrated in Figure 25.2.
In the displacement printout, the UZ component is out-of-phase with the UX and UY components. For
example, in the MODE = 1, ISYM = 1 loading case, UX and UY are the peak values at = 0 and UZ is
the peak value at = 90. The same occurs for the reaction forces (FX, FY, etc.). The element stress
directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. We recommend that you always use the angle
field on the SET command when postprocessing the results. For more information about harmonic
elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads
The sign convention on the surface shears is such that for a rectangular element that is lined up parallel
to the axes with node J in the positive Y direction from node I, the shear stresses on surfaces I-J and KL are analogous to the centroidal SYZ in both definition and sign. Stress components which are
inherently zero for a load case are printed for clarity. Solution Output gives a general description of
solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
PLANE25
ISYM
MODE
VOLU:
PRES
TEMP
PK ANG
Loading key: 1 = symmetric, -1 = antisymmetric

Number of waves in loading
Volume
Pressure P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at I,L
Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Angle where component stresses have peak values: 0
and 90/MODE degrees. Blank if MODE = 0.
XC, YC
S:X, Y, Z
Direct stresses (radial, axial, hoop) at PK ANG locations
S:XY, YZ, XZ
Shear stresses (radial-axial, axial-hoop, radial-hoop) at
PK ANG locations
S:1, 2, 3
Principal stresses at both PK ANG locations as well as
where extreme occurs (EXTR); if MODE = 0, only one
location is given.
S:INT
Stress intensity at both PK ANG locations as well as
location is given.
S:EQV
Equivalent stress at both PK ANG locations as well as
location is given.
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
Elastic strain
EPEL:EQV
Equivalent elastic strain [4]
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
Average thermal strains
EPTH:EQV
Equivalent thermal strain [4]
FACE
Face label
TEMP
Surface average temperature
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z, SH) Surface strains (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) at
PK ANG locations and where extreme occurs (EXTR)
S(PAR, PER, Z, SH)
Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) at
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
2
2
2
Y
Y
1
1
2
2
2
2
1. These items are output only if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
4. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by
the user (MP,PRXY).
Table25.2:PLANE25 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic Analysis
notation is used in Table25.2:PLANE25 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table25.1:PLANE25 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
PLANE25

I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L
Output Quantity
Name
P1
SMISC
P2
SMISC
P3
SMISC
P4
SMISC
THETA = 0
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
THETA = 90/MODE
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
EXTR Values
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
Item

I
J
K
2
-
1
4
3
6
-
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
16
17
18
19
20
31
32
33
34
35
46
47
48
49
50
6
7
8
9
10
21
22
23
24
25
36
37
38
39
40
51
52
53
54
55
11
12
13
14
15
26
27
28
29
30
41
42
43
44
45
56
57
58
59
60
Note: The NMISC items (1 thru 60) in the above table represent the combined stress
solution, KEYOPT(5) = 1. If MODE = 0, their values are zero at THETA = 90/MODE
and at EXTR.
See Surface Solution of this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the
ETABLE command.

The area of the element must be positive.
The element must be defined in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 25.1 and the global Xaxis must be the radial direction. Negative X coordinates should not be used.
The element assumes a linear elastic material. Post-analysis superposition of results is valid only
with other linear elastic solutions. The element should not be used with the large deflection option.
PLANE25
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular
elements so that a constant strain element results.
Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met.
You can use only axisymmetric (MODE,0) loads without significant torsional stresses to generate
the stress state used for stress stiffened modal analyses using this element.
This element does not support spectrum analysis.
Modeling hint: If shear effects are important in a shell-like structure, you should use at least two
elements through the thickness.

2.18.Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies

If you are a long-time user, your models may still employ some legacy element types. As technology
advances, however, ANSYS, Inc. continues to develop robust new element types. ANSYS, Inc.
recommends using current-technology elements (sometimes called new-generation elements) rather
than legacy elements in your analysis wherever possible. Current element types are more feature-rich
and use more advanced technologies than legacy elements. (For more information, see CurrentTechnology Element Benefits.)
The following table lists many legacy elements and suggests current-technology elements to use instead.
In some cases, an element KEYOPT setting, degree-of-freedom constraint, or command may be
necessary to closely reproduce the behavior of a given legacy element.
Legacy Element
Type [1]
Suggested
Current
Element Type
[2]
FLUID141
FLUID142
INFIN9
INFIN47
PLANE13
PLANE25
PLANE53
ANSYS CFX-Flo
ANSYS CFX-Flo
INFIN110
INFIN111
PLANE223
SOLID272
PLANE233
PLANE83
SHELL41
SOLID273
SHELL181
SOLID5
SOLID117
SOLID226
SOLID236
Suggested Setting(s) to Approximate Legacy

Element Behavior [3]
Element
Comments
KEYOPT
--------------------KEYOPT(6) = 0
--See the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic
Analysis Guide
KEYOPT(6) = 0 --KEYOPT(1) = 1, --KEYOPT(3) = 2
------See Legacy vs. Current-Technology
Edge-Based Elements in the LowFrequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide
1. After considering element redundancy and consistency issues, ANSYS, Inc. may in future releases
move legacy element documentation to the Feature Archive or undocument those elements
altogether; however, the table does not imply that all legacy elements listed are immediate targets
for such action.
2. The table is not a definitive listing of legacy-to-current element equivalents in terms of either
formulation or use of shape functions; for example, a suggested current element may require a
more refined mesh in some cases, or may require adaptation via appropriate constraints for
specific 2-D analyses.
3. While a given KEYOPT setting can allow you to approximate the behavior of a legacy element, it
may not be the most desirable KEYOPT for the current element. For structural-only analyses, try
the ETCONTROL command for element and KEYOPT recommendations. For more information, see
Automatic Selection of Element Technologies.
2.18.1.Current-Technology Element Benefits

Current element technologies are more advanced and feature-rich than legacy elements. For example,
support for the following capabilities is available only in applicable current-technology elements:
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH2_OLDNEW.html[28/04/2013 08:32:53 p.m.]
A vast array of material constitutive options (such as anisotropic hyperelasticity, cast iron plasticity,
enhanced Drucker-Prager plasticity, Hill plasticity, hyperelasticity, shape memory alloy, plasticity,
rate-dependent plasticity, viscoelasticity, and others).
Association of a single element with several material constitutive options (such as a combination of
hyperelasticity and viscoelasticity with Prony series expansion).
A curve-fitting tool (TBFT) for calibrating material parameters through experimental data, which
currently supports creep, hyperelasticity, and viscoelasticity.
Fracture mechanics parameter calculation (CINT), which uses the domain-integration approach to
calculate the J-Integrals for both linear and elastoplastic material behavior at a designated tip
location (2-D) or at specific location along the crack front (3-D) through a structure component.
Variational Technology for optimization analysis, which quickly evaluates response surfaces for
various type of applications (such as structural and frequency sweep analysis).
Initial state conditions (INISTATE) that may exist in the structure (available in the elements listed
in Initial State Element Support).
Custom user-defined material models created via the UserMat subroutine.
3-D smeared reinforcing, provided by elements such as REINF265 when used with 3-D solid and
shell elements (referred to as the base elements) to achieve the effect of extra reinforcement to
those elements.
Nonlinear stabilization, a viscous-based algorithm for improving convergence behavior when
instabilities are expected.
Manual rezoning for solid elements.
Control of the element technologies (ETCONTROL) used in element formulation for applicable
elements.
A layered section option (via SECDATA and other section commands) for shell and solid elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH2_OLDNEW.html[28/04/2013 08:32:53 p.m.]
FLUID141
FLUID141
2-D Fluid-Thermal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> <> <> PP <> <> <>
FLUID141 Element Description

Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using the
ANSYS CFX-Flo product instead.
You can use FLUID141 to model transient or steady state fluid/thermal systems that involve fluid and/or
non-fluid regions. The conservation equations for viscous fluid flow and energy are solved in the fluid
region, while only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid region. Use this FLOTRAN CFD element
to solve for flow and temperature distributions within a region, as opposed to elements that model a
network of one-dimensional regions hooked together (such as FLUID116). You can also use FLUID141 in
a fluid-solid interaction analysis. See FLUID141 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
For the FLOTRAN CFD elements, the velocities are obtained from the conservation of momentum
principle, and the pressure is obtained from the conservation of mass principle. (The temperature, if
required, is obtained from the law of conservation of energy.) A segregated sequential solver algorithm
is used; that is, the matrix system derived from the finite element discretization of the governing
equation for each degree of freedom is solved separately. The flow problem is nonlinear and the
governing equations are coupled together. The sequential solution of all the governing equations,
combined with the update of any temperature- or pressure-dependent properties, constitutes a global
iteration . The number of global iterations required to achieve a converged solution may vary
considerably, depending on the size and stability of the problem. Transport equations are solved for the
mass fractions of up to six species.
You may solve the system of equations in a constant angular velocity rotating coordinate system. The
degrees of freedom are velocities, pressure, and temperature. Two turbulence quantities, the turbulent
kinetic energy and the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate, are calculated if you invoke an optional
turbulence model. For axisymmetric models, you can calculate an optional swirl - velocity VZ normal to
the plane. You also can specify swirl at the inlet or a boundary (moving wall).
Figure141.1FLUID141 Geometry
FLUID141 Input Data

Figure 141.1 shows the geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element. The
element is defined by three nodes (triangle) or four nodes (quadrilateral) and by isotropic material
properties. The coordinate system is selected according to the value of KEYOPT(3), and may be either
Cartesian, axisymmetric, or polar.
Node and Element Loads describes element loads. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis, you can apply a
fluid-solid interaction flag using the SF family of commands (SF, SFA, SFE, or SFL) and the FSIN
surface load label. You must also apply the same interface number to the solid interface where load
transfer takes place. See Sequentially Coupled Physics Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_FLUID141.html[28/04/2013 08:33:03 p.m.]
FLUID141
more information on the use of the fluid-solid interaction flag.

The Fluids Analysis Guide includes a discussion of which ANSYS commands are unavailable or
inappropriate for FLUID141.
FLUID141 Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of a FLUID141 element is 1, it is assumed to be a fluid element. Its
properties - density, viscosity, thermal conductivity and specific heat - are defined with a series of
FLDATA commands. You can analyze only one fluid, and it must be in a single phase. Thermal
conductivity and specific heat are relevant (and necessary) only if the problem is thermal in nature. The
properties can be a function of temperature through relationships specified by the FLDATA7,PROT
command or through a property database (the file floprp.ans ). In addition, the density may vary with
pressure (per the ideal gas law) if the fluid is specified to be air or a gas.
Six turbulence models are available. You can activate turbulence modeling with the
FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,T command. The Standard k- Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model
are available along with four extensions of the Standard k- Model. See Turbulence in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications and Turbulence Models in the Fluids
Analysis Guide for more information on the models.
KEYOPT(1) activates multiple species transport , which allows you to track the transport of up to six
different fluids (species) in the main fluid. KEYOPT(4) allows you to use displacement DOFs to specify
motion of boundaries when using the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) formulation.
Real constants, shown in Table141.1:FLUID141 Real Constants, are required only if a distributed
resistance ("FLUID141 Distributed Resistance"), a fan model ("FLUID141 Fan Model"), a wall roughness
("FLUID141 Wall Roughness"), or an ALE formulation is to be included.
FLUID141 Distributed Resistance

A distributed resistance provides a convenient way to approximate the effect of porous media (such as a
filter) or other such flow domain features without actually modeling the geometry of those features. It is
an artificially imposed, unrecoverable loss associated with geometry not explicitly modeled. Any fluid
element with a distributed resistance will have a real constant set number [REAL] greater than 1
assigned to it.
The resistance to flow, modeled as a distributed resistance, may be due to one or a combination of
these factors: a localized head loss (K), a friction factor (f), or a permeability (C). The total pressure
gradient is the sum of these three terms, as shown below for the X direction.
where:
= is the density (mass/length 3 )
= is the viscosity (mass/(length*time))
RE = is the local value of the Reynolds Number (calculated by the program): RE = ( V Dh ) /
f = is a friction coefficient (calculated by the program): f = a RE-b
C = is the FLOTRAN permeability (1/length2). FLOTRAN permeability is the inverse of the intrinsic
or physical permeability.
If large gradients exist in the velocity field within a distributed resistance region, you should deactivate
the turbulence model by setting ENKE to 0 and ENDS to 1.0 in this region.
Non-Newtonian viscosity models also are available for this element. Currently, ANSYS provides a Power
Law model, a Bingham model, and a Carreau model.
FLUID141
In addition, ANSYS provides a user-definable subroutine to compute viscosity. Viscosity of the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications and Using User-Programmable
Subroutines in the Fluids Analysis Guide describe these models and how to use them. The subroutine,
called UserVisLaw, is documented in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.
FLUID141 Fan Model

The fan model provides a convenient way to approximate the effect of a fan or pump in the flow
domain. It is an artificially imposed momentum source that provides momentum source terms associated
with a fan or a pump not explicitly modeled.
The pressure rise associated with a fan model is given by the pressure gradient times the flow length
through the elements with the fan model real constants. For a one-directional fan model, (real constant
TYPE = 4), three coefficients are input. The pressure gradient can be treated as a quadratic function of
velocity, as shown below for the X direction.
V is the fluid velocity and C1 , C2 , and C3 are the coefficients specified as real constants. For an arbitrary
direction fan model (real constant TYPE = 5), the three coefficients are the components of the actual
coefficients along a coordinate direction. See also the Fluids Analysis Guide .
FLUID141 Wall Roughness

The FLOTRAN default condition is smooth walls. For information on applying roughness values, see Flow
Boundary Conditions in the Fluids Analysis Guide .
FLUID141 Non-Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of the element is greater than 1, it is assumed to be a non-fluid element.
Only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid elements. You can define up to 100 different nonfluid materials. To specify density, specific heat, and thermal conductivity for the non-fluid elements, use
the MP command. Temperature variation of the non-fluid properties is permitted, and you specify it via
the MP or MPDATA commands. Orthotropic variation also is permitted, with the restriction that the
spatial variation is always with respect to the global coordinate system. Note that element real constants
have no meaning for non-fluid FLUID141 elements.
"FLUID141 Input Summary" summarizes the element input. Element Input gives a general description of
element input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.
FLUID141 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
Real Constants
See Table141.1:FLUID141 Real Constants
Material Properties
FLUID141
Non-fluid: KXX, KYY, C, DENS

Fluid: Density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, specific heat (use FLDATA commands) or
MPTEMP and MPDATA.
Surface Loads
HFLUX, CONV, RAD, RDSF, FSIN
Body Loads
HGEN, FORC
Special Features
Nonlinear
Six turbulence models
Incompressible or compressible algorithm
Transient or steady state algorithm
Rotating or stationary coordinate system
Algebraic solvers particular to FLOTRAN
Optional distributed resistance and fan models
Multiple species transport
KEYOPT(1)
Number of species:
0--
Species transport is not activated.
2-6--
Number of species transport equations to be solved.
KEYOPT(3)
0--
Cartesian coordinates (default)
1--
Axisymmetric about Y-axis
2--
Axisymmetric about X-axis
3--
Polar Coordinates
KEYOPT(4)
Support mesh displacement DOFs:
0--
Do not include displacement DOFs.
FLUID141
1--
Include displacement DOFs (UX and UY).
Table141.1FLUID141 Real Constants
No.
Name
TYPE
Units
(Blank)
DIR
(Blank)
K
Kx
Type of distributed resistance or fan model:

1 = Distributed resistance: isotropic
2 = Distributed resistance: one-directional
3 = Distributed resistance: direction-dependent
4 = Fan model: aligned with a coordinate axis
5 = Fan model: arbitrary direction
1, 2, 3 - Not used
4 - Fan orientation: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z
5 - Not Used
1, 2 - Dimensionless head loss / length
3 - Head loss in X direction
1/L
1/L
C1
4 - Constant term
M/L 2 t 2
C1x
M/L 2 t 2
5 - Vector component of C1 in X direction

1, 2 - Permeability
1/L2
Cx
3 - Permeability in X direction
1/L2
C2
4 - Linear coefficient
M/L 3 t
C2x
Dh
1, 2 - Hydraulic diameter
M/L 3 t
L
Dhx
3 - Hydraulic diameter in X direction
C3
4 - Quadratic coefficient
M/L 4
C3x

1, 2 - Coefficient of Reynolds number, used in friction
factor calculations
3 - Coefficient a in X direction
M/L 4
-
bx
4, 5 - Not Used
1, 2 - Exponent of Reynolds number, used in friction
factor calculations
3 - Exponent b in X direction
(Blank)
(Blank)
FLDIR
Ky
4, 5 - Not Used
1 - Not Used
2 - Flow direction: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z
3 - Head loss in Y direction
1/L
(Blank)
C1y
4 - Not Used
5 - Vector component of C1 in Y direction
(Blank)
Cy
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Permeability in Y direction
a
a x
Definition and Type no.
(Blank)
b
M/L 2 t 2
1/L2
FLUID141
(Blank)
C2y
10
(Blank)
Dhy
(Blank)
C3y
4 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Hydraulic diameter in Y direction
M/L 3 t
L
-
(Blank)
a y
4 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Y direction
12
(Blank)
(Blank)
by
4, 5 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Y direction
13
(Blank)
(Blank)
K z
4, 5 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Head loss in Z (swirl) direction
1/L
(Blank)
C1z
4 - Not Used
5 - Vector component of C1 in Z (swirl) direction
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Permeability in Z (swirl) direction
11
14
(Blank)
Cz
(Blank)
C2z
M/L 4
-
M/L 2 t 2
1/L2
-
(Blank)
Dhz
4 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Hydraulic diameter in Z (swirl) direction
(Blank)
C3z
4 - Not Used
(Blank)
a z
M/L 4
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) direction -
(Blank)
(Blank)
bz
4, 5 - Not Used
1, 2 - Not Used
3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) direction
18
19
20
(Blank)
BDTOL
MMFAC
Ks
4, 5 - Not Used
Element birth/death tolerance
Mesh morphing multiplier
Local uniform wall roughness
L
L
21
CK s
An empirical dimensionless factor between 0.5 and 1.0

that specifies the degree of nonuniformity of the
surface.
15
16
17
M/L 3 t
L
FLUID141 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element takes the form of nodal quantities. Additional
intermediate properties and derived quantities supplement the degrees of freedom. See the Basic
Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Table141.2:FLUID141 Element Output Definitions describes quantities that are output on a nodal basis.
Some quantities are not output if the relevant options are not activated. Once an option is used, the
relevant DOF quantities are always stored. For example, if a temperature field has been obtained and
FLUID141
upon restart the energy equation is no longer to be solved, the temperatures are stored anyway. You
control the storage of derived properties such as effective viscosity by issuing the FLDATA5,OUTP
command.
The Jobname.PFL file provides additional output. This file contains periodic tabulations of the maximum,
minimum, and average values of the velocities, pressure, temperature, turbulence quantities, and
properties. The file also records the convergence monitoring parameters calculated at every global
iteration. The Jobname.PFL file also tabulates the mass flow at all the inlets and outlets and the heat
transfer information at all the boundaries.
A wall results file ( Jobname.RSW) contains information associated with the boundary faces of wall
elements. Average pressure, temperature, shear stress, Y-plus values and wall heat fluxes are stored,
along with vectors denoting the normal direction from the surface (Normal Vector) and the direction of
the velocity immediately adjacent to the wall (Tangent Vector).
An optional residual file ( Jobname.RDF) shows how well the current solution satisfies the implied matrix
equations for each DOF.
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
[ETABLE, ESOL]. The R column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
A Y in the R column indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table footnote that
describes when the item is conditionally available, and a - indicates that the item is not available.
Table141.2FLUID141 Element Output Definitions
Name
UX
UY
VX:
VY:
VZ:
PRES:
ENKE:
ENDS:
TEMP:
DENS:
VISC:
COND:
SPHT:
EVIS:
ECON:
CMUV:
TTOT:
Definition
Displacement in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates); Displacement along
axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric about X); Displacement in the radial direction
(Axisymmetric about Y)
Displacement in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates); Displacement along
radial direction (Axisymmetric about X); Displacement along the axis of
symmetry (Axisymmetric about Y)
Velocity in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the radial
direction (Polar coordinates); Velocity along axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric
about X); Velocity in the radial direction (Axisymmetric about Y)
Velocity in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the tangential
direction (Polar coordinates); Velocity in the radial direction (Axisymmetric
about X); Velocity along the axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric about Y)
Velocity in the swirl direction (Axisymmetric problems)
Relative Pressure
Turbulent kinetic energy
Turbulence dissipation rate
Temperature
Nodal fluid density
Nodal fluid viscosity
Nodal fluid thermal conductivity
Nodal fluid specific heat
Effective viscosity (includes effects of turbulence)
Effective thermal conductivity (includes the effects of turbulence)
Turbulent viscosity coefficient
Stagnation (Total) Temperature (Only relevant to compressible analyses)
R
10
10
Y
Y
8
Y
2
2
1
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
7
FLUID141
HFLU:
HFLM:
RDFL:
STRM:
MACH:
PTOT:
PCOE:
YPLU:
TAUW:
SP0 N:
LMD N:
EMD N:
Heat Flux at external surface nodes (per unit area)

Heat Transfer (film) coefficient at external surface nodes
Radiation Heat Flux
Stream Function (2-D)
Mach Number (must be requested if incompressible)
Stagnation (Total) Pressure
Pressure Coefficient
Y+ a turbulent law of the wall parameter
Shear Stress at the wall
Mass fraction of species N, where N = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is given
a user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0 N.
Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Not
relevant unless species defined.)
Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Not
relevant unless species defined.)
1
1
1
Y
6
Y
3
3
3
4
3
2
1. Available if thermal is on.

2. Available if turbulence is on.
3. Must be requested.
4. Available if species defined.
5. Available if property is variable.
6. Available if compressible.
7. Available if compressible and thermal.
8. Available if swirl is turned on.
9. For solid material elements in FLOTRAN, when nodes are connected only to solid nodes, the
column for the density (DENS) label within the Jobname.RFL results file, stores the product of the
solid material's density and its specific heat.
10. Available if KEYOPT(4) = 1.
FLUID141 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element must not have a negative or a zero area.
You must define the connectivity of an element with the nodes in counterclockwise order.
The element must lie in the X-Y plane.
When triangles are formed by duplicating the third node, the FLOTRAN element will ignore the
duplicate node and treat nodes I, J, and K.
Only linear elements are supported.
You cannot use FLUID141 with any other ANSYS elements.
Not all ANSYS commands are relevant to the use of FLUID141. The Fluids Analysis Guide
documents these command usage restrictions.
FLOTRAN CFD analyses are highly nonlinear.
FLUID141
In some cases, convergence is difficult to achieve and requires the use of stability and relaxation
parameters.
Highly turbulent cases may benefit from preconditioning (the initialization of the flow field with a
laminar analysis), particularly if a coarse finite element mesh is being used.
You must determine if use of the turbulence and/or compressible option is warranted. The
turbulence option requires a fine mesh near the walls and a fine mesh is recommended near any
regions where shock waves occur. If the larger gradients occur in regions with the coarsest mesh,
rerun the problems with adjusted meshes.
Surface-to-surface radiation (RDSF) is not supported for compressible flow thermal analysis and R and R--Z coordinate systems.
The FLOTRAN element must be in counterclockwise order for a 2-D FSI analysis (for Figure 141.1,
I, J, K, L order) and it must be in positive volume order for a 3-D FSI analysis (for Figure 142.1, I,
J, K, L, M, N, O order). If the element order is not proper, you will need to recreate the mesh to
reverse it.
The following assumptions have been made in the formulation:
The nodal coordinate system and the global coordinate system must remain the same.
The problem domain and the finite element mesh may not change during an analysis.
The fluid is a single phase fluid.
Non-fluid thermal conductivities can vary with temperature. Orthotropic variation of non-fluid
thermal conductivity also is supported. For more information, see MP, MPDATA, and related
commands in the Command Reference.
Free surfaces are not permitted.
The equation of state of gases is the ideal gas law. This is the case regardless of whether the
incompressible or compressible algorithm is invoked. The ideal gas law is not valid at Mach
numbers above 5.
In the incompressible option, work done on the fluid by pressure forces, viscous dissipation, and
kinetic energy terms are neglected in the energy equation. The incompressible energy equation is
a thermal transport equation.
In the compressible adiabatic case, the stagnation (total) temperature is assumed constant and the
static temperature is calculated from it by subtracting a kinetic energy term.
Load case operations are not permitted with the FLOTRAN elements.
FLUID141 Product Restrictions

14.137.FLUID141 - 2-D Fluid-Thermal
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Quad
Advection-Diffusion
Matrices for Momentum
Equations (X, Y and Z)
Advection-Diffusion
Matrix for Energy
(Temperature)
Equation12121, Equation12
122, and Equation12123
Quad
Equation12124
Triangle
Equation12124
Quad
Equation12125
Triangle
Equation12125
Triangle
Advection-Diffusion
Matrix for Pressure
Shape Functions
Advection-Diffusion
Matrices for Turbulent
Kinetic Energy and
Dissipation Rate
Quad
Equation12127 and
Equation12128
Triangle
Equation12127 and
Equation12128
Momentum Equation
Source Vector
Same as momentum equation matrix
Pressure Equation
Source Vector
Same as pressure matrix
Heat Generation Vector Same as temperature matrix
Turbulent Kinetic Energy

Same as kinetic energy and dissipation rate
and Dissipation Rate
matrices
Source Term Vectors
Integration Points
if 2-D 1 (default) or 2 x
2; if axisymmetric 1 or
2 x 2 (default)
(adjustable with the
FLDATA,QUAD,MOMD
command)
1
Same as for momentum
equation, but adjustable
(with the
FLDATA,QUAD,PRSD
command)
Same as for
momentum, equations
but adjustable (with the
FLDATA,QUAD,THRD
command)
Same as for
momentum, equations
but adjustable (with the
FLDATA,QUAD,TRBD
command)
Same as momentum
equations, but
adjustable (with the
FLDATA,QUAD,MOMS
command)
Same as pressure
equations, but
FLDATA,QUAD,PRSS
command)
Same as temperature
equations, but
FLDATA,QUAD,THRS
command)
Same as kinetic energy
and dissipation rate
equations, but
FLDATA,QUAD,TRBS
command)
Distributed Resistance
Same as momentum equation matrix
Source Term Vector
Convection Surface
Matrix and Load Vector One-half of the element face length times the
heat flow rate is applied at each edge node
and Heat Flux Load
Vector
1
None

Fluid Flow describes the derivation of the applicable matrices, vectors, and output quantities. Heat Flow
describes the derivation of the heat transfer logic, including the film coefficient treatment.
12.7.2-D and Axisymmetric Solids

This section contains shape functions for 2-D and axisymmetric solid elements. These elements are
available in a number of configurations, including certain combinations of the following features:
triangular or quadrilateral.
- if quadrilateral, with or without extra shape functions (ESF).
with or without midside nodes.
Figure12.62-D and Axisymmetric Solid Element
12.7.1.2-D and Axisymmetric 3-Node Triangular Solids (CST)

These shape functions are for 2-D 3-node and axisymmetric triangular solid elements, such as PLANE13,
FLUID141, or PLANE182 with only 3 nodes input:
(12
98)
(12
99)
(12
100)
(12
101)
(12
102)
(12
103)
(12
104)
(12
105)
(12
106)
(12
107)
(12
108)
(12
109)
12.7.2.2-D and Axisymmetric 6-Node Triangular Solids (LST)

These shape functions are for 2-D 6-node and axisymmetric triangular solids, such as PLANE35:
(12
110)
(12
111)
(12
112)
(12
113)
(12
114)
(12
115)
(12
116)
12.7.3.2-D and Axisymmetric 4-node Quadrilateral Solid without ESF

(Q4)
These shape functions are for the 2-D 4-node and axisymmetric quadrilateral solid elements without
extra shape functions, such as PLANE13 with KEYOPT(2) = 1, LINK68, or FLUID141.
(12
117)
(12
118)
(12
119)
(12
120)
(12
121)
(12
122)
(12
123)
(12
124)
(12
125)
(12
126)
(12
127)
(12
128)
12.7.4.2-D and Axisymmetric 4-node Quadrilateral Solids with ESF (QM6)

These shape functions are for the 2-D 4-node and axisymmetric solid elements with extra shape
functions, such as PLANE13 with KEYOPT(2) = 0. (Taylor et al.([49]))
(12
129)
(12
130)
Equation12129 is adjusted for axisymmetric situations by removing the u1 or u2 term for elements
near the centerline, in order to avoid holes or doubled material at the centerline.
12.7.5.2-D and Axisymmetric 8-Node Quadrilateral Solids (Q8)

These shape functions are for the 2-D 8-node and axisymmetric quadrilateral elements such as PLANE77
and PLANE183:
(12
131)
(12
132)
(12
133)
(12
134)
(12
135)
(12
136)
12.7.6.2-D and Axisymmetric 4-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids

Figure12.74-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solid Element
These Lagrangian isoparametric shape functions and mapping functions are for the 2-D and
axisymmetric 4-node quadrilateral solid infinite elements such as INFIN110:
12.7.6.1.Lagrangian Isoparametric Shape Functions
(12
137)
(12
138)
(12
139)
12.7.6.2.Mapping Functions
(12
140)
(12
141)
12.7.7.2-D and Axisymmetric 8-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids

Figure12.88-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solid Element
These Lagrangian isoparametric shape functions and mapping functions are for the 2-D and
axisymmetric 8-node quadrilateral infinite solid elements such as INFIN110:
(12
142)
(12
143)
(12
144)
(12
145)
(12
146)
The shape and mapping functions for the nodes N, O and P are deliberately set to zero.
PLANE83
PLANE83
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

current-technology element such as SOLID273 (KEYOPT(6) = 0).
PLANE83 is used for 2-D modeling of axisymmetric structures with nonaxisymmetric loading. Examples of
such loading are bending, shear, or torsion. The element has three degrees of freedom per node:
translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. For unrotated nodal coordinates, these directions
correspond to the radial, axial, and tangential directions, respectively.
This element is a higher order version of the 2-D, four-node element (PLANE25). It provides more
accurate results for mixed (quadrilateral-triangular) automatic meshes and can tolerate irregular shapes
without as much loss of accuracy. The loading need not be axisymmetric. Various loading cases are
described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
The 8-node elements have compatible displacement shapes and are well suited to model curved
boundaries. See PLANE83 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
for more details about this element.
PLANE83 Input Data

Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Z-direction material properties (EZ, ALPZ, etc.)
may be input. MODE and ISYM are used to describe the harmonic loading condition. (See Harmonic
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads for more details.)
pressures act into the element. Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads
at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified,
they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature
defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other input temperature
pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
The KEYOPT(3) parameter is used for temperature loading with MODE greater than zero and
temperature-dependent material properties. Material properties may only be evaluated at a constant
(nonharmonically varying) temperature. If MODE equals zero, the material properties are always
PLANE83
evaluated at the average element temperature. KEYOPT(4), (5), and (6) provide various element
printout options (see Element Solution).
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE83 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
0--
1--
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side
KEYOPT(3)
PLANE83

0--
1--
KEYOPT(4)
0--
Basic element solution (not extra output)
1--
2--
Nodal stress solution
KEYOPT(5)
Combined stress output:
0--
No combined stress solution
1--
Combined stress solution at centroid and nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output (surface solution is valid only for isotropic materials):
0--
Basic element solution (no extra output)
1--
Surface solution for face I-J also
2--
Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also
PLANE83 Output Data

PLANE83

the peak value at = 90. The same occurs for the reaction forces (FX, FY, etc.). We recommend that
you always use the angle field on the SET command when postprocessing the results. For more
information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric
Loads.
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The sign convention on the
surface shears is such that for a rectangular element that is lined up parallel to the axes with node J in
the positive Y direction from node I, the shear stresses on surfaces I-J and K-L are analogous to the
centroidal SYZ in both definition and sign. Stress components which are inherently zero for a load case
are printed for clarity. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
ISYM
MODE
VOLU:
PRES
TEMP
S:X, Y, Z
S:XY, YZ, XZ
S:1, 2, 3
Definition
Element Number
Corner nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at I,L
Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O),
T(P)
Direct stresses (radial, axial, hoop) at PK ANG locations Y
Shear stresses (radial-axial, axial-hoop, radial-hoop) at
Y
PK ANG locations
1
Principal stresses at both PK ANG locations as well as
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
PLANE83

location is given.
S:INT
Stress intensity at both PK ANG locations as well as
location is given.
S:EQV
Equivalent stress at both PK ANG locations as well as
location is given.
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
Elastic strain
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
PK ANG
Angle where stresses have peak values: 0 and 90/MODE
. Blank if MODE = 0.
XC, YC
FACE
Face label
TEMP
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z, SH) Surface strains (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) at
S(PAR, PER, Z, SH)
Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) at
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
2
Y
3
2
2
2
2
1. These items are output only if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
the user (MP,PRXY).
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is
used in Table83.2:PLANE83 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
I,J,K,L
Output Quantity
Name
P1
P2
Item
SMISC
SMISC

I
J
K
2
-
1
4
L
-
PLANE83
P3
SMISC
P4
SMISC
THETA = 0
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
THETA = 90/MODE
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
EXTR Values
S1
NMISC
S2
NMISC
S3
NMISC
SINT
NMISC
SEQV
NMISC
6
-
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
16
17
18
19
20
31
32
33
34
35
46
47
48
49
50
6
7
8
9
10
21
22
23
24
25
36
37
38
39
40
51
52
53
54
55
11
12
13
14
15
26
27
28
29
30
41
42
43
44
45
56
57
58
59
60
Note: The NMISC items (1 thru 60) in the above table represent the combined stress
solution, KEYOPT(5) = 1. If MODE = 0, their values are zero at THETA = 90/MODE
and at EXTR.
See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the
ETABLE command.

The element must be defined in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 83.1 and the Y-axis must
be the axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled
in the +X quadrants.
A face with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that face. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and
Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
The element assumes a linear elastic material.
Post-analysis superposition of results is valid only with other linear elastic solutions.
The element should not be used with the large deflection option.
The element may not be deactivated with the EKILL command.
The element temperature is taken to be the average of the nodal temperatures.
Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met.
Modeling hints:
PLANE83
If shear effects are important in a shell-like structure, at least two elements through the thickness
should be used.

2.12.Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements

An axisymmetric structure can be represented by a plane (X,Y) finite-element model. The use of an
axisymmetric model greatly reduces the modeling and analysis time compared to that of an equivalent
3-D model.
ANSYS recommends general axisymmetric elements SOLID272 and SOLID273 for such applications
because they can accept any type of load and can support nonlinear analyses. However, you can also
use a special class of axisymmetric elements called harmonic elements: PLANE25, SHELL61, PLANE75,
PLANE78, FLUID81, and PLANE83. The harmonic elements allow a nonaxisymmetric load and support
linear analyses.
Axisymmetric elements are modeled on a 360 basis, so all input and output nodal heat flows, forces,
moments, fluid flows, current flows, electric charges, magnetic fluxes, and magnetic current segments
must be input in this manner. Similarly, input real constants representing volumes, convection areas,
thermal capacitances, heat generations, spring constants, and damping coefficients must also be input in
on a 360 basis.
Unless otherwise stated, the model must be defined in the Z = 0.0 plane. The global Cartesian Y-axis is
assumed to be the axis of symmetry. Further, the model is developed only in the +X quadrants. Hence,
the radial direction is in the +X direction.
The boundary conditions are described in terms of the structural elements. The forces (FX, FY, etc.) and
displacements (UX, UY, etc.) for the structural elements are input and output in the nodal coordinate
system. All nodes along the y-axis centerline (at x = 0.0) should have the radial displacements (UX if not
rotated) specified as zero, unless a pinhole effect is desired. At least one value of UY should be specified
or constrained to prevent rigid body motions. Torsion, while axisymmetric, is available only for a few
element types. If an element type allows torsion, all UZ degrees of freedom should be set to 0.0 on the
centerline, and one node with a positive X coordinate must also have a specified or constrained value of
UZ. Pressures and temperatures may be applied directly. Acceleration, if any, is usually input only in the
axial (Y) direction. Similarly, angular velocity, if any, is usually input only about the Y axis.
For more information, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
2.12.1.Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads

An axisymmetric structure (defined with the axial direction along the global Y axis and the radial
direction parallel to the global X axis) can be represented by a plane (X, Y) finite-element model. The
use of an axisymmetric model greatly reduces the modeling and analysis time compared to that of an
equivalent 3-D model. The ANSYS harmonic axisymmetric elements allow nonaxisymmetric loads. For
these elements (PLANE25, SHELL61, PLANE75, PLANE78, FLUID81, and PLANE83) , the load is defined
as a series of harmonic functions (Fourier series). For example, a load F is given by:
F() = A0 + A1 cos + B 1 sin + A2 cos 2 + B 2 sin 2 + A3 cos 3 + B 3 sin 3 + ...
Each term of the above series must be defined as a separate load step. A term is defined by the load
coefficient (A or B ), the number of harmonic waves ( ), and the symmetry condition (cos or
sin ). The number of harmonic waves, or the mode number, is input with the MODE command.
Note that = 0 represents the axisymmetric term (A0 ). is the circumferential coordinate implied in
the model. The load coefficient is determined from the standard ANSYS boundary condition input (i.e.,
displacements, forces, pressures, etc.). Input values for temperature, displacement, and pressure should
be the peak value. The input value for force and heat flow should be a number equal to the peak value
per unit length times the circumference. The symmetry condition is determined from the ISYM value also
input on the MODE command. The description of the element given in Element Library and in the
appropriate sections of the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
should be reviewed to see which deformation shape corresponds to the symmetry conditions.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_axisy.html[28/04/2013 08:33:52 p.m.]
Results of the analysis are written to the results file. The deflections and stresses are output at the peak
value of the sinusoidal function. The results may be scaled and summed at various circumferential ()
locations with POST1. This may be done by storing results data at the desired location using the
ANGLE argument of the SET command. A load case may be defined with LCWRITE. Repeat for each
set of results, then combine or scale the load cases as desired with LCOPER. Stress (and temperature)
contour displays and distorted shape displays of the combined results can also be made.
Caution should be used if the harmonic elements are mixed with other, nonharmonic elements. The
harmonic elements should not be used in nonlinear analyses, such as large deflection and/or contact
analyses.
The element matrices for harmonic elements are dependent upon the number of harmonic waves
(MODE) and the symmetry condition ( ISYM ). For this reason, neither the element matrices nor the
triangularized matrix is reused in succeeding substeps if the MODE and ISYM parameters are changed.
In addition, a superelement generated with particular MODE and ISYM values must have the same
values in the "use" pass.
For stress stiffened (prestressed) structures, the ANSYS program uses only the stress state of the most
recent previous MODE = 0 load case, regardless of the current value of MODE .
Loading Cases - The following cases are provided to aid the user in obtaining a physical understanding
of the MODE parameter and the symmetric ( ISYM =1) and antisymmetric ( ISYM =-1) loading conditions.
The loading cases are described in terms of the structural elements. The forces (FX, FY, etc.) and
displacements (UX, UY, etc.) for the structural elements are input and output in the nodal coordinate
system. In all cases illustrated, it is assumed that the nodal coordinate system is parallel to the global
Cartesian coordinate system. The loading description may be extended to any number of modes. The
harmonic thermal elements (PLANE75 and PLANE78) are treated the same as PLANE25 and PLANE83,
respectively, with the following substitutions: UY to TEMP, and FY to HEAT. The effects of UX, UZ,
ROTZ, FX, FZ and MZ are all ignored for thermal elements.
Case A: ( MODE = 0, ISYM not used) - This is the case of axisymmetric loading except that torsional
effects are included. Figure 2.3 shows the various axisymmetric loadings. Pressures and temperatures
may be applied directly. Acceleration, if any, is usually input only in the axial (Y) direction. Similarly,
angular velocity, if any, is usually input only about the Y axis.
Figure2.3Axisymmetric Radial, Axial, Torsion and Moment Loadings
The total force (F) acting in the axial direction due to an axial input force (FY) is:
where FY is on a full 360 basis.

The total applied moment (M) due to a tangential input force (FZ) acting about the global axis is:
where FZ is on a full 360 basis. Calculated reaction forces are also on a full 360 basis and the above
expressions may be used to find the total force. Nodes at the centerline (X = 0.0) should have UX and
UZ (and ROTZ, for SHELL61) specified as zero, unless a pinhole effect is desired. At least one value of
UY should be specified or constrained to prevent rigid body motions. Also, one node with a nonzero,
positive X coordinate must have a specified or constrained value of UZ if applicable. When Case A
defines the stress state used in stress stiffened analyses, torsional stress is not allowed.
Case B: ( MODE = 1, ISYM =1) - An example of this case is the bending of a pipe. Figure 2.4 shows the
corresponding forces or displacements on a nodal circle. All functions are based on sin or cos. The
input and output values of UX, FX, etc., represent the peak values of the displacements or forces. The
peak values of UX, UY, FX and FY (and ROTZ and MZ for SHELL61) occur at = 0, whereas the peak
values of UZ and FZ occur at = 90. Pressures and temperatures are applied directly as their peak
values at = 0. The thermal load vector is computed from T peak , where T peak is the input element or
nodal temperature. The reference temperature for thermal strain calculations (TREF) is internally set to
zero in the thermal strain calculation for the harmonic elements if MODE > 0. Gravity (g) acting in the
global X direction should be input (ACEL) as ACELX = g, ACELY = 0.0, and ACELZ = -g. The peak
values of x , y , z and xy occur at = 0 , whereas the peak values of yz and xz occur at 90.
Figure2.4Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = 1)
The total applied force in the global X direction (F) due to both an input radial force (FX) and a
tangential force (FZ) is:
where FX and FZ are the peak forces on a full 360 basis. Calculated reaction forces are also the peak
values on a full 360 basis and the above expression may be used to find the total force. These net
forces are independent of radius so that they may be applied at any radius (including X = 0.0) for the
same net effect.
An applied moment (M) due to an axial input force (FY) for this case can be computed as follows:
An additional applied moment (M) is generated based on the input moment (MZ):
If it is desired to impose a uniform lateral displacement (or force) on the cross section of a cylindrical
structure in the global X direction, equal magnitudes of UX and UZ (or FX and FZ) may be combined as
shown in Figure 2.5.
Figure2.5Uniform Lateral Loadings
When UX and UZ are input in this manner, the nodal circle moves in an uniform manner. When FX and
FZ are input in this manner, a uniform load is applied about the circumference, but the resulting UX and
UZ will not, in general, be the same magnitude. If it is desired to have the nodal circle moving in a rigid
manner, it can be done by using constraint equations (CE) so that UX = -UZ.
Node points on the centerline (X = 0.0) should have UY specified as zero. Further, UX must equal -UZ at
all points along the centerline, which may be enforced with constraint equations. In practice, however, it
seems necessary to do this only for the harmonic fluid element, FLUID81, since this element has no
static shear stiffness. To prevent rigid body motions, at least one value of UX or UZ, as well as one
value of UY (not at the centerline), or ROTZ, should be specified or constrained in some manner. For
SHELL61, if plane sections (Y = constant) are to remain plane, ROTZ should be related to UY by means
of constraint equations at the loaded nodes.
Case C: ( MODE = 1, ISYM = -1) - This case (shown in Figure 2.6) represents a pipe bending in a
direction 90 to that described in Case B.
Figure2.6Bending and Shear Loading ( ISYM = -1)
The same description applying to Case B applies also to Case C, except that the negative signs on UZ,
FZ, and the direction cosine are changed to positive signs. Also, the location of the peak values of
various quantities are switched between the 0 and 90 locations.
Case D: ( MODE = 2, ISYM = 1) - The displacement and force loadings associated with this case are
shown in Figure 2.7. All functions are based on sin 2 and cos 2.
Figure2.7Displacement and Force Loading Associated with MODE = 2 and ISYM = 1
Additional Cases: There is no programmed limit to the value of MODE . Additional cases may be defined
by the user.
SHELL61
SHELL61
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SHELL61 has four degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions and
a rotation about the nodal z-axis. The loading may be axisymmetric or nonaxisymmetric. Various loading
cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
Extreme orientations of the conical shell element result in a cylindrical shell element or an annular disc
element. The shell element may have a linearly varying thickness. See SHELL61 in the Theory Reference
for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
SHELL61 Input Data

element is defined by two nodes, two end thicknesses, the number of harmonic waves ( MODE on the
MODE command), a symmetry condition ( ISYM on the MODE command), and the orthotropic material
properties. The element coordinate system is shown in Figure 61.2. is in the tangential (hoop)
direction. The MODE or ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with
Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
The material may be orthotropic, with nine elastic constants required for its description. The element
loading may be input as any combination of harmonically varying temperatures and pressures.
Harmonically varying nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360 basis.
The element may have variable thickness. The thickness is assumed to vary linearly between the nodes.
If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) is required. Real constant ADMSUA is used to define
an added mass per unit area.
pressures act into the element. The pressures are applied at the surface of the element rather than at
the centroidal plane so that some thickness effects can be considered. These include the increase or
decrease in size of surface area the load is acting on and (in the case of a nonzero Poisson's ratio) an
interaction effect causing the element to grow longer or shorter under equal pressures on both surfaces.
Material properties EY, PRXY, and PRYZ (or EY, NUXY, and NUYZ) are required for this effect.
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the four corner locations
shown in Figure 61.1. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are
SHELL61
unspecified, they default to T1. If only T1 and T2 are input, T3 defaults to T2 and T4 defaults to T1.
KEYOPT(1) is used for temperature loading with MODE greater than zero and temperature-dependent
material properties. Material properties may only be evaluated at a constant (nonharmonically varying)
temperature. If MODE equals zero, the material properties are always evaluated at the average element
temperature. KEYOPT(3) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes.
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL61 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
Real Constants
TK(I) - Shell thickness at node I
TK(J) - Shell thickness at node J (TK(J) defaults to TK(I))
ADMSUA - Added mass/unit area
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), ALPX, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or
THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXZ, DAMP. (X is meridional, Y is through-the-thickness, and Z is
circumferential.)
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J) (top, in -Y direction)
face 2 (I-J) (bottom, in +Y direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T1, T2, T3, T4
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
0--
SHELL61
1--
KEYOPT(3)
0--
1--
KEYOPT(4)
Member force and moment output:
0--
No printout of member forces and moments
1--
Print out member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(6)
Location of element solution output:
0--
Output solution at mid-length only
N--
Output solution at N equally spaced interior points and at end points (where N = 1, 3, 5, 7 or
9)
SHELL61 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table61.1:SHELL61 Element Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 61.2. The printout may be displayed at the centroid, at the end
points and at N equally spaced interior points, where N is the KEYOPT(6) value. For example, if N = 3,
printout will be produced at end I, 1/4 length, mid-length (centroid), 3/4 length, and at end J. Printout
location number 1 is always at end I. Stress components which are inherently zero are printed for clarity.
In the displacement printout, the UZ components are out-of-phase with the UX and UY components. For
example, in the MODE = 1, ISYM = 1 loading case, UX and UY are the peak values at = 0 and UZ is the
peak value at = 90. We recommend that you always use the angle field on the SET command when
postprocessing the results. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads
SHELL61
A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for
ways to view results.
Figure61.2SHELL61 Stress Output

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
LENGTH
XC, YC
TEMP
PRES
MODE
ISYM
T(X, Z, XZ)
M(X, Z, XZ)
MFOR(X, Y, Z),
MMOMZ
PK ANG
S(M, THK, H, MH)
EPEL(M, THK, H,
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Material number
Distance between node I and node J
Temperatures T1, T2, T3, T4
Pressures P1 (top) at nodes I,J; P2 (bottom) at nodes I,J
In-plane element X, Z, and XZ forces at KEYOPT(6)
location(s)
Out-of-plane element X, Z, and XZ moments at KEYOPT(6)
location(s)
Member forces and member moment for each node in the
element coordinate system
Angle where stresses have peak values: 0 and 90/MODE.
Blank if MODE = 0.
Stresses (meridional, through-thickness, hoop, meridionalhoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top, middle, and
bottom of shell
Elastic strains (meridional, through-thickness, hoop,
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
SHELL61
MH)
EPTH(M, THK, H,
MH)
meridional-hoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top,

middle, and bottom of shell
Thermal strains (meridional, through-thickness, hoop,
meridional-hoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top,
middle, and bottom of shell
1. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(4) = 1.

Table61.2:SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 1) lists output available through
the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in
the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more
information. The following notation is used in Table61.2:SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers
(KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 1):
Name
Item
I,J
ILn
sequence number for data at Intermediate Location n
Table61.2SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 1)
Output Quantity
Name
Top
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Mid
SM
STHK
SH
Item

I
IL1
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
LS
LS
LS
5
6
7
17
18
19
29
30
31
SHELL61
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Bot
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Element
MFORX
MFORY
MFORZ
MMOMZ
TX
TZ
TXZ
MX
MZ
MXZ
P1
P2
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
6
13
14
15
16
17
18
31
35
TEMP
19
20
21
22
23
24
Corner Location
2
3
1
LBFE
7
8
9
12
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
36
4
4
Table61.3SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 3)

Output
Quantity Name
Top
SM

I
IL1
IL2
IL3
Item
LS
13
25
37
J
49
SHELL61
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Mid
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Bot
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Element
MFORX
MFORY
MFORZ
MMOMZ
TX
TZ
TXZ
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
6
13
14
15
19
20
21
25
26
27
31
32
33
7
8
9
12
37
38
39
SHELL61
MX
MZ
MXZ
P1
P2
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
16
17
18
43
47
22
23
24
-
TEMP
28
29
30
-
40
41
42
44
48
Corner Location
2
3
1
LBFE
34
35
36
4
4

Output
Quantity
Name
Top
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Mid
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Bot
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
Item

IL1
IL2
IL3
IL4
IL5
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
61
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
65
66
67
68
65
66
67
68
65
66
67
68
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
9
10
11
12
9
21
22
23
24
21
33
34
35
36
33
45
46
47
48
45
57
58
59
60
57
69
70
71
72
69
81
82
83
84
81
SHELL61
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Element
MFORX
MFORY
MFORZ
MMOMZ
TX
TZ
TXZ
MX
MZ
MXZ
P1
P2
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
6
13
14
15
16
17
18
55
59
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
-
19
20
21
22
23
24
-
31
32
33
34
35
36
-
70
71
72
69
70
71
72
-
82
83
84
81
82
83
84
-
37
38
39
40
41
42
-
7
8
9
12
49
50
51
52
53
54
56
60
43
44
45
46
47
48
-
Corner Location
2
3
1
LBFE
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
-
25
26
27
28
29
30
TEMP
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
4
4

Output
Quantity
Name
Top
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Mid
SM
STHK
SH
Item

IL1
IL2
IL3
IL4
IL5
IL6
IL7
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
61
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
85
86
87
88
85
86
87
88
85
86
87
88
97
98
99
100
97
98
99
100
97
98
99
100
LS
LS
LS
5
6
7
17
18
19
29
30
31
41
42
43
53
54
55
65
66
67
77
78
79
89
90
91
101
102
103
SHELL61
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Bot
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Element
MFORX
MFORY
MFORZ
MMOMZ
TX
TZ
TXZ
MX
MZ
MXZ
P1
P2
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
44
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
56
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
68
65
66
67
68
65
66
67
68
80
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
92
89
90
91
92
89
90
91
92
104
101
102
103
104
101
102
103
104
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
69
70
71
72
69
70
71
72
69
70
71
72
81
82
83
84
81
82
83
84
81
82
83
84
93
94
95
96
93
94
95
96
93
94
95
96
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
6
13
14
15
16
17
18
67
71
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
-
31
32
33
34
35
36
-
TEMP
37
38
39
40
41
42
-
43
44
45
46
47
48
-
49
50
51
52
53
54
-
55
56
57
58
59
60
-
Corner Location
2
3
1
LBFE
7
8
9
12
61
62
63
64
65
66
68
72
4

Output
Quantity
Label
Top
SM
Item
LS
I
1

IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7
13
25
37
49
61
73
85
IL8
97
IL9
109
J
121
SHELL61
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Mid
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Bot
SM
STHK
SH
SMH
EPELM
EPELTHK
EPELH
EPELMH
EPTHM
EPTHTHK
EPTHH
EPTHMH
Element
MFORX
MFORY
MFORZ
MMOMZ
TX
TZ
TXZ
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
37
38
39
40
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
49
50
51
52
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
61
62
63
64
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
86
87
88
85
86
87
88
85
86
87
88
98
99
100
97
98
99
100
97
98
99
100
110
111
112
109
110
111
112
109
110
111
112
122
123
124
121
122
123
124
121
122
123
124
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
41
42
43
44
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
53
54
55
56
65
66
67
68
65
66
67
68
65
66
67
68
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
89
90
91
92
89
90
91
92
89
90
91
92
101
102
103
104
101
102
103
104
101
102
103
104
113
114
115
116
113
114
115
116
113
114
115
116
125
126
127
128
125
126
127
128
125
126
127
128
LS
LS
LS
LS
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPEL
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
LEPTH
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
33
34
35
36
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
45
46
47
48
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
57
58
59
60
69
70
71
72
69
70
71
72
69
70
71
72
81
82
83
84
81
82
83
84
81
82
83
84
93
94
95
96
93
94
95
96
93
94
95
96
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
117
118
119
120
117
118
119
120
117
118
119
120
129
130
131
132
129
130
131
132
129
130
131
132
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
6
13
14
15
19
20
21
25
26
27
31
32
33
37
38
39
43
44
45
49
50
51
55
56
57
61
62
63
67
68
69
7
8
9
12
73
74
75
SHELL61
MX
MZ
MXZ
P1
P2
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
16
17
18
79
83
22
23
24
28
29
30
-
34
35
36
-
TEMP
40
41
42
46
47
48
-
58
59
60
-
64
65
66
-
70
71
72
-
76
77
78
80
84
Corner Location
2
3
1
LBFE
52
53
54
4
4

The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane and must not have a zero
length. Both ends must have nonnegative X coordinate values and the element must not lie along
the global Y-axis.
If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) need be defined. TK(I) must not be zero.
The element thickness is assumed to vary linearly from node I to node J. Some thick shell effects
have been included in the formulation of SHELL61 but it cannot be properly considered to be a
thick shell element. If these effects are important, it is recommended to use PLANE25.
The element assumes a linear elastic material.
Post analysis superposition of results is valid only with other linear elastic solutions.
Strain energy does not consider thermal effects.
The element should not be used with the large deflection option.

There are no product restrictions for this element.
14.59. SHELL61 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
14.59.SHELL61 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Equation1238, Equation1239, and

Equation1240. If extra shape functions are
3 along length
not included (KEYOPT(3) = 1): Equation1235,
Equation1236, and Equation1237
Same as stiffness
Mass and Stress Stiffness Equation1232, Equation1233, and
Equation1234
matrix
Matrices
Stiffness Matrix; and
Thermal and Pressure
Load Vectors
Load Type
Distribution
Element Temperature Linear through thickness and along length, harmonic around circumference
Constant through thickness, linear along length, harmonic around
Nodal Temperature
circumference
Pressure
Linear along length, harmonic around circumference
Reference: Zienkiewicz([39])

Structures discusses fundamentals of linear elements. PLANE25 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node
Structural Solid has a discussion on temperature, applicable to this element.

The material properties are assumed to be constant around the entire circumference, regardless of
temperature dependent material properties or loading.
14.59.3.Stress, Force, and Moment Calculations

Element output comes in two forms:
1. Stresses as well as forces and moments per unit length: This printout is controlled by the
KEYOPT(6). The thru-the-thickness stress locations are shown in Figure 14.16. The stresses are
computed using standard procedures as given in Structural Strain and Stress Evaluations. The
stresses may then be integrated thru the thickness to give forces per unit length and moments per
unit length at requested points along the length:
(14
120)
(14
121)
(14
122)
(14
123)
(14
124)
(14
125)
Figure14.16Stress Locations
where:
T x , T z, T xz , M x , M z, M xz = resultant forces and moments (output as TX, TZ, TXZ, MX, MZ, MXZ,
respectively)
t = thickness (input as TK(I), TK(J) on R command)
x , y , z, xz = stresses (output as SX, SY, SZ, and SXZ, respectively)
2. Forces and moments on a circumference basis: This printout is controlled by KEYOPT(4). The
values are computed using:
(14
126)
where:
[T R ] = local to global transformation matrix

[Ke] = element stiffness matrix
{ue} = nodal displacements
Another difference between the two types of output are the nomenclature conventions. Since the first
group of output uses a shell nomenclature convention and the second group of output uses a nodal
nomenclature convention, M z and
represent moments in different directions.
The rest of this subsection will describe some of the expected relationships between these two methods
of output at the ends of the element. This is done to give a better understanding of the terms, and
possibly detect poor internal consistency, suggesting that a finer mesh is in order. It is advised to
concentrate on the primary load carrying mechanisms. In order to relate these two types of output in
the printout, they have to be requested with both KEYOPT(6) > 1 and KEYOPT(4) = 1. Further, care
must be taken to ensure that the same end of the element is being considered.
The axial reaction force based on the stress over an angle is:
(14
127)
or
(14
128)
where:
Rc = radius at midplane
t = thickness
The reaction moment based on the stress over an angle is:
(14
129)
or
(14
130)
Since SHELL61 computes stiffness matrices and load vectors using the entire circumference for
axisymmetric structures, = 2. Using this fact, the definition of
Equation14123, Equation14128 and Equation14130 become:
, and Equation14120 and

(14
131)
(14
132)
As the definition of is critical for these equations, Figure 14.17 is provided to show in all four
quadrants.
Figure14.17Element Orientations
In a uniform stress ( x ) environment, a reaction moment will be generated to account for the greater
material on the outside side. This is equivalent to moving the reaction point outward a distance yf . yf is
computed by:
(14
133)
Using Equation14131 and Equation14132 and setting M x to zero gives:
(14
134)
12.5.Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells and General Axisymmetric

Surfaces
This section describes shape functions for axisymmetric shell elements under nonaxisymmetric load and
for general axisymmetric surfaces.
Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells
General Axisymmetric Surfaces
12.5.1.Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells

This section describes shape functions for 2-node axisymmetric shell elements under nonaxisymmetric
(harmonic) load. These elements may or may not have extra shape functions (ESF).
Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells without ESF
Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells with ESF
Figure12.3Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Element
The shape functions for axisymmetric harmonic shells use the quantities sin and cos , where =
input quantity MODE on the MODE command. The sin and cos are interchanged if Is = -1, where
Is = input quantity ISYM on the MODE command. If = 0, both sin and cos are set equal to
1.0.
12.5.1.1.Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells without ESF

These shape functions are for 2-node axisymmetric harmonic shell elements without extra shape
functions, such as SHELL61 with KEYOPT(3) = 1.
(12
35)
(12
36)
(12
37)
12.5.1.2.Axisymmetric Harmonic Shells with ESF
These shape functions are for 2-node axisymmetric harmonic shell elements with extra shape functions,
such as SHELL61 with KEYOPT(3) = 0.
(12
38)
(12
39)
(12
40)
12.5.2.General Axisymmetric Surfaces

This section contains shape functions for 2- or 3- node-per-plane general axisymmetric surface elements
such as SURF159. These elements are available in various configurations, including combinations of the
following features:
With or without midside nodes
A varying number of node planes (Nnp ) in the circumferential direction (defined via KEYOPT(2)).
The elemental coordinates are cylindrical coordinates and displacements are defined and interpolated in
that coordinate system, as shown in Figure 12.4.
Figure12.4General Axisymmetric Surface Elements (when N np = 3)
When Nnp is an odd number, the interpolation function used for displacement is:
(12
41)
where:
i = r, , z
hi (s, t) = regular Lagrangian polynominal interpolation functions like Equation126 or Equation1219.
= coefficients for the Fourier terms.
When Nnp is an even number, the interpolation function is:
(12
42)
All of the coefficients in Equation1241 and Equation1242 can be expressed by nodal displacements,
using ur = u, uj = v, uz = w without midside nodes, and Nnp = 3:
(12
43)
(12
44)
(12
45)
Similar to the element without midside nodes, the u, v, and w with midside nodes are expressed as:
(12
46)
(12
47)
(12
48)
SURF159
SURF159
General Axisymmetric Surface
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
SURF159 Element Description

Use SURF159 to model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on general axisymmetric solid elements
(SOLID272 or SOLID273). The element has linear or quadratic displacement behavior on the master
plane and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes on the master plane. It is defined by two or three
nodes on the master plane, and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction based on
the master plane nodes. The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal planes
(KEYOPT(2)). The element area between nodal planes is called a facet. Each node has three degrees of
freedom: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions. Various loads and surface effects can exist
simultaneously.
In addition to the SURF159 element information provided here, the following topics are available in the
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications :
SURF159 - General Axisymmetric Surface with 2 or 3 Nodes
General Axisymmetric Surfaces
For related information (concerning the elements used with SURF159), see General Axisymmetric
Elements in this document.
Figure159.1SURF159 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
SURF159 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element (when KEYOPT(2) = 3) are shown in Figure 159.1.
The element input data includes nodes, real constants, and the material properties. The total number of
nodes is the two or three base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how
Fourier nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) SURF159 elements can be
generated via the ESURF command before generating nodes for general axisymmetric element sections
(NAXIS).
The element has the x-axis as normal to the element surface, the y-axis in the meridional direction, and
the z-axis in the circumferential direction.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_SURF159.html[28/04/2013 08:34:32 p.m.]
SURF159
The mass and volume calculations use the element thicknesses (real constants TKI, and TKJ). Thickness
TKJ defaults to TKI. The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit
volume) and the real constant ADMSUA, the added mass per unit area.
The stress stiffness matrix and load vector calculations use the in-plane force per unit length (input as
real constant SURT) and the elastic foundation stiffness (input as real constant EFS); the EFS uses
pressure-per-length (or force-per-length-cubed) units. The foundation stiffness can be damped, either
by using the material property DAMP as a multiplier on the stiffness or by directly using the material
property VISC.
"SURF159 Input Summary" contains a summary of the element input. See Node and Element Loads for
a general description of element input.
Pressure Loads
Pressures must be input as element surface loads (as force-per-length squared) on the element faces as
shown by the circled numbers in Figure 159.2. For SURF159, applying surface loads to the element
(SFE) or nodes (SF) is very different in comparison to the SOLID272 and SOLID273 elements. An SF
command, if issued, applies loads to faces 1 through K only (where K = KEYOPT(2), the number of
nodal planes).
SURF159 allows complex loads.
Defaults for Pressures on Faces 1 through 3K
If the first pressure for a face is specified (SFE) and the other three remain blank, the other three
pressures default to the first.
If values are specified (and perhaps supplemented by the aforementioned default) to the first face
of each of the three face families (1 through K, K+1 through 2K, or 2K+1 to 3K), the same values
are assigned to all other faces around the circumference. (The SFELIST command does not reflect
this defaulting behavior.)
Example 1.To obtain a uniform pressure across the element and around the circumference, only
one specified pressure is necessary on the first face of the face family.
Example 2.To obtain a pressure that tapers in the radial direction and is constant around the
circumference, all four values must be specified on the first face of the face family.
Faces 1 through 3K [KEYOPT(3) = 0].Positive values of pressure on these faces act in the positive
element coordinate directions, as follows: faces 1 through K in the element x (normal) direction, faces
K+1 through 2K in the element y (tangent, meridional) direction, and faces 2K+1 through 3K in the
element z (tangent, circumferential) direction. For faces 1 through K, positive or negative values may be
removed as requested via KEYOPT(6) to simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained
fluid. For faces K+1 through 3K, the direction of the load is controlled by the element coordinate system;
therefore, the ESYS command may be needed.
Faces 1 through 3K [KEYOPT(3) = 1].Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to
the local coordinate system, as follows: faces 1 through K in the local x direction, faces K+1 through 2K
in the local y direction, and faces 2K+1 through 3K in the local z direction. A local coordinate system
must be defined, and the element must be set to that coordinate system via the ESYS command.
KEYOPT(6) does not apply.
Figure159.2SURF159 Pressures
SURF159
Face 3K+1.The direction is normal to the element and the magnitude of the pressure at each
integration point is PI + XP J + YP K + ZPL , where PI through PL are input as VAL1 through VAL4 on the
SFE command, and X, Y, Z are the global Cartesian coordinates at the current location of the integration
point. No input values can be blank. Positive or negative values may be removed as requested with
KEYOPT(6) to simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. The SFFUN and
SFGRAD commands do not work with face 3K+1.
Face 3K+2.The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is
where i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude may be adjusted
with KEYOPT(11) and KEYOPT(12). No input values can be blank.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the nodes on the master plane, the
node I1 temperature T(I 1 ) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to
T(I 1 ). If both corner node temperatures are specified, the midside node temperature defaults to the
average temperature of the adjacent corner nodes. For any other input pattern, unspecified
temperatures default to TUNIF. For the nodes generated in the circumferential direction based on the
master node, if all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to the value of their base nodes
(T(I1 ), T(J 1 ), and T(K1 ), depending on their location). For any other input pattern, unspecified
temperatures default to TUNIF.
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue a NROPT,UNSYM command. For a geometric
nonlinear analysis when convergence is an issue, use an unsymmetric matrix.
SURF159 Input Summary

Nodes
I1 , J1 , K 1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , . . . , In , Jn , K n (where n = KEYOPT(2), the number of nodal planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
(Blank), (Blank), (Blank), EFS, SURT, ADMSUA,
TKI, TKJ
Material Properties
DENS, VISC, DAMP
Surface Loads
SURF159
Pressures--
In the following table, K represents the number of nodal planes (specified via KEYOPT(2)):
Pressure Face
face 1
face 2
...
face K
face K+1
Nodes
J 1 , I1 ,
J 2 , I2 ,
I2 , J 2
I3 , J 3
...
J K , IK , I1 ,
J 1 , I1 , I2 ,
J2
...
face 2K
face 2K+1
J1 ,
face 2K+2
J2 ,
...
face 3K
...
J K , IK , I1 , J 1
All
All
face 3K+1
face 3K+2
Body Loads
Normal
J1
J 2 , I2 ,
...
J K , IK ,
face K+2
Pressure Load Type
I3 , J 3
I1 , J 1
I1 , I2 , J 2
I2 , I3 , J 3
Meridional tangent
Circumferential tangent
Global taper
Oriented vector
Temperatures--
T(I 1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(I 2 ), T(J 2 ), T(K2 ), . . . , T(I n ), T(J n ), T(Kn )
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
Number of Fourier nodes in the circumferential direction (that is, the number of nodal planes):
1--
Axisymmetric deformation (with or without torsion).
3 - 12--
General 3-D deformation.
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid value. (0 is not valid.) The value must match
the KEYOPT(2) value of the underlying SOLID272 or SOLID273 element.
For information about specifying the number Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements in
this document.
For information about how Fourier nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.
KEYOPT(3)
Pressure applied to faces 1 through 3K (3 x KEYOPT(2)), according to the coordinate system:
SURF159
0--
Apply face loads in the default element coordinate system (that is, the first K faces act
normal to the surface).
1--
Apply face loads in the specified element coordinate system (that is, the first K faces act in
the x direction as defined via the ESYS command).
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0--
Has midside nodes. Use with SOLID273. This value is the default.
1--
No midside nodes. Use with SOLID272.
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 through K and 3K+1):
0--
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative).
1--
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero).
2--
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero).
To use KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(3) must be set to 0.
KEYOPT(7)
Loaded area during large-deflection analyses:
0--
Use new area.
1--
Use original area.
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 3K+2):
0--
On projected area and includes tangential component.
1--
SURF159
On projected area and does not include tangential component.

2--
On full area and includes the tangential component.
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element x-axis) on vector oriented (face 3K+2)
pressure:
0--
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation.
1--
Pressure load is not used if the element normal is oriented in the same general direction as
the pressure vector.
Table159.1SURF159 Real Constants
No.
Name
1 ... 3
4
5
6
7
8
(Blank)
EFS
SURT
ADMSUA
TKI
TKJ
Description
-Foundation stiffness
Surface tension
Added mass/unit area
In-plane thickness at node I
In-plane thickness at node J (defaults to TKI)
SURF159 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table159.2:SURF159 Element Output Definitions
To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the modes with element
results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
available.
Table159.2SURF159 Element Output Definitions
Name
Definition
SURF159
ELEMID
NODES
NNP
AREA
VOLU
MAT
DENS
ADMSUA
MASS
EFS
SURT
PRES
Element number
Nodes - I, J, . . . , K (nodes in master plane)
Number of nodal planes
Total area
Total volume
Material number
Density
Added mass per unit area
Element mass
Elastic foundation stiffness
Surface tension
Pressures
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Table159.3:SURF159 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The following notation is used in
the output table:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table159.2:SURF159 Element Output Definitions
Item
I1 , J 1 , I2 , J 2 , . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1 , J1 , I2 , J2 , . . .
Table159.3SURF159 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
ETABLE and ESOL Command Input (K = KEYOPT(2))

E
I1
J1
I2
J2
I3
J3
...
IK
JK
P1
SMISC
P2
SMISC
...
PK
...
SMISC
...
-
...
4K-1
...
4K
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
4K-2
...
4K-3
PK+1
SMISC
4K+2
4K+1
4K+3
4K+4
PK+2
SMISC
4K+6
4K+5
4K+7
4K+8
...
P2K
...
SMISC
...
-
...
...
8K-1
8K
...
...
...
-
...
-
...
8K-2
...
8K-3
P2K+1
SMISC
8K+2
P2K+2
SMISC
...
P3K
...
SMISC
...
-
P3K+1
SMISC
...
-
8K+1
8K+3
8K+4
8K+6
8K+5
8K+7
8K+8
...
...
12K-1 12K
12K+1 -
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
-
...
...
12K-2 12K-3
-
SURF159
(magnitude)
X gradient
Y gradient
Z gradient
P3K+2
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
12K+2
12K+3
12K+4
12K+5
12K+6 -
12K+7 -
12K+8 -
(magnitude)
X
SMISC
component
Y
SMISC
component
Z
SMISC
component
The item and sequence numbers shown are for real pressures. Imaginary pressures are
represented in the same way but have 12K+8 added to them.
SURF159 Assumptions and Restrictions

The length of the base element must be nonzero.
The base element must lie on one side of the axisymmetric axis, and the axisymmetric axis must
be on the same plane as the base element (master plane).
A base element or base node must be associated with one axisymmetric axis (defined via
SECTYPE and SECDATA commands) before generating nodes for general axisymmetric element
sections (NAXIS) or defining an element by node connectivity (E).
An edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that edge. For more information about the use of midside nodes, see Quadratic
Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
You cannot apply a pressure load by applying a surface load to selected areas (SFA).
The contribution of the element to the mass moment inertia of the whole model is calculated by
element mass multiplied by the square of the coordinates of the elemental centroid. The moment
of inertia may therefore be inaccurate.
The element does not support the expansion pass of a superelement with large rotation.
Issuing an /ESHAPE,1 command while PowerGraphics is active causes the program to plot the
elements in 3-D and the results on both nodal planes and all integration planes in the
circumferential direction; otherwise, the program plots the elements in 2-D and the results on the
master plane.
You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) for this element.
When listing the surface loads for elements (SFELIST), only information for the first facet is
returned.
When plotting contour values via /ESHAPE,1, expanded SURF159 elements are assigned zeroes;
you should therefore deselect SURF159 elements when plotting results such as stresses and
strains.
In postprocessing, print commands return the nodal plane results only.
SURF159
SURF159 Product Restrictions

No product-specific restrictions exist for this element.
SOLID272
SOLID272
General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Use SOLID272 to model axisymmetric solid structures. It is defined by four nodes on the master plane,
and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction based on the four master plane nodes.
The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal planes (KEYOPT(2)). Each node has three
degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions. The element allows a triangle as the
degenerated shape on the base plane to simulate irregular areas. The element has plasticity,
hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixedformulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and
nearly and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
For more details about this element, see SOLID272 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications , and General Axisymmetric Elements in this document.
Figure272.1SOLID272 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
SOLID272 Input Data

The element input data includes nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The total number of
nodes is the four base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how Fourier
nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) The default element coordinate system
is the cylindrical coordinate system with the Z axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via the SECDATA
command) and the circumferential direction as . (See General Axisymmetric Elements for details.) Use
the ESYS command to define an element coordinate system, which forms the basis for orthotropic
material directions.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures must be input as element surface
loads on the element edges of the nodal planes as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 272.1.
Positive pressures act into the element and the maximum face edge is 4n, where n is the number of
nodal planes. If pressure is applied on the element edge with face numbers less than or equal to 4 and
no load on other edges, the pressure loads are the same on the 360 degrees of circumferential surfaces.
(If pressure is applied on a single element edge with a face number greater than 4, the pressure is
ignored.) If pressure is applied on the element edges with faces p and 4q+p (where q = 1 . . . n-1), the
pressure changes linearly with respect to within the part of the surface bounded by the edges p and
4q+p; on the rest of the surface, the pressure is zero.
SOLID272
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the four nodes on the master
plane, the node I1 temperature T(I 1 ) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they
default to T(I 1 ). For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. For the nodes
generated in the circumferential direction based on the master node, they default to the value of their
base nodes (T(I1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ) or T(L 1 ), depending on their location) if all other temperatures are
unspecified. For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed
formulation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations in this document.
As described in Coordinate Systems, you can use the ESYS command to orient the material properties
and strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
global coordinate system.
"SOLID272 Input Summary" contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input in this
document for a general description of element input.

Nodes
I1 , J1 , K 1 , L1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , L2 , . . . , In , Jn , K n , Ln (where n = KEYOPT(2), the number of nodal
planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
edge 1 (J1 -I1 ), edge 2 (K1 -J1 ), edge 3 (L 1 -K 1 ), edge 4 (I 1 -L1 ), edge 5 (J2 -I2 ), edge 6 (K2 J2 ), . . . , edge 4n-3(Jn -In ), edge 4n-2 (Kn -Jn ), edge 4n-1 (L n -K n ), edge 4n (I n -Ln )
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I 1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(L 1 ), T(I 2 ), T(J 2 ), T(K2 ), T(L 2 ), . . . , T(I n ), T(J n ), T(Kn ), T(L n )
Special Features
Hyperelasticity (AHYPER, HYPER)
SOLID272

Elasticity (ELASTIC, ANEL)
Other material (USER, SDAMP, SMA, CAST, EDP, GURSON)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Automatic selection of element technology
Birth and death
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. See the
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details
about the material models.
See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and the ETCONTROL command
documentation for more information about selecting element technologies.
KEYOPT(2)
1--
Axisymmetric deformation (may have torsion)
3 - 12--
General 3-D deformation
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid value. (0 is not valid.)
For large-rotation not about the axisymmetric axis, KEYOPT(2)
5 is recommended.
For information about specifying the number of Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements
in this document.
KEYOPT(6)
0--
Use pure displacement formulation (default)
1--
Use mixed u-P formulation

Additional element output as shown in Table272.1:SOLID272 Element Output Definitions
SOLID272
As shown in Figure 272.2, the element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A
general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways
to view results.
Figure272.2SOLID272 Stress Output
Element stress directions SX, SY, and SZ shown in the global coordinate system.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
Definition
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
TEMP
See Table272.2:SOLID272 Item and Sequence

Numbers for more output.
Temperatures T(I 1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(L 1 ), T(I 2 ), T(J 2 ),
T(K2 ), T(L 2 ), . . .
Stresses
MAT
VOLU
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
Element number
Nodes - I1 , J1 , K 1 , L1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , L2 , . . .
Material number
Volume
SOLID272
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, . . . , N
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2
Y
Y
2

Plastic strains[7]
2
1
2
1
Equivalent plastic strain [6]

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
Plastic work
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5
1. Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material.

2. Output only if element has a thermal load.
5. Available only if the USERMAT subroutine and TB,STATE are used.
6. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal strains, this value is
set by the user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep strains, this value is set at 0.5.
7. For the shape memory alloy material model, transformation strains are reported as plasticity strain
EPPL.
Table272.2:SOLID272 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
the output table:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table272.1:SOLID272 Element Output Definitions
SOLID272
Item
I1 , J 1 , K 1 , L 1 , I2 , J 2 , K 2 , L 2 , . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1 , J1 , K 1 , L1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , L2 , . . .
Table272.2SOLID272 Item and Sequence Numbers
K1 L1
I2
J2
K 2 L 2 --In
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
I1
J1
P1
SMISC
---
P2
SMISC
P3
SMISC
P4
SMISC
P5
SMISC
10
P6
SMISC
P7
SMISC
P8
SMISC
15
--P4n-3
--SMISC
--
--
--
--
P4n-2
SMISC
P4n-1
SMISC
P4n
SMISC
Jn
Kn
Ln
---
---
---
---
12
11
---
14
13
---
16
---
--
--
--
--
-----
--
--
---
---
---
8n-1
----8n-6 8n-7
8n-4 8n-5
8n-2 8n-3
8n

The area of the base element must be nonzero.
You can form a triangular base element by defining duplicate K1 and L1 node numbers. (See
Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements in this document.)
You cannot apply a pressure load via the SFA command.
Incompressible and nearly incompressible material behavior should be modeled with the mixed u-P
formulation.
If you specify mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver.
SOLID272
The element does not support the expansion pass of a superelement with large rotation.
master plane.
You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) when displaying this element in 3-D via the
/ESHAPE command.
When specifying more than one facet per element edge for PowerGraphics displays
(NAXIS,EFACET,NUM , where NUM > 1), ANSYS plots additional results on some planes between the
nodal and integration planes. The results on these planes are interpolated based on the nodal and
integration plane values. and are therefore less accurate than the values on the nodal and
interpolation planes. If you do not wish to plot the interpolated values, set NUM = 1 to plot only the
values on nodal and integration planes.
Print commands in postprocessing print the nodal plane results only.
To model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on this element, use general axisymmetric
surface element SURF159. (You cannot use this element with surface-effect elements SURF153 and
SURF154.)
You cannot generate surface-based contact pairs (contact elements CONTA171 through CONTA174
paired with target elements TARGE169 and TARGE170) on this element.
You can generate node-to-surface contact pairs (contact elements CONTA175 paired with target
elements TARGE170) and node-to-node contact elements (CONTA178) on this element, with the
following restrictions:
When TARGE170 is on the surface of SOLID272, you may have accuracy and convergence
issues if the loading causes large rotations about the axisymmetric axis of SOLID272; you
may also have those issues if the two sides of the contact boundaries have different mesh
patterns in the circumferential direction (caused by different KEYOPT(2) values of SOLID272).
You cannot define CONTA175 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach using a forcedistributed constraint (that is, you cannot set KEYOPT(2) = 2, KEYOPT(4) = 1, and
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 simultaneously for the CONTA175 elements).

2.13.General Axisymmetric Elements

Different from harmonic axisymmetric elements, general axisymmetric elements (such as SOLID272,
SOLID273, SURF159) introduce the Fourier series into the interpolation functions to describe the change
of displacements in the circumferential () direction. The elements can therefore apply to any analysis
type, including geometric nonlinear analyses, and can support any load and deformation mode. For more
information, see SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes and SOLID273 - General
Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications .
The elements can have any axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via SECTYPE and SECDATA
commands). You need only define base elements on a flat plane.
General Axisymmetric Element Terminology
The plane on which quadrilaterals or triangles are defined is called the master plane . The
quadrilaterals, triangles, or lines on the master plane are called base elements, and the nodes of the
quadrilaterals, triangles, and lines are called base nodes .
A nodal plane (copied from the master plane) is a radial plane of Fourier nodes. There are n nodal
planes (where KEYOPT(2) = n), equally spaced around the circumference.
An integration plane is a plane which sits equally between any two adjacent nodal planes.
Integration points in the circumferential direction are located on both the nodal and integration
planes. For more information, see SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes in the
The NAXIS command automatically creates a full 3-D finite-element model using the base elements,
the axisymmetric axis, and the number of Fourier nodes specified via KEYOPT(2). The axisymmetric axis
must be on the master plane, and the base elements must be on one side of the axis. A base element or
base node must be associated with one axisymmetric axis before issuing the NAXIS command. All
generated nodes are equally distributed circumferentially.
The default element coordinate system is a cylindrical coordinate system having the axisymmetric axis as
z, the origin defined via the SECDATA command, and = 0 at the master plane. ANSYS uses the righthand rule to determine the direction of , resulting in x(r), y(), and z from the right-hand coordinate
system, as shown:
Figure2.8General Axisymmetric Elements and Their Coordinate Systems (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CH2_GENAXIS.html[28/04/2013 08:34:46 p.m.]
The displacements in the r, , and z directions, however, are interpolated by

ui = hi(s,t)(c 1 + a 1 cos + b1 sin + a 2 cos2 + b2 sin2 + a 3 cos3 + b3 sin3 . . .)
where
i = r, , z
and
hi(s,t) is the standard interpolation function for 2-D elements.
The nodes can have their own coordinate systems defined in any direction, as is the case with the nodes
of any other solid element. For more detailed information, see General Axisymmetric Solids in the Theory
Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench .
General axisymmetric elements differ from harmonic axisymmetric elements in that you do not specify
the symmetric and unsymmetric terms, input peak values of loads, and solve for each term as one load
step. Instead, you apply all physical loads (forces and displacements) at the nodes and solve the
problem only once to obtain the solution.
The order of hi(s,t) is determined by the element type. (SOLID272 is a lower-order element and
SOLID273 is a higher-order element.) The order of Fourier terms is determined by the number of Fourier
nodes, or the number of nodes created in the circumferential direction for one base node (including the
base node itself). This number is also the number of nodal planes in the circumferential direction, which
you input via the element's KEYOPT(2). The KEYOPT(2) setting, the number of Fourier nodes, and the
Fourier terms are shown in Table2.9:Fourier Terms for General Axisymmetric Elements. Generally, each
Fourier term has different coefficients except when KEYOPT(2) is an even number (in which case the
highest terms of the sine and cosine have the same coefficient).
Table2.9Fourier Terms for General Axisymmetric Elements
Fourier Terms
Degrees
Between Nodal
Planes
KEYOPT(2)
Value
Number of
Fourier Nodes
(and Nodal
Planes)
c1
360
c 1 , a 1 cos, b1 sin
120
c 1 , a 1 cos,
c 1 , a 1 cos,
b1 sin, a 2 cos2,
b1 sin, a 2 cos2,
a 2 sin2
90
b2 sin2
72
c 1 , a 1 cos, b1 sin, a 2 cos2, b2 sin2,

a 3 cos3, a 3 sin3
60
c 1 , a 1 cos, b1 sin, a 2 cos2, b2 sin2,

a 3 cos3, b3 sin3
51.43
45
b1 sin, ... , a 4 cos4,

b1 sin, ... , a 4 cos4,
a 4 sin4
c 1 , a 1 cos,
c 1 , a 1 cos,
b4 sin4
40
10
10
36
11
b1 sin, ... , a 5 cos5,

b1 sin, ... , a 5 cos5,
a 5 sin5
11
c 1 , a 1 cos,
c 1 , a 1 cos,
b5 sin5
32.73
12
12
c 1 , a 1 cos, b1 sin, ... , a 6 cos6, a 6 sin6
30
For KEYOPT(2) = 1, the deformation is also axisymmetric but, unlike the axisymmetric option of 2-D
elements such as PLANE182, the general axisymmetric elements allow torsion. If no torsion load exists,
it is more efficient to use the axisymmetric elements.
To simulate unsymmetric deformation, set KEYOPT(2) > 1. The greater the number of Fourier nodes,
the more accurate the simulation of complicated deformation modes.
Solve localized deformation problems with a greater number of Fourier nodes (higher-order Fourier
terms). Be aware that the deformation will not be as localized as it would be when using standard 3-D
solid elements; with general axisymmetric elements, displacements are interpolated using Fourier terms
in the circumferential direction (rather than being interpolated piecewise using linear/quadratic functions
as in 3-D solid elements).
Contact is usually a local phenomenon. Higher-order Fourier terms are normally needed.
The maximum allowed number of Fourier nodes is 12. If more than 12 nodes are necessary, a general
axisymmetric element may not be computationally efficient; therefore, it is better to use a standard 3-D
solid element for such cases.
2.13.1.Example: 3-D General Axisymmetric Model

The following example input file shows how to use ANSYS commands and the SOLID272 element to
generate a 3-D general axisymmetric model. The model represents a simple thread connection made of
two parts, a bolt and a nut, both modeled with 12 Fourier nodes (KEYOPT(2) = 12) and the global Y
axis as the axis of symmetry.
/batch,list
/title, Sample input for generating general axisymmetric solid elements
/prep7
!
et,1,272,,12
!define general axisymmetric SOLID272 with 12 nodes along circumferential
direction
et,2,272,,12
!
sect,1,axis
!define general axisymmetric section
secd,2,0,2
!use pattern 2 with global cartesian coordinate system (0)and y as axis of
symmetry (2)
!
mp,ex,1,2.0e5
!define elastic material properties
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
!
!
! Create 2D geometry of thread connection (bolt/nut)
!
k,1,1.0,0
k,2,4.0,0
k,3,4,1.5
k,4,5.0,2.5
k,5,5.0,3.5
k,6,4.0,4.5
k,7,4.0,5.5
k,8,5.0,6.5
k,9,5.0,7.5
k,10,4.0,8.5
k,11,4.0,10
k,12,1.0,10
k,13,7.0,0
k,14,7.0,10
!
k,15,4.0,0
k,16,4,1.5
k,17,5.0,2.5
k,18,5.0,3.5
k,19,4.0,4.5
k,20,4.0,5.5
k,21,5.0,6.5
k,22,5.0,7.5
k,23,4.0,8.5
k,24,4.0,10
!
a,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
a,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,14,13
!
!
!Mesh 2D geometry
!
esize,0.5
type,1
!use type 1 for bolt component
mat,1
secn,1
!use general axisymmetric section
amesh,1
!generate the master plane nodes and elements for bolt component
!
esize,1
!use different mesh
type,2
!use type 2 for nut component
mat,1
secn,1
!use general axisymmetric section
amesh,2
!generate the master plane nodes and elements for nut component
!
/PNUM,TYPE,1
!display element type numbers
/NUMBER,1
!numbering shown with colors only
eplot
!visualise the 2D model
!
!
!Generate full 3D axisymmetric model of bolt and nut using 12 planes
!
naxis
!
/view,1,1,1,1
!isometric view
!
nplot
!display the 12 nodal planes along circumferential direction
!
/eshape,1
!display elements with general axisymmetric shape
!
esel,s,type,,1
!display 3D axisymmetric model of bolt
eplot
!
esel,s,type,,2
!display 3D axisymmetric model of nut
eplot
!
esel,all
!
eplot
!display full 3D axisymmetric model of bolt and nut
!
fini
The input listing generates the following 2-D and 3-D meshes:
The general axisymmetric elements representing the bolt and nut are shown separately in the figures
below:
14.268.SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Quad
Stiffness and Stress

Stiffness Matrices; and
Thermal Load Vector
Triangle
Mass Matrix
Pressure Load Vector
Quad
Triangle
Shape Functions
Integration Points*
Equation12257,
Equation12258,
Equation12260,
Equation12261, and
Equation12262
Equation12257,
Equation12258,
Equation12263,
Equation12264, and
Equation12265
Same as stiffness matrix
Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to

face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2 x 2 x (2 x Nnp )
1 x (2 x Nnp )
2 x 2 x (2 x Nnp )
1 x (2 x Nnp )
2 x (2 x Nnp )
Distribution
Bilinear across element on rz plane, linear in circumferential
direction
Same as element temperature distribution
Linear along each face
* Nnp = KEYOPT(2) = the number of node planes in the circumferential direction. The (2 x Nnp )
integration points are circumferentially located at:
the nodal planes, and
midway between the nodal planes (that is, at the integration planes).

Structures describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress
evaluations.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thysolid272.html[28/04/2013 08:34:51 p.m.]

Although the elements are initially axisymmetric, the loads and deformation can be general in
nonaxisymmetric 3-D. The displacements are interpolated in elemental coordinate system by
interpolation functions, but the user can define the nodal displacements in any direction.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thysolid272.html[28/04/2013 08:34:51 p.m.]
PLANE182
PLANE182


PLANE182 is used for 2-D modeling of solid structures. The element can be used as either a plane
element (plane stress, plane strain or generalized plane strain) or an axisymmetric element. It is defined
by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x and y directions.
The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities.
It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic
materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
See PLANE182 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
PLANE182 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 182.1. The element input data
includes four nodes, a thickness (for the plane stress option only), and the orthotropic material
properties. The default element coordinate system is along global directions. You may define an element
coordinate system using ESYS, which forms the basis for orthotropic material directions.
the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 182.1. Positive pressures act into the
element. Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3 or
KEYOPT(3) = 5) and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
KEYOPT(3) = 5 is used to enable generalized plane strain. For more information about the generalized
plane strain option, see Generalized Plane Strain (Current-Technology Solid Element Option) in the
Element Reference.
formulation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations in the Element Reference.
As described in Coordinate Systems, you can use ESYS to orient the material properties and
strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
global coordinate system. For the case of hyperelastic materials, the output of stress and strain is always
with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system rather than following the material/element
PLANE182
coordinate system.
"PLANE182 Input Summary" contains a summary of the element input. For a general description of
element input, see Element Input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
THK - Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
HGSTF - Hourglass stiffness scaling factor (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 1); default is 1.0 (if you
input 0.0, the default value is used)
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Body force densities--
The element values in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Special Features-Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL)
Hyperelasticity (AHYPER, HYPER, BB, CDM)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Manual rezoning
PLANE182
Birth and death

Linear perturbation
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. CAST, EDP,
SMA, and UNIAXIAL are not applicable for plane stress. See the Theory Reference for
the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of the material models.
See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and ETCONTROL for more
information on selection of element technologies.
KEYOPT(1)
Element technology:
0--
Full integration with B-bar method
1--
Uniform reduced integration with hourglass control
2--
Enhanced strain formulation
3--
Simplified enhanced strain formulation
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane stress
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
3--
Plane stress with thickness input
5--
Generalized plane strain
KEYOPT(6)
0--
PLANE182
1--
Use mixed u-P formulation (not valid with plane stress)
PLANE182 Element Technology

PLANE182 uses the method (also known as the selective reduced integration method), the uniform
reduced integration method, or the enhanced strain formulation method, as follows:
method (selective reduced integration)
Helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. This option replaces
volumetric strain at the Gauss integration point with the average volumetric strain of the elements.
This method cannot, however, prevent any shear locking in bending dominated problems. In such
situations, use the enhanced strain formulation of this element. If it is not clear if the deformation
is bending dominated, enhanced strain formulation is recommended. For more information, see the
Uniform reduced integration
Also helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. Because it has only
one integration point, this option is more efficient than the method (selective reduced
integration) option. However, the artificial energy introduced to control the hourglass effect may
affect solution accuracy adversely.
When using this option, check the solution accuracy by comparing the total energy (SENE label in
ETABLE) and the artificial energy (AENE label in ETABLE) introduced by hourglass control. If the
ratio of artificial energy to total energy is less than 5%, the solution is generally acceptable. If the
ratio exceeds five percent, refine the mesh. You can also monitor the total energy and artificial
energy by issuing the OUTPR,VENG command in the solution phase.
For more information about uniform reduced integration, see the Theory Reference for the
Prevents shear locking in bending-dominated problems and volumetric locking in nearly
incompressible cases. The formulation introduces 4 internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users) to
overcome shear locking in plane strain, axisymmetric problems, and generalized plane strain
problems (all with mixed u-P formulations), and plane stress. For plane strain, axisymmetric
problems, and generalized plane strain (all with pure displacement formulations), an additional
internal DOF is introduced for volumetric locking (for a total of 5 internal DOFs). All internal DOFs
are introduced automatically at the element level and condensed out.
Because of the extra internal DOFs and static condensation, this option is less efficient than either
the method (selective reduced integration) option or the uniform reduced integration option.
For more information about enhanced strain formulation, see the Theory Reference for the
Prevents shear locking in bending-dominated problems. This is a special case of the enhanced
strain formulation and always introduces four internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users). For the
plane stress state, this formulation is the same as the enhanced strain formulation, so only
KEYOPT(1) = 2 is allowed. Because there are no internal DOFs to handle volumetric locking, this
formulation should not be used when the material is nearly incompressible, except when the Mixed
u-P formulation is also used. When used with the Mixed u-P formulation, the simplified enhanced
strain formulation gives the same results as the enhanced strain formulation. All internal DOFs are
PLANE182
introduced automatically at the element level and condensed out.

the method (selective reduced integration) option or the uniform reduced integration option,
but is more efficient than the enhanced strain formulation due to using fewer internal DOFs.
For more information about the simplified enhanced strain formulation, see the Theory Reference
for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .

The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
Stress directions are shown for Global.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Thickness
Volume
O
Y
-
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
PLANE182
TEMP
S:X, Y, Z, XY
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N

Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements)
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Thermal strains
Plastic strains[7]
Creep strains
EPCR)
Plastic work
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
1
1
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5

the user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
Note: For axisymmetric solutions in a global coordinate system, the X, Y, Z, and XY stress
and strain outputs correspond to the radial, axial, hoop, and in-plane shear
stresses and strains, respectively.
Table182.2:PLANE182 Item and Sequence
Sequence Number method. See Creating an
and Sequence Number Table in this manual
Table182.2:PLANE182 Item and Sequence
Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the

Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item
for more information. The following notation is used in
Numbers:
Name
PLANE182

Item
E
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K, L
Output
Quantity Name
P1
P2
P3
P4
THICK

E
I
J
K
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
2
7
-
1
4
-
3
6
-
L
5
8
-

The area of the element must be nonzero.
The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 182.1 and the Y-axis must be the
axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the
+X quadrants.
You can form a triangular element by defining duplicate K and L node numbers (see Triangle,
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). For triangular elements where the or enhanced strain
formulations are specified, degenerated shape functions and a conventional integration scheme are
used.
If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver.
For modal cyclic symmetry analyses, ANSYS recommends using enhanced strain formulation.

14.178.PLANE182 - 2-D 4-Node Structural Solid
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Quad
Thermal Load Vector
Triangle
Mass Matrix
Shape Functions
Equation12117 and
Equation12118
Equation1298 and
Equation1299
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2x2ifKEYOPT(1)=0,2,or3
1ifKEYOPT(1)=1
Quad
Triangle
face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Integration Points
1
2x2
1
2
Distribution
Bilinear across element, constant thru thickness or around
circumference

evaluations. General Element Formulations gives the general element formulations used by this element.
14.178.2.Theory
If KEYOPT(1) = 0, this element uses method (selective reduced integration technique for volumetric
terms) (Hughes([219]), Nagtegaal et al.([220])).
If KEYOPT(1) = 1, the uniform reduced integration technique (Flanagan and Belytschko([232])) is used.
If KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 3, the enhanced strain formulations from the work of Simo and Rifai([318]), Simo
and Armero([319]), Simo et al.([320]), Andelfinger and Ramm([321]), and Nagtegaal and Fox([322])
are used. It introduces 5 internal degrees of freedom to prevent shear and volumetric locking for
KEYOPT(1) = 2, and 4 internal degrees of freedom to prevent shear locking for KEYOPT(1) = 3. If
mixed u-P formulation is employed with the enhanced strain formulations, only 4 degrees of freedom for
overcoming shear locking are activated.
13.2.Integration Point Locations

The ANSYS program makes use of both standard and nonstandard numerical integration formulas. The
particular integration scheme used for each matrix or load vector is given with each element description
in Element Library . Both standard and nonstandard integration formulas are described in this section.
The numbers after the subsection titles are labels used to identify the integration point rule. For
example, line (1, 2, or 3 points) represents the 1, 2, and 3 point integration schemes along line
elements. Midside nodes, if applicable, are not shown in the figures in this section.
13.2.1.Lines (1, 2, or 3 Points)

The standard 1-D numerical integration formulas which are used in the element library are of the form:
(13
1)
where:
f(x) = function to be integrated
Hi = weighting factor (see Table13.8:Gauss Numerical Integration Constants)
xi = locations to evaluate function (see Table13.8:Gauss Numerical Integration Constants; these
locations are usually the s, t, or r coordinates)
= number of integration (Gauss) points
Table13.8Gauss Numerical Integration Constants
No. Integration
Points
1
2
3
Integration Point Locations (xi)

0.00000.00000.00000
0.57735 02691 89626
0.77459 66692 41483
0.00000.00000.00000
Weighting Factors (H i)
2.00000.00000.00000
1.00000.00000.00000
0.55555 55555 55556
0.88888 88888 88889
For some integrations of multi-dimensional regions, the method of Equation131 is simply expanded, as
shown below.
13.2.2.Quadrilaterals (2 x 2 or 3 x 3 Points)
The numerical integration of 2-D quadrilaterals gives:
(13
2)
and the integration point locations are shown in Figure 13.23.
Figure13.23Integration Point Locations for Quadrilaterals
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_et1.html[28/04/2013 08:35:35 p.m.]
One element models with midside nodes (such as PLANE183) using a 2 x 2 mesh of integration points
have been seen to generate spurious zero energy (hourglassing) modes.
13.2.3.Bricks and Pyramids (2 x 2 x 2 Points)

The 3-D integration of bricks and pyramids gives:
(13
3)
and the integration point locations are shown in Figure 13.24.
Figure13.24Integration Point Locations for Bricks and Pyramids
One element models with midside nodes using a 2 x 2 x 2 mesh of integration points have been seen to
generate spurious zero energy (hourglassing) modes.
13.2.4.Triangles (1, 3, or 6 Points)

The integration points used for these triangles are given in Table13.9:Numerical Integration for
Triangles and appear as shown in Figure 13.25. L varies from 0.0 at an edge to 1.0 at the opposite
vertex.
Table13.9Numerical Integration for Triangles
Type
1 Point Rule
Integration Point Location

L1 =L2 =L3 =.3333333
L1 =.66666 66666 66666
Weighting Factor
1.000000
0.33333 33333 33333
L2 =L3 =.16666 66666 66666
3 Point Rule
Permute L1 , L2 , and L3 for other

locations)
L1 =0.81684 75729 80459
Corner
Points
6 Point Rule
Edge
Center
Points
0.10995 17436 55322
L2 =L3 =0.09157 62135 09661

locations)
L1 =0.10810 30181 6807
0.22338 15896 78011
L2 =L3 =0.44594 84909 15965

locations)
Figure13.25Integration Point Locations for Triangles
13.2.5.Tetrahedra (1, 4, 5, or 11 Points)

The integration points used for tetrahedra are given in Table13.10:Numerical Integration for
Tetrahedra.
Table13.10Numerical Integration for Tetrahedra
Type
1 Point Rule
Center
Point
L1 =L2 =L3 =L4 =.25000 00000 00000 1.00000 00000 00000

L1 =.58541 01966 24968
4 Point Rule
Corner
Points
Center
Point
Corner
Points
Center
Point
0.25000 00000 00000
L2 =L3 =L4 =.13819 66011 25010

Permute L1 , L2 , L3 , and L4 for other
locations)
L1 =L2 =L3 =L4 =.25000 00000 00000 -0.80000 00000 00000
L1 =.50000 00000 00000
5 Point Rule
Weighting Factor
0.45000 00000 00000
L2 =L3 =L4 =.16666 66666 66666

Permute L1 , L2 , L3 , and L4 for other
locations)
L1 =L2 =L3 =L4 =.25000 00000 00000 0.01315 55555 55555
Corner
Point
L1 =L2 =L3 =.0714285714285714
0.00762 22222 22222
L4 =.78571 42857 14286

(Permute L1 , L2 , L3 and L4 for other
three locations)
0.02488 88888 88888
L1 =L2 =0.39940 35761 66799
11 Point Rule
Edge
Center
Points
L3 =L4 =0.10059 64238 33201

Permute L1 , L2 , L3 and L4 such that
two of L1 , L2 , L3 and L4 equal
0.39940 35761 66799 and the other
two equal 0.10059 64238 33201 for
other five locations
These appear as shown in Figure 13.26. L varies from 0.0 at a face to 1.0 at the opposite vertex.
Figure13.26Integration Point Locations for Tetrahedra
13.2.6.Triangles and Tetrahedra (2 x 2 or 2 x 2 x 2 Points)

These elements use the same integration point scheme as for 4-node quadrilaterals and 8-node solids,
as shown in Figure 13.27:
Figure13.27Integration Point Locations for Triangles and Tetrahedra
3x3 and 3x3x3 cases are handled similarly.
13.2.7.Wedges (3 x 2 or 3 x 3 Points)
These wedge elements use an integration scheme that combines linear and triangular integrations, as
shown in Figure 13.28
Figure13.286 and 9 Integration Point Locations for Wedges
13.2.8.Wedges (2 x 2 x 2 Points)
These wedge elements use the same integration point scheme as for 8-node solid elements as shown by
two orthogonal views in Figure 13.29:
Figure13.298 Integration Point Locations for Wedges
13.2.9.Bricks (14 Points)

The 20-node solid uses a different type of integration point scheme. This scheme places points close to
each of the 8 corner nodes and close to the centers of the 6 faces for a total of 14 points. These
locations are given in Table13.11:Numerical Integration for 20-Node Brick:
Table13.11Numerical Integration for 20-Node Brick
Type
14 Point Rule
Corner
Points
Center
Points

s = .75868 69106 39328
Weighting Factor
.33518 00554 01662
t = .75878 69106 39329

r = .75878 69106 39329
s = .79582 24257 54222,
t=r=0.0
.88642 65927 97784
t = .79582 24257 54222,

s=r=0.0
r = .79582 24257 54222,
s=t=0.0
and are shown in Figure 13.30.
Figure13.30Integration Point Locations for 14 Point Rule
13.2.10.Nonlinear Bending (5 Points)

Both beam and shell elements that have nonlinear materials must have their effects accumulated thru
the thickness. This uses nonstandard integration point locations, as both the top and bottom surfaces
have an integration point in order to immediately detect the onset of the nonlinear effects.
Table13.12Thru-Thickness Numerical Integration
Type
Integration Point Location[1]
0.500
0.300
0.000
Weighting Factor
0.1250000
0.5787036
0.5925926
1. Thickness coordinate going from -0.5 to 0.5.

These locations are shown in Figure 13.31.
Figure13.31Nonlinear Bending Integration Point Locations
13.2.11.General Axisymmetric Elements

The numerical integration of general axisymmetric elements gives:
(13
4)
Hi and Hj are weighting factors on the rz plane, as shown in Figure 12.23. The values are shown in
Table13.8:Gauss Numerical Integration Constants. In circumferential direction :
(13
5)
Chapter 14: Element Library
Chapter14:Element Library
This chapter describes the theory underlying each ANSYS element. The explanations are augmented by
references to other sections in this manual as well as external sources.
The table below the introductory figure of each element is complete, except that the Newton-Raphson
load vector is omitted. This load vector always uses the same shape functions and integration points as
the applicable stiffness, conductivity and/or coefficient matrix. Exceptions associated mostly with some
nonlinear line elements are noted with the element description.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_elemlib.html[28/04/2013 08:35:41 p.m.]
PLANE183
PLANE183
2-D 8-Node or 6-Node Structural Solid


PLANE183 is a higher order 2-D, 8-node or 6-node element. PLANE183 has quadratic displacement
behavior and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those produced by various CAD/CAM
systems).
This element is defined by 8 nodes or 6 nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations
in the nodal x and y directions. The element may be used as a plane element (plane stress, plane strain
and generalized plane strain) or as an axisymmetric element. This element has plasticity, hyperelasticity,
creep, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation
capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully
incompressible hyperelastic materials. Initial state is supported. Various printout options are also
available. See PLANE183 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
PLANE183 Input Data

Although a degenerated triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number
for nodes K, L and O when KEYOPT(1) = 1, it is better to use KEYOPT(1) = 1 for triangular shaped
elements. In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes a thickness (TK) (for the plane stress
option only) and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the
element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is described in Coordinate
Systems.
the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 183.1. Positive pressures act into the
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node
temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its
adjacent corner nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to
TUNIF.
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) =
3 or KEYOPT(3) = 5) and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
PLANE183
strain/stress output. Use ESYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
coordinate system.
KEYOPT(3) = 5 is used to enable generalized plane strain. For more information about the generalized
plane strain option, see Generalized Plane Strain (Current-Technology Solid Element Option) in the
Element Reference.
The next table summarizes the element input. Element Input gives a general description of element
input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P when KEYOPT(1) = 0
I, J, K, L, M, N when KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT (3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Thickness if KEYOPT (3) = 3
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K), face 4 (I-L) when KEYOPT(1) = 0
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K) when KEYOPT(1) = 1
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) when KEYOPT(1) = 0
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N) when KEYOPT(1) = 1
PLANE183
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Manual rezoning
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command. CAST, EDP,
SMA, and UNIAXIAL are not applicable for plane stress. See "Structures with Material
Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
KEYOPT(1)
Element shape:
0--
8-node quadrilateral
1--
6-node triangle
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane stress
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
3--
Plane stress with thickness (TK) real constant input
5--
PLANE183
Generalized plane strain

KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
Use mixed u-P formulation (not valid with plane stress)


available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
VOLU:
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I, J, K, L (for KEYOPT(1) = 0 and I, J, K (for
KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Material number
Thickness
Volume
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
PLANE183
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
S:X, Y, Z, XY
S:1, 2, 3
S: INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N

Y
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; P4 at I, L (P4 only for KEYOPT(1) = 0
-
4
Y
Y
(T(L) only when KEYOPT(1) = 0)

Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Thermal strains
Plastic strains[8]
Creep strains
Total equivalent mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR)
Plastic work
Y
Y
3
1
2
2
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
5
6

2. Output only if element has a creep load.
EPPL.
Note: For axisymmetric solutions, the X, Y, XY, and Z stress and strain outputs
correspond to the radial, axial, in-plane shear, and hoop stresses and strains.
PLANE183
Table183.2:PLANE183 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
Table183.2:PLANE183 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table183.1:PLANE183 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., P
Output
Quantity
Name
P1
P2
P3
P4[1]
THICK
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
E
1

I
J
K
L
M
N
2
7
-
1
4
-
3
6
-
5
8
-
O
-
P
-
1. P4 is only for KEYOPT(1) = 0

axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the
+X quadrants.
A face with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
Use at least two elements to avoid hourglass mode for KEYOPT(1) = 0.
A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K-L-O node numbers (see Triangle,
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). For these degenerated elements, the triangular shape function is
used and the solution is the same as for the regular triangular 6-node elements, but might be
slightly less efficient for KEYOPT(1) = 0. Since these degenerated elements are less efficient, the
triangle shape option (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is suggested for this case.
When mixed formulation is used (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed. If you use the
mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver (default).
PLANE183

14.179.PLANE183 - 2-D 8-Node Structural Solid
Matrix or Vector
Thermal Load Vector
Mass Matrix
Geometry
Quad
Triangle
Shape Functions
Equation12131 and
Equation12132
Equation12110 and
Equation12111
Quad
Triangle
Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to the face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Integration Points
2x2
3
3x3
3
2 along face
Distribution
Same as shape functions across element, constant thru thickness
or around circumference


A dropped midside node implies that the face is and remains straight.
SOLID65
SOLID65
3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID65 is used for the 3-D modeling of solids with or without reinforcing bars (rebar). The solid is
capable of cracking in tension and crushing in compression. In concrete applications, for example, the
solid capability of the element may be used to model the concrete while the rebar capability is available
for modeling reinforcement behavior. Other cases for which the element is also applicable would be
reinforced composites (such as fiberglass), and geological materials (such as rock). The element is
defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y,
and z directions. Up to three different rebar specifications may be defined.
The concrete element is similar to a 3-D structural solid but with the addition of special cracking and
crushing capabilities. The most important aspect of this element is the treatment of nonlinear material
properties. The concrete is capable of cracking (in three orthogonal directions), crushing, plastic
deformation, and creep. The rebar are capable of tension and compression, but not shear. They are also
capable of plastic deformation and creep. See SOLID65 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
SOLID65 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes and the isotropic material properties. The element has one solid
material and up to three rebar materials. Use the MAT command to input the concrete material
properties. Rebar specifications, which are input as real constants, include the material number (MAT),
the volume ratio (VR), and the orientation angles (THETA, PHI). The rebar orientations can be
graphically verified with the /ESHAPE command.
The volume ratio is defined as the rebar volume divided by the total element volume. The orientation is
defined by two angles (in degrees) from the element coordinate system. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. A rebar material number of zero or equal to the
element material number removes that rebar capability.
Additional concrete material data, such as the shear transfer coefficients, tensile stresses, and
compressive stresses are input in the data table, for convenience, as described in Table65.1:SOLID65
Concrete Material Data. Typical shear transfer coefficients range from 0.0 to 1.0, with 0.0 representing a
smooth crack (complete loss of shear transfer) and 1.0 representing a rough crack (no loss of shear
transfer). This specification may be made for both the closed and open crack. When the element is
cracked or crushed, a small amount of stiffness is added to the element for numerical stability. The
SOLID65
stiffness multiplier CSTIF is used across a cracked face or for a crushed element, and defaults to 1.0E-6.
element. Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I
any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence
except that zero is used instead of TUNIF.
Use the BETAD command to supply the global value of damping. If MP,DAMP is defined for the
material number of the element (assigned with the MAT command), it is used for the element instead of
the value from the BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to supply the global value of
reference temperature. If MP,REFT is defined for the material number of the element, it is used for the
element instead of the value from the TREF command. But if MP,REFT is defined for the material
number of the rebar, it is used instead of either the global or element value.
KEYOPT(1) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes. KEYOPT(5) and KEYOPT(6)
provide various element printout options (see Element Solution).
The stress relaxation associated with KEYOPT(7) = 1 is used only to help accelerate convergence of the
calculations when cracking is imminent. (A multiplier for the amount of tensile stress relaxation can be
input as constant C9 in the data table; see Table65.1:SOLID65 Concrete Material Data) The relaxation
does not represent a revised stress-strain relationship for post-cracking behavior. After the solution
converges to the cracked state, the modulus normal to the crack face is set to zero. Thus, the stiffness
is zero normal to the crack face. See the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
The program warns when each unreinforced element crushes at all integration points. If this warning is
unwanted, it can be suppressed with KEYOPT(8) = 1.
If solution convergence is a problem, it is recommended to set KEYOPT(3) = 2 and apply the load in
very small load increments.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using
SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling
automatically. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use
NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOLID65 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
MAT1, VR1, THETA1, PHI1, MAT2, VR2,
THETA2, PHI2, MAT3, VR3, THETA3, PHI3, CSTIF
(where MAT n is material number, VR n is volume ratio, and THETA n and PHIn are orientation
angles for up to 3 rebar materials)
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), PRXY or NUXY, DENS (for concrete)
SOLID65
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS (for each rebar)

Supply DAMP only once for the element (use MAT command to assign material property set).
REFT may be supplied once for the element, or may be assigned on a per rebar basis. See the
discussion in "SOLID65 Input Data" for more details.
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N),
face4(K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Fluences--
FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Concrete (CONC)
Cracking
Crushing
Large deflection
Large strain
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Note: Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.

0--
1--
KEYOPT(3)
Behavior of totally crushed unreinforced elements:
0--
Base
1--
SOLID65
Suppress mass and applied loads, and warning message (see KEYOPT(8))
2--
Features of 1 and apply consistent Newton-Raphson load vector.
KEYOPT(5)
Concrete linear solution output:
0--
Print concrete linear solution only at centroid
1--
Repeat solution at each integration point
2--
Nodal stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Concrete nonlinear solution output:
0--
Print concrete nonlinear solution only at centroid
3--
Print solution also at each integration point
KEYOPT(7)
Stress relaxation after cracking:
0--
No tensile stress relaxation after cracking
1--
Include tensile stress relaxation after cracking to help convergence
KEYOPT(8)
Warning message for totally crushed unreinforced element:
0--
Print the warning
1--
Suppress the warning
SOLID65 Concrete Information

The data listed in Table65.1:SOLID65 Concrete Material Data is entered in the data table with the TB
SOLID65
commands. Data not input are assumed to be zero, except for defaults described below. The constant
table is started by using the TBcommand (with Lab = CONCR). Up to eight constants may be defined
with the TBDATA commands following a temperature definition on the TBTEMP command. Up to six
temperatures ( NTEMP = 6 maximum on the TB command) may be defined with the TBTEMP
commands. The constants (C1-C9) entered on the TBDATA commands (6 per command), after each
TBTEMP command, are:
Table65.1SOLID65 Concrete Material Data
Constant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Meaning
Shear transfer coefficients for an open crack.
Shear transfer coefficients for a closed crack.
Uniaxial tensile cracking stress.
Uniaxial crushing stress (positive).
Biaxial crushing stress (positive).
Ambient hydrostatic stress state for use with constants 7 and 8.
Biaxial crushing stress (positive) under the ambient hydrostatic stress state
(constant 6).
Uniaxial crushing stress (positive) under the ambient hydrostatic stress state
(constant 6).
Stiffness multiplier for cracked tensile condition, used if KEYOPT(7) = 1 (defaults
to 0.6).
Absence of the data table removes the cracking and crushing capability. A value of -1 for constant 3 or 4
also removes the cracking or crushing capability, respectively. If constants 1-4 are input and constants
5-8 are omitted, the latter constants default as discussed in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications . If any one of Constants 5-8 are input, there are no defaults and all 8
constants must be input.
SOLID65 Output Data

Several items are illustrated in Figure 65.2. The element stress directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. Nonlinear material printout appears only if nonlinear properties are specified. Rebar
printout appears only for the rebar defined. If cracking or crushing is possible, printout for the concrete
is also at the integration points, since cracking or crushing may occur at any integration point. The
PLCRACK command can be used in POST1 to display the status of the integration points. A general
description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view
results.
SOLID65

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
NREINF
VOLU:
PRES
TEMP
FLUEN
XC, YC, ZC
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Material number
Number of rebar
Volume
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at J,
K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O,
P
T(P)
Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O),
FL(P)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
4
1
4
SOLID65
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:SRAT
NL:SEPL
NL:HPRES
THETCR, PHICR
STATUS
IRF
MAT
VR
THETA
PHI
EPEL
S
EPEL
EPPL
SEPL
EPCR

4
4
4
4

Average equivalent plastic strain
Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface
Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve
THETA and PHI angle orientations of the normal to the
crack plane
Element status
Rebar number
Material number
Volume ratio
Angle of orientation in X-Y plane
Angle of orientation out of X-Y plane
Uniaxial elastic strain
Uniaxial stress
Average uniaxial elastic strain
Average uniaxial plastic strain
Average uniaxial creep strain
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
2
5
5
5
5
1. Concrete solution item (output for each integration point (if KEYOPT(5) = 1) and the centroid)
2. The element status table (Table65.4:SOLID65 Element Status Table) uses the following terms:
Crushed - solid is crushed.
Open - solid is cracked and the crack is open.
Closed - solid is cracked but the crack is closed.
Neither - solid is neither crushed nor cracked.
3. Rebar solution item repeats for each rebar
4. Concrete nonlinear integration point solution (if KEYOPT(6) = 3 and the element has a nonlinear
material)
5. Rebar nonlinear integration point solution (if KEYOPT(6) = 3 and the rebar has a nonlinear
material)
Table65.3SOLID65 Miscellaneous Element Output
Description
Names of Items Output
SOLID65
TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT,

SEQV
1. Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2

Table65.4SOLID65 Element Status Table
Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Status in Direction 1
Crushed
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Neither
Crushed
Neither
Neither
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Neither
Crushed
Neither
Neither
Neither
Open
Open
Neither
Open
Open
Neither
Closed
Closed
Neither
Closed
Closed
Neither
Table65.5:SOLID65 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following
notation is used in Table65.5:SOLID65 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,P
IP
sequence number for Integration Point solution items
Output Quantity
Name
EPEL
Item
SMISC

Rebar 1
Rebar 2
1
Rebar 3
5
SOLID65
SIG
EPPL
EPCR
SEPL
SRAT
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
Output
Quantity
Name
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
S:1
S:2
S:3
S:INT
S:EQV
FLUEN
Dir 1
Dir 2
Dir 3
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
Output
Quantity Name
STATUS
THETCR
PHICR
THETCR
PHICR
THETCR
PHICR
2
41
42
43
44
7
12
15
10
16
19
-
6
7
8
9
10
110
11
12
13
14
15
111
20
23
16
17
18
19
20
112
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
14
13
18
17
22
25
27
21
22
23
24
25
113
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
28
26
27
28
29
30
114
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
21
26
30
36
37
38
39
40
116
29
31
32
33
34
35
115

Integration Point
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
9
-
24
1
2
3
4
5
109
6
49
50
51
52

J
K
L
M
N
I
8
11
4
45
46
47
48
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108

Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 65.1 or may have the planes IJKL and
MNOP interchanged. Also, the element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate
volumes. This occurs most frequently when the elements are not numbered properly.
All elements must have eight nodes.
A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L and duplicate O and P node
numbers (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). A tetrahedron shape is also available.
The extra shapes are automatically deleted for tetrahedron elements.
Whenever the rebar capability of the element is used, the rebar are assumed to be "smeared"
throughout the element. The sum of the volume ratios for all rebar must not be greater than 1.0.
The element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution.
When both cracking and crushing are used together, care must be taken to apply the load slowly
SOLID65
to prevent possible fictitious crushing of the concrete before proper load transfer can occur
through a closed crack. This usually happens when excessive cracking strains are coupled to the
orthogonal uncracked directions through Poisson's effect. Also, at those integration points where
crushing has occurred, the output plastic and creep strains are from the previous converged
substep. Furthermore, when cracking has occurred, the elastic strain output includes the cracking
strain. The lost shear resistance of cracked and/or crushed elements cannot be transferred to the
rebar, which have no shear stiffness.
The following two options are not recommended if cracking or crushing nonlinearities are present:
Stress-stiffening effects.
Large strain and large deflection. Results may not converge or may be incorrect, especially if
significantly large rotation is involved.

14.63.SOLID65 - 3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix and
Thermal Load Vector
Mass Matrix
Shape Functions
Integration
Points

Equation12217, or if modified extra shape
functions are included (KEYOPT(1) = 0) and
element has 8 unique nodes Equation12230,
Equation12217
Equation1268 and Equation12
Quad
69
Triangle
50
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2
3
Distribution
Trilinear thru element
Bilinear across each face
References: Willam and Warnke([37]), Wilson([38]), Taylor([49])

1. Cracking is permitted in three orthogonal directions at each integration point.
2. If cracking occurs at an integration point, the cracking is modeled through an adjustment of
material properties which effectively treats the cracking as a smeared band of cracks, rather than
discrete cracks.
3. The concrete material is assumed to be initially isotropic.
4. Whenever the reinforcement capability of the element is used, the reinforcement is assumed to be
smeared throughout the element.
5. In addition to cracking and crushing, the concrete may also undergo plasticity, with the DruckerPrager failure surface being most commonly used. In this case, the plasticity is done before the
cracking and crushing checks.
14.63.2.Description
SOLID65 allows the presence of four different materials within each element; one matrix material (e.g.
concrete) and a maximum of three independent reinforcing materials. The concrete material is capable
of directional integration point cracking and crushing besides incorporating plastic and creep behavior.
The reinforcement (which also incorporates creep and plasticity) has uniaxial stiffness only and is
assumed to be smeared throughout the element. Directional orientation is accomplished through user
specified angles.
14.63.3.Linear Behavior - General

The stress-strain matrix [D] used for this element is defined as:
(14
135)
where:
Nr = number of reinforcing materials (maximum of three, all reinforcement is ignored if M 1 is zero.
Also, if M 1 , M 2 , or M 3 equals the concrete material number, the reinforcement with that material
number is ignored)
[Dc] = stress-strain matrix for concrete, defined by Equation14136

[Dr] i = stress-strain matrix for reinforcement i, defined by Equation14137
M 1 , M 2 , M 3 = material numbers associated of reinforcement (input as MAT1, MAT2, and MAT3 on R
command)
14.63.4.Linear Behavior - Concrete

The matrix [Dc] is derived by specializing and inverting the orthotropic stress-strain relations defined by
Equation24 to the case of an isotropic material or
(14
136)
where:
E = Young's modulus for concrete (input as EX on MP command)
= Poisson's ratio for concrete (input as PRXY or NUXY on MP command)
14.63.5.Linear Behavior - Reinforcement

The orientation of the reinforcement i within an element is depicted in Figure 14.18. The element
coordinate system is denoted by (X, Y, Z) and
describes the coordinate system for
reinforcement type i. The stress-strain matrix with respect to each coordinate system
form
has the
(14
137)
where:
It may be seen that the only nonzero stress component is

reinforcement type i. The reinforcement direction
, the axial stress in the
direction of
is related to element coordinates X, Y, Z through
(14
138)
where:
i = angle between the projection of the
THETA2, and THETA3 on R command)
i = angle between the
axis on XY plane and the X axis (input as THETA1,
axis and the XY plane (input as PHI1, PHI2, and PHI3 on R command)
= direction cosines between
axis and element X, Y, Z axes
Figure14.18Reinforcement Orientation
Since the reinforcement material matrix is defined in coordinates aligned in the direction of
reinforcement orientation, it is necessary to construct a transformation of the form
(14
139)
in order to express the material behavior of the reinforcement in global coordinates. The form of this
transformation by Schnobrich([29]) is
(14
140)
where the coefficients a ij are defined as
(14
141)
The vector
is defined by Equation14138 while
and
are
thus defining a Cartesian coordinate referring to

unit vectors mutually orthogonal to
reinforcement directions. If the operations presented by Equation14139 are performed substituting
Equation14137 and Equation14140, the resulting reinforcement material matrix in element
coordinates takes the form
(14
142)
where:
Therefore, the only direction cosines used in [DR ] i involve the uniquely defined unit vector
.
14.63.6.Nonlinear Behavior - Concrete

As mentioned previously, the matrix material (e.g. concrete) is capable of plasticity, creep, cracking and
crushing. The concrete material model with its cracking and crushing capabilities is discussed in
Concrete. This material model predicts either elastic behavior, cracking behavior or crushing behavior. If
elastic behavior is predicted, the concrete is treated as a linear elastic material (discussed above). If
cracking or crushing behavior is predicted, the elastic, stress-strain matrix is adjusted as discussed below
for each failure mode.
14.63.7.Modeling of a Crack
The presence of a crack at an integration point is represented through modification of the stress-strain
relations by introducing a plane of weakness in a direction normal to the crack face. Also, a shear
transfer coefficient t (constant C1 with TB,CONCR) is introduced which represents a shear strength
reduction factor for those subsequent loads which induce sliding (shear) across the crack face. The
stress-strain relations for a material that has cracked in one direction only become:
(14
143)
where the superscript ck signifies that the stress strain relations refer to a coordinate system parallel to
principal stress directions with the xck axis perpendicular to the crack face. If KEYOPT(7) = 0, Rt = 0.0.
If KEYOPT(7) = 1, Rt is the slope (secant modulus) as defined in the figure below. Rt works with
adaptive descent and diminishes to 0.0 as the solution converges.
Figure14.19Strength of Cracked Condition
where:
f t = uniaxial tensile cracking stress (input as C3 with TB,CONCR)
T c = multiplier for amount of tensile stress relaxation (input as C9 with TB,CONCR, defaults to 0.6)
If the crack closes, then all compressive stresses normal to the crack plane are transmitted across the
crack and only a shear transfer coefficient c (constant C2 with TB,CONCR) for a closed crack is
introduced. Then
can be expressed as
(14
144)
The stress-strain relations for concrete that has cracked in two directions are:
(14
145)
If both directions reclose,
(14
146)
The stress-strain relations for concrete that has cracked in all three directions are:
(14
147)
If all three cracks reclose, Equation14146 is followed. In total there are 16 possible combinations of
crack arrangement and appropriate changes in stress-strain relationships incorporated in SOLID65. A
note is output if 1 >c >t >0 are not true.
The transformation of
to element coordinates has the form

(14
148)
where [T ck ] has a form identical to Equation14140 and the three columns of [A] in Equation14141
are now the principal direction vectors.
called the crack
The open or closed status of integration point cracking is based on a strain value
strain. For the case of a possible crack in the x direction, this strain is evaluated as
(14
149)
where:
The vector {ck } is computed by:

(14
150)
where:
{'} = modified total strain (in element coordinates)
{'}, in turn, is defined as:
(14
151)
where:
n = substep number
{n } = total strain increment (based on {u n }, the displacement increment over the substep)
If
is less than zero, the associated crack is assumed to be closed.
If
is greater than or equal to zero, the associated crack is assumed to be open. When cracking first
occurs at an integration point, the crack is assumed to be open for the next iteration.
14.63.8.Modeling of Crushing
If the material at an integration point fails in uniaxial, biaxial, or triaxial compression, the material is
assumed to crush at that point. In SOLID65, crushing is defined as the complete deterioration of the
structural integrity of the material (e.g. material spalling). Under conditions where crushing has
occurred, material strength is assumed to have degraded to an extent such that the contribution to the
stiffness of an element at the integration point in question can be ignored.
12.9. 3-D Solids
12.9.3-D Solids
This section contains shape functions for 3-D solid elements. These elements are available in a number
of configurations, including certain combinations of the following features:
element shapes may be tetrahedra, pyramids, wedges, or bricks (hexahedra).
- if wedges or bricks, with or without extra shape functions (ESF)
with or without rotational degrees of freedom (RDOF)
with or without midside nodes
The wedge elements with midside nodes (15-node wedges) are either a condensation of the 20-node
brick element or are based on wedge shape functions.
12.9.1.4-Node Tetrahedra
These shape functions are used for 4-node tetrahedra such as SOLID285.
Figure12.103-D Solid Elements
The resulting effective shape functions are:

(12
166)
(12
167)
(12
168)
(12
169)
12.9.2.4-Node Tetrahedra by Condensation

These shape functions are a condensation of an 8-node brick element such as SOLID5, FLUID30,
SOLID98, or FLUID142
Figure12.113-D Solid Elements
12.9. 3-D Solids

(12
170)
(12
171)
(12
172)
(12
173)
(12
174)
(12
175)
(12
176)
(12
177)
(12
178)
(12
179)
(12
180)
(12
181)
12.9.3.10-Node Tetrahedra
These shape functions are for 10-node tetrahedron elements such as SOLID98 and SOLID227:
Figure12.1210-Node Tetrahedra Element
(12
182)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
183)
(12
184)
(12
185)
(12
186)
(12
187)
12.9.4.10-Node Tetrahedra by Condensation

These shape functions are for 10-node tetrahedron elements such as SOLID90:
Figure12.1310-Node Tetrahedra Element
(12
188)
(12
189)
(12
190)
(12
191)
(12
192)
(12
193)
12.9.5.5-Node Pyramids by Condensation

This element is a condensation of an 8-node brick element.
Figure12.148-Node Brick Element
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
194)
12.9.6.13-Node Pyramids by Condensation

These shape functions are for 13-node pyramid elements which are based on a condensation of a 20node brick element:
Figure12.1513-Node Pyramid Element
(12
195)
(12
196)
(12
197)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
198)
(12
199)
12.9.7.6-Node Wedges without ESF by Condensation

Figure12.166-Node Wedge Element
The 6-node wedge elements are a condensation of an 8-node brick such as SOLID5 or FLUID30. These
shape functions are for 6-node wedge elements without extra shape functions:
(12
200)
(12
201)
(12
202)
(12
203)
(12
204)
(12
205)
(12
206)
12.9.8.6-Node Wedges with ESF by Condensation

The 6-node wedge elements are a condensation of an 8-node brick such as SOLID5 or FLUID30. (Please
see Figure 12.16.) These shape functions are for 6-node wedge elements with extra shape functions:
(12
207)
(12
208)
(12
209)
12.9. 3-D Solids
12.9.9.15-Node Wedges by Condensation

Figure12.1715-Node Wedge Element (SOLID90)
These shape functions are for 15-node wedge elements such as SOLID90 that are based on a
condensation of a 20-node brick element Equation12233.
12.9.10.15-Node Wedges Based on Wedge Shape Functions

Figure12.1815-Node Wedge Element
Elements in a wedge configuration use shape functions based on triangular coordinates and the r
coordinate going from -1.0 to +1.0.
(12
210)
(12
211)
(12
212)
(12
213)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
214)
12.9.11.8-Node Bricks without ESF

These shape functions are for 8-node brick elements without extra shape functions such as SOLID5 with
KEYOPT(3) = 1, FLUID30, or FLUID142:
(12
215)
(12
216)
(12
217)
(12
218)
(12
219)
(12
220)
(12
221)
(12
222)
(12
223)
(12
224)
(12
225)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
226)
(12
227)
(12
228)
(12
229)
12.9.12.8-Node Bricks with ESF

(Please see Figure 12.19) These shape functions are for 8-node brick elements with extra shape
functions such as SOLID5 with KEYOPT(3) = 0:
(12
230)
(12
231)
(12
232)
12.9.13.20-Node Bricks
These shape functions are used for 20-node solid elements such as SOLID90:
(12
233)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
234)
(12
235)
(12
236)
(12
237)
(12
238)
12.9.14.8-Node Infinite Bricks

Figure12.213-D 8-Node Brick Element
These Lagrangian isoparametric shape functions and mapping functions are for the 3-D 8-node solid
brick infinite elements such as INFIN111:
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
239)
(12
240)
(12
241)
(12
242)
(12
243)
(12
244)
(12
245)
(12
246)
(12
247)
12.9.15.3-D 20-Node Infinite Bricks

Figure12.2220-Node Solid Brick Infinite Element
12.9. 3-D Solids
These Lagrangian isoparametric shape functions and mapping functions are for the 3-D 20-node solid
brick infinite elements such as INFIN111:
(12
248)
(12
249)
(12
250)
(12
251)
(12
252)
(12
253)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
254)
(12
255)
(12
256)
The shape and mapping functions for the nodes U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, and B are deliberately set to zero.
12.9.16.General Axisymmetric Solids

This section contains shape functions for general axisymmetric solid elements. These elements are
A quadrilateral, or a degenerated triangle shape to simulate an irregular area, on the master plane
(the plane on which the quadrilaterals or triangles are defined)
With or without midside nodes
A varying number of node planes (Nnp ) in the circumferential direction (defined via KEYOPT(2))
The elemental coordinates are cylindrical coordinates and displacements are defined and interpolated in
that coordinate system, as shown in Figure 12.23.
Figure12.23General Axisymmetric Solid Elements (when N np = 3)
12.9. 3-D Solids
When Nnp is an odd number, the interpolation function used for displacement is:
(12
257)
where:
i = r, , z
hi (s, t) = regular Lagrangian polynominal interpolation functions like Equation12117 or Equation12
131.
= coefficients for the Fourier terms.
When Nnp is an even number, the interpolation function is:
(12
258)
The temperatures are interpolated by Lagrangian polynominal interpolations in s, t plane, and linearly
interpolated with in circumferential () direction as:
(12
259)
where:
= node plane number in circumferential direction

T n = same as Equation12125 and Equation12135.
12.9.16.1.General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes

12.9. 3-D Solids
All of the coefficients in Equation12257 and Equation12258 can be expressed by node

displacements. Using ur = u, uj = v, uz = w, and take Nnp = 3 as an example.
(12
260)
(12
261)
(12
262)
(12
263)
(12
264)
(12
265)

Similar to the element with 4 base nodes, the u, v, and w are expressed as:
(12
266)
12.9. 3-D Solids
(12
267)
(12
268)
(12
269)
(12
270)
(12
271)
SOLID185
SOLID185


SOLID185 is used for 3-D modeling of solid structures. It is defined by eight nodes having three degrees
of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. The element has plasticity,
hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed
formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and
fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
SOLID185 is available in two forms:
Homogeneous Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID185 Homogeneous
Structural Solid Element Description".
Layered Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element
Description".
See SOLID185 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
A higher-order version of the SOLID185 element is SOLID186.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Description

SOLID185 Structural Solid is suitable for modeling general 3-D solid structures. It allows for prism and
tetrahedral degenerations when used in irregular regions. Various element technologies such as B-bar,
uniformly reduced integration, and enhanced strains are supported.
Figure185.1SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Geometry
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 185.1. The element is defined by
eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The default element coordinate system is along
global directions. You may define an element coordinate system using ESYS, which forms the basis for
orthotropic material directions.
SOLID185
temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence
except that zero is used instead of TUNIF.
coordinate system.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetrical
"SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Summary" contains a summary of element input. For a
general description of element input, see Element Input.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(2) = 0,
HGSTF - Hourglass Stiffness Scaling factor if KEYOPT(2) = 1 (Default is 1.0; any positive number
is valid. If set to 0.0, value is automatically reset to 1.0.)
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or
CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Special Features
SOLID185

Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial stress import
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
See the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
KEYOPT(2)
Note: See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and ETCONTROL for more
Element technology:
0--
Full integration with
method (default)
1--
Uniform reduced integration with hourglass control
2--
3--
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0--
Structural Solid (default) -- nonlayered
1--
Layered Solid (not applicable to SOLID185 Structural Solid)
KEYOPT(6)
0--
SOLID185
1--
Use mixed formulation
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID185 uses the method (also known as the selective reduced integration method), the uniform
reduced integration method, or the enhanced strain formulation method, as follows:
method (selective reduced integration)
Helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. This option replaces
volumetric strain at the Gauss integration point with the average volumetric strain of the elements.
This method cannot, however, prevent any shear locking in bending dominated problems. In such
situations, use the enhanced strain formulation of this element. If it is not clear if the deformation
is bending dominated, enhanced strain formulation is recommended. For more information, see the
Also helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. Because it has only
one integration point, this option is more efficient than the method (selective reduced
integration) option. However, the artificial energy introduced to control the hourglass effect may
affect solution accuracy adversely.
When using this option, check the solution accuracy by comparing the total energy (SENE label in
ETABLE) and the artificial energy (AENE label in ETABLE) introduced by hourglass control. If the
ratio of artificial energy to total energy is less than 5%, the solution is generally acceptable. If the
ratio exceeds five percent, refine the mesh. You can also monitor the total energy and artificial
energy by issuing the OUTPR,VENG command in the solution phase.
For more information about uniform reduced integration, see the Theory Reference for the
incompressible cases. The formulation introduces 13 internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users).
If mixed u-P formulation is employed with enhanced strain formulation, only 9 DOFs for
overcoming shear-locking are used. All internal DOFs are introduced automatically at the element
level and condensed out.
the method (selective reduced integration) option or the uniform reduced integration option.
strain formulation and always introduces 9 internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users). Because
there are no internal DOFs to handle volumetric locking, this formulation should not be used when
the material is nearly incompressible, except when the Mixed u-P formulation is also used. When
used with the Mixed u-P formulation, the simplified enhanced strain formulation gives the same
results as the enhanced strain formulation. All internal DOFs are introduced automatically at the
element level and condensed out.
SOLID185
the method (selective reduced integration) option or the uniform reduced integration option,
but is more efficient than the enhanced strain formulation due to using fewer internal DOFs.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table185.1:SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid
Element Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 185.2. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for
more information.
Figure185.2SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Stress Output
Stress directions shown are for global directions.

available.
Table185.1SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
O
Y
-
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
SOLID185
TEMP
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2

Plastic strains [7]
2
1
2
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

Y
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5
1. Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material

2. Output only if element has a thermal load
3. Available only at centroid as a *GET item
4. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI is used
5. Available only if the USERMAT subroutine and TB,STATE are used
EPPL.
Table185.2:SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers lists output
available via ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified
By Sequence Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this
document for more information. The following notation is used in Table185.2:SOLID185 Homogeneous
Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
SOLID185
output quantity as defined in the Table185.1:SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element

Output Definitions
Item
I,J,...,P
Table185.2SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

I
J
K
L
M
N
2
5
18
-
1
6
9
-
4
10
13
-
3
14
17
-
8
19
21
7
12
22
O
11
16
23
P
15
20
24
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Assumptions and

Restrictions
Zero-volume elements are not allowed.
MNOP interchanged. The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate
volumes (which occurs most frequently when the elements are not numbered properly).
All elements must have eight nodes. You can form a prism-shaped element by defining duplicate K
and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements.) A
tetrahedron shape is also available.
For the degenerated shape elements where the or enhanced strain formulations are specified,
degenerated shape functions and a conventional integration scheme are used.
If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported. You
must use the sparse solver (default).
For modal cyclic symmetry analyses, ANSYS recommends using enhanced strain formulation.
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid
Assumptions and Restrictions" for additional information.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Product Restrictions

None.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Description

SOLID185
Use SOLID185 Layered Solid to model layered thick shells or solids. The layered section definition is
given by ANSYS section (SECxxx ) commands. A prism degeneration option is also available.
Figure185.3SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Geometry
xo = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.

x = Element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 185.3. The element is defined by
eight nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K
and L, and O and P.
In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the anisotropic material properties. Anisotropic
material directions correspond to the layer coordinate directions which are based on the element
coordinate system. The element coordinate system follows the shell convention where the z axis is
normal to the surface of the shell. The nodal ordering must follow the convention that I-J-K-L and M-NO-P element faces represent the bottom and top shell surfaces, respectively. You can change the
orientation within the plane of the layers via the ESYS command in the same way that you would for
shell elements (as described in Coordinate Systems). To achieve the correct nodal ordering for a volume
mapped (hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify the desired volume
orientation before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the EORIENT command
after automatic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation of another element,
or to be as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
Layered Section Definition Using Section Commands
You can associate SOLID185 Layered Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite
specifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through
the thickness of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx ) commands. You can use the shell
section commands even with a single-layered element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses used
for element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent with the
thickness between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file.
You can designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located through the thickness of
each layer. Two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining points
are distributed equal distance between the two points. The element requires at least two points through
the entire thickness. When no shell section definition is provided, the element is treated as single-layered
and uses two integration points through the thickness.
SOLID185 Layered Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
SOLID185
Other Input
The default orientation for this element has the S1 (shell surface coordinate) axis aligned with the first
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element and is shown as xo in Figure 185.3.
The default first surface direction S1 can be reoriented in the element reference plane (as shown in
Figure 185.3) via the ESYS command. You can further rotate S1 by angle THETA (in degrees) for each
layer via the SECDATA command to create layer-wise coordinate systems. See Coordinate Systems for
details.
element.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, if you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLID185 Layered Solid adopts an element-wise temperature pattern and
requires only eight temperatures for the eight element corner nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). `For any other input
temperature pattern, unspecified nodal temperatures default to TUNIF. ANSYS computes all layer
interface temperatures by interpolating nodal temperatures.
Alternatively, you can input temperatures as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of
the element and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. In such a case, the element uses a
layer-wise pattern. Temperatures T1, T2, T3, T4 are used for the bottom of layer 1, temperatures T5,
T6, T7, T8 are used for interface corners between layers 1 and 2, and so on between successive layers,
ending with temperatures at the top layer NLayer. If you input exactly NLayer+1 temperatures, one
temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is used for the
four top corner temperatures of the top layer. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all
other corner temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. For any other input pattern, unspecified
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetrical
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input provides a general description of
element input.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
SOLID185
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 between layers 1-2; similarly for
between successive layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NLayer (4 * (NLayer +
1) maximum)
Special Features
Creep
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
See the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for
details about material models.
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
2--
3--
Simplified enhanced strain formulation (default)
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0--
Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID185 Layered Solid)
SOLID185
1--
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0--
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (default)
1--
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be considerable.)
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID185 Layered Solid uses the enhanced strain formulation method, as follows:
incompressible cases. The formulation introduces 13 internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users).
If mixed u-P formulation is employed with enhanced strain formulation, only nine DOFs for
overcoming shear-locking are used. All internal DOFs are introduced automatically at the element
level and condensed out.
strain formulation and always introduces 9 internal DOFs (inaccessible to ANSYS users). Because
there are no internal DOFs to handle volumetric locking, this formulation should not be used when
the material is nearly incompressible, except when the Mixed u-P formulation is also used. When
used with the Mixed u-P formulation, the simplified enhanced strain formulation gives the same
results as the enhanced strain formulation. All internal DOFs are introduced automatically at the
element level and condensed out.
This option is more efficient than the enhanced strain formulation because it uses fewer internal
DOFs.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Output Data

SOLID185

Additional element output as shown in Table185.3:SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element
Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 185.4. See Filling the Element Table for Variables Identified By
Sequence Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this
document for more information.
Figure185.4SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Stress Output
Stress directions shown are for global directions.

available.
Table185.3SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
O
Y
-
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
SOLID185
TEMP

S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P;P6 at M, N, O,
P
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8
between layers 1-2; similarly for between successive
layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (4 *
(NL + 1) maximum)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2

Plastic strains [7]
2
1
2
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

Y
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
SXZ interlaminar shear stress
SYZ interlaminar shear stress
Magnitude of the interlaminar shear stress vector
Angle of interlaminar shear stress vector (measured from
the element x-axis toward the element y-axis in degrees)
4
5
9
9
8, 9
9

SOLID185
EPPL.
8. The components are combined as
maximum interlaminar shear stress.
and the largest value of il is output as the
9. Available only if a valid shell section (SECTYPE,,SHELL) is defined for the element.
Table185.4:SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via
ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for
more information. The following notation is used in Table185.4:SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item
and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table185.3:SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Output
Definitions
Item
I,J,...,P
Table185.4SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Output
Quantity
Name
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG

I
J
K
L
M
N
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
2
5
18
-
1
6
9
-
4
10
13
-
3
14
17
-
8
19
21
7
12
22
O
11
16
23
P
15
20
24

Bottom of Layer i
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
41
43
45
47
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
42
44
46
48
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

SOLID185
and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements.)
If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported. You
must use the sparse solver (default).
Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). It is
ignored in geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF) when specified by SSTIF,ON. Prestress
If the material of a layer is hyperelastic, the layer orientation angle has no effect.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Product Restrictions

14.181.SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid

Standard (nonlayered) structural solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) - see SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node
Structural Solid.
Layered structural solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) - see SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Layered Solid.
14.181.1.SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid
Matrix or Vector
Thermal Load Vector
Mass Matrix
Shape Functions
2x2x2ifKEYOPT(2)=0,2,or3
1ifKEYOPT(2)=1

Equation1268 and
Quad
Equation1269
Triangle Equation1249 and
Equation1250
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Integration Points
2x2x2
2x2
3
Distribution

14.181.2.SOLID185 - 3-D 8-Node Layered Solid
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
In-plane:

Thermal Load Vector
Mass Matrix
Equation12215, Equation12216,
and Equation12217
Equation1268 and
Quad
Equation1269
Triangle Equation1249 and
Equation1250
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2x2
Thru-the-thickness:
2ifnoshellsectiondefined.
1,3,5,7,or9perlayerifa
shellsectionisdefined
2x2
3
Distribution
Bilinear in plane of element, linear thru each layer

14.181.4.Theory
If KEYOPT(2) = 0 (not applicable to layered SOLID185), this element uses method (selective reduced
integration technique for volumetric terms) (Hughes([219]), Nagtegaal et al.([220])).
If KEYOPT(2) = 1 (not applicable to layered SOLID185), the uniform reduced integration technique
(Flanagan and Belytschko([232])) is used.
If KEYOPT(2) = 2 or 3, the enhanced strain formulations from the work of Simo and Rifai([318]), Simo
and Armero([319]), Simo et al.([320]), Andelfinger and Ramm([321]), and Nagtegaal and Fox([322])
are used. It introduces 13 internal degrees of freedom to prevent shear and volumetric locking for
KEYOPT(2) = 2, and 9 degrees of freedom to prevent shear locking only for KEYOPT(2) = 3. If mixed uP formulation is employed with the enhanced strain formulations, only 9 degrees of freedom for
overcoming shear locking are activated.
SOLID186
SOLID186


SOLID186 is a higher order 3-D 20-node solid element that exhibits quadratic displacement behavior.
The element is defined by 20 nodes having three degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal
x, y, and z directions. The element supports plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating
deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic
materials.
Homogenous Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID186 Homogenous
Structural Solid Element Description ".
Layered Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element
Description".
A lower-order version of the SOLID186 element is SOLID185.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Description

SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those
produced by various CAD/CAM systems). The element may have any spatial orientation.
Various printout options are available. See SOLID186 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL
and Mechanical Applications for more details.
Figure186.1SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Geometry
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure
186.1. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K, L, and
SOLID186
S; nodes A and B; and nodes O, P, and W. A tetrahedral-shaped element and a pyramid-shaped

element may also be formed as shown in Figure 186.1. SOLID187 is a similar, but 10-node tetrahedron
element.
material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems.
TUNIF.
coordinate system.
element input.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX,THSY, THSZ),
PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
Surface Loads
Pressures--
SOLID186
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J),T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X),
T(Y), T(Z), T(A), T(B)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of
the material models.
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0--
Uniform reduced integration (default)
1--
Full integration
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0--
Homogenous Structural Solid (default) -- nonlayered
1--
Layered Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid)
SOLID186
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID186 uses the uniform reduced integration method or the full integration method, as follows:
Uniform reduced integration method
Helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. However, hourglass mode
might propagate in the model if there are not at least two layers of elements in each direction.
Full integration
The full integration method does not cause hourglass mode, but can cause volumetric locking in
nearly incompressible cases. This method is used primarily for purely linear analyses, or when the
model has only one layer of elements in each direction.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table186.1:SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid
Element Output Definitions
Figure186.2SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Stress Output
SOLID186
available.
Table186.1SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
Definition
Element number and name

Material number
Volume
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K;P2 at I, J, N, M;P3 at
J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M,
N, O, P
T(P)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2
Y
2

Plastic strains [7]
2
1
2
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
Strain energy density
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5
1. Nonlinear solution (output only if the element has a nonlinear material)
SOLID186

EPPL.
Table186.2:SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available
through ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information.
The following notation is used in Table186.2:SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and
Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table186.1:SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Output
Definitions
Item
I,J,...,B
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., B
Table186.2SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
I
2
5
18
-

J
K
L
M
N
O
1
6
9
-
4
10
13
-
3
14
17
-
8
19
21
7
12
22
11
16
23
P
15
20
24
Q,...,B
-
See Surface Solution in this document for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for
ETABLE.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

The element must not have a zero volume. Also, the element may not be twisted such that the
element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is not
numbered properly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 186.1 or may have the
planes IJKL and MNOP interchanged.
parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and
SOLID186
Meshing Guide for more information on the use of midside nodes.

Use at least two elements in each direction to avoid hourglass mode if uniform reduced integration
is used (KEYOPT(2) = 0).
When degenerated into a tetrahedron, wedge, or pyramid element shape (see Triangle, Prism, and
Tetrahedral Elements), the corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. Degeneration to
a pyramidal form should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated, should be
small to minimize the stress gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in
meshing transition zones.
For mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed, and no degenerated
shapes are recommended. If you use the mixed formulation, you must use the sparse solver
(default).
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid
Assumptions and Restrictions" for additional information.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Description

Use SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid to model layered thick shells or solids. The layered section
definition is given by ANSYS section (SECxxx ) commands. A prism degeneration option is also available.
Figure186.3SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Geometry

SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Input Data

SOLID186
186.3. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K, L, and
S; nodes A and B; and nodes O, P, and W.
material directions correspond to the layer coordinate directions which are based on the element
coordinate system. The element coordinate system follows the shell convention where the z axis is
normal to the surface of the shell. The nodal ordering must follow the convention that I-J-K-L and M-NO-P element faces represent the bottom and top shell surfaces, respectively. You can change the
orientation within the plane of the layers via the ESYS command in the same way that you would for
shell elements (as described in Coordinate Systems). To achieve the correct nodal ordering for a volume
mapped (hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify the desired volume
orientation before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the EORIENT command
after automatic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation of another element,
or to be as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
You can associate SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered
composite specifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration
points through the thickness of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx ) commands. You can
use the shell section commands even with a single-layered element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer
thicknesses used for element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent
with the thickness between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM
.xml file.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element and is shown as xo in Figure 186.3.
The default first surface direction S1 can be reoriented in the element reference plane (as shown in
Figure 186.3) via the ESYS command. You can further rotate S1 by angle THETA (in degrees) for each
layer via the SECDATA command to create layer-wise coordinate systems. See Coordinate Systems for
details.
element.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, if you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid adopts an element-wise temperature
pattern and requires only eight temperatures for the eight element corner nodes. The node I
temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all
corner node temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average
temperature of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified nodal
temperatures default to TUNIF. ANSYS computes all layer interface temperatures by interpolating nodal
temperatures.
SOLID186
ending with temperatures at the top layer NLayer. If you input exactly NLayer+1 temperatures, one
with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system rather than the material/element coordinate
system.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using u-P mixed formulation. For details about the use of mixed
element input.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX,THSY, THSZ),
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 between layers 1-2; similarly for between
successive layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NLayer (4 * (NLayer + 1)
maximum)
Special Features
SOLID186

Viscoplasticity
Creep
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
See "Structures with Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications for details on the material models.
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0--
Uniform reduced integration (default)
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0--
Homogenous Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid)
1--
Layered Structural Solid
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0--
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer
1--
SOLID186
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid supports only the uniform reduced integration method (KEYOPT(2) =
0), which helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. However, hourglass
mode might propagate in the model if there are not at least two layers of elements in each direction.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table186.3:SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element
Output Definitions
Figure186.4SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Stress Output
The element stress directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system. A general description of
available.
Table186.3SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Material number
Volume
O
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
SOLID186
PRES
TEMP

S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
P
(NL + 1) maximum)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2
Y
2

Plastic strains [7]
2
1
2
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
Interlaminar shear stress vector sum
4
5
8
8
8
8
1. Nonlinear solution (output only if the element has a nonlinear material)

SOLID186
EPPL.
Table186.4:SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via
ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The
following notation is used in Table186.4:SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence
Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table186.3:SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Output
Definitions
Item
I,J,...,B
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., B
Table186.4SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
Output
Quantity
Name
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
I
2
5
18
-

J
K
L
M
N
O
1
6
9
-
4
10
13
-
3
14
17
-
8
19
21
7
12
22
11
16
23
Q,...,B
15
20
24

Bottom of Layer i
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
41
43
45
47
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
42
44
46
48
ETABLE.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

The element must not have a zero volume. Also, the element may not be twisted such that the
element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is not
numbered properly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 186.3 or may have the
planes IJKL and MNOP interchanged.
SOLID186
Meshing Guide for more information on the use of midside nodes.
Use at least two elements in each direction to avoid hourglass mode.
When degenerated into a wedge element shape (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements),
the corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. The element sizes, when degenerated,
should be small to minimize the stress gradients.
For mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed, and no degenerated
shapes are recommended. If you use the mixed formulation, you must use the sparse solver
(default).
Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). It is
ignored in geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF) when specified by SSTIF,ON. Prestress
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
SOLID187
SOLID187
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid

SOLID187 element is a higher order 3-D, 10-node element. SOLID187 has a quadratic displacement
behavior and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those produced from various
CAD/CAM systems).
The element is defined by 10 nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x, y, and z directions. The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating
deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic
materials. See SOLID187 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications
SOLID187 Input Data

In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic or anisotropic material
properties. Orthotropic and anisotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate
directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Linear Material Properties.
TUNIF.
coordinate system.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2 sets the element for using mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed
see the INISTATE command, and also Initial Stress Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide .
SOLID187
input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ),
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
SOLID187
See "Structures with Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of the material
models.
KEYOPT(6)
Note: See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and ETCONTROL for more
0--
1--
Use mixed formulation, hydrostatic pressure is constant in an element (recommended for
hyperelastic materials)
2--
Use mixed formulation, hydrostatic pressure is interpolated linearly in an element
(recommended for nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials)

coordinate system. The surface stress outputs are in the surface coordinate system and are available for
any face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate system for face JIK is shown in Figure 187.2. The other surface
coordinate systems follow similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface
stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met. A general description
of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number Table. See the Basic Analysis Guide for

SOLID187
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH: EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND: ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Y
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, L; P4 at K, I, L
Stresses
Y
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y

Thermal strains
Y
1

Plastic strains [7]
1
1
1
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
SOLID187

EPPL.
Table187.2:SOLID187 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table187.1:SOLID187 Element Output Definitions
Item
I,J,...,R
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., R
Output Quantity
Name
Item

I
J
K
L
P1
P2
P3
P4
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
2
4
11
1
5
7
-
3
8
10
6
9
12
M,...,R
-
See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for ETABLE.

The element must not have a zero volume.
Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 187.1 or may have node L below the I, J, K
plane.
Meshing Guide for information about using midside nodes.
When mixed formulation is used (KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2), no midside nodes can be missed.
If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2), the damped eigensolver is not supported.
You must use the sparse solver (default).
SOLID187

ANSYS Professional.
14.183. SOLID187 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
14.183.SOLID187 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Stiffness, Mass, and

Stress Stiffness Matrices; Equation12184
and Thermal Load Vector
Equation12184 specialized to the face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Integration Points
4
6
Distribution
Same as shape functions
Linear over each face

SOLID273
SOLID273
General Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Use SOLID273 to model axisymmetric solid structures. The element has quadratic displacement behavior
on the master plane and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes on the master plane. It is defined
by eight nodes on the master plane, and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction
based on the eight master plane nodes. The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal
planes (KEYOPT(2)). Each node has three degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y and z
directions. The element allows a triangle as the degenerated shape on the base plane to simulate
irregular areas. The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large
strain capabilities. It also has mixed-formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly
incompressible elastoplastic materials, and nearly and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
and Mechanical Applications , and General Axisymmetric Elements in this document.
Figure273.1SOLID273 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
SOLID273 Input Data

The element input data includes nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The total number of
nodes is the 8 base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how Fourier node
are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) The default element coordinate system is the
cylindrical coordinate system with the Z axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via the SECDATA
command) and the circumferential direction as . (See General Axisymmetric Elements for details.) Use
the ESYS command to define an element coordinate system, which forms the basis for orthotropic
material directions.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures must be input as element surface
loads on the element edge of nodal planes as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 273.1. Positive
pressures act into the element and the maximum face edge is 4n, where n is the number of nodal
planes. If pressure is applied on the element edge with face numbers less that or equal to 4 and no load
on other edges, the pressure loads are the same on the 360 degrees of circumferential surfaces. (If
pressure is applied on a single element edge with a face number greater than 4, the pressure is
ignored.) If pressure is applied on the element edges with faces p and 4q+p (where q = 1 . . . n-1), the
SOLID273
pressure changes linearly with respect to within the part of the surface bounded by the edges p and
4q+p; on the rest of the surface, the pressure is zero.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the eight nodes on the master
plane, the node I1 temperature T(I 1 ) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they
default to T(I 1 ). If all corner node temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults
to the average temperature of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other input pattern, unspecified
temperatures default to TUNIF. For the nodes generated in circumferential direction based on the
master node, if all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to the value of their base nodes
(T(I1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(L 1 ), T(M1 ), T(N 1 ), T(O1 ) and T(P 1 ), depending on their location). For any other
input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
formulation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations in this document.
global coordinate system.
"SOLID273 Input Summary" contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input in this
document for a general description of element input.

Nodes
I 1 , J 1 , K 1 , L 1 , M 1 , N 1 , O 1 , P 1 , I2 , J 2 , K 2 , L 2 , M 2 , N 2 , O 2 , P 2 , . . . , I n , J n , K n , L n , M n , N n , O n , P n
(where n = KEYOPT(2), the number of nodal planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
edge 1 (J1 -I1 ), edge 2 (K1 -J1 ), edge 3 (L 1 -K 1 ), edge 4 (I 1 -L1 ), edge 5 (J2 -I2 ), edge 6 (K2 J2 ), . . . , edge 4n-3(Jn -In ), edge 4n-2 (Kn -Jn ), edge 4n-1 (L n -K n ), edge 4n (I n -Ln )
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I 1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(L 1 ), T(M1 ), T(N 1 ), T(O1 ), T(P 1 ), T(I 2 ), T(J 2 ), T(K2 ), T(L 2 ), T(M2 ),
SOLID273
T(N 2 ), T(O2 ), T(P 2 ), . . . , T(I n ), T(J n ), T(Kn ), T(L n ), T(Mn ), T(N n ), T(On ), T(P n )
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details
about the material models.
See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and the ETCONTROL command
documentation for more information about selecting element technologies.
KEYOPT(2)
1--
Axisymmetric deformation (may have torsion)
3 - 12--
General 3-D deformation
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid nonzero value.
For large-rotation not about the axisymmetric axis, KEYOPT(2)
5 is recommended.
For information about specifying the number of Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements
in this document.
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
Use mixed u-P formulation
SOLID273

As shown in Figure 273.2, the element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A
to view results.
Element stress directions SX, SY, and SZ shown in the global coordinate system.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I1 , J1 , K 1 , L1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , L2 , . . .
Material number
Volume
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
SOLID273
TEMP
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
See Table273.2:SOLID273 Item and Sequence

Numbers for more output.
Temperatures T(I 1 ), T(J 1 ), T(K1 ), T(L 1 ), T(I 2 ), T(J 2 ),
T(K2 ), T(L 2 ), . . .
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
2
Y
Y
2

Plastic strains[7]
2
1
2
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
Plastic work
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5

6. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal strains, this value is
set by the user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep strains, this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
SOLID273
the output table:
Name
Item
I1 , J 1 , K 1 , L 1 , M 1 , N 1 , O 1 , P 1 , I2 , J 2 , K 2 , L 2 , M 2 , N 2 , O 2 , P 2 . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1 , J1 , K 1 , L1 , M 1 , N1 , O 1 , P1 , I2 , J2 , K 2 , L2 , M 2 , N2 , O 2 , P2 , .
..
Output
Quantity Item I J K L M N O P --- I
Jn Kn Ln
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
n
Name
M n N n O n Pn
P1
SMISC 2
---
P2
SMISC
---
P3
SMISC
---
P4
SMISC 7
---
P5
SMISC
---
P6
SMISC
---
P7
SMISC
---
P8
SMISC
---
---
----- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --SMISC
--- 8n- 8n-
6
7
SMISC
--- 8n- 8n-

4
5
SMISC
---
8n- 8n2
3
SMISC
--- 8n-
8n
1
--
--
--
--
P4n-3
P4n-2
P4n-1
P4n

The area of the base element must be nonzero.
parabolically, along that edge. For more information about the use of midside nodes, see Quadratic
SOLID273
Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide .

Use at least two elements to avoid the hourglass effect.
You can form a triangular base element by defining duplicate K 1 - L1 - O 1 node numbers. (See
Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements in this document.)
You cannot apply a pressure load via the SFA command.
If you specify mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), do not miss any midside nodes. You must also
use the sparse solver.
master plane.
You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) when displaying this element in 3-D via the
/ESHAPE command.
When specifying more than one facet per element edge for PowerGraphics displays
(NAXIS,EFACET,NUM , where NUM > 1), ANSYS plots additional results on some planes between the
nodal and integration planes. The results on these planes are interpolated based on the nodal and
integration plane values. and are therefore less accurate than the values on the nodal and
interpolation planes. If you do not wish to plot the interpolated values, set NUM = 1 to plot only the
values on nodal and integration planes.
Print commands in postprocessing print the nodal plane results only.
To model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on this element, use general axisymmetric
surface element SURF159. (You cannot use this element with surface-effect elements SURF153 and
SURF154.)
You cannot generate surface-based contact pairs (contact elements CONTA171 through CONTA174
paired with target elements TARGE169 and TARGE170) on this element.
You can generate node-to-surface contact pairs (contact elements CONTA175 paired with target
elements TARGE170) and node-to-node contact elements (CONTA178) on this element, with the
following restrictions:
When TARGE170 is on the surface of SOLID273, you may have accuracy and convergence
issues if the loading causes large rotations about the axisymmetric axis of SOLID273; you
may also have those issues if the two sides of the contact boundaries have different mesh
patterns in the circumferential direction (caused by different KEYOPT(2) values of SOLID273).
You cannot define CONTA175 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach using a forcedistributed constraint (that is, you cannot set KEYOPT(2) = 2, KEYOPT(4) = 1, and
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 simultaneously for the CONTA175 elements).

SOLID273
14.269.SOLID273 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Quad

Thermal Load Vector
Triangle
Mass Matrix
Quad
Triangle
Shape Functions
Equation12257,
Equation12258,
Equation12266,
Equation12267, and
Equation12268
Equation12257,
Equation12258,
Equation12269,
Equation12270, and
Equation12271

face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Integration Points*
2 x 2 x (2 x Nnp )
3 x (2 x Nnp )
3 x 3 x (2 x Nnp )
3 x (2 x Nnp )
2 x (2 x Nnp )
Distribution
Biquadratic across element on rz plane and linear between nodal
planes in the circumferential direction
* Nnp = KEYOPT(2) = the number of node planes in the circumferential direction. The (2 x Nnp )
integration points are circumferentially located at the nodal planes and midway between the nodal
planes.


Although the elements are initially axisymmetric, the loads and deformation can be general in
nonaxisymmetric 3-D. The displacements are interpolated in elemental coordinate system by

interpolation functions, but the user can define the nodal displacements in any direction.
SOLID285
SOLID285
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with Nodal Pressures
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID285 element is a lower-order 3-D, 4-node mixed u-P element. The element has a linear
displacement and hydrostatic pressure behavior. The element is suitable for modeling irregular meshes
(such as those generated by various CAD/CAM systems) and general materials (including incompressible
materials).
The element is defined by four nodes having four degrees of freedom at each node: three translations in
the nodal x, y, and z directions, and one hydrostatic pressure (HDSP) for all materials except nearly
incompressible hyperelastic materials. For nearly incompressible materials, instead of hydrostatic
pressure, the volume change rate is used at each node together with the three translation degrees of
freedom. In a nonlinear analysis, you can control the tolerance of HDSP separately via the CNVTOL
command.
The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain
capabilities. It is capable of simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials,
nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
and Mechanical Applications .
SOLID285 Input Data

In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic or anisotropic material
properties. Orthotropic and anisotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate
directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Linear Material Properties.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressure loads may be input as surface loads
on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 285.1. Positive pressures act into the
temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
coordinate system.
SOLID285
input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, HDSP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
SOLID285
Linear perturbation
Solid 285 Element Technology

This element has a mixed u-P formulation with pressure stabilization. ANSYS achieves the stabilization by
enhancing the strain field with three internal degrees of freedom (which are condensed out at the
element level). The stabilization allows for a robust and accurate element.

Nodal displacements and hydrostatic pressure included in the overall nodal solution
coordinate system. A general description of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number
Table. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
O
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
SOLID285
PRES
TEMP
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH: EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND: ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, L; P4 at K, I, L
Stresses
Y
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y

Thermal strains
Y
1

Plastic strains [7]
1
1
1
1

Creep strains
1
1
1
1

1
Y
1
-

EPCR)
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

State variables
4
5
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

EPPL.
Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The following notation is used
in Table285.2:SOLID285 Item and Sequence Numbers:
SOLID285
Name
Item
I,J,...,R
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., R
Output Quantity
Name
Item

I
J
K
L
P1
P2
P3
P4
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
2
4
11
1
5
7
-
3
8
10
6
9
12
M,...,R
-
ETABLE.

Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 285.1 or may have node L below the I, J, K
plane.
Only the sparse solver is valid when using this element.
Support is available for static and transient analyses.
The element may not offer sufficient accuracy for bending-dominant problems, especially if the
mesh is not fine enough.
On the interfaces of different materials, the elements should not share nodes because the
hydrostatic pressure value is not continuous at those nodes. This behavior can be overcome in
either of two ways:
Coupling the displacements of the nodes on the interface but leaving HDSP unconstrained.
Adding bonded contact elements on the interfaces.
The element is not computationally efficient when the model uses compressible material. In such
cases, ANSYS recommends using a more suitable (pure displacement) element such as SOLID185
or SOLID187.

SOLID285
ANSYS Professional.
CNVTOL
CNVTOL
CNVTOL, Lab , VALUE , TOLER , NORM , MINREF

Sets convergence values for nonlinear analyses.

MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM EH <> PP <> EME MFS
Lab
Valid convergence labels. If STAT, list the status of the currently specified criteria.
Discipline
Structural
Thermal
Fluid
Electric
Magnetic
VALUE
TOLER
NORM
Displacement Convergence
Label
Label Description
U
ROT
HDSP
TEMP
PRES
V
VOLT
EMF
CURR
MAG
A
Displacements
Rotations
Temperature
Pressures
Velocity
Voltage
Electromotive Force
Current Flow
Scalar Potential
Vector Potential
Force Convergence
Label
Label Description
F
M
DVOL
HEAT
FLOW
VF
AMPS
CURT
VLTG
FLUX
CSG
Forces
Moments
Volume
Heat Flow
Fluid Flow
Fluid Force
Current Flow
Current Flow
Voltage Drop
Scalar Flux
Current Segments
Typical reference value for the above label for this analysis. If negative, and if this convergence
label was previously specified explicitly, then convergence based on this label is removed. (A
negative VALUE will not remove a default convergence label.) Defaults to the maximum of a
program calculated reference or MINREF. For degrees of freedom, the reference is based upon the
selected NORM and the current total DOF value. For forcing quantities, the reference is based upon
the selected NORM and the applied loads.
When SOLCONTROL,ON, tolerance about VALUE defaults to 0.005 (0.5%) for force and moment,
1.0E-4 (0.01%) for DVOL, 0.05 (5%) for displacement when rotational DOFs are not present, and
0.05 (5%) for HDSP. When SOLCONTROL,OFF, the defaults are 0.001 (0.1%) for force and
moment, and 1.0E-5 (0.001%) for DVOL.
Specifies norm selection:
2 L2 norm (check SRSS value) (default).
1 L1 norm (check absolute value sum).
0 Infinite norm (check each DOF separately).
MINREF
The minimum value allowed for the program calculated reference value. If negative, no minimum
is enforced. Used only if VALUE is blank. Defaults to 0.01 for force, moment, and volume
convergence, 1.0E-6 for heat flow, 1.0E-12 for VOLT and AMPS, 1.0E-6 for HDSP, and 0.0
otherwise. When SOLCONTROL,OFF, defaults to 1.0 for force, moment, and volume convergence.
The default for heat flow (1.0E-6), VOLT and AMPS (1.0E-12), and others are independent of the
SOLCONTROL setting.
Command Default
For static or transient analysis, check the out-of-balance load for any active DOF using the default
VALUE , TOLER , NORM , and MINREF. Also check the displacement convergence for some problems. For
analyses that include CONTA17x contact elements, displacement/rotation convergence checking is off by
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CNVTOL.html[28/04/2013 08:39:26 p.m.]
CNVTOL
default. For harmonic magnetic analysis, check the out-of-balance of the degrees of freedom.
Notes
The default values given for this command assume SOLCONTROL,ON (the default). See the description
of SOLCONTROL for a complete listing of the defaults set by SOLCONTROL,ON and
SOLCONTROL,OFF.
Values may be set for the degrees of freedom (DOF) and/or the out-of-balance load for the
corresponding forcing quantities. When the GUI is on, if a "Delete" operation in a Nonlinear Convergence
Criteria dialog box writes this command to a log file ( Jobname.LOG or Jobname.LGW), you will observe that
Lab is blank, VALUE = -1, and TOLER is an integer number. In this case, the GUI has assigned a value of
TOLER that corresponds to the location of a chosen convergence label in the dialog box's list. It is not
intended that you type in such a location value for TOLER in an ANSYS session. However, a file that
contains a GUI-generated CNVTOL command of this form can be used for batch input or with the
/INPUT command.
If you have multiple DOF types, issue CNVTOL for each DOF, because the default will be reset for the
other DOFs the first time CNVTOL is issued.
Convergence norms specified with CNVTOL may be graphically tracked while the solution is in process
using the ANSYS program's Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) feature. Use the /GST command to turn
GST on or off. By default, GST is ON for interactive sessions and OFF for batch runs.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear

Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Convergence Crit
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Harmonic
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Static
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Transient
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Nonlinear
Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Convergence Crit
Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Harmonic
Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Static
Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Nonlinear>Transient
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_CNVTOL.html[28/04/2013 08:39:26 p.m.]
SHELL28
SHELL28
Shear/Twist Panel

SHELL28 is used to carry shear load in a frame structure. The element has three degrees of freedom at
each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions, or rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes.
See SHELL28 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
SHELL28 Input Data

element is defined by four nodes, a thickness, and material properties. The only material properties
actually used are GXY and DENS. GXY may be entered directly or calculated from EX and either NUXY or
PRXY. Also, EX must be input, whether or not GXY is entered. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Real constant SULT is the ultimate shear stress used
for the margin of safety calculation. ADMSUA is the added mass per unit area. KEYOPT(1) is used to
select whether the element should be used as a shear panel or as a twist panel. Only the lumped mass
matrix is available.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Temperatures may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are
unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to
TUNIF. Temperatures are used only for material property evaluation.
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL28 Input Summary". Element Input gives a general

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ if KEYOPT(1) = 0
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Real Constants
THCK - Panel thickness
SULT - Ultimate shear stress
SHELL28
ADMSUA - Added mass/unit area

Material Properties
EX, PRXY (or NUXY), GXY, DENS, DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0--
Shear panel
1--
Twist panel
SHELL28 Output Data

Several items are illustrated in Figure 28.2. Solution Output gives a general description of solution
output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

SHELL28
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
SXY
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
SXY(I,J,K,L)
SXY(MAX)
SMARGN
FDIK, FDJL
FLI, FJI
FIJ, FKJ
FJK, FLK
FKL, FIL
SFLIJ
SFLJK
SFLKL
SFLLI
FZI
FZJ
FZK
FZL
MDIK, MDJL
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Average of four corner shear stresses
Shear stresses at corner nodes
Maximum of four corner shear stresses
Margin of safety on shear
Forces along diagonals I-K and J-L
Forces at node I from node L and node J
Forces at node J from node I and node K
Forces at node K from node J and node L
Forces at node L from node K and node I
Shear flow on edge I - J
Shear flow on edge J - K
Shear flow on edge K - L
Shear flow on edge L - I
Z - Force at node I
Z - Force at node J
Z - Force at node K
Z - Force at node L
Moments about diagonals I-K and J-L
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1. The values are output only if KEYOPT(1) = 0

2. The values are output in place of FDIK and FDJL only if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Table28.2:SHELL28 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table28.2:SHELL28 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
SHELL28
E
Item
E

FDIK (MDIK)
FDJL (MDJL)
FLI
FJI
FIJ
FKJ
FJK
FLK
FKL
FIL
FZI
FZJ
FZK
FZL
SXY
SXYI
SXYJ
SXYK
SXYL
SXYMAX
SMARGN
SFLIJ
SFLJK
SFLKL
SFLLI
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Zero area elements are not allowed. This condition occurs most often when the elements are
numbered improperly.
This element is most often used with a latticework of beam or spar elements. If this element is
used alone it is almost always unstable, because it carries only shear (and not tension or
compression) loading.
This element is not recommended for general use. Its use should be restricted to applications
which have historically used such an element. For all other applications, you should use other shell
elements such as SHELL41, SHELL181, and SHELL281, which automatically combine tension,
compression, bending, shear, and twisting effects.
This element is based on the premise of having only shear, but no normal stress along the edges.
Since this is possible only for rectangles, you can expect the accuracy of the element to degrade if
SHELL28
nonrectangular shapes are used.

ANSYS Professional.
14.27.SHELL28 - Shear/Twist Panel
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Mass Matrix
Stress Stiffness Matrix
Shape Functions
Integration Points
None (see reference)

None (one-sixth of the mass of each of the IJK,
JKL, KLI, and LIJ subtriangles is put at the
nodes)
No shape functions are used. Rather, the stress
stiffness matrix is developed from the two
diagonal forces used as spars
None
None
None
Reference: Garvey([116])

This element is based directly on the reference by Garvey([116]). It uses the idea that shear effects can
be represented by a uniform shear flow and nodal forces in the direction of the diagonals. The element
only resists shear stress; direct stresses will not be resisted.
The shear panel assumes that only shearing stresses are present along the element edges. Similarly, the
twist panel assumes only twisting moment, and no direct moment.
This element does not generate a consistent mass matrix; only the lumped mass matrix is available.
14.27.2.Commentary
The element loses validity when used in shapes other than rectangular. For non-rectangular cases, the
resulting shear stress is nonuniform, so that the patch test cannot be satisfied. Consider a rectangular
element under uniform shear:
Figure14.2Uniform Shear on Rectangular Element
Then, add a fictional cut at 45 to break the rectangular element into two trapezoidal regions
(elements):
Figure14.3Uniform Shear on Separated Rectangular Element
As can be seen, shear forces as well as normal forces are required to hold each part of the rectangle in
equilibrium for the case of uniform shear. The above discussion for trapezoids can be extended to
parallelograms. If the presumption of uniform shear stress is dropped, it is possible to hold the parts in
equilibrium using only shear stresses along all edges of the quadrilateral (the presumption used by
Garvey) but a truly uniform shear state will not exist.
14.27.3.Output Terms
The stresses are also computed using the approach of Garvey([116]).
When all four nodes lie in a flat plane, the shear flows are related to the nodal forces by:
(14
27)
where:
F JI = force at node I from node J (output as FJI)

F IJ = force at node J from node I (output as FIJ)
IJ = length of edge I-J
The forces in the element z direction (output quantities FZI, FZJ, FZK, FZL) are zero for the flat case.
When the flat element is also rectangular, all shear flows are the same. The stresses are:
(14
28)
where:
xy = shear stress (output as SXY)
t = thickness (input as THCK on R command)
The logic to compute the results for the cases where all four nodes do not lie in a flat plane or the
element is non-rectangular is more complicated and is not developed here.
The margin of safety calculation is:
(14
29)
where:
M s = margin of safety (output as SMARGN)
SHELL41
SHELL41
Membrane Shell

current-technology element such as SHELL181 (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or KEYOPT(3) = 2).
SHELL41 is a 3-D element having membrane (in-plane) stiffness but no bending (out-of-plane) stiffness.
It is intended for shell structures where bending of the elements is of secondary importance. The
element has three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
The element has variable thickness, stress stiffening, large deflection, and a cloth option. See SHELL41
this element.
xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.

SHELL41 Input Data

element is defined by four nodes, four thicknesses, a material direction angle and the orthotropic
material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. The element x-axis may
be rotated by an angle THETA (in degrees).
The element may have variable thickness. The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of
the element, with the thickness input at the four nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, only
TK(I) need be input. If the thickness is not constant, all four thicknesses must be input. The elastic
foundation stiffness (EFS) is defined as the pressure required to produce a unit normal deflection of the
foundation. The elastic foundation capability is bypassed if EFS is less than, or equal to, zero. ADMSUA is
the added mass per unit area.
element. Because shell edge pressures are input on a per-unit-length basis, per-unit-area quantities
SHELL41
must be multiplied by the shell thickness. The pressure loading is converted to equivalent element loads
applied at the nodes. Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I
Use KEYOPT(1) for a tension-only option. This nonlinear option acts like a cloth in that tension loads will
be supported but compression loads will cause the element to wrinkle.
You should not use this cloth option to model cloth materials, since real cloth materials do contain
some bending stiffness. You can use the cloth option to efficiently model regions where wrinkling is to
be approximated, such as for shear panels in aircraft structures. Wrinkling for this type of application
may be in one (or both) orthogonal directions. If you do need to model a real cloth material, you can
use the cloth option to simulate the tension part of the loading, but you will need to superimpose a very
thin regular shell element to include a bending stiffness for the material. Superimposing a thin shell may
also aid solution stability.
Any out-of-planeness within the element or round off-error in nodal location may cause an instability in
the displacement solution. To counteract this, a slight normal stiffness may be added to the element
with the EFS real constant. KEYOPT(2) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes.
KEYOPT(4) provides various element printout options (see Element Solution).
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL41 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
TK(I), TK(J), TK(K), TK(L), THETA, EFS,
ADMSUA
See Table41.1:SHELL41 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
EX, EY, PRXY or NUXY, ALPX, ALPY (or CTEX, CTEY or THSX,THSY), DENS, GXY, DAMP (Xdirection defined by THETA real constant)
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +Z direction), face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -Z direction),
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Stress Stiffening
Large Deflection
Nonlinear (if KEYOPT(1) = 2)
SHELL41
Birth and death

Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness behavior:
0--
Stiffness acts in both tension and compression
2--
Stiffness acts in tension, collapses in compression ("cloth" option)
KEYOPT(2)
0--
1--
Suppress extra displacement shape
KEYOPT(4)
0--
Basic element printout
1--
Repeat basic printout at integration points
2--
KEYOPT(5)
Member force output:
0--
No member force printout
1--
Print member forces in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(6)
Edge output (isotropic material):
0--
No edge printout
SHELL41
1--
Edge printout for midpoint of side I-J
2--
Edge printout for midpoints of both sides I-J and K-L
Note: Edge printout valid only for isotropic materials
Table41.1SHELL41 Real Constants
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
TK(I)
TK(J)
TK(K)
TK(L)
THETA
EFS
ADMSUA
Description
Shell thickness at node I
Shell thickness at node J (defaults to TK(I))
Shell thickness at node K (defaults to TK(I))
Shell thickness at node L (defaults to TK(I))
Element x-axis rotation
Elastic foundation stiffness
SHELL41 Output Data

Several items are illustrated in Figure 41.2. The element stress directions correspond to the element
coordinate directions. Edge stresses are defined parallel and perpendicular to the IJ edge (and the KL
edge). A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide
for ways to view results.
xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.

SHELL41
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
AREA
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
S:X, Y, Z, XY
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
ANGLES
CURRENT STATS.
OLD STATUSES
TEMP
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z)
S(PAR, PER, Z)
SINT
SEQV
FX, FY, FZ
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Surface area
Pressures P1 at nodes I, J, K, L; P2 at I, J, K, L; P3 at
J, I; P4 at K, J; P5 at L, K; P6 at I, L
Stresses
Principal stress
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Average elastic strain
Average thermal strain
Equivalent thermal strain
Diagonal tension angles (degrees) between element xaxis and tensile stress directions
Element statuses at end of this time step
Element statuses at end of previous time step
Edge average temperature
Edge elastic strains (parallel, perpendicular, Z)
Edge stresses (parallel, perpendicular, Z)
Edge stress intensity
Edge equivalent stress
Nodal forces
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
-
1. Output at the integration points only if KEYOPT(1) = 2 (meaningful only if STAT = 1)

2. Output at the integration points only if KEYOPT(1) = 2. The element status is given by the
following values:
0 - Tension in both (orthogonal) directions
1 - Tension in one direction, collapse in other direction
2 - Collapse in both directions
3. Edge I-J output, if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
SHELL41
Table41.3SHELL41 Miscellaneous Element Output

Description
Integration Point Stress Solution

Edge K-L
Member Forces
TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), SINT, SEQV

TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), SINT, SEQV
TEMP, EPEL(PAR, PER, Z), S(PAR,
PER, Z), SINT, SEQV
FX, FY, FZ
1
2
3
1. Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(4) = 1

3. Output if KEYOPT(6) = 2
4. Output at each node (in the element coordinate system) if KEYOPT(5) = 1
Table41.4:SHELL41 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table41.4:SHELL41 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
I,J,K,L
Output Quantity
Name
FX
FY
FZ
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
S:1
S:2
S:3
S:INT
S:EQV
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

I
J
K
1
2
3
13
17
22
27
1
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
14
18
21
24
7
8
9
15
19
10
11
12
16
20
-
6
7
8
9
10
23
26
11
12
13
14
15
25
28
16
17
18
19
20
SHELL41
Output Quantity
Name
ANGLE
STAT
Item

Corner Location
1
2
3
NMISC
NMISC
21
22
23
24
25
26
4
27
28

The four nodes defining the element should lie in an exact flat plane; however, a small out-ofplane tolerance is permitted so that the element may have a slightly warped shape.
A slightly warped element will produce a warning message. If the warping is too severe, a fatal
message results and a triangular element should be used (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral
Elements).
Zero area elements are not allowed.
TK(I) must not be zero.
The element must not taper down to a zero thickness at any corner.
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements).
The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular elements so that a constant strain
element results.
The triangular shape is required for large deflection analyses since a four-node element may warp
during deflection.
Edge stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met.
Modeling hints:
An assembly of SHELL41 elements describing a flat plane should be exactly flat; otherwise
singularities may develop in the direction perpendicular to the plane.
Stress stiffening will help stabilize the solution after the first substep if the membrane element is in
a tension field.
An assemblage of flat elements can produce an approximation to a curved surface, but each flat
element should not extend over more than a 15 arc.

SHELL181
SHELL181


SHELL181 is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately-thick shell structures. It is a four-node element
with six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the x, y, and z directions, and rotations about
the x, y, and z-axes. (If the membrane option is used, the element has translational degrees of freedom
only). The degenerate triangular option should only be used as filler elements in mesh generation.
SHELL181 is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change in
shell thickness is accounted for in nonlinear analyses. In the element domain, both full and reduced
integration schemes are supported. SHELL181 accounts for follower (load stiffness) effects of distributed
pressures.
SHELL181 may be used for layered applications for modeling composite shells or sandwich construction.
The accuracy in modeling composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory
(usually referred to as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
The element formulation is based on logarithmic strain and true stress measures. The element
kinematics allow for finite membrane strains (stretching). However, the curvature changes within a time
increment are assumed to be small.
SHELL181 Input Data

The following figure shows the geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this
element. The element is defined by shell section information and by four nodes (I, J, K, and L).
xo = Element x-axis if ESYS is not provided.

x = Element x-axis if ESYS is provided.
Single-Layer Definition
To define the thickness (and other information), use section definition, as follows:
SHELL181
SECTYPE,,SHELL
SECDATA,THICKNESS , ...
A single-layer shell section definition provides flexible options. For example, you can specify the number
of integration points used and the material orientation.
Multilayer Definition
The shell section commands allow for layered shell definition. Options are available for specifying the
thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness of the layers.
each layer when using section input. When only one, the point is always located midway between the
top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points, two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces
respectively and the remaining points are distributed equal distance between the two points. The default
number of integration points for each layer is three; however, when a single layer is defined and
plasticity is present, the number of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during solution.
The following additional capabilities are available when defining shell layers:
SHELL181 accepts the preintegrated shell section type (SECTYPE,,GENS).
When the element is associated with the GENS section type, thickness or material definitions are
not required.
You can use the function tool to define thickness as a function of global/local coordinates or node
numbers (SECFUNCTION).
You can specify offsets (SECOFFSET).
A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file
(SECTYPE,,SHELL,FIBERSIM).
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element, which connects the midsides of edges
LI and JK and is shown as xo in Figure 181.1. In the most general case, the axis can be defined as:
where:
{x} I,
{x} J ,
{x} K,
{x} L = global nodal coordinates
For undistorted elements, the default orientation is the same as described in Coordinate Systems (the
first surface direction is aligned with the IJ side). For spatially warped or otherwise distorted elements,
the default orientation represents the stress state better because the element uses a single point of
quadrature (by default) in the element domain.
The first surface direction S1 can be rotated by angle (in degrees) for the layer via the SECDATA
command. For an element, you can specify a single value of orientation in the plane of the element.
Layer-wise orientation is supported.
You can also define element orientation via the ESYS command. See Coordinate Systems.
SHELL181
The element supports degeneration into a triangular form; however, use of the triangular form is not
recommended, except when used as mesh filler elements or with the membrane option (KEYOPT(1) =
1). The triangle form is generally more robust when using the membrane option with large deflections.
To evaluate stresses and strains on exterior surfaces, use KEYOPT(1) = 2. When used as overlaid
elements on the faces of 3-D elements, this option is similar to the surface stress option (described in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ), but is more general and
applicable to nonlinear analysis. The element used with this option does not provide any stiffness, mass,
or load contributions. This option should only be used in single-layer shells. Irrespective of other
settings, SHELL181 provides stress and strain output at the center of the layer.
SHELL181 uses a penalty method to relate the independent rotational degrees of freedom about the
normal (to the shell surface) with the in-plane components of displacements. The program chooses an
appropriate penalty stiffness by default. A drill stiffness factor can be specified via the SECCONTROLS
command.
must be multiplied by the shell thickness.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of the element
and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF.
If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and if exactly NL+1
temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last
temperature is used for the four top corner temperatures of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if
exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four corners of each layer. That is,
T1 is used for T1, T2, T3, and T4; T2 (as input) is used for T5, T6, T7, and T8, etc. For any other input
Using KEYOPT(3), SHELL181 supports uniform reduced integration and full integration with incompatible
modes. By default, this element uses the uniform reduced integration for performance reasons in
nonlinear applications.
Using reduced integration with hourglass control creates some usage restrictions, although minimal. For
example, to capture the in-plane bending of a cantilever or a stiffener (see Figure 181.2), a number of
elements through the thickness direction is necessary. The performance gains achieved by using uniform
reduced integration are significant enough to offset the need to use more elements. In relatively wellrefined meshes, hourglassing issues are largely irrelevant.
When the reduced integration option is used, you can check the accuracy of the solution by comparing
the total energy (SENE label in ETABLE) and the artificial energy (AENE label in ETABLE) introduced by
hourglass control. If the ratio of artificial energy to total energy is less than 5%, the solution is generally
acceptable. The total energy and artificial energy can also be monitored by using OUTPR,VENG in the
solution phase.
Bilinear elements, when fully integrated, are too stiff in in-plane bending.SHELL181 uses the method of
incompatible modes to enhance the accuracy in bending-dominated problems. This approach is also
called "extra shapes" or "bubble" modes approach. SHELL181 uses the formulation that ensures
satisfaction of the patch test (J. C. Simo and F. Armero, "Geometrically nonlinear enhanced strain mixed
methods and the method of incompatible modes," IJNME, Vol. 33, pp. 1413-1449, 1992).
When including incompatible modes in the analysis, you must use full integration. KEYOPT(3) = 2
implies the inclusion of incompatible modes and the use of full (2x2) quadrature.
SHELL181, with KEYOPT(3) = 2 specified, does not have any spurious energy mechanisms. This specific
form of SHELL181 is highly accurate, even with coarse meshes. We recommend that you use KEYOPT(3)
= 2 if you encounter any hourglass-related difficulties with the default options. KEYOPT(3) = 2 is also
necessary if the mesh is coarse and in-plane bending of the elements dominate the response. We
recommend this option with all layered applications.
SHELL181
KEYOPT(3) = 2 imposes the fewest usage restrictions. You can always choose this option. However, you
can improve element performance by choosing the best option for your problem. Consider the problems
illustrated in Figure 181.2
Figure181.2SHELL181 Typical Bending Applications
The cantilever beam and the beam cross-section to be modeled with shells are typical examples of inplane bending-dominated problems. The use of KEYOPT(3) = 2 is the most effective choice in these
circumstances. Reduced integration would require refined meshes. For example, reduced integration for
the cantilever beam problem requires four elements through the thickness, whereas the full integration
with incompatible modes only requires one element through the thickness.
For the stiffened shell, the most effective choice is to use KEYOPT(3) = 0 for the shell and KEYOPT(3) =
2 for the stiffener.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 is specified, SHELL181 uses an hourglass control method for membrane and
bending modes. By default, SHELL181 calculates the hourglass parameters for both metal and
hyperelastic applications. To specify the hourglass stiffness scaling factors, use the SECCONTROLS
command.
SHELL181 includes the linear effects of transverse shear deformation. An assumed shear strain
formulation of Bathe-Dvorkin is used to alleviate shear locking. The transverse shear stiffness of the
element is a 2x2 matrix as shown below:
To define transverse shear stiffness values, use the SECCONTROLS command.

For a single-layer shell with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are:
SHELL181
In the above matrix, k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = thickness of the shell.
SHELL181 can be associated with linear elastic, elastoplastic, creep, or hyperelastic material properties.
Only isotropic, anisotropic, and orthotropic linear elastic properties can be input for elasticity. The von
Mises isotropic hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BISO (bilinear isotropic hardening),
MISO (multilinear isotropic hardening), and NLISO (nonlinear isotropic hardening) options. The kinematic
hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BKIN (bilinear kinematic hardening), MKIN and KINH
(multilinear kinematic hardening), and CHABOCHE (nonlinear kinematic hardening). Invoking plasticity
assumes that the elastic properties are isotropic (that is, if orthotropic elasticity is used with plasticity,
ANSYS assumes the isotropic elastic modulus = EX and Poisson's ratio = NUXY).
Hyperelastic material properties (2, 3, 5, or 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin material model, Neo-Hookean
model, Polynomial form model, Arruda-Boyce model, and user-defined model) can be used with this
element. Poisson's ratio is used to specify the compressibility of the material. If less than 0, Poisson's
ratio is set to 0; if greater than or equal to 0.5, Poisson's ratio is set to 0.5 (fully incompressible).
Both isotropic and orthotropic thermal expansion coefficients can be input using MP,ALPX. When used
with hyperelasticity, isotropic expansion is assumed.
Use the BETAD command to specify the global value of damping. If MP,DAMP is defined for the
the value from the BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to specify the global value of
number of the layer, it is used instead of either the global or element value.
With reduced integration and hourglass control (KEYOPT(3) = 0), low frequency spurious modes may
appear if the mass matrix employed is not consistent with the quadrature rule. SHELL181 uses a
projection scheme that effectively filters out the inertia contributions to the hourglass modes of the
element. To be effective, a consistent mass matrix must be used. We recommend setting LUMPM,OFF
for a modal analysis using this element type. The lumped mass option can, however, be used with the
full integration options (KEYOPT(3) = 2).
KEYOPT(8) = 2 stores midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements. If you
use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and BOTTOM
results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results) for
those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate; examples include midsurface
stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations
that involve squaring operations such as in spectrum analyses.
KEYOPT(9) = 1 reads initial thickness data from a user subroutine.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
SHELL181

Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ
Specify DAMP only once for the element (use MAT command to assign material property set).
REFT may be provided once for the element, or may be assigned on a per layer basis. See the
discussion in "SHELL181 Input Summary" for more details.
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +N direction),
face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -N direction),
Body Loads
Temperatures--
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 (Bending and membrane stiffness):
T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of layer 1), T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for
between next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1) maximum).
Hence, for one-layer elements, 8 temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 (Membrane stiffness only):
T1, T2, T3, T4 for layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 for layer 2, similarly for all layers (4*NL maximum).
Hence, for one-layer elements, 4 temperatures are used.
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Section definition for layered shells and preintegrated shell sections for input of homogenous
section stiffnesses
Linear perturbation
"Structures with Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of the material models.
SHELL181

KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0--
Bending and membrane stiffness (default)
1--
Membrane stiffness only
2--
Stress/strain evaluation only
KEYOPT(3)
Integration option:
0--
Reduced integration with hourglass control (default)
2--
Full integration with incompatible modes
KEYOPT(8)
0--
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multi-layer elements) (default)
1--
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multi-layer elements)
Note: Volume of data may be excessive.
2--
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single- and multi-layer
elements
KEYOPT(9)
User thickness option:
0--
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default)
1--
Read initial thickness data from user subroutine UTHICK
Note: See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for user written
SHELL181
subroutines

command. Interlaminar shear stress is available as SYZ and SXZ evaluated at the layer interfaces.
KEYOPT(8) must be set to either 1 or 2 to output these stresses in POST1. A general description of
solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
The element stress resultants (N11, M11, Q13, etc.) are parallel to the element coordinate system, as
are the membrane strains and curvatures of the element. Such generalized strains are available through
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear forces Q13, Q23 are available only
in resultant form: that is, use SMISC,7 (or 8). Likewise, the transverse shear strains, 13 and 23 , are
constant through the thickness and are only available as SMISC items (SMISC,15 and SMISC,16,
respectively).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22, M12) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default,
ANSYS adopts the shell midplane as the reference plane. To offset the reference plane to any other
specified location, issue the SECOFFSET command. When there is a nonzero offset (L) from the
reference plane to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane (
recovered from stress resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
) can be
SHELL181 does not support extensive basic element printout. POST1 provides more comprehensive
output processing tools; therefore, ANSYS suggests using the OUTRES command to ensure that the
required results are stored in the database.
SHELL181

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
LOC
Definition
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Average thickness
Volume
J,I; P4 at K,J; P5 at L,K; P6 at I,L
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8
between layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers,
ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1)
maximum)
Stresses
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
1
1
SHELL181
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22, M12
Q13, Q23
11 , 22 , 12
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Thermal strains
EPCR)
Plastic work
3
3
3
3
3
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
In-plane forces (per unit length)

Out-of-plane moments (per unit length)
Transverse shear forces (per unit length)
Membrane strains
Y
8
8
Y
k11 , k22 , k12

13 , 23
Curvatures
Transverse shear strains
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG

State variables
Membrane stresses
Bending stresses
Peak stresses
Averaged transverse shear stresses
Sm: 11, 22, 12

Sb: 11, 22, 12
Sp: 11, 22, 12
St: 13, 23
5
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1. The following stress solution repeats for top, middle, and bottom surfaces.
material.
SHELL181

8. Not available if the membrane element option is used (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
Table181.2:SHELL181 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in
Table181.2:SHELL181 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Output
Quantity Name

E
I
J
K
Item
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22
M12
Q13
Q23
11
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
SMISC
10
12
SMISC
11
k11
SMISC
12
k22
SMISC
13
k12
SMISC
14
13
SMISC
15
23
SMISC
16
SHELL181
THICK
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Sm: 11
Sm: 22
Sm: 12
Sb: 11
Sb: 22
Sb: 12
Sp: 11 (at
bottom)
Sp: 22 (at
bottom)
Sp: 12 (at
bottom)
Sp: 11 (at
top)
Sp: 22 (at
top)
Sp: 12 (at
top)
St: 13
St: 23
17
shell
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
shell
18
22
27
19
23
26
29
20
24
21
25
-
28
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
32
-
30
33
-
SMISC
41
shell
SMISC
42
shell
SMISC
43
shell
SMISC
44
shell
SMISC
45
SMISC
SMISC
46
47
Output
Quantity Name
Item
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

Bottom of Layer i
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
51
53
55
57
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
52
54
56
58

ANSYS recommends against using this element in triangular form, except as a filler element. Avoid
triangular form especially in areas with high stress gradients.
Zero-area elements are not allowed. (Zero-area elements occur most often whenever the elements
are numbered improperly.)
allowed (but zero thickness layers are allowed).
If multiple load steps are used, the number of layers may not change between load steps.
When the element is associated with preintegrated shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS), additional
restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections.
If reduced integration is used (KEYOPT(3) = 0) SHELL181 ignores rotary inertia effects when an
SHELL181
unbalanced laminate construction is used, and all inertial effects are assumed to be in the nodal
plane (that is, an unbalanced laminate construction and offsets have no effect on the mass
properties of the element).
For most composite analyses, ANSYS recommends setting KEYOPT(3) = 2 (necessary to capture
the stress gradients).
however, normals to the center plane before deformation are assumed to remain straight after
deformation.
Transverse shear stiffness of the shell section is estimated by an energy equivalence procedure (of
the generalized section forces & strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy
of this calculation may be adversely affected if the ratio of material stiffnesses (Young's moduli)
between adjacent layers is very high.
The calculation of interlaminar shear stresses is based on simplifying assumptions of unidirectional,
uncoupled bending in each direction. If accurate edge interlaminar shear stresses are required,
shell-to-solid submodeling should be used.
The section definition permits use of hyperelastic material models and elastoplastic material
models in laminate definition. However, the accuracy of the solution is primarily governed by
fundamental assumptions of shell theory. The applicability of shell theory in such cases is best
understood by using a comparable solid model.
The layer orientation angle has no effect if the material of the layer is hyperelastic.
Before using this element in a simulation containing curved thick shell structures with unbalanced
laminate construction or shell offsets, validate the usage via full 3-D modeling with a solid element
in a simpler representative model. This element may underestimate the curved thick shell stiffness,
particularly when the offset is large and the structure is under torsional load.
The through-thickness stress, SZ, is always zero.
This element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (NROPT,FULL,ON).
In a nonlinear analysis, the solution process terminates if the thickness at any integration point
that was defined with a nonzero thickness vanishes (within a small numerical tolerance).
If a shell section has only one layer and the number of section integration points is equal to one,
or if KEYOPT(1) = 1, then the shell has no bending stiffness, a condition that can result in solver
and convergence problems.

ANSYS Professional.
The only special features allowed are stress stiffening, large deflections, and plasticity (BISO,
BKIN).
SHELL208
SHELL208

The SHELL208 element is suitable for modeling thin to moderately thick axisymmetric shell structures,
such as oil tanks, pipes, and cooling towers. It is a two-node element with three degrees of freedom at
each node: translations in the x, and y directions, and rotation about the z-axis. A fourth translational
degree of freedom in z direction can be included to model uniform torsion (KEYOPT(2) = 1). When the
membrane option is used, the rotational degree of freedom is excluded. An extra internal node is
available via KEYOPT(3) = 2. (SHELL209 incorporates this extra node by default.)
SHELL208 allows you to account for large strain effects, transverse shear deformation, hyperelasticity
and layers in your models. The element is intended to model finite strain with pure axisymmetric
displacements; transverse shear strains are assumed to be small.
SHELL208 can be used for layered applications for modeling laminated composite shells or sandwich
construction. See SHELL208 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for more details about this element.
SHELL208 Input Data

Figure 208.1 shows the geometry, node locations, and element coordinate system for SHELL208. The
element is defined by two nodes. For material property labels, the local x-direction corresponds to the
meridional direction of the shell element. The local y-direction is the circumferential. The local z-direction
corresponds to the through-the-thickness direction. Element formulation is based on logarithmic strain
and true stress measures. Element kinematics allows for finite membrane strains (stretching). However,
the curvature changes within an increment are assumed to be small.
The shell thickness and more general properties (such as material and number of integration points
through the thickness) are specified via section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA and
SECCONTROLS). Shell section commands allow for both single-layered and composite shell definitions.
each layer. If only one, the integration point is always located midway between the top and the bottom
surfaces. If three or more, two points are located on the top and the bottom surfaces respectively and
the remaining points are distributed evenly between these two points. The default for each layer is three
integration points. The element can have variable thickness, as a tabular function of global/local
coordinates or node numbers (SECFUNCTION).
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressure may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 208.1. Positive pressures act into the element.
SHELL208
and the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If
all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and exactly NL+1 (where
NL is the number of layers in the shell section) temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the
bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is for the top corners of the top layer. If
KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the two corners of
each layer; that is, T1 is used for T1 and T2; T2 (as input) is used for T3 and T4, etc. For any other
input patterns, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360 basis.
KEYOPT(1) is the membrane option. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element uses one integration point
through-the-thickness and accounts for only membrane stiffness (that is, the bending and transverse
shear stiffness are ignored).
KEYOPT(2) controls the torsion capability. When KEYOPT(2) = 1, the element allows constant torsion by
allowing a translational degree of freedom UZ in the circumferential direction.
KEYOPT(3) is used to include or suppress internal nodes. When KEYOPT(3) = 2, the element contains
an extra internal node and adopts a two-point integration rule. By default, the element uses one-point
integration scheme (see Figure 208.1). Internal nodes are not accessible to users. Therefore, boundary
conditions/loading can not be specified on those nodes.
SHELL208 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness E11 can
be specified using SECCONTROLS. For a single-layered shell with isotropic material, default transverse
shear stiffness is kGh, in which k = 5/6, G is the shear modulus, and h is the thickness of the shell.
Set KEYOPT(8) = 2 to store midsurface results in the results file for single- or multi-layer shell elements.
If you use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and
BOTTOM results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane
results) for those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate. Examples include
midsurface stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode
combinations that involve squaring operations such as in spectrum analyses.
Set KEYOPT(9) = 1 to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
UX, UY, UZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
Real Constants
SHELL208
None
Section Controls
E11, ADMSUA
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ ( or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J) (top, in -N direction),
face 2 (I-J) (bottom, in +N direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
For KEYOPT(1) = 0:
T1, T2 (corresponding to nodes I and J) at bottom of layer 1, and T3, T4 (corresponding to
nodes I and J) between layers 1-2. A similar relationship exists for all layers, ending with
temperatures at the top of layer NL. Hence, for one-layer elements, four temperatures are
used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1:
T1, T2 for layer 1; T3, T4 for layer 2; similarly for all layers (2 * NL maximum). Hence, for
one-layer elements, two temperatures are used.
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
APDL and Mechanical Applications for details of the material models.
Adaptive descent is not supported.
KEYOPT(1)
SHELL208
Element stiffness:
0--
Bending and membrane stiffness (default).
1--
Membrane stiffness only.
KEYOPT(2)
Torsion capability:
0--
Excluded (default).
1--
Included.
KEYOPT(3)
Extra internal node option:
0--
Suppress extra internal node (default).
2--
Include extra internal node.
KEYOPT(8)
Storage of layer data:
0--
Store data for BOTTOM of bottom layer and TOP of top layer (default).
1-Store data for TOP and BOTTOM for all layers.
2--
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
KEYOPT(9)
User-defined thickness:
0--
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default).
1--
SHELL208
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for information about user-written
subroutines

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution.
KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output on the result file for processing with the LAYER
command. Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2 is
necessary for these stresses to be output in POST1. A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear force Q13 is available only in
resultant form: that is, use SMISC,5. Likewise, the transverse shear strain 13 is constant through the
thickness and only available as a SMISC item (SMISC,10).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
adopts the shell midplane as the reference plane. To offset the reference plane to any other specified
location, issue the SECOFFSET command. When there is a nonzero offset (L) from the reference plane
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane (
resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
) can be recovered from stress
output processing tools; you should use the OUTRES command to ensure that the required results are
stored in the database.
Figure208.2SHELL208 Element Stress Output
SHELL208
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
LOC
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
,YZ,XZ
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z
,XY,YZ,XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:Elastic,
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Material number
Average thickness
Volume
Pressures P1 (top) at NODES I, J; P2 (bottom) at NODES I,
J
Temperatures T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 between
layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers, ending with
temperatures at top of layer NL (2*(NL+1) maximum)
Stresses
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
4
Y
1
1
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
1
1
1
1

Thermal strains
1
1

1
2

2
2
Equivalent creep strain

Total mechanical strains (EPEL+EPPL+EPCR)
2
-
Total equivalent mechanical strains

Plastic work
2
2
2
2
2
2
SHELL208
Plastic, Creep
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22
Q13
E11, E22, E12
K11, K22
13
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
Sm: 11, 22, 12
Sb: 11, 22
Sp: 11, 22, 12
St: 13

Membrane strains
Curvatures
Transverse shear strain
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

State variables
Membrane stresses
Bending stresses
Peak stresses
5
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
material.
Name
Item
E
I, J
sequence number for data at nodes I, J.
SHELL208

Output Quantity
Name

E
I
Item
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22
Q13
11
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
SMISC
12
SMISC
k11
SMISC
10
k22
SMISC
11
13
SMISC
12
THICK
P1
P2
Sm: 11
Sm: 22
Sm: 12
Sb: 11
Sb: 22
Sp: 11 (at
bottom)
Sp: 22 (at
bottom)
Sp: 12 (at
bottom)
Sp: 11 (at
Sp: 22 (at
Sp: 12 (at
St: 13
shell
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
13
18
19
20
21
22
23
14
16
-
15
17
-
shell
SMISC
24
shell
SMISC
25
shell top) SMISC

shell top) SMISC
shell top) SMISC
SMISC
26
27
28
29
Output
Quantity
Name
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

Bottom of Layer i
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
31
33
35
37
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
32
34
36
38

The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane with the Y-axis the axis of
symmetry.
SHELL208
The element cannot have a zero length.

Zero thickness elements, or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner, are not
deformation.
For nonlinear applications, this element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme
(NROPT,FULL,ON).
SHELL208 with an internal node cannot be used in substructures.

ANSYS Professional.
SHELL209
SHELL209

The SHELL209 element is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately thick axisymmetric shell structures. It
is a three-node element with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the X, Y directions,
and a rotation about the Z-axis. A fourth translational degree of freedom in z direction can be included
to model uniform torsion (KEYOPT(2) = 1). When the membrane option is used, the rotational degree of
freedom is excluded. (For higher efficiency, the two-node element SHELL208 may be more suitable.)
The element is well suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Changes
in shell thickness and follower effects of distributed pressures are accounted for in nonlinear analyses,
and it can be used for layered applications for modeling laminated composite shells or sandwich
construction. See SHELL209 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
SHELL209 Input Data

Figure 209.1 shows the geometry, node locations, and element coordinate system for this element. The
element is defined by three nodes. For material property labels, the local x-direction corresponds to the
meridional direction of the shell element. The local y-direction is the circumferential. The local z-direction
corresponds to the through-the-thickness direction. Element formulation is based on logarithmic strain
and true stress measures. Element kinematics allows for finite membrane strains (stretching). However,
the curvature changes within an increment are assumed to be small.
The shell thickness and more general properties (such as material and number of integration points
through the thickness) are specified via section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA and
SECCONTROLS). Shell section commands allow for both single-layered and composite shell definitions.
each layer. If only one, the integration point is always located midway between the top and the bottom
surfaces. If three or more, two points are located on the top and the bottom surfaces respectively and
the remaining points are distributed evenly between these two points. The default for each layer is three
integration points. The element can have variable thickness, as a tabular function of global/local
coordinates or node numbers (SECFUNCTION).
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressure may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 209.1. Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures can be input as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of the element and
the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all
other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and exactly NL+1 (where NL
is the number of layers in the shell section) temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the
SHELL209
bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is for the top corners of the top layer. If
KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the two corners of
each layer. That is, T1 is used for T1, T2, and T3; T2 (as input) is used for T4, T5, and T6, etc. For any
other input patterns, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360 basis.
KEYOPT(1) is the membrane option. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element uses one integration point
through-the-thickness and accounts for only membrane stiffness (that is, the bending and transverse
shear stiffness are ignored).
KEYOPT(2) controls the torsion capability. When KEYOPT(2) = 1, the element allows constant torsion by
allowing a translational degree of freedom UZ in the circumferential direction.
SHELL209 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness E11 can
be specified with SECCONTROLS. For a single-layered shell with isotropic material, default transverse
shear stiffness is kGh, in which k = 5/6, G is the shear modulus, and h is the thickness of the shell.
Set KEYOPT(8) = 2 to store midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements.
If you use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and
BOTTOM results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane
results) for those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate. Examples include
Set KEYOPT(9) = 1 to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.
"SHELL209 Input Summary" gives a summary of the element input. A general description of element
input is given in Element Input

Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
UX, UY, UZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
Real Constants
None
Section Controls
E11, ADMSUA
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ ( or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
SHELL209
DENS, GXY, GYZ,
GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J-K) (top, in -N direction),
face 2 (I-J-K) (bottom, in +N direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
For KEYOPT(1) = 0:
T1, T2 T3 (corresponding to nodes I, J, and K) at bottom of layer 1, and T4, T5, T6
(corresponding to nodes I, J, and K) between layers 1-2. A similar relationship exists for all
layers, ending with temperatures at the top of layer NL. For one-layer elements, therefore,
six temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1:
T1, T2, T3 for layer 1; T4, T5, T6 for layer 2; similarly for all layers (3 * NL maximum).
Hence, for one-layer elements, three temperatures are used.
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and ETCONTROL for more information on
selection of element technologies.
Adaptive descent is not supported.
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0--
Bending and membrane stiffness (default).
1--
SHELL209
Membrane stiffness only.

KEYOPT(2)
Torsion capability:
0--
Excluded (default).
1--
Included.
KEYOPT(8)
0--
Store data for BOTTOM of bottom layer and TOP of top layer (default).
1-Store data for TOP and BOTTOM for all layers.
2--
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
KEYOPT(9)
User-defined thickness:
0--
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default).
1--
subroutines.

KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output on the result file for processing with the LAYER
command. Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2 is
necessary for these stresses to be output in POST1. A general description of solution output is given in
SHELL209
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear force Q13 are available only in
resultant form: that is, use SMISC,5. Likewise, the transverse shear strain.
13 is constant through the thickness and only available as a SMISC item (SMISC,10).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
adopts the shell midplane as the reference plane. To offset the reference plane to any other specified
location, issue the SECOFFSET command. When there is a nonzero offset (L) from the reference plane
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane (
resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
) can be recovered from stress
output processing tools; therefore, we suggest using OUTRES command to ensure that the required
results are stored in the database.
Figure209.2SHELL209 Element Stress Output

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K
Material number
Average thickness
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
SHELL209
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
LOC
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z,
XY,YZ,XZ
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z
,XY,YZ,XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:Elastic,
Plastic, Creep
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22
Q13
E11, E22, E12
K11, K22
13
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
Volume
Pressures P1 (top) at NODES I, J; P2 (bottom) at NODES I,
J
Temperatures T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 between
layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers, ending with
temperatures at top of layer NL (2*(NL+1) maximum)
Stresses
Y
-
Y
4
Y
1
1
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
1
1
1
1

Thermal strains
1
1

1
2

2
2
Equivalent creep strain

Total mechanical strains (EPEL+EPPL+EPCR)
2
-
Total equivalent mechanical strains

Plastic work
2
2
2
2
2
2

Membrane strains
Curvatures
Transverse shear strain
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

State variables
5
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
SHELL209
Sm: 11, 22, 12

Sb: 11, 22
Sp: 11, 22, 12
St: 13
Membrane stresses
Bending stresses
Peak stresses
Y
Y
Y
Y
material.
Name
Item
E
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K.
Output Quantity
Name

E
I
J
Item
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22
Q13
11
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
SMISC
12
SMISC
SHELL209
k11
SMISC
10
k22
SMISC
11
13
SMISC
12
THICK
P1
P2
Sm: 11
Sm: 22
Sm: 12
Sb: 11
Sb: 22
Sp: 11 (at
bottom)
Sp: 22 (at
bottom)
Sp: 12 (at
bottom)
Sp: 11 (at
top)
Sp: 22 (at
top)
Sp: 12 (at
top)
St: 13
shell
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
13
18
19
20
21
22
23
14
17
-
15
18
-
shell
SMISC
24
shell
SMISC
25
shell
SMISC
26
shell
SMISC
27
shell
SMISC
28
SMISC
29
Output Quantity
Name
Item
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
16
19
-

Bottom of Layer i
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
31
33
35
37
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
32
34
36
38

The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane with the Y-axis the axis of
symmetry.
The element cannot have a zero length.
Zero thickness elements, or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner, are not
deformation.
SHELL209

For nonlinear applications, this element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme
(NROPT,FULL,ON).

ANSYS Professional.
14.205.SHELL209 - 3-Node Axisymmetric Shell
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Stiffness and Stress Stiffness Equation1219, Equation1220,

Matrix; and Thermal and
and Equation1224
Newton-Raphson Load
Vectors
Along-the-length:2
Thru-the-thickness:
1,3,5,7,or9perlayer
Mass Matrix and Pressure

Load Vector
Along-the-length:3
Thru-the-thickness:
1,3,5,7,or9perlayer
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Distribution
Linear along length and linear thru thickness
Linear along length and constant thru thickness
Linear along length
References: Ahmad([1]), Cook([5])

evaluations.

Normals to the centerline are assumed to remain straight after deformation, but not necessarily normal
to the centerline.
SHELL281
SHELL281
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS


SHELL281 is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately-thick shell structures. The element has eight nodes
with six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the x, y, and z axes, and rotations about the x,
y, and z-axes. (When using the membrane option, the element has translational degrees of freedom
only.)
SHELL281 is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change in
shell thickness is accounted for in nonlinear analyses. The element accounts for follower (load stiffness)
effects of distributed pressures.
SHELL281 may be used for layered applications for modeling composite shells or sandwich construction.
The accuracy in modeling composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory
(usually referred to as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
The element formulation is based on logarithmic strain and true stress measures. The element
kinematics allow for finite membrane strains (stretching). However, the curvature changes within a time
increment are assumed to be small.
SHELL281 Input Data

The following figure shows the geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this
element. The element is defined by shell section information and by eight nodes (I, J, K, L, M, N, O and
P).
Midside nodes may not be removed from this element. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
A triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O.
xo = Element x-axis if element orientation (ESYS) is not provided.
SHELL281
x = Element x-axis if element orientation is provided.

Single-Layer Definition
To define the thickness (and other information), use section definition, as follows:
SECTYPE,,SHELL
SECDATA,THICKNESS , ...
A single-layer shell section definition provides flexible options. For example, you can specify the number
of integration points used and the material orientation.
Multilayer Definition
The shell section commands allow for layered shell definition. Options are available for specifying the
thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness of the layers.
each layer when using section input. When only one, the point is always located midway between the
top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points, two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces
respectively and the remaining points are distributed at equal distances between the two points. The
default number of integration points for each layer is three; however, when a single layer is defined and
plasticity is present, the number of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during solution.
The following additional capabilities are available when defining shell layers:
SHELL181 accepts the preintegrated shell section type (SECTYPE,,GENS).
When the element is associated with the GENS section type, thickness or material definitions are
not required.
You can use the function tool to define thickness as a function of global/local coordinates or node
numbers (SECFUNCTION).
You can specify offsets (SECOFFSET).
A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file
(SECTYPE,,SHELL,FIBERSIM).
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the four in-plane integration points:
Where element geometry {x} is given as follows:
(s,r) = two isoparametric element coordinates

hI (s,r) = shape functions associated with eight element nodes (see Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details)
{x} i = global coordinates of eight element nodes
For undistorted elements, the default orientation is the same as described in Coordinate Systems (the
first surface direction is aligned with the IJ side).
SHELL281
The first surface direction S1 can be rotated by angle (in degrees) for the layer via the SECDATA
command. For an element, you can specify a single value of orientation in the plane of the element.
Layer-wise orientation is supported.
You can also define element orientation via the ESYS command. For more information, see Coordinate
Systems.
The element supports degeneration into a triangular form. For better accuracy, however, ANSYS, Inc.
recommends quadrilateral shaped elements. The triangle form is generally more robust when using the
membrane option with large deflections.
To evaluate stresses and strains on exterior surfaces, use KEYOPT(1) = 2. When used as overlaid
elements on the faces of 3-D elements, this option is similar to the surface stress option (described in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ), but is more general and
applicable to nonlinear analysis. The element used with this option does not provide any stiffness, mass,
or load contributions. This option should only be used in single-layer shells. Irrespective of other
settings, SHELL281 provides stress and strain output at the four in-plane integration points of the layer.
SHELL281uses a penalty method to relate the independent rotational degrees of freedom about the
normal (to the shell surface) with the in-plane components of displacements. The program chooses an
appropriate penalty stiffness by default. A drill stiffness factor can be specified via the SECCONTROLS
command.
must be multiplied by the shell thickness.
and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF.
If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and if exactly NL+1
temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last
temperature is used for the four top corner temperatures of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if
exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four corners of each layer. That is,
T1 is used for T1, T2, T3, and T4; T2 (as input) is used for T5, T6, T7, and T8, etc. For any other input
SHELL281 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness of the
element is a 2x2 matrix as shown below:
To define transverse shear stiffness values, use the SECCONTROLS command .

For a single-layer shell with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are:
In the above matrix, k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = thickness of the shell.
Only isotropic, anisotropic, and orthotropic linear elastic properties can be input for elasticity. The von
Mises isotropic hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BISO (bilinear isotropic hardening),
MISO (multilinear isotropic hardening), and NLISO (nonlinear isotropic hardening) options. The kinematic
hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BKIN (bilinear kinematic hardening), MKIN and KINH
(multilinear kinematic hardening), and CHABOCHE (nonlinear kinematic hardening). Invoking plasticity
assumes that the elastic properties are isotropic (that is, if orthotropic elasticity is used with plasticity,
SHELL281
ANSYS assumes the isotropic elastic modulus = EX and Poisson's ratio = NUXY).
Hyperelastic material properties (2, 3, 5, or 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin material model, Neo-Hookean
model, Polynomial form model, Arruda-Boyce model, and user-defined model) can be used with this
element. Poisson's ratio is used to specify the compressibility of the material. If less than 0, Poisson's
ratio is set to 0; if greater than or equal to 0.5, Poisson's ratio is set to 0.5 (fully incompressible).
Both isotropic and orthotropic thermal expansion coefficients can be input using MP,ALPX. When used
with hyperelasticity, isotropic expansion is assumed.
Issue the BETAD command to specify the global value of damping. If MP,DAMP is defined for the
the value from the BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to specify the global value of
number of the layer, it is used instead of either the global or element value.
SHELL281 uses an advanced shell formulation that accurately incorporates initial curvature effects. The
calculation for effective shell curvature change accounts for both shell-membrane and thickness strains.
The new formulation generally offers improved accuracy in curved shell structure simulations, especially
when thickness strain is significant or the material anisotropy in the thickness direction cannot be
ignored.
KEYOPT(8) = 2 is used to store midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell
elements. If you use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the
TOP and BOTTOM results. Use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results)
for those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate; examples include
KEYOPT(9) = 1 is used to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ
Specify DAMP only once for the element (use MAT command to assign material property set).
REFT may be provided once for the element, or may be assigned on a per layer basis. See the
discussion in "SHELL281 Input Summary" for more details.
Surface Loads
SHELL281
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +N direction),
face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -N direction),
Body Loads
Temperatures--
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 (Bending and membrane stiffness):
T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of layer 1), T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for
between next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1) maximum).
Hence, for one-layer elements, eight temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 (Membrane stiffness only):
T1, T2, T3, T4 for layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 for layer 2, similarly for all layers (4*NL maximum).
Hence, for one-layer elements, four temperatures are used.
Special Features
Elasticity (ANEL, ELASTIC)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Section definition for layered shells and preintegrated shell sections for input of homogenous
section stiffnesses
Linear perturbation
Applications for details about the material models.
See Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and the documentation for the ETCONTROL
command for more information about selecting element technologies.
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0--
Bending and membrane stiffness (default)
1--
Membrane stiffness only
SHELL281
2--
Stress/strain evaluation only
KEYOPT(8)
0--
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multi-layer elements) (default)
1--
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multi-layer elements). (The volume of data
may be considerable.)
2--
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single- and multi-layer
elements
KEYOPT(9)
User thickness option:
0--
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default)
1--
subroutines

command. Interlaminar shear stress is available as SYZ and SXZ evaluated at the layer interfaces.
KEYOPT(8) must be set to either 1 or 2 to output these stresses in the POST1 postprocessor. A general
description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to
review results.
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear forces Q13, Q23 are available only
in resultant form: that is, use SMISC,7 (or 8). Likewise, the transverse shear strains, 13 and 23 , are
constant through the thickness and are only available as SMISC items (SMISC,15 and SMISC,16,
respectively).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22, M12) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default,
SHELL281
ANSYS adopts the shell midplane as the reference plane. To offset the reference plane to any other
specified location, issue the SECOFFSET command. When there is a nonzero offset (L) from the
reference plane to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane (
recovered from stress resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
) can be
output processing tools; therefore, ANSYS suggests issuing the OUTRES command to ensure that the
required results are stored in the database.

available.
Name
Definition
SHELL281
EL
NODES
MAT
THICK
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
LOC
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22, M12
Q13, Q23
11 , 22 , 12

Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Average thickness
Volume
J,I; P4 at K,J; P5 at L,K; P6 at I,L
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8
between layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers,
ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1)
maximum)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Thermal strains
EPCR)
Plastic work
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Membrane strains
Y
8
8
Y
k11 , k22 , k12

13 , 23
Curvatures
Transverse shear strains
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM

State variables
5
6
Y
Y
Y
SHELL281
ILANG
Sm: 11, 22, 12
Sb: 11, 22, 12
Sp: 11, 22, 12
St: 13, 23

Membrane stresses
Bending stresses
Peak stresses
Y
Y
Y
Y
material.
8. Not available if the membrane element option is used (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
Table281.2:SHELL281 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
Table281.2:SHELL281 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Output
Quantity Name
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22

E
I
J
K
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
5
L
-
SHELL281
M12
Q13
Q23
11
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
6
7
8
9
22
SMISC
10
12
SMISC
11
k11
SMISC
12
k22
SMISC
13
k12
SMISC
14
13
SMISC
15
23
SMISC
16
THICK
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Sm: 11
Sm: 22
Sm: 12
Sb: 11
Sb: 22
Sb: 12
Sp: 11 (at
bottom)
Sp: 22 (at
bottom)
Sp: 12 (at
bottom)
Sp: 11 (at
top)
Sp: 22 (at
top)
Sp: 12 (at
top)
St: 13
St: 23
17
shell
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
shell
Output
18
22
27
-
19
23
26
29
20
24
21
25
-
28
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
32
18
22
27
32
-
19
23
26
29
-
20
24
28
31
-
30
33
21
25
30
33
-
SMISC
41
shell
SMISC
42
shell
SMISC
43
shell
SMISC
44
shell
SMISC
45
SMISC
SMISC
46
47
SHELL281
Quantity
Name
Item
Bottom of Layer i
ILSXZ
SMISC
8 * (i - 1) + 51
ILSYZ
SMISC
8 * (i - 1) + 53
ILSUM
SMISC
8 * (i - 1) + 55
ILANG
SMISC
8 * (i - 1) + 57
Top of Layer
NL
8 * (NL - 1) +
52
8 * (NL - 1) +
54
8 * (NL - 1) +
56
8 * (NL - 1) +
58

ANSYS recommends against using this element in triangular form, except as a filler element. Avoid
triangular form especially in areas with high stress gradients.
Zero-area elements are not allowed. (Zero-area elements occur most often whenever the elements
are numbered improperly.)
When the element is associated with preintegrated shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS), additional
restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections.
deformation.
the generalized section forces and strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy
The layer orientation angle has no effect if the material of the layer is hyperelastic.
Before using this element in a simulation containing curved thick shell structures with unbalanced
laminate construction or shell offsets, validate the usage via full 3-D modeling with a solid element
in a simpler representative model. This element may underestimate the curved thick shell stiffness,
particularly when the offset is large and the structure is under torsional load.
The through-thickness stress, SZ, is always zero.
This element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (NROPT,FULL,ON).
SHELL281
If a shell section has only one layer and the number of section integration points is equal to one,
or if KEYOPT(1) = 1, then the shell has no bending stiffness, a condition that can result in solver
and convergence problems.

ANSYS Professional.
SOLSH190
SOLSH190
3-D 8-Node Structural Solid Shell
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLSH190 Element Description

SOLSH190 is used for simulating shell structures with a wide range of thickness (from thin to moderately
thick). The element possesses the continuum solid element topology and features eight-node
connectivity with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Thus, connecting SOLSH190 with other continuum elements requires no extra efforts. A degenerate
prism option is available, but should only be used as filler elements in mesh generation. The element
has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It
also has mixed u-P formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible
elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials. The element formulation is based
on logarithmic strain and true stress measures.
You can use SOLSH190 for layered applications such as modeling laminated shells or sandwich
construction. The layered section definition is given by section (SECxxx ) commands. Accuracy in
modeling composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory (also known as
Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
See SOLSH190 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
Figure190.1SOLSH190 Geometry

SOLSH190 Input Data

190.1. The element is defined by eight nodes. The element coordinate system follows the shell
convention where the z axis is normal to the surface of the shell. The node ordering must follow the
convention that the I-J-K-L and M-N-O-P element faces represent the bottom and top shell surfaces,
respectively. You can change the orientation within the plane of the layers via the ESYS command as
you would for shell elements (as described in Coordinate Systems). To achieve the correct nodal
ordering for a volume mapped (hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify
the desired volume orientation before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the
EORIENT command after automatic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation
of another element, or to be as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_SOLSH190.html[28/04/2013 08:41:44 p.m.]
SOLSH190
You can associate SOLSH190 with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite specifications
(including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness
of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx ) commands. You can use the shell section
commands even with a single-layered SOLSH190 element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses
used for element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent with the
thickness between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file.
SOLSH190 does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element and is shown as xo in Figure 190.1. The
axis can be defined as shown:
where:
{x} I,
{x} J ,
...,
{x} P
= global nodal coordinates
You can reorient the default first surface direction S1 in the element reference plane (see Figure 190.1)
via the ESYS command. You can further rotate S1 by angle THETA (in degrees) for each layer via the
SECDATA command to create layer-wise coordinate systems. See Coordinate Systems for details.
element.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLSH190 adopts an element-wise temperature pattern and requires only
eight temperatures for the eight element nodes. Unspecified nodal temperatures default to the assigned
uniform temperature (TUNIF). ANSYS computes all layer interface temperatures by interpolating nodal
temperatures T1 ~ T8.
ending with temperatures at the top layer NL. If you input exactly NL + 1 temperatures, one
You can use the MP command to define the isotropic or orthotropic elastic material properties and the
TB,ANEL command to define anisotropic elastic material properties. Other material properties include
density, damping ratios, and coefficients of thermal expansion. You may also use the TB command to
define nonlinear material behavior such as plasticity, hyperelasticity, viscoelasticity, creep, and
SOLSH190
viscoplasticity.
KEYOPT(2) = 1 activates the internal strain enhancements to the element transverse-shear strains. With
this option, the element is capable of quadratic transverse-shear strain distributions through the entire
thickness of the element.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using u-P mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed
"SOLSH190 Input Summary" contains a summary of element input. For a general description of element
input, see Element Input.
SOLSH190 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Element-wise pattern (no element body load command issued):T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7,
T8 for 8 element nodes. Temperatures at layer interface corners are computed by
interpolating nodal temperatures.
Layer-wise pattern (element body load command issued): T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of
layer 1), T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for temperatures between
subsequent layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (4 * (NL + 1) maximum).
For a one-layer element, therefore, 8 temperatures are used.
Special Features
SOLSH190

Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
APDL and Mechanical Applications for details about the material models.
KEYOPT(2)
Enhanced transverse-shear strains:
0--
No enhanced transverse-shear strains (default).
1--
Include enhanced transverse-shear strains.
KEYOPT(6)
0--
Use pure displacement formulation (default).
1--
Use mixed u-P formulation.
KEYOPT(8)
0--
For multilayer elements, store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (default).
1--
For multilayer elements, store data for top and bottom for all layers. (Before using this
option, be aware that the amount of data involved can be very large.)
SOLSH190 Element Technology

SOLSH190 employs incompatible modes to enhance the accuracy in in-plane bending situations. The
satisfaction of the in-plane patch test is ensured. A separate set of incompatible modes is adopted to
SOLSH190
overcome the thickness locking in bending dominant problems. The incompatible modes introduce seven
internal DOFs that are inaccessible to users and condensed out at the element level.
SOLSH190 utilizes a suite of special kinematic formulations to avoid locking when the shell thickness
becomes extremely small. However, due to its shell-like behavior, SOLSH190 fails to pass the patch test
if the element is distorted in the thickness direction.
SOLSH190 is fully compatible with 3-D constitutive relations. Compared to classical shell elements that
are based on plane stress assumptions, SOLSH190 usually gives more accurate predictions when the
shell is thick.
SOLSH190 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table190.1:SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 190.2. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more
information.
Figure190.2SOLSH190 Stress Output

available.
Table190.1SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions
SOLSH190
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP

S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
XZ
EPTO:EQV
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:HPRES
SEND:ELASTIC,
PLASTIC, CREEP
N11, N22, N12
M11, M22, M12
Q13, Q23
LOCI:X, Y, Z
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
Sm: 11, 22, 12
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
(NL + 1) maximum)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Thermal strains
Y
Y

Plastic strains [6]
Y
1

Creep strains
1
1

1
-

1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1

Transverse-shear forces (per unit length)
State variables
Membrane stresses
Y
Y
Y
3
4
7
7
7
7
SOLSH190
Sb: 11, 22, 12

Sp: 11, 22, 12
St: 13, 23
Bending stresses
Peak stresses
Averaged transverse-shear stresses
Y
Y
Y

the user (MP,NUXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
Table190.2:SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence Number in the Basic
following notation is used in Table190.2:SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table190.1:SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions
Item
I,J,...,P
Table190.2SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity
Name
Item

I
J
K
L
M
N
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
THICK
N11
N22
N12
M11
M22
M12
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
2
5
18
-
1
6
9
-
4
10
13
-
3
14
17
-
8
19
21
-
7
12
22
-
O
11
16
23
-
P
15
20
24
-
SOLSH190
Q13
Q23
Sm: 11
Sm: 22
Sm: 12
Sb: 11
Sb: 22
Sb: 12
Sp: 11 (at
bottom face)
Sp: 22 (at
bottom face)
Sp: 12 (at
bottom face)
Sp: 11 (at top
face)
Sp: 22 (at top
face)
Sp: 12 (at top
face)
St: 13
St: 23
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
SMISC
43
SMISC
44
SMISC
45
SMISC
46
SMISC
47
SMISC
SMISC
48
49
Output
Quantity
Name
Item
ILSXZ
ILSYZ
ILSUM
ILANG
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

Bottom of Layer i
Top of Layer NL
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(i
(i
(i
(i
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
51
53
55
57
8
8
8
8
*
*
*
*
(NL
(NL
(NL
(NL
1)
1)
1)
1)
+
+
+
+
52
54
56
58
SOLSH190 Assumptions and Restrictions

and L and duplicate O and P node numbers (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements).
If you use the mixed u-P formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported.
You must use the sparse solver (default).
Using both hyperelastic and elastoplastic layers in the same element can produce unpredictable
results and is not recommended.
SOLSH190 Product Restrictions

SOLSH190

INTER192
INTER192
2-D 4-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
INTER192 Element Description

INTER192 is a 2-D four-node linear interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling . When
used with 2-D linear structural elements (such as PLANE182), INTER192 simulates gasket joints. The
element can be used either as a plane element (plane stress or plane strain) or as an axisymmetric
element. It is defined by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x and y directions.
See Gasket Material and INTER192 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on the gasket
capability in ANSYS.
Figure192.1INTER192 Geometry
INTER192 Input Data

The element geometry, node locations, connectivity, and the nodal coordinate system are shown in
Figure 192.1. The element geometry is defined by 4 nodes, which form bottom and top lines of the
element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L. The
element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L. This element has 2 integration points. The Gauss integration
scheme is used for the numerical integration.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I), defaults
to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input pattern,
unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3) and on
a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
By default, the element is capable of both through-thickness and transverse shear deformations
(KEYOPT(2) = 1). The inclusion of transverse shear stiffness is generally required when the interfaces
between the gasket and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are
modeled with a matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using
through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between
the gasket and the mating parts.
The following table summarizes the element input. See the Element Input section in the Element
Reference for a general description of element input.
INTER192 Input Summary
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_INTER192.html[28/04/2013 08:41:59 p.m.]
INTER192
Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Plane stress with thickness, if KEYOPT(3) = 3
Material Properties
DAMP, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Gasket material associated with TB,GASKET [1]
Linear perturbation
1. See Gasket Material in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for details on the material model.
KEYOPT(2)
Element deformation:
0 --
Through-thickness deformation only
1 --
Through-thickness and transverse shear deformation (default)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
Plane stress with thickness (THK) real constant input
INTER192
INTER192 Output Data

Nodal items such as nodal displacements are included in the overall nodal solution.
Element items such as stresses and closures are element outputs as shown in
Table192.1:INTER192 Element Output Definitions.
The output directions for element items are parallel to the local element coordinate system based on the
element midplane as illustrated in Figure 192.2. See Gasket Material in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details.
ways to review results.
Figure192.2INTER192 Stress Output

available.
Table192.1INTER192 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
TEMP
GKS:X, (XY)
GKD:X, (XY)
GKDI:X, (XY)
GKTH:X, (XY)
Definition
Element number
Node connectivity - I, J, K, L
Material number
Stress (also gasket pressure)
Total closure
Total inelastic closure
Thermal closure
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
INTER192 Assumptions and Restrictions

This element is not supported for initial stress.
Pressure as a type of surface load on element faces is not supported by this element.
INTER192
This element is based on the local coordinate system. ESYS is not permitted.
This element is only available for static analyses.
INTER192 Product Restrictions

There are no product-specific restrictions on this element.
4.4.Gasket Material
Gasket joints are essential components in most of structural assemblies. Gaskets as sealing components
between structural components are usually very thin and made of many materials, such as steel, rubber
and composites. From a mechanics point of view, gaskets act to transfer the force between mating
components. The gasket material is usually under compression. The material under compression exhibits
high nonlinearity. The gasket material also shows quite complicated unloading behavior. The primary
deformation of a gasket is usually confined to 1 direction, that is through-thickness. The stiffness
contribution from membrane (in-plane) and transverse shear are much smaller, and are neglected.
The table option GASKET allows gasket joints to be simulated with the interface elements, in which the
through-thickness deformation is decoupled from the in-plane deformation, see INTER192 - 2-D 4-Node
Gasket, INTER193 - 2-D 6-Node Gasket, INTER194 - 3-D 16-Node Gasket, and INTER195 - 3-D 8-Node
Gasket for detailed description of interface elements. The user can directly input the experimentally
measured complex pressure-closure curve (compression curve) and several unloading pressure-closure
curves for characterizing the through thickness deformation of gasket material.
Figure 4.24 shows the experimental pressure vs. closure (relative displacement of top and bottom gasket
surfaces) data for a graphite composite gasket material. The sample was unloaded and reloaded 5 times
along the loading path and then unloaded at the end of the test to determine the unloading stiffness of
the material.
Figure4.24Pressure vs. Deflection Behavior of a Gasket Material
4.4.1.Stress and Deformation

The gasket pressure and deformation are based on the local element coordinate systems. The gasket
pressure is actually the stress normal to the gasket element midsurface in the gasket layer. Gasket
deformation is characterized by the closure of top and bottom surfaces of gasket elements, and is
defined as:
(4
182)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_gasket.html[28/04/2013 08:42:09 p.m.]
Where, uTOP and uBOTTOM are the displacement of top and bottom surfaces of interface elements in the
local element coordinate system based on the mid-plane of element.
The input of material data of a gasket material is specified by the command (TB,GASKET). The input of
material data considers of 2 main parts: general parameters and pressure closure behaviors. The general
parameters defines initial gasket gap, the stable stiffness for numerical stabilization, and the stress cap
for gasket in tension. The pressure closure behavior includes gasket compression (loading) and tension
data (unloading).
The GASKET option has followings sub-options:
Sub-option
PARA
COMP
LUNL
NUNL
Description
Define
Define
Define
Define
gasket
gasket
gasket
gasket
material general parameters

compression data
linear unloading data
nonlinear unloading data
A gasket material can have several options at the same time. When no unloading curves are defined, the
material behavior follows the compression curve while it is unloaded.
4.4.3.Thermal Deformation
The thermal deformation is taken into account by using an additive decomposition in the total
deformation, d, as:
(4
183)
where:
d = relative total deformation between top and bottom surfaces of the interface element
di = relative deformation between top and bottom surfaces causing by the applying stress, this can be
also defined as mechanical deformation
dth = relative thermal deformation between top and bottom surfaces due to free thermal expansion
do = initial gap of the element and is defined by sub-option PARA
The thermal deformation causing by free thermal expansion is defined as:
(4
184)
where:
= coefficient of thermal expansion (input as ALPX on MP command)
T = temperature change in the current load step
h = thickness of layer at the integration point where thermal deformation is of interest
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_thry/thy_gasket.html[28/04/2013 08:42:09 p.m.]
14.188.INTER192 - 2-D 4-Node Gasket
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Thermal Load Vector
Shape Functions
Linear in x and y directions
Load Type
Element temperature
Nodal temperature
Integration Points
2
Same as stiffness
matrix
Distribution
Based on element shape function, constant through the direction
perpendicular to element plane

The theory for this element is described in INTER194 - 3-D 16-Node Gasket.
INTER193
INTER193
2-D 6-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER193 is a 2-D 6-node quadratic interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling. When
used in conjunction with 2-D quadratic structural elements (such as PLANE183), INTER193 is used to
simulate gasket joints. The element can be used either as a plane element (plane stress or plane strain)
or as an axisymmetric element. It is defined by six nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node:
translations in the nodal x and y directions.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on the gasket
capability in ANSYS.
INTER193 Input Data

Figure 193.1. The element geometry is defined by 6 nodes, which form bottom and top lines of the
element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J, M; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L, O. The
element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, O. This element has 2 integration points. Dropping mid
side nodes M or O is not permitted.
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3) and on
a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
By default, the element adopts a full-integration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 2), and is capable of both
through-thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEYOPT(2) = 1). The full-integration scheme and
the inclusion of transverse shear stiffness are generally required when the interfaces between the gasket
and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled with a
matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using the reduced
integration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 0) and through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to
achieve better efficiency and to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the gasket and the
mating parts.
The next table summarizes the element input. See Element Input in the Element Reference for a general
INTER193

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, O
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Plane stress with thickness, if KEYOPT(3) = 3
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O)
Special Features
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
INTER193
Plane stress with thickness (THK) real constant input

KEYOPT(4)
Element technology:
0 --
2 --
Full integration (default)


available.
Name
EL
NODES
Definition
Element number
Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, O
O
-
R
Y
Y
INTER193
MAT
TEMP
GKS:X, (XY)
GKD:X, (XY)
GKDI:X, (XY)
GKTH:X, (XY)
Material number
Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O)
Total closure
Thermal closure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y


Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Thermal Load Vector
Shape Functions
Linear in x, quadratic in y direction
Load Type
Element temperature
Nodal temperature
Integration Points
2
Same as stiffness
matrix
Distribution

INTER194
INTER194
3-D 16-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER194 is a 3-D 16-node quadratic interface element. When used with 3-D quadratic structural
elements (SOLID96, SOLID186, and SOLID187), INTER194 simulates gasket joints. It is defined by 16
nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details about gasket
simulation.
INTER194 Input Data

Figure 194.1. The element geometry is defined by 16 nodes, which form bottom and top surfaces of the
element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L, Q, R, S, T; and the top surface is defined by
nodes, M, N, O, P, U, V, W, X. As shown, the element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q,
R, S, T, U, V, W, X. The element is degenerated to a wedge (prism) element, when K=L=S and
O=P=W, as shown in Figure 194.2.
Figure194.2INTER194 3-D 16-Node Degenerated Quadratic Interface
For the degenerated element, 3 integration points are used for numerical integration. The degenerated
element can be used in conjunction with 10-node solid tetrahedral elements (such as SOLID187).
Dropping any or some of midside nodes, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X is not permitted.
INTER194
By default, the element adopts a full-integration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 2) and is capable of both
through-thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEYOPT(2) =1). The full-integration scheme and
the inclusion of transverse shear stiffness are generally required when the interfaces between the gasket
and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled with a
matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS, Inc. recommends using the reducedintegration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 0) and through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to
achieve better efficiency and to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the gasket and the
mating parts.
The following table summarizes the element input. See Element Input in the Element Reference for a
general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
Special Features
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
INTER194
Element technology:
0 --
2 --
Full integration (default)


available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
Definition
Element number
Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U,
V, W, X
Material number
Y
Y
INTER194
TEMP
GKS:X, (XY, XZ)
GKD:X, (XY, XZ)
GKDI:X, (XY, XZ)
GKTH:X, (XY, XZ)

T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
Total closure
Thermal closure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y


Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Thermal Load Vector
Shape Functions
Linear in x, quadratic in y and z directions
Load Type
Element temperature
Nodal temperature
Integration Points
2x2
Same as stiffness
matrix
Distribution
14.190.1.Element Technology
The element is designed specially for simulation of gasket joints, where the primary deformation is
confined to the gasket through-thickness direction. The through-thickness deformation of gasket is
decoupled from the other deformations and the membrane (in-plane) stiffness contribution is neglected.
The element offers a direct means to quantify the through-thickness behavior of the gasket joints. The
pressure-deformation behavior obtained from experimental measurement can be applied to the gasket
material. See Gasket Material for detailed description of gasket material options.
The element is composed of bottom and top surfaces. An element midplane is created by averaging the
coordinates of node pairs from the bottom and top surfaces of the elements. The numerical integration
of interface elements is performed in the element midplane. The element formulation is based on a
corotational procedure. The virtual work in an element is written as:
(14
430)
where:
t = traction force across the element
d = closure across the element
Sint = midplane of the interface surfaces
The integration is performed in the corotational equilibrium configuration and the Gauss integration
procedure is used.
The relative deformation between top and bottom surfaces is defined as:
(14
431)
where, uTOP and uBOTTOM are the displacement of top and bottom surfaces of interface elements in the
local element coordinate system based on the midplane of element.
The thickness direction is defined as the normal direction of the mid plane of the element at the
integration point.
INTER195
INTER195
3-D 8-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER195 is a 3-D 8-node linear interface element. When used with 3-D linear structural elements
(SOLID62, SOLID65, SOLID185, SOLSH190, SOLID272, SOLID273, and SOLID285), INTER195 simulates
gasket joints. It is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in
the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on this ANSYS
capability.
INTER195 Input Data

Figure 195.1. The element geometry is defined by 8 nodes, which form bottom and top surfaces of the
element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L; and the top surface is defined by nodes, M,
N, O, P. As shown, the element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P.
By default, the element is capable of both through-thickness and transverse shear deformations
(KEYOPT(2) = 1). The inclusion of transverse shear stiffness is generally required when the interfaces
between the gasket and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are
modeled with a matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using
through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between
the gasket and the mating parts.
The next table summarizes the element input. See Element Input in the Element Reference for a general

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
INTER195
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Special Features
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --

INTER195

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
TEMP
GKS:X, (XY, XZ)
GKD:X, (XY, XZ)
GKDI:X, (XY, XZ)
GKTH:X, (XY, XZ)
Definition
Element number
Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Material number
T(P)
Total closure
Thermal closure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y


Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Thermal Load Vector
Shape Functions
Linear in x, bilinear in y and z directions
Load Type
Element temperature
Nodal temperature
Integration Points
2x2
Same as stiffness
matrix
Distribution

TARGE169
TARGE169
2-D Target Segment
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

TARGE169 Element Description

TARGE169 is used to represent various 2-D "target" surfaces for the associated contact elements
(CONTA171, CONTA172, and CONTA175). The contact elements themselves overlay the solid elements
describing the boundary of a deformable body and are potentially in contact with the target surface,
defined by TARGE169. This target surface is discretized by a set of target segment elements
(TARGE169) and is paired with its associated contact surface via a shared real constant set. You can
impose any translational or rotational displacement, temperature, voltage, and magnetic potential on the
target segment element. You can also impose forces and moments on target elements. See TARGE169
this element. To represent 3-D target surfaces, use TARGE170, a 3-D target segment element. For rigid
targets, these elements can easily model complex target shapes. For flexible targets, these elements will
overlay the solid elements describing the boundary of the deformable target body.
Figure169.1TARGE169 Geometry
TARGE169 Input Data

The target surface is modeled through a set of target segments, typically, several target segments
comprise one target surface.
The target surface can either be rigid or deformable. For modeling rigid-flexible contact, the rigid surface
must be represented by a target surface. For flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces
must be overlayed by a target surface. See the Contact Technology Guide for more information about
designating contact and target surfaces.
The target and associated contact surfaces are identified by a shared real constant set. This real
constant set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
Each target surface can be associated with only one contact surface, and vice-versa. However, several
contact elements could make up the contact surface and thus come in contact with the same target
surface. Likewise, several target elements could make up the target surface and thus come in contact
with the same contact surface. For either the target or contact surfaces, you can put many elements in a
single target or contact surface, or you can localize the contact and target surfaces by splitting the large
surfaces into smaller target and contact surfaces, each of which contain fewer elements.
If one contact surface may contact more than one target surface, you must define duplicate contact
surfaces that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets, that is, have separate real
constant set numbers.
For any target surface definition, the node ordering of the target segment element is critical for proper
detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered so that, for a 2-D surface, the associated contact
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_TARGE169.html[28/04/2013 08:43:57 p.m.]
TARGE169
elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175) must lie to the right of the target surface when
moving from target node I to target node J. For a rigid 2-D complete circle, contact must occur on the
outside of the circle; internal contacting is not allowed.
Considerations for Rigid Targets

Each target segment is a single element with a specific shape, or segment type. The segment types are
defined by one, two, or three nodes and a target shape code, TSHAP, and are described in
Table169.1:TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes. The TSHAP command
indicates the geometry (shape) of the element. The segment dimensions are defined by a real constant
(R1), and the segment location is determined by the nodes. ANSYS supports seven 2-D segment types;
see Table169.1:TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes.
Table169.1TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes
TSHAP
Segment Type
LINE
Straight line
ARC
Arc, clockwise
CARC
Arc, counterclockwise
PARA
Parabola
CIRC
Circle
PILO
Pilot node
POINT
Point [3]
Node 3
(DOF)
R2
Node1
(DOF)
Node 2
(DOF) [1]
1st corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
1st corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
1st corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
1st corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
Circle center
pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
1st point (UX,
UY, ROTZ)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
1st point (UX,
UY)
2nd corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
2nd corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
2nd corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
2nd corner pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
None
None
None
None
Circle center
pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
Circle center
pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
Midside pt
(UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Radius
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
R1[2]
1. The DOF available depends on the setting of KEYOPT(1) for the associated contact element. For
more information, see the element documentation for CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175.
2. When creating a circle via direct generation, define the real constant R1 before creating the
element.
3. Rigid surface node. This segment type is only used to apply boundary conditions to rigid target
surfaces.
Figure169.2TARGE169 2-D Segment Types
TARGE169
For simple rigid target surfaces, you can define the target segment elements individually by direct
generation. You must first specify the SHAPE argument for the TSHAP command. When creating circles
through direct generation, you must also define the real constant R1 before creating the element. Real
constant R1 (see Table169.1:TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes) defines
the radius of the target circle.
For general 2-D rigid surfaces, target segment elements can be defined by line meshing (LMESH). You
can also use keypoint meshing (KMESH) to generate the pilot node.
If the TARGE169 elements will be created via automatic meshing (LMESH or KMESH), then the TSHAP
command is ignored and ANSYS chooses the correct shape automatically.
For rigid-to-flexible contact, by default, ANSYS automatically fixes the structural degree of freedom for
rigid target nodes if they aren't explicitly constrained (KEYOPT(2) = 0). If you wish, you can override the
automatic boundary condition settings by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements. For flexible-toflexible contact, no special boundary conditions treatment is performed, and the KEYOPT(2) = 0 setting
should be used.
For each rigid-flexible contact pair, you can assign only one pilot node to an entire rigid target surface
(or none if it is not needed). The pilot node, unlike the other segment types, is used to define the
degrees of freedom for the entire target surface. This node can be any of the target surface nodes, but
it does not have to be. All possible rigid motions of the target surface will be a combination of a
translation and a rotation around the pilot node. The pilot node provides a convenient and powerful way
to assign boundary conditions such as rotations, translations, moments, temperature, voltage, and
magnetic potential on an entire rigid target surface. By default (KEYOPT(2) = 0), you can assign the
boundary conditions only to the pilot node, eliminating the need to assign boundary conditions to
individual target nodes, thus reducing the chance of errors. ANSYS will also automatically fix the
structural degrees of freedom on the pilot node if they aren't explicitly constrained.
By setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements, you can apply boundary conditions on any rigid
target nodes rather than only on the pilot node. It is your responsibility to make sure the rigid target
surface is not under-constrained or over-constrained. It is still recommended that you apply all boundary
conditions on the pilot node, even when KEYOPT(2) = 1.
Considerations for Deformable Target Surfaces

For general deformable surfaces, you will normally use the ESURF command to overlay the target
TARGE169
elements on the boundary of the existing mesh. Note that the segment types (TSHAP command) should
not be used for this case.
Considerations for Fluid Penetration Loading

To model fluid penetration loads, use the SFE command to specify the fluid pressure and fluid
penetration starting points. For more information, see Applying Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads in the
Contact Technology Guide .
Considerations for Thermal Contact Analysis

By default, the temperature is set to the value of TUNIF, and if this has no explicit value the
temperature is set to zero. For thermal contact analysis, such as convection and radiation modeling, the
behavior of a thermal contact surface (whether a near-field or free surface) is usually based on the
contact status. Contact status affects the behavior of the contact surface as follows:
If the contact surface is outside the pinball region, its behavior is as a far-field of free surface. In
this instance, convection/radiation occurs with the ambient temperature.
If the contact surface is inside the pinball region, the behavior is as a near-field surface.
However, the thermal contact surface status is ignored if KEYOPT(3) = 1 is set, and the surface is
always treated as a free surface (see CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175 for details).
A summary of the element input is given in "TARGE169 Input Summary". A general description of
TARGE169 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (J and K are not required for all segment types)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP, VOLT, AZ (ROTZ is used for the pilot node only )
Real Constants
R1, R2, [the others are defined through the associated CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175
element]
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to target normal direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear
Birth and death
Fluid pressure penetration load
TARGE169
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
Boundary conditions for rigid target nodes:
0--
Automatically constrained by ANSYS
1--
Specified by user
KEYOPT(3)
Behavior of thermal contact surface
0--
Based on contact status
1--
Treated as free-surface
KEYOPT(4)
DOF set to be constrained on dependent DOF for internally-generated multipoint constraints
(MPCs). This option is used for these situations: solid-solid and shell-shell assemblies; surfacebased constraints that use a single pilot node for the target element; and rigid target surfaces that
use the KEYOPT(2) = 1 setting.
n--
Enter a three digit value that represents the DOF set to be constrained. The first to third
digits represent ROTZ, UY, UX, respectively. The number 1 (one) indicates the DOF is active,
and the number 0 (zero) indicates the DOF is not active. For example, 011 means that UX
and UY will be used in the multipoint constraint. Leading zeros may be omitted; for example,
you can enter 1 to indicate that UX is the only active DOF. If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (which is the
default) or 111, all DOF are constrained.
TARGE169 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is shown in Table169.2:TARGE169 Element Output
Definitions. The following notation is used:
available.
Table169.2TARGE169 Element Output Definitions
Name
Definition
TARGE169
EL
NODES
ITRGET
TSHAP
ISEG
FPRS
Element Number
Nodes I, J, and K
Target surface number (assigned by ANSYS)
Segment shape type
Segment numbering
Actual applied fluid penetration pressure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
1
Y
1. An internal segment number determined by ANSYS. ISEG for the target element has a different
meaning than ISEG reported for the contact element.
You can display or list the actual fluid pressure applied to the target element through several POST1
postprocessing commands, as shown below:
PLESOL,CONT,FPRS
PLNSOL,CONT,FPRS
PRESOL,CONT
PRNSOL,CONT
Note that only the FPRS (fluid penetration pressure) output item is meaningful when the PRESOL and
PRNSOL commands are used for target elements.
Table169.3:TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
command using the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis
notation is used in Table169.3:TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table169.2:TARGE169 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I, J
Table169.3TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity
Name
FPRS
Item
SMISC

E
I
3
J
2
TARGE169 Assumptions and Restrictions

The 2-D segment element must be defined in an X-Y plane.
For each pilot node, ANSYS automatically defines an internal node and an internal constraint
equation. The rotational DOF of the pilot node is connected to the translational DOF of the internal
node by the internal constraint equation. ANSYS recommends against using external constraint
equations or coupling on pilot nodes; if you do, conflicts may occur, yielding incorrect results.
For circular arcs, the third node defines the actual center of the circle and must be defined
accurately when the element is generated and must be moved consistently with the other nodes
TARGE169
during the deformation process. If the third node is not moved consistently with the other nodes,
the arc shape will change with that node's movement. To ensure the correct behavior, apply all
boundary conditions to a pilot node.
For parabolic segments, the third point must lie at the middle of the parabola.
Generally speaking, you should not change the R1 real constant between load steps or during
restart stages; otherwise ANSYS assumes the radius of the circle varies between the load steps.
When using direct generation, the real constant R1 for circles may be defined before the input of
the element nodes. If multiple rigid circles are defined, each having a different radius, they must
be defined by different target surfaces.
For rotation of a rigid body constrained only by a bonded, rigid-flexible contact pair with a pilot
node, use the MPC algorithm or a surface-based constraint as described in "Multipoint Constraints
and Assemblies" in the Contact Technology Guide . Penalty-based algorithms can create undesirable
rotational energies in this situation.
TARGE169 Product Restrictions

CONTA171
CONTA171

CONTA171 Element Description

CONTA171 is used to represent contact and sliding between 2-D "target" surfaces (TARGE169) and a
deformable surface, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 2-D structural and coupled
field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 2-D solid, shell, or beam elements
without midside nodes (such as PLANE13, PLANE55, PLANE182, MATRIX50, and SHELL208). It has the
same geometric characteristics as the solid, shell, or beam element face with which it is connected (see
Figure 171.1). Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements
(TARGE169) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined
friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact
to simulate interface delamination. See CONTA171 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. Other surface-to-surface contact elements
(CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174) are also available.
Figure171.1CONTA171 Geometry
CONTA171 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 171.1. The element is defined by two nodes (the
underlying solid, shell, or beam element has no midside nodes). If the underlying solid, shell, or beam
elements do have midside nodes, use CONTA172. The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the
element. The correct node ordering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact. The
nodes must be ordered such that the target must lie to the right side of the contact element when
moving from the first contact element node to the second contact element node as in Figure 171.1. See
Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating
elements automatically using the ESURF command.
The 2-D contact surface elements are associated with the 2-D target segment elements (TARGE169) via
a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between surfaces with the same real constant
set. For modeling either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be
represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information.
If more than one target surface will make contact with the same boundary of solid elements, you must
define several contact elements that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets (targets
which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one
(targets that share the same real constant numbers).
To model separation of bonded contact with KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, use the TB command with
the CZM label. See "Debonding" in the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
To model proper momentum transfer and energy balance between contact and target surfaces, impact
constraints should be used in transient dynamic analysis. See the description of KEYOPT(7) below and
the contact element discussion in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_CONTA171.html[28/04/2013 08:44:04 p.m.]
CONTA171
To model isotropic friction, use the TB,FRIC,,,,ISO command. You can define a coefficient of friction that
is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity by using
the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC,,,,ISO. See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) for more information.
To implement a user-defined friction model, use the TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER to specify
friction properties and write a USERFRIC subroutine to compute friction forces. See User-Defined Friction
(TB,FRIC,,,,USER) for more information on how to use this feature. See also the Guide to ANSYS User
Programmable Features for a detailed description of the USERFRIC subroutine.
This element supports various 2-D stress states, including plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric
states. The stress state is automatically detected according to the stress state of the underlying element.
However, if the underlying element is a superelement, you must use KEYOPT(3) to specify the stress
state.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTA171 Input Summary". A general description of
element input is given in Element Input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements.
CONTA171 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)
UX, UY, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 2)
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 4)
UX, UY, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 6)
AZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
R1, R2, FKN, FTOLN, ICONT, PINB,
PMAX, PMIN, TAUMAX, CNOF, FKOP, FKT,
COHE, TCC, FHTG, SBCT, RDVF, FWGT,
ECC, FHEG, FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, , PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
See Table171.1:CONTA171 Real Constants for descriptions of the real constants.
Material Properties
MU, EMIS (MP command)
FRIC (TB command; see Contact Friction (TB,FRIC))
CZM (TB command; see Cohesive Zone Materials Used for Debonding in the Contact Technology
Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
loading. On the SFE command use LKEY = 1 to specify the pressure values, and use LKEY = 2 to
specify starting points and penetrating points.
Convection, Face 1 (I-J)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J)
CONTA171
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Isotropic friction; USERFRIC subroutine
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
Presented below is a list of KEYOPTS available for this element. Included are links to sections in
the Contact Technology Guide where more information is available on a particular topic.
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom:
0--
UX, UY
1--
UX, UY, TEMP
2--
TEMP
3--
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
4--
TEMP, VOLT
5--
UX, UY, VOLT
6--
VOLT
7--
AZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
Augmented Lagrangian (default)
1--
Penalty function
CONTA171
2--
Multipoint constraint (MPC); see "Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies" in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information
3--
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent
4--
Pure Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and tangent
KEYOPT(3)
Stress state when superelements are present:
0--
Use with h-elements (no superelements)
1--
Axisymmetric (use with superelements only)
2--
Plane stress/Plane strain (use with superelements only)
3--
Plane stress with thickness input (use with superelements only)
KEYOPT(4)
Location of contact detection point:
0--
On Gauss point (for general cases)
1--
On nodal point - normal from contact surface
2--
On nodal point - normal to target surface
KEYOPT(5)
Note: When using the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach to define surface-based
constraints, use KEYOPT(4) in the following way: set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a
force-distributed constraint, set KEYOPT(4) = 2 for a rigid surface constraint.
See Surface-based Constraints for more information.
CNOF/ICONT Automated adjustment:

0--
No automated adjustment
CONTA171
1--
Close gap with auto CNOF
2--
Reduce penetration with auto CNOF
3--
Close gap/reduce penetration with auto CNOF
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
Contact stiffness variation (used to enhance stiffness updating when KEYOPT(10) > 0):
0--
Use default range for stiffness updating
1--
Make a nominal refinement to the allowable stiffness range
2--
Make an aggressive refinement to the allowable stiffness range
KEYOPT(7)
Element level time incrementation control / impact constraints:
0--
No control
1--
Automatic bisection of increment
2--
Change in contact predictions made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment
3--
Change in contact predictions made to achieve the minimum time/load increment whenever a
change in contact status occurs
4--
Use impact constraints for standard or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0 or 1) in a transient
dynamic analysis with automatic adjustment of time increment
Note: KEYOPT(7) = 2, 3, and 4 include an automatic adjustment of the time
increment. This is activated only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was
issued prior to the solution.
CONTA171
KEYOPT(8)
Asymmetric contact selection:
0--
No action
2--
ANSYS internally selects which asymmetric contact pair is used at the solution stage (used
only when symmetry contact is defined).
KEYOPT(9)
Effect of initial penetration or gap:
0--
1--
Include both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset

Exclude both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset
2--
Include both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset, but with ramped effects
3--
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap)
4--
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap), but with ramped effects
Note: The effects of KEYOPT(9) are dependent on settings for other KEYOPTs. See
the discussion on using KEYOPT(9) in the Contact Technology Guide for more
information.
KEYOPT(10)
Contact stiffness update:
0--
Each load step if FKN is redefined during load step (pair based).
2--
Each iteration based on current mean stress of underlying elements (pair based).
KEYOPT(11)
Beam/Shell thickness effect:
0--
Exclude
1--
Include
CONTA171
KEYOPT(12)
Behavior of contact surface:
0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
Bonded (initial contact)
Note: When KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 is used with the MPC algorithm to model surfacebased constraints, the KEYOPT(12) setting will have an impact on the local
coordinate system of the contact element nodes. See Specifying a Local
Coordinate System in the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
KEYOPT(14)
Behavior of fluid pressure penetration load. KEYOPT(14) is valid only if a fluid pressure penetration
load (SFE,,,PRES) is applied to the contact element:
0--
Fluid pressure penetration load varies during iterations (default)
1--
Fluid pressure penetration load remains constant over the substep
Table171.1CONTA171 Real Constants
No.
1
2
3
Name
R1
R2
FKN
Description
Target circle radius
Superelement thickness
Normal penalty stiffness factor
For more information, see

this section in the Contact
Technology Guide . . .
Defining the Target Surface
Determining Contact Stiffness
and Penetration
CONTA171
FTOLN
Penetration tolerance factor
ICONT
Initial contact closure
PINB
Pinball region

and Penetration
Adjusting Initial Contact
Conditions
Determining Contact Status
and the Pinball Region
or
PMAX
Upper limit of initial allowable penetration
PMIN
Lower limit of initial allowable penetration
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF
Maximum friction stress

Contact surface offset
11
FKOP
12
13
14
15
FKT
COHE
TCC
FHTG
Contact opening stiffness or contact

damping
Tangent penalty stiffness factor
Contact cohesion
Thermal contact conductance
Frictional heating factor
16
17
18
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT
Stefan-Boltzmann constant
Radiation view factor
Heat distribution weighing factor
Defining Influence Range

(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Choosing a Friction Model
Conditions
Selecting Surface Interaction
Models
Modeling Conduction
Modeling Heat Generation
Due to Friction
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Radiation
Due to Friction (thermal)
or
19
ECC
20
FHEG
Electric contact conductance

Joule dissipation weight factor
21
FACT
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP
25
TOLS
27
PPCN
28
FPAT
Heat Generation Due to

Electric Current (electric)
Modeling Surface Interaction

Electric Current
Static/dynamic ratio
Static and Dynamic Friction
Coefficients
Exponential decay coefficient
Coefficients
Allowable elastic slip
Using FKT and SLTO
Maximum allowable tensile contact pressure Chattering Control
Parameters
Selecting Location of Contact

Detection
Target edge extension factor
Pressure penetration criterion
Specifying a Pressure
Penetration Criterion
Fluid penetration acting time
Specifying a Fluid Penetration
Acting Time
CONTA171
29
30
COR
STRM
Coefficient of restitution
Load step number for ramping penetration
Impact Between Rigid Bodies

Conditions
CONTA171 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table171.2:CONTA171 Element Output Definitions
available.
Table171.2:CONTA171 Element Output Definitions gives element output. In the results file, the nodal
results are obtained from its closest integration point.
Table171.2CONTA171 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC
TEMP
LENGTH
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
NX, NY
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J
Element length
AREA
Underlying solid, shell, or beam element number
Current contact statuses
Old contact statuses
Surface normal vector components
Current contacting target element number
Underlying old target number
Current penetration (gap = 0; penetration = positive value)
Current gap (gap = negative value; penetration = 0)
New or current gap at current converged substep (gap =
negative value; penetration = positive value)
Old gap at previously converged substep (gap = negative
value; penetration = positive value)
Initial gap at start of current substep (gap = negative value;
penetration = positive value)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
-
CONTA171
GGAP
CONT:PRES
CONT:SFRIC
KN
KT
MU
CONT:SLIDE
ASLIDE
TOLN
CONT:STOTAL
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
CONT:FPRS
FSTART
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX
CNFY
CONV
RAC
TCC
TEMPS
TEMPT
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
CONT:FLUX
FXNP
CNFH
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
ECURT
Geometric gap at current converged substep (gap = negative

Normal contact pressure
Tangential contact stress
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Current tangent contact stiffness (Force/Length 3 )
Friction coefficient
Y
Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum)
3
Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum)
3
Penetration tolerance
Y
Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+SFRIC**2)
Y
Frictional energy dissipation
6
Elastic slip distance for sticking contact within a substep
Slip rate
Penetration variation
Y
Pinball Region
Total number of contact status changes during substep
Y
Maximum allowable tensile contact pressure
Y
Y
Contacting area
Fluid penetration starting time
Load step time during debonding
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
Energy released due to separation in normal direction - mode I Y
debonding
Energy released due to separation in tangential direction Y
mode II debonding
Contact element force-x component
Contact element force-Y component
Convection coefficient
Y
Radiation coefficient
Y
Conductance coefficient
Y
Temperature at contact point
Y
Temperature at target surface
Y
Heat flux due to convection
Y
Heat flux due to radiation
Y
Heat flux due to conductance
Y
Total heat flux at contact surface
Y
Flux input
Contact element heat flow
Contact current density (Current/Unit Area)
Y
Contact charge density (Charge/Unit Area)
Y
Contact power/area
Y
Current per contact element
-
Current normal contact stiffness (Force/Length 3 )
3
3
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA171
ECHAR
ECC
Charge per contact element

Electric contact conductance (for electric current DOF), or
electric contact capacitance per unit area (for piezoelectric or
electrostatic DOFs)
Voltage on contact nodes
Voltage on associated target
VOLTS
VOLTT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1. The possible values of STAT and OLDST are:

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Open and not near contact

Open but near contact
Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking
2. ANSYS will evaluate model to detect initial conditions.

3. Only accumulates the sliding when contact occurs.
4. Contact element forces are defined in the global Cartesian system.
6. FDDIS = (contact friction stress)*(sliding distance of substep)/(time increment of substep)
Note: If ETABLE is used for the CONT items, the reported data is averaged across the
element.
Note: Contact results (including all element results) are generally not reported for
elements that have a status of open and not near contact (far-field).
Table171.3:CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
notation is used in Table171.3:CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table171.2:CONTA171 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
I,J
Table171.3CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity
Name
PRES
Item
SMISC

E
I
5
J
2
CONTA171
SFRIC
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
SLIDE
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
ISEG
ASLIDE
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
FPRS
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
ELSI
DENERI
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
19
20
21
22
27
47
48
48
-
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
23
25
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
49
51
53
55
57
59
67
69
4
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
19
21
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
24
26
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
50
52
54
56
58
60
68
70
CONTA171
DENERII
FSTART
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
71
73
75
77
72
74
76
78
1. Element Status = highest value of status of integration points within the element
2. Penetration = positive value, gap = negative value
You can display or list contact results through several POST1 postprocessor commands. The contact
specific items for the PLNSOL, PLESOL, PRNSOL, and PRESOL commands are listed below:
STAT
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
GAP
FLUX
CNOS
FPRS
Contact status
Contact penetration
Contact pressure
Contact friction stress
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction)
Contact sliding distance
Contact gap distance
CONTA171 Assumptions and Restrictions

The 2-D contact element must be defined in an X-Y plane and the Y-axis must be the axis of
symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
This 2-D contact element works with any 3-D elements in your model.
Do not use this element in any model that contains axisymmetric harmonic elements.
Node numbering must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid, shell, or beam
element, or with the original elements comprising the superelement.
This element is nonlinear and requires a full Newton iterative solution, regardless of whether large
or small deflections are specified. An exception to this is when MPC bonded contact is specified
(KEYOPT(2) = 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
The normal contact stiffness factor (FKN) must not be so large as to cause numerical instability.
FTOLN, PINB, and FKOP can be changed between load steps or during restart stages.
You can use this element in nonlinear static or nonlinear full transient analyses. In addition, you
can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses. For these
analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status at the
completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
When nodal detection is used and the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric
analysis, the contact pressure on that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The
contact force is accurate in this situation.
This element allows birth and death and will follow the birth and death status of the underlying
solid, shell, beam, or target elements.
CONTA171
The USERFRIC subroutine (user-defined friction) can only be used with penalty-based tangential
contact (i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).
CONTA171 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
The MU material property is not allowed.
ANSYS Structural.
The VOLT DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 3 through 6) is not allowed.
The AZ DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical.
PLANE13
PLANE13
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

current-technology element such as PLANE223.
PLANE13 has a 2-D magnetic, thermal, electrical, piezoelectric, and structural field capability with limited
coupling between the fields. PLANE13 is defined by four nodes with up to four degrees of freedom per
node. The element has nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet
demagnetization curves. PLANE13 has large deflection and stress stiffening capabilities. When used in
purely structural analyses, PLANE13 also has large strain capabilities. See PLANE13 in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
Other coupled-field elements are SOLID5, SOLID98, and SOLID62.
PLANE13 Input Data

element input data includes four nodes and magnetic, thermal, electrical, and structural material
properties. The type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command.
EMUNIT also determines the value of MUZERO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4
x 10 -7 henries/meter. In addition to MUZERO, orthotropic relative permeability is specified through the
MURX and MURY material property labels.
MGXX and MGYY represent vector components of the coercive force for permanent magnet materials.
The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root of the sum of the squares of the components.
The direction of polarization is determined by the components MGXX and MGYY. Permanent magnet
polarization and orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Nonlinear magnetic B-H,
piezoelectric, and anisotropic elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in
Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis). Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with
a combination of a B-H curve and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each
element coordinate direction where a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve
may be specified per material.
Various combinations of nodal loading are available for this element (depending upon the KEYOPT(1)
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. Nodal forces, if any, should be input
per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressure, convection or heat flux (but not
both), radiation, and Maxwell force flags may be input on the element faces indicated by the circled
numbers in Figure 13.1 using the SF and SFE commands. Positive pressures act into the element.
Surfaces at which magnetic forces are to be calculated are identified by using the MXWF label on the
surface load commands (no value is required). A maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at these
PLANE13
surfaces to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in solution as structural loads. The
surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body for which forces are required.
Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag.
Body loads - temperature, heat generation rate, and magnetic virtual displacement - may be input at the
element's nodes or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. Source current density loads may be applied to
an area [BFA] or input as an element value [BFE]. When the temperature degree of freedom is active
(KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 4), applied body force temperatures [BF, BFE] are ignored. In general, unspecified
nodal temperatures and heat generation rates default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF
or TUNIF command. Heat generation from Joule heating is applied in Solution as thermal loading for
static and transient analyses.
If the temperature degree of freedom is present, the calculated temperatures override any input nodal
temperatures.
Air elements in which local Jacobian forces are to be calculated may be identified by using nodal values
of 1 and 0 for the MVDI label [BF]. See the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.
These forces are not applied in solution as structural loads.
input is given in Element Input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 0
TEMP if KEYOPT (1 ) = 2
UX, UY, TEMP, AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 4
VOLT, AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 6
UX, UY, VOLT if KEYOPT (1) = 7
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ, (or CTEX, CTEY,CTEZ or THSX, THSY,THSZ),
DENS, GXY, DAMP,
KXX, KYY, C, ENTH, MUZERO, MURX,
MURY, RSVZ, MGXX, MGYY, PERX, PERY,
plus BH, ANEL, and Piezoelectric data tables (see Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis))
Surface Loads
Pressure, Convection or Heat Flux (but not both), Radiation (using Lab = RDSF), and
Maxwell Force Flags--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
PLANE13
Heat Generations--
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L)
Magnetic Virtual Displacements--
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L)
Source Current Density--
spare, spare, JSZ(I), PHASE(I), spare, spare,
JSZ(J), PHASE(J), spare, spare, JSZ(K), PHASE(K),
spare, spare, JSZ(L), PHASE(L)
Special Features
Requires an iterative solution for field coupling (displacement, temperature, electric, magnetic, but
not piezoelectric)
Large deflection
Large strain
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom:
0--
AZ degree of freedom
2--
TEMP degree of freedom
3--
UX, UY degrees of freedom
4--
UX, UY, TEMP, AZ degrees of freedom
6--
VOLT, AZ degrees of freedom
7--
UX, UY, VOLT degrees of freedom
KEYOPT(2)
Extra shapes:
0--
Include extra shapes
1--
PLANE13
Do not include extra shapes

KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane strain (with structural degrees of freedom)
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
Plane stress (with structural degrees of freedom)
KEYOPT(4)
Element coordinate system defined:
0--
1--
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:
0--
1--
2--
PLANE13 Output Data

Nodal degrees of freedom included in the overall nodal solution
Several items are illustrated in Figure 13.2. The element output directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic
Figure13.2PLANE13 Element Output
PLANE13
Because of different sign conventions for Cartesian and polar coordinate systems, magnetic flux density
vectors point in opposite directions for planar (KEYOPT(3) = 0) and axisymmetric (KEYOPT(3) =1)
analyses.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
HGEN
S:X, Y, Z, XY
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
TG:X, Y, SUM
TF:X, Y, SUM
EF:X, Y
EF:SUM
D:X, Y
D:SUM
UE, UD, UM
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; P4 at I, L
Input temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Input heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L)
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Thermal gradient components and vector sum
components and vector sum
Electric field components (X, Y)
Vector magnitude of EF
Electric flux density components (X, Y)
Vector magnitude of D
Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical coupled
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PLANE13
LOC
MUX, MUY
H:X, Y
H:SUM
B:X, Y
B:SUM
JSZ
JTZ
JHEAT:
FJB(X, Y)
FMX(X, Y)
FVW(X, Y)
FMAG:X, Y
FACE
AREA
NODES
HFILM
TBULK
TAVG
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFLUX
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
TJB(Z)
TMX(Z)
TVW(Z)
(UM) energies
Output location (X, Y)
Magnetic permeability
Magnetic field intensity components
Vector magnitude of H
Magnetic flux density components
Vector magnitude of B
Source current density, available for static analysis only
Total current density
Joule heat generation per unit volume
Lorentz force components
Maxwell force components
Virtual work force components
Combined (FJB and FMX) force components
Face label
Face area
Face nodes
Film coefficient at each node of face
Bulk temperature at each node of face
Average face temperature
Heat flow rate across face by convection
Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convection
Heat flux at each node of face
Average film coefficient of the face
Average face bulk temperature
Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by input
heat flux
Lorentz torque about global Cartesian +Z axis
Maxwell torque about global Cartesian +Z axis
Virtual work torque about global Cartesian +Z axis
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
-
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1. Solution values are output only if calculated (based on input data).

Note: For harmonic analysis, joule losses (JHEAT), forces (FJB(X, Y), FMX(X, Y),
FVW(X, Y)), and torque (TJB(Z), TMX(Z), TVW(Z)) represent time-average
values. These values are stored in the "Real" data set. The macros
POWERH, FMAGSUM, and TORQSUM can be used to retrieve this data.
2. Available only if a surface load is input.
the user (MP,PRXY).
Table13.2PLANE13 Miscellaneous Element Output
Description
PLANE13
Integration Pt. Solution

Nodal Solution
SINT, SEQV, EPEL, S, MUX, MUY, H, HSUM, B,

BSUM
SINT, SEQV, S, H, HSUM, B, BSUM
1. Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2.
Note: JT represents the total measurable current density in a conductor, including eddy
current effects, and velocity effects if calculated.
For axisymmetric solutions with KEYOPT(4) = 0, the X and Y directions correspond
to the radial and axial directions, respectively. The X, Y, Z, and XY stress output
correspond to the radial, axial, hoop, and in-plane shear stresses, respectively.
For harmonic analysis, joule losses (JHEAT), forces (FJB(X, Y), FMX(X, Y), FVW(X,
Y)), and torque (TJB(Z), TMX(Z), TVW(Z)) represent time-average values. These
values are stored in the "Real" data set. The macros POWERH, FMAGSUM, and
TORQSUM can be used to retrieve this data.
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic Analysis
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
FCN
sequence number for solution items for element Face N
Output Quantity
Name
JSZ
P1
P2
P3
P4
MUX
MUY
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC

E
I
J
K
1
1
2
4
9
-
3
6
-
5
8
-
7
10
-
PLANE13
FVWX
FVWY
FVWSUM
JTZ
UE
UD
UM
TJB(Z)
TMX(Z)
TVW(Z)
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
35
36
37
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

FC1
FC2
FC3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
FC4
29
30
31
32
33
34

For structural and piezoelectric problems, the extra displacement and VOLT shapes are
automatically deleted for triangular elements so that a constant strain element results.
Transient magnetic analyses should be performed in a nonlinear transient dynamic analysis.
A skin-effect analysis (where eddy current formation is permitted in conducting regions with
impressed current loading) is performed by using KEYOPT(1) = 6, specifying a resistivity, and
coupling all VOLT degrees of freedom for elements in each of such regions. This is valid for both
planar and axisymmetric models.
Current density loading (BFE,,JS) is only valid for the AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 0). For the VOLT,
AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 6) use F,,AMPS.
When this element does not have the VOLT degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 4), for a harmonic
or transient analysis, its behavior depends on the applied load. For a BFE,,JS load, the element
acts as a stranded conductor. Without BFE,,JS loads, it acts as a solid conductor modeling eddy
current effects.
Note: In this respect, PLANE13 (and PLANE53) are not like the 3-D elements
SOLID97, SOLID117, SOLID236, and SOLID237. When SOLID97, SOLID117,
SOLID236, and SOLID237 do not have the VOLT degree of freedom, they act
as stranded conductors.
Do not constrain all VOLT DOFs to the same value in a piezoelectric analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 7).
Perform a pure structural analysis instead (KEYOPT(1) = 3).
PLANE13
Permanent magnets are not permitted in a harmonic analysis.

If a model has at least one element with piezoelectric degrees of freedom (displacements and
VOLT) activated, then all elements where a VOLT degree of freedom is needed must be one of the
piezoelectric types, and they must all have the piezoelectric degrees of freedom activated. If the
piezoelectric effect is not desired in these elements, simply define very small piezoelectric material
properties for them.
This element may not be compatible with other elements with the VOLT degree of freedom. To be
compatible, the elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that
have an electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign. For
more information, see Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
This element cannot be used in a distributed solution.

ANSYS Mechanical.
Unless the Emag option is enabled, the following restrictions apply:
This element has only structural, thermal, or piezoelectric capability, and does not have magnetic
capability.
The AZ degree of freedom is not active.
KEYOPT(1) defaults to 4 (UX, UY, TEMP) instead of 0, and cannot be set to 0. If set to 4 or 6, the
AZ degree of freedom is not active.
The magnetic and electric material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are
not allowed.
The Maxwell force flags surface loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag.
This element has only magnetic and electric field capability, and does not have structural, thermal,
or piezoelectric capability.
The only active degrees of freedom are AZ and VOLT.
The only allowable material properties are the magnetic and electric properties (MUZRO through
PERY, plus the BH data table).
The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The heat generation body loads are not
applicable. The temperature body load is only used for material property evaluation.
The element does not allow any special features.
KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 (default) or 6. KEYOPT(3) = 2 is not applicable.
PLANE223
PLANE223
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE223 has the following capabilities:
Structural-Thermal
Piezoresistive
Electroelastic
Piezoelectric
Thermal-Electric
Structural-Thermoelectric
Thermal-Piezoelectric
The element has eight nodes with up to four degrees of freedom per node. Structural capabilities include
elasticity, plasticity, viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, creep, large strain, large deflection, stress stiffening
effects, and prestress effects. Thermoelectric capabilities include Seebeck, Peltier, and Thomson effects,
as well as Joule heating. In addition to thermal expansion, structural-thermal capabilities include the
piezocaloric effect in dynamic analyses. The Coriolis effect is available for analyses with structural
degrees of freedom. See PLANE223 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
PLANE223 Input Data

The element input data includes eight nodes and structural, thermal, and electrical material properties.
The type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also
determines the value of free-space permittivity EPZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and EPZRO
= 8.85e-12 Farads/meter.
KEYOPT(1) determines the element DOF set and the corresponding force labels and reaction solution.
KEYOPT(1) is set equal to the sum of the field keys shown in Table223.1:PLANE223 Field Keys. For
example, KEYOPT(1) is set to 11 for a structural-thermal analysis (structural field key + thermal field key
= 1 + 10). For a structural-thermal analysis, UX, UY, and TEMP are the DOF labels and force and heat
flow are the reaction solution.
Table223.1PLANE223 Field Keys
PLANE223
Field
Structural
Thermal
Electric Conduction
Electrostatic
Field Key
1
10
100
1000
DOF Label
UX, UY
TEMP
VOLT
VOLT
Force Label
FX, FY
HEAT
AMPS
CHRG
Reaction Solution
Force
Heat Flow
Electric Current
Electric Charge
The coupled-field analysis KEYOPT(1) settings, DOF labels, force labels, reaction solutions, and analysis
types are shown in the following table.
Table223.2PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses
Coupled-Field
Analysis
Structural-Thermal [1],
[2]
Piezoresistive
Electroelastic
Piezoelectric
Thermal-Electric
StructuralThermoelectric [1]
[1], [2]
KEYOPT(1)
DOF Label Force Label
11 UX, UY,
TEMP
FX, FY,
HEAT
Reaction
Solution
Force,
Heat Flow
Analysis Type
Static
Full Harmonic
Full Transient
Static
101
UX, UY,
VOLT
FX, FY,
AMPS
Force,
Electric
Current
1001 [3] UX, UY,

VOLT
FX, FY,
CHRG
Force,
Electric
Charge
(positive)
Static
1001 [3] UX, UY,

VOLT
FX, FY,
CHRG
Force,
Electric
Charge
(negative)
Static
Full Transient
Full Transient
Modal
Full Harmonic
Full Transient
Static
110 TEMP,
VOLT
HEAT,
AMPS
Heat Flow,
Electric
Current
111 UX, UY,

TEMP,
VOLT
FX, FY,
HEAT,
AMPS
Force,
Heat Flow,
Electric
Current
Static
1011 UX, UY,

TEMP,
VOLT
FX, FY,
HEAT,
CHRG
Force,
Heat Flow,
Electric
Charge
(negative)
Static
Full Transient
Full Transient
Full Harmonic
Full Transient
1. For static and full transient analyses, KEYOPT(2) can specify a strong (matrix) or weak (load
vector) structural-thermal coupling.
2. For full harmonic analyses, strong structural-thermal coupling only applies.
3. The electrostatic-structural analysis available with KEYOPT(1) = 1001 defaults to an electroelastic
analysis (electrostatic force coupling) unless a piezoelectric matrix is specified on TB,PIEZ.
PLANE223
As shown in the following table, material property requirements consist of those required for the
individual fields (structural, thermal, electric conduction, or electrostatic) and those required for field
coupling. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA, and TB commands.
Table223.3PLANE223 Material Properties
ALL ANALYSES WITH A STRUCTURAL FIELD
Structural
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
ELASTIC, ANEL, DENS, DAMP, DMPR, SDAMP
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), REFT
Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL,
SMA, CAST, EDP, GURSON) [1]
Viscoelasticity (PRONY,SHIFT) [1]
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL ANALYSES

Thermal
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH, HF
Coupling
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ)
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR PIEZORESISTIVE ANALYSES
Electric
RSVX, RSVY, PERX, PERY
Coupling
PZRS
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR ELECTROELASTIC ANALYSES
Electric
PERX, PERY, DPER
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES
Electric
PERX, PERY, DPER, LSST (and/or RSVX, RSVY)
Coupling
PIEZ
MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES
Thermal
Electric
Coupling
SBKX, SBKY
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC
ANALYSES
Thermal
Electric
Coupling
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), SBKX, SBKY,
PZRS
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL-PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES
Thermal
Electric
PERX, PERY, DPER, LSST (and/or RSVX, RSVY)
Coupling
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), PIEZ
1. These material properties are not applicable to structural-thermal analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11).
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. Nodal forces, if any, should be input
per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Surface loads may be input on the element
faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 223.1 using the SF and SFE commands. Positive
pressures act into the element. Body loads may be input at the element's nodes or as a single element
PLANE223
value using the BF and BFE commands.

PLANE223 surface and body loads are given in the following table.
Table223.4PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads
Coupled-Field
Analysis
Structural-Thermal
KEYOPT(1)
Load
Type
11 Surface
Body
Piezoresistive
101 Surface
Body
Electroelastic and
Piezoelectric
1001 Surface
Body
Thermal-Electric
110 Surface
Body
StructuralThermoelectric
111 Surface
Body
1011 Surface
Load
Command Label
Pressure
PRES
Convection
Heat Flux
Radiation
CONV
HFLUX
RDSF
Force Density
FORC
Heat Generation -Nodes I through P
HGEN
Pressure
PRES
Force Density
FORC
Temperature -- Nodes I
through P
TEMP
Pressure
Surface Charge Density
PRES
CHRGS[1]
Force Density
FORC
Temperature -- Nodes I
through P
TEMP
Volume Charge Density

-- Nodes I through P
CHRGD[1]
Convection
Heat Flux
Radiation
CONV
HFLUX
RDSF
HGEN
Pressure
PRES
Convection
Heat Flux
Radiation
CONV
HFLUX
RDSF
Force Density
FORC
HGEN
Pressure
Surface Charge Density
PRES
CHRGS[1]
Convection
Heat Flux
CONV
HFLUX
PLANE223
Body
Radiation
RDSF
Force Density
FORC
HGEN
Volume Charge Density

-- Nodes I through P
CHRGD[1]
1. CHRGS and CHRGD are interpreted as negative surface charge density and negative volume charge
density, respectively.
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE223 Input Summary". A general description of
Elements.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table223.2:PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table223.3:PLANE223 Material Properties.
Surface Loads
See Table223.4:PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads.
Body Loads
See Table223.4:PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads.
Special Features
Elasticity (ELASTIC, ANEL) [1]
Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL, SMA, CAST, EDP,
GURSON) [1]
Viscoelasticity (PRONY,SHIFT) [1]
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table223.2:PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses.
KEYOPT(2)
PLANE223
Structural-thermal coupling method in structural-thermal, structural-thermoelastic, or thermalpiezoelectric analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11, 111, or 1011).
0--
Strong (matrix) coupling produces an unsymmetric matrix. In a linear analysis, a coupled
response is achieved after one iteration.
1--
Weak (load vector) coupling produces a symmetric matrix and requires at least two
iterations to achieve a coupled response. [2]
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane stress
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
Plane strain
KEYOPT(4)
Electrostatic force in electroelastic analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 1001):
0--
Applied to every element node.
1--
Applied to the air-structure interface or to element nodes that have constrained structural
degrees of freedom.
2--
Not applied.
For more information, see Electroelastic Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide .
KEYOPT(9)
Thermoelastic damping (piezocaloric effect) in structural-thermal, structural-thermoelastic, or
thermal-piezoelectric analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11, 111, or 1011). Applicable to harmonic and
transient analyses only.
0--
Active
1--
Suppressed [2]
PLANE223
Input Summary Notes:

1. Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
2. Recommended in a coupled-field analysis with structural nonlinearities.

The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
available.
Name
Definition
ALL ANALYSES
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
S:X, Y, Z, XY
S:1, 2, 3
S:EQV
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTH:EQV
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY
EPPL:EQV
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY
EPCR:EQV
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY
EPTO:EQV
ADDITIONAL
TG:X, Y, SUM
Element Number
Y
Y
Material number
Y
Volume
Y
2
ALL ANALYSES WITH A STRUCTURAL FIELD
1
Principal stresses
1
Equivalent stress
1
Elastic strains
1
Thermal strains
1
1
Plastic strains
1
1
Creep strains
1
Equivalent creep strain [3]
1
Total equivalent mechanical strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR)
OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 11)
Thermal gradient components and vector magnitude
1
PLANE223
TF:X, Y, SUM
Thermal flux components and vector magnitude
1
UT
Total strain energy [7]
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR PIEZORESISTIVE ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 101)
TEMP
Input temperatures
Y
EF:X, Y, SUM
Electric field components (X, Y) and vector magnitude
1
JC:X, Y, SUM
Conduction current density components (X, Y) and vector
1
magnitude
JS:X, Y, SUM
Current density components (X, Y) and vector magnitude
1
[4]
JHEAT
Joule heat generation per unit volume [5]
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR ELECTROELASTIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1001)
TEMP
Input temperatures
Y
EF:X, Y, SUM
1
D:X, Y, SUM
Electric flux density components (X, Y) and vector
1
magnitude
FMAG:X, Y, SUM
Electrostatic force components (X, Y) and vector magnitude 1
UE, UD
Stored elastic and dielectric energies
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1001)
TEMP
Input temperatures
Y
EF:X, Y, SUM
1
D:X, Y, SUM
Electric flux density components (X, Y) and vector
1
magnitude
JHEAT
Joule heat generation per unit volume [5], [6]
1
UE, UD
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 110)
TG:X, Y, SUM
1
TF:X, Y, SUM
1
EF:X, Y, SUM
Electric field components and vector magnitude
1
JC:X, Y, SUM
Conduction current density components and vector
1
magnitude
JS:X, Y, SUM
Current density components and vector magnitude [4]
1
JHEAT
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) =
111)
TG:X, Y, SUM
1
TF:X, Y, SUM
1
EF:X, Y, SUM
1
JC:X, Y, SUM
Conduction current density components and vector
1
magnitude
JS:X, Y, SUM
Current density components and vector magnitude [4]
1
JHEAT
1
UT
1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR THERMAL-PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1011)
TG:X, Y, SUM
1
TF:X, Y, SUM
1
EF:X, Y, SUM
1
D:X, Y, SUM
Electric flux density components and vector magnitude
1
PLANE223
JHEAT
UE, UD
UT

1
1
1
1. Solution values are output only if calculated (based on input values).

4. JS represents the sum of element conduction and displacement current densities.
5. Calculated Joule heat generation rate per unit volume (JHEAT) may be made available for a
subsequent thermal analysis with companion thermal elements.
6. For a time-harmonic analysis, Joule losses (JHEAT) are time-averaged. These values are stored in
both the real and imaginary data sets. For more information, see Quasistatic Electric Analysis in the
7. For a time-harmonic analysis, total strain energy (UT) is time-averaged. These values are stored in
both the real and imaginary data sets. For more information, see Thermoelasticity in the Theory
Table223.6:PLANE223 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic
following notation is used in Table223.6:PLANE223 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
ETABLE Command Input
Item

UE
UD
UT
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
4

PLANE223 assumes a unit thickness.
When NLGEOM is ON, SSTIF defaults to OFF.
PLANE223 uses 2 x 2 and 3 point integration rules to calculate the element matrices and load
vectors for the quad and triangle geometries, respectively.
PLANE223
In a piezoelectric analysis, electric charge loading is interpreted as negative electric charge or

negative charge density.
In a coupled-field analysis with structural degrees of freedom, the model should have at least two
elements in each direction to avoid the hourglass mode.
The optimized nonlinear solution defaults (SOLCONTROL) are not available in coupled-field
analyses.
A face with a removed midside node implies that the degrees-of-freedom vary linearly, rather than
This element does not support fully incompressible materials.

TARGE170
TARGE170
3-D Target Segment

TARGE170 Element Description

TARGE170 is used to represent various 3-D "target" surfaces for the associated contact elements
(CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177). The contact elements themselves
overlay the solid, shell, or line elements describing the boundary of a deformable body and are
potentially in contact with the target surface, defined by TARGE170. This target surface is discretized by
a set of target segment elements (TARGE170) and is paired with its associated contact surface via a
shared real constant set. You can impose any translational or rotational displacement, temperature,
voltage, and magnetic potential on the target segment element. You can also impose forces and
moments on target elements. See TARGE170 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. To represent 2-D target surfaces, use
TARGE169, a 2-D target segment element.
For rigid target surfaces, these elements can easily model complex target shapes. For flexible targets,
these elements will overlay the solid, shell, or line elements describing the boundary of the deformable
target body.
Figure170.1TARGE170 Geometry
TARGE170 Input Data

The target surface is modeled through a set of target segments, typically, several target segments
comprise one target surface.
The target surface can either be rigid or deformable. For modeling rigid-flexible contact, the rigid surface
must be represented by a target surface. For flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces
must be overlayed by a target surface. See the Contact Technology Guide for more information about
designating contact and target surfaces.
TARGE170
The target and associated contact surfaces are identified via a shared real constant set. This real
constant set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
Each target surface can be associated with only one contact surface, and vice-versa. However, several
contact elements could make up the contact surface and thus come in contact with the same target
surface. Likewise, several target elements could make up the target surface and thus come in contact
with the same contact surface. For either the target or contact surfaces, you can put many elements in a
single target or contact surface, or you can localize the contact and target surfaces by splitting the large
surfaces into smaller target and contact surfaces, each of which contain fewer elements.
If a contact surface may contact more than one target surface, you must define duplicate contact
surfaces that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets, that is, that have separate real
constant set numbers.
Figure 170.2 shows the available segment types for TARGE170. The general 3-D surface segments (3node and 6-node triangles, and 4-node and 8-node quadrilaterals) and the primitive segments (cylinder,
cone, and sphere) can be paired with 3-D surface-to-surface contact elements, CONTA173 and
CONTA174, the 3-D node-to-surface contact element, CONTA175, and the 3-D line-to-surface contact
element, CONTA177. The line segments (2-node line and 3-node parabola) can only be paired with the
3-D line-to-line contact element, CONTA176, to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact.
For any target surface definition, the node ordering of the target segment element is critical for proper
detection of contact. For the general 3-D surface segments (triangle and quadrilateral segment types),
the nodes must be ordered so that the outward normal to the target surface is defined by the right hand
rule (see Figure 170.2). Therefore, for the surface target segments, the outward normal by the right
hand rule is consistent to the external normal. For 3-D line segments (straight line and parabolic line),
the nodes must be entered in a sequence that defines a continuous line. For a rigid cylinder, cone, or
sphere, contact must occur on the outside of the elements; internal contacting of these segments is not
allowed.
Considerations for Rigid Target Surfaces

Each target segment of a rigid surface is a single element with a specific shape, or segment type. The
segment types are defined by several nodes and a target shape code, TSHAP, and are described in
Table170.1:TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes. The TSHAP command
indicates the geometry (shape) of the element. The segment radii are defined by real constants (R1 and
R2), and the segment location is determined by the nodes. ANSYS supports eleven 3-D segment types;
see Table170.1:TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes.
Table170.1TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes
TSHAP
TRIA
QUAD
TRI6
QUA8
LINE
PARA
Segment Type
Nodes (DOF) [1]
3-node triangle
1st - 3rd nodes are corner points (UX,

UY, UZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
4-node quadrilateral 1st - 4th nodes are corner points (UX,
6-node triangle
1st - 3rd nodes are corner points, 4th 6th are midside nodes (UX, UY, UZ)
(TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
8-node quadrilateral 1st - 4th nodes are corner points, 5th 8th are midside nodes (UX, UY, UZ)
(TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
2-node straight line 1st - 2nd nodes are line end points (UX,
UY, UZ)
3-node parabola
1st - 2nd nodes are line end points, 3rd
R1
R2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Target
Radius[4]
Target
Contact
Radius[5]
Contact
TARGE170
is a midside node (UX, UY, UZ)

CYLI
Cylinder[2]
CONE
Cone[2]
SPHE
Sphere [2]
PILO
Pilot node[3]
POINT
Point 6
Radius[4]
1st - 2nd nodes are axial end points (UX, Radius
1st - 2nd nodes are axial end points (UX, Radius at
node 1
Sphere center point (UX, UY, UZ) (TEMP) Radius
(VOLT) (MAG)
1st point: (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,
None
ROTZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
1st point: (UX, UY, UZ)
None
Radius[5]
None
Radius at
node 2
None
None
None
1. The DOF available depends on the setting of KEYOPT(1) of the associated contact element. Refer
to the element documentation for either CONTA173, CONTA174, or CONTA175 for more details.
2. When creating a cylinder, cone, or sphere via direct generation, define the real constant set before
creating the element.
3. Only pilot nodes have rotational degrees of freedom (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ).
4. Input the target radius as a negative value when modeling internal pipe-to-pipe contact (a pipe
contacting/sliding inside another pipe). Input a positive value to model external 3-D beam-to-beam
contact.
5. Input a positive contact radius when modeling internal pipe-to-pipe contact or external 3-D beamto-beam contact.
6. Rigid surface node. This segment type is only used to apply boundary conditions to rigid target
surfaces.
Figure 170.2 shows the 3-D segment shapes.
Figure170.2TARGE170 Segment Types
TARGE170
For simple rigid target surfaces (including line segments), you can define the target segment elements
individually by direct generation. You must first specify the SHAPE argument on the TSHAP command.
When creating cylinders, cones, or spheres through direct generation, you must also define the real
constant R1 (and R2 for cones) before creating the element. Real constants R1 and R2 (see
Table170.1:TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes) define the dimensions of
the target shape.
For general 3-D rigid surfaces, target segment elements can be defined by area meshing (AMESH). Set
KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the default) to generate low order target elements (3-node triangles and/or 4-node
quadrilaterals) for rigid surfaces. Set KEYOPT(1) = 1 to generate target elements with midside nodes (6node triangles and/or 8-node quadrilaterals).
For 3-D rigid lines, target segment elements can be defined by line meshing (LMESH). Set KEYOPT(1)
= 0 (the default) to generate low order target elements (2-node straight lines). Set KEYOPT(1) = 1 to
generate target elements with midside nodes (3-node parabolas).
You can also use keypoint meshing (KMESH) to generate the pilot node.
If the TARGE170 elements will be created via program meshing (AMESH, LMESH, or KMESH
commands), then the TSHAP command is ignored and ANSYS chooses the correct shape automatically.
For rigid-to-flexible contact, by default, ANSYS automatically fixes the structural degree of freedom for
rigid target nodes if they aren't explicitly constrained (KEYOPT(2) = 0). If you wish, you can override the
automatic boundary condition settings by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements. For flexible-toflexible contact, no special boundary conditions treatment is performed, and the KEYOPT(2) = 0 setting
should be used.
For each rigid-flexible contact pair, you can assign only one pilot node to an entire rigid target surface
(or none if it is not needed). The pilot node, unlike the other segment types, is used to define the
degrees of freedom for the entire target surface. This node can be any of the target surface nodes, but
it does not have to be. All possible rigid motions of the target surface will be a combination of a
translation and a rotation around the pilot node. The pilot node provides a convenient and powerful way
to assign boundary conditions such as rotations, translations, moments, temperature, voltage, and
TARGE170
magnetic potential on an entire rigid target surface. By default (KEYOPT(2) = 0), you can assign the
boundary conditions only to the pilot node, eliminating the need to assign boundary conditions to
individual target nodes, thus reducing the chance of errors. ANSYS will also automatically fix the
structural degrees of freedom on the pilot node if they aren't explicitly constrained.
target nodes rather than only on the pilot node. It is your responsibility to make sure the rigid target
surface is not under-constrained or over-constrained. It is still recommended that you apply all boundary
conditions on the pilot node, even when KEYOPT(2) = 1.
Considerations for Deformable Target Surfaces

For general deformable surfaces, use the ESURF command to overlay the target elements on the
boundary of the existing mesh. By default, the command generates a target element with an external
surface that has the same shape as the underlying element. You can issue ESURF,,,LINE to generate 3D line or parabola segments on an exterior of selected 3-D elements (e.g., shell edges). Segment types
(TSHAP command) should not be used prior to ESURF when generating target elements on deformable
target surfaces.
The cylinder, cone, sphere, point, and pilot node target segments should not be used for deformable
target surfaces. However, you can use geometry correction (see below) for deformable target surfaces
that represent (or approximately represent) a sphere, cylinder, or cone.
Considerations for Geometry Correction

In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by linear or quadratic contact
and target elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, in certain circumstances (for
example, when linear elements are used or when the midside nodes of quadratic elements do not lie
exactly on the initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used), using a faceted
surface in place of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses. An
optional geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute) via
SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific
contact elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for
Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide .
Considerations for Fluid Penetration Loading

Considerations for Thermal Contact Analysis

By default, the temperature is set to the value of TUNIF, and if this has no explicit value the
temperature is set to zero. For thermal contact analysis, such as convection and radiation modeling, the
behavior of a thermal contact surface (whether a near-field or free surface) is usually based on the
contact status. Contact status affects the behavior of the contact surface as follows:
If the contact surface is outside the pinball region, its behavior is as a far-field of free surface. In
this instance, convection/radiation occurs with the ambient temperature.
If the contact surface is inside the pinball region, the behavior is as a near-field surface.
However, the thermal contact surface status is ignored if KEYOPT(3) = 1 is set, and the surface is
always treated as a free surface (see CONTA173, CONTA174, or CONTA175 for details).
A summary of the element input is given in "TARGE170 Input Summary". A general description of
TARGE170
TARGE170 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (J - P are not required for all segment types)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ for pilot nodes only)
Real Constants
R1, R2, [the others are defined through the associated CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175,
CONTA176, or CONTA177 elements]
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to target normal direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear
Birth and death
Section definition used for geometry correction of spherical and revolute surfaces
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element order (used by AMESH and LMESH commands only):
0--
Low order elements
1--
High order elements
KEYOPT(2)
Boundary conditions for rigid target nodes:
0--
Automatically constrained by ANSYS
1--
Specified by user
KEYOPT(3)
TARGE170
Behavior of thermal contact surface:

0--
Based on contact status
1--
Treated as free-surface
KEYOPT(4)
DOF set to be constrained on dependent DOF for internally-generated multipoint constraints
(MPCs). This option is used for these situations: solid-solid and shell-shell assemblies; surfacebased constraints that use a single pilot node for the target element; and rigid target surfaces that
use the KEYOPT(2) = 1 setting.
n--
Enter a six digit value that represents the DOF set to be constrained. The first to sixth digits
represent ROTZ, ROTY, ROTX, UZ, UY, UX, respectively. The number 1 (one) indicates the
DOF is active, and the number 0 (zero) indicates the DOF is not active. For example, 100011
means that UX, UY, and ROTZ will be used in the multipoint constraint. Leading zeros may
be omitted; for example, you can enter 11 to indicate that UX and UY are the only active
DOF. If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (which is the default) or 111111, all DOF are constrained.
KEYOPT(5)
DOF set to be used in internally-generated multipoint constraints (MPCs), with the MPC algorithm
and no separation or bonded behavior (KEYOPT(2) = 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 4, 5, or 6 on the
contact element). Note that this key option is not used for surface-based constraints. (See
"Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies" in the Contact Technology Guide for more information):
0--
Automatic constraint type detection (default)
1--
Solid-solid constraint (no rotational DOFs are constrained)
2--
Shell-shell constraint (both translational and rotational DOFs are constrained independently).
Also used with penalty based shell-shell assembly (KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1 and KEYOPT(12) = 5
or 6 on the contact element); see Bonded Contact for Shell-Shell Assemblies in the Contact
3--
Shell-solid constraint - contact normal direction (both translational and rotational DOFs from
the contact surface are included in the constraint set; only translational DOFs from the target
surface are included in the constraint set).
4--
Shell-solid constraint - all directions. This option acts the same as KEYOPT(5) = 3 if an
intersection is found from the contact normal to the target surface. Otherwise, constraint
equations are still built as long as contact node(s) and target segments are inside the pinball
region.
5--
TARGE170
Shell-solid constraint - anywhere inside pinball region. Constraint equations are always built
as long as contact node(s) and target segments are inside the pinball region, regardless of
whether an intersection exists between the contact normal and the target surface.
Note: When the no separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4 on the contact element) is
used with the MPC approach, only the KEYOPT(5) = 0 and 1 options (auto
detection or solid-solid constraint) described above are valid. If the auto
detection option is set and the program finds a shell-shell or shell-solid
constraint in this situation, the solution will terminate.
TARGE170 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is shown in Table170.2:TARGE170 Element Output
Definitions.
available.
Table170.2TARGE170 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
ITRGET
TSHAP
ISEG
FPRS
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J, and K
Segment shape type
Segment numbering
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
1
Y
1. An internal segment number determined by ANSYS. ISEG for the target element has a different
meaning than ISEG reported for the contact element.
You can display or list the actual fluid pressure applied to the target element through several POST1
postprocessing commands, as shown below:
PLESOL,CONT,FPRS
PLNSOL,CONT,FPRS
PRESOL,CONT
PRNSOL,CONT
Note that only the FPRS (fluid penetration pressure) output item is meaningful when the PRESOL and
PRNSOL commands are used for target elements.
Table170.3:TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
notation is used in Table170.3:TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table170.2:TARGE170 Element Output Definitions
TARGE170
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Table170.3TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output
Quantity Name
FPRS

E
I
J
K
Item
SMISC
L
4
TARGE170 Assumptions and Restrictions

Generally speaking, you should not change real constants R1 or R2, either between load steps or
during restart stages; otherwise ANSYS assumes the radii of the primitive segments varies between
the load steps. When using direct generation, the real constants for cylinders, cones, and spheres
may be defined before the input of the element nodes. If multiple rigid primitives are defined, each
having different radii, they must be defined by different target surfaces.
For each pilot node, ANSYS automatically defines an internal node and an internal constraint
equation. The rotational DOF of the pilot node is connected to the translational DOF of the internal
node by the internal constraint equation. ANSYS recommends against using external constraint
equations or coupling on pilot nodes; if you do, conflicts may occur, yielding incorrect results.
For rotation of a rigid body constrained only by a bonded, rigid-flexible contact pair with a pilot
node, use the MPC algorithm or a surface-based constraint as described in "Multipoint Constraints
and Assemblies" in the Contact Technology Guide . Penalty-based algorithms can create undesirable
rotational energies in this situation.
TARGE170 Product Restrictions

CONTA173
CONTA173


field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements without
midside nodes (SOLID65, SOLID70, SOLID96, SOLID185, SOLID285, SOLSH190, SHELL28, SHELL41,
SHELL131, SHELL157, SHELL181, and MATRIX50). It has the same geometric characteristics as the solid
or shell element face with which it is connected (see Figure 173.1). Contact occurs when the element
surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface.
Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are
allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination. See
CONTA173 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
details about this element. Other surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA174) are also available.
R = Element x-axis for isotropic friction

xo = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is not supplied (parallel to global X-axis)
x = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is supplied
CONTA173 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 173.1. The element is defined by four nodes (the
underlying solid or shell element has no midside nodes). If the underlying solid or shell elements do have
midside nodes, use CONTA174. The node ordering is consistent with the node ordering for the underlying
solid or shell element. The positive normal is given by the right-hand rule going around the nodes of the
element and is identical to the external normal direction of the underlying solid or shell element surface.
For shell elements, the same nodal ordering between shell and contact elements defines upper surface
contact; otherwise, it represents bottom surface contact. Remember the target surfaces must always be
on its outward normal direction. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for
more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be
CONTA173

which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one
(targets that share the same real constant numbers).
CONTA173 supports isotropic and orthotropic Coulomb friction. For isotropic friction, specify a single
coefficient of friction, MU, using either TB command input (recommended) or the MP command. For
orthotropic friction, specify two coefficients of friction, MU1 and MU2, in two principal directions using
TB command input. (See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) for more information.)
For isotropic friction, the applicable coordinate system is the default element coordinate system (noted
by the R and S axes in the above figure).
For orthotropic friction, the principal directions are determined as follows. The global coordinate system
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command.
(These are depicted by the xo and x axes in the above figure.) The first principal direction is defined by
projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the contact surface. The second
principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact
normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to correctly model the
directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system (global or local) so that
the first direction of that system is within 45 of the tangent to the contact surface.
If you want to set the coordinate directions for isotropic friction (to the global Cartesian system or
another system via ESYS), you can define orthotropic friction and set MU1 = MU2.
To define a coefficient of friction for isotropic or orthotropic friction that is dependent on temperature,
time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command along
with TB,FRIC. See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) for more information.
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by faceted contact and target
elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, using a faceted surface in place of the true
curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses in some contact applications.
An optional geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute)
via SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to
specific contact elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction
for Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide .

CONTA173
Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
MAG (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
TOLS, MCC, PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
Material Properties
Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure
penetration loading. On the SFE command use LKEY = 1 to specify the pressure values, and use
LKEY = 2 to specify starting points and penetrating points.
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Isotropic or orthotropic friction; USERFRIC subroutine
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0--
UX, UY, UZ
1--
CONTA173
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP

2--
TEMP
3--
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
4--
TEMP, VOLT
5--
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
6--
VOLT
7--
MAG
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(4)
0--
1--
CONTA173
2--
3--
On nodal point - normal from contact surface (projection-based method)
KEYOPT(5)
Note: Certain restrictions apply when the surface projection based method
(KEYOPT(4) = 3) is defined. See Using the Surface Projection Based Contact
Method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) for more information.
CNOF/ICONT automated adjustment:

0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(7)
CONTA173
0--
No control
1--
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(8)


0--
No action
2--
KEYOPT(9)
0--
1--

2--
3--
4--
CONTA173
information.
KEYOPT(10)
0--
2--
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect:
0--
Exclude
1--
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
CONTA173

KEYOPT(14)
0--
1--
No.
Name
Description
1
2
3
R1
R2
FKN
Target radius for cylinder, cone, or sphere

Target radius at second node of cone
FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region

and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
PMAX
PMIN
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF

11
FKOP
12
13
14
15
FKT
COHE
TCC
FHTG

damping
Contact cohesion
16
17
18
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT

(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Conditions
Models
Modeling Conduction
Due to Friction
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Radiation
CONTA173
or
19

ECC
20
FHEG

21
FACT
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP
25
TOLS
26
27
MCC
PPCN
28
FPAT
29
30
COR
STRM

Electric Current
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
Parameters

Detection
Magnetic contact permeance
Modeling Magnetic Contact
Acting Time
Load step number for ramping penetration Adjusting Initial Contact
Conditions

available.
Table173.2:CONTA173 Element Output Definitions gives element output at the element level. In the
results file, the nodal results are obtained from its closest integration point.
Name
Definition
CONTA173
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
TAUR/TAUS[7]
KN
KT
MU[8]
TASS/TASR[7]
AASS/AASR[7]
TOLN
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:STOTAL
CONT:SLIDE
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
CONT:FPRS
FSTART
DTSTART
DPARAM
Element Number
Nodes I, J, K, L
AREA
Underlying solid or shell element number
Tangential contact stresses
Total (algebraic sum) sliding in S and R directions
Total (absolute sum) sliding in S and R directions
Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2)
Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2)
Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2+TASR**2)
Slip rate
Pinball Region
Contacting area
Debonding parameter
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA173
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX[4]
CNFY
CNFZ
CONV
RAC
TCC
TEMPS
TEMPT
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
CONT:FLUX
FXNP
CNFH
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
MCC
MFLUX
MAGS
MAGT

debonding
mode II debonding
Contact element force-X component
Contact element force-Z component
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Flux input
Y
Y
Contact power/area
Y
Y
electrostatic DOFs)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Magnetic potential on contact node
Y
Magnetic potential on associated target
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking

4. Contact element forces are defined in the global Cartesian system
CONTA173
7. For the case of orthotropic friction, components are defined in the global Cartesian system
(default) or in the local element coordinate system specified by ESYS.
8. For orthotropic friction, an equivalent coefficient of friction is output.
element.
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Output
Quantity Name
PRES
TAUR
TAUS
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
MFLUX
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

E
I
J
K
13
41
-
1
5
9
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
38
42
46
1
5
9
2
6
10
15
19
23
27
31
35
39
39
43
47
2
6
10
3
7
11
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
40
44
48
3
7
11
L
4
8
12
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
41
45
49
4
8
12
CONTA173
DBA
TASR
TASS
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
ISEG
AASR
AASS
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
FPRS
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
MCC
MAGS
MAGT
ELSI
DENERI
DENERII
FSTART
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
42
43
44
45
58
98
99
99
-
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
46
50
54
62
66
70
74
78
82
86
90
94
100
104
108
112
116
120
124
128
132
136
140
144
148
152
156
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
47
51
55
63
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
129
133
137
141
145
140
153
157
15
19
23
27
31
35
39
48
52
56
64
68
72
76
80
84
88
92
96
102
106
110
114
118
122
126
130
134
138
142
146
150
154
158
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
49
53
57
65
69
73
77
81
85
89
93
97
103
107
111
115
119
123
127
131
135
139
143
147
151
155
159
CONTA173
STAT
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
GAP
FLUX
CNOS
FPRS
Contact status
Contact penetration
Contact pressure

The 3-D contact element must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid or shell
element or with the original elements comprising the superelement.

ANSYS Professional.
The MU material property is not allowed
ANSYS Structural.
The MAG DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical.
CONTA173

SOLID70
SOLID70
3-D Thermal Solid
MP ME <> PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS


SOLID70 has a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element has eight nodes with a single degree of
freedom, temperature, at each node. The element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient
thermal analysis. The element also can compensate for mass transport heat flow from a constant
velocity field. If the model containing the conducting solid element is also to be analyzed structurally,
the element should be replaced by an equivalent structural element (such as SOLID185). See SOLID90
for a similar thermal element, with mid-edge node capability.
An option exists that allows the element to model nonlinear steady-state fluid flow through a porous
medium. With this option, the thermal parameters are interpreted as analogous fluid flow parameters.
For example, the temperature degree of freedom becomes equivalent to a pressure degree of freedom.
SOLID70 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. A prism-shaped element, a
tetrahedral-shaped element, and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure
70.1. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Specific heat and density are
ignored for steady-state solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Convection or heat flux (but not both) and
radiation may be input as surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure
70.1.
Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation
rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I).
The nonlinear porous flow option is selected with KEYOPT(7) = 1. For this option, temperature is
interpreted as pressure and the absolute permeability of the medium are input as material properties
KXX, KYY, and KZZ. Properties DENS and VISC are used for the mass density and viscosity of the fluid.
SOLID70
Properties C and MU are used in calculating the coefficients of permeability as described in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications . Temperature boundary conditions input
with the D command are interpreted as pressure boundary conditions, and heat flow boundary
conditions input with the F command are interpreted as mass flow rate (mass/time).
A mass transport option is available with KEYOPT(8). With this option the velocities VX, VY, and VZ must
be input as real constants (in the element coordinate system). Also, temperatures should be specified
along the entire inlet boundary to assure a stable solution. With mass transport, you should use specific
heat (C) and density (DENS) material properties instead of enthalpy (ENTH).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
Mass transport effects (KEYOPT(8) = 1):
VX - X direction of mass transport velocity
VY - Y direction of mass transport velocity
VZ - Z direction of mass transport velocity
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C, ENTH, VISC, MU (VISC and MU used only if KEYOPT(7) = 1. Do not use
ENTH with KEYOPT(8) = 1).
Surface Loads
Convectionor Heat Flux (but not both) and Radiation (using Lab = RDSF) --
face4(K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
Evaluation of film coefficient:
0--
Evaluate film coefficient (if any) at average film temperature, (TS + TB)/2
1--
SOLID70
Evaluate at element surface temperature, TS

2--
Evaluate at fluid bulk temperature, TB
3--
Evaluate at differential temperature |TS-TB|
KEYOPT(4)
Element coordinate system defined:
0--
1--
KEYOPT(7)
Nonlinear fluid flow option:
0--
Standard heat transfer element
1--
Nonlinear steady-state fluid flow analogy element
KEYOPT(8)
Note: Temperature degree of freedom interpreted as pressure.
Mass transport effects:

0--
No mass transport effects
1--
Mass transport with VX, VY, VZ
SOLID70 Output Data

Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. If
KEYOPT(7) = 1, the standard thermal output should be interpreted as the analogous fluid flow output.
SOLID70
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
HGEN
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM
FACE
AREA
NODES
HFILM
TBULK
TAVG
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
HFLUX
PRESSURE GRAD
MASS FLUX
FLUID VELOCITY
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M),
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Thermal gradient components and vector sum at centroid
components and vector sum at centroid
Face label
Face area
Face nodes
heat flux
Total pressure gradient and its X, Y, and Z components
Mass flow rate per unit cross-sectional area
Total fluid velocity and its X, Y, and Z components
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
-
1. Output if a surface load is input

2. Output if KEYOPT(7) = 1
Name
SOLID70

Item
FCn
sequence number for solution items for element Face n
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG

FC1
FC2
FC3
FC4
FC5
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
FC6
31
32
33
34
35
36

The element must not have a zero volume. This occurs most frequently when the element is not
numbered properly.
MNOP interchanged.
A prism or tetrahedron shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate node numbers as
described in Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements.
The specific heat and enthalpy are evaluated at each integration point to allow for abrupt changes
(such as for melting) within a coarse grid.
If the thermal element is to be replaced by a SOLID185 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face I-J-N-M and/or face K-L-P-O is a
free surface.
A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
boundary constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
Thermal transients having a fine integration time step and a severe thermal gradient at the surface
will also require a fine mesh at the surface.
If KEYOPT(8) > 0, unsymmetric matrices are produced.
When mass flow is activated (KEYOPT(8)=1), the element Peclet number should be less than 1:
Pe = *v*L*Cp/(2*k) <1.0
Where L is an element length scale based on the element geometry. See SOLID70 in the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details.

SOLID70
ANSYS Professional.
This element does not have the mass transport or fluid flow options. KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(8)
can only be set to 0 (default).
The VX, VY, and VZ real constants are not applicable.
The VISC and MU material properties are not applicable.
The element does not have the birth and death feature.
SOLID90
SOLID90


SOLID90 is a higher order version of the 3-D eight node thermal element (SOLID70). The element has
20 nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The 20-node elements have
compatible temperature shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
The 20-node thermal element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See
SOLID90 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details
about this element. If the model containing this element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element
should be replaced by the equivalent structural element (such as SOLID186).
SOLID90 Input Data

element is defined by 20 node points and the material properties. A prism-shaped element may be
formed by defining duplicate K, L, and S; A and B; and O, P, and W node numbers. A tetrahedralshaped element and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure 90.1.
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Specific heat and density are ignored for
steady-state solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties.
90.1. Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat
generation rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I). If all corner node
heat generation rates are specified, each midside node heat generation rate defaults to the average
heat generation rate of its adjacent corner nodes.
For phase change problems, use KEYOPT(1) = 1 (diagonalized specific heat matrix).
SOLID90

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R),
HG(S), HG(T), HG(U), HG(V), HG(W), HG(X), HG(Y), HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Specific heat matrix:
0--
Consistent specific heat matrix
1--
Diagonalized specific heat matrix
SOLID90 Output Data

Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. The
element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
SOLID90

available.
Label
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
HGEN
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM
FACE
NODES
AREA
HFILM
TAVG
TBULK
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFLUX
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), ..., HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
Face label
Corner nodes on this face
Face area
Film coefficient
Fluid bulk temperature
heat flux
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Y
Y
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1. Output only if a surface load is input

The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is
used in Table90.2:SOLID90 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
SOLID90

FCn
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG

FC1
FC2
FC3
FC4
FC5
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
FC6
31
32
33
34
35
36

The element must not have a zero volume. This occurs most frequently when the element is not
numbered properly.
MNOP interchanged.
The condensed face of a prism-shaped element should not be defined as a convection face.
(such as melting) within a coarse grid of elements.
If the thermal element is to be replaced by a SOLID186 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face IJNM and/or face KLPO is a free
surface.
A free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that edge.
See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information
about the use of midside nodes.
For transient solutions using the THOPT,QUASI option, the program removes the midside nodes
from any face with a convection load. A temperature solution is not available for them. Do not use
the midside nodes on these faces in constraint equations or with contact. If you use these faces
for those situations, remove the midside nodes first.
Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution.
The element sizes, when degenerated, should be small in order to minimize the field gradients.
Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in meshing transition zones.
SOLID90

ANSYS Professional.
No Birth and Death.
14.86. SOLID90 - 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid
14.86.SOLID90 - 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Brick
Equation12236
14
Conductivity Matrix and Wedge
Equation12213
3x3
Heat Generation Load
Pyramid
Equation12198
2x2x2
Vector
Tet
Equation12185
4
Same as conductivity matrix. If KEYOPT(1) = 1,
Same as conductivity
Specific Heat Matrix
the matrix is diagonalized as described in Lumped matrix
Matrices.
Quad
Equation1290
3x3
Convection Surface
Matrix and Load Vector Triangle
Equation1263
6

Heat Flow describes the derivation of thermal element matrices and load vectors as well as heat flux
evaluations.
CONTA172
CONTA172


CONTA172 represents contact and sliding between 2-D "target" surfaces (TARGE169) and a deformable
surface, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 2-D structural and coupled field contact
analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 2-D solid elements with midside nodes (PLANE35,
PLANE77, PLANE53, PLANE121, PLANE183, SHELL209, PLANE223, PLANE230, or MATRIX50). It has the
same geometric characteristics as the solid element face with which it is connected (see Figure 172.1).
Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE169)
on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the
USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate
interface delamination. See CONTA172 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for more details about this element. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide for a discussion concerning midside nodes. Other surface-to-surface
contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA173, CONTA174) are also available.
CONTA172 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 172.1. The element is defined by three nodes (the
underlying solid element has midside nodes). If the underlying solid elements do not have midside
nodes, use CONTA171 (you may still use CONTA172 but you must drop the midside nodes). The element
x-axis is along the I-J line of the element. The correct node ordering of the contact element is critical for
proper detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered such that the target must lie to the right side of
the contact element when moving from the first contact element node to the second contact element
node as in Figure 172.1. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for more
information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be
with different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one (both
having the same real constant number).
CONTA172

To model isotropic friction, use the TB,FRIC,,,,ISO command. You can define a coefficient of friction that
is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity by using
the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC,,,,ISO. See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) for more information.
This element supports various 2-D stress states, including plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric
states. The stress state is automatically detected according to the stress state of the underlying element.
However, if the underlying element is a superelement, you must use KEYOPT(3) to specify the stress
state.

Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)
UX, UY, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
AZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
TOLS, , PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
Material Properties
Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
loading. On the SFE command use LKEY = 1 to specify the pressure values, and use LKEY = 2 to
specify starting points and penetrating points.
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K)
CONTA172
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K)

Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0--
UX, UY
1--
UX, UY, TEMP
2--
TEMP
3--
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
4--
TEMP, VOLT
5--
UX, UY, VOLT
6--
VOLT
7--
AZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
CONTA172
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(3)
Stress state when superelements are present:
0--
Use with h-elements (no superelements)
1--
Axisymmetric (use with superelements only)
2--
Plane stress/Plane strain (use with superelements only)
3--
Plane stress with thickness input (use with superelements only)
KEYOPT(4)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(5)

0--
CONTA172
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(7)
0--
No control
1--
2--
3--
4--
CONTA172
KEYOPT(8)

0--
No action
2--
KEYOPT(9)
0--
1--

2--
3--
4--
information.
KEYOPT(10)
0--
2--
KEYOPT(11)
Beam/Shell thickness effect:
0--
Exclude
1--
CONTA172
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
KEYOPT(14)
0--
1--
No.
1
2
3
Name
R1
R2
FKN
Description
Target circle radius
Superelement thickness

CONTA172
FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region
and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
PMAX
PMIN
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF

11
FKOP
12
13
14
15
FKT
COHE
TCC
FHTG

damping
Contact cohesion
16
17
18
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT

(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Conditions
Models
Modeling Conduction
Due to Friction
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Radiation
or
19
ECC
20
FHEG

21
FACT
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP
25
TOLS
27
PPCN
28
FPAT


Electric Current
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
Parameters

Detection
CONTA172
29
30
COR
STRM
Acting Time
Conditions

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC
TEMP
LENGTH
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
NX, NY
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J
Element length
AREA
Underlying solid, shell, or beam element number
Surface normal vector components
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
-
CONTA172
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
CONT:SFRIC
KN
KT
MU
CONT:SLIDE
ASLIDE
TOLN
CONT:STOTAL
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
CONT:FPRS
FSTART
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX
CNFY
CONV
RAC
TCC
TEMPS
TEMPT
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
CONT:FLUX
FXNP
CNFH
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU

Tangential contact stress
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum)
3
Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum)
3
Y
Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+SFRIC**2)
Y
6
Slip rate
Y
Pinball Region
Y
Y
Y
Contacting area
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
debonding
mode II debonding
Contact element force-x component
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Flux input
Y
Y
Contact power/area
Y
3
3
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA172
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC

electrostatic DOFs)
VOLTS
VOLTT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking

element.
Name
Item
E
I,J
Output Quantity
Name
Item

E
I
CONTA172
PRES
SFRIC
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
SLIDE
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
ISEG
ASLIDE
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
FPRS
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
ELSI
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
5
19
20
21
22
27
47
48
48
-
1
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
23
25
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
49
51
53
55
57
59
67
2
4
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
19
21
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
24
26
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
50
52
54
56
58
60
68
CONTA172
DENERI
DENERII
FSTART
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
69
71
73
75
77
70
72
74
76
78
STAT
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
GAP
FLUX
CNOS
FPRS
Contact status
Contact penetration
Contact pressure

The 2-D contact element must be defined in an X-Y plane and the Y-axis must be the axis of
symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
This 2-D contact element works with any 3-D elements in your model.
Do not use this element in any model that contains axisymmetric harmonic elements.
Node numbering must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid element or with the
original elements comprising the superelement.
When nodal detection is used and the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric
analysis, the contact pressure on that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The
contact force is accurate in this situation.
CONTA172
solid or target elements.

ANSYS Professional.
ANSYS Structural.
ANSYS Mechanical.
PLANE77
PLANE77

PLANE77 is a higher order version of the 2-D, 4-node thermal element (PLANE55). The element has one
degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The 8-node elements have compatible temperature
shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
The 8-node thermal element is applicable to a 2-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See
PLANE77 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details
about this element. If the model containing this element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element
should be replaced by an equivalent structural element (such as PLANE183). A similar axisymmetric
thermal element which accepts nonaxisymmetric loading is PLANE78.
PLANE77 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes and orthotropic material properties. A triangular-shaped element may
be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O.
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Specific heat and density are ignored for
steady-state solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties.
77.1. Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat
generation rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I). If all corner node
heat generation rates are specified, each midside node heat generation rate defaults to the average
heat generation rate of its adjacent corner nodes.
This element can also have a Z-depth specified by KEYOPT(3) and real constant THK. Be careful when
using this option with other physics, especially radiation. Radiation view factors will be based on a unit
Z-depth (only).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
PLANE77
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
THK
THK = Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
0--
1--
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane
1--
Axisymmetric
3--
Plane with Z-depth, specified via real constant THK.
PLANE77 Output Data

PLANE77

The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. For an axisymmetric
analysis the face area and the heat flow rate are on a full 360 basis. Convection heat flux is positive
out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
HGEN
TG:X, Y, SUM
TF:X, Y, SUM
FACE
NODES
AREA
HFILM
TAVG
TBULK
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
HFLUX
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Thermal gradient components and vector sum at
centroid
Face label
Face nodes
Face area
Film coefficient
Fluid bulk temperature
heat flux
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
-

Table77.2:PLANE77 Item and Component Labels lists output available through the ETABLE command
PLANE77
notation is used in Table77.2:PLANE77 Item and Component Labels:
Name
Item
FCn
Table77.2PLANE77 Item and Component Labels
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG
Item

FC1
FC2
FC3
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FC4
19
20
21
22
23
24

The 2-D element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 77.1 and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
A face with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than
(such as melting) within a coarse grid.
If the thermal element is to be replaced by a PLANE183 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element may be oriented such that face IJ and/or face KL is a free surface.
will require a fine mesh at the surface.

ANSYS Professional.
PLANE77

PLANE55
PLANE55
2-D Thermal Solid

PLANE55 can be used as a plane element or as an axisymmetric ring element with a 2-D thermal
conduction capability. The element has four nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at
each node.
The element is applicable to a 2-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. The element can also
compensate for mass transport heat flow from a constant velocity field. If the model containing the
temperature element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by an
equivalent structural element (such as PLANE182).
A similar element with midside node capability is PLANE77. A similar axisymmetric element which accepts
nonaxisymmetric loading is PLANE75.
An option exists that allows the element to model nonlinear steady-state fluid flow through a porous
medium. With this option the thermal parameters are interpreted as analogous fluid flow parameters.
PLANE55 Input Data

element is defined by four nodes and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions
correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as
described in Coordinate Systems. Specific heat and density are ignored for steady-state solutions.
Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties.
55.1.
Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation
rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I).
A mass transport option is available with KEYOPT(8). With this option the velocities VX and VY must be
input as real constants (in the element coordinate system). Also, temperatures should be specified along
the entire inlet boundary to assure a stable solution. With mass transport, you should use specific heat
(C) and density (DENS) material properties instead of enthalpy (ENTH).
The nonlinear porous flow option is selected with KEYOPT(9) = 1. For this option, temperature is
interpreted as pressure and the absolute permeabilities of the medium are input as material properties
KXX and KYY. Properties DENS and VISC are used for the mass density and viscosity of the fluid. See
PLANE55
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for a description of the
properties C and MU, which are used in calculating the coefficients of permeability, with reference to the
Z terms ignored. Temperature boundary conditions input with the D command are interpreted as
pressure boundary conditions, and heat flow boundary conditions input with the F command are
interpreted as mass flow rate (mass/time).
This element can also have a Z-depth specified by KEYOPT(3) and real constant THK. Be careful when
using this option with other physics, especially radiation. Radiation view factors will be based on a unit
Z-depth (only).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
THK, VX, VY
THK = Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
VX = Mass transport velocity in X (used only if KEYOPT(8) > 0)
VY = Mass transport velocity in Y (used only if KEYOPT(8) > 0)
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH, VISC, MU (VISC and MU used only if KEYOPT (9) = 1. Do not use ENTH
with KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2).
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
How to evaluate film coefficient:
0--
Evaluate film coefficient (if any) at average film temperature, (TS + TB)/2
PLANE55
1--
Evaluate at element surface temperature, TS
2--
Evaluate at fluid bulk temperature, TB
3--
Evaluate at differential temperature, |TS - TB|
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane
1--
Axisymmetric
3--
Plane with Z-depth, specified via real constant THK.
KEYOPT(4)
0--
1--
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side.
KEYOPT(8)
Mass transport effects:
0--
No mass transport effects
1--
Mass transport with VX and VY
2--
Same as 1 but also print mass transport heat flow
KEYOPT(9)
Nonlinear fluid flow option:
0--
PLANE55
Standard heat transfer element

1--
Nonlinear steady-state fluid flow analogy element (temperature degree of freedom
interpreted as pressure)
PLANE55 Output Data

For an axisymmetric analysis the face area and the heat flow rate are on a full 360 basis. Convection
heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. If KEYOPT(9) = 1,
the standard thermal output should be interpreted as the analogous fluid flow output. The element
output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of solution output
is given in Solution Output and of postprocessing data in Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements. See
the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
HGEN
TG:X, Y, SUM
TF:X, Y, SUM
FACE
AREA
NODES
HFILM
TBULK
TAVG
HEAT RATE
HFAVG
TBAVG
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L)
Face label
Face area
Face nodes
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Y
Y
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
PLANE55
HFLXAVG
heat flux
Heat flow rate across face by mass transport
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFLUX
HEAT FLOW BY
MASS TRANSPORT
PRESSURE GRAD
Total pressure gradient and its X and Y components
MASS FLUX
Mass flow rate per unit cross-sectional area
FLUID VELOCITY
Total fluid velocity and its X and Y components
1
1
2
3
3
3
1. If a surface load is input

2. If KEYOPT(8) = 2
3. If KEYOPT(9) = 1
Name
Item
FCn
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

FC1
FC2
FC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FC4
19
20
21
22
23
24

The element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 55.1 and the Y-axis must be the axis of
symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X
quadrants.
PLANE55
Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements.

(such as melting) within a coarse grid of elements.
If the thermal element is to be replaced by a PLANE182 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element should be oriented with face IJ or face KL as a free surface. A free
surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
If KEYOPT(8) > 0, unsymmetric matrices are produced.
When mass flow is activated (KEYOPT(8)=1 or 2), the element Peclet number should be less than
1:
Pe = *v*L*Cp/(2*k) <1.0
Where L is an element length scale based on the flow direction and element geometry. See
PLANE55 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
details.

ANSYS Professional.
This element does not have the mass transport or fluid flow options. KEYOPT(8) and KEYOPT(9)
can only be set to 0 (default).
The VX and VY real constants are not applicable.
The VISC and MU material properties are not applicable.
The element does not have the birth and death feature.
PLANE75
PLANE75
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Thermal Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE75 is used as an axisymmetric ring element with a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element
has four nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The element is a
generalization of the axisymmetric version of PLANE55 in that it allows nonaxisymmetric loading. Various
loading cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
The element is applicable to an axisymmetric geometry for steady-state or transient thermal analyses.
details about this element. If the model containing the element is also to be analyzed structurally, the
element should be replaced by the equivalent structural element (such as PLANE25). A similar thermal
element with midside node capability is PLANE78.
PLANE75 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this axisymmetric thermal solid element
are shown in Figure 75.1. The data input is essentially the same as for PLANE55 and is described in
"PLANE55 Input Data". The element input data also includes the number of harmonic waves ( MODE ) and
the symmetry condition ( ISYM ) on the MODE command. If MODE = 0 and ISYM = 1, the element behaves
similarly to the axisymmetric case of PLANE55. The MODE and ISYM parameters describe the type of
temperature distribution and are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Harmonically varying bulk temperatures or
heat fluxes (but not both) may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled
numbers on Figure 75.1. Harmonically varying heat generation rates may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation rate HG(I) is input and all others are unspecified, they
default to HG(I).

Nodes
PLANE75
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Convections--
Heat Fluxes--
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None
PLANE75 Output Data

element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The face area and the heat
flow rate are on a full 360 basis. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads. A general description of solution output is given in
PLANE75
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
HGEN
MODE
TG:X, Y, SUM, Z
TF:X, Y, SUM, Z
FACE
NODES
AREA
TAVG, TBULK
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
HFLUX
Definition
Element number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L)
Thermal gradient components and vector sum (X and Y) at
centroid
components and vector sum (X and Y) at centroid
Face label
Face nodes
Face area
Average of the two end nodal temperatures evaluated at
peak value, fluid bulk temperature evaluated at peak value
heat flux
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
2
2
2
-
1. Gradient and flux peak at THETA = 0 and THETA = 90 MODE degrees

2. Output if a surface load is input
Name
Item
PLANE75
FCn
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG
Item

FC1
FC2
FC3
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FC4
19
20
21
22
23
24

The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 75.1 and the Y-axis must be the
If the thermal element is to be replaced by the analogous structural element (PLANE25) with
surface stresses requested, the thermal element should be oriented so that face I-J (and also face
K-L, if applicable) is a free surface.
Temperature-dependent material properties (including the film coefficient) are assumed to be
axisymmetric even if the temperature varies harmonically.
If MODE = 0, properties are evaluated at the temperatures calculated in the previous substep (or
at TUNIF if for the first substep).
If MODE > 0, properties are evaluated at temperatures calculated from the previous MODE = 0
substep; if no MODE = 0 substep exists, then evaluation is done at 0.0 degrees.

There are no product restrictions for this element.
PLANE78
PLANE78
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE78 is used as an axisymmetric ring element with a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element
has one degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. PLANE78 is a generalization of PLANE77 in that
it allows nonaxisymmetric loading. Various loading cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads.
The 8-node elements have compatible temperature shapes and are well suited to model curved
boundaries.
The element is applicable to an axisymmetric geometry for steady-state or transient thermal analyses.
details about this element. If the model containing the element is also to be analyzed structurally, the
element should be replaced by the equivalent structural element (such as PLANE83).
PLANE78 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this axisymmetric thermal solid element
are shown in Figure 78.1. The data input is essentially the same as for PLANE77 and is described in
"PLANE77 Input Data". The element input data also includes the number of harmonic waves ( MODE on
the MODE command) and the symmetry condition ( ISYM on the MODE command). If MODE = 0 and
ISYM = 1, the element behaves similarly to the axisymmetric case of PLANE77. If MODE equals 1, the
temperature is assumed to be 0 along an entire diameter. The MODE and ISYM parameters describe the
type of temperature distribution and are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Harmonically varying bulk temperatures or
heat fluxes (but not both) may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled
numbers on Figure 78.1. Harmonically varying heat generation rates may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation rate HG(I) is input and all others are unspecified, they
default to HG(I). If all corner node heat generation rates are specified, each midside node heat
generation rate defaults to the average heat generation rate of its adjacent corner nodes.

Nodes
PLANE78
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Convections--
Heat Fluxes--
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
Mode Number
Special Features
Birth and death
Loading Condition
KEYOPT(1)
0--
1--
PLANE78 Output Data

PLANE78
element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The face area and the heat
flow rate are on a full 360 basis. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads. A general description of solution output is given in
available.
Name
Definition
EL
NODES
MAT
MODE
VOLU:
XC, YC
HGEN
Element number
Material number
Volume
Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N),
HG(O), HG(P)
TG:X, Y, SUM, Z Thermal gradient components and vector sum (X and Y) at
centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM, Z Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) components
and vector sum (X and Y) at centroid
FACE
Face label
NODES
Face nodes
AREA
Face area
HFILM
Film coefficient
TAVG, TBULK
Average of the two end nodal temperatures evaluated at peak
value, fluid bulk temperature at peak value
HEAT RATE
HEAT
RATE/AREA
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by input heat
flux
HFLUX
1. Gradient and flux peak at THETA = 0 and THETA = 90 Mode degrees
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
2
2
2
2
PLANE78
Name
Item
FCn
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

FC1
FC2
FC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FC4
19
20
21
22
23
24

The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 78.1 and the Y-axis must be the
A face with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than
If the thermal element is to be replaced by the analogous structural element (PLANE83) with
surface stresses requested, the thermal element should be oriented so that face IJ (and also face
KL, if applicable) is a free surface. A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another
element and not subjected to a boundary constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
Temperature-dependent material properties (including the film coefficient) are assumed to be
axisymmetric even if the temperature varies harmonically.
If MODE = 0, properties are evaluated at the temperatures calculated in the previous substep (or at
TUNIF if for the first substep).
If MODE > 0, properties are evaluated at temperatures calculated from the previous MODE = 0
substep; if no MODE = 0 substep exists, then evaluation is done at 0.0 degrees.
PLANE78

14.74. PLANE78 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
14.74.PLANE78 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Shape Functions
Equation12165
Conductivity Matrix and Quad
Heat Generation Load
Triangle
Equation12154
Vector
Same as conductivity matrix. If KEYOPT(1) = 1,
matrix is diagonalized as described in Lumped
Matrices
Convection Surface
Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to the face
Matrix and Load Vector
Integration Points
3x3
6
Same as conductivity
matrix
2

Heat Flow describes the derivation of the thermal element matrices and load vectors as well as heat flux
evaluations.

A dropped midside node implies that the edge is straight and that the temperature varies linearly along
that edge.
CONTA174
CONTA174


field contact analyses.
The element is located on the surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements with midside nodes (SOLID87,
SOLID90, SOLID98, SOLID122, SOLID123, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID231,
SOLID232, SHELL132, SHELL281, and MATRIX50).
The element has the same geometric characteristics as the solid or shell element face with which it is
connected (see Figure 174.1 below). Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the
target segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress
friction, and user-defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. The element also allows
separation of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination.
See CONTA174 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
details about this element. Other surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA173) are also available.
R = Element x-axis for isotropic friction

xo = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is not supplied (parallel to global X-axis)
x = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is supplied
CONTA174 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 174.1. The element is defined by eight nodes (the
underlying solid or shell element has midside nodes). It can degenerate to a six node element depending
on the shape of the underlying solid or shell elements. If the underlying solid or shell elements do not
have midside nodes, use CONTA173 (you may still use CONTA174 but you must drop all midside nodes).
See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information on
the use of midside nodes. The node ordering is consistent with the node ordering for the underlying solid
or shell element. The positive normal is given by the right-hand rule going around the nodes of the
element and is identical to the external normal direction of the underlying solid or shell element surface.
For shell elements, the same nodal ordering between shell and contact elements defines upper surface
CONTA174
contact; otherwise, it represents bottom surface contact. Remember the target surfaces must always be
on its outward normal direction. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for
more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
The 3-D contact surface elements (CONTA173 and CONTA174) are associated with the 3-D target
segment elements (TARGE170) via a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between
surfaces with the same real constant set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the
deformable surfaces must be represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target
Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine two target surfaces into one (targets
that share the same real constant numbers).
For isotropic friction, the applicable coordinate system is the default element coordinate system (noted
by the R and S axes in the above figure).
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command.
(These are depicted by the xo and x axes in the above figure.) The first principal direction is defined by
projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the contact surface. The second
principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact
normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to correctly model the
directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system (global or local) so that
the first direction of that system is within 45 of the tangent to the contact surface.
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by quadratic order contact and
target elements. However, in certain circumstances (for example, when the midside nodes do not lie
exactly on the initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used), using a faceted
surface in place of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses. An
optional geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute) via
CONTA174
SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific
contact elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for
Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide .
Elements.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
MAG (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
TOLS, MCC, PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
Material Properties
Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure
penetration loading. On the SFE command use LKEY = 1 to specify the pressure values, and use
LKEY = 2 to specify starting points and penetrating points.
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
CONTA174
KEYOPT(1)
0--
UX, UY, UZ
1--
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
2--
TEMP
3--
4--
TEMP, VOLT
5--
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
6--
VOLT
7--
MAG
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
CONTA174
KEYOPT(4)
0--
1--
2--
3--
On nodal point - normal from contact surface (projection-based method)
KEYOPT(5)
Note: Certain restrictions apply when the surface projection based method
(KEYOPT(4) = 3) is defined. See Using the Surface Projection Based Contact
Method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) for more information.

0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
CONTA174

2--
KEYOPT(7)
0--
No control
1--
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(8)


0--
No action
2--
KEYOPT(9)
0--
1--

2--
CONTA174
3--
4--
information.
KEYOPT(10)
0--
2--
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect:
0--
Exclude
1--
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
CONTA174
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
KEYOPT(14)
0--
1--
No.
Name
Description
1
2
3
R1
R2
FKN

FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region

and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
PMAX
PMIN
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF

11
FKOP
12
FKT

damping

(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Conditions
Models
CONTA174
13
14
15
COHE
TCC
FHTG
Contact cohesion
16
17
18
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT

Modeling Conduction
Due to Friction
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Radiation
or
19
ECC
20
FHEG

21
FACT
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP
25
TOLS
26
27
MCC
PPCN
28
FPAT
29
30
COR
STRM


Electric Current
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
Parameters

Detection
Acting Time
Conditions

CONTA174
available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
TAUR/TAUS[7]
KN
KT
MU[8]
TASS/TASR[7]
AASS/AASR[7]
TOLN
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:STOTAL
CONT:SLIDE
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
AREA
Old gap from previously converged substep (gap = negative
Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2 + TASR**2)
Slip rate
Pinball Region
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
5
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
-
3
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA174
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
CONT:FPRS
FSTART
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
CONV
RAC
TCC
TEMPS
TEMPT
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
CONT:FLUX
FXNP
CNFH
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
MCC
MFLUX
MAGS
MAGT

Y
Y
Y
Contacting area
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
debonding
mode II debonding
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Flux input
Y
Y
Contact power/area
Y
Y
electrostatic DOFs)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Magnetic potential on contact node
Y
Magnetic potential on associated target
Y

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA174

element.
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L,
Output
Quantity Name
PRES
TAUR
TAUS
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

E
I
J
K
13
1
5
9
14
18
22
26
30
34
2
6
10
15
19
23
27
31
35
3
7
11
16
20
24
28
32
36
L
4
8
12
17
21
25
29
33
37
CONTA174
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
MFLUX
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
TASR
TASS
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
ISEG
AASR
AASS
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
FPRS
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
MCC
MAGS
MAGT
ELSI
DENERI
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
41
42
43
44
45
58
98
99
99
-
38
38
42
46
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
46
50
54
62
66
70
74
78
82
86
90
94
100
104
108
112
116
120
124
128
132
136
140
39
39
43
47
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
47
51
55
63
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
129
133
137
141
40
40
44
48
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
35
39
48
52
56
64
68
72
76
80
84
88
92
96
102
106
110
114
118
122
126
130
134
138
142
41
41
45
49
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
49
53
57
65
69
73
77
81
85
89
93
97
103
107
111
115
119
123
127
131
135
139
143
CONTA174
DENERII
FSTART
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
144
148
152
156
145
149
153
157
146
150
154
158
147
151
155
159
STAT
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
GAP
FLUX
CNOS
FPRS
Contact status
Contact penetration
Contact pressure

The 3-D contact element must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid or shell
element.
You can use this element in nonlinear static or nonlinear full transient analyses.
In addition, you can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic
analyses. For these analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e.,
the status at the completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
solid, shell, beam or target elements.

ANSYS Professional.
The MU material property is not allowed
CONTA174

ANSYS Structural.
ANSYS Mechanical.
SOLID98
SOLID98
Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

current-technology element such as SOLID227.
SOLID98 is a 10-node tetrahedral version of the 8-node SOLID5 element. The element has a quadratic
displacement behavior and is well suited to model irregular meshes (such as produced from various
CAD/CAM systems). When used in structural and piezoelectric analyses, SOLID98 has large deflection
and stress stiffening capabilities.
The element is defined by ten nodes with up to six degrees of freedom at each node (see KEYOPT(1)).
details about this element. The 3-D magnetic, thermal, electric, piezoelectric, and structural field
capability is similar to that described for SOLID5.
SOLID98 Input Data

element input data is essentially the same as for SOLID5 except that there are 10 nodes instead of 8.
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (displacements, temperature, voltage, scalar magnetic potential). With the F command, the Lab
variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, HEAT, AMPS, FLUX) and VALUE corresponds to the value
(force, heat flow, current or charge, magnetic flux). Nonlinear magnetic B-H, piezoelectric, and
anisotropic elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in Material Data Tables
(Implicit Analysis). Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a
B-H curve and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate
direction where a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified
per material.
Surfaces at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using the MXWF label on
the surface load commands (no value is required.) A Maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at
these surfaces to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in solution as structural loads.
The surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body for which forces are required.
SOLID98
The body loads; temperature, heat generation rate and magnetic virtual displacement may be input
based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE]. When the
temperature degree of freedom is active (KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1 or 8), applied body force temperatures [BF,
BFE] are ignored. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures and heat generation rate default
to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT)
is applied in subsequent iterations as heat generation rate loading.
temperatures.
Air elements in which Local Jacobian forces are to be calculated may be identified by using nodal values

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 0
TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 1
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 3
TEMP if KEYOPT(1) = 8
VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 9
MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 10
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP,
KXX, KYY, KZZ, C,
ENTH, MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, plus BH, ANEL, and PIEZ data tables (see Material Data
Tables (Implicit Analysis))
Surface Loads
Pressure, Convection or Heat Flux (but not both), Radiation (using Lab = RDSF), and
Maxwell Force Flags --
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R)
Heat Generations--
SOLID98
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
MVDI--
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N), VD(O), VD(P), VD(Q), VD(R)
EF--
EFX, EFY, EFZ. See "SOLID98 Assumptions and Restrictions".
Special Features
not piezoelectric)
Large deflections
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Degree of freedom selection:
0--
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
1--
TEMP, VOLT, MAG
2--
UX, UY, UZ
3--
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
8--
TEMP
9--
VOLT
10--
MAG
KEYOPT(3)
0--
1--
SOLID98
KEYOPT(5)
0--
2--
Nodal stress or magnetic field printout
SOLID98 Output Data

Several items are illustrated in Figure 98.2. The component output directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. The reaction forces, heat flow, current, and magnetic flux at the nodes can be
printed with the OUTPR command. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output.
See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure98.2SOLID98 Element Output

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Element Number
Corner nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
SOLID98
PRES
TEMP(INPUT)
HGEN(INPUT)
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
LOC
MUX, MUY, MUZ
H:X, Y, Z
H:SUM
B:X, Y, Z
B:SUM
FJB
FMX
FVW
Combined (FJB or
FMX) force
components
EF:X, Y, Z
EF:SUM
JS:X, Y, Z
JSSUM
JHEAT:
D:X, Y, Z
D:SUM
U(E, D, M)
TG:X, Y, Z
TG:SUM
TF:X, Y, Z
TF:SUM
FACE
AREA
NODES
HFILM
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, L;
P4 at K, I, L
T(P), T(Q), T(R)
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
Stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Thermal strains
1
1
1
1
1

Output location (X, Y, Z)
Lorentz magnetic force components (X, Y, Z)
Maxwell magnetic force components (X, Y, Z)
Virtual work force components (X, Y, Z)
Combined (FJB or FMX) force components
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Electric field components

Source current density components
Vector magnitude of JS
Electric flux density components
Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical
coupled (UM) energies
Thermal gradient components
Vector magnitude of TG
Thermal flux components
Vector magnitude of TF (Heat flow rate/unit crosssection area)
Face label
Face area
Face nodes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
SOLID98
TBULK
TAVG
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFLUX
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG

heat flux
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
2
2
2
1. The solution value is output only if calculated (based upon input data). The element solution is at
the centroid.
2. Output only if a surface load is input.
the user (MP,PRXY).
Table98.2SOLID98 Miscellaneous Element Output
Description
Nodal Magnetic Field Solution

LOC, SINT, SEQV, EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, 1
XZ), EPEL(1, 2, 3), S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,
XZ), S(1, 2, 3)
H, HSUM, B, BSUM
2
R
-
1. Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2 and structural DOF

2. Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2 and magnetic DOF
Name
Item
E
I,J,...,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,L
FCn -
SOLID98

Output
Quantity Name
P1
P2
P3
P4
MUX
MUY
MUZ
FVWX
FVWY
FVWZ
FVWSUM
UE
UD
UM
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
2
4
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
5
7
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG

E
I
J
K
3
8
10
6
9
12

FC1
FC2
FC3
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
FC4
37
38
39
40
41
42

When using SOLID98 with SOURC36 elements, the source elements must be placed so that the
resulting Hs field fulfills boundary conditions for the total field.
The element must not have a zero volume. Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure
98.1 or may have node L below the IJK plane. in the Modeling and Meshing Guide
parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) for more information about
the use of midside nodes.
The difference scalar magnetic potential option is restricted to singly-connected permeable
regions, so that as in these regions, the resulting field H0. The reduced scalar and
general scalar potential options do not have this restriction.
Temperatures and heat generation rates, if internally calculated, include any user defined heat
generation rates.
Large deflection capabilities available for KEYOPT(1) = 2 and 3 are not available for KEYOPT(1) =
0. Stress stiffening is available for KEYOPT(1) = 0, 2, and 3.
SOLID98
The electric field body load is not used during solution and is applicable only to POST1 charged
particle tracing.
In an MSP analysis, avoid using a closed domain and use an open domain, closed with natural flux
parallel boundary conditions on the MAG degree of freedom, or infinite elements. If you use a
closed domain, you may see incorrect results when the formulation is applied using SOLID5,
SOLID96, or SOLID98 elements and the boundary conditions are not satisfied by the Hs field load
calculated by the Biot-Savart procedure based on SOURC36 current source primitive input.
If you used the MAG degree of freedom, you cannot restart a job in ANSYS Mechanical using
Jobname.DB and Jobname.ESAV files that were created by ANSYS Multiphysics.

ANSYS Mechanical.
This element does not have magnetic capability.
The MAG degree of freedom is not active.
KEYOPT(1) cannot be set to 10. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) or 1, the MAG degree of freedom is
inactive.
The magnetic material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are not allowed.
The Maxwell force flags and magnetic virtual displacements body loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag.
The only active degrees of freedom are MAG and VOLT.
If KEYOPT(1) = 1, the TEMP degree of freedom is inactive. KEYOPT(1) settings of 0, 2, 3 and 8
are not allowed.
PERZ, plus the BH data table).
The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The only applicable body loads are
temperatures (for material property evaluation only) and magnetic virtual displacements.
The element does not have stress stiffening or birth and death features.
SOLID5
SOLID5
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

current-technology element such as SOLID226.
SOLID5 has a 3-D magnetic, thermal, electric, piezoelectric, and structural field capability with limited
coupling between the fields. The element has eight nodes with up to six degrees of freedom at each
node. Scalar potential formulations (reduced RSP, difference DSP, or general GSP) are available for
modeling magnetostatic fields in a static analysis. When used in structural and piezoelectric analyses,
SOLID5 has large deflection and stress stiffening capabilities. See SOLID5 in the Theory Reference for
the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. Coupled field
elements with similar field capabilities are PLANE13, SOLID62, and SOLID98.
SOLID5 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes and the material properties. The type of units (MKS or user defined) is
specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of MUZERO. The
EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZERO = 4 x 10 -7 Henries/meter. In addition to MUZERO,
orthotropic relative permeability is specified through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ material property
labels.
MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ represent vector components of the coercive force for permanent magnet
materials. The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root of the sum of the squares of the
components. The direction of polarization is determined by the components MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ.
Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. Orthotropic
material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Nonlinear magnetic, piezoelectric, and anisotropic
elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in Material Data Tables (Implicit
Analysis). Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H curve
and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction where
a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per material.
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (displacements, temperature, voltage, scalar magnetic potential). With the F command, the Lab
SOLID5
variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, HEAT, AMPS, FLUX) and VALUE corresponds to the value
(force, heat flow, current or charge, magnetic flux).
Surfaces at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using the MXWF label on
the surface load commands (no value is required.) A maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at
these surfaces to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in solution as structural loads.
The surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body for which forces are required.
The body loads, temperature, heat generation rate and magnetic virtual displacement may be input
based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE]. When the
temperature degree of freedom is active (KEYOPT(1) = 0,1 or 8), applied body force temperatures [BF,
BFE] are ignored. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperature and heat generation rate default
to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT)
is applied in subsequent iterations as heat generation rate.
temperatures.
Current for the scalar magnetic potential options is defined with the SOURC36 element the command
macro RACE, or through electromagnetic coupling. The various types of scalar magnetic potential
solution options are defined with the MAGOPT command.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 0
TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 1
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 3
TEMP if KEYOPT (1) = 8
VOLT if KEYOPT (1) = 9
MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 10
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP, KXX, KYY, KZZ, C,
ENTH, MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, plus BH, ANEL, and PIEZ data tables (see Material Data
Tables (Implicit Analysis))
SOLID5
Surface Loads
Pressure, Convection or Heat Flux (but not both),Radiation (using Lab = RDSF), and
Maxwell Force Flags --
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Heat Generations--
Magnetic Virtual Displacements--
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N), VD(O), VD(P)
Electric Field--
EFX, EFY, EFZ. See "SOLID5 Assumptions and Restrictions".
Special Features
not piezoelectric)
Large deflection
Stress stiffening
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
0--
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
1--
TEMP, VOLT, MAG
2--
UX, UY, UZ
3--
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
8--
TEMP
9--
VOLT
SOLID5
10--
MAG
KEYOPT(3)
Extra shapes:
0--
Include extra shapes
1--
Do not include extra shapes
KEYOPT(5)
0--
2--
Nodal stress or magnetic field printout
SOLID5 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is in two forms
Additional element output as shown in Table5.1:SOLID5 Element Output Definitions.
coordinate system. The reaction forces, heat flow, current, and magnetic flux at the nodes can be
printed with the OUTPR command. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output.
See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure5.2SOLID5 Element Output

SOLID5
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
HGEN
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
LOC
MUX, MUY, MUZ
H: X, Y, Z
H:SUM
B:X, Y, Z
B:SUM
FJB
FMX
FVW
FMAG:X, Y, Z
EF:X, Y, Z
EF:SUM
JS:X, Y, Z
JSSUM
JHEAT:
D:X, Y, Z
Definition
Element Number
Element nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Element material number
Element volume
P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at J, K, O, N;
P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
Input Temperatures: T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N),
T(O), T(P)
Input Heat Generations: HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L),
HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Component stresses
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Thermal strains
1
1
1
1
1

Lorentz magnetic force components (X, Y, Z)
Maxwell magnetic force components (X, Y, Z)
Virtual work force components (X, Y, Z)
Electric field components (X, Y, Z)
Source current density components
Vector magnitude of JS
Electric flux density components
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SOLID5
D:SUM
UE, UD, UM
TG:X, Y, Z
TG:SUM
TF:X, Y, Z
TF:SUM
FACE
AREA
NODES
HFILM
TBULK
TAVG
HEAT RATE
HEAT RATE/AREA
HFLUX
HFAVG
TBAVG
HFLXAVG
Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical
coupled (UM) energies
Thermal gradient components
Vector magnitude of TG
Thermal flux components
Vector magnitude of TF (heat flow rate/unit cross-section
area)
Face label
Face area
Face nodes
heat flux
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
2
2
2
1. Element solution at the centroid printed out only if calculated (based on input data).
2. Nodal stress or magnetic field solution (only if KEYOPT(5) = 2). The solution results are repeated
at each node and only if a surface load is input.
the user (MP,PRXY).
using the Sequence Number method. The following notation is used in Table5.2:SOLID5 Item and
Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
I,J,...,P
FCn
SOLID5

Output
Quantity
Name
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
MUX
MUY
MUZ
FVWX
FVWY
FVWZ
FVWSUM
UE
UD
UM
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
Output Quantity
Name
AREA
HFAVG
TAVG
TBAVG
HEAT RATE
HFLXAVG

I
J
K
L
M
N
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
2
5
18
-
3
-
10
13
14
17
-
8
19
21
7
12
22
11
16
23
15
20
24

FC1
FC2
FC3
FC4
FC5
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
6
9
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
FC6
49
50
51
52
53
54

When using SOLID5 with SOURC36 elements, the source elements must be placed so that the
resulting Hs field fulfills boundary conditions for the total field.
The element must not have a zero volume or a zero length side. This occurs most frequently when
the element is not numbered properly.
Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 5.1 or may have the planes IJKL and MNOP
interchanged.
A prism shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate node numbers as described in
The difference scalar magnetic potential option is restricted to singly-connected permeable
regions, so that as in these regions, the resulting field H0. The reduced scalar and
general scalar potential options do not have this restriction.
At a free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
boundary constraint), the normal component of magnetic flux density (B) is assumed to be zero.
SOLID5
Temperatures and heat generation rates, if internally calculated, include any user defined heat
generation rates.
The thermal, electrical, magnetic, and structural terms are coupled through an iterative procedure.
Large deflection capabilities available for KEYOPT(1) = 2 and 3 are not available for KEYOPT(1) =
0.
Stress stiffening is available for KEYOPT(1) = 0, 2, and 3.
Do not constrain all VOLT DOFs to the same value in a piezoelectric analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or
3). Perform a pure structural analysis instead (KEYOPT(1) = 2).
The electric field body load is not used during solution and is applicable only to POST1 charged
particle tracing.
In an MSP analysis, avoid using a closed domain and use an open domain, closed with natural flux
parallel boundary conditions on the MAG degree of freedom, or infinite elements. If you use a
closed domain, you may see incorrect results when the formulation is applied using SOLID5,
SOLID96, or SOLID98 elements and the boundary conditions are not satisfied by the Hs field load
calculated by the Biot-Savart procedure based on SOURC36 current source primitive input.
If you used the MAG degree of freedom, you cannot restart a job in ANSYS Mechanical using
Jobname.DB and Jobname.ESAV files that were created by ANSYS Multiphysics.

ANSYS Mechanical.
This element does not have magnetic capability.
The MAG degree of freedom is not active.
KEYOPT(1) cannot be set to 10. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) or 1, the MAG degree of freedom is
inactive.
The magnetic material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are not allowed.
The Maxwell force flags and magnetic virtual displacements body loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag.
The only active degrees of freedom are MAG and VOLT.
KEYOPT(1) settings of 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 are invalid.
SOLID5
PERZ, plus the BH data table).
The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The only applicable body loads are
temperatures (for material property evaluation only) and magnetic virtual displacements.
The element does not have stress stiffening or birth and death features.
14.5. SOLID5 - 3-D Coupled-Field Solid
14.5.SOLID5 - 3-D Coupled-Field Solid
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Magnetic Potential Coefficient

Matrix
Electrical Conductivity Matrix
Thermal Conductivity Matrix
Stiffness Matrix and Thermal
Expansion Load Vector
Equation12229
Equation12228
Equation12227
Equation12217 or, if modified extra
shapes are included (KEYOPT(3) = 0),
Equation12232
Piezoelectric Coupling Matrix Same as combination of stiffness matrix and
conductivity matrix.
Same as conductivity matrix. Matrix is
diagonalized as described in 3-D Lines
Mass and Stress Stiffening
Matrices
Equation12217
Load Vector due to Imposed Same as coefficient or conductivity matrix
Thermal and Electric
Gradients, Heat Generation,
Joule Heating, Magnetic
Forces, Magnetism due to
Source Currents and
Permanent Magnets
Same as stiffness or conductivity matrix
Load Vector due to
specialized to the surface.
Convection Surfaces and
Pressures
Integration Points
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
References: Wilson([38]), Taylor([49]), Coulomb([76]), Mayergoyz([119]), Gyimesi([141],[149])

evaluations. Heat Flow describes the derivation of thermal element matrices and load vectors as well as
heat flux evaluations. Derivation of Electromagnetic Matrices discusses the scalar potential method,
which is used by this element. Piezoelectrics discusses the piezoelectric capability used by the element.
CONTA175
CONTA175
2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact


CONTA175 may be used to represent contact and sliding between two surfaces (or between a node and
a surface, or between a line and a surface) in 2-D or 3-D. The element is applicable to 2-D or 3-D
structural and coupled field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of solid, beam, and
shell elements. 3-D solid and shell elements with midside nodes are supported for bonded and no
separation contact. For other contact types, lower order solid and shell elements are recommended.
Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE169,
TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction
with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to
simulate interface delamination. See CONTA175 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
CONTA175 Input Data

The geometry is shown in Figure 175.1. The element is defined by one node. The underlying elements
can be 2-D or 3-D solid, shell, or beam elements. The 3-D underlying solid or shell elements must have
no midside nodes. CONTA175 represents 2-D or 3-D contact depending on whether the associated 2-D
(TARGE169) or 3-D (TARGE170) segments are used. Remember, contact can occur only when the
outward normal direction of the 2-D or 3-D target surface points to the contact surface. See Generating
Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating elements
automatically using the ESURF command.
For isotropic friction, the default element coordinate system (based on node connectivity of the
underlying elements) is used. For orthotropic friction, the global coordinate system is used by default, or
you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The principal directions are
computed on the target surface and then projected onto the contact element (node). The first principal
direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the target
surface. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction
and the target normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to
correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system
(global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45 of the tangent to the contact
surface.
CONTA175
The contact surface elements are associated with the target segment elements (TARGE169, TARGE170)
via a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between surfaces with the same real
constant set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be
Technology Guide for more information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the
same boundary of solid elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same
geometry but relate to separate targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you
must combine the two target surfaces into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
See the Contact Technology Guide for a detailed discussion on contact and using the contact elements.
"Node-to-Surface Contact" discusses CONTA175 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTAC175 Input Summary". A general description of
CONTAC175 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, (UZ) (if KEYOPT(1) = 0
UX, UY, (UZ), TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, (UZ), TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, (UZ), VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
AZ (2-D), MAG (3-D) (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
TOLS, MCC, , , COR, STRM
Material Properties
CONTA175

Guide)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0--
UX, UY, UZ
1--
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
2--
TEMP
3--
4--
TEMP, VOLT
5--
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
6--
VOLT
7--
AZ (2-D) or MAG (3-D)
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
CONTA175
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(3)
Contact model:
0--
Contact force based model (default)
1--
Contact traction model
KEYOPT(4)
Contact normal direction:
0--
Normal to target surface (default)
1--
Normal from contact nodes
2--
Normal from contact nodes (used for shell/beam bottom surface contact when shell/beam
thickness is accounted for)
3--
Normal to target surface (used for shell/beam bottom surface contact when shell/beam
thickness is accounted for)
KEYOPT(5)
rigid surface constraint, set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint.

0--
CONTA175
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(7)
0--
No control
1--
2--
Change in contact predictions are made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment
3--
4--
CONTA175
KEYOPT(8)
0--
No action
2--
KEYOPT(9)
0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
information.
KEYOPT(10)
Contact Stiffness Update:
0--
2--
KEYOPT(11)
Shell Thickness Effect (only for real constant based thickness input):
0--
Exclude
1--
CONTA175
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
Note: When KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 is used with the MPC algorithm to model surface-based
constraints, the KEYOPT(12) setting will have an impact on the local coordinate
system of the contact element nodes. See Specifying a Local Coordinate System in
the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
No.
Name
Description
1
2
3
R1
R2
FKN

FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region

and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
CONTA175
PMAX
PMIN
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF

11
FKOP
12
13
14
15
FKT
COHE
TCC
FHTG

damping
Contact cohesion
16
17
18
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT
(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Conditions
Models
Modeling Conduction
Due to Friction
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Radiation
or
19
ECC
20
FHEG

21
FACT
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP
25
TOLS
26
29
30
MCC
COR
STRM


Electric Current
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
[1]
Parameters

Detection
Conditions
1. For the force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0), TNOP is the allowable tensile contact force.

CONTA175
Additional element output as shown in Table175.2:CONTA175 Element Output Definitions.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, (ZC)
TEMP
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
TAUR/TAUS[8]
KN
KT
MU[9]
TASS/TASR[8]
AASS/AASR[8]
TOLN
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I
Location where results are reported (same as nodal location)
Temperature T(I)
AREA for 3-D, Length for 2-D
Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length for
contact force model, units: Force/Length 3 for contract traction
model)
Current tangent contact stiffness (same units as KN)
Total (algebraic sum) sliding in S and R directions (3-D only)
Total (absolute sum) sliding in S and R directions (3-D only)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
-
2
2
5
2
2
5
5
Y
3
3
Y
5
3
3
Y
CONTA175
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:STOTAL
CONT:SLIDE
NX, NY
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:SLIDE
ASLIDE
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX[4]
CNFY
CNFZ
CONV
RAC
TCC
TEMPS
TEMPT
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
CONT:FLUX
FXNP
CNFH
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) (3-D only)

2
Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) (3-D only) 2
Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2+TASR**2) (3-D only)
Y
Surface normal vector components (2-D only)
Y
Tangential contact stress (2-D only)
2
Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum) (2-D only)
3
Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum) (2-D only)
3
7
Slip rate
Y
Pinball Region
Y
2
Y
Contacting area
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
debonding
mode II debonding
Contact element force-Z component (3-D only)
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Flux input
Y
Y
Contact power/area
Y
6
electrostatic DOFs)
Y
Y
2
2
Y
2
3
3
7
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
CONTA175
MCC
MFLUX
AZS/MAGS
AZT/MAGT

2-D/3-D Magnetic potential on contact node
2-D/3-D Magnetic potential on associated target
6
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
Y
Y

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking
2. For the force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0), the unit of the quantities is FORCE. For the tractionbased model (KEYOPT(3) = 1), the unit is FORCE/AREA.
5. For the force-based model, the unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH. For the traction-ased model, the
unit is FORCE/LENGTH3 .
6. The units of TCC, ECC, and MCC in the traction-based model should be the units of TCC, ECC, and
MCC of the force-based model per area.
Table175.3:CONTA175 (3-D) Item and Sequence Numbers and Table175.4:CONTA175 (2-D) Item
and Sequence Numbers list outputs available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence
Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and
Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in the
tables below:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table175.2:CONTA175 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
I
sequence number for data at nodes I
CONTA175
Table175.3CONTA175 (3-D) Item and Sequence Numbers

Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
PRES
TAUR
TAUS
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
MFLUX
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
TASR
TASS
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
ISEG
AASR
AASS
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
13
41
42
43
44
45
58
98
99
1
5
9
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
38
42
46
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
46
50
54
62
66
70
78
82
86
90
94
-
CONTA175
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
MCC
MAGS
MAGT
ELSI
DENERI
DENERII
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
99
-
100
104
108
112
116
120
124
128
132
136
140
144
148
152

Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
PRES
SFRIC
FLUX
FDDIS
FXCV
FXRD
FXCD
FXNP
JCONT
CCONT
HJOU
MFLUX
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
SLIDE
KN
KT
TOLN
IPENE
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
ISEG
CAREA
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
5
19
20
21
22
27
1
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
18
20
22
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
23
-
CONTA175
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
TEMPS
TEMPT
CONV
RAC
TCC
CNFH
ECURT
ECHAR
ECC
VOLTS
VOLTT
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
MCC
AZS
AZT
ELSI
DENERI
DENERII
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
47
48
48
-
29
31
33
37
39
41
43
45
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
STAT
PENE
PRES
SFRIC
STOT
SLIDE
GAP
CNOS
Contact status
Contact penetration
Contact pressure for the traction-based model. Contact normal force for
the force-based model.
Contact friction stress for the traction-based model. Friction force for
the force-based model.
Contact total stress (pressure plus friction) for the traction-based
model. Total contact force for the force-based model.

CONTA175

When the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric analysis, the contact
pressure on that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The contact force is
accurate in this situation.

ANSYS Professional.
ANSYS Structural.
The AZ (2-D) and MAG (3-D) DOFs (KEYOPT(1) = 7) are not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical.
The AZ (2-D) and MAG (3-D) DOFs (KEYOPT(1) = 7) are not allowed.
14.171.CONTA175 - 2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Geometry
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Normal Direction
Sliding Direction
None
None
None
None

The CONTA175 description is the same as for CONTA174 - 3-D 8-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
except that it is a one node contact element.
14.171.2.Contact Models
The contact model can be either contact force based (KEYOPT(3) = 0, default) or contact traction based
(KEYOPT(3) = 1). For a contact traction based model, ANSYS can determine the area associated with
the contact node. For the single point contact case, a unit area will be used which is equivalent to the
contact force based model.
14.171.3.Contact Forces
In order to satisfy contact compatibility, forces are developed in a direction normal (n-direction) to the
target that will tend to reduce the penetration to an acceptable numerical level. In addition to normal
contact forces, friction forces are developed in directions that are tangent to the target plane.
(14
404)
where:
F n = normal contact force
K n = contact normal stiffness (input as FKN on R command)
un = contact gap size
(14
405)
where:
F T = tangential contact force
K T = tangential contact stiffness (input as FKT on R command)
uT = contact slip distance
For orthotropic friction, eq is computed using the expression:

(14
406)
where:
eq = equivalent coefficient of friction for orthotropic friction
1 , 2 = coefficients of friction in first and second principal directions (input as MU1 and MU2 using TB
command with Lab = FRIC)
14.170.CONTA174 - 3-D 8-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrices
Geometry
Quad
Triangle
Shape Functions
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (has midside
nodes) Equation1283,
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (has midside
nodes) Equation12112
Integration Points
2x2
3
14.170.1.Introduction
CONTA174 is an 8-node element that is intended for general rigid-flexible and flexible-flexible contact
analysis. In a general contact analysis, the area of contact between two (or more) bodies is generally
not known in advance. CONTA174 is applicable to 3-D geometries. It may be applied for contact
between solid bodies or shells.
14.170.2.Contact Kinematics
Contact Pair
In studying the contact between two bodies, the surface of one body is conventionally taken as a
contact surface and the surface of the other body as a target surface. For rigid-flexible contact, the
contact surface is associated with the deformable body; and the target surface must be the rigid surface.
For flexible-flexible contact, both contact and target surfaces are associated with deformable bodies. The
contact and target surfaces constitute a "Contact Pair".
The CONTA174 contact element is associated with the 3-D target segment elements (TARGE170) using
a shared real constant set number. This element is located on the surface of 3-D solid, shell elements
(called underlying element). It has the same geometric characteristics as the underlying elements. The
contact surface can be either side or both sides of the shell or beam elements.
Location of Contact Detection

Figure14.32Contact Detection Point Location at Gauss Point
CONTA174 is a surface-to-surface contact element. The contact detection points are the integration
points and are located either at nodal points or Gauss points. The contact element is constrained against
penetration into the target surface at its integration points. However, the target surface can, in principle,
penetrate through into the contact surface. See Figure 14.32. CONTA174 uses Gauss integration points
by default (Cescotto and Charlier([213]), Cescotto and Zhu([214])), which generally provides more
accurate results than when using the nodes themselves as the integration points. A disadvantage of
using nodal contact points is that, for a uniform pressure, the kinematically equivalent forces at the
nodes are unrepresentative and indicate release at corners.
The surface projection method (based on Puso and Laursen ([382] and [383])) is available for the 3-D
elements, CONTA173 and CONTA174. This option enforces contact constraints on an overlapping region
of contact and target surfaces (see Figure 14.33) rather than on individual contact nodes or Gauss
points. This method passes patch tests and generally offers smoother stress distributions (for both
contact elements and underlying elements) than the other contact detection options. The contact forces
vary smoothly during large sliding, and the forces do not jump when contact nodes slide off edges of
target surfaces. The surface projection method also satisfies moment equilibrium for frictional or bonded
contact. Other contact detection options may not satisfy moment equilibrium exactly when an offset
exists along the contact normal direction under certain circumstances (for example, when using a
penalty based formulation, when accounting for shell thickness effects, or when using a user-defined
contact offset).
Figure14.33Surface Projection Based Contact
Penetration Distance
The penetration distance is measured along the normal direction of the contact surface (at integration
points) to the target surface (Cescotto and Charlier([214])). See Figure 14.34. It is uniquely defined
even when the geometry of the target surface is not smooth. Such discontinuities may be due to
physical corners on the target surface, or may be introduced by a numerical discretization process (e.g.
finite elements). Based on the present way of calculating penetration distance, there is no restriction on
the shape of the rigid target surface. Smoothing is not always necessary for the concave corner. For the
convex corner, it is still recommended to smooth out the region of abrupt curvature changes (see Figure
14.35).
Figure14.34Penetration Distance
Figure14.35Smoothing Convex Corner
For the surface projection based contact method, the contact detection remains at contact nodal points
and the contact normal is perpendicular to the contact surface. However, the contact penetration
distance is computed over the overlapping region (see Figure 14.33) in an average sense.
Pinball Algorithm
The position and the motion of a contact element relative to its associated target surface determine the
contact element status. The program monitors each contact element and assigns a status:
STAT
STAT
STAT
STAT
=
=
=
=
0
1
2
3
Open far-field contact

Open near-field contact
Sliding contact
Sticking contact
A contact element is considered to be in near-field contact when the element enters a pinball region,
which is centered on the integration point of the contact element. The computational cost of searching
for contact depends on the size of the pinball region. Far-field contact element calculations are simple
and add few computational demands. The near-field calculations (for contact elements that are nearly or
actually in contact) are slower and more complex. The most complex calculations occur the elements are
in actual contact.
Setting a proper pinball region is useful to overcome spurious contact definitions if the target surface
has several convex regions. The current default setting should be appropriate for most contact problems.
14.170.3.Frictional Model
Coulomb's Law
In the basic Coulomb friction model, two contacting surfaces can carry shear stresses. When the
equivalent shear stress is less than a limit frictional stress (lim), no motion occurs between the two
surfaces. This state is known as sticking. The Coulomb friction model is defined as:
(14
358)
(14
359)
where:
lim = limit frictional stress
= coefficient of friction for isotropic friction (input as MU using either TB command with Lab = FRIC
or MP command; orthotropic friction defined below
P = contact normal pressure
b = contact cohesion (input as COHE on R command)
Once the equivalent frictional stress exceeds lim, the contact and target surfaces will slide relative to
each other. This state is known as sliding. The sticking/sliding calculations determine when a point
transitions from sticking to sliding or vice versa. The contact cohesion provides sliding resistance even
with zero normal pressure.
CONTA174 provides an option for defining a maximum equivalent frictional stress max (input as
TAUMAX on RMORE command) so that, regardless of the magnitude of the contact pressure, sliding will
occur if the magnitude of the equivalent frictional stress reaches this value.
Figure14.36Friction Model
Contact elements offer two models for Coulomb friction: isotropic friction and orthotropic friction.
Isotropic Friction
The isotropic friction model uses a single coefficient of friction iso based on the assumption of uniform
stick-slip behavior in all directions. It is available with all 2-D and 3-D contact elements (CONTA171,
CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, and CONTA178).
Orthotropic Friction
The orthotropic friction model is based on two coefficients of friction, 1 and 2 , to model different
stick-slip behavior in different directions. Use orthotropic friction model in 3-D contact only (CONTA173,
CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177). The two coefficients are defined in two orthogonal
sliding directions called the principal directions (see Element Reference for more details). The frictional
stress in principal direction i=1,2 is given by:
(14
360)
By appropriately scaling the frictional stresses in principal directions the expressions for scaled limit
frictional stress (
) and scaled equivalent frictional stress (
) for orthotropic friction can be written
in a form similar to isotropic friction (Michalowski and Mroz([361])):
(14
361)
(14
362)
(14
363)
(14
364)
where:
= scaled frictional stress in direction i = 1,2
= scaled equivalent frictional stress
= scaled limit frictional stress
While scaled frictional stresses are used for friction computations, actual frictional stresses are output
after applying the inverse scaling in Equation14361.
The coefficient of friction ( 1 and 2 ) can have dependence on time, temperature, normal pressure,
sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity (defined as fields on the TBFIELD command). Suitable
combinations of up to two fields can be used to define dependency, for example, temperature or
temperature and sliding distance; see Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) in the Element Reference for details.

CONTA174 provides the exponential friction model, which is used to smooth the transition between the
static coefficient of friction and the dynamic coefficient of friction according to the formula (Benson and
Hallquist([317])):
(14
365)
where:
v = slip rate
s= Rf d = static coefficient of friction

R = ratio of static and dynamic friction (input as FACT on RMORE command)
c = decay coefficient (input as DC on RMORE command)
Integration of Frictional Law

The integration of the frictional mode is similar to that of nonassociated theory of plasticity (see RateIndependent Plasticity). In each substep that sliding friction occurs, an elastic predictor is computed in
contact traction space. The predictor is modified with a radial return mapping function, providing both a
small elastic deformation along with a sliding response as developed by Giannakopoulos([135]).
The flow rule giving the slip increment for orthotropic friction can be written as:
(14
366)
where:
dui = slip increment in principal direction i = 1, 2
= Lagrange multiplier for friction
By appropriately scaling the slip increment, it can be shown that the Lagrange multiplier is equal to the
scaled equivalent slip increment:
(14
367)
(14
368)
and the direction of scaled slip increment is same as that of scaled frictional stress.
(14
369)
Thus, computations for orthotropic friction use the same framework as isotropic friction except for scaled
slip increments and scaled frictional stresses which are converted to actual values for output.
User-defined Friction
For friction models that do not follow Coulombs law, you can write a USERFRIC subroutine. Refer to the
Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description on writing a USERFRIC
subroutine. You can use it with any 2-D or 3-D contact element (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173,
CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, and CONTA178) with penalty method for tangential
contact (select KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3). Use the TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER to choose the
user define friction option, and specify the friction properties on the TBDATA command.
Friction models involve nonlinear material behavior, so only experienced users who have a good
understanding of the theory and finite element programming should attempt to write a USERFRIC
subroutine.
Algorithmic Symmetrization
Contact problems involving friction produce non-symmetric stiffness. Using an unsymmetric solver
(NROPT,UNSYM) is more computationally expensive than a symmetric solver for each iteration. For this
reason, a symmetrization algorithm developed by Laursen and Simo([216]) is used by which most
frictional contact problems can be solved using solvers for symmetric systems. If frictional stresses have
a substantial influence on the overall displacement field and the magnitude of the frictional stresses is
highly solution dependent, any symmetric approximation to the stiffness matrix may provide a low rate
of convergence. In such cases, the use of an unsymmetric stiffness matrix is more computationally
efficient.
14.170.4.Contact Algorithm
Four different contact algorithms are implemented in this element (selected by KEYOPT(2)).
Pure penalty method
Augmented Lagrangian method (Simo and Laursens([215]))
Pure Lagrange multiplier method (Bathe([2]))
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on frictional direction
Pure Penalty Method

This method requires both contact normal and tangential stiffness. The main drawback is that the
amount penetration between the two surfaces depends on this stiffness. Higher stiffness values decrease
the amount of penetration but can lead to ill-conditioning of the global stiffness matrix and to
convergence difficulties. Ideally, you want a high enough stiffness that contact penetration is acceptably
small, but a low enough stiffness that the problem will be well-behaved in terms of convergence or
matrix ill-conditioning.
The contact traction vector is:
(14
370)
where:
P = normal contact pressure
1 = frictional stress in direction 1
2 = frictional stress in direction 2
The contact pressure is:
(14
371)
where:
K n = contact normal stiffness
The frictional stress for isotropic friction is obtained by Coulomb's law:
(14
372)
where:
K s = tangential contact stiffness (input as FKT on R command)

ui = slip increment in direction i over the current substep
= equivalent slip increment over the current substep
iso = coefficient of friction
= frictional stress in direction i = 1,2 at the end of previous substep
For orthotropic friction, slip increment and frictional stress are scaled so that
(14
373)
where:
= scaled tangential contact stiffness in principal direction i = 1, 2
= slip increment in principal direction i = 1, 2 over the current substep
= scaled equivalent slip increment over the current substep
eq = equivalent coefficient of friction
= scaled frictional stress in principal direction i = 1, 2 at the end of previous substep
For consistency between scaled friction stress and scaled slip increment, the scaled tangential contact
stiffness in principal direction i = 1, 2 must be defined as:
(14
374)
Augmented Lagrangian Method

The augmented Lagrangian method is an iterative series of penalty updates to find the Lagrange
multipliers (i.e., contact tractions). Compared to the penalty method, the augmented Lagrangian method
usually leads to better conditioning and is less sensitive to the magnitude of the contact stiffness
coefficient. However, in some analyses, the augmented Lagrangian method may require additional
iterations, especially if the deformed mesh becomes excessively distorted.
The contact pressure is defined by:
(14
375)
where:
= compatibility tolerance (input as FTOLN on R command)

i = Lagrange multiplier component at iteration i
The Lagrange multiplier component i is computed locally (for each element) and iteratively.
Pure Lagrange Multiplier Method

The pure Lagrange multiplier method does not require contact stiffness. Instead it requires chattering
control parameters. Theoretically, the pure Lagrange multiplier method enforces zero penetration when
contact is closed and "zero slip" when sticking contact occurs. However the pure Lagrange multiplier
method adds additional degrees of freedom to the model and requires additional iterations to stabilize
contact conditions. This will increase the computational cost. This algorithm has chattering problems due
to contact status changes between open and closed or between sliding and sticking. The other main
drawback of the Lagrange multiplier method is overconstraint in the model. The model is
overconstrained when a contact constraint condition at a node conflicts with a prescribed boundary
condition on that degree of freedom (e.g., D command) at the same node. Overconstraints can lead to
convergence difficulties and/or inaccurate results. The Lagrange multiplier method also introduces zero
diagonal terms in the stiffness matrix, so that iterative solvers (e.g., PCG) can not be used.
The contact traction components (i.e., Lagrange multiplier parameters) become unknown DOFs for each
element. The associated Newton-Raphson load vector is:
(14
376)
Lagrange Multiplier on Contact Normal and Penalty on Frictional Direction

In this method only the contact normal pressure is treated as a Lagrange multiplier. The tangential
contact stresses are calculated based on the penalty method (see Equation14372).
This method allows only a very small amount of slip for a sticking contact condition. It overcomes
chattering problems due to contact status change between sliding and sticking which often occurs in the
pure Lagrange Multiplier method. Therefore this algorithm treats frictional sliding contact problems much
better than the pure Lagrange method.
14.170.5.Energy and Momentum Conserving Contact

To correctly model the physical interaction between contact and target surfaces in a transient dynamic
analysis, the contact forces must maintain force and energy balance, and ensure proper transfer of
linear momentum. This requires imposing additional constraints on relative velocities between contact
and target surfaces (see Laursen and Chawla ([376]), and Armero and Petcz ([377])).
Impact Constraints and Contact Forces

In ANSYS the penetration constraints and the relative velocity constraints between contact and target
surfaces are collectively referred to as impact constraints. These constraints can be selected by setting
KEYOPT(7) = 4 for any of the 2D or 3D contact elements and are valid for all types of contact
interactions (flexible-to-flexible, flexible-to-rigid, and rigid-to-rigid) with and without friction.
An automatic time stepping scheme is used to predict the time of impact and adjust the size of the time
increment to minimize penetration. When contact is detected, the relative velocity constraints are
imposed using one of the four contact algorithms: pure penalty method, augmented Lagrangian method,
pure Lagrange multiplier method, or Lagrange multiplier in contact normal and penalty in frictional
direction method. In the case of rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 1) the relative velocity constraint is
imposed in the tangential direction also to prevent slip. In the case of standard contact (KEYOPT(12) =
0) with friction, the slip increment and frictional stress are computed by taking the relative velocity
constraint into consideration.
For the pure penalty method, contact pressure P and friction stresses i for isotropic friction are defined
as:
(14
377)
where:
K n = contact normal stiffness
= algorithmic contact gap size (based on the relative velocity constraint)
Pn-1 = normal contact pressure at the end of previous substep

and:
(14
378)
where:
K s = tangential contact stiffness (input as FKT on R command)
= slip increment in direction i over the current substep
= equivalent slip increment over the current substep
= algorithmic slip increment in direction i over the current substep

=
algorithmic equivalent slip increment over the current substep
iso = coefficient of friction
= frictional stress in direction i = 1,2 at the end of previous substep
For other contact algorithms, the expressions for contact pressure and frictional stresses are defined in a
similar manner as shown in Equation14375 and Equation14376 but with additional variables as
shown above in Equation14377 and Equation14378.
Energy and Momentum Balance

Imposition of the impact constraints at Gauss points of contact elements ensures satisfaction of
momentum and energy balance in a finite element sense. Since the impact constraints act only on the
contact/target interface, energy balance is not enforced for the underlying finite elements used to model
the interior of the contact and target bodies. Total energy at the contact/target interface is conserved
for frictionless or rough contact when relative velocity constraints are satisfied exactly. If the relative
velocity constraints are not satisfied to a tight tolerance there may be some loss of kinetic energy.
When friction is specified for contact elements, energy is conserved when the contact and target
surfaces are not slipping (STICK) with respect to each other, and energy equal to the work done by
frictional forces is dissipated when the contact and target surfaces are slipping (SLIP) with respect to
each other.
Energy is also lost when numerical damping is used for the time integration scheme.
As per the classical theory of impact, exact conservation of energy during impact between rigid bodies is
identified with elastic impact . It corresponds to a coefficient of restitution (COR) of 1. The impact
constraints in ANSYS for impact between rigid bodies satisfy the conditions of elastic impact when the
constraints are satisfied exactly and no numerical damping or friction is specified. Energy loss during
impact between rigid bodies can be modeled by specifying a coefficient of restitution value (input as real
constant COR) smaller than 1.
Time Integration Scheme

The impact constraints are formulated such that they can be used with both methods available for
implicit transient dynamic analysis in ANSYS, the Newmark method and the HHT method. An important
reason for using the impact constraints is that they make the time integration scheme numerically more
stable without using large numerical damping. A small amount of numerical damping may still be needed
to suppress high frequency noise.
14.170.6.Debonding
Debonding refers to separation of bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6). It is activated by
associating a cohesive zone material model (input with TB,CZM) with contact elements. Debonding is
available only for pure penalty method and augmented Lagrangian method (KEYOPT(2) = 0,1) with
contact elements CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and
CONTA177.
A cohesive zone material model is provided with bilinear behavior (Alfano and Crisfield([365])) for
debonding. The model defines contact stresses as:
(14
379)
(14
380)
and
(14
381)
where:
P = normal contact stress (tension)
1 = tangential contact stress in direction 1
2 = tangential contact stress in direction 2
K n = normal contact stiffness
K t = tangential contact stiffness
un = contact gap
u1 = contact slip distance in direction 1
u2 = contact slip distance in direction 2
d = debonding parameter
direction 1 and direction 2 = principal directions in tangent plane
The debonding parameter is defined as:
(14
382)
with d = 0 for
1 and 0 < d
1 for > 1, and and are defined below.
Debonding allows three modes of separation: mode I, mode II and mixed mode.
Mode I debonding is defined by setting

(14
383)
and
(14
384)
where:
= contact gap at the maximum normal contact traction (tension)
= contact gap at the completion of debonding (input on TBDATA command as C2 using TB,CZM)
Mode II debonding is defined by setting
(14
385)
(14
386)
and
(14
387)
where:
= equivalent tangential slip distance at the maximum equivalent tangential stress,
= equivalent tangential slip distance at the completion of debonding (input on TBDATA command
as C4 using TB,CZM)
Mixed mode debonding is defined by setting
(14
388)
and
(14
389)
The constraint on that the ratio of the contact gap distances be same as the ratio of tangential slip
distances is enforced automatically by appropriately scaling the contact stiffness values.
For mixed mode, debonding is complete when the energy criterion is satisfied:
(14
390)
with
(14
391)
(14
392)
(14
393)
(14
394)
where:
max = maximum normal contact stress (input on TBDATA command as C1 using TB,CZM)
max = maximum equivalent tangential contact stress (input on TBDATA command as C3 using
TB,CZM)
Verification of satisfaction of energy criterion can be done during postprocessing of results.
The debonding modes are based on input data:
1. Mode I for normal data (input on TBDATA command as C1, C2, and C5).
2. Mode II for tangential data (input on TBDATA command as C3, C4, and C5).
3. Mixed mode for normal and tangential data (input on TBDATA command as C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and
C6 ).
Artificial damping can be used to overcome convergence difficulties associated with debonding. It is
activated by specifying the damping coefficient (input on TBDATA command as C5 using TB,CZM).
Tangential slip under compressive normal contact stress for mixed mode debonding is controlled by
appropriately setting the flag (input on TBDATA command as C6 using TB,CZM). Settings on are:
= 0 (default) indicates no tangential slip
= 1 indicates tangential slip is allowed
After debonding is completed the surface interaction is governed by standard contact constraints for
normal and tangential directions. Frictional contact is used if friction is specified for contact elements.
14.170.7.Thermal/Structural Contact
Combined structural and thermal contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 1, which indicates that structural
and thermal DOFs are active. Pure thermal contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 2. The thermal contact
features (Zhu and Cescotto([280])) are:
Thermal Contact Conduction

(14
395)
where:
q = heat flux (heat flow rate per area)
K c = thermal contact conductance coefficient (input as TCC on R command)
T T = temperature on target surface

T C = temperature on contact surface
Heat Convection
(14
396)
where:
hf = convection coefficient (input on SFE command with Lab = CONV and KVAL = 1)
Heat Radiation
(14
397)
where:
= Stefan-Boltzmann constant (input as SBCT on R command)
= emissivity (input using EMIS on MP command)
F = radiation view factor (input as RDVF on R command)
T o = temperature offset (input as VALUE on TOFFST command)
Heat Generation Due to Frictional Sliding

(14
398)
where:
qc = amount of frictional dissipation on contact surface
qT = amount of frictional dissipation on target surface
F w = weight factor for the distribution of heat between two contact and target surfaces (input as FWGT
on R command)
F f = fractional dissipated energy converted into heat (input on FHTG on R command)
t = equivalent frictional stress
v = sliding rate
Note: When KEYOPT(1) = 2, heat generation due to friction is ignored.
14.170.8.Electric Contact
Combined structural, thermal, and electric contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 3. Combined thermal and
electric contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 4. Combined structural and electric contact is specified if
KEYOPT(1) = 5. Pure electric contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 6. The electric contact features are:
Electric Current Conduction (KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4)

(14
399)
where:
J = current density
/L = electric conductivity per unit length (input as ECC on R command)
VT = voltage on target surface
VC = voltage on contact surface
Electrostatic (KEYOPT(1) = 5 or 6)
(14
400)
where:
14.170.9.Magnetic Contact
The magnetic contact is specified if KEYOPT(1) = 7. Using the magnetic scalar potential approach, the
3-D magnetic flux across the contacting interface is defined by:
(14
401)
where:
n = magnetic flux
t = magnetic potential at target surface (MAG degree of freedom)
c = magnetic potential at contact surface (MAG degree of freedom)
CM = magnetic contact permeance coefficient
o = free space permeability
A = contact area
= normal component of the "guess" magnetic field (See Equation516)
The gap permeance is defined as the ratio of the magnetic flux in the gap to the total magnetic
potential difference across the gap. The equation for gap permeance is:
(14
402)
where:
t = gap thickness
The magnetic contact permeance coefficient is defined as:
(14
403)
The above equations are only valid for 3-D analysis using the Magnetic Scalar Potential approach.
12.6. 3-D Shells
12.6.3-D Shells
This section contains shape functions for 3-D shell elements. These elements are available in a number
of configurations, including certain combinations of the following features:
with or without rotational degrees of freedom (RDOF).
- if with RDOF, with or without shear deflections (SD).
Figure12.53-D Shell Elements
12.6.1.3-D 3-Node Triangular Shells without RDOF (CST)

These shape functions are for 3-D 3-node triangular shell elements without RDOF, such as SHELL41,
SHELL131, or SHELL132:
(12
49)
(12
50)
(12
51)
(12
52)
(12
53)
(12
54)
(12
55)
(12
56)
12.6.2.3-D 6-Node Triangular Shells without RDOF (LST)
12.6. 3-D Shells
These shape functions are for 3-D 6-node triangular shell elements without RDOF, such as SHELL281
when used as a triangle:
(12
57)
(12
58)
(12
59)
(12
60)
(12
61)
(12
62)
(12
63)
(12
64)
12.6.3.3-D 3-Node Triangular Shells with RDOF but without SD

These shape functions are for the 3-D 3-node triangular shell elements with RDOF, but without shear
deflection.
(12
65)
(12
66)
(12
67)
12.6.4.3-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF and without ESF

(Q4)
These shape functions are for 3-D 4-node triangular shell elements without RDOF and without extra
displacement shapes, such as SHELL41 with KEYOPT(2) = 1 and the magnetic interface element
INTER115.
(12
68)
(12
69)
(12
70)
(12
71)
(12
72)
(12
12.6. 3-D Shells
73)
(12
74)
(12
75)
(12
76)
(12
77)
(12
78)
(12
79)
(12
80)
12.6.5.3-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF but with ESF

(QM6)
These shape functions are for 3-D 4-node quadrilateral shell elements without RDOF but with extra
shape functions, such as SHELL41 with KEYOPT(2) = 0:
(12
81)
(12
82)
12.6.6.3-D 8-Node Quadrilateral Shells without RDOF

These shape functions are for 3-D 8-node quadrilateral shell elements without RDOF, such as SHELL281:
(12
83)
(12
84)
(12
85)
(12
86)
(12
87)
12.6. 3-D Shells
(12
88)
(12
89)
(12
90)
(12
91)
12.6.7.3-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Shells with RDOF but without SD and

without ESF
These shape functions are for 3-D 4-node quadrilateral shell elements with RDOF but without shear
deflection and without extra shape functions:
(12
92)
(12
93)
(12
94)
12.6.8.3-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Shells with RDOF but without SD and

with ESF
These shape functions are for 3-D 4-node quadrilateral shell elements with RDOF but without shear
deflection and with extra shape functions:
(12
95)
(12
96)
(12
97)
CONTA176
CONTA176
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS


CONTA176 is used to represent contact and sliding between 3-D line segments (TARGE170) and a
deformable line segment, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 3-D beam-beam
structural contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D beam or pipe elements with
or without midside nodes (such as BEAM188 or BEAM189). Contact occurs when the element surface
penetrates one of the 3-D straight line or parabolic line segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified
target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the USERFRIC
subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate interface
delamination. See CONTA176 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for more details about this element. To model beam-to-surface contact, use the line-tosurface contact element, CONTA177.
CONTA176 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 176.1. The element is defined by two nodes (if
the underlying beam element does not have a midside node) or three nodes (if the underlying beam
element has a midside node). The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the element. Correct node
ordering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered in
a sequence that defines a continuous line. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
Three different scenarios can be modeled by CONTA176:
Internal contact where one beam (or pipe) slides inside another hollow beam (or pipe) (see Figure
176.2)
External contact between two beams that lie next to each other and are roughly parallel (see
Figure 176.3)
External contact between two beams that cross (see Figure 176.4)
Use KEYOPT(3) = 0 for the first two scenarios (internal contact and parallel beams). In both cases, the
contact condition is only checked at contact nodes.
Use KEYOPT(3) = 1 for the third scenario (beams that cross). In this case, the contact condition is
checked along the entire length of the beams. The beams with circular cross sections are assumed to
come in contact in a point-wise manner. Each contact element can potentially contact no more than one
target element.
Figure176.2Beam Sliding Inside a Hollow Beam
CONTA176
Figure176.3Parallel Beams in Contact
Figure176.4Crossing Beams in Contact
The 3-D line-to-line contact elements are associated with the target line segment elements (LINE or
PARA segment types for TARGE170) via a shared real constant set. The contact/target surface is
assumed to be the surface of a cylinder. For a general beam cross section, use an equivalent circular
beam (see Figure 176.5). Use the first real constant, R1, to define the radius on the target side (target
radius rt ). Use the second real constant, R2, to define the radius on the contact side (contact radius rc).
Follow these guidelines to define the equivalent circular cross section:
Determine the smallest cross section along the beam axis.
Determine the largest circle embedded in that cross section.
Figure176.5Equivalent Circular Cross Section
CONTA176
The target radius can be entered as either a negative or positive value. Use a negative value when
modeling internal contact (a beam sliding inside a hollow beam, or pipe sliding inside another pipe), with
the input value equal to the inner radius of the outer beam (see Figure 176.2). Use a positive value
when modeling contact between the exterior surfaces of two cylindrical beams.
For the case of internal contact, the inner beam should usually be considered the contact surface and
the outer beam should be the target surface. The inner beam can be considered as the target surface
only when the inner beam is much stiffer than the outer beam.
Contact is detected when two circular beams touch or overlap each other. The non-penetration condition
for beams with a circular cross section can be defined as follows.
For internal contact:
and for external contact:
where rc and rt are the radii of the cross sections of the beams on the contact and target sides,
respectively; and d is the minimal distance between the two beams which also determines the contact
normal direction (see Figure 176.4). Contact occurs for negative values of g.
ANSYS looks for contact only between contact and target surfaces with the same real constant set. For
either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be represented by a
contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide for more
information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the same boundary of beam
elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same geometry but relate to
separate targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two
target surfaces into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
For isotropic friction, local element coordinates based on the nodal connectivity are used to define
principal directions. In the case of two crossing beams in contact (KEYPT(3) = 1), the first principal
direction is defined by 1/2(t1 + t2 ). The first vector, t1 , points from the first contact node to the second
contact node, and the second vector, t2 , points from the first target node to the second target node. In
the case of two parallel beams in contact (KEYOPT(3) = 0), the first principal direction points from the
first contact node to the second contact node. In both cases, the second principal direction is defined by
taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact normal.
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The
first principal direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto
the contact element. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first
principal direction and the contact normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the
contact element to correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the
CONTA176
coordinate system (global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45 of the tangent
to the contact surface.
"3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact" discusses CONTA176 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input gives a general description of element
input.

Nodes
I, J, (K)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
COHE, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
(Blank), (Blank), FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), COR, STRM
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
Guide)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Debonding
Birth and death
CONTA176
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom. Currently, the default (UX, UY, UZ) is the only valid option:
0--
UX, UY, UZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(3)
Beam contact type:
0--
Parallel beams or beam inside beam
1--
Crossing beams
KEYOPT(4)
Type of surface-based constraint (see Surface-based Constraints for more information):
0--
Rigid surface constraint
1--
Force-distributed constraint
CONTA176
KEYOPT(5)
0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(7)
0--
No control
1--
2--
3--
4--
CONTA176

KEYOPT(8)


0--
No action
2--
KEYOPT(9)
0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
information.
KEYOPT(10)
0--
2--
KEYOPT(12)
CONTA176

0--
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
No.
Name
Description
1
2
3
R1
R2
FKN[1]
Target radius
Contact radius
FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region

Real Constants R1, R2
Real Constants R1, R2
and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
PMAX
PMIN

(PINB)
Conditions
CONTA176
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF

11
FKOP
12
13
21
FKT[1]
COHE
FACT

damping
Contact cohesion
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP

Maximum allowable tensile contact force
25
TOLS
COR
STRM

29
30
Conditions
Conditions
Models
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
Chattering Control
Parameters
Real Constant TOLS
Conditions
1. The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor of AREA with respect to those used in the
surface-to-surface contact elements. See Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis for
more information.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J, K
O
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
CONTA176
TEMP
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
TAUR/TAUS[7]
KN
KT
MU[8]
TASS/TASR[7]
AASS/AASR[7]
TOLN
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:STOTAL
CONT:SLIDE
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX[4]
CNFY
Temperature T(I)
Y
Length
Y
Y
Y
Underlying beam element number
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Geometric gap at current converged substep (gap = negative value; penetration = positive value)
Normal contact force
2
2
Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length)
5
5
Y
3
3
Y
2
2
Y
6
Slip rate
Y
Pinball Region
Y
2
Y
Contacting area
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
debonding
mode II debonding
-
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
5
5
3
3
Y
2
2
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA176
CNFZ

0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking
2. The unit of the quantities is FORCE.

5. The unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH.
7. For the case of orthotropic friction in contact between beams, components are defined in the
global Cartesian system.
The following table lists output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table in this manual for more information.
Name
Item
predetermined item label for ETABLE command
E
NMISC
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K
Output Quantity
Name
PRES
TAUR
TAUS
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

E
I
J
13
-
1
5
9
2
6
10
K
3
7
11
CONTA176
FDDIS
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
TASR
TASS
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
ISEG
AASR
AASS
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
ELSI
DENERI
DENERII
GGAP
VREL
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
41
42
43
44
45
58
-
18
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
46
50
54
62
66
70
112
116
120
136
140
144
148
152
19
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
47
51
55
63
67
71
113
117
121
137
141
145
149
153
20
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
35
39
48
52
56
64
68
72
114
118
122
138
142
146
150
154

The main restriction is the assumption of constant circular beam cross section. The contact radius
is assumed to be the same for all elements in the contact pair.
For KEYOPT(3) = 1 (crossing beams), contact between the beams is pointwise, and each contact
element contacts no more than one target element.
CONTA176
beam, pipe, or target elements.

ANSYS Professional.
The MU material property (input via MP,MU or TB,FRIC) is not allowed.
14.172.CONTA176 - 3-D Line-to-Line Contact
Shape Function
Integration
Points
W = C 1 + C 2 x + C 3 x2
None
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix

except that it is a 3-D line contact element.
14.172.2.Contact Kinematics
Three different scenarios can be modeled by CONTA176:
Internal contact where one beam (or pipe) slides inside another hollow beam (or pipe) (see Figure
14.37).
External contact between two beams that lie next to each other and are roughly parallel (see
Figure 14.38).
External contact between two beams that cross (see Figure 14.39).
Use KEYOPT(3) = 0 for the first two scenarios (internal contact and parallel beams). In both cases, the
contact condition is only checked at contact nodes.
Use KEYOPT(3) = 1 for the third scenario (beams that cross). In this case, the contact condition is
checked along the entire length of the beams. The beams with circular cross-sections are assumed to
come in contact in a point-wise manner.
Figure14.37Beam Sliding Inside a Hollow Beam
Figure14.38Parallel Beams in Contact
Figure14.39Crossing Beams in Contact
Contact is detected when two circular beams touch or overlap each other. The non-penetration condition
for beams with a circular cross-section can be defined as follows.
For internal contact:
(14
407)
and for external contact:
(14
408)
where:
g = gap distance
rc and rt = radii of the cross-sections of the beam on the contact and target sides, respectively.
d = minimal distance between the two beam centerlines (also determines the contact normal direction).
Contact occurs for negative values of g.
CONTA176 uses a contact force based model. In order to satisfy contact compatibility, forces are
developed in a direction normal (n-direction) to the target that will tend to reduce the penetration to an
acceptable numerical level. In addition to normal contact forces, friction forces are developed in
directions that are tangent to the target plane.
(14
409)
where:
(14
410)
where:

(14
411)
where:
CONTA177
CONTA177
3-D Line-to-Surface Contact

CONTA177 is used to represent contact and sliding between 3-D surface segments (TARGE170) and a
deformable line segment, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 3-D beam-to-solid and
3-D shell edge-to-solid structural contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D beam
or pipe elements with or without midside nodes (such as BEAM188, BEAM189, PIPE288, PIPE289, and
ELBOW290). It can also be located on the edge of 3-D shell elements with or without midside nodes,
such as SHELL181 and SHELL281. Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the
target segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress
friction, and user defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows
separation of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination. See CONTA177 in the Theory Reference
for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. To model
beam-to-beam contact, use the line-to-line contact element, CONTA176.
CONTA177 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 177.1. The element is defined by two nodes (if
the underlying beam or shell element does not have a midside node) or three nodes (if the underlying
beam or shell element has a midside node). The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the element.
Correct node ordering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact. The nodes must
be ordered in a sequence that defines a continuous line. See Generating Contact Elements in the
Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF
command.
ANSYS looks for contact only between contact and target surfaces with the same real constant set. For
either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable "surfaces" (beam or shell edge)
must be represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the
same boundary of line elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same
geometry but relate to separate targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you
must combine the two target surfaces into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
For isotropic friction, local element coordinates based on the nodal connectivity are used as principal
directions. The first principal direction points from node I to node J. The second principal direction is
CONTA177
defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact normal.
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The
first principal direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto
the contact element. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first
principal direction and the contact normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the
contact element to correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the
coordinate system (global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45 of the tangent
to the contact surface.
"Line-to-Surface Contact" discusses CONTA177 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input gives a general description of element
input.

Nodes
I, J, (K)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
COHE, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
(Blank), (Blank), FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), COR, STRM
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
Guide)
CONTA177
Special Features
Nonlinear
Large deflection
Debonding
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom. Currently, the default (UX, UY, UZ) is the only valid option:
0--
UX, UY, UZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
1--
Penalty function
2--
3--
4--
KEYOPT(4)
Type of surface-based constraint (see Surface-based Constraints for more information):
0--
Rigid surface constraint
1--
Force-distributed constraint
KEYOPT(5)
CONTA177
0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0--
1--
2--
KEYOPT(7)
0--
No control
1--
2--
3--
4--
CONTA177
KEYOPT(9)


0--
1--
2--
3--
4--
information.
KEYOPT(10)
0--
2--
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect (target side only):
0--
Exclude
1--
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0--
Standard
CONTA177
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
No.
Name
Description
1
2
3
R1
R2
FKN[1]

FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
Pinball region

and Penetration
and Penetration
Conditions
or
PMAX
PMIN
9
10
TAUMAX
CNOF


(PINB)
Conditions
Conditions
Accounting for Thickness
Effect (CNOF and
CONTA177
11
FKOP
12
13
21
FKT[1]
COHE
FACT

damping
Contact cohesion
22
DC
23
24
SLTO
TNOP

25
TOLS
COR
STRM

29
30
KEYOPT(11))
Models
Coefficients
Coefficients
Using FKT and SLTO
Chattering Control
Parameters
Real Constant TOLS
Conditions
1. The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor of AREA with respect to those used in the
surface-to-surface contact elements. See Real Constants FKN and FKT for more information.

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
VOLU
NPI
ITRGET
Definition
Element Number
Nodes I, J, K
Temperature T(I)
Length
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
CONTA177
ISOLID
CONT:STAT
OLDST
ISEG
OLDSEG
CONT:PENE
CONT:GAP
NGAP
OGAP
IGAP
GGAP
CONT:PRES
TAUR/TAUS[7]
KN
KT
MU[8]
TASS/TASR[7]
AASS/AASR[7]
TOLN
CONT:SFRIC
CONT:STOTAL
CONT:SLIDE
FDDIS
ELSI
VREL
DBA
PINB
CONT:CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
CAREA
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI
DENERII
CNFX[4]
CNFY
CNFZ
Underlying beam or shell element number

Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Geometric gap at current converged substep (gap = negative value; penetration = positive value)
Normal contact force
2
2
Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length)
5
5
Y
3
3
Y
2
2
Y
6
Slip rate
Y
Pinball Region
Y
2
Y
Contacting area
Y
Debonding parameter
Y
debonding
mode II debonding
-
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
2
5
5
3
3
Y
2
2
Y
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONTA177
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=

Closed and sliding
Closed and sticking
2. The unit of the quantities is FORCE.

5. The unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH.
7. For the case of orthotropic friction in contact between beams (or shell edges) and a 3-D surface,
components are defined in the global Cartesian system.
The following table lists output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table in this manual for more information.
Name
Item
predetermined item label for ETABLE command
E
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K
Output Quantity
Name
PRES
TAUR
TAUS
FDDIS
STAT[1]
OLDST
PENE[2]
DBA
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

E
I
J
13
41
-
1
5
9
18
1
5
9
13
2
6
10
19
2
6
10
14
K
3
7
11
20
3
7
11
15
CONTA177
TASR
TASS
KN
KT
TOLN
IGAP
PINB
CNFX
CNFY
CNFZ
ISEG
AASR
AASS
CAREA
MU
DTSTART
DPARAM
CNOS
TNOP
SLTO
ELSI
DENERI
DENERII
GGAP
VREL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
42
43
44
45
58
-
17
21
25
29
33
37
46
50
54
62
66
70
112
116
120
136
140
144
148
152
18
22
26
30
34
38
47
51
55
63
67
71
113
117
121
137
141
145
149
153
19
23
27
31
35
39
48
52
56
64
68
72
114
118
122
138
142
146
150
154

The thickness effects of underlying beam elements on the contact side can be taken into account
by specifying the contact surface offset CNOF.
The thickness effects of underlying shell elements on the target side can be taken into account by
setting KEYOPT(11) = 1.
CONTA177
beam, pipe, shell, or target elements.
The USERFRIC (user-defined friction) subroutine can only be used with penalty-based tangential
contact (KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).

ANSYS Professional.
The MU material property (input via MP,MU or TB,FRIC) is not allowed.
14.173.CONTA177 - 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Shape Function
Integration
Points
W = C 1 + C 2 x + C 3 x2
None

except that it is a 3-D line contact element.
CONTA177 uses a contact force based model. In order to satisfy contact compatibility, forces are
developed in a direction normal (n-direction) to the target that will tend to reduce the penetration to an
acceptable numerical level. In addition to normal contact forces, friction forces are developed in
directions that are tangent to the target plane.
(14
412)
where:
(14
413)
where:

(14
414)
where:
CONTA178
CONTA178
3-D Node-to-Node Contact

CONTA178 represents contact and sliding between any two nodes of any types of elements. The
element has two nodes with three degrees of freedom at each node with translations in the X, Y, and Z
directions. It can also be used in 2-D and axisymmetric models by constraining the UZ degree of
freedom. The element is capable of supporting compression in the contact normal direction and Coulomb
friction in the tangential direction. User-defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine is also allowed.
The element may be initially preloaded in the normal direction or it may be given a gap specification. A
longitudinal damper option can also be included. See CONTA178 in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. Other contact
elements, such as COMBIN40, are also available.
CONTA178 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in the CONTA178
figure above. The element is defined by two nodes, an initial gap or interference (GAP), an initial
element status (START), and damping coefficients CV1 and CV2. The orientation of the interface is
defined by the node locations (I and J) or by a user specified contact normal direction. The interface is
assumed to be perpendicular to the I-J line or to the specified gap direction. The element coordinate
system has its origin at node I and the x-axis is directed toward node J or in the user specified gap
direction. The interface is parallel to the element y-z plane. See Generating Contact Elements in the
Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the EINTF
command.
constraints should be used in transient dynamic analysis. See the description of KEYOPT(7) in the Input
Summary and the contact element discussion in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for details.
Contact Algorithms
Four different contact algorithms can be selected:
CONTA178
Pure Lagrange multiplier method (KEYOPT(2) = 4)

Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on frictional (tangential) direction (KEYOPT(2) =
3)
Augmented Lagrange method (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
Pure Penalty method (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
The following sections outline these four algorithms.
Pure Lagrange Multiplier

The pure Lagrange multiplier method does not require contact stiffness FKN, FKS. Instead it requires
chattering control parameters TOLN, FTOL, by which ANSYS assumes that the contact status remains
unchanged. TOLN is the maximum allowable penetration and FTOL is the maximum allowable tensile
contact force.
Note: A negative contact force occurs when the contact status is closed. A tensile contact
force (positive) refers to a separation between the contact surfaces, but not
necessarily and open contact status.
The behavior can be described as follows:
If the contact status from the previous iteration is open and the current calculated penetration is
smaller than TOLN, then contact remains open. Otherwise the contact status switches to closed
and another iteration is processed.
If the contact status from the previous iteration is closed and the current calculated contact force
is positive, but smaller than FTOL, then contact remains closed. If the tensile contact force is larger
than FTOL, then the contact status changes from closed to open and ANSYS continues to the next
iteration.
ANSYS will provide reasonable defaults for TOLN and FTOL. Keep in mind the following when providing
values for TOLN and FTOL:
A positive value is a scaling factor applied to the default values.
A negative value is used as an absolute value (which overrides the default).
The objective of TOLN and FTOL is to provide stability to models which exhibit contact chattering due to
changing contact status. If the values you use for these tolerances are too small, the solution will
require more iterations. However, if the values are too big it will affect the accuracy of the solution,
since a certain amount of penetration or tensile contact force are allowed.
Theoretically, the pure Lagrange multiplier method enforces zero penetration when contact is closed and
"zero slip" when sticking contact occurs. However the pure Lagrange multiplier method adds additional
degrees of freedom to the model and requires additional iterations to stabilize contact conditions. This
will increase the computational cost and may even lead to solution divergence if many contact points are
oscillating between sticking and sliding conditions during iterations.
Lagrange Multiplier on Normal and Penalty on Tangent Plane

An alternative algorithm is the Lagrange multiplier method applied on the contact normal and the
penalty method (tangential contact stiffness) on the frictional plane. This method only allows a very
small amount of slip for a sticking contact condition. It requires chattering control parameters TOLN,
FTOL as well as the maximum allowable elastic slip parameter SLTOL. Again, ANSYS provides default
tolerance values which work well in most cases. You can override the default value for SLTOL by
CONTA178
defining a scaling factor (positive value) or an absolute value (negative value). Based on the tolerance,
current normal contact force, and friction coefficient, the tangential contact stiffness FKS can be
obtained automatically. In a few cases, you can override FKS by defining a scaling factor (positive input)
or absolute value (negative input). Use care when specifying values for SLTOL and FKS. If the value for
SLTOL is too large and the value for FKS too small, too much elastic slip can occur. If the value for
SLTOL is too small or the value for FKS too large, the problem may not converge.
Augmented Lagrange Method

The third contact algorithm is the augmented Lagrange method, which is basically the penalty method
with additional penetration control. This method requires contact normal stiffness FKN, maximum
allowable penetration TOLN, and maximum allowable slip SLTOL. FKS can be derived based on the
maximum allowable slip SLTOL and the current normal contact force. ANSYS provides a default normal
contact stiffness FKN which is based on the Young's modulus E and the size of the underlying elements.
If Young's modulus E is not found, E = 1x10 9 will be assumed.
You can override the default normal contact stiffness FKN by defining a scaling factor (positive input) or
absolute value (negative input with unit force/length). If you specify a large value for TOLN, the
augmented Lagrange method works as the penalty method. Use care when specifying values for FKN
and TOLN. If the value for FKN is too small and the value for TOLN too large, too much penetration can
occur. If the value for FKN is too large or the value for TOLN too small, the problem may not converge.
Penalty Method
The last algorithm is the pure penalty method. This method requires both contact normal and tangential
stiffness values FKN, FKS. Real constants TOLN, FTOLN, and SLTOL are not used and penetration is no
longer controlled in this method. Default FKN is provided as the one used in the augmented Lagrange
method. The default FKS is given by MU x FKN. You can override the default values for FKN and FKS by
inputting a scaling factor (positive input) or absolute value (negative input) for these real constants.
Contact Normal Definition

The contact normal direction is of primary importance in a contact analysis. By default [KEYOPT(5) = 0
and NX, NY, NZ = 0], ANSYS will calculate the contact normal direction based on the initial positions of
the I and J nodes, such that a positive displacement (in the element coordinate system) of node J
relative to node I opens the gap. However, you must specify the contact normal direction for any of the
following conditions:
If nodes I and J have the same initial coordinates.
If the model has an initial interference condition in which the underlying elements' geometry
overlaps.
If the initial open gap distance is very small.
In the above cases, the ordering of nodes I and J is critical. The correct contact normal usually points
from node I toward node J unless contact is initially overlapped.
You can specify the contact normal by means of real constants NX, NY, NZ (direction cosines related to
the global Cartesian system) or element KEYOPT(5). The following lists the various options for
KEYOPT(5):
KEYOPT(5) = 0
The contact normal is either based on the real constant values of NX, NY, NZ or on node locations
when NX, NY, NZ are not defined. For 2-D contact, NZ = 0.
KEYOPT(5) = 1 (2,3)
CONTA178
The contact normal points in a direction which averages the direction cosines of the X (Y, Z) axis
of the nodal coordinates on both nodes I and J. The direction cosines on nodes I and J should be
very close. This option may be supported by the NORA and NORL commands, which rotate the X
axis of the nodal coordinate system to point to the surface normal of solid models.
KEYOPT(5) = 4 (5,6)
The contact normal points to X (Y, Z) of the element coordinate system issued by the ESYS
command. If you use this option, make sure that the element coordinate system specified by
ESYS is the Cartesian system. Otherwise, the global Cartesian system is assumed.
Contact Status
The initial gap defines the gap size (if positive) or the displacement interference (if negative). If
KEYOPT(4) = 0, the default, the gap size can be automatically calculated from the GAP real constant
and the node locations (projection of vector points from node I to J on the contact normal), that is, the
gap size is determined from the additive effect of the geometric gap and the value of GAP.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, the initial gap size is only based on real constant GAP (node locations are ignored).
By default KEYOPT(9) is set to 0, which means the initial gap size is applied in the first load step. To
ramp the initial gap size with the first load step (to model initial interference problems, for example), set
KEYOPT(9) = 1. Also, set KBC,0 and do not specify any external loads over the first load step.
The force deflection relationships for the contact element can be separated into the normal and
tangential (sliding) directions. In the normal direction, when the normal force (FN) is negative, the
contact status remains closed (STAT = 3 or 2). In the tangential direction, for FN < 0 and the absolute
value of the tangential force (FS) less than |FN|, contact "sticks" (STAT = 3). For FN < 0 and FS =
|FN|, sliding occurs (STAT = 2). As FN becomes positive, contact is broken (STAT = 1) and no force is
transmitted (FN = 0, FS = 0).
The contact condition at the beginning of the first substep can be determined from the START
parameter. The initial element status (START) is used to define the "previous" condition of the interface
at the start of the first substep. This value overrides the condition implied by the interference
specification and can be useful in anticipating the final interface configuration and reducing the number
of iterations required for convergence. However, specifying unrealistic START values can sometimes
degrade the convergence behavior.
If START = 0.0 or blank, the initial status of the element is determined from either the GAP value or the
KEYOPT(4) setting. If START = 3.0, contact is initially closed and not sliding ( 0), or sliding (if =
0.0). If START = 2.0, contact is initially closed and sliding. If START = 1.0, contact is initially open.
Friction
The only material property used is the interface coefficient of friction (MU). A zero value should be
used for frictionless surfaces. Temperatures may be specified at the element nodes (for material
property evaluation only). The coefficient of friction is evaluated at the average of the two node
temperatures. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I).
For analyses involving friction, using NROPT,UNSYM is useful (and, in fact, sometimes required if the
coefficient of friction is > 0.2) for problems where the normal and tangential (sliding) motions are
strongly coupled.
To define a coefficient of friction for isotropic friction that is dependent on temperature, time, normal
pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC.
See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) for more information.
This element also supports user-defined friction. To implement a user-defined friction model, use the
TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER to specify friction properties and write a USERFRIC subroutine to
CONTA178
compute friction forces. See User-Defined Friction (TB,FRIC,,,,USER) for more information on how to use
this feature. See also the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the
USERFRIC subroutine.
Weak Spring
KEYOPT(3) can be used to specify a "weak spring" across an open or free sliding interface, which is
useful for preventing rigid body motion that could occur in a static analysis. The weak spring stiffness is
computed by multiplying the normal stiffness KN by a reduction factor if the real constant REDFACT is
positive (which defaults to 1 x 10 -6 ). The weak spring stiffness can be overridden if REDFACT has a
negative value. Set KEYOPT(3) = 1 to add weak spring stiffness only to the contact normal direction
when contact is open. Set KEYOPT(3) = 2 to add weak spring stiffness to the contact normal direction
for open contact and tangent plane for frictionless or open contact.
The weak spring only contributes to global stiffness, which prevents a "singularity" condition from
occurring during the solution phase if KEYOPT(3) = 1,2. By setting KEYOPT(3) = 3,4, the weak spring
will contribute both to the global stiffness and the internal nodal force which holds two separated nodes.
Note: The weak spring option should never be used in conjunction with either the noseparation or bonded contact options defined by KEYOPT(10).
Contact Behavior
Use KEYOPT(10) to model the following different contact surface behaviors:
KEYOPT(10) = 0
Models standard unilateral contact; that is, normal pressure equals zero if separation occurs.
KEYOPT(10) = 1
Models rough frictional contact where there is no sliding. This case corresponds to an infinite
friction coefficient and ignores the material property input MU.
KEYOPT(10) = 2
Models no separation contact, in which two gap nodes are tied (although sliding is permitted) for
the remainder of the analysis once contact is established.
KEYOPT(10) = 3
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes are bonded in all directions (once contact is
established) for the remainder of the analysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 4
Models no separation contact, in which two gap nodes are always tied (sliding is permitted)
throughout the analysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 5
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes are bonded in all directions throughout the
analysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 6
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes that are initially in a closed state will remain
closed and two gap nodes that are initially in an open state will remain open throughout the
analysis.
CONTA178
Cylindrical Gap
The cylindrical gap option (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is useful where the final contact normal is not fixed during
the analysis, such as in the interaction between concentric pipes. With this option, you define the real
constants NX, NY, NZ as the direction cosines of the cylindrical axis ( ) in the global Cartesian
coordinate system. The contact normal direction lies in a cross section that is perpendicular to the
cylindrical axis. The program measures the relative distance |XJ - XI| between the current position of
node I and the current position of node J projected onto the cross section. NX, NY, NZ defaults to
(0,0,1), which is the case for a 2-D circular gap. With the cylindrical gap option, KEYOPT(4) and
KEYOPT(5) are ignored and node ordering can be arbitrary. Real constant GAP is no long referred as the
initial gap size and a zero value is not allowed. The following explanation defines the model based on
the sign of the GAP value.
Figure178.2CONTA178 Gap and Nodes
A positive GAP value models contact when one smaller cylinder inserted into another parallel larger
cylinder. GAP is equal to the difference between the radii of the cylinders (|RJ - RI|) and it
represents the maximum allowable distance projected on the cross-section. The contact constraint
condition can be written as :
A negative GAP value models external contact between two parallel cylinders. GAP is equal to the
sum of the radii of the cylinders (|RJ + RI|) and it represents the minimum allowable distance
projected on the cross-section. The contact constraint condition can be written as:
Damper
The damping capability is only used for modal and transient analyses. By default, the damping capability
is removed from the element. Damping is only active in the contact normal direction when contact is
closed. The damping coefficient units are Force (Time/Length). For a 2-D axisymmetric analysis, the
coefficient should be on a full 360 basis. The damping force is computed as
, where Cv is
the damping coefficient given by Cv = Cv1 + Cv2xV. V is the velocity calculated in the previous substep.
The second damping coefficient (Cv2) is available to produce a nonlinear damping effect.
CONTA178
Monitoring Contact Status

By default, ANSYS will not print out contact status and contact stiffness for each individual element. Use
KEYOPT(12) = 1 to print out such information, which may help in solving problems that are difficult to
converge.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
FKN, GAP, START, FKS, REDFACT, NX,
NY, NZ, TOLN, FTOL, SLTOL, CV1,
CV2, COR
See Table178.1:CONTA178 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures - T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Nonlinear gap type
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Gap type:
0--
Unidirectional gap
1--
Cylindrical gap
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0--
Augmented Lagrange method (default)
CONTA178
1--
Pure Penalty method
3--
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent (uses U/P formulation for
normal contact, non-U/P formulation for tangential contact)
4--
Lagrange multiplier method
KEYOPT(3)
Weak Spring:
0--
Not used
1--
Acts across an open contact (only contributes to stiffness)
2--
Acts across an open contact or free sliding plane (only contributes to stiffness)
3--
Acts across an open contact (contributes to stiffness and internal force)
4--
Acts across an open contact or free sliding plane (contributes to stiffness and force)
KEYOPT(4)
Gap size:
0--
Gap size based on real constant GAP + initial node locations
1--
Gap size based on real constant GAP (ignore node locations)
KEYOPT(5)
Basis for contact normal:
0--
Node locations or real constants NX, NY, NZ
1--
X - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)
2--
CONTA178
Y - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)

3--
Z - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)
4--
X - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
5--
Y - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
6--
Z - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
KEYOPT(7)
Element level time incrementation control / impact control:
0--
No control.
1--
Change in contact predictions are made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment. This
option is activated only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued prior to the
solution.
2--
Change in contact predictions are made to achieve the minimum time/load increment
whenever a change in contact status occurs. This option is activated only if the command
SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued prior to the solution.
4--
dynamic analysis with automatic adjustment of the time increment. Automatic adjustment of
the time increment is performed only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued
prior to the solution.
KEYOPT(9)
Initial gap step size application:
0--
Initial gap size is step applied
1--
Initial gap size is ramped in the first load step
KEYOPT(10)
0--
CONTA178
Standard
1--
Rough
2--
3--
Bonded
4--
5--
Bonded (always)
6--
Bonded (initial)
KEYOPT(12)
Contact Status:
0--
Does not print contact status
1--
Monitor and print contact status, contact stiffness
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
FKN
GAP
START
FKS
REDFACT
NX
NY
NZ
TOLN
FTOL
SLTOL
CV1
CV2
COR
Description
Normal stiffness
Initial gap size
Initial contact status
Sticking stiffness
KN/KS reduction factor
Defined gap normal - X component
Defined gap normal - Y component
Defined gap normal - Z component
Maximum tensile contact force
Maximum elastic slip
Damping coefficient
Nonlinear damping coefficient
CONTA178

Additional element output as shown in Element Output Definitions.
The value of USEP is determined from the normal displacement (UN), in the element x-direction,
between the contact nodes at the end of a substep. This value is used in determining the normal force,
FN. The values represented by UT(Y, Z) are the total translational displacements in the element y and z
directions. The maximum value printed for the sliding force, FS, is |FN|. Sliding may occur in both the
element y and z directions. STAT describes the status of the element at the end of a substep.
If STAT = 3, contact is closed and no sliding occurs
If STAT = 1, contact is open
If STAT = 2, node J slides relative to node I
For a frictionless surface ( = 0.0), the converged element status is either STAT = 2 or 1.
The element coordinate system orientation angles and (shown in Figure 178.1) are computed by the
program from the node locations. These values are printed as ALPHA and BETA respectively. ranges
from 0 to 360 and from -90 to +90. Elements lying along the Z-axis are assigned values of =
0, = 90, respectively. Elements lying off the Z-axis have their coordinate system oriented as
shown for the general , position.
Note: For = 90, 90, the element coordinate system flips 90 about the Z-axis.
The value of ANGLE represents the principal angle of the friction force in the
element y-z plane. A general description of solution output is given in Element
Solution. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
USEP
FN
STAT
OLDST
ALPHA, BETA
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
T(I), T(J)
Gap size
Normal force (along I-J line)
Element status
Old contact status
Element orientation angles
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
R
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
CONTA178
MU
UT(Y, Z)
FS(Y, Z)
ANGLE
Coefficient of friction
Displacement (node J - node I) in element y and z directions
Tangential (friction) force in element y and z directions
Principal angle of friction force in element y-z plane
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1. If the value of STAT is:

1 - Open contact
2 - Sliding contact
3 - Sticking contact (no sliding)
2. If MU>0.0
Analysis Guide for more information. The following notation is used in Table178.3:CONTA178 Item and
Sequence Numbers :
Name
output quantity as defined in the Element Output Definition
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
FN
FSY
FSZ
STAT
OLDST
USEP
ALPHA
BETA
UTY
UTZ
MU
ANGLE
KN
KS
TOLN
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CONTA178
FTOL
SLTOL
NMISC
NMISC
13
14

The element operates bilinearly only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic analyses. If used in
other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.
Nonconverged substeps are not in equilibrium.
Unless the contact normal direction is specified by (NX, NY, NZ) or KEYOPT(5), nodes I and J must
not be coincident or overlapped since the nodal locations define the interface orientation. In this
case the node ordering is not an issue. On the other hand, if the contact normal is not defined by
nodal locations, the node ordering is critical. Use /PSYMB, ESYS to verify the contact normal and
use EINTF,,,REVE to reverse the normal if wrong ordering is detected. To determine which side of
the interface contains the nodes, use ESEL,,ENAM,,178 and then NSLE,,POS,1.
The element maintains its original orientation in either a small or a large deflection analysis unless
the cylindrical gap option is used.
For real constants FKN, REDFACT, TOLN, FTOL, SLTOL and FKS, you can specify either a positive
or negative value. ANSYS interprets a positive value as a scaling factor and interprets a negative
value as the absolute value. These real constants can be changed between load steps or during
restart stages.
The Lagrange multiplier methods introduce zero diagonal terms in the stiffness matrix. The PCG
solver may encounter precondition matrix singularity. The Lagrange multiplier methods often
overconstrain the model if boundary conditions, coupling, and constraint equations applied on the
contact nodes overlay the contact constraints. Chattering is most likely to occur due to change of
contact status, typically for contact impact problems. The Lagrange multipliers also introduce more
degrees of freedom which may result in spurious modes for modal and linear eigenvalue bucking
analysis. Therefore, the augmented Lagrange method option is the best choice for: PCG iterative
solver, transient analysis for impact problems, modal, and eigenvalue bucking analysis.

14.174.CONTA178 - 3-D Node-to-Node Contact
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Geometry
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Normal Direction
Sliding Direction
None
None
None
None
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Distribution
None - average used for material property evaluation
None - average used for material property evaluation
14.174.1.Introduction
CONTA178 represents contact and sliding between any two nodes of any types of elements. This nodeto-node contact element can handle cases when the contact location is known beforehand.
CONTA178 is applicable to 3-D geometries. It can also be used in 2-D and axisymmetric models by
constraining the UZ degrees of freedom. The element is capable of supporting compression in the
contact normal direction and Coulomb friction in the tangential direction.
14.174.2.Contact Algorithms
Four different contact algorithms are implemented in this element.
Pure penalty method
Augmented Lagrange method
Pure Lagrange multiplier method
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal penalty on frictional direction
Pure Penalty Method

The Newton-Raphson load vector is:
(14
415)
where:

F sy = tangential contact force in y direction
F sz = tangential contact force in z direction
(14
416)
where:
K n = contact normal stiffness (input FKN on R command)
(14
417)
where:
K s = tangential contact stiffness (input as FKS on R command)
uy = contact slip distance in y direction
= coefficient of friction (input as MU on TB command with Lab = FRIC or MP command)
Augmented Lagrange Method

(14
418)
where:
= user-defined compatibility tolerance (input as TOLN on R command)

The Lagrange multiplier component of force is computed locally (for each element) and iteratively.
Pure Lagrange Multiplier Method

The contact forces (i.e., Lagrange multiplier components of forces) become unknown DOFs for each
element. The associated Newton-Raphson load vector is:
(14
419)
Lagrange Multiplier on Contact Normal Penalty on Frictional Direction

In this method only the contact normal face is treated as a Lagrange multiplier. The tangential forces
are calculated based on penalty method:
(14
420)
14.174.3.Element Damper
The damping capability is only used for modal and transient analyses. Damping is only active in the
contact normal direction when contact is closed. The damping force is computed as:
(14
421)
where:
V = relative velocity between two contact nodes in contact normal direction
Cv1 = constant damping coefficient (input as CV1 on R command)

Cv2 = linear damping coefficient (input as CV2 on R command)
FLUID29
FLUID29
2-D Axisymmetric Harmonic Acoustic Fluid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID29 is used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid/structure interaction problems.
Typical applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
equation for acoustics, namely the 2-D wave equation, has been discretized taking into account the
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element has four corner nodes
with three degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x and y directions and pressure. The
translations, however, are applicable only at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, may be included.
The element has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface. The
element can be used with other 2-D structural elements to perform unsymmetric or damped modal, full
harmonic response and full transient method analyses (see the description of the TRNOPT command).
When there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to static, modal and reduced harmonic
response analyses. See FLUID29 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
FLUID29 Input Data

element is defined by four nodes, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on the MODE command), the
symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command), a reference pressure, and the isotropic material
properties. The MODE and ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
with Nonaxisymmetric Loads. The reference pressure (PREF) is used to calculate the element sound
pressure level (defaults to 20x10-6 N/m 2 ). The speed of sound (
) in the fluid is input by SONC
where k is the bulk modulus of the fluid (Force/Area) and o is the mean fluid density (Mass/Volume)
(input as DENS). The dissipative effect due to fluid viscosity is neglected, but absorption of sound at the
interface is accounted for by generating a damping matrix using the surface area and boundary
admittance at the interface. Experimentally measured values of the boundary admittance for the sound
absorbing material may be input as material property MU. We recommend MU values from 0.0 to 1.0;
however, values greater than 1.0 are allowed. MU = 0.0 represents no sound absorption and MU = 1.0
represents full sound absorption. DENS, SONC and MU are evaluated at the average of the nodal
temperatures.
Nodal flow rates, if any, may be specified using the F command where both the real and imaginary
components may be applied. Nodal flow rates should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis and
on a 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged
by surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 29.1. Specifying the
FSI label (without a value) [SF, SFA, SFE] will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the
FLUID29
interface. Deleting the FSI specification [SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE] removes the flag. The flag
specification should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See Acoustics in the Coupled-Field Analysis
Guide for more information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag. The surface load label IMPD
with a value of unity should be used to include damping that may be present at a structural boundary
with a sound absorption lining. A zero value of IMPD removes the damping calculation. The displacement
degrees of freedom (UX and UY) at the element nodes not on the interface should be set to zero to
avoid zero-pivot warning messages.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults
KEYOPT(2) is used to specify the absence of a structure at the interface and, therefore, the absence of
coupling between the fluid and structure. Since the absence of coupling produces symmetric element
matrices, a symmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] may be used within the modal analysis. However, for the
coupled (unsymmetric) problem, a corresponding unsymmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] must be used.
Vertical acceleration (ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for the gravity regardless of the value of
MODE, even for a modal analysis.
A summary of the element input is given in "FLUID29 Input Summary". A general description of element

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0
PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 1
Real Constants
PREF - Reference pressure
Material Properties
DENS, SONC, MU
Surface Loads
Fluid-structure Interface Flag--
Impedance--
Mode Number
Input mode number on MODE command
Loading Condition
Input for ISYM on MODE command
1--
FLUID29
Symmetric loading
-1 -Antisymmetric loading
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
Structure at element interface:
0--
Structure present at interface (unsymmetric element matrix)
1--
No structure at interface (symmetric element matrix)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Planar
1--
Axisymmetric
2 -Axiharmonic
KEYOPT(7)
Free surface effect:
0--
Do not include sloshing effect
1--
Include sloshing effect on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (elements must not
have positive Y coordinates)
FLUID29 Output Data

Nodal displacements and pressures included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table29.1:FLUID29 Element Output Definitions.
Solution Output gives a general description of solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to
view results.
FLUID29

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
TEMP
PRESSURE
PG( X, Y, SUM)
VL( X, Y, SUM)
SOUND PR.LEVEL
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Average pressure
Pressure gradient components and vector sum
Fluid velocity components and vector sum
Sound pressure level (in decibels)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1. Output only if ANTYPE,HARMIC

Table29.2:FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table29.2:FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table29.1:FLUID29 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Table29.2FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E

PGX
PGY
VLX
VLY
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
4
FLUID29
PRESSURE
PGSUM
VLSUM
SOUND PR. LEVEL
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4

The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 29.1.
All elements must have 4 nodes. A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L
nodes (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements).
The acoustic pressure in the fluid medium is determined by the wave equation with the following
assumptions:
The fluid is compressible (density changes due to pressure variations).
Inviscid fluid (no dissipative effect due to viscosity).
There is no mean flow of the fluid.
The mean density and pressure are uniform throughout the fluid. Note that the acoustic
pressure is the excess pressure from the mean pressure.
Analyses are limited to relatively small acoustic pressures so that the changes in density are
small compared with the mean density.
The lumped mass matrix formulation [LUMPM,ON] is not allowed for this element.

ANSYS Multiphysics.
KEYOPT(3) = 2 is valid only in ANSYS Multiphysics
KEYOPT(7) is valid only in ANSYS Multiphysics
14.28.FLUID29 - 2-D Acoustic Fluid
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Fluid Stiffness and Mass Equation12124

Matrices
Coupling Stiffness, Mass, Equation12117, Equation12118 , and
and Damping Matrices
Equation12124 specialized to the interface
(fluid-structure interface)

Acoustics describes the derivation of acoustic element matrices and load vectors.
2x2
2
FLUID30
FLUID30
3-D Acoustic Fluid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID30 is used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid/structure interaction problems.
Typical applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
equation for acoustics, namely the 3-D wave equation, has been discretized taking into account the
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element has eight corner nodes
with four degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions and pressure. The
translations, however, are applicable only at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, may be included.
The element has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface. The
element can be used with other 3-D structural elements to perform unsymmetric or damped modal, full
harmonic response and full transient method analyses (see the description of the TRNOPT command).
When there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to static, modal and reduced harmonic
response analyses. See FLUID30 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for more details about this element. See FLUID220 for a higher order hexahedral option and
FLUID221 for a higher order tetrahedral option
FLUID30 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes, a reference pressure, and the isotropic material properties. The
reference pressure (PREF) is used to calculate the element sound pressure level (defaults to 20x10-6
N/m 2 ). The speed of sound (
) in the fluid is input by SONC where k is the bulk modulus of the
fluid (Force/Area) ando is the mean fluid density (Mass/Volume) (input as DENS). The dissipative
effect due to fluid viscosity is neglected, but absorption of sound at the interface is accounted for by
generating a damping matrix using the surface area and boundary admittance at the interface.
Experimentally measured values of the boundary admittance for the sound absorbing material may be
input as material property MU. We recommend MU values from 0.0 to 1.0; however, values greater than
1.0 are allowed. MU = 0.0 represents no sound absorption, where MU is the ratio of chosen impedance
to sound plane wave impedance in media. DENS, SONC and MU are evaluated at the average of the
nodal temperatures.
FLUID30
Nodal flow rates may be specified using the F command where both the real and imaginary components
may be applied.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged
by surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 30.1. Specifying the
FSI label (without a value) [SF, SFA, SFE] will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the
interface. Deleting the FSI specification [SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE] removes the flag. The flag
specification should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See Acoustics in the Coupled-Field Analysis
Guide for more information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag. The surface load label IMPD
with a given complex impedance value can be used to include damping that may be present at a
structural boundary with a sound absorption lining, when MU = 0. A zero value of IMPD removes the
damping calculation, if MU = 0. The displacement degrees of freedom (UX, UY and UZ) at the element
nodes not on the interface should be set to zero to avoid zero-pivot warning messages.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults
KEYOPT(2) is used to specify the absence of a structure at the interface and, therefore, the absence of
coupling between the fluid and structure. Since the absence of coupling produces symmetric element
matrices, a symmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] may be used within the modal analysis. However, for the
coupled (unsymmetric) problem, a corresponding unsymmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] must be used.
KEYOPT(4) is used to specify the existence of perfectly matched layers (PML) to absorb the outgoing
sound waves. Refer to Perfectly Matched Layers (PML) in the Mechanical APDL High-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for more information about using PML.
Vertical acceleration (ACELZ on the ACEL command) is needed for the gravity, even for a modal
analysis.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0
PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 1
Real Constants
PREF - Reference pressure
Material Properties
DENS, SONC, MU
Surface Loads
Fluid-structure interface flag:
Impedance:
FLUID30

Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
Structure at element interface:
0--
Structure present at interface (unsymmetric element matrix)
1--
No structure at the interface (symmetric element matrix)
KEYOPT(4)
PML absorbing condition:
0--
Do not include PML absorbing condition
1--
Include PML absorbing condition
KEYOPT(7)
Free surface effect:
0--
Do not include sloshing effect
1--
Include sloshing effect on face of elements located on Z = 0.0 plane (elements must not have
positive Z coordinates)
FLUID30 Output Data

Nodal displacements and pressures included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table30.1:FLUID30 Element Output Definitions.
FLUID30
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
PRESSURE
PG(X,Y,Z,SUM)
VL(X,Y,Z,SUM)
SOUND PR. LEVEL
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
Average pressure
Pressure gradient components and vector sum
Fluid velocity components and vector sum
Sound pressure level (in decibels)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
1
1
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1. Output only if ANTYPE,HARMIC

Name
Item
E
Item
E

PGX
PGY
PGZ
VLX
VLY
VLZ
PRESSURE
PGSUM
VLSUM
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
FLUID30
SOUND PR. LEVEL
NMISC

Element nodes may be numbered either as shown in Figure 30.1 or may have planes IJKL and
MNOP interchanged.
The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs usually when
the element nodes are not in the correct sequence.
All elements must have 8 nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K
and L and duplicate O and P nodes (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements). A tetrahedron
shape is also available.
We do not recommend using degenerate shapes with KEYOPT(7) = 1.
The acoustic pressure in the fluid medium is determined by the wave equation with the following
assumptions:
The fluid is compressible (density changes due to pressure variations).
Inviscid fluid (no dissipative effect due to viscosity).
There is no mean flow of the fluid.
The mean density and pressure are uniform throughout the fluid. Note that the acoustic
pressure is the excess pressure from the mean pressure.
Analyses are limited to relatively small acoustic pressures so that the changes in density are
small compared with the mean density.
The lumped mass matrix formulation [LUMPM,ON] is not allowed for this element.

ANSYS Multiphysics.
KEYOPT(7) is valid only in ANSYS Multiphysics
14.29.FLUID30 - 3-D Acoustic Fluid
Matrix or Vector
Fluid Stiffness and Mass
Matrices
Coupling Stiffness and
Mass Matrices (fluidstructure interface)
Fluid Damping Matrix
(fluid at fluid-structure
interface)
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Equation12224
specialized to the interface
No shape functions are used. Instead, the area
associated with each node at the interface is
computed for the damping to act upon.

Acoustics describes the derivation of acoustic element matrices and load vectors.
2x2x2
2x2
None
FLUID38
FLUID38
Dynamic Fluid Coupling
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID38 is used to represent a dynamic coupling between two points of a structure. The coupling is
based on the dynamic response of two points connected by a constrained mass of fluid. The points
represent the centerlines of concentric cylinders. The fluid is contained in the annular space between the
cylinders. The cylinders may be circular or have an arbitrary cross-section. The element has two degrees
of freedom per node: for example, translations in the nodal x and z directions. The axes of the cylinders
are then assumed to be in the nodal y directions. The element may be used in any structural dynamic
analysis. For certain cases the axisymmetric harmonic fluid element, FLUID81 (with MODE = 1), can also
be used. See FLUID38 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for
more details about this element.
FLUID38 Input Data

The node locations and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 38.1. The element is
defined by two nodes and several real constants. The real constants are defined in Table38.1:FLUID38
Real Constants.
KEYOPT(3) is used to select the form of the fluid coupling element. The form of the element determines
the real constants required, the material properties (if any), and the matrices calculated. The density is
input as material property DENS and is evaluated at the average of the two node temperatures. The
damping matrix is calculated only if F is nonzero. KEYOPT(6) is used to select the direction of operation
for the element. If KEYOPT(6) = 1, the X and Y labels used in this description should be interchanged.
Similarly, if KEYOPT(6) = 3, interchange the Z and Y labels.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UZ if KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 2, or
UY, UZ if KEYOPT(6) = 1, or
UX, UY if KEYOPT(6) = 3
Real Constants
FLUID38
If KEYOPT(3) = 0:
R2, R1, L, F, DX, DZ,
WX, WZ
If KEYOPT(3) = 2:
M2, M1, MHX, MHZ, DX, DZ,
WX, WZ, CX, CZ
See Table38.1:FLUID38 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
DENS if KEYOPT (3) = 0
None if KEYOPT (3) = 2
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature--
T(I), T(J)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(3)
Cross-section of cylinders:
0--
Concentric circular cylinders
2--
Concentric arbitrary cylinders
KEYOPT(6)
Flow axis parallel to:
0, 2 --
Nodal Y axis (UX, UZ degrees of freedom)
1--
Nodal X axis (UX, UZ degrees of freedom)
3 --
Flow axis parallel to nodal Z axis (UX, UY degrees of freedom)
Table38.1FLUID38 Real Constants
No.
Name
Description
FLUID38
Concentric Circular Cylinders: KEYOPT(3) = 0

1
R2
Radius of outer cylinder (length); node J refers to outer boundary
2
R1
Radius of inner cylinder (length); node I refers to inner boundary
3
L
Length of cylinders
4
F
Darcy friction factor for turbulent flow
5
DX
Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DX
6
DZ
Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DZ
7
WX
Estimate of resonant X frequency (Rad/Time)
8
WZ
Estimate of resonant Z frequency (Rad/Time)
Concentric Arbitrary Cylinders: KEYOPT(3) = 2
1
M2
Mass of fluid that could be contained within the outer boundary
(Boundary 2) in absence of inner boundary.
2
M1
Mass of fluid displaced by the inner boundary (Boundary 1)
3
MHX
Hydrodynamic mass in X direction
4
MHZ
Hydrodynamic mass in Z direction
5
DX
Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DX
6
DZ
Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DZ
7
WX
Estimate of resonant X frequency (Rad/Time)
8
WZ
Estimate of resonant Z frequency (Rad/Time)
9
CX
Flow and geometry constant for X motion (mass/lenght)
10
CZ
Flow and geometry constant for Z motion (mass/length)
FLUID38 Output Data

There is no element solution output associated with the element unless element reaction forces and/or
energies are requested.

The element operates in the nodal coordinate system (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal
Coordinate System).
No fluid coupling exists in the flow axis direction.
The element has no nodal coordinate system transformation to account for nonparallel nodal
coordinate systems.
Nodes I and J may be located anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
The lumped mass option [LUMPM] is not available with this element.

14.37.FLUID38 - Dynamic Fluid Coupling
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Mass Matrix
None
Damping Matrix
Not defined
None
Reference: Fritz([12])
14.37.1.Description
This element is used to represent a dynamic coupling between two points of a structure. The coupling is
based on the dynamic response of two points connected by a constrained mass of fluid. The points
represent the centerlines of concentric cylinders. The fluid is contained in the annular space between the
cylinders. The cylinders may be circular or have an arbitrary cross-section. The element has two DOFs
per node: translations in the nodal x and z directions. The axes of the cylinders are assumed to be in
the nodal y directions. These orientations may be changed with KEYOPT(6).

1. The motions are assumed to be small with respect to the fluid channel thickness.
2. The fluid is assumed to be incompressible.
3. Fluid velocities should be less than 10% of the speed of sound in the fluid.
4. The flow channel length should be small compared to the wave length for propagating vibratory
disturbances (less than about 10%), in order to avoid the possibility of standing wave effects.
14.37.3.Mass Matrix Formulation

The mass matrix formulation used in the element is of the following form:
(14
62)
The m values are dependent upon the KEYOPT(3) value selected. For KEYOPT(3) = 0 (concentric
cylinder case):
(14
63)
(14
64)
(14
65)
where:
= fluid mass density (input as DENS on MP command)

R1 = radius of inner cylinder (input as R1 on R command)
R2 = radius of outer cylinder (input as R2 on R command)
L = length of cylinders (input as L on R command)
Note that the shape functions are similar to that for PLANE25 or FLUID81 with MODE = 1. The element
mass used in the evaluation of the total structure mass is
For KEYOPT(3) = 2, which is a generalization of the above cylindrical values but for different geometries,
the m values are as follows:
(14
66)
(14
67)
(14
68)
(14
69)
(14
70)
(14
71)
where:
M 1 = mass of fluid displaced by the inner boundary (Boundary 1) (input as M1 on R command)
M 2 = mass of fluid that could be contained within the outer boundary (Boundary 2) in absence of the
inner boundary (input as M2 on R command)
M hx, M hz = hydrodynamic mass for motion in the x and z directions, respectively (input as MHX and
MHZ on R command)
The element mass used in the evaluation of the total structure mass is M 2 - M 1 .
The lumped mass option (LUMPM,ON) is not available.
14.37.4.Damping Matrix Formulation

The damping matrix formulation used in the element is of the following form:
(14
72)
The c values are dependent upon the KEYOPT(3) value selected. For KEYOPT(3) = 0:
(14
73)
(14
74)
(14
75)
(14
76)
where:
W x , W z = estimate of resonant frequencies in the x and z response directions, respectively (input as

WX, WZ on RMORE command)
f = Darcy friction factor for turbulent flow (input as F on R command)
x, z = estimate of peak relative amplitudes between inner and outer boundaries for the x and z
motions, respectively (input as DX, DZ on R command)
For KEYOPT(3) = 2, the c values are as follows:
(14
77)
(14
78)
(14
79)
(14
80)
where:
Cx , Cz = flow and geometry constants for the x and z motions, respectively (input as CX, CZ on
RMORE command)
SOLID62
SOLID62
3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID62 has the capability of modeling 3-D coupled magneto-structural fields. The magnetic formulation
uses a vector potential (AX, AY, AZ) in static analysis and a vector potential combined with a timeintegrated scalar potential (VOLT) for harmonic and transient analysis. The structural formulation is
similar to that in the SOLID45 element. The element has plasticity, creep, swelling, stress stiffening,
large deflection, and large strain capabilities. Other elements with magneto-structural capability are
PLANE13, SOLID5, and SOLID98. Magneto-structural coupling is not available for harmonic analysis. See
SOLID62 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details
about this element.
The element has nonlinear magnetic harmonic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet
demagnetization curves.
SOLID62 Input Data

element is defined by eight nodes and the material properties. A tetrahedral-shaped element may be
formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes M, N, O, and P; and nodes K and L. A wedgeshaped element and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure 62.1. The type
of units (MKS or user defined) for magnetic field analysis is specified through the EMUNIT command.
EMUNIT also determines the value of MUZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4
x 10 -7 henries/meter. In addition to MUZRO, orthotropic relative permeability is available and is specified
through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ material property labels. Orthotropic resistivity is specified through
the RSVX, RSVY, and RSVZ material labels.
MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ represent vector components of the coercive force for permanent magnet
materials. The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root of the sum of the squares of the
components. The direction of polarization is determined by the components MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ.
Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. Nonlinear magnetic properties are
entered with the TB command as described in Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis). Nonlinear
orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H curve and linear relative
permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction where a zero value of
SOLID62
relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per material.
Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (displacement, magnetic vector potential, and time-integrated electric scalar potential). With the F
command, the Lab variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ, AMPS) and VALUE
corresponds to the value (force, magnetic current segments, and current).
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. The surface loads; pressure and Maxwell force
flags may be input on the element faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 62.1 using the SF
and SFE commands. Surfaces at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using
the MXWF label on the surface load commands (no value is required). A Maxwell stress tensor
calculation is performed at these surfaces to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in
solution as structural loads. The surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body
for which forces are required. Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag.
The body loads; temperature (structural), magnetic virtual displacement, fluence, and source current
density may be input based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value (BF and
BFE commands.) In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures and fluence default to the
uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. The vector components of the current
density are with respect to the element coordinate system. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT) may be
made available for a subsequent thermal analysis with companion elements (LDREAD command).
of 1 and 0 for the MVDI (Magnetic Virtual Displacements) label (BF command). See the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ plus BH data table (see Material Data Tables (Implicit Analysis)),
(PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
DENS, GXY, GXZ, GYZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Maxwell Force Flags--
6 (M-N-O-P)
Pressures--
SOLID62
6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
MVDI--
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N), VD(O), VD(P)
Fluences--
FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Source Current Density--
JSX(I), JSY(I), JSZ(I), PHASE(I), JSX(J), JSY(J), JSZ(J), PHASE(J), JSX(K), JSY(K), JSZ(K),
PHASE(K), JSX(L), JSY(L), JSZ(L), PHASE(L), JSX(M), JSY(M), JSZ(M), PHASE(M), JSX(N), JSY
(N), JSZ(N), PHASE(N), JSX(O), JSY(O), JSZ(O), PHASE(O), JSX(P), JSY(P), JSZ(P), PHASE(P)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP)
Swelling (SWELL)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Magneto-structural coupling -- requires an iterative solution for field coupling
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(1)
0--
1--
KEYOPT(5)
0--
1--
Integration point printout
SOLID62
2--
Nodal magnetic field and stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0--
1 --
Structural surface solution for face I-J-N-M also
2--
Structural surface solution for face I-J-N-M and face K-L-P-O (Surface solution available for
linear materials only)
3--
Structural nonlinear solution at each integration point also
4--
Structural surface solution for faces with nonzero pressure
SOLID62 Output Data

Nodal displacements and potentials included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table62.1:SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions
The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system.
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The surface stress outputs
are in the surface coordinate systems and are available for any face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate
systems for faces IJNM and KLPO are shown in Figure 62.1. The other surface coordinate systems follow
similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface stress printout is valid
only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met. A general description of solution output is
given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Table62.1SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
Definition
Element Number
SOLID62
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
FLUEN
S:1, 2, 3
S:INT
S:EQV
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3
EPEL:EQV
XZ
EPTH:EQV
XZ
EPPL:EQV
XZ
EPCR:EQV
EPSW:
NL:EPEQ
NL:SRAT
NL:SEPL
NL:HPRES
FACE
AREA
TEMP
EPEL(X, Y, XY)
PRESS
S(X, Y, XY)
S(1, 2, 3)
SINT
SEQV
Material number
Volume
P
Input temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N),
T(O), T(P)
Input fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N),
FL(O), FL(P)
Stresses (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ)
Principal stresses
Stress intensity
Equivalent stress
Elastic strains
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
1
Y
1

Average plastic strain
1
1
1
1

Average creep strain
1
1
1
1
Equivalent creep strain [4]

Average swelling strain
Average equivalent plastic strain
Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface
Face label
Face area
Surface elastic strains
Surface pressure
Surface stresses (X-axis parallel to line defined by first
two nodes which define the face)
Surface principal stresses
Surface stress intensity
Surface equivalent stress
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1. Nonlinear solution (if the element has a nonlinear material)

2. Face printout (if KEYOPT(6) is 1, 2, or 4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SOLID62
Table62.2SOLID62 Miscellaneous Structural Element Output
Description
Nonlinear Integration Pt. Solution EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL, HPRES, EPCR,
EPSW
Integration Point Stress Solution
TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT, SEQV,
EPEL
TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT, SEQV,
EPEL
1. Output at each of eight integration points, if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6)
=3
Table62.3SOLID62 Magnetic Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
CENT: X, Y, Z
TEMP
LOC
MU(X, Y, Z)
H:X, Y, Z
H:SUM
B:X, Y, Z
B:SUM
JS:X, Y, Z
JT(X, Y, Z)
JHEAT:
FJB(X, Y, Z)
FMX(X, Y, Z)
FVW(X, Y, Z)
Combined (FJB or
FMX) force
components
Definition
Element Number
Material number
Volume
Global location XC, YC, ZC
Input temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N),
T(O), T(P)
Source current density, valid for static analysis only
Total current density components
Lorentz magnetic force components
Maxwell magnetic force components
Virtual work force components
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1. The solution value is output only if calculated (based on input data). The element solution is at the
centroid.
SOLID62
Table62.4SOLID62 Miscellaneous Magnetic Element Output

Description
Integration Point Solution

Nodal Magnetic Field Solution
LOC, MUX, MUY, MUZ, H, HSUM, B, BSUM

H, HSUM, B, BSUM
O
1
2
R
-

2. Output at each corner node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2
Note: JT represents the total measurable current density in a conductor, including eddy
current effects, and velocity effects if calculated.
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table62.1:SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Item
E

JSX
JSY
JSZ
JS(SUM)
MUX
MUY
MUZ
FVWX
FVWY
FVWZ
FVW(SUM)
JTX
JTY
JTZ
JT(SUM)
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
14
15
SOLID62
The element must not have a zero volume or a zero length side. This occurs most frequently when
the element is not numbered properly. Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 62.1
or may have the planes IJKL and MNOP interchanged.
The PCG solver does not support SOLID62 elements.
For models containing materials with different permeabilities, the 3-D nodal-based vector potential
formulation (either static or time-dependent) is not recommended. The solution has been found to
be incorrect when the normal component of the vector potential is significant at the interface
between elements of different permeability. To obtain the normal component of the vector
potential in postprocessing, issue PLVECT,A or PRVECT,A in a rotated coordinate system [RSYS]
that orients one of the vector potential components normal to the material interface.
For static analysis, the VOLT degree of freedom is not used.
For transient analyses, the following restrictions apply: The VOLT degree of freedom is required in
all regions with a specified nonzero resistivity. The VOLT degree of freedom should be set to zero
in nonconducting regions where it is not required. For conducting regions (RSVX 0), current
loading should be applied as nodal loads (AMPS); current density loading (JS) is not allowed.
No coupling is introduced for harmonic analysis. The magneto-structural coupling is invoked only
for static and transient analyses. No reduced transient analysis capability is available. Structural
coupling is introduced automatically in current carrying conductors (either those with an applied
current density, JS, or induced current density, JT). Structural coupling is also introduced by
specifying a Maxwell surface on the "air" elements adjacent to the structure.
Note: Applying MVDI does not introduce magneto-structural coupling. The coupling
is highly nonlinear if large deflection is involved. Ramp load slowly and
converge at intermediate time substeps.
Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution. The element sizes, when
degenerated, should be small in order to minimize the stress gradients and field gradients.
Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in meshing transition zones.
compatible, the elements must have the same reaction force (see Element Compatibility in the
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide ).

14.60. SOLID62 - 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
14.60.SOLID62 - 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
Matrix or Vector
Integration
Points
Shape Functions
Magnetic Vector
Potential Coefficient, and
Damping (Eddy Current) Equation12218, Equation12219, and
Matrices; and Permanent Equation12220
Magnet and Applied
Current Load Vector
Equation12217 or, if modified extra shape
Stiffness Matrix and
functions are included (KEYOPT(1) = 0) and
Thermal Load Vector
element has 8 unique nodes Equation12230,
Mass and Stress
Equation12215, Equation12216 and
Equation12217
Stiffness Matrices
Magnetic Force Load
Same as damping matrix
Vector
Quad
69
Triangle
50
Load Type
Current Density and Phase Angle
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2
3
Distribution

References: Wilson([38]), Taylor et al.([49]), Coulomb([76]), Biro et al.([120])

evaluations. Derivation of Electromagnetic Matrices and Electromagnetic Field Evaluations contain a
discussion of the 2-D magnetic vector potential formulation which is similar to the 3-D formulation of this
element.
FLUID79
FLUID79
2-D Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID79 is used to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. Another fluid element
(FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing in pipes and channels. The fluid element is particularly
well suited for calculating hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such as
in sloshing problems, as well as temperature effects, may be included.
The fluid element is defined by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translation in
the nodal x and y directions. The element may be used in a structural analysis as a plane element or as
an axisymmetric ring element. See FLUID79 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. See FLUID80 for a 3-D version of this
element.
Note: The reduced method is the only acceptable method for modal analyses using the
ANSYS fluid elements.
FLUID79 Input Data

element input data includes four nodes and the isotropic material properties. EX, which is interpreted as
the "fluid elastic modulus", should be the bulk modulus of the fluid (approximately 300,000 psi for
water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping matrix for dynamic analyses (typical
viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10 -7 lb-sec/in2) . The use of KEYOPT(2) for gravity springs is
discussed in "FLUID80 Input Data". Vertical acceleration ( ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for
the gravity springs.
FLUID79
Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS, VISC, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
Location of gravity springs:
0--
Place gravity springs on all sides of all elements
1--
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (elements must not
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane
1--
Axisymmetric
FLUID79 Output Data

Degree of freedom results included in the overall nodal solution
FLUID79
Additional element output as shown in Table79.1:FLUID79 Element Output Definitions

The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. Nodal forces and reaction forces
are on a full 360 basis for axisymmetric models. A general description of solution output is given in
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
TAVG
PAVG
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Volume
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; P4 at
I, L
Average temperature
Average pressure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Name
Item
E
I,J,...,L
FLUID79
Output
Quantity Name
PRES
P1
P2
P3
P4

E
I
J
K
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
3
8
2
5
-
4
7
-
6
9

The fluid element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 79.1 and the Y-axis must be the
Radial motion should be constrained at the centerline.
Usually the Y-axis is oriented in the vertical direction with the top surface at Y = 0.0.
Elements should be rectangular whenever possible, as results are known to be of lower quality for
some cases using nonrectangular shapes.
Axisymmetric elements should always be rectangular.
The nonlinear transient dynamic analysis should be used instead of the linear transient dynamic
analysis for this element.
A very small stiffness (EX x 1.0E-9) is associated with the shear and rotational strains to ensure
static stability. See FLUID80 for more assumptions and restrictions.

14.75.FLUID79 - 2-D Contained Fluid
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness and
Damping Matrices;
and Thermal Load
Vector
Mass Matrix
Pressure Load
Vector
Geometry
Shape Functions
Quad
Equation12117 and
Equation12118
Triangle
Equation1298 and
Equation1299
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
1x1forbulkstraineffects
2x2forshearandrotational
resistanceeffects
1x1forbulkstraineffects
3forshearandrotational
resistanceeffects
Same as stiffness matrix. Matrix is

diagonalized as in Lumped Matrices.
Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to the
face
Load Type
Integration Points
Same as for shear effects

2
Distribution
Average of the four nodal temperatures is used throughout the
element

Structures describes the derivation of element matrices and load vectors. The fluid aspects of this
element are the same as described for FLUID80.
13.5.Lumped Matrices
Some of the elements allow their consistent mass or specific heat matrices to be reduced to diagonal
matrices (accessed with the LUMPM,ON command). This is referred to as lumping.
13.5.1.Diagonalization Procedure
One of two procedures is used for the diagonalization, depending on the order of the element shape
functions. The mass matrix is used as an example.
For lower order elements (linear or bilinear) the diagonalized matrix is computed by summing rows (or
columns). The steps are:
1. Compute the consistent mass matrix
in the usual manner.
2. Compute:
(13
9)
where:
n = number of degrees of freedom (DOFs) in the element
3. Set
(13
10)
(13
11)
For higher order elements the procedure suggested by Hinton, et al.([45]), is used. The steps are:
1. Compute the consistent mass matrix
in the usual manner.
2. Compute:
(13
12)
(13
13)
3. Set:
(13
14)
(13
15)
Note that this method ensures that:
1. The element mass is preserved
2. The element mass matrix is positive definite

It may be observed that if the diagonalization is performed by simply summing rows or columns in
higher order elements, the resulting element mass matrix is not always positive definite.
13.5.2.Limitations of Lumped Mass Matrices

Lumped mass matrices have the following limitations:
1. Elements containing both translational and rotational degrees of freedom will have mass
contributions only for the translational degrees of freedom. Rotational degrees of freedom are
included for:
SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, SHELL281, and ELBOW290 unless an unbalanced laminate
construction is used.
BEAM188, BEAM189, PIPE288, and PIPE289 if there are no offsets.
2. Lumping, by its very nature, eliminates the concept of mass coupling between degrees of freedom.
Therefore, the following restrictions exist:
Lumping is not allowed for FLUID29, FLUID30, or FLUID38 elements.
Lumping is not allowed for the mass matrix option of MATRIX27 elements if it is defined with
nonzero off-diagonal terms.
The use of lumping with constraint equations may effectively cause the loss of some mass for
analyses that involve a mass matrix. For example, in modal analyses this typically results in
higher frequencies. This loss of mass comes about because of the generation of off-diagonal
terms by the constraint equations, which then are ignored.
The exceptions to this are substructuring generation passes with the sparse solver and the
PCG Lanczos mode extraction method in modal analyses. These exceptions contain the offdiagonal terms when lumped mass is used with constraint equations. It is important to note
however, that the assembled mass matrix in a jobname.FULL file generated by the PCG
Lanczos mode extraction method will not contain the off-diagonal mass terms for this case.
LUMPM
LUMPM
LUMPM, Key
Specifies a lumped mass matrix formulation.

Key
Formulation key:
OFF Use the element-dependent default mass matrix formulation (default).
ON Use a lumped mass approximation.
Command Default
Use the default element mass matrix.
Notes
This command is also valid in PREP7. If used in SOLUTION, this command is valid only within the first
load step.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main

Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>New Analysis
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>New Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_LUMPM.html[28/04/2013 08:53:01 p.m.]
FLUID80
FLUID80
3-D Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID80 is used to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. Another fluid element
(FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing in pipes and channels. The fluid element is particularly
well suited for calculating hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such as
in sloshing problems, as well as temperature effects, may be included.
The fluid element is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translation in
the nodal x, y, and z directions. See FLUID80 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. See FLUID79 for a 2-D version of this
element.
FLUID80 Input Data

element input data includes eight nodes and the isotropic material properties. EX, which is interpreted as
the "fluid elastic modulus", should be the bulk modulus of the fluid (approximately 300,000 psi for
water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping matrix for dynamic analyses. A
typical viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10 -7 lb-sec/in2 .
The element also includes special surface effects, which may be thought of as gravity springs used to
hold the surface in place. This is performed by adding springs to each node, with the spring constants
being positive on the top of the element, and negative on the bottom. Gravity effects [ACEL] must be
included if a free surface exists. For an interior node, the positive and negative effects cancel out, and at
the bottom, where the fluid must be contained to keep the fluid from leaking out, the negative spring
has no effect (as long as all degrees of freedom on the bottom are fixed). If the bottom consists of a
flexible container, or if the degrees of freedom tangential to a curved surface are released, these
negative springs may cause erroneous results and "negative pivot" messages. In this case, use of
KEYOPT(2) = 1 is recommended.
FLUID80
These surface springs, while necessary to keep the free surface in place, artificially reduce the
hydrostatic motion of the free surface. The error for a tank with vertical walls, expressed as a ratio of
the computed answer over the correct answer is 1.0/(1.0 + (bottom pressure/bulk modulus)), which is
normally very close to 1.0. Hydrodynamic results are not affected by this overstiffness.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
0--
1--
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Z = 0.0 plane (elements must not
have positive Z coordinates)
FLUID80 Output Data

FLUID80

The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
PRES
TEMP
TAVG
PAVG
Definition
Element Number
Y
Y
Material number
Y
Volume
Y
Y
Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at J, K,
Y
O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
Y
Average temperature
Y
Average pressure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y

Name
Item
E
I,J,...,P
FLUID80
Output
Quantity
Name
PRES
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

I
J
K
L
M
N
E
1
3
6
-
2
7
10
19
-
11
14
-
15
18
-
9
20
22
8
13
23
12
17
24
16
21
25

MNOP interchanged.
The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate volumes. This occurs
most frequently when the elements are not numbered properly.
Structures are usually modeled with the Z-axis oriented in the vertical direction and the top surface
at Z = 0.0.
Elements should be rectangular (brick shaped) whenever possible, as results are known to be of
lower quality for some cases using nonrectangular shapes.
For the case of a modal analysis with irregular meshes, one can expect one or more low frequency
eigenvectors, representing internal fluid motions, without significantly affecting the vertical motion
of the free surface.
The amount of flow permitted is limited to that which will not cause gross distortions in the
element.
The large deflection option should not be used with this element.
In a reduced analysis, master degrees of freedom should be selected at all nodes on the free fluid
surface in the direction normal to the free surface. Other master degrees of freedom, if any, should
only be selected normal to one or more flat planes within the fluid, with all nodes on these planes
being included. Other selections may produce large internal rotations.
When used for a static application, the free surface must be input flat. Gravity must be input if
there is a free surface. The element gives valid nodal forces representing hydrostatic pressure and
also valid vertical displacements at the free surface. Other nodal displacements, which may be
large, represent energy-free internal motions of the fluid.
Fluid element at a boundary should not be attached directly to structural elements but should have
separate, coincident nodes that are coupled only in the direction normal to the interface.
Arbitrarily small numbers are included to give the element some shear and rotational stability.
FLUID80

14.76.FLUID80 - 3-D Contained Fluid
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness and
Damping
Matrices; and
Thermal Load
Vector
Mass Matrix
Pressure Load
Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points

Equation12217
1x1x1forbulkstraineffects
2x2x2forshearandrotational
resistanceeffects
Same as stiffness matrix. Matrix is

diagonalized as described in Lumped
Matrices
the face
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
2x2x2
2x2
Distribution
Average of the 8 nodal temperatures is used throughout element
Average of the 8 nodal temperatures is used throughout element

Structures describes the derivation of element matrices and load vectors.

This element does not generate a consistent mass matrix; only the lumped mass matrix is available.
14.76.3.Material Properties
Rather than Equation23, the stress-strain relationships used to develop the stiffness matrix and
thermal load vector are:
(14
163)
where:
= thermal coefficient of expansion (input as ALPX on MP command)

T = change of temperature from reference temperature
K = fluid elastic (bulk) modulus (input as EX on MP command)
P = pressure
= shear strain
S = K x 10 -9 (arbitrarily small number to give element some shear stability)
= shear stress
Ri = rotation about axis i
B = K x 10 -9 (arbitrarily small number to give element some rotational stability)
M i = twisting force about axis i
A damping matrix is also developed based on:
(14
164)
where:
= viscosity (input as VISC on MP command)
c = .00001*
and the ( ) represents differentiation with respect to time.

A lumped mass matrix is developed, based on the density (input as DENS on MP command).
14.76.4.Free Surface Effects

The free surface is handled with an additional special spring effect. The necessity of these springs can
be seen by studying a U-Tube, as shown in Figure 14.20.
Note that if the left side is pushed down a distance of h, the displaced fluid mass is:
(14
165)
where:
M D = mass of displaced fluid
h = distance fluid surface has moved
A = cross-sectional area of U-Tube
= fluid density
Then, the force required to hold the fluid in place is
(14
166)
where:
F D = force required to hold the fluid in place
g = acceleration due to gravity (input on ACEL command)
Figure14.20U-Tube with Fluid
Finally, the stiffness at the surface is the force divided by the distance, or
(14
167)
This expression is generalized to be:
(14
168)
where:
AF = area of the face of the element
gi = acceleration in the i direction
Ci = ith component of the normal to the face of the element
This results in adding springs from each node to ground, with the spring constants being positive on the
top of the element, and negative on the bottom. For an interior node, positive and negative effects
cancel out and, at the bottom where the boundary must be fixed to keep the fluid from leaking out, the
negative spring has no effect. If KEYOPT(2) = 1, positive springs are added only to faces located at z =
0.0.
14.76.5.Other Assumptions and Limitations

The surface springs tend to retard the hydrostatic motions of the element from their correct values. The
hydrodynamic motions are not changed. From the definition of bulk modulus,
(14
169)
where:
us = vertical motion of a static column of fluid (unit cross-sectional area)
H = height of fluid column
P = pressure at any point
z = distance from free surface
The pressure is normally defined as:
(14
170)
But this pressure effect is reduced by the presence of the surface springs, so that
(14
171)
Combining Equation14169 and Equation14171 and integrating,
(14
172)
or
(14
173)
If there were no surface springs,
(14
174)
Thus the error for hydrostatic effects is the departure from 1.0 of the factor (1 / (1+Hg/K)), which is
normally quite small.
The 1 x 1 x 1 integration rule is used to permit the element to bend without the bulk modulus
resistance being mobilized, i.e.
Figure14.21Bending Without Resistance
While this motion is permitted, other motions in a static problem often result, which can be thought of
as energy-free eddy currents. For this reason, small shear and rotational resistances are built in, as
indicated in Equation14163.
FLUID81
FLUID81
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID81 is a modification of the axisymmetric structural solid element (PLANE25). The element is used
to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. It is defined by four nodes having three
degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. The element is used in
a structural analysis as an axisymmetric ring element.
The element is a generalization of the axisymmetric version of FLUID79, the 2-D fluid element, in that
the loading need not be axisymmetric. Various loading cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads. The fluid element is particularly well suited for calculating
hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such as in sloshing problems, as
well as temperature effects, may be included. See FLUID81 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. Another fluid element
(FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing in pipes and channels.
FLUID81 Input Data

element input data includes four nodes, the number of harmonic waves ( MODE on the MODE command),
the symmetry condition ( ISYM on the MODE command), and the isotropic material properties. If MODE =
0 and ISYM = 1, the element behaves similar to the axisymmetric case of FLUID79. The MODE and ISYM
parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads. EX,
which is interpreted as the "fluid elastic modulus," should be the bulk modulus of the fluid
(approximately 300,000 psi for water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping
matrix for dynamic analyses. A typical viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10 -7 lb-sec/in2 . Density
(DENS) must be input as a positive number.
The use of KEYOPT(2) for gravity springs is discussed in "FLUID80 Input Data". Vertical acceleration
( ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for the gravity springs regardless of the value of MODE , even
for a modal analysis. Harmonically varying nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360 basis.
pressures act into the element.
FLUID81
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures--
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
0--
1--
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (element must not
FLUID81
FLUID81 Output Data

The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. Nodal forces and reaction forces
are on a full 360 basis.
the peak value at = 90. Printout for combined loading cases may be obtained from the POST1
routine. We recommend that you always use the angle field on the SET command when postprocessing
the results. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with
The following notation is used in Table81.1:FLUID81 Element Output Definitions:
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
ISYM
MODE
VOLU:
XC, YC
PRES
TEMP
TAVG
PAVG
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Loading Key
1
Volume
Y
Average temperature
Average pressure
1. If ISYM is:
1 - Symmetric loading
-1 - Antisymmetric loading
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
FLUID81
Name
Item
E
I,J,...,L
Output
Quantity Name
PRES
P1
P2
P3
P4

E
I
J
K
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
3
8
2
5
-
4
7
-
6
9

The fluid element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 81.1 and the Y-axis must be the
The Y-axis should be oriented in the vertical direction and the top surface is usually at Y = 0.0.
Temperature-dependent material properties, if any, are evaluated at the reference temperature
[TREF].
Elements should be rectangular since results are known to be of lower quality for nonrectangular
shapes.
A lumped mass matrix may be obtained for this element with the LUMPM command.
See FLUID80 for more assumptions and restrictions.
FLUID81

14.77. FLUID81 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
14.77.FLUID81 - Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
Matrix or Vector
Geometry
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Stiffness and
Damping Matrices;
and Thermal Load
Vector
Mass Matrix
Pressure Load
Vector
1forbulkstraineffects
2x2forshearandrotational
resistanceeffects
Equation12147 , Equation12 1forbulkstraineffects
Triangle
3forshearandrotational
resistanceeffects
Quad
2x2
Triangle
3
Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to the
2
face
Quad
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Distribution
Average of the four nodal temperatures is used throughout the
element

Structures describes the derivation of element matrices and load vectors. The fluid aspects of this
element are the same as described for FLUID80 - 3-D Contained Fluid except that a consistent mass
matrix is also available (LUMPM,OFF).

The material properties are assumed to be constant around the entire circumference, regardless of
temperature dependent material properties or loading.
14.77.3.Load Vector Correction

When (input as MODE on MODE command) > 0, the gravity that is required to be input for use as a
gravity spring (input as ACELY on ACEL command) also is erroneously multiplied by the mass matrix for
a gravity force effect. This erroneous effect is cancelled out by an element load vector that is
automatically generated during the element stiffness pass.
12.8.Axisymmetric Harmonic Solids

This section contains shape functions for axisymmetric harmonic solid elements. These elements are
The shape functions of this section use the quantities sin and cos (where = input as MODE on
the MODE command). sin and cos are interchanged if Is = -1 (where Is = input as ISYM on the
MODE command). If = 0, sin = cos = 1.0.
Figure12.9Axisymmetric Harmonic Solid Elements
12.8.1.Axisymmetric Harmonic 3-Node Triangular Solids

These shape functions are for the 3-node axisymmetric triangular solid elements, such as PLANE25 with
only 3 nodes input:
(12
147)
(12
148)
(12
149)
(12
150)
12.8.2.Axisymmetric Harmonic 6-Node Triangular Solids

These shape functions are for the 6-node axisymmetric triangular solids elements, such as PLANE83
input as a triangle:
(12
151)
(12
152)
(12
153)
(12
154)
12.8.3.Axisymmetric Harmonic 4-Node Quadrilateral Solids without ESF

These shape functions are for the 4-node axisymmetric harmonic quadrilateral solid elements without
extra shape functions, such as PLANE25 with KEYOPT(2) = 1, or PLANE75:
(12
155)
(12
156)
(12
157)
(12
158)
12.8.4.Axisymmetric Harmonic 4-Node Quadrilateral Solids with ESF

These shape functions are for the 4-node axisymmetric harmonic quadrilateral elements with extra
shape functions, such as PLANE25 with KEYOPT(2) = 0.
(12
159)
(12
160)
(12
161)
Unless
(MODE) = 1, u1 or u2 and w1 or w2 motions are suppressed for elements near the centerline.
12.8.5.Axisymmetric Harmonic 8-Node Quadrilateral Solids

These shape functions are for the 8-node axisymmetric harmonic quadrilateral solid elements such as
PLANE78 or PLANE83.
(12
162)
(12
163)
(12
164)
(12
165)
FLUID129
FLUID129
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID129 has been developed as a companion element to FLUID29. It is intended to be used as an
envelope to a model made of FLUID29 finite elements. It simulates the absorbing effects of a fluid
domain that extends to infinity beyond the boundary of FLUID29 finite element domain. FLUID129
realizes a second-order absorbing boundary condition so that an outgoing pressure wave reaching the
boundary of the model is "absorbed" with minimal reflections back into the fluid domain. The element
can be used to model the boundary of 2-D (planar or axisymmetric) fluid regions and as such, it is a line
element; it has two nodes with one pressure degree of freedom per node. FLUID129 may be used in
transient, harmonic, and modal analyses. Typical applications include structural acoustics, noise control,
underwater acoustics, etc. See FLUID129 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
FLUID129 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes (I, J), the material properties and the real constants (defined in
"FLUID129 Input Summary"). The element must be circular with radius RAD and center located at or
near the center of the structure. The radius RAD should be supplied through the real constants.
The element is characterized by a pair of symmetric stiffness and damping matrices.
In a typical meshing procedure, you should mesh the interior fluid domain that is bounded by a circular
boundary with FLUID29 elements, select the nodes on the circular boundary, select the type associated
with the FLUID129 and then issue the ESURF command. The latter will automatically add the FLUID129
elements on the boundary of the finite domain.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
PRES
Real Constants
RAD - Radius
FLUID129
X 0 - Center of enclosing circle, X value

Y 0 - Center of enclosing circle, Y value
Material Properties
SONC - velocity of sound
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Planar
1--
Axisymmetric

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
LINE:
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Material number
Length
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
FLUID129
XC, YC
SONC

Speed of sound
1
Y

Table129.2:FLUID129 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
following notation is used in Table129.2:FLUID129 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
SONC
NMISC

FLUID129 must lie on a boundary circular in shape and should completely enclose the domain
meshed with FLUID29 elements.
The radius RAD of the circular boundary of the finite domain should be specified as a real constant.
If the coordinates (X 0 , Y 0 ) of the center of the circle are not supplied through the real constant
input, the center will be assumed to be at the origin. The center of the circle should be as close to
the center of the model as possible.
It is recommended that the enclosing circular boundary is placed at a distance of at least
0.2*lambda from the boundary of any structure that may be submerged in the fluid, where lambda
= c/f is the dominant wavelength of the pressure waves; c is the speed of sound (SONC) in the
fluid, and f is the dominant frequency of the pressure wave. For example, in the case of a
submerged circular cylindrical shell of diameter D, the radius of the enclosing boundary, RAD,
should be at least (D/2) + 0.2*lambda.
FLUID129 uses an extra DOF, labeled XTR1, that is not available to the user. This DOF is solely for
ANSYS' internal use, although it may appear in DOF listings or in program messages.
The only applicable modal analysis method is the Damped method.

14.125.FLUID129 - 2-D Infinite Acoustic
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Fluid Stiffness and Damping Matrices Equation1212
Integration Points
2

The mathematical formulation and finite element discretization are presented in FLUID130 - 3-D Infinite
Acoustic.
INFIN110
INFIN110
2-D Infinite Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>
INFIN110 Element Description

INFIN110 models an open boundary of a 2-D unbounded field problem. A single layer of elements is
used to represent an exterior sub-domain of semi-infinite extent. The layer models the effect of far-field
decay in magnetic, electrostatic, thermal, or electric current conduction analyses. For information about
enclosed elements and analysis types, see Table110.1:INFIN110 Analyses. INFIN110 may be used for
planar and axisymmetric analyses. See INFIN110 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Figure110.1INFIN110 Geometry
INFIN110 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element are shown in Figure 110.1.
KEYOPT(1) specifies the degree of freedom to be used. KEYOPT(2) specifies whether a 4-node or 8node element is used.
Only one layer of INFIN110 elements should be used between the finite element model and the exterior
(infinite) surface. The nodes may be input starting at any corner node, but the face opposite of the finite
element model (the exterior face) must be flagged as an infinite surface. This is usually done by
selecting the nodes at the outer surface and issuing the SF,all,INF command. The other faces have no
meaning. For best results, edges connecting the inner and outer surfaces of the infinite element should
be radial from the center of the model.
A summary of the element input is given in "INFIN110 Input Summary". A general description of
Elements.
INFIN110 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table110.1:INFIN110 Analyses.
Real Constants
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_INFIN110.html[28/04/2013 08:55:08 p.m.]
INFIN110
None
Material Properties
See Table110.2:INFIN110 Material Properties.
Surface Loads
Infinite Surface Flags--
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table110.1:INFIN110 Analyses.
KEYOPT(2)
Element definition:
0--
1--
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane
1--
Axisymmetric
KEYOPT(6)
Electric charge reaction sign:
0--
Positive
1--
Negative
Analysis categories are shown in the following table. KEYOPT(1) specifies the element degree of
freedom.
INFIN110
Table110.1INFIN110 Analyses
Analysis
Category
Magnetic
Electrostatic
KEYOPT(1)
0
DOF
Label
AZ
VOLT
Reaction
Solution
Enclosed
Elements
PLANE13
Static
Magnetic Current
Segment
PLANE53
Harmonic
(F label = CSG)
Transient
PLANE121
Electric
Current
Conduction
TEMP
VOLT
Static
Harmonic
Electric Charge
Thermal
Analysis
Type
(F label = CHRG)
PLANE35
Steady-state
Heat Flow
PLANE55
Transient
(F label = HEAT)
Electric Current
PLANE77
PLANE230
Steady-state
(F label = AMPS)
Harmonic
Transient
INFIN110 material properties are shown in the following table. Nonzero material properties must be
defined. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA and EMUNIT commands.
Table110.2INFIN110 Material Properties
Analysis Category
Magnetic
Electrostatic
Thermal
Electric Current Conduction
KEYOPT(1)
0
1
2
3
Material Properties
MUZERO
PERX, PERY, LSST, RSVX, RSVY
KXX, KYY, DENS, C
RSVX, RSVY, LSST, PERX, PERY
INFIN110 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table110.3:Element Output Definitions
Several items are illustrated in Figure 110.2. The element output directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic
Figure110.2INFIN110 Element Output
INFIN110
The following notation is used in Table110.3:Element Output Definitions:

available.
Table110.3Element Output Definitions
Name
Definition
EL
NODES
Element Number
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC
MUZERO
PERX, PERY
KXX, KYY
Nodes-I,J,K,L(KEYOPT(2)=0)
Nodes-I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P(KEYOPT(2)=1)
Material number
Volume
Magnetic permeability of free space
Electric relative permittivity (element coordinates)
Thermal conductivity (element coordinates)
Y
1
2
3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
1
2
3
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0
2. If KEYOPT(1) = 1
3. If KEYOPT(1) = 2
Table110.4:INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
following notation is used in Table110.4:INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table110.3:Element Output Definitions
Item
E
INFIN110

Table110.4INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
MUZERO
PERX
PERY
KXX
KYY
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
1
2
1
2
INFIN110 Assumptions and Restrictions

The area of the quadrilateral infinite element must be nonzero.
The element cannot degenerate to a triangle.
The exterior surface (for example, KL or KOL in Figure 110.1) of the element must be flagged
using the INF option on the SF family of commands.
Only one layer of infinite elements can be used on the exterior boundary of the finite element
model.
The lines JK and IL of the infinite element IJKL (in Figure 110.2) should either be parallel or
divergent from each other. That is, the enclosed surface should be convex and the infinite domain
must be represented by one layer of infinite elements without overlap or gap. Ideally, the length
OJ should equal JK, and OI should equal IL. The point "O" is the "pole" of mapping for the infinite
element. The pole is chosen arbitrarily, and may or may not coincide with the origin of the
coordinate system. For best results, the poles should be placed at the centers of disturbances
(loads). There can be multiple poles for a problem. See the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications for more about poles.
Although this element can have 8 nodes (KEYOPT(2) = 1), for theoretical reasons (see the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ), only 5 nodes are included in the
solution.
The element assumes that the degree of freedom (DOF) value at infinity is always zero (0.0). That
is, the DOF value at infinity is not affected by TUNIF, D, or other load commands.
The infinite elements are not included in solution result displays but may be viewed in element
displays [EPLOT].
There are considerations in the application of INFIN110 that will lead to optimal performance in the
analysis of your model. These consideration are covered in detail in the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
When used in a model with the higher-order elements PLANE35, PLANE53, PLANE77, PLANE121,
and PLANE230 use the higher-order setting for INFIN110 (KEYOPT(2) = 1).
compatible, elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have
an electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign.
KEYOPT(6) sets the electric charge reaction sign. For more information, see Element Compatibility
in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
INFIN110 Product Restrictions

INFIN110
ANSYS Mechanical.
These restrictions apply unless the Emag option is enabled.
This element does not have magnetic, electrostatic, or electric current conduction capability.
The AZ and VOLT degrees of freedom are not active. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 2 (TEMP) instead of 0
and cannot be changed.
The material properties MUZERO, PERX, PERY, RSVX, RSVY, and LSST are not allowed.
ANSYS Emag.
This element has only magnetic, electrostatic, and electric current conduction capability, and does
not have thermal capability.
The only active degrees of freedom are AZ and VOLT. KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 or 1.
The only allowable material properties are MUZERO, PERX, PERY, RSVX, RSVY, and LSST.
14.106.INFIN110 - 2-D Infinite Solid
Matrix or Vector
Magnetic Potential Coefficient
Matrix
Thermal Conductivity and
Specific Heat Matrices
Dielectric Permittivity and
Electrical Conductivity
Coefficient Matrices
Mapping and Shape Functions

Equation12141
Equation12141
Equation12141
Integration Points
2x2
2x2
2x2
References: Zienkiewicz et al.([169]), Damjanic' and Owen([170]), Marques and Owen([171]), Li et

al.([172])
14.106.1.Mapping Functions
The theory for the infinite mapping functions is briefly summarized here. Consider the 1-D situation
shown below:
Figure14.22Global to Local Mapping of a 1-D Infinite Element
The 1-D element may be thought of as one edge of the infinite element of Figure 14.23. It extends from
node J, through node K to the point M at infinity and is mapped onto the parent element defined by the
local coordinate system in the range -1 t 1.
Figure14.23Mapping of 2-D Solid Infinite Element
The position of the "pole", xo , is arbitrary, and once chosen, the location of node K is defined by
(14
192)
The interpolation from local to global positions is performed as
(14
193)
where:
M J (t) = -2t/(1 - t)
M K(t) = 1 - M J (t)
Examining the above mapping, it can be seen that t = -1, 0, 1 correspond respectively to the global
positions x = xJ , xK, , respectively.
The basic field variable is:
and can be interpolated using standard shape functions, which when written in polynomial form
becomes
(14
194)
Solving Equation14193 for t yields
(14
195)
where:
r = distance from the pole, O, to a general point within the element
a = xK - xJ as shown in Figure 14.23
Substituting Equation14195 into Equation14194 gives
(14
196)
Where c 0 = 0 is implied since the variable A is assumed to vanish at infinity.
Equation14196 is truncated at the quadratic (r2 ) term in the present implementation. Equation14196
also shows the role of the pole position, O.
In 2-D (Figure 14.23) mapping is achieved by the shape function products. The mapping functions and
the Lagrangian isoparametric shape functions for 2-D and axisymmetric 4 node quadrilaterals are given
in 2-D and Axisymmetric 4-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids. The shape functions for the nodes M and N
are not needed as the field variable, A, is assumed to vanish at infinity.
14.106.2.Matrices
The coefficient matrix can be written as:
(14
197)
with the terms defined below:
1. Magnetic Vector Potential (accessed with KEYOPT(1) = 0)
[K e] = magnetic potential coefficient matrix
o = magnetic permeability of free space (input on EMUNIT command)

The infinite elements can be used in magnetodynamic analysis even though these elements do not
compute mass matrices. This is because air has negligible conductivity.
2. Electric Potential (Electric Charge) (accessed with KEYOPT(1) = 1)
[Ke] = dielectric permittivity matrix
x , y = dielectric permittivity (input as PERX and PERY on MP command)
= effective electrical conductivity (defined by Equation586)

3. Temperature (accessed with KEYOPT(1) = 2)
[K e] = thermal conductivity matrix
kx , ky = thermal conductivities in the x and y direction (input as KXX and KYY on MP command)
Cc = Cp
= density of the fluid (input as DENS on MP command)
Cp = specific heat of the fluid (input as C on MP command)
{N} = shape functions given in 2-D and Axisymmetric 4-Node Quadrilateral Infinite Solids
4. Electric Potential (Electric Current) (accessed with KEYOPT(1) = 3)
[Ke] = electrical conductivity matrix
= effective electrical conductivity (defined by Equation586)
x , y = dielectric permittivity (input as PERX and PERY on MP command)

Although it is assumed that the nodal DOFs are zero at infinity, it is possible to solve thermal problems
in which the nodal temperatures tend to some constant value, T o , rather than zero. In that case, the
temperature differential, (= T - T o ), may be thought to be posed as the nodal DOF. The actual
temperature can then be easily found from T = + T o . For transient analysis, must be zero at infinity
t > 0, where t is time. Neumann boundary condition is automatically satisfied at infinity.
The {B i} vectors of the [B] matrix in Equation14197 contain the derivatives of Ni with respect to the
global coordinates which are evaluated according to
(14
198)
where:
[J] = Jacobian matrix which defines the geometric mapping
[J] is given by
(14
199)
The mapping functions [M] in terms of s and t are given in 2-D and Axisymmetric 4-Node Quadrilateral
Infinite Solids. The domain differential d(vol) must also be written in terms of the local coordinates, so
that
(14
200)
Subject to the evaluation of {B i} and d(vol), which involves the mapping functions, the element matrices
[Ke] and [Ce] may now be computed in the standard manner using Gaussian quadrature.
INFIN111
INFIN111
3-D Infinite Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
INFIN111 Element Description

INFIN111 models an open boundary of a 3-D unbounded field problem. A single layer of elements is
used to represent an exterior sub-domain of semi-infinite extent. The layer models the effect of far-field
decay in magnetic, electrostatic, thermal, or electric current conduction analyses. For information about
enclosed elements and analysis types, see Table111.1:INFIN111 Analyses. See INFIN111 in the Theory
Figure111.1INFIN111 Geometry
INFIN111 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element are shown in Figure 111.1.
KEYOPT(1) specifies the degree(s) of freedom to be used. KEYOPT(2) specifies whether a 8-node or 20node element is used.
Only one layer of INFIN111 elements should be used between the finite element model and the exterior
(infinite) surface. The nodes may be input starting at any corner node, but the face opposite of the finite
element model (the exterior face) must be flagged as an infinite surface. This is usually done by
selecting the nodes at the outer surface and issuing the SF,all,INF command. The other faces have no
meaning. For best results, edges connecting the inner and outer surfaces of the infinite element should
be radial from the center of the model.
A summary of the element input is given in "INFIN111 Input Summary". A general description of
INFIN111 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B (if KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table111.1:INFIN111 Analyses.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
INFIN111
See Table111.2:INFIN111 Material Properties.

Surface Loads
Infinite Surface Flags--
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degree of freedom. See Table111.1:INFIN111 Analyses.
KEYOPT(2)
Element definition:
0--
8-node brick
1--
20-node brick
KEYOPT(6)
Electric charge reaction sign:
0--
Negative
1--
Positive
Analysis categories are shown in the following table. KEYOPT(1) specifies the element degree of
freedom.
Table111.1INFIN111 Analyses
Analysis Category KEYOPT(1)
Magnetic
DOF
Label
MAG
Reaction
Solution
Magnetic Flux
Enclosed
Elements
SOLID5
Analysis
Type
Static
(F label = FLUX) SOLID96

Magnetic
AX, AY,
AZ
SOLID98
Magnetic Current SOLID62
Segments
SOLID97
Static
Harmonic
INFIN111
(F label = CSG)
Electrostatic
Thermal
Electric Current
Conduction
VOLT
Electric Charge
TEMP
(F label = CHRG) SOLID123

Heat Flow
SOLID70
Harmonic
Steady-state
(F label = HEAT) SOLID87
Transient
VOLT
SOLID122
Transient
Static
SOLID90
SOLID231
Steady-state
Electric Current
SOLID232
Harmonic
(F label = AMPS)
Transient
INFIN111 material properties are shown in the following table. Nonzero material properties must be
defined. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA and EMUNIT commands.
Table111.2INFIN111 Material Properties
Analysis Category
KEYOPT(1)
Magnetic
Magnetic
Electrostatic
Thermal
Electric Current Conduction
0
1
2
3
4
Material Properties
MUZERO
MUZERO
PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C
RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, LSST, PERX, PERY, PERZ
INFIN111 Output Data

Nodal potentials included in the overall nodal solution
Additional element output as shown in Table111.3:INFIN111 Element Output Definitions
available.
Table111.3INFIN111 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 0); Nodes - I,
J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B (if
Y
Y
Y
Y
INFIN111
MAT
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
MUZERO
PERX, PERY, PERZ
KXX, KYY, KZZ
KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Material number
Volume
Magnetic permeability of free space
Electric relative permittivity
Thermal conductivity
Y
Y
Y
1
2
3
Y
Y
4
1
2
3
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1
2. If KEYOPT(1) = 2
3. If KEYOPT(1) = 3
Table111.4:INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
following notation is used in Table111.4:INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table111.3:INFIN111 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Table111.4INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
MUZERO
PERX
PERY
PERZ
KXX
KYY
KZZ
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
INFIN111 Assumptions and Restrictions

Assumptions and restrictions listed for INFIN110 elements also apply to INFIN111 elements (see
INFIN110 Assumptions and Restrictions).
There are considerations in the application of INFIN111 that will lead to optimal performance in the
analysis of your model. These consideration are covered in detail in the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
When used in a model with the higher-order elements SOLID87, SOLID90, SOLID98, SOLID122,
INFIN111
SOLID123, SOLID231, and SOLID232, use the higher-order setting for INFIN111 (KEYOPT(2) = 1).
compatible, elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have
an electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign.
KEYOPT(6) sets the electric charge reaction sign. For more information, see Element Compatibility
in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide .
INFIN111 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Mechanical.
These restrictions apply unless the Emag option is enabled.
This element does not have magnetic, electrostatic, or electric current conduction capability.
The MAG, AX, AY, AZ, and VOLT degrees of freedom are not active. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 3
(TEMP) instead of 0 and cannot be changed.
The material properties MUZERO, PERX, PERY, PERZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, and LSST are not
allowed.
ANSYS Emag.
This element has only magnetic, electrostatic, and electric current conduction capability, and does
not have thermal capability.
TEMP is not allowed as a degree of freedom. KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0, 1 or 2.
The only allowable material properties are MUZERO, PERX, PERY, PERZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, and
LSST.
14.107.INFIN111 - 3-D Infinite Solid
Matrix or Vector
Mapping and Shape Functions

Coefficient, Dielectric
Permittivity, Electrical
Conductivity Coefficient,
and Thermal Conductivity
Matrices
Magnetic Vector Potential Equation12140, Equation12141,
Coefficient Matrix
Integration Points
2x2x2
2x2x2
2x2x2

See INFIN110 - 2-D Infinite Solid for the theoretical development of infinite solid elements. The
derivation presented in INFIN110 - 2-D Infinite Solid for 2-D can be extended to 3-D in a straightforward
manner.
FLUID116
FLUID116
Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe
MP ME <> PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID116 is a 3-D element with the ability to conduct heat and transmit fluid between its two primary
nodes. Heat flow is due to the conduction within the fluid and the mass transport of the fluid.
Convection may be accounted for either with additional nodes and convection areas or with surface
elements SURF151 and SURF152. In both cases, the film coefficient may be related to the fluid flow
rate. The element may have two different types of degrees of freedom, temperature and/or pressure.
The thermal-flow element may be used in a steady-state or transient thermal analysis. If the model
containing the thermal-flow element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced
by an equivalent (or null) structural element. See FLUID116 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
FLUID116 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this thermal-flow pipe element are shown
in Figure 116.1. The element is defined by two primary nodes, two additional nodes if convection is
desired, several real constants (see Table116.1:FLUID116 Element Real Constants), and the material
properties. The length L of the element is determined from the two primary node locations.
The material properties can be input as numerical values or as tabular inputs evaluated as a function of
pressure, temperature, velocity, time, and location. If temperature or pressure, you need to activate the
appropriate pressure or temperature degrees of freedom. Tabular material properties are calculated
before the first iteration (i.e., using initial values [IC]).
The fluid mass density (Mass/Length3 ) is input as property DENS or computed following the ideal gas
law if the real constant Rgas is present. If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, the convection film coefficient hf
(Heat/Length2 *Time*Deg) is input by the options defined by KEYOPT(4). If KEYOPT(2) = 1, convection

surfaces using FLUID116 velocities and other information are stored and can be used by SURF151 or
SURF152 and optionally the user programmable feature USRSURF116 in order to determine film
coefficients and bulk temperatures as a function of velocities and other parameters. The input tables are
explained in detail in Table116.2:FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional). The thermal conductivity
kxx (Heat/Length*time*Deg) acts in the element longitudinal direction and is input as property KXX. The
specific heat c p (Heat/Mass*Deg or Heat*Length/Force*Time 2 *Deg) is input as property C. The fluid
viscosity is input as property VISC. In an axisymmetric analysis, such as for annular flow, the flow
area, the convection areas, and all other input should be on a full 360 basis.
KEYOPT(2) = 3 and 4 are variations of KEYOPT(2) = 2 used to avoid an artificial reduction of the
FLUID116
change in temperature in the last element next to an inlet or outlet with no specified temperature. If
such an inlet or outlet is at node I, use KEYOPT(2) = 3 and if it is at node J, use KEYOPT(2) = 4. All
elements of a run of pipe should use the same KEYOPT, not just the end one. For networks where the
usage of KEYOPT(2) is not obvious and the detailed temperature distribution is important, use
KEYOPT(2) = 2 with a relatively fine mesh (small elements). The effect of KEYOPT(2) = 3 and 4 could
be alternatively achieved by adjusting the convection areas (Real Constants 7 and 8) but it is not as
convenient.
The coefficient of friction (input as property MU) is the starting value of the Moody friction factor (f). The
friction factor for the first iteration is always assumed to be MU. The smooth-pipe empirical correlations
are a function of Reynolds number (Re) and depend on whether the flow is laminar or turbulent
(Re>2500). If a friction table is supplied (TB,FCON), the friction factor is recomputed each substep from
the table (using linear interpolation where necessary). The table is also explained in detail in
Table116.2:FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional).
The word PRES (or TEMP) should be input for the Lab variable on the D command and the pressure (or
temperature) value input for the value. If a nodal heat (or fluid) flow rate is defined with the F
command, input the word HEAT (or FLOW) for the Lab variable and input the flow rate for the value. If
temperature is the only degree of freedom, (KEYOPT(1) = 1), you can input a known flow rate in units
of mass/time via an SFE,,,HFLUX command (rather than F,,FLOW). Fluid weight effects are activated by
specifying a nonzero acceleration and/or rotation vector [ACEL and/or OMEGA].
When using the rotational speed and slip factor real constants (real constants 7-10 in
Table116.1:FLUID116 Element Real Constants), you can specify either numerical values or table inputs.
If specifying table inputs, enclose the table name in % signs (for example, %tabname%). Also, if using
table inputs for rotational speed, either both real constants 7 and 8 should have the same table name
reference, or real constant 8 should be unspecified. Similarly, if using table inputs for slip factor, either
both real constants 9 and 10 should have the same table name reference, or real constant 10 should be
unspecified. Both rotational speed and the slip factor can vary with time and location.
If tabular real constants are used, then any node in a FLUID116 network must refer to a single table
name. For correct results, at any node, the table names from different elements must all be the same
and a table name cannot be used along with any numerical real constant from a different element.
See Steady-State Thermal Analysis in the Thermal Analysis Guide for more information on using table
inputs.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Element body loads may be input as heat
generation rates at the nodes. The node J heat generation rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat
generation rate HG(I).
KEYOPT(8) is used for inputting flow losses (see Table116.1:FLUID116 Element Real Constants).
Momentum losses in pipes due to bends, elbows, joints, valves, etc., may be represented by a fictitious
(equivalent) length of pipe La.This equivalent length may be input directly or calculated from an input
constant K, the hydraulic diameter D, and the friction factor f.
FLUID116 elements can be used to model fluid flow between hydrostatic fluid elements, (HSFLD241 or
HSFLD242). A single FLUID116 element connecting the pressure nodes of two different hydrostatic fluid
elements is sufficient to model the flow. However, more FLUID116 elements can be added if the actual
geometry of the connection needs to be modeled. For FLUID116 elements that are directly or indirectly
connected to hydrostatic fluid element, you must set KEYOPT(1) = 3 to convert the fluid element mass
flow rate to volume change (for compatibility with the hydrostatic fluid elements).
A summary of the element input is given in "FLUID116 Input Summary". A general description of

Nodes
FLUID116
I, J or I, J, K, L (see KEYOPT(2))
Degrees of Freedom
PRES, TEMP if KEYOPT(1) = 0
TEMP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
PRES if KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 3
Real Constants
See Table116.1:FLUID116 Element Real Constants
Material Properties
KXX, C, DENS, MU, VISC, HF
Surface Loads
You can specify imposed mass flow via an SFE,,,HFLUX command. Valid only when KEYOPT(1) =
1.
Body Loads
Heat Generations--
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Pressure and temperature degrees of freedom:
0--
PRES and TEMP degrees of freedom
1--
TEMP degrees of freedom only
2--
PRES degrees of freedom only. This option is not valid when FLUID116 is connected to
HSFLD241 or HSFLD242.
3--
PRES degrees of freedom only. This option is only valid when FLUID116 is directly or
indirectly connected to HSFLD241 or HSFLD242.
KEYOPT(2) (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1)
0--
2 nodes and no convection surface or convection information
1--
2 nodes and convection information passed to SURF151/SURF152
FLUID116
2--
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area shared
between nodes I and J
3--
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area only at
node I
4--
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area only at
node J
KEYOPT(4) (used only if KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4)
Film coefficient (h f ) definition
0--
Use MP,HF
1--
Use real constants 9 thru 12 (see Table116.1:FLUID116 Element Real Constants)
2--
Use TB,HFLM for hf as a function of temperature and average velocity
3--
Use TB,HFLM for hf as a function of temperature and Reynold's number
4--
Use TB,HFLM for Nu as a function of temperature and Reynold's number (h f = K xx*Nu/diam)
5--
Use call to User116Hf
KEYOPT(5) (used only if KEYOPT(4) = 0, 2, 3, 4, or 5)
Evaluation of film coefficient:
0--
Average fluid temperature (TI + TJ)/2
1--
Average wall temperature (TK +TL)/2
2--
Average film temperature (TI + TJ + TK + TL)/4
3--
FLUID116
Differential temperature (TI + TJ)/2 - (TK + TL)/2

KEYOPT(6) (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2)
Fluid conductance coefficient definition:
0--
Use conductance formula
1--
Use real constant C
2--
Use TB,FCON as a function of temperature and average velocity
3--
Use TB,FCON as a function of temperature and Reynold's number
4--
Use call to User116Cond
KEYOPT(7) (used only if KEYOPT(6) = 0)
Friction factor calculation:
0--
Use smooth pipe empirical correlations
1--
Use MP,MU
2--
Use TB,FCON with friction factor being a function of temperature and average velocity
3--
Use TB,FCON with friction factor being a function of temperature and Reynold's number
KEYOPT(8) (used only if KEYOPT(6) = 0)
Flow losses specified by input:
0--
Use real constant La as the additional length
1--
Use real constant K as loss coefficient
KEYOPT(9)
Discretization scheme:
FLUID116
0--
Upwind difference linear shape function (default). This scheme has lower order accuracy than
the other schemes.
1--
Central difference linear shape function. This scheme has higher order accuracy but it can
lead to oscillations near bends.
2--
Upwind difference exponential shape function. This scheme has high accuracy and does not
produce oscillations near bends.
Table116.1FLUID116 Element Real Constants
(Given in the order required for input in the real constant table)
Name
Definition
Units
No.
1
2
D
A
Hydraulic diameter.
Flow cross-sectional area.
Nc
4-6
7
(A n ) I
Number of flow channels (defaults to 1). If greater than 1,

real constants and element output are on a per channel
basis.
not currently used
Length
Length 2
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, angular velocity associated with node I.

If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, convection area between nodes
I and K. Defaults toDL/2 if KEYOPT(2) = 2, defaults to
DL if KEYOPT(2) = 3
where:
L = element length
Length 2
(A n ) J
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, angular velocity associated with node J.

Defaults to value at node I.
If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, convection area between nodes
J and L. Defaults toDL/2 if KEYOPT(2) = 2, defaults to
DL if KEYOPT(2) = 4
Length 2
9
10
SLIPFAI
SLIPFAJ
9-12
N1, N2,
N3, N4
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, slip factor at node I.
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, slip factor at node J. Defaults to value at

node I.
(Used if KEYOPT(4) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4)

Nu = N1 + N2 Re N3 PrN4
where:
Re = Reynolds number (WD/A)
Pr = Prandtl number (Cp /KXX)
Cp = specific heat
For example, the Dittus-Boelter correlation for fulldeveloped turbulent flow in smooth pipes may be input
with N1 = 0.0, N2 = 0.023, N3 = 0.8, and N4 = 0.4
(heating).
13
Pp
Pump pressure.
Force /
Length 2
FLUID116
14
Used to compute conductance coefficient C

where:
p = pressure drop
Cr
If KEYOPT(6) = 1, conductance coefficient is used to
calculate flow. Hence,

La
If KEYOPT(6) = 0, and KEYOPT(8) = 0, additional Length

of pipe to account for flow losses (for example, valves,
orifices, etc.) Hence,
where:
= DENS
F = friction coefficient
K
15-18
19
Rgas
20
VDF
21
Cver
If KEYOPT(6) = 0 and KEYOPT(8) = 1, this real constant is

the loss coefficient K. Hence,
not currently used

Gas constant in ideal gas law ( = p/(R gasT abs)), where T abs
is the absolute temperature and p = average pressure. If
zero, use as specified by the DENS material property.
Viscous damping multiplier. Default 0.0
Length 2 / Deg
* Time2
Units conversion factor for viscous damping. Default = 1.0

2
Q v = VDFCver FVISC(VELOC) L = viscous heating for
element, with F = 8.0 for laminar and 0.21420 for turbulent
flow.
Note: Real constants 7 through 12 and 20 and 21 are used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1
and real constants 13 through 19 are used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2.
The data in Table116.2:FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional) is entered in the data table with the
TB commands. The curves are initialized by using the TB command. The temperature for the first curve
is input with the TBTEMP command, followed by TBPT commands for up to 100 points. Up to 20
temperature-dependent curves (NTEMP = 20 maximum on the TB command) may be defined in this
manner. The constants (X, Y) entered on the TBPT command (two per command).
Table116.2FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional)
Constant
Meaning
Film Coefficient The film coefficient table is initialized with the TB,HFLM command. The TBPT
data are:
X
Velocity (Length/Time)
Y
Film Coefficient (Heat/(time*area*temp) The velocity may be replaced with the
Reynold's number, and the film coefficient may be replaced with the Nusselt
number, depending on KEYOPT(4).
Fluid Conductance/Friction Factor The fluid conductance/friction factor is initialized with the
TB,FCON command. The TBPT data are:
X
Velocity (Length/Time)
Y
Corresponding friction factor value (Dimensionless)
The velocity may be replaced with the Reynold's number, and the friction factor may be replaced
FLUID116
with the fluid conductance, depending on KEYOPT(6) and KEYOPT(7).

The fluid flow rate is expressed in units of Mass/Time and is positive from node I to node J. In an
axisymmetric analysis these flow rates and all other output are on a full 360 basis. The fluid flow rate
and the heat flow rate at the nodes may be printed with the OUTPR command. A general description of
The following notation is used in Table116.3:FLUID116 Element Output Definitions:
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
XC, YC, ZC
VELOC
RE
FLOW RATE
HT COND RATE
HT TRANSP RATE
CONV AREAS (I, J)
HFILM
NUS
PR
HT CONV RATES (I,
J)
HGVD
TEMP
PUMP PR
FRICTION
PRES
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Average velocity
Reynolds number
Flow rate from node I to node J
Heat flow rate from node I to node J due to conduction
Heat flow rate at node I due to mass transport
Convection areas at nodes I and J
Film coefficient
Nusselt number
Prandtl number
Heat flow rates from nodes I to K and from nodes J to L
due to convection
Heat generation due to direct input and viscous damping
Temperature
Pump pressure
Friction factor
Pressure
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
-
FLUID116
3. If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
VELOC
RE
FLOW RATE
HEAT COND RATE
HEAT TRANSP RATE
CONV AREA
HFILM
NUS
PR
HEAT CONV RATE
HGVD
TEMP
PUMP PR
FRICTION
PRES
Item
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC

E
I
J
K
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
13
15
19
20
12
14
16
21
7
-
17
-
22
L
18

The element must not have a zero length, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
Nodes K and L may be located anywhere in space, even coincident with I and J, respectively.
D must always be nonzero.
FLUID116
A defaults toD2 /4.0 and is assumed to remain constant for the element.
Compressibility and flow inertia effects of the fluid are not included in the element formulation.
If temperatures are degrees of freedom, the resulting unsymmetric matrix requires twice as much
memory storage for the solution as other ANSYS elements.
HF must be nonzero for the four node element.
MU and DENS must be nonzero if a flow solution is desired and KEYOPT(6) is not zero.
If the flow is specified at a node also having a specified pressure, the flow constraint is ignored.
In general, flow is usually specified at the inlet, pressure at the outlet.
For problems involving pressure specification on inlets and outlets, the solution may converge too
soon (i.e., the PRES degree of freedom has converged but FLOW has not due to a loose
convergence criterion). Be sure to check your results carefully. To force more iterations, you can
tighten the convergence criteria (i.e., CNVTOL,flow,,1e-30 ), or you can specify a nonzero initial
condition on pressure, which could be an average of the specified inlet and outlet pressures (i.e.,
IC,all,pres,pavg). You can use both options together; however, ANSYS recommends using a
nonzero initial condition. Tightening the convergence requires you to estimate a suitable tolerance.
More substeps are required for convergence as the flow approaches zero.
See the CNVTOL command for convergence control.
If pressure is a degree of freedom, the element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution.

ANSYS Professional.
These restrictions apply when using this element with the ANSYS Professional product.
The PRES degree of freedom (KEYOPT (1) = 0, 2) is not available with the ANSYS Professional
product.
SURF151
SURF151


SURF151 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto a face of
any 2-D thermal solid element (except axisymmetric harmonic elements PLANE75 and PLANE78). The
element is applicable to 2-D thermal analyses. Various loads and surface effects may exist
simultaneously. See SURF151 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Figure151.1SURF151 Geometry
SURF151 Input Data

The element is defined by two to five node points and the material properties. An extra node (away from
the base element) may be used for convection or radiation effects. Two extra nodes (away from the
base element) may be used to more accurately capture convection effects.
The mass, volume, and heat generation calculations use the in-plane element thicknesses at nodes I and
J (real constants TKI and TKJ, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thickness TKJ defaults to
TKI. If KEYOPT(3) = 3, the out-of-plane thickness is input as the real constant TKPS (defaults to 1.0).
The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS).
See Node and Element Loads for a description of element loads. Convections or heat fluxes may be
input as surface loads on the element.
The convection surface conductivity matrix calculation uses the film coefficient (input on the SFE
command with KVAL = 0 and CONV as the label). If the extra node option is used, its temperature
becomes the bulk temperature. If the extra node is not used, the CONV value input with KVAL = 2
becomes the bulk temperature. The convection surface heat flow vector calculation uses the bulk
temperature. On a given face, either a heat flux or a convection may be specified, but not both
simultaneously.
For the extra node option (KEYOPT(5) = 1), film effectiveness and free stream temperatures may also
be input for convection surface loads (input on the SFE command with the CONV label and KVAL = 3
and 4, respectively). If film effectiveness is input, bulk temperature is ignored.
Setting KEYOPT(7) = 1 multiplies the evaluated film coefficient by the empirical term ITS-TBIn , where
TS is the element surface temperature, TB is the fluid bulk temperature, and n is an empirical coefficient
(real constant ENN).
If KEYOPT(5) = 1 and flow information is available from FLUID116 with KEYOPT(2) = 1, the bulk
temperature may be adjusted to the adiabatic wall temperature using KEYOPT(6) = 1, real constants
OMEG (rotational speed) and NRF (recovery factor), and the logic described in the Theory Reference for
SURF151
the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications . For this adjustment, the global Y Cartesian coordinate
axis is used as the axis of rotation (KEYOPT(3) = 1). When using the OMEG real constant, you can
specify either numerical values or table inputs. If specifying table inputs, enclose the table name in %
signs (for example, %tabname%). Rotational speed (OMEG) can vary with time and location. Use the
*DIM command to dimension the table and identify the variables. For more information and examples
on using table inputs, see Array Parameters of the ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide , Applying
Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in the Basic Analysis Guide and Doing a Thermal Analysis
Using Tabular Boundary Conditions in the Thermal Analysis Guide , as well as the description of *DIM in
the Command Reference.
A film coefficient specified by the SFE command may be modified by activating the user subroutine
USERCV with the USRCAL command. USERCV may be used to modify the film coefficient of a surface
element with or without an extra node. It may be used if the film coefficient is a function of temperature
and/or location.
If the surface element has an extra node (KEYOPT(5) = 1), the bulk temperature and/or the film
coefficient may be redefined in a general way by user programmable routine USRSURF116.
USRSURF116 may be used if the bulk temperature and/or the film coefficient is a function of fluid
properties, velocity and/or wall temperature. If a bulk temperature is determined by USRSURF116, it
overrides any value specified by SFE or according to KEYOPT(6). Also, if a film coefficient is determined
by USRSURF116, it overrides any values specified by SFE or USRCAL, USERCV. USRSURF116 calculation
are activated by modifying the USRSURF116 subroutine and creating a customized version of ANSYS;
there will be no change in functionality without modifying USRSURF116. For more information, see UserProgrammable Features (UPFs).
Heat generation rates are input on a per unit volume basis and may be input as an element body load
at the nodes, using the BFE command. Element body loads are not applied to other elements connected
at the same nodes. The node I heat generation HG(I) defaults to zero. The node J heat generation
defaults to HG(I). The heat generation load vector calculation uses the heat generation rate values.
As an alternative to using the BFE command, you can specify heat generation rates directly at the
nodes using the BF command. For more information on body loads, see Body Loads in the Basic
Analysis Guide .
SURF151 allows for radiation between the surface and the extra node. The emissivity of the surface
(input as material property EMIS for the material number of the element) is used for the radiation
surface conductivity matrix. The form factor FORMF and the Stefan-Boltzmann constant SBCONST are
also used for the radiation surface conductivity matrix. The form factor can be either input as a real
constant (defaults to 1) using KEYOPT(9) = 1 or it can be calculated automatically as a cosine effect
using KEYOPT(9) = 2 or 3. For information on how the cosine effect depends on basic element
orientation and the extra node location, see the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications . There is no distance effect included in the cosine effect. For axisymmetric
analyses, the automatic form factor calculation is used only with the extra node on the Y-axis. The
Stefan-Boltzmann constant defaults to 0.119x10 -10 (Btu/hr*in2 *R 4 ).
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, an edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies
linearly, rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
If a single PLANE element lies beneath SURF151, you can automatically set the element behavior (plane
stress, axisymmetric, or plane stress with thickness [including TKPS if applicable]) to that of the
underlying solid element using KEYOPT(3) =10. This option is valid only when a single PLANE element
lies beneath the SURF element. For example, if you apply a SURF151 element over a PLANE77 (thermal)
element whose nodes are also used in the definition of a PLANE183 (structural) element, a warning
appears and the load is not applied to the element.
A summary of the element input is given in "SURF151 Input Summary". A general description of element

SURF151
Nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT (5) = 0
I, J, K if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT(5) = 2
I, J, K if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 0
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, K, L, M if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 2
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
FORMF, SBCONST, (Blank), OMEG, NRF, VABS,
TKI, TKJ, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), TKPS,
ENN, GC, JC
See Table151.1:SURF151 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
DENS (for density)
EMIS (for emissivity, if KEYOPT(9) > 0)
Surface Loads
Convections--
face 1 (I-J) if KEYOPT(8) > 1
Heat Fluxes--
face 1 (I-J) if KEYOPT(8) = 1
Body Loads
Heat Generation--
HG(I), HG(J); also HG(K) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Adiabatic wall temperature option:
0, 1, 2--
See Adiabatic Wall Temperature as Bulk Temperature for information on these options.
KEYOPT(2)
Recovery factor (F R ) option:
0, 1, or 2--
See Adiabatic Wall Temperature as Bulk Temperature for information on these options.
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
SURF151
0--
Plane
1--
Axisymmetric
3--
Plane with thickness input (TKPS)
10--
Use the element behavior--plane, axisymmetric, or plane with thickness input (including TKPS
if applicable)--of the underlying solid element.
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0--
Has midside node (that matches the adjacent solid element)
1--
No midside node
KEYOPT(5)
Extra node for radiation and/or convection calculations:
0--
No extra nodes
1--
Has extra node (optional if KEYOPT(8) > 1; required if KEYOPT(9) > 0)
2--
Two extra nodes (optional if KEYOPT (8) > 1). Only valid for convection calculations. Use this
option if the bulk temperature is unknown. The extra nodes get bulk temperatures from the two
nodes of a FLUID116 element. This is generally more accurate than the one extra node option.
KEYOPT(6) (used only if KEYOPT(5) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1)
Use of bulk temperatures:
0--
Extra node temperature used as bulk temperature
1--
Adiabatic wall temperature used as bulk temperature
KEYOPT(7)
Empirical term:
SURF151
0--
Do not multiply film coefficient by empirical term.
1--
Multiply film coefficient by empirical term |TS-TB|n .
KEYOPT(8)
Heat flux and convection loads:
0--
Ignore heat flux and convection surface loads (if any)
1--
Include heat flux, ignore convection
Use the following to include convection (ignore heat flux):
2--
Evaluate film coefficient hf (if any) at average film temperature, (TS +TB)/2
3--
Evaluate hf at element surface temperature, TS
4--
Evaluate hf at fluid bulk temperature, TB
5--
Evaluate hf at differential temperature, | TS - TB |
KEYOPT(9)
Radiation form factor calculation:
0--
Do not include radiation
1--
Use radiation with the form factor real constant
2--
Use radiation with cosine effect computed as an absolute value (ignore real constant)
3--
Use radiation with cosine effect computed as zero if negative (ignore real constant)
SURF151
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9-11
12
13
14
15
Name
FORMF
SBCONT
(Blank)
OMEGA
NRF
VABS
TKI
TKJ
(Blank)
TKPS
ENN
GC
JC
Description
Form factor
-Angular velocity
Recovery factor
Absolute value of fluid velocity (KEYOPT(1) = 0)
-Out-of-plane thickness (if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
Empirical coefficient
Gravitational constant used for units consistency
Joule constant used to convert work units to heat units
SURF151 Output Data

Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. A
to view results.
available.
Name
EL
SURFACE NODES
EXTRA NODE
MAT
AREA
VOLU:
XC, YC
VN(X, Y)
DENSITY
MASS
HGEN
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Extra node (if present)
Material number
Surface area
Volume
Components of unit vector normal to center of element
Density
Mass of Element
Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
7
-
Y
1
1
-
SURF151
HEAT GEN. RATE

HFLUX
HEAT FLOW RATE
HFILM
TBULK
TAVG
TAW
RELVEL
SPHTFL
RECFAC
CONV. HEAT RATE
CONV. HEAT
RATE/AREA
EMISSUR
EMISEXT
TEMPSUR
TEMPEXT
FORM FACTOR
RAD. HEAT RATE
RAD. HEAT
RATE/AREA
Heat generation rate over entire element (HGTOT)

Input heat flux at nodes I, J
Input heat flux heat flow rate over element surface area
(HFCTOT)
Film coefficient at each face node
Bulk temperature at each face node or temperature of
extra node
Average surface temperature
Adiabatic wall temperature
Relative velocity
Specific heat of the fluid
Recovery factor
Convection heat flow rate over element surface area
(HFCTOT)
Average convection heat flow rate per unit area
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
4
4
5
5
5
5
4
Average emissivity of surface (for element material

number)
Emissivity of extra node
Average temperature of surface
Temperature of extra node
Average form factor of element
Radiation heat flow rate over entire element (HRTOT)
Average radiation heat flow rate per unit area
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1. If dens > 0
2. If heat generation load is present
3. If KEYOPT(8) = 1
4. If KEYOPT(8) > 1
5. If KEYOPT(6) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1
6. If KEYOPT(9) > 0
Table151.3:SURF151 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE
following notation is used in Table151.3:SURF151 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table151.2:SURF151 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
SURF151

I,J
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
HGTOT
HFCTOT
HRTOT
AREA
VNX
VNY
HFILM
TAVG
TBULK
TAW
RELVEL
SPHTFL
RECFAC
EMISSUR
EMISEXT
TEMPSUR
TEMPEXT
FORM FACTOR
DENS
MASS
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMSC
NMSC
NMSC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
3
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

The element must not have a zero length.
If KEYOPT(9) > 0 (radiation is used):
element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution
extra node must be present.
if KEYOPT(4) = 0, midside nodes may not be dropped.

ANSYS Professional.
KEYOPT(3) = 3 is not applicable.
SURF151
The TKPS real constant (R12) is not applicable.

The only allowable material property is EMIS.
No special features are allowed.
14.147. SURF151 - 2-D Thermal Surface Effect
14.147.SURF151 - 2-D Thermal Surface Effect
Matrix or Vector
Midside Nodes [1]
Shape Functions
Integration Points
w = C1 + C2 x + C3 x2
Without midside nodes w = C1 + C2 x
With midside nodes
All
1. Midside node setting is controlled by KEYOPT(4).

Load Type
All Loads
Distribution
The logic is very similar to that given for SURF152 - 3-D Thermal Surface Effect.
2
2
FLUID130
FLUID130
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID130 has been developed as a companion element to FLUID30. It is intended to be used as an
envelope to a model made of FLUID30 finite elements. It simulates the absorbing effects of a fluid
domain that extends to infinity beyond the boundary of the finite element domain that is made of
FLUID30 elements. FLUID130 realizes a second-order absorbing boundary condition so that an outgoing
pressure wave reaching the boundary of the model is "absorbed" with minimal reflections back into the
fluid domain. The element can be used to model the boundary of 3-D fluid regions and as such, it is a
plane surface element; it has four nodes with one pressure degrees of freedom per node. FLUID130
may be used in transient, harmonic, and modal analyses. Typical applications include structural
acoustics, noise control, underwater acoustics, etc. See FLUID130 in the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element.
FLUID130 Input Data

The element is defined by four nodes (I, J, K, L), the material property SONC (speed of sound) and the
real constants shown in "FLUID130 Input Summary". A triangular element may be formed by defining
duplicate K and L node numbers. The element must be at the spherical boundary of an acoustic fluid
domain, meshed using FLUID30 elements, with radius RAD and center located at or near the center of
the structure. The radius RAD should be supplied through the real constants.
The element is characterized by a symmetric stiffness and a damping matrix.
In a typical meshing procedure the user should mesh the interior fluid domain that is bounded by a
spherical boundary with FLUID30 elements, select the nodes on the spherical boundary, select the type
associated with the FLUID130 and then issue the ESURF command. The latter will automatically add the
FLUID130 elements on the boundary of the finite domain.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
FLUID130
Degrees of Freedom
PRES
Real Constants
RAD - Radius
X 0 - Center of enclosing circle, X value
Y 0 - Center of enclosing circle, Y value
Z0 - Center of enclosing circle, Z value
Material Properties
SONC
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None

available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Material number
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
FLUID130
AREA:
XC, YC
SONC
AREA
Speed of sound
Y
Y
Y
1

Name
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
SONC
NMISC

FLUID130 must lie on a boundary spherical in shape and should completely enclose the domain
meshed with FLUID30 elements.
The radius RAD of the spherical boundary of the finite domain should be specified as a real
constant. If the coordinates (X 0 , Y 0 , Z0 ) of the center of the sphere are not supplied through the
real constant input, the center will be assumed to be at the origin of the global coordinate system.
The center of the sphere should be as close to the center of the model as possible.
It is recommended that the enclosing spherical boundary is placed at a distance of at least
0.2*lambda from the boundary of any structure that may be submerged in the fluid, where lambda
= c/f is the dominant wavelength of the pressure waves. c is the speed of sound (SONC) in the
fluid and f is the dominant frequency of the pressure wave. For example, in the case of a
submerged spherical shell of diameter D, the radius of the enclosing boundary, RAD, should be at
least (D/2) + 0.2*lambda.
FLUID130 uses extra DOFs, labeled XTR1 and XTR2, that are not available to the user. These
DOFs are solely for ANSYS' internal use, although they may appear in DOF listings or in program
messages.
The only applicable modal analysis method is the Damped method.

FLUID130
14.126.FLUID130 - 3-D Infinite Acoustic
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Fluid Stiffness and Damping Matrices Equation12124
2x2
14.126.1.Mathematical Formulation and F.E. Discretization

The exterior structural acoustics problem typically involves a structure submerged in an infinite,
homogeneous, inviscid fluid. The fluid is considered linear, meaning that there is a linear relationship
between pressure fluctuations and changes in density. Equation14286 is the linearized, lossless wave
equation for the propagation of sound in fluids.
(14
286)
where:
P = pressure
c = speed of sound in the fluid (input as SONC on MP command)
= second derivative of pressure with respect to time
+ = unbounded region occupied by the fluid
In addition to Equation14286), the following Sommerfeld radiation condition (which simply states that
the waves generated within the fluid are outgoing) needs to be satisfied at infinity:
(14
287)
where:
r = distance from the origin
Pr = pressure derivative along the radial direction
d = dimensionality of the problem (i.e., d =3 or d =2 if + is 3-D or 2-D respectively
A primary difficulty associated with the use of finite elements for the modeling of the infinite medium
stems precisely from the need to satisfy the Sommerfeld radiation condition, Equation14287. A typical
approach for tackling the difficulty consists of truncating the unbounded domain + by the introduction
of an absorbing (artificial) boundary a at some distance from the structure.
Figure14.28Absorbing Boundary
The equation of motion Equation14286 is then solved in the annular region f which is bounded by
the fluid-structure interface and the absorbing boundary a. In order, however, for the resulting
problem in f to be well-posed, an appropriate condition needs to be specified on a. Towards this end,

the following second-order conditions are used (Kallivokas et al.([218])) on a:
In two dimensions:
(14
288)
where:
n = outward normal to a
Pn = pressure derivative in the normal direction
P = pressure derivative along a
k = curvature of a
= stability parameter
In three dimensions:
(14
289)
where:
n = outward normal
u and v = orthogonal curvilinear surface coordinates (e.g., the meridional and polar angles in spherical
coordinates)
Pu , Pv = pressure derivatives in the a surface directions
H and K = mean and Gaussian curvature, respectively
E and G = usual coefficients of the first fundamental form
14.126.2.Finite Element Discretization

Following a Galerkin based procedure, Equation14286 is multiplied by a virtual quantity P and
integrated over the annular domain f . By using the divergence theorem on the resulting equation it can
be shown that:
(14
290)
Upon discretization of Equation14290, the first term on the left hand side will yield the mass matrix of
the fluid while the second term will yield the stiffness matrix.
Next, the following finite element approximations for quantities on the absorbing boundary a placed at
a radius R and their virtual counterparts are introduced:
(14
291)
(14
292)
where:
N1 , N2 , N3 = vectors of shape functions ( = {N 1 }, {N 2 }, {N 3 })
P, q(1) , q(2) = unknown nodal values (P is output as degree of freedom PRES. q(1) and q(2) are solved
for but not output).
Furthermore, the shape functions in Equation14291 and Equation14292 are set to:
(14
293)
The element stiffness and damping matrices reduce to:
For two dimensional case:
(14
294)
(14
295)
where:
de = arc-length differential
These matrices are 6 x 6 in size, having 2 nodes per element with 3 degrees of freedom per node (P,
(1)
(2)
,q
).
For three dimensional case:
(14
296)
(14
297)
where:
dA e = area differential
These matrices are 8 x 8 in size, having 4 nodes per element with 2 degrees of freedom per node (P, q)
(Barry et al.([217])).
For axisymmetric case:
(14
298)
(14
299)
where:
x = radius
These matrices are 4 x 4 in size having 2 nodes per element with 2 degrees of freedom per node (P, q).
LINK11
LINK11
Linear Actuator
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

LINK11 may be used to model hydraulic cylinders and other applications undergoing large rotations. The
element is a uniaxial tension-compression element with three degrees of freedom at each node:
translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or twist loads are considered. See LINK11 in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this
element.
LINK11 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for the element are shown in Figure 11.1. The element is defined by
two nodes, a stiffness, viscous damping, and mass. The element initial length Lo and orientation are
determined from the node locations.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. The stroke (length) is defined through the
surface load input using the PRES label. The stroke is relative to the zero force position of the element.
A force may be defined in the same manner as an alternate to the stroke.
A summary of the element input is given below. A general description of element input is given in
Element Input.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
K - Stiffness (force/length)
C - Viscous damping coefficient (force*time/length)
M - Mass (force*time 2 /length)
Material Properties
DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
LINK11
face 1 - Stroke
face 2 - Axial Force
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPTs
None
LINK11 Output Data

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal displacement solution
Additional element output as shown in Table11.1:LINK11 Element Output Definitions.
available.
Name
EL
NODES
ILEN
CLEN
FORCE
DFORCE
STROKE
MSTROKE
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Initial element length
Current element length (this time step)
Axial force (spring force)
Damping force
Applied stroke (element load)
Measured stroke
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Table11.2:LINK11 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. The following notation is used in Table11.2:LINK11 Item and
Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table11.1:LINK11 Element Output Definitions
LINK11
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
FORCE
ILEN
CLEN
STROKE
MSTROKE
DFORCE
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
1
2
3
4
5

The element assumes a straight line, axially loaded at the ends.
A twist (torsion) about the element x-axis (defined from node I to node J) has no effect.
No bending of the element is considered, as in a pin-jointed structure.
The mass is equally divided between the nodes.
Surface load pressure indicators are not displayed for element or node plots.

14.11.LINK11 - Linear Actuator
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness and Damping Matrices
Mass Matrix
Stress Stiffness Matrix
Shape Functions
Equation126
None (lumped mass formulation)
Integration Points
None
None
None

The element is not capable of carrying bending or twist loads. The force is assumed to be constant over
the entire element.
14.11.2.Element Matrices and Load Vector

All element matrices and load vectors are described below. They are generated in the element
coordinate system and are then converted to the global coordinate system. The element stiffness matrix
is:
(14
10)
where:
K = element stiffness (input as K on R command)
The element mass matrix is:
(14
11)
where:
M = total element mass (input as M on R command)
The element damping matrix is:
(14
12)
where:
C = element damping (input as C on R command)
The element stress stiffness matrix is:
(14
13)
where:
F = the axial force in the element (output as FORCE)
L = current element length (output as CLENG)
The element load vector is:
(14
14)
where:
The applied force vector is:

(14
15)
where:
F' = applied force thru surface load input using the PRES label
The Newton-Raphson restoring force vector is:
(14
16)
14.11.3.Force, Stroke, and Length

The element spring force is determined from
(14
17)
where:
F = element spring force (output as FORCE)
SA = applied stroke (output as STROKE) thru surface load input using the PRES label
SM = computed or measured stroke (output as MSTROKE)
The lengths, shown in the figure at the beginning of this section, are:
Lo = initial length (output as ILEN)
Lo + SM = current length (output as CLEN)
MATRIX27
MATRIX27
Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
MATRIX27 Element Description

MATRIX27 represents an arbitrary element whose geometry is undefined but whose elastic kinematic
response can be specified by stiffness, damping, or mass coefficients in matrix form. The matrix is
assumed to relate two nodes, each with six degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y,
and z directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. See MATRIX27 in the Theory Reference
for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this element. Other similar,
but less general, elements are the spring-damper element (COMBIN14), and the mass element
(MASS21).
Figure27.1MATRIX27 Schematic
MATRIX27 Input Data

The node locations and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 27.1. The element is
defined by two nodes and the matrix coefficients. The stiffness, damping, or mass matrix constants are
input as real constants. The units of the stiffness constants are Force/Length or Force*Length/Radian
and the damping constants, Force*Time/Length and Force*Length*Time/Radian. The mass constants
should have units of Force*Time 2 /Length or Force*Time 2 *Length/Radian.
All matrices generated by this element are 12 by 12. The degrees of freedom are ordered as UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ for node I followed by the same for node J. If one node is not used, simply let all
rows and columns relating to that node default to zero.
A structural matrix that combines the effects of many elements is normally positive or zero definite, as
are the element matrices that contribute to it. There may be unusual circumstances where an element
matrix is negative definite, and this is okay if there are other matrices connected to the same nodes that
are positive definite, resulting in a final system of equations is still positive or zero definite. A simple
example of such a circumstance is a beam element loaded with half of the buckling load. The stress
stiffness matrix is negative definite, but the combined regular and stress stiffness matrix is positive
definite.
When using MATRIX27 with symmetric element matrices (KEYOPT(2) = 0), positive or zero definite
matrices should be input using KEYOPT(1) = 0, the default. If it is desired to input a negative definite
element matrix, the user should set KEYOPT(1) = 1 so that the negative definite checking will be
bypassed. However, when using an unsymmetric or skew-symmetric element matrix, (KEYOPT(2) = 2 or
3), there are no limits on the form of the matrix, as the unsymmetric solvers are designed to solve any
system of equations, as long as it is not singular.
The matrix constants should be input according to the matrix diagrams shown in "MATRIX27 Output
Data". For example, if a simple spring of stiffness K in the nodal x direction is desired, the input
constants would be C1 = C58 = K and C7 = -K for KEYOPT(2) = 0 and KEYOPT(3) = 4.
A summary of the element input is given in "MATRIX27 Input Summary". Element Input gives a general
MATRIX27 Input Summary

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_MATRIX27.html[28/04/2013 08:58:12 p.m.]
MATRIX27
Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
C1, C2, ... C78 - Define the upper triangular portion of the symmetric matrix (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
C1, C2, ... C144 - Define all terms of the unsymmetric matrix (if KEYOPT(2) = 2)
C1, C2, ... C66 - Define upper triangular portion (less diagonal terms) if skew symmetric
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
Material Properties
DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Matrix form (only works with KEYOPT(2) = 0):
0--
Input positive or zero definite matrices only
1--
Input positive, zero, or negative definite matrices
KEYOPT(2)
Matrix formulation:
0--
Symmetric matrices (78 constants required)
2--
Unsymmetric matrices(144 constants required)
3--
Skew symmetric matrices (66 constants required)
KEYOPT(3)
Real constant input data:
MATRIX27
2--
Defines a 12 x 12 mass matrix
4--
Defines a 12 x 12 stiffness matrix
5--
Defines a 12 x 12 damping matrix
KEYOPT(4)
Element matrix output:
0--
Do not print element matrix
1--
Print element matrix at beginning of solution phase
MATRIX27 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element consists of node displacements included in the overall
nodal solution. There is no element solution output associated with the element unless element reaction
forces and/or energies are requested. KEYOPT(4) = 1 causes the element matrix to be printed (for the
first substep of the first load step only). Solution Output gives a general description of solution output.
For KEYOPT(2) = 0, the symmetric matrix has the form:
For KEYOPT(2) = 2, the unsymmetric matrix has the form:
MATRIX27
For KEYOPT(2) = 3, the skew symmetric matrix has the form:
MATRIX27 Assumptions and Restrictions

Nodes may be coincident or noncoincident.
Since element matrices should normally not be negative definite, a note is printed for those cases
where this can be easily detected.
With a lumped mass matrix [LUMPM,ON] all off-diagonal terms must be zero.
The matrix terms are associated with the nodal degrees of freedom and are assumed to act in the
nodal coordinate directions (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System).
MATRIX27 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
Damping and unsymmetric matrices are not allowed.
Real constants C79 through C144, for unsymmetric matrices, are not applicable.
MATRIX27

KEYOPT(2) can only be set to 0 (default). KEYOPT(3) = 5 is not allowed.
14.26. MATRIX27 - Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
14.26.MATRIX27 - Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix

Matrix or Vector
Stiffness, Mass, and Damping
Matrices
Shape Functions
Integration Points
None
None

All MATRIX27 matrices should normally be positive definite or positive semidefinite (see Positive Definite
Matrices for definition) in order to be valid structural matrices. The only exception to this occurs when
other (positive definite) matrices dominate the involved DOFs and/or sufficient DOFs are removed by
way of imposed constraints, so that the total (structure) matrix is positive definite.
13.4. Positive Definite Matrices
13.4.Positive Definite Matrices

By definition, a matrix [D] (as well as its inverse [D] -1 ) is positive definite if the determinants of all
submatrices of the series:
(13
6)
including the determinant of the full matrix [D], are positive. The series could have started out at any
other diagonal term and then had row and column sets added in any order. Thus, two necessary (but
not sufficient) conditions for a symmetric matrix to be positive definite are given here for convenience:
(13
7)
(13
8)
If any of the above determinants are zero (and the rest positive), the matrix is said to be positive
semidefinite. If all of the above determinants are negative, the matrix is said to be negative definite.
13.4.1.Matrices Representing the Complete Structure

In virtually all circumstances, matrices representing the complete structure with the appropriate
boundary conditions must be positive definite. If they are not, the message NEGATIVE PIVOT . . .
appears. This usually means that insufficient boundary conditions were specified. An exception is a
piezoelectric analysis, which works with negative definite matrices, but does not generate any error
messages.
13.4.2.Element Matrices
Element matrices are often positive semidefinite, but sometimes they are either negative or positive
definite. For most cases where a negative definite matrix could inappropriately be created, the program
will abort with a descriptive message.
COMBIN39
COMBIN39
Nonlinear Spring
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

COMBIN39 is a unidirectional element with nonlinear generalized force-deflection capability that can be
used in any analysis. The element has longitudinal or torsional capability in 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D
applications. The longitudinal option is a uniaxial tension-compression element with up to three degrees
of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or torsion is
considered. The torsional option is a purely rotational element with three degrees of freedom at each
node: rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. No bending or axial loads are considered.
The element has large displacement capability for which there can be two or three degrees of freedom
at each node.
See COMBIN39 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more
details about this element. The element has no mass or thermal capacitance. These may be added by
using the appropriate elements (see MASS21 and MASS71). A bilinear force-deflection element with
damping and gaps is also available (COMBIN40).
COMBIN39 Input Data

element is defined by two (preferably coincident) node points and a generalized force-deflection curve.
The points on this curve (D1, F1, etc.) represent force (or moment) versus relative translation (or
rotation) for structural analyses, and heat (or flow) rate versus temperature (or pressure) difference for
a thermal analyses. The loads should be defined on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
The force-deflection curve should be input such that deflections are increasing from the third
(compression) to the first (tension) quadrants. Adjacent deflections should not be nearer than 1E-7
times total input deflection range. The last input deflection must be positive. Segments tending towards
vertical should be avoided. If the force-deflection curve is exceeded, the last defined slope is
maintained, and the status remains equal to the last segment number. If the compressive region of the
force-deflection curve is explicitly defined (and not reflected), then at least one point should also be at
the origin (0,0) and one point in the first (tension) quadrant. If KEYOPT(2) = 1 (no compressive
resistance), the force-deflection curve should not extend into the third quadrant. Note that this tensiononly behavior can cause convergence difficulties similar to those that can be experienced by contact
elements. See the Contact Technology Guide , as well as various contact element descriptions, for
guidelines on overcoming convergence difficulties. Note that the number of points defining the loading
curve (20 points) can be effectively doubled by using the reflective option.
COMBIN39
Slopes of segments may be either positive or negative, except that the slopes at the origin must be
positive and, if KEYOPT(1) = 1, slopes at the ends may not be negative. Also, if KEYOPT(1) = 1, forcedeflection points may not be defined in the second or fourth quadrants and the slope of any segment
may not be greater than the slope of the segment at the origin in that quadrant.
The KEYOPT(1) option allows either unloading along the same loading curve or unloading along the line
parallel to the slope at the origin of the curve. This second option allows modeling of hysteretic effects.
As illustrated in Figure 39.2, the KEYOPT(2) option provides several loading curve capabilities.
The KEYOPT(3) option selects one degree of freedom. This may be a translation, a rotation, a pressure
or a temperature.
Alternately, the element may have more than one type of degree of freedom (KEYOPT(4) > 0). The two
nodes defining the element should not be coincident, since the load direction is colinear with the line
joining the nodes. The longitudinal option (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 3) creates a uniaxial tension-compression
element with two or three translational degrees of freedom at each node. No bending or torsion is
considered. The torsional option (KEYOPT(4) = 2) creates a purely rotational element with three
rotational degrees of freedom at each node. No bending or axial loads are considered. The stress
stiffening capability is applicable when forces are applied, but not when torsional loads are applied.
The element has large displacement capability with two or three degrees of freedom for each node when
you use KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 3 in combination with NLGEOM,ON.
Convergence difficulties caused by moving through rapid changes of the slope (tangent) of the forcedeflection diagram are sometimes helped by use of line search (LNSRCH,ON).

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES, or TEMP.
Make 1-D choices with KEYOPT(3).
Make limited 2- or 3-D choices with KEYOPT(4).
Real Constants
D1, F1, D2, F2, D3, F3,
D4, F4, ..., D20, F20
See Table39.1:COMBIN39 Real Constants for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear
Stress stiffening
COMBIN39
Large displacement
KEYOPT(1)
Unloading path:
0--
Unload along same loading curve
1--
Unload along line parallel to slope at origin of loading curve
KEYOPT(2)
Element behavior under compressive load:
0--
Compressive loading follows defined compressive curve (or reflected tensile curve if not
defined)
1--
Element offers no resistance to compressive loading
2--
Loading initially follows tensile curve then follows compressive curve after buckling (zero or
negative stiffness)
KEYOPT(3)
Element degrees of freedom (1-D) (KEYOPT(4) overrides KEYOPT(3)):
0, 1--
2--
UY (Displacement along nodal Y axes)
3--
UZ (Displacement along nodal Z axes)
4--
ROTX (Rotation about nodal X axes)
5--
ROTY (Rotation about nodal Y axes)
6--
ROTZ (Rotation about nodal Z axes)
7--
PRES
COMBIN39
8--
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
Element degrees of freedom (2-D or 3-D):
0--
Use any KEYOPT(3) option
1--
3-D longitudinal element (UX, UY and UZ)
2--
3-D torsional element (ROTX, ROTY and ROTZ)
3--
2-D longitudinal element. (UX and UY) Element must lie in an X-Y plane
KEYOPT(6)
Element output:
0--
1--
Also print force-deflection table for each element (only at first iteration of problem)
No.
Name
1
2
3
4
5, ... 40
D1
F1
D2
F2
D3, F3, etc.
Description
D value for the first point on force-deflection curve
F value for the first point on force-deflection curve
D value for the second point on force-deflection curve
F value for the second point on force-deflection curve
Continue input of D and F values up to a maximum of 20 points on the
force-deflection curve

Additional element output as shown in Table39.2:COMBIN39 Element Output Definitions
The nodal displacements and forces correspond to the degrees of freedom selected with KEYOPT(3). For
an axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360 basis. The element value
STRETCH is the relative deflection at the end of the substep (e.g., UX(J) - UX(I) - UORIG, etc.). STAT
and OLDST describe the curve segment number at the end of the current and previous substeps,
respectively. STAT or OLDST = 0 indicates nonconservative unloading (KEYOPT(1) = 1). A status of 99
COMBIN39
or -99 (as shown in Figure 39.1) indicates that the active load point on the curve is outside of the
supplied data. The slope of the last segment that is provided is simply continued beyond the last data
point.
Figure39.2COMBIN39 Force-Deflection Curves

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
UORIG
FORCE
STRETCH
STAT
OLDST
UI
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Origin shift upon reversed loading
Force in element
Relative displacement (includes origin shift)
Status at end of this time step
Same as STAT except status assumed at beginning of this
time step
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
4
1
Y
Y
2
2
Y
Y
2
2
COMBIN39
UJ
CRUSH
SLOPE
Status of the force deflection curve after buckling
Current slope
Y
3
Y
Y
-
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 1
0 - Indicates nonconservative unloading
1-20 - Curve segment number at end of time step
99 - Beyond last segment (last segment is extrapolated) (negative STAT values indicate
compressive segments)
3. If KEYOPT(2) = 2 and if the value of CRUSH is:
0 - Use defined tensile curve
1 - Use reflected compressive curve in tension (element has been compressed)
Name
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
FORCE
STRETCH
UI
UJ
UORIG
STAT
OLDST
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
1
2
3
4
5
6

If you specify KEYOPT(4) = 0, the element has only one degree of freedom per node. This degree
of freedom defined by KEYOPT(3), is specified in the nodal coordinate system and is the same for
COMBIN39
both nodes (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System). KEYOPT(3) also defines
the direction of the force. Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
If you specify KEYOPT(4) 0, the element has two or three displacement degrees of freedom per
node. Nodes I and J should not be coincident, since the line joining the nodes defines the direction
of the force.
The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to put
the element in tension.
The nonlinear behavior of the element operates only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic
analyses.
As with most nonlinear elements, loading and unloading should occur gradually.
When the element is also nonconservative, loads should be applied along the actual load history
path and in the proper sequence.
The real constants for this element can not be changed from their initial values.
Whenever the force that the element carries changes sign, UORIG is reset, and the origin of the
force-deflection curve effectively shifts over to the point where the force changed sign. If
KEYOPT(2) = 1 and the force tends to become negative, the element "breaks" and no force is
transmitted until the force tends to become positive again.
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element is both nonlinear and nonconservative.
In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner analogous
to the displacement.

ANSYS Structural.
KEYOPT(3)= 8 (temperature DOF) is not allowed.
14.38.COMBIN39 - Nonlinear Spring
Matrix or Vector
Option
Stiffness Matrix
Longitudinal
Torsional
Stress Stiffening Matrix
Longitudinal
Shape Functions[1]
Integration Points
Equation1215
Equation1218
8
None
None
None
1. There are no shape functions used if the element is input as a one DOF per node basis
(KEYOPT(4) = 0) as the nodes are coincident.
14.38.1.Input
The user explicitly defines the force-deflection curve for COMBIN39 by the input of discrete points of
force versus deflection. Up to 20 points on the curve may be defined, and are entered as real constants.
The input curve must pass through the origin and must lie within the unshaded regions, if KEYOPT(1) =
1.
Figure14.5Input Force-Deflection Curve
The input deflections must be given in ascending order, with the minimum change of deflection of:
(14
81)
where:
ui = input deflections (input as D1, D2, ... D20 on R or RMORE commands)
umax = most positive input deflection

umin = most negative input deflection
14.38.2.Element Stiffness Matrix and Load Vector

During the stiffness pass of a given iteration, COMBIN39 will use the results of the previous iteration to
determine which segment of the input force-deflection curve is active. The stiffness matrix and load
vector of the element are then:
(14
82)
(14
83)
where:
K tg = slope of active segment from previous iteration (output as SLOPE)
F 1 = force in element from previous iteration (output as FORCE)
If KEYOPT(4) > 0, Equation1482 and Equation1483 are expanded to 2 or 3 dimensions.
During the stress pass, the deflections of the current equilibrium iteration will be examined to see
whether a different segment of the force-deflection curve should be used in the next equilibrium
iteration.
Figure14.6Stiffness Computation
14.38.3.Choices for Element Behavior

If KEYOPT(2) = 0 and if no force-deflection points are input for deflection less than zero, the points in
the first quadrant are reflected through the origin (Figure 14.7).
Figure14.7Input Force-Deflection Curve Reflected Through Origin
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, there will be no stiffness for the deflection less than zero (Figure 14.8).
Figure14.8Force-Deflection Curve with KEYOPT(2) = 1
If KEYOPT(1) = 0, COMBIN39 is conservative. This means that regardless of the number of loading
reversals, the element will remain on the originally defined force-deflection curve, and no energy loss
will occur in the element. This also means that the solution is not path-dependent. If, however,
KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element is nonconservative. With this option, energy losses can occur in the
element, so that the solution is path-dependent. The resulting behavior is illustrated in Figure 14.9.
Figure14.9Nonconservative Unloading (KEYOPT(1) = 1)
When a load reversal occurs, the element will follow a new force-deflection line passing through the
point of reversal and with slope equal to the slope of the original curve on that side of the origin (0+ or
0-). If the reversal does not continue past the force = 0 line, reloading will follow the straight line back
to the original curve (Figure 14.10).
Figure14.10No Origin Shift on Reversed Loading (KEYOPT(1) = 1)
If the reversal continues past the force = 0 line, a type of origin shift occurs, and reloading will follow a
curve that has been shifted a distance uorig (output as UORIG) (Figure 14.11).
Figure14.11Origin Shift on Reversed Loading (KEYOPT(1) = 1)
A special option (KEYOPT(2) = 2) is included to model crushing behavior. With this option, the element
will follow the defined tensile curve if it has never been loaded in compression. Otherwise, it will follow a
reflection through the origin of the defined compressive curve (Figure 14.12).
Figure14.12Crush Option (KEYOPT(2) = 2)
COMBIN40
COMBIN40
Combination
MP ME ST PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS


COMBIN40 is a combination of a spring-slider and damper in parallel, coupled to a gap in series. A mass
can be associated with one or both nodal points. The element has one degree of freedom at each node,
either a nodal translation, rotation, pressure, or temperature. The mass, springs, slider, damper, and/or
the gap may be removed from the element. The element may be used in any analysis. See COMBIN40 in
the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details about this
element. Other elements having damper, slider, or gap capabilities are COMBIN14, MATRIX27,
COMBIN37, and COMBIN39.
COMBIN40 Input Data

The combination element is shown in Figure 40.1. The element is defined by two nodes, two spring
constants K1 and K2 (Force/Length), a damping coefficient C (Force*Time/Length), a mass M
(Force*Time 2 /Length), a gap size GAP (Length), and a limiting sliding force FSLIDE (Force). (Units listed
here apply only to KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, 2, or 3.)
If the element is used in an axisymmetric analysis, these values (except GAP) should be on a full 360
basis. A spring constant of 0.0 (for either K1 or K2, but not both) or a damping coefficient of 0.0 will
remove these capabilities from the element. The mass, if any, may be applied at node I or node J or it
may be equally distributed between the nodes.
The gap size is defined by the fourth element real constant. If positive, a gap of this size exists. If
negative, an initial interference of this amount exists. If GAP = 0.0, the gap capability is removed from
the element. The FSLIDE value represents the absolute value of the spring force that must be exceeded
before sliding occurs. If FSLIDE is 0.0, the sliding capability of the element is removed, that is, a rigid
connection is assumed.
A "breakaway" feature is available to allow the element stiffness (K1) to drop to zero once a limiting
force |FSLIDE| has been reached. The limit is input as -|FSLIDE| and is applicable to both tensile
breaking and compressive crushing. A "lockup" feature may be selected with KEYOPT(1). This feature
removes the gap opening capability once the gap has closed.
The force-deflection relationship for the combination element is as shown in Figure 40.2 (for no
damping). If the initial gap is identically zero, the element responds as a spring-damper-slider element
having both tension and compression capability. If the gap is not initially zero, the element responds as
follows: when the spring force (F1+F2) is negative (compression), the gap remains closed and the
element responds as a spring-damper parallel combination. As the spring force (F1) increases beyond
the FSLIDE value, the element slides and the F1 component of the spring force remains constant. If
FSLIDE is input with a negative sign, the stiffness drops to zero and the element moves with no resisting
F1 spring force. If the spring force becomes positive (tension), the gap opens and no force is
transmitted. In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner
analogous to the displacement.
COMBIN40
The element has only the degrees of freedom selected with KEYOPT(3). The KEYOPT(3) = 7 and 8
options (pressure and temperature DOFs) allow the element to be used in a thermal analysis (with
thermal equivalent real constants).

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES, or TEMP (depending on KEYOPT(3) below)
Real Constants
Units for real constants will depend on the KEYOPT(3) setting.
K1 - Spring constant
C - Damping coefficient
M - Mass
GAP - Gap size
FSLIDE - Limiting sliding force
K2 - Spring constant (par to slide)
Note: If GAP is exactly zero, the interface cannot open. If GAP is negative, there is
an initial interference. If FSLIDE is exactly zero, the sliding capability is
removed. If FSLIDE is negative, the "breakaway" feature is used.
Material Properties
DAMP
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear (unless both GAP and FSLIDE equal zero)
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Gap behavior:
0--
Standard gap capability
1--
Gap remains closed after initial contact ("lockup")
COMBIN40
KEYOPT(3)
0, 1 --
2--
UY (Displacement along nodal Y axes)
3--
UZ (Displacement along nodal Z axes)
4--
ROTX (Rotation about nodal X axes)
5--
ROTY (Rotation about nodal Y axes)
6--
ROTZ (Rotation about nodal Z axes)
7--
PRES
8--
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
Element output:
0--
Produce element printout for all status conditions
1--
Suppress element printout if gap is open (STAT = 3)
KEYOPT(6)
Mass location:
0--
Mass at node I
1--
Mass equally distributed between nodes I and J
2--
COMBIN40
Mass at node J

Additional element output as shown in Figure 40.2
Several items are illustrated in Figure 40.2. The displacement direction corresponds to the nodal
coordinate direction selected with KEYOPT(3). The value STR is the spring displacement at the end of
this substep, STR = U(J)-U(I)+GAP-SLIDE. This value is used in determining the spring force. For an
axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360 basis. The value SLIDE is the
accumulated amount of sliding at the end of this substep relative to the starting location.
STAT describes the status of the element at the end of this substep for use in the next substep. If STAT
= 1, the gap is closed and no sliding occurs. If STAT = 3, the gap is open. If STAT = 3 at the end of a
substep, an element stiffness of zero is being used. A value of STAT = +2 indicates that node J moves
to the right of node I. STAT = -2 indicates a negative slide. A general description of solution output is
given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure40.2COMBIN40 Behavior

available.
Name
EL
NODES
XC, YC, ZC
SLIDE
F1
STR1
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Amount of sliding
Force in spring 1
Relative displacement of spring 1
Y
Y
Y
Y
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
COMBIN40
STAT
OLDST
UI
UJ
F2
STR2
Element status
STAT value of the previous time step
Force in spring 2
Relative displacement of spring 2
1
1
1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

1 - Gap closed (no sliding)
2 - Sliding right (node J moving to right of node I)
-2 - Sliding left (node J moving to left of node I)
3 - Gap open
Name
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
F1
F2
STAT
OLDST
STR1
STR2
UI
UJ
SLIDE
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

The element has only one degree of freedom per node which is specified in the nodal coordinate
system (see Elements that Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System).
COMBIN40
The element assumes only a 1-D action.

Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to open
the gap. If, for a given set of conditions, nodes I and J are interchanged, the gap element acts as
a hook element, i.e., the gap closes as the nodes separate.
The real constants for this element can not be changed from their initial values.
The nonlinear options of the element operate only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic
(TRNOPT,FULL) analyses.
If used in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.
A 0.0 value for GAP or FSLIDE removes the gap or sliding capability, respectively, from the
element.
The mass, if any, is 1-D.
The element requires an iterative solution if GAP and/or FSLIDE are nonzero.
A stiffness (K1 or K2) must be defined if the gap capability is used. Unreasonably high stiffness
values should be avoided.
The rate of convergence may decrease as the stiffness increases. If FSLIDE is not equal to zero,
the element is nonconservative as well as nonlinear. Nonconservative elements require that the
load be applied very gradually, along the actual load history path, and in the proper sequence (if
multiple loadings exist).

ANSYS Professional .
Structural Analysis:
No damping capability; CV1 and CV2 are not allowed.
Only stress stiffening and large deflections are allowed.
KEYOPT(3) = 7 or 8 is not allowed.
FSLIDE and K2 not allowed.
ANSYS Structural.
KEYOPT(3) = 7 and 8 (pressure and temperature DOFs) are not allowed.
14.39.COMBIN40 - Combination
Matrix or Vector
Stiffness, Mass, and Damping
Matrices
Shape Functions
Integration Points
None (nodes may be coincident)
None
14.39.1.Characteristics of the Element

The force-deflection relationship for the combination element under initial loading is as shown below (for
no damping).
Figure14.13Force-Deflection Relationship
where:
F 1 = force in spring 1 (output as F1)
F 2 = force in spring 2 (output as F2)
K 1 = stiffness of spring 1 (input as K1 on R command)
K 2 = stiffness of spring 2 (input as K2 on R command)
ugap = initial gap size (input as GAP on R command) (if zero, gap capability removed)
uI = displacement at node I
uJ = displacement at node J
F S = force required in spring 1 to cause sliding (input as FSLIDE on R command)
14.39.2.Element Matrices for Structural Applications

The element mass matrix is:
(14
84)
(14
85)
(14
86)
where:
M = element mass (input as M on R command)
If the gap is open during the previous iteration, all other matrices and load vectors are null vectors.
Otherwise, the element damping matrix is:
(14
87)
where:
c = damping constant (input as C on R command)
The element stiffness matrix is:
(14
88)
where:
and the element Newton-Raphson load vector is:

(14
89)
F 1 and F 2 are the current forces in the element.
14.39.3.Determination of F1 and F2 for Structural Applications

1. If the gap is open,
(14
90)
If no sliding has taken place, F 1 = F 2 = 0.0. However, if sliding has taken place during
unidirectional motion,
(14
91)
and thus
(14
92)
where:
us = amount of sliding (output as SLIDE)
2. If the gap is closed and the slider is sliding,
(14
93)
and
(14
94)
where:
u2 = uJ - uI + ugap = output as STR2
3. If the gap is closed and the slider is not sliding, but had slid before,
(14
95)
where:
u1 = u2 - us = output as STR1
and
(14
96)
14.39.4.Thermal Analysis
The above description refers to structural analysis only. When this element is used in a thermal analysis,
the conductivity matrix is [Ke], the specific heat matrix is [Ce] and the Newton-Raphson load vector is
, where F 1 and F 2 represent heat flow. The mass matrix [M] is not used. The gap size ugap is the
temperature difference. Sliding, F slide, is the element heat flow limit for conductor K 1 .
MATRIX50
MATRIX50
Superelement (or Substructure)
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

MATRIX50 Element Description

MATRIX50 is a group of previously assembled ANSYS elements that is treated as a single element. The
superelement, once generated, may be included in any ANSYS model and used in any analysis type for
which it is applicable. The superelement can greatly decrease the cost of many analyses. Once the
superelement matrices have been formed, they are stored in a file and can be used in other analyses
the same way any other ANSYS elements are used. Multiple load vectors may also be stored with the
superelement matrices, thereby allowing various loading options. See MATRIX50 in the Theory Reference
Figure50.1MATRIX50 Schematic
MATRIX50 Input Data

The superelement, which is a mathematical matrix representation of an arbitrary structure, has no fixed
geometrical identity and is conceptually shown in Figure 50.1. Any analysis using a superelement as one
of its element types is called a superelement use pass (or run). The degrees of freedom are the master
degrees of freedom specified during the generation pass.
The element name is MATRIX50 (the number 50 or the name MATRIX50 should be input for the variable
ENAME on the ET command). The SE command is used to define a superelement. SE reads the
superelement from Jobname.SUB (defaults to File.SUB ) in the working directory. The material number
[MAT] is only used when material dependent damping [MP,DAMP] or electrical permittivity [MP,PERX]
is an input. The real constant table number [REAL] is not used. However, the appropriate element type
number [TYPE] must be entered.
An element load vector is generated along with the element at each load step of the superelement
generation pass. Up to 31 load vectors may be generated. Load vectors may be proportionately scaled in
the use pass. The scale factor is input on the element surface load command [SFE]. The load label is
input as SELV, the load key is the load vector number, KVAL determines whether the load vector is real
or imaginary, and the load value is the scale factor. The load vector number is determined from the load
step number associated with the superelement generation. If a superelement load vector has a zero
scale factor (or is not scaled at all), this load vector is not included in the analysis. Any number of load
vector-scale factor combinations may be used in the use pass.
In a large rotation analysis (NLGEOM,ON), you can use KEYOPT(3) to specify whether the load vectors
associated with this element type rotates with the element (as you would for a pressure load) or remains
in the original (unrotated) direction (as you would for a non-follower force load); all load vectors (if
multiple load vectors) are rotated or left unrotated. You can use KEYOPT(4) to indicate that the
superelement was generated with constraints (D) so that it cannot translate or rotate freely in the use
pass as expected (although you can apply constraints in the use pass to the master degrees of freedom
to prevent such motion.)
The KEYOPT(1) option is for the special case where the superelement is to be used with a T 4
MATRIX50
nonlinearity, such as for radiation. The File.SUB for this case may be constructed directly by the user or
may be generated by AUX12, the radiation matrix generator.
A summary of the element input is given in "MATRIX50 Input Summary". A general description of
MATRIX50 Input Summary

Nodes
None input (supplied by element)
Degrees of Freedom
As determined from the included element types (a mixture of multi-field degrees of freedom is not
allowed)
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
DAMP, PERX
Surface Loads
Surface load effects may be applied through a generated load vector and scale factors. Use the
SFE command to supply scale factors with LAB = SELV, LKEY = load vector number (31
maximum), KVAL = real or imaginary, and VAL1 = scale factor.
Body Loads
Body loads may be applied through a generated load vector and scale factors as described for
surface loads.
Special Features
Radiation (if KEYOPT(1) = 1), Large rotation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0--
Normal substructure
1--
Special radiation substructure
KEYOPT(3)
Load vector update with large rotations (NLGEOM,ON):
0--
Load vector(s) rotate with the substructure as it rotates
1--
MATRIX50
Load vector(s) do not rotate and remain in their original direction

KEYOPT(4)
Constrained substructure with large rotations (NLGEOM,ON):
0--
Substructure was unconstrained in the generation pass
1--
Substructure was constrained in the generation pass
KEYOPT(6)
Nodal force output:
0--
Do not print nodal forces
1--
Print nodal forces
MATRIX50 Output Data

Displacements and forces may be printed for each (master) degree of freedom in a structural
superelement in the "use" pass. Energies are also available when requested. The nodal forces may be
output if KEYOPT(6) = 1. The stress distribution within the superelement and the expanded nodal
displacements can be obtained from a subsequent stress pass. In addition to the database and
substructure files from the generation run, File.DSUB must be saved from the superelement "use" pass
and input to the expansion pass (if an expansion pass is desired). A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output.
MATRIX50 Assumptions and Restrictions

A superelement may contain elements of any type except Lagrange multiplier-based elements
(such as MPC184, PLANE182 with KEYOPT(6) = 1, and CONTA171 with KEYOPT(2) = 3).
See the D command for degree of freedom field groups.
Superelements of different field types may be mixed within the use run.
The nonlinear portion of any element included in a superelement will be ignored and any bilinear
element will maintain its initial status throughout the analysis.
Superelements may contain other superelements.
The relative locations of the superelement attachment points in the nonsuperelement portion of the
model (if any) should match the initial superelement geometry.
If the superelement contains a mass matrix, acceleration [ACEL] defined in the use run will be
applied to the superelement.
If a load vector containing acceleration effects is also applied in the use run, both accelerations
(the ACEL command and the load vector) will be applied to the superelement.
Similarly, if the superelement contains a damping matrix (as specified in the generation run) and
MATRIX50
and damping multipliers [ALPHA and BETA] are defined in the use run, additional damping
effects will be applied to the superelement.
You should be careful to avoid duplicating acceleration and damping effects.
Pressure and thermal effects may be included in a superelement only through its load vectors.
The dimensionality of the superelement corresponds to the maximum dimensionality of any
element used in its generation. A 2-D superelement should only be used in 2-D analyses, and 3-D
superelements in 3-D analyses.
See Substructuring Analysis in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical
Applications for a discussion of the substructure matrix procedure.
MATRIX50 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Structural.
KEYOPT(1) = 0
The PERX material property is not applicable.
ANSYS Professional.
This element may be used as a radiation substructure only. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 1 instead of 0
and cannot be changed.
The DAMP material property, PERX material property, surface loads, and body loads are not
applicable.
The large rotation special feature is not applicable.
ANSYS Emag.
This element may be used as a Trefftz substructure only.
The DAMP material property is not applicable.
The large rotation special feature is not applicable.
14.49. MATRIX50 - Superelement (or Substructure)
14.49.MATRIX50 - Superelement (or Substructure)
Matrix or Vector
Shape Functions
Integration Points
Stiffness, Conductivity, Stress

Stiffness (used only when added
to the Stiffness Matrix),
Convection Surface Matrices; and Same as the constituent elements
Gravity, Thermal and
Pressure/Heat Generation and
Convection Surface Load Vectors
Mass/Specific Heat and Damping Same as the constituent elements
reduced down to the master degrees of
Matrices
freedom
Load Type
Element Temperature and Heat Generation Rate
Pressure/Convection Surface Distribution
Same as the
constituent elements
Same as the
constituent elements
Distribution
As input during generation run
As input during generation run

Superelements are discussed in Substructuring Analysis.
SURF153
SURF153


SURF153 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto a face of
any 2-D structural solid element (except axisymmetric harmonic elements PLANE25, PLANE83, and
FLUID81). The element is applicable to 2-D structural analyses. See SURF153 in the Theory Reference
SURF153 Input Data

The element is defined by two or three node points and the material properties. The element x-axis is
along to the I-J line of the element.
The mass and volume calculations use the in-plane element thicknesses at nodes I and J (real constants
TKI and TKJ, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thickness TKJ defaults to TKI. If
KEYOPT(3) = 3, the out-of-plane thickness is input as the real constant TKPS (defaults to 1.0). The
mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit volume) and the real constant
ADMSUA, the added mass per unit area.
property VISC.
See Node and Element Loads for a description of element loads. Pressures may be input as surface
loads as force-per-length-squared on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure
153.2. SURF153 allows complex pressure loads.
Figure153.2Pressures
SURF153
Faces 1 and 2 [KEYOPT(2) = 0].Positive values of pressure on the first two faces act in the positive
element coordinate directions (except for the normal pressure which acts in the negative z direction). For
face 1, positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to simulate the
discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid.
Faces 1 and 2 [KEYOPT(2) = 1].Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to the
local coordinate system as follows: face 1 in the local x direction and face 2 in the local y direction. A
local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set to that coordinate system via the
ESYS command. KEYOPT(6) does not apply.
Face 3.The magnitude of the pressure at each integration point is PI + XP J + YP K, where PI through PK
are input as VAL1 through VAL3 on the SFE command, and X and Y are the global Cartesian coordinates
at the current location of the point. No input values can be blank. The SFFUN and SFGRAD commands
do not work with face 3.
Face 4.The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is
where i and j are
unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude can be adjusted with KEYOPTS(11)
and (12). No input values can be blank. When using the SFFUN or SFGRAD commands, the load
direction is not altered, but the load magnitude is the average of the computed corner node magnitudes.
SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as this command also causes the load direction components
to be added.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element for real pressure on
face 1 if KEYOPT(2) = 0 or on face 3. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness
effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Element body load temperatures are
not applied to other elements connected at the same nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to
TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I). Temperatures are used for material property evaluation
only.
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more
information about the use of midside nodes.
If a single PLANE element lies beneath SURF153, you can automatically set the element behavior (plane
stress, axisymmetric, or plane stress with thickness [including TKPS if applicable]) to that of the
underlying solid element using KEYOPT(3) =10. This option is valid only when a single PLANE element
lies beneath the SURF element. For example, if you apply a SURF153 element over a PLANE77 (thermal)
element whose nodes are also used in the definition of a PLANE183 (structural) element, a warning
appears and the load is not applied to the element.
KEYOPT(7) = 1 is useful when the element is used to represent a force. When KEYOPT(7) = 0, the
force is input as a pressure times an area; however, if the area changes due to large deflections, the
force also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the area changes.
If using SURF153 with VTGEOM parameters, see Element Support.

Nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (4) = 1,
I, J, K if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
SURF153
Real Constants
TKI, TKJ, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), TKPS
Material Properties
DENS, VISC, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J)
face 2 (I-J)
face 3 (I-J)
face 4 (I-J)
(in -y normal direction)

(in +x tangential direction)
(in -y normal direction, global taper)
(oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J); also T(K) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1 and 2 according to coordinate system:
0--
Apply face loads in the element coordinate system
1--
Apply face loads in the local coordinate system
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0--
Plane stress
1--
Axisymmetric
2--
Plane strain
3--
Plane stress with thickness input (TKPS)
SURF153
5 -Generalized plane strain

10--
Use the element behavior--plane stress, axisymmetric, plain strain, plane stress with
thickness input (including TKPS if applicable), or generalized plane strain--of the underlying
solid element.
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0--
Has midside node (that matches the adjacent solid element)
1--
No midside node
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 and 3):
0--
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative)
1--
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero)
2--
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero)
KEYOPT(7)
0--
Use new area
1--
Use original area
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 4):
0--
On projected area and includes tangential component
1--
On projected area and does not include tangential component
SURF153
2--
On full area and includes the tangential component
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element y-axis) on vector-oriented (face 4) pressure:
0--
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation
1--
the pressure vector
No.
1 ... 3
4
5
6
7
8
9 ... 11
12
Name
(Blank)
EFS
SURT
ADMSUA
TKI
TKJ
(Blank)
TKPS
Description
Surface tension
-Out-of-plane thickness if KEYOPT(3) = 3 (defaults to 1.0)
SURF153 Output Data

available.
Name
EL
SURFACE NODES
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J
Y
Y
Y
Y
SURF153
EXTRA NODE
MAT
AREA
VOLU:
XC, YC
VN(X, Y)
PRES
PY, PX

Material number
Surface area
Volume
Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4 at nodes I, J
Pressures at nodes in element coordinate system (P4
uses an average element coordinate system)
AVG. FACE PRESSURE
Average normal pressure (P1AVG), Average tangential
pressure (P2AVG), Average tapered normal pressure
(P3AVG), Effective value of vector oriented pressure
(P4EFF)
DVX, DVY
Direction vector of pressure P4
TEMP
Surface temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K)
DENSITY
Density (input as DENS)
MASS
Mass of Element
FOUNDATION STIFFNESS Foundation Stiffness (input as EFS)
FOUNDATION PRESSURE Foundation Pressure
SURFACE TENSION
Surface Tension (input as SURT)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
-
Y
-
1
-
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
1. If pressure load
2. If temperature load
3. If DENS > 0
4. If EFS > 0
5. If SURT > 0
Name
Item
E
I,J
SURF153

Item
E
I

PY (real)
PX (real)
PY (imaginary)
PX (imaginary)
P1AVG (real)
P2AVG (real)
P3AVG (real)
P4EFF (real)
P1AVG (imaginary)
P2AVG (imaginary)
P3AVG (imaginary)
P4EFF (imaginary)
FOUNPR
AREA
VNX
VNY
EFS
SURT
DENS
MASS
DVX
DVY
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
13
14
15
16
39
40
41
42
21
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
3
27
29
2
4
28
30
-

The surface tension load vector acts along the line connecting nodes I and J as a force applied to
the nodes seeking to minimize the length of the line. If the nodes of the element are not coplanar
when using surface tension, equilibrium may be lost.
For structural large deflection analyses, the loads are applied to the current size of the element,
not the initial size.
Surface printout and foundation stiffness are not valid for elements deactivated [EKILL] and then
reactivated [EALIVE]. Surface printout does not include large strain effects.

ANSYS Professional.
The VISC and DAMP material properties are not applicable.
ANSYS Structural.
SURF153
The only allowable material property is DENS.

14.149. SURF153 - 2-D Structural Surface Effect
14.149.SURF153 - 2-D Structural Surface Effect
Matrix or Vector
Midside Nodes [1]
All
With midside nodes
All
Without midside nodes
Shape Functions
Integration Points
w = C 1 + C 2 x + C 3 x2
w = C1 + C2 x
3
2

Load Type
All Loads
Distribution
The logic is very similar to that given for SURF154 in SURF154 - 3-D Structural Surface Effect with the
differences noted below:
1. For surface tension (input as SURT on R command)) on axisymmetric models (KEYOPT(3) = 1), an
average force is used on both end nodes.
2. For surface tension with midside nodes, no load is applied at the middle node, and only the
component directed towards the other end node is used.
3. When using large deflections, the area on which pressure is applied changes. The updated distance
between the two end nodes is used. For plain strain problems, the thickness (distance normal to
the X-Y plane) remains at 1.0, by definition. For plane stress problems, the thickness is adjusted:
(14
349)
where:
t u = final thickness used.
t i = thickness for user input option (input as TKPS on R command)

z = strain in thickness direction (normal to X-Y plane)
Using the assumption of constant volume:
(14
350)
where:
x = strain along the length of the element
y = strain normal to the underlying solid.
Assuming further that:

(14
351)
yields:
(14
352)
SURF154
SURF154


SURF154 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto an area
face of any 3-D element. The element is applicable to 3-D structural analyses. Various loads and surface
effects may exist simultaneously. See SURF154 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
SURF154 Input Data

The element is defined by four to eight nodes and the material properties. A triangular element may be
formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral
Elements. The default element x-axis is parallel to the I-J side of the element.
The mass and volume calculations use the element thicknesses at nodes I, J, K, and L (real constants
TKI, TKJ, TKK, and TKL, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thicknesses TKJ, TKK, and TKL
default to TKI. The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit volume)
and the real constant ADMSUA, the added mass per unit area.
property VISC.
loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 154.2. SURF154 allows complex
pressure loads.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2) = 0].Positive values of pressure on the first three faces act in the
positive element coordinate directions (except for the normal pressure which acts in the negative z
direction). For face 1, positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to
simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. For faces 2 and 3, the direction of the
load is controlled by the element coordinate system; therefore, the ESYS command is normally needed.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2) = 1].Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to
the local coordinate system, as follows: face 1 in the local x direction, face 2 in the local y direction, and
face 3 in the local z direction. A local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set
to that coordinate system via the ESYS command. KEYOPT(6) does not apply.
SURF154
Face 4.The direction is normal to the element and the magnitude of the pressure at each integration
point is PI + XP J + YP K + ZPL , where PI through PL are input as VAL1 through VAL4 on the SFE
command, and X, Y, Z are the global Cartesian coordinates at the current location of the point. No input
values can be blank. Positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to
simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. The SFFUN and SFGRAD commands
do not work with face 4.
where
i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude may be adjusted with
KEYOPT(11) and KEYOPT(12). No input values can be blank. When using the SFFUN or SFGRAD
commands, the load direction is not altered but the load magnitude is the average of the computed
corner node magnitudes. SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as this command also causes the
load direction components to be added.
face 1 if KEYOPT(2) = 0 or on face 4. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness
effects, issue a NROPT,UNSYM command.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Element body load temperatures are
not applied to other elements connected at the same nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to
TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures
are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner
nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Temperatures are used for material property evaluation only.
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, an edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies
linearly, rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
force is input as a pressure times an area; however, if the area changes due to large deflections, the
force also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the area changes.
If using SURF154 with VTGEOM parameters, see Element Support.

Nodes
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 1
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P if KEYOPT (4) = 0
Degrees of Freedom
SURF154
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
TKI, TKJ, TKK, TKL
Material Properties
DENS, VISC, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (I-J-K-L)
face 2 (I-J-K-L)
face 3 (I-J-K-L)
face 4 (I-J-K-L)
face 5 (I-J-K-L)
(in -z normal direction)

(tangential (+x))
(tangential (+y))
(in -z normal direction, global taper)
(oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L); also T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1, 2, and 3 according to coordinate system:
0--
1--
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0--
Has midside nodes (that match the adjacent solid element)
1--
Does not have midside nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 and 4). This KEYOPT is valid only when
KEYOPT(2) = 0.
SURF154
0--
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative)
1--
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero)
2--
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero)
KEYOPT(7)
0--
Use new area
1--
Use original area
KEYOPT(8)
Determines how ocean loading is applied:
0--
No ocean loading (default).
1+--
Apply ocean loading based on user subroutine userPanelHydFor computations. KEYOPT(8) is
the oceanID value for the subroutine. To activate the subroutine, the KWAVE value on the
OCDATA command must be 101 or greater.
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 5):
0--
On projected area and includes tangential component
1--
On projected area and does not include tangential component
2--
On full area and includes the tangential component
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element z-axis) on vector oriented (face 5) pressure:
0--
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation
SURF154
1--
the pressure vector.
No.
1 ... 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
(Blank)
EFS
SURT
ADMSUA
TKI
TKJ
TKK
TKL
Description
Surface tension
Thickness at node I
Thickness at node J (defaults to TKI)
Thickness at node K (defaults to TKI)
Thickness at node L (defaults to TKI)
SURF154 Output Data

available.
Name
EL
SURFACE NODES
EXTRA NODE
MAT
AREA
VOLU:
XC, YC
VN(X, Y, Z)
PRES
PZ, PX, PY
Definition
Element Number
Y
Nodes - I, J, K, L
Y
Y
Material number
Y
Surface area
Y
Volume
Y
Y
Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 at nodes I, J, K, L
1
Pressures at nodes in element coordinate system (P5
uses an average element coordinate system)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
Y
1
SURF154
DVX, DVY, DVZ

AVG. FACE PRESSURE

Average normal pressure (P1AVG), Average tangentialX pressure (P2AVG), Average tangential-Y pressure
(P3AVG), Average tapered normal pressure (P4AVG),
Effective value of vector oriented pressure (P5EFF)
TEMP
Surface temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N),
T(O), T(P)
DENSITY
Density
MASS
Mass of element
FOUNDATION STIFFNESS Foundation Stiffness (input as EFS)
FOUNDATION PRESSURE Foundation Pressure
SURFACE TENSION
Surface Tension (input as SURT)
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
1. If pressure load
2. If temperature load
3. If dens > 0
4. If EFS > 0
5. If SURT > 0
command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (/POST1) of the Basic
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
PZ
PX
PY
PZ
PX
(real)
(real)
(real)
(imaginary)
(imaginary)
Item
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC

E
I
J
K
-
1
5
9
27
31
2
6
10
28
32
3
7
11
29
33
L
4
8
12
30
34
SURF154
PY (imaginary)
P1AVG (real)
P2AVG (real)
P3AVG (real)
P4AVG (real)
P5EFF (real)
P1AVG (imaginary)
P2AVG (imaginary)
P3AVG (imaginary)
P4AVG (imaginary)
P5EFF (imaginary)
FOUNPR
AREA
VNX
VNY
VNZ
EFS
SURT
DENS
MASS
DVX
DVY
DVZ
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
13
14
15
16
17
39
40
41
42
43
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
35
36
-
37
-
38
-

The element must not have a zero area.
The surface-tension load vector acts in the plane of the element as a constant force applied to the
nodes seeking to minimize the area of the surface. If the nodes of the element are not coplanar
when using surface tension, equilibrium may be lost.
For structural large-deflection analyses, the loads are applied to the current size of the element,
not the initial size.
Surface printout and foundation stiffness are not valid for elements deactivated (EKILL) and then
reactivated (EALIVE). Surface printout does not include large strain effects.

ANSYS Professional.
The VISC and DAMP material properties are not applicable.
ANSYS Structural.
The only allowable material property is DENS.
SURF154
14.150.SURF154 - 3-D Structural Surface Effect
Matrix or Vector
Geometry / Midside Nodes

Shape Functions Integration Points
[1]
Equation1285
Equation1270
Equation12112
Equation1267
Equation1283,
Equation1284
Quad with midside nodes
and Equation12
85
Equation1268,
Equation1269
Quad without midside nodes
Mass and Stress
and Equation12
Stiffness Matrices
70
Triangle with midside nodes
Equation12112
Equation1265,
Equation1266
Triangle without midside nodes
and Equation12
67
Equation1283
and Equation12
84
Equation1268
and Equation12
69
Surface Tension Load
Vector
Equation12110
and Equation12
111
Equation1265
Triangle without midside nodes and Equation12
66
Stiffness and
Damping Matrices,
and Pressure Load
Vector

Triangle without midside nodes
3x3
2x2
6
3
3x3
2x2
6
3
3x3
2x2
6
3

Load Type
All Loads
Distribution
The stiffness matrix is:

(14
353)
where:
kf = foundation stiffness (input as EFS on R command)
A = area of element
{N z} = vector of shape functions representing motions normal to the surface
The mass matrix is:
(14
354)
where:
t h = thickness (input as TKI, TKJ, TKK, TKL on RMORE command)
= density (input as DENS on MP command)
{N} = vector of shape functions
Ad = added mass per unit area (input as ADMSUA on R command)
If the command LUMPM,ON is used, [M e] is diagonalized as described in Lumped Matrices.
The element damping matrix is:
(14
355)
where:
= dissipation (input as VISC on MP command)
The element stress stiffness matrix is:
(14
356)
where:
[S g ] = derivatives of shape functions of normal motions
s = in-plane force per unit length (input as SURT on R command)

If pressure is applied to face 1, the pressure load stiffness matrix is computed as described in Pressure
Load Stiffness.
The element load vector is:
(14
357)
where:
{N p } = vector of shape functions representing in-plane motions normal to the edge

E = edge of element
{N x } = vector of shape functions representing motion in element x direction

{N y } = vector of shape functions representing motion in element y direction
Pv = uniform pressure magnitude
P1 = input (VAL1 with LKEY = 5 on SFE command)

= angle between element normal and applied load direction
D , D , D = vector directions (input as VAL2 thru VAL4 with LKEY = 5 on SFE command)
{N X}, {N Y }, {N Z } = vectors of shape functions in global Cartesian coordinates

The integration used to arrive at
is the usual numerical integration, even if KEYOPT(6) 0. The
output quantities average face pressures are the average of the pressure values at the integration
points.
SURF156
SURF156
3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect


SURF156 may be used for applying line pressure loads on structures. It may be overlaid onto the edge
of any 3-D element. The element is applicable to 3-D structural analyses. Various loads and surface
effects may exist simultaneously. See SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect in the Theory
SURF156 Input Data

The element is defined by two to four nodes (KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1). The orientation node lies in the
element x-z plane and is required for orientation of the element loads. The element x-axis is parallel to
the line connecting nodes I and J of the element.
loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 156.2. SURF156 allows complex
pressure loads. The input units are force per length.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2)]=0.Positive values of pressure on the first three faces act in the
positive element coordinate directions. For faces 2 and 3, the direction of the load is controlled by the
element coordinate system which is oriented via the orientation node; therefore, the ESYS command
has no effect. When using large deflection (NLGEOM,ON), the orientation of the loads may change
based on the new location of the nodes. If the orientation node is on another element that moves, the
orientation node will move with it. If the orientation node is not on another element, the node cannot
move.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2)]=1.Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to the
local coordinate system, as follows: face 1 in the x direction, face 2 in the local y direction, and face 3 in
the local z direction. A local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set to that
coordinate system via the ESYS command.
SURF156

where
i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. No input values can be blank. When using
the SFFUN or SFGRAD commands, the load direction is not altered but the load magnitude is the
average of the computed corner node magnitudes. SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as this
command also causes the load direction components to be added.
Face 5.The magnitude of the pressure is PI, the load point is node I, and the direction is the element xaxis.
Face 6.The magnitude of the pressure is PI, the load point is node J, and the direction is the element
negative x-axis.
faces 2 and 3 if KEYOPT(2) = 0. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects,
issue a NROPT,UNSYM command.
force is input as a pressure times a unit length; however, if the length changes due to large deflections,
the force also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the length changes.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, if KEYOPT (4) = 0 and KEYOPT(5) = 0
I, J, K, if KEYOPT (4) = 1 and KEYOPT(5) = 0, or if KEYOPT(4) = 0 and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, if KEYOPT(4) = 1 and KEYOPT(5) = 1
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressures--
face 1 (parallel to x direction)
face 2 (parallel to y direction)
face 3 (parallel to z direction)
face 4 (oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
SURF156
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1, 2, and 3 according to coordinate system:
0--
1--
KEYOPT(4)
Midside node:
0--
Has a midside node
1--
Does not have a midside node
KEYOPT(5)
Orientation node:
0--
Has an orientation node
1--
Does not have an orientation node. Use only for load on face 1 or face 4.
KEYOPT(7)
0--
Use new area
1--
Use original area
SURF156 Output Data

SURF156

available.
Name
EL
NODES
ORIENTATION NODE
PRESSURES
VECTOR DIRECTION
Definition
Element Number
Nodes - I, J, K
Orientation node
Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4 at nodes I, J
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
1
1
1. If pressure load
command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (/POST1) of the Basic
Name
Item
E
I, J
Item
E
I

P1
P2
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
(real)
(real)
(real)
(real)
(imaginary)
(imaginary)
(imaginary)
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
7
-
1
3
5
8
10
12
2
4
6
9
11
13
SURF156
P4 (imaginary)
P4 (real) VECTOR DIRECTION
P4 (imaginary) VECTOR DIRECTION
SMISC
NMISC
NMISC
14
1-3
4-6

The element must not have a zero length, and the orientation node (when used) cannot be
colinear with nodes I and J.

ANSYS Professional.
14.152. SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect
14.152.SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect
Matrix or Vector
Midside Nodes [1]

With midside nodes

Without midside nodes
Shape Functions Integration Points

Equation1219,
Equation1220,
Equation1221
Equation1215,
Equation1216,
Equation1217
3
2

Load Type
Pressures
Distribution
Linear along length for faces 1, 2, and 3; constant along length for
face 4
REINF264
REINF264
3-D Discrete Reinforcing
REINF264 Element Description

Use REINF264 with standard 3-D link, beam, shell and solid elements (referred to here as the base
elements) to provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element is suitable for simulating reinforcing fibers with arbitrary orientations. Each fiber is modeled
separately as a spar that has only uniaxial stiffness. You can specify multiple reinforcing fibers in one
REINF264 element. The nodal locations, degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF264 element
are identical to those of the base element.
For smeared reinforcing modeling options, use the REINF263 and REINF265 elements.
REINF264 has plasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. See
REINF264 in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details
about this element.
Figure264.1REINF264 Geometry
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Solid
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_REINF264.html[28/04/2013 09:02:53 p.m.]
REINF264
3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 8-Node Shell
3-D 2-Node Beam
3-D 3-Node Beam
3-D 2-Node Spar

Figure264.2REINF264 Coordinate System
REINF264 Input Data

The geometry and nodal locations for this element are shown in Figure 264.1. The REINF264 element
and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity. Each reinforcing fiber is indicated
by its intersection points (II, JJ for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK for quadratic base elements) with
the base elements.
You can easily create REINF264 elements from the selected base elements (EREINF). Section
commands (SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, and location of
reinforcing fibers.
REINF264 allows tension-only or compression-only reinforcing fibers. You can specify the desired fiber
behavior (SECCONTROLS).
The coordinate system for one reinforcing fiber is shown in Figure 264.2. The coordinate system is solely
determined by intersection points II, JJ, and KK; therefore, the element coordinate system
(/PSYMB,ESYS) is not relevant for this element.
The REINF264 element does not accept element loading. Apply element loading only to the base
element. The temperature of the REINF264 element is identical to the temperature of the base element.
You can import an initial stress state for this element (INISTATE). For more information, see "Initial
State" in the Basic Analysis Guide .
A summary of the element input follows.
REINF264 Input Summary

Nodes
Same as those of the base element, as shown:
Base Element
3-D 20-Node Solid
REINF264 Nodes
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,A,B
REINF264

3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 8-Node Shell
3-D 2-Node Beam
3-D 3-Node Beam
3-D 2-Node Spar
Degrees of Freedom
I,J,K,L
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R
I,J,K,L
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
I,J,K (K is an optional orientation node)
I,J,K,L (L is an optional orientation node)
I,J

Base Element
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 8-Node Shell
3-D 2-Node Beam
3-D 3-Node Beam
3-D 2-Node Spar
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY or NUXY), ALPX (or CTEX or
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
REINF264 DOFs
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
UX, UY, UZ
ROTY,
ROTY,
ROTY,
ROTY,
ROTZ
ROTZ
ROTZ
ROTZ
THSX), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Temperatures--
Same as those of the base element
Special Features
Plasticity
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
Creep
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
Supports the following types of data tables associated with the TB command: BISO, MISO, NLISO,
BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL, RATE, CREEP, PRONY, SHIFT, PLASTIC, and USER.
See "Structures with Material Nonlinearities" in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
Mechanical Applications for details about the material models.
KEYOPTS
REINF264
None
REINF264 Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table264.1:REINF264 Element Output Definitions.
The axial stress component is illustrated in Figure 264.3.
Figure264.3REINF264 Stress Output
Unlike layered solid or shell elements (such as SHELL181), REINF264 always outputs the element
solution for all reinforcing layers. You can select solution items for a specific reinforcing layer (LAYER)
for listing and visualization by using full graphics (/GRAPHICS,FULL). Visualization via PowerGraphics
(/GRAPHICS,POWER) is not affected by the LAYER command; all reinforcing layers are displayed
simultaneously. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
To inspect REINF264 element results, select only REINF264 element results or adjust the translucency
level of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF264 display options are also
available directly via the GUI (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Reinforcing> Display
Options).
available.
Table264.1REINF264 Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
AREA
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
Definition
Nodes (as shown in "REINF264 Input Summary")
Material number
Averaged cross-section area of reinforcing fibers
Volume
Center location
T1, T2 for reinforcing fiber 1; T3, T4 for reinforcing fiber
2; ending with temperatures for the last reinforcing fiber
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
REINF264
S:X
EPEL:X
EPTH:X
EPPL:X
EPCR:X
EPTO:X
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
N11
LOCI:X, Y, Z
NL (2 * NL maximum)
Axial stresses
Axial elastic strains
Axial thermal strains
Axial plastic strains
Axial creep strains
Total axial mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR)
Plastic work
Averaged axial force
2
2
2
2
2
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
Y
4
1. Nonlinear solution output if the element has a nonlinear material.

element coordinate system are available for output.
Table264.2:REINF264 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via the ETABLE command
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this document for more information. The following notation is
used in Table264.2:REINF264 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table264.1:REINF264 Element Output Definitions
Item
E
Table264.2REINF264 Item and Sequence Numbers
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
N11
AREA
SMISC
SMISC
(i - 1) * 2 + 1
(i - 1) * 2 + 2
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing fiber number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing fiber number.
REINF264 Assumptions and Restrictions

Zero-volume elements are invalid.
REINF264
This element can be used only with base element types LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, and SOLID285.
A valid base element must be present for each REINF264 element.
The reinforcing element is firmly attached to its base element. No relative movement between the
reinforcing element and the base is allowed.
Through-thickness reinforcing is not permitted in shells and layered solid elements.
Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). You can
activate prestress effects via the PSTRES command.
The warping degree of freedom in beam base elements are not accounted for.
REINF264 does not support BEAM188 with the quadratic or cubic interpolation option (KEYOPT(3)).
To simulate the tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution
approach is necessary.
REINF264 Product Restrictions

None.
REINF263
REINF263

Use REINF263 with standard 2-D solid and shell elements (referred to here as the base elements) to
provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element uses a smeared approach and is suitable for modeling evenly spaced reinforcing fibers that
appear in layered form. Each reinforcing layer contains a cluster of fibers with unique orientation,
material, and cross-section area, and is simplified as a homogenous membrane having unidirectional
stiffness. You can specify multiple layers of reinforcing in one REINF263 element. The nodal locations,
degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF263 element are identical to those of the base
element.
about this element.
REINF263
X = Layer x-axis if layer orientation angle is specified (SECDATA,,,, THETA )

X 0 = Layer x-axis if layer orientation angle is not specified
REINF263 Input Data

and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity.
You can easily create REINF263 elements from the selected base elements via the EREINF command.
Section commands (SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, spacing,
location, and orientation of reinforcing fibers.
The equivalent thickness h of the smeared reinforcing layer is given by
h=A/S
where A is the cross-section area of a single fiber, and S is the distance between two adjacent fibers.
The coordinate systems for one reinforcing layer are shown in Figure 263.2. Each reinforcing layer is
indicated by its intersection points (II, JJ for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK, for quadratic base
elements) with the base elements. Fibers in this layer are always parallel to the first coordinate axis x.
The x axis is default to the first parametric direction S1 at the center of the layer. The default axis is
defined as
where
{x} = h1 {x} II + h2 {x} JJ + h3 {x} KK
{x} II, {x} JJ, {x} KK = global coordinates of intersection points
h1 , h2 , h3 = line shape functions
You can reorient the layer coordinate system by angle (in degrees) for each layer. The value of is
also provided for each layer via the SECDATA command. For more information about visualizing fiber
orientations, see the /PSYMB command documentation.
You can use REINF263 to reinforce 2-D solid elements with plane stress, plane strain, axisymmetric, and
generalized plane strain behaviors, and axisymmetric shells/membranes with or without uniform torsion
capability. The element accounts for various base element behaviors automatically.
REINF263

Nodes
Base Element
2-D 4-Node Solid
2-D 8-Node Solid
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell
Degrees of Freedom
REINF263 Nodes
I,J,K,L
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
I,J
I,J,K

Base Element
2-D 4-Node or 8-Node Solid
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Membrane
Allowing Uniform Torsion
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Membrane
Allowing Uniform Torsion
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
REINF263 DOFs
UX, UY
UX, UY, ROTZ
UX, UY
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX
UX, UY, UZ
Temperatures--
Special Features
Plasticity
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
Creep
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
REINF263
KEYOPTS
None

The following figure illustrates the axial stress component:
To inspect REINF263 element results, select only REINF263 element results or adjust translucency level
of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF263 display options are also
Options).
available.
REINF263
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
AREA
SPACING
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
S:X
EPEL:X
EPTH:X
EPPL:X
EPCR:X
EPTO:X
EPTT:X
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
N11
LOCI:X, Y, Z
Definition

Material number
Averaged distance between two adjacent fibers
Volume
Center location
T1, T2 for reinforcing layer 1; T3, T4 for reinforcing
layer 2; ending with temperatures for the last reinforcing
layer NL (2*NL maximum)
Axial stresses
Axial creep strains
Total axial strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR + EPTH)
Plastic work
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
2
2
2
2
2
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
Y
4

Table263.2:REINF263 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available via ETABLE using the
Table263.2:REINF263 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
REINF263

Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
N11
AREA
SPACING
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
(i - 1) * 3 + 1
(i - 1) * 3 + 2
(i - 1) * 3 + 3
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing layer number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing layer number.

This element can be used only with base element types SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE182, and
PLANE183.
also activate prestress effects (PSTRES).
To simulate tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is
necessary.

None.
14.259.REINF263 - 2-D Smeared Reinforcing
Matrix or Vector

Stiffness Matrices and
Thermal Load Vector
Base
Element
Linear 2-D
solid or shell
Shape Functions (for each

layer)
and Equation128
Across the length: 1

Across the section: 1
Quadratic 3-D Equation1219, Equation1220,

Across the length: 2
solid or shell and Equation1221
Mass Matrix
Same as stiffness matrix.
N/A
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Integration Points
Across the section: 1

Same as stiffness
matrix.
N/A
Distribution
Linear along the length, constant across the section.

N/A
N/A

See Stiffness and Mass Matrices of a Reinforcing Layer for the general formulation of the reinforcing
stiffness and mass matrices.
REINF265
REINF265

Use REINF265 with standard 3-D solid and shell elements (referred to here as the base elements) to
provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element uses a smeared approach and is suitable for modeling evenly spaced reinforcing fibers that
appear in layered form. Each reinforcing layer contains a cluster of fibers with unique orientation,
material, and cross-section area, and is simplified as a homogenous membrane having unidirectional
stiffness. You can specify multiple layers of reinforcing in one REINF265 element. The nodal locations,
degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF265 element are identical to those of the base
element.
For discrete reinforcing modeling options, see the documentation for the REINF264 element.
about this element.
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 4-Node Shell
REINF265
3-D 8-Node Shell

X = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number (SECDATA,,,KCN ) for the
layer is specified
X 0 = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number is not specified
REINF265 Input Data

and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity.
You can easily create REINF265 elements from the selected base elements via the EREINF command.
Section commands (SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, spacing,
location, and orientation of reinforcing fibers.
The equivalent thickness h of the smeared reinforcing layer is given by
h=A/S
where A is the cross-section area of a single fiber, and S is the distance between two adjacent fibers.
The coordinate systems for one reinforcing layer are shown in Figure 265.2. Each reinforcing layer is
indicated by its intersection points (II, JJ, KK, LL for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK, LL, MM, NN,
OO, PP for quadratic base elements) with the base elements. Fibers in this layer are always parallel to
the first coordinate axis x. The x axis is default to the first parametric direction S1 at the center of the
layer. The default axis is defined as
where
REINF265
{x} II,
{x} JJ,
{x} KK ,
{x} LL
= global nodal coordinates
You can reorient the default layer coordinate system by projecting a local coordinate system (LOCAL) to
the layer plane. One local coordinate system is allowed for each layer. The local coordinate system
reference number is given via the SECDATA command.
You can further rotate the layer coordinate system by angle (in degrees) for each layer. The value of
is also provided for each layer via SECDATA. For more information about visualizing fiber orientations,
see the /PSYMB command documentation.

Nodes
Base Element
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 8-Node Shell
Degrees of Freedom
REINF265 Nodes
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,A,B
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R
I,J,K,L
I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P

Base Element
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 8-Node Shell
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
REINF265 DOFs
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ
UX, UY, UZ
REINF265
Temperatures--
Special Features
Plasticity
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
Creep
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Initial state
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None

The following figure illustrates the axial stress component:
X = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number (SECDATA,,,, KCN ) for the
layer is specified
X 0 = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number is not specified
REINF265
To inspect REINF265 element results, select only REINF265 element results or adjust translucency level
of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF265 display options are also
Options).
available.
Name
EL
NODES
MAT
AREA
SPACING
VOLU:
XC, YC, ZC
TEMP
S:X
EPEL:X
EPTH:X
EPPL:X
EPCR:X
EPTO:X
NL:EPEQ
NL:CREQ
NL:SRAT
NL:PLWK
N11
LOCI:X, Y, Z
Definition

Material number
Averaged distance between two adjacent fibers
Volume
Center location
T1, T2, T3, T4 for reinforcing layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 for
reinforcing layer 2; ending with temperatures for the last
reinforcing layer NL (4*NL maximum)
Axial stresses
Axial creep strains
Plastic work
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
2
2
2
2
2
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
Y
4

REINF265

Table265.2:REINF265 Item and Sequence Numbers lists output available through ETABLE using the
Table265.2:REINF265 Item and Sequence Numbers:
Name
Item
E
Item
E
Output Quantity
Name
N11
AREA
SPACING
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
(i - 1) * 3 + 1
(i - 1) * 3 + 2
(i - 1) * 3 + 3
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing layer number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing layer number (1 NL 250).

This element can be used only with base element types SHELL181, SHELL281, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, and SOLSH190.
activate prestress effects via the PSTRES command.
To simulate tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is
necessary.

None.
REINF265
14.261.REINF265 - 3-D Smeared Reinforcing
Base
Element
Shape Functions (for each

layer)
Integration Points

Stiffness Matrices and
Thermal Load Vector
Linear 3-D
solid or shell
Quadratic 3-D
solid or shell
and Equation1270
and Equation1285
Mass Matrix
N/A
In-plane:1x1
Thru-the-thickness:1
In-plane:2x2
Thru-the-thickness:1
Same as stiffness
matrix
N/A
Matrix or Vector
Load Type
Element Temperature
Nodal Temperature
Pressure
Distribution
Bilinear in plane of each reinforcing layer, constant thru-thethickness of each layer.
N/A
N/A

14.261.2.Stiffness and Mass Matrices of a Reinforcing Layer

Each layer of reinforcing fibers is simplified as a membrane with unidirectional stiffness. The equivalent
membrane thickness h is given by:
(14
472)
where:
A = cross-section area of each fiber (input on SECDATA command)
S = distance between two adjacent fibers (input on SECDATA command)
We assume that the reinforcing fibers are firmly attached to the base element (that is, no relative
movement between the base element and the fibers is allowed). Therefore, the degrees of freedom
(DOF) of internal layer nodes (II, JJ, KK, LL, etc.) can be expressed in terms of DOFs of the external
element nodes (I, J, K, L, etc.). Taking a linear 3-D solid base element as the example, the DOFs of an
internal layer node II can be shown as:
(14
473)
where:
{uII, vII, wII} = displacements of internal layer node II
{ui, vi, wi} = displacements of base element node i
Ni ( II, II, II) = value of trilinear shape function of node i at the location of internal node II
Similar relationships can be established for other type of base elements. The stiffness and mass matrices
of each reinforcing layer are first evaluated with respect to internal layer DOFs. The equivalent stiffness
and mass contributions of this layer to the element is then determined through relationship
(Equation14473).
ALPHAD
ALPHAD
ALPHAD, VALUE
Defines the mass matrix multiplier for damping.
SOLUTION : Dynamic Options

MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY PP <> EME MFS
VALUE
Mass matrix multiplier for damping.
Notes
Defines the mass matrix multiplier, , for damping. One form of the viscous damping matrix [C] is given
by [M] + [K], where [M] is the mass matrix and [K] is the stiffness matrix. Damping is not used in
the static (ANTYPE,STATIC) or buckling (ANTYPE,BUCKLE) analyses.
Menu Paths
Main
Main
Main
Main
Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient

Menu>Preprocessor>Loads>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
Menu>Solution>Analysis Type>Sol'n Controls>Transient
Menu>Solution>Load Step Opts>Time/Frequenc>Damping
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_cmd/Hlp_C_ALPHAD.html[28/04/2013 09:04:56 p.m.]
15.16.Eigenvalue and Eigenvector Extraction

The following extraction methods and related topics are available:
Reduced Method
Supernode Method
Block Lanczos
PCG Lanczos
Unsymmetric Method
Damped Method
QR Damped Method
Shifting
Repeated Eigenvalues
Complex Eigensolutions
The eigenvalue and eigenvector problem needs to be solved for mode-frequency and buckling analyses.
It has the form of:
(15
184)
where:
[K] = structure stiffness matrix
{i} = eigenvector
i = eigenvalue
[M] = structure mass matrix
For prestressed modal analyses, the [K] matrix includes the stress stiffness matrix [S]. For eigenvalue
buckling analyses, the [M] matrix is replaced with the stress stiffness matrix [S]. The discussions given in
the rest of this section assume a modal analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL) except as noted, but also generally
applies to eigenvalue buckling analyses.
The eigenvalue and eigenvector extraction procedures available include the reduced, Block Lanczos, PCG
Lanczos, Supernode, unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped methods (MODOPT and BUCOPT
commands) outlined in Table15.1:Procedures Used for Eigenvalue and Eigenvector Extraction. Each
method is discussed subsequently. Shifting, applicable to most methods, is discussed in a later section
(see Shifting).
Table15.1Procedures Used for Eigenvalue and Eigenvector Extraction
Procedure
Input
Reduced
MODOPT,
REDUC
Supernode
MODOPT,
SNODE
Block Lanczos
MODOPT,
LANB
Usages
Applicable Reduction
Matrices++
Extraction
Technique
K, M
Any (but not
recommended
for buckling)
Symmetric (but K, M
not applicable to
buckling)
Guyan
HBI
None
Symmetric
None
Internally uses
node grouping,
reduced, and
Lanczos
methods
Lanczos which
internally uses
QL algorithm
K, M
PCG Lanczos
MODOPT,
LANPCG
Unsymmetric
MODOPT,
UNSYM
Damped
MODOPT,
DAMP
QR Damped
MODOPT,
QRDAMP
++ K = stiffness matrix, C =
unsymmetric
Symmetric (but
not applicable
for buckling)
Unsymmetric
matrices
K, M
None
Lanczos which
internally uses
QL algorithm
K*, M*
None
Lanczos which
internally uses
QR algorithm
K*, C*, M* None
Lanczos which
Symmetric or
internally uses
unsymmetric
QR algorithm
damped systems
K*, C*, M
Modal
QR algorithm for
Symmetric or
reduced modal
unsymmetric
damping matrix
damped systems
damping matrix, M = mass or stress stiffening matrix, * = can be
The Block Lanczos and PCG Lanczos methods both use Lanczos iterations to extract the requested
eigenvalues. However, the Block Lanczos method uses the sparse direct solver, while the PCG Lanczos
method uses the PCG iterative solver internally to solve the necessary system of equations at each
Lanczos iteration.
15.16.1.Reduced Method
For the reduced procedure (accessed with MODOPT,REDUC), the system of equations is first condensed
down to those degrees of freedom associated with the master degrees of freedom by Guyan reduction.
This condensation procedure is discussed in Substructuring Analysis (Equation1798 and Equation17
110). The set of n master degrees of freedom characterize the natural frequencies of interest in the
system. The selection of the master degrees of freedom is discussed in more detail in Automatic Master
Degrees of Freedom Selection of this manual and in Modal Analysis of the Structural Analysis Guide . This
technique preserves the potential energy of the system but modifies, to some extent, the kinetic energy.
The kinetic energy of the low frequency modes is less sensitive to the condensation than the kinetic
energy of the high frequency modes. The number of master degrees of freedom selected should usually
be at least equal to twice the number of frequencies of interest. This reduced form may be expressed
as:
(15
185)
where:
= reduced stiffness matrix (known)
= eigenvector (unknown)
i = eigenvalue (unknown)
= reduced mass matrix (known)
Next, the actual eigenvalue extraction is performed. The extraction technique employed is the HBI
(Householder-Bisection-Inverse iteration) extraction technique and consists of the following five steps:
15.16.1.1.Transformation of the Generalized Eigenproblem to a Standard

Eigenproblem
Equation15185 must be transformed to the desired form which is the standard eigenproblem (with [A]
being symmetric):
(15
186)
This is accomplished by the following steps:
Premultiply both sides of Equation15185 by
:
(15
187)
Decompose
into [L][L] T by Cholesky decomposition, where [L] is a lower triangular matrix.
Combining with Equation15187,
(15
188)
It is convenient to define:
(15
189)
Combining Equation15188 and Equation15189), and reducing yields:
(15
190)
or
(15
191)
where:
Note that the symmetry of [A] has been preserved by this procedure.
15.16.1.2.Reduce [A] to Tridiagonal Form

This step is performed by Householder's method through a series of similarity transformations yielding
(15
192)
where:
[B] = tridiagonalized form of [A]
[T] = matrix constructed to tridiagonalize [A], solved for iteratively (Bathe([2]))
The eigenproblem is reduced to:
(15
193)
Note that the eigenvalues () have not changed through these transformations, but the eigenvectors are
related by:
(15
194)
15.16.1.3.Eigenvalue Calculation
Use Sturm sequence checks with the bisection method to determine the eigenvalues.
15.16.1.4.Eigenvector Calculation
The eigenvectors are evaluated using inverse iteration with shifting. The eigenvectors associated with
multiple eigenvalues are evaluated using initial vector deflation by Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization in the
inverse iteration procedure.
15.16.1.5.Eigenvector Transformation
After the eigenvectors i are evaluated,
mode shapes are recovered through Equation15194.
In the expansion pass, the eigenvectors are expanded from the master degrees of freedom to the total
degrees of freedom.
15.16.2.Supernode Method
The Supernode (SNODE) solver is used to solve large, symmetric eigenvalue problems for many modes
(up to 10,000 and beyond) in one solution. A supernode is a group of nodes from a group of elements.
The supernodes for the model are generated automatically by the solver. This method first calculates
eigenmodes for each supernode in the range of 0.0 to FREQE* RangeFact (where RangeFact is specified
by the SNOPTION command and defaults to 2.0), and then uses the supernode eigenmodes to
calculate the global eigenmodes of the model in the range of FREQB to FREQE (where FREQB and FREQE
are specified by the MODOPT command). Typically, this method offers faster solution times than Block
Lanczos or PCG Lanczos if the number of modes requested is more than 200.
The Supernode solver uses an approximate method compared to the Block Lanczos and PCG Lanczos
solutions. The accuracy of the Supernode solution can be controlled by the SNOPTION command. By
default, the eigenmode accuracy is based on the frequency range used, as shown in the following table.
Frequency Range
0 - 100 Hz
100 - 200 Hz
200 - 400 Hz
400 - 1000 Hz
1000 Hz and higher
Accuracy of Supernode solution

0.01 percent error
0.05 percent error
0.20 percent error
1.00 percent error
3.0 - 5.0 percent error
Typically, the reason for seeking many modes is to perform a subsequent mode superposition or PSD
analysis to solve for the response in a higher frequency range. The error introduced by the Supernode
solver (shown in the table above) is small enough for most engineering purposes. You can use the
SNOPTION command to increase the accuracy of the solution, but at the cost of increased computing
time. Increasing the value of RangeFact (on the SNOPTION command) results in a more accurate
solution.
In each step of the Supernode eigenvalue calculation, a Sturm check is performed. The occurrence of
missing modes in the Supernode calculation is rare.

The lumped mass matrix option (LUMPM,ON) is not allowed when using the Supernode mode
extraction method. The consistent mass matrix option will be used regardless of the LUMPM setting.
15.16.3.Block Lanczos
The Block Lanczos eigenvalue extraction method (accessed with MODOPT,LANB or BUCOPT,LANB) is
available for large symmetric eigenvalue problems.
The block shifted Lanczos algorithm is a variation of the classical Lanczos algorithm, where the Lanczos
recursions are performed using a block of vectors, as opposed to a single vector. Additional theoretical
details on the classical Lanczos method can be found in Rajakumar and Rogers([196]).
A block shifted Lanczos algorithm, as found in Grimes et al.([195]) is the theoretical basis of the
eigensolver. The Block Lanczos method employs an automated shift strategy, combined with a Sturm
sequence check, to extract the number of eigenvalues requested. The Sturm sequence check ensures
that the requested number of eigenfrequencies beyond the user supplied shift frequency ( FREQB on the
MODOPT command) is found without missing any modes. At the end of the Block Lanczos calculation,
the solver performs a Sturm sequence check automatically. This check computes the number of negative
pivots encountered in the range that the minimum and maximum eigenvalues encompass. This number
will match the number of converged eigenvalues unless some eigenvalues have been missed. Block
Lanczos will report the number of missing eigenvalues, if any.
Use of the Block Lanczos method for solving larger models (1,000,000 DOF, for example) with many
constraint equations (CE) can require a significant amount of computer memory. The alternative method
of PCG Lanczos, which internally uses the PCG solver, could result in savings of memory and computing
time.
15.16.4.PCG Lanczos
The theoretical basis of this eigensolver is found in Grimes et al.([195]), which is the same basis for the
Block Lanczos eigenvalue extraction method. However, the implementaion differs somewhat from the
Block Lanczos eigensolver, in that the PCG Lanczos eigensolver:
does not employ an automated shift strategy during the eigenvalue analysis.
does not perform a Sturm sequence check by default.
is only available for modal analyses and is not applicable to buckling analyses.
15.16.5.Unsymmetric Method
The unsymmetric eigensolver (accessed with MODOPT,UNSYM) is applicable whenever the system
matrices are unsymmetric. For example, an acoustic fluid-structure interaction problem using FLUID30
elements results in unsymmetric matrices. Also, certain problems involving the input matrix element
MATRIX27 and/or COMBI214 element, such as in rotor dynamics can give rise to unsymmetric system
matrices. A generalized eigenvalue problem given by the following equation
(15
195)
can be setup and solved using the mode-frequency analysis (ANTYPE,MODAL). The matrices [K] and
[M] are the system stiffness and mass matrices, respectively. Either or both [K] and [M] can be
unsymmetric. {i} is the eigenvector.
The method employed to solve the unsymmetric eigenvalue problem is a subspace approach based on a
method designated as Frequency Derivative Method. The FD method uses an orthogonal set of Krylov
sequence of vectors:
(15
196)
To obtain the expression for the sequence of vectors, the generalized eigenvalue Equation15195 is
differentiated with respect to i to get:
(15
197)
Substituting Equation15197 into Equation15195 and rearranging after applying a shift s, the starting
expression for generating the sequence of vectors is given by:
(15
198)
(15
199)
where:
s = an initial shift
The general expression used for generating the sequence of vectors is given by:
(15
200)
This matrix equation is solved by a sparse matrix solver (EQSLV, SPARSE). However, an explicit
specification of the equation solver (EQSLV command) is not needed.
The subspace made of these derivatives allows the program to find the closest eigensolutions from this
shift point. The shift value s is initially determined using the FREQB value on the MODOPT command.
For a large number of eigenvalues, the UNSYM extraction algorithm is able to move automatically to a
new shift if the first solve only finds a subset of eigensolutions. This process will be repeated until all the
required eigenvalues are found, unless the algorithm fails several times to find any accurate eigenvalues.
A subspace transformation of Equation15195 is performed using the sequence of orthogonal vectors
which leads to the reduced eigenproblem:
(15
201)
where:
[K*] = [Q T] [K] [Q]
[M*] = [Q T] [M] [Q]
The eigenvalues of the reduced eigenproblem (Equation15201) are extracted using a direct eigenvalue
solution procedure. The eigenvalues i are the approximate eigenvalues of the original eigenproblem and
they converge to i with increasing subspace size m. The converged eigenvectors are then computed
using the subspace transformation equation:
(15
202)
For the unsymmetric modal analysis, the real part (i) of the complex frequency is used to compute the
element kinetic energy.
This method does not perform a Sturm Sequence check for possible missing modes. At the lower end of
the spectrum close to the shift (input as FREQB on MODOPT command), the frequencies usually
converge without missing modes.
15.16.6.Damped Method
The damped eigensolver (accessed with MODOPT,DAMP) is applicable only when the system damping
matrix needs to be included in Equation15184, where the eigenproblem becomes a quadratic
eigenvalue problem given by:
(15
203)
where:
=
(defined below)
[C] = damping matrix
Matrices may be symmetric or unsymmetric.
The method employed to solve the damped eigenvalue problem is the same as for the UNSYM option.
We first transform the initial quadratic equation (Equation15203) in a linear form applying the variable
substitutions:
To form the equivalent UNSYM eigenvalue problem.

(15
204)
Solutions of Equation15203 and Equation15204 are equivalent, except that only the first-half part of
the eigenvevctors
is considered.
The UNSYM method uses Equation15204. The default blocksize value to solve a Quadratic Damp
Eigenproblem is set to four. This value can be controlled using the blocksize parameter of the MODOPT
command.
This method does not perform a Sturm Sequence check for possible missing modes. At the lower end of
the spectrum, close to the shift (input as FREQB on the MODOPT command), the frequencies usually
converge without missing modes. Furthermore, this method does not employ an automated shift
strategy during the eigenvalue analysis.
For the damped modal analysis, the imaginary part i of the complex frequency is used to compute the
element kinetic energy.
15.16.7.QR Damped Method

The QR damped method (accessed with MODOPT,QRDAMP) is a procedure for determining the complex
eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of damped linear systems. This solver allows for
nonsymmetric [K] and [C] matrices. The solver is computationally efficient compared to damp
eigensolver (MODOPT,DAMP). This method employs the modal orthogonal coordinate transformation of
system matrices to reduce the eigenproblem into the modal subspace. QR algorithm is then used to
calculate eigenvalues of the resulting quadratic eigenvalue problem in the modal subspace.
The equations of elastic structural systems without external excitation can be written in the following
form:
(15
205)
(See Equation175 for definitions).
It has been recognized that performing computations in the modal subspace is more efficient than in the
full eigen space. The stiffness matrix [K] can be symmetrized by rearranging the unsymmetric
contributions; that is, the original stiffness matrix [K] can be divided into symmetric and unsymmetric
parts. By dropping the damping matrix [C] and the unsymmetric contributions of [K], the symmetric
Block Lanczos eigenvalue problem is first solved to find real eigenvalues and the corresponding
eigenvectors. In the present implementation, the unsymmetric element stiffness matrix is zeroed out for
Block Lanczos eigenvalue extraction. Following is the coordinate transformation (see Equation1599)
used to transform the full eigen problem into modal subspace:
(15
206)
where:
[] = eigenvector matrix normalized with respect to the mass matrix [M]
{y} = vector of modal coordinates
By using Equation15206 in Equation15205, we can write the differential equations of motion in the
modal subspace as follows:
(15
207)
where:
[2 ] = a diagonal matrix containing the first n eigen frequencies i
For classically damped systems, the modal damping matrix [] T[C][] is a diagonal matrix with the
diagonal terms being 2ii, where i is the damping ratio of the i-th mode. For non-classically damped
systems, the modal damping matrix is either symmetric or unsymmetric. Unsymmetric stiffness
contributions of the original stiffness are projected onto the modal subspace to compute the reduced
unsymmetric modal stiffness matrix [] T [Kunsym] [].
Introducing the 2n-dimensional state variable vector approach, Equation15207 can be written in
reduced form as follows:
(15
208)
where:
The 2n eigenvalues of Equation15208 are calculated using the QR algorithm (Press et al.([254])). The
inverse iteration method (Wilkinson and Reinsch([357])) is used to calculate the complex modal
subspace eigenvectors. The full complex eigenvectors, {}, of original system is recovered using the
following equation:
(15
209)
15.16.8.Shifting
Various shifting strategies are used by most of the extraction methods in an effort to improve the
accuracy, robustness, and efficiency of the algorithms. The logic on how those shift values are chosen is
discussed in this section.
In some cases it is desirable to shift the values of eigenvalues either up or down. These fall in two
categories:
1. Shifting down, so that the solution of problems with rigid body modes does not require working
with a singular matrix.
2. Shifting up, so that the bottom range of eigenvalues will not be computed, because they had
effectively been converted to negative eigenvalues. This will, in general, result in better accuracy
for the higher modes. The shift introduced is:
(15
210)
where:
= desired eigenvalue
0 = eigenvalue shift
i = eigenvalue that is extracted
0 , the eigenvalue shift is computed as:
(15
211)
When using the Block Lanczos or PCG Lanczos method, if no user input is given for SHIFT (BUCOPT
command) or FREQB (MODOPT command), the following logic is used:
(15
212)
where M ii and K ii are the diagonals of the [M] and [K] matrices, respectfully. The summation is taken
over all terms where K ii 0 and where
< 10e4. The number of such terms is n.
When using the PCG Lanczos method, if a Lev_Diff value of 1, 2, 3, or 4 is chosen (either automatically
or by the user, see PCGOPT), then -0 from Equation15212 is used when rigid body modes are
detected in order to avoid working with indefinite matrices with the PCG iterative solver. When using
Lev_Diff = 5, 0 is used as with the Block Lanczos method.
Equation15210 is combined with Equation15184 to give:
(15
213)
Rearranging,
(15
214)
or
(15
215)
where:
[K]' = [K] - 0 [M]
It may be seen that if [K] is singular, as in the case of rigid body motion, [K]' will not be singular if [M]
is not totally zero (which is normally true) and if 0 is input as a non-zero number.
Once i is computed, is computed from Equation15210 and reported.
15.16.9.Repeated Eigenvalues
Repeated roots or eigenvalues are possible to compute. This occurs, for example, for a thin,
axisymmetric pole. Two independent sets of orthogonal motions are possible.
In these cases, the eigenvectors are not unique, as there are an infinite number of correct solutions.
However, in the special case of two or more identical but disconnected structures run as one analysis,
eigenvectors may include components from more than one structure. To reduce confusion in such cases,
it is recommended to run a separate analysis for each structure.
15.16.10.Complex Eigensolutions
For problems involving spinning structures with gyroscopic effects, and/or damped structural
eigenfrequencies, the eigensolutions obtained with the Damped Method and QR Damped Method are
complex. The eigenvalues
are given by:

(15
216)
where:
= complex eigenvalue
= real part of the eigenvalue
i = imaginary part of the eigenvalue (damped circular frequency)

j=
The dynamic response of the system is given by:

(15
217)
where:
t = time
The ith eigenvalue is stable if i is negative and unstable if i is positive.
Modal damping ratio
The modal damping ratio is given by:
(15
218)
where:
i = modal damping ratio of the ith eigenvalue
It is the ratio of the actual damping to the critical damping.
Logarithmic decrement
The logarithmic decrement represents the logarithm of the ratio of two consecutive peaks in the dynamic
response (Equation15217). It can be expressed as:
(15
219)
where:
i = logarithmic decrement of the ith eigenvalue
T i = damped period of the ith eigenvalue defined by:
(15
220)
5.4.Using Special Solution Controls for Certain Types of Structural

Analyses
When you are performing certain types of structural analyses, you can take advantage of these special
solution tools:
Abridged Solution menus, which are available for static, transient (all solution methods), modal,
and buckling analyses. See Using Abridged Solution Menus.
The Solution Controls dialog box, which is available for static and transient (full solution method
only) analyses. See Using the Solution Controls Dialog Box.
5.4.1.Using Abridged Solution Menus

If you are using the GUI to perform a structural static, transient, modal, or buckling analysis, you have
the choice of using abridged or unabridged Solution menus:
Unabridged Solution menus list all solution options, regardless of whether it is recommended, or
even possible, for you to use them in the current analysis. (If it is not possible for you to use an
option in the current analysis, the option is listed but is grayed out.)
Abridged Solution menus are simpler. They list only those options that apply to the type of
analysis that you are performing. For example, if you are performing a static analysis, the Modal
Cyclic Sym option does not appear on the abridged Solution menu. Only those options that are
valid and/or recommended for the current analysis type appear.
If you are performing a structural analysis, the abridged Solution menu appears by default when you
enter the solution processor (Main Menu> Solution).
If your analysis is either static or full transient, you can use the options on the menu to complete the
solution phase of your analysis. However, if you select a different analysis type, the default abridged
Solution menu that you see above will be replaced by a different Solution menu. The new menu will
be appropriate for the analysis type you select.
All variants of the abridged Solution menu contain an Unabridged Menu option. This option is always
available for you to select in case you prefer using the unabridged menu.
If you do one analysis and then choose to do a new analysis within the same ANSYS session, ANSYS will
(by default) present you with the same type of Solution menu that you used for the first analysis. For
example, if you choose to use the unabridged Solution menu to perform a static analysis and then
select a new buckling analysis, ANSYS presents you with the unabridged Solution menu that is
appropriate for buckling analyses. However, you can toggle between the unabridged and abridged
Solution menus at any time during the solution phase of the analysis by selecting the appropriate menu
option (Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu or Main Menu> Solution> Abridged Menu).
5.4.2.Using the Solution Controls Dialog Box

If you are performing a structural static or full transient analysis, you can use a streamlined solution
interface (called the Solution Controls dialog box) for setting many of your analysis options. The Solution
Controls dialog box consists of five tabbed pages, each of which contains a set of related solution
controls. The dialog box is useful for specifying the settings for each load step of a multiple load step
analysis.
As long as you are performing a structural static or full transient analysis, your Solution menu will
contain the Sol'n Control option. When you click the Sol'n Control menu item, the Solution Controls
dialog box appears. This dialog box provides you with a single interface for setting analysis and load
step options. See Figure 5.1 for an illustration.

Figure5.1Solution Controls Dialog Box
The Basic tab, which is shown above, is active when you access the dialog box. The complete list of
tabs, in order from left to right, is as follows:
Basic
Transient
Sol'n Options
Nonlinear
Advanced NL
Each set of controls is logically grouped on a tab; the most basic controls appear on the first tab, with
each subsequent tab providing more advanced controls. The Transient tab contains transient analysis
controls; it is available only if you choose a transient analysis and remains grayed out when you choose
a static analysis.
Each of the controls on the Solution Controls dialog box corresponds to an ANSYS command. The table
below illustrates the relationships between the tabs and the command functionality that you can access
from each.
Table5.2Relationships Between Tabs of the Solution Controls Dialog Box and Commands
Solution Controls
Dialog Box Tab
Basic
What Does This Tab Let You Do?
What Commands Are

Related to This Tab?
Specify the type of analysis that you want to ANTYPE, NLGEOM, TIME,
AUTOTS, NSUBST,
perform.
DELTIM, OUTRES
Control various time settings.

Specify the solution data that you want
ANSYS to write to the database.
Transient
Specify transient options, such as transient

effects and ramped vs. stepped loading.
Specify damping options.
Choose time integration method.
Define integration parameters.
TIMINT, KBC, ALPHAD,

BETAD, TRNOPT, TINTP
Sol'n Options
Specify the type of equation solver that you

want to use.
Specify parameters for performing a
multiframe restart.
Specify configuration details for distributed
solvers
EQSLV, RESCONTROL,
Nonlinear
Control nonlinear options, such as line search LNSRCH, PRED, NEQIT,

RATE, CUTCONTROL,
and solution predictor.
CNVTOL
Specify the maximum number of iterations
that are allowed per substep.
Indicate whether you want to include creep
calculation in the analysis.
Control bisections.
Set convergence criteria.
Advanced NL
NCNV, ARCLEN, ARCTRM

Specify analysis termination criteria.
Control activation and termination of the arclength method.
Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not need to progress through the
remaining tabs unless you want to change some of the advanced controls. As soon as you click OK on
any tab of the dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS database and the dialog box closes.
Note: Whether you make changes to only one or to multiple tabbed pages, your changes
are applied to the ANSYS database only when you click OK to close the dialog box.
5.4.3.Accessing More Information

Discussions of the Solution Controls dialog box are included throughout the ANSYS manual set as
applicable.
For additional information, refer to the following:
Online help for the Solution Controls dialog box
"Structural Static Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide
"Transient Dynamic Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide
"Nonlinear Structural Analysis" in the Structural Analysis Guide
Mechanical APDL Contact Technology Guide
Table of Contents
1. Contact Overview
1.1. General Contact Classification
1.2. Contact Capabilities
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
1.2.4.
1.2.5.
Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements

Node-to-Surface Contact Elements
Line-to-Surface Contact
Node-to-Node Contact Elements
2. GUI Aids for Contact Analyses

2.1. The Contact Manager
2.2. The Contact Wizard
2.3. Managing Contact Pairs
3. Surface-to-Surface Contact
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
Using Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements

Steps in a Contact Analysis
Creating the Model Geometry and Mesh
Identifying Contact Pairs
Designating Contact and Target Surfaces
3.5.1. Asymmetric Contact vs. Symmetric Contact
3.6. Defining the Target Surface

3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
Pilot Nodes
Primitives
Element Types and Real Constants
Using Direct Generation to Create Rigid Target Elements
Using ANSYS Meshing Tools to Create Rigid Target Elements
3.7. Defining the Deformable Contact Surface

3.7.1. Element Type
3.7.2. Real Constants and Material Properties
3.7.3. Generating Contact Elements
3.8. Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces
3.9. Set the Real Constants and Element KEYOPTS
3.9.1. Real Constants
3.9.2. Element KEYOPTS
3.9.3. Selecting a Contact Algorithm (KEYOPT(2))
3.9.4. Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable Penetration
3.9.5. Choosing a Friction Model
3.9.6. Selecting Location of Contact Detection
3.9.7. Adjusting Initial Contact Conditions
3.9.8. Physically Moving Contact Nodes Towards the Target Surface
3.9.9. Determining Contact Status and the Pinball Region
3.9.10. Avoiding Spurious Contact in Self Contact Problems
3.9.11. Selecting Surface Interaction Models
3.9.12. Modeling Contact with Superelements
3.9.13. Accounting for Thickness Effect
3.9.14. Using Time Step Control and Impact Constraints
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctectoc.html[28/04/2013 09:11:55 p.m.]
3.9.15. Using the Birth and Death Option

3.10. Controlling the Motion of the Rigid Target Surface
3.11. Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions to the Deformable Elements
3.12. Applying Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads
3.12.1.
3.12.2.
3.12.3.
3.12.4.
3.12.5.
3.12.6.
Applying Fluid Penetration Pressure

Specifying Fluid Penetration Starting Points
Specifying a Pressure-Penetration Criterion
Specifying a Fluid Penetration Acting Time
Redefining or Modifying the Pressure-Penetration Loads
Postprocessing Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads
3.13. Defining Solution and Load Step Options

3.14. Solving the Problem
3.15.1. Points to Remember
4. Node-to-Surface Contact
4.1. The Node-to-Surface Contact Element
4.2. Performing a Node-to-Surface Contact Analysis
4.2.1. CONTA175 KEYOPTS
4.2.2. CONTA175 Real Constants
4.3. Using CONTA175 for Multiphysics Contact
5. 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact
5.1. The 3-D Line-to-Line Contact Element
5.2. Modeling Beam-to-Beam Contact
5.3. Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis
5.3.1. KEYOPTs and Real Constants
6. Line-to-Surface Contact
6.1. The 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Element
6.2. Performing a 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Analysis
6.2.1. KEYOPTs and Real Constants
7. Multiphysics Contact
7.1. Modeling Thermal Contact
7.1.1.
7.1.2.
7.1.3.
7.1.4.
7.1.5.
7.1.6.
7.1.7.
7.1.8.
Thermal Contact Behavior vs. Contact Status

Free Thermal Surface
Temperature on Target Surface
Modeling Conduction
Modeling Convection
Modeling Radiation
Modeling Heat Generation Due to Friction
Modeling External Heat Flux
7.2. Modeling Electric Contact

7.2.1. Modeling Surface Interaction
7.2.2. Modeling Heat Generation Due to Electric Current

7.3. Modeling Magnetic Contact
7.3.1. Using MCC
7.3.2. Modeling Perfect Magnetic Contact
8. Node-to-Node Contact
8.1. Node-to-Node Contact Elements
8.2. Performing a Node-to-Node Contact Analysis
8.2.1.
8.2.2.
8.2.3.
8.2.4.
8.2.5.
8.2.6.
8.2.7.
8.2.8.
8.2.9.
Creating Geometry and Meshing the Model

Generating Contact Elements
Defining the Contact Normal
Defining the Initial Interference or Gap
Selecting the Contact Algorithm
Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions
Defining the Solution Options
Solving the Problem
9. Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies

9.1. Modeling Solid-Solid and Shell-Shell Assemblies
9.2. Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly
9.3. Surface-Based Constraints
9.3.1.
9.3.2.
9.3.3.
9.3.4.
9.3.5.
9.3.6.
9.3.7.
Defining Surface-Based Constraints

Defining Influence Range (PINB)
Degrees of Freedom of Surface-Based Constraints
Specifying a Local Coordinate System
Additional Guidelines for a Force-Distributed Constraint
Additional Guidelines for A Rigid Surface Constraint
Modeling a Beam-Solid Assembly
9.4. Modeling Rigid Bodies

9.4.1. Modeling Contact between Rigid Bodies
9.5. Overconstraint Detection and Elimination
9.6. Restrictions and Recommendations for Internal MPC
10. Dynamic Contact and Impact Modeling
10.1. Energy and Momentum Conserving Contact
10.1.1.
10.1.2.
10.1.3.
10.1.4.
Energy Conservation
Penetration and Relative Velocity
11. Spot Welds

11.1. Defining a Spot Weld Set
11.1.1. Creating a Basic Spot Weld Set with SWGEN
11.1.2. The Components of a Spot Weld
11.1.3. Adding Surfaces to a Basic Set
11.2. Listing and Deleting Spot Welds
12. Debonding
12.1. Including Debonding in a Contact Analysis
12.1.1.
12.1.2.
12.1.3.
12.1.4.
Cohesive Zone Materials Used for Debonding

Debonding Modes
Other Considerations for Debonding
Postprocessing
A. Example 2-D Contact Analysis with Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loading

A.2. Input File
Chapter 1: Contact Overview
Chapter1:Contact Overview
Contact problems are highly nonlinear and require significant computer resources to solve. It is
important that you understand the physics of the problem and take the time to set up your model to run
as efficiently as possible.
Contact problems present two significant difficulties. First, you generally do not know the regions of
contact until you've run the problem. Depending on the loads, material, boundary conditions, and other
factors, surfaces can come into and go out of contact with each other in a largely unpredictable and
abrupt manner. Second, most contact problems need to account for friction. There are several friction
laws and models to choose from, and all are nonlinear. Frictional response can be chaotic, making
solution convergence difficult.
In addition to these two difficulties, many contact problems must also address multi-field effects, such as
the conductance of heat, electrical currents, and magnetic flux in the areas of contact.
If you do not need to account for friction in your model, and the interaction between the bodies is
always bonded, you may be able to use the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) feature (available for
certain contact elements) to model various types of contact assemblies and surface-based constraints
(see Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies for more information). Another alternative is to use
constraint equations or coupled degrees of freedom instead of contact to model these situations (see
"Coupling and Constraint Equations" in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information). The
external constraint equations or coupling equations are only suitable for small strain applications.
In addition to the implicit contact capabilities discussed in this guide, ANSYS also offers explicit contact
capabilities with the ANSYS LS-DYNA explicit dynamics product. Explicit capabilities are ideally suited for
short-duration contact-impact problems. For more information on the ANSYS LS-DYNA product and its
contact capabilities, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_over.html[28/04/2013 09:12:00 p.m.]
Chapter 9: Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies
Chapter9:Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies

You can use the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) approach (KEYOPT(2) = 2), in conjunction with
certain bonded and no separation contact definitions (KEYOPT(12) = 4, 5, or 6), to define various
contact assemblies and kinematic constraints. This capability is available for contact elements
CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177. By this
method, the program builds MPC equations internally based on the contact kinematics. You can use this
method to model the following contact assemblies and surface-based constraints:
Solid-solid assembly - both contact and target surfaces paste onto solid element faces
Shell-shell assembly - both contact and target surfaces paste onto shell element faces
Shell-solid assembly - the contact surface pastes onto shell element faces and the target surfaces
paste onto solid element faces
Rigid surface constraint - the contact nodes are constrained to the rigid body motion defined by
the pilot node (similar to the CERIG command)
Force-distributed constraint - the forces or displacements applied to the pilot node are distributed
to contact nodes, in an average sense, through shape functions (similar to the RBE3 command)
Beam-solid assembly - one beam end-node is the pilot node which connects to the solid or shell
surface (use the rigid surface constraint or force-distributed constraint type of MPC)
The internal MPC approach can overcome the drawbacks of the traditional contact algorithms and other
multipoint constraint tools available in ANSYS. For example:
Degrees of freedom of the contact surface nodes are eliminated, reducing the wave front size of
the system equation solver.
No contact stiffness is required as input. For a small deformation problem, this represents true
linear contact behavior; no iterations are needed to solve the system of equations. For large
deformation problems, the MPC equations are updated during each iteration, overcoming the small
strain restriction in conventional constraint equations.
Both translational and rotational degrees of freedom can be constrained.
Generation of internal MPC is simple because it uses contact pair definitions.
Shape functions are taken into account automatically; no weight factor is needed for a forcedistributed multipoint constraint (which is similar to the RBE3 command) if you use higher order
elements or axisymmetric elements. In addition to forces, displacements can be applied on the
pilot node for this type of MPC.
The following MPC topics are available:
Modeling Solid-Solid and Shell-Shell Assemblies
Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly
Surface-Based Constraints
Modeling Rigid Bodies
Overconstraint Detection and Elimination
Restrictions and Recommendations for Internal MPC
Before using the internal MPC feature, be sure to review the last topic listed above on restrictions and
recommendations.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_mpcassm.html[28/04/2013 09:12:07 p.m.]
Chapter 12: Debonding
Chapter12:Debonding
The debonding capability in ANSYS refers specifically to separation of bonded contact. It can be used to
simulate interface delamination where the interface is modeled using bonded contact with the
augmented Lagrangian method or the pure penalty method. A cohesive zone material must be used to
define the traction separation behavior of the interface. The following contact elements support
debonding: CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177.
An alternative method of modeling interface delamination is to use interface elements with a cohesive
zone material (see "Interface Delamination and Failure Simulation"). However, debonding with contact
elements has the following advantages over delamination with the interface elements:
Parts forming the interface can be meshed independently.
Existing models with contact definitions can be easily modified for debonding.
Standard contact and debonding can be simulated with the same contact definitions.
Debonding can be used for various applications; for example, delamination, spot weld failure, and
stitch failure.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctec_debonding.html[28/04/2013 09:12:50 p.m.]
12.1.Including Debonding in a Contact Analysis

Debonding can be defined in any model that includes surface-to-surface (CONTA171 through
CONTA174), node-to-surface (CONTA175), line-to-line (CONTA176), or line-to-surface (CONTA177)
contact. For a detailed discussion on how to set up a contact analysis, see Surface-to-Surface Contact.
To activate debonding for a contact pair, the following contact options must be defined for the contact
element:
Augmented Lagrangian method or pure penalty method (KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1)
Bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6)
In addition, you must specify a cohesive zone material model with bilinear behavior for the contact
elements. Two ways to specify the material data are available:
Bilinear material behavior with tractions and separation distances (TB,CZM command with TBOPT =
CBDD)
Bilinear material behavior with tractions and critical fracture energies (TB,CZM command with
TBOPT = CBDE)
This material model is discussed in more detail in the following section.
Once you have defined the required input parameters, you can solve the analysis the same as you would
for any nonlinear analysis (see Solving the Problem). After debonding is completed, the surface
interaction is governed by standard contact constraints for normal and tangential directions. Frictional
contact is used if friction is specified for contact elements.
12.1.1.Cohesive Zone Materials Used for Debonding

A cohesive zone material model is needed to model debonding in a contact analysis. This material is
defined using the data table method (TB and TBDATA commands). Temperature dependent data is also
allowed (TBTEMP command). On the TB command, use Lab = CZM to denote a cohesive zone
material, and use TBOPT = CBDD or CBDE to indicate the specific material data you will provide. The two
data definitions are described below. For more information on this material, see Cohesive Zone Material
Model in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications .
12.1.1.1.Bilinear Material Behavior with Tractions and Separation Distances

(TBOPT = CBDD)
This is a linear elastic material behavior with linear softening characterized by maximum traction and
maximum separation. To define this material, use the TB,CZM command with TBOPT = CBDD. Specify
the material constants as data items C1 through C6 on the TBDATA command:
Constant
C1
Symbol
max
C2
C3
max
C4
C5
C6
Meaning
contact gap at the completion of debonding
tangential slip at the completion of debonding
stress
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctec_incdebcont.html[28/04/2013 09:13:25 p.m.]
Sample command input for this material is shown below.

TB,CZM,1,2,,CBDD
TBDATA,1,max,
,max,
,,
12.1.1.2.Bilinear Material Behavior with Tractions and Critical Fracture

Energies (TBOPT = CBDE)
This is a linear elastic material behavior with linear softening characterized by maximum traction and
critical energy release rate. To define this material, use the TB,CZM command with TBOPT = CBDE.
Specify the material constants as data items C1, through C6 on the TBDATA command:
Constant
Symbol
Meaning
C1
max
C2
Gcn
critical fracture energy for normal separation
C3
max
C4
Gct
critical fracture energy for tangential slip
C5
C6

stress
Sample command input for this material is shown below.

TB,CZM,1,2,,CBDE
TBDATA,1,max,Gcn,max,Gct,,
12.1.2.Debonding Modes
Debonding involves separation of surfaces forming an interface. The direction of separation determines
the debonding mode. ANSYS detects the debonding mode based on material data that you input for
normal and tangential directions:
Mode I debonding involves separation normal to the interface. It is activated by inputting data
items C1, C2, and C5 on the TBDATA command.
Mode II debonding involves slip tangent to the interface. It is activated by inputting data items
C3 , C4 , and C5 on the TBDATA command.
Mixed mode debonding involves both normal separation and tangential slip. It is activated by
inputting data items C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5, and C6 on the TBDATA command.
12.1.3.Other Considerations for Debonding

Artificial Damping
Debonding is generally accompanied by convergence difficulties in the Newton-Raphson solution.
Artificial damping can be used to stabilize the numerical solution. It is activated by specifying the
damping coefficient (input on TBDATA command as C5 using TB,CZM). The damping coefficient has
units of time and should be smaller than the minimum time step size so that the maximum traction and
maximum separation (or critical fracture energy) values are not exceeded in debonding calculations.
Tangential Slip under Normal Compression
ANSYS provides an option to control tangential slip under compressive normal contact stress for mixed
mode debonding. By default, no tangential slip is allowed for this case, but it can be activated by setting
the flag to 1 (input on TBDATA command as C6 using TB,CZM).
Pinball Radius and Mesh Density

When using a fine mesh for underlying elements of bonded surfaces, you may need to increase pinball
radius (PINB) for contact elements so that it is greater than the maximum separation value in the
normal direction (contact gap when normal contact stress goes to zero). The default value for PINB is
based on the depth of the underlying element. If PINB is smaller than the maximum separation value,
debonding calculations will be bypassed when the contact gap exceeds PINB.
12.1.4.Postprocessing
All applicable output quantities for contact elements are also available for debonding: normal contact
stress (PRES), tangential contact stress (TAUR, TAUS, SFRIC), contact gap (GAP), tangential slip (TASR,
TASS, SLIDE), etc. In addition, the following debonding specific output quantities are available as NMISC
data: debonding time history (DTSTART), debonding parameter (DPARAM), and critical fracture energy
(DENERI, DENERII).
For more information on how to review results in a contact analysis, see Reviewing the Results in
Surface-to-Surface Contact.
Chapter 11: Coupling and Constraint Equations
Chapter11:Coupling and Constraint Equations

When generating your model, you typically define the relationships among different degrees of freedom
by using elements to connect the nodes. However, you sometimes need to be able to model distinctive
features (rigid regions, pinned structural joints, sliding symmetry boundaries, periodic conditions, and
other special internodal connections) which cannot be adequately described with elements. You can
establish such special associations among nodal degrees of freedom by using coupling and constraint
equations (CEs). Using these techniques enables you to link degrees of freedom in ways that elements
cannot.
The following topics concerning coupling and CEs are available:
What Is Coupling?
How to Create Coupled Degree of Freedom Sets
Additional Considerations for Coupling
What Are Constraint Equations?
How to Create Constraint Equations
Additional Considerations for Constraint Equations
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mod/Hlp_G_MOD12.html[28/04/2013 09:13:40 p.m.]
11.1. What Is Coupling?
11.1.What Is Coupling?
When you need to force two or more degrees of freedom (DOFs) to take on the same (but unknown)
value, you can couple these DOFs together. A set of coupled DOFs contains a prime DOF, and one or
more other DOFs. Coupling will cause only the prime DOF to be retained in your analysis' matrix
equations, and will cause all the other DOFs in a coupled set to be eliminated. The value calculated for
the prime DOF will then be assigned to all the other DOFs in a coupled set.
Typical applications for coupled DOFs include: 1) maintaining symmetry on partial models, 2) forming
pin, hinge, universal, and slider joints between two coincident nodes, and 3) forcing portions of your
model to behave as rigid bodies (see this chapter's discussion of constraint equations for more general
rigid region capability).
11.2.How to Create Coupled Degree of Freedom Sets

11.2.1.Creating and Modifying Coupled Sets at Specified Nodes
To define (or modify) a set of coupled degrees of freedom, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CP
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs
After creating a coupled set of nodes, you can include more nodes in that set by simply performing an
additional coupling operation (be sure to use the same set reference number). You can also use
selecting logic to couple "ALL" of the selected nodes. Nodes can be deleted from a coupled set by
inputting them as negative node numbers on the CP command. To modify a coupled DOF set (that is,
add or delete nodes, or change the DOF label), use the CPNGEN command. (You cannot access the
CPNGEN command directly in the GUI.)
11.2.2.Coupling Coincident Nodes

The CPINTF command couples coincident nodes in a model by generating one coupled set for each
specified DOF label at every pair of coincident nodes. This operation is useful for "buttoning" together
several pairs of nodes (such as at a seam).
Command(s):
GUI:
CPINTF
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Coincident Nodes
Instead of coupling coincident nodes, you can use one of these alternative methods to force the nodes
to behave in the same way:
If all DOFs are to be coupled for coincident nodes, it is usually more efficient to simply merge
those nodes together by using the NUMMRG command (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Numbering Ctrls> Merge Items).
You can connect coincident pairs of nodes by creating 2-node elements between them by using the
EINTF command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto
Numbered> At Coincid Nd).
To tie together two regions having dissimilar mesh patterns, use the CEINTF command (Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Adjacent Regions). This operation generates
constraint equations that connect the selected nodes of one region to the selected elements of the
other region.
11.2.3.Generating More Coupled Sets

Once one or more coupled sets exist, additional sets can be generated using these methods:
To generate new coupled sets using the same node numbers, but different DOF labels, as an
existing "pattern" set, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CPLGEN
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Gen w/Same Nodes
To generate new coupled sets using different (uniformly incremented) node numbers, but the
same DOF labels as an existing set, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CPSGEN
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Gen w/Same DOF
11.2.4.Listing and Deleting Coupled Sets

You can perform two other operations to help you manage your coupled sets:
To list coupled DOF sets, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CPLIST
Utility Menu> List> Other> Coupled Sets> All CP nodes selected
Utility Menu> List> Other> Coupled Sets> Any CP node selected
To delete coupled DOF sets, use one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
CPDELE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Del Coupled Sets
This operation deletes entire sets; you must use the CPNGEN command or the CP command (or its
GUI path) to delete specific nodes from coupled sets.
11.3. Additional Considerations for Coupling
11.3.Additional Considerations for Coupling

Coupling operates in the nodal coordinate system of each node coupled. You should usually keep your
nodal coordinate systems consistent.
Degrees of freedom are coupled within a set but are not coupled between sets. You must not allow a
degree of freedom to appear in more than one coupled set.
"Grounded" degrees of freedom (that is, DOFs with values specified by D or other constraint commands)
must not be included in the coupled set.
In a reduced analysis, if master degrees of freedom are to be chosen from coupled DOF sets, only prime
DOFs may be designated as master degrees of freedom. (You must not designate any eliminated DOF in
a coupled set as a master degree of freedom.)
In a structural analysis, coupling DOFs to create a rigid region can sometimes cause apparent violations
of equilibrium. A set of coupled nodes which are not coincident or are not in line with the coupled
displacement direction may produce an applied moment that will not appear in the reaction forces.
11.4. What Are Constraint Equations?
11.4.What Are Constraint Equations?

Linear constraint equations provide a more general means of relating degree of freedom values than is
possible with simple coupling. Constraint equations must have the form:
where U(I) is the degree of freedom of term (I), and N is the number of terms in the equation.
11.5.How to Create Constraint Equations

You can use several different methods to create constraint equations. These include the CE command
(the direct method) and other commands such as CEINTF, CERIG, and RBE3. These methods of
generating constraint equations are discussed in the following sections.
In addition to the methods discussed here, you can use the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) feature
of certain contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176,
and CONTA177) to model contact assemblies and kinematic constraints. By this method, the program
builds MPC equations internally based on the contact kinematics. See "Multipoint Constraints and
Assemblies" in the Contact Technology Guide for more information on how to use this feature.
11.5.1.The Direct Method

You can create constraint equations directly, using one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Constraint Eqn
The following example illustrates a typical application of a constraint equation, in which moment transfer
capability is created for a connection between a beam element and plane elements:
Figure11.1Establishing Relationships Between Rotational and Translational DOF
In this example, node 2 acts as a hinge if no constraint equations are used. To transfer moment
between the beam and the plane-stress elements, you can use the following equation:
ROTZ2 = (UY3 - UY1 )/10
This equation would be rewritten in the required format and entered into the program as:
0 = UY3 - UY1 - 10*ROTZ2
CE,1,0,3,UY,1,1,UY,-1,2,ROTZ,-10
The first unique degree of freedom in the equation is eliminated in terms of all other degrees of freedom
in the equation. A unique degree of freedom is one which is not specified in any other constraint
equation, coupled node set, specified displacement set, or master degree of freedom set. You should
make the first term of the equation be the degree of freedom to be eliminated. Although you may, in
theory, specify the same degree of freedom in more than one equation, you must be careful to avoid
over-specification. You must also take care to ensure that each node and degree of freedom exists in
the model. (Remember that for a degree of freedom to be present at a node, that node must be
connected to an element which supplies the necessary degree of freedom.)
11.5.1.1.Periodic Conditions
Often in field analysis, it is desirable to take advantage of antisymmetric or periodic field variation to
limit the model size. For static magnetic analyses, this can be accomplished by using ANSYS cyclic
symmetry capabilities. See Solving a Magnetic Cyclic Symmetry Analysis for more information. For
harmonic or transient magnetic analyses, use the constraint equation method explained here.
A periodic condition is a boundary for which neither the flux-parallel nor flux-normal conditions hold, but
rather the potential at one point is of equal magnitude but of opposite sign to that of a point in another
location. This condition arises in the analysis of symmetry sectors of motors, for example, where the
potentials one pole pitch apart are equal but opposite in sign. In Figure 11.2, suppose node 129 in the
outlined symmetry sector is to be constrained as described above with node 363 on the opposite pole
pitch.
Figure11.2Example of Specifying a Periodic Condition
The constraint equation would read:

A129 = - A363
0 = A129 + A363
The CE command used to input this constraint equation would appear as follows:
CE,1,0,129,MAG,1,363,MAG,1
To automatically apply groups of periodic boundary conditions (CP and CE commands) for 2-D magnetic
analyses, use the PERBC2D command macro (refer to "Electric and Magnetic Macros" in the LowFrequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for a discussion of this modeling aide):
Command(s):
GUI:
PERBC2D
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Magnetic>
Boundary> Flux Normal> Periodic BCs
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Magnetic> Boundary> Flux
Normal> Periodic BCs
Note: Periodic boundary conditions can also be represented in a structural analysis (for
example, in a turbine blade model) using CP commands on nodes rotated into the
cylindrical coordinate system.
11.5.2.Modifying Constraint Equations

To change the constant term of a constraint equation in either PREP7 or SOLUTION, use one of these
methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CECMOD
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Modify ConstrEqn
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Other> Modify
ConstrEqn
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Modify ConstrEqn
If you need to change any of the other terms of a constraint equation, you must use the CE command
(or the corresponding GUI path) in PREP7, before you start your solution.
11.5.3.Direct vs. Automatic Constraint Equation Generation

An example that appeared earlier in this chapter illustrated how you can use the CE command to create
constraint equations directly, one at a time.
Three other operations, described below, automatically generate multiple constraint equations for you.
11.5.3.1.Creating a Rigid Region

The CERIG command defines a "rigid region" by writing constraint equations to define rigid lines linking
a designated retained (or "master") node to a number of removed (or "slave") nodes. (The term "master
node" as applied to this operation is not the same as a master degree of freedom for a reduced
analysis.)
Command(s):
GUI:
CERIG
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Rigid Region
By setting Ldof to ALL on the CERIG command (default), this operation will generate three equations
for each pair of constrained nodes in 2-D space. These equations define the three rigid body motions in
global Cartesian space (UX, UY, ROTZ). In order to create a rigid region on a 2-D model, you must make
sure that the X-Y plane is the rigid plane and that UX, UY, and ROTZ degrees of freedom are available
at each constrained node. This operation will similarly generate six equations for each pair of
constrained nodes in 3-D space. All six degrees of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ) must
be available at each constrained node.
Entering other labels in the Ldof field will create different effects. If this field is set to UXYZ, the
program will write two constraint equations in 2-D (X, Y) space and three constraint equations in 3-D (X,
Y, Z) space. These equations will be written in terms of the slave nodes' translational degrees of
freedom, and in terms of the master node's translational and rotational degrees of freedom. Similarly,
the RXYZ label allows you to generate a partial set of equations that omit the slave nodes' translational
degrees of freedom. The other available Ldof labels will generate other types of constraint equations.
In general, your slave nodes need have only the degrees of freedom called for by Ldof , but your master
node must have all applicable translational and rotational degrees of freedom (that is, UX, UY, ROTZ for
2-D; UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ for 3-D). For models that are made up of elements having no
rotational degree of freedom, you might consider adding a dummy beam element to provide rotational
degrees of freedom at the master node.
11.5.3.2.Tying Dissimilarly Meshed Regions Together

You can tie dissimilarly meshed regions together via the CEINTF command, or you can use contact
elements with the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm.
11.5.3.2.1.Using the CEINTF Command
You can generate constraint equations connecting the selected nodes of one region to the selected
elements of another region via the CEINTF command (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Coupling/Ceqn> Adjacent Regions). This operation ties together regions with dissimilar mesh
patterns. At the interface location between two regions, select the nodes from the denser mesh region,
A, and select the elements from the sparser mesh region, B. The degrees of freedom of region A nodes
are interpolated with the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes on the region B elements,
using the shape functions of the region B elements. Constraint equations are then written that relate
region A and B nodes at the interface. ANSYS allows two tolerances on the location of these nodes.
Nodes which are outside the element by more than the first tolerance are not accepted as being on the
interface. Nodes that are closer than the second tolerance to an element surface are moved to that
surface.
Certain limitations affect the CEINTF command: stress or thermal flux might not be continuous across
the interface. Nodes in the interface region must not have specified displacements.
11.5.3.2.2.Using Contact Elements

To learn more about tying dissimilarly meshed regions together via contact elements and the internal
MPC algorithm, see "Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies".
11.5.3.3.Generating Sets of Constraint Equations from Existing Sets

You can issue the CESGEN command to generate sets of constraint equations from existing sets. All
node numbers within the existing sets are then incremented to generate the additional sets. The labels
and coefficients of the additional sets remain the same as those of the original sets.
Command(s):
GUI:
CESGEN
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn > Gen w/same DOF
11.5.4.Listing and Deleting Constraint Equations

You can list and delete your constraint equations.
To list constraint equations, use one of these methods:
Command(s):
GUI:
CELIST
Utility Menu> List> Other> Constraint Eqns> All CE nodes selected
Utility Menu> List> Other> Constraint Eqns> Any CE node selected
To delete constraint equations, use one of these methods:

Command(s):
GUI:
CEDELE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Del Constr Eqn
11.5.5.Program Modification of Constraint Equations

During the solution, the user-defined constraint equations (CEs) may be modified as follows:
CEs that are applied to DOFs which are not active (for example, a CE relating rotational DOFs on
nodes with only translational DOFs) are deleted.
CEs for which all DOFs are constrained (D command) are deleted.
CEs that have DOFs in another equation have their terms reordered so that they all have a
common retained DOF.
CEs which are chained together are merged into a single CE.
CEs which are internal to the solution process are generated by MPC contact and by cyclic
symmetry. These CEs cannot be listed or deleted.
11.5.6.Troubleshooting Problems with Constraint Equations

Overconstrained problems for which there is no unique DOF that can be solved typically generate an
error message similar to one of the following:
Constraint equation set is defective.
Constraint equation is circular.
Constraint equation has no unique degree of freedom.
Contact overconstraint may occur.
In addition to CE-specific error messages, you may also notice "small (or zero) pivot" messages from the
solver. Such overconstraints may be caused by one of the following conditions:
Duplicate CEs are specified for the same DOFs.
Work-around: Delete any duplicate specifications, or issue an NUMMRG,CE command to

compress them out.
DOFs in a CE are also present in a coupled (CP) set.
Work-around: Delete the CP set and include the DOF in the CE to obtain the desired response.
CEs are chained together in such a way that they form a "circular" set.
Typically, this condition occurs when you define CEINTF and/or MPC contact on adjacent surfaces.
Work-around: Perform the CEINTF operation, or specify the contact region encompassing both
surfaces simultaneously rather than individually.
11.6. Additional Considerations for Constraint Equations
11.6.Additional Considerations for Constraint Equations

All constraint equations are based on small rotation theory. Therefore, their use in large-rotation
analyses [NLGEOM] should be restricted to cases where the directions of the DOF included in
constraint equations do not change significantly.
The presence of constraint equations can produce unexpected reaction and nodal force results. Please
see The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for a related discussion.

Results from a contact analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses, strains, reaction forces, and
the contact information (e.g., contact pressure, sliding, etc.). You can review these results in POST1, the
general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history postprocessor. For contact-related results, you can
select CONT as a plotting or list item. While in POST1, you can also review the results from within the
Contact Manager (via the Contact Manager icon in the ANSYS Standard Toolbar). See the "Output Data"
section of the element descriptions (the Element Reference) for the available output components.
Remember that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from that
substep should have been written to Jobname.RST (or Jobname.RCN for the initial contact configuration
calculated by CNCHECK,POST). (The load step option command OUTRES controls which substep
results are stored on Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described below.
See Points to Remember in the Structural Analysis Guide .

The steps for reviewing results in POST1 are the same as those for a typical nonlinear analysis (see
Reviewing Results in POST1 in the Structural Analysis Guide ) with the following exceptions:
For step 4, the following shows the various CONT options for the PLNSOL and PLESOL commands. You
can set these options through the Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot>
Nodal Solu or Element Solu menu item. Choose Contact for Item, Comp and you'll see a list of the
options detailed below.
CONT
STAT
PENE
PRES[2]
SFRIC[2]
STOT[2]
SLIDE
GAP
FLUX
CNOS
FPRS
Contact status[1]:
3-closed and sticking
2-closed and sliding
1-open but near contact (near-field)
0-open and not near contact (far-field)
Contact penetration
Contact pressure
Heat flux at contact surface
Fluid penetration pressure (surface-to-surface contact only)
1. For MPC-based contact definitions, the value of STAT can be negative. This indicates that one or
more contact constraints were intentionally removed to prevent over-constraint. STAT = -3 is used
for MPC bonded contact; STAT = -2 is used for MPC no-separation contact. Negative values are
valid for CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177.
2. For the contact force-based model, used for CONTA175 with KEYOPT(3) = 0, CONTA176, and
CONTA177, PRES, SFRIC, and STOT are the contact normal force, contact friction force, and total
contact force, respectively.
For rigid-to-flexible contact or asymmetric flexible-to-flexible contact, the contact element provides the
true pressure and friction stress. However, for symmetric flexible-to-flexible contact, the true pressure
and friction stress is the average of the pressures and friction stresses from both sides of the contact
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_revresu.html[28/04/2013 09:14:50 p.m.]
elements.
Note: The contact results are only reported at the corner nodes of contact elements.
Therefore, for higher order contact elements, mid-side node contact can occur
without pressure being reported. In this case, the elements contact status and
contact pressure reported via ETABLE may give more precise information.
Note that the contact-specific information (CONT) plots as follows. For 2-D contact analyses, the model
will plot in gray and the requested item will be contoured as an area (trapezoid) along the edge of the
model where the contact elements are located. Use the FACT item to scale 2-D contour size. For 3-D
contact analyses, the model will plot in gray and the requested item will be contoured as a 2-D surface
where the contact elements overlay the model.
For tabular listings, you may also list contact-specific information by using the CONT label and its
arguments with the PRNSOL or PRESOL commands or their related menu items.
You should not use the PLESOL or PRESOL command to obtain contact forces for contact elements.
The force values reported by these commands may not be accurate for these elements. Instead, use the
ETABLE command to obtain contact force values.
You can also animate contact results over time. See the ANTIME command for details.
Command(s):
GUI:
ANTIME
If you used CNCHECK,POST to evaluate the initial contact state, you can view the contact results items
for the initial contact configuration as you would for any other load step. To do so, you must explicitly
read the results of the first load step from the results file Jobname.RCN by issuing the FILE and
SET,FIRST commands before postprocessing. Otherwise, the result file may be read improperly.

The steps for reviewing results in POST26 are the same as those for a typical nonlinear analysis See
Reviewing Results in POST26 in the Structural Analysis Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_revresu.html[28/04/2013 09:14:50 p.m.]
Appendix A. Example 2-D Contact Analysis with Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loading
AppendixA.Example 2-D Contact Analysis with Fluid PressurePenetration Loading

Table of Contents
A.2. Input File
This example represents a planar seal compression with applied fluid pressure-penetration loading at the
contact interface. It demonstrates the application of the fluid pressure loads and the propagation of the
fluid penetration path from one starting point into the contact interface.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctec_flpressexamp.html[28/04/2013 09:16:05 p.m.]
A.1.Problem Description
The model represents a half symmetry planar hyperelastic seal. Figure A.1 shows a diagram of the model, and Figure A.2 shows
the meshed half symmetry model.
FigureA.1Diagram of Planar Seal Model
FigureA.2Meshed Planar Seal Model
The seal is compressed by a displacement-controlled load in the first load step. Fluid pressure is applied to all contact elements in
the second load step (see Figure A.3) so that the fluid opens and penetrates into the contact interface that was previously closed
by compression.
The fluid pressure is applied using the SFE command with the load key set to 1 ( LKEY = 1 on SFE). Using SFE with the load key
set to 2 ( LKEY = 2 on SFE), all default starting points are suppressed (STA1 = -1) and two elements are chosen as starting
locations initially exposed to the fluid (STA1 = 1). (See Specifying Fluid Penetration Starting Points for more information on the
STA values.) From this location the fluid penetrates gradually by opening the bottom part of the contact surface, while the top
part of the contact surface completely closes.
FigureA.3Fluid Pressure Loading on Planar Seal
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecflprprodes.html[28/04/2013 09:16:10 p.m.]
At the end of the first load step (compression load step) most of the contact is closed as shown in the above figure. Plots of
contact fluid pressure at an intermediate substep of load step 2 and at the end of load step 2 are shown in Figure A.4 and Figure
A.5.
FigureA.4Intermediate Fluid Pressure Distribution
FigureA.5Final Fluid Pressure Distribution
Three contact elements at the bottom of the seal are used for time history postprocessing, representing each region that
undergoes fluid penetration. Time history results for fluid contact pressure and gap are printed and plotted to show the path of
fluid penetration along the bottom contact elements. The fluid pressure history is shown in Figure A.6.
FigureA.6Time History of Fluid Pressure for Three Contact Elements
A.2. Input File
A.2.Input File
/title,Seal compression with fluid pressure-penetration loading
/com =====================================================================
/com
OBJECTIVE:
/com
The objective of this test is to verify the path of fluid
/com
penetration pressure with rigid-flex contact
/com
and CONTA171 default keyoptions.
/com
/com
DESCRIPTION:
/com
The model represents a planar seal that is compressed. Fluid
/com
pressure is applied to all contact elements so that the fluid
/com
penetrates and opens the contact that used to be closed by
/com
compression.
/com
/com
The fluid pressure is applied after the compression, and one
/com
starting point is chosen to be initially in fluid (STA=1 on SFE).
/com
From this location the fluid penetrates gradually at the bottom
/com
surface.
/com
/com
TEST SPECIFICATIONS:
/com
SOLID ELEMENTS: PLANE182 - PLANE STRESS
/com
TARGET ELEMENT: TARGE169
/com
CONTACT ELEMENT: CONTA171, K(14)=0, K(2)=0, K(4)=0
/com
MATERIAL MODEL: HYPERELASTIC
/com
/com
/com
RESULTS:
/com
At the end of load step 1 there are 3 regions where contact is
/com
closed at the bottom surface. One element from each of these
/com
regions is chosen, and the time history results for fluid
/com
contact pressure and gap are printed and plotted to show the
/com
path of fluid penetration along the bottom contact elements.
/com
Notice that at the time when the contact opens
/com
(gap is not zero), the FPRS is nonzero.
/com =====================================================================
/prep7
et,1,182
! PLANE182 with plane stress option
tb,HYPER,1,1,2,MOON
tbtemp,0
tbdata,,80,20,0,,,
/com
**** Build the model ****
k,1
k,2,0.333,0
k,3,0.867,0.867
k,4,1.1,0.867
k,5,1.1,1
k,6,0.8,1
k,7,0.267,0.133
k,8,0,0.133
l,1,2
*repeat,7,1,1
l,8,1
lfillt,1,2,0.20
lfillt,2,3,0.15
lfillt,5,6,0.20
lfillt,6,7,0.15
lfillt,7,8,0.05
lfillt,8,1,0.05
al,all
k,98,-1.0,0
k,99,1.1,0
lstr,99,98
k,100,-1.0,1.0
k,101,1.1,1.0
lstr,100,101
lcomb,8,13
lcomb,8,14
esize,0.02
type,1
mat,1
smrtsize,5
! Set element attributes and meshing parameters
amesh,all
allsel
! Mesh the model
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecflprinput.html[28/04/2013 09:16:18 p.m.]
A.2. Input File
lsel,s,,,4
nsll,s,1
d,all,ux,0
allsel
/com
! BCs to model half symmetry
**** Contact pair creation ****
et,2,169
et,3,171
keyopt,3,10,2
mp,mu,2,0.2
! Friction
r,2
/com
**** Top and bottom rigid targets ****
type,2
real,2
mat,2
lesize,15,,,1
lesize,16,,,1
lmesh,15,16
/com
**** Contact on the planar seal ****
lsel,s,line,,1,12
lsel,u,line,,4
nsll,s,1
type,3
esurf
allsel,all
finish
/solu
allsel
esel,s,ename,,169
nsle
nsel,r,loc,y,1
d,all,uy,-0.865
nlgeom,on
time,1
nsubst,25,2000,5
outres,all,all
allsel
nropt,unsym
solve
! Move top rigid target
! Unsymmetric due to friction
esel,s,ename,,171
sfe,all,1,PRES, ,150
sfe,all,2,pres,,-1
! Select only contact elements

! Apply fluid pressure of 150 to all contact elements
! Suppress default starting points (STA1 = -1)
nsel,s,loc,x
esln
esel,r,ename,,171
sfe,all,2,pres,,1
! Select a location for starting points

! Reselect only the contact elements
! Specify the above location to be initially in fluid (STA1 = 1]
allsel
nsubst,100,1000,10
solve
finish
/com
**** Post1 postprocessing ****
/post1
/show
set,2,last
finish
/com
**** Post26 time history postprocessing ****
/post26
timerange,1,2
esol,2,523,138 ,cont,fprs,CONTFPRS1
esol,3,523,138 ,cont,gap,CONTGAP1
/com *****************************************************************************
/com History of contact gap and fluid pressure for an element in the
/com region that opens first
/com *****************************************************************************
prvar,2,3
esol,4,578,53 ,cont,fprs,CONTFPRS2
A.2. Input File
esol,5,578,53 ,cont,gap,CONTGAP2
/com ****************************************************************************
/com History of contact gap and fluid pressure for an element in the
/com region that opens later
/com *****************************************************************************
prvar,4,5
esol,6,517,6,cont,fprs,CONTFPRS3
esol,7,517,6,cont,gap,CONTGAP3
/com ****************************************************************************
/com History of contact gap and fluid pressure for contact element
/com that opens last
/com *****************************************************************************
prvar,6,7
/title,Time history of fluid pressure for three contact elements
/axlab,y,Fluid pressure
plvar,2,4,6
finish
Chapter 11: Spot Welds
Chapter11:Spot Welds
The traditional way of modeling spot welds involves matching the meshes of different parts at the spot
weld connection points, which introduces meshing difficulties and often requires parts to be meshed
manually. In addition, this approach does not take into account the effects of the spot weld radius, and
it underestimates the strength of the spot weld connection when the radius of the spot weld is the same
or lesser order of magnitude than the mesh size.
The ANSYS spot weld feature, based on the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) approach, offers a
robust alternative to the traditional method. This feature allows you to easily model thin sheet
components that are connected with spot welds, rivets, or fasteners. The spot weld can be located
anywhere between the parts that are to be connected, independent of the mesh and the node locations.
The figure below shows an example of the spot weld configuration. Each spot weld set connects two or
more surfaces.
Figure11.1Example Spot Weld Configuration
There are several advantages to using this mesh independent spot weld capability:
Parts can be meshed independently.
A basic spot weld set can be easily defined by specifying two surfaces to be connected and a
single node called the spot weld node near the surfaces. The spot weld node determines the
location of the spot weld.
This approach takes into account effects of the spot weld radius input by the user. ANSYS will
create multipoint constraint equations (MPCs) internally through two contact pair definitions, one
on each spot weld surface. The internal constraint equations (force-distributed constraints) couple
the motion of the surface nodes to the motion of the spot weld node in an average sense.
The spot weld can be rigid (default) or deformable. To specify a deformable spot weld, you simply
define a deformable beam element type prior to creating the spot weld.
The following spot weld topics are available:
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_spotwel.html[28/04/2013 09:16:56 p.m.]
Chapter 11: Spot Welds
Defining a Spot Weld Set

Listing and Deleting Spot Welds
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_spotwel.html[28/04/2013 09:16:56 p.m.]
11.1.Defining a Spot Weld Set

The general procedure for defining a spot weld set consists of the following steps:
1. Define the basic spot weld set (SWGEN command)
2. Define any additional surfaces for the existing spot weld set (SWADD command)
In addition, ANSYS supplies the SWLIST and SWDEL commands for listing and deleting spot weld sets.
11.1.1.Creating a Basic Spot Weld Set with SWGEN

Use the SWGEN command to define a basic spot weld set (in the GUI, pick Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Element > SpotWeld> Create New Set). The required
arguments are:
Name of the spot weld set
Spot weld radius
Spot weld surfaces
First spot weld node
You can optionally specify the following:
Second spot weld node
Spot weld projection direction
Search radius
Contact and target element types
All of these inputs are discussed in detail below.
Spot Weld Set Name ( Ecomp ):
Use the Ecomp argument to assign a name to a new basic spot weld set. The spot weld set is a
component composed of new beam, target, and contact elements. The name entered for the
Ecomp argument will be used to list, delete, output, or add new surfaces to the spot weld set.
Spot Weld Surfaces ( NCM1 , NCM2 ):
Each basic spot weld set contains two surfaces, surface 1 and surface 2, to be connected together.
Use arguments NCM1 and NCM2 to specify these surfaces. You can input the name of a predefined
node component or a meshed area number. If no nodal component names matching NCM1 and
NCM2 are found, they are assumed to be meshed area numbers.
Spot Weld Nodes ( SND1 , SND2 ):
You must specify the first spot weld node, SND1 . The location of each spot weld depends on SND1 .
If you specify the second spot weld node ( SND2 ), it is used to determine the spot weld projection
direction. The second node will be generated automatically if it is not specified. You should locate
SND1 and SND2 (referred to as node 1 and node 2 in figures that follow) as close to the
corresponding surfaces as possible. They can be nodes on the corresponding surfaces or
independent nodes in space. If they are not on the corresponding surfaces, node 1 will be moved
to surface 1 and node 2 will be moved to surface 2.
ANSYS will determine the actual location for the spot weld nodes by first projecting node 1 onto
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_spwdset.html[28/04/2013 09:17:47 p.m.]
surface 1 along the spot weld projection direction. Next, ANSYS projects node 2 to surface 2 along
the spot weld projection direction. The spot weld nodes are moved to the surfaces in the
beginning of the analysis.
Spot Weld Projection Direction:
By default, the projection direction is a surface normal vector from node 1 to surface 1 (see figure
below). If you specify node 2 ( SND2 ), the projection direction is in line with the two spot weld
nodes. If node 2 is not specified, you can still explicitly define the projection direction with the
DIRX , DIRY , and DIRZ arguments.
Figure11.2Default Projection Direction for Node 1
Once the actual location of node 1 has been determined, ANSYS will project node 2 to surface 2
along the spot weld projection direction that was used for node 1. The figure below shows the
projection locations of nodes 1 and 2 given a default projection normal to surface 1.
Figure11.3Default Projection Direction for Nodes 1 and 2
The figure below shows spot weld node 1 projected as specified by the user (either through the
input of DIRX , DIRY , and DIRZ , or by the specification of a second spot weld node).
Figure11.4User-specified Projection Direction, Node 1
The figure below is another example showing the projection location of spot weld nodes 1 and 2
given a user-specified projection direction.
Figure11.5User-specified Projection Direction, Nodes 1 and 2
Spot Weld Radius ( SWRD ):

Each spot weld is assumed to have a circular projection onto the spot weld surfaces. The
projection is defined by the required spot weld radius argument SWRD . For each spot weld surface
ANSYS will build 6 force-distributed constraint equations through a contact pair. The spot weld
radius determines the influence range of the constraint equations. Each spot weld node couples
with a group of nodes on the corresponding surface within the radius. (See Figure 11.7 later in this
section.)
Search Radius ( SHRD ):
ANSYS will create a contact pair for each spot weld surface. The contact pair contains one contact
element defined by the spot weld node, and target elements overlaid fully or partially on the
corresponding spot weld surface. Only the surface nodes that fall within a sphere of radius, called
the search radius, with its center at the original position of the corresponding spot weld node are
used to form target elements (see figure below). The search radius must be larger than the spot
weld radius. If the search radius argument ( SHRD ) is not defined, ANSYS uses a default search
radius that is four times the spot weld radius.
Figure11.6Search Radius for Spot Weld
Target and Contact Element Types ( ITTY , ICTY ):

By default, the program automatically creates the target and contact element types required for
the spot weld. However, you may use the ITTY and ICTY arguments to specify the target and
contact element types, respectively. You must also set certain key options if you specify the
element types to be used. See The Components of a Spot Weld for more information.
11.1.2.The Components of a Spot Weld

Each new spot weld set created by the SWGEN command consists of a beam element and two node-tosurface MPC contact pairs (see Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly for more information). Each node-tosurface pair will generate 6 constraint equations. You can choose either a rigid MPC184 element (the
default) or a deformable BEAM188 element to link the spot weld surfaces. Below are detailed
explanations of how these items are generated:
1. Contact Pairs: Two node-to-surface contact pairs are created for each new spot weld set. One
pair is for spot weld surface 1 and the other is for surface 2. Each contact pair has only one
contact element, CONTA175, which is defined by the associated spot weld node. The target
elements (TARGE170) are formed by a group of surface nodes lying within the region of the
search radius. ANSYS will create an independent real constant ID for each contact pair, and proper
contact and target element type IDs.
If you prefer, you can specify the contact or target element type IDs to be used. To specify a
contact element type, use the ICTY argument on SWGEN and set the following contact element
options for that element type: KEYOPT(2) = 2 (MPC approach), KEYOPT(12) = 5 (bonded always).
To specify a target element type, use the ITTY argument on SWGEN and set the target element
option KEYOPT(5) = 4 (shell-solid constraint) for that element type.
2. Force-distributed constraint equations: For each contact pair, ANSYS will internally form
force-distributed constraint equations that distribute the internal forces of the spot weld node (that
is, the contact node) to the surface nodes (that is, the target nodes) lying within the region of the
spot weld radius. This includes all elements that fall entirely or partially within the radius (see the
figure below). In other words, it couples the motion of certain surface nodes to the motion of the
spot weld node (in an average sense). There are six constraint equations generated for each spot
weld surface (that is, each contact pair).
Figure11.7Nodes Included in Constraint Equations
3. Beam element: A beam element is created to connect spot weld surface 1 and surface 2. The
two beam end-nodes are the spot weld nodes, node 1 and node 2 (see Figure below). The spot
weld set can be rigid or deformable. By default ANSYS will create a rigid beam element (MPC184
with KEYOPT(1)=1) to represent a rigid spot weld. However, if the currently defined element type
is BEAM188 with a solid circular cross-section, ANSYS assumes the spot weld set is deformable and
a BEAM188 element is created. In this case, you must input the material properties with the MP
command and define the geometry of the beam section using the SECTYPE and SECDATA
commands (see the example listing below). Generally, BEAM188 is capable of handling a short
beam situation.
Figure11.8Beam Element Created for Spot Weld
The following example input shows typical commands used to define a spot weld with a deformable
BEAM188 element having a circular cross section.
MP,EX,3,200000000000. ! spot weld material properties
MP,NUXY,3,0.3
SECTYPE,3,beam,csolid ! define a circular solid beam section
SECDATA,2.75e-002
! beam circular radius
ET,3,188
! element type for a deformable spot weld
TYPE,3
MAT,3
SECNUM,3
*SET,NODE1,9000
! define parameter for node number
N,NODE1,0.1,0.5,10.2 ! define spot weld node
SWGEN,SWELD1,2.75e-2,2,3,NODE1 ! Spot weld name = SWELD1
! Radius = 2.75e-2
! Spot weld surfaces = areas 2 and 3
Note: All limitations that are documented for the MPC184 link/beam element in the
Element Reference also apply when the element is used in a rigid spot weld
definition. Please read the MPC184-Link/Beam description carefully, especially the
assumptions and restrictions.
11.1.3.Adding Surfaces to a Basic Set

Once a basic spot weld set has been created, additional surfaces can be added to the existing spot weld
set. Use the SWADD command to define the additional surfaces (in the GUI, pick Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Element > SpotWeld> Add More Surfaces). Each added
surface (input as NCM1 through NCM9 ) can be specified by an existing nodal component name or by a
meshed area number.
In the example command below, four surfaces are added to an existing spot weld set named SWELD1.
The four surfaces include area number 3, area number 4, nodal component FAC5, and nodal component
FAC6. The search radius is 0.8.
SWADD,SWELD1,0.8,3,4,FAC5,FAC6
! Adds 4 surfaces to spot weld SWELD1.
For each new surface, ANSYS will create a new spot weld node, a new contact pair, and a new beam
element (see figure below). The location of the new node is determined by projection of one of the
closest existing spot weld nodes onto the newly added surface along the spot weld projection direction.
The new node-to-surface contact pair contains the new spot weld node as a single contact node in the
pair, and surface nodes within the range of the search radius ( SHRD ) specified on the SWADD
command. The search radius defaults to 4 times the spot weld radius ( SWRD ) defined for the basic spot
weld set. Each new contact pair will create 6 force-distributed constraint equations internally. A new
beam is created to link the new surface to the closest existing surface through the spot weld nodes.
Figure11.9Surfaces Added to Basic Spot Weld Set
After all spot weld nodes are created, the nodes of the beam elements may be reordered to link every
two adjacent spot weld nodes (see Figure below). The ordering is important for the output, which is
calculated for each beam in a spot weld set.
Figure11.10Node Reordering for Beam Elements
Assuming the basic spot weld set is named SWELD, below is an example of commands that could have
produced the above figure.
SWADD,SWELD, ,3 ! Add Area 3 to spot weld set SWELD
SWADD,SWELD, ,4 ! Add Area 4 (between surfaces 2 and 3) to SWELD
Initially, when spot weld surface 3 was added, a beam was created between surfaces 2 and 3. When
surface 4 was added between surfaces 2 and 3, the beam that went between surfaces 2 and 3 was
redefined to go between surfaces 2 and 4, and a new beam was created to link surfaces 4 and 3.
You can add more surfaces by repeating the SWADD command. However, the maximum number of
allowable surfaces for each spot weld set (including the two surfaces used for the basic set) is 11.
11.2. Listing and Deleting Spot Welds
11.2.Listing and Deleting Spot Welds

Use the SWLIST command to list the spot weld sets for a specific spot weld or for all spot weld sets (in
the GUI, pick Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Element > SpotWeld> List). To
ensure that all defined spotwelds are listed, issue CMSEL,ALL (to select all components) before issuing
the SWLIST command. The listing will include nodes, beams, and contact pair information. If the
SWLIST command is issued in POST1 (in the GUI, pick Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> SpotWeld Solution), the beam forces and moments, are also output in the beam local
coordinate system. The output includes axial force, shear forces, torque, and bending moments. For a
deformed spot weld set, axial stress and bending stress are also reported.
Use the SWDEL command to delete a specified spot weld set or all spot weld sets. In the GUI, pick
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Element > SpotWeld> Delete.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_lsdelsw.html[28/04/2013 09:18:18 p.m.]
1.1. General Contact Classification
1.1.General Contact Classification

Contact problems fall into two general classes: rigid-to-flexible and flexible-to-flexible. In rigid-to-flexible
contact problems, one or more of the contacting surfaces are treated as rigid (i.e., it has a much higher
stiffness relative to the deformable body it contacts). In general, any time a soft material comes in
contact with a hard material, the problem may be assumed to be rigid-to-flexible. Many metal forming
problems fall into this category. The other class, flexible-to-flexible, is the more common type. In this
case, both (or all) contacting bodies are deformable (i.e., have similar stiffnesses). An example of a
flexible-to-flexible contact is bolted flanges.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_gencon.html[28/04/2013 09:19:08 p.m.]
1.2.Contact Capabilities
Five contact models are available: node-to-node, node-to-surface, surface-to-surface, line-to-line, and
line-to-surface. Each type of model uses a different set of contact elements and is appropriate for
specific types of problems as shown in the following table:
Table1.1Contact Support
Contact Element
No.
Target Element
No.
2-D
3-D
Sliding
Cylindrical Gap
Pure Lagrange
Multiplier
Augmented
Lagrange Multiplier
Lagrange Multiplier
on Normal and
Penalty on
Tangent
Internal Multipoint
Constraint (MPC)
Contact Stiffness
Auto-meshing
Tools
Lower-Order
Higher-Order
Rigid-Flexible
Flexible-Flexible
Thermal Contact
Electric Contact
Magnetic Contact
Note-toNode
178
Node-toSurface
175
171, 172
--
169, 170
169
Y
Y
small
Y
Y
Y
Y
large
Surface-to-Surface
173, 174
Line-toLine
176
Line-toSurface
177
170
170
170
-Y
large
-Y
large
Y
-large
-Y
large
--
semi-auto
ESURF
semi-auto
ESURF
semi-auto
EINTF
Y
-Y
Y
----
semi-auto semi-auto
ESURF ESURF
Y
Y (2-D
only)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
semi-auto
ESURF
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
----
Y
Y
----
To model a contact problem, you first must identify the parts to be analyzed for their possible
interaction. If one of the interactions is at a point, the corresponding component of your model is a
node. If one of the interactions is at a surface, the corresponding component of your model is an
element: either a beam, shell, or solid element. The finite element model recognizes possible contact
pairs by the presence of specific contact elements. These contact elements are overlaid on the parts of
the model that are being analyzed for interaction. The various contact elements, and procedures for
using them, are described in this guide.
An overview of the contact elements and their capabilities follows. For detailed information on any of
these elements, refer to the Element Reference and the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_anscon.html[28/04/2013 09:19:20 p.m.]
Mechanical Applications .
1.2.1.Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements

Support is available for both rigid-to-flexible and flexible-to-flexible surface-to-surface contact elements.
These contact elements use a "target surface" and a "contact surface" to form a contact pair.
The target surface is modeled with either TARGE169 or TARGE170 (for 2-D and 3-D, respectively).
The contact surface is modeled with elements CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174.
To create a contact pair, assign the same real constant number to both the target and contact
elements. You can find more details on defining these elements and their shared real constant sets in
Surface-to-Surface Contact.
These surface-to-surface elements are well-suited for applications such as interference fit assembly
contact or entry contact, forging, and deep-drawing problems. The surface-to-surface contact elements
have several advantages over the node-to-node element CONTA175. These elements:
Support lower and higher order elements on the contact and target surfaces (in other words,
corner-noded or midside-noded elements).
Provide better contact results needed for typical engineering purposes, such as normal pressure
and friction stress contour plots.
Have no restrictions on the shape of the target surface. Surface discontinuities can be physical or
due to mesh discretization.
Allow modeling of fluid pressure penetration loads.
Using these elements for a rigid target surface, you can model straight and curved surfaces in 2-D and
3-D, often using simple geometric shapes such as circles, parabolas, spheres, cones, and cylinders. More
complex rigid forms or general deformable forms can be modeled using special preprocessing techniques
(see Defining the Target Surface for more information).
Surface-to-surface contact elements are not well-suited for point-to-point, point-to-surface, edge-tosurface, or 3-D line-to-line contact applications, such as pipe whip or snap-fit assemblies. You should
use the node-to-surface, node-to-node, or line-to-line elements in these cases. You also can use
surface-to-surface contact elements for most contact regions and use a few node-to-surface contact
elements near contact corners.
The surface-to-surface contact elements only support general static and transient analyses, buckling,
harmonic, modal or spectrum analyses, or substructure analyses.
1.2.2.Node-to-Surface Contact Elements

CONTA175 is a node-to-surface contact element. It supports large sliding, large deformation, and
different meshes between the contacting components. Contact occurs when the element penetrates one
of the target segment elements (TARGE169, TARGE170) on a specified target surface. CONTA175 is
typically used to model point-to-surface contact applications, such as the corners of snap-fit parts sliding
along the mating surface.
You can also use CONTA175 to model surface-to-surface contact, if the contacting surface is defined by
a group of nodes and multiple elements are generated. The surfaces can be either rigid or deformable.
An example of this type of contact problem is a wire inserted into a slot.
Unlike the node-to-node contact elements, you do not need to know the exact location of the contacting
area beforehand, nor do the contacting components need to have a compatible mesh. Large deformation
and large relative sliding are allowed, although this capability can also model small sliding.
CONTA175 does not support 3-D higher-order elements on the contact surface side. The element can fail
if the target surface is severely discontinuous. No contour plots are available for contact results.
1.2.3.3-D Line-to-Line Contact

The line-to-line contact element, CONTA176, is typically used to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact
(crossing beams or beams that are parallel to each other) or a pipe sliding inside another pipe. Some
practical applications are woven fabric and tennis racquet strings.
CONTA176 can be attached to 3-D beam or pipe elements and supports both low-order and higherorder elements on the contact surface. The target surface is modeled with 3-D line segments
(TARGE170 straight line or parabolic line elements). This element supports large sliding and large
displacement applications. For more information on how to use CONTA176, see 3-D Beam-to-Beam
Contact.
1.2.4.Line-to-Surface Contact
The line-to-surface contact element, CONTA177, can be used to model a 3-D beam or shell edge
contacting solid or shell elements. CONTA177 supports both low-order and higher-order elements on the
contact surface. The target surface is modeled with 3-D target segment elements (TARGE170). This
element is also suitable for large sliding and large displacement applications. For more information on
how to use CONTA177, see Line-to-Surface Contact.
1.2.5.Node-to-Node Contact Elements

Node-to-node contact elements are typically used to model point-to-point contact applications. To use
node-to-node contact elements, you need to know the location of contact beforehand. These types of
contact problems usually involve small relative sliding between contacting surfaces (even in the case of
geometric nonlinearities). An example of a node-to-node contact application is the traditional pipe whip
model, where the contact point is always located between the pipe tip and the restraint.
Node-to-node contact elements can also be used to solve a surface-to-surface problem if the nodes of
the two surfaces line up, the relative sliding deformation is negligible, and deflections (rotations) of the
two surfaces remain small. These are typically problems with faceted and simple geometry. An
interference fit problem is an example of a surface-to-surface problem where the use of node-to-node
contact may be sufficient.
Another use of node-to-node contact elements is in extremely precise analysis of surface stresses, such
as in turbine blade analysis.
The CONTA178 element is the best choice for most node-to-node problems. It offers a wide range of
options and solver types.
Chapter 2: GUI Aids for Contact Analyses
Chapter2:GUI Aids for Contact Analyses

Several GUI aids are available to help you create and manage contact pairs. The Contact Manager
allows you to define, view, and edit contact pairs. It provides a convenient way to manage all contact
pairs for your entire model. The Contact Wizard, which is accessed from the Contact Manager, leads you
through the process of creating contact pairs.
The following contact-related GUI topics are available:
The Contact Manager
The Contact Wizard
Managing Contact Pairs
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_guiaids.html[28/04/2013 09:19:33 p.m.]
2.1.The Contact Manager

You can access the Contact Manager via the Contact Manager icon in the ANSYS Standard Toolbar,
or via the menu path Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Contact Pair. The Contact Manager is
available at the Begin level and in the following processors: preprocessor (PREP7), solution (SOLU), and
general postprocessor (POST1).
The Contact Manager Toolbar provides an intuitive interface for the creation and management of contact
pairs. The manager supports surface-to-surface contact analysis, node-to-surface contact analysis (using
CONTA175), and the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) method of contact .
Figure2.1Contact Manager Toolbar
Contact Wizard - Accesses the Contact Wizard GUI described in The Contact Wizard. Allows you
to manually define target and contact surfaces. Supports both 2-D and 3-D geometries as well as
rigid-flexible (with optional pilot node) or flexible-flexible contact. (Primitives are not supported by
contact wizard.) The wizard also supports surface-based constraint contact pairs.
Contact Properties - Allows you to specify the properties of the contact pair(s) via real constants
and KEYOPTs for the contact elements used.
Delete Contact Pairs - Deletes the contact pairs selected in the contact pair list.
Contact Selection Options - Specifies display of contact elements, target elements, or both.
Plot Elements/Results - Displays the elements of selected contact pairs; or displays the contact
results, if available (POST1 only), specified in the Contact Results field for selected contact pairs.
Results are displayed if Model Context is specified as "Result-"; otherwise, elements are
displayed. The display can be limited to contact, or target, or both as specified in the Contact
Selection Options field. (Note that CONTA175 results will not display graphically, but can be
listed with the List Elements/Results icon.)
Show Normals - Specifies whether or not to display the normals on the elements when plotting
contact pairs
Flip Normals - Flips the element normals of the selected contact pair. This action is limited to the
elements specified in the Contact Selection Options field.
Switch Contact and Target - Inverts the target surface and the contact surface with each other.
This is applicable only to flexible-to-flexible surface-to-surface contact pairs.
List Elements/Results - Lists the elements of the selected contact pairs; or lists the contact
results, if available (POST1 only), specified in the Contact Results field for selected contact pairs.
Results are listed if Model Context is specified as "Result-"; otherwise, elements are listed. The
listing is restricted to the elements specified in the Contact Selection Options field.
Model Context - Displays the contact pairs in the context of the entire model using a translucent
plot, or shows only the contact pairs. If set to "Result-" (POST1 only), controls display/listing of
contact pair results.
Check Contact Status - Provides contact status information for selected contact pairs. Several
options are available (click and hold down the Check Contact Status button to access these
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_contman.html[28/04/2013 09:19:38 p.m.]
options):
Display a detailed listing of status information for each contact pair.
Run a partial solution of the initial contact state (CNCHECK,POST command) that can be
subsequently postprocessed from the contact manager. (See CNCHECK for more
information.)
Physically move contact nodes to the target surface (CNCHECK,ADJUST command) in order
to close a gap or reduce a penetration (see Physically Moving Contact Nodes Towards the
Target Surface.)
Reset target element and contact element key options and real constants to their default
values (CNCHECK,RESET command).
Contact Results - Shows the contact result items for subsequent viewing using the Plot
Elements/Results and List Elements/Results icons.
The bar below the toolbar icons minimizes or maximizes the Contact Pair list box below it. The Contact
Pair list box displays the defined contact pairs. You can select contact pairs from this list for displaying or
editing purposes.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_contman.html[28/04/2013 09:19:38 p.m.]
Chapter 3: Surface-to-Surface Contact
Chapter3:Surface-to-Surface Contact
You can use the surface-to-surface contact elements to model either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible
contact between surfaces. The Contact Manager provides an easy-to-use interface to help you construct
and manage contact definitions. You can access the manager via the Contact Manager icon in the
ANSYS Standard Toolbar, or via the menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Contact Pair. See GUI Aids for Contact Analyses for more information on using the Contact Manager.
This chapter explains how to set up a surface-to-surface contact analysis using both the command and
GUI approaches. The following topics are available:
Using Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements
Steps in a Contact Analysis
Creating the Model Geometry and Mesh
Identifying Contact Pairs
Designating Contact and Target Surfaces
Defining the Deformable Contact Surface
Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces
Set the Real Constants and Element KEYOPTS
Controlling the Motion of the Rigid Target Surface
Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions to the Deformable Elements
Applying Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads
Defining Solution and Load Step Options
Solving the Problem
Note: The procedures described in this chapter also apply to node-to-surface contact
analyses using CONTA175, 3-D beam-to-beam contact analyses using CONTA176,
and 3-D line-to-surface contact using CONTA177 unless otherwise noted.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_surtsur.html[28/04/2013 09:19:43 p.m.]
3.1. Using Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements
3.1.Using Surface-to-Surface Contact Elements

In problems involving contact between two boundaries, one of the boundaries is conventionally
established as the "target" surface, and the other as the "contact" surface. For rigid-flexible contact, the
target surface is always the rigid surface, and the contact surface is the deformable surface. For flexibleto-flexible contact, both contact and target surfaces are associated with the deformable bodies. These
two surfaces together comprise the "contact pair." Use TARGE169 with CONTA171, CONTA172, or
CONTA175 to define a 2-D contact pair. For 3-D contact pairs, use TARGE170 with CONTA173,
CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, or CONTA177. Each contact pair is identified via the same real
constant number.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_usesur.html[28/04/2013 09:19:48 p.m.]
3.2. Steps in a Contact Analysis
3.2.Steps in a Contact Analysis

The basic steps for performing a typical surface-to-surface contact analysis are listed below. Each step is
then explained in detail in the following sections.
1. Create the model geometry and mesh
2. Identify the contact pairs
3. Designate contact and target surfaces
4. Define the target surface
5. Define the contact surface
6. Set the element KEYOPTS and real constants
7. Define/control the motion of the target surface (rigid-to-flexible only)
8. Apply necessary boundary conditions
9. Apply fluid pressure-penetration loads
10. Define solution options and load steps
11. Solve the contact problem
12. Review the results
Each contact-specific step also has a corresponding GUI approach where you use functions and features
on the Contact Toolbar.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_stepcon.html[28/04/2013 09:20:34 p.m.]
3.3. Creating the Model Geometry and Mesh
3.3.Creating the Model Geometry and Mesh

First, create solid model entities that represent the geometry of the contacting bodies. Set element
types, real constants, and material properties as you would for any ANSYS analysis. Mesh the contacting
bodies by meshing the areas or volumes with the element type that you have chosen. For more
information, see the Modeling and Meshing Guide .
Command(s): AMESH,
VMESH
GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh
Note: You should avoid midside-noded elements for 3-D contact surfaces when using
node-to-surface element CONTA175.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_geomesh.html[28/04/2013 09:20:39 p.m.]
3.4. Identifying Contact Pairs
3.4.Identifying Contact Pairs

You must identify where contact might occur during the deformation of your model. Once you've
identified potential contact surfaces, you define them via target and contact elements, which will then
track the kinematics of the deformation process. Target and contact elements that make up a contact
pair are associated with each other via a shared real constant set.
The contact zone can be arbitrary; however, for the most efficient solution (primarily in CPU time), you
may want to define smaller, localized contacting zones, but be sure your zones are adequate to capture
all necessary contact. Different contact pairs must be defined by a different real constant set, even if the
element real constant values do not change. There is no limit on the number of surfaces allowed.
Figure3.1Localized Contact Zones
Depending on the geometry of the model (and the potential deformation), multiple target surfaces could
interact with the same zone of the contact surface. In such cases, you must define multiple contact pairs
(using multiple overlapping contact elements), each with its own real constant number. See Figure 3.1.
The geometry-based contact pair generation tools (see the Contact Wizard) may create unnecessary
contact and target elements which are never in contact during solution. For modeling small sliding
contact or assembly contact, you can issue CNCHECK,TRIM to remove contact and target elements
which are initially in far-field (that is, open and not near contact). The trimming is based on the contact
pinball size; the smaller the pinball radius, the greater the number of contact and target elements that
will be deleted. The contact trimming option is useful in Distributed ANSYS runs to achieve better
performance.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_idpairs.html[28/04/2013 09:21:07 p.m.]
3.4. Identifying Contact Pairs
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_idpairs.html[28/04/2013 09:21:07 p.m.]
3.5. Designating Contact and Target Surfaces
3.5.Designating Contact and Target Surfaces

Contact elements are constrained against penetrating the target surface. However, target elements can
penetrate through the contact surface. For rigid-to-flexible contact, the designation is obvious: the target
surface is always the rigid surface and the contact surface is always the deformable surface. For flexibleto-flexible contact, the choice of which surface is designated contact or target can cause a different
amount of penetration and thus affect the solution accuracy. Consider the following guidelines when
designating the surfaces:
If a convex surface is expected to come into contact with a flat or concave surface, the
flat/concave surface should be the target surface.
If one surface has a fine surface mesh and, in comparison, the other has a coarse mesh, the fine
mesh should be the contact surface and the coarse mesh should be the target surface.
If one surface is stiffer then the other, the softer surface should be the contact surface and the
stiffer surface should be the target surface.
If higher-order elements underly one of the external surfaces and lower-order elements underly
the other surface, the surface with the underlying higher-order elements should be the contact
surface and the other surface should be the target. However, for 3-D node-to-surface contact, the
lower-order elements should be the contact surface. The higher-order elements should be the
target surface.
If one surface is markedly larger than the other surface, such as in the instance where one surface
surrounds the other surface, the larger surface should be the target surface.
In the case of 3-D internal beam-to-beam contact modeled by CONTA176 (a beam or pipe sliding
inside another hollow beam or pipe), the inner beam should be considered the contact surface and
the outer beam should be the target surface. However, when the inner beam is much stiffer than
the outer beam, the inner beam can be the target surface.
These guidelines are true for asymmetric contact; however, asymmetric contact may not perform
satisfactorily for your model. The following section details the difference between asymmetric and
symmetric contact and outlines some of the situations that require symmetric contact.
3.5.1.Asymmetric Contact vs. Symmetric Contact

3.5.1.1.Background
Asymmetric contact is defined as having all contact elements on one surface and all target elements on
the other surface. This is sometimes called "one-pass contact." This is usually the most efficient way to
model surface-to-surface contact. However, under some circumstances asymmetric contact does not
perform satisfactorily. In such cases, you can designate each surface to be both a target and a contact
surface. You can then generate two sets of contact pairs between the contacting surfaces (or just one
contact pair; for example, a self-contact case). This is known as symmetric contact (or "two-pass
contact"). Obviously, symmetric contact is less efficient than asymmetric contact. However, many
analyses will require its use (typically to reduce penetration). Specific situations that require symmetric
contact include models where
The distinction between the contact and target surfaces is not clear.
Both surfaces have very coarse meshes. The symmetric contact algorithm enforces the contact
constraint conditions at more surface locations than the asymmetric contact algorithm.
If the meshes on both surfaces are identical and sufficiently refined, the symmetric contact algorithm
may not significantly improve performance and may, in fact, be more "expensive" in CPU time. In such
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_dessurf.html[28/04/2013 09:21:25 p.m.]
3.5. Designating Contact and Target Surfaces
circumstances, pick one surface to be the target and the other the contact surface.
For a symmetric contact definition, ANSYS may find one side of a contact surface as closed and the
other side of the surface as closed. In this case, it can be difficult to interpret the results. The total
contact pressure acting on both sides is the average of the contact pressures on each side of the
surface.
3.5.1.2.Using KEYOPT(8)
When there are several contact pairs involved in the model, and the graphical picking of contact and
target surfaces is difficult, you can just define the symmetric contact pairs and, by setting KEYOPT(8) =
2, ANSYS will internally select which asymmetric pair is to be used at the solution stage based on the
guidelines mentioned above in Designating Contact and Target Surfaces.
Note: In any contact model, you can mix different types of contact pairs: rigid-to-flexible
or flexible-to-flexible contact; symmetric contact or asymmetric contact. However,
only one type can exist with a contact pair.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_dessurf.html[28/04/2013 09:21:25 p.m.]
3.6.Defining the Target Surface

The target surface can be 2-D or 3-D and either rigid or deformable. For deformable target surfaces,
you will normally use the ESURF command to generate the target elements along the boundaries of an
existing mesh. You can follow the same method to generate the deformable contact surface (see
Defining the Deformable Contact Surface for details). If you are modeling 3-D line-to-line contact and
the underlying elements are a part of shell edges, issue ESURF,,,LINE to generate 3-D line or parabola
segments along the shell edges.
You should not use the following rigid target segments for a deformable target surface: ARC, CARC,
CIRC, CYL1, CONE, SPHE, POINT, or PILO. For rigid target surfaces, the following provides general
guidelines.
In 2-D cases, the shape of the target surface is described by a sequence of straight lines, circular arcs,
and parabolas, all of which can be represented with the target segment element TARGE169. You can use
any combination to define the complex target surface geometry. In 3-D cases, the shape of the target
surfaces is described by a sequence of triangles, quadrilaterals, straight lines, parabolas, cylinders,
cones, and spheres, which can be represented with TARGE170. You can use any reasonable combination
of low/high-order triangles and quadrilaterals to model a target surface with a complex, arbitrary
geometry.
3.6.1.Pilot Nodes
The rigid target surface can also be associated with a "pilot node," which is really an element with one
node, whose motion governs the motion of the entire target surface. You can think of a pilot node as a
handle for the rigid target surface. Forces/moments or rotations/displacements for the entire target
surface usually should be prescribed on the pilot node. The pilot node can be one of the nodes on the
target element or a node at any arbitrary location. The location of the pilot node is important only when
rotation or moment loading is required.
3.6.2.Primitives
You can use circle, cylinder, cone, and sphere primitives to model the target (which require real
constants to define the radius). You can combine primitive segments with general segments (such as
lines, parabolas, triangles, and quadrilaterals) to define a target surface. Primitives cannot be defined
directly in the Contact Wizard. The primitives do not support MPC based bonded or no-separation
contact.
3.6.3.Element Types and Real Constants

Before generating the target element, first define the element type (TARGE169 for 2-D or TARGE170 for
3-D):
Command(s):
GUI:
ET
3.6.3.1.Defining Target Element Geometry

You define characteristics of the target element geometry through real constants R1 and R2 as follows:
For CONTA171 and CONTA172:
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_targsur.html[28/04/2013 09:21:50 p.m.]
R1 is the radius if the target shape (TARGE169) is a circle.

R2 is the element thickness if the underlying element is a superelement set as plane stress
with thickness (KEYOPT(3) = 3). The default value is 1.
For CONTA173 and CONTA174 (also applies to node-to-surface element CONTA175, and to line-tosurface element CONTA177):
R1 is the radius if the target shape (TARGE170) is a cylinder, cone, or sphere.
R2 is the radius of a cone at the second node.
For CONTA176, used to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact:
R1 is the radius of circular beams on the target side (target radius). Use a positive value
when modeling external beam-to-beam contact. Use a negative value to represent the inner
radius of the outer beam (or pipe) when modeling internal beam-to-beam contact.
R2 is the radius of circular beams on the contact side (contact radius). Use a positive value
for both external and internal beam-to-beam contact.
To set the real constant number for the target elements:
Command(s):
GUI:
REAL
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants
For TARGE169 and TARGE170, you need only set real constants R1 and R2 (if required). For a complete
description of the target elements, element shapes, and real constants, see the description of TARGE169
and TARGE170 in the Element Reference.
Note: Specifying real constants (R1, R2) manually is necessary only if you use direct
generation to create your target elements, or if you model 3-D beam-to-beam
contact with CONTA176. You can also use the ANSYS meshing tools to create the
elements, or use the Contact Manager Toolbar.
3.6.4.Using Direct Generation to Create Rigid Target Elements

To generate target elements directly, use the following command or GUI path:
Command(s):
GUI:
TSHAP
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes
You then specify the element shape. Possible shapes are:

Straight line (2-D and 3-D)
Parabola (2-D and 3-D)
Clockwise arc (2-D)
Counterclockwise arc (2-D)
Circle (2-D)
Three-node triangle (3-D)
Six-node triangle (3-D)

Four-node quadrilateral (3-D)
Eight-node quadrilateral (3-D)
Cylinder (3-D)
Cone (3-D)
Sphere (3-D)
Point (2-D or 3-D)
Pilot node (2-D and 3-D)
Once you specify a target element shape, all subsequent elements will have that shape until you specify
another shape.
Note: You cannot mix 2-D and 3-D target elements on the same target surface.
You cannot mix rigid target elements with deformable target elements on the same
target surface. During solution, ANSYS assigns a deformable status to target
elements with underlying elements and assigns a rigid status to target elements
without underlying elements. If a portion of the underlying elements of a
deformable surface are deleted, an error will occur in solution.
You can generate the nodes and elements using standard ANSYS direct generation techniques. For more
information on direct generation modeling techniques, see "Direct Generation" in the Modeling and
Meshing Guide .
Command(s): N,
E
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes
GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements
You can then verify your element shapes by listing the elements.
Command(s):
GUI:
ELIST
Utility Menu> List> Elements> Nodes + Attributes
3.6.5.Using ANSYS Meshing Tools to Create Rigid Target Elements

You can also let ANSYS generate the elements automatically using the standard ANSYS meshing
capabilities. ANSYS will recognize the proper target element shape based on the solid model and will
ignore the TSHAP setting.
To generate a pilot node, use the following command or GUI path:
Command(s):
GUI:
KMESH
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Keypoints
Note: KMESH always creates pilot nodes.
To generate POINT segments, use the Direct Generation method or use ESURF,,,POINT command on
selected nodes.
To generate 2-D rigid target elements or 3-D rigid line/parabola segments, use the following command
or GUI path. ANSYS creates a single line over each line, parabolic segments over B-splines, and arc
segments over each arc and line fillet (see Figure 3.2). If all the arcs form a closed circle, ANSYS creates
a single circular segment (see Figure 3.3). However, if the arcs that form a closed circle are created
from imported or archived geometry (such as IGES), ANSYS might not create a single circular segment.
Command(s):
GUI:
LMESH
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Lines
Figure3.2ANSYS Geometric Entities and Their Corresponding Rigid Target Elements
Figure3.3A Single Circular Target Segment Created From Arc Line Segments
To generate 3-D rigid target elements, use the following command or GUI path.
Command(s):
GUI:
AMESH
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas
If the surface segments on the solid model form a complete sphere, cylinder, or cone, then ANSYS
automatically generates a single primitive 3-D target element through the AMESH command. By
creating fewer elements, the analysis becomes more computationally efficient. For arbitrary surfaces,
you should use AMESH to generate target elements. In these cases, the quality of the meshed target
shape is not important. It is more important that the target elements represent the rigid surface
geometry well.
We recommend using mapped meshing on all possible areas. If there is no curvature on the edges of
the surface, assign one division on that edge. TARGE169 with a rigid specification will always mesh with
one element division, per line, ignoring any LESIZE setting. The default target element shape is
quadrilateral. If you want a triangular target element shape, use MSHAPE,1. Figure 3.4 shows the
meshing patterns for arbitrary target surfaces. The following command or GUI path will generate a
mapped mesh wherever possible (otherwise, if not possible, it will generate a free mesh).
Command(s):
GUI:
MSHKEY,2
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Target Surf
If the target surface is flat (or nearly flat), you may select low-order target elements (3-node triangular
or 4-node quadrilateral elements). If the target surface is curved you should select high-order target
elements (6-node triangular or 8-node quadrilateral). By doing so, set KEYOPT(1) = 1 in the target
element definition.
Note: Low-order target elements result in "cheaper" CPU usage in getting penetration and
gap; however, the meshed surface may not be smooth. Higher-order target
elements are more "expensive" to use in getting the penetration and gap, but they
need many fewer elements to discretize the whole curved target surface.
Note: If target elements are created via program meshing (through the KMESH,
LMESH, or ESURF commands) the TSHAP command is ignored and ANSYS
chooses the correct shape codes automatically.
Figure3.4Meshing Patterns for Arbitrary Target Surfaces
3.6.5.1.Some Modeling and Meshing Tips

A target surface can be made up of two or more disconnected regions. Where possible, you should
localize the contact zone by defining multiple target surfaces (each with a different real constant
number). There are no restrictions on the shape of the rigid surfaces. Smoothing is not required.
However, you must ensure that the mesh discretization of the curved surfaces on the rigid target surface
is adequate. Excessively coarse discretization can cause numerical convergence problems. It can be
difficult to obtain a converged solution in a large sliding simulation if the target surface has sharp
convex corners. To avoid such modeling problems, use line or area fillet functions on the solid model to
smooth out the sharp corner, use a more refined mesh, or use high-order element in the region of
abrupt curvature changes (see Figure 3.5).
Figure3.5Smoothing Convex Corner
3.6.5.2.Verifying Nodal Number Ordering (Contact Direction) of Target

Surface
The node order of the target surface elements is critical because it defines contact direction. For 2-D
contact, the associated (deformable) contact elements must lie to the right of the target surface when
moving from the first node to the second node along the target surface line (see Figure 3.6).
Figure3.6Correct Node Ordering
For 3-D contact, the target element numbering should be such that the rigid surface's outward normal
points toward the contact surface. The outward normal is determined by the right-hand rule.
For 3-D line segments, the target nodes must be numbered in a sequence that defines a continuous
line. The line can be made up of linear or parabolic segments, depending on whether the underlying
beam is made up of first order or second order elements.
To check the direction of the normals, turn on the element coordinate systems.
Command(s):
GUI:
/PSYMB,ESYS,1
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols
If the element normals do not point toward the contact surface, select this element and reverse the
direction of the surface normals.
Command(s):
GUI:
ESURF,,REVE
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Surf/Contact>
Surf to Surf
or, reorient the element normals:

Command(s):
GUI:
ENORM
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Elements> Shell
Normals
Note: Contact on target primitives (such as a complete circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere),
can occur only on the outside surfaces of such target bodies.
3.7.Defining the Deformable Contact Surface

To create the deformable contact surface, you must define that surface using one of the following
contact elements:
CONTA171 or CONTA172 (for 2-D)
CONTA173 or CONTA174 (for 3-D)
CONTA175 (for 2- or 3-D)
CONTA176 or CONTA177 (for 3-D line)
The contact surface is defined by the set of contact elements that comprise the surface of the
deformable body. These contact elements have the same geometric characteristics as the underlying
elements of the deformable body. The contact surface elements are of the same order as the underlying
elements (lower- or higher-order), with compatible nodes along the edges. The higher-order contact
elements can match lower-order underlying elements by dropping the midside nodes. The underlying
elements can be solid, shell, beam, or pipe elements. The contact surface can be on either side of the
shell or beam elements. The underlying elements may also be a superelement. However, axisymmetric
harmonic elements may not be used as underlying elements.
As with the target surface elements, you must define the contact surface element type, then select the
correct real constant number (the real constant number must be the same as the one used for the
target surface for each contact pair), and finally generate the elements.
3.7.1.Element Type
The four surface-to-surface contact element types are shown in the figure below, followed by a brief
description of each element. For complete information on these element types, see the Element
Reference.
Figure3.7Contact Element Types
CONTA171: This is a 2-D, 2-node, lower order line element that can be located on the surfaces of
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_defsurf.html[28/04/2013 09:22:00 p.m.]
2-D solid, shell, or beam elements (such as SHELL208).

CONTA172: This is a 2-D, 3-node, higher order parabolic element that can be located on the
surfaces of 2-D solid or beam elements with midside nodes (such as PLANE183).
CONTA173: This is a 3-D, 4-node, lower order quadrilateral element that can be located on the
surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements (such as SHELL181). It can be degenerated to a 3-node
triangular element.
CONTA174: This is a 3-D, 8-node, higher order quadrilateral element that can be located on the
surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements with midside nodes (such as SHELL281). It can be
degenerated to 3- to 7-node quadrilateral/triangular shapes.
The following elements can also be defined using the method described here.
CONTA175: This is a 2- or 3-D, 1-node element that can be located on the surface of 2-D lower
order and higher order solid or beam elements or 3-D lower order solid or shell elements. Use
CONTA175 for node-to-surface contact.
CONTA176: This is a 3-D line element that can be located on the surface of 3-D beam and pipe
elements. The element can be a 2-node line or a 3-node parabola, depending on whether the
underlying element is lower or higher order. Use CONTA176 to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact.
CONTA177: This is a 3-D line element that can be located on the surface of 3-D beam and pipe
elements or on the edge of 3-D shell elements. The element can be a 2-node line or a 3-node
parabola, depending on whether the underlying element is lower or higher order. Use CONTA177
to model 3-D line-to-surface contact.
Use the following command to define the contact element type.
Command(s):
GUI:
ET
3.7.2.Real Constants and Material Properties

After defining the element type, you need to select the correct real constant set. The real constant set
for each contact surface must be the same one used for the corresponding target surface for each
contact pair. Each contact pair must reference its own real constant number.
ANSYS uses the material properties of the underlying elements to calculate an appropriate contact (or
penalty) stiffness. ANSYS automatically defines a default value for tangent (sliding) contact stiffness that
is proportional to MU and the normal stiffness. If the underlying element is a superelement, the material
property set for the contact elements must be the same as that of the original structural elements used
during the formation of the superelement.
3.7.3.Generating Contact Elements

You can generate contact elements either through direct generation or by generating the surface
automatically from the exterior faces of the underlying elements. We recommend that you use automatic
generation; this approach is simpler and more reliable.
To automatically generate contact elements, follow these steps:
1. Select the nodes on the meshed deformable body. For each surface, view the node list. If you are
certain that particular nodes will never come into contact, you can omit those nodes and reduce
CPU time. However, you should always include more nodes than you think you'll need so that you
don't miss unexpected areas of contact.
Command(s):
GUI:
NSEL
Utility Menu> Select> Entities
2. Generate the contact elements.

Command(s):
GUI:
ESURF
Surf/Contact> Surf to Surf
If the contact surface is attached to areas or volumes that are meshed with solid elements, ANSYS
automatically determines the outward normal needed for contact calculations. If the underlying
elements are beam or shell elements, you must indicate which surface (top or bottom) is the
target surface.
Command(s):
GUI:
ESURF,,TOP or BOTTOM
Use the TOP setting (default) to generate contact elements with their outward normals the same
as the beam or shell elements' normals. Use the BOTTOM setting to generate contact elements
with their outward normals opposite the beam or shell elements' normals. You must make sure
that all elements in the beam or shell element selection have their normals consistently oriented. If
the underlying elements are solid elements, then the TOP or BOTTOM setting has no effect.
3. Check the direction of the outward normals for the contact elements. The direction of the contact
surface's outward normal is critical for proper contact detection. For 3-D surface-to-surface contact
elements CONTA173 and CONTA174, the node numbering follows the right hand rule to define its
outward normal. The contact surface's outward normal should point toward the target surface.
Otherwise, ANSYS may detect over-penetration of the surfaces at the beginning of the analysis and
have difficulty finding an initial solution. In most of these cases, the analysis will fail immediately.
For the 3-D line-to-line contact element CONTA176 and the 3-D line-to-surface contact element
CONTA177, the contact nodes must be ordered in a sequence that defines a continuous line.
Figure 3.8 illustrates both proper and improper specification of the contact surface's outward
normal.
Command(s):
GUI:
/PSYMB,ESYS
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols
Figure3.8Specification of the Contact Surface's Outward Normal
If the surface normals are specified incorrectly, you must either change them by reversing the
node number order of the selected elements.
Command(s):
GUI:
ESURF,,REVE
Or, you can reorient the element normals.

Command(s):
GUI:
ENORM
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Elements> Shell
Normals
Note: ESURF,,TOP or BOTTOM and checking the direction of outward normals will not
apply to node-to-surface contact (CONTA175) because it is a single-node element
with no surface normal associated with it.
3.8.Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces

In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by linear (lower order) or
quadratic (higher order) contact and target elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, in
certain circumstances this is not the case; for example, when linear elements are used or when the
midside nodes of quadratic elements do not lie exactly on the initial curved geometry because a third
party mesh generator was used. Thus, in some contact applications, using a faceted surface in place of
the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses.
To avoid this problem, you can use an optional geometric correction for spherical and revolute
(cylindrical) surfaces via SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. Geometry correction is available
for 3-D surface-to-surface contact elements; TARGE170, CONTA173, and CONTA174.
A spherical correction can be applied to surfaces approximating a portion of a sphere (or nearly a
sphere). Use the commands:
SECTYPE,SECID,CONTACT,SPHERE
SECDATA,X0,Y0,Z0
! sphere center location in global Cartesian coordinates
A revolute (cylindrical) correction can be applied to surfaces approximating a portion of a revolution

(or nearly a revolution), such as a cylinder or cone. Use the commands:
SECTYPE,SECID,CONTACT,CYLINDER
SECDATA,X1,Y1,Z1,X2,Y2,Z2
! location of two ends of cylindrical axis in global Cartesian
coordinates
The spherical correction requires that you specify the sphere's center location in global Cartesian
coordinates, and the cylindrical correction requires that you input the axis of revolution in global
Cartesian coordinates.
The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific contact and target elements via a section ID.
Use the SECNUM command prior to creating contact and target elements to associate the elements
with a particular section ID, or use the EMODIF command to assign a section ID to existing elements.
You can apply more than one geometry correction to the same contact or target surface. In the peg and
slot example below, the peg is one contact surface. Two geometry corrections are applied to this contact
surface: a revolute correction on the conical body and a spherical correction on the spherical tip. The
cylindrical slot (target surface) requires only a revolute correction.
Figure3.9Geometry Correction Applied to Revolute and Spherical Surfaces
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecgeomcor.html[28/04/2013 09:22:43 p.m.]
Original model configuration
Finite element model showing results
This geometry correction technique assumes that the initial locations of the contact or target element
corner nodes (but not necessarily the midside nodes of quadratic elements) lie on the true initial surface
geometry. Geometry correction is most beneficial for small deflection analyses (small or large sliding).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecgeomcor.html[28/04/2013 09:22:43 p.m.]
3.9.Set the Real Constants and Element KEYOPTS

ANSYS uses several real constants and KEYOPTs to control contact behavior using surface-to-surface
contact elements. For more information in addition to what is presented here, refer to the individual
contact element descriptions in the Element Reference.
If you decide the real constant and KEYOPT settings you have specified for a particular contact pair are
not appropriate, you can use the CNCHECK,RESET command to reset all values back to their default
settings. Some real constants and key options are not affected by this command; see CNCHECK for
details.
In many cases, certain default settings may not be appropriate for your specific model. You can issue the
CNCHECK,AUTO command to obtain optimized KEYOPT and real constant settings in terms of
robustness and efficiency. Usually, only the undefined or default KEYOPT settings and real constants are
changed. Refer to the CNCHECK command description for details of which settings are typically
changed. You should always verify these changes by issuing the CNCHECK,DETAIL command to list
current contact pair properties. If necessary, you can overwrite the optimized settings by redefining
specific KEYOPTs (KEYOPT command) and real constants (RMODIF command).
3.9.1.Real Constants
Two real constants, R1 and R2, are used to define the geometry of the target surface elements. The
remaining are used by the contact surface elements.
R1 and R2 define the target element geometry.
FKN defines a normal contact stiffness factor.
FTOLN is a factor based on the thickness of the element which is used to calculate allowable
penetration.
ICONT defines an initial closure factor (or adjustment band).
PINB defines a "pinball" region.
PMIN and PMAX define an allowable penetration range for initial penetration.
TAUMAX specifies the maximum contact friction.
CNOF specifies the positive or negative offset value applied to the contact surface.
FKOP specifies the stiffness factor applied when contact opens or the damping coefficient for
standard contact.
FKT specifies the tangent contact stiffness factor.
COHE specifies the cohesion sliding resistance.
TCC specifies the thermal contact conductance coefficient.
FHTG specifies the fraction of frictional dissipated energy converted into heat.
SBCT specifies the Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
RDVF specifies the radiation view factor.
FWGT specifies the weight factor for the distribution of heat between the contact and target
surfaces for thermal contact or for electric contact.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_realkey.html[28/04/2013 09:23:11 p.m.]
ECC specifies the electric contact conductance or capacitance per unit area.
FHEG specifies the fraction of electric dissipated energy converted into heat.
FACT specifies the ratio of static to dynamic coefficients of friction.
DC specifies the decay coefficient for static/dynamic friction.
SLTO controls maximum sliding distance when MU is nonzero and the tangent contact stiffness
(FKT) is updated at each iteration (KEYOPT(10) = 2) or when KEYOPT(2) = 3.
TNOP specifies the maximum allowable tensile contact pressure.
TOLS adds a small tolerance that extends the edge of the target surface.
MCC specifies the magnetic contact permeance (3-D only).
PPCN specifies the pressure-penetration criterion (surface contact elements only).
FPAT specifies the fluid penetration acting time (surface contact elements only).
COR specifies the coefficient of restitution for impact between rigid bodies using impact constraints
(KEYOPT(7) = 4).
STRM specifies load step number for ramping penetration.
Real constant defaults can vary depending on the environment you are working in. The following table
compares the default values between ANSYS and the ANSYS Workbench. See your ANSYS sales
representative for more information about ANSYS Workbench.
Table3.1Summary of Real Constant Defaults in Different Environments
Real Constants
No.
Name
R1
R2
Description
ANSYS
Default
Radius associated with target geometry 0

[5]
Radius associated with target geometry
ANSYS
Workbench
Default
n/a
n/a
Superelement thickness [5]
0
[1]
0.1
0
[2]
0
0
1.00E+20
0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
FKN
FTOLN
ICONT
PINB
PMAX
PMIN
TAUMAX
CNOF
FKOP

Pinball region
Upper limit of initial penetration
Lower limit of initial penetration
1
1
0.1
0
[2]
0
0
1.00E+20
0
Contact opening stiffness or

Damping coefficient
1
0
1
0
12
13
FKT
COHE

Contact cohesion
1
0
1
0
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
TCC
FHTG
SBCT
RDVF
FWGT
ECC
FHEG
FACT
DC
SLTO
TNOP
25
26
27
28
29
30
TOLS
MCC
PPCN
FPAT
COR
STRM

Joule dissipation weighting factor
Maximum allowable tensile contact
pressure
Pressure-penetration criterion
Load step number for ramping
penetration
0
1
0
1
0.5
0
1
1
0
1%
[6]
[3]
1
n/a
n/a
0.5
[7]
n/a
1
0
1%
[6]
[4]
0
0
0.01
1
1
[4]
n/a
n/a
n/a
1
1
1. FKN = 10 for bonded. For all other, FKN = 1.0, but if bonded and other contact behavior exists,
FKN = 1 for all.
2. Depends on contact behavior (rigid vs. flex target), NLGEOM,ON or OFF, KEYOPT(9) setting,
KEYOPT(12) setting, and the value of CNOF (see Using PINB).
3. Calculated as a function of highest conductivity and overall model size.
4. 10% of target length for NLGEOM,OFF.
2% of target length for NLGEOM,ON.
5. R1 and R2 are used to define the target element geometry. See Defining Target Element Geometry
and the target element descriptions (TARGE169 and TARGE170) for details on how they are used
for different geometries.
6. TNOP defaults to the force convergence tolerance divided by contact area at contact nodes.
7. Calculated as a function of lowest resistivity and overall model size.
Command(s):
GUI:
R
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants
3.9.1.1.Positive and Negative Real Constant Values

For the real constants FKN, FTOLN, ICONT, PINB, PMAX, PMIN, FKOP, FKT, SLTO, and TNOP, you can
specify either a positive or negative value. ANSYS interprets a positive value as a scaling factor and
interprets a negative value as the absolute value . ANSYS uses the depth of the underlying element as
the reference value to be used for ICONT, FTOLN, PINB, PMAX, and PMIN. For example, a positive value
of 0.1 for ICONT indicates an initial closure factor of 0.1 x depth of the underlying element. However, a
negative value of 0.1 indicates an actual adjustment band of 0.1 units. Contact related settings (ICONT,
FTOLN, PINB, PMAX, PMIN, FKN, FKT, SLTO) are always averaged across all contact elements in a
contact pair.
Figure 3.10 shows the depth of the underlying element for a solid element. If the underlying elements
are shell or beam elements, the depth will usually be 4 times the element thickness.
Figure3.10Depth of the Underlying Element
Each contact pair has a pair-based depth which is obtained by averaging the depth of each contact
element across all the contact elements in a contact pair. This can avoid the problem of very different
element-based depths when there are meshes with large variations in element sizes.
Note: When the contact pair depth is too small (for example, 10 -5 ), the machine precision
may not guarantee the accuracy of penetration to be calculated. You should scale
the length unit in the model.
3.9.2.Element KEYOPTS
Each contact element includes several KEYOPTS. We recommend using the default settings, which are
suitable for most contact problems. For some specific applications, you can override the defaults. The
element KEYOPTS allow you to control several aspects of contact behavior.
Degrees of freedom (KEYOPT(1))
Contact algorithm (defaults to augmented Lagrangian) (KEYOPT(2))
Stress state when superelements are present (KEYOPT(3)) for 2-D surface-to-surface contact (see
note below for other meanings of KEYOPT(3))
Location of contact detection point (KEYOPT(4))
CNOF Automated adjustment (KEYOPT(5))
Contact stiffness variation range (KEYOPT(6))
Time step control and impact constraints (KEYOPT(7))
Asymmetric contact selection (KEYOPT(8))
Effect of initial penetration or gap (KEYOPT(9))
Contact stiffness update (KEYOPT(10))

Shell thickness effect (KEYOPT(11)) (not applicable to CONTA176 or CONTA177)
Behavior of contact surface (rough, bonded, etc.) (KEYOPT(12))
Behavior of fluid penetration load (KEYOPT(14))
Note: For node-to-surface contact (CONTA175), KEYOPT(3) specifies the contact model.
For line-to-line contact (CONTA176), KEYOPT(3) specifies the type of beam-tobeam contact. KEYOPT(3) is not used for line-to-surface contact (CONTA177).
KEYOPT defaults can vary depending on the environment you are working in. The following table
compares the default values between ANSYS, the ANSYS Contact Wizard, and the ANSYS Workbench.
See your ANSYS sales representative for more information about ANSYS Workbench.
Table3.2Summary of KEYOPT Defaults in Different Environments
KEYOPT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
ANSYS
Workbench
Default
Linear
(bonded, no
sep)
ANSYS
Workbench,
Default
Nonlinear
(standard,
rough)
Description
ANSYS
ANSYS
Contact
Wizard
Selects DOF*
Contact Algorithm
Stress state when
superelement is present
Location of contact
detection point
CNOF/ICONT adjustment
Contact stiffnes variation
Manual
Aug. Lagr.
no super
elem
gauss
Auto
Aug. Lagr.
no super
elem
gauss
gauss
gauss
No adjust
Use default
range
No control
No adjust
Use default
range
No control
No adjust
Use default
range
No control
No adjust
Use default
range
No control
No action
No action
No action
No action
Include
all
Between
load steps
Exclude
Standard
Include
all
Between
iterations
Exclude
Standard
Exclude all
Include all
Between
load steps
Exclude
Bonded
Between load
steps
Exclude
n/a
Element level time

increment control
Asymmetric contact
selection
Effect of initial
penetration or gap
Contact stiffness update
Beam/shell thickness effect
Behavior of contact
surface
Behavior of fluid
penetration load
Auto
Auto
Pure Penalty Pure Penalty
n/a
n/a
Iteration- Iteration- n/a

based
based
*Manual: Requires user to define.

Auto: Selection is based on DOF of underlying element.
Command(s): KEYOPT,
n/a
GUI:
ET
3.9.3.Selecting a Contact Algorithm (KEYOPT(2))

3.9.3.1.Background
For surface-to-surface contact elements, ANSYS offers several different contact algorithms:
Penalty method (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Augmented Lagrangian (default) (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
Pure Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and tangent (KEYOPT(2) = 4)
Internal multipoint constraint (MPC) (KEYOPT(2) = 2)
The penalty method uses a contact "spring" to establish a relationship between the two contact
surfaces. The spring stiffness is called the contact stiffness. This method uses the following real
constants: FKN and FKT for all values of KEYOPT(10), plus FTOLN and SLTO if KEYOPT(10) = 2.
The augmented Lagrangian method (which is the default) is an iterative series of penalty methods. The
contact tractions (pressure and frictional stresses) are augmented during equilibrium iterations so that
the final penetration is smaller than the allowable tolerance (FTOLN). Compared to the penalty method,
the augmented Lagrangian method usually leads to better conditioning and is less sensitive to the
magnitude of the contact stiffness. However, in some analyses, the augmented Lagrangian method may
require additional iterations, especially if the deformed mesh becomes too distorted.
The pure Lagrange multiplier method enforces zero penetration when contact is closed and "zero slip"
when sticking contact occurs. The pure Lagrange multiplier method does not require contact stiffness,
FKN and FKT. Instead it requires chattering control parameters, FTOLN and TNOP. This method adds
contact traction to the model as additional degrees of freedom and requires additional iterations to
stabilize contact conditions. It often increases the computational cost compared to the augmented
Lagrangian method.
An alternative algorithm is the Lagrange multiplier method applied on the contact normal and the
penalty method (tangential contact stiffness) on the frictional plane. This method enforces zero
penetration and allows a small amount of slip for the sticking contact condition. It requires chattering
control parameters, FTOLN and TNOP, as well as the maximum allowable elastic slip parameter SLTO.
Another method, the internal multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm, is used in conjunction with bonded
contact (KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6) and no separation contact (KEYOPT(12) = 4) to model several types of
contact assemblies and kinematic constraints. See Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies for more
information on how to use this feature.
Note: The Lagrange multiplier methods (KEYOPT(2) = 3, 4) and MPC approach
(KEYOPT(2) = 2) do not support the Gauss point detection option (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
for surface-to-surface contact. They support the nodal detection options for
surface-to-surface contact and node-to-surface contact. When using these options,
be careful not to overconstrain the model. The model is overconstrained when a
contact node has prescribed boundary conditions, CE and CP equations. ANSYS
usually detects and eliminates the overconstraints. However, there is no guarantee
that the program will eliminate all the cases of overconstraint. You should always
verify your model carefully to address this issue. The Lagrange multiplier also
introduces more degrees of freedom which may result in spurious modes for modal
and linear eigenvalue buckling analyses. The augmented Lagrangian method would
be a better choice for these analysis types.

Note: The Lagrange multiplier methods (KEYOPT(2) = 3, 4) introduce zero diagonal terms
in the stiffness matrix. Any iterative solver (PCG or AMG) will encounter a
preconditioning matrix singularity with these methods. Therefore, you should switch
to sparse solver.
Note: If overconstraint occurs in bonded shell-shell assemblies when using the MPC
algorithm, you can switch to the penalty method or the augmented Lagrangian
method. See Bonded Contact for Shell-Shell Assemblies for more information.
Note: For 3-D higher order contact elements (CONTA174), the Lagrange multiplier
method is applied at each contact node (including mid-side nodes), but the penalty
method is applied on the center of the contact elements, even when
KEYOPT(2)=3,4 is set.
3.9.4.Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable Penetration

3.9.4.1.Background
For the augmented Lagrangian method and penalty method, normal and tangential contact stiffnesses
are required. The amount of penetration between contact and target surfaces depends on the normal
stiffness. The amount of slip in sticking contact depends on the tangential stiffness. Higher stiffness
values decrease the amount of penetration/slip, but can lead to ill-conditioning of the global stiffness
matrix and to convergence difficulties. Lower stiffness values can lead to a certain amount of
penetration/slip and produce an inaccurate solution. Ideally, you want a high enough stiffness that the
penetration/slip is acceptably small, but a low enough stiffness that the problem will be well-behaved in
terms of convergence.
ANSYS provides default values for contact stiffnesses (FKN, FKT), allowable penetration (FTOLN), and
allowable slip (SLTO). In most cases, you do not need to define the contact stiffness. In addition, we
recommend that you use KEYOPT(10) = 2 to allow the program to update the contact stiffness
automatically.
3.9.4.2.Using FKN and FTOLN

For certain contact problems, you may choose to use the real constant FKN to define a normal contact
stiffness factor. The usual factor range is from 0.01-1.0, with a default of 1.0. The default value is
appropriate for bulk deformation. If bending deformation dominates, we recommend using a smaller
value (0.1).
Note: The default contact normal stiffness is affected by defined material properties,
element size, and the total number of degrees of freedom in the model. Many
factors may be applied to the actual contact normal stiffness during the solution.
The default contact stiffness listed in the Contact Manager or by the CNCHECK
command may be different from the actual contact stiffness reported by the
ETABLE command. You should check the value reported by ETABLE to confirm
that the appropriate contact normal stiffness is used.
Use real constant FTOLN in conjunction with the augmented Lagrangian method. FTOLN is a tolerance
factor to be applied in the direction of the surface normal. The range for this factor is less than 1.0
(usually less than 0.2), with a default of 0.1, and is based on the depth of the underlying solid, shell, or
beam element (see Figure 3.10). This factor is used to determine if penetration compatibility is satisfied.
Contact compatibility is satisfied if penetration is within an allowable tolerance (FTOLN times the depth
of underlying elements). The depth is defined by the average depth of each individual contact element in
the pair. If ANSYS detects any penetration larger than this tolerance, the global solution is still
considered unconverged, even though the residual forces and displacement increments have met
convergence criteria. You can also define an absolute allowable penetration by specifying a negative
value for FTOLN.
Note: When the contact stiffness is too large (for example, 10 16 ), the machine precision
may not guarantee good conditioning of the global stiffness matrix. In this case,
you should scale the force unit in the model if possible.
Note: FTOLN is also used in the Lagrange multiplier methods (KEYOPT(2) = 3, 4) as a
chattering control parameter.
3.9.4.3.Using FKT and SLTO

ANSYS automatically defines a default tangential contact stiffness that is proportional to MU and the
normal stiffness FKN. The default tangential stiffness corresponds to a default value of FKT = 1.0. A
positive value for FKT is a factor; a negative value indicates an absolute value of tangential stiffness.
For KEYOPT(10) = 2, or when the Lagrange multiplier on normal and penalty on tangent option is used
(KEYOPT(2) = 3), ANSYS updates tangential contact stiffness based on current contact normal pressure,
PRES, and maximum allowable elastic slip, SLTO (KT = FKT*MU* PRES/SLTO). The real constant SLTO
is used to control maximum sliding distance when FKT is updated at each iteration. ANSYS provides
default tolerance values which work well in most cases. You can override the default values for SLTO
(1% of average contact length in pair) by defining a scaling factor (positive value when using command
input) or an absolute value (negative value when using command input). A larger value will enhance
convergence but compromise accuracy. Based on the tolerance, current normal pressure, and friction
coefficient, the tangential contact stiffness FKT can be obtained automatically. In certain cases users can
override FKT by defining a scaling factor (positive input value) or absolute value (negative input value)
(see Positive and Negative Real Constants for more information).
Note: FKN, FTOLN, FKT, and SLTO can be modified from one load step to another. They
can also be adjusted in a restart run. Determining a good stiffness value may
require some experimentation on your part. To arrive at a good stiffness value, you
can try the following procedure as a "trial run":
1. Use a low value for the contact stiffness to start. In general, it is better to
underestimate this value rather than overestimate it. Penetration problems
resulting from a low stiffness are easier to fix than convergence difficulties
that arise from a high stiffness.
2. Run the analysis up to a fraction of the final load (just enough to get the
contact fully established).
3. Check the penetration and the number of equilibrium iterations used in each
substep. If the global convergence difficulty is caused by too much
penetration (rather than by residual forces and displacement increments),
FKN may be underestimated or FTOLN may be too small. If the global
convergence requires many equilibrium iterations for achieving convergence
tolerances of residual forces and displacements rather than the resulting
penetration, FKN or FKT may be overestimated.
4. Adjust FKN, FKT, FTOLN, or SLTO as necessary and run the full analysis. If
the penetration control becomes dominant in the global equilibrium iterations
(that is, if more iterations were used to converge the problem to within the
penetration tolerance than to converge the residual forces), you may increase
FTOLN to permit more allowable penetration or increase FKN.
Note: For bonded contact and rough contact, ANSYS uses MU = 1.0 to calculate
tangential contact stiffness.
Note: Generally, the contact stiffness, FKN and FKT, has units of FORCE/LENGTH3 .
However, for contact force-based models the contact stiffness has units
FORCE/LENGTH. This applies to CONTA175 with KEYOPT(3) = 0, and to CONTA176
and CONTA177.
The normal and tangential contact stiffness can be updated during the course of an analysis, either
automatically (due to large strain effects that change the underlying element's stiffness) or explicitly (by
user-specified FKN or FKT values). KEYOPT(10) governs how the normal and tangential contact stiffness
is updated when the augmented Lagrangian or penalty method is used. In most cases we recommend
that you use KEYOPT(10) = 2 to allow the program to update contact stiffnesses automatically. The
possible settings for KEYOPT(10) are:
KEYOPT(10) = 0: the contact stiffness will be updated at each load step if FKN or FKT is redefined
by the user. Stiffness and other settings (ICONT, FTOLN, SLTO, PINB, PMAX, and PMIN) are
averaged across contact elements in a contact pair. The default contact stiffness is determined by
underlying element depth and material properties.
KEYOPT(10) = 2: the normal contact stiffness will be updated at each iteration based on the
current mean stress of the underlying elements and the allowable penetration, FTOLN, except in
the very first iteration. The default normal contact stiffness for the first iteration is the same as
described for KEYOPT(10) = 0. If bisections occur in the beginning of the analysis, the normal
contact stiffness will be reduced by a factor of 0.2 for each bisection. The tangential contact
stiffness will be updated at each iteration based on the current contact pressure, MU, and
allowable slip (SLTO).
Note: When a Lagrange multiplier method (KEYOPT(2) = 3, 4) or MPC algorithm
(KEYOPT(2) = 2) is used, KEYOPT(10) is ignored.
The default method of updating normal contact stiffness is suitable for most applications. However, the
variational range of the contact stiffness may not be wide enough to handle certain contact situations. In
the case of a very small penetration tolerance (FTOLN), a larger normal contact stiffness is often
needed. Furthermore, to stabilize the initial contact condition and to prevent rigid body motion, a
smaller normal contact stiffness is required.
The allowed contact stiffness variation is intended to enhance stiffness updating when KEYOPT(10) = 2
by calculating an optimal allowable range in stiffness for use in the updating scheme. To increase the
stiffness variational range, set KEYOPT(6) = 1 to make a nominal refinement to the allowable stiffness
range, or KEYOPT(6) = 2 to make an aggressive refinement to the allowable stiffness range.
3.9.4.6.Chattering Control Parameters

The Lagrange multiplier methods (KEYOPT(2) = 3, 4) do not require contact stiffness, FKN and FKT.
Instead they require chattering control parameters, FTOLN and TNOP, by which ANSYS assumes that
the contact status remains unchanged. FTOLN is the maximum allowable penetration and TNOP is the
maximum allowable tensile contact pressure.
Note: A negative contact pressure occurs when the contact status is closed. A tensile
contact pressure (positive) refers to a separation between the contact surfaces, but
not necessarily an open contact status. However, the sign of the contact pressure is
switched during postprocessing.

Note: For contact force-based models, TNOP is the maximum allowable tensile contact
force. This applies to CONTA175 with KEYOPT(3) = 0, and to CONTA176 and
CONTA177.
The behavior can be described as follows:
If the contact status from the previous iteration is open and the current calculated penetration is
smaller than FTOLN, then contact remains open. Otherwise the contact status switches to closed
and another iteration is processed.
If the contact status from the previous iteration is closed and the current calculated contact
pressure is positive but smaller than TNOP, then contact remains closed. If the tensile contact
pressure is larger than TNOP, then the contact status changes from closed to open and ANSYS
continues to the next iteration.
ANSYS will provide reasonable defaults for FTOLN and TNOP. FTOLN defaults to the displacement
convergence tolerance. TNOP defaults to the force convergence tolerance divided by contact area at
contact nodes.
Keep in mind the following when providing values for FTOLN and TNOP:
A positive value is a scaling factor applied to the default values.
A negative value is used as an absolute value (which overrides the default).
The objective of FTOLN and TNOP is to provide stability to models which exhibit contact chattering due
to changing contact status. If the values you use for these tolerances are too small, the solution will
require more iterations. However, if the values are too large, the accuracy of the solution will be affected
since a certain amount of penetration or tensile contact force is allowed.
3.9.5.Choosing a Friction Model

3.9.5.1.Background
In the basic Coulomb friction model, two contacting surfaces can carry shear stresses up to a certain
magnitude across their interface before they start sliding relative to each other. This state is known as
sticking. The Coulomb friction model defines an equivalent shear stress, at which sliding on the surface
begins as a fraction of the contact pressure p ( =p + COHE, where is the friction coefficient and
COHE specifies the cohesion sliding resistance). Once the shear stress is exceeded, the two surfaces will
slide relative to each other. This state is known as sliding. The sticking/sliding calculations determine
when a point transitions from sticking to sliding or vice versa.
As an alternative to the program-supplied friction model, you can define your own friction model with
the USERFRIC subroutine (see User-defined Friction).
For frictionless, rough, and bonded contact, the contact element stiffness matrices are symmetric.
Contact problems involving friction produce unsymmetric stiffnesses. Using an unsymmetric solver is
more computationally expensive than a symmetric solver for each iteration. For this reason, ANSYS uses
a symmetrization algorithm by which most frictional contact problems can be solved using solvers for
symmetric systems. If frictional stresses have a substantial influence on the overall displacement field
and the magnitude of the frictional stresses is highly solution dependent, the symmetric approximation
to the stiffness matrix may provide a low rate of convergence. In such cases, choose the unsymmetric
solution option (NROPT,UNSYM) to improve convergence.
3.9.5.2.Coefficient of Friction
The interface coefficient of friction, MU, is used for the Coulomb friction model. You can input MU as a
material property for the contact elements. Use MU = 0 for frictionless contact. For rough or bonded
contact (KEYOPT(12) = 1, 3, 5, or 6; see Selecting Surface Interaction Models), ANSYS assumes infinite
frictional resistance regardless of the specified value of MU. MU can have dependence on temperature,
time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity. Suitable combinations of up to two
fields can be used to define dependency; for example, temperature only, temperature and sliding
distance, or sliding relative velocity and normal pressure. If the underlying element is a superelement
(MATRIX50), the material property set must be the same as the one used for the original elements that
were assembled into the superelement.
ANSYS provides two models for Coulomb friction: isotropic friction (2-D and 3-D contact) and orthotropic
friction (3-D contact). The isotropic friction model is based on a single coefficient of friction, MU. You
can use either TB command input (recommended method) or the MP command to specify MU. The
orthotropic friction model is based on two coefficients of friction, MU1 and MU2. Use TB command input
to specify MU1 and MU2 in two principal directions (see the element descriptions for CONTA173,
CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177 for a description of the principal directions for each
individual element). See Contact Friction (TB,FRIC) in the Element Reference for details on how to
specify the coefficients of friction.
3.9.5.3.Using TAUMAX, FACT, DC, and COHE

ANSYS provides one extension of classical Coulomb friction: real constant TAUMAX is maximum contact
friction with units of stress. This maximum contact friction stress can be introduced so that, regardless of
the magnitude of normal contact pressure, sliding will occur if the friction stress reaches this value. You
typically use TAUMAX when the contact pressure becomes very large (such as in bulk metal forming
processes). TAUMAX defaults to 1.0e20. Empirical data is often the best source for TAUMAX. Its value
may be close to
, where y is the yield stress of the material being deformed.
Another real constant used for the friction law is the cohesion, COHE (default COHE = 0), which has
units of stress. It provides sliding resistance, even with zero normal pressure (see Figure 3.11).
Figure3.11Sliding Contact Resistance
Two other real constants, FACT and DC are involved in specifying static and dynamic friction
coefficients, as described in the next section.
3.9.5.4.Static and Dynamic Friction Coefficients

The coefficient of friction can depend on the relative velocity of the surfaces in contact. Typically, the
static coefficient of friction is higher than the dynamic coefficient of friction.
ANSYS provides the following exponential decay friction model:
where:
= coefficient of friction.
MU = dynamic coefficient of friction.
FACT = ratio of static to dynamic coefficients of friction. It defaults to the minimum value of 1.0
DC = decay coefficient, which has units of time/length. Therefore, time has some meaning in a static
analysis. DC defaults to zero. When DC is zero, the equation is rewritten to be = MU for the case of
sliding and = FACT*MU for the case of sticking.
Vrel = slip rate calculated by ANSYS.
For the isotropic friction model, MU is input using the MP command or the TB command as explained
above. For orthotropic friction, MU is the equivalent coefficient of friction computed from MU1 and MU2
which are specified with TB command input:
Figure 3.12 shows the exponential decay curve where the static coefficient of friction is given by:
Figure3.12Friction Decay
You can determine the decay coefficient if you know the static and dynamic coefficients of friction and
at least one data point ( 1 ; Vrel 1 ). The equation for friction decay can be rearranged to give:
If you do not specify a decay coefficient and FACT is greater than 1.0, the coefficient of friction will
change suddenly from the static to the dynamic value as soon as contact reaches the sliding state. This
behavior is not recommended because the discontinuity may lead to convergence difficulties.
3.9.5.5.Forced Frictional Sliding Using Velocity Input

In a static analysis, you can model steady-state frictional sliding between two flexible bodies or between
a flexible and a rigid body with different velocities. In this case the sliding velocities no longer follow the
nodal displacements, and they are predefined through the CMROTATE command. This command sets
the velocities on the nodes of the element component as an initial condition at the start of a load step.
ANSYS determines the sliding direction based on the direction of the sliding velocities. The amplitude of
the velocities does not affect the solution.
This feature is primarily useful for generating sliding contact at frictional contact interfaces in a brake
squeal analysis. In this case, the contact pair elements (either the contact elements or the target
elements) on the brake rotor need to be included in the rotating element component (CM command)
that is specified on the CMROTATE command. We recommend that you include only the contact
elements or only the target elements in the element component.
Velocities defined by CMROTATE will be ignored for the following contact definitions:
Frictionless contact
Rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 1)
Bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2, 5, 6)
MPC contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2)
Note: You should always verify the sliding direction when the velocities defined by
CMROTATE are applied on nodes that are shared by more than one frictional
contact pair. In this situation, you can redefine any contact elements that have a
potentially incorrect sliding direction as frictionless contact.
3.9.5.6.User-defined Friction
You can write a USERFRIC subroutine to program your own friction model for 2-D and 3-D contact
elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, and
CONTA178). See User-defined Friction in the Element Reference for more information on how to use this
feature. See also the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the
USERFRIC subroutine.
3.9.6.Selecting Location of Contact Detection

3.9.6.1.Background
Contact detection points are located at the integration points of the contact elements which are interior
to the element surface. The contact element is constrained against penetration into the target surface at
its integration points. However, the target surface can, in principle, penetrate through into the contact
surface, see Figure 3.13.
Figure3.13Contact Detection Located at Gauss Point
ANSYS surface-to-surface contact elements use Gauss integration points as a default, which generally
provide more accurate results than the nodal detection scheme, which uses the nodes themselves as the
integration points. The node-to-surface contact element, CONTA175, the line-to-line contact element,
CONTA176, and the line-to-surface contact element, CONTA177, always use the nodal detection
scheme.
3.9.6.2.Using KEYOPT(4) and TOLS

The nodal detection algorithms require the smoothing of the contact surface (KEYOPT(4) = 1) or the
smoothing of the target surface (KEYOPT(4) = 2), which is quite time consuming. You should use this
option only to deal with corner, point-surface, or edge-surface contact (see Figure 3.14). KEYOPT(4) =
1 specifies that the contact normal be perpendicular to the contact surface. KEYOPT(4) = 2 specifies
that the contact normal be perpendicular to the target surface. Use this option (KEYOPT(4) = 2) when
the target surface is smoother than the contact surface.
Figure3.14Contact Detection Point Location at Nodal Point
Be aware, however, that using nodes as the contact detection points can lead to other convergence
difficulties, such as "node slippage," where the node slips off the edge of the target surface, see Figure
3.15. In order to prevent node slippage, you can use real constant TOLS to extend the target surface
when the default setting still cannot avoid the problem. For most point-to-surface contact problems, we
recommend using CONTA175; see Node-to-Surface Contact later in this guide.
Figure3.15Node Slippage Using Nodal Integration KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2
Smoothing is required for nodal detection algroithms, and it is performed by averaging surface normals
connected to the node. As a result, the variation of the surface normal is continuous over the surface,
which leads to a better calculation of friction behavior and a better convergence.
Real constant TOLS is used to add a small tolerance that will internally extend the edge of the target
surface when you define the contact detection at the nodal point (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2). TOLS is useful
for problems where contact nodes are likely to lie on the edge of targets (as at symmetry planes or for
models generated in a node-to-node contact pattern). In these situations, the contact node may
repeatedly "slip" off the target surface and go completely out of contact, resulting in convergence
difficulties from oscillations. Units for TOLS are percent (1.0 implies a 1.0% increase in the target edge
length). A small value of TOLS will usually prevent this situation from occurring. The default value is 10
for small deflection and 2 for large deflection (NLGEOM, ON).
Note: The definition of KEYOPT(4) in node-to-surface contact element CONTA175 is
different. KEYOPT(4) = 1 for surface-to-surface contact is equivalent to KEYOPT(4)
= 1 for node-to-surface contact. However, KEYOPT(4) = 2 for surface-to-surface
contact is equivalent to KEYOPT(4) = 0 for node-to surface contact. See
KEYOPT(4). For the 3-D line-to-line contact element CONTA176 and the 3-D lineto-surface contact element CONTA177, KEYOPT(4) is not used to select the
location of contact detection, and the contact normal is always perpendicular to
both the contact and target surfaces. For CONTA176 and CONTA177, KEYOPT(4) is
used to specify a surface-based constraint type.
3.9.6.3.Using the Surface Projection Based Contact Method (KEYOPT(4) = 3)

You can define the surface projection contact method by setting KEYOPT(4) = 3 for CONTA173 and
CONTA174. For this method, the contact detection remains at contact nodal points. This option enforces
a contact constraint on an overlapping region of the contact and target surfaces (see Figure 3.16) rather
than on individual contact nodes (KEYOPT(4) = 1, 2) or Gauss points (KEYOPT(4) = 0). The contact
penetration/gap is computed over the overlapping region in an average sense. The advantages of using
this option are the following:
In general, it provides more accurate contact tractions and stresses of underlying elements
compared with other KEYOPT(4) settings.
The results are less sensitive to the designation of the contact and target surface.
It satisfies moment equilibrium when an offset exists between contact and target surfaces with
friction.
Contact forces do not jump when contact nodes slide off the edge of target surfaces. The real
constant TOLS is not used with this option.
Figure3.16Surface Projection Based Contact
There are certain disadvantages to using surface projection based contact, as follows:
This method is computationally more expensive since more nodes are included in each contact
constraint condition, especially if higher order contact/target elements are used in the model. This
effect will be more obvious when a modal has a large percentage of contact/target elements, or
when the target elements are much more refined than the contact elements.
This method calculates the penetration/gap over the contacting area in an average sense. When a
model has corner or edge contact, the averaged penetration/gap could be quite different than the
real geometric penetration observed at contact nodes. In this situation, mesh refinement is usually
required in order to achieve an accurate solution.
Note: The surface projection contact method currently does not support the following:
1. The MPC contact option (KEYOPT(2) = 2)
2. Thermal convection modeling
3. Thermal radiation modeling
4. Transient dynamics using the HHT algorithm
5. Rigid surfaces defined by primitive target segments
6. 3-D contact/target elements with partially dropped midside nodes (dropping
all midside nodes is supported)
3.9.7.Adjusting Initial Contact Conditions

3.9.7.1.Background
Rigid body motion is usually not a problem in dynamic analyses. However, in static analyses, rigid body
motion occurs when a body is not sufficiently restrained. "Zero or negative pivot" warning messages and
impractical, excessively large displacements indicate unconstrained motion in a static analysis.
In simulations where rigid body motions are constrained only by the presence of contact, you must
ensure that the contact pairs are in contact in the initial geometry. In other words, you want to build
your model so that the contact pairs are "just touching." However, you can encounter various problems
in doing so:
Rigid body profiles are often complicated, making it difficult to determine where the first point of
contact might occur.
Small gaps between element meshes on both sides of the element pair can be introduced by
numerical round-off, even if the solid model is built in an initially-contacting state.
Small gaps can exist between the integration points of the contact elements and target surface
elements.
For the same reasons, too much initial penetration between target and contact surfaces can occur. In
such cases, the contact elements may overestimate the contact forces, resulting in nonconvergence or in
breaking-away of the components in contact.
The definition of initial contact is perhaps the most important aspect of building a contact analysis
model. Therefore, you should always issue the CNCHECK command before starting the solution to
verify the initial contact status. You may find that you need to adjust the initial contact conditions.
ANSYS offers several ways to adjust the initial contact conditions of a contact pair.
3.9.7.2.Using PMIN, PMAX, CNOF, ICONT, STRM. KEYOPT(5), and KEYOPT(9)

The following techniques can be performed independently or in combinations of one or more at the
beginning of the analysis. They are intended to eliminate small gaps or penetrations caused by
numerical round-off due to mesh generation. They are not intended to correct gross errors in either the
mesh or in the geometric data.
1. Use real constant CNOF to specify a contact surface offset.
Specify a positive value to offset the entire contact surface towards the target surface. Use a
negative value to offset the contact surface away from the target surface.
Note: If user-defined values are input for both CNOF and PINB, you must ensure
that PINB is greater than CNOF. Otherwise, CNOF will be ignored. However, if
a user-defined CNOF is input and the PINB value is left at its default value,
the PINB value will be adjusted so that it is larger than the CNOF value, as
described in Using PINB.
Note: For the CONTA177 line-to-surface element, CNOF can be used to model
thickness of the underlying beam elements. Input half of the beam thickness
for CNOF to properly model the thickness effects. See Accounting for
Thickness Effect (CNOF and KEYOPT(11)) for more information.
ANSYS can automatically provide the CNOF value to either just close the gap or reduce initial
penetration. Set KEYOPT(5) as follows:
1: Closes the gap
2: Reduces initial penetration
3: Either closes the gap or reduces initial penetration
Tabular input can also be used to define CNOF. The tabular input can be defined as a function of
time and/or x,y,z location (in global or local coordinates). As an example of when tabular input
may be useful, consider the case of a CAD geometry based on nominal values. The geometry may
lack a slight curvature variation that is important for analysis purposes. Moving nodes to the actual
positions can be a tedious process, yet using the original geometry and neglecting the slight
variation in curvature will result in a different contacting area. Consequently, use of CNOF as a
function of location allows you to easily include curvature that varies with location without having
to modify the original CAD geometry.

2. Use the real constant ICONT to specify a small initial contact closure. This is the depth of an
"adjustment band" around the target surface. A positive value for ICONT indicates a scaling factor
relative to the depth of the underlying elements. A negative value indicates an absolute contact
closure value. The value of ICONT defaults to zero if KEYOPT(5) = 0, 1, 2, or 3. (The ICONT
default is different when KEYOPT(12) = 6 for bonded-initial contact; see Selecting Surface
Interaction Models for more information). If KEYOPT(5) = 4, ANSYS provides a small (but
meaningful) value for ICONT according to the geometric dimensions, and prints a warning message
stating what value was assigned. Any contact detection points that fall within this adjustment band
are internally shifted to be on the target surface (see Figure 3.17(a)). Only a very small correction
is suggested; otherwise, severe discontinuity may occur (see Figure (b)).
The difference between CNOF and ICONT is that the former shifts the entire contact surface with
the distance value CNOF, the latter moves all initially open contact points which are inside of
adjustment band ICONT onto the target surface.
Figure3.17Contact Surface Adjustment With ICONT
3. Use real constants PMIN and PMAX to specify an initial allowable penetration range. When either
PMAX or PMIN is specified, ANSYS brings the target surface into a state of initial contact at the
beginning of the analysis (see Figure 3.18). If the initial penetration is larger than PMAX, ANSYS
adjusts the target surface to reduce penetration. If the initial penetration is smaller than PMIN
(and within the pinball region), ANSYS adjusts the target surface to ensure initial contact. Initial
adjustment for contact status is performed only in translational modes.
Such adjustment of initial contact status will be performed for a rigid target surface that has either
prescribed loads or displacements. Similarly, a target surface that has no boundary conditions
specified may also be adjusted for initial contact.
When all the target surface nodes have a prescribed value of zero, the initial adjustment using
PMAX and PMIN will not be performed.
Note that ANSYS treats applicable degrees of freedom for target surface nodes independently. For
example, if you specify the UX degree of freedom to be "zero," then no initial adjustment is
possible along the X direction. However, the PMAX and PMIN options will still be activated in the Y
and Z directions.
The initial status adjustment is an iterative process. ANSYS uses a maximum of 20 iterations. If the
target surface cannot be brought into an acceptable penetration range (i.e., in the range of PMIN
to PMAX), the analysis proceeds with the original geometry. ANSYS issues a warning message in
such circumstances, and you may need to manually adjust your initial geometry.
Figure 3.19 illustrates a problem in which initial contact adjustment iteration will fail. The UY
degree of freedom for the target has been restrained. Therefore, the only possible adjustment for
initial contact is in the X direction. However, in this problem, any movement of the rigid target
surface in the X direction will not establish initial contact.
For flexible-to-flexible contact, this technique not only moves the entire target surface but also
moves the whole deformable body which attaches to the target surface. Make sure there is no
other contact surface or target surface connecting with the deformable body.
Figure3.18Contact Surface Adjustment (PMIN, PMAX)
Figure3.19A Scenario in Which Initial Adjustment Will Fail
4. Set KEYOPT(9) to adjust initial penetration or gap; see Figure 3.20.

True initial penetration includes two parts:
Penetration or gap due to geometry
Penetration or gap due to user-defined contact surface offset (CNOF).
See Figure 3.21.
KEYOPT(9) provides the following capabilities:
To include initial penetration from both geometry and contact surface offset, set KEYOPT(9)
= 0. This is the default.
To ignore initial penetration from both effects, set KEYOPT(9) = 1. When KEYOPT(12) = 4 or
5, this setting for KEYOPT(9) will also ignore the initial force in open-gap springs, thus
creating an initially "perfect" contacting surface having no initial forces acting across the
contact interface.
To include the defined contact surface offset (CNOF) but ignore the initial penetration due to
geometry, set KEYOPT(9) = 3. When KEYOPT(12) = 4 or 5, this setting for KEYOPT(9) will
also ignore the initial force in open-gap springs, thus creating an initially "perfect" contacting
surface having no initial forces acting across the contact interface.
For problems such as an interference fit, over-penetration is expected. These problems often have
convergence difficulties if the initial penetration is step-applied in the first load step. You may
overcome convergence difficulties by ramping the initial penetration over the first load step, see
Figure 3.22. The following KEYOPT(9) settings provide ramped capabilities:
To ramp the total initial penetration (CNOF + the offset due to geometry), set KEYOPT(9) =
2.
To ramp the defined contact surface penetration, but ignore the penetration due to
geometry, set KEYOPT(9) = 4.
For both of the above KEYOPT(9) settings, you should also set KBC,0 and not specify any external
loads in the first load step. Also, be sure that the pinball region is big enough to capture the initial
interference.
By default, the ramping options are active only within the first load step. However, you may have a
situation where there are multiple interference fits that you want to model sequentially (that is, the
interference present in each contact pair will be resolved in different load steps). You can define
the load step number in which the ramping option will take place for a given contact pair by using
the real constant STRM. For example, you may want to perform a different loading in load step 1,
then resolve an interference fit in load step 2 for one contact pair, and finally resolve an
interference fit in load step 3 for another contact pair. To accomplish this, you would set STRM = 2
for the first contact pair and set STRM = 3 for the second contact pair. Note that contact will still
be active prior to the load step specified by the STRM real constant.
You can use the above techniques in conjunction with each other. For example, you may wish to set a
very precise initial penetration or gap but the initial coordinates of the finite element nodes may not be
able to provide sufficient precision. To accomplish this, you could:
1. Use ICONT to move the initial open contact points just onto the target surface.
2. Use CNOF to specify a penetration (positive value) or gap (negative value).
3. Use KEYOPT(9) = 3 to resolve the initial penetration in the first substep (or KEYOPT(9) = 4 to
gradually resolve the initial penetration).
Figure3.20Ignoring Initial Penetration, KEYOPT(9) = 1
Figure3.21Components of True Penetration
Figure3.22Ramping Initial Interference
ANSYS provides a printout (in the output window or file or via the CNCHECK) of the model's initial
contact state for each target surface at the beginning of the analysis. This information is helpful for
determining the maximum penetration or minimum gap for each target surface.
If no contact is detected for a specific target surface, ANSYS issues a warning. This occurs when the
target surface is far from contact (i.e., outside of the pinball region), or when the contact/target
elements have been killed.
See Positive and Negative Real Constants for more information on these real constants.
3.9.8.Physically Moving Contact Nodes Towards the Target Surface

You can adjust the initial contact status in order to close the gap by doing one of the following:
(a) Define an initial contact adjustment via real constant ICONT. (ICONT may change the shape of the
contact detection surface.)
(b) Define a contact offset via real constant CNOF. (CNOF does not change the shape of the contact
detection surface.)
(c) Ignore the penetration by setting KEYOPT(9) = 1. (KEYOPT(9) = 1 does change the shape of the
contact detection surface.)
However, these adjustment methods do not truly change the physical locations of contact nodes; rather,
the contact detection locations are adjusted.
The initial adjustment due to (a) is applied only once in the beginning of the contact analysis, where
each contact detection point within the ICONT range is made to be in initial contact with the target
surface. The contact adjustments due to (b) and (c) offset the entire contact detection surface to close
any gap that is present. In doing so, methods (b) and (c) introduce a "rigid region" between the contact
and target surfaces during the entire analysis, which can cause a certain amount of residual force if a
large rotation appears at the contact surface. This problem can be alleviated by issuing the
CNCHECK,ADJUST command, which physically moves contact nodes towards the target surface under
the following circumstances:
Only when using the nodal detection option (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2), or when using CONTA175 or
CONTA177, or when using CONTA176 with KEYOPT(3) = 0 (parallel beams).
Initially open contact nodes inside the ICONT zone.
Initially penetrated nodes with KEYOPT(9) = 1.
After issuing the CNCHECK,ADJUST command, the coordinates of the nodes that have been moved are
modified as shown in Figure 3.23. You can change other contact related settings in PREP7 (for example,
set KEYOPT(4) = 0 to use the Gauss detection option) and save the Jobname.DB file. Issuing the SAVE
command before issuing the CNCHECK,ADJUST command is recommended in order to resume the
Jobname.DB file with the original contact configuration.
For those contact pairs whose contact nodes you do not wish to physically move towards target surface,
do not define KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2.
Figure3.23Effect of Moving Contact Nodes
3.9.9.Determining Contact Status and the Pinball Region

3.9.9.1.Background
The position and motion of a contact element relative to its associated target surface determines the
contact element status. ANSYS monitors each contact element and assigns a status:
STAT = 0 Open far-field contact (open and not near contact)
STAT = 1 Open near-field contact
STAT = 2 Sliding contact
STAT = 3 Sticking contact
A contact element is considered to be in near-field contact when its integration points (Gauss points or
nodal points) are within a code-calculated (or user-defined) distance to the corresponding target
surface. This distance is referred to as the pinball region. The pinball region is a circle (in 2-D) or a
sphere (in 3-D) centered about the Gauss point.
3.9.9.2.Using PINB
Use real constant PINB to specify a scaling factor (positive value for PINB when using command input)
or absolute value (negative value for PINB when using command input) for the pinball region. You can
specify PINB to have any value. By default, and assuming that large deflection effects apply
(NLGEOM,ON), ANSYS defines the pinball region as a circle for 2-D or a sphere for 3-D of radius
4*depth (if rigid-to-flexible contact) or 2*depth (if flexible-to-flexible contact) of the underlying element.
(See the discussion of element depth in Positive and Negative Real Constant Values.) If you include no
large-deflection effects (NLGEOM,OFF), the default pinball region is half that of the large-deflection
case. (For the no-separation (KEYOPT(12) = 4) and bonded-always (KEYOPT(12) = 5 options, the PINB
default is different than described here. See Selecting Surface Interaction Models for more information.)
Note: If you input a value for real constant CNOF (contact surface offset) and the default
PINB value (as described above) is less than the absolute value of CNOF, the
default for PINB will be set to the absolute value of (1.1*CNOF).
The computational cost of searching for contact depends on the size of the pinball region. Far-field
contact (open and not near contact) element calculations are simple and add little computational
demands. The near-field calculations (for contact elements that are nearly or actually in contact) are
slower and more complex. The most complex calculations occur once the elements are in actual contact.
Setting a proper pinball region is useful to overcome spurious contact definitions if the target surface
has several convex regions. However, the default setting should be appropriate for most contact
problems.
Note: The program will warn you when there is an abrupt change in status (for example,
from far-field to closed) during a contact analysis. This may indicate that the
substep increment is too large, or possibly (but not likely) that the pinball value
(PINB) is too small.
See Positive and Negative Real Constants for more information on this real constant.
3.9.10.Avoiding Spurious Contact in Self Contact Problems

In some cases of self contact, ANSYS may erroneously assume contact between a contact and target
surface that are in very close geometrical position as shown below.
Figure3.24Auto Spurious Prevention
ANSYS will alert you when it first detects spurious contact in each load step. If ANSYS encounters such
contact on the first load step, you'll see the following error message:
Contact element x has too much penetration related to target element y. We
assume it (may be more elements) is spurious contact.
If ANSYS encounters an abrupt change in contact that it classifies as spurious contact, you'll see the
following message:
Contact element x status changed abruptly with target element y. We assume
it (may be more elements) is spurious contact.
ANSYS issues such messages only once per load step. It does not notify you of additional cases of
spurious contact that were ignored during the load step.
3.9.11.Selecting Surface Interaction Models

3.9.11.1.Background
The surface-to-surface contact elements support normal unilateral contact models as well as other
mechanical surface interaction models.
Use KEYOPT(12) to model different contact surface behaviors.
KEYOPT(12) = 0 models standard unilateral contact; that is, normal pressure equals zero if
separation occurs.
KEYOPT(12) = 1 models perfectly rough frictional contact where there is no sliding. This case
corresponds to an infinite friction coefficient and ignores the material property MU.
KEYOPT(12) = 2 models no separation contact, in which the target and contact surfaces are tied
(although sliding is permitted) for the remainder of the analysis once contact is established.
KEYOPT(12) = 3 models "bonded" contact, in which the target and contact surfaces are bonded in
all directions (once contact is established) for the remainder of the analysis.
KEYOPT(12) = 4 models no separation contact, in which contact detection points that are either
initially inside the pinball region or that once involve contact always attach to the target surface
along the normal direction to the contact surface (sliding is permitted).
KEYOPT(12) = 5 models bonded contact, in which contact detection points that are either initially
inside the pinball region or that once involve contact always attach to the target surface along the
normal and tangent directions to the contact surface (fully bonded).
KEYOPT(12) = 6 models bonded contact, in which the contact detection points that are initially in a
closed state will remain attached to the target surface and the contact detection points that are
initially in an open state will remain open throughout the analysis.
For all types of bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6), separation of contact can be modeled
using the debonding feature. For more information, see Debonding.
For the no-separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4) and the bonded-always option (KEYOPT(12) = 5), a
relatively small PINB value (pinball region) may be used to prevent any false contact. For these
KEYOPT(12) settings, the default for PINB is 0.25 (25% of the contact depth) for small deformation
analysis (NLGEOM,OFF) and 0.5 (50% of the contact depth) for large deformation analysis
(NLGEOM,ON). (The default PINB value may differ from what is described here if CNOF is input. See
Using PINB for more information.)
For the bonded-initial option (KEYOPT(12) = 6), a relatively large ICONT value (initial contact closure)
may be used to capture the contact. For this KEYOPT(12) setting, the default for ICONT is 0.05 (5% of
the contact depth) when KEYOPT(5) = 0 or 4.
See Positive and Negative Real Constants for more information on the real constants mentioned above.
Note: For bonded contact definitions (KYEOPT(12) = 5 or 6), if the contact is not in a
just touching position, you may find that no zero modes appear for free vibration.
To avoid this issue, use the MPC approach instead of other contact algorithms.
3.9.11.3.Using FKOP
The FKOP real constant can be used in two different ways, depending on the surface interaction model
used. For no separation or bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 2 through 6), FKOP is the stiffness factor
applied when contact opens. For standard or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0 or 1), FKOP represents a
contact damping coefficient.
When modeling either no-separation or bonded contact, you may need to set a value for FKOP to apply
a stiffness factor when contact opens. If FKOP is a scaling factor (positive value for command input), the
true contact opening stiffness equals FKOP times the contact stiffness applied when contact closes. If
FKOP is an absolute value (negative value for command input), the value is applied as an absolute
contact opening stiffness. The default FKOP value is 1.
No separation and bonded contact generate a "pull-back" force when contact opening occurs, and that
force may not completely prevent separation. To reduce separation, define a larger value for FKOP. Also,
in some cases separation is expected while connection between the contacting surfaces is required to
prevent rigid body motion. In such instances, you can specify a small value for FKOP to maintain the
connection between the contact surfaces (this is a "weak spring" effect).
For standard contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0) or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 1), you can use FKOP to define
a contact damping coefficient. This option is primarily used to damp relative motions between the
contact and target surfaces for open contact. It provides certain resistance to reduce the risk of rigid
body motion. The damping force is calculated by
where Vrel is the slip rate and Ac is the area domain of the contact surface. The units of the damping
coefficient are FORCE/(AREA*VELOCITY). For the contact force-based model, the units are
FORCE/VELOCITY. To specify the contact damping coefficient, enter a negative number for FKOP.
Positive input will be ignored.
3.9.11.4.Bonded Contact for Shell-Shell Assemblies

The bonded contact options (KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6) can be used with the MPC approach (KEYOPT(2) =
2) to model various types of assemblies (see Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies ). When this method
is used to model shell-shell assemblies, there may be cases where the MPC approach causes the model
to be overconstrained. To alleviate this problem, you can use a penalty-based method for shell-shell
assemblies. Using the penalty-based method constrains rotational DOFs in addition to translational
DOFs. This capability is available for contact elements CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175 in
conjunction with TARGE170.
To use this method, first set KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1 (augmented Lagrangian or penalty function) and
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 (bonded always or bonded initial contact) in the contact elements. Setting
KEYOPT(5) = 2 (shell-shell constraint) for the target elements will cause this penalty-based method to
be used.
The penalty stiffness used for rotational DOFs is equal to (contact stiffness used for translational DOFs)
* (contact length). The contact stiffness for translational DOFs is input by real constant FKN, or defaults
to an internal value. The contact length is always calculated internally and it is printed in the output file.
The figure below shows the difference in using a conventional penalty-based shell-shell assembly and
this method.
Figure3.25Penalty-Based Shell-Shell Assembly
Note: In the case of a penalty-based shell-shell assembly, spurious rotational energy

exists if there are gaps or penetrations between the contact and target surfaces.
This can affect the accuracy of the solution. In this case it is recommended that
you use a shell-solid constraint type by setting KEYOPT(5) = 3, 4, or 5 on the
target element, which requires use of the MPC algorithm (KEYOPT(2) = 2 on the
contact element).
3.9.12.Modeling Contact with Superelements

3.9.12.1.Background
The surface-to-surface contact elements can model a rigid body (or one linear elastic body) contacting
another linear elastic body undergoing small motions. These elastic bodies can be modeled using
superelements, which greatly reduces the number of degrees of freedom involved in the contact
iteration. Remember that any contact or target nodes must be either all master nodes of the
superelements or all slave nodes of the superelements. When the contact pair is built in original
elements used to generate superelements, the contact status will not change from its initial status.
Because the superelement consists only of a group of retained nodal degrees of freedom, it has no
surface geometry on which ANSYS can define a contact and target surface. Therefore, the contact and
target surface must be defined on the surface of the original elements before they are assembled into a
superelement. Information taken from the superelement includes nodal connection and assembly
stiffness, but no material property or stress states (whether axisymmetric, plane stress, or plane strain).
One restriction is that the material property set used for the contact elements must be the same as the
one used for the original elements before they were assembled into superelements.
Use KEYOPT(3) to provide information for the 2-D analysis with superelements. In elements CONTA171
and CONTA172, the options are as follows:
No superelement used (KEYOPT(3) = 0)
Axisymmetric, use with superelements only (KEYOPT(3) = 1)
Plane strain or plane stress with unit thickness, use with superelements only (KEYOPT(3) = 2)
Plane stress with thickness input use with superelements only (KEYOPT(3) = 3). Note that for this
case, use real constant R2 to specify the thickness.
In 3-D contact analysis, KEYOPT(3) in elements CONTA173 and CONTA174 is ignored. ANSYS will
automatically detect whether the underlying element is a superelement.
Note: KEYOPT(3) has different meanings in the node-to surface contact element,
CONTA175, and in the line-to-line contact element, CONTA176. KEYOPT(3) is not
used for the line-to-surface contact element, CONTA177.
For CONTA175, KEYOPT(3) = 1 defines the contact traction-based model. In this
case, all of the real constant inputs and contact result quantities have the same
units as the surface-to-surface contact elements. KEYOPT(3) = 0 (default) defines
the contact force model. In this model, certain real constants and contact result
quantities can have different units (a factor of AREA (Length2 ) difference). See
KEYOPT(3).
For CONTA176, KEYOPT(3) specifies the type of beam-to-beam contact. See
Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis.
3.9.13.Accounting for Thickness Effect

3.9.13.1.Background
You can account for the thickness of shells (2-D and 3-D) and beams (2-D) using KEYOPT(11). (This
does not apply to 3-D beam-to-beam contact.) For rigid-to-flexible contact, ANSYS will automatically
shift the contact surface to the bottom or top of the shell/beam surface. For flexible-to-flexible contact,
ANSYS will automatically shift both the contact and target surfaces which are attached to shell/beam
elements. By default, ANSYS does not account for the element thickness, and beams and shells are
discretized at their mid-surface in which penetration distance is calculated from the mid-surface.
When you set KEYOPT(11) = 1 to account for beam or shell thickness, the contact distance is calculated
from either the top or the bottom surface as specified previously in Steps in a Contact Analysis.
Note: Only use KEYOPT(11) = 1 to account for thickness when you have shell or beam
elements with nodes located at the middle surface.
When building your model geometry, if you are going to account for thickness, remember the offsets
which may come from either the contact surface or target surface or from both. When you specify a
contact offset (CNOF) along with setting KEYOPT(11) = 1, it is defined from the top or bottom of the
shell/beam, not the mid-surface. When used with SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, SHELL281, or
ELBOW290, changes in thickness during deformation are also taken into account.
Note that KEYOPT(11) is not used with the line-to-line contact element (CONTA176). For the line-tosurface contact element (CONTA177) KEYOPT(11) is only used for shell elements on the target side.
Note: For shell and beam contact, the penetration and gap distances are always
measured from the midsurface of the shell or beam element. Any defined offset of
the shell or beam element is ignored by the contact elements.
3.9.14.Using Time Step Control and Impact Constraints

3.9.14.1.Background
Time step control is an automatic time stepping feature that predicts when the status of a contact
element will change and cuts the current time step back.
Impact constraints are used in a transient dynamic analysis to satisfy the momentum and energy
balance at the contact and target interface. See Dynamic Contact and Impact Modeling for more
information.
Use KEYOPT(7) = 0, 1, 2, or 3 to control time stepping, where KEYOPT(7) = 0 provides no control (the
default), and KEYOPT(7) = 3 provides the most control.
KEYOPT(7) = 0: No control. The time step size is unaffected by the prediction. This setting is
appropriate for most analyses when automatic time stepping is activated and a small time step size
is allowed.
KEYOPT(7) = 1: Time step size is bisected if too much penetration occurs during an iteration, or if
the contact status changes dramatically.
KEYOPT(7) = 2: Predict a reasonable increment for the next substep.
KEYOPT(7) = 3: Predict a minimal time increment for the next substep.
Use KEYOPT(7) = 4 to activate impact constraints.
KEYOPT(7) = 4: Use impact constraints for standard or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0 or 1) in a
transient dynamic analysis with automatic adjustment of the time increment.
3.9.15.Using the Birth and Death Option

The surface-to-surface contact and target elements allow birth and death and also follow the birth and
death status of their underlying elements. The elements can be removed for part of an analysis and then
reactivated for a later stage. This feature is useful for modeling complex metal forming processes where
multiple rigid target surfaces need to interact with the contact surface at different stages of the analysis.
Springback modeling often requires removing the rigid tools at the end of the forming processes. This
option cannot be used with "no separation" or bonded contact.
3.10.Controlling the Motion of the Rigid Target Surface

Rigid target surfaces are defined in their original configuration, and the motion of the entire surface is
then defined by the motion on the pilot node (or the different nodes of the target surface if no pilot
node was defined).
You must use a pilot node in any of the following situations to control the boundary conditions (and
motion) of the entire target surface:
The target surface is subjected to applied forces.
The target surface is subjected to rotations.
The target surface is connected to other elements (e.g., structural mass element MASS21).
The motion of the target surface is adjusted by the equilibrium condition.
When modelling surface-based constraints or a rigid body.
The degrees of freedom of the pilot node represent the motion of the entire rigid surface, including two
translational and one rotational degree of freedom in 2-D, and three translational and three rotational
degrees of freedom in 3-D. You can apply boundary conditions (displacement, initial velocity),
concentrated loads, rotations, etc. to the pilot node. To account for a rigid body's mass, define a mass
element (MASS21) on the pilot node. You can also define a follower element (FOLLW201) on the pilot
node; the element-specified external forces and moments will follow the motion of the pilot node.
By default, KEYOPT(2) = 0 for the target element, ANSYS checks the boundary conditions for each
target surface. If all of the following conditions are met, then ANSYS treats the target nodes along the
respective degree of freedom as fixed:
There are no explicit boundary conditions or prescribed forces for target surface nodes.
Target surface nodes are not connected to other elements.
Neither constraint equations nor node coupling have been used to constrain such nodes.
At the end of each load step, ANSYS releases the constraint conditions that were set internally.
The constraint conditions stored in the results file ( Jobname.RST) and the database file ( Jobname.DB ) may
be updated due to this change. You should carefully verify whether the current constraint conditions are
expected before restarting an analysis or resolving the problem in interactive mode.
If you wish, you can control the constraint conditions of target nodes by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 in the
target element definition.
Keep in mind the following restrictions on the target surface when using a pilot node:
Each target surface can have only one pilot node.
The pilot node can be one of the nodes on the target elements or a node at any arbitrary location.
However, it should not be a node on the contact element. The location of the pilot node becomes
important only when rotations or moments are to be applied. For each pilot node, ANSYS will
automatically define an internal node and an internal constraint equation. The rotational DOF of
the pilot node is connected to the translational DOF of the internal node by the internal constraint
equation. Generally, you should not apply external constraint equations (CE) or node coupling
(CP) to the pilot node.
ANSYS ignores all boundary conditions on all nodes other than the pilot node when KEYOPT(2) = 0
(default) for the target elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_moritar.html[28/04/2013 09:24:00 p.m.]
When KEYOPT(2) = 0 (default), only the pilot node can connect to other elements.
target nodes rather than only on the pilot node. In this case, it is your responsibility to make sure
the rigid target surface is not under-constrained or over-constrained. It is still recommended that
you apply all boundary conditions on the pilot node, even when KEYOPT(2) = 1.
Note: For flexible-to-flexible contact, no special boundary conditions treatment is
performed, and KEYOPT(2) = 0 should be used.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_moritar.html[28/04/2013 09:24:00 p.m.]
3.11. Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions to the Deformable Elements
3.11.Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions to the Deformable

Elements
You can now apply any necessary boundary conditions as you would for any ANSYS analysis. For more
information on applying boundary conditions, see the appropriate analysis descriptions in the Structural
Analysis Guide .
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_bcdefel.html[28/04/2013 09:24:15 p.m.]
3.12.Applying Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads

Pressure-penetration loads can simulate surrounding fluid or air penetrating into the contact interface,
based on the contact status. You can apply pressure-penetration loads to flexible-to-flexible or rigid-toflexible contact pairs. 2-D and 3-D surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA173, CONTA174) support pressure-penetration loading.
Fluid pressure can penetrate into the contact interface from one or multiple locations. The fluid pressurepenetration load has a path dependent nature. The penetrating path can propagate and vary, and it will
be determined iteratively. At the beginning of each iteration, ANSYS first detects starting points which
are exposed to the fluid pressure. Among the starting points, ANSYS then finds fluid penetrating points
where the contact status is open or lost, or where the contact pressure is smaller than the user defined
pressure-penetration criterion. When a contact detection point has a contact condition of penetrating,
it is subjected to the fluid pressure, and its nearest neighboring nodes are considered to be the starting
points which are exposed to the fluid pressure as well.
The fluid pressure will not be applied to an area having a contact status of open unless the edges/ends
of the area belong to the starting points.
Figure3.26Path Dependent Fluid Penetration Loading
The fluid pressure starts to penetrate into the interface between contact and target surfaces from the
penetrating points. The fluid penetration can be cut off when contact between the surfaces is
reestablished or when contact pressure is larger than the fluid penetration criterion.
To model fluid penetration loads, you need to specify the following quantities:
fluid pressure
fluid penetration starting points
fluid penetration criterion
fluid penetration acting time
An example analysis showing how to apply fluid penetrating loading is presented in AppendixA.
3.12.1.Applying Fluid Penetration Pressure

The fluid pressure must be applied to contact and target elements using the SFE command:
SFE,ELEM,1,PRES,,VAL1,VAL2,VAL3,VAL4
The pressure is applied only on the corner nodes of the contact and target elements. The pressure on
the midside nodes of CONTA172, CONTA174, TARGE169, and TARGE170 will be averaged using the
pressures of two adjacent corner nodes. VAL3 and VAL4 are not used for 2-D contact and target
elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecfluidpress.html[28/04/2013 09:24:32 p.m.]
Pressure value VALi , which is applied to the ith node (where i = 1, 2, 3, 4 indicates node I, J, K, L,
respectively) of the contact or target element, can be a constant numerical value or a table name. If it
is constant, the magnitude of pressure will be step-applied or ramped based on the KBC command
setting. To specify a table, enclose the table name in percent signs (for example, %tabname%). Use the
*DIM command to define the table. Only one table can be specified, and it must be specified in the
VAL1 position; tables specified in the VAL2 , VAL3 , and VAL4 positions will be ignored.
The fluid pressure-penetration load will be automatically applied to the penetrating points on contact
and target surfaces based on the contact status.
By default (KEYOPT(14) = 0 on the contact element), the fluid pressure-penetration load varies during
iterations based on the current contact status. In certain cases, the default can cause an unstable
convergence pattern since the contact status and the resulting applied fluid penetration load keep
changing during iterations.
When KEYOPT(14) = 1, the fluid pressure-penetration load will be applied to the contact and target
elements at the beginning of each substep and will remain constant over that substep even if the
contact status keeps changing during iterations. Small increments are often needed to obtain accurate
results.
Keep the following points in mind when defining fluid penetration loads:
For flexible-to-flexible contact with a symmetric contact pair definition (including a self-contact
pair), you should apply the fluid pressure only to the contact elements.
For flexible-to-flexible contact with an asymmetric contact pair definition, you should generally
apply fluid pressure on both contact and target elements which are currently or will potentially be
exposed to the surrounding fluid. ANSYS will ignore fluid penetration loads applied to a target
surface if there are no fluid penetration loads applied to the associated contact surface within the
contact pair. When the fluid pressures are applied to both contact and target elements, ANSYS will
have to identify the penetration paths for both the contact surface and the target surface. The
iterative process of determining the penetration path on the target surface is very time-consuming,
particularly for 3-D contact models. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you use a symmetric
contact pair definition since it does not require the specification of fluid penetration pressure on
the target surface.
For rigid-to-flexible contact, you should apply the fluid pressure only to the contact elements.
ANSYS will automatically apply equivalent forces to the rigid target surface to balance out the
applied pressure on the contact surface. Fluid pressure applied to the rigid target surface will be
ignored.
For situations in which multiple contact pairs are defined on the same surface, contact elements
may overlap each other. In this case, be careful to apply the fluid penetration pressure only once
in areas where contact elements overlap.
The fluid penetration pressure can only be applied to the contact and target elements using the
SFE command. Other pressure load commands (SF, SFL, SFA) can not be used. In addition, you
should not apply the pressure on the underlying elements.
ANSYS ignores any fluid penetration pressures applied to MPC based contact pairs.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included. If an unsymmetric matrix is
needed to achieve convergence for pressure load stiffness effects, issue the NROPT,UNSYM
command.
3.12.2.Specifying Fluid Penetration Starting Points

When a fluid pressure-penetration load is applied, the fluid pressure penetrates to the surface from
defined starting points. There can be one or multiple starting points. ANSYS will automatically find the
default starting points by selecting free end points of 2-D contact/target surfaces or nodes of free open
edges on 3-D contact/target surfaces ("free" meaning that the element is not fully surrounded by
adjacent elements; see figure below).
Figure3.27Free End Points (2-D) and Free Open Edges (3-D)
The starting points are initially exposed to the fluid and are potentially subjected to the penetration
pressure. There are no default starting points if the contact or target surface is continuous with a closed
loop. The default starting points can be overwritten using the SFE command. You can specify starting
points, specify penetrating points, and remove the default starting points with the SFE command and
STAi values, as described below. Be sure to set LKEY = 2 on the SFE command in order to specify the
STAi settings. The command format is:
SFE,ELEM,2,PRES,,STA1,STA2,STA3,STA4
ANSYS determines whether the ith node is a starting point based on the contact
status. The ith node can be a default starting point if the node is a 2-D free point or is
on a 3-D free edge.
STAi = 1 The ith node is the starting point which is initially exposed to the fluid. It can be a
penetrating point if the initial contact status is "open." The node may no-longer be the
starting point when the contact status changes during the deformation process.
STAi = 2 The ith node is a penetrating point. The node is always subjected to the fluid pressure
in spite of any contact status change.
STAi = -1 The ith node will not be a default starting point even though it belongs to a 2-D free
point or a 3-D free edge node.
STAi = 0
(default)
Note: If only STA1 is specified and the other STAi values are blank, STA2 , STA3 , and STA4
will default to STA1 .
3.12.3.Specifying a Pressure-Penetration Criterion

You can specify a pressure-penetration criterion using the contact element real constant PPCN. When
the contact pressure is less than the criterion, the starting point turns into the penetrating point; that is,
fluid pressure starts to penetrate. Thus, a higher criterion value will allow the fluid to penetrate more
easily. When the contact pressure is greater than the criterion, the penetrating point returns back to the
starting point; that is, fluid penetration is cut off. By default, the penetration criterion (PPCN) is zero. In
this case the fluid penetration occurs only when the contact is open, and the cutoff of fluid penetration
occurs only when the contact is reestablished.
You can input PPCN as a constant value or as a table of values. The tabular input can be a function of
contact point current location (global X , Y, Z), contact pressure, time, or temperature. To input a table
name, you must enclose the name in % symbols (for example, %tabnam%). Use the *DIM command
to define the table.
3.12.4.Specifying a Fluid Penetration Acting Time

When the fluid pressure penetration occurs, the fluid pressure is applied normal to the contact/target
surfaces. As with conventional pressure loading, the current amount of fluid pressure at a given substep
will depend on whether the pressure is input as a constant value or a table of values, and whether the
pressure is ramp- or step-applied (KBC command). If the total amount of fluid pressure is applied
instantaneously, convergence difficulties may arise due to large changes in stresses near the contact
interface. This is also true when the fluid penetration pressure is removed instantaneously, as when the
fluid penetration is cut off. To help stabilize the solution, ANSYS offers an option to ramp the fluid
pressure linearly over a time period, during one or several substeps.
To implement this ramping option, specify the fluid penetration acting time using the contact element
real constant FPAT. Input a positive number to define the fraction of the time increment of the load
step; input a negative number to define the absolute acting time. The default penetration acting time is
0.01 times the time increment of the current load step.
At each penetrating point, if the time increment of the current substep is less than the fluid penetration
acting time (FPAT > (t n - t n-1 )), the fluid pressure is ramped up linearly from the actual applied pressure
of the previous substep to the full current amount of the fluid pressure over the penetration acting time
period; otherwise (FPAT (t n - t n-1 )), the full amount of current fluid pressure will be applied. (See
figures below.) At the pressure-penetration cutoff points, if the time increment of the current substep is
less than the fluid penetration acting time, the fluid pressure is ramped down linearly from the applied
pressure of the previous substep to a zero magnitude over the penetration acting time period; otherwise,
the fluid pressure will be immediately removed.
Figure3.28Fluid Penetration Acting Time (FPAT) Greater Than Substep
Figure3.29Fluid Penetration Acting Time (FPAT) Less Than Substep
3.12.5.Redefining or Modifying the Pressure-Penetration Loads

You can redefine or modify fluid pressure-penetration loads and fluid penetration starting points
between load steps using the SFE command.
You can also modify the pressure-penetration criterion (real constant PPCN) and acting time (real
constant FPAT) using the RMODIF command.
To remove a fluid pressure-penetration load, use one of the following methods:
Delete the pressure load using the SFEDELE command.
Apply zero pressure using the SFE command.
Deactivate the contact elements using the EKILL command.
Because these methods remove the fluid penetration pressure immediately, convergence difficulties may
occur. To avoid this problem you can add an extra load step which applies a small fluid pressure (for
example, VALi = 1e-8) via the SFE command instead of removing the pressure.
3.12.6.Postprocessing Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads

You can list and display the actual fluid penetration pressure applied on contact and target elements
using FPRS as a contact result item on the PLNSOL, PLESOL, PRNSOL, and PRESOL commands. For
example:
PLESOL,CONT,FPRS
PLNSOL,CONT,FPRS
You can also list and display the fluid penetration pressure applied on target elements by using the
ETABLE command.
3.13.Defining Solution and Load Step Options

Convergence behavior for contact problems depends strongly on the particular problem. The options
listed below are either typical or recommended for most surface-to-surface contact analyses. Please see
the Command Reference for further details.
The time step size must be small enough to capture the proper contact zone. The smooth transfer of
contact forces is disrupted if the time step size is too large. The time step size is specified by a number
of substeps or the time step size itself. The following commands adjust these parameters.
Command(s):
GUI:
Command(s):
GUI:
NSUBST
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq
and Substps
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time
and Substps
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab)
Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substps
Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps
DELTIM
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> TimeTime Step
Time/Frequenc>Time-Time Step
Note: A reliable way to set an accurate time step size is to turn automatic time stepping
on.
The following options are automatically invoked, but may override them if needed.
Command(s):
GUI:
AUTOTS,ON
Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step or Time and Substps
If the contact status changes during the iteration process, discontinuity can occur. To avoid a slow
convergence rate and use an updated stiffness matrix, set the Newton-Raphson option to FULL.
Command(s):
GUI:
NROPT,FULL,,OFF
Also, do not use adaptive descent. Adaptive descent usually does not provide any help for surface-tosurface contact applications, and we recommend turning it off.
In cases where frictional sliding dominates, set the unsymmetric solver option (NROPT, UNSYM,,OFF) to
avoid slow convergence or divergence.
Set the number of equilibrium equations to a number that is appropriate for a reasonable time step size.
This command defaults to between 15 and 26 iterations, depending upon the physics of the problem.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_soluops.html[28/04/2013 09:24:59 p.m.]
Command(s):
GUI:
NEQIT
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Nonlinear Tab)
Equilibrium Iter
Because the iterations tend to become unstable for large increments, use the line search option to
stabilize the calculations.
Command(s):
GUI:
LNSRCH
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Line
Search
Turn the predictor-corrector option on, except for dynamic analyses.

Command(s):
GUI:
PRED
Predictor
Many convergence failures in contact analyses are the result of using too large a value for contact
stiffness (real constant FKN). Be sure to follow the recommendations given earlier in this chapter for
estimating contact stiffness. If such estimated values lead to a convergence failure, reduce the contact
stiffness and restart.
Conversely, if overpenetration occurs in your contact analysis, you probably need a larger value of FKN.
In this case, gradually increase the contact stiffness value to an appropriate level by redefining it using
RMODIF commands over several load steps in a restart.
Note: For most small strains, small displacements, and small sliding problems, set
NLGEOM, OFF. This setting will speed up the searching time; however, if the
contact problem involves large sliding, set NLGEOM, ON.
Note: By default, displacement (U) and rotation (ROT) convergence checking are not
active. Issue the CNVTOL,U or CNVTOL,ROT command to add displacement or
rotation convergence checking, if necessary.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_soluops.html[28/04/2013 09:24:59 p.m.]
3.14. Solving the Problem
3.14.Solving the Problem

You can now solve the analysis the same as you would for any nonlinear analysis. Keep the following
points in mind:
Always check the real constant sets which are related to contact pairs and check the constraint
conditions on the target surfaces. Any previous "trial runs" could have changed the settings.
Always check the target surface contact status in the beginning of the analysis. If you detect any
unexpected gap (or no contact) or overestimated penetration, abort the analysis and then check
your geometric model. You can issue the CNCHECK command to verify the initial contact status.
If your model is experiencing convergence difficulties due to contact, use the NLHIST command
as a debugging tool to monitor contact information during the solution. Before starting the
solution, issue NLHIST to specify the pair-based contact items (such as contact penetration or
gap, contact normal stiffness, etc.) to be tracked. The resulting data are written to a file named
Jobname.nlh.
NLDIAG,CONT can also be used to monitor contact information. When turned on, this feature will
track the same contact information available through NLHIST for all defined contact pairs
according to the specified writing frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step). The resulting
output is stored in a text file called Jobname.cnd.
Always check your results carefully using standard engineering guidelines.
See Solve the Analysis in the Structural Analysis Guide .
If you are restarting a contact analysis, follow the normal restart procedures as discussed in Restarting
an Analysis in the Basic Analysis Guide . However, be aware that the constraint conditions of target
surfaces may have been set internally. Verify the constraints carefully before restarting an analysis. Only
the real constants FKN, FTOLN, PINB, and FKOP can be changed, and they can only be changed at the
point of restart or at the beginning of a new load step.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_solvpro.html[28/04/2013 09:25:11 p.m.]
Chapter 4: Node-to-Surface Contact
Chapter4:Node-to-Surface Contact
You can use the node-to-surface contact element CONTA175 to model flexible-flexible or rigid-flexible
contact between a surface and a node. Additionally, you can use these elements to represent contact
between two surfaces by specifying one surface as a group of nodes.
Node-to-surface contact is a phenomenon that occurs in most engineering applications: fasteners (nuts,
bolts, rivets, pins), metal forming, rolling operations, dynamic pipe whip, etc. Engineers are interested in
the stresses, deflections, forces, and temperature changes that occur due to contact between structural
parts.
The following node-to-surface contact topics are available:
The Node-to-Surface Contact Element
Performing a Node-to-Surface Contact Analysis
Using CONTA175 for Multiphysics Contact
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_nodsurf.html[28/04/2013 09:25:29 p.m.]
4.1. The Node-to-Surface Contact Element
4.1.The Node-to-Surface Contact Element

Node-to-surface contact is represented in the ANSYS program by following the positions of points on
one surface (the contact surface, modeled by CONTA175) relative to lines or areas of another surface
(the target surface, modeled by TARGE169 or TARGE170).
CONTA175, in two or three dimensions, is depicted in Figure 4.1.
Figure4.1Node-to-Surface Contact Elements
Presented below are characteristics of CONTA175:

Has one node and its target surface is defined by TARGE169 or TARGE170. CONTA175 uses the
same real constant set as the surface-to-surface contact elements. See Real Constants for more
information.
Supports 2-D/3-D rigid-flexible and flexible-flexible contact.
Does not support 3-D contact surfaces with midside nodes, but can support 2-D/3-D target
surfaces with midside nodes or 2-D contact surfaces with midside nodes.
Generates elements using the ESURF command, as do the surface-to-surface contact elements.
Supports structural, thermal, electric, and magnetic analyses.
Note: CONTA175 is recommended for point-to-surface or edge-to-surface problems. It
can also be used to supplement a surface-to-surface pair at strategic locations
where edge contact exists. For general surface-to-surface contact, CONTA171
through CONTA174 are recommended.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_usendsu.html[28/04/2013 09:25:39 p.m.]
4.2.Performing a Node-to-Surface Contact Analysis

CONTA175 follows the contact pair concept used by surface-to-surface elements CONTA171 through
CONTA174. CONTA175 is paired off with target elements TARGE169 and TARGE170. See Identifying
Contact Pairs for more information. CONTA175 uses most of the same element KEYOPTS and real
constants as the surface-to-surface contact elements. These are described below.
You should avoid midside-noded underlying elements of the contact surface, especially in 3-D. The
effective stiffness at the contact surface nodes is very nonuniform. For instance, for a 20-node brick
(SOLID186), the corner nodes have a negative stiffness associated with them. However, the node-tosurface contact algorithm assumes that the stiffness is uniformly distributed across all the surface nodes
when contact is made. This condition can lead to convergence difficulties when using midside-noded
elements in contact. The midside-noded elements can only be used when bonded or no-separation
contact is defined. You can still use midside nodes on 2-D contact surfaces or on 2-D/3-D target
surfaces.
The basic steps for performing a node-to-surface contact analysis using CONTA175 are the same as
those used for a typical surface-to-surface analysis using CONTA171 through CONTA174. See Steps in a
Contact Analysis for details.
The Contact Manager provides an easy-to-use interface to help you construct and manage contact
definitions. You can access the manager via the Contact Manager icon in the ANSYS Standard
Toolbar, or via the menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Contact Pair. See
GUI Aids for Contact Analyses for more information on using the Contact Manager.
As mentioned, CONTA175 uses the ESURF command to generate elements between corresponding
contact pairs, similar to the surface-to-surface contact elements. The GUI path is:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Surf/Contact> Node to Surf
Since CONTA175 is a one node element, you are not able to plot the contact results. However, you can
list the results using the PRESOL,CONT or PRETAB commands.
4.2.1.CONTA175 KEYOPTS
CONTA175 uses most of the same KEYOPTS that are used by the surface-to-surface contact elements
CONTA171 through CONTA174. KEYOPT(3) and KEYOPT(4) are used but have different meanings when
used with CONTA175. See Element KEYOPTS for a listing of the remaining KEYOPTS.
4.2.1.1.KEYOPT(3)
KEYOPT(3) in CONTA175 allows you to choose between a contact force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0,
default), and a contact traction-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 1). For the contact traction-based model,
ANSYS can determine the area associated with the contact node. For the single point contact case, a
unit area will be used which is equivalent to the contact force-based model.
When the traction-based model is defined, the real constants FKN, FKT, TCC, ECC, and MCC have the
same units used in surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171 through CONTA174), as do
postprocessing items PRES, TAUR, and TAUS.
When the force-based model is defined, the units of these quantities have a factor of AREA with respect
to those used in the traction-based model. For instance, contact stiffness FKN has units FORCE/LENGTH
for the force-based model, but FORCE/LENGTH3 for the traction-based model. PRES is the contact
normal force in the force-based model, but contact pressure in the traction-based model.
4.2.1.2.KEYOPT(4)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_perndsu.html[28/04/2013 09:26:09 p.m.]
KEYOPT(4) in CONTA175 allows you to choose the contact normal direction. The contact normal can be
either perpendicular to the target surface (KEYOPT(4) = 0, default or KEYOPT(4) = 3), or perpendicular
to the contact surface (KEYOPT(4) = 1, 2). When contact occurs on the bottom surface of a shell or
beam, and shell thickness effect is included (KEYOPT(11) = 1), or CNOF is defined, KEYOPT(4) = 2 or 3
should be used in order to capture the contact.
Real constant TOLS is used to add a small tolerance that will internally extend the edge of the target
surface. TOLS is useful for problems where contact nodes are likely to lie on the edge of the target (as
at symmetry planes or for models generated in a node-to-node contact pattern). In these situations, the
contact node may repeatedly slip off the target surface and so completely out of contact, resulting in
convergence difficulties from oscillations.
Units for TOLS are percent (1.0 implies a 1.0% increase in the target edge length). A small value of
TOLS will usually prevent this situation from occurring. The default value is 10 for small deflection and 2
for large deflection (NLGEOM,ON).
4.2.2.CONTA175 Real Constants

CONTA175 uses the same real constants used by the surface-to-surface contact elements CONTA171
through CONTA174), except the units of TCC, ECC, and MCC for the contact force-based model. See a
listing of the real constants in Real Constants.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_perndsu.html[28/04/2013 09:26:09 p.m.]
4.3. Using CONTA175 for Multiphysics Contact
4.3.Using CONTA175 for Multiphysics Contact

You can use node-to-surface contact element CONTA175 to model thermal contact, electric contact, and
magnetic contact as you would use the surface-to-surface contact elements. For multiphysics contact,
we recommend that you use the contact traction-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 1), which allows you to
use real constants TCC, ECC, and MCC consistently with the surface-to-surface contact elements.
If you use the contact force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0), you should adjust the values of TCC, ECC,
and MCC up or down as you make the element mesh coarser or finer.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_usemulti.html[28/04/2013 09:26:38 p.m.]
7.1.Modeling Thermal Contact

You can use surface-to-surface contact elements and the node-to-surface contact element, in
combination with thermal-structural coupled field solid elements or thermal elements, to model heat
transfer that occurs in the contact surface. To activate both the structural and thermal DOFs, set
KEYOPT(1) = 1. To activate the thermal DOF only, set KEYOPT(1) = 2.
The following thermal contact features are supported.
Thermal contact conduction between two contacting surfaces.
Heat convection from a free surface to the environment or between two open surfaces separated
by small gap (near field convection).
Heat radiation from a free surface to the environment or between two open surfaces separated
by a small gap (near field radiation).
Heat generation due to frictional dissipation.
Heat flux input.
Note: When KEYOPT(1) is set to 2 (thermal DOF only), ANSYS ignores heat generation
due to friction.
7.1.1.Thermal Contact Behavior vs. Contact Status

Each contact pair can cover one or more thermal contact features. Which feature is active depends on
the contact status:
Closed Contact: Thermal contact conduction transfers heat between two contacting surfaces.
Frictional Sliding: Frictional dissipated energy generates the heat to both the contact and target
surfaces.
Near-Field Contact: Both heat convection and radiation between the contact and target surfaces are
taken into account. The external flux value contributes to the contact surface.
Free-Surface Contact: Heat convection and radiation between the contact surface and the
environment are taken into account. The external flux value only contributes to both contact and target
surfaces. Free-surface contact refers to either far-field contact or a user-specified free thermal
surface (KEYOPT(3) = 1 on the target element).
7.1.2.Free Thermal Surface

If you wish to model free surface convection, free surface radiation, or a surface with a supplied heat
flux value, you can define a free thermal surface. A free thermal surface can be a contact surface with
no associated target (that is, the contact pair lacks target elements). You can also set KEYOPT(3) = 1 of
the target element type definition to define a free thermal surface. When this KEYOPT is set, both free
surface radiation and convection are considered as long as open contact is detected. In this case, there
is no convective and radiative heat transfer between the contact and target surfaces.
7.1.3.Temperature on Target Surface

For interface heat conduction, near field convection, or near field radiation, a temperature for both the
contact and target surfaces is required. For a general target surface, the temperature varies along the
surface (see figure below). In this case, the temperature at the intersection between the target surface
and the normal from the contact detection point represents the target temperature. For a rigid target,
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_thercon.html[28/04/2013 09:26:45 p.m.]
the temperature on the pilot node represents the entire rigid target surface temperature, if the pilot
node exists.
Figure7.1Target Temperature
7.1.4.Modeling Conduction
To take into account the conductive heat transfer between contact and target surfaces, you need to
specify the thermal contact conductance coefficient which is real constant TCC.
7.1.4.1.Using TCC
The conductive heat transfer between two contacting surfaces is defined by
q = TCC X (T t -T c)
where:
q: is the heat flux per area.
TCC: is the thermal contact conductance coefficient, having units of HEAT/(TIME * TEMPERATURE) for
force-based node-to-surface contact, or units of HEAT/(TIME * TEMPERATURE * AREA) for the tractionbased model.
Tt and Tc: are the temperatures of the contact points on the target and contact surfaces.
The TCC value is input through a real constant, which can be made a function of temperature [(Tc +
T t )/2], pressure, time, and location by using the %TABLE% option. TCC has units of heat/(time x area x
temp). If contact occurs, a small value of TCC yields a measure amount of imperfect contact and a
temperature discontinuity across the interface. For large values of TCC, the resulting temperature
discontinuity tends to vanish and perfect thermal contact is approached. When not in contact, however,
it is assumed that no heat is transferred across the interface. To model contact conduction between two
surfaces where a small gap exists, use KEYOPT(12) = 4 or 5 to define either the bonded contact or
no-separation contact options (see Selecting Surface Interaction Models).
7.1.4.2.Using the Quasi Solver Option

You can take advantage of the fast thermal transient solver option (THOPT,QUASI) in the contact
analysis. (See Nonlinear Options in the Thermal Analysis Guide for more information on this solver
option.) To do so, you must use the following contact element key options:
KEYOPT(1) = 2 - Temperature DOF only
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 - Bonded always or bonded initial
The following solver options must also be set:
ANTYPE,TRANS
THOPT,QUASI
EQSLV,JCG/ICCG
The following two cases are supported:
Thermal conductivity at contact. The only real constant used is TCC, which can be a function of
time and temperature.
Perfect thermal contact which supports dissimilar meshes on both sides of the contacting interface
(TCC = infinity). This case requires the internal MPC approach (KEYOPT(2) = 2) and contact nodal
detections (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2) or CONTA175.
7.1.5.Modeling Convection
To model convective heat transfer, you must specify the heat convection coefficient CONV using the
SFE command (with KVAL = 1 and CONV as a table parameter). CONV can be a constant value (only
uniform is allowed) or a function of temperature, time, or location as specified through tabular input. For
free surface convection (see Thermal Contact Behavior vs. Contact Status for a definition of freesurface contact), you must also specify bulk temperature through the SFE command (with KVAL = 2
and CONV as a table parameter). You can access this command through the following GUI paths:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Thermal> Convection> On
Elements> Uniform
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Thermal> Convection> On Elements>
Uniform
The SFE surface load must be applied to the contact elements only. If either the convection coefficient
or bulk temperature is not specified, the convection loading will not be active.
7.1.6.Modeling Radiation
7.1.6.1.Background
To model radiative heat transfer, you need to specify the following:
Emissivity value EMIS, specified through the material property definition.
Stefan-Boltzmann constant SBCT through a real constant.
Offset temperature TOFFST. If you define your data in terms of degrees Fahrenheit or degrees
Celsius, you must specify a temperature offset using the TOFFST command. You can access this
command through the following GUI paths:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props
Radiation view factor RDVF, specified through a real constant (defaults to 1).
Environment (ambient) temperature. It is only used for modeling radiation between a portion of
the contact surface to the environment when the contact status is free-surface contact (see
Thermal Contact Behavior vs. Contact Status). The temperature is only applied on the contact
elements and is input on the SFE command with KVAL = 2 and CONV as a table parameter (this is
the same as the bulk temperature in free surface convection modeling). If the environment
temperature is not specified through the SFE command, the free surface radiation loading will not
be active.
7.1.6.2.Using SBCT and RDVF

When contact is open, heat transfer through radiation can occur. The equation is defined by
q = RDVF x EMIS x SBCT [(Te + TOFFST)4 - (T c + TOFFST)4 ]
Where
TOFFST: The temperature offset from absolute zero to zero (defined through the
TOFFST command.)
EMIS : The surface emissivity (input as material property).
SBCT : The Stefan-Boltzmann constant (input as a real constant). There is no default for SBCT, and if
this is not defined the radiation effect is excluded.
RDVF: The radiation view factor input as a real constant (defaults to 1). RDVF can be defined as a
function of temperature, gap distance, time, and location by using the %TABLE% option. It is only used
for near field radiation. For far field radiation, RDVF is set to 1.0 and a user-assigned value is ignored.
Other free-surface conditions recognize user-specified RDVF.
For near-field radiation, when an intersection from a contact detection point to the target surface (in
the direction of normal to the contact point) is detected, and the gap distance is smaller than the pinball
radius, T e is the target temperature at the intersection. The radiation modeling here assumes that the
radiative heat transfer occurs in the direction of the normal between two surfaces with a small gap. By
defining RDVF as a function of gap, you can account for geometry effects. Use the Radiosity Solver
method for more generalized radiation problems (see the Thermal Analysis Guide for more information).
For free-surface contact radiation, T e becomes the ambient temperature defined by bulk
temperature input on the SFE command (with KVAL = 2 and CONV as the table). For a definition of
free-surface contact, see Thermal Contact Behavior vs. Contact Status.
7.1.7.Modeling Heat Generation Due to Friction

7.1.7.1.Background
In order to model heat generation due to frictional dissipated energy, you should perform a coupled
transient thermal-structural analysis. If you wish you can turn off transient effects on structural DOFs by
using TIMINT,STRUC,OFF. However, you must include transient effects on the thermal DOF. Two real
constants are required:
FHTG is the frictional dissipated energy converted into heat.
FWGT is the weight factor for the distribution of heat between contact and target surfaces.
7.1.7.2.Using FHTG and FWGT

In the coupled thermal-structural contact modeling, the rate of frictional dissipation is given by
q = FHTG x x V
Where
: The equivalent frictional stress.

V: The sliding rate.
FHTG : The fraction of frictional dissipated energy converted into heat. This value defaults to 1 and can
be input as a real constant. For an input of true 0, you must enter a very small value (for example, 1E8). If you enter 0, ANSYS interprets this as an input of the default value.
The amount of frictional dissipation on contact and target surfaces is defined by
qc = FWGT x FHTG x x V
and
qT = (1 - FWGT) x FHTG x x V
Where qc is the contact side and qT is the target side, and FWGT is the weight factor for the distribution
of heat between the contact and target surfaces (input as a real constant). By default, FWGT = 0.5. For
an input of true 0, you must enter a very small value (for example, 1E-8). If you enter 0, ANSYS
interprets this as an input of the default value.
7.1.8.Modeling External Heat Flux

You can apply heat flux on the contact elements through the SFE command. Only uniform flux can be
applied. Heat flux cannot be applied on target elements. However, for near field contact, the external
flux is applied on contact and will contribute to target elements.
For a free thermal surface, if KEYOPT(3) of the target element is set to 1, the external flux is only
applied on the contact side. On a given contact element either CONV or HFLUX (but not both) may be
specified. However, you can define two different contact pairs: one models convection and the other
models heat flux.
Chapter 5: 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact
Chapter5:3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact

Contact between beams undergoing large displacements can be encountered in many practical
applications. Some examples are hydrogen sensors, water supply lines, nuclear power plant piping, cable
wires and coils, woven fabrics, and tennis racquet strings. You can model 2-D beam-to-beam contact by
using 2-D surface-to-surface contact elements, CONTA171 and CONTA172. (See Surface-to-Surface
Contact for details on how to use these elements.) You can model 3-D beam-to-beam contact by using
the 3-D line-to-line contact element, CONTA176.
The following beam-to-beam contact topics are available:
The 3-D Line-to-Line Contact Element
Modeling Beam-to-Beam Contact
Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecbeambeamcont.html[28/04/2013 09:27:04 p.m.]
5.1. The 3-D Line-to-Line Contact Element
5.1.The 3-D Line-to-Line Contact Element

3-D line-to-line contact is represented in the ANSYS program by following the positions of lines on the
contact surface, modeled by CONTA176 elements, relative to lines on the target surface, modeled by
TARGE170 elements. Line-to-line contact in three dimensions is depicted in the figure below.
Figure5.1Line-to-Line Contact Elements
The CONTA176 element type:

Has two nodes or three nodes.
Is paired with a target surface defined by TARGE170 elements.
Uses the same real constant set as used for the surface-to-surface contact elements. See Real
Constants for more information.
Supports 3-D rigid-flexible and flexible-flexible contact.
Supports 3-D beams and pipes with or without midside nodes.
Can be generated by the ESURF command, similar to the surface-to-surface contact elements.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/cteclinelinecont.html[28/04/2013 09:27:13 p.m.]
5.2.Modeling Beam-to-Beam Contact

There are three different scenarios for 3-D beam-to-beam contact:
Internal contact, where one beam slides inside another hollow beam (Figure 5.2).
External contact, where two beams are roughly parallel and contact each other along their outer
surfaces (Figure 5.3).
External contact, where contact between the exterior surfaces of two beams is pointwise (Figure
5.4).
Figure5.2Internal Contact (One Beam Sliding Inside Another)
Figure5.3External Contact (Two Beams Roughly Parallel)
Figure5.4External Contact (Two Beams Cross Each Other)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecmodbeambeam.html[28/04/2013 09:27:42 p.m.]
For all three scenarios shown above, use 3-D line segments (straight line or parabola) to define the
target surface (TARGE170). You can attach the contact elements and target elements to 3-D beams or
pipes, which can be first or second order elements. Both flexible-flexible and rigid-flexible contact
between two beams can be considered.
When modeling internal contact, the inner beam (or pipe) should usually be considered the contact
surface and the outer beam (or pipe) should be the target surface. The inner beam can be considered
as the target surface only when the inner beam is much stiffer than the outer beam. When modeling
external contact, the target surface should be associated with the stiffer beam or with the beam having
the coarser mesh.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecmodbeambeam.html[28/04/2013 09:27:42 p.m.]
5.3.Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis

Contact element CONTA176 follows the contact pair concept used by the surface-to-surface elements
(CONTA171 through CONTA174). You must pair CONTA176 with 3-D target line segments (TARGE170)
to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact. See Identifying Contact Pairs for more information. CONTA176
uses most of the same element KEYOPTs and real constants as the surface-to-surface contact elements.
Any differences are described in the next section.
The basic steps for performing a 3-D beam-to-beam contact analysis are the same as those used for a
typical surface-to-surface analysis using CONTA171 through CONTA174. See Steps in a Contact Analysis
for details.
Use the ESURF command to generate CONTA176 elements between corresponding contact pairs. (In
the GUI, pick Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Surf/Contact> Surf
to Surf.) This procedure is similar to that used for the surface-to-surface contact elements. If the
underlying elements of target element TARGE170 are part of shell edges, use ESURF,,,LINE to generate
3-D line or parabola target segments.
When using the line segments to form the target surface or using line-to-line contact elements to form
the contact surface, the nodes must be entered in a sequence that defines a continuous line, as shown
in the figure below.
Figure5.5Continuous Line Segments
The line can be made up of linear or parabolic segments, depending on whether the attached beam is
made up of first order or second order elements. If the nodal ordering of the underlying beam elements
is not consistent, you must either change them by reversing the node number order of the selected
elements (ESURF,,REVERSE command) or make a consistent element ordering (ENORM command).
You can list the CONTA176 results using the PRESOL,CONT or PRETAB commands. Since CONTA176 is
a 3-D line element, you can also use the PLLS command to display element table items.
5.3.1.KEYOPTs and Real Constants

CONTA176 uses most of the same KEYOPTs that are used by the surface-to-surface contact elements,
CONTA171 through CONTA174. KEYOPT(3) and KEYOPT(4) differ from the other contact elements, and
KEYOPT(11) is not used by CONTA176. See Element KEYOPTS for a listing of the remaining KEYOPTs.
CONTA176 uses the same real constants used by the surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171
through CONTA174), except for the units of FKN and FKT. See a listing of the real constants in Real
Constants.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctec3dbeamanal.html[28/04/2013 09:28:06 p.m.]
5.3.1.1.Real Constants R1, R2

For beam-to-beam contact, an important assumption is that of constant circular beam cross section. The
contact radius is assumed to be the same for all CONTA176 elements in the contact pair. Likewise, the
target radius is assumed to be the same for all TARGE170 elements in the contact pair. You supply the
target and contact radii through real constants R1 and R2, respectively.
For a general beam cross section, you can use an equivalent circular beam in the contact definition (see
figure below). Use these guideline to define the equivalent circular cross section:
Determine the smallest cross section along the beam axis.
Determine the largest circle embedded in that cross section.
Figure5.6Equivalent Circular Cross Section
Use the first real constant, R1, to define the radius on the target side (target radius rt ). Use the second
real constant, R2, to define the radius on the contact side (contact radius rc).
The contact radius R2 is always a positive number. The target radius R1 can be entered as either a
negative or positive value. Use a negative value when modeling internal contact (a beam or pipe sliding
within another beam or pipe), with the input value equal to the inner radius of the outer beam. Use a
positive value when modeling external contact between the exterior surfaces of two cylindrical beams.
For beam-to-beam contact, the thickness effect is accounted for through the contact and target radii.
Therefore, KEYOPT(11) (which is used for the surface-to-surface contact elements to include or exclude
thickness effects) is not used for CONTA176.
5.3.1.2.KEYOPT(3)
For CONTA176, KEYOPT(3) determines the type of beam-to-beam contact as follows:
Use KEYOPT(3) = 0 to model external contact between parallel beams or internal contact between
beams (a beam inside a hollow beam or a pipe inside a pipe). For this case, the sign of the target
radius, R1, will determine whether you are modeling parallel beams (R1 > 0) or a beam inside a
beam (R1 < 0).
Use KEYOPT(3) = 1 to model beams that cross. The target radius must be a positive value.
5.3.1.3.Real Constants FKN and FKT

CONTA176 uses the contact force-based model. The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor
of AREA with respect to those used in the surface-to-surface contact elements. For instance, contact
stiffness FKN has units of FORCE/LENGTH in the force-based model, but FORCE/LENGTH3 in the surfaceto-surface contact elements. PRES is the contact normal force in the force based model, but contact
pressure in CONTA171 to CONTA174.
5.3.1.4.Real Constant TOLS

For CONTA176, the contact normal is uniquely defined and is perpendicular to both the contact and the
target surfaces (two contacting beams). Real constant TOLS is used to add a small tolerance that will
internally extend the edge of the target surface. TOLS is useful for problems where contact nodes are
likely to lie on the edge of the target (as at symmetry planes or for models generated in a node-to-node
contact pattern). In these situations, the contact node may repeatedly slip off the target surface and be
completely out of contact, resulting in convergence difficulties from oscillations.
5.3.1.5.KEYOPT(4)
You can use CONTA176 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach (KEYOPT(2) = 2) to define
surface-based constraints. The KEYOPT(4) setting will determine the type of surface-based constraint.
Set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint, or set KEYOPT(4) = 0 for a rigid surface
constraint. See Surface-based Constraints for more information.
Chapter 6: Line-to-Surface Contact
Chapter6:Line-to-Surface Contact
You can use the 3-D line-to-surface contact element, CONTA177, to model flexible-flexible or rigidflexible contact between a 3-D beam and a surface or between a shell edge and a surface.
The following line-to-surface contact topics are available:
The 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Element
Performing a 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/cteclinesurfcont.html[28/04/2013 09:28:23 p.m.]
6.1. The 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Element
6.1.The 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Element

3-D line-to-surface contact is represented in the ANSYS program by following the positions of lines on
the contact surface, modeled by CONTA177 elements, relative to 3-D surface segments on the target
surface, modeled by TARGE170 elements. Line-to-surface contact in three dimensions is depicted in the
figure below.
Figure6.1Line-to-Surface Contact Elements
The CONTA177 element type:

Has two nodes or three nodes.
Is paired with a target surface defined by TARGE170 elements.
Uses the same real constant set as used for the surface-to-surface contact elements. See Real
Constants for more information.
Supports 3-D rigid-flexible and flexible-flexible contact.
Supports 3-D beams and shell edges with or without midside nodes.
Can be generated by the ESURF command (similar to the surface-to-surface contact elements) in
many cases. See Performing a 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Analysis for details.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/cteclinesurfelem.html[28/04/2013 09:28:28 p.m.]
6.2.Performing a 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact Analysis

Contact element CONTA177 follows the contact pair concept used by the surface-to-surface elements
(CONTA171 through CONTA174). You must pair CONTA177 with 3-D target surface segments
(TARGE170) to model 3-D beam-to-surface or 3-D shell edge-to-surface contact. See Identifying
Contact Pairs for more information. CONTA177 uses most of the same element KEYOPTs and real
constants as the surface-to-surface contact elements. Any differences are described in the next section.
The basic steps for performing a 3-D line-to-surface contact analysis are the same as those used for a
typical surface-to-surface analysis using CONTA171 through CONTA174. See Steps in a Contact Analysis
for details.
When the underlying elements are beams or edges of shell elements you can use the ESURF command
to create CONTA177 elements. (In the GUI, pick Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Elements> Surf/Contact> Surf to Surf.) This procedure is similar to that used for the surface-tosurface contact elements.
When using line-to-surface contact elements to form the contact surface, the nodes must be entered in
a sequence that defines a continuous line, as shown in the figure below.
Figure6.2Continuous Line Segments
The line can be made up of linear or parabolic segments, depending on whether the attached beam or
shell edge is made up of first order or second order elements. If the nodal ordering of the underlying
beam elements is not consistent, you must either change them by reversing the node number order of
the selected elements (ESURF,,REVERSE command) or make a consistent element ordering (ENORM
command).
You can list the CONTA177 results using the PRESOL,CONT or PRETAB commands. Since CONTA177 is
a 3-D line element, you can also use the PLLS command to display element table items.
6.2.1.KEYOPTs and Real Constants

CONTA177 uses most of the same KEYOPTs that are used by the surface-to-surface contact elements,
CONTA171 through CONTA174. KEYOPT(4) differs from the other contact elements. KEYOPT(3) and
KEYOPT(8) are not used by CONTA177. See Element KEYOPTS for a listing of the remaining KEYOPTs.
CONTA177 uses the same real constants used by the surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171
through CONTA174), except for the units of FKN and FKT. See Real Constants for a complete list.
6.2.1.1.Real Constants FKN and FKT
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/cteclinesurfanal.html[28/04/2013 09:28:50 p.m.]
CONTA177 uses the contact force-based model. (Since this is the only model used for this element,
KEYOPT(3) is not used.) The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor of AREA with respect to
those used in the surface-to-surface contact elements. For instance, contact stiffness FKN has units of
FORCE/LENGTH in the force-based model, but FORCE/LENGTH3 in the surface-to-surface contact
elements. PRES is the contact normal force in the force based model, but contact pressure in CONTA171
to CONTA174.
6.2.1.2.Accounting for Thickness Effect (CNOF and KEYOPT(11))

For line-to-surface contact, the thickness effect of underlying beam elements (on the contact side) is
accounted for through the contact offset real constant, CNOF. The thickness effect of underlying shell
elements (on the target side) is accounted for by setting KEYOPT(11).
For the case of a beam contacting a solid, input half of the beam thickness for CNOF; KEYOPT(11) is
ignored. For the case of a beam contacting a shell surface, input half of the beam thickness for CNOF
and set KEYOPT(11) = 1 to include the shell thickness effect. CNOF remains constant for the entire
contact pair during the solution. For more information on using CNOF, see Adjusting Initial Contact
Conditions. For more information on using KEYOPT(11), see Using KEYOPT(11).
6.2.1.3.Real Constant TOLS

For CONTA177, the contact normal is uniquely defined and is perpendicular to the target surfaces. Real
constant TOLS is used to add a small tolerance that will internally extend the edge of the target surface.
TOLS is useful for problems where contact nodes are likely to lie on the edge of the target (as at
symmetry planes or for models generated in a node-to-node contact pattern). In these situations, the
contact node may repeatedly slip off the target surface and be completely out of contact, resulting in
convergence difficulties from oscillations.
6.2.1.4.KEYOPT(4)
You can use CONTA177 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach (KEYOPT(2) = 2) to define
surface-based constraints. The KEYOPT(4) setting will determine the type of surface-based constraint.
Set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint, or set KEYOPT(4) = 0 for a rigid surface
constraint. See Surface-based Constraints for more information.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/cteclinesurfanal.html[28/04/2013 09:28:50 p.m.]
Chapter 7: Multiphysics Contact
Chapter7:Multiphysics Contact
Multiphysics applications (involving two or more fields) often require the inclusion of contact interaction
between two or more surfaces or between a surface and its surroundings. These contact interactions
can be modeled by using the thermal, electric, and magnetic capabiities of the surface-to-surface and
node-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175) .
The following multiphysics contact topics are available:
Modeling Thermal Contact
Modeling Electric Contact
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_multiph.html[28/04/2013 09:29:16 p.m.]
7.2.Modeling Electric Contact

You can use surface-to-surface contact elements or the node-to-surface contact element, in combination
with thermal-electric elements and solid coupled field elements to model electric current conduction. You
can also use surface-to-surface contact elements, in combination with piezoelectric and electrostatic
elements, to model electric charge across a contacting interface.
KEYOPT(1) provides degree of freedom options for modeling electric contact. For combined
structural/thermal/electric contact, set KEYOPT(1) = 3 to activate the structural, thermal, and electric
current DOFs. For pure thermal/electric contact, set KEYOPT(1) = 4 to activate the thermal and electric
current DOFs. For piezoelectric contact, set KEYOPT(1) = 5 to activate the structural and piezoelectric
DOFs. For electrostatic contact, set KEYOPT(1) = 6 to activate the electrostatic DOF.
The electric contact features are:
Electric conduction between two contacting surfaces.
Heat generation due to electric dissipation.
Electric charge across the contacting interface.
7.2.1.Modeling Surface Interaction

7.2.1.1.Background
To take into account the surface interaction for electric contact, you need to specify the electric contact
conductance per unit area if you are using the electric current degree of freedom, or the electric contact
capacitance per unit area if you are using the piezoelectric or electrostatic degrees of freedom. For either
case, this parameter is ECC. You specify ECC through a real constant table. You can use a tabular input
to define ECC as a function of contact pressure (pressure as a table), average temperature on contact
detection point (temperature as a table), and time. If the bonded contact or no-separation contact
option is set, contact interaction can occur between two surfaces separated by a narrow gap.
7.2.1.2.Using ECC
The interaction between two contacting surfaces is defined by
J = ECC x (Vt - Vc)
where:
J = current density for the electric potential (VOLT) degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4), or the
electric charge density (KEYOPT(1) = 5, or 6).
ECC = electric contact conductance for the electric potential (VOLT) degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 3
or 4), or the electric contact capacitance per unit area for (KEYOPT(1) = 5, or 6).
Vt and Vc = voltages at the contact points on the target and contact surfaces.
The ECC value is input through a real constant, which can be a function of temperature [(Tt + T c)/2],
pressure, and time, by using the %TABLE% option. For the current conduction option, the electric
contact conductance ECC has units of electric conductivity/length. For the piezoelectric and electrostatic
options, the electric contact capacitance ECC has units of capacitance per unit area. To model surface
interaction between two surfaces where a small gap exists, use KEYOPT(12) = 4 or 5 to define either
the bonded contact or no-separation contact options (see Selecting Surface Interaction Models).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_eleccon.html[28/04/2013 09:29:25 p.m.]
Note: For force-based node-to-surface contact, ECC has units of (electric

conductivity)*(LENGTH) or the capacitance.
7.2.2.Modeling Heat Generation Due to Electric Current

For electric current field analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4), the heat generation due to electric current is
given by
q = FHEG x J x (VT - VC)

Where
FHEG: The fraction of electric dissipated energy converted into heat (Joule heating). This value defaults
to 1 and can be input as a real constant. For an input of true 0, you must enter a very small value (for
example, 1E-8). If you enter 0, ANSYS interprets this as an input of the default value.
J: The current density.
Vt and Vc: The voltages at the contact points on the target and contact surfaces.
The amount of electric heat dissipation on contact and target surfaces is defined by
qc = FWGT x q
and
qT = (1 - FWGT) x q
Where qc is the contact side and qT is the target side, and FWGT is the weight factor for the contact
heat dissipation between the contact and target surfaces (input as a real constant). FWGT is the same
real constant used for frictional heat generation. By default, FWGT = 0.5. For an input of true 0, you
must enter a very small value (for example, 1E-8). If you enter 0, ANSYS interprets this as an input of
the default value.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_eleccon.html[28/04/2013 09:29:25 p.m.]
7.3.Modeling Magnetic Contact

You can use surface-to-surface contact elements or the node-to-surface contact element to model
magnetic flux across two contacted bodies. The following situations are possible.
Non-perfect contact to account for the effects of a small air gap between mating components. This
typically occurs at the interface between adjoining bodies. In this situation, there is a gap
permeance effect where an MMF drop occurs. You can model this effect by inputting the gap
permeance real constant, MCC. This option works best if the magnetic flux is normal to the gap
interface.
Perfect contact across dissimilar meshes. This is typically used to model the air gap in a machine,
for example, where the rotor and stator meshes meet.
For both types of magnetic contact, you must set KEYOPT(1) = 7 to select the degree-of-freedom
option. For the 2-D case, the magnetic potential degree of fredom, AZ, is active. For the 3-D case, only
the scalar potential degree of freedom, MAG, is active, and scalar potential formulations (reduced (RSP),
difference (DSP), or general (GSP)) are available (see MAGOPT).
Note: 3-D magnetic contact is not supported for the MVP formulation (AX, AY, AZ), and
the edge-based formulation (AZ).
Note: Non-perfect magnetic contact is only available for the 3D contact elements,
CONTA173 and CONTA174.
For more information on which element types should be used for a particular analysis, see the element
discussions in the appropriate chapter of the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide . For
information on the use of the AZ degree of freedom, see Specifying Element Types and Options. For
more information on the use of the MAG DOF, see Build the Model.
For details on how to set up a contact analysis, see Steps in a Contact Analysis.
For an example input listing showing a 2-D static magnetic contact analysis, see Doing an Example 2-D
Static Magnetic Contact Analysis (Command Method).
7.3.1.Using MCC
The magnetic flux across the contacting interface is defined by:
MFLUX = MCC x (M t - M c)
where:
MFLUX = magnetic flux density
M t , M c = magnetic potential at the contact points on the target and contact surfaces
MCC = contact permeance coefficient (Henries/meters2 in MKS units)
The MCC value is input through a real constant, which can be a function of temperature [(Tt + T c)/2],
pressure, and time, by using the %TABLE% option. MCC values can be approximated as /t, where is
the gap permeability and t is the gap width.
If the "no-separation contact" or "bonded contact" option is set (KEYOPT(12) = 4 or 5), contact
interaction can occur between two surfaces separated by a narrow gap.
7.3.2.Modeling Perfect Magnetic Contact

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_magcon.html[28/04/2013 09:29:58 p.m.]
Perfect magnetic contact supports dissimilar meshes on both sides of the contacting interface (MCC =
infinity). You must use the internal MPC approach by setting KEYOPT(2) = 2. You must also set
KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2 for contact nodal detection, and KEYOPT(12) = 5, 6 for bonded contact.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_magcon.html[28/04/2013 09:29:58 p.m.]
Chapter 8: Node-to-Node Contact
Chapter8:Node-to-Node Contact
You can use node-to-node contact elements to model point-to-point contact (flexible-flexible or rigidflexible). Additionally, you can use these elements to represent contact between two surfaces by
specifying individual node-to-node contact between the opposing nodes of each surface. This use
requires that the nodes of the two opposing surfaces match up geometrically and that the relative sliding
between the two surfaces is negligible. In addition, the deflections (rotations) of the two surfaces must
remain small.
The following node-to-node contact topics are available:
Node-to-Node Contact Elements
Performing a Node-to-Node Contact Analysis
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_nodnod.html[28/04/2013 09:30:25 p.m.]
8.1. Node-to-Node Contact Elements
8.1.Node-to-Node Contact Elements

The most commonly used node-to-node element is shown in the following figure.
Figure8.1Node-to-Node Contact Element
In terms of solution CPU time, the CONTA178 element shown is the simplest and least expensive of all
contact element types. When modeling conditions warrant its use, it can be an effective tool for
modeling a variety of contact situations. Following are some notable features offered with CONTA178:
Several contact algorithms, including the Lagrange method (KEYOPT(2))
Semiautomatic contact stiffness (real constants FKN-FKS)
Flexibility for defining contact normal
Many contact behaviors (KEYOPT(10))
Cylindrical gap with friction (KEYOPT(4) = 4)
Damper (real constants CV1, CV2)
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_ndndel.html[28/04/2013 09:30:37 p.m.]
8.2.Performing a Node-to-Node Contact Analysis

The procedure for performing a node-to-node contact analysis is similar to that described for the nodeto-surface contact elements in Node-to-Surface Contact. The following describes the typical steps in a
node-to-node contact analysis. Each of these steps is explained in detail.
1. Create the geometry and mesh the model.
2. Generate the contact elements.
3. Define the contact normal.
4. Define the initial interference or gap.
5. Select the contact algorithm.
6. Apply the necessary boundary conditions.
7. Define the solution options.
8. Solve the problem.
8.2.1.Creating Geometry and Meshing the Model

Node-to-node contact elements transmit forces at the nodes (compared to surface-to-surface contact
elements which transmit pressures at Gauss points). This feature limits their use to low order elements
only.
You must identify where contact might occur during the deformation of your model. The nodes on the
two surfaces of potential contact must line up. Once you've identified potential contact surfaces and
created an adequate mesh you can create the contact elements.
8.2.2.Generating Contact Elements

You can generate node-to-node contact element in one of two ways:
1. Use the direct generation method:
Command(s):
GUI:
E
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> User
Numbered> Thru Nodes
2. Use the EINTF command to generate the contact elements automatically at coincident nodes or
offset nodes. This is discussed in detail in the following subsections.
8.2.2.1.Generating Contact Elements Automatically at Coincident Nodes

If the two bodies are in the just touching position, you can use the EINTF command to automatically
generate the contact elements. In this case, the menu path is Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered> At Coincident Nodes. Only nodes within the
tolerance value set in the first argument ( TOLER) are considered as coincident. If you wish to check a
subset of nodes for coincidence, first select all the nodes you wish to check using the NSEL command.
8.2.2.2.Generating Contact Elements Automatically at Offset Nodes

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_pernono.html[28/04/2013 09:30:55 p.m.]
If the two bodies are separated by a gap, the EINTF command can be used to create elements between
offset nodes by specifying the node location increments (DX, DY, DZ) in the coordinate system KCN. The
GUI path is Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Offset Nodes.
If KOPT is set to 1, the nodes belonging to the contact elements created are rotated into the coordinate
system KCN.
For example, the following figure shows contact between two concentric pipes separated by a gap. In
this example, KCN would be a cylindrical coordinate system centered in O, and DX would be set in (
TOLER).
Figure8.2Contact Between Two Concentric Pipes
8.2.2.3.Node Ordering
Node ordering can be critical in determining the contact normal. You can use EINTF,,,LOW or
EINTF,,,HIGH to control node ordering. When using the LOW argument, the 2-node elements are
generated from the lowest numbered node to the highest numbered node. When using HIGH, 2-node
elements are generated from the highest to the lowest. To check the contact normal, use
/PSYMB,ESYS. If you discover that the ordering is incorrect, you can reverse it using EINTF,,,REVE. To
determine which side of the interface contains the I nodes, use the following commands:
ESEL,,ENAME,,178
NSLE,,POS,1
ESLN
NSLE
EPLOT
8.2.3.Defining the Contact Normal

The contact normal direction is of primary importance in a contact analysis with CONTA178. By default
[KEYOPT(5) = 0 and NX, NY, NZ = 0], ANSYS will calculate the contact normal direction based on the
initial positions of the I and J nodes, such that a positive displacement (in the element coordinate
system) of node J relative to node I opens the gap. However, you must specify the contact normal
direction for any of the following conditions:
If nodes I and J have the same initial coordinates.
If the model has an initial interference condition in which the underlying elements' geometry
overlaps.
If the initial open gap distance is very small.

In the above cases, the ordering of nodes I and J is critical. The correct contact normal usually points
from node I toward node J unless contact is initially overlapped.
You can specify the contact normal by means of real constants NX, NY, NZ (direction cosines related to
the global Cartesian system) or element KEYOPT(5). The following lists the various options for
KEYOPT(5):
KEYOPT(5) = 0
The contact normal is either based on the real constant values of NX, NY, NZ or on node locations
when NX, NY, NZ are not defined. For two dimensional contact, NZ = 0.
KEYOPT(5) = 1 (2,3)
The contact normal points in a direction which averages the direction cosines of the X (Y, Z) axis
of the nodal coordinates on both nodes I and J. The direction cosines on nodes I and J should be
very close. This option may be supported by the NORA and NORL commands, which rotate the X
axis of the nodal coordinate system to point to the surface normal of solid models. The GUI paths
for these commands are, respectively:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Rotate Node CS> To Surf
Normal> On Areas
Normal> On Lines
Normal> With Area
Figure8.3Two Concentric Pipes, Normals Rotated Properly
For a pipe-within-a-pipe, this portrays the normals rotated properly.

KEYOPT(5) = 4 (5,6)
The contact normal points to X (Y, Z) of the element coordinate system issued by the ESYS
command. If you use this option, make sure that the element coordinate system specified by
ESYS is the Cartesian system.
8.2.4.Defining the Initial Interference or Gap

With CONTA178, the gap size can be automatically calculated from the GAP real constant plus the node
locations (projection of vector points from node I to J on the contact normal). This is the default
(KEYOPT(4) = 0) This means that if you want the initial gap to be determined by the node locations
only, set KEYOPT(4) = 0 and the real constant GAP to 0.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, the initial gap size is only based on the real constant GAP (it ignores the node
location). A negative value for the gap size can be used to model initial interference.
You can ramp initial interference using KEYOPT(9) = 1.
8.2.5.Selecting the Contact Algorithm

You can choose from among the following contact algorithms for CONTA178:
Pure Lagrange Multiplier
Lagrange multiplier on the contact normal, penalty on the frictional (tangential) direction.
Augmented Lagrange method
Pure penalty method.
When using CONTA178 with the pure penalty method or the augmented Lagrange method, a
semiautomatic setting is provided for the contact normal and tangential stiffnesses.
ANSYS provides a default normal contact stiffness FKN, which is based on Young's modulus E and the
size of the underlying elements. FKN and FKS are factors. If you want to import absolute values for FKN
and FKS, use negative values.
8.2.6.Applying Necessary Boundary Conditions

You can now apply necessary boundary conditions as you would do for any ANSYS analysis. For more
information on applying boundary conditions, see the appropriate analysis description in the Structural
Analysis Guide .
When using the Lagrange multiplier method, be careful not to overconstrain the model. The model is
overconstrained when a contact constraint at a node conflicts with a prescribed boundary condition on
that degree of freedom at the same node. The following figure illustrates this issue:
Figure8.4Example of Overconstrained Contact Problem
Both nodes I and J are fixed in the X direction. The model is overconstrained only when the two bodies
are in contact and bonded contact or rough friction has been defined. It can also occur if the contact
status is sticking, In these cases, the constraint in the X-direction is duplicated which causes an
overconstrained model.
Zero Pivot and Numerical Singularity warning messages indicate overcontraints in a model.
Overconstraints can lead to convergence difficulties and/or inaccurate results. They can be easily
avoided by changing the contact definition or the boundary conditions.
8.2.7.Defining the Solution Options

Convergence behavior for contact problems depends strongly on the particular problem. The options
listed below are either typical or recommended for most node-to-node contact analyses.
Set the appropriate auto time step behavior using KEYOPT(7). The SOLCONTROL command turns
this off by default.

The time step size must be small enough to capture the proper contact zone. The smooth transfer
of contact forces is disrupted if the time step size is too large. A reliable way to set an accurate
time step size is to turn automatic time stepping on. The SOLCONTROL command turns this on by
default.
Command(s):
GUI:
AUTOTS,ON
Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step
Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps
Set the number of equilibrium equations to a number that is appropriate for a reasonable time step
size. With SOLCONTROL,ON, this command defaults to between 15 and 26 iterations, depending
upon the physics of the problem.
Command(s):
GUI:
NEQIT
Equilibrium Iter
Turn the predictor-corrector option on.

Command(s):
GUI:
PRED
Predictor
Set the Newton-Raphson option to FULL, with adaptive descent on.

Command(s):
GUI:
NROPT,FULL,,ON
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis
Options
For analysis involving friction, using NROPT, UNSYM is useful (and sometimes required if the
coefficient of friction is > 0.2) for problems where the normal and tangential (sliding) motions
are strongly coupled.
NLGEOM, ON is supported but the contact normal is not updated during the analysis. Make sure
that only small rotations occur along the contact surfaces (except for the cylindrical gap option).
Many convergence failures in contact analysis are the result of using too large a value for contact
stiffness (real constant KN). Be sure to follow the recommendations given previously in this section
for an initial estimate for contact stiffness. If such estimated values lead to a convergence failure,
reduce the contact stiffness and restart. (You must also explicitly define the tangent stiffness - see
the Note below.)
Conversely, if overpenetration occurred in your contact analysis, you probably used a value of KN
that was too small. In this case, gradually increase the contact stiffness value to an appropriate
level by redefining it using new R commands over several load steps in a restart. (You must also
explicitly define the tangent stiffness - see the Note statement below.)
Note: Although you can change the contact stiffness value (real constant KN), you cannot
change any other real constants between load steps. Therefore, if you plan to
change KN in a restart (or from one load step to the next), you cannot allow the
value of the tangent (or "sticking") contact stiffness (real constant KT) to be
defined by default, because the program would then attempt to redefine the
tangent stiffness as the contact stiffness changed. You must explicitly define the
tangent stiffness whenever you change the contact stiffness to maintain a
consistent value for the tangent stiffness throughout all load steps.
8.2.8.Solving the Problem

You can now solve the analysis the same as you would for any linear or nonlinear analysis. See Solve
the Analysis in the Structural Analysis Guide .
8.2.9.Reviewing the Results

Postprocessing of contact result items for these elements requires the use of ETABLE commands.
The steps for reviewing results in POST26 are the same as those for a typical nonlinear analysis See
Reviewing Results in POST26 in the Structural Analysis Guide .
For general information on postprocessing, refer to the Basic Analysis Guide .
9.1.Modeling Solid-Solid and Shell-Shell Assemblies

To define solid-solid or shell-shell assemblies using the internal MPC approach, you must set the
following key options on the contact elements:
KEYOPT(2) = 2
KEYOPT(12) = 4, 5, or 6
KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2
KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1
MPC based approach

No separation (see note below), bonded always, or bonded initial
Nodal detection for CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174
Contact normal direction for CONTA175
Note: When used with the MPC approach, the no separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4) is
only valid for modeling solid-solid assemblies that represent a slider line or slider
plane.
The following key options are ignored: KEYOPT(8) (it is always set to 2 internally), KEYOPT(10).
The following real constants are used: R1, R2, ICONT, PINB, CNOF, PMAX, PMIN, TOLS. All other real
constants are ignored.
This function works similarly to the CEINTF command for small deformation analysis (NLGEOM,OFF).
Comparing it to the CEINTF command, the contact surface acts as "region A nodes," and the target
surface acts as "region B elements."
The contact surface must be defined on the deformable bodies, and the target surface must be defined
on either deformable or rigid bodies in the contact pair. In order to prevent overconstraint, only
asymmetric contact is supported. If symmetric pairs are defined, ANSYS will automatically pick one pair
and ignore the other pair (acting as KEYOPT(8) = 2). The self-contact pair definition is not supported.
If the temperature degree of freedom is active in the model (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2), ANSYS will build MPC
equations not only for structural degrees of freedom, but also for the temperature DOF. In this case, the
real constant TCC is ignored. If only the temperature DOF is set (KEYOPT(1) = 2) and other solution
options are defined (ANTYPE,,TRANS; THOPT,QUASI; EQSLV,JCG/ICCG), the internal MPC approach
can support fast thermal transient analysis (see Nonlinear Options in the Thermal Analysis Guide ).
Internal MPC equations for temperature DOF are built to support heat transfer between the two bonded
surfaces.
For the bonded always option (KEYOPT(12) = 5) and no separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4), any
contact node that lies inside the pinball region (PINB) can be the constrained node in the MPC definition
if an intersection with the target surface is detected in the contact normal direction. This holds true at
the beginning of deformation, as well as during the deformation process. A relatively small PINB may be
used to prevent any false contact. When KEYOPT(12) is set to the bonded always or no separation
option, PINB defaults to 0.25 (25% of the contact depth) for small deformation analysis
(NLGEOM,OFF), and 0.5 (50% of the contact depth) for large deformation analysis (NLGEOM,ON).
(The default PINB value may differ from what is described here if CNOF is input. See Using PINB for
more information.)
For the "bonded initial" option (KEYOPT(12) = 6), only those contact nodes that are initially in contact
or have a very small gap but lie inside the adjustment zone (ICONT) are always constrained via internal
MPC. Those contact nodes that are initially open will never be constrained, even though they may later
penetrate into the target surface during the deformation process. In order to capture contact, you
should specify proper ICONT or CNOF values. Use CNCHECK in conjunction with ICONT to move all the
contact nodes that are inside the ICONT zone onto the target surface in the initial configuration, without
causing any strain. When the "bonded initial" option is set and KEYOPT(5) = 0 or 4, ICONT defaults to
0.05. See Adjusting Initial Contact Conditions for more information on using KEYOPT(5), CNOF, and
ICONT.
You can use KEYOPT(4) on the target element (TARGE169 or TARGE170) to control individual degrees
of freedom for the constraint. For example, if you are using TARGE170 elements with 3-D contact
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_solsol.html[28/04/2013 09:31:28 p.m.]
elements, you might specify that only UX, UY, and ROTZ be used in the constraint. You can do this by
entering a six digit value for KEYOPT(4). The first to sixth digits represent ROTZ, ROTY, ROTX, UZ, UY,
UX, respectively. The number 1 (one) indicates the DOF is active, and the number 0 (zero) indicates the
DOF is not active. Therefore, to specify that UX, UY, and ROTZ be used in the constraint, you would
enter 100011 as the KEYOPT(4) value.
For the 3-D case, you can also use KEYOPT(5) of the target element (TARGE170) to explicitly define the
type of constraint. In most cases, ANSYS will automatically constrain the translational degrees of
freedom for a solid-solid assembly and constrain both translational and rotational degrees of freedom for
a shell-shell assembly. The constraint types available through KEYOPT(5) are as follows:
KEYOPT(5) = 0 - Auto constraint type detection (default)
KEYOPT(5) = 1 - Solid-solid constraint (no rotational DOFs are constrained)
KEYOPT(5) = 2 - Shell-shell constraint (both translational and rotational DOFs are constrained, but they
are decoupled)
For a shell-shell assembly, you can also use the shell-solid constraint types (KEYOPT(5) = 3, 4, and 5).
See Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly for more information on the shell-solid constraint types.
Keep these important points in mind when determining the type of constraint to use for the assembly:
For the 3-D case, if you specify KEYOPT(4), only the degrees of freedom that are common to both
the KEYOPT(4) degree-of-freedom set and the KEYOPT(5) degree-of-freedom set will be
considered in the constraint equations.
When the no separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4 on the contact element) is used with the MPC
approach to model solid-solid assemblies, only the KEYOPT(5) = 0 and 1 options (auto detection
or solid-solid constraint) described above are valid. If the auto detection option is set and the
program finds a shell-shell or shell-solid constraint in this situation, the solution will terminate.
If overconstraint occurs in bonded shell-shell assemblies when using the MPC algorithm, you can
switch to the penalty method or the augmented Lagrangian method. See Bonded Contact for ShellShell Assemblies for more information.
The shell-shell constraint type (KEYOPT(5)=2) constrains the rotational and translational degrees of
freedom from both sides. However, the rotational and translational degrees of freedom are
decoupled. This option can model situations where one shell edge lines up well with another shell
surface. This provides a valid answer which is closer to a matching mesh solution.
If a certain amount of gap or penetration exists in the assembly interface, the shell-shell constraint
option causes artificial constraints to be added, which can result in an a inaccurate solution. In this
case, it is recommended that you use a shell-solid constraint type by setting KEYOPT(5) = 3, 4, or
5 on the target element. One drawback of using the shell-solid constraint type is that the initial
gap or penetration will remain during the solution (similar to setting KEYOPT(9) = 1 on the contact
element).
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_solsol.html[28/04/2013 09:31:28 p.m.]
9.2.Modeling a Shell-Solid Assembly

The 3-D shell-solid assembly provides a transition from a shell element region to a solid element region.
This approach is useful when local modeling requires a full three-dimensional model with a relatively fine
mesh, but other parts of the structure can be represented by shell elements (see Figure 9.1). No
alignment is required between the solid element mesh and the shell element mesh. The contact surface
or edge must be built on the shell element side. The target surface must be built on the solid elements
side.
Figure9.1Example of Shell-Solid Assembly
To define a shell-solid assembly using the internal MPC approach, you must set the following key
options on the contact elements:
KEYOPT(2) = 2
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6
KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2
KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1
MPC-based approach
Bonded always or bonded initial
Nodal detection for CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174
Contact normal direction for CONTA175
The following real constants are also used: ICONT, FTOL, PINB, CNOF, PMAX, PMIN, TOLS.
The following key options are ignored: KEYOPT(8), KEYOPT(10), KEYOPT(1) > 0.
In most cases, ANSYS will automatically constrain both translational and rotational degrees of freedom
for a shell-solid assembly (see Figure 9.2). However, you can use KEYOPT(5) of the target element
(TARGE170) to explicitly define the type of constraint:
KEYOPT(5) = 0 - Auto constraint type detection (default). Based on the underlying element type, this
option automatically identifies the appropriate constraint type: solid-solid constraint, shell-shell
constraint, or shell-solid constraint.
KEYOPT(5) = 3 - Shell-solid constraint; both translational and rotational DOFs are constrained on shell
nodes; only translational DOFs are constrained on solid nodes (see Figure 9.3).
KEYOPT(5) = 4 - Shell-solid constraint, all directions. This option acts the same as KEYOPT(5) = 3 if an
intersection is found from the contact normal to the target surface. Otherwise, constraint equations are
still built as long as contact nodes and target segments are inside the pinball region. (See Figure 9.4
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_solshel.html[28/04/2013 09:31:54 p.m.]
later in this section.)

KEYOPT(5) = 5 - Shell-solid constraint, anywhere inside the pinball region. Constraint equations are
always built as long as contact node(s) and target segments are inside the pinball region, regardless of
whether an intersection exists between the contact normal and the target surface. (See Figure 9.4 later
in this section.)
Figure9.2Shell-Solid Assembly (Original Mesh)
Figure9.3Shell-Solid Assembly with Shell-Solid Constraint Option
For the shell-solid constraint option (KEYOPT(5) = 3 on TARGE170), ANSYS automatically creates an
internal set of force-distributed constraints (similar to the RBE3 command) between nodes on the shell
edges and nodes on the solid surface. The program uses the pinball region (PINB), initial adjustment
zone (ICONT), and influence distance (FTOLN) to determine which nodes on the shell edge will be
constrained with which nodes on the solid surface. Each shell node acts as the master node, and
associated solid nodes act as slave nodes.
For the bonded always option (KEYOPT(12) = 5), any shell node that lies inside the pinball region (PINB)
will be included in the constraint if an intersection with the target surface is detected in the contact
normal direction. This holds true at the beginning of deformation, as well as during the deformation
process. A relatively small PINB value may be used to prevent any false contact. The default for PINB is
0.25 (25% of the contact depth) for small deformation analysis (NLGEOM,OFF), and 0.5 (50% of the
contact depth) for large deformation analysis (NLGEOM,ON). (The default PINB value may differ from
what is described here if CNOF is input. See Using PINB for more information.)
For the bonded initial option (KEYOPT(12) = 6), only the shell nodes that initially lie inside the
adjustment zone (ICONT) are included in the constraint sets. Shell nodes that lie outside ICONT are not
constrained with the solid nodes. The default for ICONT is 0.05 (5% of the contact depth).
The influence distance (FTOLN) is used for the shell-solid constraint option (KEYOPT(5) =3 on
TARGE170). Each solid node is included in the constraint set if the perpendicular distance from the solid
node to any shell edge is smaller than the influence distance. FTOLN defaults to half the thickness of the
shell. A positive FTOLN value represents a scaling factor on the shell half-thickness, and a negative value
represents an absolute distance value.
A shell-solid assembly can be used in a substructure analysis. However, if a superelement is defined to
represent the shell elements, shell thickness is unknown in the use pass. In this case, you must
overwrite the default setting of FTOLN (originally a factor of the shell thickness) to account for the zero
thickness of the superelement. Input an absolute value for FTOLN (that is, input a negative value) to
capture all constrained nodes when the constraint equations are built.
The KEYOPT(5) = 4 option (shell-solid constraint, all directions) can be used for the case when the shell
node does not overlap or intersect the contact surface (see figure below). However, if any intersection is
detected from the contact normal to the target surface, this option may not be the best choice because
it only builds very localized constraints between the shell node and the target segment which is
intersected. The same is always true for KEYOPT(5) = 3.
The KEYOPT(5) = 5 option (shell-solid constraint, anywhere inside pinball) is the recommended shellsolid constraint because constraint equations are always built between a shell node and all target
segments which are inside the pinball region, regardless of the contact normal and contact intersection.
Thus, the pinball size is important since a larger pinball will result in a larger constraint set. This option
is useful when you wish to completely constrain one contact side to another. The stresses are more
evenly distributed at the shell-solid interface for this option than they would be for other shell-solid
constraint types.
Figure9.4Shell-Solid Constraint - No Intersection (use KEYOPT(5) = 4 or 5)
Keep the following points in mind when modeling shell-solid assemblies:

For the shell-solid constraint type (KEYOPT(5) = 3, 4, or 5), KEYOPT(9) is ignored, and initial
penetration or gap always remains constant. To close the initial penetration or gap, issue the
command CNCHECK,ADJUST in the beginning of the analysis.
The shell-solid constraint (KEYOPT(5) = 3, 4, or 5) is not always capable of transmitting all
components of the moment at the shell nodes due to transverse shear locking of shell elements; a
typical example is the moment component that is parallel to the normal of the solid surface.
9.3.Surface-Based Constraints
A surface-based constraint can be used to couple the motion of nodes on the contact surface to a single
pilot node on the target surface. The multipoint constraint (MPC) capability of the contact elements
(KEYOPT(2) = 2) allows you to define two types of surface-based constraints:
Rigid surface constraint - In this type of constraint, the contact nodes are constrained to the rigid
body motion defined by the pilot node (see Figure 9.5), similar to a constraint defined by the
CERIG command.
Force-distributed constraint - In this type of constraint, forces or displacements applied on the pilot
node are distributed to contact nodes (in an average sense) through shape functions (see Figure
9.6), similar to a constraint defined by the RBE3 command.
Figure9.5Rigid Surface Constraint
Figure9.6Force-Distributed Constraint
These surface-based constraints can be used in the following applications:

To apply loads and boundary conditions to the pilot node (such as torque load or drill rotation).
Example: a bolt head submitted to a torque force using a force-distributed constraint.
To model rigid bodies. Example: rigid body definition in multi-body dynamics.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_surfcon.html[28/04/2013 09:32:12 p.m.]
To model rigid end conditions. Example: using a rigid surface constraint to model a rigid end plate
or rigid plane section of 3-D solid elements.
To model interactions with other joints. Example: two flexible parts linked by a hinge. This can be
modeled by two force-distributed constraint definitions whose pilot nodes are connected by a
revolute joint element.
To define transitions between solid and structure elements. Example: a beam element connected
to a solid element face.
9.3.1.Defining Surface-Based Constraints

The contact surface can be generated via the ESURF command. The contact nodes on the contact
surface are the slave nodes of the MPC equations. The pilot node is the only target segment on the
target surface side. It is the master node of the MPC equations. Forces and displacements can be
applied on the pilot node and the contact nodes. You can define a follower element (FOLLW201) on the
pilot node so that the element-specified external forces and moments on the follower element will follow
the motion of the pilot node.
For a force-distributed constraint, use the following contact element key options:
Force-distributed Constraint KEYOPT Settings
KEYOPT(2) = 2
MPC based approach
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6
KEYOPT(4) = 1
Indicates a force-distributed constraint for CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177
For a rigid surface constraint, use the following contact element key options:
Rigid Surface Constraint KEYOPT Settings
KEYOPT(2) = 2
MPC based approach
KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6
KEYOPT(4) = 2
Indicates a rigid surface constraint for CONTA171, CONTA172,
CONTA173, and CONTA174
KEYOPT(4) = 0
Indicates a rigid surface constraint for CONTA175 , CONTA176, and
CONTA177
The following key options are ignored for surface-based constraints: KEYOPT(8), KEYOPT(5),
KEYOPT(7), KEYOPT(10).
With the exception of PINB, none of the standard contact real constants are used for surface-based
constraints using internal MPC.
9.3.2.Defining Influence Range (PINB)

By default, all the contact nodes are included in the surface-based constraints. You can select a subset
of nodes from these contact nodes by defining a radius of influence range, PINB. The nodes that lie
within the spherical range (radius = PINB) centered about the pilot node are selected for the definition
of the surface-based constraints.
9.3.3.Degrees of Freedom of Surface-Based Constraints

KEYOPT(1) > 0 is ignored for a force-distributed constraint since only structural degree-of-freedom
constraints are included. However, for a rigid surface constraint, you can use KEYOPT(1) to include
other field degrees of freedom (in addition to the structural DOFs) in the constraint sets.
The pilot node has both translational and rotational degrees of freedom. The active degrees of freedom
at the pilot node depend on the defined type of target elements. Use TARGE169 for 2-D surface-based
constraints that contain UX, UY, and ROTZ degrees of freedom. Use TARGE170 for 3-D surface-based
constraints that contain UX, UY, UZ, and ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ degrees of freedom. Generally, you should
always set KEYOPT(2)=1 for the target element to indicate that boundary conditions for rigid target
nodes will be user-specified. Otherwise, ANSYS may apply internal constraints on the pilot node.
The degrees of freedom of the surface-based constraints can also be controlled by using KEYOPT(4) of
the target element (TARGE169 or TARGE170). For example, for the 3-D case (TARGE170), you might
specify that only UX, UY, and ROTZ be used in the constraint. You can do this by entering a six digit
value for KEYOPT(4). The first to sixth digits represent ROTZ, ROTY, ROTX, UZ, UY, UX, respectively.
The number 1 (one) indicates the DOF is active, and the number 0 (zero) indicates the DOF is not
active. Therefore, to specify that UX, UY, and ROTZ be used in the constraint, you would enter 100011
as the KEYOPT(4) value.
The basic formulation for the rigid surface constraint is similar to the MPC184 rigid beam and rigid link
elements. However, this constraint type offers additional flexibility when you fully or partially constrain
the degrees of freedom. For examples, the following are possible configurations:
All six degrees of freedom are selected, which is equivalent to the MPC184 rigid beam.
One rotational degree of freedom is excluded, which is equivalent to the MPC184 revolute joint.
Only three translational degrees of freedom are selected, which is equivalent to the MPC184
spherical joint or MPC184 rigid link.
9.3.4.Specifying a Local Coordinate System

You can specify the surface-based constraint in a local coordinate system. For the rigid surface
constraint, rotate the contact nodes into a local coordinate system. For the force-distributed constraint,
rotate the pilot node into a local coordinate system.
When KEYOPT(12) = 5 is set on the contact elements, the coordinate system does not rotate and it
keeps its initial configuration. When the rotation is finite and KEYOPT(12) = 6 is set on the contact
elements, the coordinate system in which the constrained degrees of freedom are specified will be corotated according to the rotation of the pilot node. The degrees of freedom of the surface-based
constraints will be assigned with the co-rotated system. This is true even for the constrained degrees of
freedom specified in the global coordinate system.
Note: If all degrees of freedom are included in the constraint equations, there will be no
difference between the KEYOPT(12) = 5 and KEYOPT(12) = 6 settings.
Figure 9.7 shows an example of a slider link modeled with contact. A local cylindrical coordinate system
is defined at a contact node such that the x-direction is coincident with the line connecting the contact
node and pilot node. KEYOPT(4) = 10 is set for the target element type to specify that only the y
degree of freedom is constrained and other degrees of freedom are free. The coordinate system at the
contact node will be co-rotated according to the rotation of the pilot node.
Figure9.7Slider Link
In another example, a cylindrical ring is clamped at one end and loaded by a torque at the other end
(Figure 9.8). A rigid surface constraint is used with all the contact nodes rotated into a cylindrical
coordinate system. If the x-direction constraint is free (KEYOPT(4) = 110), the ring is allowed to expand
in the radial direction.
Figure9.8Free Radial Expansion Under Torque Load
9.3.5.Additional Guidelines for a Force-Distributed Constraint

The pilot node is a dependent node (meaning the degrees of freedom for this node are removed).
The contact nodes are independent nodes (the degrees of freedom are retained). If the pilot node
has constraints applied to it, internally-generated MPC equations are rewritten so that the degrees
of freedom of the pilot node are no longer dependent DOF.
KEYOPT(4) of TARGE169 and TARGE170 controls the number of degrees of freedom of the pilot
node.
The number of internally-generated MPCs is equal to the number of degrees of freedom defined by
KEYOPT(4) of TARGE169 and TARGE170.
9.3.6.Additional Guidelines for A Rigid Surface Constraint

The pilot node is an independent (retained) node in the constraint equation. The contact nodes are
the dependent (removed) nodes. Use with great caution when you apply any displacement
constraints, coupling (CP command), or constraint equations (CE command) on the contact nodes
since redundant constraints are likely to occur.
KEYOPT(4) of TARGE169 and TARGE170 controls the DOF set (the number of DOF) of the contact
(dependent) nodes used in the internally-generated MPCs.
The number of internally-generated MPCs is equal to the number of contact nodes times the
number of DOF.
The contact surface does not require underlying elements.
9.3.7.Modeling a Beam-Solid Assembly

The surface-based constraint technique can be used to apply transitions between solid and structure
elements; for example, a beam element connected to the solid or shell element face. One beam end
node must be the pilot node and the solid/shell nodes must be the contact nodes. The rigid surface
constraint is generally well-suited for the solid beam to solid surface case (see Figure 9.9), and the
force-distributed constraint is well-suited for the flexible beam (such as a thin wall beam) to solid/shell
surface case (see Figure 9.10).
Figure9.9Beam-Solid Assembly Defined by Rigid Surface Constraint
Figure9.10Beam-Solid Assembly Defined by Force-distributed Constraint
9.4. Modeling Rigid Bodies
9.4.Modeling Rigid Bodies

Rigid bodies are widely used for numerical simulation of multibody dynamic applications. The definition
of a rigid body in ANSYS is similar to the definition of a rigid surface constraint, except that all the
elements are defined by target elements. The motion of the rigid body is governed by the degrees of
freedom at a pilot node which allows accurate representation of the geometry, mass, and rotary inertia
of the rigid body. Each rigid body is only associated with one pilot node. The pilot node can be one of
the nodes on a target element or a node at any arbitrary location. It can be connected to point mass,
follower (FOLLW201), and deformable elements. For transient analysis you should locate the pilot node
at the gravity center of the rigid body if the center of mass is known or can be approximated. You can
add a point mass element, MASS21, to the gravity center. See Modeling Rigid Bodies in a Multibody
Analysis in the Multibody Analysis Guide for more details.
9.4.1.Modeling Contact between Rigid Bodies

You can model contact between two rigid bodies by specifying a contact pair consisting of a contact
surface on one rigid body and a target surface on another rigid body. These contact and target
elements should overlap the existing contact elements defined for the rigid bodies. Use either the
augmented Lagrange algorithm or penalty algorithm (KEYOPT(2) on the contact elements) to avoid
overconstraint between rigid body constraints and contact constraints.
You cannot use the multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm (KEYOPT(2) = 2) with bonded or noseparation contact behavior (KEYOPT(12)) to connect two rigid bodies; doing so would cause the model
to be overconstrained. Instead, add a third rigid body which connects the first two rigid bodies at their
pilot nodes.
MPC bonded contact between a flexible body and a rigid body is allowed. For this case, the contact
surface of the MPC bonded contact pair must belong to the flexible body. Otherwise, the MPC bonded
constraints and rigid body constraints would be redundant.
It is possible to model two rigid bodies that are connected or overlapping through shared rigid body
nodes or pilot nodes. To prevent overconstraint, ANSYS internally merges the two rigid bodies into one
rigid body and treats the second pilot node as a regular rigid body node.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecrigidbodies.html[28/04/2013 09:32:48 p.m.]
2.2. Modeling Rigid Bodies in a Multibody Analysis
2.2.Modeling Rigid Bodies in a Multibody Analysis

Rigid bodies are widely used for numerical simulation of multibody dynamic applications. A rigid body
can be connected to other rigid bodies via joint elements. It can also be connected to flexible bodies to
model mixed rigid-flexible body dynamics.
In a finite-element model, certain relatively stiff parts can be represented by rigid bodies when stress
distributions and wave propagation in such parts are not critical. An advantage of using rigid bodies
rather than deformable finite elements is computational efficiency. Elements that belong to the rigid
bodies have no associated internal forces or stiffness. The motion of the rigid body is determined by a
maximum of six degrees of freedom (DOFs) at the pilot node.
For transient dynamic analyses, stiff bodies can excite high-frequency modes, resulting in a small time
increment in order to obtain a stable solution. Rigid bodies do not, however, excite any frequency
modes; therefore, using rigid bodies to represent stiff regions may allow a relatively large time
increment.
The following topics about rigid body modeling are available:
Defining a Rigid Body
Rigid Body Degrees of Freedom
Rigid Body Boundary Conditions
Representing Parts of a Complex Model with Rigid Bodies
Connecting Joint Elements to Rigid Bodies
Modeling Contact with Rigid Bodies
2.2.1.Defining a Rigid Body

A rigid body in ANSYS consists of a set of target nodes called rigid body nodes and a single pilot node.
The associated target elements use the same real constant ID. The motion of the rigid body is governed
by the degrees of freedom (DOFs) at the pilot node, allowing accurate representation of the geometry,
mass, and rotary inertia of the rigid body.
2.2.1.1.Typical Rigid Body Scenarios

In most applications, rigid bodies start with discretized finite elements. The rigid body can be defined on
the exterior of a pre-meshed body discretized by solid, shell, and beam elements (called underlying
elements), as shown:
Figure2.2Rigid Body Definition With Underlying Elements
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mul/Hlp_G_MULMODRIGBOD.html[28/04/2013 09:32:56 p.m.]
The 3-D target element (TARGE170) and 2-D target element (TARGE169) are applied on the exterior
surface of the rigid body. To generate the target elements, issue an ESURF command.
The rigid body can also be a simple standalone body when the target elements do not overlap other
elements (that is, have no underlying elements), as shown:
Figure2.3Rigid Body Definition Without Underlying Elements
You can generate target elements TARGE170 for a standalone 3-D rigid body (AMESH) or target
elements TARGE169 for a standalone 2-D rigid body (LMESH).
The most efficient rigid body should contain a limited number of nodes which are either connected to
other elements or subject to boundary conditions, as shown:
Figure2.4Rigid Body with a Limited Number of Nodes
The rigid body shown above contains three nodes which connect five elements (two 3-D line segments,
one pilot node segment, one MASS21, and one MPC184-Revolute).
Target element POINT segments (TSHAP,POINT) can be defined and used to apply boundary
conditions (point loads, displacement constraints, etc.) on the rigid body surface where no predefined
nodes exist.
2.2.1.2.Target Element Key Option Setting for Defining a Rigid Body

Each rigid body contains target elements defined by the same real constant ID. The target elements can
be defined via different element type IDs, however, you must set KEYOPT(2) = 1 on all of the target
elements. This KEYOPT setting causes ANSYS to build internal multipoint constraints (MPC) to enforce
kinematics of the entire rigid body.
You can also combine different target segment types for each rigid body. However, you cannot mix 2-D
with 3-D target elements.
2.2.1.3.Defining a Rigid Body Pilot Node

In addition to the rigid body nodes, each rigid body also must be associated with a rigid body pilot node.
The target element defining the pilot node must use the same real constant ID as the other target
elements which constitute the rigid body. The real constant ID identifies each rigid body, and ANSYS
builds internal multipoint constraints (surface-based rigid constraints) during solution.
The pilot node, unlike the other segment types, is used to define the degrees of freedom for the entire
rigid body. This node can be any of the target element nodes, but it does not have to be. All possible
rigid motions of the rigid body will be a combination of a translation and a rotation around the pilot
node. The pilot node provides a convenient and powerful way to assign boundary conditions such as
rotations, translations, moments, temperature, voltage, and magnetic potential on the entire rigid body.
The pilot node can be connected to point mass, follower, and deformable elements. For a transient
analysis, you can simply locate the pilot node at the gravity center of the rigid body if the center of mass
is known.
2.2.1.4.Defining Rigid Body Mass and Rotary Inertia Properties

For multibody dynamics, the mass and rotary inertia of the rigid body play important roles in the
dynamic response. In ANSYS, the target elements which define rigid bodies do not contribute mass to
the finite element system. The most effective way to contribute mass is to add the point mass element
MASS21 on the gravity center of the rigid body when the center of mass and rotary inertia properties of
the actual rigid body can be estimated. You can specify the rigid body mass and rotary inertia for
MASS21. The node of the MASS21 element is usually connected to the pilot node, although it can be
connected to any one of the rigid body nodes. The point mass node is often defined in a local
coordinate system which is parallel to the rotary principal axes.
Sometimes, the location of gravity center, the mass, and rotary inertia cannot be easily estimated. In
such cases, you can use the premeshed body to account for mass distribution for the rigid body (as
shown in Figure 2.2). The discretized elements can be pure elastic solid, shell, or beam elements.
For each rigid body, you can perform the following steps:
1. Select the associated elements (ESEL)
2. Specify the option for precalculating masses (IRLF,-1).
3. Perform a partial element solution (PSOLVE,ELFORM).
4. Calculate inertia relief terms and print a summary of the mass properties (PSOLVE,ELPREP)
5. Get the mass properties (*GET), as follows:
Item1
*GET, Par , ELEM, 0, Item1, IT1NUM, Item2, IT2NUM

IT1NUM
Description
MTOT
X, Y, Z
Total mass components.
MC
X, Y, Z
Mass centroid components.
IPRIN
X, Y, Z
Principal centroidal moments of inertia.
IANG
XY, YZ, ZX
Angles of the principal axes.
Symbol
M x, My, Mz
X c, Y c, Z c
Ixx, Iyy, Izz
xy, yz , xz
Based on the precalculated mass properties, you can easily define the point mass element. The node is
defined in the local coordinate system, as shown:
X c, Y c, Zc, xy, yz , xz
The mass properties are specified by real constants:
M x , M y , M z, Ixx, Iyy, Izz
Set MASS21 KEYOPT(2) = 1 so that the point mass element coordinate system is initially parallel to the
nodal coordinate system and rotates with the nodal coordinate rotations during a large-deflection
analysis.
2.2.2.Rigid Body Degrees of Freedom

The pilot node has both translational and rotational degrees of freedom (DOFs). The active DOFs at the
pilot node depend on the defined type of target elements. Use TARGE169 for a 2-D rigid body which
contains UX, UY and ROTZ DOFs. Use TARGE170 for 3-D rigid body which contains UX, UY, UZ and
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ DOFs.

The DOFs of rigid body nodes are based on the DOFs of the connected elements and applied boundary
conditions (BCs). Rigid body nodes that connect to solid elements involve only the translational degrees
of freedom. Rigid body nodes that connect to shell, beam, follower, and joint elements also involve the
rotational DOFs.
For standalone rigid body nodes not connected to any other elements, the associated DOFs are subject
to applied boundary conditions, as shown:
Figure2.52-D Rigid Body DOFs Subject to Applied Boundary Conditions
The node has DOF UX if a constraint or a force is applied in the X direction. If there are no applied BCs,
the standalone rigid body nodes have no DOFs; in such a case, ANSYS simply updates the position of
the nodes based on the kinematics of the rigid body.
The DOFs for a rigid body can also be controlled via KEYOPT(4) of the target element (TARGE169 or
TARGE170). The key option offers additional flexibility by fully or partially constraining the DOFs for the
rigid body.
Examples
In the following figure, a rigid sphere is defined by 8-node quadrilateral segments and a pilot node. Two
beam elements are connected to the rigid surface in the XY plane, as shown by the dotted lines. The
pilot node is located at the global Cartesian origin and is subjected to rotation ROTZ.
For the DOFs of the rigid body, selecting three rotational DOFs along with three translational DOFs
rotates the beams, as shown. Because the beams are fully connected to the rigid sphere, they rotate
with the sphere.
Figure2.6Rigid Sphere Translational DOFs + Rotational DOFs
Selecting only the three translational DOFs for the rigid body, as shown in the following figure, does not
rotate the beams because they are connected only in their translational DOFs; therefore, the connection
acts as a hinge.
Figure2.7Rigid Body Translational DOFs Only
Determining the DOFs for each rigid body node is important because the internal multipoint constraints
are built solely on the resulting DOFs.
2.2.3.Rigid Body Boundary Conditions

Constrained boundary conditions (BCs) for the rigid body are usually applied on the rigid body pilot
node. Reaction forces can be obtained for DOFs at the constrained nodes. A combination of rigid body
constraints and constrained boundary conditions applied to several rigid body nodes other than the pilot
node can lead to overconstrained models. In such cases, ANSYS issues overconstraint warnings and
attempts to remove the redundant constraints if possible. If the specified BCs are not consistent with the
rigid body constraint, the model becomes inconsistently overconstrained. You must verify the
overconstrained model and prevent conflicting overconstraints.
2.2.3.1.Defining Rigid Body Loads

You can apply point loads on any rigid body nodes and pilot node. Follower force (FOLLW201) can be
defined at those nodes, and the direction of forces is determined by the rotation of the nodes.
You can apply surface loads on surface effect elements SURF153 and SURF154 which fully or partially
override loads on the surface of the rigid body.
Loads on a rigid body are assembled from contributions of all loads on nodes and elements connected to
the rigid body.
2.2.4.Representing Parts of a Complex Model with Rigid Bodies

Using rigid bodies to represent certain portions of a complex model is more efficient than using flexible
finite elements. In the early stage of finite element model development, you can treat certain stiff parts
or discretized elements that are far away from the region of interest as the rigid bodies. In a later stage,
you can remove the rigid body definition and add the flexible discretized elements back for a detailed
and accurate finite element analysis.
By selecting or deselecting target elements or the flexible finite elements, you can easily switch back
and forth between rigid body and flexible body definition.
The following table shows the general steps involved when defining a rigid body as compared to
defining a flexible body:
Table2.1Rigid Body vs. Flexible Body Definition
Rigid Body Definition Process
Flexible Body Definition Process
1. Select the associated finite elements with

defined mass density.
1. Unselect the relevant point mass and

target elements.
2. Perform a partial element solution to

obtain mass properties.
2. Reselect the associated finite elements.
3. Add a point mass element to the center of

rigid body.
4. Add a target element whose node (pilot
node) shares the point mass node.
5. Generate target elements on the exterior
surface of the pre-mesh body.
6. Unselect the associated finite elements.
7. Connect joint elements to target nodes.
3. Define the material properties for the

flexible body.
4. Define a pilot node at one end of the joint.
The pilot node connects the joint to the
rest of the body.
5. Select the nodes on the exterior surface of
the body that you want to connect to this
pilot node.
6. Create target elements on this surface.
For each body-joint connection, repeat steps 4
through 6. For more information, see
Connecting Bodies to Joints.
2.2.5.Connecting Joint Elements to Rigid Bodies

Joint elements can be connected to any rigid body nodes and the pilot node. You can define connections
between rigid bodies, or between a rigid body and a flexible body.
Caution: Redundant constraints are most likely to occur when two rigid bodies are
connected to more than one joint element.
2.2.6.Modeling Contact with Rigid Bodies

Contact between two rigid bodies is modeled by specifying a contact surface on one rigid body and a
target surface on another rigid body. Use either the augmented Lagrange algorithm or penalty algorithm
(KEYOPT(2) on the contact element) for modeling contact between rigid bodies to avoid redundant
overconstraint between rigid body constraints and contact constraints.
You cannot use the multipoint constraint (MPC) algorithm (KEYOPT(2)) and bonded or no-separation
contact behavior (KEYOPT(12)) to connect two rigid surfaces; doing so would cause the model to be
overconstrained, resulting in an abnormal termination of the analysis. You can simply replace the bonded
contact pair by adding an additional rigid body which connects two pilot nodes.
ANSYS allows two rigid bodies that are connected or overlap each other through rigid body nodes or the
pilot node. To prevent overconstraints, ANSYS merges two rigid bodies into one rigid body internally and
treats the second pilot node as a regular rigid body node.
MPC bonded contact between a flexible body and a rigid body is possible. The contact surface in an MPC
bonded contact pair, however, should always belong to the flexible body; otherwise, the MPC bonded
constraints and rigid body constraints are redundant.
2.3. Connecting Multibody Components with Joint Elements
2.3.Connecting Multibody Components with Joint Elements

The MPC184 family of elements serves to connect the flexible and/or rigid components to each other in
a multibody mechanism.
An MPC184 joint element is defined by two nodes with six degrees of freedom at each node (for a total
of 12 DOFs). The relative motion between the two nodes is characterized by six relative degrees of
freedom. Depending on the application, you can configure different kinds of joint elements by imposing
appropriate kinematic constraints on any or some of these six relative degrees of freedom. For example,
to simulate a revolute joint, the three relative displacement degrees of freedom and two relative
rotational degrees of freedom are constrained, leaving only one relative degree of freedom available (the
rotation around the revolute axis). Similarly, constraining the three relative displacement degrees of
freedom and one relative rotational degree of freedom can simulate a universal joint. Two rotational
degrees of freedom are unconstrained in this joint.
The kinematic constraints in the joint elements are imposed using the Lagrange multiplier method.
Because the Lagrange multiplier method is used to impose the constraints, the constraint forces are
available for output purposes.
The following topics about using joint elements in a multibody analysis are available:
Joint Element Types
Material Behavior of Joint Elements
Reference Lengths and Angles for Joint Elements
Boundary Conditions for Joint Elements
Connecting Bodies to Joints
2.3.1.Joint Element Types

All joint elements are classified as MPC184 elements. The various elements are available via the MPC184
element's KEYOPT(1) setting and, in some cases, the KEYOPT(4) setting.
The following table lists the different types of joint elements and the required key option settings. The
relevant element section in the Element Reference is also indicated.
Joint Element Type
Revolute
Z-axis revolute
Universal
Slot
Point-in-plane
Translational
Cylindrical
Z-axis cylindrical
Spherical
Planar
Z-axis planar
Weld
Orient
General
KEYOPT(1)
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
5
12
12
13
14
16
KEYOPT(4)
--1
----------1
----1
-------
MPC184 Element
Constraints
Revolute Joint
Universal Joint
Slot Joint
Point-in-Plane Joint
Translational Joint
4
2
1
5
Cylindrical Joint
Spherical Joint
Planar Joint
Weld Joint
Orient Joint
General Joint
6
3
Depends on
number of fixed
relative DOFs
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mul/Hlp_G_MULMODCOMPJT.html[28/04/2013 09:33:13 p.m.]
Minimum
constraints = 0
(No DOF is
fixed)
Screw
17
---
Screw Joint
Maximum
constraints = 6
(All DOFs are
fixed)
5
Relative axial
motion and
rotational
motion are
linked via the
pitch of the
screw
Following are some examples of joint element types:

Revolute Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY
Universal Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTY
Slot Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UY, UZ
Translational Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Cylindrical Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UX, UY, ROTX, ROTY
Spherical Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UX, UY, UZ
Planar Joint.Constrained degrees of freedom: UZ, ROTX, ROTY
2.3.1.1.Joint Element Connectivity Definition

A joint element is typically defined by specifying two nodes, I and J. These nodes may be arbitrarily
located in space. There are instances, however, when one of the nodes needs to be considered as a
grounded node. In such cases, specify either node I or node J appropriately. In cases when the node
is grounded, the location of the grounded node is taken to be that of the other specified node.
Example
If the first node of the joint element is a grounded node, then the element definition is: E,,J or
EN,ElementNumber ,,J
Similarly, if the second node is the grounded node, then the element definition is: E,I, or
EN,ElementNumber ,I
2.3.1.2.Joint Element Section Definition

Each joint element must have an associated section definition. Use the SECTYPE command to define
the section type and subtype.
Example
The universal joint section definition is: SECTYPE,JOINT,UNIV,UNIV-01
2.3.1.3.Local Coordinate System Specification for Joint Elements

Local coordinate systems at the nodes are required to define the kinematic constraints of a joint
element. Use the SECJOINT command to do so.
The local coordinate systems and their required orientation vary from one joint element to another.
Input data requirements for each joint element differ. Typically, the local coordinate system is always
defined at the first node of a joint element.
The local coordinate system at the second node may be optional. If it is not specified, then the local
coordinate system at the first node is usually assumed.
The rotational components of the relative motion between the two nodes of the joint elements are
quantified in terms of Bryant (or Cardan) angles that are evaluated based on these coordinate systems.
Example
The following figure illustrates the specification of the local coordinate system for a universal joint
element:
Figure2.8MPC184 Universal Joint Geometry
The local coordinate system specification is:

LOCAL,11,0
...
LOCAL,12,0
...
SECJOINT,LSYS,11,12
2.3.1.4.Stops or Limits with Joint Elements

Stops or limit constraints in joints are imposed on the available components of relative motion between
the two nodes of a joint element. The Lagrange multiplier method is used to implement these
constraints. For static analysis, the stop constraints are based on the relative displacements (or relative
rotations) of the free degrees of freedom.
Stops in Transient Dynamic Analysis
In a transient dynamic analysis, if relative displacement-based (or rotation-based) stop constraints are
used, then the relative velocities and relative accelerations become inconsistent (oscillatory velocity
and/or accelerations are observed in many cases), implying that the energy and momentum due to the
impact-like nature of the stops is not conserved. These inconsistencies are reasonably suppressed by
imposing a numerical damping. However, numerical damping does not work appropriately in some cases.
Thus, for the transient dynamic case, an energy-momentum conservation scheme is adopted. By this
method, the user specified relative DOF stop values are taken into account, and constraints based on
the relative velocity are imposed in such a way that the overall energy and momentum balance is
achieved in a finite element sense.
Irrespective of the integration scheme specified for the transient dynamic analysis, the Newmark method
is used for the joint element when stops are specified.
The energy-momentum conservation scheme for stops is implemented for all joints except the screw
joint. In the case of the screw joint, the stops are imposed based on the relative displacements (or
rotations).
Defining Stops for Joint Elements
You can impose stops or limits on the available components of relative motion between the two nodes of
a joint element. The stops or limits essentially constrain the values of the free DOFs within a certain
range. To specify minimum and maximum values, issue the SECSTOP command.
The following figure shows how stops can be imposed on a revolute joint such that the motion is
constrained. The axis of the revolute is assumed to be perpendicular to the plane of paper and is along
the e 3 direction.
Figure2.9Stops Imposed on a Revolute Joint
The local coordinate system specified at node I is assumed to be fixed in its initial configuration.
However, the local coordinate system specified at node J evolves with the rotation of that node. The
relative angle of rotation is given by:
Let the link with node J rotate with respect to the link with node I. This characteristic implies that the
local coordinate system at node J rotates with respect to the local coordinate system at node I.
For the configuration shown, the initial relative angle of rotation is zero degrees. A counterclockwise
motion results in positive angles of rotation. Clockwise motion results in negative angles of rotation.
If stops limit the movement of the link with node J (as shown), the stop conditions are specified as
follows:
SECSTOP,6, PHI min ,PHI max
The next figure shows how stops can be imposed in a slot joint which involves displacements in the local
e I1 axis of node I. The relative distance between node J and node I is given by:
where xI and xJ are the position vectors of nodes I and J. The initial distance between the nodes I and J
is l0 and is a positive value.
Figure2.10Stops Imposed on a Slot Joint
The stops are defined as:

SECSTOP,1, min , max
SECSTOP,1,- min , max
where
min and
The stops are defined as:
max are both positive.
where
min is negative and
max is positive.
2.3.1.5.Joint Mechanism Locks

Locks or locking limits may also be imposed on the available components of relative motion between the
two nodes of a joint element. Locks are basically used in joint mechanisms to freeze the joint in a
desired configuration during the course of deformation. When the locks are activated on a particular
component of relative motion, that component remains locked for the rest of the analysis. Issue the
SECLOCK command to define lock limits.
Referring to Figure 2.9, the locks for a revolute joint are specified as SECLOCK,6, Phi_Min,Phi_Max
Referring to Figure 2.10, the locks for the slot joint are specified as SECLOCK,1, l_Min ,l_Max
2.3.2.Material Behavior of Joint Elements

The following topics related to the material behavior of joint elements in a multibody analysis are
available:
Stiffness and Damping Behavior of Joint Elements
Frictional Behavior
For more information, see MPC184 Joint Materials in the Element Reference.
2.3.2.1.Stiffness and Damping Behavior of Joint Elements

Linear or nonlinear stiffness and damping behavior can be associated with the free or unrestrained
components of relative motion of the joint elements. In the case of linear stiffness or linear damping, the
values are specified as coefficients of a 6 x 6 elasticity matrix using the TB,JOIN command with TBOPT =
STIF or TBOPT = DAMP. The stiffness and damping values can be temperature-dependent. Depending on
the joint element in use, only the appropriate coefficients of the stiffness or damping matrix are used in
the joint element constitutive calculations.
The nonlinear stiffness and damping behavior is specified using the TB,JOIN command with an
appropriate TBOPT label. In the case of nonlinear stiffness, relative displacement (rotation) versus force
(moment) values are specified using the TBPT command. For nonlinear damping behavior, velocity
versus force behavior is specified using the TBPT command. (See Figure 2.11 for a representation of the
nonlinear stiffness or damping curve.) In either case, these values may be temperature dependent; use
the TBTEMP command to define the temperature for the data table.
Figure2.11Nonlinear Stiffness and Damping Behavior for Joints
You can specify the linear or nonlinear stiffness or damping behavior independently for each component
of relative motion. However, if you specify linear stiffness for an unrestrained component of relative
motion, you cannot specify nonlinear stiffness behavior on the same component of relative motion. The
damping behavior is similarly restricted. If a joint element has more than one free or unrestrained
component of relative motion--for example, the universal joint has two free components of relative
motion--then you can independently specify the stiffness or damping behavior as linear or nonlinear for
each of the unrestricted components of relative motion.
2.3.2.2.Frictional Behavior
Frictional behavior along the unrestrained components of relative motion influences the overall behavior
of the joints. You can model Coulomb friction for joint elements via the TB,JOIN command with an
appropriate TBOPT label. Frictional behavior can be specified only for the following joints:
Revolute Joint (x-axis and z-axis)
Slot Joint
Translational Joint
The laws governing the frictional behavior of the joint are described below.
Coulombs Law
The classical Coulomb friction model is implemented for joints using a penalty formulation. The Coulomb
friction model for joints is defined as:
Where, F s is the equivalent tangential force (or moment), F n is the normal force (or moment) in the
joint, and is the current value of the coefficient of friction. The calculation of the normal force depends
on the joint under consideration.
If the equivalent tangential force F s is less than F lim, the state is known as the sticking state. If F s
exceeds F lim, sliding occurs and the state is known as the sliding state. The sticking/sliding calculations
determine when a point transitions from sticking to sliding or vice versa.
Figure2.12Coulomb's Law
Exponential Friction Law

The exponential friction law is used to smooth the transition between the static coefficient of friction and
the dynamic coefficient of friction according to the formula (Benson and Hallquist):
where:
Vrel = the relative slip rate

s = the coefficient of friction in the static regime (stiction)
d = the coefficient of friction in the dynamic regime
c = decay coefficient
Figure2.13Exponential Friction Law
2.3.2.2.1.Geometry specifications for Coulomb friction in Joints

The modeling of Coulomb friction in joints requires some geometry specifications, depending on the type
of joint under consideration. These quantities are used in the computation of the normal force (or
moment) for Coulomb friction calculations. The SECJOINT command is used to specify these quantities.
The following table outlines the required geometric quantities:
Table2.2Required Geometric Quantities
Joint Type
Revolute Joint (x-axis and z-axis)
Slot Joint
Translational Joint
Geometric Quantities
Outer radius, Inner radius, Effective Length
None required
Effective Length, Effective Radius
If appropriate geometric quantities are not specified, then the corresponding normal force contributions
will not be considered. The following section explains the normal force calculations and the geometric
quantities required.
2.3.2.2.2.Calculation of Normal Forces for Coulomb Frictional Behavior

The normal force (or moment) that is used in the Coulomb frictional behavior is based on the following
forces that arise in a joint:
Lagrange Multiplier forces (or moments) due to the constraints
Interference fit forces (or moments)
Revolute Joint
In order to compute the normal moment in a revolute joint, the revolute joint is visualized as a cylinderpin assembly (for example, a door hinge consisting of a pin with a head inserted into a cylinder).
The following geometric quantities are required in the calculations below. Note that the specification of
these quantities is optional. If some of these geometric quantities are not specified, then the
corresponding contribution to the normal moment calculations is ignored.
Router = Outer radius of the cylinder

Rinner = Inner radius of the cylinder or outside radius of pin
Leff = The effective length is the length over which the cylinder and pin are in contact with each
other
The contributions to the normal moment in an x-axis revolute joint are as follows:
An axial moment due to the axial component of the constraint Lagrange Multiplier force ( 1 ).
This force acts in such a way as to push the cylinder against the pin head, thereby causing a
frictional moment to develop.
where,
A tangential moment due to the constraint Lagrange Multiplier forces, 2 and 3 :
A bending moment that is generated as a consequence of the constraint Lagrange Multiplier

moments ( 5 and 6 ):
Leading to a bending moment:
Additionally, if interference fit moment ( M interference) is defined, the normal moment for frictional
calculations is given by:
A similar calculation is carried out for the z-axis revolute joint by choosing the appropriate constraint
Lagrange multiplier forces in the above equations.
Slot Joint
The two displacement constraint Lagrange Multiplier forces ( 2 and 3 ) in the slot joint contribute to a
tangential force as follows:
Additionally, if interference fit force ( F interference) is defined, the normal force for frictional calculations is
given by:
Geometric quantities are not required for the slot joint.

Translational Joint
The geometric quantities required for the translation joint are:
Leff = Effective length. The effective length is the length over which the two parts of the
translation joint overlap. It is assumed that the change in this length is small.
Reff = Effective radius. To simplify calculations, an effective radius is used in torsional moment
calculations, even though the cross section in a translational joint is rectangular. The effective
radius is used in computing the force that arises due to the torsional moment.
The normal force used in frictional calculations is computed as follows:
An effective radial force due to the constraint forces ( 2 and 3 ):
Bending force due to in-plane constraint moments ( 5 and 6 ):
Leading to a bending force

Force due to the torsional constraint moment, 4 :
Additionally, if interference fit force ( F interference) is defined, the normal force for frictional calculations is
given by:
2.3.3.Reference Lengths and Angles for Joint Elements

The initial configuration of the joint element may be such that nonzero forces or moments is necessary.
In such cases, you can define the constitutive behavior with respect to a reference configuration such
that these forces or moments are zero. To do so, define a reference angle or a reference length
(SECDATA).
If you do not define reference lengths and angles, ANSYS calculates the values from the initial
configuration of the joints. ANSYS uses the reference lengths and angles in the stiffness and frictional
behavior calculations.
2.3.4.Boundary Conditions for Joint Elements

Issue the DJ command to impose boundary conditions on the available components of relative motion of
the joint element. You can list the imposed values via the DJLIST command. To delete the values, issue
the DJDELE command.
To apply concentrated forces on the available components of relative motion of the joint element, issue
the FJ command. You can list the imposed values via the FJLIST command. To delete the values, issue
the FJDELE command.
2.3.5.Connecting Bodies to Joints

Other than in idealized geometry (such as that shown in Figure 2.1), an MPC184 joint element is defined
by one or two nodes in space and requires special modeling techniques to connect the joint to the body
appropriately.
Figure 2.14 shows a 3-D model of a pinned joint where the geometry of the joint (the pin) is explicitly
modeled. To perform a multibody analysis, the pin geometry is ignored and the behavior replaced by the
appropriate MPC184 joint element.
Figure2.14Pinned Joint Geometry
Figure 2.15 shows the meshed model including the revolute joint. To connect the bodies to the joint,
you must use either elements (such as beams) or constraint equations. The easiest way to do so is to
use contact elements to create surface-based constraints (multipoint constraints, or MPCs), as follows:
1. Define a pilot node at one end of the joint. The pilot node connects the joint to the rest of the
body.
2. Select the nodes on the surface of the body that you want to connect to this pilot node.
3. Create contact surface elements on this surface. By sharing the same real constant number
(REAL,N ), MPCs between the surface nodes and the pilot node are generated during the solution.
Repeat the steps for each body-joint connection.
Figure2.15Pinned Joint Mesh and Revolute Joint
Figure 2.16 shows the contact elements and Figure 2.17 shows the MPCs (constraint equations) created
during the solution for the lower body.
Create the pilot node using the TARGE170 element--setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 so as not to allow the
program to constrain any DOFs--and issuing the TSHAP,PILO command.
If you mesh the body with elements having no midside nodes (such as SOLID185), use CONTA173 as
the element type for the surface mesh. For elements with midside nodes (such as SOLID186 or
SOLID187), use CONTA174. Set the following element key options to create the necessary constraints:
KEYOPT(2) = 2
KEYOPT(4) = 2
KEYOPT(12) = 5
Constraint (MPC) option.

Generate rigid MPC constraints.
Bonded behavior between the pilot node and the contact surface.
Figure2.16Pinned Joint Contact Elements
Figure2.17Pinned Joint Constraint Equations
Instead of the rigid option, you can also choose a flexible (force-distributed or RBE3-type) constraint
option by setting KEYOPT(4) = 1. The following figures illustrate the difference in behaviors:
Figure2.18Rigid Constraint (KEYOPT(4) = 2)
Figure2.19Flexible Constraint (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Typical Command Sequence

Following is a typical command sequence for connecting bodies to joints:
! Step 1: Define a pilot node at the joint node
et,59,170
! type ID=59 is an available ID
keyopt,59,2,1
! do not allow program to constrain DOFs
real,59
! real ID=59 is an available ID
tshap,pilot
e,9536
! 9536 is the joint node
! Step 2: Select the nodes of the corresponding surface
csys,15
! CS at center of pin
nsel,s,loc,x,15
! nodes at r=15
! Step 3: Create the contact elements on the surface
et,60,173
keyopt,60,2,2
! constraint (MPC) option
keyopt,60,4,2
! rigid MPC
keyopt,60,12,5
! bonded always contact
type,60
real,59
! same real ID: this connects the pilot
!
to this surface
esurf
! generate the contact elements on the surface
nsel,all
For more information about using contact elements to generate constraints, see Surface-Based
Constraints in the Contact Technology Guide .
MPC184-Revolute
MPC184-Revolute
Multipoint Constraint Element: Revolute Joint
MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Description

The MPC184 revolute joint is a two-node element that has only one primary degree of freedom, the
relative rotation about the revolute (or hinge) axis. This element imposes kinematic constraints such that
the nodes forming the element have the same displacements. Additionally, only a relative rotation is
allowed about the revolute axis, while the rotations about the other two directions are fixed.
Figure184revo.1MPC184 Revolute Joint Geometry
MPC184 Revolute Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 6 to define a two-node revolute joint element.
Figure 184revo.1 shows the geometry and node locations for this element. Two nodes (I and J) define
the element. The two nodes are expected to have identical spatial coordinates initially.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, then element is an x-axis revolute joint with the local e 1 axis as the revolute axis.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, then element is a z-axis revolute joint with the local e 3 axis as the revolute axis.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The
specification of the second local coordinate system at node J is optional. If the local coordinate system is
not specified at node J, then the local coordinate system at node J is assumed to be the same as that at
node I.
Either the local e 1 or local e 3 direction may be specified as the axis of rotation at the nodes. The
specification of the other two local directions is not critical, but it will be used to determine the relative
rotation between the two nodes during the course of deformation. The orientation of local directions
must follow the convention specified in Figure 184revo.1. These local coordinate systems evolve with the
rotations at the respective nodes (if any). Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers of the
local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed in a revolute joint element with the local e 1 axis as the revolute axis are
described below. Similar constraint conditions are set up when the local e 3 axis is the revolute axis.
Consider the two local coordinate systems (Cartesian) attached to node I and node J (see Figure
184revo.1). At any given instant of time, the constraints imposed in a revolute joint are as described
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_elem/Hlp_E_MPC184revo.html[28/04/2013 09:33:22 p.m.]
MPC184-Revolute
below.
Displacement constraints:
uI = uJ
Where, uI is the displacement vector at node I and uJ is the displacement vector at node J.
Rotation constraints:
If the revolute axes and are not aligned at the start of the analysis, then the angle between the
two is held fixed at the starting value.
The relative position of the local coordinate system at node I with respect to node J is characterized by
the first Cardan (or Bryant) angle given by:
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate system is given by:
Where, 0 is the initial angular offset (the first Cardan (or Bryant ) angle measured in the reference
configuration) between the two coordinate systems and m is an integer accounting for multiple rotations
about the revolute axis.
The constitutive calculations use the following definition of the joint rotation:
Where
is the reference angle, angle1, specified on the SECDATA command. If this value is not
specified, then 0 is used in place of
Other input data that are common to all joint elements (material behavior, stops and limits, locks, etc.)
are described in "Joint Input Data" in the MPC184 element description.
MPC184 Revolute Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the revolute joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 6.
Nodes
I, J
Note: For a grounded joint element, specify either node I or node J in the element
definition and leave the other node (the grounded node) blank.
Degrees of Freedom
MPC184-Revolute
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Use the JOIN label on the TB command to define stiffness, damping, and Coulomb friction
behavior. (See MPC184 Joint Material Models (TB,JOIN) for detailed information on defining joint
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures--
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
Rotations--
ROTX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
ROTZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Angular velocities--
OMGX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
OMGZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Angular accelerations--
DMGX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
DMGZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Moments--
MX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
MZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
6 --
Revolute joint element
KEYOPT(4)
Element configuration:
0 --
x-axis revolute joint with local 1 direction as the revolute axis.
1 --
z-axis revolute joint with local 3 direction as the revolute axis.
MPC184-Revolute
MPC184 Revolute Joint Output Data

Additional element output as shown in Table184revo.1:MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Output
Definitions and Table184revo.2:MPC184 Revolute Joint Element - NMISC Output .
These tables use the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
[ETABLE, ESOL]. The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R
column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and a - indicates that the item is not
available.
Table184revo.1MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Output Definitions
Name
EL
NODES
FX
FY
FZ
MY
MZ
CSTOP4
CLOCK4
CSST4
CLST4
JRP4
JCD4
JEF4
JDF4
JFF4
JRU4
JRV4
JRA4
JTEMP
JFST4
JFNF4
EL
NODES
FX
Definition
x-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
Element Number
Element node numbers (I, J)
Constraint Force in X direction
Constraint Force in Y direction
Constraint Force in Z direction
Constraint Moment in Y direction
Constraint Moment in Z direction
Constraint moment if stop is specified on DOF 4
Constraint moment if lock is specified on DOF 4
Constraint stop status[1]
Constraint lock status[2]
Joint relative position
Joint constitutive rotation
Joint elastic moment
Joint damping moment
Joint friction moment
Joint relative rotation
Joint relative velocity
Joint relative acceleration
Average temperature in the element[3]
Stick/slip status when friction is specified[4]
Normal moment in friction calculations
z-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Element Number
Element node numbers (I, J)
Constraint Force in X direction
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
MPC184-Revolute
FY
FZ
MX
MY
CSTOP6
CLOCK6
CSST6
CLST6
JRP6
JCD6
JEF6
JDF6
JFF6
JRU6
JRV6
JRA6
JTEMP
JFST6
JFNF6
Constraint Force in Y direction

Constraint Force in Z direction
Constraint Moment in X direction
Constraint Moment in Y direction
Constraint moment if stop is specified on DOF 6
Constraint moment if lock is specified on DOF 6
Constraint stop status[1]
Constraint lock status[2]
Joint relative position
Joint constitutive rotation
Joint elastic moment
Joint damping moment
Joint friction moment
Joint relative rotation
Joint relative velocity
Joint relative acceleration
Average temperature in the element[3]
Slip/stick status when friction is specified[4]
Normal moment in friction calculations
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1. Constraint stop status:

0 = stop not active, or deactivated
1 = stopped at minimum value
2 = stopped at maximum value
2. Constraint lock status:
0 = lock not active
1 = locked at minimum value
2 = locked at maximum value
3. Average temperature in the element when temperatures are applied on the nodes of the element
using the BF command, or when temperature are applied on the element using the BFE
command.
4. Stick/slip status when friction is active:
0 = friction is not activated
1 = sticking
2 = slipping or sliding
The following table shows additional non-summable miscellaneous (NMISC) output available for all forms
of the revolute joint element.
Note: This output is intended for use in the ANSYS Workbench program to track the
evolution of local coordinate systems specified at the nodes of joint elements.
Table184revo.2MPC184 Revolute Joint Element - NMISC Output
Name
Definition
MPC184-Revolute
The following output is available for all revolute joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0 and
1)
E1X-I, E1Y-I, E1Z-I X, Y, Z components of the evolved e 1 axis at node I
Y
E2X-I, E2Y-I, E2Z-I
X, Y, Z components of the evolved e 2 axis at node I

X, Y, Z components of the evolved e 3 axis at node I
E2X-J, E2Y-J, E2Z-J
X, Y, Z components of the evolved e 1 axis at node J

E3X-J, E3Y-J, E3Z-J
JFX, JFY, JFZ
Constraint forces expressed in the evolved coordinate

system specified at node I
Constraint moments expressed in the evolved coordinate system specified at node I
E3X-I, E3Y-I, E3Z-I

E1X-J, E1Y-J, E1Z-J
JMX, JMY, JMZ
Table184revo.3:MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items and
Table184revo.4:MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items list output
available via the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method. See The General
Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table for
further information. The table uses the following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Element Output Definitions table.
Item
E
Table184revo.3MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
FX
FY
FZ
MY
MZ
CSTOP4
CLOCK4
CSST4
CLST4
JRP4
JCD4
JEF4
JDF4
JFF4

Item
E
x-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 0)

SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
1
2
3
5
6
10
16
22
28
34
40
46
52
58
MPC184-Revolute
JRU4
JRV4
JRA4
JTEMP
JFST4
JFNF4
FX
FY
FZ
MX
MY
CSTOP6
CLOCK6
CSST6
CLST6
JRP6
JCD6
JEF6
JDF6
JFF6
JRU6
JRV6
JRA6
JTEMP
JFST6
JFNF6
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
z-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
SMISC
64
70
76
79
80
84
1
2
3
4
5
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
79
82
86
Table184revo.4MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items


Item
E
The following output is available for all revolute joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0 and
1)
E1X-I
NMISC
1
E1Y-I
NMISC
2
E1Z-I
NMISC
3
E2X-I
NMISC
4
E2Y-I
NMISC
5
E2Z-I
NMISC
6
E3X-I
NMISC
7
E3Y-I
NMISC
8
E3Z-I
NMISC
9
E1X-J
NMISC
10
E1Y-J
NMISC
11
E1Z-J
NMISC
12
MPC184-Revolute
E2X-J
E2Y-J
E2Z-J
E3X-J
E3Y-J
E3Z-J
JFX
JFY
JFZ
JMX
JMY
JMZ
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
NMISC
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
MPC184 Revolute Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

The nodes I and J must be coincident.
The local coordinate systems at the nodes must be specified such that the revolute axis is well
defined. Otherwise, it is possible that the rotational motion might not be what is expected.
Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the revolute joint.
Rotational degrees of freedom are activated at the nodes forming the element. When these
elements are used in conjunction with solid elements, the rotational degrees of freedom must be
suitably constrained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the Revolute
Joint, a beam or shell element with very weak stiffness may be used with the underlying solid
elements at the nodes forming the joint element to avoid any rigid body modes.
If both stops and locks are specified, then lock specification takes precedence. That is, if the
degree of freedom is locked at a given value, then it will remain locked for the rest of the analysis.
In a nonlinear analysis, the component of relative motion (rotation around the revolute axis) is
accumulated over all the substeps. It is essential that the substep size be restricted such that this
rotation in a given substep is less than for the values to be accumulated correctly.
The element currently does not support birth or death options.
The equation solver (EQSLV) must be the sparse solver.
This element cannot be used with the arc-length method (ARCLEN).
MPC184 Revolute Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional.
No special features are allowed.
9.5. Overconstraint Detection and Elimination
9.5.Overconstraint Detection and Elimination

When a degree of freedom is subjected to multiple constraints, overconstraint occurs. Overconstraint can
be caused by the combination of the following constraints within the model:
User-specified constraints, including displacement constraints, constraint equations (CE command),
and coupling (CP command)
Lagrange multiplier-based contact definitions
MPC-based contact definitions
Constraints introduced through joint elements
Overconstraint may result in convergence difficulties or inaccurate solutions. In order to prevent this
problem, ANSYS tries to detect and eliminate overconstraints automatically. You can verify the
eliminated constraints during postprocessing.
ANSYS issues warning messages outlining the cause of the potential overconstraints in the beginning of
a contact analysis. You can use the CNCHECK,DETAIL command to identify the overconstraints
indicated by the messages. You should then manually remove as many unnecessary constraints as
possible.
Some overconstraints occur only during the solution due to new deformed configurations or due to
changes in contact status. ANSYS will automatically eliminate a limited set of overconstraints detected
during solution; appropriate messages are issued when this occurs. For MPC-based contact pairs, the
contact statuses (contact result item STAT) are set to negative values if one or more contact constraints
are removed. STAT is set to -3 for bonded contact; STAT is set to -2 for no-separation contact. Be
aware that, due to complexities, certain overconstraints may not be easily detected.
The way the program removes the overconstraint is not unique. The order of the redundant constraints
will influence how they are removed (the first encountered is kept, the next is removed). You should
always verify the modified model carefully. You can list and display the contact status using STAT as a
contact result item for the PLESOL and PRESOL commands; for example:
PLESOL,CONT,STAT
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecovercon.html[28/04/2013 09:33:53 p.m.]
7.1. Addressing Overconstraint Issues During Modeling
7.1.Addressing Overconstraint Issues During Modeling

Careful Setup Is Essential
ANSYS cannot always detect overconstraints automatically, particularly when the Lagrange multiplier
method is used. You are responsible for ensuring that the model is not overconstrained.
Overconstrained models most often result in nonconvergence of the solution with small solver pivot
warnings, and in some cases may yield incorrect results. It is vital that you exercise care when
setting up your multibody simulation model.
Overconstraint means that more constraints than necessary have been applied to the degrees of
freedom (DOFs) at a node.
For example, the following conditions can result in overconstraints:
Imposing boundary conditions on the DOFs at a given node if they are constrained via the CE or
CP command.
Contact modeling using the Lagrange multiplier method with improper boundary conditions on the
contact nodes.
7.1.1.Overconstraints in Rigid Bodies

Overconstraints may arise when rigid bodies are joined together using multiple joint elements. The
overconstraints can occur due to redundant joints performing the same function or contradictory motion
resulting from improper use of joints connecting different bodies.
The following examples illustrate scenarios in which overconstraint conditions can occur.
7.1.1.1.Standard Four-Bar Mechanism

In this scenario, all components are rigid. The example shows how overconstraint can occur even in
simple models.
Consider the standard 3-D four-bar mechanism shown here. (See Geradin and Cardona in Learning More
About Multibody Dynamics.) The mechanism consists of four rigid links and four revolute joints.
Figure7.1Overconstrained System: Standard 3-D Four-Bar Mechanism
Solution: Replace three of the revolute joints with spherical joints.

With six DOFs available for each rigid body, the four rigid bodies yield a total of 6 * 4 = 24 DOFs. A
revolute joint has only one free DOF and five constraints. Thus, the four revolute joints impose a total
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_mul/Hlp_G_MULTROUBOC.html[28/04/2013 09:33:59 p.m.]
of 5 * 4 = 20 constraints. If one of the rigid links is fixed in space, then an additional six constraints are
imposed. If a rotation is applied at one of the revolute joints (thereby adding one more constraint), the
number of overconstraints is 24 - (20 + 6 + 1) = -3. As modeled, therefore, this mechanism is
overconstrained.
In this case, you case resolve the overconstraints by replacing three of the revolute joints with spherical
joints. Each spherical joint imposes only three constraints; after replacing the joint type, a DOF count
indicates that the system is no longer overconstrained. While the overconstraint in this model can be
resolved fairly easily, this is not a typical case. It is therefore vital that you exercise care when setting
up your model. For more information, see Resolving Overconstraint Problems.
7.1.1.2.Redundant Rigid Bodies

This simple example illustrates overconstraints caused by redundant rigid components.
Figure7.2Overconstraint Due to Redundant Rigid Components
The figure shows a plate modeled with shell elements. A portion of the plate is made rigid by adding
MPC184 Rigid Beam elements (represented by the thick lines in the figure). The addition of rigid beams
AB and BC is redundant and leads to an overconstrained model.
In ANSYS, if the MPC184 Rigid Beam elements with direct elimination option are used to model this type
of problem, the redundant constraints are eliminated automatically. However, if MPC184 Rigid Beam with
the Lagrange multiplier option is used, the solution may not converge.
7.1.1.3.Redundant Boundary Conditions

Redundant boundary conditions can lead to overconstraint. In some cases, the multibody mechanism
may actually end up as a structure with zero mobility if improper boundary conditions are applied.
In some cases involving MPC184 Rigid Beam elements with the direct elimination option (which is based
on all DOFs at a node), redundant boundary conditions can result in an overconstrained system.
Consider a cylindrical tube with one end fixed and subjected to a bending moment at the other end. A
quarter of the cylinder is modeled with appropriate symmetry and antisymmetry boundary conditions as
shown in the following figure. MPC184 Rigid Beam elements with the direct elimination option connect all
the nodes of the tube to a center point, and a moment is applied at the center node.
Figure7.3Overconstrained System: Cylindrical Tube Subjected to Bending at One End
Because of the symmetry and antisymmetry boundary conditions, the system of internal constraint
equations generated due to the MPC184 Rigid Beam element results in an overconstrained system.
7.1.2.Overconstraints Caused by User-Defined Constraint Equations

User-defined constraint equations (created via the CE and CP commands) can conflict with the internal
constraint equations generated for the rigid bodies using the contact MPC capability or the joint
elements. ANSYS recommends avoiding user-defined CEs and/or CPs while performing a flexible
multibody simulation.
9.6. Restrictions and Recommendations for Internal MPC
9.6.Restrictions and Recommendations for Internal MPC

The following restrictions and guidelines apply when using the internal MPC approach.
To prevent overconstraint, displacement boundary conditions and other constraint equations or
coupling equations (ideally) should not be applied on the contact nodes for solid-solid, shell-shell,
and shell-solid assemblies, or for the rigid surface constraint type.
Sparse, PCG, and AMG solvers are recommended to solve models with constraint equations.
The MPC-based algorithm must be used with nodal detection (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 2) for CONTA171,
CONTA172, CONTA173, and CONTA174. If nodal detection is not set, ANSYS will issue a warning
message and automatically set KEYOPT(4) = 2.
The internal MPC option does not support rigid-flexible contact when rigid surfaces are modeled by
any primitive segments (such as circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere).
The shell-solid assembly is usually used for the case where the solid mesh is fine with respect to
the shell thickness. The shell-solid interface should be located in a region of the structure where
shell theory is valid for an approximation. The accuracy of local stresses near the shell-solid
interface (at least within the shell thickness range) is not guaranteed. We recommend you include
at least two solid elements along the layer of the shell-solid interface.
Using the force-distributed constraint type of MPC with a large number of contact nodes can result
in large and dense submatrices for the global stiffness matrix. This may significantly increase the
peak memory required during element stiffness assembly. Consider reducing the number of contact
nodes if real memory or virtual memory is limited.
The force-distributed constraint creates internal constraint equations such that the motion of the
pilot node is the average of the contact nodes. For the rotations, a least-squares approach is used
to define the "average rotation" at the pilot node from the translations of the contact nodes. If the
contact nodes are colinear, then one of the rotations on the pilot node that is parallel to the
colinear direction can not be determined in terms of the translations of the contact nodes.
Therefore, the associated moment component on the pilot node in that direction can not be
transmitted. When this case occurs, a warning message is issued.
The internal MPC option will only support element birth and death if all the MPC-based contact and
target elements are active in the first load step. The birth or death option can be set only after the
first load step.
The contact related postprocessing items (ETABLE items, PRESOL,CONT, etc.) are not supported
for the internal MPC option.
MPC contact only generates internal constraint equations. It does not calculate element internal
force and stiffness matrices. Therefore, during postprocessing the option ITEM = CONT is not valid
on the PRNLD, NFORCE, and FSUM commands.
You can use the CELIST command to list the internally-generated constraint equations associated
with MPC contact . You can also use CELIST to convert the internal constraint equations to
external constraint equation. (See CELIST for details.)
MPC contact generates constraint equations that can include constant terms. These terms are
included on the right hand side of the system equation. Thus, they are scaled by the LVSCALE
command when it is used in a mode superposition analysis.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/Hlp_ctec_restmpc.html[28/04/2013 09:34:22 p.m.]
Chapter 10: Dynamic Contact and Impact Modeling
Chapter10:Dynamic Contact and Impact Modeling

Performing contact analysis in a transient dynamic procedure is always challenging due to the presence
of contact chattering (frequent change in contact status). One of the reasons for contact chattering is
that the contact constraints enforce constraints on nodal displacements (penetration) but do not impose
any constraints on nodal velocities. Since nodal velocities and nodal accelerations are dependent on
nodal displacements (see Section 17.2 Transient Analysis in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications ), any constraints on nodal displacements make the nodal velocities
and nodal accelerations inconsistent. This introduces numerical errors in the transient dynamic solution
in subsequent time increments and, if left untreated, leads to numerical instability (non-convergence or
incorrect solution).
Numerical damping is usually added to the time integration scheme to suppress such numerical errors.
However, addition of numerical damping does not work in several cases. For example, in problems with
multiple or repeated impacts there is constant growth of numerical error in the solution, and the analysis
eventually fails to converge in spite of large numerical damping. In other situations the analysis may
converge with addition of numerical damping, but the system response may be underdamped or
overdamped depending on the growth of numerical error.
A more appropriate solution to the contact chattering problem is to treat nodal displacement and nodal
velocities consistently. One such solution is provided by Energy and Momentum Conserving Contact.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/DynConImpMod.html[28/04/2013 09:34:56 p.m.]
10.1.Energy and Momentum Conserving Contact

In transient dynamic analysis with contact, if the contact and target surfaces impact each other with
nonzero relative velocities, it is important to satisfy momentum and energy balance for the
contact/target interface. This helps to more accurately predict the duration of impact and the rebound
velocities after separation. In ANSYS this can be achieved by using impact constraints with any of the
2D or 3D contact elements: CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176,
CONTA177, and CONTA178.
Impact constraints include constraints on penetration and relative velocity (see Energy and Momentum
Conserving Contact in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications ). To
activate the impact constraints the following contact options must be defined for a contact element:
Contact algorithm must be one of the following:
Augmented Lagrangian (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
Penalty function (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
Pure Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and tangent (KEYOPT(2) = 4)
Standard or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0 or 1)
Impact constraints (KEYOPT(7) = 4)
The impact constraints can be used with both frictionless and frictional contact.
10.1.1.Energy Conservation
The impact constraints are active only on the contact/target interface, so energy conservation is
enforced only for contact elements. The underlying finite elements defining the interior of impacting
bodies do not satisfy energy conservation. To ensure energy conservation, the following conditions must
be satisfied for contact elements:
Relative velocity constraint should be satisfied exactly.
No numerical damping should be used.
No friction should be specified.
Energy conservation is relatively easy to satisfy for rigid impact (when both contact and target surfaces
are rigid) as compared to flexible impact (when the target surface is rigid and the contact surface is
flexible, or both surfaces are flexible). This is because the underlying finite elements for flexible bodies
excite higher frequencies, which can make the time integration scheme unstable unless some numerical
damping is used. For rigid bodies undergoing only translation motion and impact, numerical damping is
generally not needed; however, when rigid bodies are undergoing large rotations, a small amount of
numerical damping is necessary to keep the time integration scheme from becoming unstable.

An automatic time stepping scheme is provided to adjust the time increment size. This can be activated
by SOLCONTROL,ON,ON at the procedure level when AUTOTS,ON is set. This scheme starts adjusting
size of the time increments before impact such that there is minimum penetration in the substep where
contact is first detected. This is important because the contact algorithm will enforce the relative velocity
constraints to only prevent further penetration.
If the automatic time stepping scheme is not used, there may be some uncontrolled penetration of the
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecEnMom.html[28/04/2013 09:35:09 p.m.]
surfaces depending on the size of the time increment for the substep where contact is first detected
before the relative velocity constraint prevents further penetration.
When using fixed time increment, fixed number of substeps, or automatic time stepping (AUTOTS,ON)
without SOLCONTROL,ON,ON, you should make sure that the penetrations remain sufficiently small.
10.1.3.Penetration and Relative Velocity

When using the impact constraints, the penetration value depends on two factors:
Size of the time increment where contact is first detected
Accuracy of relative velocity constraint
The initial penetration value depends on the size of the time increment, as explained above. There is
no contact force associated with this value. The remaining penetration value comes from the
enforcement of relative velocity constraint using the contact algorithm. The value of this penetration
depends on the choice of contact algorithm, contact normal stiffness (FKN), and/or allowable penetration
(FTOLN). The contact normal force is directly related to this penetration value.
10.1.4.Impact Between Rigid Bodies

When using impact constraints to model impact between rigid bodies, a coefficient of restitution (real
constant COR) can be used to model loss of energy during impact. The coefficient of restitution defines
the ratio of relative velocity of rigid bodies after impact to relative velocity of rigid bodies before impact ,
so its value varies between 0 and 1. A value of 0 indicates that the rigid bodies stick to each other after
impact, while a value of 1 indicates that the rigid bodies rebound after impact with the magnitude of
relative velocity after impact being the same as before impact.
https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_ctec/ctecEnMom.html[28/04/2013 09:35:09 p.m.]
Chapter 6: An Overview of Postprocessing
Chapter6:An Overview of Postprocessing

After building the model and obtaining the solution, you will want answers to some critical questions:
Will the design really work when put to use? How high are the stresses in this region? How does the
temperature of this part vary with time? What is the heat loss across this face of my model? How does
the magnetic flux flow through this device? How does the placement of this object affect fluid flow? The
postprocessors in the ANSYS program can help you answer these questions and others.
Postprocessing means reviewing the results of an analysis. It is probably the most important step in the
analysis, because you are trying to understand how the applied loads affect your design, how good your
finite element mesh is, and so on.
The following postprocessing topics are available:
Postprocessors Available
The Results Files
Types of Data Available for Postprocessing
6.1.Postprocessors Available
Two postprocessors are available for reviewing your results: POST1, the general postprocessor, and
POST26, the time-history postprocessor. POST1 allows you to review the results over the entire model at
specific load steps and substeps (or at specific time-points or frequencies). In a static structural analysis,
for example, you can display the stress distribution for load step 3. Or, in a transient thermal analysis,
you can display the temperature distribution at time = 100 seconds. Following is a typical example of a
POST1 plot:
Figure6.1A Typical POST1 Contour Display
POST26 allows you to review the variation of a particular result item at specific points in the model with
respect to time, frequency, or some other result item. In a transient magnetic analysis, for instance, you
can graph the eddy current in a particular element versus time. Or, in a nonlinear structural analysis,
you can graph the force at a particular node versus its deflection. Figure 6.2 is shown below.
Figure6.2A Typical POST26 Graph
It is important to remember that the postprocessors in ANSYS are just tools for reviewing analysis
results. You still need to use your engineering judgment to interpret the results. For example, a contour
display may show that the highest stress in the model is 37,800 psi. It is now up to you to determine
whether this level of stress is acceptable for your design.

Mechanical APDL Structural Analysis Guide - ANSYS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical APDL Structural Analysis Guide - ANSYS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Types of Structural Analysis

2. Structural Static Analysis

Build the Model

2.3. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

Uses for Modal Analysis

Enter the Solution Processor

3.5. Reviewing the Results

3.6. Applying Prestress Effects in a Modal Analysis

https://www.sharcnet.ca/Software/Fluent13/help/ans_str/Hlp_G_StrTOC.html[28/04/2013 02:19:20 p.m.]